Industrial Communication

Automation and Drives Industrial Communication Postfach 48 48 90327 NÜRNBERG GERMANY www.siemens.com/automation

The information provided in this catalog contains descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of further development of the products. An obligation to provide the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of contract. Availability and technical specifications are subject to change without notice. All product designations may be trademarks or product names of Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.

Order No.: E86060-K6710-A101-B5-7600

Catalog IK PI · 2007

Catalog IK PI · 2007 Industrial Communication for Automation and Drives

Subject to change without prior notice | Dispo 26000 | KG 0906 35.0 S 1236 EN / 621608 | Printed in Germany | © Siemens AG 2006

Siemens AG

industrial COMMUNICATION Industrial Communication for Automation and Drives

Industrial Communication for Automation and Drives Catalog IK PI · 2007

Introduction

PROFINET / Industrial Ethernet according to IEEE 802.3

Please contact your local Siemens branch office.

2

Industrial Mobile Communication

3

Supersedes: Catalog IK PI · 2005 and Catalog IK PI News July · 2005 The products contained in this catalog are also contained in the electronic Catalog CA 01 Order No.: E86060-K4001-A110-C4-7600 (CD-ROM) E86060-K4001-A510-C4-7600 (DVD)

1

PROFIBUS according to IEC 61158/EN 50170

4

SIMATIC ET 200 distributed I/Os

5

© Siemens AG 2006 AS-Interface according to EN 50 295/IEC 62 026-2

6

SINAUT Telecontrol

7 The products and systems described in this catalog are manufactured/distributed under application of a certified quality management system in accordance with DIN EN ISO 9001 (Certified Registration No. can be found in the appendix). The certificate is recognized by all IQNet countries.

Network transitions

8 ECOFAST System

9 Appendix

10

s

Siemens Automation and Drives. Welcome

More than 60,000 people aiming for the same goal: increasing your competitiveness. That's Siemens Automation and Drives. We offer you a comprehensive portfolio for sustained success in your sector, whether you're talking automation engineering, drives or electrical installation systems. Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power (TIP) form the core of our offering. TIA and TIP are the basis of our integrated range of products and systems for the manufacturing and process industries as well as building automation. This portfolio is rounded off by innovative services over the entire life cycle of your plants. Learn for yourself the potential our products and systems offer. And discover how you can permanently increase your productivity with us. Your regional Siemens contact can provide more information. He or she will be glad to help.

1/2

Siemens IK PI · 2007


1/3

Sharpen your competitive edge. Totally Integrated Automation

With Totally Integrated Automation (TIA), Siemens is the only manufacturer to offer an integrated range of products and systems for automation in all sectors – from incoming goods to outgoing goods, from the field level through the production control level to connection with the corporate management level. On the basis of TIA, we implement solutions that are perfectly tailored to your specific requirements and are characterized by a unique level of integration. This integration not only ensures significant reductions in interface costs but also guarantees the highest level of transparency across all levels.

ERP Enterprise Resource Planning

MES Manufacturing Execution Systems

Control

SIMATIC NET Industrial Communication

Ethernet

Production Order Management

Material Management

Production Operations Recording

Equipment Management

Ethernet

SINAUT Telecontrol System

SIMATIC Software

SIMATIC Controllers/ Automation System

SIMATIC Sensors PROFINET Industrial Ethernet

Safety Integrated

PROFIBUS

PC-based Automation

AS-Interface

KNX/EIB GAMMA instabus

1/4


Building Technology

Micro-Automation and Aktor-Sensor Interface Level

ECOFAST IP65 Distributed Automation System

It goes without saying that you profit from Totally Integrated Automation during the entire life cycle of your plants – from the first planning steps, through operation, right up to modernization. Consistent integration in the further development of our products and systems guarantees a high degree of investment security here. Totally Integrated Automation makes a crucial contribution towards optimizing everything that happens in the plant and thus creates the conditions for a significant increase in productivity.

Plant Information Management

Product Specification Management System

Detailed Production Scheduling

Laboratory Information Management System

SIMATIC IT Framework

Production Modeler

SENTRON Circuit Breakers

SIMATIC PCS 7 Process Control System

SIMATIC HMI Human Machine Interface

SIMOTION Motion Control System

SINUMERIK Computer Numeric Control

Field Instrumentation/ Analytics

HART

SIMOCODE pro Motor Management System

SIRIUS Soft Starter

SIWAREX Weighing Technology

SIMATIC Distributed I/O

PROFIBUS PA

Drive Systems/ SINAMICS

SINAMICS


SIMODRIVE

1/5

SINAMICS

Integrated energy distribution from a single source. Totally Integrated Power

Totally Integrated Power (TIP) brings together all the components of electrical energy distribution into an integrated whole. Thus TIP provides the answer to growing market demands in the planning, construction and use of utility buildings and industrial buildings. On the basis of TIP, we offer integrated solutions for energy distribution, from medium voltage to the power outlet. Totally Integrated Power is based here on integration in planning and configuring as well as on perfectly matched products and systems.

Communication

HMI

Process/production automation

Load management

U

UI I cos o P o cos PW W

PROCESS FIELD BUS

Products and systems

£ 110 kV

Planning and configuration

1/6


Graphs

Prognoses

Totally Integrated Power offers communication and software modules for connecting the energy distribution systems to industrial automation and building automation. This enables the implementation of significant savings potential.

Maintenance Substation Distribution Maintenance task

Message/ error management

Selective protection

Protocols

Power quality

DATE: EMPLOYEE

Cost center

Building automation

COST CENTER PAY PERIOD BEGINNING PAY PERIOD ENDING

DATE SUN

MON

TUE

WED

THUR

FRI

SAT

SUN

TOTAL

IN OUT IN OUT OVERTIME

TOTAL HOURS DATE SUN

MON

TUE

WED

THUR

FRI

SAT

SUN

TOTAL

IN OUT IN

Hall 1 Distribution 3 Infeed II

Air conditioning system checkup Replacing circuit breaker contacts Replacing meters

OUT OVERTIME

TOTAL HOURS

central ON OFF local ON OFF tripped

DATE SUN

MON

TUE

WED

THUR

FRI

SAT

SUN

TOTAL

IN OUT IN OUT OVERTIME

TOTAL HOURS CODES V=VACATION H=HOLIDAY S=SICK

REGULAR

HOLIDAY

OTHER

OVER THE HOURS TIME & ONE-HALF

SICK

VACATION

instabus EIB


1/7

Introduction

Your requirements Do you want to launch new products quickly? And do you want to respond quickly and flexibly to market requirements and reduce conversion times and thus reduce the "time-to-market"? Do you want to produce efficiently and economically? And do you want to utilize the capacity of your plant/machine optimally and minimize possible downtimes? All the machines in your plant should then work optimally together. Rely on open, integrated communication for your automation needs throughout your company and beyond. Avoid island solutions in automation and in information technology through: A seamless flow of information from the sensor/actuator level up to the company management level Availability of information in any place Fast data exchange between plant sections Simple, consistent configuration and efficient diagnostics Integrated security functions which prevent unauthorized accesses Fail-safe communication and standard communication over the same cable Our offer Communication networks are of central importance in automation solutions. SIMATIC NET Networking for Industry stands for a versatile portfolio of modular blocks designed for industry which contribute to solving your communication tasks efficiently. In the different automation areas Across the whole workflow Across the whole plant life cycle For all sectors SIMATIC NET offers solutions which utilize the advantages of Ethernet and integrate fieldbus systems. Outstanding examples are: The exploitation of the field level for Industrial Ethernet The consistency from the field level up to the company management level The pushing ahead of mobile communication The integration of IT technologies

1/8


Worldwide trends A distributed plant configuration reduces the overhead for installation, maintenance and diagnostics. A distributed plant configuration reduces the overhead for installation, maintenance and diagnostics. Such configurations involve the use of intelligent devices at the local level which are interfaced to one another over networks. Openness and flexibility are important in linking different systems and carrying out expansions. The standards for bus systems are defined and standardized in international committees. Industrial Ethernet Industrial Ethernet (IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u and IEEE 802.11 WLAN) the international standard network standard for all levels PROFINET the open Industrial Ethernet standard for automation

PROFIBUS PROFIBUS (IEC 61158/EN 50170) the international standard for the field is the world-wide market leader for fieldbusses

AS-Interface AS-Interface (IEC 62026-2/EN 50295) connects sensors and actuators using a two-wire cable which is an economic alternative to cable harnesses.

KNX KNX/EIB (EN 50090, ANSI EIA 776) is the universal bus system for the entire house and building technology. KNX was developed by the Konnex Association based on EIB (European Installation Bus).

Industrial Communication by Totally Integrated Automation

SCALANCE ... for the security, flexibility and performance of your industrial communication networks Totally Integrated Automation by Siemens shows with a number of successful applications around the world to what extent consistent solutions with shared tools and standardized mechanisms can be created today. Closely connected to this is the selective further development of industrial communication with SIMATIC NET. A revolutionary milestone of this development is SCALANCE, the new generation of components for the installation of uniform networks:

SCALANCE is available in three different versions: The security modules of SCALANCE S are the core of this pioneering safety concept for automation engineering from Siemens that protects networks and data. Based on Industrial Wireless LAN, SCALANCE W supports integrated communication as far as areas that until now have been difficult or even impossible to access. The Industrial Ethernet switches (active network components) of SCALANCE X ensure future-oriented networks; and the perfect switch is always available for every task. An overall solution comprises a a bus system passive network components, e.g. cables active network components, e.g. switches interfaces for connecting the programmable controllers to the bus systems integrated interfaces separate communications processors gateways, e.g. a link software for configuring the networks tools for maintenance and diagnostics SIMATIC NET offers all the components required for an integrated overall solution, and supports the following bus systems: Bus system

Industrial Ethernet

PROFINET

PROFIBUS DP

ASInterface

Level Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) (e.g. PC) Control (e.g. S7-300) Motion Control (e.g. SIMOTION)

Well suited

PROFINET also supports the direct connection of distributed field devices to Industrial Ethernet and the solution of Motion Control applications in isochrone mode. PROFINET also enables distributed automation with the aid of component technology which allows vertical integration and fail-safe applications. PROFINET also supports controller-to-controller communication.

In industrial environments and similar.

Intelligent field devices (e.g.ET200S) Simple field devices (e.g. digital I/O modules)

Suitable

PROFINET ... increases the productivity of your plant For your strategic decisions you require a seamless, companywide information flow - from the first manufacturing step via the operational level up to the company management level. To achieve this, you must rely on efficiency and consistency at the very beginning when you design your plant. PROFINET, the open, innovative Industrial Ethernet standard, fulfills all the demands of industrial automation and enables integrated, company-wide communication.

Conducted electrically or optically or wireless via Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN).

Sensors/actuators Drives (e.g. SINAMICS)

not suitable

With Totally Integrated Automation, Siemens is the only supplier of a consistent range of products and systems for automation in all sectors from incoming goods storage via the production process up to dispatching products, from the field level via the production control level up to the integration of the company management level. The advantages of Totally Integrated Automation already pay off at the design and engineering level, but also during assembly and startup as well as during operation and maintenance. Automation solutions can be created with little outlay. New freedoms make it easier to respond more quickly and flexibly to new market requirements. Plants can be easily expanded or converted without having to interrupt current operations. Thanks to the fact that Industrial Ethernet has been venturing more and more into automation all the way down to the field level, two ingredients of Totally Integrated Automation are achieving ever greater significance: PROFINET and SCALANCE.

Failsafe communication


1/9

Mobile telephones

Bus systems for Industry

Industrial Ethernet (IEEE 802.3 and 802.3u) The international standard for local area networking. With a market share of 90% worldwide it is now the number one with respect to local area networks. Industrial Ethernet can be used to construct highperformance communication networks that span great distances.

Internet Pad

Telecontrol and substation control

PC

Controller

Monitoring and control system

Numeric Control Teleservice

Industrial Ethernet

PROFINET The international standard uses Industrial Ethernet and enables real-time communication all the way down to the field level while also including the enterprise level. Despite full use of existing IT standards, PROFINET enables isochronous motion control applications, efficient crossvendor engineering and a high level of machine and plant availability on the Industrial Ethernet. PROFINET supports distributed automation (including controller-tocontroller communication) and makes fail-safe applications possible.

Notebook

The graphic shows the connection of different automation systems to the standardized networks.

1/10


Numeric Control

Field device for intrinsically safe area

Monitoring and control system

PC/PG

Coupler

PROFIBUS PA

PROFIBUS

Machine Vision Link

PROFIBUS (IEC 61158/EN 50170) The international standard for the field level is the world market leader among field buses. It is the only field bus which permits communication for manufacturing as well as process-oriented applications.

Controller

Motor manager

Field devices

Drives

KNX

Sensors

PC

Telecontrol and substation control

Motion Control Systems

Controller PC/PG

Security

PROFINET Industrial Ethernet Access Point Controller IWLAN RCoax Cable

Notebook

AS-Interface (IEC 62026/EN 50295)

Controller Link

Combines sensors and actuators using a two-wire line as price-effective alternative to a wiring harness. Link

The basis for building services automation is the global KNX/EIB (EN 50090, ANSEI EIA 776) standard.

Link

Machine Vision Drives

Field devices Motion Control Systems Actuator

Link

Access Point Link Controller

Client Module

AS-Interface

Power supply unit

Network interfaces are implemented via controllers or links. Configuration and diagnostics can be carried out from any location in the plant.

Field device

Sensors


1/11

Industrial Ethernet

Industrial Ethernet offers a powerful area and cell network in accordance with standard IEEE 802.3 (ETHERNET), IEEE 802.3u and 802.11 a/b/g/h (Wireless LAN) for industry.

MOBIC

Ethernet is the basic technology of the Internet for worldwide networking. The different possibilities of the Intranet, Extranet and Internet, which are already available in office environments today, can, using Industrial Ethernet, also be utilized for manufacturing and process automation. The Ethernet technology which has been used successfully for many years for switching, full duplex and autosensing allows the user to adapt the necessary network performance to requirements. The user can select the data rate as needed since the consistent compatibility permits step-by-step introduction of the new technology. Ethernet presently has a market share of over 90% with a tendency to rise further, thus placing it in pole position in the LAN landscape worldwide. Ethernet offfers important advantages: Fast start-up thanks to the simplest connection method. High availability since existing networks can be extended without any adverse effects Almost unlimited communications performance because scalable performance is available through switching technology if required. Networking of different application areas such as the office and production areas. Company-wide communication thanks to linking up via WAN (Wide Area Network) such as ISDN or Internet Investment security through continuous compatible further development. Data storage for Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN) "Rapid Roaming" For very fast forwarding of mobile nodes between different access points Chronologically exact allocation of events throughout the whole plant system through plant-wide clock control. SIMATIC NET relies upon this well-proven technology. Siemens has supplied well over two million connections worldwide for rough and EMC polluted areas of industry.

1/12


S7-200 with SINAUT MICRO

S7-300 with SINAUT ST7

Notebook

S7-400 Access Point SCALANCE SIMATIC HMI W788-1PRO with WinAC

S7-300

MOBIC S7-200 Industrial Ethernet

ET 200

SIMATIC TDC

Machine Vision

SINAMICS S 120

SIMOTION C/P/D

SINUMERIK

SIMATIC NET provides important supplements to Ethernet technology for industrial environments: Network components designed for use in rough industrial environments Fast assembly on site thanks to the FastConnect wiring system with RJ45 technology Fail-safe networks thanks to fast redundancy and redundant power supplies Continuous monitoring of network components through a simple and effective signaling concept. Future-oriented network components with the SCALANCE X switch family, the members of which build on one another

of SIMOTION and SIMATIC S7/C7/WinAC. It enables PCs and workstations to be connected. The maximum volume of useful data per task is 64 KB. S7 communication offers simple, powerful communication services and provides a network-independent software interface.

PC with WinCC flexible or SINAUT MICRO SC

S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE)

SIMOTION D/P

SINUMERIK

S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) is used by SIMATIC S7/C7 to communicate with existing systems, especially with SIMATIC S5 partner, but also with PCs over PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet. FETCH and WRITE is also available over Industrial Ethernet to ensure that software created for SIMATIC S5 can continue to be used with SIMATIC S7 without any modifications.

SINAMICS S120 SCALANCE X202-2P IRT

SCALANCE S

Access Point SCALANCE W788-1RR

SIMATIC WinAC

PC Client Module SCALANCE W747-1RR

Standard communication This comprises standardized protocols for data communication, e.g. FTP. Fail-safe communication is also possible via Industrial Ethernet. OPC (OLE for Process Control) is a standardized, open and manufacturer-independent interface and allows OPC-capable Windows applications to interface to S7 communication and S5-compatible communication (SEND/ RECEIVE) and PROFINET.

Field PG M ET 200S with IM 151-3 PN FO

ET 200

The following communication functions/services are offered by Industrial Ethernet: PG/OP communication This includes integrated communication functions, via which the SIMATIC, SIMOTION and SINUMERIK automation systems can carry out data communication with any HMI device (TD/OP) and SIMATIC PG (STEP 7). PG/OP communication is supported by all networks. S7 communication S7 communication is the integral communication function (system function block) for the S7-400 or loadable function blocks for the S7-300 which have been optimized in the context

Information technology (IT) with e-mail and Web technology integrates SIMATIC, SIMOTION and SINUMERIK into the IT through Industrial Ethernet. In the office environment, e-mail and Web-browsers are widely used communication techniques. Ethernet is used as the main communication route, in addition to telephone cables and the Internet. The socket interface for Industrial Ethernet facilitates data communication with computers via TCP/IP. Users can program the data exchange freely using this widely used interface in the PC and UNIX world. SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC TDC use the SEND/RECEIVE blocks (S/R) to access TCP/IP. PROFINET communication services PROFINET IO for connecting distributed field devices to Industrial Ethernet PROFINET CBA for modern plant construction for the implementation of distributed automation structures based on pre-assembled components


1/13

PROFINET The open standard for automation

The increasing importance of vertical integration shows the important role played by industrial communication throughout modern automation engineering. PROFINET, the open and cross vendor standard based on Industrial Ethernet, enables direct, transparent access from the corporate management level to the field level. To make this possible, PROFINET relies on established IT standards and fully supports TCP/IP. Make use of synergies and protect investments: Problem-free integration of existing systems Do you want to continue utilizing and expanding existing systems and plant sections which communicate over PROFIBUS and other fieldbuses in future? No problem! With PROFINET, integration of the installed basis is easy and can be done without a lot of overhead. PROFINET thus ensures a high level of investment protection for existing systems and you can rely on an innovative standard now and in the future. The optimum basis for PROFINET: Industrial Ethernet Ethernet has established itself as standard in the office world. Thanks to its excellent market acceptance, Ethernet was chosen for continuous further development, for example as regards transmission rates. In order to make it possible to utilize Ethernet for hard industrial demands, we have been offering Industrial Ethernet, a standard-based network, for more than 15 years. PROFINET utllizes this basis to link devices from the field level to the management level, thereby combining industrial capabilities with the continuity and transparency of inter-company communication. PROFINET: New possibilities for Industrial Ethernet As a component of IEC 61158, PROFINET is based on the international Ethernet standard (IEEE 802.3) and builds systematically on Fast Ethernet with 100 Mbit/s and switching technology. PROFINET is particularly distinguished by the following: Shared use of real-time and TCP-based communication over the same cable as well as scalable real-time communication for programmable controllers, distributed I/O and motion control. PROFINET therefore ensures short response times and continuity from the field level to the management level.

1/14


PROFINET covers the entire spectrum of automation applications while differentiating between three basic communication characteristics: Non-real-time such as TCP/IP and UDP/IP communication Real-time (RT) and Isochronous real-time (IRT)

Real-time communication PROFINET fulfills all real-time demands relevant to automation, including isochronous mode. PROFINET is therefore also suitable for particularly sophisticated, complex applications, for example those involving motion control.

TCP/IP and UDP/IP communication

Process

Non-time-critical data transmission with TCP/IP and UDP/IP is the technical basis for communication for instance for assigning parameters and configuration. In the IT landscape, TCP/IP is a defacto standard.

PROFINET was conceived as a comprehensive standard for all automation tasks. Special requirements for use in industrial plants and the interfacing of process instrumentation devices and analyzers are currently being worked on with an eye toward standardization.

The solution for all demands: PROFINET, the comprehensive standard for automation

Process Safety Integrated PROFINET also fulfills all required prerequisites as regards complete safety for humans, machines and the environment. The use of PROFIsafe enables a network for standard and failsafe communication on one and the same cable.

Real-time communication

Safety Integrated

IT standards & security

PROFINET

Distributed field devices

IT standards & security PROFINET provides all functions for optimum configuration and diagnostics. All relevant data can be accessed from anywhere in the world over the Internet. PROFINET also fulfills increased demands on data and network security.

Network installation

Motion control Distributed intelligence

Simple network installation PROFINET relies systematically on 100 Mbit/s switching technology and supports linear and ring network topologies as well as the star topology customary with Ethernet. This minimizes cabling overhead and ensures the highest possible availability. Wireless communication opens the door to new industrial applications. Distributed intelligence PROFINET offers new options for the implementation of distributed automation structures: Systematic modularization and simple machine-to-machine communication with plantwide engineering - thanks to Component Based Automation

Motion control PROFINET makes it possible to implement very fast, isochronous drive control for high-performance motion control applications without a lot of overhead while at the same time using TCP/IP communication. Distributed field devices Distributed field devices can be directly interfaced to Industrial Ethernet via PROFINET. This enables fast data interchange between I/O and controller and provides for significantly better diagnostic options.


1/15


PC with SINEMA E planning software

S7-300 with PROFINET-CPU or CP 343-1

PROFINET Industrial Ethernet


Access Point SCALANCE W788-1RR IWLAN RCoax Cable

Client Module SCALANCE W747-1RR

IWLAN/ PB Link PN IO ET 200S PROFIBUS

S7-300 with CP 343-1 Lean with integrated 2-port switch ET 200S

ET 200pro

SINAMICS

The key to future market success lies in the ability to provide information and access to information at any time and in any location. With mobile systems interconnected via fast wireless radio networks (Wireless LAN), processes can be designed for greater efficiency. The main advantage of wireless solutions is easy and flexible access to mobile stations. Industrial Mobile Communication (IMC) plays an important role in this:

1/16


IMC stands for the industrial mobile communication products of SIMATIC NET that utilize wireless communication. This is based on worldwide standards, such as IEEE 802.11, GSM, GPRS or, in the future, UMTS. Also possible is fail-safe wireless communication over IWLAN.

Advantages of a wireless communication network Increased competitiveness since greater mobility achieves higher flexibility Maintenance work is simplified, service costs and downtimes are reduced and personnel is used optimally Spare parts lists and manuals are available regardless of the location Work orders can be received and acknowledged online Integrated radio network for voice and data beyond corporate boundaries

The reliability of the radio channel continues with the dustproof and waterproof construction (IP65) of the metallic enclosures, fulfilling SIMATIC's well-known high demands on mechanical stability. To protect against unauthorized access, the products provide modern standard mechanisms for user identification (authentication) and encryption of data, but can also be easily integrated into existing security policies. The "Rapid Roaming" function is available for very fast forwarding of mobile nodes between two different access points.

The system solution is tested and well-proven because the network components, communications processors and software are perfectly matched to each other Remote diagnosis for different production machines from a central service location reduces service costs Difficult to reach installations can be accessed easily; there is no need for complex wiring Fast commissioning of new plant sections due to reduced overhead for the installation of the communications network with the aid of the SINEMA E planning, simulation and configuration software. No wear on rotating and moving devices or equipment Cost-effective connection to devices which are remote, difficult to access or in hostile environments. SCALANCE W wireless communication The products of SCALANCE W offer the unique combination of reliability, ruggedness and security. With Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN), an extension to the IEEE 802.11 standard is made available that addresses the requirements of industrial customers in particular with regard to a deterministic response and redundancy. For the first time customers are getting a single radio network both for data critical to the process (e.g. alarm signaling) as well as for uncritical communication (e.g. for service and diagnostics). IWLAN components SCALANCE W and PROFINET, the Industrial Ethernet standard, provide a mobile solution for new applications all the way down to the field level.


1/17

PROFIBUS

SIMATIC S7 SIMOTION C/P/D

SINUMERIK Notebook

S7-300F with standard and F I/O

SIMATIC C7

Field PG M

PROFIBUS DP

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES

ET 200pro

SIMOCODE PRO

MICROMASTER

ET 200eco

ET 200M

ET 200M with F I/O AS-Interface

SIMOREG

SIMODRIVE

RFID systems SIMATIC RF

ET 200L

ET 200S

DP/ASInterface Link 20E

SINAMICS

PROFIBUS DP/PA is used to link field devices such as distributed I/O stations or drives with programmable controllers such as SIMATIC S7, SIMOTION or PCs. PROFIBUS, standardized to IEC 61158, is a powerful open and robust field system with short response times. PROFIBUS is available in different designs for different applications.

Openness all the way Thanks to the openness of PROFIBUS DP it is, of course, also possible to connect standardized components of other manufacturers. The IEC 61158/EN 50170 standard ensures that your investments are secure for the future.

PROFIBUS DP (distributed I/O) is used to connect distributed field devices, e.g. SIMATIC ET 200 or drives with very fast response times. PROFIBUS DP is used when actuators/sensors are distributed throughout the machine or plant (e.g. field level).

And for manufacturers of field devices, we offer everything that has to do with the PROFIBUS DP, such as ASICs, training, certification and much, much more.

The actuators and sensors are connected to the field devices. The field devices are supplied with output data in accordance with the master/slave technique and transfer input data to the programmable controller or PC.

1/18


Member companies worldwide offer a wide range of products with PROFIBUS DP interface for the field level. Siemens has a complete product portfolio of standard and fail-safe controllers, network components, communications software and field devices.

PROFIsafe Permits standard and fail-safe communication over one and the same bus cable. PROFIsafe is an open solution for fail-safe communication over standard buses, and utilizes the PROFIBUS services.

DP/AS-i LINK Advanced

SIMATIC PC with WinAC

SIMATIC HMI

Vision Sensor VS 120 VS 130

SIMATIC TDC

SIPART PS2 DP/PA coupler/link

*

PROFIBUS DP

PROFIBUS PA DP/DP coupler Customer specific sulutions with ASICs

DP slave

Power Rail Booster

DP/EIB Link

Mobile Panel

SITRANS F US RS 485iS coupler

Customer specific sulutions with ASICs

SITRANS P

ET 200iSP KNX (EN 50090, ANSI EIA 776) is the worldwide standardized building installation system and the basis for building automation.

Intrinsically safe area

* PDM is a parameterization tool for intelligent field devices

S7-400

Isochronous mode CPU, drives, I/O and user program are synchronized to the PROFIBUS clock. The "isochronous mode" function is supported by the CPUs of the SIMATIC S7-400, SIMOTION/SINUMERIK and servo drives. The PROFIdrive profile is used for drive control PROFIBUS PA (Process automation) expands PROFIBUS DP with safe data and power transmission (e.g. measuring transmitters in the food industry) in accordance with international standard IEC 61158-2 (same protocol, different design).

SIMATIC HMI S7-300

PROFIBUS FMS

SIMATIC C7

non-Siemens devices

SIMATIC C7

Field PG M

PROFIBUS FMS (fieldbus message specification) for the data communication of programmable controllers provided by different manufacturers. In this way, general control and measuring tasks can also be solved accurately in a distributed fashion in addition to motion control tasks. Siemens IK PI · 2007

1/19

AS-Interface

Sensors, valves, actuators, drives different components operate on the field level. All these actuators/sensors must be connected to a programmable controller. This is implemented with the help of distributed I/O devices; so to speak as intelligent outposts on site. AS-Interface connects the components of the field level by means of a twisted pair cable as a low-cost alternative to a cable harness. AS-Interface is used where individual actuators/sensors are distributed spatially over the machine (e.g. in a bottling plant). AS-Interface is the open international standard IEC 62026-2/ EN 50295, and is supported worldwide by 280 member companies of the AS International Association, including the leading manufacturer of actuators and sensors. The system has been used successfully in the field since 1994, and is with 10 million installed nodes the uncontested market leader among bit-oriented bus systems. AS-Interface is a single-master system. There are communications processors (CPs) for SIMATIC and for SIMOTION and Links which, as master, control field communication. With AS-Interface Specification V2.1 resp. V3.0, it is possible to connect as many as 62 slaves. AS-Interface Specification V3.0 enables the connection of up to 1,000 digital inputs/ outputs (Profile S-7.A.A: 8DI/8DO as A/B slave). New profiles open the door to the use of expanded addressing, even for analog slaves. "Fast Analog Profiles" speed up analog value transfer. Thanks to integrated analog-value processing in the masters, the access to analog values is just as simple as the access to digital values. The connection of SIMATIC S7 controllers, WinAC or other systems to AS-Interface is implemented via IE/AS-iLINK PN IO, DP/AS-i LINK Advanced or via the DP/AS-Interface Link 20E. DP/AS-i-LINK Advanced and DP/AS-interface Link 20E in IP20 are available for direct interfacing of the AS-Interface to PROFIBUS DP. This allows the AS-Interface to be used as subnet for PROFIBUS DP. IE/AS-i LINK PN IO enables direct interfacing of the AS-Interface to Industrial Ethernet and thus direct embedding in the PROFINET environment.

1/20


In this way, you can make savings AS-Interface replaces complex cable harnesses and connects binary actuators and sensors such as proximity switches, valves or indicator lights with a programmable controller, e.g. SIMATIC.

SIMATIC/ SIMOTION

* Only one master can be optimally connected to an AS-I line.

PROFINET Industrial Ethernet SIMATIC C7 AS-InterfaceNetzteil

S7-200

S7-300

AS-Interface distributor

PROFIBUS DP AS-Interface master * S7-300 with PROFINET-CPU

AS-Interface master * DP/AS-Interface Link 20E SIMOTION C


AS-Interface

(without AS-Interface chip)

S7-200

IE/AS-i LINK PN IO

SIMATIC C7

AS-Interface power supply

24 V DC power supply

LOGO! Max. AS-iI cable length per segment: 100 m without Extension Plug 200 m with Extension Plug

Repeater AS-Interface distributor (without AS-Interface chip)

Operator control panel I/O module digital/analog

Signal evaluation

Safe slave with EMERGENCY STOP

Safety monitor

In practice, this means: Installation runs smoothly because data and power are transported together on one cable. Thanks to the specially developed flat cable (in yellow) and to insulation displacement, the AS-Interface slaves can be connected at any point.

Max. AS-iI cable length per segment: 100 m without Extension Plug 200 m with Extension Plug

Compact starter IP 65 AS-i Extension Plug (for segment length up to 200 m)

This concept ensures extreme flexibility while saving a significant amount of time and money. Special knowledge about installation and commissioning is not required. In addition, the ease of laying the cable and the clear structure of the cable as well as the special version of the cable not only significantly reduce the fault risk, but also the overhead for service and maintenance.


1/21

Telecontrol and remote maintenance SINAUT Telecontrol

SINAUT, the telecontrol system based on SIMATIC S7, consists of two independent systems: SINAUT ST7 Versatile telecontrol system based on SIMATIC S7-300, SIMATIC S7-400 and WinCC for fully-automatic monitoring and control of process terminals which exchange data with one or more control centers or with each other via a WAN or over Ethernet (TCP/IP). SINAUT MICRO Telecontrol system for monitoring and controlling distributed plants using wireless communication (GPRS) on the basis of SIMATIC S7-200 and WinCC flexible or WinCC. As a result of its bidirectional communications capability, SINAUT MICRO can handle simple telecontrol tasks. An OPC server is available for both systems which permits connection to a non-Siemens control center system (OPC client).

SINAUT over Ethernet SINAUT communication over Ethernet or TCP/IP-based networks is possible between the stations and the control point as well as between stations. Prerequisites are fixed IP addresses as well as connections that are similar to dedicated lines.

SINAUT ST7 SINAUT ST7 facilitates an integrated communications concept (TIA) and complete integration into the SIMATIC environment. The modular design and the support of a huge variety of network forms and operating modes including Ethernet permit the design of flexible network structures that can also contain redundant links. By using all forms of transmission media (e.g. dedicated line, wireless, dial-up networks, SMS, FAX), the networks can be optimally adapted to the respective local conditions. First-time configuration of even highly complex networks and their expansion can be carried out easily and cost-effectively thanks to the software packages provided and STEP 7.

Date and time are always up-to-date A DCF77 radio clock can be used to supply the CPUs and the control center, e.g. ST7cc, with the date and time across the network. The systems therefore always have the exact time; including daylight savings time switchover. The GPS (Global Positioning System) can also be used as the time source instead of DCF77.

The control center The following can be used as central control centers: SIMATIC S7-300 or S7-400 controllers. SINAUT ST7cc, the PC control system (simple or redundant), is based on WinCC. It is a supervisory control system specially matched to the event-controlled and time-stamped data transmission of the SINAUT system. SINAUT ST7sc for connecting control centers of other manufacturers over OPC. The SINAUT telecontrol technology can also be connected to control center systems of other manufacturers via the data access interface. ST7sc features extensive buffer mechanisms which prevent data from being lost even if the OPC client fails.

Change-driven data transmission The SINAUT software in the stations ensures that process data is transmitted between the individual CPUs and with the control center in the event of changes. Local data storage A special characteristic of the TIM transmission module used for the SINAUT ST7 system is the local storage of the data messages (incl. time stamp) if the communication path is disturbed, a partner is lost or for cost optimization when dialing networks.

SINAUT remote programming and remote diagnostics All diagnostics and programming functions provided by SIMATIC and SINAUT for station automation and WAN communication can be used via the SINAUT networks without interrupting process data transmission. Central controller SINAUT

SINAUT ST7cc

MPI Industrial Ethernet

Ethernet TCP/IP

1/22


TIM 4

TIM 4

DCF 77 GPS

WAN

SINAUT WANs Dedicated lines (copper and fiber-optic cables) Private radio networks (optionally with time slice procedure) Analog telephone network Digital ISDN network Cellular phone network (GSM) All networks can be combined as required. Redundant paths are also possible. Star, line and node structures can be set up.

SINAUT ST7sc

WAN

MPI

e.g.. S7-300 with TIM 3V-IE

e.g. S7-400 with TIM 4

SINAUT ST7 stations

e.g. S5-115 with TIM 11

SINAUT ST1 stations

SINAUT MICRO

SIMATIC TeleService

SINAUT MICRO is the cost-effective extension to the monitoring and control of simple telecontrol tasks. It consists of a GSMGPRS modem, OPC and connection management software optimized for GPRS and an S7-200 program block package. With this package, as many as 256 SIMATIC S7-200 stations can communicate easily and securely over GPRS mobile radio with the control center and with each other. They are constantly online.

The MPI interface on SIMATIC S7/C7, SIMATIC TDC, SIMOTION/SINUMERIK automation systems and OPs is lengthened over the telephone network. This requires nothing more than a TS adapter and a modem. The TeleService engineering tool establishes a connection with the machine or plant. The familiar functionality of STEP 7, Drive ES, SIMOTION SCOUT and the diagnostic tools are available throughout. This teleservice is handled as if a maintenance man were actually sitting at the machine or in the plant. An additional PC/PG is not required.

SINAUT MICRO is perfect wherever small amounts of data are to be transferred over wireless connections. The system is configured using STEP 7 Micro/WIN. Maintenance personnel can also access the secured control center and query or set current values from the S7-200 stations from home per Internet browser. SMS or fax fault messages sent directly by S7-200 remote stations and received over mobile radio telephone can be analyzed in the control center, making it possible to respond more quickly. The routing functionality of OPC server SINAUT MICRO SC also enables bidirectional communication between S7-200 stations interfaced via the SINAUT MD720-3 modem. Under WinCC, OPC server SINAUT MICRO can be combined with SINAUT ST7cc to create a cost-optimized central fault annunciation and telecontrol system which can grow according to need.

e.g. WinCC flexible, Win CC SINAUT MICRO SC OPC server and connection manager

Central control center S7-200 station with modem SINAUT MD720-3

Internet

S7-200 station with modem SINAUT MD720-3

GSM/GPRS provider

S7-200 station with modem SINAUT MD720-3


1/23

KONNEX (KNX) for home and building system technology

Higher requirements with respect to flexibility and ease-of-use of the electronics installations, combined with the desire to minimize own costs, have resulted in the development of building system technology. The bus technology used for this purpose uses a common European concept. KNX is the universal bus system for the complete range of home and building system technology which was developed by the Konnex Association from the EIB (European installation bus)

KNX also includes radio and infrared transmission media in addition to twisted pair cables and Powerline. This opens up opportunities for retrofitting. Furthermore, it is also possible to integrate additional systems such networks of electrical appliances (home appliances etc.). In addition, services such as remote maintenance, remote data acquisition of consumer data and security services can be offered with KNX. System arguments Conventional electrical installations require a separate cable for each function and each control system requires a separate network.

EHS (European home systems) and BatiBUS based on the EIB. KNX products therefore ensure interoperability, product quality and functionality in the same way as EIB. All products are configured with a manufacturer-independent software tool. The functionality of each existing EIB system can be expanded with KNX. As the most successful and most established system on the market, EIB remains the central and unchanging system core of the KNX standard. The expansion of the system platform has cleared the way to offering and marketing efficient and economic new installations for non-residential buildings, residential constructions and modernizations.

In contrast to this, EIB permits all operational functions and procedures to be controlled, monitored and signaled over a shared cable. In this way, power can be supplied directly to the consumers without extra cabling. Apart from saving cables, this also has the following advantages: Installation in a building is much less complicated and can later be easily expanded and modified. If the systems are later used for different purposes or spaces are divided differently, the EIB can be adapted easily by simply reassigning (reconfiguring) the bus stations without having to lay new cables.

Controller Monitoring and control system

Field device for intrinsically safe area

Numeric Control

PC/PG

Coupler

PROFIBUS PA

PROFIBUS

Link Machine Vision Field devices

Motor manager

KNX Drives Sensors

1/24


Network transitions

* Only one master can be optimally connected to an AS-I line.

S7-400 PC with PN OPC server

S7-300


PC with SIMATIC WinAC (Proxy)

SINUMERIK S7-300 with PROFINET-CPU

SCALANCE W-780 Access Point

S7-400

S7-300 with PROFINET-CPU S7-200 IE/AS-i LINK PN IO

IE/PB Link PN IO (Proxy)

IE/PB Link S7-300

SIMATIC C7 PC

PG PROFIBUS SIMATIC C7 S7-200

WinAC

AS-Interface master * DP/AS-Interface Link 20E SIMOTION C

IWLAN/PB Link PN IO (Proxy)

DP/EIB Link

S7-300 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced

AS-Interface KNX/EIB

Network transitions from one bus system to another are implemented using links, PLCs or PCs. In the case of PLCs or PCs, this can take place via integrated interfaces and communications processors (CPs). Links pass on the data autonomously from one network to the other. The following links are available: IE/PB Link and IE/PB Link PN IO for the transition from Industrial Ethernet to PROFIBUS (also for fail-safe communication) IE/AS-i LINK PN IO for the transition from Industrial Ethernet to AS-Interface IWLAN/PB Link PB IO for the transition from IWLAN to PROFIBUS DP/AS-i LINK Advanced and DP/AS-Interface Link 20E for the transition from PROFIBUS to AS-Interface DP/EIB Link for the transition from PROFIBUS to KNX/EIB

In the case of PLCs such as e.g. SIMATIC S7-200, S7-300, S7-400, SINUMERIK or SIMOTION C, data is exchanged between the individual networks by means of communications processors or integrated interfaces. The data is linked by means of a PLC, and therefore passed on to the other network already preprocessed. PROFINET network transition with proxy functionality PROFIBUS segments can be connected to Industrial Ethernet via PROFINET proxies. This connection can be implemented using a solution with the SIMATIC WinAC PN optional package, SIMATIC S7-300/400-CPUs with DP and PN interface, IE/PB Link or via the IE/PB Link PN IO. For a wireless network transition, a SCALANCE W-700 access point with the IWLAN/PB Link PN IO can be used. This allows all PROFIBUS standard slaves to be used unchanged for PROFINET.


1/25

Data for practical applications

Bus system

AS-Interface

PROFIBUS DP

Industrial Ethernet

PROFINET

Update times £ 5 ms

9.6 Kbit/s 12 Mbit/s adjustable

10/100 Mbit/s 1 Gbit/s (not for PROFINET)

Criteria Data rate

31.25 Kbit/s 1) Number of nodes max.

Size of Network LAN (Local Area Network)

WAN (Wide Area Network) Topology

62

125 125 DP/PA Links 1) 31 field devices pro 1) DP/PA Link

electrical up to 600 m: - With extension plug up to 200 m - With repeater or extender up to 300 m - With repeater and extension plug up to 600 m

Line

Tree

Star

electrical up to 9.6 km optical up to 90 km


electrical up to 5 km optical up to 150 km

Ex: max 1.0 km 1) Non-Ex: 1.9 km 1)

world-wide with TCP/IP wireless with wireless LAN Line

1)

1/26

over 1000

Tree

Ring

with PROFIBUS PA

Star

Line

Tree

Ring

Star

PROFINET/ Industrial Ethernet according to IEEE 802.3

2/2 2/2 2/4 2/5 2/7 2/9 2/18

Introduction General information Data communication Communications overview Configuration examples Topologies Network selection criteria

2/20 2/20 2/23

PROFINET Introduction PROFINET-Products for Industrial Ethernet

2/25 2/25 2/26 2/27 2/29 2/32

Passive Network Components Summary of network components Overview of Twisted Pair Industrial Ethernet FastConnect IE FC RJ45 Plug IE connecting cable M12-180/M12-180 / M12 Plug PRO IE FC TP Cable 2 x 2 IE FC TP Cable 4 x 2 IE Hybrid Cable Energy Cables IE TP Cord IE FC Outlet RJ45 IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Industrial Twisted Pair – Cables/connectors Overview of fiber-optic cables Glass fiber-optic cables POF- and PCF fiber-optic cables POF/PCF-LWL termination kit

2/33 2/38 2/41 2/43 2/46 2/51 2/56 2/62 2/65 2/66 2/74 2/78 2/80 2/81 2/81 2/83 2/86 2/92 2/100 2/109 2/119 2/124 2/131 2/131 2/141

Active Network Components Industrial Ethernet Switches Overview SCALANCE X005 Entry Level SCALANCE X-100 unmanaged SCALANCE X-200 managed SCALANCE X-200IRT managed SCALANCE X-400 modular Industrial Ethernet ELS Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM Industrial Ethernet media converters SCALANCE X-100 unmanaged media converter Industrial Ethernet OMC TP11 and TP11-LD

2/144 2/144 2/145 2/149

Industrial Security Overview SCALANCE S SOFTNET Security Client

2/151 2/151 2/156 2/161 2/166 2/171

CPUs for SIMATIC S7-300 CPU 315-2 PN/DP CPU 317-2 PN/DP CPU 319-3 PN/DP CPU 315F-2 PN/DP CPU 317F-2 PN/DP

2/176 2/176

SIMATIC WinAC SIMATIC WinAC Software PLC

2/180 2/181 2/184 2/187 2/190 2/194 2/198 2/201

System interfacing for SIMATIC and SINUMERIK CP 243-1 CP 243-1 IT CP 343-1 Lean CP 343-1 CP 343-1 Advanced CP 443-1 CP 443-1 Advanced

2/205 2/207 2/208 2/209 2/212 2/215 2/219 2/221 2/223 2/225 2/229 2/232 2/234 2/236

System interfacing for PG/PC Performance data Connection options to SIMATIC PCs CP 1616 CP 1604 CP 1613 A2 S7-REDCONNECT SOFTNET for Industrial Ethernet SOFTNET PN IO OPC-Server for Industrial Ethernet PN CBA OPC server SNMP OPC server SOFTNET for LINUX/UNIX SOFTBUS for LINUX/UNIX

2/238

System interfacing for SIMATIC HMI

2/246 2/246 Sec. 3 2/248

Accessories C-PLUG Power Supply PS791-1PRO SICLOCK time synchronization

2/252 2/252 2/255

ET 200S distributed I/Os IM 151-3 PN interface modules IM 154-4 PN interface modules

2/257 2/259 2/260

Motion Control System SIMOTION Communication Board CBE30 Communication Board MCI-PN

2/261 2/261 2/267 2/272

PROFINET technology components Enhanced Real-Time Ethernet Controller ERTEC Development kits for ERTEC Development packages

2/273 2/273 2/277

Image Processing System SIMATIC VS120 SIMATIC VS130-2

2/282 Sec. 4 2/282 Sec. 3

Engineering Tools STEP 7 SIMATIC iMap SINEMA E Lean

2/285 2/287

SINAMICS S120 Drive System Communication Board CBE20

Sec. 3


Sec. 8

Network transitions


PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet

Introduction

General information

■ Overview • Area and cell network according to the international IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet) standard designed for the industrial environment right down to the field level • Connection of automation components to each other and to PC and workstations as well as components for wireless communication for homogeneous and heterogeneous communication • PROFINET, the open standard for automation, is based on Industrial Ethernet and supports the connection of devices from the field level up to the management level • Comprehensive open network solutions can be implemented

• High transmission rate of up to 1 gigabit/s • Industrial Ethernet is the industry standard, well-proven worldwide with international acceptance • Connection to wireless LAN (WLAN) and industrial wireless LAN (IWLAN) according to IEEE 802.11 • The basis for IT in automation, such as Web function, e-mail function and IWLAN connections • A safety solution specially designed for industrial automation with the industrial security concept SCALANCE S


PROFIBUS PA

Industrial Ethernet

PROFIBUS

KNX

AS-Interface

G_IK10_XX_50187

2

Industrial Ethernet in the communications landscape

■ Benefits

Ethernet presently has a market share of over 90% with a rising trend, thus placing it in pole position in the LAN landscape worldwide. Ethernet offers important characteristics that can give you significant advantages for your application. • Investment security through continuous compatible further development • Fast start-up thanks to the simplest connection method • High availability thanks to redundant network topologies • Continuous monitoring of network components through a simple and effective diagnostics concept • In Industrial Ethernet, plant-wide time synchronization is possible. This means that events can be arranged accurately in the order of occurrence throughout the plant.

2/2


• High flexibility since existing networks can be extended without any adverse effects • Basis for system-wide networking (vertical integration) • Basis for PROFINET • Almost unlimited communications performance because scalable performance is available through switching technology if required • Networking of different application areas such the office and production areas • Company-wide communication due to interface options via WAN (Wide Area Network) and use of Internet services • With SCALANCE W, IWLAN (Industrial Wireless LAN) from Siemens offers the basis for problem-free connection of mobile stations with robust wireless communication • Networks and data are protected by the Siemens security concept with SCALANCE S and SOFTNET Security Client


Introduction

General information

■ Technical specifications

■ More information

Standard

Ethernet to IEEE 802.3u, IWLAN to IEEE 802.11

Data transmission rate

10/100/1000 Mbit/s

Number of stations

unlimited

Network size • Switched network

unlimited (above 150 km, take into account signal propagation time )

Transmission medium • Electrical network

Industrial Twisted Pair and Twisted Pair cable

• Optical network

Fiber-optic cable (glass)

• Wireless network

Surrounding space

Topology

Line, tree, ring, star

Protocols

Protocol-independent

■ Ordering data

Order No.

Note: In many SIMATIC NET components with management function extensive parameterization and diagnostics functions are provided over open protocols and interfaces (e.g. Web Server, network management). These open interfaces provide access to those components, which can also be used for illicit activities. When using the above-mentioned functions and these open interfaces and protocols (such as SNMP, HTTP and Telnet), suitable security measures must be implemented that block unauthorized access to the components or the network especially from the WAN/Internet. For this reason, automation networks can be isolated from the remaining corporate network using appropriate routers (e.g. the well-proven firewall systems). The SCALANCE S products can be used to implement these routers. For further information, see Section "Industrial Security". It is important to note the boundary conditions for use of the specified SIMATIC Net products (Order Nos. 6GK..., 6XV1) which you can view inthe Internet:

Manual for TP and fiber-optic networks Paper version Network architecture, components, configurations, installation guidelines • German

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1

SIMATIC NET manual collection Electronic manuals for communication systems, protocols, products on CD-ROM German/English

6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info

1) Language versions and manuals can be found for the various products at:

Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/automation/csi/net


2/3

2


Introduction

Data communication

2

■ Overview Communication functions/services

Standard Communication

Data communication serves to exchange data between programmable controllers or between a programmable controller (controller and field devices) and intelligent partners (PCs, computers, etc.)

This comprises standardized protocols for data communication . • OPC (OLE for Process Control) is a standardized, open and manufacturer-independent interface and allows OPC-capable Windows applications to interface to S7 communication and S5-compatible communication (SEND/ RECEIVE). Internet communication can be implemented over the OPC XML DA interface. • ISO, TCP/IP and UDP transport protocols ISO, TCP/IP and UDP are available as the transport protocols. • Information technology (IT) with Email and Web technology Integrates SIMATIC into the IT through Industrial Ethernet. In the office environment, Email and Web browsers are widely used communication techniques. Ethernet is used as the main communication route, in addition to telephone cables and the Internet. These communication media and paths are also available to SIMATIC as a result of the TCP/IP protocol. SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) can also be used for Email, HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol) for access using Web browsers and FTP communication for program-controlled data exchange with computers that have different operating systems installed. • FTP; The file transfer protocol (FTP) permits simple, universal coupling, e.g. PLCs can be connected to different computers or embedded systems.

The following communication functions are available for this purpose: PROFINET Based on Industrial Ethernet, PROFINET enables direct communication of field devices with controllers as well as the solution of isochronous motion control applications. PROFINET also supports distributed automation with the help of component engineering. PG/OP communication Integral communication functions that are used by the SIMATIC programmable controllers to perform data communication with HMI devices (e.g. TD/OP) and SIMATIC PGs (STEP 7, STEP 5). PG/OP communication is supported by MPI, PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet. S7 communication S7 communication is the integral communications function (SFB) that has been optimized within the SIMATIC S7/C7. It enables PCs and workstations to be connected. The maximum volume of useful data per task is 64 KB. S7 communication offers simple, powerful communication services and provides a network independent software interface for all networks. Open Industrial Ethernet and S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) The open IE S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) is used by SIMATIC S7/C7 to communicate with existing systems, especially with SIMATIC S5 but also with PCs over PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet. FETCH and WRITE is also available over Industrial Ethernet to ensure that software created for SIMATIC S5 (automation systems, HMI systems) can continue to be used with SIMATIC S7 without any modifications.

PN PG/OP

2/4


S7

S5

OPC

System connections For many data terminals, communications processors (CPs) are available that already have the communications functions implemented as firmware and that therefore relieve the data terminal of communications tasks (e.g. flow control, blocking, etc.).

ISO TCP/IP UDP

IT

FTP


Introduction

Communications overview

■ Overview

2 TF

Receiver

with NTP

Time of day

Forward

FTP

CP 243-1 IT

CP 343-1 Lean

4)

CP 343-1

4)

CP 343-1 Advanced

4)

TIM 3 V-IE

SINUMERIK

TIM 3 V-IE Advanced 4)

CP 343-1 Advanced

4)

CP 443-1

1)

3) 3)

CP 443-1 Advanced

CP 1430 Basic CP 1430 Ext. CP 1430 TCP 1) 2) 3) 4)

ISO protocol only IT functionality included in IT-CP If CPU is the time-of-day master without client function

*) PG/OP communication

suitable

G_IK10_XX_10057

840D powerline

2)

CP 243-1

CP 343-1

SIMATIC S5

IT

Sender (Master)

Fetch/Write

SEND/RECEIVE

CBA

IO controller

H communication

SINAUT ST7

USEND URECV

BSEND BRECV

Put/Get Server

Put/Get Client

UDP

TCP

ISO

SIMATIC S7-200

PROFINET S5 comp. communic.

S7 communication

SIMATIC S7-400

SIMATIC S7-300/C7

PG/ OP*

Transport protocol

Hardware

Communications overview for SIMATIC, SINUMERIK and SINAUT


2/5


Introduction


■ Overview (continued) IWLAN

Forward

Receiver

Sender

Fetch/Write

S5 comp. IT 4) FTP 4) Time of day communic.

SEND/RECV

IO device

IO controller

PROFINET

CBA

H communication

USEND URECV

BSEND BRECV

PG/ S7 communication OP 2)

Put/Get Server

OPC

Put/Get Client

UDP 4)

TCP

Win 2003 Server

Transport protocol

ISO

Operating system

LINUX

Software

Win 2000 Prof./ Server

Hardware

Win XP Professional

CP 1613 A2 S7-1613 S7-REDCONNECT

CP 1616 CP 1604

DK-16xx PN IO

6)

6)

6)

SOFTNET PN IO

SIMATIC SOFTNET-S7 PG/PC with integrated SOFTNET-S7 Lean interface 1) SOFTNET-PG PN CBA OPC-Server SOFTNET-S7

CP 7515

SOFTNET-S7 Lean SOFTNET-PG

Ethernet Cards 3)

SOFTNET-S7/ LINUX 1) 2) 3) 4)

Further information for more hardware can be found under www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info PG/OP communication supported by TLI/DLPI drivers The IT-, FTP- and UDP functionality results in association with the hardware/ the CPs and the Windows/Linux software of the PC 5) Software source of the card driver included; for Suse 9.3 6) via driver portability If you have questions to LINUX- / UNIX projects please contact I&S, e-mail: [email protected]

Communications overview for PG/PC

2/6


suitable not suitable suitable under certain premisses

G_IK10_XX_10058

2


Introduction

Configuration examples

■ Overview

2 PC with CP 1613 A2 with S7-1613 or SOFTNET-S7

Field PG with CP 7515

Cell phone

S7-400 with CP 443-1 Advanced

PC/PG with CP 1616 or CP 1613 A2

Industrial Ethernet S7-200 with CP 243-1 or CP 243-1 IT

S7-400 with CP 443-1 or CP 443-1 Advanced G_IK10_XX_10009

S7-300 with CP 343-1 Lean, CP 343-1 or CP 343-1 Advanced

S7 communication with TCP/IP for Industrial Ethernet

CP 1613 A2 CP 7515

PC/PG SOFTNET-S7 or S7-1613

Industrial Ethernet

S7-300 with CP 343-1 Lean, CP 343-1 or CP 343-1 Advanced

G_IK10_XX_10010

S7-400 with CP 443-1 or CP 443-1 Advanced

S5-115U to 155U with CP 1430

S5-compatible communication for Industrial Ethernet


2/7


Introduction


■ Overview (continued) S7-400 with CP 443-1 or CP 443-1 IT

Industrial Ethernet S7-400 with CP 443-1 or CP 443-1 IT

PG with CP 1613 A2 and STEP 7 V5

IE/PB Link or IE/PB Link PN IO

CP 443-5 Extended

ET 200S

ET 200X

S7-400 with CP 443-1 or CP 443-1 IT

CP 443-5 Basic

S7-300 with CP 343-5

S7-300 with CP 342-5 ET 200S

ET 200X

PG/OP communication with S7 routing for transparent access to e.g. configuration and diagnostics data

SIMATIC S7-400 with CP 443-1 Advanced Panel PC

SIMATIC S7-300 with CP 343-1

ET 200S


Field PG

Installation of a small, local PROFINET network with an integrated switch in the CP 443-1 Advanced

2/8


S7-400 with CP 443-5 Basic

G_IK10_XX_10011

PROFIBUS

PROFIBUS

G_IK10_XX_10070

2


Introduction Topologies

■ Overview Network performance and network technologies for Industrial Ethernet When combined, the current Industrial Ethernet technologies can boost performance on the network by a factor of 50 and more in comparison with the original 10 Mbit/s technology. These technologies are: • Fast Ethernet with 100 Mbit/s: Messages are transported much faster than Ethernet (10 Mbit/s) and therefore only occupy the bus for an extremely short time. • Gigabit Ethernet with 1 Gbit/s: Gigabit Ethernet is faster than Fast Ethernet by a factor of 10, the bus is occupied for only one tenth of the time. • Full Duplex prevents collisions: The data throughput increases enormously because the usual message repetitions are avoided. Data can be sent and received simultaneously between two stations. The data throughput for a full duplex connection therefore rises to 200 Mbit/s with Fast Ethernet and to 2 Gbit/s with Gigabit Ethernet.

• Switching supports parallel communication: When a network is subdivided into several segments using a switch, or individual stations are connected direct to a switch, this results in load separation. Data communication is possible in each individual segment independently of the other segments. In the overall network, several messages can therefore be en-route simultaneously. The increase in performance is therefore due to the sending of several messages simultaneously. • Autocrossover automatically crosses the send and receive cables on Twisted Pair interfaces. • Autosensing describes the characteristic of network nodes (data terminals and network components) that automatically detect the transmission rate of a signal (10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s or 1 Gbit/s) and support autonegotiation. • Autonegotiation is a configuration protocol on Fast Ethernet. Before initiating the actual data transmission, network devices automatically negotiate a transmission mode which is supported by any device (100 Mbps or 10 Mbps, full duplex or half duplex). • Gigabit cabling system The 8-core FastConnect cabling system of SIMATIC NET supports transmission rates of up to 1 Gbit/s.

Data processing capacity 2000 Mbit/s

1000 Mbit/s full duplex 1000 Mbit/s

1000 Mbit/s switched 200 Mbit/s

100 Mbit/s full duplex 100 Mbit/s

100 Mbit/s switched

40 Mbit/s *)

100 Mbit/s shared

20 Mbit/s

10 Mbit/s switched

10 Mbit/s

10 Mbit/s shared

4 Mbit/s *)

G_IK10_XX_10050

10 Mbit/s full duplex

*) Effective data processing capacity because of collisions

Throughput of the network/values for 5 network stations


2/9

2



■ Overview (continued) Ethernet Switching

Full duplex

The Industrial Ethernet switch has the following functionality: • Depending on the number of available interfaces, switches are able to simultaneously interconnect several pairs of subnetworks or stations temporarily and dynamically, with each connection possessing the full data throughput. • By filtering the data traffic on the basis of the Ethernet (MAC) address of the data terminal, the local data traffic remains local; only data to users of another subnetwork is forwarded by the switch. • More data terminals can be connected than in a classic Ethernet network. • Error propagation is limited to the subnetwork concerned.

Full duplex (FDX) is an operating mode in the network that, in contrast to half duplex, allows stations to send and receive data simultaneously. When FDX is used, collision detection is automatically deactivated in the participating stations.

The switching technology offers definite advantages: • Subnetworks and network segments can be created. • The data throughput is increased and with it the network performance as a result of structuring the data communication. • Easy rules for network configuration. • Network topologies with 50 switches and an overall extension of up to 150 km can be implemented without the need to take signal propagation times into account. • Unlimited extension of the network by connecting individual collision domains/subnetworks. • The signal propagation times must be considered at distances over 150 km. • Easy, reaction-free extension of existing networks.

Segment A

Segment B

For FDX, transmission media with separate send and receive channels must be used, e.g. FOC and TP, and the participating components must be able to store data packages. With an FDX connection collisions do not occur, so components that support FDX can send and receive simultaneously at the nominal transmission rate. The data throughput therefore increases to twice the nominal transmission rate of the network, to 20 Mbit/s with the classic Ethernet and 200 Mbit/s with Fast Ethernet. With Gigabit Ethernet, up to 2000 Mbit/s are achieved. A further advantage of FDX is the increase in the network extension. By deactivating the collision principle, the distance between two components can be increased by the size of a collision domain or more. With full duplex, the maximum distance can extend as far as the performance limit of the send and receive components. This is especially the case in connection with fiber-optic cables. When 10/125 μm glass fiber-optic cables are used, distances of up to 26 km can be achieved.

Segment A

LAN

Segment C

Segment B

LAN

Segment D

Segment C

Segment D

Data traffic Switched LAN

Shared LAN

Each individual segment possesses the full performance/data rate.

All network nodes share the performance/data rate

Simultaneous data traffic in several segments; several frames simultaneously Filtering: local data traffic remains local; only selected data packets exceed segment limit

Increased performance through switching, full duplex

2/10


All data packets go through all segments. Only one frame in the network at any given time. G_IK10_XX_10002

2



■ Overview (continued)

2

Autosensing/Autonegotiation

High-speed redundancy with SIMATIC NET

Autosensing describes the characteristic of network nodes (data terminals and network components) that automatically detect the transmission rate of a signal (10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s or 1000 Mbit/s) and support autonegotiation.

Extremely fast reconfiguration of the network following an error is indispensable for industrial applications, because the connected data terminals will otherwise disconnect logical communication links. This would result in a process running out of control or emergency shutdown of the plant.

Autonegotiation is the configuration protocol for Twisted Pair. It enables the participating nodes to negotiate and agree the transmission rate before the first data packages are transferred: • 10 Mbit/s,100 Mbit/s or 1000 Mbit/s • Full duplex or half duplex Autonegotiation can also be deactivated if a specific transmission rate has to be set. The advantage with Autosensing lies in the problem-free interoperability of all Ethernet components. Classical Ethernet components that do not support Autosensing work problem-free with Fast Ethernet and new Gigabit Ethernet components that do support Autosensing. Autocrossover The Autocrossover function automatically crosses the send and receive cables on Twisted Pair interfaces. This means that crossed connecting lines (e.g. TP XP Cords) are no longer required.

To achieve the necessary fast response times, SIMATIC NET uses specially developed procedures for controlling redundancy. A network can then be reconfigured to form a functional network infrastructure in a fraction of a second. In an optical ring comprising 50 switches, the network will be reconfigured after an error (cable break or switch failure) in less than 0.3 seconds. The connected data terminals remain unaffected by the changes in the network and logical connections are not disconnected. Control over the process or application is assured at all times. In addition to implementing high-speed media redundancy in the ring, SIMATIC NET switches also offer the functions required for high-speed redundant coupling of rings or network segments. Network segments in any topology or rings can be coupled over two switches.

S7-400 Operator Station

PC

S7-400 S7-300

Industrial Ethernet

Switch SCALANCE X-400

PC

S7-400

Fiber Optic

S7-300

PC

SCALANCE X 204-2

PC S7-400

PC S7-300

G_IK10_XX_10093

S7-400

S7-400

Configuration with high-speed redundancy in the optical ring


2/11



■ Overview (continued) S7-400 Operator Station

PC

S7-400 S7-300

Industrial Ethernet


PC

S7-400

Twisted Pair

S7-300

PC

Switch SCALANCE X208

PC S7-400

PC S7-400

S7-300

S7-400

Configuration with high-speed redundancy in the electrical ring

2/12


G_IK10_XX_10101

2




2 S7-400 Operator Station

S7-400 S7-300

Industrial Ethernet

SCALANCE X202-2IRT

PC

S7-400 Switch SCALANCE X206-1

Switch SCALANCE X206-1

Industrial Ethernet

S7-300


IPC

PC S7-400 S7-400

Maximum cable length for 100 Mbit/s: electrical ring circuit: 100 m optical ring circuit (multimode): 3000 m

S7-300

G_IK10_XX_10113

IPC

S7-400

Configuration with high-speed redundancy in the mixed ring


2/13



■ Overview (continued) S7-400

S7-300 S7-400 S7-300 SCALANCE X204IRT

Industrial Ethernet PC

S7-400

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X208

S7-300

SCALANCE X208 IPC

PC SCALANCE X101-1 or X101-1LD

S7-400

G_IK10_XX_10054

2

IPC

Electrical ring topology with SCALANCE X101-1/X101-1LD

SCALANCE X-400

S7-300 with CP 343-1

SCALANCE X101-1 or X101-1 LD

Industrial Ethernet Industrial Ethernet

Access Point SCALANCE W-788-1PRO

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X101-1 or X101-1 LD

SCALANCE X206-1



ET 200S

ET 200S

ET 200S

ET 200S

ET 200S

G_IK10_XX_10056

Star topology with SCALANCE X101-1/X101-1LD and remote SCALANCE W Access Point

2/14





2

Redundancy with the Spanning Tree algorithm

Optical cabling with POF/PCF or glass fiber optic cable

The Spanning Tree algorithm is described in the IEEE 802.1d standard; it organizes any number of meshed Ethernet structures comprising bridges and switches.

Fiber optic cables are always recommended as an alternative to copper cables in environments subject to strong electromagnetic interference (EMI) if reliable equipotential bonding cannot be guaranteed, if the system is in the open air, or if no EMI is desired.

To prevent data packages circulating in the network, in the case of closed meshes different connections are switched to standby so that an open tree structure results from the meshed structure. The bridges/switches communicate for this purpose using the Spanning Tree protocol. This protocol is extremely complex because it has to handle any type of network structure. The organization of network structures with the Spanning Tree protocol can take from 30 to 60 seconds. During this period, productive communication for reliable visualization or process control in the network is not possible.

Glass fiber optic cables are used to establish optical network topologies covering long distances, while for shorter distances, plastic fiber optic cable made of light-conducting plastics like polymer optical fiber (POF), or plastic covered glass fibers such as polymer cladded fiber (PCF), are used. Simple fiber optic cabling for machine-level use is implemented with the new SC RJ connection system for polymer optical fiber and PCF. The SC RJ connectors can be assembled especially quickly and simply on-site. The plastic fiber optic cables designed for this purpose can be used universally or specifically in festoon cable systems.

In the time-optimized variant "Rapid Reconfiguration Spanning Tree“ according to IEEE 802.1, the time is shortened to a few seconds for up to 10 series-connected switches. For connecting to office networks, some SIMATIC NET switches support the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.

For optical PROFINET networking, products with POF or PCF connection are used, e.g. the Industrial Ethernet Switch SCALANCE X200-4P IRT, ET 200S distributed I/O or the SCALANCE X101-1POF media converter.

Switched network Switched industrial networks can be configured electrically or optically with a linear, star or ring structure or, with SCALANCE X-200, mixed together. They are constructed with SCALANCE X switches or with OSM and ESM. Fiber-optic conductors or Twisted Pair cables are used as the transmission media between the switches. Data terminals or network segments are connected over twistedpair cables or polymer optical fiber (POF) . Switched networks can be of any size. The signal propagation times must be taken into account at distances over 150 km.


Media-Converter SCALANCE X101-1POF

HMI

ET 200pro

POFLWL IE Standard Cable

POF-FO cable

POF-FO cable POF-FO cable

Industrial Ethernet

Switch SCALANCE X200-4P IRT


ET 200S with IM 151-3 PN FO

ET 200S with IM 151-3 PN FO G_IK10_XX_10176

PROFINET

ET 200S with IM 151-3 PN FO Mixed network with SCALANCE X202-2P IRT and SCALANCE X101-1POF media converter


2/15



■ Overview (continued) Operator Station (OS)

OS

Switch SCALANCE X414-3E

SIMATIC IT

SIMATIC Batch

OS

Engineering Station (ES)


1 Gbit/s terminal bus

OS Server (redundant)


11 Gbit/s Gbit/s plant plant bus bus

Switch SCALANCE X414-3E Switch SCALANCE X414-3E


S7-300

S7-400H redundant contoller

Use of the SCALANCE X switches in a process control system, e.g. PCS 7

2/16


ET 200M

Manufactoring cell

G_IK10_XX_10079


PROFIBUS

2




2

Fail-safe wireless communication with PROFIsafe For several years, safety engineering has been integrating into standard automation on the basis of SIMATIC S7 controllers, PROFIBUS and PROFIsafe. This range has been expanded by PROFINET-enabled components, thus providing a complete product range with failsafe controllers, failsafe I/O and a corresponding engineering environment.

PROFIsafe prevents errors such as address corruption, loss, delay, etc., when transmitting messages through continuous numbering of the PROFIsafe data, time monitoring, and authenticity monitoring using passwords or optimized cyclic redundancy check (CRC). Fail-safe communication is also supported via wireless LAN.

Internet HMI

Safety

Controller Fail-safe communication via PROFIsafe profile

Controller Security

Switch PROFINET Industrial Ethernet

PN-/PNCoupler ET 200pro

Distributed I/O

Proxy

HMI

Access Point Proxy

Machine Vision Motion Control Other fieldbuses

PROFIBUS SINAMICS G120 Distributed I/O G_IK10_XX_30118

Fail-safe wireless communication with PROFIsafe


2/17


Introduction

Network selection criteria

■ Overview Twisted-pair network

Fiber optic network

Wireless link

Flexibility of the network topology Suitability for high data rates

1)

1)

Networking between buildings EMC Simple cable laying

Range of cables for special applications

Cables for indoor area; trailing cable; marine cable; FastConnect cables

Cables for indoor and outdoor area; trailing cable; halogen-free cables

Effect of power failure

Failure of a subnet

Failure of a subnet

Effect of connection failure

Network breaks down into two subnets that function 3) in isolation 4)

2)

Network breaks down into two subnets that function in isolation

Failure of a subnet

2)

3) 5)

up to 150 km: over 150 km observe signal runtime

1000 m per segment

100 m

3000 m 50 m POF 100 m PCF multimode 26000 m singlemode

30 m indoor per segment 100 m outdoor per segment

100 m

3000 m multimode 50 m POF 100 m PCF 26000 m singlemode

100 m feeder cable to access point

Pre-assembled cables

yes

yes

On-site assembling

without special tool; FastConnect system

with special tool

with trained staff

Integrated diagnostics support

LEDs; signal contact; SNMP network management; Web-based management, PROFINET diagnosis

LEDs; signal contact; SNMP network management; Web-based management, PROFINET diagnosis

LEDs; SNMP network management; Web-based management

Redundant network structures

Electrical ring or doubling of the infrastructure (linear bus, star, tree)

Optical ring or doubling of the infrastructure (linear bus, star, tree)

multiple illumination

Max. length of the network Max. distance between two network nodes/Access Points

Max. length of connection cable

Well-suited suitable not suitable

Connection criteria

2/18

2)


5000 m

1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

Suitable for 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s Protection against subnet failure using redundant voltage supply no effect in ring structure depending on the network components used depending on the antenna used

G_IK10_XX_10013

2


Introduction

Network selection criteria


2 Twisted Pair Networks

Fiber Optic Networks

Wireless Link

Star, linear bus, ring, tree

Star, linear bus, ring, tree

Wireless network

FastConnect cables ITP-Standard Cable TP Cord

FO Standard Cable FO Ground Cable FO Trailing Cable POF Standard Cable POF Trailing Cable PCF Standard Cable GP PCF Trailing Cable GP PCF Trailing Cable

Over FC RJ45 Plug and FastConnect cables ITP Standard Cable ITP XP Standard Cable TP Cord, TP XP Cord TP Converter Cord

FO Standard Cable FO Ground Cable FO Trailing Cable POF Standard Cable POF Trailing Cable PCF Standard Cable GP PCF Trailing Cable GP PCF Trailing Cable Terminal connection over OMC

Over RJ45 Plug and FastConnect cables ITP Standard Cable ITP XP Standard Cable TP Cord, TP XP Cord TP Converter Cord

Outlet RJ45 FC Stripping Tool FC RJ45 Plug FC RJ45 Modular Outlet 9-pin ITP Sub-D connector 15-pin ITP Sub-D connector

BFOC connectors further components on request SC connectors SC RJ connectors

Antennas (incl. RCoax Cable)

Not relevant since twisted-pair only used in the indoor area

Not applicable

Lightning protector

Transmission media

Device connection

Tools and accessories

Lightning converter

Manual for TP and fiber optic networks Documentation

Included in SCALANCE W scope of supply

G_IK10_XX_10014

Network topology

Network types and components


2/19


PROFINET Introduction

■ Overview PROFINET – The open standard for automation

(PROFINET IO) distributed field devices PROFINET IO enables distributed field devices (IO devices such as signal modules) to be connected directly to Industrial Ethernet. During configuration with STEP 7, these field devices are assigned to a central controller (so-called IO-Controller). Existing modules or devices can continue to be used with PROFINET-compatible interfaces or links, which safeguards existing investments by PROFIBUS or AS-Interface users. A configuration with standard and failsafe modules in one station is also possible. An IO Supervisor serves HMI and diagnostics purposes – as on PROFIBUS – using hierarchical diagnostics dialogs (overview and detailed diagnostics). User data are transferred via real-time communication. Configuration and diagnostics are handled using TCP/IP or IT standards. The simple engineering for PROFINET, field-proven with PROFIBUS, was adopted here. From the viewpoint of programming with STEP 7 there is no difference between PROFIBUS and PROFINET when accessing an I/O device. Users can thus very easily configure field devices on Industrial Ethernet on the basis of the know-how acquired with PROFIBUS.

PROFINET is the innovative and open Industrial Ethernet standard (IEC 61158) for industrial automation. With PROFINET, devices can be linked up from the field level through to the management level. PROFINET enables system-wide communication, supports plant-wide engineering and uses the IT standards right down to the field level. Fieldbus systems such as PROFIBUS can be easily integrated without any modification of existing devices. PROFINET takes account of the following aspects: Real-time communication PROFINET is based on Industrial Ethernet and uses the standard TCP/IP (Transport Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) for parameterization, configuration and diagnosis. Real-time communication for the transmission of useful/process data is performed on the same line. PROFINET devices can support the following real-time properties: Real-time (RT) uses the option of prioritizing and optimizing the communication stacks of the stations. This makes high-performance data transmission possible with standard network components in the field of automation. Isochronous real-time (IRT) For especially demanding tasks, the hardware-supported real-time communication isochronous realtime (IRT) is available – for example, for motion control applications and high-performance applications in factory automation. The ERTEC (Enhanced Real-Time Ethernet Controller) ASICs support both real-time properties This is the basic technology for integrated system solutions using PROFINET. In addition to being integrated into Siemens Products, the ERTEC technology is also made available to other manufacturers. The development of own devices is supported in the form of Development Kits and Competence Centers.

By retaining the device model of PROFIBUS, the same diagnostics information is available on PROFINET. As well as device diagnostics, module-specific and channel-specific data can also be read out from the devices, enabling simple and fast location of faults. Alongside the star, tree and ring topologies, PROFINET also consistently supports the line topology shaped by established fieldbuses. By integrating switch functionality into the devices, as on the S7-300 with CP 343-1, for example, or the SIMATIC ET 200S or ET 200pro distributed field devices, line topologies that are oriented around the machine or plant structure can be formed in the familiar way. This results in savings in cabling overhead and cuts down on components such as external switches. In addition to the products in degree of protection IP20, a complete portfolio is available for IP65, such as the ET 200pro field device or the SCALANCE X208PRO switch. Control IO controller

PG/PC Supervisor

Industrial Ethernet PROFINET ET 200S S7-300 with CP 343-1 Lean Field devices IO devices

IE/PB Link PN IO

IE/AS-i LINK PN IO

Machine Vision ET 200pro

PROFIBUS AS-Interface

PROFINET with distributed field devices

2/20


G_IK10_XX_30103

2



■ Overview (continued) Fieldbus integration PROFINET permits easy integration of existing fieldbus systems. This requires the use of a proxy, which is a master on the PROFIBUS or AS-Interface system on the one hand and a station on Industrial Ethernet on the other hand and which supports PROFINET communication. This protects the investments of plant operators, mechanical and plant engineers, and device manufacturers. Motion Control On the basis of PROFINET and using isochronous real-time (IRT) it is also possible to implement very fast, isochronous drive controls for high-performance motion control applications without any great expense. The standardized drive profile PROFIdrive enables vendor-independent communication between motion controllers and drives, regardless of whether the bus system is Industrial Ethernet or PROFIBUS. Isochronous real-time communication and standard IT communication can be used simultaneously on the same cable without adversely affecting each other.

Distributed intelligence and machine-machine communication (PROFINET CBA) PROFIBUS International has defined a standard for implementing modular plant structures: PROFINET CBA (Component Based Automation). Positive experiences have already been made with modularization for machine and plant construction: Frequently-required parts are ready-made and can be rapidly combined into an individual unit when an order is placed. With PROFINET CBA, modularization can be extended to the automation engineering of the plant with the help of software components. Software components are understood to be encapsulated, reusable software functions. These can be individual technological functions such as closed-loop controllers, or user programs for entire machines. Like blocks, they can be flexibly combined and easily re-used – regardless of their internal programming. Communication between the software components is carried out exclusively via the component interfaces. On the outside, only those variables are accessible on these interfaces which are required for interaction with other components. Software components are created with STEP 7 or other vendorspecific tools. SIMATIC iMap is used for plant-wide configuring of the overall plant using graphical interconnection of the components. The degree of modularization does not determine the number of programmable controllers required. Allocation to one central programmable controller or several distributed controllers allows optimal utilization of the automation hardware.

STEP 7: Configure devices, generate user program

STEP 7: Generate PROFINET components

Machine 1 ON START STOP

STARTING READY CLEANING HELD LIFESTATE

Machine 2

LAD

ON START STOP

STARTING READY FILLING HELD STATUS LIFESTATE

SIMATIC iMap: Graphically linked components Machine 2


STARTING READY CLEANING HELD LIFESTATE

ON START STOP

STARTING READY FILLING HELD STATUS LIFESTATE



STARTING READY LABELING LIFESTATE

STARTING READY LABELING LIFESTATE G_IK10_XX_30102


2/21

2



2

■ Overview (continued) Network installation

IT standards & security

PROFINET enables the network to be installed without any specialist knowledge. The open standard based on Industrial Ethernet meets all the requirements relevant to the industrial sector. PROFINET permits the simple construction of the usual network topologies such as star, tree, line and ring for greater reliability and using industry-standard cabling.

In the context of Web integration, the data of PROFINET components is presented in HTML or XML format. Regardless of the tool used, information of the automation level can be accessed from any point with a commercially available Internet browser, thus significantly simplifying startup and diagnostics. PROFINET defines a graded security concept that can be used without specialist knowledge and that largely rules out operator errors, unauthorized access and manipulation, without hindering the production process. For this, the SCALANCE S product range is available with software or hardware modules.

The "PROFINET Installation Guide" provides network installation support for manufacturers and users. Symmetrical copper cable or EMI-resistant fiber optic cable is used depending on the application. Devices from different manufacturers are easily connected via standardized and rugged plug connectors (to IP65/IP67). For address assignment and network diagnostics, PROFINET uses the IT standards DCP (Discovery Configuration Protocol) and SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). PROFINET offers new functions and applications for wireless communication with Industrial Wireless LAN. This enables technologies subject to wear, such as contact wires, to be replaced and permits driverless transport systems or personalized operating or maintenance devices to be used. Industrial WLAN is standard-based but also offers additional functions that permit the high-performance connection of field devices to controllers: • "Data reservation" is used for reserving the bandwidth between an access point and a defined client. This ensures high, reliable performance for this client, regardless of the number of clients operated at the access point. • "Rapid Roaming" for the fast handover of mobile stations between different access points. These expansions to the standard enable high-performance wireless applications with PROFINET and SCALANCE W right down to the field level.

2/22


Safety The PROFIsafe safety profile, which has been tried and tested with PROFIBUS and which permits the transmission of standard and safety-related data on a single bus cable, can also be used with PROFINET. Standard switches, proxys and links can also be used for failsafe communication. In addition, failsafe communication is possible via Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN). PROFINET thus permits the implementation of standard and failsafe applications with integrated configuration throughout the network – not only when designing new plants, but also when upgrading existing ones. Process PROFINET is the standard for all applications in automation. By means of the PROFIBUS integration, it also includes the process industry – including hazardous areas.


Introduction

PROFINET-Products for Industrial Ethernet

■ Overview

2

PROFINET CBA Controllers CPU 315-2 PN/DP CPU 315F-2 PN/DP CPU 317-2 PN/DP CPU 317F-2 PN/DP CPU 319-3 PN/DP CPUs within a CBA component that allow data to be exchanged with other components over PROFINET and, with the proxy, over PROFIBUS. WinAC Basis with PN option Software PLC, based on WinAC Basis. WinAC PN also acts as a proxy for PROFIBUS devices.

System connection for PG/PC PN CBA OPC Server Enables direct access to variables in PROFINET CBA components over the OPC interface. Routers IE/PB Link CBA proxy for integration of existing PROFIBUS devices into a CBA application. The IE/PB Link offers additional S7-and data set routing Engineering Tools

System connections for SIMATIC S7 and SINUMERIK CP 343-1 Communications processor for integrating an existing S7-300 or SINUMERIK 840D powerline into a CBA application.

SIMATIC iMap Multi-vendor software for graphic configuring of communication between components.

CP 343-1 Advanced CP 443-1 Advanced Communications processors with integral switch (CP 443-1 Advanced only) for integrating a SIMATIC S7-300/S7-400 or SINUMERIK 840D powerline (CP 343-1 Advanced only) into a CBA application.


2/23


Introduction

PROFINET-Products for Industrial Ethernet

2

■ Overview (continued) PROFINET IO Controllers

Motion Control & Drives

CPU 315-2 PN/DP CPU 315F-2 PN/DP CPU 317-2 PN/DP CPU 317F-2 PN/DP CPU 319-3 PN/DP CPU as IO-Controller for processing the process signals and for directly connecting field devices to Industrial Ethernet. System connections for SIMATIC S7 and SINUMERIK CP 343-1 Communications processor for connection of the S7-300 or a SINUMERIK 840D powerline to Industrial Ethernet. Field devices are connected as IO-Devices via S7-300 to Industrial Ethernet using this. CP 343-1 Advanced CP 443-1 Advanced Communications processors with integral switch (CP 443-1 Advanced only) as IO controller for system connection of field devices to SIMATIC S7-300/S7-400 or a SINUMERIK 840D powerline (CP 343-1 Advanced only). System connection for PG/PC

CBE 20, CBE 30 CBE 20 or CBE 30 are the PROFINET boards for connecting SINAMICS S120 or SIMOTION D to PROFINET. MCI-PN SIMOTION P, the PC-based version of SIMOTION, is linked to PROFINET with MCI-PN. Engineering Tools STEP 7 or SIMOTION SCOUT For project design in the tried and tested PROFIBUS manner. SINEMA E for planning, simulating and configuring industrial WLAN applications in accordance with the 802.11 a/b/g standard. Technology components ERTEC 400 Ethernet controller with integral 4-port switch, ARM 946 RISC and PCI interface, data processing for Real-Time (RT) and Isochronous Real-Time (IRT) on PROFINET.

CP 1616 PCI module for connecting PGs/PCs to Industrial Ethernet with ASIC ERTEC 400 and integral 4-port real-time switch Use both as IO controller and as IO device.

ERTEC 200 Ethernet controller with integral 2-port switch, ARM 946 RISC, data processing for Real-Time (RT) and Isochronous Real-Time (IRT) on PROFINET.

CP 1604 PC/104-Plus module for connecting PC/104-Plus systems and SIMATIC Microbox with PC/104-Plus connection to Industrial Ethernet with ASIC ERTEC 400 and integral 4-port real-time switch Use both as IO controller and as IO device.

DK-ERTEC 400 PN IO development kit DK-ERTEC 200 PN IO development kit The Development Kits support the development of proprietary PROFINET IO devices.

DK-16xx PN IO development kit Software Development Kit for CP 1616 and CP 1604 with LINUX driver as source code for porting to PC-based operating systems. SOFTNET PN IO Communications software for operation of a PC/workstation as IO-Controller. Routers IWLAN/PB Link PN IO PROFINET proxy for transparent interfacing of existing PROFIBUS devices to an I/O controller via Industrial Ethernet Wireless LAN (IWLAN). IE/PB Link PN IO PROFINET proxy for transparent interfacing of existing PROFIBUS devices to an I/O controller via Industrial Ethernet. IE/AS-i LINK PN IO PROFINET proxy for transparent interfacing of existing AS-Interface slaves to an I/O controller via Industrial Ethernet. Distributed I/Os IM 151-3 PN Interface modules for direct coupling of the ET 200S as IO device, with integral 2-port switch for line configuration (also via fiber optic cable). IM 154-4 PN Interface module for direct connection of the ET 200pro as IO device, with integral switch for line configuration in high degree of protection (IP65/IP67).

2/24


PROFINET IO Development Kit Development package based on standard Ethernet processor for developing proprietary PROFINET IO devices. Image processing systems VS120 Vision Sensor as IO device for inspection of objects. VS130-2 Vision sensor as I/O device for reading 2D codes. Network components SCALANCE X-200IRT managed SCALANCE X-200 managed SCALANCE X204-2 SCALANCE X202-2IRT SCALANCE X204-2LD SCALANCE X204IRT SCALANCE X206-1 SCALANCE X200-4P IRT SCALANCE X206-1LD SCALANCE X201-3P IRT SCALANCE X208 SCALANCE X202-2P IRT SCALANCE X208PRO Industrial Ethernet switches for establishing different network structures, from machine-level applications right up to networked plant sections with strict real-time requirements.

IE devices with SC RJ connection

G_IK10_XX_10007

o p t i c a l

e

l

e

c

t

r

i

c a

l

IE TP Cord 2x2

IE TP Cord 4x2 ITP cables ITP connecting cables Hybrid cables Energy cables Fiber-optic (FO) cables 50/125 µm Fiber-optic cables 62,5/125 µm PCF FO cables 200/230 µm

IE TP Cord 9/RJ45 IE TP XP Cord 9/RJ45 IE TP Cord 9-45/RJ45 IE TP XP Cord 9-45/RJ45 IE TP Cord RJ45/15 IE TP XP Cord RJ45/15 IE TP XP Cord 9/9 IE TP Cord RJ45/RJ45 IE TP XP Cord RJ45/RJ45 ITP Standard Cable ITP FRNC Cable ITP Standard Cable 9/15 ITP XP Standard Cable 9/9 ITP XP Standard Cable 15/15 ITP FRNC Cable 9/15 Hybrid cable 2x2 + 4x0,34 Energy Cable 2 x 0,75 FO Standard Cable GP FO Trailing Cable FO Trailing Cable GP FO Ground Cable Fiber Optic Standard Cable INDOOR Fiber Optic Indoor Cable Flexible Fiber Optic Trailing Cable SIENOPYR Marine Duplex Fiber Optic Cable PCF Standard Cable GP PCF Trailing Cable GP PCF Trailing Cable


Prefabricated fiber-optic cables with SC RJ connector

POF Standard Cable GP POF Trailing Cable

Prefabricated fiber-optic cables with SC connector

Fiber-optic cables with BFOC connector Fiber-optic cables with SC connector POF FO cables 980/1000 µm Fiber-optic cables with SC RJ connector

IE FC Cable 2x2

IE FC Standard Cable GP 2x2 IE FC Flexible Cable GP 2x2 IE FC Trailing Cable GP 2x2 IE FC Torsion Cable GP 2x2 IE FC Trailing Cable 2x2 IE FC Marine Cable 2x2

Prefabricated fiber-optic cables with BFOC connector

IE FC Cable 4x2

IE FC Standard Cable GP 4x2

PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet Passive Network Components Summary of network components

■ Overview Industrial Ethernet (IE)

2

IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet

IE FC Outlet RJ45

IE FC RJ45 Plug 90/145/180

M12A coded power connector B coded

IP67 hybrid connector

ITP connector 9-pin/ 15-pin

IE devices with Sub-D connection

Devices with RJ45 connection

BFOC connector

IE devices with BFOC connection

SC connector

IE devices with SC connection

SC RJ connector

2/25


Passive Network Components Overview of Twisted Pair

■ Overview

■ Application

Structured cabling • Structured cabling to ISO IEC 118011/EN 50173 describes the non-application-specific, tree-like cabling of building complexes for IT purposes. A site is subdivided into the following areas: - primary area (connecting the buildings of a site) - secondary area (connecting the floors of a building) - tertiary area (IT connection of data terminals on a floor) The structured cabling that can be achieved with the Industrial Ethernet FastConnect System corresponds to the structure of the tertiary cabling in accordance with EN 50173 for Ethernet. FastConnect Twisted Pair (FC) • For structured cabling in the production hall, the FastConnect Twisted Pair cabling system is ideal. With the fast installation system for Industrial Ethernet, structured cabling from the office environment not only becomes industry compatible for installation in the production hall. • FastConnect cables can also be assembled extremely quickly and easily on site. The RJ45 cabling technique, an existing standard, is also available in an industry-standard version that supports structured cabling (patch cables, patch field, installation cables, connection socket, connecting cable). • With the IE FC RJ45 Plug and FastConnect cables as an alternative to structured cabling, up to 100 m cable length can be achieved for a point-to-point link (requires less patch technology). ITP (Sub-D connection method) • For direct connection between stations and network components, the ITP Standard Cable is offered preassembled with Sub-D plugs as a rugged connection system. This allows cable lengths of up to 100 m to be achieved without the need for patches.

■ Benefits • Comprehensive product range for flexible wiring in industry • Faster connection of data terminals thanks to safe stripping of the outer sheath and braided shield in one step • Easy connection technique (insulation-piercing contacts) for 4-core (Cat5) and 8-core (Cat6) Industrial Ethernet FC Twisted Pair installation cables • Easy assembly of both cable types with the preadjusted FC stripping tool • Reliable shield contacting and strain relief

IE FC TP Cable 2x2

10/100 Mbit/s

10/100/1000 Mbit/s

■

–

IE FC TP Cable 4x2

–

■

IE FC RJ45 Plug

■

–

IE FC Outlet RJ45

■

–


–

■

IE TP Cord

■ 1)

■ 2)

1) All TP Cord types with a Sub D interface 2) IE TP Cord RJ45/RJ45 and IE TP Cord XP

Approvals UL listing (safety standard) for network cables is especially necessary for the American and Canadian markets. The requirements for the appropriate approvals depend on where the cable is routed within the building. This applies to all cables which have to be routed from a machine to a remote control cabinet and are positioned on cable racks secured on the building. OFN/OFNG cable for routing in bundles (general purpose cable).

■ Design The FastConnect system comprises: • Industrial Ethernet FastConnect cables specially designed for fast connection (UL and CAT5 PLUS certified) as FC Standard, FC Flexible, FC Trailing, FC Torsion and FC Marine Cable. • Easy stripping with the FastConnect Stripping Tool; the outer sheath and the braided shield are stripped accurately in one step • The prepared cable is connected in the FastConnect products using the insulation displacement method.

■ Integration Active distributor, e.g. SCALANCE X-400

Terminal device, e.g. S7-300

Patch cable, e.g. IE TP Cord

Connection cable, e.g. IE TP Cord Installation cable, e. g. FC TP Standard Cable 4 x 2

A+B < 10 m A+B+C < 100 m

Connection socket, e.g. IE FC Outlet RJ45 IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet

Structured cabling to EN 50173

2/26


Connection socket, e.g. IE FC Outlet RJ45 IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet

G_IK10_XX_10061

2


Passive Network Components Industrial Ethernet FastConnect

■ Overview

■ Benefits

2

• Comprehensive product range for flexible wiring in industry in accordance with the innovative Industrial Ethernet standard PROFINET (PROFINET Installation Guide 1)) • Faster connection of data terminals thanks to safe stripping of the outer sheath and braided shield in one step • Easy connection technique (insulation displacement contacts) for 4-core (Cat5) and 8-core (Cat6) Industrial Ethernet FC Twisted Pair installation cables • Easy assembly of both cable types with the preadjusted FC stripping tool • Reliable shield contact and strain relief thanks to bolt-on cover • Excellent EMC shielding and deflection (metal housing) • Mistakes are prevented thanks to color coding and the transparent contact cover • RJ45 cabling technology is used as the permanent standard 1) Available as a download under www.profinet.com

• With the FastConnect (FC) system for Industrial Ethernet, structured cabling from the office environment becomes industry-compatible for installation in the production hall. • Time-saving, error-free installation on-site • RJ45 cabling technology is used as the permanent standard • The ideal solution for installation of RJ45 connectors in the field area with 4-core (2 x 2) Industrial Ethernet FC cables • The ideal solution for installation of IE FC RJ45 modular outlets to 8-core (4 x 2) Industrial Ethernet FC cables • Reliable shield attachment and strain relief are integrated • Mistakes are prevented thanks to color coding and the transparent contact cover • Integrated system of FC plug-in connectors and an extensive FC cable spectrum with appropriate UL approvals


2/27


Passive Network Components Industrial Ethernet FastConnect

2

■ Application Industrial Ethernet FastConnect is a fast connection technique for easy assembly of 4-core and 8-core Industrial Ethernet FC cables.

After stripping the IE FC cable, it can be directly mounted either in the IE FC RJ45 Plug (4-core), the IE FC Outlet RJ45 (4-core) or the IE RJ45 Modular Outlet (8-core).

Measure the length of cable to be stripped by resting the cable on the measuring template. The end stop is formed by the index finger of the left hand.

Insert the measured cable end in the tool. The end stop for the insertion depth is formed by the index finger of the left hand.

Fasten the end of the cable in the stripping tool up to the end stop.

To strip the cable, rotate the stripping tool several times in the direction of the arrow.

Remove the stripping tool still closed from the end of the cable.

Remove the protective film from the cores. G_IK10_XX_10021

■ Design

■ Function

The complete system: • Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables designed for fast assembly; 4-core (2x2) Cat5e; 8-core (4 x 2) Cat6 certified, with appropriate UL approval, as: - IE FC TP Standard Cable GP - IE FC TP Flexible Cable GP - IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP - IE FC TP Trailing Cable - IE TP Torsion Cable - IE FC TP Marine Cable • User-friendly stripping technique with FC Stripping Tool • FC RJ45 Plug immune to interference (10/100 Mbit/s). The rugged metal casing makes it an ideal solution for installing RJ45 plug-in connectors to 4-core IE FC cables at the field level. • The prepared cable is connected in the Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s; 4-core) or IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet (10/100/1000 Mbit/s; 8-core) using insulation displacement

2/28


The FastConnect stripping technique supports fast and easy connection of the Industrial Ethernet FC cables • IE FC RJ45 Plug (10/100 Mbit/s) • IE FC Outlet RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s) • IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet (10/100/1000 Mbit/s) The data terminals and network components are connected at the outlets over TP Cords. The Industrial Ethernet FastConnect cables are specially designed for use of the Industrial Ethernet FastConnect Stripping Tool, with which the outer casing and the woven shield can be stripped accurately in one step. The prepared cable is then connected using insulation displacement. Approvals UL listing (safety standard) for network cables is especially necessary for the American and Canadian markets. The requirements for the appropriate approvals depend on where the cable is routed within the building. This applies to all cables which have to be routed from a machine to a remote control cabinet and are positioned on cable racks secured on the building. OFN/OFNG cable for routing in bundles (general purpose cable).


Passive Network Components IE FC RJ45 Plug

■ Overview

■ Benefits

2

• Ideal solution for installing RJ45 plug-in connectors in the field level • Time-saving, error-free installation using the FastConnect system • RJ45 plug-in connector is resistant to interference thanks to the rugged metal housing • Reliable shield attachment and strain relief are integrated • Mistakes are prevented thanks to color coding and the transparent contact cover • A compatible system of Industrial Ethernet FastConnect plugin connectors and a comprehensive range of FastConnect cables with the appropriate UL approvals and PROFINET compatibility

S7-300

S7-200

■ Application The compact and rugged design of the plug-in connectors allow the FC RJ45 Plugs to be used in the industrial environment and in equipment from the office environment. Industrial Ethernet FastConnect RJ45 Plugs support quick and easy installation of the Industrial Ethernet FastConnect installation cables 2 x 2 (4-core Twisted Pair cables) in the field. The Industrial Ethernet FastConnect Stripping Tool for preparing the cable end (stripping the cable sleeve and shield in one action) supports easy handling and fast, error-free contacting of the cable at the plug-in connector. Installation is also possible under difficult working conditions because the plug-in connector does not have any small parts that can be lost. The new plug-in connectors enable point-to-point links to be implemented (100 Mbit/s) for Industrial Ethernet between two data terminals/network components up to 100 m without the need for patches.

IE FC RJ45 Plug 180

S7-400 PC

NC

IE FC TP Cable 2x2

IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 2x2 (Type A) IE FC TP Flexible Cable GP 2x2 (Type B) IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP 2x2 (Type C) IE TP Torsion Cable 2x2 (Type C) IE FC TP Trailing Cable 2x2 (Type C) IE FC TP Marine Cable 2x2 (Type B)

S7-300

S7-200

S7-400 PC

NC

Prerequisite: autocrossing

G_IK10_XX_10034

Implementation of direct device connections over distances of up to 100 m with Industrial Ethernet FC installation cable 2 x 2 without patching • Easy connection (insulation displacement contacts) for 4-core Twisted Pair installation cables (100 Mbit/s) without the need for special tools • Error-preventing connection technique thanks to visible connection area as well as colored blade terminals • Industry-compatible design (rugged metal housing, no easily lost small parts) • Excellent EMC shielding and deflection (metal housing) • Integrated strain-relief for installation cables • Compatible to the EN 50173 (RJ45) / ISO IEC 11801 standard • Additional strain and bending relief of plug connector possible through latching of plug on device housing, e.g. with SCALANCE X, SCALANCE S, ET 200S.

Use of FastConnect cables with IE FC RJ45 Plug


2/29



2

■ Design Industrial Ethernet FC RJ45 Plugs are available in three designs: With 180° (straight) cable outlet

With 90° (angled) cable outlet (SIMOTION and SINAMICS only)

They are used for optimized connection of Industrial Ethernet FastConnect cables to data terminals and network components. The plugs have a rugged, industry-compatible metal housing that provides optimum protection against faults in data communication. The 4 integrated insulation displacement contacts make contacting of the FC cable variants easy and prevent mistakes.

With 145° (angled) cable outlet (for ET 200S)

After the stripped cable end has been inserted in the blade terminal (which has been hinged open), it is pressed down for reliable contacting of the conductors. Thanks to their compactness, the plug-in connectors (IE FC Plug 180°) can be used on devices with individual sockets and on devices with multiple sockets (blocks).

Data terminals with an additional bracket on the housing provide additional tension and bending relief for the plug-in cable.

■ Function The IE FC RJ45 Plugs are used to install uncrossed 100 Mbit/s Ethernet connections up to 100 m without the use of patches. Crossed cables can also be installed by swapping the transmit and receive pair in a plug.

2/30


When the housing is open, color markings on the contact cover make it easier to connect the cores to the blade terminals. The user can check that contact has been made correctly through the transparent plastic material of the contact cover.




■ Ordering data (continued)

Interfaces • Connection of Industrial Ethernet FC cables • Connection of Industrial Ethernet RJ45 devices

4 x integrated insulation displacement contacts 1 x RJ45 Plug

Transfer rate

100 Mbit/s; Cat5e

Network expansion parameter • TP cable length

0 - 100 m; IE FC cables (depending on cable type)

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature -20 °C ... +70 °C • Transport/storage temperature -40 °C ... +80 °C • Relative humidity during operation <95% Design • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm with Plug 180 • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm with Plug 90 • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm with Plug 145 • Assembly

13.7 x 16 x 55 13.7 x 16 x 42 13.9 x 16 x 55.6

• Weight

IE FC stripping tool for stripping the IE FC cable approx. 35 g

Degree of protection

IP20

■ Ordering data

Order No.

IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 180° cable outlet; for network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface

IE FC stripping tool Preadjusted stripping tool for fast stripping of Industrial Ethernet FC cables

6GK1 901-1GA00

IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type A) 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug; PROFINET-compatible; with UL approval Sold by the meter max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m Preferred length • 1000 m

6XV1 840-2AH10

6XV1 840-2AU10

IE FC TP Flexible Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type B) 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug for occasional movement; PROFINET-compatible; with UL approval; sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

6XV1 870-2B

IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type C) 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug for use in trailing cables; PROFINET-compatible; with UL approval; sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

6XV1 870-2D

6XV1 840-3AH10

• 1 pack = 1 piece

6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0

• 1 pack = 10 pieces

6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0

IE FC TP Trailing Cable 2 x 2 (Type C) 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug 180/90 for use in trailing cables; PROFINET-compatible; without UL approval; sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

6XV1 870-2F


6GK1 901-1BB20-2AA0

IE TP Torsion Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type C) 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug for use with robots; PROFINET-compatible; with UL approval; sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m


6GK1 901-1BB20-2AB0 6GK1 901-1BB20-2AE0

IE FC TP Marine Cable 2 x 2 (Type B) 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug 180/90; marine approval; sold by the meter, max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

6XV1 840-4AH10


IE FC Blade Cassettes (5 mm) Replacement blade cassette for the Industrial Ethernet stripping tool; for use with IE FC RJ45 Plugs and Modular Outlet, 5 units

6GK1 901-1GB01

IE FC RJ45 Plug 90 RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 90° cable outlet; for ET 200S

IE FC RJ45 Plug 145 RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 145° cable outlet; for SIMOTION and SINAMICS • 1 pack = 1 piece

6GK1 901-1BB30-0AA0


6GK1 901-1BB30-0AB0


6GK1 901-1BB30-0AE0

2

Order No.


2/31


Passive Network Components

IE connecting cable M12-180/M12-180/ M12 plug PRO

2

■ Overview

■ Benefits

• Time-saving, error-free connection of end stations using preassembled connection cables • Simple assembly on site for application-specific M12 connecting cables using field-assembled M12 plugs (IE M12 Plug PRO, D-coded)

■ Ordering data

Order No.

IE Connecting Cable M12-180/M12-180 Pre-assembled IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP 2 x 2 (PROFINET type C) with two 4-pole M12 plugs (4-pole, D-coded), degree of protection IP65/IP67 Length:

Flexible connecting cables and plug-in connectors that can be assembled in the field for transmission of data (up to 100 Mbit/s) between Industrial Ethernet stations with degree of protection IP65

• 0.3 m

6XV1 870-8AE30

• 0.5 m

6XV1 870-8AE50

•1m

6XV1 870-8AH10

Industrial Ethernet connecting cable M12-180/M12-180 (D coded) • Pre-assembled connecting cable (IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP) for connecting Industrial Ethernet stations (e.g. SIMATIC ET 200pro and SCALANCE X208PRO) with degree of protection IP65/IP67 • For data transmission rates 10/100 Mbit/s

• 1.5 m

6XV1 870-8AH15

•2m

6XV1 870-8AH20

•3m

6XV1 870-8AH30

•5m

6XV1 870-8AH50

• 10 m

6XV1 870-8AN10

• 15 m

6XV1 870-8AN15

Industrial Ethernet M12 plug PRO (D coded) • Industrial Ethernet M12 cable connector that can be assembled in the field for on-site installation of SCALANCE X208PRO and IM 154-4 PN • Easy connection (insulation displacement contacts) for 4-core twisted pair FC installation cables (100 Mbit/s) without the need for special tools • Industry-compatible design (rugged metal housing) • Excellent EMC shielding and deflection (metal housing) • Integrated strain-relief for installation cables

IE M12 plug PRO For assembly in the field, M12 plug-in connector (D-coded), metal housing, fast connection method, for SCALANCE X208PRO and IM 154-4 PN

Industrial Ethernet panel feedthrough • Control cabinet feedthrough for conversion from M12 connection method (D coded, degree of protection IP65/IP67) to RJ45 connection method (IP20)

• 1 piece

6GK1 901-0DB10-6AA0

• 8 pieces

6GK1 901-0DB10-6AA8

IE panel feedthrough Control cabinet feedthrough for conversion from M12 connection method (D coded, degree of protection IP65/IP67) to RJ45 connection method (IP20) • 1 pack = 5 pieces

6GK1 901-0DM20-2AA5

■ More information Additional components of the SIMATIC NET wiring range can be ordered from your local contact person. For technical advice contact: J. Hertlein, A&D SE PS Tel.:+49(0)911/750 44 65 Fax.: +49(0)911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]

2/32



Passive Network Components IE FC TP Cable 2 x 2

■ Overview

■ Application

2

For the construction of Industrial Ethernet networks (4-core), different cable types are offered to suit the different types of application. In general, the listed Industrial Ethernet FC cables IE FC Cable 2 x 2 must be used. Note: You will find other specifications of the network topology in the manual for TP and fiber optic networks.

UL approvals Different cable versions are offered with appropriate UL approvals for laying in cable bundles and cable racks according to the specifications of NEC (National Electrical Code) Article 800/725. These are identified as GP (General Purpose).

■ Design Outer sheath

Foil shield

■ Benefits

• Time savings thanks to quick and easy assembly with FastConnect cables 2 x 2 on the Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s) or Industrial Ethernet FC RJ45 Plug 180/90. • Flexible application possibilities thanks to special bus cables • Network is immune to interference thanks to double shielded cables and a uniform grounding concept. • Silicon-free, therefore suitable for use in the automotive industry (e.g. on paint shop conveyors)

Inner sheath Braided shield G_IK PI_XX_10033

• For structured cabling in the factory hall; specially designed for fast assembly • Easy stripping with the FastConnect Stripping Tool; the outer sheath and the braided shield are stripped accurately in one step • Connection to FastConnect products using insulation displacement • Exceeds Category 5 (Cat5e) of the international cabling standards ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173 • PROFINET-compatible • UL approval • Different variants for different applications - IE FC TP Standard Cable GP - IE FC TP Flexible Cable GP - IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP - IE FC TP Trailing Cable - IE TP Torsion Cable - IE FC TP Marine Cable • High interference immunity thanks to double shielding • Easy length measurement thanks to printed meter markings

Single core sheath Copper core

The FastConnect (FC) Industrial Ethernet cables IE FC Cable 2 x 2 are designed with radial symmetry and therefore allow the use of the FC Stripping Tool The IE FC Outlet RJ45 and the IE FC RJ45 Plug can therefore be attached quickly and easily. • The double shield makes it especially suitable for routing through industrial areas with strong electro-magnetic fields • Easy connection to the insulation displacement contacts of the FC RJ45 Plug without the need for special tools • System-wide grounding concept can be implemented through the outer shield of the bus cable and through the grounding concept of the IE FC Outlet RJ45 • Printed meter marks Cable types • IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 2 x 2: Standard bus cable with rigid cores specially designed for fast installation; four rigid cores connected in a four-branch star • IE FC TP Flexible Cable GP 2 x 2: Flexible bus cable for the special application of occasional motion control; four stranded cores connected in a four branch star • IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP / IE FC TP Trailing Cable 2 x 2: Highly flexible bus cable for the special application of constant motion control in a cable carrier, e.g. for continuously moving machine parts; four stranded cores connected in a four branch star • IE TP Torsion Cable 2 x 2: Highly flexible bus cable for the special application of continuous motion control, e.g. for use with robots; stranded cores • IE FC TP Marine Cable 2 x 2: Bus cable for marine applications; four cores (stranded) connected in a four branch star, halogen-free, certified for marine applications


2/33



2

■ Design (continued) Product overview IE FC TP Cable 2 x 2 (PROFINET-compatible according to PROFINET Installation Guide 1)) PROFINET Type A

PROFINET Type B

PROFINET Type C

AWG 22/1 rigid laying

AWG 22/7 flexible cable for occasional movement

AWG 22 highly flexible cable for continuous motion, e.g. cable carrier or robots

IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type A) 6XV1 840-2AH10

■

–

–

IE FC TP Flexible Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type B) 6XV1 870-2B

–

■

–

IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type C) 6XV1 870-2D

–

–

■

IE FC TP Trailing Cable 2 x 2 (Type C) 6XV1 840-3AH10

–

–

■

IE TP Torsion Cable 2 x 2 (Type C) 6XV1 870-2F

–

–

■

IE FC TP Marine Cable 2 x 2 (Type B) 6XV1 840-4AH10

–

■

–

1) Available as a download under www.profinet.com

Installation instructions The bus cables are supplied by the meter with meter marks printed on them. FastConnect With the help of Industrial Ethernet FastConnect Stripping Tool, it is possible to strip the outer sheath and shield of Industrial Ethernet FastConnect cables 2 x 2 to the right length in one step. The IE Outlet RJ45 and the PROFINET-compatible plug-in connector IE FC RJ45 can be connected quickly and easily to the Industrial Ethernet FC cable 2 x 2. Cable routing During storage, transport and cable laying, keep both ends sealed with a shrink-on cap; comply with the permissible bending radii and tensile load.

2/34




■ Technical specifications Cable type 1)

IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type A)

IE FC TP Flexible Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type B)

IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type C)

Application areas

Universal applications

Occasional movement

Trailing cables

Cable specification

Cat5e

Cat5e

Cat5e

• at 10 MHz

typ. 5.2 dB/100 m

typ. 6 dB/100 m

6.3 dB/100 m

• at 100 MHz

typ. 19.5 dB/100 m

typ. 21 dB/100 m

21.3 dB/100 m

100 Ω ± 15 Ω

100 Ω ± 15 Ω

100 Ω ± 15 Ω

typ. ≥ 50 dB/100 m

typ. ≥ 50 dB/100 m

≥ 50 dB/100 m

Electrical data (at 20 °C) Wave attenuation

Characteristic impedance • at 1 … 100 MHz Near-end cross-talk attenuation • at 1 … 100 MHz Coupling resistance • at 10 MHz

≤ 10 mΩ/m

≤ 100 mΩ/m

≤ 20 mΩ/m

Loop resistance

≤ 124 Ω/km

≤ 120 Ω/km

≤ 120 Ω/km

Insulation resistance

≥ 500 MΩ km

≥ 500 MΩ km

≥ 500 MΩ km

• With IE FC RJ45 Plug, max.

100 m

85 m

85 m

• With IE FC Outlet RJ45, max.

90 m

75 m

75 m

Cable type (standard designation)

2YY (ST) CY 2x2x0.64/1.5-100 GN

2YY (ST) CY 2x2x0.75/1.5-100 LI GN

2YY (ST) CY 2x2x0.75/1.5-100 LI GN

Internal conductor diameter (copper)

0.64 mm, AWG22

0.75 mm, AWG22

0.75 mm, AWG22

Core insulation

PE dia. 1.5 mm

PE dia. 1.5 mm

PE dia. 1.5 mm

Inner sheath

PVC dia. 3.9 mm

PVC dia. 3.9 mm

PVC dia. 3.9 mm

Sheath

PVC dia. (6.5 ± 0.2) mm

PVC dia. (6.5 ± 0.2) mm

PVC dia. (6.5 ± 0.2) mm

Range

Mechanical data

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature

–40 ºC … +70 ºC

–10 ºC … +70 ºC

–25 ºC … +75 ºC

• Transport/storage temperature

–40 ºC … +70 ºC

–40 ºC … +70 ºC

–25 ºC … +75 ºC

• Installation temperature

–20 ºC … +60 ºC

–20 ºC … +60 ºC

–10 ºC … +60 ºC

Permissible bending radius • Multiple bends

7.5 x dia.

8 x dia.

7.5 x dia.

• Single bend

3 x dia.

5 x dia.

5 x dia.

Bending cycles

–

–

3 mill. 2)

Permissible tensile force

< 150 N

≤ 150 N

≤ 150 N

Weight

approx. 70 kg/km

approx. 68 kg/km

approx. 68 kg/km

Halogen-free

No

No

No

Behavior in fire

Flame retardant acc. to UL 1685 (CSA FT 4)



Oil resistance

Limited resistance

Limited resistance

Limited resistance

UL listing / 300 V rating

Yes / CM/CMG/PLTC/Sun Res


Yes/ CMG / PLTC / Sun Res

UL style / 600 V rating

Yes

No

Yes

UV-resistant

Yes

Yes

Yes

Fast Connect cabling

Yes

Yes

Yes

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes

Yes

1) Electrical characteristics at 20 ºC, tests to DIN 0472 2) At a bending diameter of 200 mm


2/35

2



2

■ Technical specifications (continued) Cable type1)

IE TP Torsion Cable 2 x 2 (Type C)

IE FC TP Trailing Cable 2 x 2 (Type C)

IE FC TP Marine Cable 2 x 2 (Type B)

Application areas

Applications with robots

Trailing cables

Marine and offshore use

Cable specification

Cat5e

Cat5e

Cat5e

Wave attenuation • at 10 MHz • at 100 MHz

7.6 dB/100 m 41 dB/100 m

6 dB/100 m 22 dB/100 m

6 dB/100 m 22 dB/100 m

Characteristic impedance • at 1 … 100 MHz

100 Ω ± 15 Ω

100 Ω ± 15 Ω

100 Ω ± 15 Ω

Near-end cross-talk attenuation • at 1 … 100 MHz

≥ 50 dB/100 m

≥ 50 dB/100 m

≥ 50 dB/100 m

Coupling resistance • at 10 MHz

≤ 100 mΩ/m

≤ 10 mΩ/m

≤ 10 mΩ/m

Loop resistance

≤ 120 Ω/km

≤ 120 Ω/km

≤ 120 Ω/km


≥ 500 MΩ km

≥ 500 MΩ km

≥ 500 MΩ km

Range • With IE FC RJ45 Plug, max. • With IE FC Outlet RJ45, max.

55 m 45 m

85 m 75 m

85 m 75 m

02YS (ST) C11Y 1 x 4 x 0.75/ 1.5-100LI GN VZN FRNC

2YH (ST) C11Y 2 x 2 x 0.75/ 1.5-100 LI GN VZN FRNC

L-9YH (ST) CH 2 x 2 x 0.34/ 1.5-100 GN VZN FRNC

Electrical data (at 20 °C)

Mechanical data Cable type (standard designation)

Internal conductor diameter (copper) 0.76 mm, AWG22

0.75 mm, AWG22

0.75 mm, AWG22

Core insulation

PE dia. 1.5 mm

PE dia. 1.5 mm

PP dia. 1.5 mm

Inner sheath

dia. 4.6 mm

FRNC dia. 3.9 mm

FRNC dia. 3.9 mm

Sheath

PUR dia. (6.5 ± 0.2) mm

PUR dia. (6.5 ± 0.2) mm

FRNC dia. (6.5 ± 0.2) mm

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature • Transport/storage temperature • Installation temperature

–40 ºC … +80 ºC –40 ºC … +80 ºC –20 ºC … +60 ºC

–40 ºC … +75 ºC –50 ºC … +75 ºC –20 ºC … +60 ºC

–25 ºC … +70 ºC –40 ºC … +70 ºC 0 ºC … +50 ºC

Permissible bending radius • Multiple bends • Single bend

15 x dia. 5 x dia.

7.5 x dia. 3 x dia.

15 x dia. 6 x dia.

Bending cycles

– 2)

4 mill. 3)

–


≤ 130 N

≤ 150 N

≤ 150 N

Weight

approx. 54 kg/km

approx. 63 kg/km

approx. 68 kg/km

Halogen-free

Yes

Yes

Yes

Behavior in fire

Flame-retardant acc. to IEC 60332-1-2

Flame-retardant acc. to IEC 60332-1


Oil resistance

Highly resistant

Highly resistant

Limited resistance


UL Style 21161

Yes / CMX



No

No

No

UV-resistant

Yes

Yes

Yes


No

Yes

Yes

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes

Yes

Approvals for use in marine vessels

• American Bureau of Shipping • Lloyds Register of Shipping • Det Norske Veritas • German Lloyd • Bureau Veritas

1) Electrical characteristics at 20 ºC, tests to DIN 0472 2) Torsion-resistant cables for the following requirements: At least 5 million torsional movements along 1 m length of cable ±180° 3) At a bending diameter of 200 mm

2/36




■ Ordering data

Order No.

IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type A) 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug; PROFINET-compatible; with UL approval; Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m Preferred length • 1000 m

2

Order No. Accessories

6XV1 840-2AH10

6XV1 840-2AU10


6XV1 870-2B

IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type C) 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug for use in trailing cables; PROFINET-compatible; with UL approval; sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

6XV1 870-2D

IE FC TP Trailing Cable 2 x 2 (Type C) 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug 180/90 for use in trailing cables; PROFINET-compatible; without UL approval; sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

6XV1 840-3AH10

IE TP Torsion Cable 2 x 2 (Type C) 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug for use with robots; PROFINET-compatible; with UL approval; sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

6XV1 870-2F

IE FC TP Marine Cable 2 x 2 (Type B) 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug 180/90; marine approval; sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

6XV1 840-4AH10

IE Hybrid Cable 2 x 2 + 4 x 0.34 Flexible cable, 4 x Cu Cat5, shielded (0.75 mm) and 4 x Cu (0.34 mm2) with IE FC modular outlet and power insert and IP67 hybrid plug connector; sold by the meter; up to 1000 m; minimum order 20 m

6XV1870-2J


6GK1 901-1GA00

IE FC Blade Cassettes (12 mm) Replacement blade cassette for the Industrial Ethernet stripping tool; for use with IE FC Outlet RJ45, ELS TP40, 5 pcs.

6GK1 901-1GB00

IE FC Blade Cassettes (5 mm) Replacement blade cassette for the Industrial Ethernet stripping tool; for use with IE FC RJ45 Plugs and IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet, 5 pcs.

6GK1 901-1GB01

IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 180° cable outlet; for network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface • 1 pack = 1 piece

6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0

IE FC RJ45 Plug 90 RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 90° cable outlet; for ET 200S • 1 pack = 1 piece

6GK1 901-1BB20-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB20-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB20-2AE0

IE FC RJ45 Plug 145 RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 145° cable outlet; e.g. for SIMOTION and SINAMICS • 1 pack = 1 piece

6GK1 901-1BB30-0AA0


6GK1 901-1BB30-0AB0


6GK1 901-1BB30-0AE0

SIMATIC NET Manual Collection Electronic manuals for communication systems, communication protocols and communication products; on CD-ROM; German/English

6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0


2/37



2

■ Overview

■ Benefits

• Time savings thanks to fast and easy mounting with FastConnect cables 4 x 2 on Industrial Ethernet FC RJ 45 Modular Outlet • Structure of an 8-core gigabit-capable cabling system • Thanks to the 8-core cabling it is now possible to implement 2 Industrial Ethernet connections for Fast Ethernet, but in future it will also be possible to upgrade to a Gigabit Ethernet connection • Network immune to interference thanks to integrated grounding concept

■ Application • 8-core FastConnect installation cable for gigabit-capable cabling system • Easy stripping with the FastConnect Stripping Tool; the outer sheath and the braided shield are stripped accurately in one step • Connection to IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet using insulation displacement method • Satisfies Category 6 (Cat6) of the international cabling standards ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173 • UL approval • Easy length measurement thanks to printed meter markings

2/38


The 8-core cabling system of SIMATIC NET allows transmission rates of 10/100/1000 Mbit/s for Ethernet as with the service-independent cabling from the office environment. This permits the transition from the 4-core Industrial Ethernet cabling system to the 8-core gigabit-capable cabling system. For the construction of Industrial Ethernet networks (8-core), two cable types are offered to suit the different types of application. In general, the listed Industrial Ethernet FC cables IE FC Cable 4 x 2 must be used. For further information on network configuration, see the TP and fiber-optic network manual. UL approvals Two cable versions are offered with appropriate UL approvals for laying in cable bundles and cable racks according to the specifications of NEC (National Electrical Code) Article 800/725.



■ Design The FastConnect (FC) Industrial Ethernet cables IE FC Cable 4 x 2 are designed with radial symmetry and therefore allow the use of the FC Stripping Tool The IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet can then be connected quickly and easily using insulation displacement without the need for special tools.

■ Integration

2

SCALANCE X-400

S7-300 IE TP Cord

Cable types

The bus cables are supplied by the meter with meter marks printed on them.

IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Insert 2FE


2 x 100 Mbit/s connection

PC IE TP Cord

FastConnect With the help of Industrial Ethernet FastConnect Stripping Tool, it is possible to strip the outer sheath and shield of Industrial Ethernet FastConnect cables 4 x 2 to the right length in one step. This allows the IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet to be attached quickly and easily to the Industrial Ethernet FC Cable 4 x 2.

IE FC Standard Cable 4x2


Cable routing During storage, transport and cable laying, keep both ends sealed with a shrink-on cap; comply with the permissible bending radii and tensile load.

IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Insert 1GE

G_IK10_XX_10086

Installation instructions

ET 200S IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Insert 1GE

System configuration with IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet 100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s

SCALANCE X-400

24 V DC IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Power Insert

IE Hybrid cable connector

IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0,34 SCALANCE W788-1PRO

G_IK10_XX_10087

IE FC Standard Cable GP 4 x 2: Standard bus cable with rigid cores specially designed for fast assembly with appropriate UL approvals (general purpose) for laying in cable bundles and on cable racks according to the specifications of the NEC (National Electrical Code) Article 800/725.

System configuration with SCALANCE W


2/39



2


■ Ordering data

Cable type

IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 4 x 2

Application areas

Universal applications

Cable specification

Cat6

Electrical data (at 20 °C) Wave attenuation • at 10 MHz • at 100 MHz • at 250 MHz

6 dB/100 m 19.5 dB/100 m 33 dB/100 m

Characteristic impedance • at 1 ... 250 MHz

100 Ω ± 15 Ω

Near-end cross-talk attenuation • at 1 ... 250 MHz

≥ 38.3 dB/100 m


<10 mΩ/m

Loop resistance

118 Ω/km


5000 MΩ x km

Range • With IE FC RJ45 Plug, max. • With IE FC Outlet RJ45, max. Mechanical data

Order No.

IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 4x2 8-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet for universal applications; with UL approval; sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

6XV1 870-2E

IE FC stripping tool Preadjusted stripping tool for fast stripping of Industrial Ethernet FC cables 4 x 2

6GK1 901-1GA00

IE FC Blade Cassettes (5 mm) Replacement blade cassette for the Industrial Ethernet stripping tool, for use with IE FC RJ45 Plugs and IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet, 5 units

6GK1 901-1GB01

IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet FastConnect RJ45 Outlet for Industrial Ethernet with interface for a replaceable insert; • without the replaceable insert • with a replaceable insert for 2 x 100 Mbit/s interface • with a replaceable insert for 1 x 1000 Mbit/s interface • with a replaceable insert for 1 x 24 V DC and 1 x 100 Mbit/s interface

6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA0 6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA1 6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA2


SF/UTP 4x2xAWG22

Cable diameter

9.6 mm +/- 0.3

Inner conductor diameter

0.64 mm, AWG22 (solid conductor)

Core insulation

PE

Inner sheath

PVC dia. 3.9 mm

Sheath

PVC, green


–40 ºC … +70 ºC –40 ºC … +70 ºC –20 ºC … +60 ºC


80 mm 55 mm

Bending cycles

–


180 N

Weight

115 kg/km

Halogen-free

No

Manual for TP and fiber-optic networks Paper version; network architecture, components, configurations, installation guidelines

Behavior in fire

IEC 60332-1

• German

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0

Oil resistance

Limited resistance

• English

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1

UL approval

CMG, sun res, oil res

6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0


–

UV-resistant

No

FastConnect cable installation

Yes

Silicone-free

Yes

IE Manual Collection Electronic manuals for communication systems, communication protocols and communication products; on CD-ROM; German/English

2/40


6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA3

IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Insert 2FE Replaceable insert for FC Modular Outlet Base; 2 x RJ45 for 2 x 100 Mbit/s interfaces; 1 pack = 4 pieces

6GK1 901-1BK00-0AA1

IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Insert 1GE Replaceable insert for FC Modular Outlet Base; 1 x RJ45 for 1 x 1000 Mbit/s interface; 1 pack = 4 pieces

6GK1 901-1BK00-0AA2


Passive Network Components IE Hybrid Cable

■ Overview

■ Application The IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 and the IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet with Power Insert can be used to supply remote stations (e.g. Access Points SCALANCE W) simultaneously with data (10/100 Mbit/s) and power. Installation costs can be considerably reduced since data and power are transmitted via a common cable. A maximum of 80 m and additional 6 m of patch cable can be covered between the IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet and the Access Point SCALANCE W.

SCALANCE X-400

24 V DC

• Industry-standard Industrial Ethernet hybrid cable for transmitting data (10/100 Mbit) and power (24 V/400 mA) • The IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 contains: - Industrial Ethernet cable 2 x 2 Cat5e, shielded as twisted quad (stranded, 4-core) - four power cores 0.34 mm2 (stranded)

IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Power Insert


■ Benefits IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0,34 G_IK10_XX_10087

• Simple installation thanks to insulation displacement connections in IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet and hybrid connectors at Access Point SCALANCE W • Reduced installation cost since remote stations (e.g. SCALANCE W) are supplied via one single line • Halogen-free cables for universal use in the industrial and office areas • Rugged, UV resistant industrial cable with UL approval

SCALANCE W788-1PRO

Network structure including IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet and Power Insert for supplying Access Points SCALANCE W

■ Design Rugged, halogen-free Ethernet hybrid cable with four shielded, flexible data cores (AWG22, twisted quad) and four power cores (0.34 mm2) for transmitting data and power. The IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 is available in customized lengths.


2/41

2


Passive Network Components IE Hybrid Cable

2

■ Technical specifications Cable type

1)

■ Ordering data IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34

Application areas Cable specification • Data cores • Power cores

Cat5e AWG22

Electrical data (at 20 °C) typ. 7.5 dB/100 m typ. 26 dB/100 m

Characteristic impedance • at 1 ... 100 MHz

100 Ω ± 15 Ω typ. ≥ 35.3 dB/100 m


≤ 10 mΩ/m

Loop resistance

≤ 120 Ω/km


≥ 500 MΩ km

Range • With IE FC RJ45 plug, max. • With IE FC Outlet RJ45, max. Mechanical data Cable type (standard designation)

2YH (ST) C 2x2x0.75/1.5LI LIH H 2x2x0.34/1.6GN FRNC

Cable length

80 m + 6 m IE TP cord

Cable diameter • Data cores • Power cores

8.5 mm 0.76 mm 0.76 mm, stranded

Core insulation

PE

Inner sheath

FRNC

Sheath • Data cores • Power cores

FRNC green black/brown


-25 ºC … +70 ºC -25 ºC … +70 ºC -25 ºC … +50 ºC


10 x ∅ 5x∅

Bending cycles

–


≤ 260 N

Weight

105 kg/km

Halogen-free

Yes

Behavior in fire

according to IEC 60332-1

Oil resistance

Limited resistance

UL approval

CMG/PLTC


Yes

UV-resistant

Yes


No

Silicone-free

Yes

1) Electrical characteristics at 20 ºC, tests to DIN 0472

2/42


6XV1 870-2J

Additional components

Wave attenuation • at 10 MHz • at 100 MHz

Near-end cross-talk attenuation • at 1 ... 100 MHz

IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0,34 Flexible cable, 4 x Cu Cat 5E, shielded (AWG22) and 4 x Cu (0.34 mm2) with IE FC RJ45 modular outlet and power insert and IP67 hybrid plug connector; sold by the meter

Order No.

IE TP Cord RJ45/RJ45 TP cable 4 x 2 with 2 RJ45 plugs • 0.5 m

6XV1 870-3QE50

•1m

6XV1 870-3QH10

•2m

6XV1 870-3QH20

•6m

6XV1 870-3QH60

• 10 m

6XV1 870-3QN10

IE TP XP Cord RJ45/RJ45 Twisted TP cable 4 x 2 with 2 RJ45 plugs • 0.5 m

6XV1 870-3RE50

•1m

6XV1 870-3RH10

•2m

6XV1 870-3RH20

•6m

6XV1 870-3RH60

• 10 m

6XV1 870-3RN10

IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet FastConnect RJ45 Outlet for Industrial Ethernet with interface for a replaceable insert; • With 2FE insert; replaceable insert for 2 x 100 Mbit/s interfaces

6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA1

• With 1GE insert; replaceable insert for 1 x 1000 Mbit/s interfaces

6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA2

• With power insert; replaceable insert for 1 x 24 V DC and 1 x 100 Mbit/s interface

6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA3

IP67 Hybrid Connector Connector for connecting SCALANCE W-700 to Industrial Ethernet and Power over Ethernet (PoE), with assembly instructions, 1 item

09 45 125 1300.00 Order directly from: HARTING Deutschland GmbH & Co. KG P.O. Box 24-51 D-32381 Minden Tel. +49 571-8896-0 Fax. +49 571-8896-354 Email: [email protected] Internet: http://www.HARTING.com

Manual for IE TP and fiber-optic networks Paper version Network architecture, components, configurations, installation guidelines • German

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1

SIMATIC NET Manual Collection Electronic manuals for communication systems, communication protocols and communication products; on CD-ROM German/English

6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0


Passive Network Components Energy Cables

■ Overview

■ Benefits

2

• Flexible application possibilities thanks to rugged cable design • Silicon-free, therefore particularly suitable for use in the automotive industry (e.g. on paint shop conveyors)

■ Application For the construction of PROFINET/PROFIBUS networks, different cable types are offered to suit the different types of application. The listed power cables should always be used. They are used for devices with degree of protection IP65/67 to connect the signaling contact or 24-V supply of the SCALANCE X and SCALANCE W components (power cable 2x0.75) and for the power supply (power cable 5x1.5 for ET 200). UL approvals • Different versions (5-core, 2-core) for different fields of application • Rugged cable design for installation in industrial applications • UL approvals • Easy length measurement thanks to printed meter markings

As a result of appropriate UL styles, the cables can be used worldwide.

■ Design Rugged 2-core or 5-core cable with circular cross-section for connection of signaling contact and power supply to IP65/67 components in industrial areas. Cable types The following cables with industrial capability are available for connection of the power supply and signaling contact: • Power cable 2 x 0.75; power cable for connection of signaling contact and 24 V supply voltage to SCALANCE X and SCALANCE W components • Power cable 5 x 1.5; power cable for connection of 24 V power supply of ET 200 using 7/8" plug connectors


2/43



2


Power cable 2 x 0.75

Power cable 5 x 1.5

Application areas

Connection of signaling contact and 24-V power supply to SCALANCE X and SCALANCE W

Power supply of ET 200 modules with 7/8" power port

Operating voltage (rms value)

600 V

600 V

Power cores (stranded wires) diameter

0.75 mm2

1.5 mm2

• Current carrying capability of the power cores

6A

16 A

• Sheath color

Brown/blue

Black


L-YY2x1x0.75GR

L-Y11Y-JZ 5x1x1.5 GR

Sheath • Material

PVC

PUR

• Diameter

7.4 +/- 0.3

10.5 + / -0.3

• Color

Gray

Gray


-20 ºC … +80 ºC

-40 ºC … +80 ºC


-20 ºC … +80 ºC

-40 ºC … +80 ºC


-20 ºC … +80 ºC

-40 ºC … +80 ºC

Bending radius • Single bend

2.5 x dia.

2.5 x dia.

• Multiple bends

6 x dia.

6 x dia.


≤ 100 N

≤ 500 N

Weight

approx. 70 kg/km

approx. 149 kg/km

Halogen-free

No

No

Behavior in fire


Flame-retardant IEC 60332-1


Yes

Yes


Yes

No

Resistance to mineral oils and grease

Limited resistance

Highly resistant

UV-resistant

Yes

No

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes


No

No

1) Electrical characteristics at 20 ºC, tests according to DIN 47 250 Part 4 or DIN VDE 0472

2/44




■ Ordering data

Order No.

Power cable 2 x 0.75 Power cable with trailing capability with 2 copper cores (0.75 mm2) for connecting to M12 plug-in connector; sold by the meter; max. 1000 m, minimum order quantity 20 m

6XV1812-8A

Power cable 5 x 1.5 Power cable with trailing capability with 5 copper cores (1.5 mm2) for connecting to 7/8" plug-in connector; sold by the meter; max. 1000 m; minimum order quantity 20 m

6XV1 830-8AH10


2

Cable routing: During storage, transportation and cable laying, keep both ends sealed with a shrink-on cap. Comply with the permissible bending radii and tensile load! Note: Additional components of the SIMATIC NET wiring range can be ordered from your local contact person. For technical advice contact: J. Hertlein, A&D SE PS Tel.: +49(0)911/750 44 65 Fax. +49(0)911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]

Additional components 7/8" plug-in connector Plug with axial cable outlet for field assembly for ET 200, 5-core, plastic enclosure, 1 pack = 5 items • Male pins

6GK1 905-0FA00

• Socket insert

6GK1 905-0FB00

Signaling Contact M12 Cable Connector PRO Socket for connection of SCALANCE X208PRO for signaling contact; 5-pole, B-coded, with assembly instructions; 3 items

6GK1908-0DC10-6AA3

Power M12 Cable Connector PRO Socket for connection of SCALANCE W-700 for 24 V DC supply voltage; 4-pole, A-coded, with assembly instructions, 3 items

6GK1 907-0DC10-6AA3

Power M12 Plug PRO Plug for connection to PS791-1PRO power supply for 24 V DC supply voltage; 4-pole, A-coded, with assembly instructions, 3 items

6GK1 907-0DB10-6AA3


6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

7/8" Power T-Tap PRO Power T-piece for ET 200 with two 7/8" socket inserts and one 7/8" pin insert 1 pack = 5 items

6GK1 905-0FC00


2/45


Passive Network Components IE TP Cord

2

■ Overview

■ Benefits

• Easy connection of data terminals with an RJ45 connection to the Industrial Ethernet FC cabling system with interference immunity (10/100/1000 Mbit/s) • Fast, error-free start-up thanks to preassembled, factorytested patch cables • Easy cable installation thanks to small cable diameter • Silicon-free, therefore suitable for use in the automotive industry (e.g. on paint shop conveyors) • Color-coded RJ45 plug to distinguish between twisted and untwisted cables - Twisted: RJ45 plug red on both sides - Not twisted: RJ45 plug green on both sides

• Patch cable, available as preassembled cables (max. length 10 m) • With 2 x 2 cores for 10/100 Mbit/s and 4 x 2 cores for 10/100/1000 Mbit/s Ethernet • Small cable diameter • Category Cat5e (2 x 2) and Cat6 (4 x 2) of the international cabling standards ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173

2/46




■ Application

2

Network component

NC

S7-400 S7-300

Prepared IE TP Cord 2x2

PC

Plug

Network component

Plug

Sub-D-9 RJ45

NC Sub-D-9 RJ45

IE TP Cord RJ45/RJ45 IE TP Cord 9/RJ45 IE TP Cord 9-45/RJ45 IE TP Cord RJ45/15

Prepared crossed IE TP Cord 2x2

IE TP XP Cord RJ45/RJ45 IE TP XP Cord 9/RJ45 IE TP XP Cord 9-45/RJ45 IE TP XP Cord 9/9

Sub-D-15 RJ45

NC Sub-D-9 RJ45

S7-400 S7-300

Plug

Network component

Plug

S7-400 S7-300

Prepared crossed IE TP Cord 2x2

PC Sub-D-15 RJ45

IE TP XP Cord RJ45/RJ45 IE TP XP Cord RJ45/15 IE TP XP Standard Cable 15/15

Sub-D-15 RJ45

Plug G_IK10_XX_10109

Plug

IE TP Cord can be used to directly connect individual components (10/100 Mbit/s)

Network component

NC

prepared IE TP Cord 4x2

e.g. SCALANCE X-400

NC

Network component

e.g. SCALANCE X-400

G_IK10_XX_10092

IE TP Cord RJ45/RJ45

If components not supporting Autocrossing are used it is required to use IE TP XP Cord between two network components or two terminals.

IE TP Cord RJ45/RJ45 can be used to directly connect individual components (10/100/1000 Mbit/s)


2/47



2

■ Design

■ Function

• 2 x 2 cores for 10/100 Mbit/s data transmission rate; 4 x 2 cores for 10/100/1000 Mbit/s data transmission rate • Two cores with two dummy elements twisted into a pair. • Each pair is encased in plastic film and shielded with a plastic-clad aluminum foil • Outer woven shield around all pairs comprising tinned copper wires • Plastic sheath (PVC) IE TP Cord is available as a pre-assembled cable in the following versions: • IE TP Cord RJ45/RJ45 with 2 x RJ45 plugs • IE TP XP Cord RJ45/RJ45 with 2 x RJ45 plugs, send and receive cables are twisted. • IE TP Cord 9/RJ45 with one 9-pole Sub-D connector and one RJ45 connector • IE TP XP Cord 9/RJ45 with one RJ45 connector and one 9-pole Sub-D connector, send and receive cable are twisted • IE TP Cord 9-45/RJ45 with one RJ45 connector and one 9-pole Sub-D connector, 45° cable outlet • IE TP XP Cord 9-45/RJ45 with one RJ45 connector and one 9-pole Sub-D connector, 45° cable outlet; send and receive cable are twisted • IE TP XP Cord 9/9 with two 9-pole Sub-D connectors, send and receive cable are twisted. • IE TP Cord RJ45/15 with one RJ45 connector and one 15-pole Sub-D connector; this is used to directly connect data terminals with ITP interfaces to network components with an RJ45 interface. • IE TP XP Cord RJ45/15 with one RJ45 connector and one 15-pole Sub-D connector, twisted send and receive cable; used for direct connection of a data terminal with 15-pole Sub-D connector to a data terminal with RJ45 plug. • IE TP Converter Cord 15/RJ45 with a 15-pole Sub-D socket with slide locking and an RJ45 plug. A retaining clip clamps it in place. IE TP Converter Cord 15/RJ45 2 x 2 is used to connect data terminals with an RJ45 interface to the ITP cabling system, e.g. over the ITP Standard 9/15 cable.

2/48


The flexibility of the cable ensures easy installation, for example in a control cabinet, or to connect equipment in a control room. The maximum length of an IE TP Cord is 10 m. Adapter cables are used to connect devices with an ITP interface to devices with an RJ45 interface. IE TP Converter Cord 15/RJ45 is used to convert an ITP interface of a data terminal to the RJ45 interface.




IE TP Cord 2 x 2


2

Electrical data (at 20 °C) Attenuation • at 10 MHz

≤ 9 dB/100 m

8,6 dB/100 m

• at 100 MHz

≤ 28.5 dB/100 m

28 dB/100 m

• at 300 MHz

≤ 49.5 dB/100 m

50,1 dB/100 m

• at 600 MHz

75 dB/100 m

73,5 dB/100m

• at 1 to 100 MHz

100 Ω ± 15 Ω

100 Ω ± 15 Ω

• at 10 to 600 MHz

100 Ω ± 6 Ω

100 Ω ± 10 Ω

• at 10 MHz

80 dB

80 dB

• at 100 MHz

72.5 dB

72,4 dB

• at 300 MHz

65 dB

65,3 dB

• at 600 MHz

61 dB

60,8 dB

• at 10 MHz

≤ 10 mΩ/m

≤ 10 mΩ/m

Loop resistance

300 Ω/km

290 Ω/km

Characteristic impedance

Near-end cross-talk attenuation

Coupling resistance

Mechanical data Cable type (standard designation)

LI 02YSCY 2x2x0.15/0.98 PIMF ICCS GN

LI02YSCH 4x2x0.15 PIMF GN FRNC

Internal conductor diameter (copper)

0.5 mm stranded copper

0.5 mm

Outer diameter

3.7 x 5.8 ± 0.2 mm

6.2 ± 0.3 mm

Core diameter (AWG26)

0.98 mm

1,0 mm

• Operating temperature

-40 °C ... +70 °C

-25 °C ... +70 °C


-40 °C ... +70 °C

-40 °C ... +70 °C


0 °C ... +50 °C

0 °C ... +50 °C

Perm. ambient conditions

Permissible bending radius • Multiple bends

≥ 90 mm

≥ 45 mm

• Single bend

≥ 40 mm

≥ 30 mm

Weight

approx. 33 kg/km

approx. 50 kg/km

Halogen-free

no

yes

Behavior in fire

Flame-retardant to DIN VDE 0472, Part 804, Test Type B, IEC 60332-1

Flame-retardant to DIN VDE 0472, Part 804, Test Type B, IEC 60332-1

Oil resistance

Conditionally resistant to greases and oils

Conditionally resistant to greases and oils

Silicone-free

yes

yes


2/49



2

■ Ordering data

Order No.

IE TP Cord RJ45/RJ45 TP cable 4 x 2 with 2 RJ45 plugs • 0.5 m •1m •2m •6m • 10 m

6XV1 870-3QE50 6XV1 870-3QH10 6XV1 870-3QH20 6XV1 870-3QH60 6XV1 870-3QN10

IE TP XP Cord RJ45/RJ45 Twisted TP cable 4 x 2 with 2 RJ45 plugs • 0.5 m •1m •2m •6m • 10 m

6XV1 870-3RE50 6XV1 870-3RH10 6XV1 870-3RH20 6XV1 870-3RH60 6XV1 870-3RN10

IE TP Cord 9/RJ45 TP cable 2 x 2 with one 9-pole Sub D connector and one RJ45 connector • 0.5 m •1m •2m •6m • 10 m IE TP XP Cord 9/RJ45 Twisted TP cable 2 x 2 with one 9-pole Sub D connector and one RJ45 connector • 0.5 m •1m •2m •6m • 10 m IE TP Cord 9-45/RJ45 TP cable 2 x 2 with one RJ45 connector and one Sub D connector with 45° cable outlet (not for OSM/ESM) •1m IE TP XP Cord 9-45/RJ45 Twisted TP cable with one RJ45 connector and one Sub D connector with 45° cable outlet (not for OSM/ESM) •1m IE TP XP Cord 9/9 Twisted TP cable 2 x 2 for direct connection of two Industrial Ethernet components with an ITP interface with two 9-pole Sub D connectors •1m IE TP Cord RJ45/15 TP cable 2 x 2 with one 15-pole Sub D connector and one RJ45 connector • 0.5 m •1m •2m •6m • 10 m

2/50


6XV1 850-2JE50 6XV1 850-2JH10 6XV1 850-2JH20 6XV1 850-2JH60 6XV1 850-2JN10

6XV1 850-2ME50 6XV1 850-2MH10 6XV1 850-2MH20 6XV1 850-2MH60 6XV1 850-2MN10

6XV1 850-2NH10

6XV1 850-2PH10

Order No. IE TP XP Cord RJ45/15 Twisted TP cable 2 x 2 with one 15-pole Sub D connector and one RJ45 connector • 0.5 m •1m •2m •6m • 10 m

6XV1 850-2SE50 6XV1 850-2SH10 6XV1 850-2SH20 6XV1 850-2SH60 6XV1 850-2SN10

IE TP Converter Cord 15/RJ45 TP connecting cable 2 x 2 for connecting data terminals with RJ45 interfaces to the ITP cabling system; with a 15-pole Sub D socket with slide locking and an RJ45 connector. • 0.5 m •1m

6XV1 850-2EE50 6XV1 850-2EH20

IE FC Outlet RJ45 For connection Industrial Ethernet FC cables and TP Cords; graded prices from 10 and 50 units IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet FastConnect RJ45 Outlet for Industrial Ethernet with interface for a replaceable insert; • With 2FE insert; replaceable insert for 2 x 100 Mbit/s interfaces • With 1GE insert; replaceable insert for 1 x 1000 Mbit/s interfaces • with power insert; replaceable insert for 1 x 24 V DC and 1 x 100 Mbit/s interface Manual for IE TP and fiber-optic networks Paper version network architecture, components, configurations, mounting guidelines • German • English SIMATIC NET Manual Collection Electronic manuals for communication systems, communication protocols and communication products on CD-ROM German/English

6GK1 901-1FC00 0AA0

6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA1

6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA2

6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA3

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0 6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1 6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

■ More information 6XV1 850-2RH10

6XV1 850-2LE50 6XV1 850-2LH10 6XV1 850-2LH20 6XV1 850-2LH60 6XV1 850-2LN10

Additional components of the SIMATIC NET wiring range can be ordered from your local contact person. For technical advice contact: J. Hertlein, A&D SE PS Tel.: +49(0)911/750 44 65 Fax: +49(0)911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]


Passive Network Components IE FC Outlet RJ45

■ Overview

■ Benefits

2

• Easy connection of network components or data terminals to the Industrial Ethernet FC cabling system with interference immunity. • Time-saving, error-free installation thanks to FC cables and preassembled TP Cords (10/100 Mbit/s). • Resistant to interference thanks to rugged metal casing and flexible mounting possibilities (standard rail mounting, screw fixing) • Reliable shield contact and strain relief thanks to bolt-on cover • Preventing mistakes with the help of color markings

■ Application • • • • •

Easy installation of structured Twisted Pair cabling. Extremely fast installation thanks to insulation displacement. Rugged solid metal module certified to Category 5. Reliable shield contact and strain relief thanks to bolt-on cover Preventing mistakes with the help of color markings

The IE FC Outlet RJ45 is used as a transition from the rugged Industrial Ethernet FC cables used in the industrial environment to prefabricated TP Cord cables (10/100 Mbit/s) using an RJ45 socket. By connecting several IE FC Outlet RJ45 devices in series, a patch field can be constructed with the required connection density (e.g. 16 outlets over 19“ width).


2/51



■ Application (continued) Network component e.g. OSM

Plug

Plug

NC

Sub-D-9 RJ45

IE FC Outlet RJ45

IE FC TP Cable 2x2

IE TP Cord 2x2

PC

Sub-D-15 RJ45

IE TP Cord 2x2

IE FC Standard Cable GP 2x2 (Type A) IE FC Flexible Cable GP 2x2 (Type B) IE FC Trailing Cable GP 2x2 (Type C) IE FC Torsion Cable 2x2 (Type C) IE FC Trailing Cable 2x2 (Type C) IE FC Marine Cable 2x2 (Type B)

IE TP Cord 9/RJ45 IE TP Cord 9-45/RJ45

IE TP Cord RJ45/15

Network component

Plug

NC

Sub-D-9 RJ45

S7-300

Plug Sub-D-15 RJ45

IE TP Cord RJ45/15

IE FC TP Cable 2x2

S7-300

IE TP Cord can be used for patch technology with IE FC Outlet RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s)

PC

IE TP Cord 2x2


If components are used that do not support autocrossing, an IE TP XP cord must be used between two network components or two terminal units.



IE FC Outlet RJ45 IE TP Cord 2x2

Sub-D-9 RJ45

IE TP Cord 2x2

IE FC TP Cable 2x2



Plug

NC

IE FC Outlet RJ45

IE TP Cord 2x2

2/52

S7-400

Plug Sub-D-15 RJ45

IE TP Cord RJ45/15

G_IK10_XX_10110

2



■ Design

■ Function

The IE FC Outlet RJ45 has a rugged metal housing and satisfies Category 5 of the international cable standard ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173. It is suitable both for mounting on rails and wall mounting by means of four through holes. The Outlet RJ45 can also be mounted behind a metal plate with a cutout (e.g. in a control cabinet).

The Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ45 is directly connected to the Industrial Ethernet FC cable 2 x 2. Prefabricated RJ45 patch cables (10/100 Mbit/s) are available for the connection between the IE Outlet RJ45 and a network component or data terminal.

The Outlet RJ45 has the following connections • 4 insulation-piercing contacts for connecting the Industrial Ethernet FC cable 2 x 2 (contacts are color coded) • RJ45 socket with dust protection cap for connecting different TP Cord cables (10/100 Mbit/s).

Cabinet

Cabinet

ESM

ESM TP80

Terminal device IE TP Cord Cabinet IE FC Outlet RJ45

IE FC Outlet RJ45

Terminal device


G_IK10_XX_10112

IE FC Outlet RJ45 IE FC Standard Cable 2x2

System configuration with IE FC Outlet RJ45


2/53

2



■ Integration Building

Cabinet

Cabinet

S7-400 with CP 443-1

S7-300 with CP 343-1

IE FC TP Standard Cable 2x2

Cabinet

Building low EMC interferences

PC with CP 1613 or CP 1616

OSM ITP62 Switch SCALANCE X414-3E

FO Building very strong EMC interferences e.g. by electro welding

PG IE TP Cord RJ45/RJ45 Server IE FC Outlet RJ45

Cabinet

Cabinet

S7-400 with CP 443-1

OSM ITP62 IE FC Standard Cable 2x2

IE TP Cord

IE FC Outlet RJ45

Cabinet

Workstation


IE TP Cord IE FC Standard Cable 2x2

IE TP Cord / IE FC Standard Cable 2x2 IE FC Standard Cable 2x2

Configuration example with ITP, TP and fiber-optic cabling

2/54


S7-300 with CP 343-1

G_IK10_XX_10111

2




■ Ordering data (continued) IE FC Outlet RJ45

Interfaces • Connection of data terminals, network components

RJ45 socket

• Connection of Industrial Ethernet FC cables

4 insulation displacement terminals for all IE Cables 2 x 2

Assembly

DIN rail or wall mounting

Network expansion parameters/ FC cable length • 0 … 90 m

with IE FC Standard Cable GP

• 0 … 75 m

With IE FC Flexible Cable/ IE FC Trailing Cable/ IE FC Marine Cable

• 0 … 45 m

with IE FC Torsion Cable

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature • Storage/transport temperature

-25 °C … +70 °C -40 °C … +70 °C

Construction • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm

31.7 x 107 x 30

• Weight

300 g

IE TP XP Cord 9-45/RJ45 Twisted TP cable with one RJ45 connector and one Sub-D connector with 45° cable outlet (for OSM/ESM only) •1m

6XV1 850-2PH10

IE TP XP Cord 9/9 Twisted TP cable 2 x 2 for direct connection of two Industrial Ethernet components with an ITP interface with two 9-pole Sub-D connectors •1m

6XV1 850-2RH10

IE TP Cord RJ45/15 TP cable 2 x 2 with one 15-pole Sub-D connector and one RJ45 connector • 0.5 m

6XV1 850-2LE50

•1m

6XV1 850-2LH10

•2m

6XV1 850-2LH20

•6m

6XV1 850-2LH60

• 10 m

6XV1 850-2LN10

6XV1 850-2SE50


IP20

Certification

complies with Category 5 of the international cabling standards ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173

IE TP XP Cord RJ45/15 Twisted TP cable 2 x 2 with one 15-pole Sub-D connector and one RJ45 connector • 0.5 m

UL listing

Yes

•1m

6XV1 850-2SH10

•2m

6XV1 850-2SH20

•6m

6XV1 850-2SH60

• 10 m

6XV1 850-2SN10

IE TP Converter Cord 15/RJ45 TP connecting cable 2 x 2 for connecting data terminals with RJ45 interfaces to the ITP cabling system; with a 15-pole Sub-D socket with slide locking and an RJ45 connector. • 0.5 m

6XV1 850-2EE50

•1m

6XV1 850-2EH20

Manual for IE TP and fiber-optic networks Paper version Network architecture, components, configurations, mounting guidelines • German

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1


6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

■ Ordering data IE FC Outlet RJ45 For connection Industrial Ethernet FC cables and TP Cords; graded prices from 10 and 50 pieces IE TP Cord 9/RJ45 TP cable 2 x 2 with one 9-pole Sub-D connector and one RJ45 connector • 0.5 m •1m

Order No. 6GK1 901-1FC00 0AA0

6XV1 850-2JE50 6XV1 850-2JH10

•2m

6XV1 850-2JH20

•6m

6XV1 850-2JH60

• 10 m

6XV1 850-2JN10

IE TP XP Cord 9/RJ45 Twisted TP cable 2 x 2 with one 9-pole Sub-D connector and one RJ45 connector • 0.5 m

6XV1 850-2ME50

•1m

6XV1 850-2MH10

•2m

6XV1 850-2MH20

•6m

6XV1 850-2MH60

• 10 m

6XV1 850-2MN10

IE TP Cord 9-45/RJ45 TP cable 2 x 2 with one RJ45 connector and one Sub-D connector with 45° cable outlet (not for OSM/ESM) •1m

6XV1 850-2NH10

2

Order No.


2/55


Passive Network Components IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet

2

■ Overview

■ Application The 8-core cabling system of SIMATIC NET allows transmission rates of 10/100/1000 Mbit/s for Ethernet and for the serviceindependent cabling from this office environment. Thanks to the 8-core cabling it is now possible to implement 2 Industrial Ethernet connections for Fast Ethernet, but in future it will also be possible to upgrade to a Gigabit Ethernet connection. This implements the transition from 4-core Industrial Ethernet FastConnect TP cabling system to the 8-core Gigabit cabling system. The FC RJ45 Modular Outlet base module can optionally be equipped with three different replaceable inserts, as follows: • IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Insert 2FE with 2 x RJ45 sockets for 100 Mbit/s systems • IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Insert 1GE with 1 x RJ45 socket for 1000 Mbit/s systems • IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Power Insert for SCALANCE W IWLAN system with 1 x 24 V, 1 x RJ45 socket

• Simple connection technology (insulation displacement contacts) for 8-core Industrial Ethernet FC twisted pair installation cables (Cat6) • Safe connection technology thanks to visible connection area • Industry-standard design - robust metal housing - Dust covers • Wall and DIN rail mounting inside or outside control cubicles thanks to IP40 protection • Good electromagnetic shielding and conduction due to metal housing • Integral strain relief for 8-core installation cables • Replaceable inserts for - 2 x Fast Ethernet connection IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Insert 2FE - 1 x Gigabit Ethernet connection IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Insert 1GE - 1 x Fast Ethernet connection, 1 x DC 24 V connection IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Power Insert

By replacing the IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Insert, it is possible to switch from network structures that are operated at transmission rates of 100 Mbit/s to structures with rates of 1000 Mbit/s. Replacement of the cabling is not necessary (permanent cabling). Like the 4-wire cabling system, the Gigabit cabling system with the IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet also takes the conditions in the field of industrial automation into account. No special tools are required for the assembly; the same FC stripping tool is used as for the 4-wire system. 8-wire FC installations cables are used for the cabling (AWG 22): • IE FC Standard Cable 4 x 2; for fixed routing as standard type for the IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Inserts 2FE and 1GE • IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 for the IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet with Power Insert Max. distance which can be covered between two IE FC Modular Outlets using IE FC Standard Cable is 90 m; the total length of the patch cords to the terminal units at each end must not exceed 10 m.

■ Benefits

• Simple and fault-free assembly by means of integrated insulation displacement contacts with color coding • Time-saving and fault-free installation with 8-core Industrial Ethernet FC TP installation cables • Universal application through replaceable inserts (use for 10/100 Mbit/s interfaces, one 1000 Mbit/s interface or one DC 24 V voltage supply and 100 Mbit/s interface) • Large temperature range (-20 °C to +70 °C) • Reliable shield contact and strain relief thanks to bolt-on cover • Security of investment, as 100 Mbit/s networks can be upgraded without difficulty to a 1000 Mbit/s network by replacing the insert

2/56

Thus it is possible not only to implement individual device connections, but also 100 Mbit/s dual connections.




■ Application examples

2

Energy Cable 2x0,75 S7-400 PC S7-300

FE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Power Insert

IP67 Hybrid cable connector

IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 and 4x0,34 S7-200

IE TP Cord 2x2 SCALANCE W-700

G_IK10_XX_10035

NC IE TP Cord can be used with IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet with Power Insert (10/100 Mbit/s)

S7-400

S7-400 PC

PC

S7-300

S7-300

S7-200

S7-200

NC

NC

IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet IE TP Cord 2x2

S7-400 S7-300

IE FC Cable 4x2

Insert 2FE

IE TP Cord 2x2

S7-400

Insert 2FE

PC

PC

S7-300

S7-300 IE FC Standard Cable GP 4x2 S7-200

NC

NC G_IK10_XX_10036

S7-200


IE TP Cord can be used with IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet with Insert 2FE (10/100 Mbit/s)


2/57



■ Application examples (continued) S7-400 PC S7-300


NC

IE TP Cord 2x2

IE TP Cord 2x2

IE FC TP Cable 4x2

Insert 2FE

S7-200

S7-400

Insert 2FE

PC IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 4x2

G_IK10_XX_10038

S7-300

S7-200


IE TP Cord can be used for patch technology with IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet with Insert 2FE (10/100 Mbit/s)

SCALANCE X-400 PC


IE TP Cord

IE FC TP Cable 4x2

Insert 1GE


IE TP Cord

Insert 1GE

IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 4x2



IE TP Cord RJ45/RJ45 can be used for patch technology with IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet with Insert 1GE (10/100/1000 Mbit/s)

2/58


G_IK10_XX_10091

2



■ Design IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet (base modules) • Robust metal housing, complies with Category 6 of the international cabling standards ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173 • Suitable both for DIN rail and wall mounting • Thanks to its high degree of protection IP40, it can be mounted directly on site

Ports: • 8 insulation displacement contacts for connection of the 8-core Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables • Interface for insertion of a replaceable insert with one or two RJ45 sockets or one RJ45 socket and one terminal for 24 V DC voltage supply (outlet insert, outlet power insert).

Mounting instructions


2/59

2



■ Function The IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet is connected directly to the 8-core Industrial Ethernet FC cables 4 x 2. Prefabricated RJ45 patch cables (TP cord) are available for the connection between outlet and network component or data terminal. These conform with Cat6 of the international cabling standards. When housing is opened, colored markings on the contact element simplify connection of the individual wires to the insulation displacement contacts.

SCALANCE X-400

In order to supply remote stations with power and data, the IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet with Power Insert is connected to the IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34. A maximum of 80 m can be covered between the Outlet and the IP67 Hybrid Connector. The connection between Outlet and data terminal can be established using a patch cable with a maximum length of 6 m.

SCALANCE X-400

S7-400 IE TP Cord

24 V DC

IE FC Outlet RJ45



IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Power Insert

IE FC Outlet RJ45

100 Mbit/s connection


PC IE TP Cord


System configuration with IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet and FC Outlet RJ45

SCALANCE X-400

S7-300 IE TP Cord

ET 200S IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Insert 1GE




PC IE TP Cord




System configuration with IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet 100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s

2/60


SCALANCE W788-1PRO

System configuration with SCALANCE W-700

G_IK10_XX_10087


G_IK10_XX_10085

1000 Mbit/s connection

IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0,34

G_IK10_XX_10086

2




■ Ordering data

Interfaces • Connection of data terminals, network components - FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Insert 2FE - FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Insert 2FE - FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Power Insert • Connection of Industrial Ethernet FC cables

2 x RJ45 sockets (10/100 Mbit/s) 1 x RJ45 socket (10/100/1000 Mbit/s) 1 x RJ45 socket (10/100 Mbit/s) 1 x 24 V DC terminal 8 integral insulation displacement contacts

Supply voltage • FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Power Insert

DC 19 V to DC 57 V

Installation

DIN rail or wall mounting


-20 °C ... +70 °C

• Storage/transport temperature

-40 °C ... +80 °C

• Relative humidity during operation < 95% Construction • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm

50 x 115.25 x 58.95

• Weight

approx. 450 g


IP40

Certification

complies with Category 6 of the international cabling standards ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173

UL listing

yes

IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet FastConnect RJ45 Outlet for Industrial Ethernet with interface for a replaceable insert; • without replaceable insert • With 2FE insert; replaceable insert for 2 x 100 Mbit/s interfaces • With 1GE insert; replaceable insert for 1 x 1000 Mbit/s interfaces • with power insert; replaceable insert for 1 x 24 V DC and 1 x 100 Mbit/s interface

2

Order No.

6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA0 6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA1

6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA2

6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA3

IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Insert 2FE Replaceable insert for FC Modular Outlet Base; 2 x RJ45 for 2 x 100 Mbit/s interfaces; 1 pack = 4 pieces

6GK1 901-1BK00-0AA1

IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Insert 1GE Replaceable insert for FC Modular Outlet Base; 1 x RJ45 for 1 x 1000 Mbit/s interface; 1 pack = 4 pieces

6GK1 901-1BK00-0AA2

IE FC Standard Cable 4 x 2 8-core FastConnect cable (Cat6) for permanent wiring; sold by the meter

6XV1 870-2E

IE Hybrid Cable 2 x 2 + 4 x 0.34 Flexible cable, 4 x Cu Cat5, shielded (0.75 mm) and 4 x Cu (0.34 mm2) with IE FC Modular Outlet and power insert and IP67 hybrid plug connector; sold by the meter; up to 1000 m; minimum order 20 m

6XV1870-2J

Energy Cable 2-wire power cable; stranded wire, 2 x 0.75 mm2, can be trailed, sold by the meter; up to 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

6XV1812-8A

IE TP Cord 8-core patch cable for connection between FC Modular Outlet base modules and data terminal; available in different lengths

see TP Cord


6GK1 901-1GA00


2/61



Industrial Twisted Pair – Cables/connectors

2

■ Overview

Industrial Twisted Pair cable • 2 x 2 cores. • Two cores with two dummy elements twisted into a pair. • Each pair is encased in plastic film and shielded with two aluminum-clad plastic films • Outer braided shield around all pairs made of tinned copper wire. • Plastic sheath (PVC).

Industrial Twisted Pair cable • For constructing Industrial Twisted Pair (ITP) networks • Double cable shield for industrial use • Easy to lay • Low-cost connection of data terminals • Exceeds Category 5 of the international cabling standards ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173 • Available as standard type and as halogen-free version (FRNC) Industrial Twisted Pair connector • Connector is assembled on site with screw terminals without the need for special tools • Data transfer is noise resistant thanks to - rugged metal connector - system-wide grounding concept • Fast, error-free installation using factory-tested preassembled cables.

■ Benefits

Data transfer is noise resistant thanks to • double shielding with plastic and braided shield • System-wide grounding concept • Silicon-free, therefore suitable for use in the automotive industry (e.g. on paint shop conveyors) • Available as standard and hologen-free version

■ Design

2/62


The ITP Cable is available as a pre-assembled cable in the following versions: • ITP Cable 9/15 with a 9-pole and a 15-pole connector. It is used to directly connect data terminals with an ITP interface to Industrial Ethernet network components with an ITP interface. • ITP XP Standard Cable 9/9 with two 9-pole connectors. It is twisted and used to directly connect two Industrial Ethernet network components with ITP interfaces. • ITP XP Standard Cable 15/15 with two 15-pole connectors. It is twisted and used to directly connect two data terminals with ITP interfaces. Network components

Data terminal

Network components

ITP XP 9/9

ITP 9/15

Data terminal

ITP 9/15

ITP XP 15/15

Possible applications for pre-assembled ITP cables

Industrial Twisted Pair connector (9-pole) • Metal Sub D connector • Vertical outgoing cable • For connecting the 2 x 2-core installation cable to OSM or ESM • Easy assembly using a screwdriver. Industrial Twisted Pair connector (15-pole) • Metal Sub-D connector • Variable cable outlet • For connecting the 2 x 2-core installation cable to a data terminal • Internal plug-in jumper for automatic switchover from AUI to Twisted Pair operation in SIMATIC NET CPs with integrated Twisted Pair transceiver • Easy assembly using a screwdriver.

■ Function • With their double, particularly dense shield, the industrial twisted pair cables are especially suitable for installation in industrial environments subject to electromagnetic interference, e.g. for linking control cabinets. • An integrated grounding concept can be implemented through the outer shield. • The ITP cable is flame retardant and has a copolymer outer casing FRNC (Flame Retardant Non Corrosive) • The cables considerably exceed Category 5 of the international cabling standard. They can be implemented for up to 300 MHz and are suitable for Fast Ethernet with 100 Mbit/s.





■ Ordering data ITP Standard and FRNC Cable

Electrical data (at 20 °C) Damping • at 10 MHz • at 100 MHz • at 300 MHz

≤ 5.7 dB/100 m ≤ 18.0 dB/100 m ≤ 31.0 dB/100 m

Characteristic impedance • at 1 ... 100 MHz • at 100 ... 300 MHz

100 Ω +/- 15% 100 Ω +45% / -30%

Near-end cross-talk attenuation • at 1 ... 100 MHz • at 1 ... 300 MHz

≥ 80 dB/100 m ≥ 80 dB/100 m

Coupling resistance • at 10 MHz Operating voltage

ITP Standard Cable für Industrial Ethernet non-assembled, sold by the meter, 2 x 2-pole, without connector for connecting a data terminal; for customer assembly with connectors or for the connection between the patch field and the outlet

6XV1 850-0AH10

ITP Standard Cable 9/15 ITP installation cable for direct connection of data terminals with ITP interface to Industrial Ethernet network components with ITP interface; with one 9-pole and one 15-pole Sub-D connector •2m

6XV1 850-0BH20

≤ 2 m Ω /100 m

•5m

6XV1 850-0BH50

≤ 160 V

•8m

6XV1 850-0BH80

Mechanical data

• 12 m

6XV1 850-0BN12

Cable type (standard designation) • Standard • FRNC

• 15 m

6XV1 850-0BN15

• 20 m

6XV1 850-0BN20

• 30 m

6XV1 850-0BN30

• 40 m

6XV1 850-0BN40

• 50 m

6XV1 850-0BN50

• 60 m

6XV1 850-0BN60

• 70 m

6XV1 850-0BN70

0.64 mm

• 80 m

6XV1 850-0BN80

5.3

• 90 m

6XV1 850-0BN88

• 100 m

6XV1 850-0BT10

ITP XP Standard Cable 9/9 twisted ITP installation cable for direct connection of two Industrial Ethernet components with an ITP interface with two 9-pole Sub D connectors •2m

6XV1 850-0CH20

•5m

6XV1 850-0CH50

•8m

6XV1 850-0CH80

• 12 m

6XV1 850-0CN12

• 15 m

6XV1 850-0CN15

• 20 m

6XV1 850-0CN20

• 30 m

6XV1 850-0CN30

• 40 m

6XV1 850-0CN40

• 50 m

6XV1 850-0CN50

• 60 m

6XV1 850-0CN60

• 70 m

6XV1 850-0CN70

• 80 m

6XV1 850-0CN80

• 90 m

6XV1 850-0CN88

• 100 m

6XV1 850-0CT10

ITP XP Standard Cable 15/15 twisted ITP installation cable for direct connection of two data terminals with an ITP interface with two 15-pole Sub D connectors •2m

6XV1 850-0DH20

•6m

6XV1 850-0DH60

• 10 m

6XV1 850-0DN10

Internal conductor diameter (copper) Outer diameter Core cross-section acc. to AWG 22 Resistance (CV Ω/100 m) acc. to AWG 22 Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature • Transport/storage temperature • Installation temperature Permissible bending radius • One time • Multiple bends Permissible tensile force

J-02YSCY 2 x 2 x 0.64/1.5 PIMF F J-02YSCH 2 x 2 x 0.64/1.5 PIMF F GN FRNC 0.64 mm approx. 6.0 x 9.4 mm (+0.3/-0.5 mm)

-40 °C ... +80 °C -40 °C ... +80 °C -25 °C ... +80 °C approx. 48 mm (standard cable) ≥ 90 mm multiple (FRNC cable) approx. 33 mm (standard cable) ≥ 60 mm single (FRNC cable) ≤ 80 N

Cu number

46 kg/km

Shield

coated plastic sheet braid: tinned copper wires, 0.20 mm Ø approx. 90% cover

Weight • Standard • FRNC Halogen-free • Standard • FRNC Behavior in fire • Standard

• FRNC

Oil resistance • Standard • FRNC Silicone-free

approx. 90 kg/km approx. 98 kg/km No Yes flame-retardant to VDE 0482-265-2-1 IEC 60332-1 flame-retardant to VDE 0482-266-2-4 IEC 60332-3-24

2

Order No.

limited resistance to mineral oils and grease limited resistance to mineral oils and grease Yes


2/63




2

■ Ordering data (continued) ITP FRNC Cable for Industrial Ethernet non-assembled, halogen-free, sold by the meter, 2 x 2-pole, without connector for connecting a data terminal; for customer assembly with connectors or for the connection between the patch field and the outlet

Order No. 6XV1 851-0AH10

■ More information Installation instructions The installation cable is either supplied by the meter or with preassembled connectors. It can be used to connect a single data terminal or two active network components (OSM/ESM). On the network component side, 9-pole metal Sub-D connectors are used, and on the device side, 15-pole connectors are used. The 15-pole connectors contain a special plug-in jumper which can be used by modules with integrated twisted pair transceiver to switch from AUI to twisted pair operation.

ITP FRNC Cable 9/15 ITP installation cable for direct connection of data terminals with ITP interface to Industrial Ethernet network components with ITP interface; with one 9-pole and one 15-pole Sub-D connector •2m

6XV1 851-1AH20

•5m

6XV1 851-1AH50

•8m

6XV1 851-1AH80

The maximum cable length of a laid ITP Standard Cable is 100 m if connected directly.

• 12 m

6XV1 851-1AN12

ITP cables are intended only for use inside buildings.

• 15 m

6XV1 851-1AN15

• 20 m

6XV1 851-1AN20

• 30 m

6XV1 851-1AN30

Preassembled cables are used to connect data terminals directly to an active network component or for cascading active network components.

ITP connector ITP connector for Industrial Ethernet, 9-pole for connection to OLM/ELM and OSM/ESM

6GK1 901-0CA00-0AA0

ITP connector for Industrial Ethernet, 15-pole for connection to data terminal with ITP interface

6GK1 901-0CA01-0AA0

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1

SIMATIC NET Manual Collection Electronic manuals for communication systems, communication protocols and communication products on CD-ROM German/English

6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

1) Additional language variants and manuals can be found with the various products under: http:// www.siemens.com/automation/csi/net


Note: Additional components of the SIMATIC NET wiring range can be ordered from your local contact person. For technical advice contact: J. Hertlein, A&D SE PS Tel.: +49(0)911/750 44 65 Fax.: +49(0)911/750 99 91 Email: [email protected]

Note: Additional installation instructions can be found in the manual for TP and fiber-optic-networks.

Manual for TP and fiber-optic networks Paper version network architecture, components, configurations, mounting guidelines 1) • German

2/64

The ITP cables can also be ordered by the meter for on site assembly. 9-pole and 15-pole ITP connectors for assembly without special tools are available for this purpose.


Passive Network Components Overview of fiber-optic cables

■ Overview

■ Application The fiber optic (FO) cable is used for transmitting signals with the help of waves in the optical frequency range. The light beam is guided by means of total reflection at the transition from the core to the fiber material where there is a lower refractive index than at the core. The fiber optic cable is provided with a protective coating. The term fiber is also often used for fiber-optic cable.

■ Design

• • • • • • •

Optical signal transmission No radiation along the cable Unaffected by external noise fields No grounding problems Electrical isolation Low weight Easy routing

For Industrial Ethernet and for PROFIBUS, optical cables with glass fibers, PCF fibers (Polymer Cladded Fiber) and POF fibers (Polymer Optical Fiber) are available: • Glass fiber-optic cable; duplex cable for fiber-optic networks indoors and outdoors • POF fiber-optic cable; duplex cable for POF networks indoors • PCF fiber-optic cable; duplex cable for PCF networks indoors and outdoors Sheath material

Application

PVC

Standard use in indoor and outdoor areas of industrial applications

PUR

Highly mobile applications (trailing cables) for high mechanical or chemical stress in harsh industrial environments

PE

Routing of cables in moist areas indoors and outdoors, and for direct burying in earth

FRNC

Standard applications with high fire protection requirements

Approvals UL listing (safety standard) for network cables is especially necessary for the American and Canadian markets. The requirements for the appropriate approvals depend on where the cable is routed within the building. This applies to all cables which have to be routed from a machine to a remote control cabinet and are positioned on cable racks secured on the building. OFN/OFNG cable for routing in bundles (general purpose cable)


2/65

2


Passive Network Components Glass fiber-optic cables

2

■ Overview

■ Application Marine duplex fiber-optic cable SIENOPYR Halogen-free, non-crush, flame-retardant, marine-approved fiber-optic cable for permanent installation on ships and on offshore platforms indoors and on open deck. Sold by the meter. Fiber-optic indoor cable Halogen-free fiber-optic cable, non-crush, flame-retardant, for installation inside buildings (e.g. in production halls and in building automation). Supplied in fixed lengths, pre-assembled with four BFOC connectors. Fiber-optic standard cable Fiber-optic cables for the following application areas indoors and outdoors • For routing aboveground • For installation inside buildings. Sold by the meter and in fixed lengths, pre-assembled with four BFOC connectors or four SC connectors. Fiber-optic trailing cable

• Used for the optical Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS networks • Rugged design for industrial applications indoors and outdoors • Halogen-free design for installation inside buildings • Trailing cable for the special application of forced motion control • High immunity to noise thanks to insensitivity to electromagnetic fields • Available preassembled • Extensive approvals (UL)

■ Benefits

• Easy routing with - pre-assembled cables - no grounding problems - very light fiber-optic cable • Tap-proof due to lack of radiation from the cable • Silicon-free; therefore suitable for use in the automotive industry (e.g. on paint shop conveyors)

2/66


Fiber-optic cables for the special application of forced motion control, such as in continuously moving machine parts (in trailing cables) indoors and outdoors. Two cable versions are available for this application: • FO Trailing Cable; Cable for high mechanical stress, PUR outer sheath, no UL approval • FO Trailing Cable GP (general purpose); Cable for low mechanical stress, PVC outer sheath, with UL approval Sold by the meter and in fixed lengths, pre-assembled with four BFOC connectors or four SC connectors. Fiber-optic outdoor cable Waterproof cable (lengthwise and sideways) for use outdoors with non-metallic protection against rodents for laying into the ground. Sold by the meter and in fixed lengths, pre-assembled with four BFOC connectors or four SC connectors. Note: Special tools and specially trained personnel are required for pre-assembling glass fiber-optic cables



■ Application examples

2 SCALANCE X-400

Plug

Prefabricated fiber-optic cables with SC connectors

SC connection

SCALANCE X-400

Plug SC connection

G_IK10_XX_10039

FO Standard Cable GP 50/125 FO Trailing Cable GP 50/125 FO Trailing Cable 50/125 FO Ground Cable 50/125

Use of pre-assembled fiber-optic cables with SC connectors (1000 Mbit/s)

Network components

Network components

Plug

NC

BFOC connection

Prefabricated fiber-optic cables with BFOC connectors

Plug

NC

BFOC connection

G_IK10_XX_10043


Use of pre-assembled fiber-optic cables with BFOC connectors (100 Mbit/s)

■ Design In the respective applications, the maximum cable lengths must be taken into account. Passive connection of different fiber types is not permissible. The use of 50 μm fiber is recommended for future installations due to the greater range of gigabit Ethernet. Use of the 62.5 μm fiber is only recommended for existing network installations.

Outer sheath Strain relief through aramid fibers

Single core sheath Glass fiber

The following cable types are available in two variants, 50/125 μm and 62.5/125 μm: • 100Base FX; 62.5/125 μm fiber, 3000 m • 100Base FX; 50/125 μm fiber, 3000 m • 1000Base SX; 50/125 μm fiber, 750 m • 1000Base LX; 50/125 μm fiber, 2000 m

Cable types

G_IK PI_XX_10030

Loosely buffered fiber

50/125 μm

62,5/125 μm

FO Standard Cable GP

■

–

FO Trailing Cable

■

–

FO Trailing Cable GP

■

–

FO Ground Cable

■

–

Fiber OPTIC standard cable

–

■

INDOOR Fiber Optic indoor cable

–

■

Flexible Fiber Optic trailing cable

–

■

SIENOPYR marine duplex fiber-optic cable

–

■


2/67



2



FO Ground Cable

Application areas

Universal cable for installation indoors and outdoors

Waterproof cable (lengthwise and sideways) for use outdoors with non-metallic protection against rodents for laying into the ground.

Delivery format

Sold by the meter; pre-assembled with 4 BFOC or 4 SC connectors



AT-W(ZN)YY 2x1G50/125

AT-WQ(ZN)Y(ZN)B2Y 2G50/125

Fiber type

Multi-mode gradient fiber 50/125 μm


Damping • at 850 nm • at 1300 nm

≤ 2.7 dB/km ≤ 0.7 dB/km

≤ 2.7 dB/km ≤ 0.7 dB/km

Modal bandwidth • at 850 nm • at 1300 nm

≥ 600 MHz *km ≥ 1200 MHz *km

≥ 600 MHz *km ≥ 1200 MHz *km

Number of fibers

2

2

Cable design

Segmentable

Segmentable

Core type

Hollow core, filled

Hollow core, filled

Materials • Basic element • Strain relief • Outer sheath/color of cable

PVC, orange/black Aramide fibers PVC, green

PVC, orange/black Aramide fibers PE, black

2.9 mm dia. 4.5 x 7.4 mm approx. 40 kg/km ≤ 500 N 65 mm – 300 N/cm –

2.9 mm dia. 10.5 mm ± 0.5 mm approx. 90 kg/km ≤ 800 N 155 mm – 300 N/cm –

-5 ºC … +50 ºC

-5 ºC … +50 ºC

-25 ºC … +80 ºC -25 ºC … +80 ºC

-25 ºC … +75 ºC -25 ºC … +75 ºC

Behavior in fire


–

Halogen-free

–

–

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes


Limited resistance

Highly resistant

UL/CSA approvals

OFN (NEC Article 770, UL1651)/ OFN, 90°C, FT1, FT4 (CSA standard C22.2 No232M1988)

–

UV-resistant

Yes

Yes

Rodent protection

–

Yes

Gigabit length • 1000BaseSX • 1000BaseLX

750 m 2000 m

750 m 2000 m

Mechanical characteristics • Dimensions of basic element • Cable dimensions • Cable weight • Permissible tensile force • Bending radius • Bending cycles • Resistant to lateral force • Impact resistant (starting energy/number/hammer dia.) Perm. ambient conditions • Routing and installation temperature • Operating temperature • Storage temperature

2/68




■ Technical specifications (continued)

2

Cable type

FO Trailing Cable


Application areas

Cable for use in cable carriers for high mechanical loading, PUR outer sheath, no UL approval

Cable for use in cable carriers for low mechanical loading, PVC outer sheath, UL approval

Delivery format




AT-W(ZN)Y(ZN)11Y 2G50/125

AT-W(ZN)Y(ZN)Y 2G50/125

Fiber type



Damping • at 850 nm • at 1300 nm

≤ 2.7 dB/km ≤ 0.7 dB/km

≤ 2.7 dB/km ≤ 0.7 dB/km

Modal bandwidth • at 850 nm • at 1300 nm

≥ 600 MHz *km ≥ 1200 MHz *km

≥ 600 MHz *km ≥ 1200 MHz *km

Number of fibers

2

2

Cable design

Segmentable

Segmentable

Core type

Hollow core, filled

Hollow core, filled


PVC, orange/black Aramide fibers PUR, green

PVC, orange/black Aramide fibers PVC, green

2.9 mm dia. 10.5 mm dia. ± 0.5 mm approx. 90 kg/km ≤ 800 N 200 mm 5000000 300 N/cm –

2.9 mm diam. 10.5 mm dia. ± 0.5 mm approx. 90 kg/km ≤ 800 N 200 mm 3500000 300 N/cm –

-5 ºC … +50 ºC

-5 ºC … +50 ºC

–25 ºC … +80 ºC –25 ºC … +80 ºC

–25 ºC … +80 ºC –25 ºC … +80 ºC

Behavior in fire

–


Halogen-free

–

–

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes


Highly resistant

Limited resistance

UL/CSA approvals

–

OFN (NEC Article 770, UL1651)/ OFN, 90°C, FT1, FT4 (CSA standard C22.2 No232M1988)

UV-resistant

Yes

Yes

Rodent protection

–

–


750 m 2000 m

750 m 2000 m

Mechanical characteristics • Dimensions of basic element • Cable dimensions • Cable weight • Permissible tensile force • Bending radius • Bending cycles • Resistant to lateral force • Impact resistant (starting energy/number/hammer dia.) Perm. ambient conditions • Routing and installation temperature • Operating temperature • Storage temperature


2/69



2

■ Technical specifications (continued) Cable type

INDOOR Fiber Optic Indoor cable

Fiber Optic Standard cable

Application areas

Non-crush, halogen-free and fire-retardant cable for indoor installation


Delivery format

Sold by the meter, pre-assembled with 4 BFOC connectors



T-VHH 2G62.5/125 3.2B200+0.9F600 F TB3 OR FRNC

AT-VYY 2G62,5/125 3.1B200 + 0.8F600 F

Fiber type

Multi-mode gradient fiber 62.5/125 mm


Attenuation at 850 nm Attenuation at 1300 nm

≤ 3.1 dB/km ≤ 0.8 dB/km

≤ 3.1 dB/km ≤ 0.8 dB/km

Modal bandwidth at 850 nm Modal bandwidth at 1300 nm

≥ 200 MHz *km ≥ 600 MHz *km

≥ 200 MHz *km ≥ 600 MHz *km

Number of fibers

2

2

Cable design

Segmentable inner conductor

Segmentable outer conductor

Core type

Fixed core

Compact core


Copolymer, gray (FRNC) Aramide fibers Copolymer, light orange (FRNC)

PVC, gray Kevlar fiber and impregnated glass fiber PVC, black

(2.9 ± 0.1) mm dia. (3.9 × 6.8) ± 0.2 mm approx. 30 kg/km ≤ 800 N (temporary) ≥ 60 mm (when routing); ≥ 30 mm (during operation) only on the flat side 10000 N/10 cm (temporary)1) 2000 N/10 cm (continuous)2) 1.5 Nm/20 impacts/12.5 mm

(3.5 ± 0.2) mm diam. (6.3 × 9.8) ± 0.4 mm approx. 74 kg/km ≤ 500 N (temporary) ≥ 100 mm only on the flat side

-5 ºC … +50 ºC

-5 ºC … +50 ºC

–20 ºC … +60 ºC –25 ºC … +70 ºC

–20 ºC … +60 ºC –25 ºC … +70 ºC

Behavior in fire

Flame-retardant to IEC 60332-1 and VDE 0482-265-2-1


Halogen-free

Yes

–

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes


–

–

UL approval

–

–

UV-resistant

–

Yes

Rodent protection

–

–


– –

– –

Mechanical characteristics • Dimensions of basic element • Cable dimensions • Cable weight • Permissible tensile force • Bending radius • Resistant to lateral force • Impact resistant (starting energy/number/hammer dia.) Perm. ambient conditions • Routing and installation temperature • Operating temperature • Storage temperature

1) Attenuation change reversible max. 0.3 dB 2) Attenuation change reversible max. 0.1 dB

2/70


2000 N –




2

Cable type

Flexible Fiber Optic Trailing cable


Application areas

Flexible cable for routing in cable carriers indoors and outdoors

Fixed routing on ships and on offshore platforms in any room and on open deck; marine approval

Delivery format


Sold by the meter


AT-W11Y (ZN) 11Y 2G62.5/125 3.1B200 + 0.8F600 F

MI-VHH 2G 62.5/125 3.1B200 + 0.8F600 + 2 x 1CU

Fiber type




≤ 3.1 dB/km ≤ 0.8 dB/km

≤ 3.1 dB/km ≤ 0.8 dB/km


≥ 200 MHz *km ≥ 600 MHz *km

≥ 200 MHz *km ≥ 600 MHz *km

Number of fibers

2

2

Cable design



Core type

Hollow core, filled

Full core


PUR, black Aramide fibers, also GFP central element PUR, black

Polyolefin Aramide fibers SHF1 mixture, black

(3.5 ± 0.2) mm dia. 12.9 mm (outer diameter) approx. 136 kg/km ≤ 2000 N (temporary) ≤ 1000 N (continuous) ≥ 150 mm min. 100,000 bending cycles

(2.9 ± 0.2) mm dia. 13.3 ± 0.5 mm approx. 220 kg/km ≤ 500 N (temporary) ≤ 250 N (continuous) 133 mm (once) 266 mm (more than once)

–30 ºC … +60 ºC

–10 ºC … +50 ºC

–30 ºC … +60 ºC

Mechanical characteristics • Dimensions of basic element • Cable dimensions • Cable weight • Permissible tensile force • Bending radius Perm. ambient conditions • Routing and installation temperature • Operating temperature • Storage temperature

–30 ºC … +70 ºC

–40 ºC … +80 ºC 1) –40 ºC … +70 ºC 2) –40 ºC … +80 ºC

Behavior in fire

–

flame-retardant acc. to IEC 60332-3 Cat A

Halogen-free

Yes

Yes

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes


–

–

UL approval

–

–

UV-resistant

Yes

–

Rodent protection

–

–


– –

– –

–

• Lloyd Register of Shipping • German Lloyd • Registro Staliano Navale • Bureau Veritas


1) With copper cores and no load 2) With copper cores and maximum load (6 A)


2/71



2

■ Ordering data FO Standard Cable GP 50/125 Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m; minimum order 20 m; Preferred lengths pre-assembled with 4 BFOC connectors • 0.5 m

Order No.

Order No.

6XV1 873-3AH05

FO Trailing Cable 50/125 Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m; minimum order 20 m; Preferred lengths pre-assembled with 4 BFOC connectors •3m

•1m

6XV1 873-3AH10

•5m

6XV1 873-3CH50

•2m

6XV1 873-3AH20

• 10 m

6XV1 873-3CN10

•3m

6XV1 873-3AH30

• 20 m

6XV1 873-3CN20

•5m

6XV1 873-3AH50

• 50 m

6XV1 873-3CN50

• 10 m

6XV1 873-3AN10

• 100 m

6XV1 873-3CT10

• 15 m

6XV1 873-3AN15

• 20 m

6XV1 873-3AN20

• 30 m

6XV1 873-3AN30

Preferred lengths pre-assembled with 4 SC connectors •3m

6XV1 873-6CH30

• 40 m

6XV1 873-3AN40

•5m

6XV1 873-6CH50

• 50 m

6XV1 873-3AN50

• 10 m

6XV1 873-6CN10

• 80 m

6XV1 873-3AN80

• 20 m

6XV1 873-6CN20

• 100 m

6XV1 873-3AT10

• 50 m

6XV1 873-6CN50

• 150 m

6XV1 873-3AT15

• 100 m

6XV1 873-6CT10

• 200 m

6XV1 873-3AT20

• 300 m

6XV1 873-3AT30

Preferred lengths pre-assembled with 4 SC connectors • 0.5 m

6XV1 873-6AH05

•1m

6XV1 873-6AH10

FO Trailing Cable GP 50/125 Sold by the meter; max. quantity 3000 m; minimum order 20 m; Preferred lengths pre-assembled with 4 BFOC connectors •3m

•2m

6XV1 873-6AH20

•5m

6XV1 873-3DH50

•3m

6XV1 873-6AH30

• 10 m

6XV1 873-3DN10

•5m

6XV1 873-6AH50

• 20 m

6XV1 873-3DN20

• 10 m

6XV1 873-6AN10

• 50 m

6XV1 873-3DN50

• 15 m

6XV1 873-6AN15

• 100 m

6XV1 873-3DT10

• 20 m

6XV1 873-6AN20

• 30 m

6XV1 873-6AN30

• 40 m

6XV1 873-6AN40

Preferred lengths pre-assembled with 4 SC connectors •3m

6XV1 873-6DH30

• 50 m

6XV1 873-6AN50

•5m

6XV1 873-6DH50

• 80 m

6XV1 873-6AN80

• 10 m

6XV1 873-6DN10

• 100 m

6XV1 873-6AT10

• 20 m

6XV1 873-6DN20

• 150 m

6XV1 873-6AT15

• 50 m

6XV1 873-6DN50

• 200 m

6XV1 873-6AT20

• 100 m

6XV1 873-6DT10

• 300 m

6XV1 873-6AT30

FO Ground Cable 50/125 Sold by the meter; max. quantity 2000 m; minimum order 20 m; Preferred lengths pre-assembled with 4 BFOC connectors • 100 m

2/72


6XV1 873-2A

6XV1 873-2C

6XV1 873-3CH30

6XV1 873-2D

6XV1 873-3DH30

6XV1 873-2G

6XV1 873-3GT10

• 200 m

6XV1 873-3GT20

• 300 m

6XV1 873-3GT30

Preferred lengths pre-assembled with 4 SC connectors • 100 m

6XV1 873-6GT10

• 200 m

6XV1 873-6GT20

• 300 m

6XV1 873-6GT30



■ Ordering data (continued) Standard FIBER OPTIC CABLE (62.5/125), segmentable Sold by the meter; max. quantity 2000 m; minimum order 20 m; Preferred lengths pre-assembled with 4 BFOC plugs •1m

Order No.

6XV1 820-5AH10

SIENOPYR marine duplex fiber-optic cable (62.5/125) Fiber-optic cable for installation onboard ships and on offshore platforms Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m

6XV1 830-0NH10

•2m

6XV1 820-5BH20

•3m

6XV1 820-5BH30

•4m

6XV1 820-5BH40

•5m

6XV1 820-5BH50

• 10 m

6XV1 820-5BN10

• 15 m

6XV1 820-5BN15

FLEXIBLE FIBER OPTIC CABLE trailing cable (62.5/125), segmentable Sold by the meter; max. quantity 2000 m; minimum order 20 m Preferred lengths; pre-assembled with 4 BFOC connectors •1m

• 20 m

6XV1 820-5BN20

•2m

6XV1 820-6BH20

• 30 m

6XV1 820-5BN30

•3m

6XV1 820-6BH30

• 40 m

6XV1 820-5BN40

•5m

6XV1 820-6BH50

• 50 m

6XV1 820-5BN50

• 10 m

6XV1 820-6BN10

• 55 m

6XV1 820-5BN55

• 15 m

6XV1 820-6BN15

• 60 m

6XV1 820-5BN60

• 20 m

6XV1 820-6BN20

• 65 m

6XV1 820-5BN65

• 30 m

6XV1 820-6BN30

• 70 m

6XV1 820-5BN70

• 50 m

6XV1 820-6BN50

• 75 m

6XV1 820-5BN75

• 75 m

6XV1 820-6BN75

• 80 m

6XV1 820-5BN80

• 100 m

6XV1 820-6BT10

• 100 m

6XV1 820-5BT10

Accessories

• 120 m

6XV1 820-5BT12

• 130 m

6XV1 820-5BT13

• 150 m

6XV1 820-5BT15

• 200 m

6XV1 820-5BT20

• 250 m

6XV1 820-5BT25

BFOC connector set for FIBER OPTIC CABLE, standard, trailing cable, indoor cable as well as SIENOPYR marine duplex fiber-optic cable, 20 units

• 300 m

6XV1 820-5BT30

INDOOR FIBER OPTIC CABLE (62.5/125), segmentable Sold by the meter; max. quantity 2000 m; minimum order 20 m Preferred lengths; pre-assembled with 4 BFOC connectors • 0.5 m

6XV1 820-5BH10

6XV1 820-7AH10

6XV1 820-7BH05

•1m

6XV1 820-7BH10

•2m

6XV1 820-7BH20

•3m

6XV1 820-7BH30

•5m

6XV1 820-7BH50

• 10 m

6XV1 820-7BN10

• 15 m

6XV1 820-7BN15

• 20 m

6XV1 820-7BN20

• 25 m

6XV1 820-7BN25

• 50 m

6XV1 820-7BN50

• 75 m

6XV1 820-7BN75

• 100 m

6XV1 820-7BT10

2

Order No.

6XV1 820-6AH10

6XV1 820-6BH10

6GK1 901-0DA20-0AA0

Manual for TP and fiber-optic networks 1) Paper version Network architecture, components, configurations, installation guidelines • German

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1


6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

1) Further language versions and manuals can be found for the respective products at http://www.siemens.com/automation/csi/net Note: Special fiber-optic cables, lengths and accessories available on request. Special tools and specially trained personnel are required for pre-assembling glass fiber-optic cables

■ More information You can order components supplementary to the SIMATIC NET cabling range from your local contact. Technical advice on this subject is available from: J. Hertlein, A&D SE PS Tel.: +49(0)911/750 44 65 Fax: +49(0)911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected] Siemens IK PI · 2007

2/73


Passive Network Components POF and PCF fiber-optic cables

■ Overview

■ Design Different types of POF and PCF fiber optic cables are offered: POF fiber optic cables Rugged round cables with green outer sheath and Kevlar strain relief elements as well as two plastic fibers with rugged Polyamid inner sheath for applications indoors/outdoors with cable lengths up to 50 m. The cables are suitable for assembly in the field. • POF Standard Cable GP (General Purpose); for applications indoor/outdoors • POF Trailing Cable; for trailing cable applications

Outer sheath Strain relief through aramid fibers

■ Benefits

Single core sheath POF fiber G_IK10_XX_10179

• Electrical isolation of PROFINET/Ethernet devices • Protection of the transmission path against electromagnetic interference • Up to 50 m cable length with plastic fiber optic cables and up to 100 m with PCF fiber optic cables • Rugged fiber-optic standard cables, designed for industrial applications • Extensive approvals (UL)

Cable construction POF plastic optical fiber

PCF fiber optic cables

• Plastic and PCF fiber optic cables can be pre-assembled on site • Easy connector assembly on site • Time savings on start-up thanks to pre-assembled cables • Protection of the transmission path against electromagnetic interference • Tap-proof, because the cable does not radiate

■ Application SIMATIC NET POF and PCF fiber optic conductors are used to construct optical indoor PROFINET and Industrial Ethernet networks. Devices with integral optical interface (SC RJ connection system) are, for example, SCALANCE X200-4P IRT, SCALANCE X201-3P IRT, SCALANCE X202-2P IRT, SCALANCE X101-1POF, ET 200S.

Rugged round cables with green outer sheath and Kevlar strain relief elements for applications indoor/outdoors with cable lengths up to 100 m. The cables are suitable for assembly in the field. • PCF Standard Cable GP (General Purpose); for applications indoor/outdoors with cable lengths up to 100 m. • PCF fiber-optic trailing cable; for trailing cable applications with cable lengths of up to 100 m. The cable is suitable for assembly in the field. The following cable versions are available: - PCF Trailing Cable; cable for high mechanical stress, PUR outer sheath, no UL approval - PCF Trailing Cable GP (general purpose); cable for low mechanical stress, PVC outer sheath, with UL approval

POF and PCF fiber optic cables can be assembled easily on site with SC RJ plugs. The maximum cable length between two devices is 50 m for POF and 100 m for PCF fiber-optic cables. PCF cables are also available preassembled with 2 SC RJ plugs.

Outer sheath

Supporting element Strain relief through aramid fibers Fleece material taping Single core sheath with strain relief elements Polymer-cladded fiber

Cable construction PCF plastic optical fiber

2/74


G_IK PI_XX_10031

2




POF Standard Cable GP 980/1000

POF Trailing Cable 980/1000

2

Core cross-section

Area of application

For fixed routing indoors

For moving applications (e.g. trailing cables)

Type of delivery

Sold by the meter

Sold by the meter


I-V4Y(ZN)Y 2P980/1000

I-V4Y(ZN)11Y 2P980/1000 FLEX

Fiber type

POF FOC 980/1000 μm

POF FOC 980/1000 μm

Damping • at 650 nm

160 dB/km

180 dB/km

Modal bandwidth • at 650 nm

10 MHz x 100 m

10 MHz x 100 m

Number of fibers

2

2

Materials • Fiber core • Cladding • Inner sheath/color • Outer sheath/color • Strain relief

Polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA) Fluoridated special polymer PA, black, orange PVC, green Kevlar fibers

Polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA) Fluoridated special polymer PA, black, orange PUR, green Kevlar fibers

980 μm 1000 μm 2.2 mm dia. ± 0.01 mm 7.8 mm ± 0.3 mm 65 kg/km 100 N 150 mm – 100 N/cm

980 μm 1000 μm 2.2 mm dia. ± 0.01 mm 8 mm 55 kg/km 100 N 60 mm 5000000 200 N/cm

Limited resistance Limited resistance/ Yes

Highly resistant Highly resistant/ Yes

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature • Transport/storage temperature • Routing • In short-circuit on conductor

-30°C … +70°C -30°C … +70°C 0 °C … +50 °C –

-20 °C … +70 °C -40 °C … +80 °C +5°C … +50°C –

Behavior in fire


–

UL/CSA approvals

OFN-FT1

UL-758 AWM Style 5422

UV-resistant

No

No

Halogen-free

No

No

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes

Mechanical characteristics • Diameter of fiber core • Cladding outer diameter • Diameter of inner sheath • Cable dimensions • Cable weight • Maximum permissible tensile force • Bending radius • Bending cycles • Lateral pressure resistance (shortterm) • Resistance against - mineral oil ASTM No. 2 - mineral grease/water - UV radiation


2/75



2

■ Technical specifications – PCF cables suitable for on-site assembly Cable type

PCF Standard Cable GP

PCF Trailing Cable

PCF Trailing Cable GP

Area of application

For permanent indoor and outdoor installation

For moving applications


Type of delivery

Sold by the meter

Sold by the meter

Sold by the meter


I-V(ZN)YY 2K200/230

AT-V(ZN)Y(ZN)11Y 2K200/230

AT-V(ZN)Y(ZN)Y 2K200/230

Fiber type

Step index 200/230

Step index 200/230

Step index 200/230


10 dB/km

10 dB/km

10 dB/km


17 MHz * km

17 MHz * km

17 MHz * km

Number of fibers

2

2

2

Materials • Fiber core • Cladding • Inner sheath/color • Outer sheath/color • Strain relief

Quartz glass Special polymer PVC, orange/black PVC, green Aramide fibers

Quartz glass Special polymer PVC, orange/black PUR, green Aramide fibers

Quartz glass Special polymer PVC, orange/black PVC, green Aramide fibers

200 μm 230 μm 2.2 mm dia. ± 0.01 mm 7.2 mm dia. ± 0.5 mm 45 kg/km 100 N 105 mm – 500 N/cm

200 μm 230 μm 2.2 mm dia. ± 0.01 mm 8 mm dia. ± 0.5 mm 85 kg/km 800 N 175 mm 5000000 500 N/cm

200 μm 230 μm 2.2 mm dia. ± 0.01 mm 8.8 mm dia. ± 0.5 mm 85 kg/km 800 N 175 mm >3500000 500 N/cm

300 N/cm

300 N/cm

300 N/cm


Highly resistant Highly resistant/ Yes


-25°C … +75°C -25°C … +75°C -5°C … +50°C

-25°C … +75°C -30°C … +75 °C -5°C … +50°C

-25°C … +75 °C -30°C … +75 °C -5°C … +50°C

Behavior in fire


–


UL/CSA approvals

OFN (NEC Article 770, UL1651)/ OFN, 90°C, FT1, FT4 (CSA standard C22.2 No232-M1988)

–


UV-resistant

Yes

Yes

Yes

Halogen-free

–

–

–

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes

Yes

Core cross-section

Mechanical characteristics • Diameter of fiber core • Cladding outer diameter • Diameter of inner sheath • Cable dimensions • Cable weight • Maximum permissible tensile force • Bending radius • Bending cycles • Lateral pressure resistance (short-term) • Lateral pressure resistance (long-term) • Resistance against - mineral oil ASTM No. 2 - mineral grease/water - UV radiation Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature • Transport/storage temperature • Routing • In short-circuit on conductor

2/76




■ Ordering data

Order No.

POF Standard Cable GP 980/1000 POF standard cable for fixed routing indoors, with PVC sheath; sold by the meter

6XV1 874-2A

POF Trailing Cable 980/1000 POF trailing cable with rugged PUR sheath; sold by the meter

6XV1 874-2B

PCF Standard Cable GP 200/230 Standard cable, segmentable, sold by the meter; max. quantity 2000 m; minimum order 20 m; Preferred lengths; pre-assembled with 4 Simplex connectors • 50 m

6XV1 861-2A

6XV1 861-7AN50

• 75 m

6XV1 861-7AN75

• 100 m

6XV1 861-7AT10

• 150 m

6XV1 861-7AT15

• 200 m

6XV1 861-7AT20

• 250 m

6XV1 861-7AT25

• 300 m

6XV1 861-7AT30

Preferred lengths; pre-assembled with 4 SC RJ connectors • 50 m

6XV1 861-2AN50

• 75 m

6XV1 861-2AN75

• 100 m

6XV1 861-2AT10

PCF Trailing Cable 200/230 Trailing cable, segmentable, sold by the meter; max. quantity 2000 m; minimum order 20 m; Preferred lengths; pre-assembled with 4 Simplex connectors • 50 m

6XV1 861-2C

6XV1 861-7CN50

• 75 m

6XV1 861-7CN75

• 100 m

6XV1 861-7CT10

• 150 m

6XV1 861-7CT15

• 200 m

6XV1 861-7CT20

• 250 m

6XV1 861-7CT25

• 300 m

6XV1 861-7CT30


6XV1 861-2CN50

• 75 m

6XV1 861-2CN75

• 100 m

6XV1 861-2CT10

PCF Trailing Cable GP 200/230 Trailing cable, segmentable, sold by the meter; max. quantity 2000 m; minimum order 20 m; Preferred lengths; pre-assembled with 4 Simplex connectors • 50 m

6XV1 861-2D

2

Order No. PCF Trailing Cable GP 200/230 (continued) Preferred lengths; pre-assembled with 4 Simplex connectors • 150 m

6XV1 861-7DT15

• 200 m

6XV1 861-7DT20

• 250 m

6XV1 861-7DT25

• 300 m

6XV1 861-7DT30


6XV1 861-2DN50

• 75 m

6XV1 861-2DN75

• 100 m

6XV1 861-2DT10

Termination Kit SC RJ POF Plug Assembly case for local assembly of SC RJ connectors, comprising a stripping tool, Kevlar scissors, microscope, grinding paper and grinding base

6GK1 900-0ML00-0AA0

IE SC RJ POF Plug Screw connector for local assembly on POF FOC (1 pack = 20 items)

6GK1 900-0MB00-0AC0

IE SC RJ POF refill set Refill set for Termination Kit SC RJ POF Plug consisting of grinding paper and grinding base (set of 5)

6GK1 900-0MN00-0AA0

Termination Kit SC RJ PCF Plug Assembly case for local assembly of SC RJ connectors, comprising a stripping tool, buffer stripping tool, Kevlar scissors, fiber breaking tool, microscope

6GK1 900-0NL00-0AA0

Industrial Ethernet SC RJ PCF Plug Screw connector for local assembly on POF FOC (1 pack = 10 items)

6GK1 900-0NB00-0AC0

Manual for TP and fiber-optic networks Paper version: Network architecture, project management, network components, mounting • German

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1


6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

■ More information You can order components supplementary to the SIMATIC NET cabling range from your local contact. Technical advice on this subject is available from: 6XV1 861-7DN50

• 75 m

6XV1 861-7DN75

• 100 m

6XV1 861-7DT10

J. Hertlein, A&D SE PS Tel.: +49(0)911/750 44 65 Fax: +49(0)911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]


2/77


Passive Network Components POF/PCF FOC termination kit

■ Overview

■ Application SIMATIC NET POF and PCF fiber optic conductors are used to construct optical indoor and outdoor Ethernet/PROFINET networks. They are easy to assemble on-site with the Termination Kits and 2 x 2 RJ connectors. The maximum cable length between two Ethernet/PROFINET devices is 100 m for PCF and 50 m for POF fiber optic cables. Ethernet/PROFINET devices with integral optical interface (SC RJ connection system) are e.g. SCALANCE X-200P IRT, ET200S.

■ Design Outer sheath Strain relief through aramid fibers Single core sheath POF fiber G_IK10_XX_10179

• Compact, rugged assembly case for POF and PCF fiber-optic cables • Special versions for easy assembly of SC RJ plugs on POF and PCF fiber-optic cables • The quality of the assembly can be checked using the enclosed microscope.

■ Benefits Cable construction POF plastic optical fiber

• Easy installation of the unassembled cables in industrial plants • Flexible assembly of connectors on POF and PCF fiber optic cables on site (SC RJ connectors) • Mistakes are prevented with easy visual inspection of the assembled connector on site using a microscope • Simple repair of POF and PCF fiber optic cables in the field

Outer sheath

Supporting element Strain relief through aramid fibers Fleece material taping Single core sheath with strain relief elements Polymer-cladded fiber

G_IK PI_XX_10031

2

Cable construction PCF plastic optical fiber

The kit is available in assembly cases for on-site installation of SC RJ connectors on PCF plastic optical fiber. It consists of a stripping tool, buffer stripping tool, Kevlar scissors, fiber breaking tool and microscope.

2/78



Passive Network Components POF/PCF FOC termination kit

■ Ordering data

Order No.

Termination Kit SC RJ POF Plug Assembly case for on-site installation of SC RJ POF connectors; consisting of stripping tool, Kevlar cutters, SC RJ grinding plate, grinding paper, grinding base and microscope

6GK1 900-0ML00-0AA0

Termination Kit SC RJ PCF Plug Assembly case for local assembly of SC RJ POF connectors, comprising a stripping tool, buffer stripping tool, Kevlar cutters, fiber breaking tool, microscope

6GK1 900-0NL00-0AA0

■ More information You can order components supplementary to the SIMATIC NET cabling range from your local contact. Technical advice on this subject is available from: J. Hertlein, A&D SE PS Tel.: +49(0)911/750 44 65 Fax: +49(0)911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]

Accessories IE SC RJ POF Plug 20 plugs for on-site assembly

6GK1 900-0MB00-0AC0

IE SC RJ PCF Plug 10 plugs for on-site assembly

6GK1 900-0NB00-0AC0

IE SC RJ POF refill set Refill set for Termination Kit SC RJ POF Plug consisting of grinding paper and grinding plate (set of 5)

6GK1 900-0MN00-0AA0


2/79

2


Active Network Components

Industrial Ethernet Switches and media converter

2

■ Overview Active network components for Industrial Ethernet Industrial Ethernet Switches SCALANCE X is the product range of Industrial Ethernet switches from SIMATIC NET. Switches are active network components that specifically distribute data to the relevant addressees. The SCALANCE X product group comprises four product lines that complement each other and are carefully tuned to the specific automation task. SCALANCE X-005 Entry Level; Unmanaged switch with five RJ45-Ports for use in machine and plant islands. SCALANCE X-100 unmanaged; switches with up to eight ports and on-site diagnostics for use direct at the machine. SCALANCE X-200 managed; universally implementable in applications ranging from small machine-based applications to networked subsystems. Project design and remote diagnosis are integrated in the SIMATIC STEP 7 engineering tool. This enhances the availability of the plant. Devices with a high degree of protection support installation outside the control cabinet. SCALANCE X-200IRT managed; for implementation in subsystem networks with a requirement for hard real time (isochronous real time) and maximum availability. Data communication without real-time requirements can be conducted on the same network. Dual network structures are therefore not necessary. SCALANCE X-400 modular; for implementation in high-performance plant networks that will also satisfy future requirements (e.g. High Speed Redundancy). The partially modular design concept offers optimal flexibility for adapting this switch to the task in hand. Thanks to the support of numerous standardized IT functions, automation networks can be seamlessly integrated into existing office networks. Industrial Ethernet media converter SCALANCE X-100 unmanaged media converter; media converter for converting electrical signals to optical signals.

2/80



Active Network Components — Industrial Ethernet Switches Overview

■ Overview

2

SCALANCE X

SCALANCE X-400

Real-Time (RT)

Entry Level

r an g e

SCALANCE X-200 SCALANCE X-100

Unmanaged

SCALANCE X005

Managed

OSM / ESM

X204IRT

Perf o m an ce

Isochronous Real-Time High Speed Redundancy

X414-3E

X202-2IRT

X208PRO ELS TP40M

X208

X204-2

X206-1

X200-4P IRT X201-3P IRT X202-2P IRT

ELS TP40 / TP80

X108

X104-2

X106-1

X005

G_IK10_XX_10133

Modulare Gigabit Office-Standards High Speed Redundancy

Isochronous Real-Time (IRT)

Overview of the Industrial Ethernet Switches


2/81


Active Network Components — Industrial Ethernet Switches Overview

■ Overview (continued) Type and number of ports

X414-3E

2 3)

20 5)

4 1)

X202-2IRT

2

X204IRT

4

X202-2P IRT

2

2

X201-3P IRT

1

3

4)

4 2)

Layer 3 switching

8

2

X200-4P IRT

4

X208

8

X206-1

6

X206-1LD

6

X204-2

4

X204-2LD

4

X208PRO

1 1 2 2 8

X108

8

X106-1

6

1

X104-2

4

2

X005

5

OSM TP22

2

2

4

OSM TP62

6

2

8

OSM ITP62

6

2

8

OSM ITP53

5

3

8

OSM ITP62-LD

6

2

8

8

8

ESM TP40

4

4

ESM TP80

8

8

ESM ITP80

8

ELS TP40

2

2

ELS TP40M

2

2

ELS TP80

8 1) can be additionally plugged in via 2 multimode media modules 2) can be additionally plugged in via 2 singlemode media modules 1) and 2) a total of max. 2 media modules 100 MBit/sec can be plugged in

Function overview of Industrial Ethernet switches Siemens IK PI · 2007

8

3) FO by gigabit media module 4) available soon 5) with extender module

well suitable

G_IK10_XX_10012

OSM BC08

2/82

Office features (VLAN, RSTP, IGMP, ...)

Digital inputs

Modular design

Gigabit technology

IRT capability

Standby redundancy

Ring redundancy with RM

C-PLUG

Ring redundancy without RM

PROFINET diagnosis

Diagnosis: Web, SNMP

Multi- Singlemode mode BFOC BFOC

Local display (set button)

Module type

Fiber Optic

Fast ITP Connect

Signal contact

TP RJ45 M12

LED diagnosis

TP / FO

100 Mbit/s

2 x 24 V DC

10 / 100 Mbit/s

SIMATIC environment

Fast Ethernet

Gigabit Ethernet 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbit/s

Features

Compact housing

2


Active Network Components — Industrial Ethernet Switches SCALANCE X-005 Entry Level

■ Overview

■ Application • For low-cost installation of small, electrical Industrial Ethernet star and line structures with switching functionality, e.g. machine or plant islands • For installation in the control cabinet

■ Design The SCALANCE Industrial Ethernet switches with a rugged metal housing (IP30) are optimized for mounting on a standard rail and an S7-300 DIN rail. Direct wall mounting in various positions is also possible. Due to the housing dimensions that correspond to those of the SIMATIC S7-300, the devices are ideally suited for integration into an automation solution using S7-300 components.

■ Benefits

• Ideal solution for configuring Industrial Ethernet star and line topologies • Space-saving installation in the cabinet thanks to the compact design in S7-300 format • Secure data communication by means of industry-standard device interface using PROFINET-compliant plug-in connector IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 and additional strain relief by latching the connector to the housing • Installation is possible without a patch field by means of IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 and IE FC Standard Cable • Simple and fast diagnosis via LED on device • Uncrossed connecting cables can be used due to the integrated Autocrossover function • Simple network configuration without runtime calculation

■ Function • Uncrossed connecting cables can be used due to Autocrossover function integrated in the ports • Load disconnection through integral switch functionality Network topology and network configuration The SCALANCE X005 is typically accommodated in one control cubicle together with the nodes to be connected. It can be operated in small electrical star and line topologies. Network configuration and expansion are easy to implement; there are no limitations with the cascading of SCALANCE X005. When configuring the network, it is necessary to observe the following boundary conditions: • Length of the TP cable between two SCALANCE X switches: - max. 100 m with Industrial Ethernet FastConnect products

PC with CP 1613 A2


S7-200 with CP 243-1

S7-300 with CP 343-1 Lean

IPC with CP 1613 A2

Panel PC

G_IK10_XX_30039

• The unmanaged Industrial Ethernet Entry Level Switch SCALANCE X005 is optimized for low-cost installation of small Industrial Ethernet networks with 10/100 Mbit/s in a line and star topology • Five electrical nodes or network connections • Rugged metal housing for space-saving cubicle mounting on standard rails, S7-300 DIN rail or for wall mounting • Rugged, industry-standard station connections with PROFINET-compatible RJ45 connectors that offer additional strain relief and bending strain relief thanks to latching on the housing • Diagnostics on the device by means of LEDs (power, link status, data communication)

The SCALANCE X005 Switch is equipped with: • Supply voltage (1 x 24 V DC) • A row of LEDs for displaying status information (power, link status, data communication) • 10/100BaseTX, RJ45 port: RJ45 port, automatic detection of the data rate (10 or 100 Mbit/s), with Autosensing and Autocrossover function for connecting IE FC cables via IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 over distances up to 100 m

Star network topology with SCALANCE X005


2/83

2



■ Function (continued) PC with CP 1613 A2

S7-200 with CP 243-1

Panel PC

PC with CP 1613 A2 S7-200 with CP 243-1 S7-300 with CP 343-1

IPC with CP 1613 A2


Industrial Ethernet Electrical line topology with SCALANCE X005

Diagnosis The following information is displayed by LEDs on the equipment: • Port status • Data communication

2/84


Switch SCALANCE X005 IPC with CP 1613 A2

G_IK10_XX_30040

2




■ Ordering data

Data transmission rates

10/100 Mbit/s

Interfaces • Communication connection, electrical • Connection for supply voltage

5 x RJ45 sockets (10/100 Mbit/s; TP) 1 x 2-pole terminal block

SCALANCE X005 Industrial Ethernet Switch for 10/100 Mbit/s; with five 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports for configuring small star and line structures

Supply voltage

1 x 24 V DC (18 V … 32 V)

Accessories

Current consumption

80 mA

Power loss at 24 V DC

2W

IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 RJ45 plug connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 180° cable outlet; for network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface

Network extension parameter / TP cable length • 0 … 100 m

• 0 … 85 m

• 0 … 55 m

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature • Transport/storage temperature • Relative humidity during operation Construction • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm • Weight • Assembly Degree of protection Approvals • Radio interference level • Interference immunity • CuL listing • C-Tick • CE

IE FC Standard Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or through IE FC Outlet RJ45 with 0 … 90 m IE FC Standard Cable GP + 10 m TP Cord IE FC Marine/Trailing Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or 0 … 75 m IE FC Marine/Trailing Cable + 10 m TP Cord IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or 0 … 45 m IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC outlet RJ45 + 10 m TP cord 0 °C … +65 °C -40 °C … +80°C < 95%, non-condensing

40 x 125 x 124 550 g Standard rail, S7-300 rail, wall mounting IP30 EN 61000-6-2 Class A EN 61000-6-4 UL 60950, CSA C22.2 No. 60950 AS/NZS 2064 (Class A) EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4

2

Order No. 6GK5 005-0BA00-1AA3

• 1 pack = 1 items

6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0

IE FC RJ45 Plug 145 RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 145° cable outlet; e.g. for SIMOTION and SINAMICS • 1 pack = 1 items

6GK1 901-1BB30-0AA0


6GK1 901-1BB30-0AB0


6GK1 901-1BB30-0AE0

Manual for TP and fiber-optic networks Paper version; network architecture, components, configurations, installation guidelines • German

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1


2/85


Active Network Components — Industrial Ethernet Switches SCALANCE X-100 unmanaged

2

■ Overview

■ Application The switches of the SCALANCE X-100 series are used for cost-effective configuration of Industrial Ethernet line or star topologies with switching functionality. They are designed for installation in the control cabinet. Product versions

• The unmanaged Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-100 product line are optimized for installing Industrial Ethernet networks with 10/100 Mbit/s in a line and star topology • Electrical or optical connection to stations or network in accordance with the port type of the devices • Rugged metal housing for space-saving cabinet mounting on standard rails, S7-300 DIN rail or for wall mounting • Rugged, industry-standard station connections with PROFINET-compatible plug-in connectors that offer additional strain relief and bending strain relief thanks to latching on the housing • Redundant power supply • Diagnostics on the device by means of LEDs (power, link status, data communication) • Error signaling contact with easy adjustment using the SET button

■ Benefits

• Ideal solution for configuring Industrial Ethernet star and line topologies • Space-saving installation in the cabinet thanks to the compact design in S7-300 format • Secure data communication by means of industry-standard device interface using PROFINET-compliant plug-in connector (IE FC RJ45 Plug 180) and additional strain relief by latching the connector to the housing • Installation is possible without a patch field by means of IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 and IE FC Standard Cable • Simple and fast diagnosis via LED on device and signaling contact • Uncrossed connecting cables can be used due to the integrated Autocrossover function • Simple network configuration without runtime calculation

2/86


SCALANCE X104-2 / SCALANCE X106-1 • For configuring optical Industrial Ethernet line or star topologies: - SCALANCE X104-2; line or star topologies with 2 optical ports and 4 electrical ports - SCALANCE X106-1; star topologies with 1 optical port and 6 electrical ports • Device diagnosis on the device by means of LEDs (power, link status, data communication) and signaling contact (signaling mask can be set on site using buttons) • The four (SCALANCE X104-2) or six (SCALANCE X106-1) RJ45 sockets are industry-compatible with additional retaining collars for connection to the new IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 SCALANCE X108 • For constructing electrical Industrial Ethernet star and line topologies • Device diagnosis on the device by means of LEDs (power, link status, data communication) and signaling contact (signaling mask can be set on site using buttons) • The eight RJ45 sockets are industry-standard and feature additional retaining collars for connection to the IE FC RJ45 Plug 180

■ Design The SCALANCE Industrial Ethernet switches with a rugged metal housing are optimized for mounting on a standard rail and an S7-300 DIN rail. Direct wall mounting in various positions is also possible. Due to the housing dimensions that correspond to those of the S7-300, the devices are ideally suited for integration into an automation solution using S7-300 components. The SCALANCE X-100 switches feature: • a 4-pin terminal block for connecting the redundant power supply (2 x 24 V DC ) • a row of LEDs for displaying status information (power, link status, data communication, signaling contact) • a 2-pole terminal block for connecting the floating signaling contact • a SET button for local configuration of the signaling contact The following port types are available: • 10/100BaseTX, RJ45 port: RJ45 port, automatic detection of the data rate (10 or 100 Mbit/s), with Autosensing and Autocrossover function for connecting IE FC cables via IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 over distances up to 100 m • 100BaseFX, BFOC connection technique BFOC sockets for direct connection to Industrial Ethernet glass fiber-optic cables up to 3000 m for configuring line and star topologies.



■ Function • Configuring electrical and optical Industrial Ethernet line or star topologies • Uncrossed connecting cables can be used due to Autocrossover function integrated in the ports • Load disconnection through integral switch functionality • Easy configuration and extension of the network; no limits to network extension when switches of the SCALANCE X-100 family are cascaded.

2

Network topology and network configuration The SCALANCE X -100 switches are typically accommodated in one control cabinet together with the nodes to be connected. Electrical and optical versions can be installed together in star and line topologies. When configuring the network, it is necessary to observe the following boundary conditions: • Length of the TP cable between two SCALANCE X switches: - max. 100 m with Industrial Ethernet FastConnect products • Length of the optical cables: - max. 3000 m with Industrial Ethernet glass fiber-optic cables.


IE FC outlet RJ45

IE TP cord SIMATIC Field PG

S7-300 with CP 343-1

MP 370

IPC with CP 1613 A2

G_IK10_XX_10074

S7-400 with CP 443-1

10/100 Mbit/s Industrial Ethernet FC cable 2x2

Switching cabinet

Star network topology with SCALANCE X108


2/87



■ Function (continued)

Switching cabinet S7-400 with CP 443-1 Advanced

S7-300-1/MP 370

IE/PB Link IPCwith CP 1613 A2

Switch SCALANCE X108 IE FC RJ45 Plug




10/100 Mbit/s Industrial Ethernet FC Cable 2x2

S7-300 with CP 343-1

G_IK10_XX_10098

electrical network

PROFIBUS FC Standard Cable ET 200X

Electrical line topology with SCALANCE X108

S7-300 with CP 343-1

IE/PB Link

ET 200S




electrical network optical network


Optical line topology with SCALANCE X104-2

2/88


G_IK10_XX_10099

Switching cabinet


2




2



S7-300 with CP 343-1/MP 370


IE FC RJ45 Plug

S7-200 with CP 243-1


IE/PB Link


IPC with CP 1613 A2

electric linear topology optical linear topology

ET 200X

PROFIBUS FC Standard Cable

G_IK10_XX_10090

Switching cabinet


S7-300 with CP 343-1

Electrical and optical line topologies with SCALANCE X108 and SCALANCE X104-2

Diagnostics The following information is displayed by LEDs on the equipment: • Power • Port status • Data communication The Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-100 line can also be monitored using the floating signaling contact.


2/89



2

■ Technical specifications Type

SCALANCE X104-2

SCALANCE X106-1

SCALANCE X108

Transmission rates

10/100 Mbit/s

10/100 Mbit/s

10/100 Mbit/s

• Optical • Connection for supply voltage • Connection for signaling contact

4 x RJ45 sockets (10/100 Mbit/s; TP) 2 x BFOC sockets (100 Mbit/s) 1 x 4-pole terminal block 1 x 2-pole terminal block

6 x RJ45 sockets (10/100 Mbit/s; TP) 1 x BFOC sockets (100 Mbit/s) 1 x 4-pole terminal block 1 x 2-pole terminal block

8 x RJ45 sockets (10/100 Mbit/s; TP) – 1 x 4-pole terminal block 1 x 2-pole terminal block

Supply voltage

2 x 24 V DC (18 V to 32 V)

2 x 24 V DC (18 V to 32 V)

2 x 24 V DC (18 V to 32 V)

Current consumption

160 mA

150 mA

140 mA


3.8 W

2.6 W

3.36 W

IE FC Standard Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 or through IE FC Outlet RJ45 with 0 ... 90 m IE FC Standard Cable + 10 m TP cord IE FC Marine/Trailing Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 or 0 - 75 m IE FC Marine/Trailing Cable + 10 m TP cord IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or 0 … 45 m IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC Outlet RJ45 + 10 m TP cord Glass fiber-optic cable 62,5/125 μm or 50/125 μm; ≤ 1,0 dB/km at 1300 nm; ≥ 600 MHz x km

IE FC Standard Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 or through IE FC Outlet RJ45 with 0 ... 90 m IE FC Standard Cable + 10 m TP cord IE FC Marine/Trailing Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 or 0 - 75 m IE FC Marine/Trailing Cable + 10 m TP cord IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or 0 … 45 m IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC Outlet RJ45 + 10 m TP cord Glass fiber-optic cable 62,5/125 μm or 50/125 μm; ≤ 1,0 dB/km at 1300 nm; ≥ 600 MHz x km

IE FC Standard Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 or through IE FC Outlet RJ45 with 0 ... 90 m IE FC Standard Cable + 10 m TP cord IE FC Marine/Trailing Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 or 0 - 75 m IE FC Marine/Trailing Cable + 10 m TP cord IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or 0 … 45 m IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC Outlet RJ45 + 10 m TP cord -

-10 °C ... +60 °C -40 °C ... +80 °C < 95%, non-condensing



60 x 125 x 124 780 g Standard rail, S7-300 rail, wall mounting IP30



EN 61000-6-4 Class A EN 61000-6-2 UL 60950, CSA C22.2 No. 60950 FM 3611 EN 50021 AS/NZS 2064 (Class A) EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2 60 x 125 x 124 • American Bureau of Shipping • Lloyds Register of Shipping • Det Norske Veritas • German Lloyd • Nippon Kaiji Kyokai



Interfaces • Electrical

Network extension parameter / TP cable length • 0 ... 100 m

• 0 ... 85 m

• 0 ... 55 m

• 0 ... 3000 m

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature • Transport/storage temperature • Relative humidity during operation Design • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm • Weight • Mounting Degree of protection Approvals • Radio interference level • Immunity to interference • CuL listing • FM • ATEX Zone 2 • C-Tick • CE • Marine approvals

2/90




■ Ordering data

Order No.

SCALANCE X-100

Accessories

Industrial Ethernet switches for 10/100 Mbit/s

IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 RJ45 plug connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 180° cable outlet; for network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface

• SCALANCE X108; with eight 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports for configuring star topologies

6GK5 108-0BA00-2AA3

• SCALANCE X104-2; with four 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports and two fiber-optic ports for configuring line topologies

6GK5 104-2BB00-2AA3

• SCALANCE X106-1 with six 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports and one fiber-optic port for configuring star topologies

6GK5106-1BB00-2AA3

2

Order No.


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0


6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1


2/91


Active Network Components — Industrial Ethernet Switches SCALANCE X-200 managed

2

■ Overview

■ Benefits

• The unmanaged Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-200 product line are optimized for installing Industrial Ethernet networks with 10/100 Mbit/s in a line, star and ring topology • Electrical or optical connection to stations or network in accordance with the port type of the devices • Rugged metal housing in S7-300 format for mounting on standard rail, S7-300 standard mounting rail or for direct wall mounting in various positions • Rugged, industry-standard station connections with PROFINET-compatible plug-in connectors that offer additional strain relief and bending strain relief thanks to latching on the housing • Redundant power supply • Diagnostics on the device by means of LEDs (power, link status, data communication) • Error signaling contact with easy adjustment using the SET button • The devices feature PROFINET diagnostics, SNMP access, integral Web server and automatic e-mail sending function for remote diagnosis and signaling over the network.

2/92


• Ideal solution for configuring Industrial Ethernet line, star and ring topologies • Reliable data communication thanks to rugged device connection using PROFINET-compatible plug-in cables that offer additional strain relief and bending strain relief thanks to latching on the housing. • High network availability through configuration of redundant ring topologies with SCALANCE X-400, SCALANCE X-200IRT or OSM/ESM as redundancy managers • Fast and easy diagnosis with LEDs on the device, through the integral Web server and through signaling contacts • Integration of the SCALANCE X-200 switches in the existing network management infrastructure through SNMP access point • Easy integration in the process diagnosis and system diagnosis with PROFINET • Configuration and diagnostics integrated into SIMATIC STEP 7 provide significant benefits during the engineering, start-up and operating phases of a plant • Uncrossed connecting cables can be used due to the integrated Autocrossover function • Module replacement without the need for a programming device, using the C-PLUG swap media for backing up the configuration data • Arrangement possible without control cabinet since devices with high IP65 degree of protection

■ Application The SCALANCE X-200 Industrial Ethernet switches permit costeffective configuration of Industrial Ethernet line, star or ring topologies with switching functionality where high network availability or remote diagnostics options are required. The devices with IP30 degree of protection have been designed for use in the control cabinet. The SCALANCE X208PRO has the IP65 degree of protection for installation outside the control cabinet. Product versions SCALANCE X204-2/ SCALANCE X204-2LD/ SCALANCE X206-1/ SCALANCE X206-1LD • For configuring optical Industrial Ethernet line, ring or star topologies: - SCALANCE X204-2; optical line or ring topologies with 2 optical ports, 4 electrical ports - SCALANCE X204-2LD (max. 26 km single-mode fiber-optic cable); optical line or ring topologies with 2 optical ports, 4 electrical ports - SCALANCE X206-1; star topologies with 1 optical port, 6 electrical ports, line or ring topologies with electrical and optical transmission paths - SCALANCE X206-1LD (max. 26 km single-mode fiber-optic cable); star topologies with 1 optical port, 6 electrical ports, line or ring topologies with electrical and optical transmission paths • Device diagnostics with LEDs (power, link status, data communication) • Remote diagnosis is possible through signaling contact (signal mask can be set locally using buttons), PROFINET, SNMP and Web browser • The four (SCALANCE X204-2) or six (SCALANCE X206-1) RJ45 sockets are industry-compatible with additional retaining collars for connection to the IE FC RJ45 Plug 180



■ Application (continued)


2 SNMP/Web-based Management

Diagnosis of individual SCALANCE X208 Switches by means of web browser through SIMATIC Field PG

100 Mbit/s

S7-300-1/MP 370

IE/PB Link IPC with CP 1613 A2

Switch SCALANCE X204-2 IE FC Outlet RJ45



Diagnosis using the network electrical network optical network



G_IK10_XX_10117



Switching cabinet

FO-Ring

Line-shaped network topology with SCALANCE X204-2 and SCALANCE X208

SCALANCE X208 / SCALANCE X208PRO (IP65 degree of protection) • For configuring electrical Industrial Ethernet line, star or ring • The eight PROFINET-compatible M12 sockets of the topologies (8 electrical ports): SCALANCE X208PRO are designed with IP65 degree of - SCALANCE X208 for installation in the control cabinet protection for connection to the IE M12 Plug PRO or the pre- SCALANCE X208PRO, specially for use outside the control assembled IE M12 cable cabinet • The SCALANCE X208PRO can be mounted on a DIN rail or • Device diagnostics with LEDs (power, link status, data comS7-300 rail or in a space-saving, horizontal or vertical design munication) directly on the equipment or machine; the status information can be read off regardless of the mount• Remote diagnosis with signaling contact (for SCALANCE ing position due to the angled LED strip. X208: signal mask can be set locally using buttons), PROFINET, SNMP and Web browser • Power can also be supplied to the SCALANCE X208PRO from outside the control cabinet from the PS791-1PRO power • The eight RJ45 sockets of the SCALANCE X208 are industrysupply module at 230 V AC. standard and feature additional retaining collars for connection to the IE FC RJ45 Plug 180


2/93



2

■ Design

■ Function

The SCALANCE X-200 Industrial Ethernet switches with a rugged metal housing are optimized for mounting on a standard rail and an S7-300 rail. Direct wall mounting in various positions is also possible. With the S7-300 housing format, the devices are optimized for integration in an automation solution with S7-300 components. The switches are equipped with • a 4-pole terminal block, • and SCALANCE X208PRO via 2 x M12 interfaces for connecting the redundant supply voltage (2 x 24 V DC). The status information is indicated by means of a row of LEDs (power, link status, data communication, power supply, signaling contact). The SCALANCE X-200 modules are available with the following port types: • 10/100BaseTX, RJ45 or M12 connection RJ45 or M12 socket, automatic detection of the data rate (10 or 100 Mbit/s), with Autosensing and Autocrossover functions for connecting IE FC cables using IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 or IE M12 Plug PRO up to 100 m. • 100BaseFX, BFOC connection method BFOC sockets for direct connection to Industrial Ethernet glass fiber-optic cables up to 3000 m (multimode fiber-optic cable) or up to 26000 m (single-mode fiber-optic cable) for configuring line, ring and star topologies.

• Configuring electrical and optical Industrial Ethernet line, star and ring topologies • Use in ring topologies (100 Mbit/s) together with SCALANCE X-400, SCALANCE X-200IRT or OSM/ESM as redundancy manager • Uncrossed connecting cables can be used due to Autocrossover function integrated in the ports • Load disconnection through integral switch functionality • Easy diagnostics using signaling contact, SNMP and Web browser • Easy copper cable diagnostics with Web browser for localizing cable breaks • Integration into the diagnostics of a PROFINET IO controllers for a consistent diagnostics concept, including network infrastructure • Diagnosis of data traffic by means of a parameterizable mirror port with a standard commercial network analyzer • Optimized support of PROFINET real-time communication (RT) through prioritizing • Fast device replacement in the event of a fault by using the optional C-PLUG swap medium (not included in scope of supply) Network topology and network configuration The Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X-200 switches with IP30 degree of protection are usually installed in a control cabinet together with the stations to be connected. Electrical and optical versions can be installed together in star, line and ring topologies. The SCALANCE X208PRO is designed for installation outside the control cabinet. When configuring the network, it is necessary to observe the following boundary conditions: • Length of the TP cable between two SCALANCE X switches: - max. 100 m with IE FC cable and IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 or IE M12 Plug PRO - max. 10 m using patches with TP cord • Length of the optical cables - max. 3000 m with glass fiber-optic cables (multimode). - max. 26000 m with glass fiber-optic cables (single-mode). • IP address: With the Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-200 family, the IP address is specified using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). If an appropriate server is not available in the network, the IP address can be assigned using the supplied software tool or STEP 7.

2/94





2 ET 200pro

Small switching cabinet S7-300 with CP 343-1

ET 200pro

PG screwed cable gland

HMI PG screwed cable gland Field PG with CP 7515

PGscrewed cable gland IPC with CP 1616

Switch SCALANCE X208PRO 230 V AC 24 V DC

PROFINET

ET 200S Access Point SCALANCE W788-1PRO

with Power Supply PS791-1PRO

24V DC

230 V AC

Industrial Ethernet G_IK10_XX_10078

Star network topology with SCALANCE X208PRO outside the control cabinet and 230 V AC power supply


2/95



■ Function (continued) S7-400 Operator Station

S7-400 S7-300

Industrial Ethernet

SCALANCE X202-2IRT

PC

S7-400 Switch SCALANCE X206-1


Industrial Ethernet

S7-300


IPC

PC IPC

S7-400 S7-400

Maximum cable length for 100 Mbit/s: electrical ring circuit: 100 m optical ring circuit (multimode): 3000 m

S7-300

S7-400

G_IK10_XX_10113

2

High speed redundancy in the ring with electrical and optical paths

Commissioning and diagnosis PROFINET diagnostic alarms from SCALANCE X can be displayed with the appropriate SIMATIC Engineering Tools and processed in the control. The engineering outlay for the PLC and HMI has been drastically reduced thanks to complete integration in the SIMATIC concept for system error messages. The SCALANCE X-200 Industrial Ethernet switches can also be integrated into a network management system through the standardized protocol SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). In the event of a fault in the device, error messages (SNMP traps) can be sent to a network system or as e-mail to a specified network manager.

2/96


The integral Web server enables configuration and diagnosis settings to be made using a standard browser. Statistical information can also be read out over the Web server. The following information is displayed on site by LEDs: • Power • Port status • Data traffic • Signaling contact The Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-200 line can also be monitored using the floating signaling contact.




SCALANCE X204-2

SCALANCE X204-2LD

SCALANCE X206-1

SCALANCE X206-1LD

Transmission rate

10/100 Mbit/s

10/100 Mbit/s

10/100 Mbit/s

10/100 Mbit/s

Interfaces • Communication connection, electrical • Communication connection, optical • Connection for supply voltage • Connection for signaling contact • Slot for the swap medium

4 x RJ45 sockets (10/100 Mbit/s; TP) 2 x BFOC sockets (100 Mbit/s) 4-pole terminal block 2-pole terminal block C-PLUG




Supply voltage

2 x 24 V DC (18 V to 32 V) 2 x 24 V DC (18 V to 32 V) 2 x 24 V DC (18 V to 32 V) 2 x 24 V DC (18 V to 32 V)

Current consumption

215 mA

215 mA

200 mA

200 mA


5.16 W

5.16 W

4.8 W

4.8 W

IE FC Standard Cable GP with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 IE FC Outlet RJ45 with IE FC Standard Cable GP (0 ... 90 m) + 10 m TP cord IE FC Marine/Trailing/ Flexible Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 IE FC Marine/Trailing/ Flexible Cable (0 - 75 m) + 10 m TP cord IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or 0 … 45 m IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC outlet RJ45 + 10 m TP cord Glass fiber-optic cable 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm; ≤ 1.0 dB/km at 1300 nm; ≥ 600 MHz x km –

IE FC Standard Cable GP with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 IE FC Outlet RJ45 with IE FC Standard Cable GP (0 ... 90 m) + 10 m TP cord IE FC Marine/Trailing/ Flexible Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 IE FC Marine/Trailing/ Flexible Cable (0 - 75 m) + 10 m TP cord IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or 0 … 45 m IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC outlet RJ45 + 10 m TP cord –

IE FC Standard Cable GP with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 IE FC Outlet RJ45 with IE FC Standard Cable GP (0 ... 90 m) + 10 m TP cord IE FC Marine/Trailing/ Flexible Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 IE FC Marine/Trailing/ Flexible Cable (0 - 75 m) + 10 m TP cord IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or 0 … 45 m IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC outlet RJ45 + 10 m TP cord Glass fiber-optic cable 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm; ≤ 1.0 dB/km at 1300 nm; ≥ 600 MHz x km –

IE FC Standard Cable GP with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 IE FC Outlet RJ45 with IE FC Standard Cable GP (0 ... 90 m) + 10 m TP cord IE FC Marine/Trailing/ Flexible Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 IE FC Marine/Trailing/ Flexible Cable (0 - 75 m) + 10 m TP cord IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or 0 … 45 m IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC outlet RJ45 + 10 m TP cord –

0 °C ... +60 °C -40 °C ... +80 °C < 95%, non-condensing


0 °C ... +60 °C -40 °C ... +80 °C < 95%, non-condensing

60 x 125 x 124 780 g Standard rail, S7-300 rail, wall mounting




IP30

IP30

IP30

IP30

EN 61000-6-4 Class A EN 61000-6-2 UL 60950-1, CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1 FM 3611 EN 50021 AS/NZS 2064 (Class A) EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2 • Lloyds Register of Shipping • Det Norske Veritas • German Lloyd • Nippon Kaiji Kyokai • American Bureau of Shipping • Bureau Veritas





• 0 ... 85 m

• 0 ... 55 m

• 0 ... 3000 m

• 0 ... 26000 m

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature -10 °C ... +60 °C -40 °C ... +80 °C • Transport/storage temperature • Relative humidity during operation < 95%, non-condensing Design • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm • Weight • Mounting Degree of protection Approvals • Radio interference level • Immunity to interference • cULus listing • FM • ATEX Zone 2 • C-Tick • CE • Marine approvals

Glass fiber-optic cable 10/125 μm single-mode fiber; 0.5 dB/km at 1300 nm

Glass fiber-optic cable 10/125 μm single-mode fiber; 0.5 dB/km at 1300 nm


2/97

2



2

■ Technical specifications (continued) Type

SCALANCE X208

SCALANCE X208PRO

Transmission rate

10/100 Mbit/s

10/100 Mbit/s

8 x RJ45 sockets (10/100 Mbit/s; TP)

8 x 4-pole M12 sockets (10/100 Mbit/s)

–

–

1 x 4-pole terminal block 1 x 2-pole terminal block C-PLUG

2 x 4-pole M12 interface 1 x 5-pole M12 interface C-PLUG

Supply voltage

2 x 24 V DC (18 V to 32 V)

2 x 24 V DC (18 V to 32 V)

Current consumption

185 mA

185 mA


4.4 W

4.4 W

IE FC Standard Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 IE FC Outlet RJ45 with IE FC Standard Cable (0 - 90 m) + 10 m TP cord IE FC Marine/Trailing/Flexible Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 IE FC Marine/Trailing/Flexible Cable (0 - 75 m) + 10 m TP cord IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or 0 … 45 m IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC outlet RJ45 + 10 m TP cord

IE FC Standard Cable with IE M12 plug PRO –

–

–

Interfaces • Communication connection, electrical • Communication connection, optical • Connection for supply voltage • Connection for signaling contact • Slot for the swap medium


• 0 ... 85 m

• 0 ... 55 m

• 0 - 3000 m

IE FC Marine/Trailing/Flexible Cable with IE M12 plug PRO – IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or 0 … 45 m IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC Outlet RJ45 + 10 m TP cord

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature -20 °C ... +70 °C • Transport/storage temperature -40 °C ... +80 °C • Relative humidity during operation < 95%, non-condensing


Design • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm • Weight • Mounting




IP30

IP65


EN 61000-6-4 Class A EN 61000-6-2 UL 60950, CSA C22.2 No. 60950 FM 3611 EN 50021 AS/NZS 2064 (Class A) EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2 • Lloyds Register of Shipping • Det Norske Veritas • German Lloyd • Nippon Kaiji Kyokai • American Bureau of Shipping • Bureau Veritas

Approvals • Radio interference level • Immunity to interference • cULus listing • FM • ATEX Zone 2 • C-Tick • CE • Marine approvals

2/98




■ Ordering data

Order No. Accessories (continued)

SCALANCE X-200 Industrial Ethernet Switches Industrial Ethernet switches with integral SNMP access, Web diagnostics, copper cable diagnosis and PROFINET diagnosis for configuring line, star and ring topologies • SCALANCE X204-2 with four 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports and two fiber-optic ports

2

Order No.

6GK5 204-2BB00-2AA3

• SCALANCE X204-2LD with four 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports and two long distance fiber-optic ports (single-mode fiber-optic cable up to 26 km)

6GK5 204-2BC00-2AA3

• SCALANCE X206-1 with six 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports and one fiber-optic port

6GK5 206-1BB00-2AA3

• SCALANCE X206-1LD with six 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports and one long distance fiber-optic port (single-mode fiber-optic cable up to 26 km)

6GK5 206-1BC00-2AA3

• SCALANCE X208 with eight 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports

6GK5 208-0BA00-2AA3

• SCALANCE X208PRO with degree of protection IP65, with eight 10/100 Mbit/s M12 ports, incl. eleven M12 dust protection caps

6GK5 208-0HA00-2AA6

Accessories IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 180° cable outlet; for network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface • 1 pack = 1 piece

6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0

IE M12 plug PRO M12 plug connector for connection of Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; 4-pole, D-coded, metal enclosure, degree of protection IP65, pin insert; 180° cable outlet; for network components and Industrial Ethernet stations with degree of protection IP65 • 1 pack = 1 piece

6GK1 901-0DB10-6AA0


6GK1 901-0DB10-6AA8

IE connecting cable M12-180/M12-180 Pre-assembled IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP 2 x 2 (PROFINET type C) with two 4-pole M12 connectors, 4-pole, D-coded, degree of protection IP65; Length: • 0.3 m

6XV1 870-8AE30

• 0.5 m

6XV1 870-8AE50

• 1.0 m

6XV1 870-8AH10

• 1.5 m

6XV1 870-8AH15

• 2.0 m

6XV1 870-8AH20

• 3.0 m

6XV1 870-8AH30

• 5.0 m

6XV1 870-8AH50

• 10 m

6XV1 870-8AN10

• 15 m

6XV1 870-8AN15

IE M12 panel feedthrough Control cabinet feedthrough for transition from 4-pole, D-coded M12 interface (IP65) to RJ45 socket (IP20) • 1 pack = 5 pieces

6GK1 901-0DM20-2AA5

IE Power M12 Cable connector PRO Socket for connecting SCALANCE W-700/ SCALANCE X208PRO for 24 V DC supply; 4-pole, A-coded, with installation instructions

6GK1 907-0DC10-6AA3

Signaling contact M12 Cable connector PRO Socket for connecting SCALANCE X208PRO for signaling contact; 5-pole, B-coded, with installation instructions

6GK1 908-0DC10-6AA3

Power supply PS791-1PRO AC/DC power pack, 10 W, IP65 (-20 to +60 °C), input: 85 V to 265 V AC, output: 24 V DC, metal housing, scope of supply: AC Power 3+PE cable connector, DC power cord M12, installation material, manuals German/English

6GK5 791-1PS00-0AA6

C-PLUG Swap medium for simple replacement of devices in the event of a fault; for storing configuration or engineering and application data; can be used for SIMATIC NET products with C-PLUG slot

6GK1 900-0AB00


6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1


2/99


Active Network Components — Industrial Ethernet Switches SCALANCE X-200IRT managed

2

■ Overview

■ Benefits

• Especially designed for constructing real-time (RT) and isochronous real-time (IRT) Industrial Ethernet segments in line, star and ring topologies with 10/100 Mbit/s (RM integrated); construction of redundant ring connections possible • Combination of the switching mechanisms "Cut Through“ and "Store and Forward“ for optimized performance • Electrical or optical connection to stations or network in accordance with the port type of the devices • Rugged metal housing for space-saving cabinet mounting on standard rails, S7-300 DIN rail or for wall mounting • Industry-standard compatible station connections with PROFINET-compatible plug-in connectors that offer additional strain relief and bending strain relief thanks to latching on the housing • Redundant power supply • Can be used for fault-tolerant applications and can be replaced during normal operation thanks to redundant transmission characteristics • Diagnostics on the device by means of LEDs (power, link status, data communication) • Error signaling contact with easy adjustment using the SET button • The devices feature PROFINET diagnostics, SNMP access, integral Web server and automatic e-mail sending function for remote diagnosis and signaling over the network • Different device versions with copper and fiber-optic interfaces (BFOC, SC RJ)

2/100


• The ideal solution for constructing real-time (RT) and isochronous real-time (IRT) Industrial Ethernet segments especially in line, star and ring topologies with copper and fiber-optic cables (glass FOC, PCF FOC, POF FOC) • Reliable data communication thanks to industry-standard device connection using PROFINET-compatible plug-in connectors (IE FC RJ45 Plug) that offer additional strain relief and bending strain relief due to latching on the housing • High network availability through design of redundant ring structures (RM integrated) • Fast and easy diagnosis with LEDs on the device, through the integral Web server and through signaling contacts • Integration of the SCALANCE X-200IRT switches in the existing network management infrastructure through SNMP access point • Easy integration in the process diagnosis and system diagnosis with PROFINET • Configuration and diagnostics integrated into SIMATIC STEP 7 provide significant benefits during the engineering, start-up and operating phases of a plant • Uncrossed connecting cables can be used due to the integrated Autocrossover function • Module replacement without the need for a programming device, using the C-PLUG swap media for backing up the configuration data



■ Application The SCALANCE X-200IRT Industrial Ethernet switches permits the construction of real-time (RT) and isochronous real-time (IRT) Industrial Ethernet segments in line and star topologies. Ring structures can also be designed using the integral redundancy manager. Redundant ring connections are also possible. Thanks to innovative switching technology, the special requirements of automation with regard to line topology, hard real time and unlimited IT openness have been satisfied within a single technology for the first time based on the PROFINET standard. The switches with degree of protection IP30 have been designed for use in the control cabinet. Product versions SCALANCE X204IRT • For configuring electrical Industrial Ethernet line, star or ring topologies with 4 electrical ports SCALANCE X202-2IRT • For configuring optical or electrical Industrial Ethernet line, star or ring topologies with 2 optical glass FOC ports and 2 electrical ports SCALANCE X202-2P IRT • For configuring optical or electrical Industrial Ethernet line, star or ring topologies with 2 optical POF FOC ports and 2 electrical ports SCALANCE X201-3P IRT • For configuring optical Industrial Ethernet line, star or ring topologies with 3 optical POF FOC ports and 1 electrical port SCALANCE X200-4P IRT • For configuring optical Industrial Ethernet line, star or ring topologies with 4 optical POF FOC ports Applicable to all versions: • Integral redundancy manager (RM) • Device diagnostics with LEDs (power, link status, data communication) • Remote diagnosis is possible through signaling contact (signal mask can be set locally using buttons), PROFINET, SNMP and Web browser • Automatic e-mail send function • The RJ45 sockets are industry-standard and feature additional retaining collars for connection to the IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 The SCALANCE X-200IRT switches, based on PROFINET, satisfy the real-time requirements of the field level up to high-performance motion control applications. Real-time Ethernet • Interfacing of the PROFINET IO-Devices to the PROFINET IOController through high-performance, optimized data transmission • Hard real-time and IT openness coexist: Reaction-free transmission of real-time and non-real-time communication on the same line • Increased availability thanks to redundant transmission with bumpless changeover for real-time data

Additionally through isochronous real-time (IRT) Ethernet • Isochronous real-time communication based on the transmission procedure of the IEEE 802 by combining the switching mechanisms "Cut Through" and "Store and Forward". • For drive controls, PROFINET with isochronous real-time is the best performing system worldwide with regard to its isochrone and deterministic response. With a cycle time of 1 ms, for example, axes can be controlled in isochronous mode whereby 50% of the bandwidth is available solely for IT communication.

■ Design • The SCALANCE X-200IRT switches with a rugged metal housing to IP 30 degree of protection are optimized for mounting on a standard rail and an S7-300 rail. Direct wall mounting in various positions is also possible. With the S7-300 housing format, the devices are optimized for integration in an automation solution with S7-300 components. The switches have a 4-pin terminal block for connecting the redundant supply voltage (2 x 24 V DC). The status information is indicated by means of a line of LEDs (power, link status, data communication, power supply, signaling contact). The SCALANCE X-200IRT modules are available with the following port types: • 10/100BaseTX, RJ45 connection RJ45 socket, automatic detection of the data rate (10 or 100 Mbit/s), with Autosensing and Autocrossover function for connecting IE FC cables over IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 over distances up to 100 m. • 100BaseFX, BFOC connection technique BFOC sockets for direct connection to Industrial Ethernet glass fiber-optic cables up to 3000 m for configuring line and star topologies. • 100BaseFX, SC RJ connection technique SC RJ sockets for connection to Industrial Ethernet POF (50 m) and PCF FOC (100 m) using SC RJ plug connectors

■ Function • 4-port switch for configuring electrical and optical Industrial Ethernet line, star and ring topologies • Integral redundancy manager for design of ring topologies • Integral standby function for redundant coupling of two rings • Extremely short cycle times with highly accurate clock-pulse rates thanks to integrated real-time functions • Redundant data transmission with bumpless changeover • System-wide clock accuracy (less than 1 ms) • Uncrossed connecting cables can be used due to Autocrossover function integrated in the ports • Load disconnection through integral switch functionality • Easy diagnostics using signaling contact, SNMP and Web browser • Automatic e-mail function • Integration into the diagnostics of a PROFINET IO-Controllers for a consistent diagnostics concept, including network infrastructure • Fast device replacement in the event of a fault by using the optional C-PLUG swap medium (not included in scope of supply)


2/101

2



■ Function (continued) Network topology and network configuration The Industrial Ethernet Switches SCALANCE X-200IRT are usually installed in the control cabinet together with the stations to be connected (e.g. ET 200S). When configuring the network, it is necessary to observe the following boundary conditions: • Length of the TP cable between two SCALANCE X switches: - max. 100 m with IE FC cable and IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 - max. 10 m with TP Cord • Length of the optical cables - max. 3000 m with Industrial Ethernet glass fiber-optic cables - max. 100 m with Industrial Ethernet PCF fiber-optic cables - max. 50 m with Industrial Ethernet POF fiber-optic cables • IP Address: The IP address is assigned using the BOOTP (Boot Protocol) and DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) mechanisms. If an appropriate server is not available in the network, the IP address can be assigned using the supplied software tool. The SCALANCE X-200IRT switches and their real-time functions are configured with STEP 7.

PROFINET Industrial Ethernet PC with CP 1616 as PN IO-Controller

Switch SCALANCE X204IRT Switch SCALANCE X204IRT Field PG

Commissioning and diagnosis PROFINET diagnostic alarms from SCALANCE X can be displayed with the appropriate SIMATIC Engineering Tools and processed in the control. The engineering outlay for the PLC and HMI have been drastically reduced through complete integration in the SIMATIC concept for system error messages. The SCALANCE X-200IRT Industrial Ethernet switches can also be integrated into a network management system through the standardized protocol SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). In the event of a device fault, error messages (SNMP traps) can be sent to a network system or as e-mail to a specified network manager. The integral Web server enables configuration and diagnosis settings to be made using a standard browser. Statistical information can also be read out over the Web server. Warning thresholds and alarms generated by them permit early recognition of critical fiber states (only with POF). Cable failures (fiber breakage) can thus be avoided, and plant downtimes reduced, since maintenance work can be carried out at an early point in time and outside production periods. The following information is displayed by LEDs on the equipment: • Power • Port status • Data communication • RM activated • POF cable diagnostics (system operates in reserve) The Industrial Ethernet switches of the SCALANCE X-200IRT line can also be monitored using the floating signaling contact.

2/102


IPC with CP 1616 as PN IO-Device

ET 200S

Configuration example for SCALANCE X204IRT

ET 200S

G_IK10_XX_10100

2




2 S7-400 PC

ET 200S

ET 200S Switch SCALANCE X202-2IRT


S7-400

Industrial Ethernet Switch SCALANCE X202-2IRT

S7-300

Switch SCALANCE X202-2IRT IPC

G_IK10_XX_10102

ET 200S

S7-300

Configuration with high-speed redundancy in the optical ring


2/103



■ Function (continued) S7-400 PC S7-300

S7-400 S7-300 Switch SCALANCE X204IRT


S7-400


S7-300

Switch SCALANCE X208 Switch SCALANCE X208

IPC

PC S7-400 S7-400

S7-300

IPC

S7-400

Configuration with high-speed redundancy in the electrical ring

2/104


G_IK10_XX_10044

2




2 Operator Station

Operator Stations

S7-300

SCALANCE X208

SCALANCE X204IRT

100 Mbit/s

Industrial Ethernet

SCALANCE X208

S7-300

SCALANCE X202-2IRT as Stand-by Master

Industrial Ethernet

S7-400

S7-300

SCALANCE X202-2IRT as Stand-by Slave

100 Mbit/s

SCALANCE X204-2

SCALANCE X202-2IRT IPC

G_IK10_XX_10047

S7-300

Redundant coupling of two subnetworks with SCALANCE X-200IRT


Media-Converter SCALANCE X101-1POF

HMI

ET 200pro

POFLWL IE Standard Cable

POF-FO cable

POF-FO cable POF-FO cable

Industrial Ethernet





PROFINET

ET 200S with IM 151-3 PN FO Mixed network topology with plastic fiber-optic cables and twisted-pair cables Siemens IK PI · 2007

2/105



2


SCALANCE X204IRT

SCALANCE X202-2IRT

Transmission rate

10/100 Mbit/s

10/100 Mbit/s

• Communication connection, electrical



• Communication connection, optical

–

2 x BFOC sockets (100 Mbit/s)

• Connection for supply voltage

1 x 4-pole terminal block


• Connector for signaling contact



• Slot for the swap medium

C-PLUG

C-PLUG

Supply voltage

2 x 24 V DC (18 V to 32 V)

2 x 24 V DC (18 V to 32 V)

Current consumption

200 mA

300 mA


4,8 W

7,2 W

• 0 ... 100 m

IE FC Standard Cable GP with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 IE FC Outlet RJ45 with IE FC TP Standard Cable GP + 10 m TP Cord

IE FC Standard Cable GP with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 IE FC Outlet RJ45 with IE FC Standard Cable GP (0 - 90 m) + 10 m TP Cord

• 0 ... 85 m

IE FC Marine/Trailing Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 IE FC Marine/Trailing Cable (0 - 75 m) + 10 m TP Cord

IE FC Marine/Trailing Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 IE FC Marine/Trailing Cable (0 - 75 m) + 10 m TP Cord

• 0 ... 55 m

IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or 0 … 45 m IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC outlet RJ45 + 10 m TP cord

IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or 0 … 45 m IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC outlet RJ45 + 10 m TP cord

• 0 ... 3000 m

–

Glass fiber-optic cable 62,5/125 μm or 50/125μm; d 1,0 dB/km at 1300 nm; ≥ 600 MHz x km

Interfaces

Network extension parameter / TP cable length


-20 °C ... +70 °C

-10 °C ... +60 °C


-40 °C ... +80°C

-40 °C ... +80°C

• Relative humidity during operation; non-condensing

< 95%, non-condensing



60 x 125 x 124

60 x 125 x 124

• Weight

780 g

780 g

• Assembly

Standard rail, S7-300 rail, wall mounting



IP30

IP30

Approvals • Radio interference level

EN 61000-6-4 Class A


• Noise Immunity

EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-2

• CuL listing

UL 60950, CSA C22.2 Nr. 60950

UL 60950, CSA C22.2 Nr. 60950

• FM

FM 3611

FM 3611

• ATEX Zone 2

EN 50021

EN 50021

• C-Tick

AS/NZS 2064 (Class A)


• CE

EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2

2/106





2

Type

SCALANCE X202-2P IRT



Transmission rate

10/100 Mbit/s

10/100 Mbit/s

10/100 Mbit/s


2 x RJ45 socket (10/100 Mbit/s; TP)

1 x RJ45 socket (10/100 Mbit/s; TP)

–


2 x SC sockets (100 Mbit/s)

3 x SC RJ sockets (10/100 Mbit/s)

4 x SC RJ sockets (10/100 Mbit/s)










C-PLUG

C-PLUG

C-PLUG

Supply voltage

2 x 24 V DC (18 V to 32 V)

2 x 24 V DC (18 V to 32 V)

2 x 24 V DC (18 V to 32 V)

Current consumption

300 mA

350 mA

400 mA


7.2 W

8.4 W

9.6 W

IE FC Standard Cable GP with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 IE FC Outlet RJ45 with IE FC Standard Cable GP (0 ... 90 m) + 10 m TP cord

IE FC Standard Cable GP with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 IE FC Outlet RJ45 with IE FC Standard Cable GP (0 ... 90 m) + 10 m TP cord

–

IE FC Marine/Trailing/Flexible Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 IE FC Marine/Trailing/Flexible Cable (0 ... 75 m) + 10 m TP cord

IE FC Marine/Trailing/Flexible Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 IE FC Marine/Trailing/Flexible Cable (0 ... 75 m) + 10 m TP cord

–

IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug 0 … 45 m IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC outlet RJ45 + 10 m TP cord

IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug 0 … 45 m IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC outlet RJ45 + 10 m TP cord

–

• 0 ... 3000 m

–

–

–

• 0 ... 100 m

PCF FOC 200/230 at 650 nm 17 MHz x km



• 0 ... 50 m

POF FOC 980/1000 at 650 nm 10 MHz x 100 m




0 °C ... +60°C

0 °C ... +50°C

0 °C ... +40°C


-40 °C ... +80°C

-40 °C ... +80°C

-40 °C ... +80°C

• Relative humidity during operation; non-condensing




Ports


• 0 ... 85 m

• 0 ... 55 m

–

–

–


Design • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm

60 x 125 x 124

60 x 125 x 124

60 x 125 x 124

• Weight

780 g

780 g

780 g

• Assembly





IP30

IP30

IP30

Approvals • RF interference level




• Noise Immunity

EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-2

• CuL listing

UL 60950, CSA C22.2 No. 60950

UL 60950, CSA C22.2 No. 60950

UL 60950, CSA C22.2 No. 60950

• FM

FM 3611

FM 3611

FM 3611

• ATEX Zone 2

EN 50021

EN 50021

EN 50021

• C-Tick




• CE

EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-4, EN 61000-6-2

• Marine approvals

• Lloyds Register of Shipping • Det Norske Veritas • German Lloyd




2/107



2

■ Ordering data

Order No.

Industrial Ethernet Switches SCALANCE X-200IRT Managed Industrial Ethernet Switches; isochrone real time, LED diagnostics, error signaling contact with SET button, redundant power supply • SCALANCE X204IRT; 4 x 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports

6GK5 204-0BA00-2BA3

• SCALANCE X202-2IRT; 2 x 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports, 2 x 100 Mbit/s Multimode BFOC

6GK5 202-2BB00-2BA3

• SCALANCE X202-2P IRT; 2 x 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports, 2 x 100 Mbit/s POF/PCF SC RJ

6GK5 202-2BH00-2BA3

• SCALANCE X201-3P IRT; 1 x 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports, 3 x 100 Mbit/s POF/PCF SC RJ

6GK5 201-3BH00-2BA3

• SCALANCE X200-4P IRT; 4 x 100 Mbit/s POF/PCF SC RJ

6GK5 200-4AH00-2BA3

Industrial Ethernet Medienkonverter SCALANCE X-100 Industrial Ethernet media converters, LED diagnostics, fault signaling contact with SET key, redundant power supply, PROFINET-compatible securing collars • SCALANCE X101-1POF; 1 X 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 Port 1 X 100 Mbit/s POF SC RJ

6GK5 101-1BH00-2AA3

IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 180° cable outlet; for network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface 6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0


SC RJ POF Plug 20 plugs for on-site assembly

6GK1 900-0MB00-0AC0

IE SC RJ Refill Set POF Refill set for Termination Kit SC RJ POF Plug consisting of grinding paper and grinding base (set of 5)

6GK1 900-0MN00-0AA0

SC RJ PCF Plug 10 plugs for on-site assembly

6GK1 900-0NB00-0AC0

Termination Kit SC RJ POF Plug Assembly case for on-site installation of SC RJ POF connectors; consisting of stripping tool, Kevlar scissors, SC RJ grinding plate, grinding paper, grinding base and microscope

6GK1 900-0ML00-0AA0

Termination Kit SC RJ PCF Plug Assembly case for local assembly of SC RJ PCF connectors, comprising a stripping tool, buffer stripping tool, Kevlar cutters, fiber breaking tool and microscope

6GK1 900-0NL00-0AA0


6GK1 900-0AB00

Manual for TP and fiber-optic networks Paper version; network architecture, components, configurations, installation guidelines


2/108

Order No.

• German

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1


Active Network Components — Industrial Ethernet Switches SCALANCE X-400 modular

■ Overview

• The SCALANCE X-400 product range comprises modular Industrial Ethernet switches expandable by various media modules and extenders. It supports 10/100/1000-Mbit technology for various transmission media (twisted pair, fiber optic) and increased port requirements. The main applications are high-performance plant networks (control level). Thanks to the modular design, the X-400 product line is also designed for future requirements and can be adapted to the relevant task. • The X414-3E switch has two integral Gigabit Ethernet twisted pair interfaces (10/100/1000 Mbit/s) for connecting a number of switches to one another. Nodes are connected via 12 Fast Ethernet twisted pair ports (10/100 Mbit/s) integrated into the switch. • Another eight stations can be connected via extender modules on the right of the switch. The following extender modules are available: - Extenders with eight Fast Ethernet twisted-pair ports - Extenders with four media module slots for up to eight Fast Ethernet fiber optic ports • The integrated redundancy manager facilitates high-speed media redundancy even for large networks, both for Gigabit Ethernet (SCALANCE X-400 switches in the ring) and for Fast Ethernet (SCALANCE X-400 switches in the ring in combination with SCALANCE X-200 switches or OSM/ESM). • For the construction of optical Gigabit Ethernet rings, both integrated Gigabit Ethernet ports can be converted to fiber optic via a 2-port Gigabit Ethernet media module MM. Module versions are offered for multimode (up to 750 m fiber optic cable length) and single-mode (up to 10 km). • By means of a pluggable 2-port Fast Ethernet media module for multimode or alternatively single-mode fiber optic cable, SCALANCE X-400 switches can also be integrated into 100-Mbit/s rings, e.g. with SCALANCE X204-2 or OSM. • A second pluggable 2-port Fast Ethernet fiber optic media module enables remote nodes to be connected optically. • Remote diagnosis is possible by means of PROFINET diagnosis (available soon), Web browser or SNMP. • Switches of the SCALANCE X-400 product line support IT standards and thus permit seamless integration of automation networks into existing corporate networks. Virtual networks (VLAN) can be set up. • The support of standardized redundancy procedures (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol) permits the redundant integration into higher level enterprise networks. • Through learning the Multicast sources and targets (IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) snooping), X-400 switches can also filter Multicast data traffic and therefore limit the load in the network. • Layer 3 routing (static, RIP v1/2, OSPF) supports communication between different IP subnets

■ Benefits

2

• Flexible configuration of electrical or optical Industrial Ethernet networks; the network topology, type and number of ports can be adapted easily to the structure of the plant. • High availability of the network thanks to: - redundant power supply - redundant network structures based on fiber-optic or twisted pair cables (redundancy manager, standby function and RSTP are integrated) - replacement and extension of media and expansion modules during operation - easy device replacement by means of plug-in C-PLUG swap medium • Reliable communication thanks to very fast reconfiguration of the network in the event of a fault (<0.3 seconds) • Simple fiber optic connection technology by means of SC sockets (Gigabit Ethernet), proven BFOC sockets (Fast Ethernet) and prefabricated fiber-optic cables • Twisted pair ports readily accessible from the front, 10/100 Mbit/s; ports with sleeve for rugged, industry-compatible station connection for direct connections up to 100 m in conjunction with the PROFINET-compatible IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 or IE FC RJ45 Plug 145 connector • Easy network configuration without runtime calculation also for extremely large networks • Simple monitoring and diagnosis by means of signaling contact, digital inputs, SNMP and e-mail; PROFINET IO diagnostics (available soon) • Reduced engineering expenditure for PLC/HMI due to integration into the SIMATIC system fault message concept SFM (available soon) • Due to the integrated Layer 3 function (IP routing), a further router in the network is not essential • Investment protection for existing networks due to - effortless connection of existing 10 Mbit/s data terminals or network segments to Fast Ethernet networks with 100 Mbit/s - increase in performance through load decoupling and data transfer rates of 100 Mbit/s and 1000 Mbit/s - easy integration into existing network management infrastructures by means of SNMP • Support of VLAN permits integration into Enterprise Security Policies • Limiting of load on application of Multicast-based protocols (e.g. video transmission) through IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) snooping or GMRP (GARP Multicast Registration Protocol) • Protection of network against overload by setting of port thresholds • Operating temperature range from 0 °C to +60 °C • Low-maintenance operation thanks to fanless construction


2/109



2

■ Application SCALANCE X-400 products permit the configuration of switched networks at the control level, which not only demands high availability of the network and extensive diagnostic options, but also a high number of ports, high transfer rate and the support of fiber optic and twisted-pair transmission media. SCALANCE X-400 products are designed with IP20 degree of protection for installation in control cabinets. SCALANCE X414-3E • Control stations with a high concentration of devices • Star hub in plant bus (applications with high concentration of devices) • High-speed backbone including high-speed redundancy for process control systems • SCALANCE X414-3E equipped with Layer 3 functionality for IP routing

■ Design SCALANCE X414-3E The Industrial Ethernet Switch SCALANCE X414-3E forms the core of the SCALANCE X-400 product line. It contains the switching functionality and is responsible for the diagnosis. The SCALANCE X414-3E has two integrated Gigabit Ethernet twisted-pair ports (10, 100 or 1000 Mbit/s, RJ45 sockets) for connecting the SCALANCE X-400 switches to one another and 12 integrated Fast Ethernet twisted-pair ports (10 or 100 Mbit/s, RJ45 sockets with sleeves) for connecting stations. Both Gigabit Ethernet ports can be converted to fiber-optic connections with optical Gigabit Ethernet media modules. In addition, two slots are available for optical Fast Ethernet media modules with two ports. By means of an extender interface SCALANCE X414-3E can be extended by a further 8 Fast Ethernet ports (twisted pair or fiber optic, depending on extender version). In this way, a maximum configuration of two Gigabit Ethernet Ports (electrical or optical) and up to 24 Fast Ethernet Ports (of which between 4 and 12 can be optical) is possible. The installation width including extender is max. 19". Interfaces • Console port (serial interface) and Out-Band-Ethernet port for on-site parameterization/diagnostics, for firmware update • Slot for C-PLUG swap media for easy device replacement (included in scope of supply) • Redundant 24 V feed • One floating message output for simple display of faults • Floating inputs for recording digital status information such as signal contacts of PROFIBUS OLM or door contacts and forwarding via SCALANCE X-400 diagnostic paths (LED indicator, log table, trap or e-mail) Extensive operating mode and status information is displayed via LEDs and selection pushbuttons. The SCALANCE X414-3E is supplied with 24 V DC. To protect against power failure, two infeeds are provided.

2/110


SCALANCE X-400 media modules (MM) Using media modules, the Industrial Ethernet Switch SCALANCE X414-3E can be equipped with fiber optic cables. Media modules are available for both multimode and singlemode optical fibers. They can be added or replaced during network operation. The SCALANCE X414-3E basic unit supports two optical Gigabit Ethernet ports and up to four additional optical Fast Ethernet ports. The following media modules are available: • MM491-2; 2 fiber optic ports (BFOC sockets) 100 Mbit/s for distances up to 3 km with multimode fiber-optic conductors • MM491-2LD; 2 fiber optic ports (BFOC sockets) 100 Mbit/s for distances up to 26 km with single-mode fiber-optic conductors • MM492-2; 2 fiber optic ports (SC sockets) 1 Gbit/s for distances up to 750 m with multimode fiber-optic conductors (when using SIMATIC NET FO cable 50/125μm) • MM492-2LD; 2 fiber optic ports (SC sockets) 1 Gbit/s for distances up to 10 km with single-mode fiber-optic conductors One plug-in media module for Gigabit Ethernet converts the Gigabit Ethernet twisted pair-ports included in the switch to optical mode. The two Gigabit ports can then be used as either twisted-pair or fiber-optic ports. Optical media modules for Fast Ethernet each generate two additional ports per slot. SCALANCE X-400 extender modules (EM) An optional extender module with up to 8 further Fast Ethernet ports can be mounted next to the expansion interface of the SCALANCE X414-3E. Versions: • EM495-8; with 8 twisted pair ports (RJ45 sockets with sleeves) 10/100 Mbit/s; this enables the 12 onboard Fast Ethernet twisted pair ports of the SCALANCE X414-3E to be expanded to a total of 20 ports. • EM496-4; with a further four media module slots for Fast Ethernet media modules for up to 8 optical Fast Ethernet ports The structure of the SCALANCE X-400 product line offers the following advantages: • Simple user connection via twisted pair • Gigabit Ethernet transmission rate between SCALANCE X-400 switches • Fiber optic connection via fiber optic media modules • Reduced costs for spare parts inventories; Electrical and optical versions are covered by a basic unit and fiber-optic media modules



■ Design (continued)

■ Function

SCALANCE X414-3E

Slot number

TP-Ports Fast Ethernet

Gigabit Fast Ethernet

SCALANCE X414-3E

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 MM492-2 MM491-2 MM491-2

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

MM491-2LD

EM496-4 extender module 12 13 14 15

SCALANCE X414-3E

EM496-4 extender module

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 MM491-2LD MM491-2

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

e.g. for use in optical gigabit ring, connecting four separate optical nodes and up to twelve electrical nodes

MM491-2 MM491-2 MM491-2

SCALANCE X414-3E

oder

MM491-2

Fast Ethernet MM492-2LD

oder

MM492-2

Gigabit

G_IK10_XX_10180

SCALANCE X414-3E

MM491-2LD

EM495-8 extender module 12 13

e.g. for use in electrical gigabit ring, connecting ten separate optical nodes and up to twelve electrical nodes

SCALANCE X414-3E

EM495-8 extender module

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

e.g. for use in optical gigabit ring with single mode for a distance of up to 10 km, connecting two separate optical nodes and up to twenty electrical nodes

Application possibilities of the media and extender modules with SCALANCE X-414-3E

G_IK10_XX_10180

MM492-2LD MM491-2

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

oder

MM491-2

Fast Ethernet

• Increasing the network performance; by filtering the data traffic on the basis of the Ethernet (MAC) address of the data terminals, the local data traffic remains local; only data intended for users of another subnetwork are forwarded by the switch. • Simple network configuration and expansion; the switch saves the data received at the ports and forwards them independently to the destination address. Collision detection (CSMA/CD method) does not restrict the expansion of the network beyond the port. • Limiting of error spreading to the associated subnetwork; the SCALANCE X-400 switches only pass on data with a valid checksum (CRC). • Integration of existing subnetworks with 10 Mbit/s into Fast Ethernet networks with 100 Mbit/s; at the twisted-pair ports, the SCALANCE X-400 switch automatically recognizes the conductor pairs for transmission and reception (autocrossover), the data transfer rate of 10 or 100 Mbit/s, as well as full-duplex and half-duplex operation (autonegotiation). • High-performance connection of SCALANCE X-400 switches with 1 Gbit/s; SCALANCE X-400 switches have two Gigabit Ethernet ports for connecting the switches to each other. • High-speed redundancy (HSR) in the ring, reconfiguration time of ring max. 0.3 seconds; reliable communication is achieved by closing an optical line with SCALANCE X-400 switches to form a ring. The SCALANCE X-400 switch has an integral redundancy manager (RM) which monitors the function of the network continuously. It recognizes the failure of a transmission link in the ring or of a SCALANCE X-400 switch and activates the standby link within no more than 0.3 seconds. Rings consisting of SCALANCE X-400 switches can be operated at 1000 Mbit/s. In rings with SCALANCE X-200 or OSM/ESM it is possible to integrate SCALANCE X-400 switches at 100 Mbit/s. • High-speed standby redundancy; several rings can be connected together redundantly with SCALANCE X-400 over the integrated standby function. Two X-400 switches are configured in a ring as a master and slave over two links to the other ring. • Redundant interfacing to company networks; SCALANCE X-400 switches support the standardized redundancy procedure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). This enables a subnetwork to be connected redundantly to a higher level corporate network with reduced requirements for the reconfiguration time (in the order of seconds). • Support of virtual networks (VLAN); for structuring Industrial Ethernet networks with a fast growing number of users, a physically existing network can be divided into several virtual networks.


2/111

2



■ Function (continued) • Integrated Layer 3 function (IP routing); different IP subnetworks can be connected together • Load limiting with use of Multicast protocols (e.g. video transmission); through learning the Multicast sources and targets (IGMP snooping), SCALANCE X-400 switches can also filter Multicast data traffic and therefore limit the load in the network.

• Time synchronization; diagnostic messages (log table entries, e-mails) are timestamped. The local time is standardized throughout the network by means of synchronization with a SICLOCK or SNTP time transmitter, thereby simplifying the assignment of diagnostic messages to several devices. • Fast replacement of devices in event of failure, by means of the C-PLUG switching medium

Operator Station

Operator Stations

S7-300

SCALANCE X414-3E

SCALANCE X414-3E

1000 Mbit/s

Industrial Ethernet

SCALANCE X-400

S7-300

Stand-by Master

Non-Siemens device

SCALANCE X414-3E

Industrial Ethernet

Stand-by Slave S7-400 SCALANCE X414-3E

1000 Mbit/s

PC SCALANCE X414-3E

HMI

100 Mbit/s

S7-300

S7-300

SCALANCE X414-3E

S7-300 IPC

Optical redundant connection of two optical Gigabit subnetworks with SCALANCE X-400

2/112


G_IK10_XX_10178

2




2

Network topology and network configuration IT network (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP)

Switch

Switch

Switch

Switch

The network topology can easily be adapted to the structure of the plant with SCALANCE X-400 Industrial Ethernet switches. The following network structures and combinations of structures can be implemented: • Fast Ethernet and Gigabit rings with fast media redundancy; to protect against failure of a transmission link or a switch, as many as 50 X-400 switches cascaded in line can be connected into a ring with a total length of up to 150 km with multimode or 1300 km with single mode. On the failure of a transmission link or a SCALANCE X-400 switch in the ring, the transmission path is reconfigured within 0.3 seconds. • Several rings can be redundantly linked through the standby function • In addition, SCALANCE X-400 supports redundant connection of the ring structure to the corporate network with a rapid spanning tree. • Star topology with SCALANCE X-400 switches: Each SCALANCE X-400 switch represents a star point which can interconnect as many as 26 nodes or subnetworks electrically or optically.

Ethernet

SCALANCE X-400

Industrial Ethernet

100/1000 Mbits

Ring structure in industrial fields

G_IK10_XX_10066

SCALANCE X-400

When configuring the network, it is necessary to observe the ollowing boundary conditions: • Maximum line length between two modules for multi-mode fiber optic conductors: - 3000 m at 100 Mbit/s - 750 m at 1 Gbit/s • Maximum line length between two modules for single-mode fiber optic conductors: - 26 km at 100 Mbit/s - 10 km at 1 Gbit/s • Maximum line length for twisted pairs: 100 m

Redundant connection of office network and industrial network


2/113



2

■ Function (continued) Commissioning and diagnosis

Network management

Adjustment options on the device itself: • Redundancy manager RM; when setting up a ring, a SCALANCE X-400 switch in the ring is switched into the RM mode. The two Gigabit ports (electrical or – with media module – optical) are preferably used as ring ports. When using in optical rings with 100 Mbit/s, the ring ports can be configured on one media module or on two media modules using the switch. • Signal mask; the signal mask is set to the current status of the SCALANCE X-400 (setpoint) by pushbutton operation. The signal mask defines which ports and which power supplies are to be monitored. The signal contact only reports an error when a monitored port or a monitored feeder fails (deviation of setpoint/ actual status).

The network management provides the following functions: • Password-protected dial-up for "Administrator" (read and write authorization) and "User" (read only) • Read-out of version and status information • Setting the signal and standby mask and address information • Fixed parameterization of the ports (data rates, half/full duplex) • Setting parameters of the VLANs and multicast services • Configuration of the IP routing function (static routing, RIP v1/2, OSPF) • Parameterization of the standby connections for a redundant ring link • Setting of Rapid Spanning Tree parameters • Parameterization of user administration of SNMP V3 • Output of statistics information • Diagnosis of data traffic by means of a parameterizable mirror port with a standard commercial network analyzer • Loading of new firmware or the configuration data via the network by a TFTP server • Saving the configuration data or log table via the network on a TFTP server

Diagnostic options on site: • The following status information is displayed by LEDs on site: - RM mode - signal contact status - status of the two voltage feeders - port status - port mode (10/100/1000 Mbit/s, full/half-duplex) - signal mask (setpoint status) • The status of the signal contact is routed externally by means of floating relay contacts. This enables, for example, the module to be monitored via an input module from a controller. • A PC or a programming device can be directly connected via a serial interface or an Ethernet interface on the switch CPU (out-band port). Operation is carried out using commands (Command Line Interface (CLI)). • Monitoring via the Industrial Ethernet network; the following possibilities are available: - remote via standard browser (Web-based management): selection of SCALANCE X-400 switches via the network from a PC with browser - remote via SNMP V3: secure integration of SCALANCE X-400 switches via the network into a network management station

2/114


If faults occur in the network, the SCALANCE X-400 switch can send error messages (traps) to a network management system or also e-mails to a predefined network administrator. The remote monitoring (RMON) offers the following functions: The SCALANCE X-400 switch can collect statistics information according to the RMON groups 1 through 4. These include, for example, fault statistics that are kept for each port. This information can be read out through Web-based management in the statistics sub-area.



■ Integration

2

Operator Station (OS)

OS


SIMATIC IT

SIMATIC Batch

OS

Engineering Station (ES)


1 Gbit/s terminal bus

OS Server (redundant)


11 Gbit/s Gbit/s plant plant bus bus

Switch SCALANCE X414-3E Switch SCALANCE X414-3E


S7-300

PROFIBUS

S7-400H redundant contoller ET 200M

Manufactoring cell

G_IK10_XX_10079


Use of the SCALANCE X-400 switches in a process control system, e.g. PCS 7

At the terminal bus in the control center two SCALANCE X414-3E switches with extender (high number of ports) are used. These are connected together to create an electrical ring with a transmission rate of 1 Gbit/s. Several operator panels are provided and divided between the two switches, so that the system can still be operated if one switch fails. The terminal and plant bus are connected by means of redundant servers.


2/115



2

■ Integration (continued) The plant bus is designed as an optical ring. It connects three plant sections with the servers: • SCALANCE X-400 switches without extenders are used for connecting high-availability SIMATIC controllers (H-systems). On failure of an individual controller or switch, the plant section remains functional. • One SCALANCE X414-3E with extender (high number of ports) is used for the star-format connection of controllers. In this case, the failure of one switch is tolerated.

Operator stations

OS Server redundant

Operator stations

SCALANCE X-400

SCALANCE X-400 S7-200

1000 Mbit/s

Non-Siemens device

10/100 Mbit/s

SCALANCE X-400 S7-300

S7-400

H system

H system G_IK10_XX_10081

Redundant network with SCALANCE X-400

2/116





SCALANCE X414-3E


10/100/1000 Mbit/s

Interfaces • Communication connection electrical


In the basic unit: 2 x RJ45 (10/100/1000 Mbit/s; TP) 12 x RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s; TP) with extender modules: 8 x RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s; TP) via EM495-8 In the basic unit: up to 2 x glass fiber-optic cable with SC sockets(1000 Mbit/s) via MM492-2 or MM492-2LD media modules up to 4 x glass fiber optic cable with BFOC sockets (100 Mbit/s) via MM491-2 or MM491-2LD media modules; with extender modules: up to 12 x glass fiber optic cable with BFOC sockets (100 Mbit/s) via EM496-4 and MM491-2 or MM491-2LD;

2

Permissible ambient conditions • Operating temperature

0 °C … +60 °C


-40 °C … +80 °C

• Relative humidity during operation < 95% (non-condensing) Design • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm

344 x 145 x 112

• Weight

3.4 kg

• Assembly

S7-300 sectional rail, DIN rail


IP20

Approvals • RF interference level


• Interference immunity

EN 61000-6-2

• CuL listing

UL 60950, CSA C22.2 No. 60950, UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 14-M91 UL 1604 and 2279 (hazardous location)

• FM

FM 3611, FM hazardous location

• ATEX Zone 2

EN 50021

• Extender interface

EM495-8 or EM496-4

• C-Tick




• CE

EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4



• Approvals for use in marine vessels

• German Lloyd (GL) • American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) • Lloyds Register of Shipping (LRS) • Bureau Veritas (BV) • Nippon Kaiji Kyokai (NK) • Det Norske Veritas (DNV)

• Connection for digital input signals 2 x 5-pole terminal block • Slot for the swap medium

C-PLUG

Supply voltage

24 V DC (18 … 32 V DC)

Current consumption

< 2000 mA


15 W (without media and extender modules), < 48 W (maximum configuration)

Network extension parameter / TP cable length • 0 … 100 m

IE FC Standard Cable GP with IE FC RJ45 Plug

• 0 … 85 m

IE FC Marine/Trailing Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug

• 0 … 55 m

IE FC torsion cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug

• 0 … 3000 m

Cable lengths for multimode fiber-optic cable at 100 Mbit/s; MM491-2 with glass FOC 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm; ≤ 1 dB/km at 1300 nm; ≥ 600 MHz x km

• 0 … 750 m

Cable lengths for multimode fiber-optic cable at 1000 Mbit/s; MM492-2 with glass FOC 50/125 μm; ≤ 2.7 dB/km at 850 nm; ≥ 600 MHz x km

• 0 … 26 km

Cable lengths for single-mode fiber-optic cable at 100 Mbit/s; MM491-2 with glass FOC 10/125 μm or 9/125 μm; ≤ 0.5 dB/km at 1300 nm

• 0 … 10 km

Cable lengths for single-mode fiber-optic cable at 1000 Mbit/s; MM492-2 LD with glass FOC 10/125 μm or 9/125 μm; ≤ 0.5 dB/km at 1300 nm


2/117



2

■ Ordering data

Order No.

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X414-3E Modular Industrial Ethernet switch with 2 x Gigabit and 12 x 100 Mbit integral TP ports for establishing electrical and/or optical Industrial Ethernet networks; With a Gigabit and two 100 Mbit media module slots and an extender interface; Management functionality over SNMP and Web server

6GK5 414-3FC00-2AA2

MM492-2 media module Media module with 2 ports 1000BaseSX, 1 Gbit/s, multimode fiber-optic cable up to 750 m, SC interface

6GK5 492-2AL00-8AA2

Media module MM492-2LD Media module with 2 ports 1000BaseLX, 1 Gbit/s, singlemode fiber-optic cable up to 10 km, SC interface

6GK5 492-2AM00-8AA2

MM491-2 media module Media module with 2 ports 100BaseFX, 100 Gbit/s, multimode fiber-optic cable up to 3 km, BFOC interface

6GK5 491-2AB00-8AA2

Media module MM491-2LD Media module with 2 ports 100BaseFX, long distance, 100 Mbit/s, single-mode fiberoptic cable up to 26 km, BFOC interface

6GK5 491-2AC00-8AA2

Extender module EM495-8 Extender for SCALANCE X414-3E with 8 x 10/100 Mbit/s TP ports

6GK5 495-8BA00-8AA2

Extender module EM496-4 Extender for SCALANCE X414-3E with 4 slots for 100 Mbit/s MMs

6GK5 496-4MA00-8AA2

Order No. IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 RJ45 plug connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 180° cable outlet; for network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface • 1 pack = 1 piece

6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0

IE FC RJ45 Plug 145 RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 145° cable outlet; for SIMOTION and SINAMICS network components • 1 pack = 1 piece

6GK1 901-1BB30-0AA0


6GK1 901-1BB30-0AB0


6GK1 901-1BB30-0AE0


6GK1 900-0AB00

Replacement parts

IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet FastConnect RJ45 Outlet for Industrial Ethernet with interface for a replaceable insert;

CV490 cover set consisting of covers for: 1 x Gbit submodule slot, 1 x 100 Mbit/s submodule slot, 3 x 10/100 Mbit/s TP slot

6GK5 490-0AA00-0AA2

6GK5 498-0AA00-0AA0

6GK5 498-1AA00-0AA0

• With 2FE insert; replaceable insert for 2 x 100 Mbit/s interfaces

6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA1

Label sheet 10 sheets DIN A4, color: petrol, 10 strips/sheet, pre-perforated for printing with laser printer 10 sheets per pack

• With 1GE insert; replaceable insert for 1 x 1000 Mbit/s interfaces

6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA2

4-pole and 5-pole terminal set Straight, with locking lug

• With power insert; replaceable insert for 1 x 24 V DC and 1 x 100 Mbit/s interface

6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA3

2/118



Active Network Components — Industrial Ethernet Switches Industrial Ethernet ELS

■ Overview

■ Application ELS switches support low-cost construction of Industrial Ethernet line or star network topologies with switching functions. ELS switches are designed for installation in the control cabinet. Product versions ELS TP40 • They are used to construct Industrial Ethernet line topologies or small neutral points. • Device diagnostics with LEDs (power, link status, data communication). • Two RJ45 sockets are available for connecting stations and two interfaces with insulation-piercing contacts for direct connection of the Industrial Ethernet FC TP cables.

• The Electrical Lean Switches ELS TP40 / ELS TP40M are optimized for creating Industrial Ethernet networks with 10/100 Mbit/s in a line topology, but they can also be used as a single star point. • The ELS TP40s are connected to each other via the IE FC 2 x 2 by means of integral insulation-piercing contacts. • One or two stations or a station and a programming device are connected over two RJ45 sockets. • ELS TP40M with an additional integral Web server, SNMP access and e-mail function for remote diagnostics and signaling over the network. • The Electrical Lean Switch ELS TP80 is used to create networks with a star topology comprising up to 8 stations over RJ45 sockets or to expand the number of ports in OSM/ESM applications.

ELS TP40M • They are used to construct Industrial Ethernet line topologies or small star neutral points. • Device diagnostics and signaling with LEDs (power, link status, data communication) and remote diagnostics using a Web browser, SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) and E-mail function. • Two RJ45 sockets for connecting stations and two interfaces with insulation-piercing contacts for direct connection of the Industrial Ethernet FC TP cables ELS TP80 • Used to construct star structures or to extend the number of ports in conjunction with OSM/ESM or ELS TP40 applications. • Device diagnostics is possible with LEDs (power, link status, data communication). • Eight RJ45 sockets are available for connecting stations.

■ Benefits

• Ideal solution for configuring Ethernet line topologies • Simple wiring method using integrated FastConnect elements • Simple network configuration without propagation time calculation, also for very large lines • Simple diagnostics through integrated web server on the ELS TP40M • Simple integration of the ELS TP40M in an existing network management infrastructure through SNMP • Use of standard patch cables (uncrossed) is possible using the integrated autocrossover function


2/119

2



■ Application (continued) OSM TP 22

100 Mbit/s Switching cabinet S7-400

S7-300-1/MP 370

IE/PB Link

OSM TP 22 IE FC Outlet RJ45

ELS TP 40

ELS TP 40


ELS TP 40


G_IK10_XX_10116

FO-ring


2

Network topology with ELS TP40

■ Design

■ Function

The ELS modules in the rugged metal casing are suitable for simple mounting onto standard rails. All modules feature a 3-pole terminal block that is used to connect the supply voltage (24 V DC). The status information is indicated by means of a line of LEDs (power, link status, data communication). For ELS, the following port types are available: • 10/100BaseTX RJ45 RJ45 socket, automatic detection of the data transmission rate (10 or 100 Mbit/s), with Autosensing and Autocrossing function for connecting TP cables (e.g TP Cords). • 10/100BaseTX insulation-piercing contacts Insulation-piercing contact element for direct connection to IE FC Cables 2 x 2 up to 100 m with Autosensing and Autocrossing function for setting up line topologies.

2/120


• Configuring Industrial Ethernet line or star topologies. • Integral Autocrossing function of the ports which allows untwisted connecting leads to be used. • Load disconnection through integral switch functionality. • Simple network configuration and network expansion. Collision detection (CSMA/CD method) does not restrict the expansion of the network if ELS switches are cascaded. Network topology and network configuration The ELS TP40 switches are typically installed in a control cabinet with the stations to be connected. The control cabinets are interconnected in a line topology. When configuring the network, it is necessary to observe the following basic conditions: • Length of the TP cable between two ELSs, max. 100 m • Length of the TP cable to data terminal, max. 100 m • IP address: The IP address is assigned for ELS TP40M using the DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) mechanism. If an appropriate server is not available in the network, the IP address can be assigned using the supplied software tool or STEP 7.




2 ELS TP80

Industrial Ethernet ELS TP80

FC outlet RJ45

TP cord SIMATIC Field PG

10/100 Mbit/s Industrial Ethernet FC cable

Control cabinet

s POWER

SIMATIC PANEL PC

TEMP

A G

B H

C I

M

N

O

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

A

D

E

J

F

K

P

L

Q 7 4

R 8 5

1

2

.

0

9 6 3 +/-

INS DEL

ESC

TAB

ACK

HELP SHIFT

S7-400

S7-300

FN

CTRL ALT

ENTER

G_IK10_XX_10118

MP 370

Star network topology with ELS TP80

OSM TP62

ELS TP80

Industrial Ethernet ELS TP80

Control cabinet OSM TP62

Industrial Ethernet fiber optic TP cord

SIMATIC Field PG

FC outlet with FC TP cable

IE/PB Link S7-400

ET 200X

1

G_IK10_XX_10119

S7-400 / MP 370 0

PROFIBUS

Increasing the density of connections for OSM TP62


2/121



■ Function (continued) Commissioning and diagnosis The ELS offers different diagnostic functions: The following information is displayed by LEDs on the equipment: • Power • Port status • Data communication

The ELS TP40M can also be integrated in a network management system using the standardized SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) In the event of a fault in the device, the ELS TP40M can send error messages (SNMP traps) to a network system or as e-mail to a specified network manager. Diagnostic data for the device (statistical information) can also be obtained over the integral Web server using a standard browser.

Diagnosis of individual ELS by means of web browser through SIMATIC field PG

SNMP/web based management OSM TP 22

100 Mbit/s Cabinet S7-400

IE/PB Link

S7-300-1/MP 370

OSM TP 22 IE FC Outlet RJ45

ELS TP 40

ELS TP 40

Diagnostic access through the network electrical network optical network


Line network topology with ELS TP40M and diagnostic access

2/122


ELS TP 40

G_IK10_XX_10003

FO-ring


2




2

Electrical Lean Switch

ELS TP40/ELS TP40M

ELS TP80


10/100 Mbit/s

10/100 Mbit/s

Interfaces • Connection of stations • Connection of Industrial Ethernet FC TP cables • Connection for supply voltage

2 x RJ45 sockets (10/100 Mbit/s; TP) 2 x insulation displacement contacts (10/100 Mbit/s) 1 x 3-pole terminal block

8 x RJ45 sockets (10/100 Mbit/s; TP) -

Supply voltage

24 V DC (18 V … 32 V)

24 V DC (18 V … 32 V)

Current consumption

150 mA / 215 mA

150 mA


3.6 W / 5.2 W

3.6 W

Network extension parameter TP cable length

0 … 100 m, Industrial Ethernet FC Standard Cable GP 0 … 85 m Industrial Ethernet FC Marine/Trailing Cable 0 … 55 m with IE TP Torsion Cable or via Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ45 with 0 … 90 m Industrial Ethernet FC Standard Cable GP + 10 m TP Cord 0 … 75 m Industrial Ethernet FC Marine/Trailing Cable + 10 m TP Cord 0 … 45 m Industrial Ethernet TP Torsion Cable + 10 m TP Cord

0 … 90 m Industrial Ethernet FC Standard Cable GP + 10 m TP Cord 0 … 75 m Industrial Ethernet FC Marine/Trailing Cable + 10 m TP Cord

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature • Storage/transport temperature • Relative humidity during operation

0 °C … +60 °C -40 °C … +80 °C < 95 %

0 °C … +60 °C -40 °C … +80 °C < 95 %

Construction • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm • Weight • Assembly

145 x 126.5 x 62.5 950 g Standard rail

145 x 126.5 x 62.5 950 g Standard rail


IP20

IP20

Approvals • Radio interference level • Interference immunity • UL listing • CSA • FM • C-Tick • CE

EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-2 UL 1950 CSA C22.2 No. 950 FM 3611 AS/NZS 2064 (Class A) Yes

EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-2 UL 1950 CSA C22.2 No. 950 FM 3611 AS/NZS 2064 (Class A) Yes

■ Ordering data


Order No.

Order No.

ELS TP40 for Industrial Ethernet Electrical lean switch with two 10/100 Mbit/s insulation displacement connections for configuring a line topography and two 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports

6GK1 102-6AA00

ELS TP80 for Industrial Ethernet Electrical lean switch with eight 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports for star networks for increasing the connection density in conjunction with OSM/ESM

ELS TP40M for Industrial Ethernet Electrical lean switch with two 10/100 Mbit/s insulation displacement connections for configuring a line topography and two 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports and Web diagnosis functionality through SNMP

6GK1 102-6AB00

Manual for TP and fiber-optic networks Paper version Network architecture, components, configurations, installation guidelines

6GK1 102-7AA00

• German

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1


2/123


Active Network Components — Industrial Ethernet Switches Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM

2

■ Overview

■ Benefits

• Reliable communication due to very fast reconfiguration of the network in event of fault (<0.3 seconds) • Security of investment for existing networks due to - effortless connection of existing 10 Mbit/s data terminals or subnetworks to Fast Ethernet networks with 100 Mbit/s - enhanced performance thanks to load decoupling and a data rate of 100 Mbit/s • Easy network configuration without runtime calculation also for extremely large networks • High availability of the network due to: - redundant voltage feed - redundant network structures based on fiber-optic or Twisted Pair cables; redundancy manager and standby function are integrated • Flexible configuration of networks, the network topology can easily be adapted to the structure of the plant with OSM/ESM modules. • Simple monitoring and diagnosis by means of signaling contact, digital inputs, SNMP or e-mail • Low-maintenance operation thanks to fanless construction • The managed Industrial Ethernet OSM and ESM switches are used to construct Industrial Ethernet networks at the control level • The modules are interconnected (backbone) at 100 Mbit/s over - glass fiber-optic cables for OSM - twisted-pair cables for ESM • Connection of data terminals or network segments depending on the OSM/ESM type through - 2 to 8 Twisted Pair ports in RJ45 or 9-pole Sub D version with 10/100 Mbit/s - 3 or 8 fiber-optic ports with 100 Mbit/s • Integrated redundancy manager supports high-speed media redundancy also for large networks • Very easy network configuration and network extension without complex configuration rules or parameterization • SNMP and Web-based Management and RMON • Error signaling by e-mail • Integration of digital signals, e.g. door switch, temperature monitoring or signaling contacts into the management system by means of digital inputs

■ Application The Industrial Ethernet OSM (Optical Switch Module) and ESM (Electrical Switch Module) are used in the construction of switched networks with data transmission rates of 100 Mbit/s in the control level range, in which strict demands are placed on network availability and comprehensive diagnostics are required. In existing networks, load decoupling and thus increased network performance can be achieved by creating segments (subdividing a network into subnetworks/segments) and connecting these segments to an OSM/ESM. The redundancy manager integrated into OSM/ESM allows redundant Industrial Ethernet rings to be constructed in switching technology with high-speed media redundancy (reconfiguration time 0.3 seconds max.). The data transmission rate in the ring is 100 Mbit/s; for each ring, up to 50 Industrial Ethernet OSMs (optical ring) or ESMs (electrical ring) can be used. Apart from the 2 ring ports, OSM/ESM has other ports (with either RJ45, ITP or BFOC interfaces) to which data terminals or network segments can be connected. With Industrial Ethernet OSM BC08 and media converters Industrial Ethernet OMC TP11, "Fiber to the machine" concepts can be implemented, so that the advantages of optical transmission technology can be utilized both for the backbone area and for station connection: • High-speed station connection (100 Mbit/s Full Duplex) over Industrial Ethernet OSM BC08 and media converter Industrial Ethernet OMC TP11 (fiber-optic cable through to the control cabinet) in an environment subjected to strong electromagnetic fields • Bridging of large distances of up to 3 km between two OSM BC08 modules or from an OSM BC08 to a distant station • Equipotential bonding measures or lightning protection measures are not necessary thanks to fiber-optic cables. Industrial Ethernet OSM TP22 or ESM TP40 modules are ideal for installation in the control cabinet with 1 or 2 stations connected (low equipment density). With Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM (devices with 8 ports), several rings can be redundantly interconnected using the integrated standby function.

2/124




■ Application (continued) Apart from the 2 ring ports, Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM modules are equipped with other ports to which both data terminals and network segments can be connected. OSM/ESM offer the following three error signaling functions: • Over a signaling contact • Over SNMP (traps) • by e-mail Signals such as signaling contacts from PROFIBUS OLM or door contacts can be connected to Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM through digital inputs. These digital inputs can be monitored using network management functions (read out status, e-mail on status change, create trap or log table entry).

■ Design OSM/ESM have a stable metal casing. They are suitable for the following installation types: • Standard rail • Wall mounting • Mounting in 19-inch racks (when 2 modules are used) All modules have • a 6-pole terminal block for connecting the supply voltage (redundant 24 V DC infeed) and the floating signaling contact as well as • one or two 6-pole terminal blocks for connecting four digital inputs in each case The operating mode and status information are displayed by LEDs and a selection button. Modules with 8 ports also have a standby interface that is used to synchronize two modules when coupling redundant rings. Using the serial interface, Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM can be parameterized, diagnosed or upgraded to the latest firmware status. The firmware can also be upgraded over the network. Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM is available with 4 or 8 ports. They are equipped with the following types of ports depending on the variant: • Twisted Pair interface (RJ45); 10/100BaseTX : RJ45 socket, automatic data rate detection (10 or 100 Mbit/s) as well as automatic cross-over of the send/receive cables for connecting FC cables in the field to IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 of up to 100 m in length or TP Cords (max. length 10 m, in combination with IE FC Outlet RJ45s and IE FC cables up to 100 m) • Twisted Pair interface (Sub D); 10/100BaseTX: 9-pole Sub D socket, automatic data rate detection (10 or 100 Mbit/s) as well as automatic cross-over of the send/ receive circuits for connecting ITP cables (max. length 100 m) with Sub D connectors • Glass FOC: Multimode (MM);100BaseFX BFOC: 2 BFOC sockets per port, 100 Mbit/s data transmission rate, for connecting multimode fiber-optic cables in environments subjected to strong electro-magnetic fields and for distances of up to 3000 m between two Industrial Ethernet OSMs • Glass FOC: Singlemode (SM);100BaseFX BFOC: 2 BFOC sockets per port, 100 Mbit/s data transmission rate, for connecting singlemode fiber-optic cables in environments subjected to strong electro-magnetic fields and for distances of up to 26 km between two Industrial Ethernet OSM ITP62-LD modules.

■ Function

2

Enhancing network performance By filtering the data traffic on the basis of the Ethernet (MAC) address of the data terminals, the local data traffic remains local; only data to stations of another subnetwork is forwarded by the OSM/ESM. Simple network configuration and network expansion. The overall extension of the network can be up to 150 km with OSM or up to 5 km with ESM. The OSM/ESM saves the data received at the ports and forwards it independently to the destination address. Collision detection (CSMA/CD method) does not restrict the expansion of the network beyond the switch port. Limiting error propagation to the subnetwork concerned The OSM/ESM only passes on valid data. Integration of existing subnetworks at 10 Mbit/s in fast Ethernet networks at 100 Mbit/s The OSM/ESM automatically detects the data transmission rate at Twisted Pair ports (10 or 100 Mbit/s) as well as full-duplex or half-duplex mode. Fast redundancy in the ring (reconfiguration time of the ring is max. 0.3 seconds) The availability of the communication can be enhanced by closing an optical line with an OSM or an electrical line with an ESM to form a ring. OSM/ESM have an integral redundancy manager that continuously monitors the function of the network. It recognizes the failure of a transmission link in the ring or of a OSM/ESM and activates the standby link within no more than 0.3 seconds. Fast standby redundancy Several redundant rings can be reliably interconnected over the integrated standby function (in the case of OSM/ESM with 8 ports). For this purpose, two OSM or ESM modules belonging to one ring that are connected over a standby link are connected to the other ring over two separate connection paths. Digital inputs Simple integration of digital signals in SNMP-based network management. Autocrossover function on RJ45 ports On RJ45 ports, if required, Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM TP modules automatically cross over the send and receive circuits to the connected partner device. This means that twisted TP XP Cords are not necessary. The Autocrossover function requires that Autonegotiation is activated.


2/125



■ Function (continued) Module type

Twisted Pair (Sub D9) Autosensing 10/100 Mbit/s

Twisted Pair (RJ45) Autosensing 10/100 Mbit/s

Multimode fiber-optic cable (BFOC) 100 Mbit/s

Singlemode fiberoptic cable (BFOC) 100 Mbit/s

Signaling contact

Digital inputs

Web-based management & SNMP

RMON

E-mail

Configuration Save & Load

Firmware Load

Log Table Save

Mirror port

MAC filter

Access protection

Safety

LED on switch

Service

Standby

Redundancy

Ring

Type and number of ports

2 x 24 V DC

Typical applications

OSM TP22

–

2

2

–

■

■

–

■

■

4

■

–

■

■

■

■

■

–

■

OSM TP62

–

6

2

–

■

■

■

■

■

8

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

OSM ITP62

6

–

2

–

■

■

■

■

■

8

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Control Level

5

–

3

–

■

■

■

■

■

8

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

OSM ITP62-LD

6

–

–

2

■

■

■

■

■

8

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

OSM BC08

–

–

8

–

■

■

■

■

■

8

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

OSM ITP53

Industrial Ethernet OSM product variants

Twisted Pair (Sub D9) Autosensing 10/100 Mbit/s

Twisted Pair (RJ45) Autosensing 10/100 Mbit/s

Web-based management & SNMP

RMON

E-mail

Configuration Save & Load

Firmware Load

Log Table Save

Mirror port

MAC filter

Access protection

ESM ITP80

–

4

■

■

–

■

■

4

■

–

■

■

■

■

■

–

■

–

8

■

■

■

■

■

8

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

8

–

■

■

■

■

■

8

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Industrial Ethernet ESM product variants

2/126


Safety

Digital inputs

Control Level

Service

Signaling contact

ESM TP80

Redundancy

LED on switch

ESM TP40


Standby

Typical applications

Ring

Module type

2 x 24 V DC

2




2

Cabinet ESM TP80

S7-300 with CP 343-1

PC with CP 1613

ESM D

A

Patch panel with IE FC Outlet RJ45

IE FC Standard Cable max. 100 m

IE FC Standard Cable 2x2 max. 90m

B


IE FC RJ45 S7-300 with Plug 180 CP 343-1/ CP 343-1 Advanced

Max. cable length: D=A+C 10 m

A+B+C

100 m

IE FC Outlet RJ45

C

C S7-400 with CP 443-1/ CP 443-1 Advanced

S7-400 with CP 443-1/ CP 443-1 Advanced

A, C, D = IE TP Cord 2x2 B = IE FC Standard Cable

G_IK10_XX_10114

IE FC RJ45 Plug 180

Example of device connection with ESM

Network topology and network configuration The network topology can easily be adapted to the structure of the plant with OSM/ESM modules. The following network structures and combinations of structures can be implemented: • Optical line and star topology with OSM, SCALANCE X204-2 or SCALANCE X414-3E and optical-fiber media module 100 Mbit/s: The cascade depth and network extension are only limited by the signal propagation delay; the overall extension can be up to 150 km. • Electrical line and star topologies with ESM, SCALANCE X208 or SCALANCE X414-3E: The cascading depth and network extension are only limited by the signal propagation time, the overall network extension can be up to 5 km. • Structuring of existing networks by connecting individual subnetworks to OSM/ESM • Optical 100 Mbit/s rings with high-speed media redundancy (up to 50 Industrial Ethernet OSM, SCALANCE X204-2 or SCALANCE X414-3E per ring; reconfiguration time is max. 0.3 seconds) • Electrical 100 Mbit/s rings with high-speed media redundancy (up to 50 ESM, SCALANCE X208 or SCALANCE X414-3E per ring; reconfiguration time is max. 0.3 seconds) • Hierarchic redundant rings: Individual redundant rings (10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s) are connected over two OSM or ESM modules to a higher-level 100 Mbit/s ring. High-speed media redundancy can be achieved for the individual rings and for their redundant coupling.

When configuring the network, it is necessary to observe the following boundary conditions: • Maximum FOC length between two modules: 3000 m for multimode FOCs • Maximum length of the fiber-optic cable between two Industrial Ethernet OSM ITP62-LD modules: 26 km for singlemode FOCs • Maximum length of TP-Cord: 10 m; together with Outlets RJ45 and FC cables up to 100 m • Maximum length of the ITP cable with Sub-D connectors between 2 modules or to the station: 100 m. • Maximum length of the IE FC cable 2 x 2 with an IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 between two modules or to the station: 100 m Network configuration rules such as "Propagation time equivalence" and "Variability value" end at the port of the switch and have no influence on the cascading of switches.


2/127



■ Function (continued) Server

Operator Station

Engineering Station

Firm network PC

Industrial Ethernet

100 Mbit/s

PC


Standby connection S7-300



S7-300


100 Mbit/s

S7-300 Switch SCALANCE X208

S7-400

S7-400

PG

G_IK10_XX_10132

2

Optical and electrical ring, redundantly coupled

Commissioning and diagnosis The following settings can be made on the OSM/ESM module: • Redundancy manager RM • When setting up a ring, a module in the ring is switched into RM mode. • The non-ring ports of the RM can be used for the connection of data terminals and networks. • Standby function (for OSM/ESM with 8 ports) • In the case of a redundantly coupled ring, a module in the ring that is linked to the neighboring module over a standby link is switched to standby mode by means of a switch. • Signal mask; the signal mask is set to the current status of the module (setpoint) by pushbutton operation. The signal mask defines which ports and which voltage feeders are to be monitored. The signal contact only reports an error, if a monitored port or a monitored feeder fails (deviation of setpoint/actual status).

2/128


OSM/ESM features the following diagnostic functions: • The following status information is displayed by LEDs on site: - RM mode - standby mode (for OSM/ESM with 8 ports) - signal contact status - status of the two voltage feeders - port status - port mode (10/100 Mbit/s, full/half-duplex) - signal mask (setpoint status) - status of the digital inputs • The status of the signal contact is routed externally by means of floating relay contacts. This enables the module to be monitored via an input module from a controller. Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM can also be monitored by means of network management. The following interfaces are provided for this: • Locally on the module; over the serial interface and PC with terminal emulation per command line (CLI – Command Line Interface) • Remote via browser (Web-based management): Selection of OSM/ESM modules over the network from a PC with browser • Remotely over SNMP; integration of OSM/ESM over the network to a Network Management Station




2

Network management Network management offers the following functions: • Password-protected dialup for "Administrator" (read and write authorization) and "User" (read only) • Reading of version and status information • Setting the signal and standby mask and address information • Permanent parameterization of the ports and filter tables (filter tables only for OSM/ESM with 8 ports) • Output of statistical information • Diagnosis of data traffic by means of a parameterizable mirror port with a standard commercial network analyzer • Loading of new firmware or the configuration data via the network by a TFTP server • Saving the configuration data or log table via the network on a TFTP server

If faults occur in the network, the OSM/ESM can send error messages (traps) to a network management system or also e-mails to a predefined network administrator. Remote Monitoring (RMON) offers the following functions for OSM/ESM modules with 8 ports: The OSM/ESM can collect statistical data in accordance with RMON Standards 1 to 3. These include, for example, fault statistics that are kept for each port. This information can be read out from the OSM/ESM through Web-based management in the statistics sub-area.

■ Technical specifications Data transmission rate

10/100 Mbit/s

Interface variants

For variants, see table of device connections RJ45 socket (10/100 Mbit/s Autocrossover) or 9-pole Sub-D socket 1 x 6-pole plug-in terminal block

• Connection of data terminals or subnetworks (10/100 Mbit/s) • Connection for power supply and signaling contact • Connection for digital input signals and auxiliary power

1 x 6-pole pluggable terminal block for OSM TP22/ESM TP40) or 2 x 6-pole pluggable terminal block Input voltage: - rated value 24 V DC - for status "1": +13 ... +30 V - for status "0": -30 ... +3 V - max. input current: 8 mA

Power supply

2 x 24 V DC (18 V to 32 V DC)

Current consumption (at rated voltage)

1000 mA


20 W

Network expansion parameter • Cable length between 2 OSM ITP62/OSM TP62

• Cable length between 2 OSM ITP62-LD • Cable length with RJ45 connection method

• Cable length with Sub D connection method

0 to 3 km with 50/125 μm or 62.5/125 μm glass fiber; 1.0 dB/km at 1300 nm; 600 MHz*km 0 to 26 km with 10/125 μm or 9/125 μm glass fiber; 0.5 dB/km at 1300 nm; 0 to 100 m with FC RJ45 Plug 180 and FC cables 0 to 10 m with TP Cord 0 to 100 m with structured cabling (e.g. with Industrial Ethernet FC Outlet RJ45) 0 to 100 m

Cascading depth • Line/star topology • Redundant ring Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature • Storage/transport temperature • Relative humidity Construction • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm • Weight • Mounting Degree of protection Approvals • UL • CSA • FM

Any (dependant on signal propagation time only) 50 (for reconfiguration time < 0.3 s) 0 °C ... +60 °C (OSM ITP62-LD: 0 °C ... +55 °C) -20 °C ... +80 °C max. 95 % at +25 °C 217 x 156.5 x 69 approx. 1,400 g Standard rail, fixed mounting for 19" rack (in pairs) IP20

• C-Tick • CE

1950 CSA C22.2 No. 950 Class 1, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D AS/NZS 2064 (Class A) Use in industrial environments

Marine approvals

Germanische Lloyd (GL) Llyods Register of Shipping (LRS) Bureau Veritas (BV) Det Norske Veritas (DNV) American Bureau of Shipping Europe Ltd. (ABS) Europe Ltd. (ABS) Nippon Kaiji Kyokai (NK)


2/129



2

■ Ordering data

Order No.

Industrial Ethernet OSM ITP62 Optical Switch Module with 2 fiberoptic ports 100 Mbit/s, 6 ITP ports 10/100 Mbit/s and 8 digital inputs; redundant 24 V DC infeed and signaling contact; with network management

6GK1 105-2AA10

Industrial Ethernet OSM TP62 Optical Switch Module with 2 fiberoptic ports 100 Mbit/s, 6 RJ45 ports 10/100 Mbit/s and 8 digital inputs; redundant 24 V DC infeed and signaling contact; with network management

6GK1 105-2AB10

Industrial Ethernet OSM ITP62-LD Optical Switch Module with 2 fiberoptic ports 100 Mbit/s long distance (single mode FOC up to 26 km), 6 ITP ports 10/100 Mbit/s and 8 digital inputs; redundant 24 V DC infeed and signaling contact; with network management

6GK1 105-2AC10

Industrial Ethernet OSM ITP53 Optical Switch Module with 3 fiberoptic ports 100 Mbit/s, 5 ITP ports 10/100 Mbit/s and 8 digital inputs; redundant 24 V DC infeed and signaling contact; with network management

6GK1 105-2AD10

Industrial Ethernet OSM TP22 Optical Switch Module with 2 fiberoptic ports 100 Mbit/s, 2 RJ45 ports 10/100 Mbit/s and 4 digital inputs; redundant 24 V DC infeed and signaling contact; with network management

6GK1 105-2AE00

Industrial Ethernet OSM BC08 Optical Switch Module with 8 fiber-optic ports 100 Mbit/s and 8 digital inputs; redundant 24 V DC infeed and signaling contact; with network management

6GK1 105-4AA00

Industrial Ethernet ESM ITP80 Optical Switch Module with 8 ITP ports 10/100 Mbit/s and 8 digital inputs; redundant 24 V DC infeed and signaling contact; with network management

6GK1 105-3AA10

Industrial Ethernet ESM TP80 Optical Switch Module with 8 RJ45 ports 10/100 Mbit/s and 8 digital inputs; redundant 24 V DC infeed and signaling contact; with network management

6GK1 105-3AB10

2/130


Order No. Industrial Ethernet ESM TP40 Optical Switch Module with 4 RJ45 ports 10/100 Mbit/s and 4 digital inputs; redundant 24 V DC infeed and signaling contact; with network management

6GK1 105-3AC00

IE FC Outlet RJ45 For connection Industrial Ethernet FC cables and TP Cords; graded prices from 10 and 50 units

6GK1 901-1FC00 0AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0


6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1

ITP XP Standard Cable 9/9 ITP installation cable with two 9-pole Sub-D connectors for synchronizing two ESMs over the standby port for redundant coupling of subnetworks •2m

6XV1 850-0CH20

•5m

6XV1 850-0CH50

•8m

6XV1 850-0CH80

• 12 m

6XV1 850-0CN12

• 15 m

6XV1 850-0CN15

• 20 m

6XV1 850-0CN20

• 30 m

6XV1 850-0CN30

• 40 m

6XV1 850-0CN40


Active Network Components — Industrial Ethernet media converters SCALANCE X-100 unmanaged media converter

■ Overview

• The unmanaged Industrial Ethernet media converters of the SCALANCE X-100 product line are optimized for converting various transmission media in Industrial Ethernet networks operating at 10/100 Mbit/s in a line, star and ring topology • Electrical or optical connection to stations or network in accordance with the port type of the devices • Rugged metal housing for space-saving cubicle mounting on standard rails, S7-300 DIN rail or for wall mounting • Rugged, industry-standard station connections with PROFINET-compatible RJ45 connectors that offer additional strain relief and bending strain relief thanks to latching on the housing • Redundant power supply • Diagnostics on the device by means of LEDs (power, link status, data communication) • Error signaling contact with easy adjustment using the SET button • Connection of existing 10 Mbit/s fiber optic networks • Connection of existing 10Base5 networks (e.g. SINEC H1)

■ Benefits

2

• Ideal solution for converting various transmission media in Industrial Ethernet line, star and ring topologies • Space-saving installation in the cabinet thanks to the compact design in S7-300 format • Secure data communication by means of industry-standard device interface using PROFINET-compliant plug-in connector IE FC RJ45 Plug and additional strain relief by latching the connector to the housing • Integration of existing 10Base FL and/or 10Base5 networks • Cost savings, since installation is possible without a patch field by means of IE FC RJ45 Plug and IE FC Standard Cable • Simple and fast diagnostics via LED on device and signaling contact • Uncrossed connecting cables can be used due to the integrated Autocrossover function • Simple network configuration without runtime calculation

■ Application The unmanaged media converters of the SCALANCE X-100 product line permit low-cost conversion of various transmission media within Industrial Ethernet line, star and ring topologies. They are designed for installation in the control cabinet. Single, remote terminal units on network segments can be linked via the optical path of the SCALANCE X-100 media converters. Integration of an optical path into a redundant ring is also possible, as well as installation of the SCALANCE X-100 media converters into a standby link. Product versions SCALANCE X101-1 and SCALANCE X101-1LD, SCALANCE X101-1POF, SCALANCE X101-1FL and SCALANCE X101-1AUI • For converting electrical signals into optical signals in Industrial Ethernet line, star and ring topologies • The Industrial Ethernet media converters SCALANCE X101-1 and SCALANCE X101-1LD have an - electrical 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 Port • SCALANCE X101-1 - a 100 Mbit/s multimode interface with BFOC connections • SCALANCE X101-1LD - a 100 Mbit/s single mode interface with BFOC connections • SCALANCE X101-1POF - a 100 Mbit/s plastic optical fiber interface with SC-RJ connections • SCALANCE X101-1AUI - a 10 Mbit/s AUI interface with Sub-D connections • SCALANCE X101-1FL - a 10 Mbit/s multimode interface with BFOC connections • Redundant power supply with 2 x 24 V DC • Device diagnostics on the device by means of LEDs (power, link status, data communication) and signaling contact (signaling mask can be set on site using buttons) • The electric RJ45 socket is industry-standard and features additional retaining collars for connection to the IE FC RJ45 Plugs


2/131



■ Design The SCALANCE Industrial Ethernet media converters with a rugged metal housing are optimized for mounting on a standard rail and an S7-300 DIN rail. Direct wall mounting in various positions is also possible. Due to the housing dimensions that correspond to those of the S7-300, the devices are ideally suited for integration into an automation solution using S7-300 components. The SCALANCE X-100 media converters feature: • a 4-pin terminal block for connecting the redundant power supply (2 x 24 V DC) • a row of LEDs for displaying status information (power, link status, data communication, signaling contact) • a 2-pole terminal block for connecting the floating signaling contact • a SET button for local configuration of the signaling contact and of cascading mode

The following port types are available: • 10/100BaseTX, RJ45 connector: RJ45 connector, automatic detection of the data rate (10 or 100 Mbit/s), with Autosensing and Autocrossover function for connecting IE FC cables via IE FC RJ45 Plugs over distances up to 100 m • 100BaseFX, BFOC connections with glass fiber optic cable: BFOC sockets for direct connection to Industrial Ethernet glass fiber optic cables up to 3000 m or 26000 m for configuring line, star or ring topologies. • 100BaseFX, SC RJ connections with plastic fiber optic cable: SC RJ sockets for direct connection to Industrial Ethernet plastic fiber optic cables up to 50 m for configuring line, star or ring topologies. • 10BaseFL, BFOC connections with glass fiber optic cable: BFOC sockets for direct connection to Industrial Ethernet glass fiber optic cables up to 3000 m for configuring line, star or ring topologies. • AUI, 15-pin Sub-D connector: 15-pin Sub-D socket for connecting an Industrial Ethernet AUI cable (connecting cable 727-1/drop cable) to 50 m.

■ Function • Configuring electrical and optical Industrial Ethernet line, star or ring topologies • Uncrossed connecting cables can be used due to Autocrossover function integrated in the TP ports

• Easy configuration and extension of the network; no limits to network extension when switches or media converters of the SCALANCE X-100 family are cascaded. • Integration of existing 10Base FL and/or 10Base5 networks


SCALANCE X101-1LD SCALANCE X101-1POF SCALANCE X101-1AUI

OMC TP11

1

OMC TP11LD

1

Ring redundancy without RM

1 1

1 1

Multimode BFOC

1

1

SCALANCE X101-1FL

AUI

1

1

1

10 Mbit/s Singlemode BFOC

Local display (SET button)

Multimode BFOC

1 1 1

G_IK10_XX_10137

SCALANCE X101-1

100 Mbit/s POF / PCF

Signal contact

Module type

RJ45

2 x 24 V DC

Fast Ethernet 10 / 100 Mbit/s

SIMATIC environment

Fiber Optic

LED diagnosis

Twisted Pair

Features

Compact housing

2

Function overview of Industrial Ethernet media converters

Network topology and network configuration The SCALANCE X-100 media converters are typically accommodated in one control cabinet together with the nodes to be connected. They can be installed in line, star and ring topologies. When configuring the network, it is necessary to observe the following boundary conditions: • Length of the TP cable between two SCALANCE X media converters: - max. 100 m with Industrial Ethernet FastConnect products

2/132


• Length of the optical cables: - max. 3000 m with Industrial Ethernet multimode fiber-optic cables. - max. 26000 m with Industrial Ethernet singlemode fiber-optic cables. - max. 50 m with Industrial Ethernet POF fiber optic cables. • Length of the AUI cable: - max. 50 m with Industrial Ethernet connecting cable 727-1 (AUI drop cable)




2 SCALANCE X-400

S7-300 with CP 343-1


Industrial Ethernet Industrial Ethernet

Access Point SCALANCE W-788-1PRO

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X101-1 or X101-1 LD

SCALANCE X206-1



ET 200S

ET 200S

ET 200S

ET 200S

ET 200S

G_IK10_XX_10056

Optical star topology with SCALANCE X101-1/X101-1LD and remote SCALANCE W Access Point

S7-300 with CP 343-1

S7-200 with CP 243-1

IE/PB Link

Switch SCALANCE X108 IE FC RJ45 Plug

SCALANCE X101-1





G_IK10_XX_10055



Switching cabinet

Electrical and optical linear topology with SCALANCE X101-1


2/133



■ Function (continued) S7-400

S7-300 S7-400 S7-300 SCALANCE X204IRT


S7-400

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X208

S7-300

SCALANCE X208 IPC

PC S7-400

G_IK10_XX_10054

SCALANCE X101-1 or X101-1LD

IPC

Mixed ring topology with twisted-pair and fiber optic cables

S7-400 S7-300 Switch SCALANCE X-400


S7-400

Industrial Ethernet

S7-300

PC

SCALANCE X 204-2

PC PC

SCALANCE X101-1LD

S7-400

G_IK10_XX_10052

2

Mixed ring topology with fiber optic and twisted-pair cables

2/134





2 Operator Station

Operator Stations

S7-300

SCALANCE X204-2

SCALANCE X204-2

100 Mbit/s

SCALANCE X-400

S7-300

Stand-by master

S7-300

Stand-by slave SCALANCE X101-1 or X101-1LD

SCALANCE X204-2

SCALANCE X204-2

100 Mbit/s PC SCALANCE X204-2

S7-300

IPC

S7-300

G_IK10_XX_10047

HMI

SCALANCE X202-2IRT as redundancy manager

Optical redundant connection of two optical rings with SCALANCE X101-1 or SCALANCE X101-1LD


2/135



■ Function (continued) Media-Converter SCALANCE X101-1POF

HMI


ET 200pro

POFLWL PROFINET

POF-FO cable

POF-FO cable

IE Standard Cable

POF-FO cable

Industrial Ethernet





ET 200S with IM 151-3 PN FO Network structure with plastic fiber optic cabling

SIMATIC S7-400 with CP 443-1 IE Standard Cable Industrial Ethernet


Industrial Ethernet OLM

Industrial Ethernet OLM

Industrial Ethernet OLM Fiber Optic

Media-Converter SCALANCE X101-1FL

SIMATIC S5 with CP 1430

PC with CP 1413

HMI


PC with CP 1413

HMI

Connection of a 10BaseFL segment to Industrial Ethermet (10/100 Mbit/s) with SCALANCE X101-1FL

2/136



PC with CP 1413

HMI

G_IK10_XX_10175

2




2

Diagnostics data The following information is displayed on site by LEDs: • Power • Port status • Data traffic


The Industrial Ethernet media converters of the SCALANCE X-100 product line can also be monitored using the floating signaling contact. Two media converters of the same type can be connected in cascading mode.

IE Standard Cable Switch SCALANCE X108 Connecting cable 727-1 (AUI Dropcable) Media-Converter SCALANCE X101-1AUI

10Base5-Segment

Bus coupler incl. Medium Attachment Unit

G_IK10_XX_10174

Industrial Ethernet

Connection of a 10Base5 segment (e.g. SINEC H1) to Industrial Ethermet (10/100 Mbit/s) with SCALANCE X101-1FL


2/137



2


SCALANCE X101-1

SCALANCE X101-1LD

Transmission rates

10/100 Mbit/s

10/100 Mbit/s


1 x RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s; TP)

1 x RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s; TP)


2 x BFOC sockets (multimode)

1 x BFOC socket (single mode)







Supply voltage

24 V DC 18 … 32 V

24 V DC 18 … 32 V

Current consumption

120 mA

120 mA


3W

3W

• 0 ... 100 m

IE FC Standard Cable GP with IE FC RJ45 Plug or through IE FC Outlet RJ45 with 0 … 90 m IE FC Standard Cable GP + 10 m TP Cord

IE FC Standard Cable GP with IE FC RJ45 Plug or through IE FC Outlet RJ45 with 0 … 90 m IE FC Standard Cable GP + 10 m TP Cord

• 0 … 85 m

IE FC Marine/Trailing Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or 0 … 75 m IE FC Marine/Trailing Cable + 10 m TP Cord

IE FC Marine/Trailing Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or 0 … 75 m IE FC Marine/Trailing Cable + 10 m TP Cord

• 0 … 55 m

IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or 0 … 45 m IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC Outlet RJ45 + 10 m TP cord

IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or 0 … 45 m IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC Outlet RJ45 + 10 m TP cord

• 0 … 3.000 m

Cable length with multimode glass-fiber cable with 50/125 mm or 62.5/125 mm at 600 MHz.km with 1.0 dB/km at 1300 nm

-

• 0 … 26,000 m

-

Cable length with single mode glass-fiber cable with 10/125 mm with 0.5 dB/km at 1300 nm

-10° C … +60 °C

-10° C … +60 °C

• Storage and transport temperature -40° C … +80 °C

-40° C … +80 °C

Interfaces

Cable length

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature Relative humidity

95%

95%


40 x 125 x 124

40 x 125 x 124

• Weight

0.55 kg

0.55 kg

• Assembly



IP degree of protection

IP30

IP30





EN 61000-6-4

EN 61000-6-4

• FM

FM 3611

FM 3611

• CuL listing

UL 60950, CSA C22.2 No. 60950

UL 60950, CSA C22.2 No. 60950

• C-Tick



• ATEX Zone 2

EN 50021

EN 50021

• CE

EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4

EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4

2/138





SCALANCE X101-1POF

SCALANCE X101-1FL

SCALANCE X101-1AUI

Transfer rates

10/100 Mbit/s

10 Mbit/s

10 Mbit/s

2

Interfaces • Communication connection, electrical

1 x RJ45 socket (10/100 Mbit/s; TP) 1 x RJ45 socket (10/100 Mbit/s; TP) 1 x RJ45 socket (10/100 Mbit/s; TP); 1x 15-pin Sub D socket for connecting to cable 727-1 (AUI drop cable)


1 x SC-RJ POF

1 x BFOC multimode

• Electrical interfaces for power supply




• Electrical interfaces for signaling contact




Supply voltage

24 V, 18 … 32 V

24 V, 18 … 32 V

24 V, 18 … 32 V

Input current

0.12 A

0.12 A

0.16 A

Power loss at 24 V with DC

3.0 W

3.0 W

3.0 W

• 0 ... 100 m

IE FC Standard Cable GP with IE FC RJ45 Plug or through IE FC Outlet RJ45 with 0 ... 90 m IE FC Standard Cable GP + 10 m TP Cord



• 0 … 85 m

IE FC Marine/Trailing Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or 0 ... 75 m IE FC Marine/Trailing Cable + 10 m TP Cord



• 0 … 55 m

IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC RJ45 Plug or 0 ... 45 m IE TP Torsion Cable with IE FC Outlet RJ45 + 10 m TP Cord



• 0 … 3.000 m

–

–

Cable length with multimode glass fiber cable with 50/125 mm or 62.5/125 mm at 600 MHz.km with 1.0 dB/km at 1300 nm or with 3 db/km at 850 nm (X101-1FL)

• 0 … 26,000 m

–

–

–

• 0 ... 50

Cable length in the case of plastic optical fiber with 980/1000 μm POF with 230 dB/km at 660 nm

Cable length in the case of connecting cable 727-1 (AUI drop cable)

–

Cable length

Ambient temperature • During operation

-10 ... +60 °C

-10 ... +60 °C

-10 ... +60 °C

• During storage/During transport

-40 ... +80 °C

-40 ... +80 °C

-40 ... +80 °C

Maximum relative humidity at 25°C during operation

95%

95%

95%


40 x 125 x 124

40 x 125 x 124

40 x 125 x 124

• Net weight

0.55 kg

0.55 kg

0,55 kg

• Type of mounting





IP30

IP30

IP30






EN 61000-6-4

EN 61000-6-4

EN 61000-6-4

• FM

FM 3611

FM 3611

FM 3611

• CuL listing

UL 60950, CSA C22.2 Nr. 60950

UL 60950, CSA C22.2 Nr. 60950

UL 60950, CSA C22.2 Nr. 60950

• C-Tick




• ATEX Zone 2

EN 50021

EN 50021

EN 50021

• CE

EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4

EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4

EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4


2/139



2

■ Ordering data

Order No.

SCALANCE X-100 unmanaged media converter Industrial Ethernet media converters, LED diagnostics, fault signaling contact with SET key, redundant power supply, PROFINET-compatible securing collars

Accessories IE FC RJ45 Plugs RJ45 plug connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables;

• SCALANCE X101-1 1 x 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 Port 1 x 100 Mbit/s multimode BFOC

6GK5 101-1BB00-2AA3

• SCALANCE X101-1LD 1 x 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 Port 1 x 100 Mbit/s singlemode BFOC

6GK5 101-1BC00-2AA3

• SCALANCE X101-1POF 1 x 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 Port 1 x 100 Mbit/s POF SC RJ

6GK5 101-1BH00-2AA3

• SCALANCE X101-1AUI 1 x 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 Port 1 x 10 Mbit/s AUI segment port

6GK5 101-1BX00-2AA3

• SCALANCE X101-1FL 1 x 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 Port 1 x 10 Mbit/s multimode BFOC

6GK5 101-1BY00-2AA3

2/140


Order No.

IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 180° cable outlet; for network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface • 1 pack = 1 item

6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0


6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1


Active Network Components — Industrial Ethernet media converters Industrial Ethernet OMC TP11 and TP11-LD

■ Overview

■ Application The optical media converters OMC TP11 and OMC TP11-LD for Industrial Ethernet enable selective use of FOC in Industrial Ethernet networks. 100 Mbit/s full duplex twisted pair interfaces of terminals or network components are converted to FOC interfaces with OMC. This allows implementation of the following applications: • Connection of an individual remote terminal or a remote subnetwork through FOC to an Industrial Ethernet network. Maximum FOC lengths are as follows: - with multimode FOC and OMC TP11 3 km or - with OMC TP11-LD and monomode FOC 26 km. • Integration of an FOC line in a redundant ring with ESM through the interconnection of two OMCs and FOC Equipotential bonding measures or lightning protection measures are not necessary when using OMC and FOC.

• Industrial Ethernet OMC TP11 and OMC TP11-LD optical media converters convert the electrical Twisted Pair interface into an optical interface and therefore enable the targeted use of fiber optic-cables • Optical connection of OMC TP11 media converters to other OMC TP11s or to OSM TPs through the fiber-optic port (BFOC sockets) with multimode glass FOCs up to 3 km in length at a transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s • Monomode variant OMC TP11-LD supports monomode fiberoptic cables of up to 26 km in length to other OMC TP11-LD converters • Electrical connection of data terminals capable of 100 Mbit/s to the RJ45 port of OMC TP11 or OMC TP11-LD using TP Cords up to 6 m in length • Can be combined with OSM/ESM in a redundant ring or in standby configurations • Integration of the media converters in the plant monitoring system using the signaling contact

■ Benefits

• Media redundancy of OSM/ESM is maintained through interconnection of OMC. • High availability through redundant power supply. • Simple monitoring and diagnostics through signal contact. • Equipotential bonding measures or lightning protection equipment is not required due to use of fiber-optic cables

The OMCs forward fail-state characteristics that they recognize at one port to other ports. For this reason they can be integrated in redundant rings or between rings on redundant connection routes (connection of OMC to the coupling or ring port of an OSM TP/ESM). The reliability performance of the media converters can be monitored through the signal contact.

■ Design The Industrial Ethernet OMCs TP11 and TP11-LD are equipped with an industry-standard metal housing. It is suitable for the following types of assembly: • DIN standard mounting rail • Wall mounting OMC has a 6-pin terminal block for connecting the supply voltage (redundant 24 V DC incoming supply) and the isolated signal contact. The signal contact can be monitored through an input module by a controller. LEDs display the following information: • Signal contact status • State of both 24 V incoming feeders L1 and L2 • Link state/data port 1 and port 2 The Industrial Ethernet OMC TP11 has the following interfaces: • 100BaseTX: RJ45 socket, 100 Mbit/s data rate, for the connection of TP Cords or TP XP Cords of up to 6 m in length. • 100BaseFX BFOC: 2 BFOC sockets, transmission speed 100 Mbit/s, for connection of multimode FOCs up to 3000 m in length per line segment or for connection of monomode FOCs up to 26 km in length per line segment with OMC TP11-LD.

■ Function • Conversion of twisted pair signals (100 Mbit/s) to optical signals (100 Mbit/s) and vice versa. • Signaling of operating parameters for 100 Mbit/s full duplex operation to twisted pair interface during link setup. • Electrical connection of OMC to network components (e.g. OSM/ESM) through crossed twisted pair patch cable (TP XP Cord; max. 6 m) • Electrical connection of OMC to data terminals (e.g. S7-400 with CP 443-1) through uncrossed twisted pair patch cable (TP Cord; max. 6 m).


2/141

2



■ Integration Fiber optic connection in the redundant ring with ESM

O M C

10/100 Mbit/s

ESM

ESM

ESM ESM

Industrial Ethernet OMC TP11

100 Mbit/s max. 6 m TP XP cord

OSM TP62

PC

Remote subnet

OSM

ESM ESM ESM


O M C

ESM Industrial Ethernet OMC TP11

100 Mbit/s fiber optic max. 3 km/26 km


ESM ESM

TP XP cord max. 6 m

100 Mbit/s

Remote node Industrial Ethernet OMC TP11

S7-400

S7-300

Configuration example for OMC

2/142


S7-400

O M C

100 Mbit/s max. 6 m TP cord

G_IK10_XX_10123

2




■ Ordering data 100 Mbit/s

Interfaces

OMC TP11 for Industrial Ethernet Optical Media Converter RJ45 on multimode fiber-optic cable (BFOC) with 100 Mbit/s up to 3 km; redundant 24 V DC incoming supply and signal contact;

6GK1 100-2AB00

OMC TP11-LD for Industrial Ethernet Optical Media Converter RJ45 on monomode fiber-optic cable (BFOC) with 100 Mbit/s up to 26 km; redundant 24 V DC incoming supply and signal contact;

6GK1 100-2AC00

• Electrical connection of data terminals or network components

RJ45 socket (100 Mbit/s; 100BaseTX) for connection of TP Cords or TP XP Cords up to 6 m in length

• Optical connection to additional OMC or OSM TP

2 BFOC sockets (100 Mbit/s; 100BaseFX) for multimode (OMC TP11) or for monomode (OMC TP11-LD)

• Connection for power supply and signaling contact

1 x 6-pole plug-in terminal block, can be screwed

Power supply

2 x DC 24 V (18 V to 32 V)

Current input at rated voltage

250 mA


5W

Terminal connection TP Cord RJ45/RJ45 TP connecting cable with 2 RJ45 connectors

• TP cable length

0 to 6 m with TP Cord

• 0.5 m

6XV1 850-2GE50

• Optical-fiber cable length between two OMC TP11s or between an OSM and OMC TP11

0 to 3 km (62.5/125 μm glass fiber; 1.0 dB/km at 1300 nm; 600 MHz*km)

•1m

6XV1 850-2GH10

•2m

6XV1 850-2GH20

•6m

6XV1 850-2GH60

0 to 26 km (10/125 μm or 9/125 μm glass fiber; 0.5 dB/km at 1300 nm)

TP Cord RJ45/15 TP cord with one 15-pin Sub-D connector and one RJ45 connector

Network expansion parameter

• Optical-fiber cable length between two OMC TP11-LDs or between an OSM ITP62-LD and OMC TP11-LD Perm. ambient conditions

• 0.5 m

6XV1 850-2LE50


0 °C to +60 °C

•1m

6XV1 850-2LH10


-25 °C to +80 °C

•2m

6XV1 850-2LH20

• Relative humidity during operation < 95 %

•6m

6XV1 850-2LH60


54 x 136.5 x 69

• Weight

350 g

• Mounting

Standard rail, fixed installation

Network component connection TP XP Cord RJ45/RJ45 Twisted TP cable with 2 RJ45 connectors


IP20

• 0.5 m

6XV1 850-2HE50

Approvals

2

Order No.

•1m

6XV1 850-2HH10

• UL

1950

•2m

6XV1 850-2HH20

• CSA

CSA C22.2 No. 950

•6m

6XV1 850-2HH60

• FM

Class 1, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D

• C-Tick


• CE

Use in industrial environments

TP XP Cord 9/RJ45 Twisted TP cord with one 9-pin Sub-D connector and one RJ45 connector • 0.5 m

6XV1 850-2ME50

•1m

6XV1 850-2MH10

•2m

6XV1 850-2MH20

•6m

6XV1 850-2MH60


2/143


Industrial Security Overview

■ Overview WAN

Production service computer with SOFTNET Security Client software Host computer with SOFTNET Security Client software

Firewall PC with SOFTNET Security Client software

Server

MES level

PC

Security Module SCALANCE S Office level

PC

Server



Automation network

PROFINET

PROFINET

Industrial Ethernet Security Module SCALANCE S

Industrial Ethernet Security Module SCALANCE S

Security Module SCALANCE S

Panel PC Control & Monitoring

Robot cells

Automation cell

Robot cell

G_IK10_XX_30010

Secure access (VPN tunnel)

2

Secure communication with SCALANCE S

Modern automation technology is based on communication and the trend toward increased networking of individual manufacturing islands. It is becoming more and more important to integrate all the manufacturing components into a uniform network that merges with the office network and the corporate Intranet. There is also a requirement for remote access for servicing, the increasing use of IT mechanisms such as Web servers and e-mail with programmable controllers as well as the use of wireless LANs. In this manner, industrial communication interacts more and more with the IT environment and is now subjected to the same dangers that are well-known from the office and IT environment, such as hackers, viruses, worms and Trojans. The current security concepts are tailored to the office world and require constant administration and specialist knowledge. They are not usually conversant with the special protocol landscape of industrial communication and are not designed to withstand the harsh environmental conditions. With its security concept, Siemens offers a safety solution specially designed for industrial automation engineering that satisfies the specific requirements of this application environment.

Advantages of industrial security concept: • Protection from espionage and data manipulation • Protection against overloading of the communication system • Protection against mutual interference • Protection against addressing mistakes • User-friendly and simple configuration and administration without specialist knowledge of IT security • No changes or modification of the existing network structure are necessary • No changes or modification of the existing applications or network stations are necessary • Rugged, industry-compatible design SCALANCE S security modules offer a scaleable security functionality: • Firewall for protecting the programmable controllers from unauthorized access regardless of the size of the network to be protected. • Supplementary or alternative VPN (Virtual Private Network) for reliable authentication of the communication partners and encryption of the transmitted data SOFTNET Security Client for secure access of PCs/notebooks to programmable controllers protected by SCALANCE S.

2/144



Industrial Security SCALANCE S

■ Overview

• Security modules for the protection of automation networks and security during data exchange between automation systems. • Communication is only possible between authenticated and authorized devices - protection against operator mistakes - prevention of unauthorized access - prevention of faults and communications overload • Easier handling thanks to minimal configuration and no special knowledge of IT security is required • No modification or adaptation of the existing network structure, applications or stations is required • Safeguarding of communication is independent of the protocol (e.g. PROFINET or other Ethernet-based fieldbus solutions) • Module replacement without the need for a programming device, using the C-PLUG swap media for backing up the configuration data (not included in the scope of supply) SCALANCE S602 • Basic version with firewall functionality • In addition to bridge mode, can also be operated in router mode and can therefore also be used directly at IP subnet limits • Address translation - NAT (Network Address Translation) permits the use of private IP addresses in the internal network in that public IP addresses are converted to private ones - NAPT (Network Address and Port Translation) permits the use of private IP addresses in the internal network in that frames are converted to private IP addresses depending on the communications port used • Internal network nodes can receive their IP addresses from the integral DHCP server • Log files can also be evaluated by the Syslog server • Simple and fast configuration of the firewall through global firewall rules and symbolic names for IP addresses

■ Benefits

2

• Access protection can be implemented for any devices in Ethernet networks • Problem-free integration into existing networks since it is unnecessary to reconfigure any end stations or introduce new IP subnets • High flexibility through optional operation as bridge or with router function • Use of private IP addresses possible in the internal network through NAT (Network Address Translation) or NAPT (Network Address and Port Translation) functionality; public IP addresses can therefore be saved, and automation cells can be designed identically with the same private IP addresses. • Automatic reading out of log files using Syslog server • Simple and fast startup; firewall rules which are to apply to several SCALANCE S devices can be combined in global firewall rules. • Assignment of symbolic names to IP addresses simplifies the configuration and readability of the firewall rules • Rugged, industry-compatible design tailored to the requirements in an industrial environment • Device replacement without programming devices, as all information is stored on the replaceable C-PLUG (even file system for IT functions).

■ Application The security modules of the SCALANCE S range can be used to protect all devices of an Ethernet network against unauthorized access. In addition, SCALANCE S612 and SCALANCE S613 also protect the data transmission between devices or network segments (e.g. automation cells) against data manipulation and espionage. SCALANCE S is optimized for use in automation and industrial environments, and meets the specific requirements of automation systems, such as easy upgrades of existing systems, simple installation and minimal downtimes in the event of a fault. Note: You can obtain support regarding the special features of WAN connections and company firewalls/security infrastructures from your local contact. Technical advice on this subject is available from: I&S Security Service Customer Care Desk Tel.: +49(0)9131-7-28811 E-mail: [email protected]

SCALANCE S612 and SCALANCE S613 • Encryption of data transmission - protection against espionage - protection against unauthorized manipulation


2/145



2

■ Function Security functions VPN (Virtual Private Network) (only for SCALANCE S612 and SCALANCE S613); for reliable authentication (identification) of the network stations, for encrypting the data and checking data integrity. • Authentication; All incoming data traffic is monitored and checked. As IP addresses can be falsified (IP spoofing), checking the IP address (of the client access) is not sufficient. In addition, Client PCs may have changing IP addresses. For this reason the authentication is performed by means of tried and tested VPN mechanisms. • Data encryption; Secure encryption is necessary in order to protect data communication from espionage and unauthorized manipulation. This means that the data traffic remains incomprehensible to any eavesdropper in the network. The SCALANCE Security Module establishes VPN tunnels to other Security Modules for this purpose. Firewall; Can be used as an alternative or to supplement VPN with flexible access control. The firewall filters data packets and disables or enables communications links in accordance with the filter list (packet filter firewall). Both incoming and outgoing communication can be filtered, IP and MAC addresses, as well as communication protocols (ports). • Logging; access data are saved by the Security Module in a log file. Detection of how, when and by whom it has been accessed is as important as detecting access attempts, to ensure that appropriate preventative measures can be taken.

2/146


Versions: • SCALANCE S602; uses Stateful Inspection Firewall to protect network segments against unauthorized access • SCALANCE S612; uses Stateful Inspection Firewall to protect network segments against unauthorized access; protects up to 32 devices using VPN tunnels (up to 64 VPN tunnels simultaneously) • SCALANCE S613; uses Stateful Inspection Firewall to protect network segments against unauthorized access protects up to 64 devices using VPN tunnels, (up to 128 VPN tunnels simultaneously) extended temperature range from -20 °C º +70 °C Configuring Configuring is simple to carry out even without special IT knowledge. Only the Security Modules or SOFTNET Security Clients that have to communicate with each other securely have to be created and configured. All the configuration data can be saved on the optional C-PLUG swap media (not included in scope of supply) so that the Security Module can be replaced quickly in the event of a fault and without the need of a programming device.




2

Configuration

Remote access

Office environment Office PC

ROBCAD PC

Test systems

Process Virus data protection recording server

File server archive

Print server

DHCP DNS server

Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE X414-3E with layer 3-functions (IP routing)

SCALANCE X414-3E with layer 3-functions (IP routing)

SCALANCE X414-3E

SCALANCE S602

Plant PC

Adhesive bead monitoring

Bolt PC

Laser PC

Plant PC

SCALANCE S602 Adhesive bead monitoring Laser PC

Bolt PC

Plant cells

Vehicle body production network

Syslog server

Robot S7-400 with CP 443-1

Bolt Programming Screwdriver controller device

Welding controller

Programming Screwdriver Bolt controller device

Robot S7-400 with CP 443-1

Welding controller

G_IK_XX_30043

Factory network

Printer

Factory computer center

Plant network protected by SCALANCE S

Internal network



Internal network

G_IK10_XX_10083

External "insecure" network

Secure communication with SCALANCE S


2/147



2


■ Ordering data 10/100 Mbit/s

Interfaces • External network (red port)

1 x RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s; TP)

• Internal network (green port)

1 x RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s; TP)





Supply voltage

24 V DC (20.4 … 28.8 V)

Current consumption

130 mA at 24 V

Power loss

approx. 3 W

Permissible ambient conditions • Operating temperature - SCALANCE S602 and S612 - SCALANCE S613

0 °C … +60 °C -20 °C … +70 °C


-40 °C … +85 °C

• Relative humidity during operation < 95% (at 30 °C) Design • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm

60 x 125 x 124

• Weight

approx. 0.7 kg

Assembly

• For snapping onto a standard mounting rail • Screw-mounting onto S7-300 subrack and onto horizontal and vertical surfaces


IP30

Performance data Number of VPN connections that can be operated simultaneously • SCALANCE S612

max. 64

• SCALANCE S613

max. 128

Number of internal nodes with VPN connections • SCALANCE S612

max. 32

• SCALANCE S613

max. 64

Approvals • FM

FM 3611

• CuL listing

UL 60950, CSA C22.2 No. 60950

• C-Tick


• ATEX Zone 2

EN 50021

• CE

EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4

2/148


Industrial Security Modules SCALANCE S For protection of programmable controllers and automation networks, and for safeguarding of industrial communication; configuring tool and electronic manual on CD-ROM German, English, French, Italian, Spanish • SCALANCE S602 uses Stateful Inspection Firewall to protect network segments against unauthorized access • SCALANCE S612 uses Stateful Inspection Firewall to protect network segments against unauthorized access; protects up to 32 devices, up to 64 VPN tunnels simultaneously • SCALANCE S613 uses Stateful Inspection Firewall to protect network segments against unauthorized access; protects up to 64 devices, up to 128 VPN tunnels simultaneously; enhanced temperature range (-20 to +70 °C)

Order No.

6GK5 602-0BA00-2AA3

6GK5 612-0BA00-2AA3

6GK5 613-0BA00-2AA3


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0

SOFTNET Security Client Edition 2006 Software for designing secure IP-based VPN connections from programming device/PC to network segments which are secured by SCALANCE S; single license for 1 installation, runtime software (German/English), configuring tool (German/English) and electronic manual on CD-ROM (German/English/ French/Spanish/Italian) for 32-bit Windows, XP Professional + SP1, 2, Windows 2000 Professional + SP3, 4

6GK1 704-1VW01-0AA0


6GK1 900-0AB00


Industrial Security

SOFTNET Security Client

■ Overview • SOFTNET Security Client is a component part of the industrial security concept for protecting automation devices and for security during data exchange between automation systems. • VPN client for programming devices, PCs and notebook computers in the industrial environment; secure VPN client access is supported through SCALANCE S protected automation systems

PC/IPC with Software SOFTNET Security Client

• Data transmission is protected against incorrect user operation, listening in, espionage and malignant intervention; communication can only take place between authenticated and authorized devices • Uses the IPSec mechanisms already tried and tested in the office sector for setting up and operating VPNs.

PC/PG/Notebook with CP 7515 and Software SOFTNET Security Client

Access Point SCALANCE W788-1PRO

Industrial Ethernet

Automation cell 1


Automation cell 2


Automation cell 3

protected access (VPN tunnel)

G_IK10_XX_10083


Secure access to automation cells secured by SCALANCE S612/S613 with SOFTNET Security Client

■ Benefits

• Secure access by programming devices or notebooks to automation devices or complete automation cells • Simple use on mobile PCs when using the SOFTNET Security Client, as no external device is required for securing the communication • Consistent security concept for the automation system with SCALANCE S and SOFTNET Security Client • Protecting data transmission against espionage and manipulation by means of certified standards. • Simple operation, can be implemented without special IT knowledge • Non-secure devices can be integrated into the secure data traffic • Reaction-free; no change to existing network infrastructures is required • Communication can be protected independent of the IP-based application protocol used

■ Application Security modules of the SCALANCE S family are provided specially for use in automation, yet connect seamlessly with the security structures of the office and IT world. They offer security and meet the specific requirements of automation systems, such as easy upgrades of existing systems, simple installation and minimal downtimes in the event of a fault. Depending on the respective security needs, various different security measures can be combined with one another. The SOFTNET Security Client allows programming devices, PCs and notebook computers access to network nodes or automation systems protected by SCALANCE S. Note: You can obtain support regarding the special features of WAN connections and company firewalls/security infrastructures from your local contact. Technical advice on this subject is available from: I&S Security Service Customer Care Desk Tel.: +49(0)9131-7-28811 E-mail: [email protected]


2/149

2


Industrial Security

SOFTNET Security Client

2

■ Function

■ Ordering data

Authentication Each incoming item of data traffic is monitored and checked. As IP addresses can be falsified (IP spoofing), checking the IP address (of the client access) is not sufficient. In addition, Client PCs may have changing IP addresses. For this reason the authentication is performed by means of tried and tested VPN mechanisms. Data encryption To protect the data traffic against espionage and manipulation secure encryption is necessary. This means that the data traffic remains incomprehensible to any eavesdropper in the network. To this end, SOFTNET Security Client sets up VPN tunnels based on IPSec to other SCALANCE S security modules. Performance data • System requirements: Windows 2000 Professional (32 bit) + SP3, 4 Windows XP Professional (32 bit) + SP1, 2 Configuring Using the associated configuration tool it is possible to handle setup and administration of security rules even without special IT knowledge. In the simplest case, only the SCALANCE S modules or SOFTNET security clients that are to communicate with one another are set up and configured. As soon as SOFTNET Security Client knows which automation device is to be accessed, a communication can be set up.

SOFTNET Security Client Edition 2006 Software for designing secure IP-based VPN connections from programming device/PC to network segments which are secured by SCALANCE S; single license for 1 installation, runtime software (German/English), configuring tool (German/English) and electronic manual on CD-ROM (German/English/French/Italian/Spanish) for 32-bit Windows, XP Professional + SP1, 2 Windows 2000 Professional + SP3, 4 Industrial Security Modules SCALANCE S For protection of programmable controllers and automation networks, and for safeguarding of industrial communication; configuring tool and electronic manual on CD-ROM German, English, French, Italian, Spanish • SCALANCE S612 uses Stateful Inspection Firewall to protect network segments against unauthorized access; protects up to 32 devices, up to 64 VPN tunnels simultaneously • SCALANCE S613 uses Stateful Inspection Firewall to protect network segments against unauthorized access; protects up to 64 devices, up to 128 VPN tunnels simultaneously; enhanced temperature range (-20 to +70 °C)

Order No. 6GK1 704-1VW01-0AA0

6GK5 612-0BA00-2AA3

6GK5 613-0BA00-2AA3


2/150



6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0


CPUs for SIMATIC S7-300 CPU 315-2 PN/DP

■ Overview • The CPU with a medium program memory and quantity framework • High processing performance in binary and floating-point arithmetic • Used as a central controller on production lines with central and distributed I/O • Integral PROFINET interface • Combined MPI / PROFIBUS DP-master/slave interface • Component Based Automation (CBA) on PROFINET • PROFInet proxy for intelligent devices on PROFIBUS DP in Component Based Automation (CBA) • PROFINET IO Controller for operating distributed I/O on PROFINET Micro Memory Card required for operation of CPU.

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 315-2EH13-0AB0 Product status associated programming package

STEP 7 V5.3 SP1 with hardware update

Supply voltages Rated value • DC 24 V Yes • permissible range, lower limit (DC) 20.4 V • permissible range, upper limit 28.8 V (DC) Voltages and currents external protection for supply cables (recommendation)

min. 2 A

Current consumption • Inrush current, typ.

2.5 A

• I²t

1 A²s

• Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ.

100 mA

• Current consumption (rated value)

650 mA

• Power loss, typ.

3.5 W

- expandable • Load memory - pluggable (MMC) - pluggable (MMC), max. Backup • present • without battery

DB • Number, max. • Size, max.

1,023; Number band: 1 to 1023 16 KByte

FB • Number, max. • Size, max.


FC • Number, max. • Size, max.


OB • Number, max., remark • Size, max.

See Operation List 16 KByte

Nesting depth • per priority class • additional within an error OB

8 4

CPU/processing times

Memory Memory • RAM - integrated

6ES7 315-2EH13-0AB0 CPU/blocks

• for bit operations, min.

0.1 μs

• for word operations, min.

0.2 μs

• for fixed point arithmetic, min.

2 μs

• for floating point arithmetic, min.

3 μs

256 KByte; for program and data, less the display data No Yes 8 MByte Yes; guaranteed by MMC (maintenance-free) Yes; Program and data


2/151

2



2

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 315-2EH13-0AB0 Times/counters and their remanence S7 counter • Number • of which remanent without battery - adjustable - lower limit - upper limit • Remanence - adjustable - lower limit - upper limit • Counting range - adjustable - lower limit - upper limit IEC counter • present • Type

256 Yes 0 255 Yes 0 255 Yes 0 999 Yes SFB

S7 times • Number • Remanence - adjustable - lower limit - upper limit - preset

256 Yes 0 255 No retentivity

• Time range - lower limit - upper limit

10 ms 9,990 s

IEC timer • present • Type

Yes SFB

Data areas and their remanence Flag • Number, max. • Remanence available • Number of clock memories

2,048 Byte Yes; MB 0 to MB 2047 8; 1 memory byte

Data blocks • Number, max. • Size, max. • Remanence adjustable • Remanence preset

1,023; from DB 1 to DB 1023 16 KByte Yes; via non-retain property on DB yes

Local data • per priority class, max.

1,024 Byte; per block max. 510

Process image • Inputs • Outputs

2/152


16,384 16,384 1,024; max. 1,024; max.

Analog channels • Inputs • Outputs • Inputs, of which central • Outputs, of which central

1,024 1,024 256; max. 256; max.

Hardware config. Central devices, max.

1

Expansion devices, max.

3

Racks, max.

4

Modules per rack, max.

8

Number of DP masters • integrated • via CP

1 4

Number of operable FMs and CPs (recommended) • FM • CP, point-to-point • CP, LAN

8 8 10

Time Clock • Hardware clock (real-time clock) • Battery backed and synchronized • Deviation per day, max. Operating hours counter • Number • Number/Number range • Range of values • Granularity • remanent Clock synchronization • supports • to MPI, Master • to MPI, Slave • in AS, Master • in AS, Slave

Yes Yes 10 s 1 0 2 to the power of 31 hours (when using the SFC 101) 1 hour Yes; must be restarted at each warm restart Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

S7 message functions Number of login stations for message functions, max.

16; (depending on the configured connections for PG-/OP and S7 basic communication)

2 KByte 2 KByte

Process diagnostic messages

Yes

simultaneously active Alarm-S blocks, max.

40

2 KByte 2 KByte

Test commissioning functions

Address area I/O address area • Inputs • Outputs • of which, distributed - Inputs - Outputs

6ES7 315-2EH13-0AB0 Digital channels • Inputs • Outputs • Inputs, of which central • Outputs, of which central

128 Byte 128 Byte

Status/control • Status/control variable • Variables

Yes Inputs, outputs, memory bits, DB, times, counters



■ Technical specifications (continued) Monitoring functions • Number of variables, max. • of which status variable, max. • of which control variable, max.

30 30 14

Forcing • Forcing Yes • Force, variables Inputs, outputs • Forcing, number of variables, max. 10 Status block

Yes

Single step

Yes

Number of breakpoints

2

Diagnostic buffer • present • Number of entries, max. • adjustable

Yes 100 No

Communication functions PG/OP communication

Yes

Routing

Yes

Global data communication • supported • Size of GD packets, max.

Yes 22 Byte

S7 basic communication • supported

Yes

S7 communication • supported

Yes

S5-compatible communication • supported

Yes; via CP and loadable FC

Open IE communication • TCP/IP - Number of connections, max. - Data length, max. Number of connections • overall • usable for PG communication • usable for OP communication • usable for S7 basic communication

Yes; via integrated PROFINET interface and loadable FBs 8 1,460 Byte 16 15; max. 15 14

2

6ES7 315-2EH13-0AB0

6ES7 315-2EH13-0AB0 PROFINET CBA (at set setpoint communication load) • Setpoint for the CPU communication load • Number of remote interconnection partners • Number of functions, master/slave • Total of all master/slave connections • Data length of all incoming connections master/slave, max. • Data length of all outgoing connections master/slave, max. • Number of device-internal and PROFIBUS interconnections • Data length of device-internal and PROFIBUS interconnections, max. • Data length per connection, max. • Remote interconnections with acyclic transmission - Sampling frequency: sampling interval, min. - Number of incoming interconnections - Number of outgoing interconnections - Data length of all incoming interconnections, max. - Data length of all outgoing interconnections, max. - Data length per connection, max. • Remote interconnections with cyclic transmission - Transmission frequency: transmission interval, min. - Number of incoming interconnections - Data length of all incoming interconnections, max. - Data length of all outgoing interconnections, max. - Data length per connection, max. • HMI variables via PROFINET (acyclic) - Number of log-in stations for HMI variables (PN OPC/iMap) - HMI variable updating - Number of HMI variables - Data length of all HMI variables, max. • PROFIBUS proxy functionality - supported - Number of linked PROFIBUS devices - Data length per connection, max.

50% 32 17 1,000 4,000 Byte 4,000 Byte 500 4,000 Byte 1,400 Byte

500 ms 100 100 2,000 Byte 2,000 Byte 1,400 Byte

10 ms 200 2,000 Byte 2,000 Byte 450 Byte

3; 2 * PN OPC / 1 * iMap 500 ms 200 2,000 Byte

Yes 16 240 Byte; Slave-dependent


2/153



2

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 315-2EH13-0AB0 1st interface Type of interface

Integral RS 485 interface

Physics

RS 485

isolated

Yes

Power supply to interface (15 … 30 V DC), max.

200 mA

Functionality • MPI • DP master • DP slave • Point-to-point coupling MPI • Number of connections • Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - Global data communication - S7 basic communication - S7 communication - S7 communication, as client - S7 communication, as server

Yes Yes Yes No 16 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes

• Transmission speeds, max.

12 Mbit/s

DP master • Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - Global data communication - S7 basic communication - S7 communication - S7 communication, as client - S7 communication, as server - equidistance support - SYNC/FREEZE - DPV1

Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes

• Transmission speeds, max. • Number of DP slaves, max. DP slave • Services - Routing - Global data communication - S7 basic communication - S7 communication - S7 communication, as client - S7 communication, as server - direct data exchange (cross traffic) - DPV1

12 Mbit/s 124

Yes; only when interface active No Yes Yes No Yes Yes

6ES7 315-2EH13-0AB0 Power supply to interface (15 … 30 V DC), max.

0 mA

automatic detection of transmission speed

Yes; (10/100 Mbit/s)

Functionality • MPI • DP master • DP slave • Point-to-point coupling • PROFINET CBA • PROFINET IO controller

No No No No Yes Yes

PROFINET CBA • Acyclic transmission • cyclic transmission

Yes Yes

PROFINET IO controller • Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - S7 communication

- open IE communication • Transmission speed, max. • Number of connectable IO-devices, max. • Send cycle, remark

Yes Yes Yes; with loadable FBs, max. configurable connections: 14, max. number of instances: 32 Yes; via TCP/IP 100 Mbit/s 128 1 to 512 ms (minimum value depends on communication share set for PROFINET IO, on the number of IO devices and on the number of configured useful data items)

• Address area - Inputs, max. - Outputs, max.

2 KByte 2 KByte

• Useful data consistency, max.

256 Byte

CPU/programming Programming language • STEP 7 • LAD • FBD • STL • SCL • CFC • GRAPH • HiGraph®

Yes; V 5.3 SP1 or higher + HW update Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Software libraries Operational stocks

See Operation List

No

Nesting levels

8

• Transmission speeds, max. • Transfer memory - Inputs - Outputs

12 Mbit/s

User program protection/password protection

Yes

244 Byte 244 Byte

System functions (SFC)

See Operation List

System function blocks (SFB)

See Operation List

• Address area, max.

32; with max. 32 bytes each

Dimensions and weight

2nd interface

• Width

80 mm

Type of interface

PROFINET

• Height

125 mm

Physics

Ethernet

• Depth

130 mm

isolated

Yes

• Weight, approx.

460 g

2/154




■ Ordering data CPU 315-2 PN/DP Main memory 256 KB, power supply 24 V DC, combined MPI/PROFIBUS DP master/slave interface, Ethernet/PROFINET interface; MMC required

Order No. 6ES7 315-2EH13-0AB0

Micro Memory Card • 64 Kbyte

6ES7 953-8LF11-0AA0

• 128 Kbyte

6ES7 953-8LG11-0AA0

• 512 Kbyte

6ES7 953-8LJ11-0AA0

• 2 MByte

6ES7 953-8LL11-0AA0

• 4 MByte

6ES7 953-8LM11-0AA0

• 8 MByte

6ES7 953-8LP11-0AA0

MPI cable For connecting SIMATIC S7 and the PG through MPI; 5 m in length

6ES7 901-0BF00-0AA0

Slot number plates

6ES7 912-0AA00-0AA0

S7-300 manual Design, CPU data, module data, instruction list

2

Order No. Labeling sheets for machine inscription For 16-channel signal modules, DIN A4, for printing with laser printer; 10 units • petrol

6ES7 392-2AX00-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX00-0AA0

For 32-channel signal modules, DIN A4, for printing with laser printer; 10 units • petrol

6ES7 392-2AX10-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX10-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX10-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX10-0AA0

Manual "Communication for SIMATIC S7-300/-400"

• German

6ES7 398-8FA10-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8FA10-8BA0

• French

6ES7 398-8FA10-8CA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8FA10-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8FA10-8EA0

SIMATIC Manual Collection Electronic manuals on CD-ROM, multilingual: S7-200, S7-300, C7, S7-400, SIMATIC DP (Distributed I/O), SIMATIC PC, SIMATIC PG (Programming device), STEP 7, Engineering Tools, Runtime Software, SIMATIC PCS 7, SIMATIC HMI (Human Machine Interface), SIMATIC NET (Industrial Communication), SIMATIC Machine Vision, SIMATIC Sensors

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0

SIMATIC Manual Collection update service for 1 year Current "Manual Collection" CD and the three subsequent updates

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2

Power supply connector 10 units, spare part

6ES7 391-1AA00-0AA0

Labeling strips 10 units, spare part

6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0

Label cover 10 units, spare part

6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0

S7 SmartLabel Software for automatic labeling of modules based on data of the STEP 7 project

2XV9 450-1SL01-0YX0

• German

6ES7 398-8EA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8EA00-8BA0

• French

6ES7 398-8EA00-8CA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8EA00-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8EA00-8EA0

SIMATIC S7 demo case With mounting components for mounting S7-200 and S7-300

6ES7 910-3AA00-0XA0

PROFIBUS DP bus connector RS 485 • With 90° cable outlet, max. transmission rate 12 Mbit/s - without PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0

- with PG interface

6ES7 972-0BB12-0XA0

• With 90° cable outlet for FastConnect connection system, max. transmission rate 12 Mbit/s - without PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0

- with PG interface

6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0

• With axial cable outlet for SIMATIC OP, for connecting to PPI, MPI, PROFIBUS

6GK1 500-0EA02

PROFIBUS Fast Connect bus cable Standard type with special design for quick mounting, 2-core, shielded, sold by the meter, max. delivery unit 1000 m, minimum ordering quantity 20 m

6XV1 830-0EH10

RS 485 repeater for PROFIBUS Data transmission rate up to 12 Mbit/s; 24 V DC; IP20 housing

6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0

PROFIBUS bus components For establishing MPI/PROFIBUS communication

see Catalogs IK PI, CA 01


2/155



2

■ Overview • The CPU with a large program memory and quantity framework for demanding requirements • Distributed intelligence in Component Based Automation (CBA) on PROFInet • PROFINET proxy for intelligent devices on PROFIBUS DP in Component Based Automation (CBA) • PROFINET I/O controller for operating distributed I/O on PROFINET • For multisector automation tasks in the construction of series machines, special machines and plants • Used as a central controller on production lines with central and distributed I/O • For extensive I/O configurations • For setting up distributed I/O structures • High processing performance in binary and floating-point arithmetic • Combined MPI/PROFIBUS DP-master/slave interface • Supports as an option the use of SIMATIC Engineering Tools

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 317-2EK13-0AB0 Product status associated programming package

STEP 7 V5.3 or higher with HW update


min. 2 A

Current consumption 2.5 A

• I²t

1 A²s


100 mA

• Current consumption (rated value) 650 mA 3.5 W

Memory Memory • RAM - integrated - expandable • Load memory - pluggable (MMC) - pluggable (MMC), max. Backup • present • without battery

1 MByte; for program and data, less the display data No Yes 8 MByte Yes; Guaranteed by MMC (maintenance-free) Yes; Program and data

CPU/blocks DB • Number, max. • Size, max.

2/156









16 4


• Inrush current, typ.


6ES7 317-2EK13-0AB0



0.05 μs


0.2 μs


0.2 μs


1 μs

Times/counters and their remanence S7 counter • Number • of which remanent without battery - adjustable - lower limit - upper limit

512 Yes 0 511

• Remanence - adjustable - lower limit - upper limit

Yes 0 511

• Counting range - adjustable - lower limit - upper limit

Yes 0 999

IEC counter • present • Type

Yes SFB



■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 317-2EK13-0AB0 S7 times • Number • Remanence - adjustable - lower limit - upper limit - preset



10 ms 9,990 s


Yes SFB






1,024 Byte

8 KByte 8 KByte 8 KByte 8 KByte

Process image • Inputs • Outputs • Inputs, adjustable • Outputs, adjustable • Inputs, preset • Outputs, preset

2,048 Byte 2,048 Byte 2,048 Byte 2,048 Byte 256 Byte 256 Byte

Digital channels • Inputs • Outputs • Inputs, of which central • Outputs, of which central

65,536 65,536 1,024 1,024



8 8 10

Time Clock • Hardware clock (real-time clock) • Battery backed and synchronized • Deviation per day, max. Operating hours counter • Number • Number/Number range • Range of values • Granularity • remanent Clock synchronization • supports • to MPI, Master • to MPI, Slave • in AS, Master • in AS, Slave

Yes Yes 10 s 4 0 to 3 0 to 2^31 hours (when using SFC101) 1 hour Yes; must be restarted at each warm restart Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

S7 message functions

Address area I/O address area • Inputs • Outputs • of which, distributed - Inputs - Outputs

2

6ES7 317-2EK13-0AB0

4,096 4,096 256 256

Hardware config.

Number of login stations for message functions, max.

32; depending on the configured connections for PG-/ OP- and S7basic commmunication


Yes


60

Test commissioning functions Status/control • Status/control variable • Variables Monitoring functions • Number of variables, max. • of which status variable, max. • of which control variable, max.

Yes Inputs, outputs, memory bits, DB, times, counters 30 30 14

Forcing • Forcing Yes Inputs, outputs • Force, variables • Forcing, number of variables, max. 10 Status block

Yes

Single step

Yes


2


Yes 100 No

Central devices, max.

1

Communication functions


3

PG/OP communication

Yes

Racks, max.

4

Routing

Yes


8


1 4


Yes 22 Byte


Yes


2/157



2

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 317-2EK13-0AB0 S7 communication • supported

Yes



Open IE communication • TCP/IP - Number of connections, max. - Data length, max. Number of connections • overall • usable for PG communication • usable for OP communication • usable for S7 basic comm. PROFINET CBA (at set setpoint communication load) • Setpoint for the CPU communication load • Number of remote interconnection partners • Number of functions, master/slave • Total of all master/slave connections • Data length of all incoming connections master/slave, max. • Data length of all outgoing connections master/slave, max. • Number of device-internal and PROFIBUS interconnections • Data length of device-internal and PROFIBUS interconnections, max. • Data length per connection, max. • Remote interconnections with acyclic transmission - Sampling frequency: sampling interval, min. - Number of incoming interconnections - Number of outgoing interconnections - Data length of all incoming interconnections, max. - Data length of all outgoing interconnections, max. - Data length per connection, max. • Remote interconnections with cyclic transmission - Transmission frequency: transmission interval, min. - Number of incoming interconnections - Data length of all incoming interconnections, max. - Data length of all outgoing interconnections, max. - Data length per connection, max. • HMI variables via PROFINET (acyclic) - Number of log-in stations for HMI variables (PN OPC/iMap) - HMI variable updating - Number of HMI variables - Data length of all HMI variables, max.

2/158


Yes; via integrated PROFINET interface and loadable FBs 8 1,460 Byte 32 31 31 30

50% 32 17 1,000 4,000 Byte 4,000 Byte 500

6ES7 317-2EK13-0AB0 • PROFIBUS proxy functionality - supported - Number of linked PROFIBUS devices - Data length per connection, max.


1st interface Type of interface


Physics

RS 485

isolated

Yes


200 mA



4,000 Byte


12 Mbit/s

1,400 Byte



• Transmission speeds, max. • Number of DP slaves, max.

12 Mbit/s 124

DP slave • Services - Routing - Global data communication - S7 basic communication - S7 communication - S7 communication, as client - S7 communication, as server - dir. data exchange (cross traffic) - DPV1

Yes; when interface active No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

500 ms 100 100 2,000 Byte 2,000 Byte 1,400 Byte

10 ms 200 2,000 Byte 2,000 Byte 450 Byte



12 Mbit/s

• Address area, max. • Useful data per address area, max.

32 32 Byte

244 Byte 244 Byte



■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 317-2EK13-0AB0 2nd interface

CPU/programming

Type of interface

PROFINET

Physics

Ethernet

isolated

Yes


0 mA



Functionality • MPI • DP master • DP slave • Point-to-point coupling • PROFINET CBA • PROFINET IO controller PROFINET CBA • Acyclic transmission • cyclic transmission PROFINET IO controller • Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - S7 communication


2

6ES7 317-2EK13-0AB0

No No No No Yes Yes; Firmware Status V2.3 or higher Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes; with loadable FBs, max. configurable connections: 16, max. number of instances: 32 Yes; via TCP/IP

Programming language • STEP 7 • LAD • FBD • STL • SCL • CFC • GRAPH • HiGraph®

Yes; V 5.3 or higher + HW update Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Software libraries Operational stocks

See Operation List

Nesting levels

8


Yes


See Operation List


See Operation List

Dimensions and weight • Width • Height • Depth • Weight, approx.

80 mm 125 mm 130 mm 460 g

100 Mbit/s 128 1 to 512 ms (minimum value depends on communication share set for PROFINET IO, on the number of IO devices and on the number of configured useful data items)


8 KByte 8 KByte


256 Byte


2/159



2

■ Ordering data CPU 317-2 PN/DP Main memory 1 MB, power supply 24 V DC, combined MPI/PROFIBUS DP master/slave interface, Ethernet/PROFINET interface; MMC required

Order No. 6ES7 317-2EK13-0AB0

Micro Memory Card

Order No. Labeling sheets for machine inscription For 16-channel signal modules, DIN A4, for printing with laser printer; 10 pieces • petrol

6ES7 392-2AX00-0AA0

• 64 Kbyte

6ES7 953-8LF11-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX00-0AA0

• 128 Kbyte

6ES7 953-8LG11-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX00-0AA0

• 512 Kbyte

6ES7 953-8LJ11-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX00-0AA0

• 2 MByte

6ES7 953-8LL11-0AA0

• 4 MByte

6ES7 953-8LM11-0AA0

• 8 MByte

6ES7 953-8LP11-0AA0

For 32-channel signal modules, DIN A4, for printing with laser printer; 10 pieces


6ES7 901-0BF00-0AA0

Slot number plates

6ES7 912-0AA00-0AA0


• petrol

6ES7 392-2AX10-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX10-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX10-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX10-0AA0


• German

6ES7 398-8FA10-8AA0

• German

6ES7 398-8EA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8FA10-8BA0

• English

6ES7 398-8EA00-8BA0

• French

6ES7 398-8FA10-8CA0

• French

6ES7 398-8EA00-8CA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8FA10-8DA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8EA00-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8FA10-8EA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8EA00-8EA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 910-3AA00-0XA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2

Power supply connector 10 pieces, spare part

6ES7 391-1AA00-0AA0

Labeling strips 10 pieces, spare part

6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0

Label cover 10 pieces, spare part

6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0


2XV9 450-1SL01-0YX0

2/160


PROFIBUS DP bus connector RS 485 • With 90° cable outlet, max. data transmission rate 12 Mbit/s - without PG interface - with PG interface • With 90° cable outlet for FastConnect connection system, max. data transmission rate 12 Mbit/s - without PG interface - with PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0 6ES7 972-0BB12-0XA0

6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0 6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0


6GK1 500-0EA02


6XV1 830-0EH10


6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0


See Catalogs IK PI, CA 01



■ Overview • The CPU with high command processing performance, large program memory and quantity framework for demanding applications • For cross-sector automation tasks in series machine, special machine and plant construction • Used as central controller in production lines with central and distributed I/O on PROFIBUS and PROFINET • Distributed intelligence in Component Based Automation (CBA) on PROFINET • PROFINET proxy for intelligent devices on PROFIBUS DP in Component Based Automation (CBA) • Isochronous mode on PROFIBUS • Optionally supports the use of SIMATIC engineering tools Micro Memory Card required for operation of CPU.

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 318-3EL00-0AB0 Product status associated programming package

STEP 7 V5.3 or higher, Service pack 3 with HSP


min. 2 A

6ES7 318-3EL00-0AB0 FC • Number, max. • Size, max.

2,048; from FC 0 to FC 2047 64 KByte

OB • Size, max.

64 KByte


16 4

CPU/processing times • for bit operations, min.

0.01 μs


0.02 μs


0.02 μs

4A


0.04 μs

• I²t

1.2 A²s

Times/counters and their remanence


400 mA


1,050 mA


14 W


Memory Memory • RAM - integrated - expandable

1,400 KByte No

• Load memory - pluggable (MMC) - pluggable (MMC), max.

Yes 8 MByte

S7 counter • Number • Remanence - adjustable

2,048 Yes


Yes 0 999


Yes SFB

Yes; up to 700 KB, maintenancefree

S7 times • Number • Remanence - adjustable - preset

DB • Number, max. • Size, max.

4,095; DB 0 reserved 64 KByte


10 ms 9,990 s


2,048; from FB 0 to FB 2047 64 KByte


Yes SFB

Backup • present CPU/blocks

2,048 Yes No retentivity


2/161

2



2

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 318-3EL00-0AB0 Data areas and their remanence

6ES7 318-3EL00-0AB0 Time

Flag • Number, max. • Remanence available • Number of clock memories

8 KByte Yes; MB 0 to MB 8191 8; 1 memory byte

Clock • Hardware clock (real-time clock) • Battery backed and synchronized • Deviation per day, max.

Data blocks • Number, max. • Size, max. • Remanence adjustable

4,095; from DB 1 to DB 2047 64 KByte Yes; via non-retain property on DB

Operating hours counter • Number • Number/Number range • Range of values


1,024 Byte

Address area I/O address area • Inputs • Outputs • of which, distributed - Inputs - Outputs Process image • Inputs, adjustable • Outputs, adjustable • Inputs, preset • Outputs, preset

8 KByte 8 KByte 8 KByte 8 KByte 2 KByte 2 KByte 256 Byte 256 Byte

• Granularity • remanent Clock synchronization • supports • to MPI, Master • to MPI, Slave • in AS, Master • in AS, Slave • on Ethernet via NTP

Yes Yes 10 s 4 0 to 3 0 to 2^31 hours (when using SFC101) 1 hour Yes; must be restarted at each warm restart Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes




Yes

1


60


65,536 65,536 1,024 1,024



4,096 4,096 256 256

Subprocess images • Number of subprocess images, max.


Hardware config. Racks, max.

4


8

Number of DP masters • integrated • via CP Number of operable FMs and CPs (recommended) • FM • CP, point-to-point • CP, LAN

2/162


2 4

8 8 10

Monitoring functions • Number of variables, max. • of which status variable, max. • of which control variable, max.



Yes

Single step

Yes


2

Diagnostic buffer • present • Number of entries, max.

Yes 100



■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 318-3EL00-0AB0 Communication functions PG/OP communication

Yes

Routing

Yes


Yes 22 Byte


Yes


Yes



Open IE communication • TCP/IP - Number of connections, max. - Data length, max. • ISO-on-TCP (RFC1006) - Number of connections, max. - Data length, max. Number of connections • overall • usable for PG communication • usable for OP communication • usable for S7 basic communication

Yes; via integrated PROFINET interface and loadable FBs 8 1,460 Byte Yes; via integrated PROFINET interface and loadable FBs 8 8,192 Byte 32 31 31 30

1st interface Type of interface


Physics

RS 485

isolated

Yes


150 mA

Functionality • MPI • DP master • DP slave • Point-to-point coupling

Yes Yes Yes No

2

6ES7 318-3EL00-0AB0 DP master • Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - Global data communication - S7 basic communication - S7 communication - equidistance support - SYNC/FREEZE - DPV1 • Transmission speeds, max. • Number of DP slaves, max. • Address area - Inputs, max. - Outputs, max. DP slave • Services - Routing - Global data communication - S7 basic communication - S7 communication - direct data exchange (cross traffic) - DPV1 • Transmission speeds, max. • Transfer memory - Inputs - Outputs • Address area, max. • Useful data per address area, max. MPI • Number of connections • Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - Global data communication - S7 basic communication - S7 communication - S7 communication, as client - S7 communication, as server • Transmission speeds, max.

Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 12 Mbit/s 124 244 KByte 244 KByte

Yes; when interface active No Yes Yes Yes No 12 Mbit/s 244 Byte 244 Byte 32 32 Byte

16 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes 12 Mbit/s


2/163



2

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 318-3EL00-0AB0 2nd interface

6ES7 318-3EL00-0AB0 3rd interface

Type of interface


Type of interfaces

PROFINET

Physics

RS 485

Physics

RJ45

isolated

Yes

isolated

Yes


200 mA



Functionality • MPI • DP master • DP slave • Point-to-point coupling • PROFINET CBA • PROFINET IO controller DP master • Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - Global data communication - S7 basic communication - S7 communication - equidistance support - SYNC/FREEZE - DPV1 • Transmission speeds, max. • Number of DP slaves, max. • Address area - Inputs, max. - Outputs, max. DP slave • Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - Global data communication - S7 basic communication - direct data exchange (cross traffic) - DPV1 • Transmission speeds, max. • automatic baud rate search • Transfer memory - Inputs - Outputs • Address area, max. • Useful data per address area, max.

2/164


No Yes Yes No No No

Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 12 Mbit/s 124 244 KByte 244 KByte

Functionality • MPI • PROFINET CBA • PROFINET IO controller • PROFINET IO device

No Yes Yes No

Open IE communication • Number of connections, max.

8

PROFINET CBA (at 50 % communication load) • Acyclic transmission • cyclic transmission

Yes Yes

CPU/programming Programming language • STEP 7 • LAD • FBD • STL • SCL • CFC • GRAPH • HiGraph®

Yes; 5.3 or higher, Service Pack 3 with HSP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Software libraries Yes Yes; when interface active No Yes Yes No 12 Mbit/s Yes; only with passive interface 244 Byte 244 Byte 32 32 Byte

Operational stocks

See Operation List

Nesting levels

8


Yes


See Operation List


See Operation List

Dimensions and weight • Width

120 mm

• Height

125 mm

• Depth

130 mm

• Weight, approx.

1,250 g



■ Ordering data CPU 319-3 PN/DP Main memory 1.4 MB, power supply 24 V DC, combined MPI/PROFIBUS DP master/slave interface, PROFIBUS DP master/slave interface, Ethernet/PROFINET interface; MMC required

Order No. 6ES7 318-3EL00-0AB0

Labeling sheets for machine inscription For 16-channel signal modules, DIN A4, for printing with laser printer; 10 pieces • petrol

6ES7 392-2AX00-0AA0

Micro Memory Card

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX00-0AA0

• 64 Kbyte

6ES7 953-8LF11-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX00-0AA0

• 128 Kbyte

6ES7 953-8LG11-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX00-0AA0

• 512 Kbyte

6ES7 953-8LJ11-0AA0

• 2 MByte

6ES7 953-8LL11-0AA0

• 4 MByte

6ES7 953-8LM11-0AA0


• 8 MByte

6ES7 953-8LP11-0AA0

• petrol

6ES7 392-2AX10-0AA0


6ES7 901-0BF00-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX10-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX10-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX10-0AA0

Slot number plates

6ES7 912-0AA00-0AA0



• German

6ES7 398-8EA00-8AA0

• German

6ES7 398-8FA10-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8EA00-8BA0

• English

6ES7 398-8FA10-8BA0

• French

6ES7 398-8EA00-8CA0

6ES7 398-8FA10-8CA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8EA00-8DA0

6ES7 398-8FA10-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8EA00-8EA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8FA10-8EA0

6ES7 910-3AA00-0XA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0



6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


6ES7 391-1AA00-0AA0


6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0


6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0


2XV9 450-1SL01-0YX0

• French • Spanish

2

Order No.

PROFIBUS DP bus connector RS 485 • With 90° cable outlet, max. data transmission rate 12 Mbit/s - without PG interface - with PG interface • With 90° cable outlet for FastConnect connection system, max. data transmission rate 12 Mbit/s - without PG interface - with PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0 6ES7 972-0BB12-0XA0

6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0 6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0


6GK1 500-0EA02


6XV1 830-0EH10


6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0




2/165


CPUs for SIMATIC S7-300 CPU 315F-2 PN/DP

2

■ Overview • For design of a fail-safe automation system for plants with increased safety requirements • Complies with safety requirements up to SIL 3 to IEC 61508 and up to Cat. 4 according to EN 954-1 • Fail-safe I/O modules in distributed stations can be connected through the integrated PROFINET interface (PROFIsafe) and/or through the integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (PROFIsafe); • Fail-safe I/O modules of the ET 200M range can also be centrally connected • Central and distributed use of standard modules for non safety-relevant applications • Component Based Automation (CBA) on PROFINET • PROFINET proxy for intelligent devices on PROFIBUS DP in Component Based Automation (CBA) Micro Memory Card required for operation of CPU.

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 315-2FH13-0AB0 Product status associated programming package

STEP 7 V5.3 SP3 or higher + HW update, S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 or higher


min. 2 A

2.5 A 1 A²s

• I²t • Current consumption (in no-load operation), typ.

100 mA


650 mA


3.5 W

- expandable • Load memory - pluggable (MMC) - pluggable (MMC), max. - expandable FEPROM Backup • present • without battery

2/166






8 4


0.1 μs


0.2 μs


2 μs


3 μs

Times/counters and their remanence

256 KByte; for program and data, less the display data No Yes 8 MByte Pluggable via MMC


Yes 0 255

Yes; Guaranteed by MMC (maintenance-free) Yes; Program and data


Yes 0 999


Yes SFB



S7 counter • Number • of which remanent without battery - adjustable - lower limit - upper limit





6ES7 315-2FH13-0AB0 FB • Number, max. • Size, max.


256 Yes 0 255



■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 315-2FH13-0AB0 S7 times • Number • Remanence - adjustable - lower limit - upper limit - preset

2

6ES7 315-2FH13-0AB0 Time



10 ms 9,990 s


Yes SFB





Clock • Hardware clock (real-time clock) • Battery backed and synchronized • Deviation per day, max. Operating hours counter • Number • Number/Number range • Range of values • Granularity • remanent Clock synchronization • supports • to MPI, Master • to MPI, Slave • in AS, Master • in AS, Slave

Yes Yes 10 s 1 0 2 to the power of 31 hours (when using the SFC 101) 1 hour Yes; must be restarted at each warm restart Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes


16; (depending on the configured connections for PG-/OP and S7 basic communication)


Yes 40

1,024 Byte; per block max. 510


Address area


I/O address area • Inputs • Outputs • of which, distributed - Inputs - Outputs

2 KByte 2 KByte



2 KByte 2 KByte

Process image • Inputs • Outputs

384 Byte 384 Byte


16,384 16,384 1,024; max. 1,024; max.




Yes

Single step

Yes


2

1,024 1,024 256; max. 256; max.


Yes 100 No

Central devices, max.

1

PG/OP communication

Yes


3

Routing

Yes

Racks, max.

4


8



Yes 22 Byte

1 4


Yes


Yes



Analog channels • Inputs • Outputs • Inputs, of which central • Outputs, of which central Hardware config.


Communication functions

8 8 10


2/167



2

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 315-2FH13-0AB0 Open IE communication • TCP/IP - Number of connections, max. - Data length, max. Number of connections • overall • usable for PG communication • usable for OP communication • usable for S7 basic communication • usable for routing

PROFINET CBA (at set setpoint communication load) • Setpoint for the CPU communication load • Number of remote interconnection partners • Number of functions, master/slave • Total of all master/slave connections • Data length of all incoming connections master/slave, max. • Data length of all outgoing connections master/slave, max. • Number of device-internal and PROFIBUS interconnections • Data length of device-internal and PROFIBUS interconnections, max. • Data length per connection, max. • Remote interconnections with acyclic transmission - Sampling frequency: sampling interval, min. - Number of incoming interconnections - Number of outgoing interconnections - Data length of all incoming interconnections, max. - Data length of all outgoing interconnections, max. - Data length per connection, max. • Remote interconnections with cyclic transmission - Transmission frequency: transmission interval, min. - Number of incoming interconnections - Data length of all incoming interconnections, max. - Data length of all outgoing interconnections, max. - Data length per connection, max.

2/168


Yes; via integrated PROFINET interface and loadable FBs 8 1,460 Byte 16 15; max. 15 14 X1 as MPI: max. 10; X1 as DP-master: max. 24; X1 as DP-slave (active): max. 14; X2 as PROFINET: max. 24

50% 32 17 1,000

6ES7 315-2FH13-0AB0 • HMI variables via PROFINET (acyclic) - Number of log-in stations for HMI variables (PN OPC/iMap) - HMI variable updating - Number of HMI variables - Data length of all HMI variables, max. • PROFIBUS proxy functionality - supported - Number of linked PROFIBUS devices - Data length per connection, max.



PROFINET CBA (at 50 % communication load) • Data length for arrays and strucSlave-dependent tures (local interconnection), max. • HMI variables via PROFINET (acyclic) - Number of log-in stations for HMI 2 * PN OPC / 1 * iMap variables (PN OPC/iMap) 1st interface Type of interface


Physics

RS 485

4,000 Byte

isolated

Yes

500


200 mA

4,000 Byte

4,000 Byte 1,400 Byte

500 ms 100 100 2,000 Byte 2,000 Byte 1,400 Byte

10 ms 200 2,000 Byte 2,000 Byte 450 Byte




12 Mbit/s




12 Mbit/s 124



■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 315-2FH13-0AB0 DP slave • Services - Routing - Global data communication - S7 basic communication - S7 communication - S7 communication, as client - S7 communication, as server - direct data exchange (cross traffic) - DPV1 • Transmission speeds, max. • Transfer memory - Inputs - Outputs • Address area, max.

CPU/programming Yes; only when interface active No Yes Yes No Yes Yes

Programming language • STEP 7

No

• LAD • FBD • STL • SCL • CFC • GRAPH • HiGraph®

12 Mbit/s

Software libraries

244 Byte 244 Byte 32; with max. 32 bytes each

2nd interface

Yes; V 5.3 SP3 or higher + hardware update Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Operational stocks

See Operation List

Nesting levels

8


Yes


See Operation List

Type of interface

PROFINET


See Operation List

Physics

Ethernet


isolated

Yes

• Width

80 mm


0 mA

• Height

125 mm

• Depth

130 mm

• Weight, approx.

460 g




No No No No Yes Yes

PROFINET CBA • Acyclic transmission • cyclic transmission

Yes Yes

PROFINET IO controller • Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - S7 communication


2

6ES7 315-2FH13-0AB0



2 KByte 2 KByte


256 Byte


2/169



2

■ Ordering data CPU 315F-2 PN/DP CPU for SIMATIC S7-300F; main memory 256 KB, power supply 24 V DC, MPI/PROFIBUS DP master/slave interface, Industrial Ethernet/ PROFINET interface; incl. slot number labels; MMC required

Order No. 6ES7 315-2FH13-0AB0

Order No. S7 SmartLabel Software for automatic labeling of modules based on data of the STEP 7 project Labeling sheets for machine inscription For 16-channel signal modules, DIN A4, for printing with laser printer; 10 pieces

Distributed Safety V5.4 programming tool Task: Software for configuring fail-safe user programs for SIMATIC S7-300F, S7-400F, ET 200S; Requirement: STEP 7 V5.3 SP3 and higher

• petrol

6ES7 392-2AX00-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX00-0AA0 6ES7 392-2DX00-0AA0

• Floating License

6ES7 833-1FC02-0YA5

• red

• Software Update Service

6ES7 833-1FC00-0YX2

Distributed Safety Upgrade Von V5.x auf V5.4; Floating License für 1 User

6ES7 833-1FC02-0YE5


Micro Memory Card • 64 Kbyte

6ES7 953-8LF11-0AA0

• 128 Kbyte

6ES7 953-8LG11-0AA0

• 512 Kbyte

6ES7 953-8LJ11-0AA0

• 2 MByte

6ES7 953-8LL11-0AA0

• 4 MByte

6ES7 953-8LM11-0AA0

• 8 MByte

6ES7 953-8LP11-0AA0


6ES7 901-0BF00-0AA0

Slot number plates

6ES7 912-0AA00-0AA0

• German

6ES7 398-8FA10-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8FA10-8BA0

• French

6ES7 398-8FA10-8CA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8FA10-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8FA10-8EA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


6ES7 391-1AA00-0AA0


6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0


6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0


• petrol

6ES7 392-2AX10-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX10-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX10-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX10-0AA0

Manual "Communication for SIMATIC S7-300/-400" • German

6ES7 398-8EA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8EA00-8BA0

• French

6ES7 398-8EA00-8CA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8EA00-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8EA00-8EA0

PROFIBUS DP bus connector RS 485


2/170

2XV9 450-1SL01-0YX0

• With 90° cable outlet, max. data transmission rate 12 Mbit/s - without PG interface - with PG interface • With 90° cable outlet for FastConnect connection system, max. data transmission rate 12 Mbit/s - without PG interface - with PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0 6ES7 972-0BB12-0XA0

6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0 6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0


6GK1 500-0EA02


6XV1 830-0EH10


6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0





■ Overview • The fail-safe CPU with a large program memory and quantity framework for demanding applications • For design of a fail-safe automation system for plants with increased safety requirements • Complies with safety requirements up to SIL 3 to IEC 61508 and up to Cat. 4 according to EN 954-1 • Fail-safe I/O modules in distributed stations can be connected through the integrated PROFINET interface (PROFIsafe) and/or through the integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (PROFIsafe); • Fail-safe I/O modules of the ET 200M range can also be centrally connected • Central and distributed use of standard modules for non safety-relevant applications • Component Based Automation (CBA) on PROFINET • PROFINET proxy for intelligent devices on PROFIBUS DP in Component Based Automation (CBA) Micro Memory Card required for operation of CPU.

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 317-2FK13-0AB0 Product status associated programming package

STEP 7 V5.3 SP3 or higher + HW update , S7 Distributed Safety V5.4 or higher


min. 2 A

• I²t

2.5 A 1 A²s


100 mA


650 mA


3.5 W

Memory Memory • RAM - integrated - expandable • Load memory - pluggable (MMC) - pluggable (MMC), max. Backup • present • without battery

1 MByte; for program and data, less the display data No







16 4


0.05 μs


0.2 μs


0.2 μs


1 μs

Times/counters and their remanence S7 counter • Number • of which remanent without battery - adjustable - lower limit - upper limit

512 Yes 0 511

Yes 8 MByte


Yes 0 511

Yes; Guaranteed by MMC (maintenance-free) Yes; Program and data


Yes 0 999


Yes SFB





6ES7 317-2FK13-0AB0



2/171

2



2

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 317-2FK13-0AB0 S7 times • Number • Remanence - adjustable - lower limit - upper limit - preset

6ES7 317-2FK13-0AB0 Number of DP masters • integrated • via CP

1 4

Yes 0 511 No retentivity



8 8 10

10 ms 9,990 s

Time


Yes SFB

512






1,024 Byte

Address area I/O address area • Inputs • Outputs • of which, distributed - Inputs - Outputs Process image • Inputs • Outputs • Inputs, adjustable • Outputs, adjustable • Inputs, preset • Outputs, preset

• Granularity • remanent Clock synchronization • supports • to MPI, Master • to MPI, Slave • in AS, Master • in AS, Slave

4 0 to 3 0 to 2^31 hours (when using SFC101) 1 hour Yes; must be restarted at each warm restart Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes



8 KByte 8 KByte


Yes


60

2,048 Byte 2,048 Byte 2,048 Byte 2,048 Byte 1,024 Byte 1,024 Byte 65,536 65,536 1,024 1,024


4,096 4,096 256 256

Hardware config. Central devices, max.

1


3

Racks, max.

4


8


Operating hours counter • Number • Number/Number range • Range of values

Yes Yes 10 s

8 KByte 8 KByte


2/172

Clock • Hardware clock (real-time clock) • Battery backed and synchronized • Deviation per day, max.

Test commissioning functions Status/control • Status/control variable • Variables

Yes Inputs, outputs, memory bits, DB, times, counters


30 30 14


Yes

Single step

Yes


2


Yes 100 No



■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 317-2FK13-0AB0 Communication functions PG/OP communication

Yes

Routing

Yes


Yes 22 Byte


Yes


Yes

S5-compatible communication • supported Open IE communication • TCP/IP - Number of connections, max. - Data length, max. Number of connections • overall • usable for PG communication • usable for OP communication • usable for S7 basic communication PROFINET CBA (at set setpoint communication load) • Setpoint for the CPU communication load • Number of remote interconnection partners • Number of functions, master/slave • Total of all master/slave connections • Data length of all incoming connections master/slave, max. • Data length of all outgoing connections master/slave, max. • Number of device-internal and PROFIBUS interconnections • Data length of device-internal and PROFIBUS interconnections, max. • Data length per connection, max. • Remote interconnections with acyclic transmission - Sampling frequency: sampling interval, min. - Number of incoming interconnections - Number of outgoing interconnections - Data length of all incoming interconnections, max. - Data length of all outgoing interconnections, max. - Data length per connection, max.

Yes; via CP and loadable FC Yes; via integrated PROFINET interface and loadable FBs 8 1,460 Byte 32 31 31 30

50% 32 17 1,000 4,000 Byte

• Remote interconnections with cyclic transmission - Transmission frequency: transmission interval, min. - Number of incoming interconnections - Data length of all incoming interconnections, max. - Data length of all outgoing interconnections, max. - Data length per connection, max. • HMI variables via PROFINET (acyclic) - Number of log-in stations for HMI variables (PN OPC/iMap) - HMI variable updating - Number of HMI variables - Data length of all HMI variables, max. • PROFIBUS proxy functionality - supported - Number of linked PROFIBUS devices - Data length per connection, max.

10 ms 200 2,000 Byte 2,000 Byte 450 Byte



PROFINET CBA (at 50 % communication load) • Data length for arrays and strucSlave-dependent tures (local interconnection), max. • HMI variables via PROFINET (acyclic) - Number of log-in stations for HMI 2 * PN OPC / 1 * iMap variables (PN OPC/iMap) 1st interface Type of interface


Physics

RS 485

isolated

Yes

500


200 mA

4,000 Byte

Functionality • MPI • DP master • DP slave • Point-to-point coupling

4,000 Byte

1,400 Byte

500 ms 100 100 2,000 Byte 2,000 Byte 1,400 Byte

2

6ES7 317-2FK13-0AB0

MPI • Number of connections • Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - Global data communication - S7 basic communication - S7 communication - S7 communication, as client - S7 communication, as server • Transmission speeds, max.

Yes Yes Yes No 16 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes 12 Mbit/s


2/173



2

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 317-2FK13-0AB0

6ES7 317-2FK13-0AB0




12 Mbit/s 124

DP slave • Services - Routing - Global data communication - S7 basic communication - S7 communication - S7 communication, as client - S7 communication, as server - direct data exchange (cross traffic) - DPV1

Yes; when interface active No Yes Yes No Yes Yes


8 KByte 8 KByte


256 Byte

No



12 Mbit/s

• Address area, max. • Useful data per address area, max.

32 32 Byte

244 Byte 244 Byte

2nd interface

PROFINET CBA • Acyclic transmission • cyclic transmission PROFINET IO controller • Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - S7 communication


Yes Yes


CPU/programming


Yes; V 5.3 SP3 or higher + HW update Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Type of interface

PROFINET

Software libraries

Physics

Ethernet

Operational stocks

See Operation List

isolated

Yes

Nesting levels

8


0 mA


Yes




See Operation List


See Operation List


2/174


No No No No Yes Yes; Firmware Status V2.3 or higher


80 mm

• Height

125 mm

• Depth

130 mm

• Weight, approx.

460 g



■ Ordering data CPU 317F-2 PN/DP CPU for SIMATIC S7-300F; main memory 1024 KB, 24 V DC supply voltage, MPI/PROFIBUS DP master/slave interface, Industrial Ethernet/ PROFINET interface; MMC required

Order No. 6ES7 317-2FK13-0AB0

S7-SmartLabel Software for automatic labeling of modules based on data of the STEP 7 project

• petrol

6ES7 392-2AX00-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX00-0AA0 6ES7 392-2DX00-0AA0

• Floating License

6ES7 833-1FC02-0YA5

• red


6ES7 833-1FC00-0YX2

Distributed Safety Upgrade From V5.x to V5.4; Floating license for 1 user

6ES7 833-1FC02-0YE5


Micro Memory Card • 128 Kbyte • 512 Kbyte

2XV9 450-1SL01-0YX0

Labeling sheets for machine inscription For 16-channel signal modules, DIN A4, for printing with laser printer; 10 pieces

Distributed Safety V5.4 programming tool Task: Software for configuring fail-safe user programs for SIMATIC S7-300F, S7-400F, ET 200S; Requirement: STEP 7 V5.3 SP3 and higher

• 64 Kbyte

2

Order No.

6ES7 953-8LF11-0AA0 6ES7 953-8LG11-0AA0 6ES7 953-8LJ11-0AA0

• 2 MByte

6ES7 953-8LL11-0AA0

• 4 MByte

6ES7 953-8LM11-0AA0

• 8 MByte

6ES7 953-8LP11-0AA0


6ES7 901-0BF00-0AA0

Slot number plates

6ES7 912-0AA00-0AA0

S7-300 manual Design, CPU data, module data, instruction list • German

6ES7 398-8FA10-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8FA10-8BA0

• French

6ES7 398-8FA10-8CA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8FA10-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8FA10-8EA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


6ES7 391-1AA00-0AA0


6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0


6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0

• petrol

6ES7 392-2AX10-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX10-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX10-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX10-0AA0


6ES7 398-8EA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8EA00-8BA0

• French

6ES7 398-8EA00-8CA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8EA00-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8EA00-8EA0

PROFIBUS DP bus connector RS 485 • With 90° cable outlet, max. data transmission rate 12 Mbit/s - without PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0

- with PG interface • With 90° cable outlet for FastConnect connection system, max. data transmission rate 12 Mbit/s - without PG interface - with PG interface

6ES7 972-0BB12-0XA0

6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0 6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0


6GK1 500-0EA02


6XV1 830-0EH10


6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0




2/175


SIMATIC WinAC

SIMATIC WinAC Software PLC

2

■ Overview • Optimized for applications that demand a high level of flexibility and integration. • SIMATIC WinAC Software PLCs include: - WinAC Basis and - WinAC RTX • WinAC RTX: - the software solution for tasks which require high performance and strict real-time requirements - with real-time expansion for ensuring RTX strict real-time requirement behavior for the control section • SIMATIC Basis: - the economic solution for PC-based control tasks - for data intensive processes in connection with extensive PC tasks

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 671-0RC05-0YA0 Memory Memory • RAM - integrated • Load memory - integrated RAM, max.

PC work memory can be used (non-paged memory) PC work memory can be used (non-paged memory)

CPU/blocks DB • Number, max. • Size, max. FB • Number, max. • Size, max. FC • Number, max. • Size, max.

Limited only by available PC work memory 64 KByte Limited only by available PC work memory 64 KByte Limited only by available PC work memory 64 KByte

OB • Size, max.

64 KByte


24 24

CPU/processing times Reference platform

Pentium IV, 2.4 GHz

Times/counters and their remanence S7 counter • Number • Remanence - adjustable - lower limit - upper limit - preset

2/176


6ES7 671-0RC05-0YA0 • Counting range - adjustable - lower limit - upper limit

Yes 0 999

IEC counter • present

Yes

• Type

SFB

S7 times • Number • Remanence - lower limit - upper limit - preset

512 0 511 0


10 ms 9,990 s


Yes SFB

Data areas and their remanence Remanence without UPS and PS Extension Board

none

Remanence with UPS

all data

Flag • Number, max. • of which remanent • Remanence preset • Number of clock memories

16 KByte MB 0 - MB 16383 MB 0 - MB 15 8

Address area 512 Yes 0 511 8

I/O address area • Inputs • Outputs • of which, distributed - DP interface, inputs - DP interface, outputs

16 KByte 16 KByte 16 KByte 16 KByte


SIMATIC WinAC


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 671-0RC05-0YA0 Process image • Inputs, adjustable • Outputs, adjustable • Inputs, preset • Outputs, preset Subprocess images • Number of subprocess images, max. Digital channels • Outputs Analog channels • Inputs • Outputs

Communication functions 8 KByte 8 KByte 512 Byte 512 Byte 15

128,000 8,000 8,000

Hardware config. Submodules • Number of submodules, max • of which PROFIBUS, max.

Number of operable FMs and CPs (recommended) • FM, remark

• CP, point-to-point, remark • CP, LAN, remark

PG/OP communication

Yes

Global data communication • supported

No


No

S7 communication • as server • as client

Yes Yes

Number of connections • overall • reserved for PG communication • reserved for OP communication

64 1 1

1st interface 4 4; CP 5611, CP 5611-A2, integrated PB interface of the SIMATIC PC, CP 5613 CP, 5613-A2

FM distributed: FM 350-1/350-2, FM 351, FM 352, FM 353, FM 354, FM 355, FM 355-2 CP 340, CP 341 distributed over PC CP

Time Clock • Hardware clock (real-time clock) • Battery backed and synchronized

Yes Yes

Clock synchronization • supports • to PC-CP, Slave

Yes Yes

S7 message functions SCAN procedure

No


Yes; Alarm_S

Alarm 8-blocks

Yes

Instrumentation & control messages No Test commissioning functions Status/control • Status/control variable

2

6ES7 671-0RC05-0YA0

Yes

Monitoring functions Forcing • Forcing

No

Status block

Yes

Single step

Yes

Diagnostic buffer • present • Number of entries, max. • preset

Yes 3,200 120

Type of interface

CP 5611, CP 5611-A2, integrated PB interface of SIMATIC PC

Number of simult. operable CPs, max.

1

Physics

RS-485 / PROFIBUS

isolated

Yes

Functionality • MPI • DP master • DP slave

No Yes No

DP master • Number of connections, max. • Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - Global data communication - S7 basic communication - S7 communication - SYNC/FREEZE - Activation/deactivation of DP slaves - direct data exchange (cross traffic) - DPV0 - DPV1 • Transmission speeds, max. • Number of DP slaves, max. • Address area - Inputs, max. - Outputs, max. • Useful data per DP slave - Inputs, max. - Outputs, max.

8 Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 12 Mbit/s 64 16 KByte 16 KByte 244 Byte 244 Byte


2/177


SIMATIC WinAC


2

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 671-0RC05-0YA0 2nd interface Type of interface

CP 5613, CP 5613-A2

Number of simult. operable CPs, max.

4

Physics

RS-485 / PROFIBUS

isolated

Yes

Functionality • MPI • DP master • DP slave • PROFINET CBA • PROFINET CBA-SRT • PROFINET IO controller

No Yes No No No No

DP master • Number of connections, max. • Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - Global data communication - S7 basic communication - S7 communication - equidistance support - SYNC/FREEZE - Activation/deactivation of DP slaves - direct data exchange (cross traffic) - DPV0 - DPV1 • Transmission speeds, max. • Number of DP slaves, max. • Address area - Inputs, max. - Outputs, max. • Useful data per DP slave - Inputs, max. - Outputs, max.

50 Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes


Yes; as of V5.3, SP2, Engineering Tools (optional) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Software libraries • Easy Motion Control

Yes

Nesting levels

8


No

Open development interfaces • CCX (Custom Code Extension) • SMX (Shared Memory Extension) - Inputs - Outputs • CMI (Controller Management Interface)

Yes; with WinAC ODK V4.1 Yes; with WinAC ODK V4.1 4 KByte 4 KByte Yes; with WinAC ODK V4.1

Hardware requirements Hardware required

PC with color monitor, keyboard, mouse or pointing device for Windows

Yes Yes

Required memory on hard disk, min.

100 MByte

12 Mbit/s 125

Processor • Multi-processor system • Hyperthreading

Intel Pentium 400 MHz Yes; Dual Pentium Yes

16 KByte 16 KByte 244 Byte 244 Byte

Isochronous mode Yes

Number of DP masters with isochronous mode

2

Useful data per isochronoous slave, max.

128 Byte

equidistance

Yes

shortest clock pulse

2.2 ms; 2.2 ms without partial process image; 2.2 ms with partial process image



Yes

Isochronouos mode

2/178

6ES7 671-0RC05-0YA0 CPU/programming

Operating systems Operating system • Windows NT 4.0 • Windows 2000 • Windows XP

No Yes; Professional, >=SP3 Yes; Professional, SP1 and SP2


SIMATIC WinAC


■ Ordering data

Order No.

SIMATIC WinAC RTX 2005 Software-based PC-based control system for applications requiring a strictly deterministic response; CD-ROM with electronic documentation in English, French and German; Single license, for Windows 2000/XP

6ES7 671-0RC05-0YA0

SIMATIC WinAC RTX 2005 Upgrade For upgrading from Basic/ RTX V3.x, V4.0, V4.1 to 2005; single license, for Windows 2000/XP

6ES7 671-0RC05-0YE0

2

Order No. CP 5611 A2 communications processor PCI card (32-bit) for connection of a programming device or PC to PROFIBUS

6GK1 561-1AA01

CP 5613 A2 communications processor PCI card (32-bit; 3.3 V/5 V) for connection to PROFIBUS incl. DP-Base software with NCM PC; DP-RAM interface for DP master, incl. PG and FDL protocol; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server, Windows XP Professional, German/English

6GK1 561-3AA01


2/179


System interfacing for SIMATIC and SINUMERIK General

■ Overview CPs with standard functions • CP 243-1 for SIMATIC S7-200, CP 343-1 Lean and CP 343-1 for SIMATIC S7-300, CP 443-1 for SIMATIC S7-400 • Designed for use in harsh industrial environments • Shipbuilding certification for use on ships and offshore units • Can be used via RJ45 interface for the industrial-standard SIMATIC NET FastConnect cabling system • High-speed data transfer even with large volumes of data (10/100 Mbit/s)

S7-400

S7-300 S7-200

CPs with function expansions • CP 243-1 IT for SIMATIC S7-200 with IT functionality • CP 343-1 Advanced for SIMATIC S7-300 with IT functionality and for use as PROFINET IO controller • CP 443-1 Advanced for SIMATIC S7-400 with IT functionality and for use as PROFINET IO controller; the CP 443-1 Advanced also has an integral 4-port switch for setting up small local networks

SIMATIC S7-200/S7-300/S7-400

STEP 7 with NCM S7

CP 443-1

CP 443-1 Advanced

CP 343-1 Lean

CP 343-1

CP 343-1 Advanced

CP 243-1 IT For the protocols PG/OP communication CP 243-1 S7 communication S5 compatible communication 1) (SEND/RECEIVE, FETCH/WRITE) Open IE-Communication (TCP/IP) PROFINET 1) 2) IT FTP Multiprotocol: All protocols of a CP can be operated simultaneously Several CPs can be operated in one S7-200, S7-300 or S7-400 1) Not with CPs for S7-200 2) Not with CP 443-1

System connections for SIMATIC

2/180


G_IK10_XX_50182

2


System interfacing for SIMATIC and SINUMERIK CP 243-1

■ Overview

PN

ISO

■ Benefits

TCP/IP UDP

PG

S7

S5

IT

FTP

• Connection of S7-200 to Industrial Ethernet with - 10/100 Mbit/s - Half/full duplex - RJ 45 socket - TCP/IP • Configuration, remote programming and service with STEP 7 Micro/WIN over Industrial Ethernet possible (program upload and program download, status) • CPU/CPU communication over Industrial Ethernet possible (client + server, 8 S7 connections + 1 PG connection) • An S7 OPC server (e.g. in SOFTNET-S7) allows PLC data to be further processed in PC applications. • Module replacement possible without PG

2

• Time and cost savings due to fast and easy configuration, programming and monitoring from a central location via LAN • Fast access via Ethernet for archiving or further processing of SIMATIC S7-200 process data • Increased data throughput, almost unlimited expansion and use of a standardized Ethernet infrastructure • SIMATIC S7-300 and S7-400 programmable controllers can communicate with S7-200 over Industrial Ethernet which means that S7-200 can also be used for more complex applications. • Reduction of complexity and savings for networking all automation levels and devices since only Ethernet is required • Simple startup and easy diagnostics options due to configuration support by STEP 7 Micro/WIN • Simple maintenance since modules can be replaced without a PG and network administrator support is simple (e.g. PING) • Open data exchange with PC applications over OPC is possible

■ Application • The CP 243-1 communication processor is used to connect S7-200 to Industrial Ethernet. • A SIMATIC S7-200 with STEP 7-Micro/WIN can be configured, programmed and diagnosed remotely over Industrial Ethernet in this way. • An S7-200 programmable controller with CP 243-1 can exchange data with other S7 programmable controllers over Industrial Ethernet. • PC applications can access the data of an S7-200 via an S7 OPC server. In this way, process data can be easily archived or further processed.

■ Design The CP 243-1 offers all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-200 system design: • Compact construction in a rugged plastic housing • Terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • LED status display • Alternatively, standard rail mounting or wall mounting • RJ45 socket for connecting to Ethernet (10/100 Mbit/s full/half duplex with automatic transmission rate detection)


2/181



■ Function The CP 243-1 independently handles data traffic over Industrial Ethernet. The communication is based on TCP/IP. You can configure up to eight connections. For connection control (keep alive) it is possible to configure an adjustable time for all TCP/IP transport connections for active and passive partners. The CP 243-1 enables communication between an S7-200 and another S7-200 or S7-300/S7-400 controller via Ethernet. Integration into PC applications is possible by means of the S7-OPC server of the PC software.

The CP 243-1 enables the S7-200 programming software STEP 7-Micro/WIN to access the S7-200 via Industrial Ethernet. Configuration • The CP 243-1 is configured with STEP 7-Micro/WIN (V3.2 SP1 or higher) • The programming data of the CP 243-1 are stored on the S7-200 CPU so it is possible to replace modules without a programming device • The CP 243-1 is supplied with a globally unique MAC address that cannot be changed.

■ Integration S7-400 with CP 443-1 PC with SOFTNET-S7 (incl. S7-OPC server)

PC with WinCC

OPC

WinCC

PC with WinAC WinAC

SIMATIC Field PG with SOFTNET-PG

S7-300 with CP 343-1

Industrial Ethernet PROFIBUS S7-200

S7-200

IO

S7-200

EM 277 CP 243-1

IO

CP 243-2 S7-200

CP 243-1 CP 243-1 IT

CP 243-1 IT AS-Interface

S7-200 communication options with CP 243-1

2/182


G_IK10_XX_10120

2



■ Technical specifications Data transmission rate Interfaces • Communication connection, electrical • Connection for supply voltage

■ Ordering data 10/100 Mbit/s autosensing 1 x RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s; TP) 1 x 2-pin terminal block

Supply voltage

24 V DC (±5%)

Current consumption • from the backplane bus • from 24 V DC external

55 mA 60 mA


1.75 W

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature - horizontal installation - vertical installation

0 °C … +55 °C 0 °C … +45 °C

• Transport/storage temperature • Relative humidity

-40 °C … +70 °C max. 95% at +25 °C

Construction • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm • Weight

71.2 x 80 x 62 150 g

Performance data S7 communication/ PG communication • Number of connections that can be used Configuration

8 S7 connections + 1 PG connection With STEP 7-Micro/WIN (V3.2 SP1 or higher)

2

Order No.

CP 243-1 communications processor for connection of SIMATIC S7-200 to Industrial Ethernet; for S7 communication, PG communication with electronic manual on CD-ROM, German, English, French, Italian, Spanish

6GK7 243-1EX00-0XE0

SOFTNET-S7 Edition 2005 for Industrial Ethernet

6GK1 704-1CW63-3AA0

Software for S7 and S5-compatible communication, incl. OPC server, PG/OP communication and NCM PC; up to 64 connections, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, 2000 Professional/ Server; for CP 1512 and CP 1612 German/English SOFTNET-S7 Lean Edition 2005 for Industrial Ethernet

6GK1 704-1LW63-3AA0

Software for S7 and S5-compatible communication, incl. OPC server, PG/OP communication and NCM PC; up to 8 connections, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, 2000 Professional/ Server; for CP 1512 and CP 1612 German/English S7-1613 Edition 2005

6GK1 716-1CB63-3AA0

Software for S7 and S5 communication, incl. PG/OP communication, OPC server and NCM PC; up to 120 connections, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, Windows 2000 Professional/Server; for CP 1613/CP 1613 A2 German/English STEP 7-Micro/WIN V4 programming software Target system: All CPUs of the SIMATIC S7-200 Prerequisite: Windows 2000/XP on PG or PC Type of delivery: German, English, French, Spanish, Italian, Chinese; with online documentation • Single license

6ES7 810-2CC03-0YX0 1)

• Upgrade Single License

6ES7 810-2CC03-0YX3

1) Upgrade for all previous STEP 7-Micro/WIN and STEP 7-Micro/DOS versions


2/183


System interfacing for SIMATIC and SINUMERIK CP 243-1 IT

2

■ Overview

PN

■ Benefits

ISO

TCP/IP UDP

PG

S7

S5

IT

FTP

• Connection of S7-200 to Industrial Ethernet with - 10/100 Mbit/s - Half/full duplex - RJ 45 socket - TCP/IP • Configuration, remote programming and service with STEP 7 Micro/WIN over Industrial Ethernet possible (program upload and program download, status) • CPU/CPU communication over Industrial Ethernet possible (client + server, 8 S7 connections + 1 PG connection) • IT communication - Web function - E-mail function - FTP client function for program-controlled data communication (e.g DOS, UNIX, LINUX, embedded systems) • FTP server with 8 MB memory • OPC allows PLC data to be further processed in PC applications

• Process information can be accessed simultaneously (password protected) with standard Web browsers, which reduces software costs on the client side • Low-cost bulk storage for data, statistics and HTML-based machine or plant documentation • Simple universal linking of PLCs to different computers by means of FTP • Local and worldwide transmission of event-driven messages by e-mail • Time and cost savings due to fast and easy configuration, programming and monitoring from a central location via LAN • SIMATIC S7-300 and S7-400 programmable controllers can communicate with S7-200 over Industrial Ethernet which means that S7-200 can also be used for more complex applications. • Reduction of complexity and savings for networking all automation levels and devices since only Ethernet is required • Simple startup and easy diagnostics options due to configuration support by STEP 7 Micro/WIN • Open data exchange with PC applications over OPC is possible

■ Application • The CP 243-1 IT communications processor is used to connect S7-200 to Industrial Ethernet. • A SIMATIC S7-200 with STEP 7-Micro/WIN can be configured, programmed and diagnosed remotely over Industrial Ethernet in this way. • A S7-200 programmable controller with CP 243-1 IT can exchange data with other S7 programmable controllers over Industrial Ethernet. • Simple visualization using Web technology, sending e-mails, and file processing (FTP). The file system of the CP 243-1 IT can also be managed through the CPU. The file system serves as a bulk storage device, a cross-system computer link and a storage for HTML pages and Java applets. The CP 243-1 IT has a large file system in which, apart from HTML pages, machine documentation or user guides can also be stored. • Distributed plants can be reached over telephone lines or the Internet by using a router and simple diagnostics, signal or user functions can be performed with the help of a web browser. The CP 243-1 IT is especially suited for plant sections in which using PCs for permanent monitoring functions would not be cost-effective. • PC applications can access the data of a S7-200 via S7-OPC. In this way, process data can be easily archived or further processed.

■ Design The CP 243-1 IT offers all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-200 system design: • Compact construction in a rugged plastic housing • Terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • LED status display • Alternatively, standard rail mounting or wall mounting • RJ45 socket for connecting to Ethernet (10/100 Mbit/s full/half duplex with automatic transmission rate detection)

2/184




■ Function • The CP 243-1 IT independently handles data traffic over Industrial Ethernet. • Communication is based on TCP/IP. • Up to 8 connections can be configured. For connection control (keep alive) it is possible to configure an adjustable time for all TCP/IP transport connections for active and passive partners. • The CP 243-1 IT enables communication between a S7-200 and another S7-200 or S7-300 or S7-400 PLC through Industrial Ethernet. • It can be integrated in PC applications by using the S7 OPC server of the PC software. • The CP 243-1 IT permits the S7-200 programming software STEP 7- Micro/WIN to access the S7-200 through Industrial Ethernet.

2

IT functions Web server: HTML pages can be downloaded and viewed with standard browsers. Web pages • For monitoring the S7-200 controller: standard pages are supplied with it for system diagnostics as well as a simple variable editor. • Other customized pages can be created with any HTML tools. E-mails messages can be sent from the application program through predefined E-mails. Variables can be integrated into text. FTP communication The CPU can send data blocks to other computers in the form of files or read or delete files on other computers (client function). Communication through FTP is possible with most operating systems Configuration • The CP 243-1 IT is configured with STEP 7-Micro/WIN (V3.2 SP3 and higher) • The CP 243-1 is supplied with a MAC address that is unique worldwide and which cannot be changed

■ Integration LINUX, DOS, UNIX, Mainframe over FTP

S7-400 with CP 443-1

PC with application (e. g. WinCC, WinAC) over OPC or Internet browser


Notebook

Field PG Websites

Router

Industrial Ethernet

Internet Intranet

PROFIBUS IO

EM 277 CP 243-2

CP 243-1 IT

CP 243-1 IT

IO

embedded system (e.g. nutrunner, welding control) over FTP

MOBIC Mobile/PDA

AS-Interface

G_IK10_XX_10200

S7-200

S7-200 communication options with CP 243-1 IT


2/185



2


■ Ordering data 10/100 Mbit/s Autosensing


1 x RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s; TP)


1 x 2-pin terminal block

Supply voltage

24 V DC (±5%)

Current consumption • From backplane bus

55 mA

• From external 24 V DC

60 mA


1.75 W

Perm. environmental conditions • Operating temperature - Horizontal mounting

0°C to +55°C

- Vertical mounting

0°C to +45°C


-40 °C to +70 °C

• Relative humidity

max. 95% at +25 °C


71.2 x 80 x 62

• Weight

150 g

Performance data IT communication • Number of connections to an e-mail server

1

• E-mail client

32 E-mails with max. 1024 characters

• Number of FTP connections

1

• Number of HTTP connections

4

• Adjustable access enable program

8 users

• Memory capacity of the Flash Memory file system

8 MB

• Service life of the Flash Memory cells

1,000,000 write cycles

CP 243-1 IT communications processor

• Number of usable connections

8 S7 connections + 1 PG connection

Configuration

With STEP 7-Micro/WIN, V3.2 SP3 and higher

6GK7 243-1GX00-0XE0

for connection of SIMATIC S7-200 to Industrial Ethernet; for S7 communication, PG communication, E-mail and WWW server; with electronic manual on CD-ROM; German, English, French, Italian, Spanish SOFTNET-S7 Edition 2005 for Industrial Ethernet

6GK1 704-1CW63-3AA0


6GK1 704-1LW63-3AA0

Software for S7 and S5-compatible communication, incl. OPC server, PG/OP communication and NCM PC; up to 8 connections, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, 2000 Professional/ Server; for CP 1512 and CP 1612 German/English S7-1613 Edition 2005

S7 communication/ PG communication

Order No.

6GK1 716-1CB63-3AA0

Software for S7 and S5 communication, incl. PG/OP communication, OPC server and NCM PC; up to 120 connections, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, Windows 2000 Professional/Server; for CP 1613/CP 1613 A2 German/English STEP 7-Micro/WIN V4 programming software Target system: All CPUs of the SIMATIC S7-200 Prerequisite: Windows 2000/XP on PG or PC Type of delivery: German, English, French, Spanish, Italian, Chinese; with online documentation • Single license

6ES7 810-2CC03-0YX0

• Upgrade Single License1)

6ES7 810-2CC03-0YX3

1) Upgrade for all previous STEP 7-Micro/WIN and STEP 7-Micro/DOS versions

2/186



System interfacing for SIMATIC and SINUMERIK CP 343-1 Lean

■ Overview

PN

ISO

■ Benefits

TCP/IP UDP

PG

S7

S5

IT

FTP

• Interface for the SIMATIC S7-300 to Industrial Ethernet - 10/100 Mbit/s full/half duplex connection with Autosensing for automatic switchover - RJ45 connection - multi-protocol operation with TCP and UDP transport protocol - Keep Alive function • Communication services: - TCP/IP and UDP transport protocol - PG/OP communication - S7 communication (server) - S5-compatible communication • Multicast for UDP • Remote programming and initial start-up is possible exclusively over Industrial Ethernet • Integration into network management through SNMP • Configuration of CP 343-1 Lean with NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet (integrated into STEP 7) • Cross-network programming device/operator panel communication through S7 routing

2

• Direct integration of S7-300 in complex systems by means of Industrial Ethernet at 100 Mbit/s • Investment protection for existing plants through the integration of the SIMATIC S7-300 by means of the S5-compatible communication • Flexible use thanks to lack of slot rules • One slot is saved thanks to single-width format • Remote programming is possible due to the WAN characteristic of TCP/IP, even via the telephone network (e.g. ISDN) • A large number of stations can be accessed thanks to the multicast function • Access by as many as 4 HMI systems to the SIMATIC S7-300 • Use of the socket interface in the partner system possible without RFC 1006 • Initial start-up can be performed directly over Industrial Ethernet • Secure data communication by means of industry-standard device interface using plug-in connector IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 and additional strain relief by latching the connector to the housing

■ Application The CP 343-1 Lean is the communications processor for SIMATIC S7-300 for Industrial Ethernet. The CP 343-1 Lean relieves the CPU of communications tasks and facilitates additional connections with its own processor. Communication options of the S7-300 through CP 343-1 Lean with: • Programming devices, processors and HMI devices • Other SIMATIC S7 systems • SIMATIC S5 PLCs

■ Design The CP 343-1 Lean offers all the advantages of SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact design; the rugged plastic casing features on the front: - RJ45 socket for connection to Industrial Ethernet with automatic data rate detection through Autosensing; The RJ45 sockets have additional industry-compatible retaining collars for connection to the new IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 - 2-pin plug-in terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • Easy installation; The CP 343-1 Lean is snap-mounted on the S7-300 DIN rail and connected to adjacent modules through the bus connectors. There are no slot rules. • The CP 343-1 Lean can be operated without a fan. A standby battery is not required. • In combination with IM 360/361, CP 343-1 Lean can also be used in an expansion rack (ER). • The module can be replaced without the need for a programming device


2/187



2

■ Function The CP 343-1 Lean independently handles data traffic over Industrial Ethernet. The module has its own processor. Layers 1 to 4 comply with international standards. Multi-protocol operation of the transport protocols TCP/IP and UDP is possible. The CP 343-1 Lean has a preset unique Ethernet address and can be put directly into operation through the network. The CP 343-1 Lean works in multi-protocol mode for the following communication services: PG/OP communication PG/OP communication allows all S7 stations connected to the network to be remotely programmed. • S7 routing; Using of S7 routing it is possible to use programming device communication across networks. S7 communication For connecting the S7-300 (server only) to S7-400, HMI units and PCs (CP 1613 with S7-1613 or SOFTNET-S7). S5-compatible communication Based on layer 4, this is a simple, optimized interface for data communication. Up to 8 KB of data can be transmitted in one call.

S5-compatible communication is used for communication with SIMATIC S5, SIMATIC S7-400/-300 and computers/PCs. The function blocks required are a component part of NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet and must be integrated into the S7 user program. S5-compatible communication with FETCH/WRITE allows direct access to the CPU data of the SIMATIC S5 (e.g. via CP 1430). This means existing HMI systems can still be used. Implementing UDP as the transmission protocol for S5-compatible communication allows utilization of the multicast function to simultaneously send and receive data on configured multicast circuits. Diagnostics Extensive diagnostic options are available via NCM S7, including: • Status of the CP • General diagnostics and statistics functions • Connection diagnostics • LAN controller statistics • Diagnostics buffer Via SNMP all MIB-2 objects can be read out. This enables the current status of the Ethernet interfaces to be retrieved.

This interface enables • TCP transport connections • UDP - Multicast for UDP

Configuring

to be used.

The configuration data of the CP is stored on the CPU. This allows the module to be replaced without a programming device.

Version 5.2 or higher of STEP 7 and NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet is required for configuring the CP 343-1 Lean. NCM S7 is completely embedded in the STEP7 environment.

All the function blocks required for S5-compatible communication are included in the scope of supply.

■ Technical specifications Data transmission rate Interfaces • Communication connection, electrical • Communication connection, optical Power supply Current consumption • From backplane bus • From 24 V DC external

10/100 Mbit/s autosensing

Performance data

1 x RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s; TP)



• Sum of all simultaneously operable TCP/UDP connections

+5 V DC (±5%) and +24 V DC (±5%) 200 mA typ. 160 mA max. 200 mA

Power loss

5.8 W

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature • Transport/storage temperature • Relative humidity

0 °C to +60 °C -40 °C to +70 °C max. 95% at +25 °C

Construction • Module format • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm • Weight Configuring software

2/188


Compact module S7-300, single width 40 x 125 x 120 approx. 200 g NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet (supplied with STEP 7 V5.2)

max. 8

• Useful data - TCP - UDP

8 KByte 2 KByte

S7 communication • Number of connections

max. 4

PG/OP communication • Number of operable OP connections (non-isochrone services)

max. 4

Multi-protocol operation • Sum of all simultaneously operable connections

max. 12

Multicast

8



■ Ordering data

Order No.

CP 343-1 Lean communications processor For connecting SIMATIC S7-300 to Industrial Ethernet through TCP/IP and UDP, S7 communication, S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE), FETCH/WRITE, diagnostic expansions, Multicast, SNMP, initial start-up over LAN 10/100 Mbit/s; with electronic manual on CD-ROM

6GK7 343-1CX00-0XE0

SOFTNET-S7 Edition 2005 for Industrial Ethernet Software for S7 and S5-compatible communication, incl. OPC server, PG/OP communication and NCM PC; up to 64 connections, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, 2000 Professional/ Server; for CP 1512 and CP 1612 German/English

6GK1 704-1CW63-3AA0

SOFTNET-S7 Lean Edition 2005 for Industrial Ethernet Software for S7 and S5-compatible communication, incl. OPC server, PG/OP communication and NCM PC; up to 8 connections, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, 2000 Professional/ Server; for CP 1512 and CP 1612 German/English

6GK1 704-1LW63-3AA0

S7-1613 Edition 2005 Software for S7 and S5 communication, incl. PG/OP communication, OPC server and NCM PC; up to 120 connections, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, Windows 2000 Professional/Server; for CP 1613/CP 1613 A2 German/English

6GK1 716-1CB63-3AA0

2

Order No. NCM S7 configuration software for Industrial Ethernet NCM S7 configuration software for Industrial Ethernet CPs for SIMATIC S7 V5.2, for execution under STEP 7 V5.2; on CD-ROM, with electronic manual in English, German, French, Spanish and Italian

Included in the scope of supply of STEP 7 V5.2 and higher


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0

Documentation S7-CPs/NCM S7 For Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS; manual package for configuring S7-CPs, IE/PB link and PC stations (STEP 7 V5.3) • German

6GK7 080-0AA01-8AA0

• English

6GK7 080-0AA01-8BA0

■ More information The NCM S7 configuration software for Industrial Ethernet is included in the scope of supply of STEP 7 V5.2.


2/189



2

■ Overview

■ Benefits

PN

ISO

IO-C

IO-D

TCP/IP UDP

PG

S7

S5

IT

FTP

CBA

• Connection of SIMATIC S7-300 to Industrial Ethernet - 10/100 Mbit/s full/half duplex connection with autosensing - Connection for RJ45 - Multi-protocol operation with TCP and UDP transport protocol - Adjustable Keep Alive function • Communication services: - PROFINET IO Controller - PROFINET CBA - TCP/IP and UDP transport protocol - Programming device/operator panel communication: Cross-network by means of S7 routing - S7 communication (client, server, multiplexing) - S5-compatible communication • Multicast for UDP • IP address assignment via DHCP, simple PC tool or via the user program (e.g. HMI) • Access protection by means of configurable access list • Remote programming and initial startup via the network • Automatic setting of the CPU clock via Ethernet with NTP or SIMATIC procedure • SNMP MIB2 diagnostics information for network management systems

2/190


• Connection of field devices to Industrial Ethernet with PROFINET • Investment protection for existing plants through the integration of the SIMATIC S7-300 by means of the S5-compatible communication • Savings in time and cost in modular machine and plant construction with PROFINET CBA • Security: Protection without the need for changing passwords through device-oriented IP address lists • Remote programming is possible due to the WAN characteristic of TCP/IP, even via the telephone network (e.g. ISDN) • Setting of intrinsic IP parameters of series machines without STEP 7 • Plant-wide time synchronization via NTP or SIMATIC procedure • Accessibility of many nodes by means of free UDP connections or multicast function • Active transmission of data with S7 communication • Access by as many as 16 HMI systems to the SIMATIC S7-300 • Use of the socket interface in the partner system possible without RFC 1006

■ Application The CP 343-1 is the communications processor for connecting SIMATIC S7-300 to Industrial Ethernet. With its own processor, it relieves the CPU of communications tasks and facilitates additional connections. The CP 343-1 offers the communication options of the S7-300 with: • PG/PC • HMI devices • SIMATIC S5/S7/C7 systems • PROFINET IO devices • PROFINET CBA components

■ Design The CP 343-1 offers all the advantages of SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact design; the rugged plastic casing features on the front: - automatic transmission rate detection through autosensing; - RJ45 socket for connection to Industrial Ethernet. - 2-pin plug-in terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • Simple assembly; The CP 343-1 is mounted on the S7-300 DIN rail and connected to adjacent modules by means of the bus connectors. There are no slot rules. • Operation without fans; a backup battery is not required. • With the IM 360/361, the CP 343-1 can also be used in an expansion rack (ER) • Module replacement possible without PG • C-PLUG (configuration plug) for PROFINET CBA (not included in scope of delivery)



■ Function The CP 343-1 independently handles data traffic over Industrial Ethernet. The module has its own processor. Layers 1 to 4 comply with international standards. Multi-protocol operation of the transport protocols TCP/IP and UDP is possible. For connection control (keep alive) it is possible to configure an adjustable time for all TCP transport connections for active and passive partners. The CPU’s time can be set using NTP or SIMATIC procedures with an accuracy of approx. +/-1 s.

Diagnostics Extensive diagnostics options are available via NCM S7, including: • Operating status of CP • Operating status of PROFINET devices connected to CP • General diagnostics and statistics functions • Connection diagnostics • LAN controller statistics • Diagnostics buffer

The CP 343-1 works in multi-protocol mode for the following communication services:

Diagnostics possibilities during operation • Status scanning of connections using function block • SNMP MIB-2 objects; the current status of the Ethernet interface can then be called, e.g. for network management.

PG/OP communication

Security

PG/OP communication allows all S7 stations connected to the network to be remotely programmed. • S7 routing; with the aid of S7 routing it is possible to use programming device communication across networks

With a configurable IP access list, specific PCs and automation devices can be released for IP-based access to the CP or controller.

The CP 343-1 has a preset unique Ethernet address and can be put directly into operation over the network.

PROFINET communication • PROFINET IO Controller; real-time communication (RT) with field devices on Industrial Ethernet in accordance with PROFINET standard • PROFINET CBA; Communication between technology modules (distributed intelligence); Cyclic or acyclic communication can be selected. S7 communication For connecting the S7-300 (server and client) to S7-200/300/400 (server and client), HMI units and PCs (CP 1613 with S7-1613 or SOFTNET-S7). Open IE and S5-compatible communication Based on layer 4, this is a simple, optimized interface for data communication. Up to 8 KB of data can be transmitted in one call. This interface enables • TCP transport connections - TCP with RFC 1006 - TCP without RFC 1006 • UDP - Multicast for UDP to be used. Open IE and S5-compatible communication is used for communication with SIMATIC S5, SIMATIC S7-400/-300 and computers/PCs. The function blocks required are a component part of STEP 7 for Industrial Ethernet and must be integrated into the S7 user program. S5-compatible communication with FETCH/WRITE allows direct access to the CPU data of the SIMATIC S5 (e.g. via CP 1430 TCP). This means existing HMI systems can still be used. Implementing UDP as the transmission protocol for S5-compatible communication allows utilization of the multicast function to simultaneously send and receive data on configured multicast circuits.

Configuring Version 5.3 SP2 of STEP 7 and NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet are required for configuring the CP 343-1. NCM S7 is completely embedded in the STEP 7 environment. The CBA interconnection information created with SIMATIC iMAP are backed up on the C-PLUG (Configuration Plug) swap media. The CP can be replaced in the event of failure without the need for a programming device because the relevant user and configuration data are saved on the CPU or on the C-PLUG. The function blocks required for communication and the programmable communications block (S7-Client) are included in the scope of supply of NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet or can be downloaded from the Internet.

■ Technical specifications Transmission rate Interfaces • Communication connection, electrical • Communication connection, optical • Slot for the swap medium Power supply Current consumption • From backplane bus • From 24 V DC external

10/100 Mbit/s autosensing 1 x RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s; TP) 1 x 2-pin terminal block C-PLUG +5 V DC (±5%) and +24 V DC (±5%) 200 mA typ. 160 mA max. 200 mA

Power loss

5.8 W


0 °C to +60 °C -40 °C to +70 °C max. 95% at +25 °C

Construction • Module format • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm • Weight

Compact module S7-300, double width 80 x 125 x 120 approx. 600 g

Configuring software

STEP 7 V5.3 SP2 and higher


2/191

2



2

■ Technical specifications (continued) Performance data S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) • Sum of all simultaneously operable TCP/UDP connections • Useful data - TCP - UDP

max. 16

8 KB 2 KB


max. 16

PG/OP communication • Number of operable OP connections (non-isochrone services)

16


max. 48

Multicast

16

PROFINET communication PROFINET IO Controller • Number of operable PN IO-Devices

125

• Size of IO data areas overall - I/O input area - I/O output area

2160 byte 2160 byte

• Size of I/O data areas per connected PN IO device - I/O input area - I/O output area

max. 128 byte max. 128 byte

PROFINET CBA • Number of remote interconnecting partners

64

• Swapped connectors

1000

• Data length of all incoming connections

8192 byte

• Data length of all outgoing connections

8192 byte

• Data length for arrays and structures (acyclic interconnection), max.

8192 byte

• Data length for arrays and structures (cyclic interconnection), max.

450 byte

• Data length for arrays and structures (local interconnection), max.

2400 byte

2/192


• Remote interconnections with acyclical transmission - Scan rate: Sampling time, min. Possible settings: 100, 200, 500 and 1000 ms - Number of incoming interconnections, max. - Number of outgoing interconnections, max. - Data length of all incoming interconnections - Data length of all outgoing interconnections • Remote interconnections with cyclical transmission - Transmission frequency: Transmission time, min. Possible settings: 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 and 1000 ms - Number of incoming interconnections, max. - Number of outgoing interconnections, max. - Data length of all incoming interconnections - Data length of all outgoing interconnections • HMI variables via PROFINET (acyclic) - Number of stations for HMI variables that can connect (PN OPC/iMap); stations are 2 x PN OPC and 1 x SIMATIC iMap - Update HMI variables, min. - Number of HMI variables, max. - Data length of all HMI variables • Internal device interconnections - Number of internal interconnections - Data length of all internal interconnections • Interconnections with constants - Number of interconnections with constants, max. - Data lengths of all interconnections with constants. • PROFIBUS proxy functionality • Access to S7extended variables - Maximum number of S7 connections for access to variables with the PROFINET attribute "S7extended", max.

100 ms

128 128 8192 byte 8192 byte

10 ms

200 200 2000 byte 2000 byte

3

500 ms 200 8192 byte 256 2400 byte

200 4096 byte No 32



■ Ordering data

Order No.

CP 343-1 communications processor For connection of SIMATIC S7-300 to Industrial Ethernet; PROFINET IO Controller, PROFINET CBA, TCP/IP and UDP, S7 communication, S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE), FETCH/ WRITE, with and without RFC 1006, diagnostic expansions, multicast, CPU clock synchronization via SIMATIC procedure and NTP, access protection through IP access list, SNMP, DHCP, initialization over LAN 10/100 Mbit/s; with electronic manual on CD-ROM

6GK7 343-1EX21-0XE0


6GK1 900-0AB00

2

Order No. S7-1613 Edition 2005 Software for S7 and S5 communication, incl. PG/OP communication, OPC server and NCM PC; up to 120 connections, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, Windows 2000 Professional/Server; for CP 1613/CP 1613 A2 German/English NCM S7 configuration software for Industrial Ethernet for Industrial Ethernet CPs for SIMATIC S7 V5.3 SP2, operating under STEP 7 V5.3; on CD-ROM with electronic manual in German, English, French, Spanish, Italian

6GK1 716-1CB63-3AA0

Included in the STEP 7 V5.3 package

Documentation S7-CPs/NCM for Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS for V5.x (STEP 7 V5.x); paper version


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0


6GK1 704-1CW63-3AA0


6GK1 704-1LW63-3AA0

• German

6GK7 080-0AA01-8AA0

• English

6GK7 080-0AA01-8BA0

SIMATIC iMap V2.0 for configuring PROFINET CBA, Prerequisite: Windows 2000 Prof. SP4 or Windows XP Prof. SP1; on programming device or PC with Pentium processor, min. 500 MHz; STEP 7, V5.2 SP1 and higher incl. NCM, SIMATIC NET IE SOFTNET-PG, V6.2 and higher; PN OPC server, V6.2 and higher Type of supply: German, English with electronic documentation • Single license

6ES7 820-0CC04-0YA5


6ES7 820-0CC01-0YX2

• Upgrade to V2.0 single license

6ES7 820-0CC04-0YE5


2/193


System interfacing for SIMATIC and SINUMERIK CP 343-1 Advanced

2

■ Overview

■ Benefits

PN

ISO

IO-C

IO-D

TCP/IP UDP

PG

S7

S5

IT

FTP

CBA

• Connection of SIMATIC S7-300 to Industrial Ethernet - 10/100 Mbit/s full/half duplex connection with autosensing - Connection for RJ45 - Multi-protocol operation with TCP and UDP transport protocol - Adjustable Keep Alive function • Communication services: - Open IE communication (TCP/IP and UDP): Multicast for UDP - PROFINET IO controller - PROFINET CBA - Programming device/operator panel communication: Cross-network by means of S7 routing - S7 communication (client, server, multiplexing) - S5compatible communication - IT communication: HTTP communication supports access to process data through Web browsers; FTP communication supports program-controlled FTP client communication, Access to data blocks through FTP server, Data handling for own file system through FTP, E-mail • IP address assignment via DHCP, simple PC tool or via program block (e.g. for HMI) • Access protection by means of configurable access list • Module replacement without programming device; all information is stored on the C-PLUG (also file system for IT functions). • Extensive diagnostic functions for all modules in the rack • Integration into network management systems through the support of SNMP V1 MIB-II

2/194


• The field level (PROFINET, S7, S5) can be connected over Industrial Ethernet with the management level (IT communication such as Email, FTP and HTTP) • Connection of field devices to Industrial Ethernet with PROFINET • Optimum support of maintenance through - web-based diagnostics - monitoring with IT network management tools (SNMP) - simple module replacement without PG using C-PLUG swap media • Savings in time and cost in modular machine and plant construction with PROFINET CBA • Security: Protection without changing passwords, through devicerelated IP address lists; password protection for Web applications • Low-cost access to process information using standard Web browsers, reducing software costs on the client side • File system as low-cost bulk storage for data, log files, machine documentation and statistics (C-PLUG as swap media) • Plant-wide time synchronization via NTP or SIMATIC procedure • Setting of own IP parameters when using in series machines delivered without STEP 7

■ Application The CP 343-1 Advanced is the communications processor for connecting SIMATIC S7-300 to Industrial Ethernet. With its own processor, it relieves the CPU of communications tasks and facilitates additional connections. The CP 343-1 Advanced offers the communication options of the S7-300: • PG/PC • Host computer • HMI devices • SIMATIC S5/S7/C7 systems • PROFINET IO devices • PROFINET CBA components PROFINET CBA is used to create reusable technology modules.

■ Design The CP 343-1 Advanced offers all the advantages of SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact design; the rugged plastic casing features on the front: - automatic transmission rate detection through autosensing; - RJ45 socket for connection to Industrial Ethernet. - 2-pin plug-in terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • Easy installation; The CP 343-1 Advanced is snap-mounted on the S7-300 DIN rail and connected to adjacent modules through the bus connectors. There are no slot rules. • Operation without fans; a backup battery is not required. • With the IM 360/361, the CP 343-1 Advanced can also be used in an expansion rack (ER) • Module replacement possible without PG • C-PLUG (configuration plug) is included in scope of delivery as replacement medium (cannot be operated without C-PLUG)



■ Function The CP 343-1 Advanced independently handles data traffic over Industrial Ethernet. The module has its own processor and can be put into service directly using the unique preset Ethernet address (MAC) via the network. Multi-protocol operation of the transport protocols TCP/IP and UDP is possible. For connection control (keep alive) it is possible to configure an adjustable time for all TCP transport connections for active and passive partners. The CPU’s time can be set using NTP or SIMATIC procedures with an accuracy of approx. +/-1 s. The CP 343-1 Advanced works in multi-protocol mode for the following communication services: PG/OP communication PG/OP communication allows all S7 stations connected to the network to be remotely programmed. • S7 routing; With the aid of S7 routing it is possible to use programming device communication across networks. PROFINET communication • PROFINET IO Controller; real-time communication (RT) with field devices on Industrial Ethernet in accordance with PROFINET standard • PROFINET CBA; Communication between technology modules (distributed intelligence); Cyclic or acyclic communication can be selected. S7 communication For connecting the S7-300 (server and client) to S7-200/300/400 (server and client), HMI units and PCs (SOFTNET-S7 or CP 1613 A2 with S7-1613). Open IE and S5-compatible communication Based on layer 4, this is a simple, optimized interface for data communication. Up to 8 KB of data can be transmitted in one call. This interface enables • TCP transport connections - TCP with RFC 1006 - TCP without RFC 1006 • UDP - Multicast for UDP to be used. Open IE and S5-compatible communication is used for communication with SIMATIC S5, SIMATIC S7-400/-300 and computers/PCs. The function blocks required are a component part of STEP 7 for Industrial Ethernet and must be integrated into the S7 user program. S5-compatible communication with FETCH/WRITE allows direct access to the CPU data of the SIMATIC S7 (in the same way as in the CP 1430 TCP and the SIMATIC S5). This means existing HMI systems can still be used. Implementing UDP as the transmission protocol allows utilization of the multicast function to simultaneously send and receive data on configured multicast circuits.

IT functions • Web server; any HTML pages up to 30 MB can be downloaded and viewed with standard browsers • Standard diagnostics pages; for prompt diagnostics on the system for all modules inserted in the rack, without the need for additional tools • Emails; sending of Emails direct from the user program • Communication via FTP; open protocol that is available on most operating system platforms • The 30 MB RAM file system can be used for buffering dynamic data. Diagnostics data Extensive diagnostics options are available via NCM S7, including: • Operating status of CP • Diagnostics of the assigned PROFINET field devices • General diagnostics and statistics functions • Connection diagnostics • LAN controller statistics • Diagnostic buffer Diagnostics possibilities during operation • Status scanning of connections using function block • SNMP MIB-2 objects; the current status of the Ethernet interface can then be called, e.g. for network management. • Web interface with basic diagnostics information and diagnostics buffer of the CP and CPU in plain text Security With a configurable IP access list, specific PCs and automation devices can be released for IP-based access to the CP or the controller. Web pages can be protected using passwords. Configuration Version 5.3 SP3 of STEP 7 and NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet are required for configuring the CP 343-1 Advanced. NCM S7 is completely embedded in the STEP 7 environment. The configuration data of the CP created with STEP 7 is stored on the CPU. Attention must however be paid to the memory volume of the S7-CPU. The user-specific HTML pages, FTP data and the CBA connection information created with SIMATIC iMAP are saved on the swap media C-PLUG (Configuration Plug). The CP can be replaced in the event of failure without the need for a programming device because the relevant user and configuration data are saved on the CPU or on the C-PLUG. The function blocks required for communication and the programmable communications block (S7-Client) are included in the scope of supply of NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet or can be downloaded from the Internet.


2/195

2



2

■ Technical specifications Data transmission rate Interfaces • Communication connection, electrical • Connection for supply voltage • Slot for the swap medium Voltage supply Current consumption • from the backplane bus • From 24 V DC external

10/100 Mbit/s 1 x RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s; TP) Autosensing/Autocrossover/ Autonegotiation 1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal block C-PLUG +5 V DC (±5%) and +24 V DC (±5%) 200 mA typ. 160 mA max. 200 mA

Power loss

5.8 W


0 °C … +60 °C -40 °C … +70 °C max. 95% at +25 °C




STEP 7 V5.3 SP3 and higher

Performance data Open IE/S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) • Sum of all simultaneously operable TCP/UDP connections

max. 16

• Useful data - TCP - UDP

8KB 2KB


max. 16

PG/OP communication • Number of operable OP connections (acyclic services)

16


max. 48

Multicast

16

FTP communication • Number of client connections • Number of server connections

max. 10 max. 2

IT communication Number of connections to an Email server Memory capacity • Flash memory file system • RAM memory Service life of the Flash Memory cells

2/196


max. 1

30 MB 30 MB approx. 100000 write cycles

PROFINET communication PROFINET IO Controller • Number of operable PN IO-Devices

125


2160 byte 2160 byte

• Size of I/O data areas per connected PN IO device - I/O input area - I/O output area



64


1000


8192 byte


8192 byte


8192 byte


450 byte


2400 byte

• Remote interconnections with acyclic transmission - Scan rate: Sampling time, min. Possible settings: 100, 200, 500 and 1000 ms - Number of incoming interconnections, max. - Number of outgoing interconnections, max. - Data length of all incoming interconnections - Data length of all outgoing interconnections • Remote interconnections with cyclic transmission - Transmission frequency: Transmission time, min. Possible settings: 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 and 1000 ms - Number of incoming interconnections, max. - Number of outgoing interconnections, max. - Data length of all incoming interconnections - Data length of all outgoing interconnections • HMI variables via PROFINET (acyclic) - Number of stations for HMI variables that can connect (PN OPC/iMap); stations are 2 x PN OPC and 1 x SIMATIC iMap - Update HMI variables, min. - Number of HMI variables, max. - Data length of all HMI variables

100 ms

128 128 8192 byte 8192 byte

10 ms

200 200 2000 byte 2000 byte

3

500 ms 200 8192 byte



■ Technical specifications (continued) • Internal device interconnections - number of internal interconnections - data length of all internal interconnections • Interconnections with constants - number of interconnections with constants, max. - data lengths of all interconnections with constants.

■ Ordering data CP 343-1 Advanced communications processor

• PROFIBUS proxy functionality 256 2400 byte

4096 byte

Order No. 6GK7 343-1GX21-0XE0

Software for S7 and S5-compatible communication, incl. OPC server, PG/OP communication and NCM PC; up to 8 connections, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, 2000 Professional/ Server; for CP 1512 and CP 1612 German/English

S7-1613 Edition 2005

6GK1 716-1CB63-3AA0

NCM S7 configuration software for Industrial Ethernet

6GK1 900-0AB00

Configuration software for Industrial Ethernet CPs for SIMATIC S7 V5.3 SP2, operating under STEP 7 V5.3; on CD-ROM with electronic manual in German, English, French, Spanish, Italian

Included in the STEP 7 V5.3 package

Documentation S7-CPs/NCM for Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS 6GK1 704-1CW63-3AA0


Order No.

Software for S7 and S5 communication, incl. PG/OP communication, OPC server and NCM PC; up to 120 connections, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, Windows 2000 Professional/Server; for CP 1613/CP 1613 A2 German/English

Swap medium for simple replacement of devices in the event of a fault; for storing configuration or engineering and application data; can be used for SIMATIC NET products with C-PLUG slot SOFTNET-S7 Edition 2005 for Industrial Ethernet

• Access to S7extended variables - maximum number of S7 connec- 32 tions for access to variables with the PROFINET attribute "S7extended", max.

200

For the connection of SIMATIC S7-300 to Industrial Ethernet; PROFINET IO Controller, PROFINET CBA, TCP/IP and UDP, S7 communication, S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE), FETCH/WRITE, with and without RFC 1006, diagnostics expansions, multicast, Web server, HTML diagnostics, FTP server, FTP client, E-mail client, setting of CPU’s clock using SIMATIC and NTP procedures, access protection through IP access list, SNMP, DHCP, initialization over LAN 10/100 Mbit/s; with electronic manual on CD-ROM C-PLUG

2

no

6GK1 704-1LW63-3AA0

for V5.x (STEP 7 V5.x); paper version • German

6GK7 080-0AA01-8AA0

• English

6GK7 080-0AA01-8BA0

SIMATIC iMap V3.0 for configuring PROFINET CBA, Prerequisite: Windows 2000 Prof. with Service Pack 4 or later or Windows XP Prof. with Service Pack 1 or later or Windows 2003 Server with Service Pack 1 or later; on PG or PC with Pentium processor, min. 1 GHz; STEP 7 V5.3 or later with Service Pack 3, PN OPC Server V6.3 or later Type of deilvery: German, English with electronic documentation • Single license

6ES7 820-0CC04-0YA5


6ES7 820-0CC01-0YX2

• Upgrade to V3.0, single license

6ES7 820-0CC04-0YE5


2/197



2

■ Overview

■ Benefits

• Direct integration of S7-400 even in complex systems by means of Industrial Ethernet at 100 Mbit/s • Investment protection for existing plants through the integration of the SIMATIC S7-400 by means of the S5-compatible communication. Flexible in use thanks to automatic media switching (AUI/ITP) and free choice of slot • Remote programming is possible due to the WAN characteristic of TCP/IP, even via the telephone network (e.g. ISDN) • Accessibility of many nodes by means of free UDP connections or multicast function • Use of the socket interface in the partner system possible without RFC 1006 • Protection against unauthorized access via TCP/IP PN

ISO

TCP/IP UDP

PG

S7

S5

IT

FTP

• Connection of SIMATIC S7-400 to Industrial Ethernet - 10/100 Mbit/s full/half duplex connection with autosensing for automatic switchover between AUI, ITP and RJ45 interface - universal connection options for ITP, RJ45 and AUI - multi-protocol operation with ISO, TCP/IP and UDP transport protocol - adjustable Keep Alive function • Communication services: - Open IE communication via TCP/IP and UDP) - PG/OP communication - S7 communication - S5 compatible communication • Multicast for UDP • Cross-network programming device/operator panel communication through S7 routing • Remote programming and initial startup via the network • Access protection by means of configurable access list

2/198


■ Application The CP 443-1 is the communications processor for the SIMATIC S7-400 for Industrial Ethernet. With its own processor, it relieves the CPU of communications tasks and facilitates additional connections. Communication options for S7-400 through CP 443-1 with: • Programming devices, processors and HMI devices • Other SIMATIC S7 systems • SIMATIC S5 PLCs.

■ Design The CP 443-1 offers all the advantages of SIMATIC S7-400 system design: • Compact design; the rugged plastic casing features on the front: - 15-pin Sub-D socket with automatic switching between AUI and twisted pair interface; - RJ45 socket for connection to Industrial Ethernet. • Automatic transmission rate detection through autosensing. • Easy installation: the CP 443-1 is mounted on the S7-400 rack and connected to other modules of the S7-400 by means of the backplane bus. There are no slot rules. • The CP 443-1 can be operated without a fan. A standby battery is not required. • In combination with IM 460/461, the CP 443-1 can also be used in an expansion rack (ER) • The module can be replaced without the need for a programming device.



■ Function The CP 443-1 independently handles data traffic over Industrial Ethernet. The module has its own processor. Layers 1 to 4 comply with international standards. Multi-protocol operation of the transport protocols ISO and TCP/IP is possible.

Security With a freely configurable access list, specific users and programmable controllers can be enabled for accessing the CP or control via TCP/IP. Diagnostics data

The CP 443-1 works in multi-protocol mode for the following communication services:

Extensive diagnostic options are available via NCM S7, including: • Operating status of the CP • General diagnostics and statistics functions • Connection diagnostics • LAN controller statistics • Diagnostic buffer

PG/OP communication

Configuration

PG/OP communication allows all S7 stations connected to the network to be remotely programmed. • S7 routing With the aid of S7 routing it is possible to use programming device communication across networks.

STEP 7 and NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet are required for configuring the CP 443-1. NCM S7 is completely embedded in the STEP 7 environment.

For connection control (keep alive) it is possible to configure an adjustable time for all TCP transport connections for active and passive partners. The CP 443-1 has a preset unique Ethernet address and can be put directly into operation over the network.

S7 communication • for connecting the S7-200/300 (server and client) to S7-400 (server and client), HMI devices and PCs (SOFTNET-S7 or CP 1613 A2 with S7-1613). Communication takes place through the CP 443-1 without further configuration. • H communication For redundant S7 communication, the CP 443-1 can also be used in SIMATIC H systems. • Time of day synchronization The CP 443-1 is capable of forwarding the time of day of the S7-400 CPU to the network. Conversely, the CP 443-1 of the S7-400-CPU can make an existing time of day available on the network. This is also made available by means of the international protocol (Network Time Protocol).

The CP is only available following installation of NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet in the hardware catalog of STEP 7. NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet is a component of STEP 7 (Version V 5.0 or higher). In Version V5 or higher of STEP 7/NCM S7 the configuration data of the CP can also optionally be stored on the CPU. This allows the module to be replaced without a programming device. Attention should therefore be paid to the memory capacity of the S7-CPU. Configuration and programming of all SIMATIC S7 controllers connected to the network is possible over the network. All function blocks (FC) required for S5-compatible communication are included in the scope of supply of NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet.


Open IE and S5-compatible communication

Interfaces

Based on layer 4, this is a simple, optimized interface for data communication.


Open IE and S5-compatible communication is used with SIMATIC S5 and computers/PCs. The function calls required are a component part of NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet and must be integrated in the S7 user program. S5-compatible communication with FETCH/WRITE allows direct access to the CPU data in the same way as in the CP 1430. This means existing HMI systems can still be used. Implementing UDP as the transmission protocol allows utilization of the multicast function to simultaneously send and receive data on configurable multicast circuits.

1 x 15-pin Sub-D socket (10 Mbit/s AUI; 10/100 Mbit/s ITP) 1 x RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s; TP)

Up to 8 KB of data can be transmitted in one call. This interface enables the following to be used: • ISO transport connections • TCP transport connections - TCP with RFC 1006 - TCP without RFC 1006 • UDP (2 KB data length) - Multicast for UDP (2 KB data length)


Current consumption • from +5 V DC (±5%)

approx. 1.4 A

• from 24 V DC (±5%)

typ. 220 mA, max. 350 mA (depending on the interface used)

Power loss

8.6 W


0 °C … +60 °C


-40 °C … +70 °C


max. 95% at +25 °C

Construction • Module format

Compact module S7-400, single width

• Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm

25 x 290 x 210

• Weight

approx. 700 g


NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet (included in the scope of delivery of STEP 7 V5.x).


2/199

2



2


■ Ordering data

Performance data Open IE/S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) • Sum of all simultaneously operable ISO/TCP/UDP connections

max. 64

• Volume of user data ISO or TCP/IP max. 8 KB • Volume of user data UDP

max. 2 KB

S7 communication • Number of connections1)

max. 48


max. 64

1) Utilization depends on performance of S7-CPU/FM used.

■ Ordering data CP 443-1 communications processor For connecting SIMATIC S7-400 to Industrial Ethernet through TCP/IP, ISO and UDP; for S7 communication, S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) with FETCH/WRITE with and without RFC 1006, diagnostic expansions, Multicast, access protection over IP access list, initial start-up over LAN 10/100 Mbit/s with electronic manual on CD-ROM

Order No. 6GK7 443-1EX11-0XE0


Order No.


6GK1 704-1LW63-3AA0


6GK1 716-1CB63-3AA0

NCM S7 configuration software for Industrial Ethernet Configuration software for Industrial Ethernet-CPs for SIMATIC S7; V5.x, operating under STEP 7 V5.x; on CD-ROM with electronic manual in German, English, French, Spanish, Italian

Included in the STEP 7 V5.x package

Documentation S7-CPs/NCM S7 For Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS; manual package for configuring S7-CPs, IE/PB link and PC stations (STEP 7 V5.3)


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0


6GK1 704-1CW63-3AA0

• German

6GK7 080-0AA01-8AA0

• English

6GK7 080-0AA01-8BA0

■ More information The configuration software NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet is supplied with STEP 7 V5.2.

2/200




■ Overview

PN

ISO

IO-C

IO-D

■ Benefits

TCP/IP UDP

PG

S7

S5

IT

FTP

CBA

• Connection of SIMATIC S7-400 to Industrial Ethernet - 10/100 Mbit/s full/half duplex connection with autosensing - Connection via RJ45 - Multi-protocol operation for ISO, TCP/IP and UDP - Adjustable Keep Alive function • Communication services: - Open IE communication (TCP/IP and UDP): Multicast for UDP - PROFINET IO Controller - PROFINET CBA - ISO, TCP/IP and UDP transport protocols: Multicast for UDP - Programming device/operator panel communication: Cross-network by means of S7 routing - S7 communication - S5-compatible communication - IT communication: HTTP communication supports access to process data through Web browsers; FTP communication supports program-controlled FTP client communication, Access to data blocks through FTP server, Data handling for own file system through FTP, E-mail • IP address assignment via DHCP, simple PC tool or via the user program (e.g. HMI) • Access protection by means of configurable access list • Single-width module with integrated 4-port switch saves space in the rack and control cabinet. Thanks to the integrated autocrossing function, the CP 443-1 Advanced is very well suited for establishing small local networks. • Module replacement without programming device; all information is stored on the C-PLUG (also file system for IT functions). • Extensive diagnostic functions for all modules in the rack • Integration into network management systems through the support of SNMP V1 MIB-II

2

• Ideal for construction of small local networks thanks to the integrated 4-port switch which saves space in the control cabinet. • Connection of field devices to Industrial Ethernet with PROFINET • Savings in time and cost in modular machine and plant construction with PROFINET CBA • Security: Protection without the need for changing passwords through device-oriented IP address lists • Access to process information (password protected) using standard Web browsers, reducing software costs on the client side • Simple diagnostics even without STEP 7 by diagnosing all modules and racks via Web browser or SNMP • Simple universal linking of PLCs to different computers by means of FTP • File system as low-cost bulk storage for data, log files and statistics (C-PLUG as swap media) • Local and worldwide transmission of event-driven messages by e-mail through IT communication paths • Module replacement without programming devices, as all information is stored on the replaceable C-PLUG (even file system for IT functions). • One module for various applications: Programming device/PC, HMI systems, SIMATIC S5/S7 (high-priority) and IT communication • Remote programming is possible due to the WAN characteristic of TCP/IP, even via the telephone network (e.g. ISDN) • Plant-wide time synchronization via NTP or SIMATIC procedure with selectable path • Setting of intrinsic IP parameters of series machines without STEP 7

■ Application The CP 443-1 Advanced is the communications processor for connecting SIMATIC S7-400 to the Industrial Ethernet. With its own processor, it relieves the CPU of communications tasks and facilitates additional connections. The CP 443-1 Advanced provides the opportunity for the SIMATIC S7-400 to communicate with: • PG/PC • Host computer • HMI devices • SIMATIC S5/S7/C7 systems • PROFINET CBA components • PROFINET IO devices PROFINET CBA is used to create reusable technology modules.


2/201



2

■ Design

Communication with PROFINET

The CP 443-1 Advanced offers all the advantages of SIMATIC S7-400 system design: • The front panel of the rugged plastic casing includes: - Four RJ45 sockets for connection to Industrial Ethernet. - Diagnostic LEDs for each switch port • Connection is by means of the IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 with 180° cable exit or by means of a standard patch cable • Simple installation; the CP 443-1 Advanced is mounted on the S7-400 rack and connected to other modules by means of the backplane bus. There are no slot rules. • The CP 443-1 Advanced can be operated without a fan. • In combination with IM 460/461, the CP 443-1 Advanced can also be used in an expansion rack (ER). • The module can be replaced without the need for a programming device • C-PLUG (configuration plug) is included in scope of delivery as replacement medium (cannot be operated without CPLUG).

■ Function The CP 443-1 Advanced independently handles data traffic over Industrial Ethernet. The module has its own powerful processor and can be put into service directly using the unique preset Ethernet address (MAC) via the network. Support of the DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) enables the IP address to be issued from a central DHCP server. The CP 443-1 Advanced works in multi-protocol mode for the following communication services: PG/OP communication PG/OP communication allows all S7 stations connected to the network to be remotely programmed. • S7 routing; With the aid of S7 routing it is possible to use programming device communication across networks. S7 communication for connecting the S7-200/300/400 (server and client) to S7-400 (server and client), HMI devices and PCs (CP1613 with S7-1613 or SOFTNET-S7 with CP1612 or CP1512). • Clock synchronization using SIMATIC procedure or NTP (network time protocol) with selectable path. Open IE and S5-compatible communication Simple and optimized interface for data communication. Up to 8 KB of data can be transmitted in one call. This interface enables • ISO transport connections • TCP connections with or without RFC 1006 • UDP (2 KB data length) • UDP Multicast (2 KB data length) to be used. Open IE and S5-compatible communication is used with SIMATIC S5, SIMATIC S7-400/-300 and computers/PCs. The function calls required are a component part of STEP S7 and must be integrated into the S7 user program.

2/202


PROFINET IO controller; for connection of field devices to Industrial Ethernet with PROFINET PROFINET CBA; Communication between technology modules (distributed intelligence); This communication is suitable for time-critical as well as nontime-critical tasks. IT functions • WEB server; any HTML pages can be downloaded and viewed with standard browsers • Standard diagnostic pages; for prompt diagnosis on the system for all modules inserted in the rack, without the need for additional tools • E-mails; sending of e-mails direct from the user program • Communication via FTP; open protocol that is available on most operating system platforms • The 32 MB RAM file system can be used for buffering dynamic data. In addition, a buffered area of 512 KB is available which is supplied via the central backup battery. Diagnostics Extensive diagnostic options are available via STEP S7 or SNMP, including: • General diagnostics and statistics functions • Connection diagnostics • Diagnosis of the assigned PROFINET field devices (also in the user program) • LAN controller statistics • Information about every port of the switch • Diagnostics buffer • Web interface with basic diagnostic information • Integration into network management systems through the support of SNMP V1 MIB-II Security With a freely configurable access list, PCs and programmable controllers can be enabled for accessing the CP or control via TCP/IP. Configuring CP 443-1 Advanced is configured with STEP 7, V 5.2 SP3 and higher. To utilize the PROFINET function of the device, STEP 7 V 5.3 SP1 and higher is required. When using PROFINET CBA, the engineering tool iMap V 2.0 and higher is required. The configuration data of the CP created with STEP 7 is stored on the CPU. Attention must however be paid to the memory volume of the S7-CPU. The user-specific HTML pages, FTP data and the connection information created with SIMATIC iMAP are saved on the swap media C-PLUG (Configuration Plug). The CP can be replaced in the event of failure without the need for a programming device because the relevant user and configuration data are saved on the CPU or on the C-PLUG.



■ Integration

2 SIMATIC S7-400 with CP 443-1 Advanced

PROFINET Industrial Ethernet SIMATIC S7-400 with CP 443-1 Advanced

Field PG

Switch SCALANCE X208PRO

Panel PC



ET 200S


Connection to higher-level network

G_IK10_XX_10070

ET 200S

G_IK10_XX_10069

ET 200S

Field PG

Small independent local networks (e.g. within a machine or cell)

■ Technical specifications Transmission rate

10/100 Mbit/s Autosensing

Performance data

• Communication connection, electrical • Slot for the swap medium

4 x RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s; TP)


C-PLUG

• Sum of all simultaneously operable TCP/UDP connections

Power supply

DC +5 V (+/- 5%) from the backplane bus

Ports

max. 64

• Useful data - ISO or TCP/IP - UDP - E-mail

max. 8 KB max. 2 KB max. 2 KB


max. 1.8 A

Power loss

7.25 W


max. 128

0 °C to +60 °C -40 °C to +70 °C max. 95% at +25 °C

PG/OP communication • Number of PG connections • Number of OP connections

max. 2 max. 30

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature • Transport/storage temperature • Relative humidity Design • Module format • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm • Weight



STEP 7 V5.3 + SP11) 2)

Multi-protocol operation • Sum of all simultaneously operable connections FTP communication • Number of client connections • Number of server connections

max. 128

max. 10 max. 2

IT communication Memory capacity • Flash memory file system • RAM

HTTP communication • Number of server connections

32 MB, approx. 30 MB of which is freely available to the user 32 MB, max. 16 MB of which is freely available to the user; additional 512 KB buffered via central backup battery max. 4

1) For configuring PROFINET IO 2) For configuring PROFINET CBA, iMap V 2.0 is also required


2/203



2

■ Technical specifications (continued) PROFINET communication PROFINET IO Controller • Number of operable PN IO-Devices

max. 125

• Number of external IO-lines in one central rack

max. 4


max. 4 KB max. 4 KB

• Size of I/O data areas per connected PN IO device: - I/O input area - I/O output area



64


600


8192 byte


8192 byte


8192 byte


450 byte


2400 byte

• Remote interconnections with acyclical transmission - scan rate: Sampling time, min. Possible settings: 100, 200, 500 and 1000 ms - number of incoming interconnections, max. - number of outgoing interconnections, max. - data length of all incoming interconnections - data length of all outgoing interconnections

2/204


• Remote interconnections with cyclical transmission - transmission frequency: Transmission time, min. Possible settings: 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500 and 1000 ms - number of incoming interconnections, max. - number of outgoing interconnections, max. - data length of all incoming interconnections - data length of all outgoing interconnections • HMI variables via PROFINET (acyclic) - number of stations for HMI variables that can connect (PN OPC/iMap); stations are 2 x PN OPC and 1 x SIMATIC iMap - update HMI variables, min. - number of HMI variables, max. - data length of all HMI variables • Internal device interconnections - number of internal interconnections - data length of all internal interconnections • Interconnections with constants - number of interconnections with constants, max. - data lengths of all interconnections with constants.

100 ms

• PROFIBUS proxy functionality

150

• Access to S7extended variables - maximum number of S7 connections for access to variables with the PROFINET attribute "S7extended", max.

150 8192 byte 8192 byte

10 ms

250 250 2000 byte 2000 byte

3

500 ms 200 8192 byte 300 2400 byte

500 4000 byte No 32



■ Ordering data

Order No.

CP 443-1 Advanced communications processor For the connection of SIMATIC S7-400 to Industrial Ethernet over PROFINET IO; PROFINET IOController, PROFINET CBA, TCP/IP, ISO and UDP; for S7 communication, S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) with FETCH/ WRITE, with and without RFC 1006, diagnostic expansions, multicast, clock synchronization via SIMATIC procedure or NTP, access protection via IP access list, FTP client/server, HTTP server, HTML diagnostics, SNMP, DHCP, e-mail, data storage on CPLUG, 4-port switch on board, initialization via LAN 10/100 Mbit/s; with electronic manual on CDROM

6GK7 443-1EX40-0XE0

C-PLUG Replacement medium for simple replacement of devices in the event of a fault; for storing configuration or engineering and application data, can be used for SIMATIC NET products with C-PLUG slot

6GK1 900-0AB00


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0


6GK1 704-1CW63-3AA0


6GK1 704-1LW63-3AA0

2

Order No. S7-1613 Edition 2005 Software for S7 and S5 communication, incl. PG/OP communication, OPC server and NCM PC; up to 120 connections, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, Windows 2000 Professional/Server; for CP 1613/CP 1613 A2 German/English

6GK1 716-1CB63-3AA0

Configuring software NCM S7 for Industrial Ethernet CPs for SIMATIC S7; V5.x, operating under STEP 7 V5.x; with electronic manual on CD-ROM, German, English, French, Spanish, Italian

Included in the STEP 7 V5.x package

Documentation S7-CPs/NCM For Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS; manual package for configuring S7-CPs, IE/PB link and PC stations (STEP 7 V5.3) • German

6GK7 080-0AA01-8AA0

• English

6GK7 080-0AA01-8BA0

Software iMap V2.0 Prerequisites: Windows 2000 Prof. SP4 or Windows XP Prof. SP1; on programming device or PC with Pentium processor, min. 500 MHz; STEP 7, V5.2 SP1 and higher incl. NCM, SIMATIC NET IE SOFTNET-PG, V6.2 and higher; PN OPC server, V6.2 and higher Type of supply: German, English with electronic documentation • Single license

6ES7 820-0CC04-0YA5


6ES7 820-0CC01-0YX2

• Upgrade iMap V2.0 single license

6ES7 820-0CC04-0YE5

■ More information The NCM S7 configuration software for Industrial Ethernet is included in the scope of supply of STEP 7 V5.2. Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net


2/205


System interfacing for PG/PC General information

■ Overview

SOFTWARE

CPs with an internal microprocessor • Protocol software executes on the CP • Free PC resources for applications • Suitable for comprehensive applications • Recommended for applications with HMI systems with high performance requirements, e.g. WinCC • Recommended for large systems (8 stations or more, e.g. SIMATIC) • Constant communication throughput • Can be used for redundant communication • Use for PROFINET IO real-time applications (RT, IRT with CP 1616/CP 1604) • Time synchronization

HARDWARE

CPs with their own microprocessor You can find software for the PC products under Windows on the SIMATIC NET/Windows CD. Development Kits are available (e.g. for CP 1616 or CP 1604) for use in various operating-system environments

CP 1613 A2 (PCI)

CPs without an internal microprocessor • Protocol software executes on the PG/PC • PC resources are divided between communications and applications • Suitable for less comprehensive applications • Recommended for smaller applications (up to 8 stations, e.g. SIMATIC) • Communications performance depends on PC resources and PC loading

CP 1616 (PCI)

The necessary configuring tools are supplied with all software packages. Manuals in pdf format and comprehensive details of SIMATIC NET products and communication can be found on the SIMATIC NET Manual CD that accompanies the software products.

CP 1604 (PC/104-Plus)

CPs without their own microprocessor SIMATIC NET Manual Collection

CP 7515 (PC-Card, CardBus)

G_IK10_XX_50183

2

System interfacing for PG/PC

2/206



System interfacing for PG/PC Performance data

■ Overview The following communications processors are available for connecting to the programming device or PC: • CPs with an internal microprocessor: - CP 1616 (PCI) available soon, - CP 1613 (PCI) • CPs without an internal microprocessor: - CP 1612 (PCI) - CP 1512 (PC Card CardBus) - CP 7515 (PC Card CardBus)

2

Data throughput of Industrial Ethernet Comparisons between Layer-2 Ethernet cards and CP 1613 A2 show the respective communications throughput. This throughput varies between 0 and the maximum throughput for Layer-2 Ethernet cards with the corresponding software packages. When the CP 1613 A2 is used with software packages, the communications performance remains constantly at a high level and ensures fast response times without any variations.

Time

Message/sec

CP 1613 A2 constant communication power

G_IK10_XX_10037

Layer 2 Ethernet Cards fluctuating communication power

Communication performance comparisons

Advanced/PC Configuration • Supports a simplified OPC configuration • Easy to handle thanks to automatic software installation (Plug & Play) • Advanced PC configuration is included in the scope of supply of the communications software for the PC from Version 6.0 upwards; the configuration tool NCM PC as well as the configuration console are also supplied with it.

■ More information Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info

NCM PC NCM PC replaces the previous PC configuring tools. This means that the PC can be configured either in STEP 7 or in NCM PC Version V5.1+SP2 and higher. Both tools offer the same look and feel and create the same database. This permits consistent configuration of communication functions, S5-compatible communication and S7 communication. Data only has to be entered once and data consistency is assured. • A configuration wizard integrated into NCM PC also supports user-driven configuration of the PC station. • With NCM PC and STEP 7 from Version V5.1+SP2 upwards, a PC similar to a SIMATIC S7 station can be configured and loaded over a network. This applies both to the local station on which NCM PC or STEP 7 is installed and to the remote station that is addressed over the network. Note: NCM PC does not contain a conversion function for LDBs that were created using COML S7. Reconfiguration is necessary.


2/207


System interfacing for PG/PC Connection options to SIMATIC PCs

2

■ Overview The operating systems listed in the table refer exclusively to the communication products specified! Please refer to the description of the relevant IPC for the operating system that is available and has been released for that IPC.

Rack PC: IL 43, 840 Box PC: 620, 627, 840, Panel PC: 577, 677, 877

Microbox PC 420

CPs and software for Industrial Ethernet CP 1613 A2

■

S7-1613 Edition 2005 under • Windows 2000 Professional/ Server + SP3/4, Windows XP Professional + SP1/2, Windows 2003 Server + SP1

■

SOFTNET-S7 Edition 2005 / SOFTNET-S7 Lean Edition 2005 under • Windows 2000 Professional/ Server + SP3/4, Windows XP Professional + SP1/2, Windows 2003 Server + SP1

■

• Windows 2000 Professional/ Server + SP3/4, Windows XP Professional + SP1/2, Windows 2003 Server + SP1, Xpembedded + SP1

■

SOFTNET-PG Edition 2005 under • Windows 2000 Professional/ Server + SP3/4, Windows XP Professional + SP1/2, Windows 2003 Server + SP1

■


■

SOFTNET PN IO Edition 2005 under • Windows 2000 Professional/ Server + SP3/4, Windows XP Professional + SP1/2, Windows 2003 Server + SP1

■


■

CPs and software for PROFINET Slots in the case of Industrial PC/Embedded Platform CP 1616 (PCI) 1) CP 1604 (PC/104-Plus)

PCI 1)

PC/104-Plus

1) Use of these CPs requires porting of the Development Kit DK-16xx PN IO to the relevant target system and operating system environment. You can order the DK-16xx PN IO at http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/dk16xx in the Internet. It contains sample software for Linux Suse 9.3.

2/208



System interfacing for PG/PC CP 1616

■ Overview

PN

IO-C

ISO

IO-D

■ Benefits

TCP/IP UDP

OPC

PG

S7

S5

ITIT

FTP

CBA

2

• Ideally suited for design of small local networks through integral 4-port real-time switch • Connection of field devices to Industrial Ethernet with PROFINET • Direct memory access to process data by linking as PROFINET IO-Controller via IO-Base interface • High computing power is available in the PC by taking the load off the host CPU by means of a real-time ASIC ERTEC 400 with support of the PROFINET real-time features RT and IRT (available soon) • Implementation in Motion Control applications thanks to support of IRT (available soon) • Simple transfer to various operating system environments using Development Kit DK-16xx PN IO • Switch mode also with the PC switched off, via optional external power supply • Uncrossed connecting cables can be used due to the integrated Autocrossover function

■ Application The CP 1616 enables SIMATIC PGs/PCs and PCs equipped with a PCI slot to be connected to PROFINET IO.

• PCI module for connecting PCs and SIMATIC PGs/PCs to PROFINET IO • Full-duplex/half-duplex with autonegotiation (universal key 3.3 V and 5 V; 33 MHz / 66 MHz; 32 bit, executes in 64-bit PCI-X systems) • With Ethernet real-time ASIC ERTEC 400 • Integral 4-port real-time switch • Communication services: - PROFINET IO controller and/or PROFINET IO device (RT) - support of IRT in Motion Control applications (available soon) • High performance through direct memory access • Integration in network management systems through the support of SNMP I (available soon) • Comprehensive diagnostics possibilities for installation, start-up and operation of the module • Powerful configuration tools are included in delivery of module

The CP 1616 provides high-performance support for control tasks on the PC (PC based Control, Numeric Control, Robot Control). With IRT (Isochronous Real-Time), the CP is ideally suited to time-critical applications that are in the range of strictly isochronous closed-loop control in the motion control sector (available soon). The integrated 4-port switch supports low-cost system solutions and the configuration of different topologies. The CP 1616 provides communication functions for SIMATIC programming devices/PCs and industrial PCs: • PROFINET IO controller and/or PROFINET IO device (RT) The DK-16xx PN IO development kit enables integration of the module into any operating systems.

■ Design • Industrial Ethernet - 4 x RJ45 connection - integral 4-port real-time switch for 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet - half/full duplex - Autosensing/Autocrossover • PCI interface: - PCI 2.2 - 32 bit, for execution in 64-bit PCI X systems - 33 MHz or 66 MHz - Universal Key 3.3 V and 5 V - installation through PCI standard mechanisms (Plug & Play) • Host interface/processor: - dual-port RAM on board - flash for program memory on board - ARM 946 RISK processor (32 bit) on board for preprocessing • Power supply: - operating voltage: 5 V through PCI - optional external 6 - 9 V DC supply for switch operation with PC switched off • Size: - short PCI format Siemens IK PI · 2007

2/209



User interfaces

The CP 1616 can be operated as a PROFINET IO controller and/or PROFINET IO device that stores the process image (input and output data) in the memory area on the CP. High-performance data transfer to and from the IO devices is performed autonomously by the CP 1616.

Programming interface through C library

Support of real-time properties of PROFINET for RT and IRT (available soon). The real-time properties of the CP 1616 ensure extremely short cycle times with highly accurate clock-pulse rates.

For applications that want to use the PROFINET IO-Controller or IO-Device functionality directly over C/C++, the IO-Base interface can be used. This interface is of a similar design to the DP Base interface of PROFIBUS modules CP 5613 and CP 5614. It is therefore possible to port existing PROFIBUS DP master applications to PROFINET IO-Controller applications. The following compilers can be used in combination with SIMATIC NET products: • Microsoft Visual C++ V6.0 • Microsoft Visual C++.NET

Switching

Diagnostics

According to the industry requirements, the 4-port real-time switch additionally permits the configuration of line topologies with spur lines and makes external switch components unnecessary.

Extensive diagnostic options are available via STEP 7 or SNMP, including: • General diagnostics functions • Connection diagnostics • Diagnostics of the assigned PROFINET field devices • Integration in network management systems through the support of SNMP I (available soon)

Real-time

The switch function is also available when the PC is turned off thanks to the possibility of independently supplying an external voltage. Software packages DK-16xx PN IO development kit; driver and IO-Base software for CP 1616 as PROFINET IO-Controller and IO-Device under Linux in source code for transfer to any PC-based operating systems with IO-Base interface for: • PROFINET communication: - PROFINET IO controller: Connection of field devices to Industrial Ethernet with PROFINET - PROFINET IO device: Link-up with a PROFINET IO controller through real-time communication according to the PROFINET standard • Access in isochronous mode to real-time data for PROFINET over IRT (available soon); extremely short cycle times with highly accurate clock-pulse rates; jitter accuracy, isochronous mode, and cycle time enable high-performance motion control applications (available soon). • Direct memory access to the process data; the process data of the IO-Devices are always consistent. The IO programming interface provides the PC programmer with function calls for data transfer. • The design of the interface not only permits fast access as PROFINET IO controller, but also easy porting to other operating system environments (e.g. VXWorks, QNX, RMOS, RTX). • The IO-Base interface for the PROFINET IO controller of the CP 1616 is compatible with the interface for SOFTNET PN IO • The CP 1616 is functionally compatible with the CP 1604 Using the Development Kit DK-16xx PN IO, the CP 1616 communications processor can be integrated into any PC-based operating system environments. The development kit contains the driver and IO-Base source code required for this including the transfer instructions, and also the example code which executes with SUSE Linux 9.2.

2/210


Configuring Configuration of the CP 1616 is performed with STEP 7/NCM PC, V5.3 SP2 and higher. NCM PC is included with the module.

■ Integration PROFINET Industrial Ethernet PC with CP 1616 as PN IO controller Switch SCALANCE X204IRT


Switch SCALANCE X204IRT Field PG

IPC with CP 1616 as PN IO device

ET 200S

ET 200S

CP 1616 as PROFINET IO-Controller and PROFINET IO-Device

G_IK10_XX_10097

2

■ Function



■ Technical specifications Transmission rate Interfaces • Communication connection, electrical • Connection to programming device/PC

• External supply for switch from standard plug-type power supply unit (optional)

■ Ordering data 10/100 Mbit/s autosensing 4 x RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s; TP), Autosensing/Autocrossover/ Autonegotiation PCI 2.2 and PCI-X compatible, 32-bit, executable in 64-bit PCI-X slots, 33 MHz/66 MHz, 3.3 V/5 V universal key Low-voltage socket for hollow plug 3.5 mm (-) / 1.3 mm (+)

Power supply • Internal

5 V DC through PCI

• External

Optional for switch supply at PC power-down via standard plug-in power supply (plug-in power supply not included in scope of supply) Required 6 … 9 V DC

- electrical isolation - rated voltage range Current consumption • Internal

max. 800 mA from PCI 5 V

• External

Optional for switch with PC power-down max. 650 mA max. 450 mA

- at 6 V DC (optional) - at 9 V DC (optional) Power loss • In normal mode (PC on; without external supply) • In switch mode (PC power down and external supply)

approx. 4 W approx. 3.9 … 4.1 W


+5 °C … +55 °C -20 °C … +60 °C max. 95% at +25 °C

Construction • Module format • Dimensions (W x D) in mm • Weight • Space requirements

PCI card, short 107 x 167 approx. 110 g 1 x PCI slot (32 bit; 3.3 V/5 V)

Processor

ERTEC 400 / ARM9

Performance data PROFINET-Kommunikation PN IO-Controller performance data • Number of operable PN IO-Devices

max. 200, of which max. 16 IRT

• Size of IO data areas overall

max. 8 kbyte

• Size of I/O data areas per connected PN IO-Device - I/O input area - I/O output area


CP 1616 communications processor PCI card (32-bit; 3.3/5 V universal key) with ASIC ERTEC 400 for connecting PCs to PROFINET IO with 4-port real-time switch (RJ45); for use with DK-16xx PN IO development kit; NCM PC

2

Order No. 6GK1 161-6AA00

Accessories DK-16xx PN IO V2.0 development kit Software development kit for CP 1616/CP 1604; driver and IO-Base software for CP 1616/CP 1604 as PN IO-Controller and IO-Device in source code for transfer to other PCbased operating systems; including executable example code for SUSE Linux 9.3

see http://www.siemens.com/ simatic-net/dk16xx


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0

IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type A) 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug; PROFINET-compatible; with UL approval; sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

6XV1 840-4AH10


6XV1 870-2B


2/211



2

■ Overview

■ Application The CP 1604 is used to connect PC/104 Plus systems to PROFINET IO. The CP 1604 provides high-performance support for control tasks on the PC (PC based Control, Numeric Control, Robot Control). With IRT (Isochronous Real-Time), the CP is ideally suited to time-critical applications that are in the range of strictly isochronous closed-loop control in the motion control sector. The integrated 4-port switch supports low-cost system solutions and the configuration of different topologies. The CP 1604 offers PC/104 Plus systems communications facilities with: • PROFINET IO controller and/or PROFINET IO device The DK-16xx PN IO development kit enables integration of the module into any operating systems.

PN

IO-C

ISO

TCP/IP UDP

IO-D

OPC

PG

S7

S5

ITIT

FTP

CBA

• PC/104 Plus module for connecting PC/104 Plus systems to PROFINET IO • Full/half duplex with autonegotiation • With Ethernet real-time ASIC ERTEC 400 • Integral 4-port real-time switch • Communication services: - PROFINET IO controller and/or PROFINET IO device - support of IRT in motion control applications • High performance through direct memory access • Integration in network management systems through the support of SNMP • Comprehensive diagnostics possibilities for installation, start-up and operation of the module • Powerful configuration tools are included in delivery of module

■ Benefits

• Connection of field devices to Industrial Ethernet with PROFINET • Ideally suited for design of small local networks through integral 4-port real-time switch • Direct memory access to process data by linking as PROFINET IO-Controller via IO-Base interface • High computing power is available in the PC by taking the load off the host CPU by means of a real-time ASIC ERTEC 400 with support of the PROFINET real-time features RT and IRT • Implementation in Motion Control applications thanks to support of IRT • Simple transfer to various operating system environments using Development Kit DK-16xx PN IO • Switch mode also with the PC switched off, via optional external power supply (in RT mode only) • Uncrossed connecting cables can be used due to the integrated Autocrossover function

2/212


■ Design • Industrial Ethernet (via "Connection Board for CP 1604") - Ethernet real-time ASIC ERTEC 400 - 4 x RJ45 connection - Integral 4-port real-time switch for 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet - half/full duplex - Autosensing/Autocrossover/Autonegotiation • PC/104 Plus port: - PCI 2.2 - 32 bit - 33 MHz or 66 MHz - installation through PCI standard mechanisms (Plug & Play) • Host interface/processor: - dual-port RAM onboard - fash for program memory onboard - ARM 946 RISK processor (32-bit) onboard for preprocessing • Power supply: - operating voltage: 5 V through PC/104 Plus - optional external 6 to 9 V DC supply for switch operation with PC switched off (through "Power Supply for CP 1604") • Size: - PC/104 Plus format

■ Function The CP 1604 can be operated as a PROFINET IO controller and/or PROFINET IO device that stores the process image (input and output data) in the memory area on the CP. With simultaneous controller and device mode, only the controller or the device can be operated in IRT mode. High-performance data transfer to and from the IO devices is performed autonomously by the CP 1604. Real-time Support of real-time properties of PROFINET for RT and IRT. The real-time properties of the CP 1604 ensure extremely short cycle times with highly accurate clock-pulse rates. Switching According to the industry requirements, the 4-port real-time switch additionally permits the configuration of line topologies with spur lines and makes external switch components unnecessary. The switch function in RT mode is also available when the PC is turned off thanks to the possibility of independently supplying an external voltage (via "Power Supply for CP 1604").




■ Integration

2

Software packages PROFINET Industrial Ethernet SIMATIC Microbox or PC/104-Plus System with CP 1604 as PN IO-Controller

Switch SCALANCE X204IRT


Switch SCALANCE X204IRT Field PG

SIMATIC Microbox or PC/104-Plus system with CP 1604 as PN IO-Device

ET 200S

ET 200S

G_IK10_XX_30136

DK-16xx PN IO development kit; driver and IO-Base software for CP 1604 as PROFINET IO-Controller and IO-Device under Linux in source code for transfer to any PC-based operating systems with IO-Base interface for: • PROFINET communication: - PROFINET IO controller: Connection of field devices to Industrial Ethernet with PROFINET - PROFINET IO device: Link-up with a PROFINET IO controller through real-time communication according to the PROFINET standard • Access in isochronous mode to real-time data for PROFINET over IRT; extremely short cycle times with highly accurate clock-pulse rates; jitter accuracy, isochronous mode, and cycle time enable high-performance motion control applications. • Direct memory access to the process data; the process data of the IO-Devices are always consistent. The IO programming interface provides the PC programmer with function calls for data transfer. • The design of the interface not only permits fast access as PROFINET IO controller, but also easy porting to other operating system environments (e.g. VXWorks, QNX, RMOS, RTX). • The IO-Base interface for the PROFINET IO controller of the CP 1604 is compatible with the interface for SOFTNET PN IO • The CP 1604 is functionally compatible to the CP 1616

CP 1604 as PROFINET IO-Controller and PROFINET IO-Device

Using the Development Kit DK-16xx PN IO, the CP 1604 communications processor can be integrated into any PCbased operating system environment. The development kit contains the driver and IO-Base source code required for this including the transfer instructions, and also the example code which executes with SUSE Linux 9.3. User interfaces Programming interface through C library • For applications that want to use the PROFINET IO-Controller or IO-Device functionality directly over C/C++, the IO-Base interface can be used. This interface is of a similar design to the DP Base interface of PROFIBUS modules CP 5613 and CP 5614. It is therefore possible to port existing PROFIBUS DP master applications to PROFINET IO-Controller applications. Diagnostics data Extensive diagnostic options are available via STEP 7 or SNMP, including: • General diagnostics functions • Connection diagnostics • Diagnostics of the assigned PROFINET field devices • Integration in network management systems through the support of SNMP

CP 1604 with accessories

Configuration Configuration of the CP 1604 is performed with STEP 7/NCM PC, V5.3 SP2 and higher. NCM PC is included with the module.

CP 1604 Microbox Package


2/213



2


■ Ordering data 10/100 Mbit/s


4 x RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s; TP), Autosensing/Autocrossover/ Autonegotiation

• Connection to PC/104 Plus

PC/104 Plus compatible, 32 bit, 33 MHz/66 MHz


Via Power Supply for CP 1604

Supply voltage • Internal

5 V DC through PC/104 Plus

• External

Optional for supplying the switch via power supply for CP 1604 in the event of host system powerdown (power supply not included in the scope of supply) Required 5 V DC +/- 5%

- electrical isolation - rated voltage range Current consumption • Internal

max. 800 mA from PC/104 Plus 5V

• External

Optional for supplying the switch in case of host system powerdown max. 800 mA

- for 5 V DC (via "Power Supply for CP 1604") Power loss • In normal mode (PC on; without external supply)

approx. 4 W

• In switch mode (host system power-down; and external supply via "Power Supply for CP 1604")

approx. 5.4 W


+5 °C … +55 °C


-20 °C … +60 °C


max. 95% at +25 °C


PC/104 Plus format


90 x 95 x 24

• Weight

approx. 110 g

• Space requirements

PC/104 Plus slot (32-bit; 3.3 V/5 V)

Processor

ERTEC 400 / ARM9

Performance data PROFINET IO Controller • Number of operable PN IO devices

max. 200, of which max. 16 IRT

• Size of IO data areas overall

max. 8 KB

• Size of I/O data areas per connected PN IO-Device - I/O input area - I/O output area


2/214


Order No.

CP 1604 communications processor PCI/104 Plus card (32-bit) with ASIC ERTEC 400 for connecting PC/104 Plus systems to PROFINET IO with 4-port realtime switch (RJ45), for use with DK-16xx PN IO development kit; NCM PC

6GK1 160-4AA00

CP 1604 Microbox Package Package for implementing the CP 1604 in the SIMATIC Microbox PC; comprising the CP 1604, connection board, power supply and expansion racks for Microbox PC; for use with Development Kit DK16xx PN IO; NCM PC

6GK1 160-4AU00

Accessories Connection board for CP 1604 Connection board for CP 1604 with four RJ45 sockets incl. connecting cable

6GK1 160-4AC00

Power supply for CP 1604 Redundant power supply for CP 1604 for operating the integral 4-port switch of the CP 1604 with the PC/104 system switched off

6GK1 160-4AP00

DK-16xx PN IO V2.0 development kit Software development kit for CP 1616/CP 1604; driver and IO-Base software for CP 1616/CP 1604 as PN IO controller and IO device in source code for transfer to other PCbased operating systems; including executable example code for SUSE Linux 9.3

see http://www.siemens.com/ simatic-net/dk16xx

IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 180° cable outlet; for network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface • 1 pack = 1 item

6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0

IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 2 x 2 (Type A) 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug; PROFINET-compatible; with UL approval; sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

6XV1 840-4AH10


6XV1 870-2B


System interfacing for PG/PC CP 1613 A2

■ Overview

PN

ISO

■ Benefits

TCP/IP UDP

OPC

PG

S7

S5

ITIT

FTP

2

• Constant data throughput through protocol processing on the CP • Can be connected to many devices through ITP or RJ45 connections on the module • Free computing capacity for other applications on the PC, e.g. HMI (ISO and TCP/IP transport onboard) • Simple handling through Plug&Play and Autosensing (10/100 Mbit/s) • Operation of large network configurations with a single card through high number of connections • Can be used for redundant communication • OPC as standard interface • Uniform procedure and configuration functions for NCM PC and STEP 7

• PCI card (32 bit; 33 MHz/66 MHz; 3.3 V/5 V universal key) with microprocessor for connection of PG/PC to Industrial Ethernet with 10/100 Mbit/s Autosensing/Autonegotiation • Communication services using - open IE communication via TCP/IP and UDP) - ISO transport protocol - PG/OP communication - S7 communication - S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) • 15-pole ITP connection • RJ45 connection • Time synchronization • ISO and TCP/IP transport protocol onboard • SNMP-supported diagnostics • The appropriate OPC server and configuration tools are included in the respective scope of supply of the communication software


2/215



■ Application The CP 1613 A2 is used to connect SIMATIC PGs/PCs and PCs with a PCI slot to Industrial Ethernet (10/100 Mbit/s).

10/100 Mbit/s

Twisted-Pair network (Sub-D) SCALANCE X005/X-100/X-200/X-400

OSM / ESM

IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 ITP Standard Cable up to 100 m

10/100 Mbit/s

CP 1613 A2

ITP

Twisted-Pair network (RJ45)

IE FC TP Cable 2 x 2

structured cabling according to EN 50173 Industrial Ethernet Switch e.g. ESM, SCALANCE X005/X-100/X-200/X-400

Sub-D

RJ45

up to 100 m

IE FC Outlet RJ45

TP Cord RJ45/RJ45

IE FC TP Standard Cable IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet

TP Cord RJ45/RJ45

IE TP Cord

IE TP Cord IE FC TP Cable 4 x 2

100 Mbit/s

Fiber Optic network SCALANCE X101-1 OMC

OSM BC08 LWL

TP Cord RJ45/RJ45 G_IK10_XX_10051

2

Network connection facilities for CP 1613 A2

2/216




■ Design The CP 1613 A2 module (PCI card with microprocessor 32 bit; 33 MHz/66 MHz; 3,3 V/5 V universal key) is directly plugged into a SIMATIC PG/PC or into a PC and requires a short PCI slot. Runs in 64 bit PCI and PCI-X slots (PCI 2.2- and PCI-X compatible).

Ports: • 15-pin Sub-D socket for ITP • RJ45 socket for twisted pair • Automatic detection and selection of the interface on start-up (ITP or RJ45) The module is connected, for example, using • ITP over the ITP Standard Cable 9/15 to OSM/ESM • TP over the TP cord up to 10 m or over FastConnect- System up to 100 m (IE FC RJ45 Plug and FC cables) to SCALANCE X or SCALANCE S

■ Function User interfaces OPC interface The OPC server included in the respective software package can be used as the standard programming interface for the S5-compatible communication and S7 communication protocols for linking automation technology applications to OPC-capable Windows applications (Office, HMI systems, etc.). Programming interface through C library The programming interfaces for S7 communication protocol, PG/OP communication protocol and S5-compatible communication protocol for existing applications are implemented as a Dynamic Link Library (DLL). This means that the following compilers can be used in combination with the SIMATIC NET products: • Microsoft Visual C/C++ V6.0 • Microsoft Visual Basic V6.0 • Microsoft Visual C++ V7.x • Other compilers can be used over the OPC server, but the compiler must support the COM interface (Microsoft component model) Software for PG/OP communication This software supports the programming of SIMATIC S5 and S7 controllers over Industrial Ethernet in combination with STEP5 / STEP7 programmable controllers. It is included in all CP 1613 A2 software packages. Software for S7 communication (S7-1613 or S7-REDCONNECT) The S7 interface provides PG/PC applications (e.g. WinCC) and application programs with access to SIMATIC S7 system components. This provides easy, flexible access to the data of the SIMATIC S7 controller. S7 communication offers: Administrative services • Connection management • Mini database • Trace Data transfer services • Read/write variables • BSEND/BRECEIVE

Software for open IE and S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) This interface is used for communication between • PG/PC and SIMATIC S5 • PG/PC and SIMATIC S7 • PG/PC and PG/PC used Open IE and S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) offers the following services: • Management services • Connection establishment services • Data transfer services The software is included in the S7-1613 product. Mode of operation Protocols up to Level 4 (Transport) are processed autonomously on the module. 16 MB of memory is available for this to support a large quantitative framework and reliable communication. Data is exchanged between the module and the host in master mode. This means that the CP 1613 A2 accesses the physical RAM of the host. A Windows driver is responsible for transferring data between the host system and the CP 1613 A2. The transmission rate to Industrial Ethernet is detected and automatically switched over (autosensing). The IT functionality is provided in combination with the Windows software of the PC. Diagnostics data Via SNMP all MIB-2 objects can be read out. This enables the current status of the Ethernet interfaces to be retrieved. Configuration • The S7 communication protocol and S5-compatible communication protocol are configured in STEP 7 or NCM PC. • The configuration tool NCM PC is included in the CP 1613 A2 software packages. • NCM PC is a component part of Advanced PC Configuration.

With S7-REDCONNECT, communication to the high-availability S7-400H system is possible.


2/217

2



2


■ Ordering data 10/100 Mbit/s autosensing


1 x 15-pin Sub-D socket (10/100 Mbit/s ITP) 1 x RJ45 (10/100 Mbit/s; TP)

• Connection to programming device/PC

PCI (32 bit; 33 MHz/66 MHz; 3.3 V/5 V universal key)

Supply voltage

5 V DC ± 5% via PCI; 12 V DC ±5 % via PCI

Current consumption • from 5 V DC

600 mA

• from 12 V DC

500 mA

Power loss

4W


+5 °C … +55 °C


-20 °C … +60 °C


max. 95% at +25 °C


PCI card

• Dimensions (W x D) in mm

107 x 167

• Weight

approx. 200 g


1 x PCI slot (32-bit; 3.3 V/5 V)

Performance data for mono-protocol operation S7 and programmable device/ operator panel communication • Number of connections that can be used - ISO - TCP/IP

max. 120 max. 120

S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) • Number of connections that can be used - ISO - TCP/IP Total of all configurable connections per PC station

2/218


max. 120 max. 120 max. 207

Order No.

CP 1613 A2 communications processor PCI card (32-bit, 33 MHz/66 MHz; 3.3 V/5 V universal key) for connection to Industrial Ethernet (10/100 Mbit/s) with ITP and RJ45 connection over S7-1613 and S7-REDCONNECT, incl. driver for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, Windows 2000 Professional/Server

6GK1 161-3AA01


6GK1 716-1CB63-3AA0

S7-REDCONNECT Edition 2005 Software for failsafe S7 communication over redundant networks incl. S7-OPC server, S7-1613 2005, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CDROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, Windows 2000 Professional/Server; for CP 1613/CP 1613 A2 German/English

6GK1 716-0HB63-3AA0

Upgrade S7-REDCONNECT Edition 2005 For expanding S7-1613 2005 to S7-REDCONNECT, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, Windows 2000 Professional/ Server; for CP 1613/CP 1613 A2 German/English

6GK1 716-0HB63-3AA4

SIMATIC NET Software Update Service For Industrial Ethernet, PROFIBUS, OPC server, for one year service incl. manuals on CD-ROM; prerequisite: SIMATIC NET PC/Windows products German/English

6GK1 704-0AA00-3AA2


System interfacing for PG/PC S7-REDCONNECT

■ Overview

■ Application

• For interfacing PCs over redundant Industrial Ethernet to the SIMATIC S7-400H • Protected from communication failures arising from a fault in the double bus or in redundant rings • For redundantly configured Industrial Ethernet • Can also be implemented in non-redundant networks • No additional programming overhead for the PC and in H systems • The appropriate OPC server and configuration tools are included in the scope of supply of the respective communication software • Enhanced redundancy over 4-way communication (STEP 7 V5.1 + SP4 and higher)

The software package S7-REDCONNECT connects the SIMATIC S7-400H to applications on the PC, e.g. WinCC. Typically, a redundant Industrial Ethernet is used. The software package can also be used where SIMATIC H systems are operated on non-redundant networks. Mixed operation of redundant and non-redundant systems is also possible.

■ Design The following components are required to design a SIMATIC H system with PC connection PC with: • up to four CP 1613 A2 and S7-REDCONNECT to connect the PC to Industrial Ethernet with ISO protocol

Fault-tolerant communication

S7-400H with: • CP 443-1 to connect the S7-400H to Industrial Ethernet with ISO protocol • STEP 7 V5.0 or higher for programming

PC with 2 x CP 1613 A2 and S7-REDCONNECT

Industrial Ethernet

■ Function

S7-400H

G_IK10_DE_10048

H-CPU in single mode

ET 200M System configuration for S7-REDCONNECT

PN

ISO

TCP/IP UDP

OPC

PG

S7

S5

ITIT

FTP

■ Benefits

• S7 REDCONNECT contains the functional scope of the S7-1613 software package (S7 communication, S5-compatible communication and PG/OP communication) as well as additional redundant communication through S7 connections. An additional license for S7-1613 is not required. • S5-compatible communication • Time-of-day synchronization • Continued use of existing Windows applications • Services for monitoring the redundant communication. • Diagnostics tool for visualizing the communication status • Simple redundancy through 2-way communication (STEP 7 V5.0 SP2 or newer) • Increased redundancy through 4-way communication (STEP 7 V5.1 + SP4 or hig newer) The fault-tolerant S7 communication is directed through a standard and a reserve connection. These connections are monitored during operation and switched over if there is a fault. With S7 REDCONNECT they remain concealed to the PC application. Fault detection, switching over if required, communication monitoring and synchronization are handled in the background invisible to the application. The application, e.g. Win CC, communicates with the 2 subunits of the S7-400H in the same way as with an S7 CPU.

• Provides protection against communication failure in the event of a fault in the double bus or in redundant rings • Simplifies communication of a PC application with the SIMATIC S7-400H system • Safeguards previous investments due to the use of existing applications and the flexible application options • No additional programming required for PC and H systems • Increases the availability of the PC application (e.g. PCS 7) through redundant communication


2/219

2


System interfacing for PG/PC S7-REDCONNECT

■ Function (continued) User interfaces OPC interface The OPC server contained in the respective software package can be used as a standard programming interface for the protocols S7 communication and S5-compatible communication to connect automation applications to OPC-capable Windows applications (Office, HMI systems etc.) Programming interface through C-Library The programming interfaces for the protocols S7 communication, PG/OP communication, S5-compatible communication and TF protocol for existing applications are implemented as a Dynamic Link Library (DLL).

The following compilers can therefore be used in conjunction with the SIMATIC NET products: • Microsoft Visual C/C++ V6.0 • Microsoft Visual Basic V6.0 • Microsoft Visual C V7.0 (without .net Framework) available soon Configuration • Configuration of S7 communication protocols and S5-compatible communication is executed in STEP 7 NCM PC, V5.1 SP2 or newer. • The configuring tool NCM PC is included in the scope of supply of S7 REDCONNECT for Industrial Ethernet. • NCM PC is a component of Advanced PC Configuration

■ Integration PC with S7-REDCONNECT and 2 x CP 1613 A2

Industrial Ethernet

S7-300

SCALANCE X414-3E

SCALANCE X414-3E

SCALANCE X204-2

100 Mbit/s

SCALANCE X204-2

Non-Siemens system

10/100 Mbit/s S7-400

SCALANCE X204-2

H system

SCALANCE X204-2

S7-400

S7-400

H system G_IK10_XX_10053

2

Note: The optical ring can also be implemented optionally as an electrical ring

Redundant optical ring for connection of high-availability systems

■ Ordering data S7-REDCONNECT Edition 2005 Software for failsafe S7 communication over redundant networks incl. S7-OPC server, S7-1613 2005, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CDROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, Windows 2000 Professional/Server; for CP 1613/CP 1613 A2 German/English

2/220


Order No. 6GK1 716-0HB63-3AA0

Order No. Upgrade S7-REDCONNECT Edition 2005 For expanding S7-1613 2005 to S7-REDCONNECT, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, Windows 2000 Professional/ Server; for CP 1613/CP 1613 A2 German/English

6GK1 716-0HB63-3AA4


System interfacing for PG/PC SOFTNET for Industrial Ethernet

■ Overview

■ Application

• For coupling programming devices/PCs/workstations to programmable controllers • Communication services: - PG/OP communication - S7 communication - S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) • Can be used with - Layer 2 Ethernet card (PCI) - CP 7515 (PC Card CardBus) - Integrated Industrial Ethernet interface - Modem (Remote Access Service RAS) • Complete protocol stack as a software package • The appropriate OPC server and configuration tools are included in the scope of supply of the respective communication software

With SOFTNET for Industrial Ethernet, PC/PG and workstations can be connected to programmable controllers, such as SIMATIC S7, over Industrial Ethernet. The following user interfaces are available: • PG/OP communication for SIMATIC S7 • S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) for communication with SIMATIC S5 and S7 • S7 communication SOFTNET is available for the following interfaces: • Layer 2 Ethernet card (PCI), • CP 7515 (PC-Card CardBus) • Integrated Industrial Ethernet interface • Modem/ISDN (Remote Access Service RAS)

■ Function

PC/PG withSOFTNET for Industrial Ethernet

With SOFTNET, the complete protocol stack is processed in the PC. This architecture means that in contrast to the 1613 products, the performance of the SOFTNET packages is dependent on the configuration or loading of the PC used. The IT functionality is provided in combination with the interfaces and the Windows software of the PC. User interfaces

Industrial Ethernet

S7-400 with CP 343-1

S5-115U to -155U with CP 1430 TF

G_IK10_XX_10045

S7-200 with CP 243-1 S7-300 with CP 443-1

System configuration SOFTNET for Industrial Ethernet

PN

ISO

TCP/IP UDP

OPC

PG

S7

S5

ITIT

FTP

■ Benefits

OPC interface The OPC server included in the respective software package can be used as the standard programming interface for the S5-compatible communication and S7 communication protocols for linking automation technology applications to OPC-capable Windows applications (Office, HMI systems, etc.). Programming interface through C library The programming interfaces for S7 communication protocol, PG/OP communication protocol and S5-compatible communication protocol for existing applications are implemented as a Dynamic Link Library (DLL). This means that the following compilers can be used in combination with the SIMATIC NET products: • Microsoft Visual C/C++ V6.0 • Microsoft Visual Basic V6.0 • Microsoft Visual C++ V7.x Other compilers can be used over the OPC server, but the compiler must support the COM interface (Microsoft component model) Software for PG/OP communication

• Communication with SIMATIC over Industrial Ethernet • OPC as standard interface • Uniform procedure and configuration functions for NCM PC and STEP 7 • Versatile connection possibilities, e.g. via CP 1612, integral Industrial Ethernet interface, modem/ISDN (RAS)

This software supports the programming of SIMATIC S5 and S7 controllers over Industrial Ethernet in combination with STEP 5 / STEP 7.


2/221

2


System interfacing for PG/PC SOFTNET for Industrial Ethernet



Software for S7 communication

Performance data

SIMATIC S7 system components communicate with each other using S7 communication functions.

S7 and PG/OP communication (number of operable connections)

The S7 communication functions can be based on either ISO protocol or TCP/IP protocol.

• SOFTNET-S7

max. 64

• SOFTNET-S7 Lean

max. 8

S7 communication offers the following services: • Administrative services • S7 connection management services • Variable services • VFD services (Virtual Field Device) • Trace and mini database

■ Ordering data

S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) This interface based on Layer 4 (ISO transport or TCP/IP with RFC 1006) is used for communication between • PG/PC and SIMATIC S5 • PG/PC and SIMATIC S7 • PG/PC and PG/PC S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) offers the following services: • Management services • Connection establishment services • Data transfer services Configuring • The S7 communication protocol and S5-compatible communication protocol are configured in STEP 7 or SIMATIC NCM PC, V5.1 SP2 and higher. • NET NCM PC is a component part of Advanced PC Configuration. • The NCM PC configuring tool is included in the scope of supply of the relevant packages. PC/PG with Layer 2 Ethernet cards and SOFTNET-S7 Lean

Industrial Ethernet S7-200 with CP 243-1

S7-200 with CP 243-1

System configuration with SOFTNET-S7 Lean for Industrial Ethernet and S7-200

2/222


S7-200 with CP 243-1

G_IK10_XX_50194

2

Order No.


6GK1 704-1CW63-3AA0

SOFTNET-PG Edition 2005 for Industrial Ethernet Software for PG/OP communication, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, 2000 Professional/Server; for CP 1512 and CP 1612 German/English

6GK1 704-1PW63-3AA0


6GK1 704-1LW63-3AA0

SIMATIC NET Software Update Service For Industrial Ethernet, PROFIBUS, OPC server, for one year service incl. manuals on CDROM; prerequisite: SIMATIC NET PC/Windows products German/English

6GK1 704-0AA00-3AA2


System interfacing for PG/PC SOFTNET PN IO

■ Overview

2

PC/PG with SOFTNET PN IO

SIMATIC NET OPC-Scout

WinCC OPC-Client

Microsoft Office OPC-Client

OPC XML Webclient

COM/DCOM

PN IO OPC-Server

PROFINET Communication

OPC XML DA as Webservice

SOFTNET PN IO

PROFINET Industrial Ethernet IE/PB Link PN IO ET 200pro

PROFIBUS

e.g. S7-300 with CP 342-5 as Slave

G_IK10_XX_10073

ET 200S with IM 151-3 PN

e.g. S7-300 with CPU 31x and CP 343-1 Advanced

ET 200S

PC with SOFTNET PN IO as PROFINET IO-Controller

PN

IO-C

ISO

IO-D

TCP/IP UDP

OPC

PG

S7

S5

ITIT

FTP

CBA

• Software with PROFINET IO-Controller function for coupling PG/PC and IPC with PROFINET IO-Devices • Possible applications: - PC-based control systems - HMI systems - test applications • Communication services: - PROFINET IO Controller • Can be used with - CP 1612 (PCI) - integrated interfaces of SIMATIC PG/PC - additional information regarding application can be found in the Internet under: www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info • Cost-effective solution for the low-end performance range • OPC server for I/O interfacing over PROFINET included in scope of supply

■ Benefits

• Cost-effective interfacing of field devices with Industrial Ethernet with PROFINET • Simple porting of the application with OPC as a standard interface • High-performance IO data access through IO Base interface for linking into C/C++ applications • Simple migration of PROFIBUS modules CP 5613/CP 5614 with DP base interface to PROFINET through IO-Base interface • Uniform procedure and configuration functions for NCM PC and STEP 7


2/223


System interfacing for PG/PC SOFTNET PN IO

2

■ Application

■ Technical specifications Performance data PROFINET IO-Controller

Using SOFTNET PN IO, PCs can be connected to field devices over Industrial Ethernet. SOFTNET PN IO is available for the following interfaces: • Integrated interfaces of SIMATIC PG/PC

■ Function PROFINET communication • PROFINET IO-Controller Connection of field devices to Industrial Ethernet with PROFINET User interfaces • OPC interface The supplied OPC server can be used as a standard programming interface for PROFINET IO-Controller to link automation applications to OPC-capable Windows applications (Office, HMI systems, etc.). • Programming interface through C library; For applications that want to use the PROFINET IO-Controller functionality directly in C/C++, the IO-Base interface can be used. This interface is of a similar design to the DP Base interface of PROFIBUS modules CP 5613 and CP 5614. It is therefore possible to port existing PROFIBUS DP master applications to PN IO-Controller applications. The following compilers can be used in combination with SOFTNET PN IO: - Microsoft Visual C/C++ V6.0 - Microsoft Visual Basic V6.0 - Microsoft Visual Basic V7.0 SOFTNET PN IO and CP 1616 use compatible functions of the IO-Base interface. Mode of operation With SOFTNET, the complete protocol stack is processed in the PC. This architecture means that the performance depends on the configuration of the PC used or the loading on the PC. Configuring • Configuration is performed with STEP 7/NCM PC, V5.3 SP1 and higher

2/224


• Number of operable IO devices

max. 64

• Number of external IO-lines in one central rack

max. 1


max. 2 kByte max. 2 kByte

• Size of I/O data area per connected I/O device - I/O input area - I/O output area

max. 1440 Byte max. 1440 Byte

■ Ordering data SOFTNET PN IO Edition 2005 Software for PROFINET I/O controller with OPC server and NCM PC single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CDROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server; Windows 2000 Professional, Server for CP 1512 and CP 1612, German/English

Order No. 6GK1 704-1HW63-3AA0


System interfacing for PG/PC OPC server for Industrial Ethernet

■ Overview • The appropriate OPC servers are included in the scope of supply of the respective communication software • Standardized, open, manufacturer-independent interface

• Interfacing of OPC-capable Windows applications to S7-communication and S5-compatible communication functions (SEND/RECEIVE), PROFINET and SNMP • OPC Scout with browser functions as OPC client and OCX Data Control

PC/Windows PC SIMATIC NET OPC scout

OPC XML Webclient

Microsoft Office OPC client

WinCC OPC client

COM/DCOM

DP OPC server FMS OPC server

DP protocol FMS protocol

S7 OPC server

S5 OPC server

PN CBA OPC server PN IO OPC server

SNMP OPC server

OPC XML DA as web service

S7 communication

S5 compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE)

PROFINET

SNMP

DX OPC server

S7-400 FMS-PC

PROFIBUS

SIMATIC S5 (SEND/RECEIVE only)

S7-PC G_IK10_XX_10103

ET 200X

SIMATIC S5

Industrial Ethernet

S7-300

System integration with the OPC server

■ Benefits

• Different networks and protocols can be used easily thanks to the uniform interface • Reduced training and familiarization costs • Easy interfacing in the system environment and office applications over C++, Visual Basic and .NET interfaces • Fast creation of applications • Easy handling and cost-effective because the corresponding OPC server is included in the scope of supply of the respective communications software


2/225

2



2

■ Application OPC (OLE for Process Control) is implemented as an expansion of the COM (Component Object Model) communications interface and DCOM (Distributed COM) for the user software. The basic principle of OPC is that OPC client applications communicate with the OPC server over a standardized, open and manufacturer-independent interface. It is also possible to connect to OPC-capable Windows applications (Microsoft Office or HMI systems) that are already available on the market. The following communication possibilities are available for Industrial Ethernet with OPC server: • S7 communication • S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) • PROFINET • SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) The OPC server offers: • Data Access interface 2.05 • Alarm and event interface 1.1 • OPC XML DA interface 1.0 • Integration of automation products of different manufacturers • Uniform, easy user interface for different components • Can be accessed from every computer in the LAN • High-performance data access over the Custom Interface (C++, NET) • Easy to use with the “Automation Interface“ (VB, NET) or the supplied OCX Data Control • Grouping of variables (Items); which allows a large quantity of data to be pre-processed in a short time. DX OPC server: • The DX OPC server is an expansion package for SIMATIC NET PC/Windows products with an OPC interface • OPC DX allows communication between OPC DA and OPC DX servers in Ethernet networks (OPC DX functionality 1.0 for horizontal communication between OPC servers). In contrast to this, only pure client-server communication is possible with OPC DA. • Simple data exchange even between different OPC services from different companies.

2/226


■ Function • Open standardization of the addressing using logical names for objects from an automation component or an automation system • Supports STEP 7 symbols • Efficient data transfer from a process component to an application for further processing • One client application can use several servers simultaneously • Simultaneous execution of more than one client is possible on one OPC server • Communication protocols can be used in parallel by means of the multiplexer function • Interfaces - “Custom Interface“ for high-performance C++/NET applications - “Automation Interface" for easily created Visual Basic applications (or similar) - XML DA interface; Data access to S7 CPUs is therefore possible over the Internet. - OCX Data Control for direct embedding in Windows applications that support COM/DCOM - DX interface with methods for controlling the runtime behavior of the DX OPC server. DX OPC server • A DX server is based on a DA OPC server that meets one of the specifications for OPC interfaces. The DX OPC server also contains functions required for server-server communication. A DX OPC server is DA OPC server expanded by the DX interface and a configurable OPC DA client • Configuration of the communication between OPC servers by means of OPC data exchange. The DX OPC servers can thus exchange data values even between different OPC servers from different companies simply and autonomously.




2

Server A

Application Y

Server B

Server C

WinCC OPC client

PN OPC server

S7 OPC server

Application X OPC client

FMS OPC server

DP OPC server

XY OPC server

G_IK10_XX_10106

Application X

Comparison of conventional client/server architecture with an OPC architecture

Configuration The communication parameters are configured using only the tools of the installed software Advanced PC Configuration (configuration console, SIMATIC NCM PC or STEP 7 V5.1 + SP2); SIMATIC iMAP is used for PROFINET CBA with SIMATIC iMAP.


2/227



2

■ Technical specifications Programming

■ Ordering data • Synchronous and asynchronous reading and writing of variables • Monitoring of variables using the OPC server with a signal to the client when a change occurs • Use of quantity operations; so a large amount of data can be processed in a short time. • Custom Interface (C++, NET) for high OPC performance

Interfaces

• Automation Interface (VB, Excel, Access, Delphi, ...) for ease-of-use • Graphics with OCX for configuring instead of programming • OPC XML-Interface for Data Access • DX interface with methods for controlling the runtime behavior of the DX OPC server. include OPC servers for:

Products Industrial Ethernet • S7-1613, SOFTNET-S7 for Industrial Ethernet, SOFTNET-S7 Lean

S7-OPC server for S7 communication, XML-DA S5-OPC server for S5 compatible communication, XML-DA

SNMP OPC-Server - Basic - Extended - Power Pack

SNMP OPC server for SNMP protocol access; XML-DA

PROFINET • SOFTNET PN IO

PN IO OPC server for PROFINET IO communication; XML-DA

• PN CBA OPC server

PN CBA OPC server for access to CBA components; XML-DA Horizontal communication between OPC servers

PROFIBUS • DP-5613, SOFTNET-DP, SOFTNET-DP slave

DP-OPC server for PROFIBUS DP communication; XML-DA

• FMS-5613

FMS-OPC server for PROFIBUS FMS communication; XML-DA

Others • DX OPC server

2/228


DX OPC server for simple data exchange even between different OPC servers from different companies

Order No.

DX OPC-Server Edition 2005 DX OPC server upgrade; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, 2000 Professional/Server; requirement: SIMATIC NET IE PC / Windows product Edition 2005 with OPC interface; German/English

6GK1 706-0XW63-3AA0

PN CBA OPC-Server Edition 2005 PROFINET OPC server for CBA; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2000 Professional/Server; German/English

6GK1 706-0HB63-3AA0

SNMP OPC-Server Edition 2005 Including MIB compiler; single license for 1 installation of the runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM; license key on diskette, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, 2000 Professional WS/Server; for CP 1613 German/English • Basic Administration of up to 20 IP addresses

6GK1 706-1NW63-3AA0

• Extended Administration of up to 200 IP addresses

6GK1 706-1NX63-3AA0

• Power Pack Upgrade from SNM OPC Server Basic to SNM OPC Server Extended

6GK1 706-1NW63-3AA4


System interfacing for PG/PC PN CBA OPC server

■ Overview • Access to variables in PROFINET CBA components over the OPC interface • Use of the objects and symbols defined using the PROFINET engineering tool SIMATIC iMap and STEP 7

• Adding PROFINET functionality to existing installations. This enables it to be used in parallel with other communication protocols such as S7 communication with SOFTNET-S7 for Industrial Ethernet. • OPC Scout as an OPC client with browser functions for the variables of the PROFINET CBA components


ProTool/Pro OPC client

SOFTNET-S7 SOFTNET S7 Lean S7-1613

SOFTNET PN IO

PN CBA OPC server

S7-OPC server

PN CBA OPC server

S7 comminication

PROFINET CBA

SIMATIC NET OPC scout


PROFINET IO


PROFINET CBA component

e.g. S7-400 with CP 443-1 Advanced

PROFINET CBA component

PROFINET IO-Device

IE/PB Link PN IO IE/PB Link

ET 200S

e.g. S7-300 with CP 343-1

PROFIBUS DP

PROFIBUS DP S7-300

PROFINET IO-Device PROFINET CBA component

ET 200S

data access over PROFIBUS DP as seen from the PN CBA OPC server

G_IK10_XX_10122

data access

ET 200S

as seen from the PN IO OPC server

System integration with the PN CBA OPC server


2/229

2



2

■ Benefits

■ Function

• Complete integration of the PN CBA OPC server in the SIMATIC NET OPC server environment • Supports distributed automation solutions with PROFINET CBA • Directly uses the variables and symbols defined with the PROFINET engineering tool SIMATIC iMap and STEP 7 • Operates in parallel with other communication protocols such as S7 communication over SOFTNET-S7 and Industrial Ethernet. This means that existing installations can also be expanded with the PROFINET functionality • The standardized OPC interface means that from the start C++, Visual Basic and .NET applications as well as general OPC clients (such as Microsoft Office) can participate in the new PROFINET concept

■ Application • The PN CBA OPC server (PROFINET OPC server) is the PC application interface for communication over Industrial Ethernet with PROFINET CBA components. • OPC client applications communicate with the PN CBA OPC server over a standardized, open and manufacturer-independent interface. • The PN CBA OPC server offers: - standardized access for OPC-capable applications and Windows applications (e.g. Microsoft Office) to variables that are available on the component interface of the PROFINET CBA components. - high-performance data access over the "Custom Interface" (C++, .NET) - easy to use with the "Automation Interface" (VB, .NET) and the OCX Data Control included in the scope of supply. - Internet communication over OPC XML DA Interface • Based on the PROFINET standard. This standard supports: - Component technology in automation engineering - Graphical configuration of communication between intelligent devices instead of complex programming - Manufacturer-independent, plant-wide engineering - Vertical integration, i.e. the user can access the interface variables of a PROFINET component by means of IT standards and an OPC interface over Industrial Ethernet.

2/230


• The PN CBA OPC server communicates with PROFINET CBA components over Industrial Ethernet by means of DCOM protocol • Open standardization of the addressing using logical names for objects from an automation component or an automation system • Operation in parallel with other protocols is possible, such as - S7 communication - S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) • Efficient data transfer from a process component to an application for further processing: - synchronous and asynchronous reading and writing of variables - monitoring of variables using the OPC server with a signal to the client when a change occurs - use of quantity operations; a large amount of data can be processed in a short time. • Simultaneous execution of more than one client is possible on one OPC server • OPC Scout as an OPC client with browser functions for all interface variables of the PROFINET CBA components User interfaces • "Custom Interface“ for high-performance C++/.NET applications • "Automation Interface" for easily created Visual Basic applications (or similar) • XML DA interface; Data access to S7 CPUs is therefore possible over the Internet. • OCX Data Control for direct embedding in Windows applications that support COM/DCOM Configuration • For configuring the PROFINET communication, a separate engineering tool SIMATIC iMap is required. This tool is offered as an option package with STEP 7. • With SIMATIC iMAP, the communication links between PROFINET CBA components are graphically configured. In addition to the interconnection data, the engineering tool also creates the data used to access the interface variables over the PN CBA OPC server from visualization systems or office applications.




■ Ordering data • Open and standardized • Synchronous and asynchronous reading and writing of variables • Monitoring of variables using the OPC server with a signal to the client when a change occurs • Use of quantity operations; so a large amount of data can be processed in a short time.

Interfaces

• Custom Interface (C++, .NET) • Automation Interface (Visual Basic, Excel, Access,...) • OPC Data Control • OPC XML-Interface for Data Access

Protocols

• DCOM protocol

Configuring

Configuring software for PROFINET SIMATIC iMap

PROFINET communication (CBA) • Number of communication partners

max. 288

• Number of interconnections

max. 10.000

PN CBA OPC server Edition 2005 PROFINET OPC server for CBA; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2000 Professional/Server; German/English

2

Order No. 6GK1 706-0HB63-3AA0

Software iMap V3.0 for configuring PROFINET CBA Requirement: Windows 2000 Prof. with Service Pack 4 or later or Windows XP Prof. with Service Pack 1 or later or Windows 2003 Server with Service Pack 1 or later; on PG or PC with Pentium processor, min. 1 GHz; STEP 7 V5.3 or later with Service Pack 3, PN OPC Server V6.3 or later Type of supply: German, English with electronic documentation • Single license

6ES7 820-0CC04-0YA5


6ES7 820-0CC01-0YX2


6ES7 820-0CC04-0YE5

SIMATIC NET Software Update Service For Industrial Ethernet, PROFIBUS, OPC server, f or one year service incl. manuals on CD-ROM; prerequisite: SIMATIC NET PC/ Windows products German/English

6GK1 704-0AA00-3AA2

■ More information Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/cba


2/231


System interfacing for PG/PC SNMP OPC Server

2

■ Overview

■ Application The SNMP OPC server makes data available for the administration of TCP/IP networks for any OPC client systems. SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is a protocol that has been specifically designed for administration of TCP/IP networks. The individual nodes in the network (network components or data terminals) are equipped with a so-called SNMP agent that provides information in structured form. With OPC (OLE for Process Control), a standardized, open, multi-vendor interface is available for automation engineering. The SNMP OPC server supports access to device information over the OPC interface. This means that network visualization, system diagnostics and plant status monitoring can be implemented in any OPC client systems (with OPC clients such as WinCC, ProTool/Pro RT and PCS 7). In addition to simple device diagnostics, detailed information such as redundant network structures or network load distribution can be displayed. This increases the operational safety and improves the availability of the plant.

• Status monitoring and network management of SNMPcapable devices in any OPC client systems; e.g. SIMATIC HMI/SCADA, office application • Easy access to SNMP-capable devices over the OPC interface • Devices without SNMP agents can be monitored using the ping mechanism • Complete integration in the SIMATIC NET OPC server environment • SNMP can be implemented in parallel with other communications protocols such as PROFINET or S7 communication • Configuring with STEP 7 or NCM PC • Autodiscovery function for integrating accessible Ethernet devices (STEP 7 V5.3+SP3 or higher)

■ Benefits

• Easy network diagnostics in SIMATIC HMI/SCADA systems and office applications, or i.e. network view and process view in a single system • Easy configuration and engineering without the need for detailed knowledge of SNMP. • Embedded in the SIMATIC tool landscape • It can operate in parallel with other communication protocols

2/232


The device information can be visualized according to individual requirements and can be adapted to the special requirements of the respective customer installation. The information that is made available can also be integrated into the signaling system and alarm log of an HMI/SCADA system for example. Using the SNMP information, it is possible to expand an existing HMI/SCADA system as far as a customer-specific network management station. The SNMP OPC server can be operated over the following interfaces: • CP 1613 A2 (PCI Card, 32-bit) • CP 7515 (PC Card, CardBus, 32-bit) • Integral Industrial Ethernet interface of SIMATIC programming devices/PCs


System interfacing for PG/PC SNMP OPC Server

■ Function The SNMP OPC server supports access to SNMP-capable devices in the OPC client systems. For all configured TCP/IP devices that are not SNMP-capable, one OPC variable for signof-life monitoring (ICMP-PING) is offered. Read access and in part write access to the respective device information is possible. Thus the diagnosis of individual devices is possible as well as diagnosis of the complete plant and device characteristics can be actively controlled. STEP 7/NCM PC contains an MIB compiler (Managed Information Base) for integrating SNMP-enabled devices. This allows device profiles to be created on the basis of an MIB file Devices with SNMP agents: SIMATIC NET devices that feature special SNMP agents such as switches, WLAN Access Points and Industrial Ethernet PC and S7 communication processors are already included complete with their device profiles. Thanks to MIB compilers (Managed Information Base), other SNMP-enabled devices can be integrated into the OPC configuration through loading of MIBs in accordnance with the SMI V1 and SMI V2 standard from STEP 7 V5.4.

■ Ordering data

2

Order No.

SNMP OPC-Server Edition 2005 Including MIB compiler; single license for 1 installation of the runtime software, software and electronic manual on CDROM; license key on diskette, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, 2000 Professional WS/Server; for CP 1512/CP 1612/CP 1613 German/English • Basic Administration of up to 20 IP addresses

6GK1 706-1NW63-3AA0

• Extended Administration of up to 200 IP addresses

6GK1 706-1NX63-3AA0

• Power Pack Upgrade from SNM OPC Server Basic to SNMP OPC Server Extended

6GK1 706-1NW63-3AA4

Devices with IP addresses without SNMP agents: Devices without SNMP agents can be monitored using the ping mechanism. The user can edit and save device-specific information such as the contact person, site and device description for this purpose. • Any SNMP-capable devices such as printers or PCs can be depicted using a predefined library. • The devices are integrated into the desktop of a client application using preconfigured ActiveX Controls. The predefined device profiles and the associated ActiveX controls allow easy administration of the devices in OPC client applications. Individual expansions can also be implemented. The SNMP OPC server is integrated in the SIMATIC NET OPC server. The OPC Scout is also included in the functional scope for browsing the displayed SNMP information. The SNMP OPC server can use, for example, PROFINET or S7 communication at the same time as PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet communication. This means that existing installations can also be expanded with SNMP functionality. The SNMP OPC server also enables several clients to execute simultaneously on one server. User interfaces • "Custom Interface“ for high-performance C++ applications • "Automation Interface" for easily created Visual Basic applications (or similar). • OPC Data Control for easy creation of client applications by configuring ActiveX controls • OPC Alarm & Event (subset) • Preconfigured ActiveX controls for the device profile used Configuration The NCM PC configuration tool is included in the scope of supply of the CP 1613 software packages and SOFTNET for Industrial Ethernet.


2/233


System interfacing for PG/PC SOFTNET for LINUX/UNIX

■ Overview • • • • •

■ Function

Software for connecting SIMATIC S7 Provision of S7 communication via SAPI-S7 interface Support of ISO and TCP/IP (RFC 1006) protocol Available on LINUX and UNIX operating systems Simultaneous operation of several cards

SOFTNET uses internal standard interfaces of the operating system for accessing the Ethernet connections. This supports the interface cards enabled by the operating system. Simultaneous operation of several cards is possible. During communication, you can choose between the protocols ISO and TCP/IP with RFC1006 for each connection. The SOFTNET products offer the user diagnostics and trace functions.

LINUX- / UNIX-applications, HMI

SOFTNET-S7 functions

SOFTNET S7

LINUX/UNIX-BS

7 . . 4 . .

SIMATIC S7 system components communicate with each other using S7 communication functions. The programming interface SAPI-S7 (Simple Application Programmer Interface) is available for LINUX/UNIX operating systems as well as for the Windows operating systems.

ISO/OSI layer model

7 . . 4 . .

Note: It is important to note that the SOFTNET-S7 functional scope differs between the Windows and UNIX versions.

TCP/IP

ISO

SIMATIC S7

G_IK10_XX_10041

S7 communication offers the following services: • Administrative services • Variable services • BSEND/BRECV PC/PG with SOFTNET for LINUX / UNIX

SOFTNET LINUX/UNIX system configuration

■ Benefits

• High-speed communication with the S7 based on the S7 protocol • Cost-saving programming thanks to user-friendly and simple interface • Flexible in use thanks to hardware-independent software

Industrial Ethernet

S7-200 with CP 243-1

■ Application For LINUX/UNIX systems, Siemens offers high-speed communication with the SIMATIC S7 for Industrial Ethernet based on the S7 protocol. SAPI-S7 (Simple Application Programmer Interface) provides you with a user-friendly call interface for communication between HMI systems or other LINUX/UNIX applications and the SIMATIC S7.

2/234


S7-400 with CP 443-1

S5-115U to -155U with CP 1430 TF

S7-300 with CP 343-1

SOFTNET LINUX/UNIX system configuration

G_IK10_XX_10127

2


System interfacing for PG/PC SOFTNET for LINUX/UNIX

■ Ordering data SOFTNET-S7/UNIX for Industrial Ethernet Software for S7 communication for SIMATIC S7 including Level 4 interface over ISO or TCP/IP, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key by fax, Class A, German/English Version 2.0 The original distributions of SUSE and RedHat LINUX are supported. Please contact your Siemens representative for information about current versions

Order No. 2XV9 450-1CG00


2

Support for other UNIX operating systems: Contact for Sales, Service and Training: SIEMENS AG I&S IS E&C IT Contact Your IT4Industry Team Werner-von-Siemens-Str. 60 91052 Erlangen Tel.: +49(0)9131/7-4 61 11 Fax: +49(0)9131/7-4 47 57 E-mail: [email protected]

SOFTNET-S7/UNIX Packages are available for the following operating systems: • Solaris Sparc • Solaris X86 • SCO UNIX • HP-UNIX Please contact your Siemens contacts for information about the latest versions and their variants (32-bit and 64-bit).


2/235


System interfacing for PG/PC SOFTBUS for LINUX/UNIX

■ Overview • Uniform interface - to databases - link to ERP and DB systems - to SIMATIC S7

• Integrated communication • Cross-computer communication

Oracle Database

Customer interfaces C++ JAVA File

SOFTBUS ADAPTER

LINUX

Customer applications ERP systems Quality management ...

SOFTBUS DB

Windows

SOFTBUS

SOFTBUS ADAPTER

SCO

HP-UX

SOFTBUS

SOFTBUS APRED

SOFTBUS

SOFTNET S7 Send / Receive

Redundant

Adapter

ISO RFC1006

SIMATIC S5

Solaris

Ethernet TCP/IP

other systems

SIMATIC S7

G_IK10_XX_10049

2

System configuration for SOFTBUS

■ Benefits

■ Application

• Communication across the system with standardized interface. • Incorporation of ERP and DB systems. • Interfacing of SIMATIC control systems • Fast and automatic data flow

2/236


The process landscape in industrial companies is frequently a product of historical developments. Thus there are many isolated solutions that function optimally within their own terms of reference but operate in a vacuum. Integrating these requires a smooth, loss-free and integrated communication system. Only this guarantees that the right information arrives at the right place and at the right time. SOFTBUS together with SOFTNET-S7 consists of matched modules that are available on the commonly used system platforms (LINUX, UNIX, Windows) and thus guarantee smooth communication between the system platforms.


System interfacing for PG/PC SOFTBUS for LINUX/UNIX

■ Function SOFTBUS functions SOFTBUS comprises software modules that can be used on all commonly available computer systems (UNIX, Windows, LINUX). The modules are compatible and have been adapted to standards such as SIMATIC NET and thus secure vertical integration with short start-up times. SOFTBUS DB functions SOFTBUS-DB merges databases and communication and therefore offers possibilities for transaction protection and uniform data storage. Interfaces Thanks to the combination of different modules, all commonly used platforms can be supported and linked together heterogeneously or homogeneously. The programming interface of SOFTBUS is identical to the WVS-KOM interface of the SIPAX package. This means that SIPAX applications can migrate to SOFTBUS without any problems.

■ Ordering data

2

Order No.

SOFTBUS Version 2.3 SOFTBUS LINUX • SOFTBUS/LINUX redundant (TCP) (32 bit)

2XV9 450-1CG02

• SOFTBUS/LINUX redundant (ISO) (32 bit)

2XV9 450-1CG04

• SOFTBUS/LINUX (TCP) (32 bit)

2XV9 450-1CG08

• SOFTBUS/LINUX (ISO) (32 bit)

2XV9 450-1CG10

SOFTBUS UNIX Packages are available for the following operating systems: • Solaris Sparc • Solaris X86 • SCO UNIX • HP-UNIX Please contact your Siemens contacts for information about the latest versions and their characteristics (32-bit and 64-bit).

■ More information Support LINUX distributors, UNIX operating systems: SIEMENS AG I&S IS E&C IT Contact Your IT4Industry Team Werner-von-Siemens-Str. 60 91052 Erlangen Tel.: +49(0)9131/7-4 61 11 Fax: +49(0)9131/7-4 47 57 E-mail: [email protected]


2/237


System interfacing for SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC ProTool/Pro

2

■ Overview

■ Integration Protocol

PC interfaces

SIMATIC S7 via Ethernet (TCP/IP) • S7-200 with CP 243-1 • S7-300 with CP 343-1 • S7-400 with CP 443-1

CP 1512 1)2) CP 1612 1)2) CP 1613 3) 4) CP 1613 A2 3) 4)

• WinAC Basis (V3.0 and higher) • WinAC RTX OPC (client + server) • Data Access V2.0 + V1.1

• PC-based HMI solution for single-user systems directly at the machine • SIMATIC ProTool/Pro comprises: - SIMATIC ProTool/Pro RT runtime software for PC-based systems - SIMATIC ProTool/Pro Configuration (CS) configuration software for configuring PC-based systems and for configuring of SIMATIC operator panels 1) • Executable under Windows 98 SE/ME and Windows NT4.0/2000/XP Professional • Current version: - SIMATIC ProTool/Pro Configuration V6.0 + SP3 - SIMATIC ProTool/Pro Runtime V6.0 + SP3

■ Benefits • Integral component of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA): The full integration of ProTool/Pro in the SIMATIC S7 environment provides conformity in communications, in data management and in configuration and programming • Openness: Consistent support of the Windows standards such as OLEAutomation and OPC (OLE for Process Control) • Flexibility: Individual function expansions can be implemented with Visual Basic scripts Archiving of process data and alarms, e.g. in an ODBC (Open Data Base Connectivity) database • Convenient process visualization: Ranging from archiving through print functions, graphics libraries, trend displays, messaging system, logging system, recipe management through to comprehensive controller drivers • Language selection: Reduction in handling and configuration costs by management of up to 32 languages in the project and online switching of up to 5 languages on the device

2/238


CP 1512 1) CP 1612 1)

1) For Panel PC 670/870 via internal Ethernet interface 2) Also required: SOFTNET-S7 Lean V6.2 for Industrial Ethernet (6GK1 704-1LW62-3AA0) or SOFTNET-S7 V6.2 for Industrial Ethernet (6GK1 704-1CW62-3AA0) 3) Also required: S7-1613/Windows V6.2 (6GK1 716-1CB62-3AA0) 4) When used with ProTool/Pro only released for communication with SIMATIC S7; no configuration download


System interfacing for SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC ProTool/Pro

■ Integration (continued)

2

Higher-level visualisation system WinCC

OPC-Client

Industrial Ethernet / TCP/IP On-site visualisation

OPC-Server

OPC-Server

ProTool/ Pro

ProTool/ Pro

OPC-Client

SIMATIC S7-300

OPC-Server

Non-Siemens PLCs SIMATIC S7-400

G_ST80_DE_00003

PROFIBUS

SIMATIC ProTool/Pro application example

■ More information Additional information is available in Catalog ST 80 or in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.de/protoolpro http://www2.automation.siemens.com/salesmaterial-as/ catalog/de/st80_d.pdf


2/239


System interfacing for SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC WinCC flexible RT

2

■ Overview

■ Integration SIMATIC WinCC flexible Runtime supports linking to: Protocol

PC interfaces

SIMATIC S7 via Ethernet (TCP/IP)1) • S7-200 with CP 243-1 • S7-300 with CP 343-1

CP 1612 1) 2) CP 1613 A2 3) 4)

• S7-400 with CP 443-1 • WinAC Basis (V3.0 and higher) • WinAC RTX OPC (client + server) 5) 6)

• PC-based visualization software for single-user systems directly at the machine • Executable under Windows 2000/XP Professional • Current version: - SIMATIC WinCC flexible 2005 SP1 Runtime with 128, 512 or 2048 PowerTags Note: Service Pack 1 is also available for download free of charge in the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/ww/view/de/23059737); CD available on request

■ Benefits • Optimum price/performance ratio thanks to individually scalable system functionality • Functions for all visualization tasks: Operator functions, graphical and plot representations, signaling system, log system, archiving (option), recipe management (option), Audit Trail (option), process fault diagnostics (option) • Flexible runtime functionality thanks to Visual Basic scripts • Innovative service concepts with remote operation, diagnostics and administration via intranet and Internet as well as e-mail communication to increase availability (option) • Support for simple distributed automation solutions based on TCP/IP networks at the machine level (option)

2/240


• Data Access V2.0 + V1.1 (COM) / V1.0 (XML) client only

CP 1612 2)

HTTP communication for data exchange between SIMATIC HMI (client + server) 6) 7)

CP 1612 2)

1) A Softnet Lean License is supplied with every WinCC flexible 2005 Runtime package. This means that an Ethernet link to SIMATIC S7 (max. 8 connections) is included in the basic package. 2) For MicroBox 420 and Panel PC 477/677/877 via internal Ethernet interface 3) Also required: S7-1613 2005 (6GK1 716-1CB63-3AA 4) When used with WinCC flexible, only released for communication with SIMATIC S7; no configuration download 5) OPC Client included in scope of delivery, "WinCC flexible/OPC Server for WinCC flexible Runtime" required for OPC Server 6) OPC and HTTP communication are additive, i.e., can be used in conjunction with the PLC links listed above 7) "WinCC flexible/Sm@rtAccess for WinCC flexible Runtime" options required


System interfacing for SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC WinCC flexible RT


2

Higher level visualization system WinCC

OPC-Client

Industrial Ethernet/TCP/IP

OPC-Server

OPC-Server

PROFIBUS

SIMATIC S7-300

OPC-Client 3rd Party OPC-Server


G_ST80_EN_00077

On-site visualization

SIMATIC WinCC flexible Runtime application example

■ More information Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/wincc-flexible


2/241


System interfacing for SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC WinCC

2

■ Overview

■ Integration Integration in enterprise-wide solutions (IT and Business Integration) WinCC is based on Microsoft technologies, ensuring maximum openness and scope for integration. ActiveX controls support technology- and sector-specific expansions. Even cross-vendor communication is made easy. Why? Because WinCC is OPCcompliant and can, therefore, be used as an OPC client and server. Furthermore, in addition to access to current process values, it also supports standards such as OPC HDA (Historical Data Access) and OPC Alarm & Events. Other important features include: Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) for userspecific expansions to the WinCC Graphics Designer and Visual Basic Scripting (VBS) as an easy-to-learn, open runtime language. Professional application developers can also use ANSI-C on request. What's more, the ODK (Open Development Kit) makes access to APIs really easy.

• PC-based operator control and monitoring system for visualizing and operating processes, production flows, machines and plants in all sectors – with the simple single-user station through to distributed multi-user systems with redundant servers and cross-location solutions with Web clients. WinCC is the information hub for corporation-wide vertical integration. • The basic system configuration (WinCC basic software) includes industry-standard functions for signaling and acknowledging events, archiving of messages and measured values, logging of all process and configuration data, user administration and visualization. • The WinCC basic software forms the core of a wide range of different applications. Based on the open programming interfaces, a wide range of WinCC options (from Siemens A&D) and WinCC add-ons have been developed (by Siemens-internal and external partners). • Current versions: - SIMATIC WinCC V6.0 SP4: Runs under Windows XP Professional/Windows 2003 Server and Windows 2000 - SIMATIC WinCC V5.1 SP2: Runs under Windows NT 4.0/2000

For the first time, the WinCC V6 basic system features an integrated powerful and scalable Historian function based on the Microsoft SQL Server 2000. The possibilities thereby afforded to users are endless: From high-performance archiving of current process data through long-term archiving with high data compression and beyond to a central information hub in the form of an enterprise-wide Historian Server. Versatile clients and tools for evaluation, open interfaces, special options (Connectivity Pack , IndustrialDataBridge, Client Access licenses) provide the basis for effective IT and Business Integration. Integration in automation solutions (valid for WinCC V6.0 and higher) WinCC is an open process visualization system and supports the connection of all types of PLC. Released communications software Only communications software with the versions listed (or higher) can be used. Corresponding SIMATIC NET updates are available for upgrading older versions and releases (these are supplied with the WinCC basic package/upgrade). Number of connectable PLCs The number of PLCs that can be connected via Industrial Ethernet CP 1613 with a maximum message-frame length of 512 KB is determined as follows: Type of connection

Number of stations

• SIMATIC S5 Ethernet Layer 4 + TCP/IP

Up to 60

• SIMATIC S5 Ethernet TF

Up to 60

• SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite

Up to 64

• SIMATIC 505 Ethernet Layer 4 + TCP/IP

Up to 60

Up to 8 (with CP 5611) or up to 44 (CP 5613) PLCs can be connected via PROFIBUS. The use of Industrial Ethernet is recommended for approx. 10 PLCs and more.

2/242





2

Mixed operation with different PLCs

Communication redundancy

With their multiprotocol stack, CP 1613 and CP 5613 communications processors support the parallel operation of two protocols, e.g. for mixed operation of a variety of PLCs via a bus cable. WinCC supports the operation of two interface boards of the same type only in conjunction with the following channels: SIMATIC S5 Ethernet Layer 4 (2 x CP 1613), SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite (2 x CP 1613, 2 x CP 5613) and PROFIBUS DP (4 x CP 5613; max. 122 slaves per CP 5613). In addition to communication via Industrial Ethernet CP 1613 or PROFIBUS CP 5613 one CP 5511 or CP 5611 can be used for communication with SIMATIC S7 via MPI.

WinCC itself does not support redundant LAN interfaces. The S7-REDCONNECT software package is required for the redundant connection of PCs via 2 x Industrial Ethernet on SIMATIC S7. This connects the SIMATIC S7 with applications on the PC, e.g. SIMATIC WinCC. Pure communications redundancy can also be achieved by setting up optical rings (see Catalog IK PI).

Client/server communication

Overview of interfaces (WinCC V6.0 and higher)

Communication between the clients and server takes place on TCP/IP. We recommend setting up a separate PC LAN. For small projects with a correspondingly low volume of message frames, a SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet can be used for both process communication (WinCC/Server ↔ PLC) and for PC-PC communication (WinCC/Client ↔ WinCC/Server).

Protocol

Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/wincc-connectivity

Description

SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite

Channel DLL for S7 functions via MPI, PROFIBUS or Ethernet Layer 4 + TCP/IP

Cross-vendor Windows DDE

Channel DLL for DDE communication, WinCC can acquire data from DDE server applications

OPC client

Channel DLL for OPC communication, WinCC can acquire data from OPC server applications

OPC server

Server applications for OPC communication; WinCC makes process data available for OPC clientsg


2/243



2

■ Components for communication between PG/PC and SIMATIC (WinCC V6.0 and higher) Industrial Ethernet

SIMATIC S5 Ethernet (TF)

SIMATIC S5 Ethernet Layer 4

SIMATIC S5 TCP/IP

SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite

SIMATIC 505 Ethernet Layer 4

SIMATIC 505 TCP/IP 1)

Order No.

WinCC – Channel DLL SIMATIC S5 Ethernet TF Channel DLL for S5-TF communication

Included in the basic package

■

SIMATIC S5 Ethernet Layer 4 Channel DLL for S5-Layer 4 communication + TCP/IP

■


■

SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite Channel DLL for S7 functions


■

Communication components for OS/OP expansion CP 1612 PCI card for connecting a PG/PC to Industrial Ethernet (SOFTNET-S7 must be ordered separately)

6GK1 161-2AA00

SOFTNET-S7 2005 Communications software for S7 functions (max. 64 connections) • for Windows 2000/XP/2003 Server SOFTNET-S7 Lean2005 Communications software for S7 functions (max. 8 connections) • for Windows 2000/XP/2003 Server CP 1613 PCI card for connecting a PG/PC to Industrial Ethernet (communications software must be ordered separately) CP 1613 A2 PCI card (32 bit) for connecting a PG/PC to Industrial Ethernet (communications software must be ordered separately)

■

■

■

■

■

■

6GK1 704-1CW63-3AA0

6GK1 704-1LW63-3AA0

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■ 6GK1 716-1CB63-3AA0

6GK1 716-1TB63-3AA0

■

■

Additional information can be found in the Internet under:


■

■


2/244

■

■

6GK1 161-3AA01

■ System interface possible 1) Via any interface board with NDIS 3.0 interface; no separate communications software required

http://www.siemens.com/wincc

■

6GK1 161-3AA00

■

S7-1613 2005 Communications software for S7 functions and S5/505 Layer 4 communication with TCP/IP • for Windows 2000/XP/2003 Server TF-1613 2005 Communications software for TF functions and S5/505 Layer 4 communication with TCP/IP • for Windows 2000/XP

■

■

■

Further information about components for communication for PG/PC can be found in the Internet under: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/de/14627901



■ Communication examples Standard-PC with WinCC e.g. RC 64 k or RT 64 k

2 SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet (S7 functions)

WinCC

- CP 1613 6GK1 161-3AA00 - S7 1613 (communications software) 6GK1 716-1CB61-3AA0

Industrial Ethernet

SIMATIC S7-400

SIMATIC S7-300

- CP 443-1 (S7, S/R) ISO + TCP 6GK7 443-1EX11-0XE0

- CP 343-1 (S7, S/R) ISO + TCP 6GK7 343-1EX11-0XE0

- CP 443-1 IT (S7, S/R, HTTP) 6GK7 443-1GX11-0XE0 - NCM S7 manual Industrial Ethernet (SIMATIC NET CD bzw. Internet Download)

Manual

- NCM S7 manual Industrial Ethernet (SIMATIC NET CD or Internet Download) G_ST80_XX_00011

Manual

- CP 343-1 IT (S7, S/R, HTTP) 6GK7 343-1GX11-0XE0

WinCC single-user system: Industrial Ethernet with S7 communication

Higher-level visualisation system WinCC

- OPC server functionality (included in WinCC basic package) - TCP-IP interface board required

OPC-Client

Industrial Ethernet/TCP/IP On-site visualization

OPC-Server

OPC-Server

ProTool/ Pro

PROFIBUS

- integrated PROFIBUS interface

OPC-Client OPC-Server

SIMATIC S7-300


Non-Siemens PLCs

- OPC server functionality (included in WinCC basic package) - OPC server required for interfacing with third-party PLCs

SIMATIC S7-400

G_ST80_DE_00015

- OPC server functionality (included in ProTool/Pro Runtime basic package)

OPC link Siemens IK PI · 2007

2/245


Accessories C-PLUG

2

■ Overview

■ Design The C-PLUG is designed to the degree of protection IP20. For IP65 components, the degree of protection is ensured by the construction of the target device. The power supply is also provided by the data terminal. The C-PLUG is plugged into the appropriate slot in the SIMATIC NET component. During start-up of the device and reconfiguring, the configuration data of the device is backed up automatically. In the event of component failure, the C-PLUG is simply removed from the failed component and plugged into the replacement part. The replacement unit installed in the network or in the automation system then starts up automatically with the same device configuration as the failed device. To protect against inadvertent removal (falling out), the slot for the C-PLUG is usually mounted on the rear of the data terminal.

• Swap media that supports the fast and easy replacement of SIMATIC NET components without a programming device in the event of a fault • For implementation in all SIMATIC NET products with C-PLUG slot • For automatic backing up of configuration or engineering data from the SIMATIC NET components • The C-PLUG can also be used to store application data such as documents or Web pages • In some SIMATIC S7 CP modules, such as the CP 443-1 Advanced, the C-PLUG is a standard component of the scope of supply and is required to guarantee the complete functional scope of the respective component.

■ Benefits The C-PLUG is plugged into the rear of the CP 443-1 Advanced

• Quick and easy replacement of SIMATIC NET components without the need to reconfigure the replacement part • The device can be replaced without the need for specially trained personnel or a programming device or PC • The downtime of network segments and connected Industrial Ethernet stations in the event of a fault is minimized.

■ Application The C-PLUG is used when it is necessary for network components or communication modules to be replaced quickly and easily in the event of a fault without the need for reconfiguring the replacement part and without the need for special training.

The C-PLUG is plugged into the IWLAN Access Point SCALANCE W 788-1PRO on the rear of the device

2/246



Accessories C-PLUG

■ Function During start-up, the device automatically backs up the configuration data on an unwritten C-PLUG (factory state) that has been plugged into a SIMATIC NET component. Changes to the configuration during normal operation are also backed up on the C-PLUG without any additional operator intervention. During start-up an unconfigured device automatically loads the configuration data from an inserted, written C-PLUG provided that the data were written by a compatible device type. Diagnostics Incorrect C-PLUG handling, such as inserting a C-PLUG that contains the configuration of another device group or general malfunctions of the C-PLUG are signaled over the diagnostic mechanisms for the respective data terminal (LEDs, PROFINET, SNMP, Web-based Management, etc.).

■ Integration Supported products SCALANCE X Industrial Ethernet switches • SCALANCE X208 • SCALANCE X208PRO • SCALANCE X204-2 • SCALANCE X204-2LD • SCALANCE X206-1 • SCALANCE X206-1LD • SCALANCE X204IRT • SCALANCE X202-2IRT • SCALANCE X202-2P IRT • SCALANCE X201-3P IRT • SCALANCE X200-4P IRT • SCALANCE X414-3E (included in delivery)


2

Power supply

Via data terminal

Power loss

0.015 mW

Mounting

Can be plugged into a C-PLUG slot


-20 °C to +70 °C -40 °C to +80 °C max. 95% (164 ft)


24.3 x 17 x 8.1 approx. 5 g

Memory capacity

32 MB


IP20

■ Ordering data C-PLUG

Order No. 6GK1 900-0AB00

Swap medium for simple replacement of devices in the event of a fault; for storing configuration or engineering and application data; can be used for SIMATIC NET products with C-PLUG slot

Industrial Security SCALANCE S • SCALANCE S602 • SCALANCE S612 • SCALANCE S613 Industrial Wireless LAN SCALANCE W • SCALANCE W744-1PRO • SCALANCE W746-1PRO • SCALANCE W747-1RR • SCALANCE W788-1PRO • SCALANCE W788-2PRO • SCALANCE W788-1RR • SCALANCE W788-2RR System connections for SIMATIC S7 • CP 443-1 Advanced (included in delivery) • CP 343-1 • CP 343-1 Advanced (included in delivery) Routers • IWLAN/PB Link PN IO • IE/PB Link PN IO • IE/AS-i LINK PN IO • DP/AS-i LINK Advanced


2/247


Accessories

SICLOCK time synchronization

2

■ Overview

■ Design SICLOCK TM and SICLOCK TS are designed for mounting on a standard SIMATIC mounting rail. Kits for installation in 19" racks and 19" consoles are also available.

■ Function SICLOCK TM / SICLOCK TS master clock SICLOCK TM and SICLOCK TS support the synchronization of CPs and PCs via Industrial Ethernet using SIMATIC and NTP procedures. • SICLOCK TM serves as a master clock for highly accurate time control and distributes the time to all systems to be synchronized via Industrial Ethernet, and also provides eight additional outputs for point-to-point connections with RS232, RS422 and TTY 20 mA. • SICLOCK TS serves as a master clock for highly exact time control and distribution to all systems to be synchronized via Industrial Ethernet, and also provides three individually programmable outputs for point-to-point connections and IRIG A and B. SICLOCK TM and SICLOCK TS contain RJ45 and ITP connectors for direct linking to Ethernet. • SICLOCK TM/TS master clock as the central component for time synchronization of a plant over Ethernet • GPS or DCF77 radio clocks for direct connection to PCs, SIMATIC S7 controllers and to the SICLOCK TM/TS master clock • Pulse converter for electrical and optical distribution and interface conversion • Complete packages for common applications

■ Application The time synchronization of all components plays an important role when automating production plants. The SICLOCK system is a programmable, modular and optimally matched system for time synchronization of plants. Either GPS or DCF77 can be used for external radio synchronization. The modular SICLOCK system permits time synchronization of a single PLC up to a large plant designed with multiple redundancy. Concepts for time-of-day synchronization Automation systems and operator stations of a SIMATIC PCS 7 system or WinCC stations can be synchronized as follows with DCF77 or GPS time signals: • Large plants; For larger plants with a large number of network nodes, the time is synchronized by means of a master SICLOCK TM/SICLOCK TS on the plant bus. • Small plants; For small to medium-sized plants, the PCS 7 operator station or the WinCC station serves as the time master, the corresponding DCF or GPS radio clock being directly connected to the COM interface of the PC. • Stand-alone systems; For SIMATIC S7 controllers or small plants, e.g. for laboratory automation, SICLOCK DCFS7 offers a cost-effective solution for direct DCF77 synchronization via an S7 digital input.

2/248


Adaptation to individual, local necessities in the plant is achieved by programming the interfaces, telegram contents, types of signal etc. using the membrane keyboard and the LCD panel. This enables fast, flexible and user-friendly integration of SICLOCK TM and SICLOCK TS and still permits expansion. On failure of the antennas, SICLOCK TM and SICLOCK TS offer a high level of precision by means of their automatic switchover to quartz mode. Once the antenna fault has been cleared, they resume the time signal without any jump in time.


Accessories


■ Ordering data

Order No.

SICLOCK TM master clock

SICLOCK TS master clock

SICLOCK TM DCF77 SICLOCK TM master clock with Ethernet interface + DCFRS radio clock, industrial version, package contains • SICLOCK TM in high-grade steel housing for DIN rail mounting • Active DCF77 antenna with TTY output (20 mA current loop) and antenna frame • Splitting box • 1 m connection cable, fitted, extendable up to 1000 m - With SICLOCK TM, 24 ... 110 V DC - With SICLOCK TM, 90 ... 230 V AC/DC

SICLOCK TS DCF77 SICLOCK TS master clock with Ethernet interface and IRIG A and B + DCFRS radio clock, industrial version, package comprises • SICLOCK TS in high-grade steel housing for DIN rail mounting • Active DCF77 antenna with TTY output (20 mA current loop) and antenna frame • Splitting box • 1 m connection cable, fitted, extendable up to 1000 m - With SICLOCK TS, 24 ... 110 V DC - With SICLOCK TS, 90 ... 230 V AC/DC

SICLOCK TM GPSDEC SICLOCK TM master clock with Ethernet interface + GPSDEC radio clock, package contains • SICLOCK TM in high-grade steel housing for DIN rail mounting • GPS antenna with antenna frame • 22 m coaxial antenna cable (max. length 70 m, see accessories) • GPSDEC decoder with power supply unit • 5 m RS232 connection cable • Parameterization software for the PC - With SICLOCK TM, 24 ... 110 V DC - With SICLOCK TM, 90 ... 230 V AC/DC SICLOCK TM GPS1000 SICLOCK TM master clock with Ethernet interface + GPS1000 radio clock, package contains • SICLOCK TM in high-grade steel housing for DIN rail mounting • GPS1000 antenna head with antenna frame • GPS1000 power supply • 5 m RS232 connection cable • Splitting box - With SICLOCK TM, 24 ... 110 V DC - With SICLOCK TM, 90 ... 230 V AC/DC SICLOCK TM single device SICLOCK TM master clock with Ethernet interface in high-grade steel housing for standard rail mounting • SICLOCK TM 24..110 V DC • SICLOCK TM 90… 230 V AC/DC

2XV9 450-1AR26 2XV9 450-1AR27

SICLOCK TS GPS1000 SICLOCK TS master clock with Ethernet interface and IRIG A and B + GPS1000 radio clock, package contains • SICLOCK TS in high-grade steel housing for DIN rail mounting • GPS1000 radio clock with antenna frame • Splitting box - With SICLOCK TS, 24 ... 110 V DC - With SICLOCK TS, 90 ... 230 V AC/DC

2XV9 450-1AR24 2XV9 450-1AR25

2

Order No.

SICLOCK TS single device SICLOCK TS master clock with Ethernet interface and IRIG A and B in stainless steel housing for mounting on standard rails • SICLOCK TS 24 ...110 V DC • SICLOCK TS 90… 230 V AC/DC

2XV9 450-1AR56 2XV9 450-1AR57

2XV9 450-1AR54 2XV9 450-1AR55

2XV9 450-1AR52 2XV9 450-1AR53

2XV9 450-1AR50 2XV9 450-1AR51

2XV9 450-1AR22 2XV9 450-1AR23


2/249


Accessories


2

■ Ordering data

Order No.

DCF radio clocks

Accessories for SICLOCK DCFS7

SICLOCK DCFRS, industry-compatible radio clock DCF radio clock for time synchronization of individual PCs or servers in industrial environments subject to severe interference, possible distance between DCF radio clock and PC up to 1000 m, package contains: • Active DCF77 antenna with TTY output (20 mA current loop) and antenna frame • TTY/RS232 converter • Plug-type power supply unit • Two splitting boxes • 1 m connection cable, fitted, extendable up to 1000 m • DCF77 receiver service for Windows

2XV9 450-1AR21

SICLOCK DCFRS, radio clock for Windows DCF radio clock for time synchronization of individual PCs over short distances, package contains • Active DCF77 antenna with RS232 interface mounting bracket • 20 m connecting cable mounted • DCF77 receiver service for Windows

2XV9 450-1AR14

SICLOCK DCFEMP, receiver with RS232 interface DCF receiver for connecting to HF cable system available in the plant for DCF77 time signals for time synchronization of individual PCs or server over short distances, package contains • Active DCF77 receiver with mounting bracket and RS232 interface • 20 m connecting cable mounted

2XV9 450-1AR60

SICLOCK DCFEMP, receiver with TTY interface DCF receiver for connecting to HF cable system available in the plant for DCF77 time signals for time synchronization of individual PCs or server over distances up to 1000 m, package contains • Active DCF77 receiver with mounting bracket and TTY interface • 1 m connecting cable mounted

2XV9 450-1AR61

SICLOCK DCFS7 Economical solution for time synchronization over DCF77 of SIMATIC S7-300/400 via a digital input, package contains • SICLOCK DCFRS, radio clock with RS232 output, 20 m connection cable and mounting bracket • SICLOCK DCFS7 interface • SICLOCK DCFS7 receiver service (STEP 7 function block for integration into S7 software)

2XV9 450-1AR36

2/250


Order No.

SICLOCK DCFS7 interface + receiver service (STEP 7 function block for integration into S7 software)

2XV9 450-1AR30

SICLOCK DCFS7 interface

2XV9 450-1AR35

SICLOCK DCFS7 receiver service (STEP 7 function block for integration into S7 software)

2XV9 450-1AR32

GPS radio clocks SICLOCK WINGPS, radio clock for Windows GPS radio clock for time synchronization of individual PCs in industrial environments subject to severe interference, package contains: • GPS antenna with antenna frame • WINGPS decoder with power supply unit • 22 m coaxial antenna cable (max. length 70 m, see accessories) • 20 m PC connection cable WINGPS • DCF77 receiver service for Windows

2XV9 450-1AR13

SICLOCK GPSDEC, radio clock for Windows GPS radio clock for time synchronization of SICLOCK TM/TS master clocks or programmable logic controllers in industrial environments subject to severe interference, package contains • GPS antenna with antenna frame • GPSDEC decoder with power supply unit • 22 m coaxial antenna cable (max. length 70 m, see accessories) • 5 m RS232 connecting cable • Parameterization program

2XV9 450-1AR00

GPS1000 + power supply, radio clock for Windows GPS radio clock for time synchronization of PCs, programmable logic controllers as well as the SICLOCK TM and SICLOCK TS master clocks in industrial environments subject to severe interference over distances up to 1000 m between the antenna and device, package contains • GPS1000 antenna head with antenna frame • GPS1000 power supply • Splitting box • 5 m RS232 connecting cable

2XV9 450-1AR82


Accessories


■ Ordering data

Order No.

Accessories Kit for SICLOCK TM/TS • for desktop housing

2XV9 450-1AR80

• for 19" mounting frame (4 HU)

2XV9 450-1AR81

Lightning protection for antenna cable • Lightning protection for coaxial antenna cable (SICLOCK GPSDEC / WINGPS) • Lightning protection for TTY cable (SICLOCK GPS1000/DCFRS industrial version) • Lightning protection for RS232 antenna cable (SICLOCK DCFS7/DCFRS with RS232 interface)

2XV9 450-1AR11

2XV9 450-1AR83


2

SIEMENS AG Electronic Design and Manufacturing Services (I&S EDM) Frauenauracher Strasse 98 91056 Erlangen Tel.: +49 (0) 91 31 / 18-8 20 10 (Hotline) Fax: +49 (0) 91 31 / 18-8 06 04 E-Mail: [email protected] Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/siclock

2XV9 450-1AR15

Coaxial antenna cable SICLOCK GPSDEC / WINGPS • 30 m

2XV9 450-1AR12

• 70 m

2XV9 450-1AR07

Software SICLOCK DCF77 receiver service for Windows

2XV9 450-1AR28

SICLOCK Ethernet receiver service for Windows NT

2XV9 450-1AR44

Pulse converter SICLOCK EOPC Electro-optical pulse converter for industrial applications with 32 fiber-optic outputs for transparent operation and pulse mode • SICLOCK EOPC 24 ... 110 V DC • SICLOCK EOPC 90… 230 V AC/DC SICLOCK PCON Single-channel electro-optical pulse converter for industrial applications • SICLOCK PCON 24 ... 230 V AC/DC, with multimode glass fiber connection, 820 nm • SICLOCK PCON 24 ... 230 V AC/DC, long distance, with multimode glass fiber connection, 1310 nm SICLOCK DCFHF HF modulator for DCF77 signals for industrial applications

2XV9 450-1AR72 2XV9 450-1AR73

2XV9 450-1AR63-1SA0

2XV9 450-1AR63-1MA0

2XV9 450-1AR64

Displays SICLOCK DA1000 NET Digital display with Ethernet connection for date and time • Red display

2XV9 450-1AR68

SICLOCK DA1000 Digital display for date and time • Red display

2XV9 450-1AR65

• Green display

2XV9 450-1AR66


2/251


ET 200S distributed I/Os

IM 151-3 PN interface modules

2

■ Overview

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 1513AA20-0AB0

6ES7 1513BA20-0AB0

24 V Yes

24 V Yes

20 ms

20 ms

• from supply voltage 1L+, max.

250 mA

250 mA

• Power dissipation, typical

2,5 W

2,5 W

256 Byte 256 Byte

256 Byte 256 Byte

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• Transmission rate, max.

100 Mbit/s

100 Mbit/s

• Automatic transmission speed detection

Yes

Yes

No

No

Interrupts - Interrupts

Yes

Yes

Diagnostics - Diagnostic functions

Yes

Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• between backplane bus and electronic components

No

No

• between ethernet and electronic components

Yes

Yes

• between supply load and electronic components

No

No

• VendorID

002AH

002AH

• DeviceID

0301

0301H

Supply voltages Supply voltage of electronic components 1L+ - Rated value (DC) - Reverse polarity protection Voltages and currents • Line supply/voltage failure buffering, min. Current consumption

Address area

• Interface module for linking the ET 200S to PROFInet • Handles all data exchange with the PROFIBUS I/O Controller • 2 versions: - IM151-3 PN STANDARD - IM151-3 PN HIGH FEATURE (available soon); supports, in contrast to the STANDARD version, the operation of PROFIsafe F modules • with integrated 2-port switch for line topology Note: Micro Memory Card required for operation of CPU.

Addressing range - Outputs - Inputs Connection system • RJ45 Protocols • PROFINET IO PROFINET IO

Clock synchronism • Clock synchronous operation Status information/ interrupts/ diagnostics

Diagnostic display LED - Bus fault BF (red) - Group fault SF (red) - Monitoring 24 V power supply ON (green) - Connection to the LINK line (green) - Send/Receive RX/TX (yellow) Potentials/ electrical isolation

General information


2/252


• Width

60 mm

60 mm

• Height

119.5 mm

119.5 mm

• Depth

75 mm

75 mm

• Weight, approx.

120 g

135 g




■ Ordering data

Order No.

IM 151-3 PN interface module For ET 200S; data transmission rates up to 100 Mbit/s; data volume depends on the number of modules inserted, up to 63 modules can be connected, bus connection through RJ45 • Standard

6ES7 151-3AA20-0AB0

• High Feature

6ES7 151-3BA20-0AB0

Manual ET 200S ET 200S distributed I/O system manuals are available in the Internet as PDF files:

Accessories Industrial Ethernet FC RJ45 Plug 90 RJ45 plug connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 90° cable outlet • 1 piece

6GK1 901-1BB20-2AA0

• 10 pieces

6GK1 901-1BB20-2AB0

• 50 pieces

6GK1 901-1BB20-2AE0

Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect installation cables • IE FC TP Standard Cable GP 2 x 2 sold by the meter, max. quantity 1000 m minimum order 20 m • IE FC TP Trailing Cable 2 x 2 sold by the meter, max. quantity 1000 m minimum order 20 m • IE FC TP Trailing Cable GP 2 x 2 sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m • IE TP Torsion Cable GP 2 x 2 sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m • IE FC TP Marine Cable 2 x 2 sold by the meter, max. quantity 1000 m minimum order 20 m

2

Order No.

http://www.siemens.com/ simatic-docu

SIMATIC Manual Collection Electronic manuals on CD, multilingual: S7-200, TD 200, S7-300, M7-300, C7, S7-400, M7-400, STEP 7, Engineering Tools, Runtime Software, SIMATIC DP (Distributed I/O), SIMATIC HMI (Human Machine Interface), SIMATIC NET (Industrial Communication)

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0

SIMATIC Manual Collection – Update service for 1 year

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2

Scope of delivery: Current CD "S7 Manual Collection" and the three subsequent updates

6XV1 840-2AH10

6XV1 840-3AH10

Label sheets DIN A4 (10 pieces) Each sheet contains 60 label strips for peripheral modules and 20 label strips for interface modules • petrol

6ES7 193-4BH00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 193-4BD00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 193-4BB00-0AA0

• light beige

6ES7 193-4BA00-0AA0

Terminating module

6ES7 193-4JA00-0AA0

as spare part for ET 200S 6XV1 870-2D

6XV1 870-2F

6XV1 840-4AH10

Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect stripping tool

6GK1 901-1GA00

MMC 64 KB 1)

6ES7 953-8LF11-0AA0

SIMATIC S5, DIN rail 35 mm, length 483 mm for 19“ cabinets

6ES5 710-8MA11

SIMATIC S5, DIN rail 35 mm, length 530 mm for 600 mm cabinets

6ES5 710-8MA21

SIMATIC S5, DIN rail 35 mm, length 830 mm for 900 mm cabinets

6ES5 710-8MA31

SIMATIC S5, DIN rail 35 mm, length 2 m

6ES5 710-8MA41

For storing the device name MMC 128 KB 1)

6ES7 953-8LG11-0AA0

For storing the device name MMC 512 KB 1)

6ES7 953-8LJ11-0AA0

For storing the device name MMC 2 MB 1)

6ES7 953-8LL11-0AA0

For storing the device name and/or firmware update MMC 4 MB 1)

6ES7 953-8LM11-0AA0

For storing the device name and/or firmware update MMC 8 MB 1)

6ES7 953-8LP11-0AA0

For storing the device name and/or firmware update 1) For operating the IM 151-3, an MMC is essential


2/253




2

■ More information Terminal module selection assistance Power modules

TM-P terminal modules for power modules

Screw-type terminal Order No. 6ES7 193...

15S23-A1 4CC20-0AA0

15S23-A0 4CD20-0AA0

15S22-01 4CE00-0AA0

30S44-A0 4CK20-0AA0

Spring-loaded terminal Order No. 6ES7 193...

15C23-A1 4CC30-0AA0

15C23-A0 4CD30-0AA0

15C22-01 4CE10-0AA0

30C44-A0 4CK30-0AA0

FastConnect Order No. 6ES7 193...

15N23-A1 4CC70-0AA0

15N23-A0 4CD70-0AA0

15N22-01 4CE60-0AA0

Available soon

PM-E 24 V DC

■

■

■

PM-E 24 V … 48 V DC

■

■

■

PM-E 24 V DC/120/230 V AC

■

■

■

PM-E F 24 V DC PROFIsafe

2/254


■




■ Overview Interface module for processing the communication between ET 200pro and a higher-level controller over PROFINET IO.

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 154-4AB00-0AB0 Supply voltages Supply voltage of electronic components 1L+ - Rated value (DC) - Short-circuit protection - Reverse polarity protection Rated value - 24 V DC - permissible range, lower limit (DC) - permissible range, upper limit (DC)

24 V Yes Yes Yes 20.4 V 28.8 V

Current consumption 250 mA

• Power dissipation, typical

4.5 W

Memory/backup Yes

256 Byte 256 Byte

Protocols • PROFINET IO

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Insulation • Insulation tested with

500 V DC

• between backplane bus and electronic components

Yes

• between supply load and electronic components

Yes

Environmental requirements

Address area Addressing range - Outputs - Inputs

Diagnostic display LED - Bus fault BF (red) - Group fault SF (red) - Monitoring 24 V power supply ON (green) - Monitoring the load voltage DC 24 V (green)

Potentials/ electrical isolation

• from supply voltage 1L+, max.

Memory - Micro memory card

6ES7 154-4AB00-0AB0 Status information/interrupts/ diagnostics

Yes

PROFINET IO • Transmission rate, max.

100 Mbit/s

• Automatic transmission speed detection

Yes

• Services

Network management functions, network diagnostics (SNMP), ping, arp

Operating temperature - min. - max.

-25 °C 55 °C

Storage/transportation temperature - min. - max.

-40 °C 70 °C

Degree of protection and class of protection - IP65 - IP66 - IP67

Yes Yes Yes


90 mm

• Height

130 mm

• Depth

71 mm

• Weight, approx.

480 g

General information


2/255

2




2

■ Ordering data IM 154-4 PN High Feature interface module For communication between ET 200pro and higher-level controllers over PROFINET IO; support of PROFIsafe

Order No. 6ES7 154-4AB00-0AB0

3RX9 802-0AA00

Micro Memory Card, 3.3 V, NFLASH • 64 KB

6ES7 953-8LF11-0AA0

• 128 KB

6ES7 953-8LG11-0AA0

• 512 KB

6ES7 953-8LJ11-0AA0

• 2 MB

6ES7 953-8LL11-0AA0

• 4 MB

6ES7 953-8LM11-0AA0

• 8 MB

6ES7 953-8LP11-0AA0

IE M12 connecting cables Pre-assembled with two M12 connectors • 0.3 m long

6XV1 870-8AE30

• 0.5 m long

6XV1 870-8AE50

• 1 m long

6XV1 870-8AH10

• 1.5 m long

6XV1 870-8AH15

• 2 m long

6XV1 870-8AH20

• 3 m long

6XV1 870-8AH30

• 5 m long

6XV1 870-8AH50

• 10 m long

6XV1 870-8AN10

• 15 m long

6XV1 870-8AN15

7/8" connecting cable to power supply 5-core, 5 x 1.5 mm2, trailing type, pre-assembled with two 7/8" connectors, 5-pin • 1.5 m long

6XV1 822-5BH15

• 2 m long

6XV1 822-5BH20

• 3 m long

6XV1 822-5BH30

• 5 m long

6XV1 822-5BH50

• 10 m long

6XV1 822-5BN10

• 15 m long

6XV1 822-5BN15

Power cables 5-core, 5 x 1.5 mm2, trailing type, sold by the meter, minimum order quantity 20 m, maximum order quantity 1000 m

6XV1 830-8AH10

7/8" cable connector For ET 200eco, with axial cable outlet • with male insert, 5 per pack

6GK1 905-0FA00

• with female insert, 5 per pack

6GK1 905-0FB00

7/8“-Power T-Tap PRO energy-t-connector for ET200 with 2 7/8"socket inserts and one 7/8"pin insert, 5 pieces per packaging unit

6GK1 905-0FC00

2/256


General accessories ET 200pro rack • Narrow, for interface, electronics and power modules - 500 mm

Accessories M12 covering cap For protection of unused M12 connections with ET 200pro

Order No.

6ES7 194-4GA00-0AA0

- 1000 mm

6ES7 194-4GA10-0AA0

- 2000 mm, can be cut to length

6ES7 194-4GA20-0AA0

• Compact, for interface, electronics and power modules - 500 mm

6ES7 194-4GC00-0AA0

- 1000 mm

6ES7 194-4GC10-0AA0


6ES7 194-4GC20-0AA0

• Wide, for interface, electronics, power modules and motor starters - 500 mm

6ES7 194-4GB00-0AA0

- 1000 mm

6ES7 194-4GB10-0AA0


6ES7 194-4GB20-0AA0

Spare fuse 12.5 A quick-response, for interface and power modules, 10 items per package unit

6ES7 194-4HB00-0AA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0

SIMATIC Manual Collection – Update service for 1 year Scope of delivery: Current CD "S7 Manual Collection" and the three subsequent updates

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


Motion Control System SIMOTION General information

■ Overview Combining the three control functions of Motion Control, Logic Control (PLC) and technology functions has the following benefits: • Reduced engineering overhead and increased machine performance • Time-critical interfaces between the individual components are no longer required • Simple, uniform and transparent programming and diagnostics of the entire machine The SIMOTION system comprises three components: Engineering system Motion Control, PLC and technology tasks can all be performed within an integrated system. The engineering system provides all the tools required for these tasks: From programming and parameterization, through testing and commissioning, to diagnostics. SIMOTION is available for all machines carrying out Motion Control tasks - from simple machines to the high-performance variety. The focus is on a simple and flexible solution to a huge variety of Motion Control tasks. In order to achieve this in the best way possible, a new system approach has been introduced: Motion Control has been combined with two other control functions found in most machines: PLC and technology functions. This approach enables the Motion Control of axes and machine control within the same system. The same applies to technology functions, such as pressure control of a hydraulic axis. A seamless switch can be made from position-controlled positioning mode to pressure control.

Runtime Software Modules These modules provide the various Motion Control and technology functions. The entire system functionality can be adapted to the machine as required by selecting the appropriate modules. Hardware platforms The hardware platforms form the basis of the SIMOTION Motion Control system. The application created by the engineering system and the associated Runtime software modules can be used on various hardware platforms. Thus you can always select the platform which is most suited to your machine, whether as a controller, an industrial PC or an Intelligent Module directly in the drive.

Engineering system For programming, parameterization, ... Graphical or text-based programming Test and diagnostics

Runtime software PLC Positioning Gear Cam Etc.

Hardware platforms

G_PM10_EN_00126


2/257

2


Motion Control System SIMOTION General information

■ Overview The hardware platforms

SIMOTION C – Modularity and flexibilit

Every hardware platform has its benefits when used in certain applications. The various platforms can also be combined very easily, which is a particular advantage in modular machines and plants. This is because the individual hardware platforms always contain the same system characteristics, i. e. functionality and engineering are always identical, irrespective of the platform used.

SIMOTION C230-2 uses the S7-300 mounting technology. It is supplied with four integrated interfaces for analog or stepper drives and several integrated digital inputs and outputs on board. The C230-2 can also be expanded using I/O Modules from the SIMATIC S7 300 range. At other interfaces, the C230-2 has already built in two PROFIBUS interfaces with PROFIdrive and one Industrial Ethernet interface, thus offering great flexibility in communication.

PROFIBUS or PROFINET can be used to connect drives and I/O decentrally to the control. SIMOTION D – Compact and integrated in the drive

SIMOTION P350 WinCC flexible RT

Several panel variants in various screen sizes are available for operating the industrial PC. These panels can either be operated using a keyboard and mouse, or a touch screen. Two PROFIBUS interfaces are used to link the drives and the I/Os with PROFIdrive or via PROFINET with an optional Communication Board.

ET 200S 1 station with 32 DI, 32 DO

Isochronous

SINAMICS S120 3 to 9 positioning axes

With SIMOTION D, the SIMOTION functionality is integrated directly in the Control Unit of the new SINAMICS S120 multi-axis drive system. Therefore, the complete system (containing all control and drive functionalities) is extremely compact and responds very quickly. SIMOTION D is available in three performance versions (D425, D435 and D445), ensuring maximum scalability and flexibility. The field of application ranges from single axes to high-performance multi-axis machines. SIMOTION D is supplied with two integrated PROFIBUS interfaces with PROFIdrive and two integrated Industrial Ethernet interfaces on board.

■ More information Further information regarding technical specifications and ordering data can be found in Catalog PM10 “Motion Control System SIMOTION“ and in the interactive catalog under “Automation Systems / SIMOTION Motion Control System“

2/258

SIMOTION P – Open for other tasks SIMOTION P350 is a PC-based Motion Control system. The operating system is Windows XP Professional, with a realtime expansion for SIMOTION. This enables PC applications to be carried out alongside SIMOTION machine applications at any time. For example, the SIMOTION engineering system, an operator control application, a process data evaluation, a standard PC application, etc.

G_PM10_en_00095

2



Motion Control System SIMOTION Communication Board CBE30

■ Overview

■ Integration The CBE30 Communication Board plugs into the option slot on the SIMOTION D Control Unit.

■ Technical specifications Max. current requirement at 24 V DC)

0.25 A

Permissible ambient temperature • Storage and transport

-40 °C … + 70 °C

• Operation

0 °C to … 55 °C

Dimensions

113 mm × 77 mm

Weight, approx.

100 g

■ Ordering data Communication Board CBE30

The CBE30 Communication Board for SIMOTION D425, D435 and D445 allows the SIMOTION to be connected to a PROFINET IO network. The SIMOTION D then assumes the function of a PROFINET IO Controller and can perform the following: • PROFINET IO Controller functions • 100 Mbit/s full duplex • Supports real-time classes of PROFINET IO: - RT (RealTime) - IRT (Isochronous RealTime) • Connects distributed IOs as PROFINET IO devices • Connects drives as PROFINET IO devices using PROFIdrive compliant with specification V4 • Supports standard Ethernet communication (TCP/IP), e.g. for interfacing SIMOTION SCOUT, HMI or standard TCP, UDP communication, to devices of any other type • Integrated 4-port switch with four RJ45 sockets based on the PROFINET ASIC ERTEC400. The optimum topology (line, star, tree) can therefore be configured without additional external switches.

Order No. 6FC5 312-0FA00-0AA0

■ Accessories The PROFINET cables and connectors listed below are recommended: Description

Order No.

Industrial Ethernet FC RJ45 Plug 145 (1x)

6GK1 901-1BB30-0AA0

Industrial Ethernet FC RJ45 Plug 145 (10x)

6GK1 901-1BB30-0AB0

Industrial Ethernet FC stripping tool

6GK1 901-1GA00

Industrial Ethernet FC Standard Cable GP 2x2

6XV1 840-2AH10

Industrial Ethernet FC Flexible Cable GP 2x2

6XV1 870-2B

Industrial Ethernet FC Trailing Cable GP 2x2

6XV1 870-2D

Industrial Ethernet FC Trailing Cable 2x2

6XV1 840-3AH10

Industrial Ethernet FC Marine Cable 2x2

6XV1 840-4AH10


2/259

2


Motion Control System SIMOTION Communication Board MCI-PN

2

■ Overview

■ Technical specifications Current consumption

900 mA at 5V

Permissible ambient temperature • Storage and transport • Operation

-20 °C … +60 °C +5 °C … +55 °C

Weight, approx.

110 g

Dimensions

107 mm x 167 mm

■ Ordering data MCI PN communication board

Order No. 6AU1 390-0BA00-0AA0

■ Accessories The following PROFINET cables and connectors are recommended: The MCI PN communication board for SIMOTION P350 supports connection to a PROFINET IO network. This means that in terms of PROFINET, SIMOTION P350 is a PROFINET IO controller that offers the following functions: • PROFINET IO controller • 100 Mbit/s full duplex • Support of real time classes of PROFINET IO: - RT (realtime) - RT (isochrone realtime) • Integration of distributed I/O as PROFINET IO devices • Integration of drives as PROFINET IO devices through PROFIdrive according to the V4 specification • Support of standard Ethernet communication (TCP/IP), e.g. for integration of SIMOTION SCOUT, HMI or standard TCP, UDP communication to any other devices. • Integrated 4-port switch with 4 RJ45 sockets based on the PROFINET ASIC, ERTEC400. The optimal topology (line, star, treee or ring) can therefore be constructed without the need for additional external switches.

■ Design The MCI PN communication board is inserted in the spare PCI slot of the SIMOTION P350.

2/260


Description

Order No.

Industrial Ethernet FC RJ45 Plug 145 (1 item)

6GK1 901-1BB30-0AA0

Industrial Ethernet FC RJ45 Plug 145 (10 items)

6GK1 901-1BB30-0AB0

Industrial Ethernet FC RJ45 Plug 180 (1 item)

6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0

Industrial Ethernet FC RJ45 Plug 180 (10 items)

6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0

Industrial Ethernet FC Stripping Tool

6GK1 901-1GA00


6XV1 840-2AH10


6XV1 870-2B


6XV1 870-2D


6XV1 840-3AH10


6XV1 840-4AH10


PROFINET technology components

Enhanced Real-Time Ethernet Controller ERTEC

■ Overview

■ Benefits

2

• All functions on chip for high-performance systems solutions (system on chip) • Space-saving implementation thanks to a high degree of integration • Complete communication processing for cyclic data transmission • Broad field of application thanks to comprehensive interfaces • Openness through compatibility to IEEE 802 • Industry-standard environmental characteristics • Supports IT communication and real-time data communication in parallel and unlimited on one line • PCI, the bus standard of the PC world, is a component of the ERTEC 400. This saves space, time and costs during integration into PC-based system environments and ensures a fast "time to market“. • Integral PHYs with the ERTEC 200 additionally save space and implementation costs

PROFINET IO uses Fast Switched Ethernet as the communications basis with a transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s. The required functions are supported by hardware ASICs of the ERTEC range (Enhanced Real-Time Ethernet Controller), and high-performance values are achieved. Previously required discrete components have been included in the ERTECs as a system-onchip. These high-performance Ethernet controllers with integral real-time switch and 32-bit microprocessor have been specially designed for industrial applications. It is then possible to implement powerful PROFINET connections in the smallest possible space. The ERTEC 200 is available for simple field devices, and the ERTEC 400 for controllers and network components. They feature a rugged design, specific automation functions, and openness for the IT world. • Easy space-saving connection of devices to switched 10/100 Mbit Ethernet • No need for external network components since the switches are integrated into the device • Integral high-performance ARM 946 processor for optimum integration of communications and applications • Specific communication functions for automation technology secure the position of the technology as front runner for timecritical applications through real-time characteristics • The DK-ERTEC development kits and global technical support help towards implementation


2/261




■ Application PROFINET is the system solution for automation engineering that is characterized by openness, scalability and performance. PROFINET also satisfies the requirements of factory automation and motion control applications. This supports integrated system solutions that go much further than specific machine solutions. Thanks to innovative switching technology, the special requirements of automation with regard to line topology, hard real time and unlimited IT openness have been satisfied within a single technology for the first time. The ERTEC ASICs combine real time and IT without making any compromises. Thus, for example, axes can be controlled in isochronous mode whereby 50% of the bandwidth is available solely for IT communication. Based on the transmission procedures of IEEE 802, the ERTEC ASICs offer the PROFINET real-time (RT) and isochronous real-time properties. To achieve this, they provide intelligent combination of the switching mechanisms "Cut Through" and "Store and Forward". Integrated plant and machine solutions are possible that are compatible with the standard. In addition to providing the PROFINET mechanisms, the Industrial Ethernet ASIC ERTECs based on the latest semiconductor technology have all the functions on chip that are required for high-performance system functions in the automation industry. By integrating the powerful ARM 946 processors, the necessary flexibility is offered for creating demanding applications. ERTEC 200 The ASIC ERTEC 200 is the optimum solution for field devices. It is an Ethernet controller with integral 2-port switch and 32-bit microprocessor. So-called PHYs (blocks for the transition from the internal to external world) are required to link the Ethernet controller to the physical structure of the communications network. These are already integrated in the ERTEC 200, and support the AutoNegotiation and Auto-Crossing functions.

Thanks to the integral ARM 946 processor, the ERTEC 200 can be used as a system-on-chip implementation for simple devices. Since the cyclic data transmission for PROFINET IO with realtime and isochronous real-time - which particularly loads the processor - is completely handled by the ERTEC hardware, sufficient processor resources are still available to execute the applications of simple field devices. External processors can be omitted. On-chip I/Os enable direct connection of I/O signals, serial interfaces and timers. ERTEC 400 The ASIC ERTEC 400 is the platform for complex applications. Target systems of the ERTEC 400 are automation equipment such as PLCs, motion controllers, PC-based systems and network components. The ERTEC 400 is an Ethernet controller with integral 4-port switch, 32-bit microprocessor and PCI interface. The integral 4-port switch enables flexible topologies such as star, tree and line without further external network components. The large integral communications memory permits comprehensive quantity frameworks which are particularly required by PLCs and motion controllers. With its integral PCI interface, the ERTEC 400 is suitable for PCbased control systems, since the interface is already on-chip and an external PCI bridge is unnecessary. The integral ARM 946 processor handles all communications tasks, thus saving processor resources in the host processors of the target systems. As with the ERTEC 200, cyclic communication for real-time and isochronous real-time in the ERTEC 400 is also executed completely by the hardware, and the stack execution times are eliminated for time-critical data. The real-time data are available immediately for the application.

SIMATIC S7-400 with CP 443-1 Advanced

SIMATIC Panel

PC with CP 1616 as PN IO-Controller with ERTEC 400

PC with CP 1613 A2

IPC with CP 1616 as PN IO-Controller with ERTEC 400

PROFINET

Non-Siemens device with ERTEC 200

ET 200S

PROFINET Devices

PROFINET communication with ERTEC 200/400

2/262


ET 200S

Microbox with CP 1604 as IO-Device with ERTEC 400

PROFINET Devices

Non-Siemens device with ERTEC 200

G_IK10_XX_30129

2




■ Design

■ Function

External memory

JTAG / Debug ERTEC400

MemoryController

SRAM (8 kByte)

ARMInterruptController

ARM946ES I-Cache (8kByte) D-Cache (4kByte) D-TCM (4kByte)

32 GPIO

Periphery

2x UART

PCI Bridge (32 Bit, 66MHz) Master

LBU / PCI (V 2.2)

Switch (192 K SRAM) Timer

G_IK10_XX_30001

Local Bus Unit (LBU) (16 Bit)

SPI

4 x Ethernet 10/100 MBit (external connection PHY)

Internal design of ERTEC 400

External memory

JTAG / Debug

• Switching; in accordance with industrial requirements, the integral switch additionally enables lines to be configured and there is no need for external switch components. • Real-time; the real-time properties (RT and IRT) allow extremely short cycle times with highly accurate cycle rates. PROFINET with the ERTEC is the quantum leap forward for real-time communication and makes concepts possible that could never be achieved before. • IT; the high processor performance and the on-chip memory form a stable basis for implementing IT functions such as a Web server and e-mail. • PCI; PCI, the bus standard of the PC world, is a component of the ERTEC 400. This saves space, time and costs during integration into PC-based system environments and ensures a fast "time to market“. • Network management/diagnostics; comprehensive diagnostic characteristics such as RMON statistical counter permit effective system diagnostics. DK-ERTEC PN IO development kit Development kits make it easy for beginners. They contain the necessary hardware, drivers, configuration software, demonstration programs and documentation. Technical support Industrial Ethernet ASICs from Siemens provide the customer with worldwide support and implementation support. The two Competence Centers in Europe and the U.S.A. provide low-cost telephone support for development and commissioning engineers. Development orders for software and hardware as well as on-site support are included in the comprehensive range of services offered.

ERTEC 400

ARMInterrupt Controller

ARM 946 I-Cache (8kByte) D-Cache (4kByte) D-TCM (4kByte)

45 GPIO

Local Bus Unit (LBU) (16 Bit)

LBU 16 Bit

1x UART

SPI

Switch (64 K SRAM)

PCI Bridge (32 Bit, 33 MHz)/ 66 MHz) Master

Timer

2 x Ethernet 10/100 MBit

G_IK10_XX_30044

DMAController

I/O devices

MemoryController

Internal design of ERTEC 200


2/263

2




2

■ Technical specifications ERTEC 400

ERTEC 200

Transmission rate

10/100 Mbit/s

10/100 Mbit/s

Interfaces • Ethernet / PHY interface

4 x PHY interface • Half/full duplex • Broadcast filter • IEEE 802.1 p Traffic Management • IEEE 802.1 q VLAN Tagging and Identification • IEEE 1588 Supports copper and fiber-optic conductors; Autosensing; Autocrossover

2 x Ethernet interface (PHY integrated) or alternatively 2 x PHY interface (for connecting optical PHYs) • Half/full duplex • Broadcast filter • IEEE 802.1 p Traffic Management • IEEE 802.1 q VLAN Tagging and Identification • IEEE 1588 Supports copper and fiber-optic conductors (PHY for Cu integrated); Autosensing; Autocrossover

• Local-Bus-Unit (LBU)

Local bus master interface for an external host with access to internal areas of the ERTEC; 16-bit data bit width

Local bus master interface for an external host with access to internal areas of the ERTEC; 16-bit data bit width

• PCI interface

32 bit, 33/66 MHz • Host functionality • Memory protection unit (MPU) • 2 PCI interrupt outputs INTA_N and SERR_N • Power Management V1.1 • 3.3 Volt (5 V tolerant) • PCI master/target interface • PCI core conformant to PCI spec. 2.2

–

128 MB/16 bit or 256 MB/32 bit 4 x 16 MB for asynchronous blocks (SRAM, Flash, I/O 8/16/32 bit) yes

64 MByte/16 Bit or 128 MByte/32 Bit 4 x 16 MB for asynchronous blocks (SRAM, Flash, I/O 8/16/32 bit) yes

32 parameterizable I/O (GPIO); multifunction outputs

45 parameterizable I/O (GPIO); multifunction outputs

Integral 4-port Fast Ethernet/real-time Ethernet switch; 10/100 Mbit Ethernet full-duplex 192 KB

Integral 2-port Fast Ethernet/real-time Ethernet switch; 10/100 Mbit Ethernet full-duplex 64 KB

yes

yes

• Integral ARM946 processor - adjustable operating frequency - data cache - instruction cache - D-TCM - Memory Protection Unit (MPU) - trace functionality - interrupt controller

32-bit ARM system 50/100/150 MHz 4 KB 8 KB 4 KB yes Debugging capability through embedded ICE (JTAG) For 16xIRQ/ 8xFIQ

32-bit ARM system 50/100/150 MHz 4 KB 8 KB 4 KB yes Debugging capability through embedded ICE (JTAG) For 16xIRQ/ 8xFIQ

• Processor I/O - SPI master interface - timer 32-bit counting downwards - F-Timer 32-bit counting downwards - watchdog functions - external interrupt inputs

2 UART similar to the UART 16C550 standard yes 2 yes

1 UART similar to the UART 16C550 standard yes 3 yes

2 yes

3 yes

• Internal bus structure

32 bit (multi-layer AHB) with 50 MHz clock frequency; multi-layer architecture with parallel access structure of several multimasters to multislave

32 bit (multi-layer AHB) with 50 MHz clock frequency; multi-layer architecture with parallel access structure of several multimasters to multislave

- in association with the corresponding PHY types:

• External memory interface (EMIF) - SDRAM controller - SRAM controller - chip select support • IO interfaces Components • Real-time Ethernet switch - communications RAM (SRAM on chip for message buffering) - intelligent switching and PROFINET IRT prioritizing/timing

2/264


– – – – – – –





2

ERTEC 400

ERTEC 200

8 KB ARM 946 For ARM946, IRT and PCI

– – –

• Clock generation

Internal through PLL for ARM 946ES, AHB, APB and IRT

Internal through PLL for ARM 946ES, AHB, APB and IRT

• Boot ROM

With Opcode for software download from various sources

With Opcode for software download from various sources

• Debugging functions

Boundary scan

Boundary scan

• Core (VDD core)

1.5 V +/- 10%

1.5 V +/- 10%

• I/Os (VDD IO)

3.3 V +/- 10%

3.3 V +/- 10%

• at 1.5 V

typ. 270 mA

typ. 535 mA

• at 3.3 V

typ. 150 mA

typ. 175 mA

• PDD Core

typ. 0.4 W

typ. 0.8 W

• PDD IO

typ. 0.5 W

typ. 0.57 W

Components (continued) • SRAM-integrated main memory on AHB - size - program/data memory - multiport RAM

Voltage supply

Current consumption

Power loss


-40 °C … +85 °C

-40 °C … +85 °C


-40 °C … +85 °C

-40 °C … +85 °C


max. 95% at +25 °C

max. 95% at +25 °C

Design • Enclosure

Plastic FBGA 304 pin

Plastic FBGA 304 pin

• Pinning ball pitch

0.8 mm

0.8 mm

• Soldering notes

Versions available for leaded and unleaded processing

Versions available for leaded and unleaded processing

Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm - ERTEC

19 x 1 x 19

19 x 1 x 19

Supported communications protocols • General Ethernet protocols

Corresponding to the respective software implementa- Corresponding to the respective software implementation which uses the ERTEC as Ethernet controller tion which uses the ERTEC as Ethernet controller

• PROFINET in combination with a PROFINET software stack

Real-time communication (RT); isochronous real-time communication (IRT)

Real-time communication (RT); isochronous real-time communication (IRT)

Note: If you have any technical questions, please contact the PROFINET Competence Centers:

Germany and Europe

America

Siemens AG ComDeC Postfach 2355 D-90713 Fürth Germany Tel.: +49(0)/911/750 - 2080 Fax: +49(0)/911/750 - 2100 E-mail: [email protected]

PROFI Interface Center One Internet Plaza Johnson City, TN, 37604 U.S.A. Tel.: (423) - 262 - 2576 Fax: (423) - 262 - 2103 E-mail: [email protected]


2/265




2

■ Ordering data

Order No.

Order No.

ERTEC 400

ERTEC 200

ASIC ERTEC 400 for connecting to Switched Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/sec, Ethernet Controller with integral 4-port switch, ARM 946 processor and PCI interface (V 2.2), data preprocessing for real time and isochronous real-time with PROFINET IO

ASIC ERTEC 200 for connecting to Switched Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/sec, Ethernet controller with integral 2-port switch, ARM 946 processor and PCI interface (V 2.2), data preprocessing for real-time and isochronous real-time (available soon) with PROFINET IO

• Leaded

• Leaded

- 70 units (single tray)

6GK1 182-0BA00-0AA1


6GK1 182-0BA00-0AA1

- 350 units (drypack, 5 trays)

6GK1 182-0BA00-0AA2


6GK1 182-0BA00-0AA2

• Not leaded

• Not leaded


6GK1 182-0BB00-0AA1


6GK1 182-0BB00-0AA1


6GK1 182-0BB00-0AA2


6GK1 182-0BB00-0AA2

DK-ERTEC 400 PN IO development kit Development package V1.0 for ASIC ERTEC 400 for real-time and isochronous real-time (available soon), comprising: CP 1616, ERTEC 400 evaluation board, ASICs ERTEC 400 (10 units), IE FC RJ45 Plug 180, IE FC Standard Cable 2 x 2, IE FC Stripping Tool, DK-16xx PN IO documentation and example software

2/266


6GK1 953-0CA00

DK-ERTEC 200 PN IO development kit Development package V2.0 for ASIC ERTEC 200 for real-time and isochronous real-time comprising: CP 1616, ERTEC 200 evaluation board, ASICs ERTEC 200 (10 units), IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 (2 units), IE FC Standard Cable 2 x 2 (5 m), IE FC Stripping Tool, DK-16xx PN IO V 2.0, Wind River evaluation software, documentation and example software

6GK1 953-0BA00


PROFINET technology components Development kits for ERTEC

■ Overview

■ Application Using the DK-ERTEC 200 PN IO and DK-ERTEC 400 PN IO development kits, PROFINET hardware and software applications can be developed and tested using the ASIC ERTEC 200 or ERTEC 400. The comprehensive, perfectly interacting hardware and software components considerably reduce the development costs for a PROFINET IO device (as PROFINET IO-Device). The development kit offers a fully functional development environment which development engineers can build on with their special requirements for hardware and software. The documentation is supplied on CD in English and German.

• The DK-ERTEC 200 PN IO and DK-ERTEC 400 PN IO Development Kits are available for development of PROFINET and Industrial Ethernet devices with integral real-time switch • Possible applications: - development of IO field devices (as PROFINET IO-Device) with a PROFINET interface - development of drives with PROFINET - development of any other device with an Industrial Ethernet interface

■ Benefits

• Devices can easily be developed for Industrial Ethernet with PROFINET • Optimized components are included for developing a PROFINET device • Easy adaptation to the characteristics of the device to be developed using the supplied software examples • Easy creation of a specific GSDML file using the supplied example • EB 200 or EB 400 development board in the PC or as standalone outside a PC can be operated as an IO-Device • Shortening of development time through complete development environment including executable example applications

The development kit makes the PROFINET technology accessible to device vendors and users. The two PROFINET Competence Centers in Europe and the U.S.A. provide low-cost telephone support for development and commissioning engineers. Development orders for software and hardware as well as on-site support are included in the comprehensive range of services offered by the Competence Centers . The PROFINET real-time (RT) and isochronous real-time (IRT) properties are supported from version V2.0 onwards. Operating system environment The current version of the development kit can only be used together with the VxWorks 5.5.1 operating system from the company Wind River. An installation CD is provided with the development kit with which the user can activate a limited-period evaluation license at Wind River. It is subsequently possible to purchase a full license version from Wind River at special conditions for ERTEC 200 and ERTEC 400 users. Note: The full version of the Wind River license also includes the runtime license fees for ERTEC-based PROFINET devices. No additional runtime license fees are then incurred for VxWorks. The Wind River licenses must be ordered by users directly from Wind River. All license details concerning Wind River products are exclusively covered by the specifications provided by Wind River to the user (see http://www.windriver.com/ alliances/eval-cd/details.html?pgmid=ERTEC)

Production license for PROFINET IO-Devices The development kit includes a development license which authorizes users to develop and test PROFINET IO devices on the basis of ERTEC 200 or ERTEC 400. For production of series devices, a production license for PROFINET IO-Devices must be additionally purchased for each production line. This production license must be ordered separately (6ES7 195-3BC10-0YA0).


2/267

2



■ Design Hardware included • CP 1616; PC module for operation as PROFINET IO-Controller as test partner • ERTEC 200 or ERTEC 400 Evaluation Board; evaluation board with the ASIC ERTEC 400 as a test environment for customized applications • ERTEC 200 or ERTEC 400 ASICs; for developing customized hardware, 10 ERTEC 400 ASICs are already included in the package. • FastConnect; for easy assembly of Industrial Ethernet cables, FastConnect connectors, cables and the stripping tool are included

PC* with CP 1616 as PN IO-Controller LinuxSUSE V9.3*

Software included • PROFINET IO-Controller example software; test and simulation software for Windows XP Professional for use on PCs • PROFINET IO device sample software; sample program as PROFINET IO device based on the ERTEC 200 or ERTEC 400 • DK-16xx PN IO; Development Kit for CP 1616 for operation with SUSE Linux 9.3 or for transfer to other PC-based operating systems • Wind River software Fully functional version of Tornado/Vx Works and WindView but with time limit

Plug-type power supply unit for EB 400 stand-alone mode

Tornado shell/FTP server connected to EB 400 over Ethernet PC (COM1) cable* connected to RS232

PN IO-Controller connected to EB 400 over Industrial Ethernet

Further PROFINET IO-Devices*

CPU 317-2 PN/DP as PN IO-Controller*

of EB 400

ERTEC 400 development board EB 400 as PN IO-Device Switch* e.g. SCALANCE X204IRT for connection of further PROFINET IO-Devices The EB 400 development board can be used as a PN IO-Device outside a PC or in a PC. * Parts are not contained in the DK = optional

Design of a development environment with DK-ERTEC 400 PN IO

2/268


PC* with ERTEC 400 and Wind River development environment (evaluation) (Windows XP Pro*)

G_IK10_XX_30134

2




2 Plug-type power supply unit for EB 200 stand-alone mode

Tornado shell/FTP server connected to EB 200 over Ethernet PC (COM1) cable* connected to RS232

PN IO-Controller connected to EB 200 over Industrial Ethernet

of EB 200

PC* with ERTEC 200 and Wind River development environment (evaluation) (Windows XP Pro*)

Further PROFINET IO-Devices*

The EB 200 development board can be used as a PN IO-Device outside a PC or in a PC. * Parts are not contained in the DK

G_IK10_XX_ 30153

ERTEC 200 development board EB 200 as PN IO-Device

PC* with CP 1616 as PN IO-Controller LinuxSUSE V9.3*

= optional

Design of a development environment with DK-ERTEC 200 PN IO

Information on ERTEC 400 and DK-ERTEC 400 PN IO development kit Catalog and Internet Ordering DK-ERTEC 400 PN IO (6GK1 953-0CA00)

Evaluation: working and testing with DK-ERTEC 400 PN IO

Design of a development environment including fully-licensed VxWorks development system development of PROFINET IO-Devices based on ERTEC

Registration

Ordering

Wind River: registration of the evaluation license of the Wind River development system

Wind River development system full license for ERTEC/PROFINET applications

ERTEC and VxWorks-based PROFINET IO-Device software

Production of the PROFINET IO-Devices of a product line based on ERTEC

Ordering of license (6ES7195-3BC10-0YA0)

Siemens PROFINET IO-Device runtime stack production license G_IK10_XX_30135

Application of Development Kit and assignment of required software licenses


2/269



2

■ Technical specifications If you have any technical questions, please contact the PROFINET Competence Centers: Germany and Europe Siemens AG ComDeC Postfach 2355 D-90713 Fürth Germany Tel.: +49(0)/911/750 - 2080 Fax: +49(0)/911/750 - 2100 Email: [email protected] America PROFI Interface Center One Internet Plaza Johnson City, TN, 37604 U.S.A. Tel.: (423) - 262 - 2576 Fax: (423) - 262 - 2103 Email: [email protected]

■ Ordering data

Order No.


6GK1 953-0BA00


6GK1 953-0CA00

PROFINET IO production license for one product line Production license for a product range based on ERTEC 200 or ERTEC 400

6ES7 195-3BC10-0YA0

PROFINET IO-Controller

2/270


CP 1616 communications processor PCI card (32-bit; 3.3/5 V) with ASIC ERTEC 400 for connecting to PROFINET IO with 4-port realtime switch (RJ45), for use with DK-16xx PN IO development kit; NCM PC

6GK1 161-6AA00

SOFTNET PN IO Edition 2005 Software for PROFINET I/O controller with OPC server and NCM PC single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server; Windows 2000 Professional, Server, German/English

6GK1 704-1HW63-3AA0

CPU 317-2 PN/DP Main memory 512 KB, power supply 24 V DC, combined MPI/PROFIBUS DP master/slave interface, Ethernet/PROFINET interface, MMC required

6ES7 317-2EJ10-0AB0



■ Ordering data

Order No.

2

Order No.

Network components

ASIC Enhanced Real-Time Ethernet Controller

IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 RJ45 plug connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 180° cable outlet; for network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface • 1 pack = 1 piece

6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0

ERTEC 200 ASIC ERTEC 200 for connecting to Switched Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/sec, Ethernet controller with integral 2-port switch, ARM 946 processor and PCI interface (V 2.2), data preprocessing for real-time and isochronous real-time (available soon) with PROFINET IO


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0

• Leaded


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0


6GK1 182-0BA00-0AA1

IE FC Standard Cable 2 x 2 (Type B) 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug; PROFINET-compatible; with UL approval; sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

6XV1 840-2AH10


6GK1 182-0BB00-0AA1

IE FC stripping tool

6GK1 901-1GA00

• Not leaded

Preadjusted stripping tool for fast stripping of Industrial Ethernet FC cables Industrial Ethernet switches SCALANCE X-200IRT Managed Industrial Ethernet switches; real-time (RT) and isochronous real-time IRT available soon, LED diagnostics, error signaling contact with SET button, redundant power supply


6GK1 182-0BA00-0AA2


6GK1 182-0BB00-0AA2

ERTEC 400 ASIC ERTEC 400 for connecting to Switched Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/sec, Ethernet Controller with integral 4-port switch, ARM 946 processor RISC and PCI interface (V2.2), data preprocessing for real-time and isochronous real-time available soon with PROFINET IO • Leaded

• SCALANCE X-204IRT; 4 x 10 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports

6GK5 204-0BA00-2BA3

• SCALANCE X-202-2IRT; 2 x 10 10/100 Mbit/s RJ45 ports; 2 x 100 Mbit/s Multimode BFOC

6GK5 202-2BB00-2BA3


6GK1 184-0BA00-0AA1


6GK1 184-0BB00-0AA1

• Not leaded - 70 units (single tray)

6GK1 184-0BA00-0AA2


6GK1 184-0BB00-0AA2

■ More information Further information, technical specifications and manuals on ERTEC 200, ERTEC 400, DK-ERTEC 200 PN IO and DK-ERTEC 400 PN IO are available on the Internet. Additional information can be found in the Internet under: www.siemens.com/ertec-microsite www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info www.siemens.com/ertec www.ad.siemens.com/csi/pnio-doc The Wind River development environment can be obtained from: Wind River GmbH Osterfeldstrasse 84 D-85737 Ismaning Tel.: +49 89 96 24 45 0 Fax: +49 89 96 24 45 999 [email protected] Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.windriver.com/alliances/eval-cd/ details.html?pgmid=ERTEC


2/271


PROFINET technology components Development packages

2

■ Overview

■ Ordering data Development package for PROFINET IO

Order No. 6ES7 195-3BC00-0YA0

For Ethernet processor Accessories

In time for market entry of PROFINET IO, a development package is available that allows third-party manufacturers to develop and offer their own PROFINET IO devices.

■ Technical specifications Please address any technical questions about the development kit to: In Germany and Europe Siemens AG ComDeC Postfach 2355 90713 Fürth Germany Tel.: +49(0)/911/750 - 2080 Fax: +49(0)/911/750 - 2100 E-mail: [email protected] U.S.A. PROFI Interface Center One Internet Plaza Johnson City, TN, 37604 U.S.A. Tel.: (001)(423) - 262 - 2576 Fax: (001)(423) - 262 - 2103 E-mail: [email protected]

CPU 317-2 PN/DP 512 KB main memory, 24 V DC supply voltage, combined MPI/PROFIBUS DP master/slave interface, Ethernet/PROFInet interface; MMC required

6ES7 317-2EJ10-0AB0

Micro Memory Card e.g. 512 KB (other MMC optional)

6ES7 953-8LJ11-0AA0

Programming software STEP 7, V5.3, SP1 Floating license, STL, LAD. FBD programming for S7-300/400/C7 and WinAC

6ES7 810-4CC07-0YA5

SCALANCE X 108 switch (other switches optional)

6GK5 108-0BA00-2AA3

SIMATIC NET TP cable RJ45/RJ45, length 2 m At least 3 items will be required; other cable types/lengths optional

6XV1 850-2GH20

PS 307 power supply 120 V AC, 24 V DC, 2 A (optional)

6ES7 307-1BA00-0AA0

■ More information The development environment can be obtained from NetSilicon: In Germany and Europe Digi GmbH (NetSilicon) Joseph-von-Fraunhofer-Str. 23 44227 Dortmund Germany Tel: +49 231 9747 550 Fax: +49 231 9747 650 E-mail: [email protected] http://www.netsilicon.com/ USA NetSilicon, Inc. 411 Waverley Oaks Road #304 Waltham, MA 02452 U.S.A. Tel: ++1 800 243-2333, 781 647-1234 Fax: ++1 781 893-1338 E-mail: [email protected] http://www.netsilicon.com/ Asia NetSilicon Japan, Inc. NES Bldg. South 8F 22-14 Sakuragaoka-cho Shibuya-ku, Tokyo, 150-0031 Japan Tel: +81-3-5428-0261 Fax: +81-3-5428-0262 E-mail: [email protected] http://www.netsilicon.co.jp/

2/272



Image Processing System SIMATIC VS120

■ Overview

■ Application The intelligent vision sensor can be used for the following applications: • Determining the position for Pick & Place applications • Checking the presence and position of objects in production • Checking the orientation of objects in infeed systems Examples of possible inspection tasks and inspection objects: • Checking the presence and position of symbols (warnings) and logos (corporate logos) on print media and packaging • Checking the presence and position of objects in production for the quality assurance of assembly steps • Checking the orientation of assembly items in infeed systems

■ Design • Vision sensor for object finding and object size testing in reflected light • VS120 finds and checks different objects and / or patterns, e.g.: - Printed symbols (product markings on labels, packaging, etc. ) - Injection-molded parts, - Ceramic elements, - ... • Can be used in principle for the following applications: - Position detection for Pick&Place applications, - Checking the presence and position of objects in production, - Checking the orientation of objects in infeed systems • Easy configuration through presentation of the good object to be recognized. "Training" is done automatically by activating the training function of the unit. • Parameter definition is done using the web-based operating interface and can be run on various platforms with the following requirements: - Browser (IE5.5 or higher), - JAVA-VM (MS, SUN). • The web-based operator interface is also used for controlling the device from an HMI device. The same prerequisites apply here concerning the Browser and JAVA VM. • Remote maintenance concept using web-based operator interface. • Remote controlled with integrated digital inputs, PROFIBUS or PROFINET IO. • Can be supplied as a complete package in several variations for different object sizes

The SIMATIC VS 120 vision sensor offers the following image field sizes: • 70 mm x 50 mm fixed-focus sensor head • 40 mm x 30 mm fixed-focus sensor head • Variable field of view with C/CS-Mount sensor head The following components are required for use of the fixed-focus version of the SIMATIC VS120 vision sensor and are included in the scope of delivery: • Sensor head • Front lighting in the form of a ring light matched to the application and sensor head • Evaluation unit • Connecting cables • CD with configuration software and assembly/operating instructions To start up the fixed focus version you also need the following items (not included in the scope of delivery): • Ethernet cable (see "Accessories") for connecting the evaluator to any web client. The web client, e.g. a PC with web browser installed, is used to adjust the sensor head and the lighting. The following components are required for use of the C/CS mount version of the SIMATIC VS120 vision sensor and are included in the scope of delivery: • Sensor head (without lens!) • Evaluation unit • Connecting cables (no connecting cable for lighting!) • CD with configuration software and assembly/operating instructions To start up the C/CS-Mount version you also need the following items (not included in the scope of delivery): • C/CS-Mount lens with the required imaging properties • Suitable light source and suitable connecting cable (see accessories) • Ethernet cable (see "Accessories") for connecting the evaluator to any web client. The web client, e.g. a PC with web browser installed, is used to adjust the sensor head and the lighting.


2/273

2



2

■ Design (continued) Sensor head The sensor head is equipped with: • Extruded aluminium housing to degree of protection IP65 (fixed-focus version) • CCD chip (640 x 480 quadratic pixels) • Lens, permanently installed and non-adjustable (fixed focus version) • Interface for digital transmission of image data to the processing unit A sensor head for C/CS-Mount lenses is additionally available. Evaluation unit The processing unit has: • Plastic housing, designed for cabinetless construction (IP40) • Connections for - supply voltage 24 V DC - lighting - sensor head - digital inputs and outputs - ethernet interface (DHCP-Client, DHCP-Server, fixed IP address) - PROFIBUS DP • 4-line text display for operator prompting • 6 keys for operating the unit • User guidance with web-based operator interface (HTML, JAVA VM) • Access protection by means of password. The following communication services are included: • PROFINET IO (slave) • PROFIBUS DP V0 (slave), • TCP/IP native The analysis is carried out by a powerful digital signal processor. Front lighting • Designed as ring light pushed onto sensor head • Can be dismounted, and secured with different orientation on the machine • Housing with degree of protection IP65 • Equipped with red LEDs • Operation in flash mode • Power control for the flash integrated in the light

■ Function • Training the object test parameters using one or more good objects • Testing an object and/or pattern with the features taken from the training • Testing can be performed on stationary and moving objects • Checking for a match with the reference provides a good/poor indication after comparison with set-value criteria • Test results output to three control outputs: - OK: trained object and/or pattern found based on features; degree of match greater than set value - N_OK: trained object and/or pattern NOT found based on features; degree of match NOT greater than set value • Position information output via PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET IO, Ethernet or with converter to RS 232 interface • Integrated DI/O enables "stand-alone" operation without additional controller. • Remote control via PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET IO, DI/O or Ethernet • Remote maintenance via web-based operator interface Intranet or Internet: - monitoring (live image in read mode) - diagnostics (fault image, log information, ...) - system administration (software update, ...) - error analysis for troubleshooting for faulty readings • Actuation of ring lighting Mode of operation The following steps are required for using the SIMATIC VS120: • Mount the vision sensor and lighting. • Manual alignment of the camera, lighting check: This is handled with the web-server integrated in the unit and the web-based operator interface contained within. The operator interface displays the camera image. In the setup phase, the sensor head can be aligned with reference to the live image in the user interface. The user interface executes on any PC with Microsoft Internet Explorer and JAVA VM installation. If the sensor head adjustment is complete, the vision sensor automatically takes over the following procedures: - optimization of lighting control. - "Training" the image processing parameters by applying a reference object - the result of the training is stored under one of the 64 data records • Starting the evaluation operation requires loading a trained object record and changing into the "RUN" operating mode. The VS120 starts the evaluation after triggering. • Depending on the trained set values and the actual values of the evaluation, one of the digital control outputs OK (good result) or N_OK (poor result) is set. The position information is output via the PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET IO or Ethernet interface. Programming SIMATIC VS120 is not programmed and parameters are not defined as on standard image processing systems. It is trained for its special task, finding and testing a special object. The SIMATIC VS120 is shown a good object and the device is "trained" to this object. The training procedure can be performed while a conveyor system is running. Up to 64 different data records can be stored in the device and can be called up at any time by the operator or can also be called up through an external controller.

2/274




■ Technical specifications Vision Sensor SIMATIC VS120 Sensor head Image capture

CCD chip ¼", 640 x 480 square pixels; full frame shutter with automatic exposure time

Image data transfer

Triggered frame transfer

Available versions

• Fixed lens system for two different field of view sizes and mounting positions • One C/CS-mount version without lens. Size of field of view: 70 mm x 50 mm for object sizes up to approx.: 60 mm x 40 mm Operating distance: 120 mm Size of field of view: 40 mm x 30 mm for object sizes up to approx.: 34 mm x 24 mm Operating distance: 85 mm Lens can be selected by the user; hence freely selectable field of view size and object size Operating distance: dependent on the lens

• Large field of view

• Small field of view

• Variable field of view

2

Vision Sensor SIMATIC VS120

Enclosure

Aluminum profile casing, anodized black

Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm

42 x 42 x 100


IP65 according to DIN EN 60529 / VDE 0470-1

Ambient temperature

0 to 50 °C

Mechanical strength • Vibrations • Shock

1 g (60 to 500 Hz) 70 g (6 ms, 3 shocks)

Lighting Illuminant

LED, wavelength 630 nm (red), designed as a flash of 20 μs to 10 ms, diffuse

Enclosure

Ring lamp with multiple fixing possibilities; plastic with plastic diffusing panel


102 x 102 x 26.5



Ambient temperature

0 to 50 °C

Evaluation unit Operator controls

4-line text display and 6 operator buttons

Training

Fully-automatic training procedure

Number of types saved

64 different data records, can be selected via control button or digital inputs or PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO, network-fail-safe storage

Triggering inspection

External (via digital input, PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO)

Permissible object rate, max.

20 objects/s

Infeed direction of the objects • For external triggering • Setup software

As required Software for displaying the sensor image when mounting and adjusting the sensor head and lighting. The software is provided directly by the integrated web server and can be executed on every JAVA-capable browser (preferably IE6.0).

Enclosure

Plastic, all cables can be plugged in, suitable for installation without cabinet


170 x 140 x 76



Ambient temperature

0 to 50 °C


1 g (60 to 500 Hz) 70 g (6 ms, 3 shocks)

Interfaces on evaluation unit • Digital inputs for 24 V DC

8; of which one interrupt-capable trigger input for standard binary sensors, 7 further PLC-capable control inputs 6; • Digital outputs for 24 V DC of which 3 quality outputs 0.5 A are for the direct activation of pneumatic valves (15-pin Sub-D socket for inputs/outputs) • Integrated PROFIBUS DP interDP (9 pin D-sub socket) to control face the testing and real-time transmission of test results • Integrated PROFINET IO interface RJ45 (socket) for operating software, controlling the testing and real-time transmission of test results • Integrated Ethernet interface RJ45 (socket) for operating software, controlling the testing and real-time transmission of test results • Lighting control 4-pin circular connector (female) for power supply and for triggering the flash • Sensor head interface Digital interface (26 pin Sub-D socket) for connecting the VS120 sensor head

Power supply • Rated value • Permitted range Current consumption, max.

24 V DC 20 V to 30 V DC 4 A, of which up to 1.5 A for supplying the pneumatic valves that can be connected


2/275



2

■ Ordering data

Order No.

SIMATIC VS120 vision sensor Complete package for object testing; consisting of sensor head, LED front lighting, evaluation unit and the following cables: • Cable between evaluation unit and sensor head, for lengths see below • Cable between lighting and processing unit (except for vision sensor with variable field of view), for length see below • Cable for power supply, length 10 m • Cable for connecting digital I/O devices, length 10 m Incl. documentation package for SIMATIC VS120 • Field of view 70 mm x 50 mm - with cable length 2.5 m

6GF1 120-1AA

- with cable length 10 m

6GF1 120-1AA01

• Field of view 40 mm x 30 mm - with cable length 2.5 m

6GF1 120-2AA


6GF1 120-2AA01

• Variable field of view, prepared for IP65 protective housing - with cable length 2.5 m

6GF1 120-3AB


6GF 1 120-3AB01

2/276



Image Processing System SIMATIC VS130-2

■ Overview

• Can be supplied as a complete package in several variations for different object sizes • The product is available in 6 languages (operator interface, manual and online help are available in German, English, French, Spanish, Italian and Chinese).

■ Application The intelligent vision sensor VS130-2 can be used for the following applications: • Coded information can be read out. • The coded information is compared with a defined character sequence. • Measurement of code quality. Barcodes

• The SIMATIC VS130-2 vision sensor has been developed especially for reading data matrix codes (DMC) ECC200 in an industrial environment. More 2D codes and 1D codes are also available making the vision sensor into a complete code reader: • 1D codes (barcodes): - code 39, - code 128, - interleave 2/5, - EAN13. • 2D codes: - data matrix code (DMC) according to ECC200, - QR (alphanumeric characters; without subversions: truncated, macro, micro), - PDF417 (without subversions: Macro, micro), • SIMATIC VS130-2 reads codes on different construction elements and surfaces, e.g. (incomplete listing): - paper or plastic labels, - plastic parts, - circuit boards, - metallic objects. • SIMATIC VS130-2 reads codes of different types of markings, e.g. (incomplete list): - printed, - stamped, - lasered, - drilled. • No parameter definition for adapting to the various support materials and types of marking is required by the user. "Training" is performed automatically by presenting a readable code pattern. Programming and parameterization are not required. • Can be used in principle for the following applications: - coded information can be read out, - the coded information is compared with a defined character sequence, - quality assessment of the marking process (exclusively DMC). • Parameters are set using the web-based operator interface which runs on various platforms with the following requirements: Browser (IE5.5 and higher), JAVA-VM (MS, SUN). • The web-based operator interface is also used for controlling the device from an HMI device. In this case, the requirements mentioned above also apply with regard to the browser and JAVA VM • Remote maintenance concept using web-based operator interface. • Remote controlled with integrated digital inputs, PROFIBUS or PROFINET IO.

The SIMATIC VS130-2 vision sensor reads the barcodes (Code 39, Code 128, Interleave 2/5, EAN13) in different sizes: • Fixed focus sensor head (640 x 480): Up to 60 mm code width, • C/CS sensor head (640 x 480 or 1024 x 768): Code width depends on the selected lens. The main condition for reading is that the smallest code structure element (the thinnest line) has to be at least 3 pixels wide to ensure good readability. Data matrix code The SIMATIC VS130-2 vision sensor can decode data matrix codes of the following matrices in various sizes: • Square: 10 x 10 dots up to 72 x 72 dots • Rectangular: 8 x 18 dots up to 16 x 48 dots The parameters for dot size and reading distance are defined by the optics selected and can vary over a wide range: • Readable dot size 0.1 mm to >3 mm. • Reading distance 80 mm to 3000 mm. PDF417 The SIMATIC VS130-2 vision sensor can decode PDF417 in various sizes: • Fixed focus / C/CS sensor head (640 x 480): Up to 50 lines of code, up to 7 columns of code • C/CS sensor head (1024 x 768): Up to 80 lines of code, up to 15 columns of code. QR The SIMATIC VS130-2 vision sensor can decode QR in various sizes: • Fixed focus / C/CS sensor head (640 x 480): Up to 89 x 89 dots • C/CS sensor head (1024 x 768): Up to 145 x 145 dots. Common properties Code readability is basically not connected to the type of marking or support material, as long as the marked structure and the background are different optically. Possible marking systems include e.g.: • Laser inscription systems • Inkjet printers Examples of possible surfaces and materials e.g.: • Different types of PCB. • Plastic parts of various colors. • Labels of various colors. • Electronic components. • Metallic objects, etc.


2/277

2



2

■ Design The following components are required for use of the SIMATIC VS130-2 vision sensor and are included in the scope of delivery of a fixed-focus complete package (working distance approximately 100 mm): • Fixed-focus sensor head (3 display field sizes available for selection). • Front lighting in the form of a ring light matched to the application and sensor head. • Evaluation unit. • Cables. • CD with mounting/operating instructions

Sensor head

For working distances between 80 mm and 3000 mm, "C/CS-Mount complete packages" are available: • C/CS-Mount sensor head (standard resolution 640 x 480 [pixels], high-resolution 1024 x 768 [pixels]) • Evaluation unit. • Cables. • CD with mounting/operating instructions

The fixed-focus sensor head offers IP65 degree of protection. Even when C/CS-Mount lenses are used, IP65 degree of protection can be achieved by use of the optional protective housing.

The core of this package is a C/CS-Mount sensor head whose imaging behavior is determined with a suitable C/CS-Mount lens. The lens is not included in the package and can be selected under "Accessories". The lighting (incl. cables) must be selected in accordance with the working distance and are not included in the "C/CS-Mount complete packages". The following is additionally required for commissioning (not included in scope of delivery): • Ethernet cable (see "Accessories") for connecting the evaluator to any web client. The web client, e.g. a PC with web browser installed, is used to adjust the sensor head and the lighting.

The sensor head is equipped with: • Extruded aluminium housing with IP65 degree of protection • CCD chip (640 x 480 square pixels, 1024 x 768 square pixels). • Lens, permanently installed (possible field of view sizes: 70 x 50 mm, 40 x 30 mm, 20 x 15 mm for 640 x 480 pixels in each case) or prepared for C/CS-Mount lens (field of view size can be freely selected for 640 x 480 pixels or 1024 x 768 pixels) • Interface for digital transmission of image data to the evaluation unit.

Evaluation unit The evaluation unit has: • Plastic housing designed for cabinet-free mounting (IP40). • Connections for: - supply voltage 24 V DC. - lighting - sensor head - digital inputs and outputs - PROFIBUS DP. - Ethernet (DHCP client, DHCP server, fixed IP address). • Operator prompting on the device (4-line text display, 6 keys). • Operator prompting through web-based user interface (HTML, JAVA VM). • Access protection by means of password. The following communication services are included: • PROFINET IO (slave) • PROFIBUS DP V0 (slave), • TCP/IP native. Frontlighting • Designed as ring light, pushed onto sensor head or lens housing • Can be dismounted, and secured with different orientation on the machine • Housing with degree of protection IP65 • Equipped with various LEDs for different applications: - not focussed, for small reading distances (0.08 m to 0.5 m) - focussed, for large reading distances (0.5 m to 3 m). - infrared LED, for daylight-independent operation - red LED for high light intensity - operation in flash mode - power control for the flash integrated in the light

2/278




■ Function The following functions are available: • "Training" the vision sensor with reference to a code (DMC) pattern. • Coded information can be read out. • The coded information is compared with a defined character sequence. • Measurement of code quality. • Codes on moving or stationary objects can be processed. • Output of the decoding results to three control outputs: - READ: Code is decoded. - MATCH: Decoded code content exactly matches the reference. - N_OK: Code cannot be decoded. • Output of the decoded DMC information via PROFIBUS-DP, Ethernet or by means of a converter on the RS232 interface. • Formatting of the output. • Integrated DI/Os, for example, for "stand-alone" mode without additional control. • Remote control via PROFIBUS-DP, PROFINET IO or DI/O or Ethernet. • Remote maintenance is possible through web-based Intranet or Internet user interface: - monitoring (live image in read mode). - diagnostics (fault pattern, log information, etc.). - system administration (software update, etc.). - fault analysis for finding the cause of faulty readings. • Actuation of ring lighting Mode of operation When using the SIMATIC VS130-2, the following steps are necessary: • Mount the vision sensor and lighting. • Manually align the camera, check the lighting: The web server integrated into the device complete with webbased user interface is provided for this purpose. The user interface presents the camera image and the decoded result. In the setup phase, the sensor head can be aligned with reference to the live image in the user interface. The user interface executes on any PC with Microsoft Internet Explorer and JAVA VM installation. When the sensor head is correctly adjusted, the vision sensor performs the subsequent tasks autonomously: - Optimization of lighting control. - "Training" of the image processing parameters by presenting a code sample. The image processing parameters for the type of code (carrier material, marking type, dot size, matrix size, etc.) are stored. No further parameter inputs are required. • Evaluation mode (RUN mode) is started using the training results and a read is started: Feeding of the Data Matrix Code can be carried out manually or via a conveyor unit. The Data Matrix Code must be located within the viewing window at the moment of triggering and is permitted to move at a maximum speed of 5000 mm/s. Any angle of rotation within the viewing window of the sensor head is permitted.

SIMATIC VS130-2 generally has three operating modes that can also be combined: • Operating mode 1 "Code decoding": The character string is transferred to the controller filtered or unfiltered. Filters can be separators, start position and length of the character string, or company-specific ID numbers. • Operating mode 2 "Decoded information is compared with a character string": The comparison can refer to the decoded string or to only a certain part. Comparison of parts is possible using the filter functions mentioned above. • Operating mode 3 "Measurement of code quality": The measurement can be absolute or relative. With the relative method, the reading system is calibrated by presenting a reference sample during the training phase. In this mode, the quality values measured are based on the reference sample. VS130-2 can, however, also use absolute measurement. In this case, the calibration step is omitted and a reference sample is not necessary. • Depending on the operating mode and the result of the analysis, one of the digital control outputs READ, MATCH or N_OK is set. • The decoded information is output, over PROFIBUS DP, PROFIBUS IO, Ethernet or a serial interface (converter required) as preferred and on the device display. Programming SIMATIC VS130-2 is not programmed or parameterized like conventional image processing systems. It configures the lighting and trains the algorithms without the need for user settings with reference to a code sample or during the first read. The training can be performed when the conveyor system is running. Self-parameterization can be started externally using the operator buttons on the device or remotely from the user interface. Self-parameterization is also activated during reading by a failed attempt at reading. Maximum reading reliability is achieved thanks to independence from user inputs and due to automatic self-parameterization. Up to 15 different parameter records can be stored in the device. These can be called up at any time by the user or by an external controller and can be used for reading code without the need to repeat the training phase.


2/279

2



2

■ Technical specifications SIMATIC VS 130-2 Vision Sensor

SIMATIC VS 130-2 Vision Sensor

Sensor head

Evaluation unit

Image capture

CCD chip 1/4", 640 x 480 square pixels; CCD chip 1/3", 1024 x 768 square pixels; Full frame shutter with automatic exposure

Image data transfer

Triggered frame transfer

Available versions

• Permanently adjusted lens for three different field of view sizes and read distances, only available for 640 x 480 • Two C/CS-Mount versions (without lens): User-defined field of view size and reading distance Size of field of view: 70 mm x 50 mm Dot size: 0.60 mm - 3.5 mm (edge length) Operating distance: 120 mm Size of field of view: 40 mm x 30 mm Dot size: 0,35 mm - 2,0 mm (edge length) Operating distance: 85 mm Size of field of view: 20 mm x 15 mm Dot size: 0,2 mm - 1,0 mm (edge length) Operating distance: 95 mm Freely selectable field of view size, reading distance and sensor resolution depending on: • Selected lens • Selected sensor head resolution 640 x 480 pixels or 1024 x 768 pixels Minimum requirement: 5 pixels/dot

• Large field of view

• Medium-sized field of view

• Small field of view

• Variable field of view

Housing

Extruded aluminum housing, black anodized


42 x 42 x 100


IP65 acc. to DIN EN 60529 / VDE 0470-1

Ambient temperature

0 to 50 °C


1 g (60 to 500 Hz) 70 g (6 ms, 3 shocks)

4-line text display and 6 operator buttons

"Teach-in" of DMC ("training")

Fully-automatic training procedure

Number of objects saved

15 different parameter sets, selectable using operator buttons or digital inputs, powerfailproof storage

Inspection triggering

External (through digital input)

Permissible object rate, max.

20 reads/s

Infeed direction of the objects • For external triggering • Setup software

Illuminant

Housing

Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm • Plastic • Metal

Plastic, all cables of plug-in type, suitable for cabinet-free installation


170 x 140 x 76



Ambient temperature

0 to 50 °C


1 g (60 to 500 Hz) 70 g (6 ms, 3 shocks)

Interfaces on evaluation unit • Digital inputs for 24 V DC

• Digital outputs for 24 V DC

• Integral PROFIBUS DP interface

LED, wavelength 630 nm (red) or infra-red, designed as a flash of 20 μs to 10 ms, diffuse or clear

• Integrated Ethernet interface

Ring lamp of plastic, working area up to 500 mm or Ring lamp of metal, working area up to 3000 mm, suitable for protective housing for lens

• Lighting control

• Sensor head interface 102 x 102 x 26.5 116 x 116 x 42


IP65 acc. to DIN EN 60529 / VDE 0470-1

Ambient temperature

0 to 50 °C


As required Software for displaying the sensor image when mounting and adjusting the sensor head and lighting. The software makes the integral web server available directly and requires an installed browser (Internet Explorer 5.5 and higher) and installed JAVA-VM (Microsoft or SUN).

Housing

• Integral PROFINET I/O interface

Lighting

2/280

Operator prompting

Supply voltage • Rated value • Permissible range Current input, max.

8; of which one interrupt-capable trigger input for standard binary sensors, 7 further PLC-capable control inputs 6; of which 3 quality outputs 0.5 A for the direct activation of pneumatic valves (15-pin Sub-D socket for inputs/outputs) DP (9-pin Sub-D socket) for realtime transfer of the test results RJ-45 (socket) for operator software, real-time transfer of test results and process interfacing RJ-45 (socket) for operator software, transfer (not real-time) of test results and process interfacing 4-pin circular connector (female) for power supply and for triggering the flash Digital interface (26-pin Sub-D socket) for connecting the VS110 sensor head 24 V DC 20 to 30 V DC 4 A, of which up to 1.5 A for supplying the pneumatic valves that can be connected



■ Ordering data

2

Order No.

SIMATIC VS130-2 vision sensor Complete package for object inspection; comprising sensor head, LED incident light (ring lamp 6GF9 004-8BA), processing unit and the following cables: • Cable between processing unit and sensor head, for lengths see below • Cable between lighting and processing unit (except for vision sensor with variable field of view), for length see below • Cable for power supply, length 10 m • Cable for connecting digital I/O devices, length 10 m Incl. documentation package for SIMATIC VS130-2 • Field of view 70 mm x 50 mm - with cable length 2.5 m

6GF1 130-1BA


6GF1 130-1BA01


6GF1 130-2BA


6GF1 130-2BA01


6GF1 130-4BA


6GF1 130-4BA01

• Variable field of view with 640 x 480 pixels and prepared for IP65 protective housing - with cable length 2.5 m

6GF1 130-3BB


6GF1 130-3BB01

• Variable field of view with 1024 x 768 pixels and prepared for IP65 protective housing - with cable length 2.5 m

6GF1 130-3BC


6GF1 130-3BC01


2/281


Image Processing System SIMATIC iMap

2

■ Overview

■ Design SIMATIC iMap is a Windows-based application for configuring communication between technology modules (PROFINET devices) of a machine/plant.

• Component-based software tool for configuring the communication in distributed automation solutions • For easy graphical configuration of the communication between subsystems and machine-to-machine communication in the production line • Based on the PROFINET standard • Open for PROFINET devices from various manufacturers on Industrial Ethernet • Runs under Windows 2000, Windows XP Professional and Windows 2003 Server

■ Benefits The clear advantage of SIMATIC iMap over programmed communication lies in the simple programming of the communication (graphically using lines interconnecting the technology interfaces of the devices).

■ Application

SIMATIC iMap principally comprises the following views: • Project tree: Used to manage all project resources (technology functions and devices) and to navigate within the automation hierarchy of a plant. • Technology library: The library contains the technological software functions that are required for a project. The library elements must be supplied by the OEMs (technologists). • Connection editor: Used to specify data exchange between the technology modules. • Network and topology view: Used for assigning the hardware units to each other in terms of topology and for system diagnosis (diagnosis of communication and device status). • Project view: Used for project administration and for an overview of the software functions used in a project. • Chart view: Structured representation of the configured plant

■ Function SIMATIC iMap connects software components that are managed in libraries. • Each technological machine/plant module is represented by a "software component" in the SIMATIC iMap engineering tool. This is represented graphically in the form of one or more software functions and a corresponding intelligent device. • A "software component" and therefore a technology module is uniquely described with the inputs and outputs (component interfaces) and can be used in SIMATIC iMap more than once (reuse of library elements). • The machine/plant can be structured hierarchically to any depth using subdiagrams.

Plant-wide engineering

How it works

In a modular machine/plant, a plant-wide configuration tool is appropriate that defines the relationship between the separate machine/plant subsystems or machine units.

The procedure for creating and starting up a project using SIMATIC iMap is as follows: • Creating "software components" for every machine/plant module. • Connection of the technological software components in the connection editor. • Configuration of the associated devices in the network topology. • Downloading the program and communication data into the devices.

SIMATIC iMap is a component-based software tool for configuring communication in distributed automation solutions. SIMATIC iMap is used to graphically configure the data exchange between technological modules. To ensure data exchange between devices of different manufacturers, SIMATIC iMap is based on PROFINET — the standard communication protocol of PROFIBUS International. PROFINET defines communication based on TCP /IP and Industrial Ethernet.

Creation of the software components

SIMATIC iMap can be integrated into the SIMATIC software landscape as a higher-level configuring tool. In this case, the library elements are created using STEP 7.

Each machine/plant module contains a separate user program that contains all technology functions of the module. From this, a "software component" is created that describes the module. The "software components" are generated in accordance with the PROFINET standard in the device-specific programming environment of the device manufacturer (e.g. in STEP 7 in the case of SIMATIC). The result is an XML file that describes in full a "software component" and the associated data storage (including device dependencies).

2/282






Generation of components in STEP 7

Current version

V3.0

The manufacturer of a technological software component will be able to program the PLC functions for a technology module in the same manner as before. The programmer writes the PLC programs using STEP 7 languages (STL, LAD, etc.) and only has to specify the technological interfaces of the software components using a data block (interface data block). A software component is then created in an interactive screen form in STEP 7 Manager. The data storage for the created software component is an XML file whose structure is defined by the PROFINET standard. The software component can then be imported into the library of SIMATIC iMap.

Software class

A

Applications Keyword

SIMATIC iMap is an engineering tool for configuring communication between automation and field devices in distributed automation solutions.

Marketing message

"Time and cost savings in modular machine and plant construction with Component based Automation." "Modularization and machine-tomachine communication along the production line."

Advantages

• Open component-based engineering tool to the PROFINET standard. • Simple communication between intelligent automation and field devices on PROFIBUS DP and on Ethernet. • Graphical configuration of communication on PROFIBUS DP and on Ethernet • Extremely high reusability of software components (technology modules) • Graphical structuring of the plant using "chart-in-chart" function • Convenient navigation through the project tree • Easy creation and structuring of technology libraries • PROFIBUS and Ethernet in the overview of the network view • Fast start-up thanks to downloading and testing directly on Ethernet (also of PROFIBUS slaves) • Online display of values of the technology modules on the interfaces and in the variable table • Diagnosis of communication in the diagnostics window

Sectors

• Automotive industry (especially in assembly, conveyor systems and in the paint shop) • Complex food and packaging machines • Conveyor systems based on PROFIBUS DP • Production lines with several interlinked machines

Target systems

• SIMATIC S7 CPU 31x-2 PN/DP and SIMATIC S7 CPU 319-3 PN/DP (with integrated PROFINET interface. This can be used as a proxy function for the devices of a complete PROFIBUS segment, one line only) • SIMATIC WinAC PN (can be used as a proxy function for the devices of a complete PROFIBUS segment, one line only)

Configuring the communication using SIMATIC iMap SIMATIC iMap is used to graphically configure the data exchange between the separate machine/plant modules. The project engineer connects the software components together, configures the associated devices in the network topology and then the project is finished. The engineer can test and monitor the communication between the devices in online mode. From the technical viewpoint, SIMATIC iMap offers the user the following advantages: • Communication between the "software components" and therefore between the technology modules is defined in SIMATIC iMap by means of graphical connection. Programming knowledge is not required. • Consistent data are generated for the communication from the engineering information and downloaded to the devices. Downloading of the communications relationship of the devices is performed over Ethernet and, in contrast to program downloading, does not require installation of the device-specific programming tools. • All variables which are required for general data accesses, e.g. by the visualization or from the MES level, are generated automatically from the engineering information (OPC tag file). • The entire communication of the machine/plant can be directly tested in SIMATIC iMap and diagnosed. SIMATIC iMap provides an overview of the network topology in graphical form for this purpose. The devices associated with the software components are shown here. HMI integration

2

The user can access the data of the separate PROFINET devices simply by browsing from any OPC client application. For this purpose, SIMATIC SOFTNET S7 for Industrial Ethernet (containing the S7 OPC server) as well as the OPC server for PROFINET CBA (SIMATIC NET PN CBA OPC server) are required.


2/283



2

■ Technical specifications (continued) Target systems (continued)

• SIMATIC NET IE/PB Link (can be used as a proxy function for the devices of a complete PROFIBUS segment) • SIMATIC NET CP 343-1 and CP 343-1 Advanced (for connecting SIMATIC S7-300 to Ethernet), CP443-1 Advanced (for connecting SIMATIC S7-400 to Ethernet) • Distributed I/O stations with separate CPU (all intelligent field devices on PROFIBUS such as SIMATIC CPU 313C-2DP, CPU 314C-2DP, CPU 315-2DP, CPU 316-2DP, ET 200 IM 151 CPU, ET 200S BM 147 CPU), • PROFINET CBA OPC Server (for access from PC applications to data in PROFINET devices) • Devices on Industrial Ethernet based on the PROFINET CBA standard • SIMATIC OPs (within the components) • SIMATIC ProTool/Pro, WinCC or any other visualization system with OPC client function

System requirements Operating system

Windows 2000 Prof. Service Pack 4 and higher or Windows XP Prof. Service Pack 1 and higher or Windows 2003 Server Service Pack 1 and higher; PC administration rights are required for installation

PG/PC hardware

Pentium processor, 1 GHz or higher

Recommended expansion of main memory in PG/PC

RAM: 512 MB or more

Hard disk space required in PG/PC approx. 200 MB Software required

• STEP 7 V5.3 Service Pack 3 or higher • PN OPC server V6.3 or higher The following software must be installed before iMap (included in the iMap package): • MS Internet Explorer V6.0 Service Pack 1 and higher • Adobe Acrobat Reader V5.0

Delivery format Languages

English, German, French, Italian and Spanish

Single License (SL)

Yes

Upgrade License (UL)

Yes, from V2.0 to V3.0

Paper manuals

Electronically on CD

Authorization/licenses Authorization

Yes

Single License (SL)

Yes

Upgrade License (UL)

Yes

Software Update Service

Yes

Unlock Copy License

No

2/284


■ Ordering data

Order No.

SIMATIC iMap V3.0 Target system: CPU 31x-2 PN/DP, CPU 319-3 PN/DP, SIMATIC WinAC PN, SIMATIC NET IE/PB Link, SIMATIC NET CP 343-1, SIMATIC NET CP 343-1 Advanced, SIMATIC NET CP 443-1 Advanced, distributed I/O devices with own CPU, PROFINET CBA OPC server, devices on the Industrial Ethernet based on the PROFINET CBA standard, SIMATIC OPs, SIMATIC ProTool/Pro Requirements: Windows 2000 Prof. with Service Pack 4 or later or Windows XP Prof. with Service Pack 1 or later or Windows 2003 Server with Service Pack 1 or later; on PG or PC with Pentium processor, min. 1 GHz; STEP 7 V5.3 or later with Service Pack 3, PN OPC Server V6.3 or later Delivery form: German, English, with electronic documentation • Single license

6ES7 820-0CC04-0YA5


6ES7 820-0CC01-0YX2


6ES7 820-0CC04-0YE5


SINAMICS S120 Drive System General information

■ Overview Free performance selection for Vector and Servo control modes The use of a SINAMICS S120 Vector control is recommended for drive solutions with continuous material webs, for example, wiredrawing machines, film and paper machines, as well as for hoisting gear, centrifuges and marine drives with harmonic, circular motion. Servo control with SINAMICS S120 is employed for cyclic processes with precise, highly dynamic position control and servo motors, e.g. in textile, packaging, printing machines and machine tools. DRIVE-CLiQ – the digital interface between all components

Flexibility for successful machine design As part of the SINAMICS drive family, the SINAMICS S120 drive is a modular system for high-performance applications in machine construction and plant engineering. SINAMICS S120 offers high-performance single-axis and multi-axis drives for a very broad range of industrial applications. By virtue of its scalability and flexibility, SINAMICS S120 is the ideal system for satisfying the ever increasing demand for more axes and better performance. SINAMICS S120 supports flexible machine designs and speedy implementation of customized drive solutions. The response to ever increasing demands Modern machines must be built at ever lower cost, but promise ever greater productivity. The SINAMICS S120 drive concept meets both these challenges! It is easy to configure and thus helps to reduce project completion times. Its excellent dynamic response and accuracy permit higher cycle rates for maximum productivity. Applications in machine and plant engineering Regardless of whether the application involves continuous material webs or cyclic, highly dynamic processes – SINAMICS S120 means increased machine performance in many sectors: Modularity for machine construction SINAMICS S120 is designed to allow free combination of power and control performance. Multi-axis drives with higher-level motion control can be implemented with the SINAMICS S120 modular system as easily as single-drive solutions. Greater flexibility with central control intelligence On the SINAMICS S120, the drive intelligence is combined with closed-loop control functions into Control Units. These units are capable of controlling drives in Vector, Servo and V/f modes. They also perform the speed and torque control functions plus other intelligent drive functions for all axes on the drive.

All SINAMICS S120 components, including the motors and encoders, are interconnected by a shared serial interface called DRIVE-CLiQ. The standardized cables and connectors reduce the variety of different parts and cut storage costs. Converter boards (Sensor Modules) for converting standard encoder signals to DRIVE-CLiQ are available for third-party motors or retrofit applications. Swift and automatic: The electronic rating plate An important digital linkage element of the SINAMICS S120 drive system are the electronic rating plates integrated in every component. They allow all drive components to be detected automically via a DRIVE-CLiQ link. As a result, data do not need to be entered manually during commissioning or component replacement – helping to ensure that drives are commissioned successfully! The electronic rating plates of the motors contain, for example, the parameters of the electrical equivalent circuit diagram and the characteristic data of the built-in motor encoder, but also information such as order and identification numbers. Modular design ensures flexibility and scalability DC/AC units (= Motor Modules) – available in booksize and chassis formats – are characterized by their modular design. All the drive intelligence is organized into Control Units. These perform all the closed-loop control functions for the drive grouping. They also handle all other drive functions such as the interconnection of drive-related I/Os, positioning functions, etc. and feature PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET as a central interface for linking to higher-level automation systems. Line Modules function as the central energy supply to the voltage-source DC link. Line Modules are optionally available with regulated infeed/regenerative feedback to provide a constant DC link voltage and high level of supply compatibility. Motor Modules supply the motors with energy from the DC link. On AC/AC units, the infeed and motor power supply functions are combined in one device, the Power Module – available in blocksize and chassis formats. For single-axis applications, drive control functions are performed by a special Control Unit (CU310) mounted on the Power Module and for multi-axis applications, by a Control Unit (e.g. CU320) connected by a DRIVE-CLiQ link. In this case, a CU Adapter is mounted on the Power Module in place of the Control Unit.


2/285

2


SINAMICS S120 Drive System General information

■ Overview (continued) All formats can be combined freely

SINAMICS S120 and SIMOTION – the perfect team

The different SINAMICS S120 formats can be combined freely thanks to their DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces, e.g. Line Modules in chassis format can be freely combined with Motor Modules in booksize format for multi-axis applications with high total output.

Modern machines must be capable of handling ever more complex motion control tasks and performing them with increasing accuracy and speed. As regards this requirement, the SIMOTION Motion Control System and high-performance SINAMICS S120 drive system form a perfect team. The SIMOTION D variant, which is physically integrated in the SINAMICS S120 drive, is the ideal solution for machines with a large number of axes and stringent precision requirements. This distributed automation structure allows the machine to be segmented into various axis groupings, with each grouping controlled by a separate SIMOTION Motion Control System. The SIMOTION systems communicate either via PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET. Another important aspect: The compact machine design thanks to the distributed automation structure and a Control Unit directly in the drive.

PROFIBUS PROFINET

DRIVE-CLiQ Digital and analog I/O (Terminal Modules) Power Modules (Motor Modules)

Central Control Module (Control Unit)

Totally Integrated Automation – the unique automation platform

Infeed (Line Module) 3 AC

G_D211_EN_00073

DRIVE-CLiQ

Motors Motor

Control (e. g. SIMATIC)

SINAMICS S120 is also available with a PROFINET interface. This Ethernet-based bus enables control data to be exchanged at high speed via PROFINET IO with IRT or RT and makes SINAMICS S120 a suitable choice for integration in top-performance multi-axis applications.

PROFIBUS

SINAMICS S120 AC Drive with CU310

1-ph. 230 V AC 3-ph. 400 V AC DRIVE-CLiQ

1-ph. 230 V AC 3-ph. 400 V AC DRIVE-CLiQ

Motors SINAMICS S120 AC Drive topology

■ More Information Further information regarding technical specifications and Ordering data can be found in Catalog D21.1 “SINAMICS 120 Drive Systems” as well as in the interactive catalog under “Drives Technology/AC Converters/Low-Voltage Converter”

2/286


PROFIBUS

PROFINET

PROFINET

SINAMICS S120 AC Drive with CU310

With Totally Integrated Automation (TIA), Siemens is the only single-source provider to offer an integrated spectrum of products and systems for all sectors. Tailored to meet individual customer requirements, sector-specific automation solutions can be implemented efficiently on the basis of TIA. Lower lifecycle costs for plant operation and a significant reduction in the time to market result in a marked improvement in productivity and greater investment security. PROFIBUS DP, the standard fieldbus of the TIA system, is supported by all SINAMICS S120 variants. It provides a high-performance, system-wide communication network which links all automation components: HMI, controls, drives and I/O devices.

SINAMICS S120 frame size booksize topology

G_D211_EN_00074

2

At the same time, PROFINET also uses standard IT mechanisms (TCP/IP) to transport information, e.g. operating and diagnostic data, to higher-level systems. A SINAMICS S120 with this interface can thus easily be integrated into factory IT networks.


SINAMICS S120 Drive System CBE20 Communication Board

■ Overview

■ Technical specifications Max. current requirement (at 24 V DC)

2

0.16 A

Permissible ambient temperature • Storage and transport

-40 °C … + 70 °C

• Operation

0 °C … + 55 °C

Dimensions

130 mm × 78 mm

Weight, approx.

76 g

■ Ordering data CBE20 Communication Board

Order No. 6SL3055-0AA00-2EB0

■ Accessories The PROFINET cables and connectors listed below are recommended: The CBE20 Communication Board can be used to connect the SINAMICS S120 drive system to a PROFINET IO network via a CU320 Control Unit.

Description

Order No.

Industrial Ethernet FC RJ45 Plug 145 (1 x)

6GK1901-1BB30-0AA0

The SINAMICS S120 then assumes the function of a PROFINET IO device and can perform the following: • PROFINET IO device functions • 100 Mbit/s full duplex • Supports real-time classes of PROFINET IO: - RT (RealTime) - IRT (Isochronous RealTime) • Connects to controls as PROFINET IO devices using PROFIdrive compliant with specification V4 • Standard TCP/IP communication for engineering processes using the STARTER drive/commissioning software • Integrated 4-port switch with four RJ45 sockets based on the PROFINET ASIC ERTEC400. The optimum topology (line, star, tree) can therefore be configured without additional external switches.

Industrial Ethernet FC RJ45 Plug 145 (10 x)

6GK1901-1BB30-0AB0

Industrial Ethernet FC stripping tool

6GK1901-1GA00


6XV1840-2AH10


6XV1870-2B


6XV1870-2D


6XV1840-3AH10


6XV1840-4AH10

■ Integration The CBE20 Communication Board plugs into the option slot on the CU320 Control Unit.


2/287


2

7 2/288



3/2 3/2 3/5

Introduction General information Application examples

3/9 3/9 3/10 3/18 3/31

Network components for IWLAN Function overview IWLAN RCoax cables SCALANCE W-780 Access Points SCALANCE W-780 Access Points and WLAN Controller SCALANCE W-740 Client Modules Accessories Antennae, terminating resistor and lightning protection element Power Supply

3/36 3/44 3/44 3/48

Sec. 4 Network components for PROFIBUS Sec. 4 Infrared Link Module ILM 3/50 3/50


3/55 Engineering Tools 3/55 SINEMA E Lean Sec. 2 SNMP OPC Server Sec. 8 Network transitions Sec. 8 IWLAN/PB Link PN IO Sec. 7 Sec. 7 Sec. 7 Sec. 7 Sec. 7

SINAUT Telecontrol SINAUT MICRO GSM/GPRS Modem MD720-3 GSM/GPRS Antenna ANT794-4MR SINAUT MICRO SC



Introduction

General information

■ Overview The key to future market success lies in the ability to provide information and access to information at any time and in any location. With mobile systems interconnected through standardized

and available radio networks, processes can be designed for greater efficiency. The main advantage of wireless solutions is easy and flexible access to mobile stations.

3 PROFINET Industrial Ethernet

Industrial Ethernet

PROFIBUS

KNX

AS-Interface

G_IK10_XX_50186

PROFIBUS PA

Industrial Mobile Communication in the communications landscape

SIMATIC NET is the name of a whole family of networks. The individual members satisfy the different performance and application requirements: They can exchange data over different levels, between different subsystems or between different automation stations. Industrial Mobile Communication (IMC) plays an important role in this: IMC stands for the industrial mobile communication products of SIMATIC NET that utilize wireless communication. This is based on international standards, such as IEEE 802.11, GSM, GPRS or, in the future, UMTS. For example, on PROFIBUS, infrared transmission technology is used. The SIMATIC NET components are equipped with uniform system interfaces and are also designed for perfect interaction with each other. Supplementing the conventional wired solutions, wireless communication is penetrating further and further into industry. SIMATIC NET offers products for company-wide data transmission over local networks, intranet, Internet or wireless networks. Thanks to the carefully graded performance, company-wide communication can be achieved with SIMATIC NET, from the simplest device through to the most complex installation. The SIMATIC NET Industrial Wireless LAN Access Points can communicate using all the currently available IEEE 802.11 standards (a, b, g as well as h can be retrofitted following completion of the standardization process).

3/2


SCALANCE W – wireless communication The products of SCALANCE W offer the unique combination of reliability, ruggedness and security in one product. With the basic technology of Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN), an extension to the IEEE 802.11 standard is made available that addresses the requirements of industrial customers in particular with regard to a deterministic response and redundancy. For the first time customers are getting a single radio network both for data critical to the process (e.g. alarm signaling) (IWLAN) as well as for uncritical communication (WLAN), e.g. for service and diagnostics. SCALANCE W-products distinguish themselves by the reliability of their radio channel and the dust and water-proof design (IP65 of the metal casing, and the high requirements with respect to mechanical durability for which SIMATIC is known. To protect against unauthorized access, the products provide modern standard mechanisms for user identification (authentication) and encryption of data, but can also be easily integrated into existing security concepts.


Introduction

General information

■ Overview (continued) Radio infrastructure Instead of copper cables and fiber-optic cables, wireless transmission techniques use radio waves. The propagation properties of the electromagnetic waves differ considerably and depend on the physical surroundings and the installed radio infrastructure. SIMATIC NET modules use techniques such as antenna switchover (antenna diversity), high-quality receivers and faulttolerant modulation procedures to enhance reception and to prevent interruption of radio communication. For reliable wireless connections, it is even possible to activate data storage at the access points; this ensures a reliability equivalent to that of wired connections. Industrial Mobile Communication uses different radio networks, e.g. WLAN, GSM and GPRS in harmony with each other. This concerns primarily the assignment of different frequency ranges for different applications, limiting to maximum permissible transmission power levels, and the selection of specific transmission procedures.

Network solution with Industrial Mobile Communication (IMC) With mobile data terminals, a continuous information flow from the management level down to the production level is possible. The SINEMA software is available for simplified planning and configuration of an IWLAN network with the help of simulation functions. It visualizes clearly and details wireless and device properties, thus reducing the configuring and startup overhead and helping to avoid configuring errors. The PROFIBUS ILM offers an infrared solution and the IWLAN/ PB Link PN IO a radio-based solution for wireless communication in the PROFIBUS environment. This means that information can be provided quickly, reliably and easily at the right place and at the right time with flexibility and mobility. Reliability Thanks to redundancy mechanisms and packet repetitions, the SCALANCE W access points generate a reliable wireless connection that also withstands interference in the industrial area. Reservation of the data rate makes it possible to plan data traffic, thus preventing delays in accessing the data traffic, and even preventing production standstills.

Wireless LAN. IEEE 802.11

Bluetooth

The swap medium C-PLUG saves configuring data, making device replacement possible in a short time and without specially trained personnel. This minimizes standstill times and saves training costs.

depending on surroundings

With "rapid roaming", mobile stations can be transferred quickly from one wireless field to another so that the PROFINET IO communication is not interrupted. In addition, simultaneous, wireless operation of several PROFINET IO devices is possible in real time.

GSM, HSCSD, GPRS, UMTS

Ruggedness and industrial suitability

from approx. 30 m to approx. 300 m

Personal Area Network (PAN)

Local Area Network (LAN)

The SCALANCE W products can be exposed to temperature fluctuations of -20°C to +60°C, or continuous contact with dust and water. Metal housing and design protection against shock and vibration enable use in harsh industrial environments.

from 300 m Wide Area Network (WAN)

G_IK_XX_30604

up to approx. 10 m

Accessories such as antennae, power supply and cabling are also part of this concept and suitable for use in industry. Power and data are transferred over one cable with Power-overEthernet, thus saving investment and maintenance costs.

Wireless radio networks for different applications


3/3

3


Introduction

General information

■ Overview (continued) Data safety

Redundant network concepts can also be implemented wirelessly: Wireless channels are designed redundantly, with switching taking place within milliseconds so that the application is not affected by packet repetitions or interference in the wireless channel. The latest encryption mechanisms protect the data against undesired access.

Dedicating data transfer rate Data trans- IEEE 802.11 fer rate dedicated

Data trans- IEEE 802.11 fer rate dedicated

Data trans- IEEE 802.11 fer rate dedicated

Time

Client 1 Client 2 Client 3 Client 4 Client 5 Client 6

Nodes with critical data

Nodes 1,2 and 3 have predictive access to the radio channel, controlled by SCALANCE W-780

Node 4 can "only" access the radio channel in the third cycle

G_IK10_XX_10181

3

Defined transmission times and a net bit rate of the data packets are implemented with the function "Reservation of the data rate" and provide the stations with cyclic wireless traffic. Even real time can be used in a wireless network.

Cyclic radio traffic through data rate reservation

■ Benefits

• Wireless communication to programmable controllers and terminal devices enables access to mobile units • Wide-area networking (roaming) within a covered area enables mobile terminal devices to be set up anywhere • Can be used in areas that are difficult to access. This means savings in construction measures. • Facility for information and modification anywhere, anytime accelerates process sequences • Flexible and amenable to change. For example, it is possible to change the location of use or the configuration quickly in the case of plant expansions/conversions • Uniform networking from the plant management/control level right down to the field level saves on network transitions between the levels and also saves on duplicated training overhead • Wear-free – saves maintenance and repair costs on plug connections, festoons, carbon brushes, sliding contacts or retractors

3/4


• Fast startup of new plant sections through reduced overhead for installing the communication network with the help of SINEMA E planning, simulation and configuration software • The wireless bands are generally accessible so no further license fees are required • Lower-cost assembly in areas subject to explosion hazard (from Zone 2) • Wireless transmisison prevents contact interruption from severe vibration or heavy contamination • Integrated wireless network for voice and data across corporate areas through HiPath wireless connection • Predictable data traffic (strict real-time requirements) and defined response times on the radio link • Reliable wireless connection through, for example, redundant connection, automatic roaming in the case of interruption of the wireless connection to Industrial Ethernet (forced roaming), cyclic monitoring of the wireless link (link check) or monitoring for IP connections (IP alive) • High degree of investment security because all products are compatible with the internationally recognized IEEE 802.11 standard and are suitable for 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz


Introduction

Application examples

■ Overview S7-300 with PROFINET-CPU or CP 343-1

PROFINET

3

Industrial Ethernet Access Point SCALANCE W788-1RR


IWLAN RCoax Cable

IWLAN/ PB Link PN IO ET 200S

ET 200pro

PROFIBUS

G_IK10_XX_30115

Client Module SCALANCE W74/-1RR

ET 200S

Wireless integration of PROFIBUS segments and PROFINET stations into an existing Industrial Ethernet network

An existing Ethernet network can be expanded by a mobile network without increased overhead.

Access to the existing controllers or processes is possible without an excessive additional wiring overhead.

For this purpose, the network transition IWLAN/PB Link PN IO can be connected to an existing PROFIBUS network, for example, using an access point and RCoax cable.

Use of a radio link and the roaming function means that one can move freely within the range of the Industrial Wireless LAN network and observe the process from different locations.

The radio connection is established to the mobile stations by connecting a SCALANCE W access point to the Ethernet network. The mobile stations are connected using the Industrial wireless card CP 7515 or a client module, e.g. SCALANCE W746-1PRO, to which the mobile station is connected with a cable.


3/5


Introduction


■ Overview (continued) Office network

HiPath wireless access point

Pocket Loox


MOBIC

PC

S7-300 with CP 343-1

HiPath wireless optiPoint

HiPath 3700

Router Access Point SCALANCE W788-2RR


WAN Router

HiPath wireless controller

Client Module SCALANCE W746-1PRO


Public network S7-300 with CP 343-1

S7-300 with CP 343-1

G_IK10_XX_30141

optiPoint WL2 professional

3

Automation network

transitionless roaming between office and industry

Transition-free roaming between office and industrial networks

When using SCALANCE W788-2RR, a simple connection to the HiPath wireless controller can be established in an alternative operating mode. In this way, an integrated wireless network for speech and data can be established from the office area right down to the automation network. SCALANCE W788-2RR access points provide the wireless field indoors and outdoors; together with HiPath controllers, they form a wireless infrastructure for speech, Internet and PLCs even in company networks covering a large area. This achieves a high degree of flexibility because the data are accessible through the uniform wireless network using seamless roaming both from the office and from the production plant.

3/6


Thanks to the use of a centralized security mechanism for each user group (Virtual Network Services VNS), the data are protected against unauthorized access and manipulation. The central management system with HiPath wireless enables configuration, fault recording, monitoring and documentation of statistics


Introduction


■ Overview (continued) The silicone-free fiber optic cable IWLAN RCoax cable is used along the coding rail for establishing wireless data transmission between the hanger system and the central controller, e.g. for nutrunner control in automobile manufacture. It generates a defined, spherical and reliable wireless field and is easy to lay.

S7-300 with CP 343-1

PROFINET

A SCALANCE W788-1RR access point is used as the infeed station and the SCALANCE W747-1RR client module is installed as the mobile station. This means the same mobile unit can be used for all applications and so a mobile nutrunner can be used for several cycles resulting in lower investment costs.

Access Point SCALANCE W788-1RR RCoax Cable Segment 1

Maintenance costs and downtimes are reduced by reliable wireless and therefore wear-resistant data transmission to mobile communication partners Antenna ANT792-4DN

All the nutrunner data can be loaded over the IWLAN segment. Downtimes are reduced because in the event of a fault, devices can be replaced without a programming device or specialist personnel by using the swap medium C-PLUG.


Model changes are easy to carry out and depend only on material logistics. Switch SCALANCE X208PRO Control& Monitoring

ET 200pro Suspension gear

G_IK10_XX_30048

Schraubersteuerung

System solution for nutrunner controls with RCoax cable and SCALANCE W747-1RR


3/7

3


Introduction



3

Internet HMI

Safety

Controller Fail-safe communication via PROFIsafe profile

Controller Security

Switch PROFINET Industrial Ethernet

PN-/PNCoupler ET 200pro

Distributed I/O

Proxy

HMI

Access Point Proxy

Machine Vision Motion Control Other fieldbuses

PROFIBUS SINAMICS G120 Distributed I/O G_IK10_XX_30118

Failsafe wireless communication with PROFIsafe

For several years, safety engineering has been integrating into standard automation on the basis of SIMATIC S7 controllers, PROFIBUS and PROFIsafe. This range has been expanded by PROFINET-enabled components, thus providing a complete product range with failsafe controllers, failsafe I/O and a corresponding engineering environment.

3/8


PROFIsafe prevents errors such as address corruption, loss, delay, etc., when transmitting messages through continuous numbering of the PROFIsafe data, time monitoring, and authenticity monitoring using passwords or optimized CRC backup. Failsafe communication is also supported via wireless LAN.

Number of devices

SCALANCE W788-1PRO

SCALANCE W788-2PRO

1)

2)

3)

Client function through alternative parameters e.g. RCoax Cable 0°C to +60°C 1)

1 65 2048 IP or MAC adr. IE

1)

2 65 IP or 2048 MAC adr. IE

SCALANCE W788-1RR 1)

1 65 2048 IP or MAC adr. IE

SCALANCE W788-2RR 1)

2 65 IP or 2048 MAC adr. IE

SCALANCE W744-1PRO 1 65 1 1x MAC adress IE

SCALANCE W746-1PRO 1 65 8 7x IP, 1x MAC adr. IE

SCALANCE W747-1RR 1 65 8 7x IP, 1x MAC adr. IE

IWLAN/PB Link PN IO 1 20

CP 7515 1 20 3)

8 PROFIBUS Slaves

suitable


Hardwired interface

Address administration

Number of addresses

Rapid roaming

Reservation of data transfer rate

Metal enclosure

Resistant to condensation

0°C to +40°C

-20°C to +60°C


Standard DIN rail

S7 rail

Wall mounting

Redundant power supply

PoE (Power over Ethernet) 24V

PoE (Power over Ethernet) 802.3af

WDS (Wireless Distribution System)

External antenna can be connected 2)

Antenna diversity

WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)

WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)

AES (Advanced Encription Security)

802.11a (5 GHz, 54 Mbit/s)

802.11g (2,4 GHz, 54 Mbit/s)

802.11b (2,4 GHz, 11 Mbit/s)

Number of radio interfaces

HiPath Wireless Controller

Client

Access Point

Industrial Mobile Communication Network components for IWLAN Function overview

■ Overview

Address table

3

PB Master

PC Card (32 Bit)

G_IK10_XX_30123

Function overview of IWLAN network components

3/9


Network components for IWLAN IWLAN RCoax cables

■ Overview

■ Benefits

• Reliable coverage in areas problematic for radio • Controlled emission of radio waves • Cost savings thanks to direct substitution of sliding contacts and trailing cables • Highly flexible implementation

3

■ Application

The RCoax cables are radiating cables that function as special antennas for the SCALANCE W Access Points in environments with complex radio coverage. Its design means that a defined, cone-shaped radio field is generated along the RCoax cable. The radiating cables are therefore perfectly suitable for use in environments with complex radio coverage and in any type of track vehicle. • Rugged coaxial cable which can be easily installed • Two cables for use in the Industrial Wireless LAN sector with frequency bands 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz • Supply stations based on the SCALANCE W-780 Access Points • Mobile stations (e.g. Ethernet Client Module SCALANCE W740, IWLAN/PB Link PN IO)

3/10


• In areas with complex radio coverage (e.g. in tunnels, channels and elevator shafts) where "unlimited" mobility is not of decisive importance, but where rather a mechanically wearfree and thus low-maintenance solution is required to ensure reliable data transmission. This is made possible by the defined radio field along the RCoax cable. • The RCoax cables offer, especially for conveyor systems, robots and every type of rail-mounted vehicle (overhead conveyors, AGV systems) a wear-free and reliable radio link. Application examples • Overhead monorail conveyors • Automated guided vehicle systems (AGVS) • Cranes • Stacker cranes • Transfer lines • Tool-changing trolleys • Robots • Railway stations • Underground railway systems • Railway wagons • Lifts • Theater stages



■ Application (continued) SIMATIC S7-400 mit CP 443-1

Server for Nutrunner Data Server for Production Information System (FIS)

Industrial Ethernet Access Point SCALANCE W788-2RR

RCoax Cable


SIMATIC S7-200 mit CP 243-1


Nutrunner

Panel

Nutrunner Station Telpher


Nutrunner



Nutrunner

Panel


RCoax Cable




3

Nutrunner



Nutrunner

Panel

Nutrunner


G_IK10_XX_10177


System solution with RCoax cable using example of overhead monorail conveyor


3/11



■ Design The RCoax cables were specially designed for the frequency band around 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz respectively.

Cable sheath

3

Dielectric Wave propagation Outer conductor with opening G_IK10_XX_30114

Inner conductor

Openings are present in the outer conductor of the coaxial cable which permit the penetration and emission of radio waves. A defined radio field is then developed around the RCoax cables. A balanced relationship has been observed for the longitudinal damping and extraction loss of the RCoax cables to permit a long length of cable per supply point (SCALANCE W-780 Access Points) and an appropriate distance of the mobile station (e.g. SCALANCE W-740, IWLAN/ PB Link PN IO) from the RCoax cable.

3/12


Coordinated accessories are available for assembly: • IWLAN RCoax cable clip 1/2" • IWLAN RCoax spacer 85 mm • IWLAN RCoax threaded washer M6



■ Integration IWLAN RCoax N-Connect Female N-Connector 6GK5798-0CN00-0AA0

IWLAN RCoax N-Connect Female N-Connector 6GK5798-0CN00-0AA0

SIMATIC NET IWLAN RCOAX CABLE SIMATIC NET IWLAN RCOAX CABLE 6XV1 875-2A

IWLAN RCoax Cable 2.4 GHz = 6XV1875-2A 5 GHz = 6XV1875-2D

Access Point SCALANCE W788-1RR / W788-2RR

6GK5795-1TR00-0AA6

IWLAN Termination Impedance TI795-1R 6GK5795-1TR00-0AA6

R-SMA Plug

6XV1 870-2J

or

IE FC standard cable 2x2

Power M12 cable connector PRO

6XV1840-2AH10

6XV1812-8A

6GK1907-0DC10-6AA3

with energy cable 2x0.75

Client Module SCALANCE W747-1RR IWLAN Antenna ANT792-4DN / ANT793-4MN 2 GHz = 6GK5792-4DN00-0AA6 5 GHz = 6GK5793-4MN00-0AA6

IWLAN RCoax N-Connect/R-SMA male/male Flexible connection cable 1 m = 6XV1875-5CH10 5 m = 6XV1875-5CH50

IP67 Hybrid connector with IE Hybrid cable 2x2 + 4x0.34

6GK5795-1TN00-1AA0

IWLAN RCoax N-Connect/R-SMA male/male Flexible connection cable 1 m = 6XV1875-5CH10


R-SMA Plug

6XV1 870-2J

or


Power M12 cable connector PRO

6XV1840-2AH10

6XV1812-8A

6GK1907-0DC10-6AA3

with energy cable 2x0.75

G_IK10_XX_30120

IWLAN Termination impedance TI795-1R

IWLAN RCoax N-Connect Male termination impedance 50 Ohm

PROFINET IO communication over IWLAN RCoax system with connection to Industrial Ethernet


3/13

3



■ Integration (continued) IWLAN RCoax N-Connect Female N-Connector

IWLAN RCoax N-Connect Female N-Connector

6GK5798-0CN00-0AA0

6GK5798-0CN00-0AA0

3

IWLAN RCoax N-Connect Male termination impedance 50 Ohm

SIMATIC NET IWLAN RCOAX CABLE

6GK5795-1TN00-1AA0

IWLAN RCoax Cable 2.4 GHz = 6XV1875-2A 5 GHz = 6XV1875-2D Access Point SCALANCE W788-1RR / W788-2RR

IWLAN Termination impedance TI795-1R 6GK5795-1TR00-0AA6

IWLAN/PB Link PN IO

IWLAN RCoax N-Connect/N-Connect male/male Flexible connection cable 1 m = 6XV1875-5AH10

IWLAN RCoax N-Connect/R-SMA male/male Flexible connection cable 1 m = 6XV1875-5CH10 5 m = 6XV1875-5CH50

Control box IWLAN/PB Link PN IO 6GK1417-5AB00


6GK5798-0PT00-2AA0

0 H1 0E

6XV1875-5DE30

83

0-

or

IWLAN RCoax N-Connect/SMA female/female Panel feedthrough

IWLAN RCoax R-SMA/SMA Male/Male Flexible connection cable 0.3 m

R-SMA Plug

6XV1 870-2J

IWLAN RCoax N-Connect Female Antenna ANT792-4DN / ANT793-4MN 2 GHz = 6GK5792-4DN00-0AA6 5 GHz = 6GK5793-4MN00-0AA6

with energy cable 2x0.75 6XV1812-8A

V1 6X FC US IB OF

6GK1907-0DC10-6AA3

PROFIBUS bus connector RS 485 (35°) 6ES7972-0BA41-0XA0

with PROFIBUS FC standard cable 6XV1830-0EH10

PROFINET IO communication over IWLAN RCoax system with connection to PROFIBUS

3/14


G_IK10_XX_30121

6XV1840-2AH10

Power M12 cable connector PRO PR




■ Technical specifications IWLAN RCoax cables

2.4 GHz for distant field

5 GHz for near field

Applications

Monorail overhead conveyors, cranes, high-bay racking control units or similar

Monorail overhead conveyors, cranes, high-bay racking control units or similar

50 Ω

50 Ω

• 2.4 GHz

17.0 dB/100 m

–

• 5.15 GHz

–

24.0 dB/100 m

• 5.85 GHz

–

28.0 dB/100 m

Cable diameter

15.5 mm

15.5 mm

Sheath

Polyethylene, pastel turquoise

Polyethylene, pastel turquoise


-40 °C .. +85 °C

-40 °C … +85 °C


-70 °C … +85 °C

-70 °C … +85 °C


-25 °C … +60 °C

-25 °C … +60 °C

Electrical data (at 20 °C) Impedance

3

Nominal longitudinal attenuation 1)

Mechanical data


Smallest bending radius (once only) 20 cm

20 cm


1100 N

1100 N

Weight

0.232 kg/m

0.232 kg/m

Recommended mounting distance

0.5 m

0.5 m

• Low corrosive gas emission

IEC 60754-2

IEC 60754-2

• Flame retardant

IEC 60332-1 and IEC 60332-3 Cat. C

IEC 60332-1 and IEC 60332-3 Cat. C

• Low smoke emission

IEC 61034

IEC 61034

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes

Behavior in fire

1) For applications that require the RCoax cable to be routed in the close vicinity of metal (e.g. aluminum rails), the attenuation parameters are higher


3/15



■ Ordering data

3

Order No.

• 2.4 GHz

6XV1 875-2A

• 5 GHz

6XV1 875-2D

Accessories IWLAN RCoax N-Connect stripping tool Stripping tool for fast stripping of RCoax cable on site

6GK1 901-1PH00

RCoax N-Connect female N-connector Plug connector for assembly on site; connection unit of RCoax cable for connection of further components, N-female connection.

6GK5 798-0CN00-0AA0

RCoax N-Connect male termination impedance Terminating resistor for RCoax cable, 50 Ohm impedance, N-male connection

6GK5 795-1TN00-1AA0

RCoax N-Connect/R-SMA Male/male flexible connection cable Flexible cable for connection of RCoax cable or antenna to a SCALANCE W-700 Access Point; assembled with N-Connect male and R-SMA male connectors 6XV1 875-5CH10

•5m

6XV1 875-5CH50

RCoax N-Connect male/male Flexible connection cable Flexible cable for connection of two RCoax cables; assembled with two N-Connect male connectors 6XV1 875-5AH10

•5m

6XV1 875-5AH50

RCoax R-SMA/SMA male/male Flexible connection cable Flexible cable for connecting an IWLAN/PB Link PN IO to components with RSMA and SMA connections, e.g. cabinet feedthrough; assembled with two R-SMA male to SMA male connectors 6XV1 875-5DE30


6GK5 792-4DN00-0AA6

IWLAN RCoax N-Connect female Antenna ANT793-4MN RCoax 5/8 antenna with vertical polarization for RCoax systems; 5 GHz; N-Connect female connection; degree of protection IP67; ambient temperature -20 °C … +60 °C

6GK5 793-4MN00-0AA6

RCoax N-Connect female Power splitter 2-way cable splitter, Y-element for dividing the RCoax cable

6GK5 798-0SN00-0EA0

RCoax N-Connect male/male Coupler RF coupling for connecting an RCoax antenna to an RCoax cable; two N-Connect male connectors

6GK5 798-0CP00-1AA0

• 10 dB

6GK5 798-0AP00-4CA0

RCoax N-Connect/SMA Female/female Panel feedthrough Panel feedthrough for wall thicknesses up to 5.5 mm, SMA female and N-Connect female connections

6GK5 798-0PT00-2AA0

IWLAN RCoax cable clip 1/2" Cable holder for RCoax cable

•1m

3/16

IWLAN RCoax N-Connect female Antenna ANT792-4DN RCoax helical antenna with circular polarization for RCoax systems; 2.4 GHz; N-Connect female connection; antenna gain 1 dB at 2.4 GHz; degree of protection IP67; ambient temperature -20 °C … +60 °C

RCoax N-Connect male/female Attenuator Attenuator with N-Connect male/ N-Connect female connectors

•1m

• 0.3 m


IWLAN RCoax cables Radiating cables for complex radio environments as special antenna for SCALANCE W Access Points; for wider temperature range (-40 °C … + 85 °C); sold by the meter (minimum order quantity 20 m)

• 10 pieces

6GK5 798-8MB00-0AC1

• 100 pieces

6GK5 798-8MB00-0AM1

IWLAN RCoax threaded washer M6 Threaded washer M6 for RCoax cable clip 1/2", for assembly with M6 threaded bolts • 10 pieces

6GK5 798-8MC00-0AC1

• 100 pieces

6GK5 798-8MC00-0AM1

IWLAN RCoax spacer 85 mm Spacer 85 mm for RCoax cable clip 1/2" • 10 pieces

6GK5 798-8MD00-0AC1

• 100 pieces

6GK5 798-8MD00-0AM1



■ Ordering data

Order No.

Additional components IWLAN/PB Link PN IO Network transition between Industrial Wireless LAN and PROFIBUS with PROFINET IO functionality, TCP/IP, S7 routing, 10/100 Mbit/s Fast Ethernet, 9.6 to 12 Mbit/s PROFIBUS; including electronic manual on CD-ROM German, English, French, Spanish, Italian • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada

6GK1 417-5AB00 6GK1 417-5AB01

SCALANCE W-780 Access Points IWLAN Access Point with built-in radio interface; radio networks IEEE 802.11b/g/a/h at 2.4/5 GHz to 54 Mbit/s; national approvals; WPA/AES; Power over Ethernet (PoE), degree of protection IP65 (-20 °C … +60 °C); scope of supply: 2 antennas ANT795-4MR, IP67 hybrid plug-in connector, assembly material, manual on CD-ROM; German/English SCALANCE W788-1PRO IWLAN Access Point with one built-in radio interface • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada SCALANCE W788-2PRO IWLAN Dual Access Point with two built-in radio interfaces • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada SCALANCE W788-1RR IWLAN Access Point with one built-in radio interface for establishment of radio links with rapid roaming • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada SCALANCE W788-2RR IWLAN Dual Access Point with two built-in radio interfaces for establishment of radio links with rapid roaming or alternative operation on the HiPath wireless controller • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada

Order No. SCALANCE W-740 Client Modules IWLAN Ethernet client module with built-in radio interface; radio networks IEEE 802.11b/g/a/h at 2.4/5 GHz to 54 Mbit/s. National approvals; WPA/AES; Power over Ethernet (PoE), degree of protection IP65 (-20 °C to +60 °C); Scope of supply: Two ANT7954MR antennas, IP 67 hybrid plugin connector, assembly material, manual on CD ROM; German/English SCALANCE W744-1PRO For administration of the wireless connection of one device with Industrial Ethernet connection • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada SCALANCE W746-1PRO For administration of the wireless connection of up to eight devices with Industrial Ethernet connection • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada

6GK5 788-1ST00-2AA6 6GK5 788-1ST00-2AB6

SCALANCE W747-1RR For administration of the wireless connection with rapid roaming of up to eight devices with Industrial Ethernet connection • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada

3

6GK5 744-1ST00-2AA6 6GK5 744-1ST00-2AB6

6GK5 746-1ST00-2AA6 6GK5 746-1ST00-2AB6

6GK5 747-1SR00-2AA6 6GK5 747-1SR00-2AB6

6GK5 788-2ST00-2AA6 6GK5 788-2ST00-2AB6

6GK5 788-1SR00-2AA6 6GK5 788-1SR00-2AB6

6GK5 788-2SR00-2AA6 6GK5 788-2SR00-2AB6

Note:

Current approvals can be found in the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info


3/17


Network components for IWLAN SCALANCE W-780 Access Points

■ Overview

■ Benefits

3

• SCALANCE W-780 Access Points are optimally suitable for designing Industrial Wireless LANs (IWLAN) with reliable communication and for use in the PROFINET environment. • In conformance with standards by supporting of IEEE 802.11, with additional functional expansions especially for use in industrial environments • Rugged metal housing and degree of protection IP65 for protection against the ingress of water and dust; also for outdoor use at -20°C to +60°C (resistant to condensation) • Protection against unauthorized access, espionage, tapping and falsification thanks to WPA2/IEEE 802.11i and 128-bit encoding (AES) • Optional operation at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz with data rates of up to 54 Mbit/s in one device • Several operating modes in one device: - set up of wide area wireless networks (infrastructure) with ranges of up to 30 m indoors (about 100 m outdoors) - point-to-point connection of Industrial Ethernet segments over large distances (several 100 m) • Support during configuration provided by wizard and online help. • Simple management with Web server and SNMP • Fast replacement of devices in event of failure, by means of optional C-PLUG (configuration plug) switching medium • Comprehensive accessories with antennae, plugs, cables including RCoax cable (fiber-optic cable) for controlled emittance of the transmitted power

3/18


IWLAN is ideally suited to demanding industrial applications with requirements for reliable radio communication: • Predictable data traffic (strict real-time requirements) and defined response times on the radio link • Reliable radio link, e.g. through redundant connection, automatic roaming in event of interruption in connection to Industrial Ethernet (forced roaming), cyclic monitoring of radio link (link check) or monitoring for IP connections (IP alive) • Cost savings due to a separate radio network for reliable operation of a process as well as for critical process data (e.g. alarm signals), as well as for non-critical communication (e.g. service and diagnostics) • High degree of investment security because all products are compatible with the internationally recognized industrial standard IEEE 802.11 and suitable for 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz • Fast commissioning of new plant items due to reduced amount of work for installing the communication network • No wear on rotating and moving devices, or plant components • Cost-effective connection to devices which are remote, difficult to access or in hostile environments • Suitable for industrial environments, e.g. thanks to rugged metal enclosure, industrial approvals (e.g. UL, FM, CE, explosion protection Zone 2 (Atex), E1 (vehicles), PCS 7, EN 50155 (trains and trams)) and resistance to condensation • Increased plant availability through non-contact and thus wear-free data transmission to mobile communication partners with RCoax cable • Uniform radio network throughout the company sectors for voice and data; cost savings resulting from central management, simple installation and reliable startup



The SCALANCE W-700 products offer a reliable radio connection, versatile redundancy mechanisms, and fast transfer of stations from one access point to the next (roaming). In this manner, processes can be monitored and production failures through machine downtimes avoided. In addition, Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN) can be used in time-critical applications associated with production automation (PROFINET). Due to the high degree of protection IP65 and the extended temperature range from -20 … +60 °C, the products are suitable for use in the food and beverages industry (cooling technology) and in logistics. SCALANCE W products are silicone-free and can therefore also be used in paint plants. When using the RCoax cable (fiber-optic cable), operation is also possible in conveying technology and all track applications (e.g. local public transport). SCALANCE W788-2RR can be additionally used for operation with the HiPath wireless controller, thus opening up the advantages of this architecture to industrial and outdoor areas. Application examples: • Automated guided vehicles and overhead conveyors; prevention of wear and high flexibility in the choice of route thanks to wireless transmission of data to the vehicles • Crane; high flexibility through access to data communication with the moving unit independent of the location • Mobile control desk; reliable intervention in the process thanks to data communication over IWLAN with mobile units; the number of operator panels is therefore determined by the number of personnel and no longer by the number of control desks. • Wireless access to field devices for configuration and testing without the need for time-consuming modifications in the control cabinet • Access to service and maintenance drawings on-site; immediate updating of the measures performed in the system over IWLAN; Optimized processes and reduced error quotas thanks to online information regardless of the location of the machine • Communication with moving stations (e.g. mobile controls and devices), storage and retrieval machines, conveyor systems, conveyor belts, rotating machines, trucks • Wireless coupling of communication segments for fast startup or for cost-effective networks in which cable routing would be extremely expensive (e.g. on public roads, rivers, lakes, train lines) • Public transport (underground and suburban trains, buses); reliable use of the products in applications with high temperature and mechanical stability demands; optimum radio field through controlled emission of output power with RCoax cable (radiating cable)

■ Design • Wireless card (compatible with IEEE 802.11b/g and IEEE 802.11a/h) permanently installed in device • Two omnidirectional antennas ANT795-4MR (omnidirectional characteristics) bolted to housing (R-SMA) (included in delivery). These two antennas can be replaced by antennas from the SCALANCE W-700 range, retaining antenna diversity. • Robust metal housing, shock and vibration-proof for severe mechanical loading • Designed without rotating parts (e.g. operation without fans) • High level of protection against dust and splashwater with degree of protection IP65 • Ambient temperatures from -20°C … +60°C • Resistant to condensation • Redundant energy feed via screw-fit M12 connectors (19 … 57 V DC) • For operation on 100 V … 240 V AC line network, the PS7911PRO is available. It can simply be bolted on with the SCALANCE W products • Construction and design appropriate to field of application with SIMATIC control components • Function LEDs for optical signaling of faults and operating states • Wall mounting; a 90 mm length of S7-300 DIN rail (assembled vertically) can be used to assist mounting (screws included in scope of supply). If mounting is to be made on a horizontal S7-300 DIN rail, the antenna characteristic must be taken into account. When mounting in a control cabinet, remote antennae must be used (Faraday cage). Hybrid cable and plug connectors • One cable for voltage supply and data (Ethernet): - 24 V DC voltage supply and Industrial Ethernet interface via the IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 and the IE FC Modular Outlet with Power Insert - Power-over-Ethernet compliant with IEEE 802.3af with vibration-proof IP67 Hybrid connector (included) • IP67 Hybrid connector 2x antennas, detachable

with SCALANCE W788-2PRO: 2x additional sockets for separate antennas

back: C-PLUG

energy hybrid socket

wallmounting

protective clip 10/100 Mbit/s Industrial Ethernet

redundant energy

G_IK10_XX_30019

■ Application

Design and interfaces of the SCALANCE W-780 Access Points


3/19

3



■ Design (continued) 24 V DC and data transmission on two separate lines (4-core and 2-core)

Redundant 24 V DC and data transmission on one line (8-core and 2-core)

90 V 265 V AC and data transmission on two separate lines (4-core and 3-core)

(8-core)

Installation of only one line

48 V DC and data transmission on one line (Power over Ethernet) according to IEEE 802.3af (4-core, modulated)

Data and power on two separate lines


Operation with 90 V 265 V AC

Operation with Power over Ethernet (PoE)

(8-core)

IP67 hybrid plug connector with IE hybrid cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 IP67 hybrid plug connector with IE standard cable 2x2 Power M12 cable connector with energy cable 2x0.75 Power Supply PS791-1PRO Use

G_IK10_XX_30122

3

24 V DC and data transmission on one line

Possibilities for power supply from SCALANCE W access points/client modules

■ Function The SCALANCE W-700 products support the following functions of an IWLAN wireless connection: • Predictable data traffic (strict real-time requirements) and defined response times on the radio link • Cyclic monitoring of wireless link between Access Point and node for fast recognition of fault states • Redundancy mechanisms for reliable wireless infrastructure • Antenna diversity for very good reception in difficult areas for radio signals • Optional use of separate antennas for customer-specific requirements • Automatic switching back to lower data rates if quality of connection is reduced With the SCALANCE W products, a wireless network with approval in more than 30 countries is set up in the license-free ISM bands at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz. This wireless network permits a very reliable radio connection via IWLAN at up to 54 Mbit/s. SCALANCE W supports the IEEE 802.11h standard that includes the stringent ETSI requirements of the European countries.

3/20


Security A high degree of data security is achieved by means of the modern mechanisms of Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA2/IEEE 802.11i). These define modern procedures that control a regular exchange of the complete 128-bit code, but also perform the user authentication of a node. The Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) is available for data encryption. All encryption mechanisms are already integrated in the products and do not incur any additional costs. If a security concept with Virtual Private Networks (VPN) or the SCALANCE S range is required, the products can be integrated without any difficulty.



■ Function (continued) Product versions SCALANCE W788-1PRO A wireless network can already be designed using one single W788-1PRO Access Point (infrastructure mode). The Access Point provides an Industrial Ethernet interface for connection to the wireline network. Users, such as mobile controllers, the

Internet Pad MOBIC or a Field PG can move freely within the radio cells and exchange data with other users through the Access Point.

Industrial Ethernet

S7-300

S7-400

SIMATIC HMI


PROFIBUS

SCALANCE W 788-1PRO ET 200S

MOBIC with CP 1515

G_IK10_XX_30003

S7-300

Radio cell

Mobile devices (e.g. MOBIC and Field PG) simultaneously access the automation network through a wireless connection via the Access Point.


3/21

3



■ Function (continued) If the radio field of a single Access Point (radio cell) is insufficient, it can be expanded by further Access Points. It should be ensured that the individual radio cells overlap so that moving users are passed from one Access Point to the next without gaps

3

Radio cell 1

(roaming). This happens transparently for the application. The Access Points must be able to exchange data over Ethernet if a Wireless Distribution System, WDS, is not used.

Radio cell 2 S7-400

Industrial Ethernet Access Point SCALANCE W788-1PRO

Access Point SCALANCE W788-1PRO Field PG/ Notebook with CP 7515


SIMATIC HMI

SIMATIC HMI

S7-300

Automatic Guided Vehicle System (AGVS)

Roaming of moving units (e.g. Field PG and mobile controller) in a radio network with two Access Points

3/22


G_IK10_XX_30004

PC




■ Function (continued) If the Access Points cannot be connected to Industrial Ethernet using a wired connection (e.g. no cable route available for data line), the operating mode "Wireless Distribution System" must be

selected. In this case a SCALANCE W788-1PRO Access Point can communicate with up to eight other Access Points which are not connected to the data network by a direct wired connection.

3

IE Client Module SCALANCE W746-1PRO S7-300 with CP 343-1

Notebook with CP 7515

Central Access Point Access Point SCALANCE W788-2PRO SCALANCE W788-1PRO

Access Point SCALANCE W788-2PRO IE Client Module SCALANCE W747-1RR

ET 200S

MOBIC with CP 1515

Access Point SCALANCE W788-2PRO G_IK10_XX_30016


Industrial Ethernet Wireless Distribution System with four remote Access Points without direct wired connection to the rest of the data network

In this configuration, a radio interface of each of the four W7882PRO Access Points and the W788-1PRO Access Point establish a Wireless Distribution System (WDS). The access points can be mutually accessed. The second radio interface of the four W788-2PRO Access Points is used to establish a radio cell at the location of the respective SCALANCE W788-2PRO for operation of users. The minimum distance necessary between the antennae must be observed. Each user can communicate with another user (even in the other radio cells). In a Wireless Distribution System, all Access Points must share the bandwidth of one radio channel. If users are to additionally gain access to the system via this WDS, the performance demands of the individual connections must be exactly checked.

A special version of a Wireless Distribution System (WDS) is the point-to-point connection. In this operating mode two Ethernet segments are coupled by means of a radio link, if it is difficult to install cables (e.g. across public roads). By replacing the two antennae included in the scope of supply by optionally available directional antennae, ranges of several 100 m can be achieved outdoors.


3/23



■ Function (continued) SCALANCE W788-2PRO

S7-300 with CP 343-1

"Redundancy mode" In this operating mode, two Industrial Ethernet segments are coupled and the data stream is transmitted in parallel by the two wireless cards. If , for example, the frequency band at 2.4 GHz is chosen for one wireless card and 5 GHz for the other, a radio link with maximum reliability is implemented.

S7-300 with CP 343-1

PG

Industrial Ethernet

Industrial Ethernet

ET 200S


2,4 GHz 5 GHz

Redundancy mode with SCALANCE W788-2PRO for a very reliable point-to-point connection

Existing wireless networks that have been set up using the Radio Link Module (RLM) can easily be expanded with SCALANCE W788-1PRO and SCALANCE W788-2PRO.

3/24



G_IK10_XX_30022

3

In the Dual Access Point SCALANCE W788-2PRO, two access points are integrated in one housing. This enables a variety of applications to be implemented economically. The product is particularly suitable for designing a radio network with redundancy in applications requiring increased reliability. This possibility is extended by use of the Spanning Tree (ST) mechanism. If a fault occurs on one connection, the wireless network automatically finds a redundant path. A high level of operational security is then achieved.



■ Function (continued) SCALANCE W788-1RR The functionality of the SCALANCE W788-1RR Access Point corresponds to that of the SCALANCE W788-1PRO Industrial Wireless LAN Access Point. In addition, SCALANCE W788-1RR permits provision of a radio field enabling extremely fast transfer of moving users from one radio cell to the next (Rapid Roaming). The transfer is so fast that even PROFINET IO communication is possible without interruption during the roaming (updating times up to 20 ms). Furthermore, a radio field is made available which permits prediction of the access by users, thus permitting a strict real-time response for up to 50 users at the Access Point. In order to achieve very short transfer times, rapid roaming is only made available in the radio field of a RCoax cable because – in contrast to the radio field with antennae – a radio field is available which has a significantly better definition and reliability.

A corresponding interface must be present on the wireless users which can communicate with the Access Point (e.g. IWLAN/PB Link PN IO). Since the IEEE 802.11 standard does not support rapid roaming, a radio field with special mechanisms must be implemented for this. Therefore a device in conformance with IEEE 802.11 (Wi-Fi) cannot be operated in a radio field with rapid roaming. However, this presents the advantage that the known WLAN hacker tools cannot detect such a radio field. This results in particular data integrity, and all advantages of standard wireless LAN chipsets are retained at the same time (e.g. data security, modulation procedure). Note: Although the IWLAN radio field of SCALANCE W788-1PRO also permits PROFINET IO communication, a delay time of several 100 ms – resulting from roaming in conformance with IEEE 802.11 – prevents fault-free handling of the PROFINET IO communication with fast updating times for this short period. Delay times of several 100 ms are encountered with all devices conforming to IEEE 802.11.

SIMATIC S7-400 with CP 443-1 Advanced


RCoax cable segment 1

Antenna ANT792-4DN IWLAN/PB Link PN IO

PROFIBUS

Access Point SCALANCE W788-1RR RCoax cable segment 2

ET 200S with IM 151 CPU




PROFIBUS

Antenna ANT792-4DN


IWLAN/PB IWL Link PN IO

PROFIBUS

G_IK10_XX_300333


Monorail overhead conveyor

Fast transfer of the users from one RCoax cable segment to the next using rapid roaming

PROFINET IO is being increasingly used with overhead conveyors since the cyclic data transfer greatly supports control of the moving suspension gear. To avoid the problems associated with the wear of sliding contacts, non-contact connections are being increasingly used for this application. In order to transmit cyclic communication data with fixed updating times, it is necessary for the radio network to also support this performance. Industrial Wireless LAN with rapid roaming can be optimally used to this end.

Note: SCALANCE W788-1RR can also be configured conforming to the IEEE 802.11 standard as an alternative to operation of an IWLAN radio field. Rapid roaming is then impossible.


3/25

3



■ Function (continued) SCALANCE W788-2RR 2RR Dual Access Point that one radio card is operated in IWLAN mode with rapid roaming and the other with Industrial Wireless LAN conforming to IEEE 802.11. The control unit (e.g. MOBIC) can then access the SCALANCE W788-2RR Dual Access Point via the Industrial Wireless LAN interface, and then transmit its data transparently via this device and the IWLAN RR radio card on the RCoax cable to the moving vehicles.

Radio cell Access Point SCALANCE W788-2RR RCoax cable

Antenna ANT792-4DN

Via IWLAN (IEEE 802.11), the field PG accesses a radio interface of SCALANCE W788-2RR for configuring, the other interface of SCALANCE W788-2RR carries out communication with the RCoax cable using rapid roaming.

Diagnostics and management • Web-based (HTTP Server) management tool for configuration and diagnosis using a standard browser • LEDs for signaling operating and fault states • Signaling of faults by means of SNMP trap or e-mail to a network management tool • Bolt-on shaft on the rear panel of the device for the optional replacement medium C-PLUG (configuration plug) for simple replacement of the module without a programming device in the event of failure

3/26


G_IK10_XX_30007

Suspension gear 5

Suspension gear 4

Suspension gear 3

Field PG/Notebook with CP 7515

Suspension gear 2

IWLAN/PB Link PN IO

Suspension gear 1

3

With the SCALANCE W788-2RR Dual Access Point, the functionalities of a SCALANCE W788-1RR and a SCALANCE W7881PRO are integrated in one housing. This enables a variety of applications to be implemented economically. If an application which solves fast roaming of mobile users or vehicles using IWLAN and rapid roaming is to be administered or configured using devices conforming to IEEE 802.11 (e.g. field PG, MOBIC), the possibility is provided by the SCALANCE W788-



■ Integration In addition to the standard scope of supply for SCALANCE W-700, this system configuration uses a hybrid cable (to be ordered in addition) and the FC Modular Outlet with Power Insert (assembly in the Outlet possible in the field). The hybrid plug connector from the scope of supply can be configured on site by the user.

SCALANCE X-400

If the power supply is not connected via the hybrid connector, power must be applied via the redundant supply and a Power M12 Cable Connector PRO (to be ordered separately, see accessories). 24 V DC IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet Power Insert

If a 100 … 240 V AC supply is available, the PS791-1PRO is used. A connecting cable to SCALANCE W-700 and an AC plug are included in the scope of supply (AC cable is not supplied).


Note: A standard RJ45 plug can also be used in the housing socket of the hybrid connector. However, the degree of protection IP65 is then lost. SCALANCE W-700 additionally supports both options of the Power-over-Ethernet standard IEEE 802.3af G_IK10_XX_10087

IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0,34 SCALANCE W788-1PRO

Data and power supply via a hybrid cable with SCALANCE W-700

■ Technical specifications Standards

Transmission rates dependent on national approval

• IEEE 802.11b

2.412 - 2.462 GHz, 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbit/s; 50 mW (17 dBm), up to 100 mW (20 dBm) with antenna, depending on national approval, can be reduced in stepsr

• IEEE 802.11g

2.412 - 2.462 GHz, 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbit/s; 50 mW (17 dBm), up to 100 mW (20 dBm) with antenna, depending on national approval, can be reduced in steps

• IEEE 802.11a/h

5.15 - 5.25 GHz, 5.25 - 5.35 GHz, 5.7 - 5.8 GHz, 6, 9 , 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbit/s; 50 mW (17 dBm), up to 100 mW (20 dBm) or 1000 mW (30 dBm) with antenna, depending on national approval, can be reduced in steps

Type

SCALANCE W788-1PRO

SCALANCE W788-2PRO

SCALANCE W788-1RR

SCALANCE W788-2RR

Installed radio card

1

2

1

2

• IEEE 802.11b

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• IEEE 802.11g

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• IEEE 802.11a/h

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• Data transfer with strict real-time requirements (predictable)

Yes, additional priority assignment with IEEE 802.11e and WMM




• VLAN

No

No

8x SSIDs with 8 VLANs each

8x SSIDs with 8 VLANs each

• Redundant radio connection

No

Yes

No

Yes

• Cyclic link check

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• Monitoring for IP connections (IP Alive)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• Automatic roaming when the connection to Industrial Ethernet is interrupted (Forced Roaming)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Wireless approvals

Current approvals can be found in the Internet at http:/www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info

Rapid Roaming

No

Yes

Yes

Transmission rate according to

Industrial Wireless LAN

No


3/27

3




SCALANCE W788-1PRO

SCALANCE W788-2PRO

SCALANCE W788-1RR

SCALANCE W788-2RR

IE Hybrid socket (IP65); RJ45 connection




Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Interfaces • Industrial Ethernet via

3

• External antenna connections - 2 x R-SMA with two screwed-on Yes ANT795-4MR antennae (omnidirectional characteristics); replaceable - 2 x R-SMA antenna connections No for the second radio card (antennae not included in scope of supply) • Connection for redundant supply voltage

4-pole M12 interface 24 V DC (A-coded)





C-PLUG

C-PLUG

C-PLUG

C-PLUG

• Power-over-Ethernet (PoE)

48 V DC (IEEE 802.3af), 24 V DC

48 V DC (IEEE 802.3af), 24 V DC

48 V DC (IEEE 802.3af), 24 V DC

48 V DC (IEEE 802.3af), 24 V DC

• M12 Power Connector (A-coded) for redundant power supply

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

• IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34

19 V to 57 V DC power supply: IE FC RJ45 modular outlet with power insert




Power loss

10 W

10 W

10 W

10 W


IP65

IP65

IP65

IP65


-20 °C to +60 °C (resistant to condensation)





-40 °C to +70 °C

-40 °C to +70 °C

-40 °C to +70 °C

-40 °C to +70 °C

• Relative humidity in operation

100 %

100 %

100 %

100 %

• Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm - without antenna

125 x 90 x 118

125 x 90 x 118

125 x 90 x 118

125 x 90 x 118

• Weight

1.05 kg

1.07 kg

1.05 kg

1.07 kg

Software

Web-based Manager

Web-based Manager

Web-based Manager

Web-based Manager

Data security

WEP, WPA2/IEEE 802.11i with AES and TKIP, EAP-TLS, EAP, TTLS, EAP-PEAP, EAP-MD5, EAP-MSChapv2, MAC filter, admin password, IEEE 802.1x




Power supply

Permissible ambient conditions

Construction

3/28




■ Ordering data

Order No.

SCALANCE W-780 Access Points IWLAN Access Points with built-in radio interfaces; radio networks IEEE 802.11b/g/a/h at 2.4/5 GHz to 54 Mbit/s. National approvals; WPA2/AES; Power over Ethernet (PoE), degree of protection IP65 (-20 °C … +60 °C); scope of supply: 2 antennas ANT795-4MR, IP67 hybrid plug-in connector, assembly material, manual on CD ROM; German/English SCALANCE W788-1PRO IWLAN Access Point with one built-in radio interface • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada

6GK5 788-1ST00-2AA6

SCALANCE W788-2PRO IWLAN Dual Access Point with two built-in radio interfaces • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada

6GK5 788-2ST00-2AA6

SCALANCE W788-1RR IWLAN Access Point with one built-in radio interface for establishment of radio links with rapid roaming • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada SCALANCE W788-2RR IWLAN Dual Access Point with two built-in radio interfaces for establishment of radio links with rapid roaming or alternative operation on the HiPath wireless controller • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada

6GK5 788-1ST00-2AB6

6GK5 788-2ST00-2AB6

6GK5 788-1SR00-2AA6 6GK5 788-1SR00-2AB6

6GK5 788-2SR00-2AA6 6GK5 788-2SR00-2AB6

SCALANCE W-740 Client Modules IWLAN Ethernet client module with built-in radio interface; radio networks IEEE 802.11b/g/a/h at 2.4/5 GHz to 54 Mbit/s. National approvals; WPA/AES; Power over Ethernet (PoE), degree of protection IP65 (-20 °C to +60 °C); Scope of supply: Two ANT7954MR antennas, IP67 hybrid plugin connector, assembly material, manual on CD ROM; German/English SCALANCE W744-1PRO For administration of the wireless connection of one device with Industrial Ethernet connection • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada

Order No. SCALANCE W746-1PRO For administration of the wireless connection of up to eight devices with Industrial Ethernet connection • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada SCALANCE W747-1RR For administration of the wireless connection with rapid roaming of up to eight devices with Industrial Ethernet connection • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada

6GK5 746-1ST00-2AA6

6GK5 747-1SR00-2AA6 6GK5 747-1SR00-2AB6

IE FC RJ45 modular outlet with power insert Fast Connect RJ45 modular outlet for Industrial Ethernet with a replaceable insert for 1 x 24 V and 1 x 100 Mbit/s interface

6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA3

IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 4-wire, shielded installation cable; sold by the meter, up to 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

6XV1 870-2J

IE FC Standard Cable GP 2 x 2 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug; PROFINET-compatible; with UL approval; sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

6XV1 840-2AH10

IWLAN RCoax cables Radiating cable for complex radio environments as special antenna for SCALANCE W Access Points; for wider temperature range (-40 °C … + 85 °C); sold by the meter (minimum order quantity 20 m) • 2.4 GHz • 5 GHz

3

6GK5 746-1ST00-2AB6

6XV1 875-2A 6XV1 875-2D

IP67 hybrid connector Connector for connecting SCALANCE W-700 to Industrial Ethernet and Power over Ethernet (PoE), with assembly instructions, 1 piece

09 45 125 1300.00 Order directly from: HARTING Deutschland GmbH & Co. KG PO Box 24-51 D -32381 Minden Tel. +49 571-8896-0 Fax. +49 571-8896-354 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.HARTING.com

Power M12 Cable Connector PRO Terminal socket for connection of SCALANCE W-700 for 24 V DC supply voltage; 4-pole, a-coded, with assembly instructions, 3 pcs.

6GK1 907-0DC10-6AA3

6GK5 744-1ST00-2AA6 6GK5 744-1ST00-2AB6


3/29



■ Ordering data

Order No.

3


Accessories Power supply PS791-1PRO AC/DC power supply, 10 W, IP65 (-20 … +60°C), input: 90 V … 265 V AC, output: 24 V DC, metal housing; scope of supply: AC power 3+PE cable connector, DC power cord M12, installation materials, instruction manual German/English

6GK5 791-1PS00-0AA6

Antenna ANT793-8DR Antenna with strong directional effect; antenna gain incl. R-SMA plug and 5 m cable 14 dBi, IP65 (-30°C … +50°C), 5 GHz, US/Canadian approvals, mounting material for wall and mast mounting; with termination impedance 1 x TI795-1R, manual on CD-ROM; English/German

6GK5 793-8DR00-0AB6

CP 7515 communications processor PCMCIA card (32-bit; CardBus) for connecting a PG/PC/notebook to Industrial Wireless LAN acc. to IEEE 802.11b/g/a (2.4/5 GHz, up to 54 Mbit/s), and national approvals; incl. Client Manager and driver for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server, XP Professional, 2003 Server; manual on CD-ROM; German/English

6GK1 751-5AA00

TI795-1R Termination Impedance Antenna termination impedance 50 ohm for terminating the second R-SMA antenna socket, when operating a SCALANCE W-700 radio interface with only one antenna, IP65 (-20 °C … +60 °C); 3 items

6GK5 795-1TR00-0AA6

IE Hybrid RJ45 Socket Dust Cover Dust cap for RJ45 port socket (Industrial Ethernet/PoE) of SCALANCE W-700

6ES7 194-1JB10-0XA0

ANT795-4MR Antenna Antenna with omni-directional characteristic; antenna gain incl. R-SMA plug 4-5 dBi, IP65 (-20 … +60°C), 2.4/5 GHz, national approvals, direct mounting on SCALANCE W788-1PRO, W788-2PRO, W744-1PRO, manual on CD-ROM; English/German

6GK5 795-4MR00-0AA6

ANT795-6MR Antenna Antenna with omni-directional characteristic; antenna gain incl. R-SMA plug and 5 m cable 3 dBi, IP65 (-30 … +50°C), 2.4/5 GHz national approvals, mounting material for wall and mast mounting with 1 x TI795-1R termination resistor, manual on CD-ROM; English/German

6GK5 795-6MR00-0AA6

ANT792-8DR Antenna Antenna with directivity; antenna gain incl. R-SMA plug, IP65 (-20 °C … +60 °C), 2.4 GHz, US/Canadian approvals, mounting material for wall and mast mounting; with termination impedance 1 x TI795-1R, manual on CD-ROM; English/German • With 5 m cable 10 dBi • Without cable

3/30


IWLAN antenna extension cable FRNC Cable preassembled with two R-SMA plugs, for extension of the antennae of the ANT790 versions complete with installation cable, cable attenuation 2.5 dBi •5m • 15 m

6XV1 875-3FH50 6XV1 875-3FN15

LP798-1PRO Lightning Protector Lightning protection element with R-SMA plug for the ANT790 antennae, IP65 (-40 … +100 °C)

6GK5 798-1LP00-0AA6

C-PLUG Configuration plug, swap medium for simple replacement of the module in the event of a fault; for storing configuration or engineering and application data; can be used for SIMATIC NET products with C-PLUG slot

6GK1 900-0AB00

■ More information You can order components supplementary to the SIMATIC NET cabling range from your local contact. Technical advice on this subject is available from: J. Hertlein A&D SE PS Tel. +49 (0)911/750 44 65 Fax +49 ( 0911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]

6GK5 792-8DR00-0AA6 6GK5 792-8DR01-0AA6


Network components for IWLAN SCALANCE W-780 Access Points and WLAN Controller

■ Overview

■ Benefits

• Uniform radio network throughout the company sectors for voice and data; cost savings resulting from central management, simple installation and reliable startup

■ Application Plant-wide radio network using HiPath Wireless in the office, outdoor and industrial areas; seamless operation of mobile phones, laptops and mobile controllers in one and the same network while adhering to the security policies for the various user groups and ensuring a defined quality of service (QoS) for a variety of devices.

SCALANCE W788-2RR can be used for operation with the HiPath wireless controller, thus opening up the advantages of this architecture to industrial and outdoor areas. • Use with HiPath wireless LAN controller for comprehensive solutions in office and production environments. Integration of optiPoint WLAN phones (Voice over WLAN) is possible • SCALANCE W788-2RR can alternatively be operated on the HiPath wireless controller, and downloads its firmware from there (rapid roaming function and IWLAN data recording are then unavailable)


3/31

3



■ Function The HiPath wireless controller offers central management. It connects, manages and coordinates all access point and clients such that the WLAN environment appears like several individual IP subnetworks with central management. The individual connections are additionally managed here, and the stations can therefore move reliably throughout the complete radio network.

Office network

Automation network

transitionless roaming between office and industry optiPoint WL2 professional


S7-300 with CP 343-1



HiPath Wireless Access Point 2610



Router

HiPath wireless controller

Transition-free roaming between office and industrial networks

3/32



S7-400 with CP 443-1

G_IK10_XX_30142

3

Through adjustment in the Web interface, SCALANCE W7882RR offers an alternative possibility to operation on the HiPath wireless controller. This operating state is retained even following switching-off of the device, and the current firmware is automatically downloaded from the WLAN controller. The SCALANCE W788-2RR Access Point can also be reset to its original configuration.



■ Function (continued) The HiPath wireless controller permits the logical division of a single radio infrastructure into logical networks (Virtual Network Services, VNS). Various services, security requirements and access possibilities can then be reliably assigned to the stations, and different user groups such as administrators, commissioning engineers or guests can use the same radio network.



Office optiPoint WL2 professional

HiPath Wireless Access Point 2610 Access Point SCALANCE W788-1PRO

VNS Voice


Access Point SCALANCE W788-1PRO VNS Voice

VNS Voice

G_IK10_XX_30144

VNS Voice

3

WDS Wireless Distribution System

Office


Different applications such as voice, Internet or PLCs can thus be operated within the same infrastructure, resulting in optimum utilization of the radio network. For applications with high reliability demands, the HiPath wireless controller can be operated with a redundant device.

Router HiPath wireless controller

Linking of a remote office in a HiPath wireless infrastructure

In order to supplement a HiPath wireless infrastructure by a remote area with wireless connection (see picture above), the SCALANCE W788-1PRO Access Point is used. This access point operates in the mode known from SCALANCE W, and uses a wireless distribution system (WDS). In the above picture, the two SCALANCE W788-1PRO Access Points pass the data to and from the HiPath wireless controller, and cannot be administered and monitored centrally.

Diagnostics and management Central management for operation with HiPath wireless for configuration, fault recording, monitoring and documentation of statistics


3/33




3

Standards


• IEEE 802.11b

2.412 - 2.462 GHz, 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbit/s; 50 mW (17 dBm), up to 100 mW (20 dBm) with antenna, depending on national approval, can be reduced in steps

• IEEE 802.11g

2.412 - 2.462 GHz, 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbit/s; 50 mW (17 dBm), up to 100 mW (20 dBm) with antenna, depending on national approval, can be reduced in steps

• IEEE 802.11a/h

5.15 - 5.25 GHz, 5.25 - 5.35 GHz, 5.7 - 5.8 GHz, 6, 9 , 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbit/s; 50 mW (17 dBm), up to 100 mW (20 dBm) or 1000 mW (30 dBm) with antenna, depending on national approval, can be reduced in steps

Type

SCALANCE W788-2RR Operation on the HiPath wireless controller

Installed radio card

2

Transmission rate according to

Type

SCALANCE W788-2RR Operation on the HiPath wireless controller

Power supply • Power-over-Ethernet (PoE)

48 V DC (IEEE 802.3af), 24 V DC

• IEEE 802.11b

Yes

• IEEE 802.11g

Yes


24 V DC

• IEEE 802.11a/h

Yes


Priority assignment only with IEEE 802.11e and WMM


Power loss

10 W

• VLAN

8x Virtual Network Services (VNS)


IP65/IP67

• Redundant radio connection

No


• Cyclic link check

No


• Monitoring for IP connections (IP Alive)

No



-40 °C to +70 °C


100 %

Industrial Wireless LAN • Data transfer with strict real-time requirements (predictable)

• Automatic roaming when the con- No nection to Industrial Ethernet is interrupted (Forced Roaming) Wireless approvals

Rapid Roaming

Current approvals can be found in the Internet at http:/www.siemens.com/ simatic-net/ik-info No

Interfaces • Industrial Ethernet via


• External antenna connections - 2 x R-SMA with two screwed-on Yes ANT795-4MR antennae (omnidirectional characteristics); replaceable - 2 x R-SMA antenna connections Yes for the second radio card (antennae not included in scope of supply) • Connection for redundant supply voltage


Slot for swap medium

C-PLUG

3/34


Construction • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm - without antenna

125 x 90 x 118

• Weight

1.07 kg

Software

HiPath wireless convergence software RF management

Data security

WEP, WPA2/IEEE 802.11i with AES and TKIP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP, EAP-MD5, MAC filter, IEEE 802.1x



■ Ordering data SCALANCE W788-2RR IWLAN Dual Access Point with two built-in radio interfaces for establishment of radio links with rapid roaming or alternative operation on the HiPath wireless controller • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada

Order No.

■ More information HiPath wireless controller, optiPoint WLAN phones and further access points for the office environment Additional information can be found in the Internet under http://www.siemens.com/hipath

3

6GK5 788-2SR00-2AA6 6GK5 788-2SR00-2AB6


3/35


Network components for IWLAN SCALANCE W-740 Client Modules

■ Overview

■ Benefits

3

• The Ethernet client modules from the SCALANCE W-740 range are optimally suitable for interfacing stations with Industrial Ethernet connection which are to be integrated into Industrial Wireless LANs (IWLAN) with reliable communication and into the PROFINET environment • In conformance with standards by supporting of IEEE 802.11, with additional functional expansions especially for use in industrial environments • Rugged metal housing and degree of protection IP65 for protection against the ingress of water and dust; also for outdoor use at -20 … +60°C (resistant to condensation) • Protection against unauthorized access, espionage, tapping and falsification thanks to WPA2/IEEE 802.11i and 128-bit encoding (AES) • Optional operation at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz with data rates of up to 54 Mbit/s • Support during configuration provided by wizard and online help. • Simple management with Web-Server and SNMP • Fast replacement of devices in event of failure, by means of optional C-PLUG (configuration plug) switching medium • Comprehensive accessories with antennae, plugs, cables including RCoax cable (fiber-optic cable) for controlled emittance of the transmitted power

IWLAN is ideally suited to demanding industrial applications with requirements for reliable radio communication: • Predictable data traffic (strict real-time requirements) and defined response times on the radio link • Reliable radio link, e.g. through redundant connection, automatic roaming in event of interruption in connection to Industrial Ethernet (forced roaming), cyclic monitoring of radio link (link check) or monitoring for IP connections (IP alive) • Cost savings due to a separate radio network for reliable operation of a process as well as for critical process data (e.g. alarm signals), as well as for non-critical communication (e.g. service and diagnostics) • High degree of investment security because all products are compatible with the internationally recognized industrial standard IEEE 802.11 and suitable for 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz • Fast commissioning of new plant items due to reduced amount of work for installing the communication network • No wear on rotating and moving devices, or plant components • Cost-effective connection to devices which are remote, difficult to access or in hostile environments • Suitable for industrial environments, e.g. through rugged metal enclosure, industrial approvals (e.g. UL, FM, CE, explosion protection Zone 2 (Atex), E1 (vehicles), PCS 7, EN 50155 (trains and trams)) and resistance to condensation • Increased plant availability through non-contact and thus wear-free data transmission to mobile communication partners with RCoax cable

■ Application The SCALANCE W-700 products offer a reliable radio connection, versatile redundancy mechanisms, and fast transfer of stations from one access point to the next (roaming). In this manner, processes can be monitored and production failures through machine downtimes avoided. In addition, Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN) can be used in time-critical applications associated with production automation (PROFINET). Due to the high degree of protection IP65 and the extended temperature range from -20 … +60 °C, the products are suitable for use in the food and beverages industry (cooling technology) and in logistics. SCALANCE W products are silicone-free and can therefore also be used in paint plants. When using the RCoax cable (fiber-optic cable), operation is also possible in conveying technology and all track applications (e.g. local public transport). Application examples: • Automated guided vehicles and suspended monorails; prevention of wear and high flexibility in the choice of route thanks to wireless transmission of data to the vehicles • Crane; high flexibility through access to data communication with the moving unit independent of the location • Mobile control desk; reliable intervention in the process thanks to data communication over IWLAN with mobile units; the number of operator panels is therefore determined by the number of personnel and no longer by the number of control desks

3/36




■ Application (continued) • Wireless access to field devices for configuration and testing without the need for time-consuming modifications in the control cabinet • Online access to service and maintenance drawings; immediate updating of the measures performed in the system over IWLAN; Optimized processes and reduced error quotas thanks to online information regardless of the location of the machine • Communication with moving stations (e.g. mobile controls and devices), storage and retrieval machines, conveyor systems, conveyor belts, rotating machines, trucks • Wireless coupling of communication segments for fast startup or for cost-effective networks in which cable routing would be extremely expensive (e.g. on public roads, rivers, lakes, train lines) • Public transport (underground and suburban trains, buses); reliable use of the products in applications with high temperature and mechanical stability demands; optimum radio field through controlled emission of output power with RCoax cable (fiber-optic cable)

• Construction and design appropriate to field of application with SIMATIC control components • Function LEDs for optical signaling of faults and operating states • Wall mounting; a 90 mm length of S7-300 DIN rail (assembled vertically) can be used to assist mounting (screws included in scope of supply). If mounting is to be made on a horizontal S7-300 DIN rail, the antenna characteristic must be taken into account. When mounting in a control cabinet, remote antennae must be used (Faraday cage). Hybrid cable and plug connectors • One cable for voltage supply and data (Ethernet): - 24 V DC voltage supply and Industrial Ethernet interface via the IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 and the IE FC Modular Outlet with Power Insert - Power-over-Ethernet compliant with IEEE 802.3af with vibration-proof IP67 Hybrid connector (included) • IP67 Hybrid connector

2x antennas, detachable

■ Design

back: C-Plug

energy hybrid socket

wallmounting

protective clip 10/100 Mbit/s Industrial Ethernet

G_IK10_XX_30020

• Wireless card (compatible with IEEE 802.11b/g and IEEE 802.11a/h) permanently installed in device • Two omnidirectional antennas ANT795-4MR (omnidirectional characteristics) bolted to housing (R-SMA) (included in delivery). These two antennas can be replaced by antennas from the SCALANCE W-700 range, retaining antenna diversity. • Robust metal housing, shock and vibration-proof for severe mechanical loading • Designed without rotating parts (e.g. operation without fans) • High level of protection against dust and splashwater with degree of protection IP65 • Ambient temperatures from -20 °C … +60 °C • Resistant to condensation • Redundant energy feed via screw-fit M12 connectors (19 … 57 V DC) • For operation on 100 V … 240 V AC line network, the PS791-1PRO is available. It can simply be bolted on with the SCALANCE W products

redundant energy

Design and interfaces of the SCALANCE W-740 client modules

24 V DC and data transmission on one line

24 V DC and data transmission on two separate lines (4-core and 2-core)

Redundant 24 V DC and data transmission on one line (8-core and 2-core)

90 V 265 V AC and data transmission on two separate lines (4-core and 3-core)

(8-core)

Installation of only one line

48 V DC and data transmission on one line (Power over Ethernet) according to IEEE 802.3af (4-core, modulated)

Data and power on two separate lines


Operation with 90 V 265 V AC

Operation with Power over Ethernet (PoE)

(8-core)

Use

G_IK10_XX_30122

IP67 hybrid plug connector with IE hybrid cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 IP67 hybrid plug connector with IE standard cable 2x2 Power M12 cable connector with energy cable 2x0.75 Power Supply PS791-1PRO

Possibilities for power supply from SCALANCE W access points/client modules


3/37

3



■ Function

With the SCALANCE W products, a wireless network with approval in more than 30 countries is set up in the license-free ISM bands at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz. This wireless network permits a very reliable radio connection via IWLAN at up to 54 Mbit/s. SCALANCE W supports the IEEE 802.11h standard that includes the stringent ETSI requirements of the European countries.

Security A high degree of data security is achieved by means of the modern mechanisms of Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA2/IEEE 802.11i). These define modern procedures that control a regular exchange of the complete 128-bit code, but also perform the user authentication of a node. The Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) is available for data encryption. All encryption mechanisms are already integrated in the products and do not incur any additional costs. If a security concept with Virtual Private Networks (VPN) or the SCALANCE S range is required, the products can be integrated without any difficulty. Product versions SCALANCE W744-1PRO The Ethernet client module SCALANCE W744-1PRO established the radio link of just one mobile device with an Ethernet interface to the wireless network. SCALANCE W-780 Access Points implement the wireless network in which SCALANCE W-740 Access Points can move freely. The Ethernet Client Module is handed over automatically and transparently for the application from one access point to the next (roaming). SCALANCE W744-1PRO can administer one single IP address, namely that of the connected device. If this is replaced, the Ethernet client module recognizes this automatically and administers this new address. This reduces plant downtimes and sources of error. HMI

S7-300 with CP 343-1

Industrial Ethernet Access Point SCALANCE W788-1PRO



Field PG/Notebook with CP 7515 S7-300

IE Client Module

S7-300

SCALANCE W744-1PRO

Automatic Guided Vehicle System AGVS

SCALANCE W744-1PRO


Mobile controls in an automatic guided vehicle (AGV)

In addition to the infrastructure mode, SCALANCE W744-1PRO can also be operated in ad hoc mode. In this infrequently used mode, a simple radio link is established between several mobile devices without using an access point. It enables a SCALANCE W744-1PRO to communicate with another SCALANCE W740 device or with a wireless card (e.g. CP 7515).

3/38


IE Client Module

S7-300

IE Client Module

SCALANCE W744-1PRO


G_IK10_XX_30021

3

The SCALANCE W-700 products support the following functions of an IWLAN wireless connection: • Predictable data traffic (strict real-time requirements) and defined response times on the radio link • Cyclic monitoring of wireless link between access point and node for fast recognition of fault states • Redundancy mechanisms for reliable wireless infrastructure • Antenna diversity for very good reception in difficult areas for radio signals • Optional use of separate antennas for customer-specific requirements • Automatic switching back to lower data rates if quality of connection is reduced • Operation in conjunction with HiPath Wireless Controller possible



■ Function (continued) SCALANCE W746-1PRO The SCALANCE W746-1PRO Ethernet client module administers the wireless connection for up to eight devices with Ethernet interface. It is then possible to integrate mobile units with a small Ethernet network (up to 8 devices) extremely effectively into an

Radio cell 1

IWLAN radio field. If one of the connected devices is replaced, the Ethernet client module recognizes this automatically, and administers this new address. This reduces plant downtimes and sources of error.

Radio cell 3

Radio cell 2

S7-400

Industrial Ethernet






SIMATIC HMI

SIMATIC HMI

S7-300

S7-300

PC


SIMATIC HMI

PC


G_IK10_XX_30005


Automatic Guided Vehicle System (AGVS)

Ethernet network with SCALANCE W746-1PRO client module

The automatic guided vehicles (AGV) shown in the graphic can move freely in the three radio cells, and are automatically passed on from one SCALANCE W788-1PRO Access Point to the next (roaming). The wireless interface on the FTS is implemented by SCALANCE W746-1PRO which can administer up to eight devices. Wireless access from a Field PG to the FTS is additionally possible for configuration or diagnostics purposes..


3/39

3



■ Function (continued) SCALANCE W747-1RR


PC



SCALANCE W747-1RR module client

Track-based vehicle

The SCALANCE W747-1RR Ethernet Client Module administers the wireless connection to a radio field with rapid roaming for up to 8 devices with Ethernet interface. It is then possible to integrate mobile units with a small Ethernet network (up to 8 devices) extremely effectively into a radio field with rapid roaming. If one of the connected devices is replaced, the Ethernet client module recognizes this automatically, and administers this new address. This reduces plant downtimes and sources of error.


IWLAN RCoax Cable

PC


Track-based vehicle


IWLAN RCoax Cable

PC


Track-based vehicle


IWLAN RCoax Cable

G_IK10_XX_30124

3

The wireless interface of the SCALANCE W788-1RR Access Point provides the radio field with rapid roaming for the PROFINET IO data communication which requires very short updating times. Rapid roaming is an expansion of Industrial Wireless LAN, and offers real-time wireless communication even if stations move from one radio cell to another (roaming) and updating times of up to 16 ms are required. As known with Industrial Wireless LAN, communication is also predictable in the radio field with rapid roaming (strict real-time requirements), even with very many stations. No stations conforming to IEEE 802.11 can be operated in this radio field since the standard does not allow such high-performance.

Ethernet network with SCALANCE W747-1RR client module

The RCoax cable (radiating cable) is being increasingly used to avoid problems resulting from wear of the sliding contacts of track vehicles. This establishes a contact-free connection for data communication with the moving units. If the data has to be additionally transmitted with fixed response times, a radio field with rapid roaming can be optimally used. Note: SCALANCE W747-1RR can also be configured conforming to the IEEE 802.11 standard as an alternative to operation in a radio field with rapid roaming. Rapid roaming is then impossible.

3/40


Diagnostics and management • Web-based (http Server) management tool for configuration and diagnosis using a standard browser • LEDs for signaling operating and fault states • Signaling of faults by means of SNMP trap or e-mail to a network management tool • Bolt-on shaft on the rear panel of the device for the optional replacement medium C-PLUG (configuration plug) for simple replacement of the module without a programming device in the event of failure



■ Integration This Industrial Ethernet cable is connected on site to the supplied IP67 hybrid plug connector. A Power M12 Cable Connector PRO must be ordered in addition for the power supply. This configuration is meaningful if the devices are only separated by a few meters.

SCALANCE W-700

S7-300

IE FC cable 2x2 with hybrid plug connector

Energy Cable 2x0,75 with Power M12 cable connector PRO

G_IK10_XX_30009

24V DC

If the power and data are to be applied to the Ethernet client module via one cable, a hybrid cable (to be ordered in addition) is used as well as the FC Modular Outlet with Power Insert (assembly in the Outlet possible in the field). The hybrid plug connector from the scope of supply can be configured on site by the user. If a 100 … 240 V AC supply is available, the PS791-1PRO is used. A connecting cable to SCALANCE W-700 and an AC plug are included in the scope of supply (AC cable is not supplied).

Separate lines for supplying power and data

In addition to the standard scope of supply for SCALANCE W-700, this system configuration uses the IE FC TP Standard Cable 2 x 2 (type A, to be ordered in addition).

Note: A standard RJ45 plug also latches in the housing socket of the hybrid connector. However, the degree of protection IP65 is then lost. SCALANCE W-700 additionally supports both options of the Power-over-Ethernet standard IEEE 802.3af

■ Technical specifications Standards


• IEEE 802.11b

2–12 - 2.462 GHz, 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbit/s; 50 mW (17 dBm), up to 100 mW (20 dBm) with antenna, depending on national approval, can be reduced in steps

• IEEE 802.11g

2–12 - 2.462 GHz, 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbit/s; 50 mW (17 dBm), up to 100 mW (20 dBm) with antenna, depending on national approval, can be reduced in steps

• IEEE 802.11a/h

5–15 - 5.25 GHz, 5–25 - 5.35 GHz, –,7 - 5.8 GHz, 6, 9 , 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbit/s; 50 mW (17 dBm), up to 100 mW (20 dBm) or 1000 mW (30 dBm) with antenna, depending on national approval, can be reduced in steps

Type

SCALANCE W744-1PRO, SCALANCE W746-1PRO

SCALANCE W747-1RR

Wireless card permanently installed 1

1

Data transmission rate according to • IEEE 802.11b Yes • IEEE 802.11g Yes Yes • IEEE 802.11a/h

Yes Yes Yes

Industrial Wireless LAN • Data transfer with strict real-time requirements (predictable) • Redundant radio connection • Cyclic link check • Monitoring for IP connections (IP Alive) • Automatic roaming when the connection to Industrial Ethernet is interrupted (Forced Roaming)

Yes, additional priority assignment with IEEE 802.11e and WMM Yes Yes Yes

Yes, additional priority assignment with IEEE 802.11e and WMM Yes Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

Wireless approvals



Rapid Roaming

No

Yes

IE Hybrid socket (IP65); RJ45 connection 2 x R-SMA with two screwed-on ANT795-4MR antennae (omnidirectional characteristics); replaceable Yes

IE Hybrid socket (IP65); RJ45 connection 2 x R-SMA with two screwed-on ANT795-4MR antennae (omnidirectional characteristics); replaceable Yes



Interfaces • Industrial Ethernet via • External antenna connections - 2 x R-SMA with two screwed-on ANT795-4MR antennae (omnidirectional characteristics); replaceable • Connection for redundant supply voltage


3/41

3




SCALANCE W744-1PRO, SCALANCE W746-1PRO

SCALANCE W747-1RR

Connection for swap medium

C-PLUG

C-PLUG

• Power-over-Ethernet (PoE)

48 V DC (IEEE 802.3af), 24 V DC

48 V DC (IEEE 802.3af), 24 V DC


19 V … 57 V DC

19 V … 57 V DC


19 V … 57 V DC power supply: IE FC RJ45 modular outlet with power insert

19 V … 57 V DC power supply: IE FC RJ45 modular outlet with power insert

Power loss

10 W

10 W


IP65

IP65


-20 °C … +60 °C (resistant to condensation)

-20 °C … +60 °C (resistant to condensation)


-40 °C … +70 °C

-40 °C … +70 °C


100 %

100 %

• Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm - without antenna

125 x 90 x 118

125 x 90 x 118

• Weight

1.05 kg

1.05 kg

Software

Web-based Manager

Web-based Manager

Data security

WEP, WPA2/IEEE 802.11i with AES and TKIP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP, EAP-MD5, EAP-MSChapv2, MAC filter, Admin password, IEEE 802.1x

WEP, WPA2/IEEE 802.11i with AES and TKIP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-PEAP, EAP-MD5, EAP-MSChapv2, MAC filter, Admin password, IEEE 802.1x

Supply voltage

3


Construction

■ Ordering data

Order No.

SCALANCE W-740 client modules

SCALANCE W747-1RR For administration of the wireless connection with rapid roaming of up to eight devices with Industrial Ethernet connection • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada

IWLAN Ethernet client modules with built-in radio interface; radio networks IEEE 802.11b/g/a/h at 2.4/5 GHz to 54 Mbit/s. National approvals; WPA/AES; Power over Ethernet (PoE), degree of protection IP65 (-20 … +60°C); Scope of supply: 2 antennas ANT795-4MR, IP67 hybrid plug-in connector, assembly material, manual on CD ROM; German/English SCALANCE W744-1PRO For administration of the wireless connection of one device with Industrial Ethernet connection • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada SCALANCE W746-1PRO For administration of the wireless connection of up to eight devices with Industrial Ethernet connection • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada

3/42


Order No.

6GK5 744-1ST00-2AA6 6GK5 744-1ST00-2AB6

6GK5 746-1ST00-2AA6 6GK5 746-1ST00-2AB6

6GK5 747-1SR00-2AA6 6GK5 747-1SR00-2AB6

IE FC RJ45 modular outlet with power insert Fast Connect RJ45 modular outlet for Industrial Ethernet with a replaceable insert for 1 x 24 V and 1 x 100 Mbit/s interface

6GK1 901-1BE00-0AA3

IE Hybrid Cable 2x2 + 4x0.34 4-wire, shielded installation cable; sold by the meter, up to 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

6XV1 870-2J

IE FC Standard Cable GP 2 x 2 4-core, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC Outlet RJ45/ IE FC RJ45 Plug; PROFINET-compatible; with UL approval; sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

6XV1 840-2AH10



■ Ordering data

Order No.

IWLAN RCoax cables Radiating cable for complex radio environments as special antenna for SCALANCE W Access Points; for wider temperature range (-40 … + 85 °C); sold by the meter (minimum order quantity 20 m) • 2.4 GHz

6XV1 875-2A

• 5 GHz

6XV1 875-2D

IP67 hybrid connector Connector for connecting SCALANCE W-700 to Industrial Ethernet and Power over Ethernet (PoE), with assembly instructions, 1 piece

09 45 125 1300.00 Order directly from: HARTING Deutschland GmbH & Co KG Postfach 24-51 D-32381 Minden Tel. +49 571-8896-0 Fax. +49 571-8896-354 E-Mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.HARTING.com

Power M12 Cable Connector PRO Terminal socket for connection of SCALANCE W-700 for 24 V DC supply voltage; 4-pole, a-coded, with assembly instructions, 3 items.

6GK1 907-0DC10-6AA3

Power supply PS791-1PRO AC/DC power supply, 10 W, IP65 (-20 … +60°C), input: 90 … 265 V AC, output: 24 V DC, metal housing; scope of supply: AC power 3+PE cable connector, DC power cord/ M12, installation materials, instruction manual German/English

6GK5 791-1PS00-0AA6

CP 7515 communications processor PCMCIA card (32-bit; CardBus) for connecting a PG/PC/notebook to Industrial Wireless LAN acc. to IEEE 802.11b/g/a (2.4/5 GHz, up to 54 Mbit/s), and national approvals; incl. Client Manager and driver for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server, XP Professional, 2003 Server; manual on CD-ROM; German/English

6GK1 751-5AA00

Accessories IE Hybrid RJ45 Socket Dust Cover Dust cap for RJ45 port socket (Industrial Ethernet/PoE) of SCALANCE W-700

6ES7 194-1JB10-0XA0

Antenna ANT795-4MR Antenna with omni-directional characteristic; antenna gain incl. R-SMA plug 4 dBi, IP65 (-20 … +60 °C), 2.4/5 GHz, national approvals, direct mounting on SCALANCE W788-1PRO, W788-2PRO, W744-1PRO, manual on CD-ROM; English/German

6GK5 795-4MR00-0AA6

Antenna ANT795-6MR Antenna with omni-directional characteristic; antenna gain incl. R-SMA plug and 5 m cable 3 dBi, IP65 (-30 … +50 °C), 2.4/5 GHz national approvals, mounting material for wall and mast mounting with 1 x TI795-1R termination resistor, manual on CD-ROM; English/German

6GK5 795-6MR00-0AA6

Order No. Antenna ANT792-8DR Antenna with directional effect; antenna gain incl. R-SMA plug and 5 m cable 10 dBi, IP65 (-20 … +60°C), 2.4 GHz, US/Canadian approvals, mounting material for wall and mast mounting; with termination impedance 1 x TI795-1R, manual on CD-ROM; English/German

3

• With 5 m pre-assembled cable, 10 dBi

6GK5 792-8DR00-0AA6

• Without cable, 13 dBi

6GK5 792-8DR01-0AA6

Antenna ANT793-8DR Antenna with strong directional effect; antenna gain incl. R-SMA plug and 5 m cable 14 dBi, IP65/IP67 (-30 … +50 °C), 5 GHz, US/Canadian approvals, mounting material for wall and mast mounting; with termination impedance 1 x TI795-1R, manual on CD-ROM; English/German

6GK5 793-8DR00-0AB6

Termination Impedance TI795-1R Antenna termination impedance 50 ohm for terminating the second R-SMA antenna socket, when operating a SCALANCE W-700 radio interface with only one antenna, IP65 (-20 … +60°C), 3 items

6GK5 795-1TR00-0AA6

IWLAN antenna extension cable FRNC Cable preassembled with two R-SMA plugs, for extension of the antennae of the ANT790 version complete with installation instructions •5m

6XV1 875-3FH50

• 15 m

6XV1 875-3FN15

Lightning Protector LP798-1PRO Lightning protection element with R-SMA plug for the ANT790 antennae, IP65 (-40 … +100 °C)

6GK5 798-1LP00-0AA6

C-PLUG Configuration plug, swap medium for simple replacement of the module in the event of a fault; for storing configuration or engineering and application data; can be used for SIMATIC NET products with C-PLUG slot

6GK1 900-0AB00

Preset-PLUG Swap medium for simple initial startup of IWLAN clients, e.g. SCALANCE W-740 Client Modules or IWLAN/PB Link PN IO

6GK5 798-8AB00

Note: Additional information regarding national approvals is available in the Internet at: www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info

■ More information You can order components supplementary to the SIMATIC NET cabling range from your local contact. Technical advice on this subject is available from: J. Hertlein A&D SE PS Tel. +49 (0)911/750 44 65 Fax +49 ( 0911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected] Siemens IK PI · 2007

3/43


Accessories

Antennae, terminating resistor and lightning protection element

■ Overview

• Optimized use of SCALANCE W-700 products due to - directional antenna for directed lighting of production lines as well as point-to-point links for coupling data networks - circular beam antennae (omnidirectional) for designing up an IWLAN radio infrastructure • Cost-effective connection to devices which are remote, difficult to access or in hostile environments

3

■ Application Separate antennae optimize the transmission and receiving conditions and support the use of IWLAN products in a number of industrial applications. On the radio interfaces for radio channel 1, instead of the supplied antennae with a circular beam a separate antennae can also be used. This also applies to the two radio interfaces for radio channel 2 of the SCALANCE W788-2PRO and SCALANCE W788-2RR Dual Access Points, for which a second pair of antennae is not supplied. With directional antennae, conveyor belts or corridors can be covered by radio as well as point-to-point links over hundreds of meters. Alternatively, an omnidirectional antenna concentrates the radio field around the antenna in the shape of a disc which enhances the quality of the connection. If the supplied antenna cable is not long enough, it can be extended using an extension cable. If the lightning protection element is used, the antennae can be installed outdoors with no problem. Antennas • Separate antennae increase the reliability of radio links by optimizing the receiving and radiation of signals • Implementation in Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN) networks as well as in Standard Wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11) networks at 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz with data transmission rates of up to 54 Mbit/s • Easy to install because the antennae are pre-assembled with antenna cable and R-SMA plugs; as an option, an extension cable is offered • All antenna cables are flame-resistant, chemical-resistant and silicone-free Termination Impedance TI795-1R • The antenna termination impedance TI795-1R must be used with SCALANCE W-700 products if only one antenna is installed Lightning Protector LP798-1PRO • The lightning protector LP798-1PRO extends the application range of separate antennae outdoors • Flexible industrial use thanks to protection against ingress of water and dust to the degree of protection IP65 Also for outdoor with extended temperature range • All accessories are suitable for use with SCALANCE W-700 including national approvals

■ Benefits

• IWLAN is ideally suited to demanding industrial applications with requirements for reliable radio communication • Cost savings due to a separate radio network for reliable operation of a process (IWLAN) as well as for critical process data (e.g. alarm signals), as well as for non-critical communication (wireless LAN), e.g. for service and diagnosis • High degree of investment security because all products are compatible with the internationally recognized industrial standard IEEE 802.11 and suitable for 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz

3/44


Note: Each additional cable causes further attenuation and therefore a weakening of the radio signal.

Application examples: • Automated guided vehicles and overhead conveyors; prevention of wear and high flexibility in the choice of route thanks to wireless transmission of data to the vehicles • Crane; high flexibility through access to data communication with the moving unit independent of the location • Mobile control desk; reliable intervention in the process thanks to data communication over IWLAN with mobile units; The number of operator panels is therefore determined by the number of personnel and no longer by the number of control desks. • Wireless access to field devices for configuration and testing without the need for time-consuming modifications in the control cabinet • Access to service and maintenance drawings on-site; Immediate updating of the measures performed in the system over IWLAN; Optimized processes and reduced error quotas thanks to online information regardless of the location of the machine • Communication with moving stations (e.g. mobile controls and devices), storage and retrieval machines, conveyor systems, conveyor belts, transversing tables, elevators, rotating machines, trucks • Wireless coupling of communication segments for fast startup or for cost-effective networks in which cable routing would be extremely expensive (e.g. on public roads, rivers, lakes, train lines) • Public transport (underground and suburban trains, buses); reliable use of the products in applications with high temperature and mechanical stability demands; optimum radio field through controlled emission of output power with RCoax cable (fiber-optic cable)


Accessories


■ Design Type

ANT792-8DR

ANT793-8DR

ANT795-4MR

ANT795-6MR

Antenna extension cable FRNC

TI795-1R

LP798-1PRO

Connectors

R-SMA

R-SMA

R-SMA

R-SMA

R-SMA

R-SMA

R-SMA

Mounting

Walls, masts

Walls, masts

Device

Walls, masts

–

Device

On the cable

Antenna cable

0 m/5 m

5m

–

5m

15 m/5 m

–

–

■ Function Separate antennae are used to optimize the radio field for the application. This makes a reliable radio link possible in industrial applications ANT795-6MR and ANT795-4MR

ANT 795-6/4MR

These antennae concentrate the radio field in the shape of a cone (for greater clarity, a funnel is shown schematically in the diagram). The radiation is stronger in the vertical antenna plane. Moving away from this direction by the beam angle makes a radio link almost impossible. This is why this type of antenna is known as "directional". The antennas are supplied with preassembled 5 m antenna cable, ANT792-8DR is available alternatively without a cable. Antenna cable Cables with especially low attenuation must be selected so that the quality of the radio signal is only affected to a minimal extent. Particular attention was paid to the following design characteristics to make the products suitable for industrial use: • Flame resistance • Low smoke output in the event of fire • Silicone-free • Resistant to corrosion

G_IK10_XX_30027

Beam angle

With these omnidirectional antennae, the radio field is concentrated on a plane vertical with respect to the antenna. The field is evenly distributed around the antenna (360°), but is reduced in strength as the distance from the antenna increases. Both antennae have a total beam angle of 30° and a similar antenna gain In contrast to the ANT795-4MR, which is mounted directly on the housing, ANT795-6MR supports the option of separate mounting using the permanently attached antenna cable. Above and below the antenna, there is no radiation. Outside the vertical antenna plane, when the total beam angle is reached, the antenna gain falls to half the value. The quality of the radio link is significantly poorer here.

For optimized installation, the 5 m and 15 m IWLAN Antenna Extension Cable FRNC, preassembled with two R-SMA connections, can be supplied. This extension cable can be lengthened by a further extension cable. This increases the attenuation of the signal. Antenna terminating impedance TI795-1R The radio interfaces of SCALANCE W-700 products are equipped with antenna diversity for extremely good reception in areas problematic for radio. Two antennae are used for reception in this case to minimize the negative effects of reflection from metallic objects or multiple path propagation. If this feature is not used and only one antenna is used (e.g. when a directional antenna is used or to save costs), the second R-SMA socket of the SCALANCE W-700 products must be equipped with a terminating impedance. Lightning protection element LP798-1PRO When separate antennae are used outdoors there is a risk of lightning strikes. To prevent damage, the lightning protection element LP798-1PRO can be used.

ANT792-8DR and ANT793-8DR

ANT 792-8DR/ ANT 793-8DR

G_IK10_XX_30028

Beam angel


3/45

3


Accessories



3

ANT792-8DR

ANT793-8DR

ANT795-4MR

ANT795-6 MR

Frequency range

2.4 - 2.5 GHz

5.15 - 5.9 GHz

2.4 GHz, 5. 15 - 5.35 GHz, 5.725 - 5.85 GHz

2.4 GHz, 5.15 -5.35 GHz

Characteristic

Directional

Directional

Omni-directional

Omni-directional

Radiation angle

30° horizontal, 30° vertical




Antenna gain, incl. antenna cable and connector

12.5 dBi (2.4 - 2.5 GHz) minus 0.5 dBi/m antenna cable

14 dBi (5.15 - 5.9 GHz)

3 dBi (2.4 GHz), 5 dBi (5.15 - 5.35 GHz)

3 dBi (2.4 GHz), 3.5 dBi (5.15 - 5.35 GHz)

SWR

Max. 1.5

Max. 2.0

Max. 2.0

Max. 2.0

Connectors

R-SMA

R-SMA

R-SMA

R-SMA

Length of antenna cable

0 m/5 m

5m

–

5m


-20 °C to +60 °C -20 °C to +60 °C 100%

-20 °C to +60 °C -20 °C to +60 °C 100%

-20 °C to +60 °C -20 °C to +60 °C 100%

-20 °C to +60 °C -20 °C to +60 °C 100%


IP65

IP65

IP65

IP65


190 x 190 x 20

190 x 190 x 28

148 x 35 x 13

420 x Ø 25

Mounting

Wall or mast

Wall or mast

Directly on the device

Wall or mast

Weight

500 g

1000 g

50 g

600 g

Current national approvals can be found in the Internet under www.siemens.com/ simatic-net/ik-info Yes (cable)


Current national approvals can be found in the Internet under www.siemens.com/ simatic-net/ik-info –


Yes (cable)

Yes (cable)

–

Yes (cable)

1000 m

1000 m

100 m

100 m

Approvals • Wireless approvals

• IEC 60754-1/-2, IEC 601034, IEC 60332-1 • UL Range with unobstructed line of sight

Note: The range can be considerably less, depending on spatial factors, the wireless standard applied, the data rate, and the antennas used on the opposite side.. Antenna extension cable FRNC

Lightning Protector LP798-1PRO

Attenuation

0.5 dB/m at 2.4 GHz, 0.8 dB/m at 5 GHz

Frequency range

0 to 5.8 GHz

Connectors

R-SMA

Impedance

50 ohm


15 m/5 m

Connectors

R-SMA


-25 °C to +80 °C -40 °C to +70 °C 100%


-40 °C to +100 °C -40 °C to +100 °C 100%

Behavior in fire

IEC 60332-1


IP65

Yes

Dimensions (L x D) in mm

36.8 x 17

Silicone-free

Yes

Weight

50 g


Partially resistant


IP65

Frequency range

2.4 GHz, 5 GHz

Weight

500 g

Impedance

50 ohm

Approvals

IEC 60754-1/-2, IEC 601034, IEC 60332-1, UL

Connectors

R-SMA


-20 °C bis +60 °C -20 °C bis +60 °C 100 %


IP65

Dimensions (L x D) in mm

15 x 10

Weight

5g

Halogen-free

3/46


Termination impedance TI795-1R


Accessories


■ Ordering data Antenna ANT792-8DR Antenna with directivity; antenna gain incl. R-SMA plug; IP65 (-20 °C to +60 °C), 2.4 GHz, US/Canadian approvals, mounting material for wall and mast mounting; with termination impedance 1 x TI795-1R, manual on CD-ROM; English/German • With 5 m pre-assembled cable, 10 dBi • Without cable, 13 dBi

Order No.

■ More information You can order additional components from the SIMATIC NET cable range from your local Siemens contact. For technical support with your order, contact: J. Hertlein A&D SE PS Tel. +49 (0) 911/750 44 65 Fax. +49 (0) 911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]

6GK5 792-8DR00-0AA6 6GK5 792-8DR01-0AA6

Antenna ANT793-8DR Antenna with high degree of directivitiy; antenna gain incl. R-SMA plug and 5 m cable 14 dBi, IP65 (-20 °C to +60 °C), 5 GHz, US/Canadian approvals, mounting material for wall and mast mounting; with termination impedance 1 x TI795-1R, manual on CD-ROM; English/German

6GK5 793-8DR00-0AB6

Antenna ANT795-4MR Antenna with omni-directional characteristic; antenna gain incl. R-SMA plug 4-5 dBi, IP65 (-20 °C to +60 °C), 2.4/5 GHz, national approvals, direct mounting on SCALANCE W7881PRO, W788-2PRO, W744-1PRO, manual on CD-ROM; English/German

6GK5 795-4MR00-0AA6

Antenna ANT795-6MR Antenna with omni-directional characteristic; antenna gain incl. R-SMA plug and 5 m cable 3 dBi, IP65 (-20 °C to +60 °C), 2.4/5 GHz, Wi-Fi compliance and national approvals, mounting material for wall and mast mounting, manual on CD-ROM; English/German

6GK5 795-6MR00-0AA6

IWLAN antenna extension cable FRNC Cable pre-assembled with two R-SMA connectors, for extension of antennae of type ANT790; cable attenuation 2.5 dBi; with installation instructions; extension cable can be connected to a further extension cable 5m

6XV1 875-3FH50

15 m

6XV1 875-3FN15

Lightning Protector LP798-1PRO Lightning protection element with R-SMA plug for the ANT790 antennae, IP65 (-40 °C to +100 °C)

6GK5 798-1LP00-0AA6

Termination impedance TI795-1R Antenna termination impedance 50 ohm for terminating the second R-SMA antenna socket, when operating a SCALANCE W-700 radio interface with only one antenna, IP65 (-20 °C to +60 °C), 3 items

6GK5 795-1TR00-0AA6


3/47

3


Accessories Power Supply

■ Overview

■ Benefits

• Less stock keeping through one power supply for all SCALANCE products with degree of protection IP65 • Worldwide use due to wide range of line input voltages • High operational reliability due to short-circuit-resistance, no-load-resistance and buffering of short network faults • Wide field of application through : - wide input voltage range - high efficiency - low heat generation

3

■ Design • The PS791-1PRO power supply is an AC/DC power supply for input voltages of 90-265 V AC for all SCALANCE products with degree of protection IP65 • Direct mounting on the SCALANCE W-700 and SCALANCE X-200 devices, but also suitable for wall or DIN rail mounting (DIN or S7-300) • Rugged metal housing with IP65 class protection against water and dust • Operating temperature -20 °C to 60 °C

• Design without fan and rugged metal casing; high protection against dust and splashwater with degree of protection IP65 • Operating temperatures from -20°C to +60°C • Resistant to condensation • Connection to AC network via AC Power 3+PE cable connector (included) • Connection to SCALANCE products with degree of protection IP65 • In other applications the Power M12 Plug pro is used for DC output (to be ordered separately) • Direct mounting on SCALANCE products with degree of protection IP65 with supplied installation material; also suitable for wall or mounting on standard mounting rail (S7-300) ET 200pro

Small switching cabinet S7-300 with CP 343-1

ET 200pro

PG screwed cable gland

Control & monitoring PG screwed cable gland Field PG with CP 7515

IPC with CP 1616

PS791-1PRO Power Supply

230 V AC 24 V DC

PROFINET Industrial Ethernet Example for the use of power supply PS791-1PRO with SCALANCE X Note: When SCALANCE W is connected to SCALANCE X208PRO, the power supply in the hybrid connector is not available; power must be supplied via the M12 plug connector.

3/48



ET 200S Access Point SCALANCE W788-1PRO

with PS791-1PRO Power Supply 230 V AC

24V DC G_IK10_XX_10078

PG-screwed cable gland


Accessories Power Supply


■ Ordering data Power supply PS791-1PRO

Interfaces

• AC Power 3+PE cable connector for 100-240V AC feed • M12 Plug pro or Power Cord M12 for DC 24V output voltage • On/Off switch

Input voltage

90 V to 260 V AC at 47 Hz to 63 Hz

Output voltage

24 V DC, +-7%, 0.42 A

Output power

10 W

System disturbances

Stored energy time at least 20 ms at 230 V AC


-20°C to 60°C -40°C to +85°C 100%

Approvals

EMC: EN 55022 Class B, EN 61000-4; UL 1950, EN 60950;

Device failure

MTBF 600,000 h at full load, 25 °C

Switching frequency

typ. 100 kHz


IP65


125 x 60 x 130

Mounting

Wall/DIN rail mounting (S7-300) directly on SCALANCE devices

Weight

700 g

Order No.

Power supply PS791-1PRO AC/DC power supply, 10 W, IP65 (-20 to +60 °C), input: 90 V - 265 V AC, output: 24 V DC, metal housing; scope of supply: AC power 3+PE cable connector, DC power cord M12, installation materials, instruction manual German/English

6GK5 791-1PS00-0AA6

Power M12 Plug PRO Terminal socket for connection to Power Supply PS791-1PRO for 24 V DC supply voltage; 4-pole, a-coded, with assembly instructions, 3 pcs.

6GK1 907-0DB10-6AA3

AC Power 3+PE cable connector Connection socket for connection of Power Supply PS791-1PRO to AC voltage supply, with assembly instructions, 5 units

6GK1 907-0FC10-0AA5

Power cable 2 x 0.75 Connecting cable for power supply PS791-1PRO, sold by the meter

6XV1 812-8A

3

■ More information You can order additional components from the SIMATIC NET cable range from your local Siemens contact. For technical support with your order, contact: J. Hertlein A&D SE PS Tel. +49 (0) 911/750 44 65 Fax. +49 (0) 911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]


3/49



■ Overview

■ Benefits

• IWLAN is ideally suited to demanding industrial applications with requirements for reliable radio communication • Cost savings due to a separate radio network for reliable operation of a process (IWLAN) as well as for critical process data (e.g. alarm signals), as well as for non-critical communication (WLAN), e.g. for service and diagnosis • High degree of investment security because all products are compatible with the internationally recognized industrial standard IEEE 802.11 and suitable for 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz • Fast commissioning of new plant items due to reduced amount of work for installing the communication network • No wear on rotating and moving devices or equipment

3

■ Application • The CP 7515 is a PC card (32-bit CardBus) for operation on an Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN) radio network with reliable communication. The CP 7515 can be used in a standard WLAN according to IEEE 802.11b/g and IEEE 802.11a at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz. Transmission rates up to 54 Mbps (108 Mbps in turbo mode) with IEEE 802.11g and IEEE 802.11a. • Two integrated antennae (for antenna diversity) for reliable reception in areas that place high demands on radio communication • Highly reliable thanks to reserving the data rate (only in combination with SCALANCE W-700 Access Points) • High degree of protection against unauthorized access thanks to WPA and 128-bit encoding (AES) • Integration in STEP 7/NCM PC • Communication services using ISO or TCP/IP transport protocols: - PG communication - S7 communication - S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) • For use in industrial environments as well as in office/enterprise areas • The appropriate OPC server and configuration tools are ncluded in the scope of supply of the respective communication software.

The CP 7515 can be used both in the industrial environment (IWLAN) and in the office. The IWLAN radio network from SCALANCE W788-1PRO and SCALANCE W788-2PRO (Access Points) provides a high degree of reliability in the radio link which supports its use in production and manufacturing. The CP 7515 can also be used in a standard WLAN radio network acc. to IEEE 802.11. Application examples: • Mobile control desk; reliable intervention in the process thanks to data communication over IWLAN with mobile units; the number of operator panels is therefore determined by the number of personnel and no longer by the number of control desks. • Wireless access to field devices for configuration and testing without the need for time-consuming modifications in the control cabinet • Access to service and maintenance drawings on-site; immediate updating of the measures performed in the system over IWLAN; optimized processes and reduced error quotas thanks to online information regardless of the location of the machine • Communication with moving stations (e.g. mobile controls and devices), storage and retrieval machines, conveyor systems, conveyor belts, rotating machines

■ Design • PC card for the 32-bit CardBus; two antennae (incl. diversity) for operation in a radio network to IEEE 802.11b/g and IEEE 802.11a are permanently installed in the card • Degree of protection IP20 at ambient temperatures of 0 °C to 55 °C • Protection against the ingress of dust and water to the degree of protection IP20 at ambient temperatures of 0 °C to 55 °C • Integration in existing security concepts with authentication to IEEE 802.1x and a RADIUS Server or Virtual Private Network (VPN) is possible without any problems • Display of operating status via Power LED and Activity LED

3/50




■ Function The CP 7515 is a PC card for operation in a wireless radio network to IEEE 802.11b/g or IEEE 802.11a with up to 54 Mbit/s (108 Mbit/s with Turbo Mode) at 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz with radio approval in over 30 countries. The CP is inserted into the 32-bit CardBus slot of a mobile unit (e.g. PG/notebook). In this manner, the mobile unit can move freely around the radio field and exchange data with other stations.

Security

Features of an Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN): • Reservation of the data rate for selected nodes for forecasting (strict real-time requirements) the access to the wireless medium and for defining maximum transmission times • Cyclic monitoring of wireless link between Access Point and node for fast recognition of fault states • Antenna diversity for very good reception in difficult areas for radio signals • Automatic switching back to lower data rates if quality of connection is reduced • Rugged radio techniques thanks to redundancy in modulation

Additional protection mechanisms: • PEAP (Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol); uses a procedure similar to SSL/TLS for establishing a secure connection • EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) through Client/Server certificate • EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Security) only through server certificate; The user identification is transmitted encrypted. • Use in conjunction with SOFTNET security client and SCALANCE S

Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) and passwords provide protection from listening in and from unauthorized access. The Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) has been provided for extensive encryption of the data. IEEE 802.1x and the additional use of RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service) support secure access control.

Configuring • The protocols "S7 communication" and S5-compatible communication" are configured in STEP 7, 5.2 SP1 and higher or NCM PC, 5.2 SP1 and higher • The NCM PC configuration tool is included in the scope of supply of the SOFTNET-S7 and SOFTNET-PG software packages for Industrial Ethernet • NCM PC is a component part of Advanced PC Configuration • Installation and parameterization with Management Tool for Windows 2000 Professional and XP Professional Diagnostics, management • Client Manager for setting the operating parameters and for diagnosis of the parameterization or the transmission performance • Status displays on the CP for power and activity


3/51

3



■ Integration Internet Pads and notebooks utilize the advantages of mobile wireless communication intensively, in particular, for • Commissioning • Maintenance • Diagnostics • Service. The CP 7515 offers the following wireless modes of access: • Interface for PC networks in the industrial environment • Access to Industrial Ethernet, e.g. for SIMATIC S5/S7, in combination with the SOFTNET packages for Industrial Ethernet

Industrial Ethernet

Industrial Ethernet



S7-400


S7-200 SIMATIC S5 ET 200S Field PG/ Notebook with CP 7515

IE Client Module SCALANCE W746-1PRO

IE Client Module SCALANCE W746-1PRO

Automated guided vehicle systems

Mobile diagnosis and service

IWLAN components are used for mobile access to data

3/52


Wireless SPS Separate radio network

G_IK10_XX_30017

3

In IWLAN radio networks with Access Points of the SCALANCE W-700 product family, the radio card CP 7515 offers in addition to transmission of data in accordance with the relevant standards (to IEEE 802.11b/g or IEEE 802.11a) the ability to reserve the data rate and therefore capability for deterministic data communication. To increase the reliability of the radio link still further, its quality is monitored and, in the event of an error, a message is generated.




■ Ordering data CP 7515

Data transmission rate • IEEE 802.11b

2.412 - 2.462 GHz, depending on the national approval, 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbit/s

• IEEE 802.11g

2.412 - 2.462 GHz, depending on the national approval, 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbit/s

• IEEE 802.11a

5.15 - 5.25 GHz, 5.25 - 5.35 GHz, 5.7 - 5.8 GHz, depending on the national approval, 6, 9 , 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbit/s

• Turbo mode

Max. 108 Mbit/s

Interfaces • Connection to PG/PC/Notebook

PC card Type II (32-bit CardBus)

• Antennas

Two integral antennae (antenna diversity) for 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz

Encryption • IEEE 802.1x Support

EAP-TLS, TTLS, PEAP, WEP, WPA with AES and TKIP

Industrial wireless LAN

• Reserving the data transmission rate for clients and deterministic data communication • Cyclic monitoring of the radio channel

Wireless approvals • Wi-Fi Compliance (Wireless Fidelity)

Yes

• National approvals

current approvals can be found in the Internet under www.siemens.de/ simatic-net/ik-info

Power supply

3.3 V DC

Current consumption

max. 600 mA

Power loss

max. 2 W


IP20


0 °C to +55 °C


-20 °C to +75 °C


max. 90 %, non-condensing


PC card (32-bit CardBus)


5 x 54 x 110 mm

• Weight

50 g


1x PC Card Type II slot

Software

Driver software and client manager for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional, XP Professional, 2003 Server

CP 7515 communications processor IWLAN PC Card (32 bit; CardBus) for connecting a programming device/PC/notebook to Industrial Wireless LAN acc. to IEEE 802.11b/g/a (2.4/5 GHz, up to 54 Mbit/s), and national approvals; incl. Client Manager and driver for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server, XP Professional; manual on CD-ROM; German/English


3

Additional components SOFTNET-S7 Edition 2005 for Industrial Ethernet Software for S7 and S5-compatible communication, incl. OPC server, PG/OP communication and NCM PC; up to 64 connections, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, 2000 Professional/Server; German/English

6GK1 704-1CW63-3AA0

SOFTNET-S7 Lean Edition 2005 for Industrial Ethernet Software for PG/OP communication, single license for 1 installation runtime software, software and electronic manual on CDROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, 2000 Professional/Server; German/English

6GK1 704-1PW63-3AA0

SOFTNET-PG Edition 2005 for Industrial Ethernet Software for PG/OP communication, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, 2000 Professional/Server; German/English

6GK1 704-1LW63-3AA0

SOFTNET Security Client 2004 Software for designing secure IP-based VPN connections from programming device/PC to network segments which are secured by SCALANCE S; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, configuration tool and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional, XP Professional; German/English/French/ Italian/Spanish

6GK1 704-1VW01-0AA0


3/53



■ Ordering data

3

SIMATIC NET Software Update Service For Industrial Ethernet, PROFIBUS, OPC server, for one year service incl. manuals on CD-ROM; Prerequisite: SIMATIC NET PC/Windows products; German/English

Order No. 6GK1 704-0AA00-3AA2

SCALANCE W788-2RR IWLAN Dual Access Point with two built-in radio interfaces for designing radio connections with rapid roaming or alternative operation on HiPath Wireless Controller • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada

SCALANCE W-780 Access Points IWLAN Access Point with built-in radio interface; radio networks IEEE 802.11b/g/a/h at 2.4/5 GHz to 54 Mbit/s. National approvals; WPA2/AES; Power over Ethernet (PoE), degree of protection IP65/IP67 (-20°C to +60°C); scope of supply: 2 antennas ANT795-4MR, IP67 hybrid plug-in connector, assembly material, manual on CD ROM; German/English SCALANCE W788-1PRO IWLAN Access Point with built-in radio interface • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada

6GK5 788-1ST00-2AA6

SCALANCE W788-2PRO IWLAN Dual Access Point with two built-in radio interfaces • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada

6GK5 788-2ST00-2AA6

3/54


Order No. SCALANCE W788-1RR IWLAN Access Point with built-in radio interface for designing radio connections with rapid roaming • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation in the U.S.A. and Canada

6GK5 788-1ST00-2AB6

6GK5 788-2ST00-2AB6

6GK5 788-1SR00-2AA6 6GK5 788-1SR00-2AB6

6GK5 788-2SR00-2AA6 6GK5 788-2SR00-2AB6


Engineering tools SINEMA E Lean

■ Overview

• Planning, simulation and configuration software for Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN) applications according to standard 802.11 a/b/g • Visualization of IWLAN networks e.g. according to coverage, data transfer rate, signal/noise ratio and overlapping with consideration of environmental and device characteristics • Configuration of single and multiple devices as well as uploading/downloading of IWLAN device parameters • Integrated and expandable catalog entries for WLAN devices, antennas and radio hindrances as well as standard graphics formats for importing layout plans • Report function for documentation of configured IWLAN environment and device characteristics

■ Benefits

• Simplifies the planning and configuration of IWLAN applications with the assistance of simulation functions - for determining the number, locations and parameters of IWLAN devices - for industrial and office environments, including outdoor areas - for experts and beginners, e.g. generation of quotation using sales wizard • Clear and detailed visualization of radio and device characteristics • Minimization of configuration and commissioning overhead through grouped configuration and online functions, as well as support during initial startup • Reduces configuration errors through inherent consistency check • Reports for generation of quotation, device installation instructions and plant documentation • Flexible and open architecture for integrating further WLAN devices (according to standard 802.11 a/b/g) for modeling, simulation and detection of hindrances which could influence the radio coverage

■ Application SINEMA E (SIMATIC Network Manager Engineering) is the generic term for the engineering of network products such as SCALANCE W. SINEMA E 2006 Lean contains the following functions for the engineering of IWLAN networks: • Quotation phase - simple sales wizard - report for generation of quotation • Planning, simulation and configuration - planning and simulation of a WLAN infrastructure - simultaneous configuring of device groups - generation of a report with installation guidelines • Central detection, upload/download and modification of device parameters • Report for final documentation • Measures in event of faults and servicing


3/55

3



■ Application

3

Engineering

Customer

Installation personnel

Planner

Configuration engineer

Installation & Comissioning

Commissioning engineer

Offline

Maintenance & Service

Service

Online

G_IK10_XX_10135

Technical clarification & Planning

Modeling and simulation of a WLAN infrastructure with interfering influences

■ Design

■ Function

The SINEMA E (SIMATIC Network Manager Engineering) software contains various tools for planning and configuring WLAN networks in accordance with the 802.11 a/b/g standard. Planning and simulation tool • Determination of number and location of required IWLAN devices for optimum coverage of environment • Visualization of WLAN radio coverage and interfering influences, as well as the data transfer rate to be expected Modeling tools for industrial and office environments • Modeling of walls and other outdoor and indoor hindrances for a WLAN system. Configuring (individually and using profile groups) • Configuring of individual access points and client modules • Fast and consistent configuring of access points and client groups using profiles Local startup • Support for assignment of addresses during first startup • Central configuration, download/upload of access points and clients Sales wizard • Generation of a quotation for IWLAN applications of an industrial plant (1 floor) Report • Generation of a quotation (result of the sales wizard) • Instructions for installation personnel • Documentation for acceptance or fault locating

3/56


Modeling and simulation of a WLAN infrastructure with interfering influences SINEMA E can be used to design and simulate complete WLAN networks, including the environment, from the desk. Special algorithms take into consideration whether the WLAN applications are in industrial environments, office environments or outdoors. Even difficult environments can be modeled rapidly and exactly using integral tools and catalogs with known interfering influences such as walls. Simulation in SINEMA E takes into account all influencing factors of the modeled WLAN infrastructure, and subsequently displays these in various graphical views. In addition to the range, data transfer rate, attenuation and interferences between existing IWLAN devices, one also sees how far security-relevant data can be received outside the plant. The characteristics and parameters of antennas, access points and clients can be displayed, adapted and simulated at any time. The planning result can be displayed at any time, allowing early recognition of faults and elimination prior to the actual hardware installation. Multi-device setting of access points and clients The parameters of all SIMATIC NET access points and clients are part of the SINEMA E project and can be set accordingly. Common parameters of these devices can be combined in a group and therefore set more rapidly. Configuring with SINEMA E can also be carried out without the hardware being present. SINEMA E checks the consistency of the configuration, thus preventing faulty settings.



■ Function (continued) Initial startup and configuration Simply by pressing a key, SINEMA E identifies all SIMATIC NET IWLAN nodes which can be accessed online, and transmits all basic parameters of these devices, such as IP addresses etc., during the initial startup. Further devices which are not yet included in the project are also detected, and their configuration data can be added to the project. The initial startup can be carried out from any point in the same subnetwork. Further settings and configurations can then also be transmitted from other subnetworks in the Ethernet network to all devices in the project by pressing a key. SINEMA E report function The integral report function can be used during any phase of the engineering process to gain an overview and to document the current status of the project.

■ Ordering data SINEMA E 2006 Lean Engineering software for planning, simulating and configuring industrial WLAN applications on PG/PC in accordance with 802.11 a/b/g standard; software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional +SP2; German/English

Order No. 6GK1 781-0AA00-6AA0

3

■ More information Additional information can be found in the Internet under http://www.siemens.com/sinema

The report in HTML format contains the Order Nos. of all IWLAN devices and antennas of a project, as well as the installation coordinates within and outside the model environment. In addition, the signal quality to be expected (strength, data transfer rate and interfering influences) is displayed for every environment. The report permits quotations to be generated at an early point in time, and devices can be installed for commissioning using the coordinates data. Following commissioning, the report serves as an acceptance document for the warranty conditions in the case of a guarantee or servicing matter.

■ Integration Supported products WLAN access points • SCALANCE W788-1PRO • SCALANCE W788-2PRO • SCALANCE W788-1RR • SCALANCE W788-2RR • Standard Wi-Fi 802.11 a/b/g access points 1) WLAN clients • SCALANCE W744-1PRO • SCALANCE W746-1PRO • SCALANCE W747-1RR • IWLAN/PB Link PN IO • Standard Wi-Fi 802.11 a/b/g clients 1) LAN adapter for online functions • SIMATIC NET CP 1613 A2 • Layer 2 Ethernet card 2) WLAN adapter for online functions • SIMATIC NET CP 7515 • Standard WLAN card 3) 1) No configuration 2) Integral LAN port of notebooks and programming devices such as Power PG M from Siemens 3) WLAN PCMCIA card or integral WLAN port of notebooks and programming devices such as Power PG M from Siemens


3/57


3

7 3/58


PROFIBUS according to IEC 61158/EN 50170

4/2 4/2 4/4 4/9 4/11 4/13 4/15 4/19

Introduction General information Process or field communication Data communication Communications overview Configuration examples Topologies Technical specifications

4/20 4/21 4/24

Network components Network selection criteria Connection examples

4/27 4/27 4/29 4/36 4/39 4/41 4/46 4/47 4/48 4/49 4/52 4/53 4/54 4/56 4/57 4/59 4/60

Electrical networks (RS 485) PROFIBUS FastConnect PROFIBUS bus cables ECOFAST bus cables Energy Cable RS 485 bus connectors 830-1T connecting cable 830-2 connecting cable PROFIBUS M12 and 7/8" plug-in cable/connector Bus terminals Active RS 485 terminating element RS 485 repeater for PROFIBUS Diagnostics repeater for PROFIBUS DP DP/DP coupler PROFIBUS DP/RS 232C link Power Rail Booster BT200 hardware test unit

4/62 4/62 4/64 4/66

Electrical networks (PROFIBUS PA) SpliTConnect Bus cables DP/PA coupler and link

4/69 4/69 4/77 4/82 4/83

Optical networks with OLM Glass fiber-optic cables Plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables PCF FOC termination kits Optical Link Module OLM

4/86 4/86 4/91 4/93 4/94

Optical networks with OBT and integrated interface Plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables ECOFAST fiber optic hybrid cable PCF FOC termination kits Optical Bus Terminal OBT

4/96 4/96

Wireless Link Infrared Link Module ILM

4/98 4/99 4/102 4/106 4/109 4/112 4/115

System interfacing for SIMATIC CP 342-5 CP 342-5 FO CP 343-5 CP 443-5 Basic CP 443-5 Extended IM 467, IM 467 FO

4/117 4/118 4/120 4/121 4/125 4/129 4/134 4/139 4/141 4/143 4/146

System interfacing for PG/PC Performance data Connection options to SIMATIC PCs CP 5613 A2 CP 5613 FO CP 5614 A2 CP 5614 FO CP 5512 CP 5611 A2 SOFTNET for PROFIBUS OPC Server for PROFIBUS

4/149 4/149 4/152 4/154 4/156

Connection options for SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC ProTool/Pro SIMATIC WinCC flexible RT SIMATIC WinCC

4/162

Sec.9 Sec.9 Sec.9

PROFIBUS DP Switching devices, control devices and sensors SIMOCODE pro motor management and control devices SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5 motor protection and control devices 3UF18 current transformers for overload protection 3UL22 summation current transformers SENTRON communication-capable circuit-breakers ECOFAST motor and soft starter COMBIMASTER 411 MICROMASTER 411

4/176 4/176

SIMATIC FS600 laser scanner PROFsafe laser scanner

4/182

RFID System communications modules ASM 450/452 ASM 456 ASM 470/475 ASM 473 ASM 454/424, ASM 754/724, ASM 854/824

4/162 4/169 4/173 4/174 4/175

4/182 4/184 4/186 4/188 4/189 4/191 4/191

Engineering Tools STEP 7

4/193 4/196

SIMATIC PDM Process Device Manager SIMATIC PDM

4/200 4/200 4/203 4/206

Technology Components PROFIBUS DP ASICs Interface modules / interfaces Development packages

4/207 4/207 4/208

Partner solutions PROFIBUS SCOPE diagnostic software Delphi-S7, Delphi-DPLib and Delphi-DPSoftnetSlave

Sec. 8

Network transitions

Sec. 9

ECOFAST frequency converter Siemens IK PI · 2007

PROFIBUS

Introduction

General information

■ Overview • Bus system - for process and field communication in cell networks with a small number of stations and with field devices - and for data communication acc. to IEC 61 158/EN 50 170 • Offers openness for interfacing to standardized non-Siemens components - PROFIBUS – the fieldbus standard in production and process engineering comprises: - specification of the standards for the physical characteristics of the bus and the access procedure - specification of the user protocol and the user interface

• Process or field communication - PROFIBUS DP for fast, cyclic data exchange with field devices - PROFIBUS PA for applications in process automation and in the intrinsically safe area • Data communication - PROFIBUS FMS for data communication between programmable controllers of different manufacturers

4 PROFINET Industrial Ethernet

PROFIBUS

KNX

AS-Interface

G_IK10_XX_50018

PROFIBUS PA

Industrial Ethernet

PROFIBUS in the communication landscape

■ Benefits

• PROFIBUS is a powerful, open, and robust bus system, which guarantees trouble-free communication. • The system is fully standardized, which enables trouble-free connection of standardized components from a variety of manufacturers. • Configuration, commissioning, and troubleshooting can be carried out from any side. This results in user-defined communication relationships that are very versatile, simple to implement, and easy to change.

4/2


• Fast assembly and startup on site with the help of the FastConnect wiring system. • Continuous monitoring of network components through a simple and effective signaling concept. • High security of investment since existing networks can be extended without any adverse effects • High availability through ring redundancy with OLM.

PROFIBUS

Introduction

General information

■ Ordering data

Order No.

Manual for PROFIBUS networks Paper version Network architecture, configuring, network components, installation

■ More information It is important to note the restrictions for use of the specified SIMATIC NET products (Order Nos. 6GK..., 6XV1) which you can view on the Internet: Additional information can be found in the Internet under:

• German

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA1


6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info

4

1) Language versions and manuals can be found for the various products at:

Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/automation/csi/net


4/3

PROFIBUS

Introduction

Process or field communication

■ Overview Communication functions Process or field communication (PROFIBUS DP, PROFIBUS PA) is used to link field devices to a programmable controller, HMI system or control system. Interfacing is performed over integrated interfaces on the CPU or through interface modules (IMs) and communications processors (CPs).

4

With modern high-performance programmable controllers it is often more effective to link more than one PROFIBUS DP line to one programmable controller, not just to increase the number of I/O stations that can be connected, but also to enable individual production areas to be handled independently (segmentation). PROFIBUS standardized to IEC 61158/EN 50 170 is a high-performance, open, rugged fieldbus system with short response times and the following protocols:

4/4


PROFIBUS DP (Distributed I/O) is used to connect distributed I/O stations, such as SIMATIC ET 200 with extremely fast response times in accordance with the IEC 61158/EN 50170 standard. PROFIBUS PA (Process Automation) extends PROFIBUS DP with intrinsicallysafe transmission technology in accordance with the international standard IEC 61158-2.

DP

PA

PROFIBUS

Introduction


■ Overview (continued) SIMATIC S7-300 / S7-400 SIMATIC C7

Integral interface

Communications processor

C7-635/636

CP 342-5/CP 342-5 FO, CP 343-5

CPU 315F/317F, CPU 414H/417H CPU 416F, CPU 41x -2/3 FM 458-1 DP (isochronous)

CP 342-5/CP 342-5 FO, CP 343-5, CP 443-5 Basic, CP 443-5 Extended IM 467/467 FO

4

CPUs with DP interface

ET 200S / ET 200M / ET 200pro / ET 200eco

IM 151-1, IM 151-1 HF, IM 151-7 CPU, IM 151-7 F-CPU IM 153-1, IM 153-2 IM 154-1 DP, IM 154-2 DP HF

SIMATIC TDC

CP 50M0

SIMATIC PC/PG Power PG

Box PC

Box PC 620/627/840 Rack PC 840/IL40 S Panel PC IL77/670/677/870/877 Field PG Power PGO

Panel PC

Field PG

CP 5512 CP 5611 A2 CP 5613 A2/CP 5613 FO CP 5614 A2/CP 5614 FO

Rack PC

PC-based Automation WinAC

WinAC Slot 412/416 (with integral interface), WinAC MP (with integral interface) WinAC RTX

CP 5613 A2

WinAC Basis

CP 5611 A2, CP 5613 A2, Integral interface PC/PG G_IK10_XX_50002

PROFIBUS DP master


4/5

PROFIBUS

Introduction


■ Overview (continued) PROFIBUS DP/PA is used to link field devices such as distributed I/O stations or drives with automation systems such as SIMATIC S7 or PCs. PROFIBUS DP/PA is used when I/O devices are widely distributed on the machine or in the plant (e.g. at the field level) and can be combined into one station (e.g. ET 200), more than 16 inputs/outputs.

The actuators and sensors are connected to field devices. The field devices are supplied with output data in accordance with the master/slave technique and transfer input data to the programmable controller or PC. High-performance tools such as STEP 7 and COM PROFIBUS are available for configuring and parameterizing the I/O devices. Testing and start-up is possible over PROFIBUS DP from any connection point using these tools.

DP master e.g. PLC or PC

4 C7-635, C7-636

S7-300 (Slave) with CPU 31x-2 DP or CP 342-5, CP 342-5 FO Vision Sensor VS 120 VS 130

PC with CP 5611 A2 CP 5614 A2 CP 5614 FO

S7-200 (Slave) ET 200S

ET 200L

Customized solution with Siemens ASICs

ET 200M DP/PA coupler/link ET 200iSP

ET 200eco

S5-115U with IM 308C

Field device for hazardous area

ET 200pro

Drive (e.g. SIMODRIVE)

SITRANS F US

Mobile Panel Master Drive SITRANS P

PROFIBUS PA

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E

Customized solution with Siemens ASICs

PROFIBUS DP slaves

4/6


G_IK10_XX_50108

DP/EIB Link

PROFIBUS

Introduction


■ Overview (continued) DP device types

DP-V0

PROFIBUS DP distinguishes between two different master classes and different DP functions:

The DP master functions (DP-V0) comprise configuration, parameterization, read input data and write outputs in cycles, read diagnostics data.

DP Master Class 1 The DP Master Class 1 is the central component on PROFIBUS DP. The central controller or PC exchanges information with distributed stations (DP slaves) in a fixed, repeated message cycle. DP Master Class 2 Devices of this type are used (programming, configuration or control devices) during start-up, for configuring the DP system or for controlling the plant during normal operation (diagnostics). A DP Master Class 2 can be used, for example, to read the input, output, diagnostics and configuration data of the slaves. DP slave A DP slave is an I/O station that reads in input data and transfers output data to the I/O. The volume of input and output data depends on the device and can be up to 244 bytes. The functional scope can differ between DP masters of Class 1 and 2 or DP slaves. This determines the performance and availability of a communications processor.

DP-V1 The additional DP function expansions (DP-V 1) make it possible to perform non-isochronous read and write functions as well as acknowledgement of alarms at the same time as processing cyclic data communication. These extended DP functions comprise acyclic access to the parameters and measured values of a slave (e.g. field devices of process automation and intelligent HMI devices). This type of slave must be supplied with extensive parameter data during start-up and during normal operation. Data transferred in acyclic mode (e.g. parameterization data) are only rarely changed, in comparison to the cyclic measured values, and are transferred at lower priority in parallel with the cyclic high-speed useful data transfer. Alarm acknowledgement by the master ensures reliable transfer of the alarms from DP slaves. DP-V2 The DP master functions (DP-V2) comprise functions for isochronous mode and direct data communication between DP slaves. Isochronous mode

DP-M

DP-S

Isochronous mode is implemented by means of a signal with a constant bus cycle for the bus system. This isochronous, constant cycle is sent by the master to all bus stations in the form of a global control message. The master and slave can then synchronize their applications with this signal. The jitter of this signal from cycle to cycle must be less than 1 µs for typical drive applications. Direct data communication between DP slaves The publisher/subscriber model is used to implement the direct data communication between slaves. Slaves declared as publishers make their input data (corresponds to response message to their own master) available to other slaves, the subscribers, for reading. Direct slave-to-slave communication is performed cyclically.


4/7

4

PROFIBUS

Introduction


■ Integration

DP Master Class 1

DP Master Class 2

Control tasks and diagnostics

Engineering and diagnostics Master diagnostics Read bus parameters Download/upload, etc.

e.g. PLC/PC

e.g. PC

DP Master Classes

4/8


Read/write data recordn (acyclic)

G_IK10_XX_50004

Equidistance Internode communication

e.g. ET 200

Read input data Read output data Slave diagnostics Read configuration Address modification

DP-V0

DP-V1

Alarm acknowledge Read/write data record (acyclic)

Slave

DP-V1

DP-V0

Configuration Parameterization Read input data Write output data Read diagnostics data

DP-V2

4

PROFIBUS

Introduction

Data communication

■ Overview Communication functions

Standard communication

Data communication (e.g. PROFIBUS FMS) serves to exchange data between programmable controllers or between a programmable controller and intelligent partners (PC, computers, etc.).

This comprises standardized protocols for data communication . • PROFIBUS FMS (Fieldbus Message Specification)

The following communication functions are available for this purpose:

This is ideally suited to communication from different automation systems (e.g. PLCs, PCs) from different manufacturers at the cell level with only a few stations (max. 16). Communication with field devices using the FMS interface is also possible.

PG/OP communication

With the FMS services READ, WRITE and INFORMATION REPORT, read or write access to variables of the communication partner is possible from the user program by means of a variable index or variable name, or the user program can transfer its own variable values to a communications partner. Partial access to variables is supported. Communication is processed over acyclic connections (master-to-master, master-to-slave), over acyclic connections with a slave initiative or with cyclic connections (master-to-slave). The INFORMATION REPORT can also be used to send a message to all stations on the network using a broadcast service. The FMS service IDENTIFY (request for identification characteristics of the partner) and STATUS (request partner status) can also be activated.

Comprises integral communication functions that are used by the SIMATIC programmable controllers to perform data communication with HMI devices (e.g. TD/OP) and SIMATIC PG (STEP 7). PG/OP communication is supported by MPI, PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet networks. S7 routing Using S7 routing it is possible to use the programming device communication across networks. S7 communication S7 communication is the integral communication function that has been optimized within the SIMATIC S7/C7. It enables PCs and workstations to be connected. The maximum volume of useful data per task is 64 KB. S7 communication offers simple, powerful communication services and provides a network-independent software interface for MPI, PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet networks.

OPC server The basic principle of OPC (OLE for Process Control) is that OPC client applications communicate with the OPC server over a standardized, open and manufacturer-independent interface.


IT communication can be implemented over the OPC XML DA interface.

The SEND/RECEIVE interface (with PROFIBUS over FDL) is optimized for communication between SIMATIC S5 and S7 controls and therefore facilitates migration of SIMATIC S5, SIMATIC S7 controls and PCs over PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet.

The appropriate OPC servers are included in the scope of supply of the respective communication software.

DP-M

DP-S PG/OP

S7

S5

FMS

OPC


4/9

4

PROFIBUS

Introduction

Data communication

■ Overview (continued) System interfacing For many data terminals, communications processors (CPs) are available that already have the communications functions implemented in the firmware and therefore relieve the data terminal of communications tasks (e.g. flow control, blocking, etc.).

Automation system

4

Communications processor

SIMATIC C7

S7-300/C7

CP 342-5 CP 342-5 FO CP 343-5

S7-400

CP 443-5 Basic CP 443-5 Extended

S5-115U to 155U

CP 5431 FMS/DP

PG/PC

PROFIBUS

Data communication for SIMATIC and the PC

4/10


G_IK10_XX_50005

CP 5611 A2 CP 5613 A2/CP 5613 FO CP 5614 A2/CP 5614 FO

PROFIBUS

Introduction


■ Function 1)

S7 Communication

S5-C

PROFIBUS-FMS

Time of day

CP 5431 FMS/DP

Relay

Receiver

Sender

Info. / Report

Write

Read

H-Comunication

USEND URECV

BSEND BRECV

Put/Get Client

Put/Get Server

DP-Slave

Master Class 2 in the H system

in the standard system

SIMATIC S5

PG/ OP

PROFIBUS DP Master Class 1

Hardware

4

2)

IM 308-C 505 FIM SIMATIC 505

505 RBC CP 5434

SIMATIC S7-300

CP 342-5

SIMATIC C7

CP 343-5

3)

3)

CP 443-5 Basic SIMATIC S7-400

CP 443-5 Extended

4)

4)

IM 467 IM 467 FO S5-compatible communication; refers to SDA (PLC/PLC connection) and SDN services of PROFIBUS Layer 2 Additional SRD services of PROFIBUS Layer 2 DP master, DP slave cannot be operated simultaneously Fault-tolerant DP master and S7 Communication can be operated optionally

G_IK10_XX_50100

1) 2) 3) 4)

Communications overview for SIMATIC


4/11

PROFIBUS

Introduction


■ Function (continued) OPC

CP 5613 A2 CP 5613 FO CP 5614 A2 CP 5614 FO (PCI 32 bit)

(PCI 32 bit)

Info/Report

Write

PROFIBUS FMS

Read

S5-C H communication

USEND/URECV

Put/Get Server

S7 communication

Put/Get Client

DP slave

PROFIBUS DP

BSEND/BRECV

6)

Master class 2

OPC

Master class 1

PG/ OP

CP with DP-Base 1) 4)

5)

DP-5613 4) S7-5613 FMS-5613

SOFTNET-DP

CP 5611 A2

Win 2003 Server

Operating system

Windows XP Pro

2) 3)

2) 3)

SOFTNET-DP Slave

2)

SOFTNET-S7 STEP 7

SOFTNET-DP

CP 5512

(CardBus 32 bit)

SOFTNET-DP Slave

2) 3)

2) 3) 2)

SOFTNET-S7 STEP 7

You can find more information in the Internet. http://www.siemens.com.simatic-net/ik-info In case of questions on Linux-/ UNIX projects consult I & S. E-mail: [email protected]

Communications overview for PG/PC

4/12


1) Included in the CP 5613/A2/CP 5613FO/CP 5614 A2/CP 5614 FO scope of supply 2) DP master and DP slave cannot be operated simultaneously 3) Master Class 1 and Master Class 2 cannot be operated simultaneously on one CP 4) DP-Base and CP 5613 cannot be operated simultaneously 5) On CP 5614 only 6) Including XML DA interface for data access

You can find application examples on the Quick Start CD

G_IK10_XX_50058

4

Software

Windows 2000 Pro

Hardware

PROFIBUS

Introduction


■ Integration Configuration example for process or field communication S7-400 with CP 443-5 Extended (DP-Master)

PROFIBUS DP

PC with CP 5613 A2 and DP-Base (DP-Master)

S7-300 with CP 342-5 (DP-Master)

PROFIBUS DP

S5 with IM 308-C

PG with STEP 7 and STEP 5

ET 200S

4 G_IK10_XX_50007

Third-party device ET 200X

PROFIBUS DP configuration for SIMATIC S5/S7 and PG/PC

Configuration example for data communication PROFIBUS FMS


S7-300 with CP 343-5

PC/WinCC with CP 5613 A2 and FMS-5613

PROFIBUS FMS

G_IK10_XX_50008

Third-party device

S5-115 - 155U with CP 5431 FMS/DP

PG with STEP 7 and STEP 5

PROFIBUS FMS configuration for SIMATIC S5/S7 and PG/PCC


4/13

PROFIBUS

Introduction


■ Integration (continued) Configuration example for programming device/operator panel communication PG/OP communication

S7-400 with CP 443-1

PG with CP 1613 A2 and STEP 7 V5

CP 443-5 Extended

S7-400 with CP 443-1

CP 443-5 Basic PROFIBUS

PROFIBUS DP

S7-300 with CP 343-5

S7-300 with CP 342-5 ET 200S

PG/OP communication with S7 routing

4/14


ET 200X


G_IK10_XX_50009

4

Industrial Ethernet

S7-400 with CP 443-1

PROFIBUS


■ Overview Siemens offers a comprehensive range of PROFIBUS network components for electrical and optical transmission technology. PROFIBUS is standardized to IEC 61158/EN 50170 for universal automation (PROFIBUS FMS and PROFIBUS DP) as well as to IEC 61158-2 for process automation (PROFIBUS PA). Electrical network • The electrical network uses a shielded, twisted-pair cable. The RS 485 interface operates with voltage differences. It is therefore more insensitive to disturbances than a voltage or current interface. With PROFIBUS, the stations are connected to the bus through a bus terminal or a bus connector (max. 32 stations per segment). • The individual segments are connected through repeaters. • The transmission rate can be set in steps from 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s. • The maximum segment length depends on the transmission rate. • The electrical network can be configured as a bus or with a tree topology • For intrinsically safe applications, PROFIBUS PA offers transmission technology to IEC 61158-2. In this case the transmission rate is 31.25 kbit/s.

Features • High-quality bus cable • Transmission procedure: RS 485 (to EIA) • Bus structure with bus terminals and bus connector for connecting the PROFIBUS stations • Transmission procedure to IEC 61158/EN 50170 for universal automation (PROFIBUS FMS/DP) as well as IEC 61158-2 for intrinsically-safe applications (PROFIBUS PA) • The network components (DP/PA coupler or DP/PA Link) convert the DP transmission technique from RS 485 (bit coding by means of voltage difference signals) to IEC 61158-2 (bit coding by means of current signals) • Simple, system-wide installation and grounding concept • Easy installation.

PC with CP 5613 A2 S7-400 with CP 443-5

OP 17

PROFIBUS PA

PG

ET 200S

Repeater

ET 200M

DP/PA-Link

Intrinsically-safe area

Drive

ET 200pro

ET 200pro

G_IK10_XX50012

Repeater

Network configuration of electrical PROFIBUS network


4/15

4

PROFIBUS


■ Overview (continued) Optical network

Optical PROFIBUS with OLMs

The fiber-optic version of PROFIBUS has the following features: • The transmission path is insensitive to electromagnetic interference • Suitable for long distances • Electrical isolation • Uses plastic, PCF or glass fiber-optic cables

Optical Link Modules (OLMs) can be used to construct an optical network in line, ring and star topology. The maximum distance between two OLMs can be up to 15 km. The transmission rate can be set in steps from 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s.

4

PC with CP 5613 A2

OLM

The optical PROFIBUS with an integrated interface and OBT has a line topology. A cost-effective solution in the form of devices with an integral optical interface is available for this purpose. Data terminals with an RS 485 interface can be connected over an Optical Bus Terminal (OBT). The maximum spacing between two stations is 50 m for a plastic fiber-optic cable. Special fiberoptic cables are offered for bridging distances of up to 300 m.

OLM

Bus cable for PROFIBUS Glass FO cable

Network configuration for optical PROFIBUS with OLMs


OLM

S7-400 with CP 443-5

S7-300 with CP 342-5

4/16

OLM

Drive

ET 200pro

G_IK10_XX_50136

OLM

Optical PROFIBUS with integrated interface and OBT

PROFIBUS


■ Overview (continued) Hybrid network Hybrid electrical and optical networks are possible. The transition between both media is implemented by the OLM. There is no difference between the two-wire technology and fiber-optic technology with regard to communication between the stations on the bus. Up to 127 stations can be connected to a PROFIBUS network.

The optical transmission technology offers the following advantages: • Fiber-optic conductors made of plastic or glass are insensitive to electromagnetic fields, so there is no need for the EMC measures that are necessary with electrical networks • In outdoor applications, there is no need for additional lightning protection • The electrical potentials on the modules are electrically isolated thanks to the properties of the conductors • Fiber-optic cables can be used to bridge long distances to field devices.

4

Control cabinet OLM

OLM

OLM

OLM

ET 200M ET 200S

ET 200S

OP 17

Bus cable for PROFIBUS Glass FOC

ET 200pro

ET 200pro

G_IK10_XX_50135

S7-300

Network configurations as a combination of the electrical and optical PROFIBUS


4/17

PROFIBUS




Wireless link Using the PROFIBUS Infrared Link Module (ILM), individual or multiple PROFIBUS slaves or slave segments can be connected wirelessly. For a maximum transmission rate of 1.5 Mbit/s and a maximum range of 15 m, communication to moving parts, e.g. to automated guided vehicles, and the replacement of systems subject to wear (sliprings or slipconductors) is possible.

Additional language versions and manuals can be found for the various products at: http://www.siemens.com/automation/csi/net It is important to note the restrictions for use of the specified SIMATIC NET products (Order Nos. 6GK..., 6XV1) which you can view on the Internet: Additional information can be found in the Internet under:

Master e.g. S7-300


4

Slave e.g. ET 200L

ILM

Slave e.g. ET 200pro

Link to moving parts

4/18


ILM

Slave e.g. ET 200S

G_IK10_XX_50134

ILM

PROFIBUS


■ Technical specifications Standard

■ Ordering data Manual for PROFIBUS networks Network architecture, configuring, network components, installation

Bus, tree

• German

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA0

Bus, tree, ring

• English

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA1

Point-to-point; point-to-multipoint


6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

Topology • Electrical network • Optical network • Wireless Link

Order No.

PROFIBUS according to IEC 61 158/EN 50 170 Volume 2

Transmission medium • Electrical network

Shielded two-wire cable

• Optical network

Fiber-optic cable (glass, PCF and plastic)

• Wireless Link

Infrared

Network size • Electrical network

max. 9.6 km

• Optical network

max. 90 km

• Wireless Link

max. 15 m


9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s (selectable) including 31.25 kbit/s for (PROFIBUS PA)

Number of stations

max. 127

Access procedure

Token passing with lower level master/slave

Protocols

PROFIBUS DP PG/OP communication S7 communication S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) PROFIBUS FMS

4

■ More information It is important to note the restrictions for use of the specified SIMATIC NET products (Order Nos. 6GK..., 6XV1) which you can view on the Internet: Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info


4/19

e

l

e

c

t

r

i

c a

l

4/20 PROFIBUS FC bus cables PROFIBUS bus cables Connecting cables ECOFAST cable Hybrid cable Energy cable PROFIBUS FC bus cable (PROFIBUS PA) Bus terminal Fiber-optic cables 50/125 µm Fiber-optic cables 62,5/125 µm PCF-FOC 200/230 µm POF-FOC 980/1000 µm Fiber-optic cables with BFOC connector Fiber-optic cables with Simplex connector

PROFIBUS FC Standard Cable PROFIBUS FC Robust Cable PROFIBUS FC Food Cable PROFIBUS FC Ground Cable PROFIBUS FC FRNC Cable PROFIBUS FC Trailing Cable PROFIBUS Festoon Cable PROFIBUS Flexible Cable 830-2 connecting cable 830-1T connecting cable PROFIBUS M12 connecting cable ECOFAST Hybrid Cable ECOFAST Hybrid Cable GP PROFIBUS Hybrid Standard Cable GP PROFIBUS Hybrid Robust Cable Energy Cable 5 x 1.5

PB FC Process Cable

Busterminal 12M FO Standard Cable GP FO Trailing Cable FO Trailing Cable GP FO Ground Cable Fiber Optic Standard Cable INDOOR Fiber Optic Indoor Cable Flexible Fiber Optic Trailing Cable SIENOPYR marine duplex fiber-optic cable PCF Standard Cable GP PCF Trailing Cable PCF Trailing Cable GP Plastic Fiber Optic Standard cable

Prefabricated fiber-optic cables with BFOC connector

Prefabricated fiber-optic cables with Simplex connector

4

PB devices with Simplex connection


G_IK10_XX_50013

o p t i c a l

Network components

PROFIBUS

Summary of network components

■ Overview PROFIBUS (PB)

PB FastConnect connector

PB bus connector

ECOFAST connector

PB M12 connector/socket (B coded)

7/8" Power connector

PB devices with Sub-D and M12 connection

ET 200pro

Bus terminal 12M

SpliTConnect system

BFOC connector

PB devices with BFOC connection

Simplex connector

PROFIBUS

Network components Network selection criteria

■ Overview

Criteria

Electrical network

RS 485 in accordance with IEC 61158/ EN 50170

IEC 61158-2 (PA)

Optical network

Plastic

Wireless link Glass

PCF

Infrared

EMC

4

Networking between buildings

1)

Range

5)

2)

Suitable for high data rate

4)

Simple connector assembly

3)

3)

Simple cable laying Equipotential bonding measures required

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

Range of cables for special applications Use with mobile nodes Use in intrinsically-safe environment suitable partly suitable Not relevant for this application

G_IK10_XX_50010

1) Lightning protection measures required 2) Dependent on data transmission rate 3) Trained personnel and special tool required 4) Careful laying required 5) Outside cable required (on request)

Summary of network selection criteria for transmission media


4/21

PROFIBUS


■ Overview (continued) Criteria

Electrical network

Optical network

Electrical PROFIBUS

Transmission media

Plastic

with OLM

with integr. Interface/OBT

90 km

9.6 km

1)

PCF

4

Glass Shielded twisted-pair cable Distances

maximum network size between 2 nodes

Topology

9.6 km 5) up to 1 km

3)

up to 15 km

2)

up to 300 m

2)

Bus Linear bus Tree Ring

Transmission protocol Connection of nodes via

All

All

DP

OLM Integral interfaces

4)

Bus terminal Bus connector

1) Plastic fiber optic cable is also called polymer optical fiber (POF) 2) Depending on cable type used 3) Depending on data rate and performance type used 4) Integral interfaces (ET 200M, ET 200X) 5) For PROFIBUS-PA 1.9 km

Selection criteria for electrical and optical networks

4/22


suitable Not relevant for this application

G_IK10_XX_50133

Electrical network segments can be connected

PROFIBUS


■ Overview (continued) Electrical network RS 485in accordance with IEC 61158/EN 50170

Optical network

IEC 61158-2 (PA)

withOLM

Linear bus, star, ring

Wireless link

with integral interface/ OBT

Linear bus

Point-to-point Point-to-multipoint

Plastic fiber optic cable PCF optic cable

Wireless, infrared

Bus tree

Bus tree

Shielded twisted-pair cable

Shielded twisted-pair Plastic fiber optic cable cable for intrinsically-safe PCF optic cable and non-intrinsically-safe Glass fiber optic cable areas

FastConnect stripping tool

FastConnect stripping tool

Tools for preparing BFOC connectors for plastic fiber optic cables

Tools for preparing Simplex connectors for plastic fiber optic cables

Bus connector

SpliTConnect system

BFOC connector

Simplex connector

Integral terminals

Bus terminal

SpliTConnect system

OLM

OBT

ILM

INDOOR cable with BFOC Standard glass cable with BFOC Trailing cable with BFOC Standard PCF cable with BFOC Standard plastic cable with BFOC

Standard PCF cable with Simplex connectors and pull cord feature

Not required

Not required

Optical Link Module (OLM)

Optical Bus Terminal (OBT)

Infrared Link Module (ILM)

Network topology

Transmission media

Tools and accessories

Connectors

Connection components

Prepared cables

Lightning protection

Electrical network segment can be connected via

830-1T connecting cable 830-2 connecting cable

Primary protection Secondary protection

to be implemented through design measures

repeater

4

Signal contact and integral measuring sockets; level measuring device on request

Level measuring device on request

Signal contact and display of signal strength

Documentation

Manual for PROFIBUS networks





Opt. PROFIBUS/OLM

Opt. PROFIBUS/ int./OBT

Electrical PROFIBUS Repeater

OLM

OBT

ILM

Optical PROFIBUS/OLM

OLM

OLM

OBT + OLM

OLM + ILM

Optical PROFIBUS/int./OBT

OBT

OBT + OLM

OBT, integr. optics

OBT + ILM

ILM

OLM + ILM

OBT + ILM

ILM

G_IK10_XX_50016

BT 200 hardware test device

Not available

Diagnostics tool

PROFIBUS network components and accessories

Wireless link

Wireless link

G_IK10_XX_50017

Electrical PROFIBUS

Transitions between the transmission media Siemens IK PI · 2007

4/23

PROFIBUS

Network components Connection examples

■ Integration

CP 342-5

PROFIBUS FC RS 485 bus connector

4

PROFIBUS FC standard cable

G_IK10_XX_50170

SIMATIC S7-300

Connection example for electrical networking with PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector RS 485

PROFIBUS FC RS 485 Plug 180 bus connector

PROFIBUS module e.g. CP 5613 A2

PROFIBUS FC bus cable Bus terminal 12M for connecting bus stations to PROFIBUS

G_IK10_XX_50055

PROFIBUS FC bus cable

Connection example for electrical networking with PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector RS 485 or bus terminal

PROFIBUS module e.g. CP 5613 A2

PROFIBUS OLM

PROFIBUS FC RS 485 bus connector

PROFIBUS FC standard cable Connection example for optical networking

4/24


Pre-assembled glass FO cable

G_IK10_XX_50056

PROFIBUS FC RS 485 Plug 180 bus connector

PROFIBUS


■ Integration (continued) PROFIBUS module e.g. CP 5613 FO

CP 342-5 FO (IM 153-2 FO, IM 151, BM 143 DESINA)

FO cable with simplex connector

PROFIBUS PCF - or plastic FO cable

G_IK10_XX_50061

4

Connection example of optical networking with fiber-optic cables and Simplex connectors

OLM

OLM

G_IK10_XX_50014

FO cable with BFOC connector

Connection example of optical networking with fiber-optic cables and BFOC connectors

DP/PA coupler

TAP

TAP

Coupler

TAP

FC process cable

SITRANS P

SITRANS F

SITRANS P

G_IK10_XX_50057

PROFIBUS PA

Connection example for an intrinsically safe network Siemens IK PI · 2007

4/25

PROFIBUS


■ Integration (continued) SIMATIC S7-300

ET 200X

0

4

1

PROFIBUS FC standard cable Connection example for wireless data transmission with ILM

4/26


G_IK10_XX_50171

PROFIBUS FC standard cable

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) PROFIBUS FastConnect

■ Overview

■ Benefits

• Shorter connection times for terminals by stripping of the outer cladding and woven shield in one step • Installation faults, such as short-circuits between the shield and cores, are excluded • Easy assembly due to preset insulation stripping tool (FC stripping tool) • Termination can be checked in the assembled state through the transparent cover for the insulation piercing terminals thanks to color coding.

■ Design • Quick and easy assembly of PROFIBUS copper cables • Assembly mistakes such as short-circuits between the shield and core are excluded

The system comprises 3 compatible components: • FastConnect bus cables for rapid installation • FastConnect stripping tool • FastConnect bus connector for PROFIBUS The PROFIBUS FastConnect bus cables can also be connected to conventional bus connectors.

■ Function The FastConnect stripping method enables fast and easy connection of PROFIBUS connectors to the PROFIBUS cables. The special structure of the FastConnect bus cables enables the use of the FastConnect stripping tool with which the outer casing and the woven shield can be stripped in one operation with perfect precision. The cable prepared in this way is connected in the FastConnect bus connector using the insulation displacement method.


4/27

4

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) PROFIBUS FastConnect

■ Application

The stripping tool (FCS) is held in the right hand

Measure the length of cable to be stripped by resting the cable on the measuring template. The end stop is formed by the index finger of the left hand.

Insert the measured cable end in the tool up to the index finger of the left hand.

Fasten the end of the cable in the FCS up to the end stop.

Rotate the FCS 4 times in the direction of the arrow.

Remove the stripping tool still closed from the end of the cable.

Cable residue remains in the FCS. These can be removed when the FCS is opened.

Insert the cores in the plug according to color code, press down the holding tab and tighten the cable clamp.

Finished!

4

4/28


G_IK10_XX_50001

PROFIBUS FastConnect is a system for fast and easy assembly of PROFIBUS copper cables.

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) PROFIBUS bus cables

■ Overview

■ Design Shielded, twisted-pair cable with circular cross-section The following applies for all PROFIBUS bus cables: • The double shield makes it especially suitable for routing through industrial areas with strong electro-magnetic fields • System-wide grounding concept can be implemented using the external shield of the bus cable and the grounding terminals on the bus terminal • Printed meter marks Cable types

• Different versions for different fields of application (e.g. underground cables, trailing cables) • High interference immunity thanks to double shielding • Flame-retardant bus cable (halogen-free) • Easy length measurement thanks to printed meter markings

■ Benefits

• Flexible application possibilities thanks to special bus cables • Network is immune to interference thanks to double shielded cables and a uniform grounding concept • Time saving due to simple and fast connector assembly with FastConnect cables • Silicon-free, therefore particularly suitable for use in the automotive industry (e.g. on paint shop conveyors)

■ Application For the construction of PROFIBUS networks, different cable types are offered to suit the different types of application. The listed bus cables should always be used. For further information on network configuration, see PROFIBUS network manual. UL approvals Different cable versions are offered with appropriate UL approvals for laying in cable bundles and cable racks according to the specifications of NEC (National Electrical Code) Article 800/725.

The shape of the FastConnect (FC) bus cables is radially symmetric and allows an insulation stripping tool to be used. This means that bus connectors can be assembled quickly and easily. • PROFIBUS FC Standard Cable: Standard bus cable specially designed for fast installation • PROFIBUS FC Robust Cable: Special cable for use in corrosive atmospheres and under severe mechanical loading • PROFIBUS FC Food Cable: The PE casing of the cable makes this cable suitable for use in the food, beverage and tobacco industries • PROFIBUS FC Ground Cable: Special cable for laying underground. It differs from the PROFIBUS bus cable in that it has an additional sheath • PROFIBUS FC Flexible Cable Flexible (stranded conductors), halogen-free bus cable with PUR sheath for occasional moving • PROFIBUS FC Trailing Cable: Bus cable specially designed for forced motion control in a trailing cable, e.g. with continuously moving machine parts (stranded core) • PROFIBUS FC FRNC Cable: Two-core, shielded, flame-retardant, halogen-free bus cable with Copolymer outer sheath FRNC (Flame Retardant Non Corrosive) Bus cables without FastConnect technology (due to type of construction) • PROFIBUS Festoon Cable: Flexible bus cable (stranded cores) specially designed for festoon suspension. For round cables, cable-carrying trolleys are recommended • PROFIBUS Torsion Cable Bus cable for highly flexible applications: Special cable (stranded cores) for use on moving parts of machines (5 million torsion movements on 1 m length of cable, ± 180º) • PROFIBUS Hybrid Cable: Rugged hybrid cable suitable for trailing with two copper conductors for data transmission and two copper conductors for the power supply of ET 200pro • SIENOPYR FR marine cable Halogen-free, non-crush, flame-retardant, marine-approved cable for permanent installation on ships and offshore platforms indoors and on open deck. Sold by the meter.


4/29

4

PROFIBUS



PROFIBUS FC Standard Cable

PROFIBUS FC Robust Cable

PROFIBUS FC Food Cable

Applications

Universally implementable

In corrosive atmospheres and under severe mechanical stress

Food, beverages and tobacco industries

• at 16 MHz

≤ 42 dB/km

≤ 42 dB/km

≤ 42 dB/km

• at 4 MHz

≤ 22 dB/km

≤ 22 dB/km

≤ 22 dB/km

• at 9:6 kHz

≤ 2.5 dB/km

≤ 2.5 dB/km

≤ 2.5 dB/km

Damping

4

Characteristic impedance • at 9.6 kHz

270 ± 27 Ω

270 ± 27 Ω

270 ± 27 Ω

• at 38.4 kHz

185 ± 18.5 Ω

185 ± 18.5 Ω

185 ± 18.5 Ω

• at 3 to 20 MHz

150 ± 15 Ω

150 ± 15 Ω

150 ± 15 Ω

Rated value

150 Ω

150 Ω

150 Ω

Loop resistance

≤ 110 Ω/km

≤ 110 Ω/km

≤ 110 Ω/km

Shield resistance

≤ 9.5 Ω/km

≤ 9.5 Ω/km

≤ 9.5 Ω/km

Effective capacitance at 1 kHz

approx. 28.5 nF/km

approx. 28.5 nF/km

approx. 28.5 nF/km


≤ 100 V

≤ 100 V

≤ 100 V


02YSY (ST) CY 1 × 2 × 0.64/2.55-150 KF 40 FR VI

02YSY (ST) CY 1 × 2 × 0.64/2.55-150 KF 40 FR VI

02YSY (ST) CY 1 × 2 × 0.64/2.55-150 KF 40 FR VI

• Material

PVC

PUR

PE

• Diameter

8.0 ± 0.4 mm

8.0 ± 0.4 mm

8.0 ± 0.4 mm

• Color

Violet

Violet

Black


–40 ºC … +60 ºC

–40 ºC … +60 ºC

–40 ºC … +60 ºC


–40 ºC … +60 ºC

–40 ºC … +60 ºC

–40 ºC … +60 ºC


–40 ºC … +60 ºC

–40 ºC … +60 ºC

–40 ºC … +60 ºC

• Single bend

≥ 75 mm

≥ 75 mm

≥ 75 mm

• Multiple bends

≥ 150 mm

≥ 150 mm

≥ 150 mm


≤ 100 N

≤ 100 N

≤ 100 N

Weight

76 kg/km

73 kg/km

67 kg/km

Halogen-free

No

No

No

Behavior in fire

Flame-retardant to VDE 0482-266-2-4, IEC 60332-3-24

Flame-retardant to VDE 0482-265-2-1, IEC 60332-1

Inflammable



Yes / CMX

No


Yes

No

No


Limited resistance

Highly resistant

Limited resistance

UV-resistant

Yes

Yes

Yes

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes

Jacket


Bending radii


4/30


PROFIBUS


■ Technical specifications (continued) Cable type 1)

PROFIBUS FC Ground Cable

PROFIBUS FC Flexible Cable 2)

PROFIBUS FC Trailing Cable 2) 3)

PROFIBUS FC FRNC Cable

Applications

Underground laying

Occasionally moved machine parts

Trailing cables

Halogen-free and flameretardant applications

Damping • at 16 MHz • at 4 MHz • at 38.4 kHz • at 9.6 kHz

≤ 42 dB/km ≤ 22 dB/km ≤ 4 dB/km ≤ 2.5 dB/km

≤ 49 dB/km ≤ 25 dB/km ≤ 4 dB/km ≤ 3 dB/km

≤ 49 dB/km ≤ 25 dB/km ≤ 4 dB/km ≤ 3 dB/km

≤ 42 dB/km ≤ 22 dB/km ≤ 4 dB/km ≤ 2.5 dB/km

Characteristic impedance • at 9.6 kHz • at 38.4 kHz • at 3 to 20 MHz

270 ± 27 Ω 185 ± 18.5 Ω 150 ± 15 Ω

270 ± 27 Ω 185 ± 18.5 Ω 150 ± 15 Ω

270 ± 27 Ω 185 ± 18.5 Ω 150 ± 15 Ω

270 ± 27 Ω 185 ± 18.5 Ω 150 ± 15 Ω

Rated value

150 Ω

150 Ω

150 Ω

150 Ω

Loop resistance

≤ 110 Ω/km

≤ 133 Ω/km

≤ 133 Ω/km

≤ 110 Ω/km

Shield resistance

≤ 9.5 Ω/km

≤ 14 Ω/km

≤ 14 Ω/km

≤ 9.5 Ω/km


approx. 28.5 nF/km

approx. 28 nF/km

approx. 28.5 nF/km

approx. 28.5 nF/km


≤ 100 V

≤ 100 V

≤ 100 V

≤ 100 V


02YSY (ST) CY2Y 1 x 2 x 0.64/2.55-150 KF 40 SW

02Y (ST) C 11Y 1 x 2 x 0.65/2.56-150 LI KF40 FRNC FC VI

02YY (ST) C11Y 1 x 2 x 0.64/2.55-150 LI KF 40 FR petrol

02YSH (ST) CH 1 x 2 x 0.64/2.55-150 VI KF 25 FRNC

Jacket • Material • Diameter • Color

PE/PVC 10.8 ± 0.5 mm 4) Black

PUR 8.0 ± 0.4 mm Violet

PUR 8.0 ± 0.4 mm Petrol

FRNC 8.0 ± 0.4 mm Light violet


–40 ºC … +60 ºC –40 ºC … +60 ºC –40 ºC … +60 ºC

–20 ºC … +60 ºC –40 ºC … +60 ºC –40 ºC … +60 ºC

–40 ºC … +60 ºC –40 ºC … +60 ºC –40 ºC … +60 ºC

–25 ºC … +80 ºC –25 ºC … +80 ºC –25 ºC … +80 ºC

Bending radii • Single bend • Multiple bends

≥ 80 mm ≥ 160 mm

≥ 40 mm ≥ 120 mm

≥ 40 mm ≥ 120 mm

≥ 60 mm ≥ 80 mm

Bending cycles

–

–

3.000.000

–

4


≤ 100 N

≤ 100 N

≤ 100 N

≤ 100 N

Weight

117 kg/km

70 kg/km

70 kg/km

72 kg/km

Halogen-free

No

Yes

No

Yes

Behavior in fire

Inflammable





No

Yes / CMX

Yes / CMX

Yes/ CM / PLTC / Sun Res


No

No

No

No


Limited resistance

Limited resistance

Highly resistant

Limited resistance

UV-resistant

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

1) 2) 3) 4)

Electrical characteristics at 20 ºC, tests according to DIN 47 250 Part 4 or DIN VDE 0472 Limited segment length (see manual for PROFIBUS networks) Trailing cables for the following requirements: Min. 3 million bending cycles for the specified bending radius and an acceleration of max. 4 m/s2 Outer diameter >8 mm; bus connectors can only be connected after the outer sheath has been stripped


4/31

PROFIBUS



PROFIBUS Festoon Cable 2)

PROFIBUS Torsion Cable 2)

Applications

Festoon suspension

Moving machine parts

Shipbuilding

• at 16 MHz

≤ 49 dB/km

≤ 82 dB/km

≤ 45 dB/km

• at 4 MHz

≤ 25 dB/km

≤ 28 dB/km

≤ 22 dB/km

• 38.4 kHz

≤ 4 dB/km

≤ 3 dB/km

≤ 5 dB/km

• at 9.6 kHz

≤ 3 dB/km

≤ 2.5 dB/km

≤ 3 dB/km

3)

SIENOPYR FR shipboard cable 4)

Damping

4


270 ± 27 Ω

270 ± 27 Ω

250 ± 25 Ω

• at 38.4 kHz

185 ± 18.5 Ω

185 ± 18.5 Ω

185 ± 18.5 Ω

• at 3 to 20 MHz

150 ± 15 Ω

150 ± 15 Ω

150 ± 15 Ω

Rated value

150 Ω

150 Ω

150 Ω

Loop resistance

≤ 133 Ω/km

≤ 98 Ω/km

≤ 110 Ω/km

Shield resistance

≤ 19 Ω/km

≤ 14 Ω/km

–


approx. 28 nF/km

approx. 29 nF/km

approx. 30 nF/km at 800 Hz


≤ 100 V

≤ 100 V

≤ 100 V


02Y (ST) CY 1 x 2 x 0.65/2.56-150 LI petrol FR

02Y (ST) C 11Y 1 x 2 x 0.65/2.56-150 LI FR VI

M-02Y (ST) CH X 1 x 2 x 0.35 100 V

• Material

PVC

PUR

Polymer 6)

• Diameter

8.0 ± 0.3 mm

8.0 ± 0.4 mm

10.3 ± 0.5 mm

• Color

Petrol

Violet

Black


–40 ºC … +80 ºC

–40 ºC … +60 ºC

–40 ºC … +80 ºC


–40 ºC … +80 ºC

–40 ºC … +60 ºC

–40 ºC … +80 ºC


–40 ºC … +80 ºC

–40 ºC … +60 ºC

–10 ºC … +50 ºC

• Single bend

≥ 30 mm

≥ 60 mm

≥ 108 mm

• Multiple bends

≥ 70 mm 5)

≥ 120 mm

≥ 216 mm


≤ 80 N

≤ 100 N

≤ 100 N

Weight

64 kg/km

65 kg/km

approx. 109 kg/km

Halogen-free

No

No

Yes

Behavior in fire





Yes/ CM/CMG/PLCT/Sun Res/Oil Res

Yes / CMX

No


Yes

No

No


Limited resistance

Highly resistant

Extremely highly resistant

UV-resistant

Yes

Yes

Yes

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes

Yes


No

No

No

Jacket


Bending radii

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)

Electrical characteristics at 20 ºC, tests according to DIN 47 250 Part 4 or DIN VDE 0472 Limited segment length (see manual for PROFIBUS networks) Torsion-resistant cables for the following requirements: Min. 5 million torsional movements along 1 m length of cable ±180° Marine approvals: Lloyds Register of Shipping, Germanischer Lloyd Festooned cables for the following requirements: Min. 5 million bending cycles for the specified bending radius and an acceleration of 4 m/s2 Outer diameter >8 mm; bus connectors can only be connected after the outer sheath has been stripped

4/32


PROFIBUS



PROFIBUS cable for ET 200X

PROFIBUS Hybrid Standard Cable

PROFIBUS Hybrid Robust Cable 2) 3)

Applications

ET 200X

ET 200pro

ET 200pro

• at 16 MHz

–

≤ 4.9 dB/100 m

≤ 4.9 dB/100 m

• at 4 MHz

–

≤ 2.5 dB/100 m

≤ 2.5 dB/100 m

• at 9.6 kHz

–

≤ 0.3 dB/100 m

≤ 0.3 dB/100 m

• at 9.6 kHz

–

270 ± 27 Ω

270 ± 27 Ω

• at 38.4 kHz

–

185 ± 18.5 Ω

185 ± 18.5 Ω

• at 3 to 20 MHz

135 – 165 Ω

150 ± 15 Ω

150 ± 15 Ω

Rated value

–

150 Ω

150 Ω

Loop resistance

–

≤ 138 Ω/km

≤ 138 Ω/km

Shield resistance

–

≤ 10 Ω/km

≤ 10 Ω/km


30 nF/m

30 nF/m

30 nF/m


≤ 35 V

≤ 300 V

≤ 300 V

• Diameter

0.75 mm2

1.5 mm2

1.5 mm2

• Current carrying capacity

–

≤ 7.5 A (at 25 °C)

≤ 7.5 A (at 25 °C)

• Sheath color

–

Black

Black


02Y (ST)C 1x2x0.65/2.56-150 LI LIY-J Y 3 x 1 x 0.75 VI KF30

02Y(ST)C 1x2x0.65/2.56-150LI LIYZ Y 2x1x1.5 VI

02Y(ST)C 1x2x0.65/2.56-150LI LIHZ 11Y 2x1x1.5 VI FRNC

• Material

PUR

PVC

PUR

• Diameter

approx. 9.5 mm

11.0±0.5 mm

11.0±0.5 mm

• Color

Petrol

Violet

Violet


–30 ºC … +60 ºC

–40 ºC … +75 ºC

–40 ºC … +75 ºC


–40 ºC … +60 ºC

–40 ºC … +75 ºC

–40 ºC … +75 ºC


–40 ºC … +60 ºC

–40 ºC … +75 ºC

–40 ºC … +75 ºC

• Single bend

35 mm

44 mm

44 mm

• Multiple bends

75 mm

75 mm

75 mm


≤ 300 N

≤ 450 N

≤ 450 N

Weight

approx. 105 kg/km

140 kg/km

135 kg/km

Halogen-free

No

No

Yes

Behavior in fire





Yes

Yes / CMG

Yes / CMX


No

No

No


Limited resistance

Limited resistance

Highly resistant

UV-resistant

No

No

No

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes

Yes


No

No

No

Damping

4


Power cores (stranded wires)

Jacket


Bending radii

1) Electrical characteristics at 20 ºC, tests according to DIN 47 250 Part 4 or DIN VDE 0472 2) Trailing cables for the following requirements: Min. 1 million bending cycles for the specified bending radius and an acceleration of max. 2.5 m/s2 3) Cable resistance to weld spatter according to HD22.2 S3 / 5


4/33

PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data PROFIBUS FC Standard Cable Standard type with special design for fast mounting, 2-core, shielded, Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m; minimum order 20 m;

Order No. 6XV1 830-0EH10

Preferred lengths

4

• 20 m

6XV1 830-0EN20

• 50 m

6XV1 830-0EN50

• 100 m

6XV1 830-0ET10

• 200 m

6XV1 830-0ET20

• 500 m

6XV1 830-0ET50

• 1000 m

6XV1 830-0EU10

In spool box

Order No. PROFIBUS Torsion Cable 2-core, shielded Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m; minimum order 20 m; PROFIBUS cable for ET 200X • 5-core, sold by the meter, for bus signals, power supply: oil-resistant, partially weldresistant, can be trailed, PUR material, minimum order quantity 10 m • 5-core, sold by the meter, for bus signals, power supply: Standard, PVC material

6XV1 830-0PH10

6ES7 194-1LY10-0AA0 Length (specify in m)

6ES7 194-1LY00-0AA0-Z, Z = length (specify in m)

PROFIBUS Hybrid Standard Cable Standard PROFIBUS hybrid cable with 2 power conductors (1.5 mm2) for supply of data and power to ET 200pro

6XV1 860-2R

PROFIBUS Hybrid Robust Cable Rugged PROFIBUS hybrid cable suitable as trailing cable and resistant to welding spatter, with 2 power conductors (1.5 mm2) for supply of data and power to ET 200pro

6XV1 860-2S

• 50 m

6XV1 830-1EN50

• 100 m

6XV1 830-1ET10

PROFIBUS FC Robust Cable 2-core, shielded Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m; minimum order 20 m;

6XV1 830-0JH10

PROFIBUS FC Food Cable 2-core, shielded Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m; minimum order 20 m;

6XV1 830-0GH10

PROFIBUS FC Ground Cable 2-core, shielded Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m; minimum order 20 m;

6XV1 830-3FH10

PROFIBUS FC Flexible Cable 2-core, shielded Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m; minimum order 20 m;

6XV1 831-2K

Additional components 6GK1 905-6AA00

PROFIBUS FC Trailing Cable 2-core, shielded Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m; minimum order 20 m;

6XV1 830-3EH10

PROFIBUS FastConnect Stripping Tool Preadjusted stripping tool for fast stripping of PROFIBUS FastConnect bus cables

6GK1 905-6AB00

PROFIBUS Festoon Cable 2-core, shielded Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m; minimum order 20 m;

6XV1 830-3GH10

PROFIBUS FastConnect Blade Cassettes Spare blade cassettes for PROFIBUS FastConnect stripping tool, 5 units

PROFIBUS FC FRNC Cable 2-core, shielded, nonflammable, with copolymer outer sheath FRNC Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m; minimum order 20 m;

6XV1 830-0LH10

4/34


Special bus cables SIENOPYR PROFIBUS shipboard cable Copper cable for ships and offshore units Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m; minimum order 20 m;

6XV1 830-0MH10

PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector RS 485 with 90° cable outlet Insulation displacement • Without PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0

• With PG interface

6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0

PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector RS 485 Plug 180 With 180° cable outlet, insulation displacement

6GK1 500-0FC00

PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data

Order No.


Accessories

Installation instructions

Manual for PROFIBUS networks1)

The bus cables are supplied by the meter. If a bus segment must be assembled using two sections (e.g. > 1000 m segment length), bushings can be used for this purpose (low-impedance connection between cores with clamps, connect shields over a wide area).

Network architecture, project management, network components, installation • German

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA0

FastConnect

• English

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA1

The FastConnect stripping tool can be used to strip the outer sheath and shield of the new FastConnect bus cables to the right length in one step. In this way, the bus connectors (except 6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0) can be connected easily and quickly to the bus cable.

Lightning protection modules for reliable transmission between buildings with overvoltage protection 2) • Basic protection - basic section

919506

- protection module Type B

919510

- protective housing

906055

- shield connection terminal

919508

• Low-voltage protection - basic section

919506

- protection module

919570

- shield connection terminal

919508

SIMATIC NET Manual Collection

6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

Electronic manuals for communication systems, c ommunication protocols and communication products; on CD-ROM; German/English 1) Additional language versions and manuals can be found with the various products under: http/www.siemens.com/automation/csi/net 2) Order from: DEHN & Söhne Hans-Dehn-Str.1 92318 Neumarkt/Opf

Cable routing: During storage, transport and cable laying, keep both ends sealed with a shrink-on cap. Comply with the permissible bending radii and tensile load! An underground cable must be used if cables are laid outside buildings e.g. directly in the ground, in sand or in concrete building blocks or when routed through protective pipes made of steel or plastic above or below ground. Overvoltage protection guidelines for underground laying must be complied with. Note: Additional components of the SIMATIC NET wiring range can be ordered from your local contact person. For technical advice contact: J. Hertlein A&D SE PS Tel. +49 (0) 911/750 44 65 Fax. +49 (0) 911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]


4/35

4

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) ECOFAST bus cables

■ Overview

■ Benefits • Savings in wiring, installation, commissioning and operation as result of standardized connection system (copper or fiberoptic) with high degree of protection (IP65) • With ECOFAST, the turnaround times for offers, planning and engineering of machines and plants can be reduced • ECOFAST permits fast and problem-free startup of automation and drive systems • Minimization of sources of error by means of standardized interfaces and plug connectors. • With ECOFAST plants remain highly available: No interruption of power and field bus when replacing equipment.

4 In the ECOFAST system, all operational devices are connected to PROFIBUS DP using the bus cables. The bus cable is implemented as a hybrid cable and contains: • PROFIBUS DP in copper RS 485; • Four additional copper cores for carrying 24 V DC: - 24 V DC, not switched (for electronics and inputs) - 24 V DC, switched (for outputs, disconnectable e.g. for EMERGENCY OFF) The ECOFAST hybrid cables are sold by the meter or in fixed lengths preassembled with ECOFAST connector (Han Brid) and socket.

4/36


PROFIBUS



PROFIBUS ECOFAST hybrid cable 1) 2)

Sheath • Material - ECOFAST hybrid cable - ECOFAST hybrid cable GP

PUR PVC

• Diameter

approx. 11 mm

• Color

Violet

Perm. ambient conditions Applications

Connection for ECOFAST stations

Damping


–40 ºC … +60 ºC


–40 ºC … +60 ºC

• at 16 MHz

< 49 dB/km


–40 ºC … +60 ºC

• at 4 MHz

< 25 dB/km

Bending radius

• at 9.6 kHz

< 3 dB/km

• Single bend

38 mm


4

• Multiple bends

55 mm

• at 9.6 kHz

270 ± 27 Ω


≤ 300 N

• at 38.4 kHz

185 ± 18.5 Ω

Weight

approx. 154 kg/km

• at 3 to 20 MHz

150 ± 15 Ω

Halogen-free

Rated value

≤ 150 Ω

• ECOFAST hybrid cable

Yes

Loop resistance

≤ 138 Ω/km

• ECOFAST hybrid cable GP

No

Shield resistance

≤ 15 Ω/km

Behavior in fire


30 pF/m



100 V


Power cores (stranded wires) diameter

1.5 mm2

• ECOFAST hybrid cable

No


CM/PLTC/SunRes/Oil Res

• Current carrying capability of the power cores

12 A

• Sheath color

Black

Cable type (standard designation) • ECOFAST hybrid cable


02Y (ST)C 1 x 2 x 0.65/2.56 - 150 LI LIH-Z 11Y 4 x 1 x 1.5 VI FRNC 02Y (ST)C 1 x 2 x 0.65/2.56 –150 LI LIY-Z Y 4 x 1 x 1.5 VI

UL style / 600 V rating • ECOFAST hybrid cable

No


Yes


Limited

UV-resistant • ECOFAST hybrid cable

No


Yes

Silicone-free

Yes

1) Electrical characteristics at 20 °C, tests according to DIN 47 250 Part 4 or DIN VDE 0472 2) Trailing cable for the following requirements: ECOFAST hybrid cable: Min. 9 million bending cycles for the specified bending radius and an acceleration of max. 5 m/s2; ECOFAST hybrid cable GP: Min. 2 million bending cycles for the specified bending radius and an acceleration of max. 2.5 m/s2


4/37

PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data PROFIBUS ECOFAST Hybrid Cable - Cu Trailing cable (PUR sheath), with two shielded Cu wires for PROFIBUS DP plus four Cu wires of 1.5 mm2 Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

Order No.

6XV1 830-7AH10

Not pre-assembled

4

Order No. Additional components

• 20 m

6XV1 830-7AN20

• 50 m

6XV1 830-7AN50

• 100 m

6XV1 830-7AT10

Pre-assembled with ECOFAST male and female connectors, fixed length

PROFIBUS Cu bus connector with 2 x Cu shielded and 4 x Cu 1.5 mm2; type of contact: POF, HAN D for 24 V; tool: Crimping tool, polishing set • with pin insert

6GK1 905-0CA00

• with socket insert

6GK1 905-0CB00

PROFIBUS ECOFAST Hybrid Plug angled; with 2 x Cu shielded and 4 x Cu 1.5 mm2; 5 units; with installation instructions • pin insert

6GK1 905-0CC00

• socket insert

6GK1 905-0CD00

• 0.5 m

6XV1 830-7BH05

•1m

6XV1 830-7BH10

• 1.5 m

6XV1 830-7BH15

•3m

6XV1 830-7BH30

•5m

6XV1 830-7BH50

• 10 m

6XV1 830-7BN10

ECOFAST Terminating Plug Bus termination plug-in connector for PROFIBUS DP; with 2 x Cu and 4 x Cu 1.5 mm2; male pins, integrated termination resistors

• 15 m

6XV1 830-7BN15

• Package of 1

6GK1 905-0DA10

• 20 m

6XV1 830-7BN20

• Package of 5

6GK1 905-0DA00

• 25 m

6XV1 830-7BN25

• 30 m

6XV1 830-7BN30

• 35 m

6XV1 830-7BN35

• 40 m

6XV1 830-7BN40

Data T piece For 2 x 24 V auxiliary voltage (switched and non-switched) and PROFIBUS DP

• 45 m

6XV1 830-7BN45

• for Cu RS 485

3RK1 911-2AG00

6XV1 830-7BN50

• for fiber-optic cable

3RK1 911-2AH00

Addressing plug For setting the PROFIBUS DP addresses

6ES7 194-1KB00-0XA0

• 50 m Pre-assembled with two ECOFAST connectors, variable length 1) PROFIBUS ECOFAST Hybrid Cable GP Trailing cable with 4 x Cu and 2 x Cu, shielded, with UL approval Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m; minimum order 20 m;

■ More information 6XV1 860-2P

Not pre-assembled • 20 m

6XV1 860-4PN20

• 50 m

6XV1 860-4PN50

• 100 m

6XV1 860-4PT10

Pre-assembled with ECOFAST male and female connectors • 0.5 m

6XV1 860-3PH05

•1m

6XV1 860-3PH10

• 1.5 m

6XV1 860-3PH15

•3m

6XV1 860-3PH30

•5m

6XV1 860-3PH50

• 10 m

6XV1 860-3PN10

• 15 m

6XV1 860-3PN15

• 20 m

6XV1 860-3PN20

• 25 m

6XV1 860-3PN25

• 30 m

6XV1 860-3PN30

• 35 m

6XV1 860-3PN35

• 40 m

6XV1 860-3PN40

• 45 m

6XV1 860-3PN45

• 50 m

6XV1 860-3PN50

4/38


You can order additional components from the SIMATIC NET cable range from your local Siemens contact. For technical support with your order, contact: J. Hertlein A&D SE PS Tel. +49 (0) 911/750 44 65 Fax. +49 (0) 911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) Energy Cable

■ Overview

■ Application For the construction of PROFINET/PROFIBUS networks, different cable types are offered to suit the different types of application. The listed power cables should always be used. They are used for devices with degree of protection IP65/67 to connect the signaling contact or 24-V supply of the SCALANCE X and SCALANCE W components (power cable 2x0.75) and for the power supply (power cable 5x1.5 for ET 200). UL approvals As a result of appropriate UL styles, the cables can be used worldwide.

■ Design Rugged 2-core or 5-core cable with circular cross-section for connection of signaling contact and power supply to IP65/67 components in industrial areas. Cable types • Different versions (5-core, 2-core) for different fields of application • Rugged cable design for installation in industrial applications • UL approvals • Easy length measurement thanks to printed meter markings

■ Benefits

The following cables with industrial capability are available for connection of the power supply and signaling contact: • Power cable 2 x 0.75; power cable for connection of signaling contact and 24 V supply voltage to SCALANCE X and SCALANCE W components • Power cable 5 x 1.5; power cable for connection of 24 V power supply of ET 200 using 7/8" plug connectors

• Flexible application possibilities thanks to rugged cable design • Silicon-free, therefore particularly suitable for use in the automotive industry (e.g. on paint shop conveyors)


4/39

4

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) Energy Cable


4

■ Ordering data

Cable type 1)

Power cable 2 x 0.75

Power cable 5 x 1.5

Application areas

Connection of signaling contact and 24-V power supply to SCALANCE X and SCALANCE W

Power supply of ET 200 modules with 7/8" power port


600 V

600 V

Power cores (stranded wires) diameter • Current carrying capability of the power cores • Sheath color

0.75 mm2

1.5 mm2

6A

16 A

Brown/blue

Black


L-YY 2x1x0.75GR

L-Y11Y-JZ 5x1x1.5 GR

Order No.

Power cable 2 x 0.75 Power cable with trailing capability with 2 copper cores (0.75 mm2) for connecting to M12 plug-in connector; sold by the meter; max. 1000 m, minimum order quantity 20 m

6XV1812-8A

Power cable 5 x 1.5 Power cable with trailing capability with 5 copper cores (1.5 mm2) for connecting to 7/8" plug-in connector; sold by the meter; max. 1000 m; minimum order quantity 20 m

6XV1 830-8AH10

Additional components

• Material

PVC

PUR

• Diameter

7.4 +/- 0.3

10.5 + / -0.3

7/8" plug-in connector Plug with axial cable outlet for field assembly for ET 200, 5-core, plastic enclosure, 1 pack = 5 items

• Color

Gray

Gray

• Pin insert

6GK1 905-0FA00

• Socket insert

6GK1 905-0FB00

Signaling Contact M12 Cable Connector PRO Socket for connection of SCALANCE X208PRO for signaling contact; 5-pole, B-coded, with assembly instructions; 3 items

6GK1908-0DC10-6AA3

Power M12 Cable Connector PRO Socket for connection of SCALANCE W-700 for 24 V DC supply voltage; 4-pole, A-coded, with assembly instructions, 3 items

6GK1 907-0DC10-6AA3

Power M12 Plug PRO Plug for connection to PS791-1PRO power supply for 24 V DC supply voltage; 4-pole, A-coded, with assembly instructions, 3 items

6GK1 907-0DB10-6AA3


6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

Sheath


-20 ºC … +80 ºC

-40 ºC … +80 ºC


-20 ºC … +80 ºC

-40 ºC … +80 ºC


-20 ºC … +80 ºC

-40 ºC … +80 ºC

Bending radius • Single bend

18.5 mm

26 mm

• Multiple bends

45 mm

63 mm


≤ 100 N

≤ 500 N

Weight

approx. 70 kg/km

approx. 149 kg/km

Halogen-free

No

No

Behavior in fire

Flame-retardant Flame-retardant acc. to IEC 60332-1 IEC 60332-1


Yes

Yes


Yes

No


Limited resistance

Highly resistant

UV-resistant

Yes

No

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes


No

No


1) Further language versions and manuals can be found for the respective products at: http/www.siemens.com/automation/csi/net

■ More information Cable routing: During storage, transport and cable laying, keep both ends sealed with a shrink-on cap. Comply with the permissible bending radii and tensile load! Note: You can order additional components from the SIMATIC NET cable range from your local Siemens contact. For technical support with your order, contact: J. Hertlein A&D SE PS Tel. +49 (0) 911/750 44 65 Fax. +49 (0) 911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]

4/40


PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) RS 485 bus connectors

■ Overview

■ Design Different versions of the bus connector, optimized for the connected devices, are available: • Bus connectors with axial cable outlet (180 °C) e.g. for PCs and SIMATIC HMI OPs, for transmission rates up to 12 Mbit/s with integrated bus terminating resistor • Bus connector with vertical cable outlet (90 °C)

• This is used to connect PROFIBUS stations to the PROFIBUS bus cable • Easy installation • The insulation piercing method of the FastConnect connectors reduces installation time considerably • Integrated matching resistors (not for 6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0) • Connection of PG using a special bus connector is possible without the need to install network nodes.

■ Application The RS 485 bus connector for PROFIBUS is used to connect a PROFIBUS station or a PROFIBUS network component to the bus cable for PROFIBUS.

This connector enables a vertical cable outlet (with and without PG interface) for transmission rates up to 12 Mbit/s with integrated bus terminating resistor. With transmission rates of 3, 6 or 12 Mbit/s, the SIMATIC S5/S7 connecting cable is required for the connection between the bus connector with additional PG interface and a programming device. • Bus connector with 30° cable outlet (low-cost version) without PG interface for transmission rates up to 1.5 Mbit/s and without integrated bus terminating resistor. • PROFIBUS FastConnect RS 485 bus connector (90° or 180° cable outlet) with transmission rates up to 12 Mbit/s for fast, easy mounting with insulation displacement method (for rigid and flexible wires).

■ Function The bus connector is plugged directly to the PROFIBUS interface (9-pin Sub-D connector) of the PROFIBUS node or a PROFIBUS network component. The incoming and outgoing PROFIBUS bus cable is connected through four terminals in the connector. The line termination integrated in the bus connector can be connected through an externally accessible switch (not with 6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0). Here, incoming and outgoing bus cables are separated in the connector (isolating function). This is mandatory at both ends of a PROFIBUS segment.


4/41

4

PROFIBUS



4

Bus connector

6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0 6ES7 972-0BB12-0XA0

6ES7 972-0BA41-0XA0 6ES7 972-0BB41-0XA0

6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0 1)

Cable outlet

90° cable outlet

35° cable outlet

30° cable outlet


9.6 kbit/s...12 Mbit/s

9.6 kbit/s...12 Mbit/s

9.6 kbit/s...1500 kbit/s

Terminating resistance

Integral resistor combination and isolator function that can be selected using a slide switch: When the resistor is connected, the outgoing bus is disconnected


No terminating resistance, cannot be used for first and last device in the bus segment

9-pin Sub-D socket 4 terminal blocks for wires of up to 1.5 mm2


9-pin Sub-D socket 4 insulation-piercing terminals for wires of 0.644 ± 0.040 mm2

FastConnect insulation-piercing method

No

No

Yes

Supply voltage (must come from terminal unit)

4.75 V … 5.25 V DC

4.75 V … 5.25 V DC

-

Current consumption

max. 5 mA

max. 5 mA

-


0 °C … +60 °C -25 °C … +80 °C max. 75% at +25 °C

0 °C … +60 °C -25 °C … +80 °C max. 75% at +25 °C

0 °C … +60 °C -25 °C … +80 °C max. 75% at +25 °C


15.8 x 54 x 34 approx. 40 g

16 x 54 x 38 approx. 40 g

15 x 58 x 34 approx. 30 g

PG connection socket

0BA12: No; 0BB12: Yes


No


IP20

IP20

IP20

UL listing

Yes

Yes

Yes

Interfaces • PROFIBUS nodes • PROFIBUS bus cable

Used in PLC S7-200/S7-300/S7-400® C7-633 DP, C7-634 DP, C7-635, C7-636 S5-115U to S5-155U

■ 2)

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

OLM/OBT

■

■

RS 485 repeater

■

■

I/O station ET 200M/ET 200B/ET 200L/ET 200S Programming device PG 720/720C/PG 740/PG 760 Interface IM 308-C CP 5431 FMS/DP CP 342-5 CP 343-5 CP 443-5 IM 467 CP 5511/CP 5512/CP 5611/ CP 5613/CP 5614 SIMATIC OP

■

Suitable for application

1) Flexible bus cables cannot be used with this connector 2) S7-400: Not used with MPI/DP interface when DP interface is assigned; not used with 1FM1 interface when 1FM2 interface is assigned

4/42


■

PROFIBUS


■ Technical specifications Bus connector

6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0 6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0

6ES7 972-0BA60-0XA0 6ES7 972-0BB60-0XA0

6GK1 500-0FC00

6GK1 500-0EA02

Cable outlet

90° cable outlet

35° cable outlet

180° cable outlet

180° cable outlet


9.6 kbit/s ... 12 Mbit/s




Terminating resistance

Integral resistor combination and isolator function that can be selected using a slide switch: When the resistor is connected, the outgoing bus is disconnected. Connection using insulation displacement method for FastConnect system

Integral resistor combination and isolator function that can be selected using a slide switch: When the resistor is connected, the outgoing bus is disconnected. Connection using insulation displacement method for FastConnect system

Integral resistor combination and isolator function that can be selected using a slide switch: If the resistor is connected, the outgoing bus is disconnected. Connection with insulationpiercing/clamp method for FastConnect system


9-pin Sub-D socket 4 insulation-piercing terminals for all FastConnect PROFIBUS cables (except for FC Process Cable)




FastConnect insulation-piercing method

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Supply voltage (must come from terminal unit)

4.75 V … 5.25 V DC

4.75 V … 5.25 V DC

4.75 V … 5.25 V DC

4.75 V … 5.25 V DC

Current consumption

max. 5 mA

Interfaces • PROFIBUS nodes • PROFIBUS bus cable

max. 5 mA

max. 5 mA

max. 5 mA

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature 0 °C … +60 °C • Transport/storage temperature -25 °C … +80 °C • Relative humidity max. 75% at +25 °C

0 °C … +60 °C -25 °C … +80 °C max. 75% at +25 °C

0 °C … +60 °C -25 °C … +80 °C max. 75% at +25 °C

0 °C … +60 °C -25 °C … +80 °C max. 75% at +25 °C


72.7 x 16 x 34 approx. 50 g

72.7 x 16 x 34 approx. 50 g

15.8 x 61.75 x 34.3 approx. 100 g

15 x 57 x 39 approx. 100 g

PG connection socket



No

No


IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

UL listing

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Used in PLC S7-200/-300/-400 C7-633 DP, C7-634 DP, C7-635, C7-636 S5-115U to -155U I/O station ET 200M/ ET 200B/ ET 200L/ ET 200S

■ ■

■ ■

■

■

■

■

Programming device PG 720/720C/PG 740/PG 760 Interface IM 308-C CP 5431® FMS/DP CP 342-5/ CP 343-5/ CP 443-5 IM 467 CP 5511/CP 5512/CP 5611/ CP 5613 A2/CP 5614 A2

■ ■ ■ ■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■ ■ ■ ■

SIMATIC OP OLM/OBT

■

■

RS 485 repeater

■

■

■

■

Suitable for application Siemens IK PI · 2007

4/43

4

PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data Bus connector RS 485 with axial cable outlet (180°) For the industrial PC, SIMATIC HMI OP, OLM; max transmission rate 12 Mbit/s

Order No. 6GK1 500-0EA02

Bus connector RS 485 with 90° cable outlet With screw-type terminals, max. transmission rate 12 Mbit/s

4

• without PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0

• with PG interface

6ES7 972-0BB12-0XA0

Bus connector RS 485 with angled cable outlet (35°) With screw-type terminals, max. transmission rate 12 Mbit/s • without PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA41-0XA0


6ES7 972-0BB41-0XA0

Bus connector RS 485 with 30° cable outlet With screw-type terminals, low-cost version, max. transmission rate 1.5 Mbit/s

6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0


6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0


6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0



6ES7 972-0BA60-0XA0


6ES7 972-0BB60-0XA0

PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector RS 485 Plug 180 in insulation-displacement method, and 180° cable outlet for the industrial PC, SIMATIC HMI OP, OLM; max transmission rate 12 Mbit/s

6GK1 500-0FC00

SIMATIC S5/S7 plug-in cable for PROFIBUS Preassembled with two 9-pole Sub-D connectors; max. transmission rate 12 Mbit/s; 3m

6ES7 901-4BD00-0XA0

Manual for PROFIBUS networks Paper version Network architecture, project management, network components, mounting

PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector RS 485 with 90° cable outlet in insulation-displacement method, max. transmission rate 12 Mbit/s

4/44

Order No. PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector RS 485 with 35° cable outlet in insulation-displacement method, max. transmission rate 12 Mbit/s

• German

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA1


6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

PROFIBUS


■ Dimension drawings Dimensions in mm

15.8

35.6

34 _+ 0.2

7.9

5

25

35.4

64

54.5

11.6

G_IK10_XX_50121

10

6ES7 972-0B.12-0XA0

28.4

Seating surface Sub-D connector 15.8

34 _+ 0.2

7.9

5

25 75.15 _+ 0.2

Thread 4-40 UNC

G_IK10_XX_50122

10+_ 0.1

6ES7 972-0B.50-0XA0 61.75

15.8

44.1

28.4

G_IK10_XX_50123

34.3

6GK1 500-0FC00

56

OFF

15

ON

G_IK10_XX_50124

35 39

10

6GK1 500-0EA02


4/45

4

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) 830-1T connecting cable

■ Overview

■ Benefits

• Trouble-free connection of end stations through preassembled connecting leads • Reliable data transmission to the end station in EMC-exposed environment through direct cable shielding and termination.

■ Design The 830-1T connecting cable consists of a twisted-pair cable (wires made of stranded copper) with a woven shield.

4

It has a 9-pin Sub-D plug at both ends. Both cable ends are terminated by a resistor combination (cannot be switched off).

• Prefabricated cable for fast and cost-effective connection of PROFIBUS nodes to OLM and OBT • Flexible PROFIBUS connecting cable

■ Function The PROFIBUS 830-1T connecting cable is used for connecting the electrical PROFIBUS interface to the PROFIBUS nodes (OLM, OBT and data terminals) for data transmission rates of up to 12 Mbit/s.

■ Ordering data

Order No.

PROFIBUS 830-1T connecting cable for terminal connection, preassembled, with two Sub-D plugs, 9-pin terminated at both ends

4/46


• 1.5 m long

6XV1 830-1CH15

• 3 m long

6XV1 830-1CH30

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) 830-2 connecting cable

■ Overview

■ Benefits

• Trouble-free connection of end stations through preassembled connecting leads • Direct connection of a PG through the PG interface without interrupting the connection between the stations.

■ Design The 830-2 connecting cable comprises a standard PROFIBUS bus cable. It is preassembled with two 9-pin connectors (6GK1 500-0EA02 and 6ES7 972-0BB11-0XA0). One plug of the preassembled connecting cable is equipped with a PG interface.

■ Function • Prefabricated cable for connection of PROFIBUS nodes (e.g. HMI) to PLCs • Flexible PROFIBUS connection cable for up to 12 Mbit/s

The 830-2 connecting cable is used to connect PROFIBUS nodes (e.g. HMI) to automation devices for transmission rates up to 12 Mbit/s.

■ Ordering data

Order No.

PROFIBUS 830-2 connecting cable Preassembled, with two 9-pin connectors • 3 m long

6XV1 830-2AH30

• 5 m long

6XV1 830-2AH50

• 10 m long

6XV1 830-2AN10


4/47

4

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) PROFIBUS M12 and 7/8" plug-in cable/connector

■ Overview

■ Ordering data

Order No.

PROFIBUS M12 plug-in cable Pre-assembled with two 5-pole M12 male/female connectors; length:

4 Flexible plug-in cables for data transmission (up to 12 Mbit/s) for supplying power to IP65 PROFIBUS stations PROFIBUS M12 plug-in cables • Pre-assembled plug-in cables (PROFIBUS FC Trailing Cable) for connecting PROFIBUS stations (e.g. SIMATIC ET 200) to degree of protection IP65 • For transmission rates up to 12 Mbit/s 7/8" plug-in cable • Pre-assembled plug-in cables for supplying power to PROFIBUS stations (e.g. SIMATIC ET 200) to degree of protection IP65 PROFIBUS M12 and 7/8" plug-in connector • For establishing direct connections between devices on PROFIBUS installation and power cables with M12 or 7/8" connections • Excellent EMC shielding and deflection

■ Benefits

• 0.3 m

6XV1 830-3DE30

• 0.5 m

6XV1 830-3DE50

• 1.0 m

6XV1 830-3DH10

• 1.5 m

6XV1 830-3DH15

• 2.0 m

6XV1 830-3DH20

• 3.0 m

6Xv1 830-3DH30

• 5.0 m

6XV1 830-3DH50

• 10 m

6XV1 830-3DN10

• 15 m

6XV1 830-3DN15

7/8" plug-in cable For power supply; pre-assembled with two 5-pole 7/8" male/female connectors; length: • 0.3 m

6XV1 822-5BE30

• 0.5 m

6XV1 822-5BE50

• 1.0 m

6XV1 822-5BH10

• 1.5 m

6XV1 822-5BH15

• 2.0 m

6XV1 822-5BH20

• 3.0 m

6XV1 822-5BH30

• 5.0 m

6XV1 822-5BH50

• 10 m

6XV1 822-5BN10

• 15 m

6XV1 822-5BN15

Plug-in connector for assembly in the field PROFIBUS M12 connectors 5-pole, B-coded, metal casing, 1 pack = 5 pieces • Pin insert

6GK1 905-0EA00

• Socket insert

6GK1 905-0EB00

7/8" plug-in connector 5-pole, plastic casing, 1 pack = 5 pieces

• Time-saving, error-free connection of end stations using preassembled connecting cables • Easy assembly on-site for application-specific M12 and 7/8“ plug-in cables using M12 and 7/8“ plug-in connectors for assembly in the field

■ Design M12 plug-in cable • Comprises the PROFIBUS Trailing Cable • Pre-assembled with two 5-pole M12 male/female connectors; B-coded 7/8" plug-in cable • Comprises the Energy Cable 5 x 1.5 mm2 • Pre-assembled with two 5-pole 7/8" male/female connectors

4/48


• Pin insert

6GK1 905-0FA00

• Socket insert

6GK1 905-0FB00

Power cables Energy Cable (5 x 1.5 mm2) Power cable with trailing capability with 5 copper cores (1.5 mm2) for connecting to 7/8" plug-in connector; sold by the meter; max. 1000 m; minimum order quantity 20 m

6XV1 830-8AH10

7/8" Power T-Tap PRO Power T-piece for ET 200 with two 7/8" socket inserts and one 7/8" pin insert 1 pack = 5 pieces

6GK1 905-0FC00

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) Bus terminals

■ Overview

■ Benefits

• Easy and clearly comprehensible connection of PROFIBUS stations thanks to preassembled, integrated connecting cable • Simple cabinet pre-wiring by connecting the PROFIBUS connecting cable with integrated interfaces

■ Application

• For connecting PROFIBUS stations with an RS 485 interface to a segment • Variants with transmission rates of 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s • Easy, transparent assembly (simply snap onto a standard rail) • Unambiguous localization of faulty bus termination with the 12M bus terminal • PG connection with a special bus terminal and PG connecting cable without the need to install network nodes for the RS 485 bus terminal.

The PROFIBUS bus terminals enable a bus station to be connected to a PROFIBUS network. • Pre-wired device connection for PROFIBUS node • Easy connection of stations to PROFIBUS networks through insertion of the radial line with Sub-D plug • Implementation of multipoint connections by directly interconnecting several bus terminals (up to 32 stations per segment) with the 12M bus terminal.

■ Design Different versions are available: • Up to 1.5 Mbit/s RS 485 bus terminal • Up to 12 Mbit/s 12M bus terminal. The following is applicable to all versions: • Housing with degree of protection IP20 • Wall mounting or mounting on deep standard mounting rail • External 6-pin terminal block for connecting incoming and outgoing bus cable and equipotential bonding conductors • Integrated connecting cable with Sub-D plug for connecting the nodes • Terminating resistor combination can be connected through rotary switch The 12M bus terminal has the following additional features: • Ranges can be set for data transmission rates through a rotary switch. • Supply of 12M bus terminal through connected PROFIBUS node (5 V DC/90 mA) using a 9-pin Sub-D connector • For maximum segment lengths, see technical specifications. • Incoming and outgoing bus cables are isolated when the terminating resistors are inserted.


4/49

4

PROFIBUS


■ Function • Connection of stations over flexible connecting cable with Sub-D connector • Easy connection of the bus cable over the terminal block • No bus interruption in response to a missing terminal • Bus termination is possible over integral termination resistor combinations.

The following also applies to the 12M bus terminal • Unique localization of faulty termination within a segment (the incoming and outgoing bus cables are cut for inserting the resistor combinations) • When the 12M bus terminal is used in a segment with RS 485 bus terminals, the configuration rules for the RS 485 bus terminal apply (see manual for PROFIBUS networks). Bus terminal

4

PROFIBUS System connection with PROFIBUS bus terminals e.g. for SIMATIC S7

4/50


G_IK10_XX_50020

e.g. SIMATIC S7-300 with communications processor

PROFIBUS



■ Ordering data

Maximum segment lengths for 12M bus terminal Data transmission rate

Maximum segment lengths

9.6 to 187.5 kbit/s

1000 m

500 kbit/s

400 m

1.5 Mbit/s

200 m

3 to 12 Mbit/s

100 m

Connectable systems for 12M bus terminal System

BT 12M

SIMATIC S5 IM 308 C

■

CP 5431 FMS/DP

■

S5-95U/DP

■

SIMATIC S7-200 CPU 215

■

SIMATIC S7-300 CP 342-5

■

CP 343-5

■

CPU 313

■

CPU 314

■

CPU 315

■

CPU 316

■

CPU 315-2 DP

■

Order No.

RS 485 bus terminal for PROFIBUS Transmission rate 9.6 kbit/s to 1500 kbit/s with connecting cable 3.0 m in length

6GK1 500-0AB00

RS 485 bus terminal for PROFIBUS With fitted PG interface and connecting cable 1.5 m in length

6GK1 500-0DA00

PROFIBUS 12M bus terminal Bus terminal for connecting PROFIBUS nodes up to 12 Mbit/s with 1.5 m connecting cable

6GK1 500-0AA10

4

Manual for PROFIBUS networks, paper version Network architecture, configuring, network components, installation • German

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA1


6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

SIMATIC S7-400 CP 443-5 Basic

■

CP 443-5 Extended

■

IM 467

■

CPU 413-2 DP

■

CPU 414-2 DP

■

PC modules CP 5511

-–

CP 5512

-–

CP 5611

■

CP 5613 A2

■

CP 5614 A2

■

SIMATIC DP ET 200M, IM 153

■

ET 200U, IM 318-C

■

ET 200B

■

ET 200L

-–

ET 200X

-–

ET 200S

-–

ET 200eco

-–

SIMATIC 505 SIMATIC 505 FIM

■

SIMATIC 505

-–

PROFIBUS DP RBC

■

Miscellaneous RS 485 repeater

■

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E

■

DP/RS 232 link

■


4/51

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) Active RS 485 terminating element

■ Overview

■ Technical specifications Supply voltages Rated value - 24 V DC - permissible range, lower limit (DC) - permissible range, upper limit (DC)

Yes 20.4 V 28.8 V

Current consumption • Current consumption, typical

30 mA

Connection system

4

• Bus lines

Screw terminal block

• Power supply

Screw terminal block

PROFIBUS DP • Transmission rate, max.

12 Mbit/s; 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s


• Terminates bus segments at data transmission rates of 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s • Power supply independent of bus stations.

■ Benefits

• Terminal-independent bus termination through onboard power supply

■ Application The active RS 485 terminating resistance is used to terminate bus segments. Power supply is independent of the stations. The terminating resistor is supplied with power separately from the other I/O components, either permanently or with a voltage applied ahead of the I/Os. By terminating the bus system the stations (e.g. ET 200S) can be coupled and decoupled selectively without malfunctions.

■ Design • 1 terminal block for the segment connection • Terminal block for power supply (24 V DC external)

■ Function The active RS 485 terminating element terminates the PROFIBUS and therefore ensures a defined level of the RS 485 signal and suppression of reflections on the line. Since it is operated independently of the field devices, they can be decoupled from the bus without reactions.

4/52



0 °C 60 °C


-40 °C 70 °C

Relative humidity - Operation, max.

95%; at +25°C

Degree of protection and class of protection - IP 20

Yes


60 mm

• Height

70 mm

• Depth

43 mm

• Weight, approx.

95 g

■ Ordering data Active RS 485 terminating element for PROFIBUS For terminating bus segments for data transmission rates of 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s

Order No. 6ES7 972-0DA00-0AA0

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) RS485 repeater for PROFIBUS

■ Overview

■ Function Mode of operation • Increasing the number of stations (max. 127) and the expansion • Regenerating the signals in amplitude and time • Electrical isolation of the connected bus systems

• • • • • •

Automatic data transmission rate search Data transmission rate of 45.45 kbit/s possible 24 V DC voltage display Display bus activity segment 1 and 2 Isolation of segment 1 and 2 possible by switch Isolation of the right segment part when terminating resistor is inserted • Decoupling of segment 1 and segment 2 in the event of static interference.

■ Benefits

• To increase the number of stations and the expansion • Galvanic isolation of segments • Startup assistance - switch for disconnecting segments - display of bus activity - isolation of segment with incorrectly inserted terminating resistor Please also have a look at the diagnostics repeater which in addition to the normal repeater functionality also has comprehensive diagnostics functions for physical line diagnosis. It is described under "Distributed I/O/Diagnostics/Diagnostics repeater for PROFIBUS DP".

■ Application The RS 485 IP20 repeater connects two PROFIBUS or MPI bus segments using the RS 485 system with up to 32 stations. Data transmission rates of 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s are then possible.

■ Design • • • •

Housing to degree of protection IP20. 2 terminal blocks for connecting the segment Terminal block for supply voltage (24 V DC external). PG/OP interface.


Max. segment length

9.6 kbit/s

1000 m

19.2 kbit/s

1000 m

45.45 kbit/s

1000 m

93.75 kbit/s

1000 m

187.5 kbit/s

1000 m

500 kbit/s

400 m

1500 kbit/s

200 m

3000 kbit/s

100 m

6000 kbit/s

100 m

12000 kbit/s

100 m

4

■ Technical specifications Supply voltages Rated value - 24 V DC - permissible range, lower limit (DC) - permissible range, upper limit (DC)

Yes 20.4 V 28.8 V


200 mA

Connection system • Bus lines

2 terminal blocks

• Power supply

Terminal block



Environmental requirements Operating temperature - min. - max.

0 °C 60 °C


-40 °C 70 °C


95%; at 25 °C

Degree of protection and class of protection - IP20

Yes


45 mm

• Height

128 mm

• Depth

67 mm

• Weight, approx.

350 g

■ Ordering data Repeater RS 485 for PROFIBUS Data transmission rate up to 12 Mbit/s 24 V DC, housing to IP20

Order No. 6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0


4/53

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) Diagnostics repeater for PROFIBUS DP

■ Overview

■ Function Operating mode Repeater functionality The diagnostic repeater is integrated in the bus system as an RS 485 repeater but has a separate PROFIBUS DP address: • Increased number of stations (max. 127) and expansion in the bus system • Regenerating the signals in amplitude and time • Optical isolation of connected segments • Configuration is executed through STEP 7, COM PROFIBUS, or a GSD file.

4

Diagnostics functionality Initiated by STEP 7 COM PROFIBUS or through the application program (SIMATIC S7-400), the diagnostic repeater determines the topology of the connected segments and saves it in the internal diagnostics memory. • • • • •

RS 485 repeater with online line diagnostics for PROFIBUS DP DP standard PROFIBUS slave Automatic determination of fault types and locations Data transmission rate 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s Connection through FastConnect using the insulation displacement method

■ Application The diagnostic repeater for PROFIBUS DP connects PROFIBUS DP segments according to the RS 485 system. In addition, it offers physical online monitoring of copper bus cables. In the event of a fault it sends a diagnostics message to the DP master containing detailed data on the fault type and fault location.

■ Design • Housing with degree of protection IP20 • Mounting on S7-300 sectional rails or DIN rail • LEDs for the display of 24 V DC, bus activities and cable faults per segment • Terminal block for 24 V DC (external) supply voltage • 9-pin Sub-D socket for PG connection • Connections for 3 bus segments using the FastConnect insulation displacement method • The diagnostic repeater is integrated as a DP standard PROFIBUS slave in the bus system. It supports: - monitoring of 2 PROFIBUS DP segments - max. 31 stations per segment (max. 62 station per diagnostic repeater) - max. segment length 100 m - configuration of up to 9 diagnostic repeaters in series • The diagnostics-capable segments must be connected with approved bus connectors (see ordering data/ accessories). • The construction guidelines for 12 Mbaud networks must be adhered to.

4/54


In the event of a fault, the repeater automatically relays a standard diagnostics message to the bus master containing the following details: • Affected segment • Location of fault (between station X and Y) • Distance of fault location in meters from station X or Y and from the repeater • Fault type The following faults can be diagnosed: • Break in signal cables A or B • Short-circuit in signal cables A or B to the shield • Missing terminating resistors • Unpermissible cascading depth • Too many stations in a segment • Stations too far away from the diagnostic repeater • Faulty telegrams Sporadic faults are also recognized. The error messages are displayed graphically in STEP 7 and COM PROFIBUS. They are fully integrated into the SIMATIC system diagnostics (e.g. overview diagnostics, "report system error" function). Display of network topology and statistics The topology can be displayed in STEP 7 in Version 5.2 and newer. This display shows the stations and cable lengths. An additional dispay shows the quality of the bus system in the form of statistical data. Configuration The diagnostic repeater is configured as follows: • STEP 7 V5.1 and newer, incl. Service Pack 2 • COM PROFIBUS V5.1, incl. Service Pack 2 • Third-party tools: Through GSD file If third-party masters are used, it is possible to determine the topology with COM PROFIBUS. A third-party configuration tool cannot determine the topology. However, if the topology was determined once with COM PROFIBUS, third-party configuration tools will then show information on error locations.

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) Diagnostics repeater for PROFIBUS DP

■ Technical specifications Supply voltages Rated value - 24 V DC - permissible range, lower limit (DC) - permissible range, upper limit (DC) Connection system • Bus lines

• Power supply PROFIBUS DP • Transmission rate, max.

■ Ordering data RS 485 diagnostic repeater For connection of up to 2 segments to PROFIBUS DP; with online diagnostics function for monitoring the bus cables

Environmental requirements Operating temperature Yes 20.4 V 28.8 V

FastConnect insulation piercing technique, 10 connecting cycles are possible Terminal block 12 Mbit/s; 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s

- min. - max. Storage/transportation temperature - min. - max.

-40 °C 70 °C


95%; at 25 °C


Yes

Dimensions and weight • Width • Height • Depth • Weight, approx.

80 mm 125 mm 67.5 mm 300 g

Order No. 6ES7 972-0AB01-0XA0

Accessories RS 485 bus connector with 90° cable outlet with insulation displacement method, max. data transmission rate 12 Mbit/s • without PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0


6ES7 972-0BB12-0XA0

PROFIBUS FastConnect Bus Connector RS 485 with 90° cable outlet With insulation displacement method, max. data transmission rate 12 Mbit/s • without PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0


6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0

PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector RS 485 Plug 180 In insulation displacement technology with 180° cable outlet for industrial PCs, SIMATIC HMI OP, OLM; max. data transmission rate 12 Mbit/s

6GK1 500-0FC00


6ES7 972-0BA41-0XA0


6ES7 972-0BB41-0XA0

4

Order No. PROFIBUS FastConnect Stripping Tool Pre-set stripping tool for rapid stripping of insulation from PROFIBUS FastConnect bus cables

6GK1 905-6AA00

PROFIBUS FC Standard Cable Standard type with special design for quick assembly, 2-core, shielded, meter goods; max. consignment 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

6XV1 830-0EH10

S7 Manual Collection Electronic manuals on CD, multilingual: S7-200, TD 200, S7-300, M7-300, C7, S7-400, M7-400, STEP 7, Engineering Tools, Runtime Software, SIMATIC DP (Distributed I/O), SIMATIC HMI (Human Machine Interface), SIMATIC NET (Industrial Communication)

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0

S7 Manual Collection Maintenance service for 1 year Scope of supply: CD containing the current S7 Manual Collection and the three subsequent updates

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2

Manual for PROFIBUS networks 1) Network architecture, configuring, network components, installation German

RS 485 bus connector with angular cable outlet (35°) with insulation displacement method, max. data transmission rate 12 Mbit/s

0 °C 60 °C

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA0

BT 200 hardware test device with point-to-point cable for station testing, with test connector for wiring test, without charging unit, with operating instructions German/English/French

6ES7 181-0AA01-0AA0

Connecting cable for PROFIBUS 12 Mbit/s; for PG connection to PROFIBUS DP, preassembled with 2 x 9-pin SUB connector; 3.0 m

6ES7 901-4BD00-0XA0

1) Additional language versions and manuals can be found for the various products at: http://www.siemens.com/automation/csi/net Siemens IK PI · 2007

4/55

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) DP/DP coupler

■ Overview

■ Function The DP/DP coupler continuously copies the output data from one network to the input data of the other network (and vice versa). Functions • Data exchange of up to 244 byte of input and output data of which up to 128 >byte can be consistent • Up to 16 input/output ranges for exchanging data • If one side fails, the outputs on the other side maintain the previous value • Support of DPV1 with full diagnostics • Adjustment of DP/DP coupler either via switch or STEP 7 • Different baud rate settings are possible • Electrical isolation between the two DP networks • Power is supplied to both sides

4

Parameter assignment • Interconnecting two PROFIBUS DP networks • The interchange of data between both DP networks takes place by internal copying in the coupler.

■ Application The PROFIBUS DP/DP coupler interconnects two PROFIBUS DP networks. Byte data (0 … 244 byte) is transferred from the DP master of the first network to the DP master of another network and vice versa.

The PROFIBUS DP addresses are set via two DIP switches on the top of the coupler. The coupler is configured either with STEP 7 or with a configuring tool which integrates the DP/DP coupler with the help of a GSD file. The data length is adjusted with the corresponding configuring tool.


The principle corresponds to the hardware wiring of inputs and outputs used today. The coupler has two independent DP interfaces with which the two DP networks are connected.

PROFIBUS data transmission rate

max. 12 Mbit/s

Interfaces • PROFIBUS DP

9-pin Sub-D connector

The DP/DP coupler is a slave on each DP network. The interchange of data between both DP networks takes place by internal copying in the coupler.

Supply voltage

24 V DC

Current consumption typ.

150 mA

Mounting

Upright (DIP switches above)

■ Design

Perm. environmental conditions

The DP/DP coupler is housed in a 40 mm casing of the S7-300 series. It can be mounted on a standard mounting rail (7.5 mm and 15 mm) as well as on a DIN rail for the S7 design.

• Operating temperature - horizontal mounting - all other mounting positions

0 °C ... +60 °C 0 °C ... +40 °C

The preferred arrangement is upright in a row, side by side, and without clearance.


-40 °C ... +70 °C


10-95 % at +25 °C

The coupler is connected to the PROFIBUS DP networks through an integral 9-pin Sub-D connector.

Design • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm • Weight

40 x 127 x 117 approx. 250 g


IP20

■ Ordering data DP/DP coupler

Order No. 6ES7 158-0AD01-0XA0

Note: The manual is available on the Internet free of charge.

4/56


PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) PROFIBUS DP/RS 232C link

■ Overview

■ Application The DP/RS 232C link implements the conversion between an RS 232C (V.24) interface and PROFIBUS DP. Devices with an RS 232C interface can be connected to PROFIBUS DP with the DP/RS 232C Link.

■ Design • Compact 70 mm housing for mounting on standard rails; for butt-mounting preferably vertically • 9-pin Sub-D female connector for connection to PROFIBUS DP

■ Function PROFIBUS DP/RS 232C link is connected to the device through a point-to-point connection. Conversion to the PROFIBUS DP protocol takes place in the PROFIBUS DP/RS 232C link. The data is transferred consistently in both directions. Up to 224 byte of useful data can be transferred per message. • Adapter between an RS 232C (V.24) interface and PROFIBUS DP • DP/RS 232C Link supports the following procedures: - 3964 R - data communication with start and end characters - character delay mode - data traffic with fixed-length messages • Devices with an RS 232C interface can be connected to PROFIBUS DP with the DP/RS 232C Link.

Parameterization The PROFIBUS DP address can be set with two rotary switches on the front panel. Configuration is performed through the GSD file with the configuration tool of the connected device.


4/57

4

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) PROFIBUS DP/RS 232C link


■ Ordering data 6ES7 1580AA01-0XA0

6ES7 1971LA02-0XA0

System Requirements of a DP master system - Length diagnostics frame - Length configuration frame - Length user data frame - Length parameterization frame

4

Yes

Current consumption • Current consumption, max.

300 mA

Interfaces • RS 232C

Yes

• PROFIBUS DP

Yes

Connection system • RS 232C

9-pin Sub-D female connector

• PROFIBUS DP


Protocols • PROFIBUS DP protocol

Yes

Yes

12 Mbit/s

12 Mbit/s; 9.6 / 19.2 / 45.45 / 93.75 / 187.5 / 500 kbit/s 1.5 / 3 / 6 / 12 Mbit/s


Point-to-point Transmission rate, RS232 - with 3964 (R) protocol, max. Character frame (adjustable) - Number of start bits/stop bits - Parity

19.2 kBit/s 8 data bits, 1 stop bit none, even or odd parity

Environmental requirements Operating temperature - min. - max.

0 °C 55 °C


-40 °C 70 °C


95%; at +25°C


Yes


70 mm

40 mm

• Height

95 mm

125 mm

• Depth

80 mm

130 mm

• Weight, approx.

300 g

350 g

4/58


Order No. 6ES7 158-0AA01-0XA0

Accessories 231 Byte 244 Byte 244 Byte 214 Byte

Supply voltages Rated value - 24 V DC

PROFIBUS DP/RS 232C Link For coupling RS 232C devices to PROFIBUS DP, including GSD file and documentation file SIMATIC S5 Sub-D connector, 9-pin, female

6ES5 750-2AB11

Note: The manual is available free of charge on the Internet.

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) Power Rail Booster

■ Overview

■ Design The power rail booster can be snapped on to a 15 mm or a 7.5 mm standard DIN rail.

■ Function How it works • For safe data transmission of the PROFIBUS DP signals via the contact conductors, the signal levels are raised to an interference-immune level and injected into the contact conductors. Manual and configuring The manual for the Power Rail Booster can be downloaded from the Internet in English, German and French. The "PRB Checker" software tool for easy configuration of contact conductor networks is available for downloading.

■ Technical specifications • The device for low-cost PROFIBUS DP transfer over contact conductors and slip rings to degree of protection IP20 • Permissible baud rates from 9600 bit/s to 500 kbit/s, self-optimizing • Permissible busbar length: From 25 m at 500 kbit/s to 1200 m at 9600 bit/s • Configuring with PRB Checker software • Up to 125 nodes per segment • Transparent for data communication: The power rail booster does not reserve DP addresses • Easy to install due to connection without terminating resistor and filter element • Diagnostics LED for power supply, bus activity and group errors • Isolated electronic changeover contact for external group error display or diagnostic alarm • Uninterruptible communication beyond segment limits using the "PRB segment controller"

■ Application The power rail booster supports connection of a PROFIBUS DP through a contact wire, such as can be implemented on monorail conveyors or high-bay storage and retrieval systems, thus ensuring continued use of the wide range of PROFIBUS DP system services, such as diagnostics and PROFIsafe safety engineering through a bus.

Dimensions (W x H x D, with connector) in mm

90 x 132 x 75

Supply voltage

24 V DC

Power consumption

max. 20 W

Data transmission rate, max.

500 kBit/s, self-adjusting

Cable length (depends on baud rate), max.

1200 m

Shock-hazard protected voltage

Yes, to EN 61131-2

Stations per PRB segment, max.

125

Operation without terminating resistance

Yes

Operation without filter

Yes

Wiring options: Line / star

Yes / Yes


IP20

■ Ordering data

Order No.

Power Rail Booster Signal amplifier for PROFIBUS DP transmission over contact cables, max. 500 kbit/s

6ES7 972-4AA02-0XA0

PRB segment controller Automatic change-over switch between PRB segments

6ES7 972-4AA50-0XA0

Monorail conveyors Vehicle control for monorail conveyors can be achieved costeffectively with a concept based on SIMATIC standard components. High availability, short response times and easy expansion can be achieved by using distributed controllers, such as SIMATIC ET 200S with IM 151-7/CPU. These can also be programmed by the user with SIMATIC STEP 7 via the contact wires. High-bay storage and retrieval systems The maintenance-hungry data photoelectric barriers used in high-bay storage and retrieval systems can be replaced, thus increasing plant availability. Applications with slip rings The power rail booster enables cost-effective routing of PROFIBUS DP through rotating axes even in the case of large diameters.


4/59

4

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) BT 200 hardware test unit

■ Overview

■ Benefits

• Minimizing errors during installation and commissioning • Shorter service and plant standstill times

■ Application During installation, the BT 200 test unit can be used to check the PROFIBUS cable. Wiring can also be checked when the stations are plugged in. Installation errors can be detected quickly and without any effort; no special knowledge of PROFIBUS is required.

4

Even before the system is commissioned, it is possible to test the PROFIBUS DP nodes’ RS 485 interfaces with the BT 200. A listing of addressable slaves on the connected bus is also possible, even without a master on the PROFIBUS DP. • For checking the bus cable, RS 485 interfaces and accessibility of slaves • Compact and very easy to operate • Choice of 6 languages • For installers, start-up engineers and service personnel • Optional logging kit for generating acceptance reports/documentation Optional adapters for IP65/67 systems • Connecting adapter, bus tester BT200 on M12 • Connecting adapter, bus tester BT200 on ECOFAST • Connecting adapter for 24 V DC ECOFAST for supplying the station with 24 V DC for the station test These connecting adapters can be purchased from: KnorrTec Kapellenbergstraße 34 D-93176 Beratzhausen Germany Tel: +49 (0) 94 93/ 9 51 96 90 Fax: +49 (0) 94 93/ 9 51 96 79 E-Mail: [email protected] Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.knorrtec.de/de/produkte/I_3a.asp

4/60


This permits advance function testing of single bus segments, which reduces commissioning times. In case of faults, these test functions are also useful for localizing the fault, thus minimizing plant down times. With the help of the optional log generation kit, the individual tests are saved in BT 200 and transferred to a PC. The test results can then be printed in report form. This means, for example, that it is possible to edit an acceptance report quickly and easily.

■ Function Checking the PROFIBUS cable: • Line interruption/shield interruption • Short-circuiting among lines or line and shield • Determining the location of fault in case of breakage/shorting of data lines • Detecting reflections that may cause a fault • Line change • Determining the length of the installed cable Checking slave accessibility: • Listing of accessible slaves • Specific addressing of individual slaves Checking the RS 485 interface of the master and slave: • RS 485 driver • Power supply for line termination • RTS signal • Displaying PROFIBUS DP addresses

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (RS 485) BT 200 hardware test unit


■ Ordering data

Supply voltages • Description

via integral NC battery

Connection system • PROFIBUS DP


PROFIBUS DP • Transmission rate, max. Environmental requirements Operating temperature - min. - max.


BT 200 hardware test device with point-to-point cable for station testing, with test connector for wiring test, without charging unit, with operating instructions German/English/French

Order No. 6ES7 181-0AA01-0AA0

Accessories Charging unit for the rechargeable batteries: Chargers

5 °C 45 °C

230 V AC/2.4 … 10 V DC

6ES7 193-8LA00-0AA0

110 V AC/2.4 … 10 V AC

6ES7 193-8LB00-0AA0

Logging Kit BT 200 comprising data transmission cable BT 200/PC and logging software for PC German/English/French

6ES7 193-8MA00-0AA0

Test connector Spare part

6EP8 106-0AC20


-20 °C 60 °C


95%


Yes

NiCd battery pack Spare part

6EP8 106-0HA01

• adjustable

Yes

6EP8 106-0HC01

• German

Yes

Point-to-point cable for station test Spare part

• English

Yes

• French

Yes

• Italian

Yes

• Portuguese

Yes

• Spanish

Yes

Online languages

4


210 mm

• Height

100 mm

• Depth

55 mm

• Weight, approx.

350 g


4/61

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (PROFIBUS PA) SpliTConnect

■ Overview

■ Benefits

• Easy terminal connection through use of the FastConnect connection system • Wide range of applications due to the modular SpliTConnect system • Reduction of types and parts thanks to a uniform connection system for PROFIBUS PA

4 • This is used to install fieldbus segments according to IEC 61 158-2 (e. g. PROFIBUS PA) with field device connection points • Easy installation of the bus cable using the FastConnect system (FastConnect Stripping Tool, FC Process Cable acc. to IEC 61 158-2) • Terminal units can be connected over FC Process Cables acc. to IEC 61 158-2 or SpliTConnect M12 Outlet/M12 Jack • Termination resistor combination can be integrated (SpliTConnect® Terminator

■ Application • By replacing the contact screw with the SpliTConnect Terminator, the SpliTConnect Tap can be used as a bus termination element.

Strip the cable end with FastConnect

Attach screwed gland, seal, shield contact and stranded conductor holder to the end of the cable.

Insert the insulation piercing contacts in the SpliTConnect Tap

The cable ends make contact by screwing in the insulation piercing contacts

4/62


Insert the prepared end of the cable in the SpliTConnect Tap and secure it by tightening the screwed gland.

G_IK10_XX_50011

• The SpliTConnect Tap supports the installation of fieldbus segments according to IEC 61 158-2 (e.g. PROFIBUS PA) with terminal unit connection points. • Using the SpliTConnect Coupler, a PROFIBUS PA distributor can be constructed by cascading SpliTConnect Taps.

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (PROFIBUS PA) SpliTConnect

■ Design


SpliTConnect M12 Outlet

SpliTConnect Coupler

Transmission rate

31.25 kbit/s

Type of connection

Insulation displacement

Cable gland

M22

Enclosure material

PBT (polybutyleneterephthalate)

Permissible ambient temperature • Operating temperature • Transport/storage temperature

-40 °C ... +85 °C -40 °C ... +85 °C

For use in hazardous areas

II 1G EEx ia IIC T6

UV-resistant

Yes


84 x 54 x 49 approx. 170 g


IP67

UL listing

Yes

■ Ordering data SpliTConnect Terminator

SpliTConnect M12 Jack

• • • • •

Rugged plastic casing made of PBT in IP67 design Resistant to ultraviolet rays, thus suitable for outdoor use Full shielding through integrated metal housing Easy cable connection through use of FC Process Cable Contacting and connection of the FC Process Cable through insulation displacement contacts using contacting screw • The SpliTConnect taps can be grounded through a contacting screw • For DIN rail mounting or wall mounting

■ Function • The SpliTConnect tap enables configuration of fieldbus segments according to IEC 61158-2 (e.g. PROFIBUS PA) and connection of terminals • Easy pre-assembly of the SpliTConnect taps through the FastConnect connection system (FastConnect stripping tool, FC Process Cable) • Connection of the terminals directly through FC Process Cable or SpliTConnect M12 outlet

4

Order No.

SpliTConnect Tap For assembling PROFIBUS PA segments and connecting PA field devices, insulation displacement method, IP67 Type of delivery: 1 packet = 10 pcs.

6GK1 905-0AA00

SpliTConnect M12 outlet Element for direct connection of PROFIBUS PA field devices to the SpliTConnect tap through M12 connection Type of delivery: 1 packet = 5 pcs.

6GK1 905-0AB10

SpliTConnect coupler Coupling element for connecting SpliTConnect taps in series to configure star points Type of delivery: 1 packet = 10 pcs.

6GK1 905-0AC00

SpliTConnect terminator (Ex version) For terminating PROFIBUS PA segments, can be used in hazardous areas Type of delivery: 1 packet = 5 pcs.

6GK1 905-0AD00

SpliTConnect terminator (non-Ex version) For terminating PROFIBUS PA segments, cannot be used in hazardous area Type of delivery: 1 packet = 5 pcs.

6GK1 905-0AE00

SpliTConnect M12 jack Connector element for direct connection of PROFIBUS PA field devices to the PROFIBUS PA segment through M12 connection Type of delivery: 1 packet = 5 pcs.

6GK1 905-0AF00


4/63

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (PROFIBUS PA) Bus cables

■ Overview


4 • Bus cable for fieldbus systems according to IEC 61158-2, e.g. PROFIBUS PA • High interference immunity thanks to double shielding • Different variants for different applications (hazardous areas, non-hazardous areas) • Easy length measurement thanks to printed meter markings

■ Benefits

• Length can easily be determined due to meter length markings printed on the cable • Complete range of cables for hazardous and non-hazardous areas • Reduction of types and parts thanks to a uniform connection system for PROFIBUS PA

■ Application Color coded wires are available for assembling fieldbus networks according to IEC 61 158-2 (e.g. PROFIBUS PA) for different areas of applications (hazardous, non-hazardous areas). UL approvals Different cable variants with the appropriate UL approvals for installation in cable bundles and cable racks, according to the NEC guidelines (National Electrical Code) Article 800/725.

■ Design • Shielded, twisted-pair cable with circular cross-section. • Grounding continuity may be implemented through the outer shield of the bus cable and the ground terminals of the SpliTConnect system. • Meter length marking printed on the cable. Cable types • FC Process Cable: Special bus cable according to IEC 61158-2 for use in hazardous areas (Ex version) and in non-hazardous areas (non-Ex version). • The connection between the bus segments with RS 485 and IEC 61158-2 transmission method is made through the segment transceiver/link.

4/64


Cable type 1)

FC Process Cable 2)

Damping • at 38.4 kHz/39 kHz

≤ 3 dB/km

Inductance • at 31.25 kHz

650 µH/km


100 ± 20 Ω

Rated value

100 Ω

Loop resistance

≤ 44 Ω/km


approx. 90 nF/km


≤ 100 V


02 Y SY CY 1 x 2 x 1.0/2.55-100 BL OE FR

Sheath • Material • Diameter • Color

PVC 8.0 ± 0.4 mm Blue or black


–40 ºC … +80 ºC –40 ºC … +80 ºC –20 ºC … +80 ºC

Bending radius • Single bend • Multiple bends

≥ 80 mm ≥ 160 mm


150 N

Weight

103 kg/km

Halogen-free

No

Behavior in fire



Yes/CM/CMG/PLTC/ Sun Res/Oil Res


Yes


Limited resistance

UV-resistant

Yes

Silicone-free

Yes

1) Electrical characteristics at 20 °C, tests according to DIN 47 250 Part 4 or DIN VDE 0472/FISCO 2) Data transmission rate 31.25 kbit/s.

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (PROFIBUS PA) Bus cables

■ Ordering data PROFIBUS FC Process Cable Two-wire, shielded • Blue for applications in hazardous areas • Black for applications in non-hazardous areas Meter goods: Max. consignment 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

Order No.

■ More information Mounting instructions

6XV1 830-5EH10 6XV1 830-5FH10

FastConnect The FastConnect stripping tool can be used to strip the sheath and shield of the FC Process Cable for PROFIBUS PA to the correct length. Use of the FastConnect stripping tool and SpliTConnect tap makes, for example, connecting field devices to the PROFIBUS PA bus system easy.

PROFIBUS FastConnect stripping tool Stripping tool for rapid stripping of insulation from PROFIBUS FastConnect bus cables

6GK1 905-6AA00

PROFIBUS FastConnect blade cassettes Spare blade cassettes for the PROFIBUS FastConnect stripping tool, 5 pcs.

6GK1 905-6AB00

Cable routing During storage, transport and cable laying, keep both ends sealed with a shrink-on cap. Comply with the permissible bending radii and tensile load! Note: Additional components of the SIMATIC NET wiring range can be ordered from your local contact person. For technical advice contact: J. Hertlein A&D SE V22 Tel. +49 (0) 911/750 44 65 Fax. +49 (0) 911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]

Manual for PROFIBUS networks Paper version Network architecture, configuring, network components, installation • German

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA1


6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0


4/65

4

PROFIBUS

Electrical networks (PROFIBUS PA) DP/PA coupler and link

■ Overview

DP/PA link • The DP/PA link is formed by the IM 153 interface module and one or more DP/PA couplers (Ex or non-Ex versions). All components of the DP/PA link are interconnected through the S7 backplane bus. • Combination of the IM 153 with Ex or non-Ex versions of the DP/PA coupler means that Ex and non-Ex versions of the DP/PA link are also possible. • This modular system can be expanded to a maximum of 5 PA segments. • The total depth is max. 130 mm, the height 125 mm. The width of the IM 153 is 40 mm. The total width of the DP/PA link depends on the number of DP/PA couplers used. • Connection to PROFIBUS DP only on the IM 153 via 9-pin Sub-D socket. • Redundant operation possible on S7-400H.

4

Application options

• Implements the transition between PROFIBUS DP and PROFIBUS PA. • Modular expansion • Ex version available • Non-Ex version available

■ Benefits

• Systemwide integration due to direct connection of the PA field devices to PROFIBUS DP

■ Design

DP/PA coupler The DP/PA coupler (stand-alone) is used for small quantity frameworks and low timing requirements. When using the DP/PA coupler, the data transfer rate on the PROFIBUS DP must be fixed at 45.45 kbit/s. The quantity framework is determined either by the maximum number of addressable slaves (field devices) or the maximum cycle time. When using the DP/PA coupler, the field devices are addressed directly by the PLC/automation system; the DP/PA coupler is transparent. It is not necessary to configure the DP/PA coupler. It is therefore recommended for expanding existing plants based on SIMATIC S5. DP/PA link

Modular system (DP/PA coupler and DP/PA link) in S7-300 system design on a flat mounting rail for swinging out, with screw mounting. Hot swapping is possible through the high mounting rail and the BM 157 and BM DP/PA backplane bus modules. The DP/PA coupler can be expanded to a DP/PA link. DP/PA coupler: • Housing with degree of protection IP20 • Two versions of the DP/PA coupler: Non-Ex version with max. 400 mA output current for the PA cable; Ex version with max. 110 mA output current. The PA cable of the Ex version can be used in the hazardous area. The DP/PA coupler itself must be installed outside the hazardous area (up to Ex Zone 2). • The total mounting depth is max. 130 mm, the height 125 mm. The width of the DP/PA coupler is 80 mm. • 4-pole screw terminal for 24 V DC connection • 9-pin Sub-D socket for connection to PROFIBUS DP • Non-intrinsically-safe version: 4 screw terminals for connection to PROFIBUS PA • Intrinsically-safe version: 2 screw terminals for connection to PROFIBUS PA • The DP/PA coupler (Ex version) is always present at the end of the PA cable. The terminating resistor integrated in the housing is always active. The DP/PA coupler (non-Ex version) has a selectable terminating resistor. It is therefore possible to loop the PA cable through. The screen connection of the PA cable also serves for strain relief in both versions.

4/66

Use of the DP/PA coupler and DP/PA link depends on the control system used as well as the quantity framework (number of field devices per PLC/automation system).


The DP/PA link is used for large quantity frameworks and high timing requirements. The DP/PA link is a slave on the PROFIBUS DP and a master on the PROFIBUS PA. The PLC/automation system addresses the field devices over the DP/PA link like a modular slave whose modules are the PA devices. Configuration of the DP/PA link is integrated extremely conveniently in the STEP 7 configuration software (V4.02 and higher). The DP/PA link can be operated on PROFIBUS DP standard masters. The GSD file required for operation on PROFIBUS DP standard masters can be downloaded from the Internet.

PROFIBUS


■ Function


DP/PA coupler • Conversion of data format from asynchronous (11 bits/character) to synchronous (8 bits/character) and conversion of data transmission rate. • Power supply for field devices. • Limiting of supply current by means of barriers. • The supply current is limited to 110 mA for the Ex version, and to 400 mA for the non-Ex version. • The CiR function (Configuration in RUN) is supported in association with the PROFIBUS master S7-400. This means that field devices can be added or removed during operation.

DP/PA coupler Function

Conversion of data format from asynchronous (11 bits/character) to synchronous (8 bits/character) and conversion of data transmission rate. Power supply for field devices. Limiting of supply current by means of barriers. Support of CiR functionality in association with S7-400

The number of slaves or field devices which can be connected is limited by their power consumption of the field devices.

• Intrinsically safe version

2-pole screw terminal, permanently integrated terminating resistor, max. output current 110 mA Output voltage: 13...14 V DC

• Non-intrinsically safe version

4-pole screw terminal, selectable terminating resistor, max. output current 400 mA Output voltage: 19 V DC

Connection for PROFIBUS DP

9-pin Sub-D plug, contact assignment as described in IEC 61158/EN 50170

Backplane bus

Connection through S7 backplane bus connector (only necessary for PA Link ); non-isolated The active BM DP/PA bus modules are required for the hot swapping function

Displays

Bus activity DP (yellow) Bus activity PA (yellow)

The DP/PA link can comprise: • IM 153 and max. 5 DP/PA couplers

Supply voltage

24 V DC (green)

The PA segments of a DP/PA link together form a logical bus. The sum of all field devices on a DP/PA link is limited to 64.

• Ex version

max. 400 mA

• Non-Ex version

max. 750 mA

Redundancy

Power loss

Redundant operation is possible with the S7-400H. The IM 153 is present twice in this case. Hot swapping is made possible through the BM 157 and BM DP/PA backplane bus modules and the DIN rail for active bus modules. This applies both to the IM 153 and to the series-connected DP/PA coupler.

• Ex version

approx. 7 Watt

• Non-Ex version

approx. 7 Watt

Connection for PROFIBUS PA

DP/PA link Subordinate PA segments can be designed by using the DP/PA link. This data is transmitted to the control system over PROFIBUS DP at a maximum rate of 12 Mbit/s without any significant time loss. The DP/PA link is a gateway that interconnects PROFIBUS DP and PROFIBUS PA, but decouples their data transmission rates. It is a slave on the PROFIBUS DP and a master on the PROFIBUS PA. The PLC indirectly addresses the field devices over the DP/PA link. From the viewpoint of the automation system, the DP/PA link is a modular slave. The individual modules of these slaves are the field devices connected to the subordinate PA segments. The CiR function (Configuration in RUN) is supported in association with the PROFIBUS master S7-400. This means that field devices can be added or removed during operation.

Current consumption

Operating temperature • Ex version

25...60 °C

• Non-Ex version

-25...+60 °C


80 x 125 x 130

IM 153-2 Supply voltages Rated value • Permissible range, lower limit (DC) • Permissible range, upper limit (DC) • Reverse polarity protection • Overvoltage protection • Bridging capability of line voltage outages

20.4 V 28.8 V Yes Yes 5 ms

Current consumption Current consumption, max.

480 mA

Current consumption, typ.

400 mA

Power loss

4W


4/67

4

PROFIBUS


■ Technical specifications (continued) IM 153-2

Order No.

DP/PA coupler

Interfaces PROFIBUS DP

Yes

PROFIBUS PA

Yes; using coupler

AS-Interface

No

Connection method PROFIBUS DP

For conversion of the communications system from RS 485 to IEC 1158-2 • Intrinsically safe version (Ex)

6ES7 157-0AD82-0XA0

• Non intrinsically safe version (non-Ex)

6ES7 157-0AC82-0XA0

9-pin Sub-D

IM 153-2

6ES7 153-2BA81-0XB0

PROFIBUS DP

Yes

Interface module for DP/PA link and Y link

PROFIBUS DP Data transmission rate

12 Mbit/s

PS 307 load current supply, including connection assembly; 120/230 V AC; 24 V DC

• Data transmission rate, max.

12 Mbit/s

• 2 A; 50 mm wide

6ES7 307-1BA00-0AA0

• Max. number of slaves

64

• 5 A; 80 mm wide

6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0

• 5 A, extended temperature range; 80 mm wide

6ES7 307-1EA80-0AA0

• 10 A, 200 mm wide

6ES7 307-1KA00-0AA0

Protocol

4

■ Ordering data

Accessories

Properties of the subordinate DP master system

PROFIBUS PA Data transmission rate

31.25 kbit/s; user view

Number of PA field devices that can be connected

64

Bridging capability of line voltage outages

5 ms

CPU/ programming Configuring software • STEP 7

Yes; GSD tool

Yes

Alarms • Alarms

Yes

Diagnostics • Diagnostics functions

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Insulation

DIN (without hot swapping) • 482 mm wide (19 inches)

6ES7 390-1AE80-0AA0

• Width 530 mm

6ES7 390-1AF30-0AA0

Active bus modules for hot swapping • IM 157 bus module for two IM 153-2 modules, for redundant and non-redundant configuration, for extended temperature range, for hot swapping function, permissible operating temperature -25...+60 °C

6ES7 195-7HD80-0XA0

• DP/PA bus module for one DP/PA coupler, for extended temperature range, for hot swapping function, permissible operating temperature -25...+60°C

6ES7 195-7HF80-0XA0

DIN rail for hot swapping

Insulation tested with

500 V AC

Environmental demands Operating temperature • min • max.

-25 °C 60 °C

Storage/transportation temperature • min. • max.

-40 °C 70 °C

Relative humidity • Operation, max.

95%

Degree/Class of protection • IP20

Yes


40 mm

• Height

125 mm

• Depth

117 mm

• Weight, approx.

350 g

4/68

6ES7 305-1BA80-0AA0

Components for redundant configuration

Status information/ Alarms/ Diagnostics Status indicator

LED diagnostics • DP bus activity (yellow) • PA bus activity (yellow) • BF bus error (red) • SF group error (red) • Monitoring 24 V voltage supply ON (green)

PS 305 load current supply, 24/48/60/110 V DC; 24 V DC • 2 A, extended temperature range; 80 mm wide


For max. 5 active bus modules for hot swapping function • 482 mm long (19 inches)

6ES7 195-1GA00-0XA0

• 530 mm long

6ES7 195-1GF30-0XA0

• 620 mm long

6ES7 195-1GG30-0XA0

• 2000 mm long

6ES7 195-1GC00-0XA0

PROFIBUS

Optical networks with OLM Glass fiber-optic cables

■ Overview

■ Application Marine duplex fiber-optic cable SIENOPYR Halogen-free, non-crush, flame-retardant, marine-approved fiber-optic cable for permanent installation on ships and on offshore platforms indoors and on open deck. Sold by the meter. Fiber-optic indoor cable Halogen-free fiber-optic cable, non-crush, flame-retardant, for installation inside buildings (e.g. in production halls and in building automation). Supplied in fixed lengths, pre-assembled with 4 BFOC connectors. Fiber-optic standard cable Fiber-optic cables for the following application areas indoors and outdoors • For routing above ground • For installation inside buildings. Sold by the meter and in fixed lengths, pre-assembled with 4 BFOC connectors. Fiber-optic trailing cable

• Used for the optical Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS networks • Rugged design for industrial applications indoors and outdoors • Halogen-free design for installation inside buildings • Trailing cable for the special application of forced motion control • High immunity to noise thanks to insensitivity to electromagnetic fields • Available preassembled • Extensive approvals (UL)

■ Benefits

Fiber-optic cables for the special application of forced motion control, such as in continuously moving machine parts (in trailing cables) indoors and outdoors. Two cable versions are available for this application: • FO Trailing Cable; Cable for high mechanical stress, PUR outer sheath, no UL approval • FO Trailing Cable GP (general purpose); Cable for low mechanical stress, PVC outer sheath, with UL approval Sold by the meter and in fixed lengths, pre-assembled with 4 BFOC connectors. Fiber-optic outdoor cable Waterproof cable (lengthwise and sideways) for use outdoors with non-metallic protection against rodents for laying into the ground. Sold by the meter and in fixed lengths, pre-assembled with 4 BFOC connectors. Note: Special tools and specially trained personnel are required for pre-assembling glass fiber-optic cables

• Easy routing with - pre-assembled cables - no grounding problems - very light fiber-optic cable • Tap-proof due to lack of radiation from the cable • Silicon-free; therefore suitable for use in the automotive industry (e.g. on paint shop conveyors)


4/69

4

PROFIBUS


■ Application (continued) Application examples

Network components

Network components

Plug

NC

BFOC connection

Preassembled fiber-optic cables with BFOC connectors

Plug

NC

BFOC connection

4

G_IK10_XX_10043


Use of pre-assembled fiber-optic cables with BFOC connectors (100 bit/s)

■ Design Cable types Outer sheath Strain relief through aramid fibers

Single core sheath Glass fiber

G_IK PI_XX_10030

Loosely buffered fiber

50/125 µm

62.5/125 µm


■

–

FO Trailing Cable

■

–


■

–

FO Ground Cable

■

–

FIBER OPTIC standard cable

–

■

INDOOR Fiber Optic indoor cable

–

■

Flexible Fiber Optic trailing cable

–

■

SIENOPYR marine duplex fiberoptic cable

–

■

In the respective applications, the maximum cable lengths must be taken into account. Passive connection of different fiber types is not permissible.

4/70


PROFIBUS




FO Ground Cable

Application areas


Waterproof cable (lengthwise and sideways) for use outdoors with non-metallic protection against rodents for laying into the ground.

Type of delivery

Sold by the meter; pre-assembled with 4 BFOC connectors



AT-W(ZN)YY 2x1G50/125

AT-WQ(ZN)Y(ZN)B2Y 2G50/125

Fiber type

Multi-mode gradient fiber 50/125 mm


• at 850 nm

≤ 2.7 dB/km

≤ 2.7 dB/km

• at 1300 nm

≤ 0.7 dB/km

≤ 0.7 dB/km

4

Damping


≥ 600 MHz *km

≥ 600 MHz *km

• at 1300 nm

≥ 1200 MHz *km

≥ 1200 MHz *km

Number of fibers

2

2

Cable design

Segmentable

Segmentable

Core type

Hollow core, filled

Hollow core, filled

Materials • Basic element

PVC, orange/black

PVC, orange/black

• Strain relief

Aramide fibers

Aramide fibers

• Outer sheath/color of cable

PVC, green

PVC, black

Mechanical characteristics • Dimensions of basic element

2.9 mm dia.

2.9 mm dia.

• Cable dimensions

4.5 x 7.4 mm

10.5 mm

• Cable weight

approx. 40 kg/km

approx. 90 kg/km

• Permissible tensile force

≤ 500 N

≤ 800 N

• Bending radius

65 mm

155 mm

• Bending cycles

–

–

• Resistant to lateral force

300 N/cm

300 N/cm

• Impact resistant (starting energy/number/hammer Ø)

–

–

• Routing and installation temperature

–5 ºC … +50 ºC

–5 ºC … +50 ºC


–25 ºC … +80 ºC

–25 ºC … +70 ºC

• Storage temperature

–25 ºC … +80 ºC

–25 ºC … +70 ºC

Behavior in fire

–

–

Halogen-free

–

–

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes


Limited resistance

Highly resistant

UL/CSA approvals


–

UV-resistant

Yes

Yes

Protection against rodents

–

Yes



4/71

PROFIBUS



4

Cable type

FO Trailing Cable


Application areas

Cable for use in cable carriers for high mechanical loading, PUR outer sheath, no UL approval

Cable for use in cable carriers for low mechanical loading, PVC outer sheath, UL approval

Type of delivery




AT-W(ZN)Y(ZN)11Y 2G50/125

AT-W(ZN)Y(ZN)Y 2G50/125

Fiber type



• at 850 nm

≤ 2.7 dB/km

≤ 2.7 dB/km

• at 1300 nm

≤ 0.7 dB/km

≤ 0.7 dB/km

Damping


≥ 600 MHz *km

≥ 600 MHz *km

• at 1300 nm

≥ 1200 MHz *km

≥ 1200 MHz *km

Number of fibers

2

2

Cable design

Segmentable

Segmentable

Core type

Hollow core, filled

Hollow core, filled


PVC, orange/black

PVC, orange/black

• Strain relief

Aramide fibers

Aramide fibers


PUR, green

PVC, green


2.9 mm dia.

2.9 mm dia.


10.5 mm

10.5 mm

• Cable weight

approx. 90 kg/km

approx. 90 kg/km


≤ 800 N

≤ 800 N

• Bending radius

200 mm

200 mm

• Bending cycles

5000000

>3500000


300 N/cm

300 N/cm


–

–


–5 ºC … +50 ºC

–5 ºC …+50 ºC


–25 ºC … +80 ºC

–25 ºC … +80 ºC


–25 ºC … +80 ºC

–25 ºC … +80 ºC

Behavior in fire

–

–

Halogen-free

–

–

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes


Highly resistant

Limited resistance

UL/CSA approvals

–


UV-resistant

Yes

Yes


–

–


4/72


PROFIBUS



INDOOR Fiber Optic Indoor cable

Fiber Optic Standard cable

Application areas

Non-crush, halogen-free and fire-retardant cable for indoor installation


Type of delivery




T-VHH 2G62.5/125 3.2B200+0.9F600 F TB3 OR FRNC

AT-VYY 2G62,5/125 3.1B200 + 0.8F600 F

Fiber type




≤ 3.5 dB/km ≤ 1.0 dB/km

≤ 3.1 dB/km ≤ 0.8 dB/km


≥ 200 MHz *km ≥ 500 MHz *km

≥ 200 MHz *km ≥ 600 MHz *km

Number of fibers

2

2

Cable design

Segmentable inner conductor


Core type

Fixed core

Compact core

4


Copolymer, gray (FRNC)

PVC, gray

• Strain relief

Aramide fibers

Kevlar fiber and impregnated glass fiber


Copolymer, light orange (FRNC)

PVC, black


(2.9 ± 0.1) mm dia.

(3.5 ± 0.2) mm dia.


(3.9 × 6.6) ± 0.2 mm

(6.3 × 9.8) ± 0.4 mm

• Cable weight

approx. 27 kg/km

approx. 74 kg/km


≤ 800 N (temporary)

≤ 500 N (temporary)

• Bending radius

≥ 50 mm (when routing) ≥ 30 mm (during operation) only on the flat side

≥ 100 mm only on the flat side


10000 N/10 cm (temporary) 1) 2000 N/10 cm (continuous) 2)

–


1.5 Nm/20 impacts/12.5 mm

–


–5 ºC … +50 ºC

–5 ºC …+50 ºC


–20 ºC … +60 ºC

–20 ºC … +60 ºC


–25 ºC … +70 ºC

–25 ºC … +70 ºC

Behavior in fire



Halogen-free

Yes

–

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes


–

–

UL approval

–

–

UV-resistant

–

–


–

Yes


1) Attenuation change reversible max. 0.3 dB 2) Attenuation change reversible max. 0.1 dB


4/73

PROFIBUS



4

Cable type

Flexible Fiber Optic Trailing cable


Application areas

Flexible cable for routing in cable carriers indoors and outdoors

Fixed routing on ships and on offshore platforms in any room and on open deck; marine approval

Type of delivery


Sold by the meter


AT-W11Y (ZN) 11Y 2G62.5/125 3.1B200 + 0.8F600 F

MI-VHH 2G 62.5/125 3.1B200 + 0.8F600 + 2 x 1CU

Fiber type




≤ 3.1 dB/km ≤ 0.8 dB/km

≤ 3.1 dB/km ≤ 0.8 dB/km


≥ 200 MHz *km ≥ 600 MHz *km

≥ 200 MHz *km ≥ 600 MHz *km

Number of fibers

2

2

Cable design



Core type

Hollow core, filled

Full core


PUR, black

Polyolefin

• Strain relief

Aramide fiber, also GFP central element

Aramide fibers


PUR, black

SHF1 mixture, black


(3.5 ± 0.2) mm dia.

(2.9 ± 0.2) mm dia.


13.4 ± 0.4 mm (external diameter)

13.3 ± 0.5 mm

• Cable weight

approx. 135 kg/km

approx. 220 kg/km


≤ 2000 N (temporary) ≤ 1000 N (continuous)

≤ 500 N (temporary) ≤ 250 N (continuous)

• Bending radius

≥ 150 mm min. 100000 bending cycles

133 mm (once) 266 mm (more than once)

Perm. ambient conditions • Routing and installation temperature

–5 ºC … +50 ºC

–10 ºC … +50 ºC


–30 ºC … +60 ºC

–40 ºC … +80 ºC 1) –40 ºC … +70 ºC 2)


–30 ºC … +70 ºC

–40 ºC … +80 ºC

Behavior in fire

–

Flame-retardant acc. to IEC 60332-3 Cat A

Halogen-free

–

Yes

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes


–

–

UL approval

–

–

UV-resistant

Yes

–


–

–


–

• Lloyd Register of Shipping • German Lloyd • Registro Staliano Navale • Bureau Veritas

1) With copper cores and no load 2) With copper cores and maximum load (6 A)

4/74


PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data FO Standard Cable GP 50/125 Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m; minimum order 20 m;

Order No. 6XV1 873-2A

Preferred lengths pre-assembled with 4 BFOC connectors

Order No. Standard FIBER OPTIC CABLE (62.5/125), segmentable Sold by the meter; max. quantity 2000 m; minimum order 20 m

6XV1 820-5AH10

• 0.5 m

6XV1 873-3AH05

Preferred lengths pre-assembled with 4 BFOC plugs

•1m

6XV1 873-3AH10

•1m

6XV1 820-5BH10

6XV1 873-3AH20

•2m

6XV1 820-5BH20

6XV1 873-3AH30

•3m

6XV1 820-5BH30

6XV1 873-3AH50

•4m

6XV1 820-5BH40

• 10 m

6XV1 873-3AN10

•5m

6XV1 820-5BH50

• 15 m

6XV1 873-3AN15

• 10 m

6XV1 820-5BN10

• 20 m

6XV1 873-3AN20

• 15 m

6XV1 820-5BN15

6XV1 873-3AN30

• 20 m

6XV1 820-5BN20

6XV1 873-3AN40

• 30 m

6XV1 820-5BN30

6XV1 873-3AN50

• 40 m

6XV1 820-5BN40

6XV1 873-3AN80

• 50 m

6XV1 820-5BN50

6XV1 873-3AT10

• 55 m

6XV1 820-5BN55

6XV1 873-3AT15

• 60 m

6XV1 820-5BN60

6XV1 873-3AT20

• 65 m

6XV1 820-5BN65

6XV1 873-3AT30

• 70 m

6XV1 820-5BN70

• 75 m

6XV1 820-5BN75

• 80 m

6XV1 820-5BN80

• 100 m

6XV1 820-5BT10

• 120 m

6XV1 820-5BT12

Preferred lengths pre-assembled with 4 BFOC connectors

• 130 m

6XV1 820-5BT13

• 150 m

6XV1 820-5BT15

•3m

6XV1 873-3CH30

• 200 m

6XV1 820-5BT20

•5m

6XV1 873-3CH50

• 250 m

6XV1 820-5BT25

• 10 m

6XV1 873-3CN10

• 300 m

6XV1 820-5BT30

• 20 m

6XV1 873-3CN20

• 50 m

6XV1 873-3CN50

• 100 m

6XV1 873-3CT10

6XV1 820-7AH10

FO Trailing Cable GP 50/125 Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m; minimum order 20 m;

INDOOR FIBER OPTIC CABLE (62.5/125), segmentable Sold by the meter; max. quantity 2000 m; minimum order 20 m

6XV1 873-2D

•2m •3m •5m

• 30 m • 40 m • 50 m • 80 m • 100 m • 150 m • 200 m • 300 m FO Trailing Cable 50/125 Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m; minimum order 20 m;

6XV1 873-2C

Preferred lengths 1) pre-assembled with 4 BFOC connectors •3m

6XV1 873-3DH30

•5m

6XV1 873-3DH50

• 10 m

6XV1 873-3DN10

• 20 m

6XV1 873-3DN20

• 50 m

6XV1 873-3DN50

• 100 m

6XV1 873-3DT10

FO Ground Cable 50/125 Sold by the meter; max. quantity 2000 m; minimum order 20 m;

6XV1 873-2G

Preferred lengths pre-assembled with 4 BFOC connectors • 100 m

6XV1 873-3GT10

• 200 m

6XV1 873-3G T20

• 300 m

6XV1 873-3G T30

4

Preferred lengths; pre-assembled with 4 BFOC connectors • 0.5 m

6XV1 820-7BH05

•1m

6XV1 820-7BH10

•2m

6XV1 820-7BH20

•3m

6XV1 820-7BH30

•5m

6XV1 820-7BH50

• 10 m

6XV1 820-7BN10

• 15 m

6XV1 820-7BN15

• 20 m

6XV1 820-7BN20

• 25 m

6XV1 820-7BN25

• 50 m

6XV1 820-7BN50

• 75 m

6XV1 820-7BN75

• 100 m

6XV1 820-7BT10

SIENOPYR marine duplex fiber-optic cable (62.5/125) Fiber-optic cable for installation onboard ships and on offshore platforms Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m

6XV1 830-0NH10


4/75

PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data FLEXIBLE FIBER OPTIC CABLE trailing cable (62.5/125), segmentable Sold by the meter; max. quantity 2000 m; minimum order 20 m

Order No.

You can order components and demonstration materials supplementary to the SIMATIC NET cabling range from your local contact. 6XV1 820-6AH10

•1m

6XV1 820-6BH10

•2m

6XV1 820-6BH20

•3m

6XV1 820-6BH30

•5m

6XV1 820-6BH50

• 10 m

6XV1 820-6BN10

• 15 m

6XV1 820-6BN15

• 20 m

6XV1 820-6BN20

• 30 m

6XV1 820-6BN30

• 50 m

6XV1 820-6BN50

• 75 m

6XV1 820-6BN75

• 100 m

6XV1 820-6BT10

Accessories BFOC connector set for FIBER OPTIC CABLE, standard, trailing cable, indoor cable as well as SIENOPYR marine duplex fiber-optic cable, 20 units

6GK1 901-0DA20-0AA0

Manual for TP and fiber-optic networks 1) Paper version Network architecture, components, configurations, installation guidelines • German

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1


6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

1) Further language versions and manuals can be found for the respective products at http://www.siemens.com/automation/csi/net Note Special fiber-optic cables, lengths and accessories available on request. Special tools and specially trained personnel are required for pre-assembling glass fiber-optic cables

4/76


Technical advice on this subject is available from: J. Hertlein A&D SE PS Tel. +49 (0) 911/750 44 65 Fax. +49 (0) 911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]

Preferred lengths; pre-assembled with 4 BFOC connectors

4


PROFIBUS

Optical networks with OLM Plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables

■ Overview

■ Application SIMATIC NET plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables are used in combination with OLM/P11 and OLM/P12 for constructing optical PROFIBUS networks or for the optical connection of segments in RS 485 technology in indoor applications. Plastic fiber-optic cables and segmented PCF fiber-optic cables can be assembled on site with 2 x 2 BFOC connectors. The maximum cable length between two OLM/P11 or OLM/P12 is 80 m. Longer cable lengths up to 400 m can be achieved using PCF fiber-optic cables. These cables are also available preassembled with 4 BFOC connectors.

■ Design Different types of plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables are offered:

• Electrical isolation of PROFIBUS devices and PROFIBUS segments • Protection of the transmission path against electromagnetic interference • Up to 80 m cable length with plastic fiber-optic cables and up to 400 m with PCF fiber-optic cables • Rugged fiber-optic standard cables, designed for industrial applications • Extensive approvals (UL)

■ Benefits

• Plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables can be pre-assembled on site • Time savings on start-up thanks to pre-assembled cables • Protection of the transmission path against electromagnetic interference • Tap-proof, because the cable does not radiate

Plastic fiber-optic cables • Plastic FOC, standard cable; rugged round cable with violet PVC outer sheath and Kevlar tension components as well as two plastic fibers with a rugged polyamide inner sheath. For indoor applications; cable lengths up to 80 m. • Plastic FOC, duplex core; two flat cores with PVC inner sheath and without outer sheath for indoor applications with low mechanical stress such as laboratory setups or inside cabinets; cable length to 50 m. PCF fiber optic cables • PCF fiber-optic cable, standard cables: Rugged round cables with violet/green PVC outer sheath and Kevlar strain relief elements for applications indoor/outdoors; cable lengths up to 400 m; the following cable versions are available: - PCF fiber optic standard cable; with violet PVC outer sheath for indoor applications. The cable is not suitable for assembly in the field; (only available pre-assembled with an insertion tool) - PCF Standard Cable GP (general purpose); with green PVC outer sheath for indoor and outdoor applications. The cable is suitable for assembly in the field. • PCF fiber optic trailing cable; rugged round cable with green outer sheath and Kevlar tension elements for trailing cable applications; cable lengths of up to 400 m. The cables are suitable for assembly in the field. The following cable versions are available: - PCF Trailing Cable; cable for high mechanical stress, PUR outer sheath, no UL approval - PCF Trailing Cable GP (general purpose); cable for low mechanical stress, PVC outer sheath, with UL approval


4/77

4

PROFIBUS



PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic Duplex Core

PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic Standard Cable

PROFIBUS PCF Fiber Optic Standard Cable

Area of application

Indoor applications with low mechanical loading, such as laboratory setups or inside cabinets, with cable lengths up to 50 m

For indoor applications with cable lengths up to 80 m


Delivery format

Sold by the meter; for assembly on site with 2 simplex connectors

Preassembled with 2 x 2 BFOC connectors or sold by the meter

Only preassembled with 2 x 2 BFOC plugs; cable is not suitable for assembly in the field.


I-VY2P 980/1000 150A

I-VY4Y2P 980/1000 160A

I-VY2K 200/230 10A17+8B20

Fiber type

Step-index fiber

Step-index fiber

Step-index fiber

• at 660 nm

≤ 230 dB/km

≤ 230 dB/km

≤ 10 dB/km

Number of fibers

2

2

2

• Fiber core

Polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA)


Quartz glass

• Cladding

Fluoridated special polymer



• Inner sheath/color

PVC, gray

PA, black or orange

–1)

• Outer sheath/color

–

PVC, violet

PVC, violet

• Strain relief

–

Kevlar fibers

Kevlar fibers

• Diameter of fiber core

980 µm

980 µm

200 µm

• Cladding outer diameter

1000 µm

1000 µm

230 µm

• Diameter of inner sheath

2.2 ± 0.01 mm dia.

2.2 ± 0.01 mm dia.

–


2.2 × 4.4 mm ± 0.01 mm

7.8 ± 0.3 mm dia.

4.7 ± 0.3 mm dia.

• Cable weight

7.8 kg/km

65 kg/km

22 kg/km

• Maximum permissible tensile force - temporary ≤ 50 N - constant Not suitable for continuous tensile load

≤ 100 N Not suitable for continuous tensile load

≤ 500 N ≤ 100 N (only on strain relief, ≤ 50 N on plug or single core)

• Bending radius - once without tensile force ≥ 30 mm - more than once with tensile force ≥ 50 mm (only over flat side)

≥ 100 mm ≥ 150 mm

≥ 75 mm ≥ 75 mm

≤ 35 N/10 cm

≤ 100 N/10 cm

≤ 750 N/10 cm

Limited Limited Limited Not UV resistant

Limited Limited Limited Limited

Limited Limited Limited Limited


–30 ºC … +70 ºC

–30 ºC … +70 ºC

–20 ºC … +70 ºC


–35 ºC … +85 ºC

–30 ºC … +70 ºC

–30 ºC … +70 ºC

• Routing

0 ºC … +50 ºC

0 ºC … +50 ºC

-5 ºC … +50 ºC

Behavior in fire

Flame retardant in accordance with the VW-1 flame test to UL 1581


Flame-retardant acc. to flame test VW-1 to UL 1581

Silicone-free

Contains small quantities of a nonmigrating silicone elastomer

Yes

Yes

Core cross-section

4

Damping

Materials

Mechanical characteristics

• Resistance to lateral force per 10 cm cable length (temporary) • Resistant against - mineral oil ASTM No. 2 - grease - water - UV radiation Perm. ambient conditions

• In short-circuit on conductor

–

1) Sold by the meter without inner sheath; not suitable for assembly in the field.

4/78


PROFIBUS




PCF Trailing Cable


Area of application




Delivery format

Sold by the meter

Sold by the meter

Sold by the meter


I-V(ZN)YY 2K200/230

AT-V(ZN)Y(ZN)11Y 2K200/230


Fiber type

Step index 200/230

Step index 200/230

Step index 200/230

10 dB/km

10 dB/km

10 dB/km

• at 650 nm

17 MHz * km

17 MHz * km

17 MHz * km

Number of fibers

2

2

2

• Fiber core

Quartz glass

Quartz glass

Quartz glass

• Cladding

Special polymer

Special polymer

Special polymer


PVC, orange/black

PVC, orange/black

PVC, orange/black


PVC, green

PUR, green

PVC, green

• Strain relief

Aramide fibers

Aramide fibers

Aramide fibers


200 µm

200 µm

200 µm


230 µm

230 µm

230 µm


2.2 mm dia.

2.2 mm dia.

2.2 mm dia.


7.2 mm

8.8 mm

8.8 mm

• Cable weight

45 kg/km

85 kg/km

85 kg/km

• Maximum permissible tensile force 100 N

800 N

800 N

• Bending radius

105 mm

175 mm

175 mm

• Bending cycles

–

5000000

5000000

• Resistant to lateral force - constant - temporary

300 N/cm 500 N/cm

300 N/cm 500 N/cm

300 N/cm 500 N/cm

• Resistant against - mineral oil ASTM No. 2 - grease - water - UV radiation

Limited resistance Limited resistance Yes

Limited resistance Highly resistant Yes

Limited resistance Limited resistance Yes


-25 °C … 75 °C

-25 °C … 75 °C

-25 °C … 75 °C


-25 °C … 75 °C

-30 °C … 75 °C

-30 °C … 75 °C

• Routing

-5 °C … 50 °C

-5 °C … 50 °C

-5 °C … 50 °C

Behavior in fire




UL/CSA approvals


–


UV-resistant

Yes

Yes

Yes

Halogen-free

-

-

-

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes

Yes

Core cross-section

4

Damping • at 650 nm Modal bandwidth

Materials





4/79

PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data

Order No.

PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic, standard cable Rugged round cable with 2 plastic fiber-optic cores, PVC outer sheath and PA inner sheath, for indoor use Without connector

4

• Sold by the meter

6XV1 821-0AH10

• 50 m ring

6XV1 821-0AN50

• 100 m ring

6XV1 821-0AT10

Preferred lengths Preassembled with 2 x 2 BFOC connectors, arm length 20 cm each, for connection of OLM/P. •1m

6XV1 821-0BH10

•2m

6XV1 821-0BH20

•5m

6XV1 821-0BH50

• 10 m

6XV1 821-0BN10

• 15 m

6XV1 821-0BN15

• 20 m

6XV1 821-0BN20

• 25 m

6XV1 821-0BN25

• 30 m

6XV1 821-0BN30

• 50 m

6XV1 821-0BN50

• 65 m

6XV1 821-0BN65

• 80 m

6XV1 821-0BN80

PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic, duplex core Plastic fiber-optic cable with two cores, PVC outer sheath, for use in environments with low mechanical stress, without connector • 50 m ring

6XV1 821-2AN50

PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic, Stripping Tool Set Tools for removing the outer sheath or core sheath of PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic cables

6GK1 905-6PA10

PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic, BFOC connector set 20 BFOC connectors for assembling PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic cables for OLM/P..

6GK1 905-1PA00

PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic, BFOC crimping tool For connecting BFOC connectors to PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic cables PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic, BFOC polishing set Polishing set for grinding and polishing the BFOC connector face ends for PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic cables with OLM/P..

4/80


Order No. PROFIBUS PCF Fiber Optic standard cable PCF fiber-optic cable with two cores, PVC outer sheath, for covering larger distances up to 400 m,

6GK1 905-6PB00

6GK1 905-6PS00

Preferred lengths Preassembled with 2 × 2 BFOC connectors, arm length 20 cm each, with aid for pulling in at one end for connection of OLM/P. • 75 m

6XV1 821-1BN75

• 100 m

6XV1 821-1BT10

• 150 m

6XV1 821-1BT15

• 200 m

6XV1 821-1BT20

• 250 m

6XV1 821-1BT25

• 300 m

6XV1 821-1BT30

• 400 m

6XV1 821-1BT40

PROFIBUS PCF Standard Cable GP 200/230 Standard cable, segmentable, sold by the meter; max. quantity 2000 m; minimum order 20 m;

6XV1 861-2A

Preferred lengths; pre-assembled with 4 BFOC connectors • 75 m

6XV1 861-3AN75

• 100 m

6XV1 861-3AT10

• 150 m

6XV1 861-3AT15

• 200 m

6XV1 861-3AT20

• 250 m

6XV1 861-3AT25

• 300 m

6XV1 861-3AT30

• 400 m

6XV1 861-3AT40

PROFIBUS PCF Trailing Cable 200/230 Trailing cable, segmentable, sold by the meter; max. quantity 2000 m; minimum order 20 m;

6XV1 861-2C


6XV1 861-3CN75

• 100 m

6XV1 861-3CT10

• 150 m

6XV1 861-3CT15

• 200 m

6XV1 861-3CT20

• 250 m

6XV1 861-3CT25

• 300 m

6XV1 861-3CT30

• 400 m

6XV1 861-3CT40

PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data PROFIBUS PCF Trailing Cable GP 200/230 Trailing cable, segmentable, sold by the meter; max. quantity 2000 m; minimum order 20 m;

Order No.

6XV1 861-2D

■ More information You can order components and demonstration materials supplementary to the SIMATIC NET cabling range from your local contact. For technical support, please contact: J. Hertlein A&D SE V22 Tel. +49 (0) 911/750 44 65 Fax. +49 (0) 911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]


6XV1 861-3DN75

• 100 m

6XV1 861-3DT10

• 150 m

6XV1 861-3DT15

• 200 m

6XV1 861-3DT20

• 250 m

6XV1 861-3DT25

• 300 m

6XV1 861-3DT30

• 400 m

6XV1 861-3DT40

4

Manual for PROFIBUS networks Paper version Network architecture, project management, network components, installation • German

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA1


6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0


4/81

PROFIBUS

Optical networks with OLM PCF FOC termination kits

■ Overview


Supporting element

Fleece material taping Single core sheath with strain relief elements

4

Polymer-cladded fiber

• Compact, rugged assembly case for PCF fiber-optic cables • Special versions for easy assembly of HP Simplex and BFOC plugs on PCF fiber-optic cables • The quality of the assembly can be checked using the enclosed microscope

■ Benefits

• Easy installation of the unassembled cables in industrial plants • Flexible assembly of connectors on PCF fiber-optic cables on site (HP Simplex, BFOC connectors) • Mistakes are avoided with easy visual inspection of the assembled connector on site using a microscope • PCF fiber-optic cables are easily repaired on site by installing a new PCF cable

■ Application SIMATIC NET PCF fiber-optic conductors are used to design optical indoor and outdoor PROFIBUS DP networks. They are easily assembled on site with 2 x 2 Simplex connectors or 2 x 2 BFOC connectors. The maximum cable length between two DP devices is 300 m, and between two OLMs it is 400 m. PROFIBUS DP devices that are equipped with an integral optical interface (Simplex connection) include OBT, CP 342-5 FO, CP 5613 FO, CP 5614 FO, IM 153-2 FO and IM 467 FO.

G_IK PI_XX_10031

Strain relief through aramid fibers

Two types of assembly cases for PCF fiber-optic cables are offered: • Assembly case for HP Simplex connectors; for local assembly of HP Simplex connectors; comprising a stripping tool, buffer stripping tool, Kevlar cutters, fiber breaking tool, crimping tool and microscope • Assembly case for BFOC connectors; for local assembly of BFOC connectors; comprising a stripping tool, buffer stripping tool, Kevlar cutters, fiber breaking tool, and microscope.

■ Ordering data

Order No.

Termination Kit for Simplex connectors Assembly case for local assembly of PCF Simplex connectors; comprising a stripping tool, buffer stripping tool, Kevlar cutters, fiber breaking tool, crimping tool and microscope

6GK1 900-0KL00-0AA0

Termination Kit for BFOC connectors Assembly case for local assembly of BFOC connectors; comprising a stripping tool, buffer stripping tool, Kevlar cutters, fiber breaking tool, and microscope

6GK1 900-0HL00-0AA0

Connector Simplex connector with cleaning materials; 50 crimp connectors for assembly on PCF fiber-optic cables on site

6GK1 900-0KB00-0AC0

BFOC connector with cleaning materials; 20 screw connectors for assembly on PCF fiber-optic cables on site

6GK1 900-0HB00-0AC0

■ More information You can order components supplementary to the SIMATIC NET cabling range from your local contact. For technical support, please contact: J. Hertlein A&D SE V22 Tel. +49 (0) 911/750 44 65 Fax. +49 (0) 911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]

4/82


PROFIBUS

Optical networks with OLM Optical Link Module OLM

■ Overview

■ Design The OLMs have a compact metal housing. It is suitable for mounting on a standard mounting rail and for fixed mounting. The 24 V supply is provided through a terminal block. Redundant power supply configurations are supported. The signal contact can be used to transfer a digital signal for evaluation purposes to controllers or operator control and monitoring systems. OLMs can be combined with each other and individual stations or whole electrical segments integrated in the optical PROFIBUS network through an electrical interface .

• For constructing PROFIBUS networks (line, star and ring) with glass, PCF and plastic fiber-optic cables • High availability can be achieved using redundant power supply and redundant cable routes • Function monitoring through signaling contact • All PROFIBUS data rates from 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s including 45.45 kbit/s for PROFIBUS PA • The fiber-optic routes can be checked with a voltmeter

■ Benefits

• High network availability through redundant optical ring topology • Fast error localization through signal contact, LED and measuring jacks • Wide range through use of glass fiber-optic cables up to a length of 15 km • OLM/G12-EEC for use outdoors down to –20 °C

■ Application With the PROFIBUS OLM (Optical Link Modules) Version 3, optical PROFIBUS networks can be established in linear bus, star and redundant ring topologies. The data transmission rate of a fiber optic line is independent of the distance and can be up to 12 Mbit/s.

The OLMs are available with one or two FOC interfaces with BFOC connection method for various types of FO cables: • Plastic FO cables (980/1000 µm) can be used for single line lengths up to 80 m. They can also be preassembled on site with BFOC connectors . • PCF FO cables (200/230 µm) can be used for single line lengths up to 400 m. They are available preassembled with 4 BFOC connectors and an insertion assistance. • Glass fiber multimode FO cables (62.5/125 µm) like the SIMATIC NET fiber-optic cables can be used for long distances up to 3000 m. These cables are available preassembled with 4 BFOC plugs. • Single mode FO cables (10/125 µm fibers) can be used for very long distances up to 15 km. They are available on request.

■ Function • Automatic recognition of all PROFIBUS transmission rates: 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s including 45.45 kbit/s (PROFIBUS PA) • Configuration of the following network topologies: line, star, redundant ring • High availability through media redundancy. The distance between two OLMs in the redundant ring is limited only by the optical sensing range of the modules. • Segmentable RS485 interface (Sub-D connector) • Unlimited multimaster mode: Extended segmenting function for error localization on fiber-optic cable and RS 485 segments • Fast localization of faults: - indication of module status through isolated signaling contact. - inspection of the fiber-optic cable quality: Measuring output for optical receivers for logging and validity check of the FOC line attenuation with a voltmeter • High cascading depth:Lline and redundant ring up to 124 OLM (only limited by monitoring times)

Possible applications for OLMs include: • System buses based on PROFIBUS • Networking between buildings using glass fiber optic cable • Mixed networks with electrical and optical segments • Networks covering a wide area (road tunnels, traffic control systems) • Networks with high availability requirements (redundant ring networks)


4/83

4

PROFIBUS


■ Integration OLM

4

OLM

OLM

OLM

S7-400

S7-300

Drive

ET 200S

Fiber optic cable Bus cable for PROFIBUS

Example of a system configuration with OLM for PROFIBUS

4/84


G_IK10_XX_50059

PC with WinCC

PROFIBUS



■ Ordering data

Transmission rates

9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s 45.45 kbit/s (PROFIBUS PA)

Transit delay

6 bit times

Interfaces • Connection for bus segment station or OLM

9-pin Sub-D socket


5-pole pluggable terminal block with detent lugs

• Connection for FOC

2 or 4 BFOC sockets

• Measuring device connection

3 test sockets for test plugs, 2 mm diameter

Optical interfaces OLM/P11 and OLM/P12

Plastic optical fibers 980/1000 µm 230 dB/km

PCF optical fibers 200/230 µm 10 dB/km

• Length of fiber-optic path

0 to 80 m

0 to 400 m

Optical interfaces OLM/G11, OLM/G12 and OLM/G12-EEC

Optical glass fibers 62.5/125 µm 3.5 dB/km

Optical glass fibers 50/125 µm 3 dB/km

• Wavelength

860 nm

860 nm

• Launchable transmitter power

-13 dBm

-15 dBm

• Receiver sensitivity

-28 dBm

-28 dBm

• Permissible fiber-optic path attenuation (system reserve 3 dB)

12 dB

10 dB


0 to 3,000 m

0 to 3,000 m

Optical interfaces OLM/G11-1300 and OLM/G12-1300

Optical glass fibers 62.5/125 µm 1 dB/km

Optical glass fibers 10/125 µm 0.5 dB/km

• Wavelength

1310 nm

1310 nm

• Launchable transmitter power

-17 dBm

-19 dBm


-29 dBm

-29 dBm

• Permissible fiber-optic path attenuation (system reserve 3 dB)

10 dB

8 dB


0 to 10 km

0 to 15 km

Power supply

24 V DC (18 V to 30 V DC)


max. 200 mA

Power consumption

max. 6 W

Mounting

DIN rail or screwed cable glands

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature except OLM/G12-EEC

0 °C ... +60 °C

• OLM/G12-EEC

-20 °C ... +60 °C


-40 °C ... +70 °C


max. 95% at +25 °C


39.5 x 110 x 73.2

• Weight

approx. 500 g


IP40

Order No.

PROFIBUS OLM/P11 Optical link module with 1 x RS 485 and 1 x plastic FOC interface (2 BFOC sockets) with signaling contact and test port incl. 2 BFOC connectors for plastic FOC

6GK1 502-2CA10

PROFIBUS OLM/P12 Optical link module with 1 x RS 485 and 2 x plastic FOC interface (4 BFOC sockets) with signaling contact and test port incl. 4 BFOC connectors for plastic FOC

6GK1 502-3CA10

PROFIBUS OLM/G11 Optical link module with 1 x RS 485 and 1 x glass FOC interface (2 BFOC sockets) for standard distances with signaling contact and test port

6GK1 502-2CB10

PROFIBUS OLM/G12 Optical link module with 1 x RS 485 and 2 x glass FOC interface (4 BFOC sockets) for standard distances up to 3000 m with signaling contact and test port

6GK1 502-3CB10

PROFIBUS OLM/G12-EEC Optical link module with 1 x RS 485 and 2 x glass FOC interface (4 BFOC sockets) for standard distances up to 3000 m for extended temperature range –20 °C to +60 °C with signaling contact and test port

6GK1 502-3CD10

PROFIBUS OLM/G11-1300 Optical link module with 1 x RS 485 and 1 x glass FOC interface (2 BFOC sockets), 1300 nm wavelength for large distances up to 15 km, with signaling contact and test port

6GK1 502-2CC10

PROFIBUS OLM/G12-1300 Optical link module with 1 x RS 485 and 2 x glass FOC interface (4 BFOC sockets), 1300 nm wavelength for large distances up to 15 km, with signaling contact and test port

6GK1 502-3CC10

4

Manual for PROFIBUS networks Paper version Network architecture, project management, network components, mounting • German

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA1


6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0


4/85

PROFIBUS

Optical networks with OBT and integrated interface Plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables

■ Overview

■ Application SIMATIC NET plastic and PCF fiber-optic conductors are used to construct optical indoor PROFIBUS DP networks. Plastic fiber-optic cables and segmented PCF fiber-optic cables can be assembled easily on site with 2 x 2 simplex plugs. The maximum cable length between two DP devices is 50 m. Longer cable lengths up to 300 m can be achieved using PCF fiber-optic cables. These cables are also available preassembled with 4 simplex plugs. Devices that are equipped with an integral optical interface (simplex connection) include OBT, CP 342-5 FO, CP 5613 FO, CP 5614 FO, IM 153-2 FO and IM 467 FO.

4

■ Design

• Electrical isolation of DP devices • Protection of the transmission path against electromagnetic interference • Up to 50 m cable length with plastic fiber-optic cables and up to 300 m with PCF fiber-optic cables • Rugged fiber-optic standard cables, designed for industrial applications • Hybrid cable for the shared transmission of data and power supply • Extensive approvals (UL)

■ Benefits

• Plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables can be pre-assembled on site • Easy connector assembly on site • Time savings on start-up thanks to pre-assembled cables • Protection of the transmission path against electromagnetic interference • Tap-proof, because the cable does not radiate • A cable for the shared transmission of data and power

4/86


Different types of plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables are offered: • Plastic FOC, duplex core; Two flat cores with PVC inner sheath and without outer sheath for indoor applications with low mechanical stress such as laboratory setups or inside cabinets. Cable lengths up to 50 m. • Plastic FOC, standard cable; Rugged round cable with violet PVC outer sheath and Kevlar tension components as well as two plastic fibers with a rugged polyamide inner sheath. For indoor applications with cable lengths up to 50 m. • PCF fiber-optic cable, standard cables: - PCF Fiber Optic standard cable; rugged round cable with violet PVC outer sheath and Kevlar tension components for indoor applications with cable lengths of up to 300 m. The cable is not suitable for assembly in the field (only available pre-assembled with an insertion tool) - PCF Standard Cable GP (general purpose); rugged round cable with green PVC outer sheath and Kevlar tension elements for indoor and outdoor applications with cable lengths of up to 300 m; the cable is suitable for assembly in the field. • PCF fiber-optic trailing cable; Rugged round cable with green outer sheath and Kevlar tension elements for trailing cable applications with cable lengths of up to 300 m. The cable is suitable for assembly in the field. Two cable versions are available for this application: - PCF Trailing Cable; cable for high mechanical stress, PUR outer sheath, no UL approval - PCF Trailing Cable GP (general purpose); cable for low mechanical stress, PVC outer sheath, with UL approval

PROFIBUS


■ Technical specifications PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic Duplex Core

PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic Standard Cable

PROFIBUS PCF Fiber Optic Standard Cable

Fields of application

Indoor applications with low mechanical loading, such as laboratory setups or inside cabinets, with cable lengths up to 50 m


Pre-assembled cable for indoor applications with cable lengths up to 300 m; not suitable for connector assembly in the field.

Delivery format

Sold by the meter; for assembly on site with 2 x 2 simplex plugs

Sold by the meter; for assembly on site with 2 x 2 simplex plugs

Only preassembled with 2 x 2 simplex plugs


I-VY2P 980/1000 150A

I-VY4Y2P 980/1000 160A

I-VY2K 200/230 10A17+8B20

Fiber type

Step-index fiber

Step-index fiber

Step-index fiber


≤ 230 dB/km

≤ 230 dB/km

≤ 10 dB/km

Number of fibers

2

2

2

• Fiber core

Polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA)

Polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA)

Quartz glass

• Cladding





PVC, gray

PA, black or orange

–1)


–

PVC, violet

PVC, violet

• Strain relief

–

Kevlar fibers

Kevlar fibers


980 µm

980 µm

200 µm

• Outer diameter of cladding

1000 µm

1000 µm

230 µm


2.2 ± 0.01 mm Ø

2.2 ± 0.01 mm Ø

–


2.2 × 4.4 mm ± 0.01 mm

7.8 ± 0.3 mm Ø

4.7 ± 0.3 mm Ø

• Cable weight

7.8 kg/km

65 kg/km

22 kg/km

≤ 100 N Not suitable for continuous tensile load

≤ 500 N ≤ 100 N (only on strain relief, ≤ 50 N on plug or single core)

≥ 100 mm ≥ 150 mm

≥ 75 mm ≥ 75 mm

≤ 35 N/10 cm

≤ 1000 N/10 cm

≤ 750 N/10 cm

Limited Limited Not UV resistant

Limited Limited Limited

Limited Limited Limited


–30 ºC … +70 ºC

–30 ºC … +70 ºC

–20 ºC …+70 ºC


–35 ºC … +85 ºC

–30 ºC … +70 ºC

–30 ºC … +70 ºC

• Routing

0 ºC … +50 ºC

0 ºC … +50 ºC

-5 ºC … +50 ºC

Behavior in fire


IEC 60332-1


UL/CSA approvals

No

OFN-FT1 c(UL)us OFN (NEC Article 770, UL 1651)

No

UV-resistant

No

No

No

Halogen-free

No

No

No

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes

Yes

Cable type Core cross-section

Materials


• Maximum permissible tensile force - temporary ≤ 50 N - continuous Not suitable for continuous tensile load • Bending radius - once without tensile force ≥ 30 mm - more than once with tensile force ≥ 50 mm (only over flat side) • Resistance to lateral force per 10 cm cable length (temporary) • Resistance against - mineral oil ASTM No. 2 - mineral fat/water - UV radiation Perm. ambient conditions

1) Sold by the meter without inner sheath, not suitable for assembly in the field. Siemens IK PI · 2007

4/87

4

PROFIBUS



4

Cable type


PCF Trailing Cable


Fields of application




Delivery format

Sold by the meter

Sold by the meter

Sold by the meter


I-V(ZN)YY 2K200/230

AT-V(ZN)Y(ZN)11Y 2K200/230


Fiber type

Step index 200/230

Step index 200/230

Step index 200/230

10 dB/km

10 dB/km

10 dB/km

• at 650 nm

17 MHz * km

17 MHz * km

17 MHz * km

Number of fibers

2

2

2

• Fiber core

Quartz glass

Quartz glass

Quartz glass

• Cladding

Special polymer

Special polymer

Special polymer


PVC, orange/black

PVC, orange/black

PVC, orange/black


PVC, green

PUR, green

PVC, green

• Strain relief

Aramide fiber

Aramide fiber

Aramide fiber


200 µm

200 µm

200 µm

• Outer diameter of cladding

230 µm

230 µm

230 µm


2.2 mm diam.

2.2 mm diam.

2.2 mm diam.


7.2 mm

9 mm

9 mm

• Cable weight

45 kg/km

85 kg/km

85 kg/km

• Maximum permissible tensile force 100 N

800 N

800 N

• Bending radius

105 mm

200 mm

200 mm

• Bending cycles

–

5000000

>3500000

• Resistance to lateral force per 10 cm cable length (temporary)

100 N/cm

300 N/cm

300 N/cm

Limited resistance limited endurance/ Yes

Highly resistant highly resistant/ Yes

Limited resistance limited endurance/ Yes


-25 °C … 75 °C

-25 °C … 70 °C

-25 °C … 75 °C


-25 °C … 75 °C

-30 °C … 75 °C

-30 °C … 75 °C

• Routing

-5 °C … 50 °C

-5 °C … 50 °C

-5 °C … 50 °C

UL/CSA approvals


–


UV-resistant

Yes

Yes

Yes

No halogen

–

–

–

Silicone-free

Yes

Yes

Yes

Damping • at 650 nm Modal bandwidth

Materials


• Resistant to - mineral oil ASTM No. 2 - mineral fat/water - UV radiation Perm. ambient conditions

• In short-circuit on conductor Behavior in fire

4/88


PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data

Order No.

PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic, standard cable Rugged round cable with 2 plastic fiber-optic cores, PVC outer sheath and PA inner sheath, for indoor use; without connector • Sold by the meter

6XV1 821-0AH10

• 50 m ring

6XV1 821-0AN50

• 100 m ring

6XV1 821-0AT10

PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic, duplex core Plastic fiber-optic cable with 2 cores, PVC outer sheath, for use in environments with low mechanical stress; without connector • 50 m ring

6XV1 821-2AN50

PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic, simplex plug/polishing set 100 simplex connectors and 5 polishing sets for assembling PROFIBUS plastic fiber optic cables for the optical PROFIBUS DP

6GK1 901-0FB00-0AA0

PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic, stripping tool set Tools for removing the outer sheath or core sheath of Plastic Fiber Optic cables

6GK1 905-6PA10

PROFIBUS PCF Fiber Optic PCF fiber-optic cable with 2 cores, PVC outer sheath, for covering larger distances up to 300 m, for connecting devices to the optical PROFIBUS DP Preferred lengths Precut/preassembled with 2 × 2 Simplex connectors, arm length 30 cm each, with aid for pulling in at one end • 50 m

6XV1 821-1CN50

• 75 m

6XV1 821-1CN75

• 100 m

6XV1 821-1CT10

• 150 m

6XV1 821-1CT15

• 200 m

6XV1 821-1CT20

• 250 m

6XV1 821-1CT25

• 300 m

6XV1 821-1CT30

PROFIBUS PCF Standard Cable GP 200/230 Standard cable, segmentable, sold by the meter; max. quantity 2000 m; minimum order 20 m;

Order No. PROFIBUS PCF Trailing Cable 200/230 Trailing cable, segmentable, sold by the meter; max. quantity 2000 m; minimum order 20 m;

6XV1 861-2A

Preferred lengths; pre-assembled with 4 Simplex connectors • 50 m

6XV1 861-7AN50

• 75 m

6XV1 861-7AN75

• 100 m

6XV1 861-7AT10

• 150 m

6XV1 861-7AT15

• 200 m

6XV1 861-7AT20

• 250 m

6XV1 861-7AT25

• 300 m

6XV1 861-7AT30

6XV1 861-2C


6XV1 861-7CN50

• 75 m

6XV1 861-7CN75

• 100 m

6XV1 861-7CT10

• 150 m

6XV1 861-7CT15

• 200 m

6XV1 861-7CT20

• 250 m

6XV1 861-7CT25

• 300 m

6XV1 861-7CT30

PROFIBUS PCF Trailing Cable GP 200/230 Trailing cable, segmentable, sold by the meter; max. quantity 2000 m; minimum order 20 m;

6XV1 861-2D

4


6XV1 861-7DN50

• 75 m

6XV1 861-7DN75

• 100 m

6XV1 861-7DT10

• 150 m

6XV1 861-7DT15

• 200 m

6XV1 861-7DT20

• 250 m

6XV1 861-7DT25

• 300 m

6XV1 861-7DT30

Plug-in adapter For assembling the plastic Simplex connector in combination with IM 467 FO, CP 342-5 FO, IM 151 FO and IM 153-2 FO, 50 units

6ES7 195-1BE00-0XA0

Termination Kit for Simplex Plug Assembly case for local assembly of PCF Simplex connectors; comprising a stripping tool, buffer stripping tool, Kevlar cutters, fiber breaking tool, crimping tool and microscope

6GK1 900-0KL00-0AA0

Termination Kit for BFOC Plug Assembly case for local assembly of BFOC connectors; comprising a stripping tool, buffer stripping tool, Kevlar cutters, fiber breaking tool, and microscope

6GK1 900-0HL00-0AA0

Simplex Plug Crimp connector with cleaning materials; 50 connectors for assembly on PCF fiber-optic cables on site

6GK1 900-0KB00-0AC0

BFOC Plug Screw connector with cleaning materials; 20 connectors for assembly on PCF fiber-optic cables on site

6GK1 900-0HB00-0AC0


4/89

PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data

Order No.

Manual for PROFIBUS networks Paper version: Network architecture, project management, network components, mounting

4

You can order components supplementary to the SIMATIC NET cabling range from your local contact. Technical advice on this subject is available from:

• German

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA1


6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

4/90



J. Hertlein A&D SE PS Tel. +49 (0) 911/750 44 65 Fax. +49 (0) 911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]

PROFIBUS

Optical networks with OBT and integrated interface ECOFAST fiber optic hybrid cable

■ Overview


ECOFAST fiber optic hybrid cable (DESINA-compatible)

Core cross-section

• Electrical isolation of DP devices • Protection of the transmission path against electromagnetic interference • Up to 50 m cable length with plastic fiber-optic cable • Rugged fiber-optic cables, designed for industrial applications • Hybrid cable for the shared transmission of data and power supply

■ Benefits

• Savings in wiring, installation, commissioning and operation as result of standardized connection system (copper or fiberoptic) with high degree of protection (IP65) • With ECOFAST, the turnaround times for offers, planning and engineering of machines and plants can be reduced: • ECOFAST permits fast and problem-free startup of automation and drive systems • Minimization of sources of error by means of standardized interfaces and plug connectors. • With ECOFAST plants remain highly available: No interruption of power and field bus when replacing equipment.

■ Application The ECOFAST Fiber Optic Hybrid Cable of SIMATIC NET is used to construct optical PROFIBUS DP networks indoors. It is particularly suitable for connecting DESINA components installed at machine level, and is easy to assemble on site. The maximum cable length between two DP devices is 50 m.

Applications

DESINA-compatible devices, e.g. for ET 200X

Delivery format

Sold by the meter; can be assembled on site with DESINA plugs or preassembled with 2 DESINA plugs


J-V11Y 4Y2P980/1000 230A10 FFLIY 4 × 1.5

Fiber type

Step-index fiber


≤ 260 dB/km

Number of fibers

2 × FOC, 4 × copper

Materials • Fiber core • Cladding • Inner sheath/color • Outer sheath/color • Strain relief • Copper cores - rated voltage - current load - nominal area - sheath material/color

Polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA) Fluorinated special polymer PA, black, orange PUR, violet – 300 V 10 A 1.5 mm2 PVC, black

Mechanical characteristics • Diameter of fiber core

980 µm


1000 µm


2.2 ± 0.01 mm Ø


10.6 mm Ø

• Cable weight

135 kg/km

• Maximum permissible tensile force - temporary - constant

≤ 100 N ≤ 30 N

• Bending radius - once without tensile force – - more than once with tensile force ≥ 106 mm • Resistance to lateral force per 10 cm cable length (temporary)

≤ 100 N/10 cm

• Resistance against - mineral oil ASTM No. 2 - mineral grease/water - UV radiation

Limited Limited No

The rugged, hybrid trailing cable contains two plastic fiber-optic cables for data transmission and four copper wires (1.5 mm2) for supplying power to DESINA1) stations.

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature • Transport/storage temperature • Routing • In short-circuit on conductor

+5 ºC … +70 ºC –30 ºC … +70 ºC +5 ºC … +70 ºC +160 °C (max. 5 sec)

1) DESINA is the trademark for DEcentralized and Standardized INstallAtion technology for machine tools.

Behavior in fire

Flame retardant in acc. with the VW-1 flame test to UL 1581

UL/CSA approvals

No

UV-resistant

No

Halogen-free

No

Silicone-free

Yes

■ Design


4/91

4

PROFIBUS

Optical networks with OBT and integrated interface ECOFAST fiber optic hybrid cable

■ Ordering data ECOFAST fiber optic hybrid cable (DESINA-compatible) Trailing cable with 2 plastic fiberoptic conductors and 4 copper cores, 1.5 mm2 for use in DESINA-compatible devices only Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

Order No.

You can order components supplementary to the SIMATIC NET cabling range from your local contact. Technical advice on this subject is available from:

6XV1 830-6CH10

Not pre-assembled

4

• 20 m

6XV1 830-6CN20

• 50 m

6XV1 830-6CN50

• 100 m

6XV1 830-6CT10

Preassembled with 2 DESINA connectors • 1.5 m

6XV1 830-6DH15

•3m

6XV1 830-6DH30

•5m

6XV1 830-6DH50

• 10 m

6XV1 830-6DN10

• 15 m

6XV1 830-6DN15

ECOFAST Fiber Optic Hybrid Plug 180, DESINA-compatible (ECOFAST FOC) 2 x FO; 4 x 1.5 mm2 Cu • With male pins (Hanbrid connector) • With female pins (Hanbrid connector)

6GK1 905-0BA00 6GK1 905-0BB00

Manual for PROFIBUS networks Paper version: Network architecture, project management, network components, mounting • German

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA1


6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

4/92



J. Hertlein A&D SE PS Tel. +49 (0) 911/750 44 65 Fax. +49 (0) 911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]

PROFIBUS

Optical networks with OBT and integrated interface PCF FOC termination kits

■ Overview


Supporting element

Fleece material taping Single core sheath with strain relief elements Polymer-cladded fiber

• Compact, rugged assembly case for PCF fiber-optic cables • Special versions for easy assembly of HP Simplex and BFOC plugs on PCF fiber-optic cables • The quality of the assembly can be checked using the enclosed microscope

■ Benefits

• Easy installation of the unassembled cables in industrial plants • Flexible assembly of connectors on PCF fiber-optic cables on site (HP Simplex, BFOC connectors) • Mistakes are prevented with easy visual inspection of the assembled connector on site using a microscope • PCF fiber-optic cables are easily repaired on site by installing a new PCF cable

■ Application SIMATIC NET PCF fiber-optic conductors are used to construct optical indoor and outdoor PROFIBUS DP networks. They are easily assembled on site with 2 x 2 Simplex connectors or 2 x 2 BFOC connectors. The maximum cable length between two DP devices is 300 m, and between two OLMs it is 400 m. PROFIBUS DP devices that are equipped with an integral optical interface (Simplex connection) include OBT, CP 342-5 FO, CP 5613 FO, CP 5614 FO, IM 153-2 FO and IM 467 FO.

G_IK PI_XX_10031

Strain relief through aramid fibers

Two types of assembly cases for PCF fiber-optic cables are offered: • Assembly case for HP Simplex connectors; for local assembly of HP Simplex connectors; comprising a stripping tool, buffer stripping tool, Kevlar cutters, fiber breaking tool, crimping tool and microscope • Assembly case for BFOC connectors; for local assembly of BFOC connectors; comprising a stripping tool, buffer stripping tool, Kevlar cutters, fiber breaking tool, and microscope.

■ Ordering data

Order No.

Termination Kit for Simplex connectors Assembly case for local assembly of PCF Simplex connectors; comprising a stripping tool, buffer stripping tool, Kevlar cutters, fiber breaking tool, crimping tool and microscope

6GK1 900-0KL00-0AA0

Termination Kit for BFOC connectors Assembly case for local assembly of BFOC connectors; comprising a stripping tool, buffer stripping tool, Kevlar cutters, fiber breaking tool, and microscope

6GK1 900-0HL00-0AA0

Connector Simplex connector with cleaning materials; 50 crimp connectors for assembly on PCF fiber-optic cables on site

6GK1 900-0KB00-0AC0

BFOC connector with cleaning materials; 20 screw connectors for assembly on PCF fiber-optic cables on site

6GK1 900-0HB00-0AC0

■ More information You can order components supplementary to the SIMATIC NET cabling range from your local contact. For technical support, please contact: J. Hertlein A&D SE V22 Tel. +49 (0) 911/750 44 65 Fax. +49 (0) 911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]


4/93

4

PROFIBUS

Optical networks with OBT and integrated interface Optical Bus Terminal OBT

■ Overview

■ Application The OBT (Optical Bus Terminal) is used to connect a PROFIBUS station without integral optical interface or a PROFIBUS DP RS 485 segment to an optical line. Existing DP devices are then provided with the advantages of optical data transmission. The PROFIBUS station is connected to the RS 485 interface of the OBT via a cable terminated at both ends, e.g. connecting cable 830-1T. The OBT is integrated into the optical line using two optical interfaces. The following optical transmission media can be connected to the OBT: • Plastic fiber-optic cables can be used up to an individual segment length of 50 m. They can be configured very easily on site with 2 x 2 Simplex connectors. • PCF1) fiber-optic cables can be used for an individual segment length up to 300 m. These cables are preassembled. The OBT supports all PROFIBUS data transmission rates up to 12 Mbit/s.

4 • For connecting a PROFIBUS station without an integrated fiber-optic cable interface or an RS 485 segment to an optical line • Quick and easy installation of the plastic fiber-optic cable without the need for special tools

■ Benefits

• Option of connecting existing devices or an RS 485 segment with electrical interface to the optical PROFIBUS • "Socket outlet" for connecting mobile devices (e.g. programming devices) without interruption of the bus • Time saved through simple and fast connector mounting without special tools

1) Also known as HCS® fiber-optic cable: HCS® is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies.

■ Design The OBT has compact plastic housing. Two tapped holes make it suitable for installation on standard DIN rails as well as for wall mounting. The OBT has the following interfaces: • 9-pin Sub-D connector for connecting the PROFIBUS DP station such as programming device, PC, Operator Panel (OP), S7-300 or station without integrated optics, e.g. ET 200S or PROFIBUS DP components from other manufacturers or an RS 485 segment • Two optical interfaces for connecting plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables with simplex connectors (connection to CP 342-5 FO, CP 5613 FO, CP 5614 FO, IM 153-2 FO, IM 467 FO or to ET 200 with integrated optics) • 24 V DC power supply.

■ Function • Connection of a station with RS 485 interface via 830-1T connecting cable or PROFIBUS cable with bus connectors (terminated at both ends) or an RS 485 segment • Provision of an electrical connection point on the optical line (e.g. PG connection for startup and diagnostics). • Support for all PROFIBUS data rates from 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s including 45.45 kbit/s for PROFIBUS PA • Regeneration of the signals in amplitude and time • Cascade depth when using user-defined bus parameters up to 126 stations • Galvanic isolation of the station via fiber optic cable • Simple diagnostics via LED display for operating voltage as well as for receipt of data CH1, CH2 and CH3.

4/94


PROFIBUS

Optical networks with OBT and integrated interface Optical Bus Terminal OBT

■ Integration PG/PC/OP with 5613 FO

ET 200S with IM 151 FO

S7-300 with CP 342-5 FO

ET 200M with IM 153-2 FO

DP node without integral optics

OBT

830-1T connecting cable

Other nodes

Single connection lengths: plastic to 50 m, PCF to 300 m

G_IK10_XX_50107

4

System configuration of optical PROFIBUS DP with PROFIBUS OBT

■ Technical specifications Data transmission rates

■ Ordering data 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s 45.45 kbit/s (PROFIBUS PA)

Interfaces

PROFIBUS OBT Optical bus terminal for connecting a PROFIBUS station or an RS 485 segment without integrated optical interface to the optical PROFIBUS; without simplex connector


• Connection for DP stations or a RS 485 segment


• Connection for power supply

2-pin terminal

• Connection for FOC

2 duplex sockets

Optical interfaces:

Plastic fiber optic cable 980/1000 µm

PCF fiber-optic cable 200/230 µm

830-1T PROFIBUS connecting cable For data terminal connection, completely preassembled with 2 Sub-D plugs, 9-pin

• Wavelength

640 … 660 nm

640 … 660 nm

• 1.5 m

6XV1 830-1CH15 6XV1 830-1CH30

• Transmitter power

-5.9 dBm

-16 dB

•3m


-20 dBm

-22 dBm

• Permissible FO path attenuation

13 dB

3 dB

Supply voltage

24 V DC (18 … 30 V DC)



max. 200 mA

• German

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA0

Power loss

6W

• English

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA1

Assembly

Standard DIN rail or wall mounting

SIMATIC NET manual collection Electronic manuals and communication systems, protocols, products on CD-ROM German/English

6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

Perm. environmental conditions • Operating temperature

0 ºC … +60 ºC


-40 ºC … +70 ºC


max. 95% to +25 ºC


50.5 x 138 x 78

• Weight

approx. 400 g


IP30


4/95

PROFIBUS

Wireless Link

Infrared Link Module ILM

■ Overview

■ Application • Wireless transmission from PROFIBUS at close range ( ≤ 15 m) • For coupling individual stations in a segment or coupling two segments • Communication with moving stations, e.g. automatically guided vehicles • Communication with alternating stations, e.g. stations along conveyor belts and production lines • Fast installation of plants and temporary configurations, e.g. test setups • Replacement of systems subject to wear, e.g. sliprings or slipconductors • At a distance of 11 m from an ILM, the signal permeates a circle of 4 m in diameter.

4

■ Design • Wireless PROFIBUS link for all protocols • Rugged design with degree of protection IP65 • 15 m range at transmission rates up to 1.5 Mbit/s.

■ Benefits

• Mounting without adjusting tools thanks to large radiation angle • Replacement of worn systems (slip rings or conductors) is possible • Fast and easy module replacement in the event of a fault due to permanent wiring

• Robust die-cast aluminium housing in degree of protection IP65 • 2 x 2-pin terminal block in housing (with cable connection through heavy gauge threaded joint) for connecting PROFIBUS segment • 4-pin terminal block in housing (with cable connection through heavy gauge threaded joint) for connecting the power supply (24 V DC) and signal contact • Permanent wiring, i.e. simple and fast replacement of electronics in the case of a fault • Status display for operating states through LEDs • Setting of data transmission rate through interior switch • Protection from irritating ambient lighting through integral daylight filter • Easy alignment due to area coverage (± 10°solid angle)

■ Function • Permits wireless connection to any PROFIBUS slaves within a range of 15 m • Communication with several slaves at a distance from the master • Transmission interruptions are detected and indicated through LED and signaling contact • A reduction in transmission quality is indicated by an LED and signal contact before the data transmission is aborted • The infrared link module (ILM) can be used in daylight thanks to an integrated filter which protects against stray lighting. When mounting the Infrared Link Module, make sure that there is an uninterruptible visible connection between the modules • When using several ILM transmission lines mutual influencing of the lines must be ruled out by the constructional design and by observing minimum distances.

4/96


PROFIBUS

Wireless Link

Infrared Link Module ILM

■ Integration Master, e.g. PLC

Master, e.g. PLC

Master, e.g. PLC

Slave e.g. ET 200

Slave e.g. ET 200

Slave e.g. ET 200

ILM

ILM

ILM

4 ILM

ILM

ILM

ILM

FTS

Slave e.g. S7-300

Slave e.g. ET 200

1

Slave e.g. ET 200S

Connection to mobile nodes

Connection to mobile nodes

Connection of two segments

G_IK10_XX_50028

0

System configuration of ILM

■ Technical specifications Data transmission rate Interfaces • 2 connections for bus segments

■ Ordering data 9.6 kbit/s … 1.5 Mbit/s

PROFIBUS ILM Infrared link module for connecting PROFIBUS stations and segments without the need for wires



2 x 2-pole terminal block in the housing 4-pole terminal block in the housing

Current consumption

max. 300 mA

Supply voltage

24 V DC


Power loss

7.5 W

• German

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA0

Assembly

2 tapped holes

• English

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA1


IP65

6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

IR wavelength

880 nm

Minimum range

0.5 m

Maximum range

15 m



0 °C … +60 °C -40 °C … +70 °C max. 95% at +25 °C


175 x 80 x 57 approx. 800 g


4/97

PROFIBUS

System interfacing for SIMATIC General information

■ Overview CPs with standard functions • CP 342-5 and CP 343-5 for SIMATIC S7-300 for connection to PROFIBUS DP and PROFIBUS FMS • CP 443-5 Basic, CP 443-5 Extended and IM 467 for SIMATIC S7-400 for connection to PROFIBUS FMS and PROFIBUS DP • Designed for use in harsh industrial environments • Shipbuilding certification for use on ships and offshore units • High-speed data transfer even with large volumes of data (10/100 Mbit/s)

S7-400

S7-300

4

CPs with function expansions • CP 342-5 FO with integral optical interface for connecting the SIMATIC S7-300 to the optical PROFIBUS DP • IM 467 FO with integral optical interface for connecting the SIMATIC S7-400 to the optical PROFIBUS DP

SIMATIC S7-300/S7-400

STEP 7 with NCM S7

CP 342-5/ CP 342-5 FO/ CP 343-5

CP 443-5 Basic/ CP 443-5 Extended

IM 467/ IM 467 FO

For the protocols DP PG/OP communication S7 communication S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) FMS

Multi-protocol: All protocols of a CP can be operated simultaneously Several CPs can be operated in one S7-300 or S7-400 1) Only in the case of CP 443-5 Extended

System connections for SIMATIC

4/98


G_IK10_XX_50185

Time synchronization 1)

PROFIBUS

System interfacing for SIMATIC CP 342-5

■ Overview

■ Application The CP 342-5 communications processor is the communications module of SIMATIC S7-300, and SIMATIC C7 for the bus system PROFIBUS DP. The CP 342-5 relieves the CPU from communication tasks. Communication possibilities of the S7-300 using communication modules: • As DP master or slave for PROFIBUS DP according to IEC 61158/EN 50170 • Communication with programming devices and HMI devices • Communication with other SIMATIC S7 systems • Communication with SIMATIC S5 programmable controllers The number of CPs that can be used is dependent on the performance range of the CPU and on the communications services used.

■ Design DP-M

DP-S

PG

S7

S5

FMS

• PROFIBUS DP master or slave with electrical interface for connecting the SIMATIC S7-300 and the SIMATIC C7 to PROFIBUS at up to 12 Mbit/s (including 45.45 kbit/s) • Communication services: - PROFIBUS DP-V0 - PG/OP communication (OP multiplexing) - S7 communication (client, server) - S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) • Easy configuration and programming over PROFIBUS • Cross-network programming device communication through S7 routing • Modules can be replaced without the need for a PG

■ Benefits

The CP 342-5 offers all the advantages of SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact design; single standard width of the SM modules of the SIMATIC S7-300 • 9-pin Sub-D socket for connection to PROFIBUS • 4-pin terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • Simple assembly; the CP 342-5 is mounted on the S7-300 DIN rail and connected to adjacent modules by means of the bus connectors. Slots 4 to 11 in subracks 0 to 3 (coupled through the IM 360/361) can be used for the CP 342-5 • In combination with IM 360/361, the CP 342-5 can also be used in an expansion rack (ER) • User-friendly wiring; Sub-D socket and the terminal block are easily accessible. • The CP 324-5 can be operated without a fan; a back-up battery or a memory module is not required

• Expansion of the process I/O at SIMATIC S7-300 by several PROFIBUS DP interfaces • Flexible utilization of the process I/O through dynamic activation of DP slaves • Subprocess-oriented configuration of an automation solution by implementing several CPs • Optimization of applications and many application options through sending of data with S7 communication • Comprehensive control and monitoring through multiplex function with OP communication • Suitable for closed loop control tasks due to SYNC and FREEZE.


4/99

4

PROFIBUS


■ Function The CP 342-5 provides access to different communication services of the PROFIBUS bus system: • PROFIBUS DP (acc. to IEC 61158/EN 50 170, master or slave) • PG/OP communication • S7 communication • S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE). PROFIBUS DP master

4

The CP 342-5 operates as a DP-V0 master according to IEC 61158/EN 50 170, Volume 2, and processes the data transfer completely autonomously. It supports the services of Master Classes 1 and 2. The data areas of the distributed I/Os are transferred consistently between the CP and the CPU. This is the case whether the CP is used as a DP master or as a DP slave. As a DP master it can be connected to: • SIMATIC S7-300, e.g. CP 342-5 as DP slave • DP slaves of the central ET 200 I/O station (integrated as DP-V0 slave). The CP 342-5 also offers the functions SYNC, FREEZE, Shared Input/Output as well as the activation/deactivation of DP slaves. PROFIBUS DP slave With the CP 342-5 as a DP-V0 slave, the S7-300 can exchange data with other PROFIBUS masters. This supports a mixed configuration of SIMATIC S5/S7, PCs, ET 200 and other field devices to PROFIBUS DP. For DP communication, function calls are necessary. These function calls (DP-SEND/DP-RECV) must be integrated into the STEP 7 user program. PG/OP communication PG/OP communication allows all S7 stations connected to the network to be remotely programmed. • S7 routing Using S7 routing it is possible to use programming device communication across networks. Using the CP 342-5, up to 16 text displays and operator panels can be combined on one S7-300 station. Only one connection resource is required in the S7 CPU (multiplex channel). Over the multiplex channel, the acyclic HMI services are supported. S7 communication S7 communication is used for the coupling: • between SIMATIC S7 programmable controllers • to HMI devices (OPs) • to PCs, e.g. with CP 5613 or CP 5511/CP 5512/CP 5611 and S7 OPC server. Communication with the PG and OP is performed without the need for any additional configuration. Furthermore, the central controller can also be programmed and configured decentrally over the CP 342-5. The client functionality is made available through loadable communication modules.

4/100


S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) Based on Layer 2 (FDL) of PROFIBUS, the CP 342-5 offers a simple, optimized interface for process or field communication. This interface offers uniform, high-performance communication between SIMATIC S5, SIMATIC S7, SIMATIC 505 and PC. In addition to the SDA service (PLC/PLC connections), SEND/RECEIVE also provides the SDN service (Broadcast, Multicast). The communication partners are the programmable controllers: • SIMATIC S7 with CP 342-5, CP 343-5, CP 443-5 • SIMATIC S5 with S5-95U with PROFIBUS interface, S5-115U/H, S5-135U, S5-155U/H with CP 5431 FMS/DP • SIMATIC 505 with CP 5434-FMS • PCs with CP 5511, CP 5512, CP 5611, CP 5613, CP 5614 • Non-Siemens systems that are equipped with an FDL interface. To use SEND/RECEIVE, function calls are required (PLCSEND/PLC-RECEIVE), which must be integrated into the STEP 7 user program. Diagnostics Extensive diagnostic options are available via STEP S7, including: • Status of the CP • General diagnostics and statistics functions • Connection diagnostics • Bus statistics • Message buffer STEP 7 is required for configuring the CP 342-5. In STEP 7 Version V5 and higher, the configuring data of the CPs can also be stored on the CPU in which case they are retained following supply failure. A module can therefore by replaced without having to reload the configuration data from a programming device. The CPU transfers the configuration data to the CP during startup. Attention should therefore be paid to the memory capacity of the S7-CPU. Configuration and programming of all SIMATIC S7 controllers connected to the network is possible over the network. The function blocks for PROFIBUS DP are included in the standard library of STEP 7. The function blocks for using S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) and S7 communication (S7 client) can be found in the SIMATIC NET library following installation of STEP 7.

PROFIBUS



■ Ordering data 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s

Interfaces • Connection to PROFIBUS

9-pin Sub-D socket (RS 485)

• Connection to supply voltage

4-pin terminal block

Voltage supply

24 V DC

Current consumption • from the backplane bus

150 mA

• from 24 V

250 mA

Power loss

6.75 W


0 °C … +60 °C


-40 °C … +70 °C


max. 95% at +25°C


Compact module


40 x 125 x 120

• Weight

approx. 300 g

Number of CPs per S7-300

4

Performance data S7 communication • Number of connections that can be used

max. 16

S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) • Number of connections that can be used

max. 16

• Useful data / connection

max. 240 byte (SEND and RECEIVE)

Multi-protocol operation

Order No.

CP 342-5 communications processor Communications processor for electrical connection of SIMATIC S7-300 to PROFIBUS to 12 Mbit/s with electronic manual on CD-ROM

6GK7 342-5DA02-0XE0

NCM S7 configuration software for PROFIBUS Configuration software for PROFIBUS CPs for SIMATIC S7 • V5.1 and newer executable under STEP 7 V5.1; with electronic manual on CD-ROM English, French, German, Italian and Spanish

Delivered with STEP 7 Version 5

4

"NCM S7 for PROFIBUS" manual Paper version for V5.x (STEP 7 V5.x) • German

6GK7 080-5AA04-8AA0

• English

6GK7 080-5AA04-8BA0

• French

6GK7 080-5AA04-8CA0

• Spanish

6GK7 080-5AA04-8DA0

• Italian

6GK7 080-5AA04-8EA0

PROFIBUS FastConnect RS 485 bus connector With 90° cable outlet; With insulation displacement method, max. data transmission rate 12 Mbit/s • without PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0


6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0

• Number of connections that can be used

max. 32 (without DP); max. 28 (with DP)

PROFIBUS bus connector IP20 For connection to PPI, MPI, PROFIBUS

• Volume of DP data per connected DP slave

max. 240 byte


6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0


6ES7 972-0BB12-0XA0

PROFIBUS 12M bus terminal Bus terminal for connecting PROFIBUS stations up to 12 Mbit/s with connecting cable

6GK1 500-0AA10

SIMATIC S7-300 DM 370 Dummy module; used during module replacement

6ES7 370-0AA01-0AA0

DP master function • DP master

DP-V0

• Number of operable DP slaves

124

• Size of DP data areas overall - DP input area - DP output range

2160 byte 2160 byte

• Size of DP data areas per connected slave - DP input area - DP output range

244 byte 244 byte

DP slave function • DP slave • Size of DP data areas overall - DP input area - DP output range

DP-V0 240 byte 240 byte

"Communication with SIMATIC" manual • German

6ES7 398-8EA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8EA00-8BA0

• French

6ES7 398-8EA00-8CA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8EA00-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8EA00-8EA0


16


4/101

PROFIBUS

System interfacing for SIMATIC CP 342-5 FO

■ Overview

■ Benefits

4 DP-M

DP-S

PG

S7

S5

FMS

• The fiber-optic technology is used when - the environment is subject to strong EMC interference, - strong potential differences exist and - high transmission rates are required. • The CP 342-5 FO is connected directly to the optical PROFIBUS and is therefore specially suited to harsh industrial environments • Expansion of the process I/O at SIMATIC S7-300 by several PROFIBUS DP interfaces • Optimization of applications and many application options through sending of data with S7 communication • Comprehensive control and monitoring through multiplex function with OP communication • Suitable for closed loop control tasks due to SYNC and FREEZE.

■ Application • PROFIBUS DP master or slave with optical interface for connecting the SIMATIC S7-300 and the SIMATIC C7 to PROFIBUS at up to 12 Mbit/s (including 45.45 kbit/s) • Direct connection to the optical PROFIBUS network over the integrated fiber-optic interface for plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables • Communication services: - PROFIBUS DP-V0 - PG/OP communication (OP multiplexing) - S7 communication (client, server) - S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) • Easy configuration and programming over PROFIBUS • Cross-network programming device communication through S7 routing • Modules can be replaced without the need for a PG

The communications processor CP 342-5 FO is the communications module of SIMATIC S7-300 and SIMATIC C7 for the optical bus system PROFIBUS DP. The CP 342-5 FO is equipped with a fiber-optic interface that enables noise resistant connections in environments subjected to strong electromagnetic fields. It relieves the CPU of communication tasks. Communication of SIMATIC S7-300 and SIMATIC C7 with: • ET 200 distributed I/O station with integral optical interface • SIMATIC S7-400 with IM 467 FO and CP 342-5 FO • PC with CP 5613 FO/5614 FO • Other PROFIBUS nodes over the optical bus terminal (OBT) The number of CPs that can be used is dependent on the performance range of the CPU and on the communications services used.

■ Design The CP 342-5 FO offers all the advantages of SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact design; single standard width of the SM modules of the SIMATIC S7-300 • Integrated fiber-optic cable interface; 2 female duplex connectors for direct connection to the optical PROFIBUS over 2 x 2 male simplex connectors and 2 plug-in adapters • 4-pin terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • Easy installation; the CP 342-5 FO is snap-mounted on the S7-300 DIN rail and connected to adjacent modules through the bus connectors. There are no slot rules. • In combination with IM 360/361, the CP 342-5 FO can also be used in an expansion rack (ER). • User-friendly wiring; female FOC connector and the terminal block are easily accessible. • The CP 342-5 FO can be operated without a fan; a back-up battery or a memory module are not required.

4/102


PROFIBUS


■ Function The CP 342-5 FO provides access to different communication services of the PROFIBUS bus system: • PROFIBUS DP (acc. to IEC 61 158/EN 50 170, master or slave) • PG/OP communication • S7 communication • S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE).


PROFIBUS DP master

The communication partners are the programmable controllers: • SIMATIC S7 with CP 342-5, CP 343-5, CP 443-5 • SIMATIC S5 with S5-95U with PROFIBUS interface, S5-115U/H, S5-135U, S5-155U/H with CP 5431 FMS/DP • SIMATIC 505 with CP 5434-FMS • PCs with CP 5511, CP 5512, CP 5611, CP 5613 FO, CP 5614 FO • Non-Siemens systems that are equipped with an FDL interface.

The CP 342-5 FO operates as a DP-V0 master according to IEC 61,158/EN 50 170, Volume 2, and processes the data transfer completely autonomously. It supports the services of Master Classes 1 and 2. The data areas of the distributed I/Os are transferred consistently between the CP and the CPU. This is the case whether the CP is used as a DP master or as a DP slave. As a DP master it can be connected to: • The ET 200 distributed I/O station with integral optical interface (integrate as DP-V0 slave) • SIMATIC S7-300 with CP 342-5 FO as slave • PC with CP 5614 FO as slave • The other DP-V0 slaves over the optical bus terminal (OBT). The CP 342-5 FO also offers the functions SYNC, FREEZE, Shared Input/Output as well as the activation/deactivation of DP slaves. PROFIBUS DP slave The CP 342-5 FO as DP-V0 slave supports data communication from SIMATIC S7-300 to SIMATIC S7-400 over the IM 467 FO and with the other DP masters over the OBT. This supports a mixed configuration of SIMATIC S5/S7, PCs, ET 200 and other field devices to PROFIBUS DP. For DP communication, both as master and as slave, function calls are required. These function calls (DP-SEND/DP-RECV) are supplied with STEP 7 and must be integrated into the user program. PG/OP communication PG/OP communication allows all S7 stations connected to the network to be remotely programmed. • S7 routing: with the aid of S7 routing it is possible to use programming device communication across networks. Using the CP 342-5 FO, up to 16 text displays and operator panels can be combined on one S7-300 station. Only one connection resource is required in the S7 CPU (multiplex channel). Over the multiplex channel, the acyclic HMI services are supported. S7 communication

Based on Layer 2 (FDL) of PROFIBUS (IEC 61 158/EN 50170), the CP 342-5 FO offers a simple, optimized interface for process or field communication. This interface offers uniform, high-performance communication between SIMATIC S5, SIMATIC S7, SIMATIC 505 and PC. In addition to the SDA service (PLC-to-PLC links), SEND/RECEIVE also provides the SDN service (Broadcast, Multicast).

To use SEND/RECEIVE, function calls are required (PLC-SEND/ PLC-RECEIVE), which must be integrated into the STEP 7 user program. Diagnostics Extensive diagnostic options are available via STEP 7, including: • Status of the CP • General diagnostics and statistics functions • Connection diagnostics • Bus statistics • Message buffer STEP 7 is required for configuring the CP 342-5. In STEP 7 Version V5 and higher, the configuring data of the CPs can also be stored on the CPU in which case they are retained following supply failure. A module can therefore by replaced without having to reload the configuration data from a programming device. The CPU transfers the configuration data to the CP during startup. Attention should therefore be paid to the memory capacity of the S7-CPU. Configuration and programming of all SIMATIC S7 controllers connected to the network is possible over the network. The function blocks for PROFIBUS DP are included in the standard library of STEP 7. The function blocks for using S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) and S7 communication (S7 client) can be found in the SIMATIC NET library following installation of STEP 7.

S7 communication is used for the coupling • between SIMATIC S7 programmable controllers • to HMI devices (OPs) • to PCs, e.g. with CP 5613 or CP 5511/CP 5512/CP 5611 and S7 OPC server. Communication with the PG and OP is performed without the need for any additional configuration. Furthermore, the central controller can also be programmed and configured decentrally over the CP 342-5 FO. The client functionality is made available through loadable communication modules.


4/103

4

PROFIBUS


■ Function (continued) PG/PC with CP 5613 FO

S7-300 with CP 342-5 FO

ET 200M with IM 153-2 FO

DP nodes without integral optics

OBT

830-1T connecting cable

4 Other nodes Optical linear bus Single connection lengths: plastic to 50 m, PCF to 300 m

DESINA cable ET 200S with IM 151 FO

ET 200X with integral optics

G_IK10_XX_50138

S7-400 with IM 467 FO

System configuration of optical PROFIBUS DP with CP 342-5 FO

4/104


PROFIBUS



■ Ordering data 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s (exception: 3 and 6 Mbit/s)


2 x duplex socket



Voltage supply

24 V DC


150 mA

• from 24 V DC

250 mA

Power loss

6.75 W

Maximum distance between two neighboring stations • Plastic fiber optic cables

max. 50 m

• PCF fiber optic cable

max. 300 m

Order No.

CP 342-5 FO communications processor Communications processor for optical connection of SIMATIC S7-300 to PROFIBUS up to 12 Mbit/s with electronic manual on CD-ROM

6GK7 342-5DF00-0XE0

NCM S7 configuration software for PROFIBUS Configuration software for PROFIBUS CPs for SIMATIC S7 V5.1 and newer executable under STEP 7 V5.1; including Service Pack 3; with electronic manual on CD-ROM English, French, German, Italian and Spanish


4


0 °C … +60 °C


-40 °C … +70 °C

"NCM S7 for PROFIBUS" manual Paper version for V5.x (STEP 7 V5.x)


max. 95% at +25°C

• German

6GK7 080-5AA04-8AA0

Construction

• English

6GK7 080-5AA04-8BA0

• Module format

Compact module

• French

6GK7 080-5AA04-8CA0


40 x 125 x 120

• Spanish

6GK7 080-5AA04-8DA0

• Weight

approx. 300 g

• Italian

6GK7 080-5AA04-8EA0

4

Manual for PROFIBUS networks Paper version Network architecture, components (OLM (V3), OBT, ILM), configuration and assembly


• Number of CPs per S7-300 Performance data S7 communication • Number of connections that can be used

max. 16


max. 16


max. 240 byte (Send and Receive)

Multi-protocol operation • Number of connections that can be used

32 (without DP); max. 28 (with DP)

DP master function • DP master

DP-V0


124


2160 byte 2160 byte

• Size of DP data areas per connected slave - DP input area - DP output range

244 byte 244 byte

• Volume of DP data per connected DP slave

• German

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA1

PROFIBUS plastic fiber-optic, simplex plug/polishing set 100 simplex plugs and 5 polishing kits for assembling PROFIBUS plastic fiber-optic cables for the optical PROFIBUS DP

6GK1 901-0FB00-0AA0

PROFIBUS plastic fiber-optic, stripping tool set Tools for stripping the outer casing and core casing of PROFIBUS plastic fiber-optic cables

6GK1 905-6PA10

Connection adapters For installation of the plastic simplex plug in connection with CP 342-5 FO, IM 467 FO, IM 153-2 FO and IM 151 FO 50 pcs.

6ES7 195-1BE00-0XA0

max. 240 byte

DP slave function • DP slave

DP-V0


240 byte 240 byte


16


4/105

PROFIBUS


■ Overview

■ Benefits

• Easy integration of SIMATIC S7 in a vendor-independent automation network using PROFIBUS FMS • The user requires little knowledge of the PROFIBUS FMS specification due to simple configuration and autonomous data conversion on the CP • Subprocess-oriented configuration of an automation solution by implementing several CPs • Integration of SIMATIC S7-300 in existing installations due to S5-compatible communication • Universal applications for the CP through using different communications services in parallel on one CP

4

■ Application DP-M

DP-S

PG

S7

S5

FMS

The CP 343-5 communications processor is the module required for SIMATIC S7-300 and SIMATIC C7 for the PROFIBUS bus system. It offloads communication tasks from the CPU.

Connection of SIMATIC S7-300 and SIMATIC C7 to PROFIBUS at up to 12 Mbit/s (including 45.45 kbit/s) • Communication services: - PG/OP communication - S7 communication - S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) - PROFIBUS FMS • Easy configuration and programming over PROFIBUS • Can be easily integrated into the S7-300 system • Cross-network programming device communication through S7 routing • Modules can be replaced without the need for a PG

4/106


S7-300 communication options using communication modules: • FMS communication with PROFIBUS FMS stations through PROFIBUS • Communication with programming devices, human machine interface devices • Communication with other SIMATIC S7 systems • Communication with SIMATIC S5 PLCs • The number of CPs that can be operated depends on the performance range of the CPU and the communication services used.

■ Design The CP 343-5 offers all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact design; single standard width of the SM modules of the SIMATIC S7-300 • If the adjacent modules do not join correctly when predecessor modules are exchanged, a space holder module must be installed. • 9-pin Sub-D connector for bus connection to PROFIBUS • 4-pin terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • Simple connection; the CP 343-5 is snap-mounted on the S7-300 DIN rail and connected to adjacent modules through the bus connectors. The slots 4 to 11 in the subracks 0 to 3 (coupled through IM 360/361) are permissible for the CP 343-5. • In conjunction with the IM 360/361, the CP 343-5 can also be operated in the expansion rack (ER). • User-friendly wiring: Sub-D connector and terminal are easily accessible • The CP 323-5 can be operated without a fan. Neither a backup battery nor a memory module are required.

PROFIBUS


■ Function The CP 343-5 provides the user with access to different communication services of the PROFIBUS bus system: • PG/OP communication • S7 communication (PG, OP, S7 controllers) • S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) • PROFIBUS FMS (acc. to IEC 61 158/EN 50 170) PG/OP communication PG/OP communication allows all S7 stations connected to the network to be remotely programmed • S7 routing Routing makes it possible to use programming device communication across networks. S7 communication S7 communication is used for the coupling • Between SIMATIC S7 programmable controllers (CP 343-5 server only) • to HMI devices (OPs) • to SIMATIC 505 • to PCs, e.g. with CP 5613 or CP 5511/CP 5512/CP 5611 and S7 OPC server. Communication with the PG and OP is performed without the need for any additional configuration. Furthermore, the central controller can also be programmed and configured decentrally over the CP 343-5. S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) Based on Layer 2 (FDL) of PROFIBUS (IEC 61 158/EN 50,170), the CP 343-5 offers a simple, optimized interface for process or field communication. This interface offers uniform, high-performance communication between SIMATIC S5, SIMATIC S7, SIMATIC 505 and PC. In addition to the SDA service (PLC/PLC connections), SEND/RECEIVE also provides the SDN service (Broadcast, Multicast). The communication partners are the programmable controllers: • SIMATIC S7 with CP 342-5, CP 343-5, CP 443-5 • SIMATIC S5 with S5-95U with PROFIBUS interface, S5-115U/H, S5-135U, S5-155U/H with CP 5431 FMS/DP, • SIMATIC 505 with CP 5434-FMS • PCs with CP 5511, CP 5512, CP 5611, CP 5613, CP 5614 • Non-Siemens systems that are equipped with an FDL interface.

PROFIBUS FMS PROFIBUS FMS, according to PROFIBUS IEC 61 158/EN 50 170, supports message transfer to different FMS services: • READ, WRITE; for reading or writing access to variables of communication partners from the user program (by means of variable index, variable names); for transferring local variable values to the communications partner. Partial access to variables is supported. The communication is processed over acyclic connections (master-tomaster, master-to-slave), over acyclic connections with a slave initiative and with cyclic connections. • INFORMATION REPORT; (signaling) allows an FMS server to perform unacknowledged transfer of variables. This type of request is used, in particular, for transmission on Broadcast FMS connections. • IDENTIFY; to request the identification features of the communications partner • STATUS; to request partner status Diagnostics Extensive diagnostic options are available via STEP 7, including: • Status of the CP • General diagnostics and statistics functions • Connection diagnostics • Bus statistics • Message buffer Configuring STEP 7 is required for configuration. In STEP 7 Version V5 and higher, the configuring data of the CPs can also be stored on the CPU in which case they are retained following supply failure. A module can therefore by replaced without having to reload the configuration data from a programming device. The CPU transfers the configuration data to the CP during start-up. Attention should therefore be paid to the memory capacity of the S7-CPU. Configuration and programming of all SIMATIC S7 controllers connected to the network is possible over the network. The function blocks for using S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) and FMS can be found in the SIMATIC NET library following installation of STEP 7.

To use SEND/RECEIVE, function calls are required (PLC-SEND/ PLC-RECEIVE), which must be integrated into the STEP 7 user program.


4/107

4

PROFIBUS








Voltage supply

24 V DC

Current consumption

4

• from the backplane bus

150 mA

• from 24 V

250 mA

Power loss

6.75 W


0 °C … +60 °C


-40 °C … +70 °C


max. 95% at +25°C

Order No.

CP 343-5 communications processor Communication processor for connecting S7-300 to PROFIBUS, FMS, S5-compatible communication, PG/OP and S7 communication; with electronic manual on CD-ROM

6GK7 343-5FA01-0XE0

NCM S7 configuration software for PROFIBUS Configuration software for PROFIBUS CPs for SIMATIC S7 V5.x, executable under STEP 7 V5.x; with electronic manual on CD-ROM English, French, German, Italian and Spanish


• Module format

Compact module


40 x 125 x 120

"NCM S7 for PROFIBUS" manual Paper version for V5.x (STEP 7 V5.x)

• Weight

approx. 300 g

• German

6GK7 080-5AA04-8AA0

Number of CPs per S7-300

4

• English

6GK7 080-5AA04-8BA0

• French

6GK7 080-5AA04-8CA0

• Spanish

6GK7 080-5AA04-8DA0

• Italian

6GK7 080-5AA04-8EA0

Construction


max. 16 1)


max. 16



FMS function

PROFIBUS FastConnect RS 485 bus connector With 90° cable outlet; With insulation displacement method, max. data transmission rate 12 Mbit/s • without PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0


6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0


max. 16

• Variable length for READ

237 byte

PROFIBUS bus connector IP20 For connection to PPI, MPI, PROFIBUS

• Variable length for WRITE and REPORT

233 byte


6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0


6ES7 972-0BB12-0XA0

• Configurable server variables

256

6GK1 500-0AA10

• Variables that can be loaded from partners

256

PROFIBUS 12M bus terminal Bus terminal for connecting PROFIBUS stations up to 12 Mbit/s with connecting cable

max. 48

"Communication with SIMATIC" manual

Multi-protocol operation • Number of connections that can be used

1) Dependent on the CPU used

4/108


• German

6ES7 398-8EA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8EA00-8BA0

• French

6ES7 398-8EA00-8CA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8EA00-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8EA00-8EA0

SIMATIC S7-300 DM 370 Dummy module; used during module replacement

6ES7 370-0AA01-0AA0

PROFIBUS

System interfacing for SIMATIC CP 443-5 Basic

■ Overview

■ Benefits

• Easy integration of SIMATIC S7 in a vendor-independent automation network using PROFIBUS FMS • Suitable for use in high availability systems due to redundant S7 communication • The user requires little knowledge of the PROFIBUS FMS specification due to simple configuration and autonomous data conversion on the CP • A system-wide time synchronization • Integration of SIMATIC S7-400 into existing installations using S5-compatible communication • Universal applications for the CP through using different communications services in parallel

DP-M

DP-S

PG

S7

S5

FMS

■ Application The CP 443-5 Basic communications processor is the module required for SIMATIC S7-400 for the PROFIBUS bus system. It offloads communication tasks from the CPU.

• Connection of the S7-400® to PROFIBUS • Communication services: - PG/OP communication - S7 communication - S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) - PROFIBUS FMS • Time synchronization • Easy programming and configuration over PROFIBUS • Cross-network programming device communication through S7 routing • Can be easily integrated into the SIMATIC S7-400 system • Modules can be replaced without the need for a PG • SIMATIC H system operation for redundant S7 communication

Communications options of the S7-400 through communications modules: • FMS communication with PROFIBUS stations through PROFIBUS • Communication with programming devices, human machine interface devices • Communication with other SIMATIC S7 systems • Communication with SIMATIC S5 PLCs The number of CPs that can be operated depends on the performance range of the CPU and the communication services used.

■ Design The CP 443-5 communications processor offers all the advantages of SIMATIC S7-400 design features: • Compact design; 9-pin Sub-D connector for connection to PROFIBUS • Simple wide module • Simple connection; the CP 443-5 is mounted on the S7-400 subrack and connected to the other S7-400 modules through the backplane bus. There are no slot rules. • User-friendly wiring; the Sub-D connector is easily accessible and easy to use • The CP 443-5 Basic can be operated without a fan. Neither a back up battery nor a memory module are required. • When the SEND/RECEIVE interface is used, the number of operable modules depends on the S7-400 CPU in use.


4/109

4

PROFIBUS


■ Function The CP 443-5 Basic provides access to different communication services of the PROFIBUS bus system: • PG/OP communication • S7 communication (S7 controllers) • S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) • PROFIBUS FMS (acc. to IEC 61 158/EN 50 170) • Clock time synchronization PG/OP communication

4

PG/OP communication allows all S7 stations connected to the network to be remotely programmed. • S7 routing Routing makes it possible to use programming device communication across networks. S7 communication S7 communication is used for the coupling • between SIMATIC S7 programmable controllers • to programming devices (PG/OP communication) • to PCs, e.g. with CP 5613/5614 or CP 5511/5512/5611 and S7 OPC server. • to HMI devices (OPs). • For redundant S7 communication, the CP 443-5 Basic can also be used in SIMATIC H systems.

PROFIBUS FMS PROFIBUS FMS, to IEC 61 158/EN 50 170, supports message transfer to different FMS services: • READ, WRITE; for read or write access to variables of communication partners from the user program (by means of variable index, variable names); for transferring local variable values to the communications partner. Partial access to variables is supported. The communication is processed over acyclic connections (master-to-master, master-to-slave), over acyclic connections with a slave initiative and with cyclic connections (master/slave). • INFORMATION REPORT; (signaling) allows an FMS server to perform unacknowledged transfer of variables. This type of request is also used, in particular, for transmission on Broadcast FMS connections. • IDENTIFY; to request the identification features of the communications partner • STATUS; to request partner status Time-of-day synchronization The CP 443-5 Basic is capable of forwarding the time of day of the S7-400 CPU to PROFIBUS. Conversely, the CP 443-5 Basic of the S7-400 CPU can make an existing time of day available on PROFIBUS.


Diagnostics

Based on Layer 2 (FDL) of PROFIBUS, the CP 443-5 Basic offers a simple, optimized interface for data communication. This interface offers uniform, high-performance communication between SIMATIC S5, SIMATIC S7 and the PC. It provides the services SDA (PLC/PLC connections) and SDN (Broadcast, Multicast).

Extensive diagnostic options are available via STEP S7, including: • Status of the CP • General diagnostics and statistics functions • Connection diagnostics • Bus statistics • Message buffer

The communication partners are the programmable controllers: • SIMATIC S7 with CP 342-5, CP 343-5, CP 443-5 • SIMATIC S5 with S5-95U with PROFIBUS interface, S5-115U/H, S5-135U, S5-155U/H with CP 5431 FMS/DP • SIMATIC 505 with CP 5434-FMS • PCs with CP 5511, CP 5512, CP 5611, CP 5613, CP 5614 • Non-Siemens systems that are equipped with an FDL interface To use SEND/RECEIVE, function calls are required (PLCSEND/PLC-RECEIVE), which must be integrated into the STEP 7 user program.

4/110


Configuring STEP 7 is required for configuring the CP 443-5 Basic. In STEP 7 Version V5 and higher, the configuring data of the CPs can also be stored on the CPU in which case they are retained following supply failure. A module can therefore by replaced without having to reload the configuration data from a programming device. The CPU transfers the configuration data to the CP during start-up. Configuration and programming of all SIMATIC S7 controllers connected to the network is possible over the network. The function blocks for using S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) can be found in the SIMATIC NET library following installation of STEP 7.

PROFIBUS




Interface • Connection to PROFIBUS


Voltage supply

5 V DC ± 5%

Current input from 5 V DC

1.2 A

Power loss

6.5 W


0 °C … +60 °C


-40 °C … +70 °C


max. 95% at +25°C


25 x 290 x 210

• Weight

approx. 700 g


16 to 481)

S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) • Number of connections that can be used • Useful data / connection

max. 32 max. 240 byte (SEND and RECEIVE)

FMS function

Order No.

CP 443-5 communications processor Communications processor for connection of S7-400 to PROFIBUS, FMS, S5-compatible communication, PG/OP and S7 communication; with electronic manual on CD-ROM

6GK7 443-5FX01-0XE0

Configuring software NCM S7 for PROFIBUS Configuring software for PROFIBUS CPs for SIMATIC S7 V5.x, runs under STEP 7 V5.x; with electronic manual on CD-ROM, German, English, French, Spanish, Italian


4

Manual NCM S7 for PROFIBUS Paper version for V5.x (STEP 7 V5.x) • German

6GK7 080-5AA04-8AA0

• English

6GK7 080-5AA04-8BA0

• French

6GK7 080-5AA04-8CA0

• Spanish

6GK7 080-5AA04-8DA0

• Italian

6GK7 080-5AA04-8EA0

PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector RS 485 With 90° cable outlet; insulation displacement technology, max. transmission rate 12 Mbit/s


max. 48

• Variable length READ

max. 237 byte

• Without PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0

• Variable length WRITE

max. 233 byte


6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0

• Configurable server variables

512

• Variables that can be loaded from partners

2640

PROFIBUS bus connector IP20 With connection to PPI, MPI, PROFIBUS

Multi-protocol operation • Number of connections that can used (2 of which are reserved for PG/OP communication)

max. 59

• Without PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0


6ES7 972-0BB12-0XA0

PROFIBUS bus terminal 12M Bus terminal for connection of PROFIBUS stations up to 12 Mbit/s with plug-in cable

6GK1 500-0AA10

Communication with SIMATIC Manual • German

6ES7 398-8EA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8EA00-8BA0

• French

6ES7 398-8EA00-8CA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8EA00-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8EA00-8EA0

1) Dependent on CPU type


4/111

PROFIBUS

System interfacing for SIMATIC CP 443-5 Extended

■ Overview

■ Application The CP 443-5 Extended communications processor is the module required for SIMATIC S7-400 for the PROFIBUS bus system. It offloads the CPU of communications tasks and enables further connections. Communications options of the S7-400 through communications modules: • As a master for PROFIBUS DP according to IEC 61158/EN 50170 • Communication with programming devices, human machine interface devices • Communication with other SIMATIC S7 systems • Communication with SIMATIC S5 PLCs • The number of CPs that can be operated depends on the performance range of the CPU and the communication services used.

4 DP-M

DP-S

PG

S7

S5

FMS

• DP-V1 master connection of the S7-400 on PROFIBUS • For setting up additional PROFIBUS DP lines • Communication services: - PROFIBUS DP - PG/OP communication - S7 communication - S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) • Time synchronization • Easy programming and configuration over PROFIBUS • Cross-network programming device communication through S7 routing • Can be easily integrated into the SIMATIC S7-400 system • Module replacement without PG • SIMATIC H system operation for redundant S7 communication or DP master communication • Data record routing (PROFIBUS DP) • Adding or modifying distributed I/O during operation

■ Benefits

■ Design The CP 443-5 Extended communications processor offers all the advantages of SIMATIC S7-400 design features: • Compact design; 9-pin Sub-D connector for connecting to PROFIBUS DP. • Simple wide module • Simple connection; the CP 443-5 is mounted on the S7-400 subrack and connected to the other S7-400 modules through the backplane bus. • User-friendly wiring; the Sub-D connector is easily accessible and easy to use • The CP 443-5 Extended can be operated without a fan. Neither a back up battery nor a memory module are required. • Up to 14 CPs can be operated. If the CP 443-5 Extended is implemented as a DP master, at least 4 and up to 10 additional PROFIBUS DP lines can be configured in the central rack. The number of permissible PROFIBUS DP lines is dependent on the SIMATIC S7-400 CPU used. There are no slot rules when S7 communication is used. The number of S7 connections which can be operated is dependent on the S7-400 CPU. When SEND/RECEIVE is used, the number of modules which can be operated is dependent on the S7-400 CPU.

■ Function • Increase the system availability through redundant connection of the process I/Os (e.g. ET 200 M) in the SIMATIC S7-400 H system • Particularly suitable for controlling tasks through SYNC/FREEZE and equidistant bus cycle • Subprocess-oriented configuration of an automation solution by implementing several CPs • A system-wide time synchronization • Integration of SIMATIC S7-400 into existing installations using S5-compatible communication • Universal applications for the CP by using different communications services in parallel on one CP • Cost savings due to flexible, reaction-free start-up using CiR (Configuration in RUN)

4/112


The CP 443-5 Extended provides access to different communication services of the PROFIBUS bus system: • PROFIBUS DP (acc. to IEC 61158/EN 50 170) • PG/OP communication • S7 communication (S7 controllers) • S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) • Time synchronization

PROFIBUS


■ Function (continued) Master for PROFIBUS DP

Time synchronization

The CP 443-5 Extended operates as DP-V1 master. It processes data transfer autonomously and allows slaves to be connected, such as CP 342-5 as DP slave, DP slaves of the ET 200 distributed I/O station, etc. This means that the CP 443-5 Extended is able to connect the S7-400 station to PROFIBUS DP as well as providing the integral DP master interfaces of the S7-400 CPUs with the ideal expansion for establishing additional PROFIBUS DP lines. The CP 443-5 Extended can also be used in the SIMATIC S7 H system as a redundant DP master. The CP 443-5 Extended is a DP-V1 master, i.e. it also supports the acyclic standard services incl. interrupt handling. The CP 443-5 Extended also supports the SYNC and FREEZE functions, equidistance, slave-to-slave communication, data set routing and changes to the configuration of the assigned distributed I/O during normal operation. During normal operation, it is also possible to activate or deactivate DP slaves. This supports the step-by-step start-up of subprocesses, for example. The distributed I/O is handled like the central I/O from the user’s point of view. This means that there are no differences between the CP 443-5 Extended and the integral DP master interface of the S7-400 CPU with regard to configuration and parameterization. Depending on the scale of the system, the CP 443-5 Extended has extremely short response times.

The CP 443-5 Extended is capable of forwarding the time of day of the S7-400 CPU to PROFIBUS. Conversely, the CP of the S7-400 CPU can make an existing time of day available on PROFIBUS

PG/OP communication PG/OP communication allows all S7 stations connected to the network to be remotely programmed. • S7 routing By means of routing it is possible to use programming device communication across networks. S7 communication S7 communication is used for the coupling • between SIMATIC S7 programmable controllers • to programming devices (PG/OP communication) • to PCs e.g. with CP 5613 or CP 5511/CP 5512/CP 5611 and S7 OPC server • to HMI devices (OPs). For redundant S7 communication, the CP 443-5 Extended can also be used in SIMATIC H systems. S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) Based on Layer 2 (FDL) of PROFIBUS, the CP 443-5 Extended offers a simple, optimized interface for process or field communication. This interface offers uniform, high-performance communication between SIMATIC S5, SIMATIC S7 and the PC. It provides the services SDA (PLC/PLC connections) and SDN (Broadcast, Multicast). The communication partners are the programmable controllers • SIMATIC S7 with CP 342-5, CP 343-5, CP 443-5 • SIMATIC S5 with S5-95U with PROFIBUS interface, S5-115U/H, S5-135U, S5-155U/H with CP 5431 FMS/DP • SIMATIC 505 with CP 5434-FMS • PCs with CP 5511, CP 5512, CP 5611, CP 5613, CP 5614 • Non-Siemens systems that are equipped with an FDL interface.

The CP 443-5 Extended supports • The time-stamping of distributed process signals in combination with IM 153 • Time status value, daylight-saving time changeover, synchronization status Data set routing The CP 443-5 Extended supports the data set routing function. With this option, the CP can be used as a router for data sets that have to be sent to field devices (DP slaves). SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) is a tool that creates data sets of this type for parameterizing and diagnosing field devices. Application: It is possible, for example, to use SIMATIC PDM (on the PC) to set parameters and perform diagnostics for a PA field device over Industrial Ethernet, S7-400 (CP 443-1, CP 443-5 Extended) and DP/PA Coupler/Link. Diagnostics data Extensive diagnostic options are available via STEP 7, including: • Status of the CP • General diagnostics and statistics functions • Connection diagnostics • Bus statistics • Message buffer CiR – Configuration in RUN With CiR, it is possible to add or modify distributed I/O devices during normal operation. • Adding PROFIBUS DP/PA slaves • Adding/removing modules (e.g. I/O modules) in a modular DP slave (e.g. ET 200M and DP/PA Link) Configuration STEP 7 is required for configuring the CP 443-5 Extended. DP configuration/programming is performed for the CP 443-5 Extended in the same manner as for DP configuration/programming of the integrated DP interfaces of the SIMATIC S7-400 CPUs with STEP 7. The configuring data of the CPs is always saved on the CPU and is retained even after a PLC failure. A module can therefore be replaced without having to reload the configuration data from a programming device. The CPU transfers the configuration data to the CP during start-up. Configuration and programming of all SIMATIC S7 controllers connected to the network is possible over the network. The function blocks for using S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) can be found in the SIMATIC NET library following installation of STEP 7.

To use SEND/RECEIVE, function calls are required (PLC-SEND/ PLC-RECEIVE), which must be linked into the STEP 7 user program. Siemens IK PI · 2007

4/113

4

PROFIBUS




Interfaces • Connections


Voltage supply

5 V DC ± 5% 24 V DC ±5%


1.3 A

Power loss

6.5 W


4


0 °C … +60 °C


-40 °C … +70 °C


max. 95% at +25°C


25 x 290 x 210

• Weight

approx. 700 g

Number of external DP-lines in one central rack

10

Performance data DP master function

CP 443-5 Extended communications processor For connecting SIMATIC S7-400 to PROFIBUS Extended version for PROFIBUS DP; with electronic manual, on CD-ROM Configuring software NCM S7 for PROFIBUS Configuring software for PROFIBUS CPs for SIMATIC S7 V5.1, runs under STEP 7 V5.1; with electronic manual on CD-ROM, German, English, French, Spanish, Italian

Order No.

6GK7 443-5DX04-0XE0


Manual NCM S7 for PROFIBUS Paper version for V5.x (STEP 7 V5.x) • German

6GK7 080-5AA04-8AA0

• English

6GK7 080-5AA04-8BA0

• French

6GK7 080-5AA04-8CA0

• DP master

DP-V1

• Spanish

6GK7 080-5AA04-8DA0


max. 125

• Italian

6GK7 080-5AA04-8EA0


max. 4 KB max. 4 KB

• Size of DP data areas per connected DP slave - DP input area - DP output range


S7 communication • Number of connections that can be used

16 to 481)


max. 32



Multi-protocol operation • Number of connections that can used (2 of which are reserved for PG/OP communication) - without DP - with DP

1) Dependent on CPU type

4/114


PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector RS 485 With 90° cable outlet; insulation displacement technology, max. transmission rate 12 Mbit/s • Without PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0


6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0

PROFIBUS bus connector IP20 With connection to PPI, MPI, PROFIBUS • Without PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0


6ES7 972-0BB12-0XA0


6GK1 500-0AA10

Communication with SIMATIC Manual

max. 59 max. 55

• German

6ES7 398-8EA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8EA00-8BA0

• French

6ES7 398-8EA00-8CA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8EA00-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8EA00-8EA0

PROFIBUS

System interfacing for SIMATIC IM 467, IM 467 FO

■ Overview

■ Design The IM 467/467 FO interface module features all the advantages of SIMATIC S7-400 configuration: • Compact configuration: 9-pin Sub-D socket or FO cable interface for connection to PROFIBUS DP • Single-width module • Easy installation: The IM 467/467 FO is plugged into the S7-400 rack and is connected with the other modules via the backplane bus. • User-friendly wiring: The Sub-D socket/integrated FO cable interface is easily accessed. • Rugged operation: The IM 467/467 FO can be operated without fans. A backup battery or memory module is not required.

• For connection of the S7-400 as a master to PROFIBUS DP • For setting up further PROFIBUS DP lines • PROFIBUS DP communication services and PG/OP communication • Simple programming and configuring via PROFIBUS • Interfaces: RS 485 (IM 467) or integrated FO interface (IM 467 FO)

■ Benefits

• Subprocess-oriented configuration of an automation solution through the use of several IMs • Allows up to 14 additional DP bus lines to be connected to the S7-400 • Integrated fiber-optic interface

■ Application The IM 467/467 FO is the low-overhead SIMATIC S7-400 interface module for the PROFIBUS DP bus system. It off-loads communication tasks from the CPU and supports additional connections. The IM 467 FO is always used in those cases where the advantages of fiber-optic cables (plastic and PCF) are required. Communication modes for the S7-400 via IM 467/467 FO communications modules: • As a master for the ET 200 distributed I/O station in accordance with EN 50170 and IEC 61158-3 Ed2 • Communication with programming devices and human machine interface devices

If the IM 467/467 FO is used as a DP master, up to 10 additional PROFIBUS DP lines can be connected. The number of possible PROFIBUS DP lines depends on the SIMATIC S7-400 CPU used. There are no slot rules.

■ Function The IM 467/IM 467 FO provides different communication services of the PROFIBUS bus system: • PROFIBUS DP (in accordance with EN 50170) • PG/OP communication PROFIBUS DP master The IM 467/467 FO operates as a DP master according to EN 50170, Volume 2. It implements data transmission completely autonomously and allows slaves to be connected, such as CP 342-5 as DP slave, DP slaves of the ET 200 distributed I/O system, etc. The IM 467/467 FO can therefore connect the S7-400 station to PROFIBUS DP or it complements the integrated DP master interfaces of the S7-400 CPU in order to establish additional PROFIBUS DP lines. In addition, the IM 467/467 FO also supports the functions SYNC and FREEZE, equidistance and internode data traffic. The distributed I/O is handled in the same manner as the central I/O from the viewpoint of the user. This means that for configuring and parameter assignment, there is no distinction between the IM 467/467 FO and the integrated DP master interface of the S7-400 CPU. Whatever the size of the plant, the IM 467/467 FO achieves the shortest possible response times. PG/OP communication With the help of PG/OP communication, all the S7 stations connected to the network can be remotely programmed. • S7 routing: Routing enables PG/OP communication to be utilized across networks. Configuring STEP 7 is necessary for configuring the IM 467/467 FO. DP configuration and programming is performed for the IM 467/467 FO in the same manner as for the integrated DP master interfaces of the SIMATIC S7-400 CPUs with STEP 7 V4.0 or newer (IM 467 FO with STEP 7 V5.0 or newer). The IM configuration data is saved on the CPU and is retained even in the case of power outage. Modules can therefore be replaced having to reload the product information from a PG. During startup, the CPU transfers the configuration data to the IM. It is possible to configure and program all SIMATIC S7 controllers connected to the network over the network.


4/115

4

PROFIBUS

System interfacing for SIMATIC IM 467, IM 467 FO


■ Ordering data 6ES7 4675GJ02-0AB0

6ES7 4675FJ00-0AB0

Yes; +/- 5 % Yes; +/- 5 %

Yes; +/- 5 % Yes; +/- 5 %

Supply voltages Rated value - 5 V DC - 24 V DC Current consumption • from backplane bus 5 V DC, max.

4

Configuration • Number of modules per CPU

1,300 mA

1,300 mA

10 in CR (depending on CPU type)

10 in CR (depending on CPU type)

6ES7 467-5GJ02-0AB0

IM 467 FO interface module for connection to PROFIBUS DP; fiber-optic interface

6ES7 467-5FJ00-0AB0

RS 485 bus terminal connector with 90° outgoing feeder cable for FastConnect system max. data transmission rate 12 Mbit/s • Without PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0


6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0 6ES7 195-1BE00-0XA0

2 x duplex socket

• Physical

9-pin sub-D female connector RS 485

Connection adapters pack of 50, for use of the simplex plugs with the IM 467 FO

FO/Lamda = 660 nm

Manual "SIMATIC S7-400 programmable controller" incl. operation list

Functionality - DP master

Yes

Yes

1st interface • Type of interface

DP master - Number of connections, max. • Services - Equidistance support - Direct data exchange (lateral communication) - Transmission rates, max. - Transmission rates, min. - Number of DP slaves, max.

32; depending on the CPU type

32; depending on the CPU type

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

12 Mbit/s

12 Mbit/s; not 3 and 6 Mbit/s 9.6 kBit/s 96

9.6 kBit/s 96


4 KByte 4 KByte

4 KByte 4 KByte

• User data per DP Slave - Inputs, max. - Outputs, max.

244 Byte 244 Byte

244 Byte 244 Byte


0 °C 60 °C

0 °C 60 °C


-40 °C 70 °C

-40 °C 70 °C

Air pressure - Altitude above MSL, max.

3,000 m

3,000 m


95%; at 26 °C

95%; at 26 °C

• Width

25 mm

25 mm

• Height

290 mm

290 mm

• Depth

210 mm

210 mm

• Weight, approx.

700 g

700 g



4/116


Order No.

IM 467 interface module for connection to PROFIBUS DP; RS 485

• German

6ES7 498-8AA04-8AA0

• English

6ES7 498-8AA04-8BA0

• French

6ES7 498-8AA04-8CA0

• Spanish

6ES7 498-8AA04-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 498-8AA04-8EA0


6ES7 398-8EA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8EA00-8BA0

• French

6ES7 398-8EA00-8CA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8EA00-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8EA00-8EA0

PROFIBUS

System interfacing for PG/PC General information

■ Overview PC card with an internal microprocessor

SOFTWARE

HARDWARE

CPs with own microprocessor You will find software for the PC products under Windows with the corresponding authorization diskettes on the SIMATIC NET software CD. For use in different operating system surroundings are Development Kits availably (e.g. CP 5613 A2 or CP 5614 A2) The necessary configuring tools are contained in all software packages. Manuals in pdf format and extensive further information on SIMATIC NET products and communication can be found on the SIMATIC NET Manual Collection CD, enclosed with the software products.

CP 5613 A2 (PCI)

Recommended solution for: • PC-based control systems (Soft Control, PLC, Numeric Control, Robot Control) • Process control systems • Operator control and monitoring systems (HMI) • PROFIBUS DP slave interface (CP 5614 A2, CP 5614 FO) • PROFIBUS plants with large quantity framework (more than 8 stations) • Multi-protocol operation • Use of several CPs in one system • Designs with fiber-optic interface (FO) PC card without an internal microprocessor

CP 5613 FO (PCI)

CP 5614 A2 (PCI)

Recommended solution for: • Configuring tools (e.g. STEP 7) • PROFIBUS DP diagnostics station (e.g. with COM PROFIBUS or as DP Master Class 2) • PROFIBUS DP slave interface • PROFIBUS systems with up to 8 stations • Mono protocol mode

CP 5614 FO (PCI)

CPs without own microprocessor CP 5611 A2 (PC-Card, CardBus)

SIMATIC NET Manual Collection CP 5512 (PC-Card, CardBus)

System connection for PG/PC


4/117

4

PROFIBUS


■ Overview The following communications processors are available for connecting to the programming device or PC: • CPs with an internal microprocessor: CP 5613 A2 (PCI), CP 5613 FO (PCI), CP 5614 A2 (PCI), CP 5614 FO (PCI) • CPs without an internal microprocessor: CP 5512 (PC Card/CardBus), CP 5611 A2 (PCI) Performance of PROFIBUS CPs The maximum performance specifies how much digital input/ output data can be read or written in 1 ms from the PROFIBUS application over the respective PROFIBUS CP (regardless of the physical characteristics of the bus).

CP 5613 A2 with DP-RAM access

CP 5613 A2 with DP-5613/Win NT

CP 5611 A2/5512 with SOFTNET-DP

G_IK10_XX_50035

Performance

4

Performance under almost identical CPU loading

CPU loading and access time

CPU load

If event access (using interrupts) and polling access are compared, it can be shown that the CPU loading can be significantly reduced with the CP 5613 using the event/filter mechanism, for the same data throughput.

Other CPs with polling

CPU load at same data throughput to retain current data of a slave

G_IK10_XX_50036

CP 5613 A2 with events via DP-RAM access

Comparison of loading on the CPU with event access and with polling access

Performance data of PROFIBUS CPs CP 5613 A2/CP 5613 FO

CP 5614 A2/CP 5614 F0

CP 5611 A2/CP 5512

Number of connectable DP slaves

Max.

122

122

60

Number of FDL tasks waiting

Max.

120

120

100

Number of PG/OP and S7 connections

Max.

50 1)

50 1)

8

Number of FMS connections

Max.

40 2)

40 2)

-

Note: 1) for credit = 1; PDU size ≤ 480 byte 2) for credit = 1; max. 2 x CP 5612 A2 / CP 5612 FO / CP 5614 A2 / CP 5614 FO

4/118


PROFIBUS


■ Overview (continued) Advanced PC configuration for PROFIBUS • Supports a simplified OPC configuration • Easy to handle thanks to automatic software installation (Plug & Play) • Advanced PC configuration is included in the scope of supply of the communications software for the PC from Version 6.0 upwards; the configuration tool NCM PC as well as the configuration console are also supplied with it.

■ More information Additional information can be found in the Internet under http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info

NCM PC NCM PC replaces the previous PC configuration tools. This means that the PC can be configured either in STEP 7 or in NCM PC Version V5.1+SP2 and higher. Both tools offer the same look and feel and create the same database. This means that uniform configuration is possible for the communication functions S5-compatible communication, S7 communication and for the DP protocol and FMS protocol. Data only has to be entered once and data consistency is assured. • A configuration wizard integrated into NCM PC also supports user-driven configuration of the PC station. • With NCM PC and STEP 7 from Version V5.1+SP2 upwards, a PC similar to a SIMATIC S7 station can be configured and loaded over a network. This applies both to the local station on which NCM PC or STEP 7 is installed and to the remote station that is addressed over the network.

4

Note: NCM PC does not contain a conversion function for LDBs that were created using COML S7. Reconfiguration is necessary.


4/119

PROFIBUS

System interfacing for PG/PC Connection options to SIMATIC PCs

■ Overview The operating systems listed in the table refer exclusively to the communication products specified! Please refer to the description of the relevant IPC for the operating system that is available and has been released for that IPC Note: You can find detailed descriptions of the SIMATIC Industrial PCs in the Catalog "PC-based Automation" or in the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall

4

Rack PC: IL 43, 840 Box PC: 620, 627, 840, Panel PC: 577, 677, 877

Microbox PC 420

CPs and software for PROFIBUS CP 5613 A2 / CP 5613 FO / CP 5614 A2 / CP 5614 FO with • Windows 2000 Professional/ Server + SP3/4, Windows XP Professional + SP1/2, Windows 2003 Server + SP1

■

–

• Windows 2000 Professional/ Server + SP3/4, Windows XP Professional + SP1/2, Windows 2003 Server + SP1

■

–

CP 5611 A2/CP 5512 1)

■

–

• Windows 2000 Professional/ Server + SP3/4, Windows XP Professional + SP1/2, Windows 2003 Server + SP1

■

–

• Windows 2000 Professional/ Server + SP3/4, Windows XP Professional + SP1/2, Windows 2003 Server + SP1, XPembedded + SP1

■

■

DP-5613 Edition 2005 / FMS-5613 Edition 2005 / S7-5613 Edition 2005 under

SOFTNET-DP Edition 2005 / SOFTNET-S7 Edition 2005 / SOFTNET-DP Slave Edition 2005 under

1) The CP 5512 can only be used with the Box PC 620.

4/120


PROFIBUS


■ Overview

■ Benefits

• • • • • • • • • DP-M

DP-S

PG

S7

S5

FMS

UDP OPC

• PCI card (universal key 5 V/3.3 V) with microprocessor for system connection for PCs and SIMATIC PG/PC to PROFIBUS with up to 12 Mbit/s • Communication services: - PROFIBUS DP masters according to IEC 61158/EN 50170 - PG/OP communication with STEP 5 and STEP 7 - S7 communication - S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) based on the FDL interface - PROFIBUS FMS acc. to IEC 61158/EN 50170 • Comprehensive diagnostics possibilities for installation, startup and operation of the module • High performance over direct dual-port RAM access • Event and filter mechanisms to reduce the loading on the host CPU • Multi-protocol mode and parallel operation of up to 4 CPs • Implementation in Motion Control applications is possible because a constant bus cycle time is supported • The appropriate OPC server and configuration tools are included in the scope of supply of the respective communication software

Fast access to process data over dual-port RAM OPC as standard interface Consistent process data from a DP cycle More computing power is available in the PG/PC by taking the load off the host CPU Fast start-up through Plug&Play and diagnostic tools Implementation in Motion Control applications is possible because a constant bus cycle time is supported Simple porting to other operating system environments through dual port RAM interface Implementation is even possible in an industrial environment at high temperatures. Can be used flexibly in PG/PC due to PCI 3.3/5V, 33/66 MHz and compatibility to 64-bit PCI-X slot

■ Application

The CP 5613 A2 supports the connection of a SIMATIC PG/PC and PCs with a PCI slot to PROFIBUS. The CP 5613 A2 provides high-performance support for control tasks on the PC (PC based Control, Numeric Control, Robot Control).

■ Design • • • • • • •

Short PCI card Suitable for 3.3 V and 5 V PCI slots (universal key) 33 MHz or 66 MHz PCI cycle Can be used as a 32-bit card in a 64-bit PCI-X slot 9-pin Sub-D socket for connection to PROFIBUS Diagnostic LEDs Parallel operation of max. 4 CPs 1)

The module is installed using the standard PCI mechanisms (Plug&Play). The electrical PROFIBUS is connected using • Bus connector and PROFIBUS cable or • Bus terminal (e.g. bus terminal 12 M) and PROFIBUS bus cable. The optical PROFIBUS is connected using • Bus cable with 2 bus connectors or • PROFIBUS 830-1T connecting cable to an OLM. When the CP 5613 A2 is used as a DP master or in a PG/OP on PROFIBUS DP, the optical PROFIBUS is connected with an integrated interface and OBT using: • Bus cable with 2 bus connectors or • PROFIBUS 830-1T connecting cable to an optical bus terminal (OBT) for PROFIBUS DP. 1) FMS-5613 supports up to 2 CP 5613 A2/5614 A2.


4/121

4

PROFIBUS


■ Function PROFIBUS DP Access to process data with DP-Base The CP 5613 A2 is operated as a PROFIBUS DP master module which holds the process image (input/output and diagnostic data) in the dual port RAM (memory area on the CP). The highperformance data exchange with the PROFIBUS slaves is handled independently by the CP 5613 A2 hardware. The user has direct access to the dual port RAM. The process data of the slaves is always consistent, i.e. the user gets the data of a slave from one and the same DP cycle.

4

Parallel operation of DP 5613 software and DP-Base is not possible. Event/filter mechanism The user receives up-to-date data through two access mechanisms: • Cyclic polling of the DP slaves (higher load on host CPU) • Signaling by new kind of event/filter mode in the event of changes in the input data of a slave (minimum load on host CPU) Both alternatives can be combined. Optimum utilization of the PC is therefore possible for the relevant application. The new event/filter mechanism can also be used for • Signaling by interrupt for diagnostic messages from slaves • In equidistant mode signaling by interrupt: - start DP cycle - end cyclic data transfer with the DP slaves (hardware version 3 and newer) FastLogic FastLogic means that the CP 5613 A2 can react automatically to up to 4 plant states. A fast response time and independence of the host application is achieved here, for example, for rapid equipment shutdown. DP programming interface The DP programming interface (DP-Base) of the CP 5613 A2 has the following functions: • DP Master Class 1 including acyclic DP extensions • DP Master Class 2 including acyclic DP extensions Access to the process data is directly through the dual port RAM. The dual port RAM interface not only offers fast access as a DP master but also a basis for portability to other operating system environments (e.g. VXWorks, QNX, RMOS, RTX). A library (DP_BASE.DLL) offers administrative functional calls (initialization and management services). DK-5613 development kit The DK-5613 development kit offers access to the functions DP Master Class 1 including non-cyclic DP expansions. With the DK-5613 software development kit the CP 5613 A2 and CP 5614 communications processors can be integrated in any operating system environments. The kit contains the necessary source code including the descriptions in PDF format and can be downloaded free of charge from the Internet.

4/122


Access to process data with DP-5613 • DP Master Class 1 The CP 5613 A2 operates as a DP Master Class 1 according to IEC 61158/EN 50170 and handles data transfer with the distributed stations (DP slaves) completely independently. In a fixed, repetitive message cycle, the central controller exchanges information with the DP slaves (e.g. ET 200S). The DP programming interface (DPLib.DLL) provides the PC programmer with function calls for data transfer. In addition, the DP interface offers the functions SYNC and FREEZE as well as the activation and deactivation of slaves. The DP function expansions for Master Class 1 enable noncyclic read and write functions (DS_READ, DS_WRITE) as well as alarm acknowledgement (ALARM_ACK) to be performed parallel to cyclic data traffic. The non-cyclic transmitted data (e.g. parameterization data) are changed very rarely in comparison with the cyclic measured values and are transmitted with low priority parallel to the fast cyclic useful data transfer. The interrupt acknowledgement in the master ensures reliable transmission of the interrupts from the DP slaves. Parallel operation of DP-Base and DP-5613 software is not possible. • DP Master Class 2 Apart from the DP Master Class 1 services, the CP 5613 A2 also offers, in combination with the DP programming interface, DP Master Class 2 services according to IEC 61158/EN 50170. Devices of this type (programming devices, configuration devices or operating devices) are used on startup, on configuring the DP system or for operating the system during normal operation (e.g. diagnostics). The DP programming interface provides the following services: • Master diagnostics • Slave diagnostics • Read inputs/outputs of a slave • Reading configuration data and • Changing the slave address. The extended DP functions also include non-cyclic access to the parameters and measured values of a slave (e.g. field devices of the process automation, intelligent HMI devices). This type of slave must be supplied with extensive parameter data during startup and normal operation (DS_READ, DS_WRITE). Software for PG/OP communication This software allows programming of the SIMATIC S5 and S7 controllers (except for SIMATIC S5-95U) through PROFIBUS in conjunction with STEP 5/STEP 7. PG/OP communication for the CP 5613 is available following installation of the CP 5613 A2 (DP-Base). No additional software package is needed. S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE based on the FDL interface) SEND/RECEIVE (FDL interface) is already available after installation of the CP 5613 A2 (DP-Base) and offers data exchange services for diagnostics and management. No additional software package is needed.

PROFIBUS


■ Function (continued) Software for S7 communication (S7-5613)

User interfaces

SIMATIC S7 system components communicate with each other through S7 communication. The S7 programming interface enables PG/PC application programs to access SIMATIC S7 system components. The SIMATIC S7 data can be accessed easily and flexibly.

OPC interface

The following services are available with S7 communication: Administrative services • Link management • Mini database • Trace

The OPC server contained in the respective software package can be used as a standard programming interface for the protocols PROFIBUS DP, S5-compatible communication, S7 communication and PROFIBUS FMS to connect automation applications to OPC-capable Windows applications (Office, HMI systems etc.). Programming interface through C-Library

Data transfer services • Reading/writing of variables • BSEND/BRECEIVE (up to 64 KB per task) Software for PROFIBUS FMS (FMS-5613)

The programming interfaces for existing applications are implemented as a Dynamic Link Library (DLL). The following compilers can therefore be used in conjunction with the SIMATIC NET products: • Microsoft Visual C/C++ V6.0 • Microsoft Visual Basic V6.0 • Microsoft Visual C V7.x

The FMS programming interface allows PG/PCs to exchange data with FMS-capable controllers (e.g. S5/S7) and field devices of other manufacturers. The use of the FMS protocol guarantees open communication.

Partner solutions from Software Option are available for Borland programming interfaces (e.g. DELPHI).

The following services are available through the FMS interface: • Administrative services • CRL management services • FMS connection management services • Object directory management services for clients and server • Variable services for clients and server (read, write, information report) • Server functionality • VFD (virtual field device) services for clients and server • Bus access information services (live list) • Trace and Mini database

Configuration • Configuration of S7 communication protocols, S5-compatible communication, DP protocol (DP-V0/DP-V1/DP-V2) and FMS protocol is executed in STEP 7 or NCM PC V5.1 + SP2. • The configuring tool NCM PC is included in the scope of supply of the PROFIBUS software package. • NCM PC is a component of Advanced PC Configuration.

For solutions for other operating systems, see the DK-5613 Development Kit.

Diagnostics Extensive diagnostic tools are available (for installation, commissioning and operation) for the module itself and for the PROFIBUS DP network. Therefore a PROFIBUS network can be started up quickly and easily with a CP 5613 A2.

■ Technical specifications 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s

Performance data Single protocol operation

• Connection to PROFIBUS

9-pin Sub-D connector PCI (32 bit; 3.3 V/5 V; universal keyed; 33/66 MHz)

• Number of connectable DP slaves

max. 124

• Connection to PG/PC

• Number of parallel FDL tasks to be processed

max. 120

Data transmission rates Interfaces

Supply voltage (from PCI)

5 V DC ± 5%

Power consumption from 5 V DC

0.8 A

• Number of PG/OP and S7 connections

max. 50 1)

Power loss

4W

• Number of FMS connections

max. 40 2)


+5 °C to +50 °C


-40 °C to +70 °C


max. 85 % at +30 °C

1) For credit = 1; PDU size ≤ 480 byte 2) For credit = 1; max. 2 x CP 5613 A2 / CP 5613 FO / CP 5614 A2 / CP 5614 FO

Design • Module format

short PCI card

• Dimensions (W x H) in mm

107 x 168

• Weight

approx. 105 g

• Space required

1 x PCI slot

DP-Master

DP-V0, DP-V1, DP-V2


4/123

4

PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data

4

Order No.

CP 5613 A2 communications processor PCI card (32-bit; 3.3 V/5 V) for connection to PROFIBUS incl. DP-Base software with NCM PC; DP-RAM interface for DP master, incl. PG and FDL protocol; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server, Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server German/English

6GK1 561-3AA01

Development Kit DK-5613 Software development kit for CP 5613/CP 5614/ CP 5613 A2/CP 5614 A2/ CP 5613 FO/CP 5614 FO for integration in other operating system environments on systems with a PCI slot

See http://www.siemens.com/ simatic-net/dk5613

DP-5613 Edition 2005 Software for DP, incl. PG and FDL protocol, OPC server and NCM PC; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CDROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional; 2003 Server, 2000 Professional/Server, for CP 5613, CP 5613 A2, CP 5613 FO, CP 5614, CP 5614 A2, CP 5614 FO German/English

6GK1 713-5DB63-3AA0

S7-5613 Edition 2005 Software for S7 communication, incl. PG and FDL protocol, OPC server and NCM PC; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional; 2003 Server, 2000 Professional/Server, for CP 5613, CP 5613 A2, CP 5613 FO, CP 5614, CP 5614 A2, CP 5614 FO; German/English

6GK1 713-5CB63-3AA0

Order No. FMS-5613 Edition 2005 Software for FMS protocol, incl. PG/OP communication, FDL, FMS-OPC server and NCM PC; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional; 2003 Server, 2000 Professional/Server, for CP 5613, CP 5613 A2, CP 5613 FO, CP 5614, CP 5614 A2, CP 5614 FO; German/English

6GK1 713-5FB63-3AA0

PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector RS 485 Plug 180 With 180° cable outlet

6GK1 500-0FC00


6GK1 500-0AA10

SIMATIC NET Software Update Service For Industrial Ethernet, PROFIBUS, OPC server, for one year service incl. manuals on CD-ROM Prerequisite: SIMATIC NET PC/Windows products German/English

6GK1 704-0AA00-3AA2

■ More information The DK-5613 can be found in the Internet under: Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/dk5613

4/124


The CP 5613 A2 module can also be used under the LINUX and UNIX operating systems. You can find information about the available LINUX distributors and UNIX operating systems from: Siemens AG Contact Your IT4Industry Team Werner-von-Siemens-Str. 60 91052 Erlangen, Germany Tel.: +49(0)9131/7-4 61 11 Fax: +49(0)9131/7-4 47 57 E-mail: [email protected]

PROFIBUS

System interfacing for PG/PC CP 5613 FO

■ Overview

DP-M

DP-S

■ Benefits

PG

S7

S5

FMS

UDP OPC

• PCI card with microprocessor for system connection for PCs and SIMATIC PGs/PC to the optical PROFIBUS at up to 12 Mbit/s • Integral fiber-optic interface for direct FO connection • Communication services: - PROFIBUS DP masters according to IEC 61158/EN 50170 - PG/OP communication with STEP 5 and STEP 7 - S7 communication - S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) based on the FDL interface - PROFIBUS FMS acc. to IEC 61158/EN 50170 • Comprehensive diagnostics possibilities for installation, startup and operation of the module • High performance over direct dual-port RAM access • Event and filter mechanisms to reduce the loading on the host CPU • Multi-protocol mode and parallel operation of up to 4 CPs • Implementation in Motion Control applications is possible because equidistant mode is supported • The appropriate OPC server and configuration tools are included in the scope of supply of the respective communication software

• Fastest possible access to process data through dual port RAM • OPC as standard interface • Process-consistent data from a DP cycle • Direct connection to the optical PROFIBUS through integrated FOC interface • Higher computing performance in the PC by relieving the host CPU • Fast commissioning through Plug&Play and diagnostic tools • Implementation for motion control applications possible through support of the equidistant mode • Easy portability to other operating systems through a dual port RAM interface • Can also be used in high temperature industrial environments

■ Application

The CP 5613 FO provides a connection to the optical PROFIBUS for SIMATIC PG/PC and PCs with a PCI slot. The CP 5613 FO provides high-performance support for control tasks on the PC (PC based Control, Numeric Control, Robot Control).

■ Design • Short PCI card • 2 duplex sockets for connecting plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables with 2 simplex connectors each to the optical PROFIBUS • Connection of the external supply through a plug-in power supply unit. This ensures that data communication over the optical line is not interrupted when the PC is shut down. • Diagnostic LEDs • Parallel operation of max. 4 CPs 1) The module is installed using the standard PCI mechanisms (Plug&Play). When the CP 5613 FO is used as a DP master or in a PG/OP on PROFIBUS DP, the optical PROFIBUS is connected with an integrated interface using: • Plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables with simplex plugs 1) FMS-5613 supports up to 2 CP 5613/5614.


4/125

4

PROFIBUS


■ Function PROFIBUS DP

Access to process data with DP-5613

Access to process data with DP-Base

DP Master Class 1

The CP 5613 FO is operated as a PROFIBUS DP master module that stores the process image (input/output and diagnostics data) in the dual-port RAM (memory area on the CP). Highperformance data transfer to and from the PROFIBUS slaves is performed autonomously by the hardware of the CP 5613 FO. The user accesses the dual-port RAM directly.

The CP 5613 FO operates as DP Master Class 1 to IEC 61158/ EN 50170 and processes data communication with the distributed stations (DP slaves) completely autonomously. The central controller exchanges information with the DP slaves (e.g. ET 200S) in a specified, constantly repeating message cycle. The DP programming interface (DPLib.DLL) provides the PC programmer with function calls for data transfer. The DP interface also offers the SYNC and FREEZE functions as well as the activation and deactivation of slaves. The DP function expansions with respect to Master Class 1 enable acyclic read and write functions (DS_READ, DS_WRITE) and alarm acknowledgements (ALARM_ACK) to be performed in parallel with the cyclic data communication. Data that is to be transferred in acyclic mode (e.g. parameterization data) is only rarely changed in comparison to the cyclic measured values, and are transferred at lower priority in parallel with the cyclic high-speed useful data transfer. The acknowledgement of alarms by the master ensures reliable transmission of the alarms of DP slaves. DP-Base and DP 5613 software cannot be used at the same time.

The process data of the slaves are always consistent, i.e. the user receives the data of a slave from one and the same DP cycle.

4

DP-Base and the DP 5613 software cannot be operated simultaneously. Event/filter mechanism The user receives up-to-date data over two access mechanisms: • Cyclic polling of the DP slaves (higher loading for host CPU) • Notification through event/filter mode on changing the input data of a slave (minimal loading for host CPU) Both alternatives can be combined. This allows users to optimize use of the PC for their applications. The event/filter mechanism can be used additionally for • Notification by means of an interrupt of the diagnostic alarms from slaves • During operation with constant bus cycle time, signaling by means of interrupt: - start DP cycle - end cyclic data communication with DP slaves Constant bus cycle time can be set for STEP 7 V5.1 + SP2 upwards or NCM PC V5.1+SP2. DP programming interface

DP Master Class 2 Apart from the DP Master Class 1 services, the CP 5613 FO also offers DP Master Class 2 services to IEC 61158/EN 50170 in conjunction with the DP programming interface. Devices of this type (programming, configuration or control devices) are used during start-up, for configuring the DP system or for controlling the system during normal operation (diagnostics). The DP programming interface provides the following services: - master diagnostics - slave diagnostics - reading the inputs/outputs of a slave - reading configuration data and - changing slave addresses.

The DP programming interface (DP-Base) of the DP 5613 FO features the following functions: • DP Master Class 1 including acyclic DP expansions • DP Master Class 2 including acyclic expansions

The extended DP functions comprise acyclic access to the parameters and measured values of a slave (e.g. field devices of process automation and intelligent HMI devices). This type of slave must be supplied with extensive parameter data during start-up and during normal operation (DS_READ, DS_WRITE).

The process data is accessed directly through the dual-port RAM. The dual-port RAM interface not only offers fast access as DP master but also easy porting to other operating system environments (e.g. VXWorks, QNX, RMOS, RTX).

This software supports programming of the SIMATIC S5/S7 controllers (with the exception of SIMATIC S5-95U) over PROFIBUS in combination with STEP 5/STEP 7. PG/OP communication for the CP 5613 FO is available as soon as the CP 5613 (DP-Base) has been installed. No additional software packages are required.

Administrative function calls (initialization and management services) are offered in a library (DP_BASE.DLL). Development Kit DK-5613 The Development Kit DK-5613 provides access to the functions DP Master Class 1 including acyclic DP expansions The Software Development Kit DK-5613 can be used to integrate the CP 5613/CP 5614 and CP 5613 FO/CP 5614 FO communications processors into operating system environments. The kit contains the necessary source code including the descriptions in PDF format and can be downloaded free of charge from the Internet.

4/126


Software for PG/OP communication

S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE based on the FDL interface) SEND/RECEIVE (FDL interface) is already available following installation of the CP 5613 FO (DP-Base) and provides services for data transfer, diagnostics and management. No additional software packages are required.

PROFIBUS


■ Function (continued) Software for S7 communication (S7-5613)

User interfaces

SIMATIC S7 system components communicate with each other using S7 communication functions. The S7 programming interface provides programming device/PC user programs with access to SIMATIC S7 system components. This provides easy, flexible access to the data of the SIMATIC S7 controller.

OPC interface

The following services are available with S7 communication: Administrative services • Connection management • Mini database • Trace

The OPC server included in the respective software package can be used as the standard programming interface for the PROFIBUS DP, S5-compatible communication, S7 communication and PROFIBUS FMS protocols for linking automation technology applications to OPC-capable Windows applications (Office, HMI systems, etc.). Programming interface through C library

Data transfer services • Read/write variables • BSEND/BRECEIVE (up to 64 KB per task) Software for PROFIBUS FMS (FMS-5613)

The programming interfaces for existing applications are implemented as Dynamic Link Libraries (DLL). This means that the following compilers can be used in combination with the SIMATIC NET products: • Microsoft Visual C/C++ V6.0 • Microsoft Visual Basic V6.0 • Microsoft Visual C V7.x

With the FMS programming interface, PCs can exchange different manufacturer data with FMS-capable controllers (e.g. S5 and S7) and field devices. Open communication is made possible by using the FMS interface.

For Borland programming interfaces (e.g. DELPHI), partner solutions from SoftwareOption are offered.

The FMS interface offers the following services: • Administrative services • CRL management services • FMS connection management services • Object directory management services for clients and server • Variable services for clients and servers (Read, Write, Information Report) • Server functionality • VFD services (Virtual Field Device) for clients and servers • Bus access information services (Live list) • Trace and mini database

Configuration • S7 communication protocol, S5-compatible communication protocol, DP protocol (DP-V0/DP-V1/DP-V2) and FMS protocol are configured in STEP 7/NCM PC V5.1+SP2 and higher. • The configuring tool NCM PC is included in the PROFIBUS software packages. • NCM PC is a component part of Advanced PC Configuration

For solutions for other operating systems, see Development Kit DK-5613.

Diagnostics data Comprehensive diagnostic tools are available (for installation, start-up and operation) for the module itself and for the PROFIBUS network. These tools can be used for quick and easy start-up of a PROFIBUS network with a CP 5613 FO.


9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s

Interfaces


PCI card


2 x duplex socket (FO)


107 x 168


PCI (32-bit, 5 V)

• Weight

approx. 250 g


1 x PCI slot (32-bit; 5 V)

• External optical supply via standard plug-in power supply

Low-voltage socket 3.5 mm/1.3 mm

DP master

DP-V0, DP-V1 DP-V2

5 V DC +/- 5 % 12 V DC +/- 5 %

Performance data Mono protocol mode

Power supply from PCI Current consumption


max. 122

• from 5 V DC

1.4 A

• Number of FDL tasks waiting

max. 120

• from 12 V DC

0.3 A

max. 50 1)

Power loss

7W


Supply voltage (optional)

9 … 12 V DC


max. 40 2)

• Current consumption

0.4 A

• Power loss

3.6 … 4.8 W

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature - without fan - with fan (airflow 0.5 m/s)

+5 °C … +40 °C +5 °C … +60 °C


- 40 °C … +70 °C


max. 95% at +25 °C



4/127

4

PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data

4

Order No.

CP 5613 FO communications processor PCI card (32 bit; 5 V) for connection to optical PROFIBUS incl. DP-Base software with NCM PC; DP-RAM interface for DP master, incl. PG and FDL protocol; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/server: Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server German/English

6GK1 561-3FA00

Development Kit DK-5613 Software Development Kit for CP 5613/CP 5614 for integration in other operating system environments on systems with a PCI slot

You can find the DK-5613 in the Internet at: http://www.siemens.de/ simatic-net/dk5613

DP-5613 Edition 2005 Software for DP, incl. PG and FDL protocol, OPC server and NCM PC; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, Windows 2000 Professional/Server, for CP 5613, CP 5613 A2, CP 5613 FO, CP 5614, CP 5614 A2, CP 5614 FO German/English

6GK1 713-5DB63-3AA0

S7-5613 Edition 2005 Software for S7 communication, incl. PG and FDL protocol, OPC server and NCM PC; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional; 2003 Server, Windows 2000 Professional/Server, for CP 5613, CP 5613 A2, CP 5613 FO, CP 5614, CP 5614 A2, CP 5614 FO; German/English

6GK1 713-5CB63-3AA0

FMS-5613 Edition 2005 Software for FMS protocol, incl. PG/OP communication, FDL, FMS-OPC server and NCM PC; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional; 2003 Server, Windows 2000 Professional/Server, for CP 5613, CP 5613 A2, CP 5613 FO, CP 5614, CP 5614 A2, CP 5614 FO; German/English

6GK1 713-5FB63-3AA0


6GK1 704-0AA00-3AA2

4/128


■ More information The DK-5613 can be found in the Internet under: Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/dk5613

PROFIBUS


■ Overview

■ Application

The CP 5614 A2 supports the connection of a SIMATIC PG/PC and PCs with a PCI slot to PROFIBUS. It can be either a DP master or a DP slave. Two different PROFIBUS networks can then be connected in a hierarchic structure on a PC with a PROFIBUS card and data can be transferred between the two. The CP 5614 A2 provides high-performance support for control tasks on the PC (PC based Control, Numeric Control, Robot Control). DP-M

DP-S

PG

S7

S5

FMS

UDP OPC

• PCI card (universal key 5 V/3.3 V) with microprocessor for system connection for PCs and SIMATIC PG/PC to PROFIBUS with up to 12 Mbit/s • Communication services: - PROFIBUS DP master and slave interface according to IEC 61158/ EN 50170 on a PCI card - PG/OP communication with STEP 5 and STEP 7 - S7 communication - S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) based on the FDL interface - PROFIBUS FMS acc. to IEC 61158/EN 50170 • Comprehensive diagnostics possibilities for installation, startup and operation of the module • High performance over direct dual-port RAM access • Event and filter mechanisms to reduce the loading on the host CPU • Multi-protocol mode and parallel operation of up to 4 CPs • Implementation of Motion Control applications is possible because an equidistant mode is supported • The appropriate OPC server and configuration tools are included in the scope of supply of the respective communication software

■ Benefits

• • • • • • • • • •

Only one slot is necessary for master and slave Fast access to process data over dual-port RAM OPC as standard interface Consistent process data from a DP cycle More computing power is available in the PG/PC by taking the load off the host CPU Fast start-up through Plug&Play and diagnostic tools Implementation in Motion Control applications is possible because an equidistant mode is supported Simple porting to other operating system environments through dual port RAM interface Implementation is even possible in an industrial environment at high temperatures. Can be used flexibly in PG/PC due to PCI 3.3/5V, 33/66 MHz and compatibility to 64-bit PCI-X slot

■ Design • • • • • • •

Short PCI card Suitable for 3.3 V and 5 V PCI slots (universal key) 33 MHz or 66 MHz PCI cycle Can be used as a 32-bit card in a 64-bit PCI-X slot 2 x 9-pin Sub-D socket for connection to PROFIBUS Diagnostic LEDs Parallel operation of max. 4 CPs 1)

The module is installed using the standard PCI mechanisms (Plug&Play). The electrical PROFIBUS is connected using • Bus connector and PROFIBUS cable or • Bus terminal (e.g. bus terminal 12 M) and PROFIBUS bus cable The optical PROFIBUS is connected using • Bus cable with 2 bus connectors or • PROFIBUS connecting cable 830-1 to an OLM. Connection to the optical PROFIBUS with integrated interface and OBT is implemented using • Bus cable with 2 bus connectors or • PROFIBUS connecting cable 830-1T to an OLM. When the CP 5614 A2 is used as a DP master, DP slave or in a PG/OP on PROFIBUS DP, the optical PROFIBUS is connected with an integrated interface and OBT using: • Bus cable with 2 bus connectors or • PROFIBUS connecting cable 830-1T to an optical bus terminal (OBT) for PROFIBUS DP. 1) FMS-5613 supports up to 2 CP 5613 A2/5614 A2.


4/129

4

PROFIBUS


■ Function PROFIBUS DP Access to process data The CP 5614 A2 is operated as a PROFIBUS DP master and DP slave module that stores the process image (input/output and diagnostics data) in the dual-port RAM. High-performance data transfer to and from the PROFIBUS slaves is performed autonomously by the hardware of the CP 5614 A2. The user accesses the dual-port RAM directly.

Parallel operation of the DP-5613 (DP master) and DP Base (DP master, DP slave) software is not possible.

SIMATIC S7-400 controller (DP master)

Programming device

4

The process data of the slaves is always consistent, i.e. the user receives the data of a slave from one and the same DP cycle.

Non-Siemens systems

PROFIBUS DP

PC

DP-Master DP-Slave

Robot control

CP 5614 A2

ET 200pro ET 200S

ET 200S

ET 200M

G_IK10_XX_50021

PROFIBUS DP

CP 5613 A2 example configuration as DP master and DP slave

Event filter mechanism

FastLogic

The user receives up-to-date data over two access mechanisms: • Cyclic polling of the DP slaves (high loading for host CPU) • Notification through a new type of event/filter mode on changing the input data of a slave (minimal loading for host CPU)

FastLogic means that the CP 5614 A2 can react autonomously to 4 plant statuses. This results in a short response time and independence from the host application, e.g. fast shutdown of devices.

Both alternatives can be combined. This allows users to optimize use of the PC for their applications. The event/filter mechanism can be used additionally for • Notification by means of an interrupt of the diagnostic alarms from slaves • During operation with constant bus cycle time, signaling by means of interrupt: - start DP cycle - end cyclic data communication with DP slaves

4/130


PROFIBUS


■ Function (continued) DP programming interface

DP Master Class 2

The DP master programming interfaces of the CP 5613 A2 and CP 5614 A2 are identical.

Apart from the DP Master Class 1 services, the CP 5614 A2 also offers DP Master Class 2 services to IEC 61158/EN 50170 in conjunction with the DP programming interface. Devices of this type (programming, configuration or operating devices) are used during start-up, for configuring the DP system or for operating the system during normal operation (diagnostics). The DP programming interface provides the following services: • Master diagnostics • Slave diagnostics • Reading the inputs/outputs of a slave • Reading the configuration data • Changing slave addresses.

The DP programming interface of the CP 5614 A2 features the following functions: • DP slave • DP Master Class 1 including acyclic DP expansions • DP Master Class 2 including acyclic DP expansions The process data is accessed directly through the dual-port RAM. The DP RAM interface not only offers fast access as DP master/slave but also a basis for porting to other operating system environments (e.g. VXWorks, QNX, RMOS, RTX). Administrative function calls (initialization and management services as well as diagnostic functions) are provided through a DP master and DP slave library (DP_BASE.DLL and DPS_BASE.DLL). A transfer mechanism (PC application) can be activated in the software as a linking component for data transfer between the master and slave interface. Defined I/O data can be transferred in this manner between the master interface and the slave interface. The two connected PROFIBUS networks can be operated with different PROFIBUS bus parameters because they are independent of each other. Development Kit DK-5613 The Development Kit DK-5613 provides access to the functions DP Master Class 1 and DP slave (incl. acyclic DP expansions) The Software Development Kit DK-5613 is used to integrate the CP 5613 A2 and CP 5614 A2 communications processors into any operating system environment. The kit contains the necessary source code including the descriptions in PDF format and can be downloaded free of charge from the Internet. Access to process data with DP-5613 DP Master Class 1 The CP 5614 A2 operates as a DP Master Class 1 according to IEC 61158/EN 50170 and processes data communication with the distributed stations (DP slaves) completely autonomously. The central controller exchanges information with the DP slaves (e.g. ET 200S) in a fixed, repeating message cycle. The DP programming interface (DPLib.DLL) provides the PC programmer with function calls for data transfer. The DP interface also provides the SYNC and FREEZE functions as well as activation and deactivation of slaves. The DP function expansions for Master Class 1 make it possible to perform acyclic read and write functions (DS_READ, DS_WRITE) as well as acknowledgement of alarms (ALARM_ACK) at the same time as processing cyclic data communication. Data that is to be transferred in non-isochronous mode (e.g. parameterization data) is only rarely changed, in comparison to the cyclic measured values, and are transferred at lower priority in parallel with the cyclic high-speed useful data transfer. Alarm acknowledgement by the master ensures reliable transfer of the alarms from DP slaves (DS_READ, DS_WRITE, DS_DATA_TRANSPORT).

The extended DP functions comprise acyclic access to the parameters and measured values of a slave (e.g. field devices of process automation and intelligent HMI devices). This type of slave must be supplied with extensive parameter data during start-up and during normal operation. (DS_READ, DS_WRITE). Software for PG/OP communication This software supports programming of the SIMATIC S5/S7 controllers (with the exception of SIMATIC S5-95U) over PROFIBUS in combination with STEP 5/STEP 7. PG/OP communication for the CP 5614 A2 is already available after the CP 5614 A2 (DP-Base) has been installed. No additional software packages are required. S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE based on the FDL interface) SEND/RECEIVE (FDL interface) is already available following installation of the CP 5614 A2 (DP-Base) and provides services for data transfer, diagnostics and management. No additional software packages are required. Software for S7 communication (S7-5613) SIMATIC S7 system components communicate with each other using S7 communication functions. The S7 programming interface provides programming device/PC user programs with access to SIMATIC S7 system components. This provides easy, flexible access to the data of the SIMATIC S7 controller. The following services are available with S7 communication: Administrative services • Connection management • Mini database • Trace Data transfer services • Read/write variables • BSEND/BRECEIVE (up to 64 KB per task)

Parallel operation of the DP-Base und DP-5613 software is not possible.


4/131

4

PROFIBUS


■ Function (continued) User interfaces

With the FMS programming interface, PG/PCs can exchange different manufacturer data with FMS-capable controllers (e.g. S5 and S7) and field devices. Open communication is assured by using the FMS interface.

OPC interface

The FMS interface offers the following services: • Administrative services • CRL management services • FMS connection management services • Object directory management services for clients and server • Variable services for clients and servers (Read, Write, Information Report) • Server functionality • VFD services (Virtual Field Device) for clients and servers • Bus access information services (Live list) • Trace and mini database

The OPC server included in the respective software package can be used as the standard programming interface for the PROFIBUS DP (DP master and DP slave), S5-compatible communication, S7 communication and PROFIBUS FMS protocols for linking automation technology applications to OPC-capable Windows applications (Office, HMI systems, etc.). Programming interface through C library The programming interfaces for existing applications are implemented as Dynamic Link Libraries (DLL). This means that the following compilers can be used in combination with the SIMATIC NET products: • Microsoft Visual C/C++ V6.0 • Microsoft Visual Basic V6.0 • Microsoft Visual C V7.x For Borland programming interfaces (e.g. DELPHI) partner solutions from the AIXO company are offered. For solutions for other operating systems, see DK-5613 Development Kit. Configuring • S7 communication protocol, S5-compatible communication protocol, DP protocol (DP-V0/DP-V1/DP-V2) and FMS protocol are configured in STEP 7 or NCM PC V5.1+SP2 and higher. • The configuration tool NCM PC is included in the PROFIBUS software packages. • NCM PC is a component part of Advanced PC Configuration. Diagnostics Comprehensive diagnostic tools are available (for installation, start-up and operation) for the module itself and for the PROFIBUS DP network. These tools can be used for quick and easy start-up of a PROFIBUS DP network with a CP 5614 A2.

Programming device with CP 5613 A2

SIMATIC S7-300 with CP 342-5 (DP master)

PROFIBUS DP slave

Transfer mechanism

RS 485 DP master

PROFIBUS

CP 5614 A2 Distributed I/O

SIMATIC ET 200M

Configuration example for CP 5614 A2

4/132


SIMATIC ET 200S

G_IK10_XX_50110

4

Software for PROFIBUS FMS (FMS-5613)

PROFIBUS




Interfaces • Connection to PROFIBUS DP (master)

9-pin Sub-D socket

• Connection to PROFIBUS DP (slave)

9-pin Sub-D socket


PCI (32 bit; 3.3 V/5 V; universal keyed; 33/66 MHz)

Supply voltage (from PCI)

5 V DC ± -5 %


approx. 0.9 A

Power loss

approx. 4.5 W


+5 °C to +50 °C


-40 °C to +70 °C


max. 85 % at + 30 °C


Short PCI card


107 x 168

• Weight

approx. 120 g


1 x PCI slot (32 bit; 3.3 V/5 V; universal keyed; 33/66 MHz)

DP master

DP-V0, DP-V1, DP-V2

DP slave

DP-V0, DP-V1

Performance data Mono-protocol operation • Number of connectable DP slaves

max. 124

• Data area of the slave interface: Input data, output data, diagnostics data

244 byte each

• Number of parallel FDL tasks waiting

max. 120


max. 50 1)


max. 40 2)


■ More information The DK-5613 can be found in the Internet at: Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/dk5613

Order No.

CP 5614 A2 communications processor PCI card (32-bit; 3.3 V/5 V) master and slave connection to PROFIBUS incl. DP-Base software with NCM PC; DP-RAM interface for DP master, incl. PG and FDL protocol; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server German/English

6GK1 561-4AA01

Development Kit DK-5613 Software development kit for CP 5613/CP 5614/CP 5613 A2/ CP 5614 A2/CP 5613 FO/ CP 5614 FO for integration in other operating system environments on systems with a PCI slot

See http://www.siemens.com/ simatic-net/dk5613

DP-5613 Edition 2005 Software for DP, incl. PG and FDL protocol, OPC server and NCM PC; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server, Windows XP Professional; 2003 Server, for CP 5613, CP 5613 A2, CP 5613 FO, CP 5614, CP 5614 A2, CP 5614 FO German/English

6GK1 713-5DB63-3AA0

S7-5613 Edition 2005 Software for S7 communication, incl. PG and FDL protocol, OPC server and NCM PC; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server, for CP 5613, CP 5613 A2, CP 5613 FO, CP 5614, CP 5614 A2, CP 5614 FO German/English

6GK1 713-5CB63-3AA0

FMS-5613 Edition 2005 Software for FMS protocol, incl. PG/OP communication, FDL, FMSOPC server and NCM PC; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server, Windows XP Professional; 2003 Server, for CP 5613, CP 5613 A2, CP 5613 FO, CP 5614, CP 5614 A2, CP 5614 FO German/English

6GK1 713-5FB63-3AA0


6GK1 500-0FC00


6GK1 500-0AA10


6GK1 704-0AA00-3AA2


4/133

4

PROFIBUS


■ Overview

■ Benefits

4 DP-M

DP-S

PG

S7

S5

FMS

UDP OPC

• PCI card with microprocessor for system connection for PCs and SIMATIC PGs/PC to the electrical and optical PROFIBUS at up to 12 Mbit/s • Integral fiber-optic interface for FO direct connection; can be operated as a DP master or DP slave as required • Communication services: - PROFIBUS DP master and slave interface according to IEC 61158/ EN 50170 on a PCI card - PG/OP communication with STEP 5 and STEP 7 - S7 communication - S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) based on FDL - PROFIBUS FMS acc. to IEC 61158/EN 50170 • Comprehensive diagnostics possibilities for installation, startup and operation of the module • High performance over direct dual-port RAM access • Event and filter mechanisms to reduce the loading on the host CPU • Multi-protocol mode and parallel operation of up to 4 CPs • Implementation in Motion Control applications is possible because an equidistant mode is supported • The appropriate OPC server and configuration tools are included in the scope of supply of the respective communication software

• Only one slot is necessary for master and slave • Direct connection to the optical PROFIBUS through the integral fiber-optic interface • Fast access to process data over dual-port RAM • OPC as standard interface • Consistent process data from a DP cycle • More computing power is available in the PC by taking the load off the host CPU • Fast start-up through Plug&Play and diagnostic tools • Simple porting to other operating system environments through dual port RAM interface • Implementation in Motion Control applications is possible because an equidistant mode is supported • Implementation is even possible in an industrial environment at high temperatures. • Flexible implementation thanks to selectable assignment of the optical and electrical interface to the master and slave

■ Application

The CP 5614 FO supports the connection of SIMATIC PG/PC with a PCI slot to PROFIBUS. It can be either a DP master or a DP slave. Two different PROFIBUS networks can then be connected in a hierarchic structure on a PC with a PROFIBUS card and data can be transferred between the two. The CP 5614 FO provides high-performance support for control tasks on the PC (PC based Control, Numeric Control, Robot Control).

■ Design • Short PCI card • 2 duplex sockets for connecting plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables with 2 simplex connectors each to the optical PROFIBUS • 9-pin Sub-D socket for connection to PROFIBUS • Connection of the external supply through a plug-in power supply unit. This ensures that data communication over the optical line is not interrupted when the PC is shut down. • Diagnostics LEDs • Parallel operation of max. 4 CPs 1). • A software switch can be used to change the assignment of the master and slave to the optical and electrical interface. The module is installed using the standard PCI mechanisms (Plug&Play). When the CP 5614 FO is used as a DP master, DP slave or in a PG/OP on PROFIBUS DP, it is connected with an integrated interface and OBT using: • Plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables with simplex plugs. 1) FMS-5613 supports up to 2 CP 5613/5614.

4/134


PROFIBUS


■ Function PROFIBUS DP

Development Kit DK-5613

Access to process data

The Development Kit DK-5613 provides access to the functions DP Master Class 1 and DP slave (incl. acyclic DP expansions)

The CP 5614 FO is operated as a PROFIBUS DP master and DP slave module that stores the process image (input/output and diagnostics data) in the dual-port RAM. High-performance data transfer to and from the PROFIBUS slaves is performed autonomously by the hardware of the CP 5614 FO. The user accesses the dual-port RAM directly.

The DK-5613 Software Development Kit is used to integrate the CP 5613 and CP 5614 communications processors into any operating system environment. The kit contains the necessary source code including the descriptions in PDF format and can be downloaded free of charge from the Internet.

The process data of the slaves are always consistent, i.e. the user receives the data of a slave from one and the same DP cycle.

Access to process data with DP-5613

Parallel operation of DP 5613 (DP master) and DP Base (DP master, DP slave) is not possible.

The CP 5614 FO operates as a DP Master Class 1 according to IEC 61158/EN 50170 and processes data communication with the distributed stations (DP slaves) completely autonomously. The central controller exchanges information with the DP slaves (e.g. ET 200S) in a fixed, repeating message cycle. The DP programming interface (DPLib.DLL) provides the PC programmer with function calls for data transfer. The DP interface also provides the SYNC and FREEZE functions as well as activation and deactivation of slaves.

Event/filter mechanism The user receives up-to-date data over two access mechanisms: • Cyclic polling of the DP slaves (higher loading for host CPU) • Notification through event/filter mode on changing the input data of a slave (minimal loading for host CPU). Both alternatives can be combined. This allows users to optimize use of the PC for their applications. The event/filter mechanism can be used additionally for • Notification by means of an interrupt of the diagnostic alarms from slaves • During operation with constant bus cycle time, signaling by means of interrupt: - start DP cycle - end cyclic data communication with DP slaves Constant bus cycle time can be set for STEP 7 V5.1 and higher or NCM PC V5.1+SP2. DP programming interface The DP programming interfaces of the CP 5614 and CP 5614 FO are identical. The DP programming interface of the CP 5614 FO features the following functions: • DP slave • DP Master Class 1 including acyclic DP expansions • DP Class 2 including acyclic expansions The process data is accessed directly through the dual-port RAM. The dual-port RAM interface not only offers fast access as DP master/slave, but also easy porting to other operating system environments (e.g. VXWorks, QNX, RMOS, RTX).

DP Master Class 1

The DP function expansions for Master Class 1 make it possible to perform acyclic read and write functions (DS_READ, DS_WRITE) as well as acknowledgement of alarms (ALARM_ACK) at the same time as processing cyclic data communication. Data that is to be transferred in acyclic mode (e.g. parameterization data) is only rarely changed, in comparison to the cyclic measured values, and are transferred at lower priority in parallel with the cyclic high-speed useful data transfer. Alarm acknowledgement by the master ensures reliable transfer of the alarms from DP slaves (DS_READ, DS_WRITE). DP-Base and the DP 5613 software cannot be operated simultaneously. DP Master Class 2 Apart from the DP Master Class 1 services, the CP 5614 FO also offers DP Master Class 2 services to IEC 61158/EN 50170 in conjunction with the DP programming interface. Devices of this type (programming, configuration or operating devices) are used during start-up, for configuring the DP system or for operating the system during normal operation (diagnostics). The DP programming interface provides the following services: • Master diagnostics • Slave diagnostics • Reading the inputs/outputs of a slave • Reading configuration data and • Changing slave addresses.

Administrative function calls (initialization and management services as well as diagnostic functions) are provided through a DP master and DP slave library (DP_BASE.DLL and DPS_BASE.DLL).

The extended DP functions comprise acyclic access to the parameters and measured values of a slave (e.g. field devices of process automation and intelligent HMI devices). This type of slave must be supplied with extensive parameter data during start-up and during normal operation. (DS_READ, DS_WRITE).

A transfer mechanism (PC application) can be activated in the software as a linking component for data transfer between the master and slave interface.

Software for PG/OP communication

Defined I/O data can be transferred in this manner between the master interface and the slave interface. The two connected PROFIBUS networks can be operated with different PROFIBUS bus parameters because they are independent of each other.

This software supports programming of the SIMATIC S5/S7 controllers (with the exception of SIMATIC S5-95U) over PROFIBUS in combination with STEP 5/STEP 7. PG/OP communication for the CP 5614 FO is available as soon as the CP 5614 (DP-Base) has been installed. No additional software packages are required.


4/135

4

PROFIBUS


■ Function (continued) S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE based on the FDL interface) SEND/RECEIVE (FDL interface) is already available following installation of the CP 5614 FO (DP-Base) and provides services for data transfer, diagnostics and management. No additional software packages are required. Software for S7 communication (S7-5613)

4

SIMATIC S7 system components communicate with each other using S7 communication functions. The S7 programming interface provides programming device/PC user programs with access to SIMATIC S7 system components. This provides easy, flexible access to the data of the SIMATIC S7 controller. The following services are available with S7 communication: Administrative services • Connection management • Mini database • Trace Data transfer services • Read/write variables • BSEND/BRECEIVE (up to 64 KB per task) Software for PROFIBUS FMS (FMS-5613) With the FMS programming interface, PCs can exchange different manufacturer data with FMS-capable controllers (e.g. S5 and S7) and field devices. Open communication is assured by using the FMS interface. The FMS interface offers the following services: • Administrative services • CRL management services • FMS connection management services • Object directory management services for clients and server • Variable services for clients and servers (Read, Write, Information Report) • Server functionality • VFD services (Virtual Field Device) for clients and servers • Bus access information services (Live list) • Trace and mini database

4/136


User interfaces OPC interface The OPC server included in the respective software package can be used as the standard programming interface for the PROFIBUS DP (DP master and DP slave), S5-compatible communication, S7 communication and PROFIBUS FMS protocols for linking automation technology applications to OPC-capable Windows applications (Office, HMI systems, etc.). Programming interface through C library The programming interfaces for existing applications are implemented as Dynamic Link Libraries (DLL). This means that the following compilers can be used in combination with the SIMATIC NET products: • Microsoft Visual C/C++ V6.0 • Microsoft Visual Basic V6.0 • Microsoft Visual C V7.x For Borland programming interfaces (e.g. DELPHI) partner solutions from the company SolutionOption are offered. For solutions for other operating systems, see DK-5613 Development Kit. Configuration • S7 communication protocol, S5-compatible communication protocol, DP protocol (DP V0/DP V1/DP V2) and FMS protocol are configured in STEP 7/NCM PC V5.1+SP2 and higher. • The configuration tool NCM PC is included in the PROFIBUS software packages. • NCM PC is a component part of Advanced PC Configuration. Diagnostics data Comprehensive diagnostic tools are available (for installation, start-up and operation) for the module itself and for the PROFIBUS network. These tools can be used for quick and easy start-up of a PROFIBUS network with a CP 5614 FO.

PROFIBUS


■ Function (continued) Programming device with CP 5613 FO

SIMATIC S7-300 with CP 342-5 FO

Optical PROFIBUS DP slave

Transfer mechanism

FO DP master

RS 485

4

Switchable

PROFIBUS

CP 5614 FO

SIMATIC ET 200M

G_IK10_XX_50109

Distributed I/O

SIMATIC ET 200S

Configuration example for CP 5614 FO


9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s

Interface basic setting


PCI card

• PROFIBUS master



107 x 168

• PROFIBUS slave

9-pin Sub-D socket

• Weight

approx. 300 g


1 x PCI slot

DP master

DP-V0, DP-V1 DP-V2

DP slave

DP V0, DP V1

Interfaces can be switched via software call • PROFIBUS master

9-pin Sub-D socket

• PROFIBUS slave



PCI (32-bit; 5 V)

• External supply (optional) via standard plug-in power supply

Low-voltage socket 3.5 mm/1.3 mm

Power supply (from PCI)

5 V DC +/- 5 % 12 V DC +/- 5 %

Current consumption

Performance data Mono protocol mode • Number of connectable DP slaves

max. 122

• Data area of the slave interface: Input data, output data, diagnostics data

244 byte each


max. 120 max. 50 1) max. 40 2)

• from 5 V DC

1.6 A


• from 12 V DC

0.3 A


Power loss

8W

Supply voltage (optional) external supply

9 to 12 V DC

• Current consumption

0.4 A


• Power loss

3.6 to 4.8 W

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature - without fan - with fan (airflow 0.5 m/s)

+5 °C … +40 °C +5 °C … +60 °C


- 40 °C … +70 °C


max. 95% at +25 °C


4/137

PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data

4

Order No.

CP 5614 FO communications processor PCI card (32-bit; 5 V) master and slave connection to electrical and optical PROFIBUS incl. DP-Base software with NCM PC; DP-RAM interface for DP master, incl. PG and FDL protocol; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, German/English

6GK1 561-4FA00

Development Kit DK-5613 Software development kit for CP 5613 A2/CP 5614 A2/ CP 5613 FO/CP 5614 FO for integration in other operating system environments on systems with a PCI slot

You can find the DK-5613 in the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/ simatic-net/dk5613

DP-5613 Edition 2005 Software for DP, incl. PG and FDL protocol, OPC server and NCM PC; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, for CP 5613, CP 5613 A2, CP 5613 FO, CP 5614, CP 5614 A2, CP 5614 FO; German/English

6GK1 713-5DB63-3AA0

S7-5613 Edition 2005 Software for S7 communication, incl. PG and FDL protocol, OPC server and NCM PC; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, for CP 5613, CP 5613 A2, CP 5613 FO, CP 5614, CP 5614 A2, CP 5614 FO; German/English

6GK1 713-5CB63-3AA0

FMS-5613 Edition 2005 Software for FMS protocol, incl. PG/OP communication, FDL, FMS-OPC server and NCM PC; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional; incl. V6.0 for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, for CP 5613, CP 5613 A2, CP 5613 FO, CP 5614, CP 5614 A2, CP 5614 FO; German/English

6GK1 713-5FB63-3AA0

4/138


Order No. PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector RS 485 Plug 180

6GK1 500-0FC00

PROFIBUS bus terminal 12M

6GK1 500-0AA10

PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic, simplex plug/polishing set

6GK1 901-0FB00-0AA0

PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic, Stripping Tool Set

6GK1 905-6PA10

Plug-in adapter • 50 units

6ES7 195-1BE00-0XA0

SIMATIC NET Software Update Service For Industrial Ethernet, PROFIBUS, OPC server, for one year service incl. manuals on CD-ROM, requirements: SIMATIC NET PC/Windows products German/English

6GK1 704-0AA00-3AA2

■ More information The DK-5613 can be found in the Internet at: Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/dk5613

PROFIBUS


■ Overview

■ Application

The CP 5512 is used to connect programming devices and notebook computers with a PC card slot for CardBus (32 bit) to PROFIBUS and to the multipoint MPI interface of SIMATIC S7.

■ Design

4

• PC card Typ II for CardBus (32 bit) • Adapter with 9-pin Sub-D connector for connection to PROFIBUS DP-M

DP-S

PG

S7

S5

FMS

UDP OPC

• For connecting programming devices, PCs and notebook computers with a PC slot (CardBus 32 bit) to PROFIBUS and the MPI of SIMATIC S7 • Communication services: - PROFIBUS DP Master Class 1 including acyclic DP expansions with SOFTNET-DP - PROFIBUS DP Master Class 2 including acyclic DP expansions with SOFTNET-DP - PROFIBUS DP slave with SOFTNET-DP slave - PG/OP communication - S7 communication with SOFTNET-S7 - S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE based on the FDL interface) with SOFTNET-DP or SOFTNET-S7 • PC card Type II (CardBus 32 bit); for programming device/PC with PC card slot and notebook computers - Can be used with: STEP 7 and NCM PC; (ProTool, Micro/Win, ProTool/Pro, SIMATIC PDM for PG/OP communication) - SOFTNET-S7 (for S7 communication) - SOFTNET-DP, SOFTNET-DP slave (for DP) • The appropriate OPC servers are included in the scope of supply of the respective communication software

■ Benefits

• Connection for notebooks or other portable PCs to PROFIBUS (e.g. for diagnostics and commissioning) • Easy installation and commissioning • Optimized for SOFTNET. • OPC as standard interface • Uniform procedure and configuration functionality with NCM PC and STEP 7.

■ Function Various different software packages can be used to operate the CP 5512 and it allows the user to execute programming device functions and PC functions over PROFIBUS and the multipoint interface MPI. Only one CP can be used per programming device, PG/PC or notebook computer. Similarly only one protocol (PROFIBUS DP, S7 communication or FDL) can be used per CP. The following software packages support the CP 5512: • STEP 7 V5.2 and higher; drivers for the CP 5512 that execute under Windows 2000 Professional and XP Professional are included in the scope of supply of STEP 7. • SOFTNET-S7 V6.1 and higher; with this package, the S7 programming interface under Windows XP Professional can be used (Windows 2000 Professional from SOFTNET-S7 V6.1 SP1 upwards). • SOFTNET-DP V6.1 and higher; the CP 5512 can be used as a PROFIBUS DP Master Class 1 or 2 under Windows XP Professional (Windows 2000 Professional from SOFTNET-DP V6.1 SP1 upwards). • SOFTNET-DP slave V6.1 and higher; for using the CP 5512 as a PROFIBUS DP slave under Windows XP Professional (Windows 2000 Professional from SOFTNET-DP slave V6.1 SP1 upwards). • STEP 7-Micro/WIN V3.2 SP4 and higher; hardware basis for the programming software of the SIMATIC S7-200 programmable controller. • ProTool, ProTool/Pro V6.0 SP2; the CP 5512 can be used as a hardware basis for the configuration tool for SIMATIC Operator Panels, Touch Panels and Text Displays. • NCM PC V5.2 and higher; under Windows XP Professional • SIMATIC PDM; drivers for the CP 5512 that execute under Windows 2000 Professional and XP Professional are included in the scope of supply of SIMATIC PDM.


4/139

PROFIBUS







PC Card Type II (CardBus 32 bit);

Supply voltage

3.0 V to 3.6 V DC

Current consumption

Typ. 520 mA

Power loss

1.8 W

Perm. environmental conditions

4


+5°C to +45°C


-20 °C to +60 °C


95% at +25 °C


PC card Typ II for CardBus (32 bit)


54 x 85 x 5

• Weight - without adapter - with adapter

approx. 30 g approx. 130 g

• Space required

1 x PC Card slot Type II (CardBus 32 bit)

DP master

DP V0, DP V1 (with SOFTNET DP)

DP slave

DP V0, DP V1 (with SOFTNET DP slave)

4/140


Order No.

CP 5512 communications processor PC card (CardBus, 32-bit) for connecting a programming device or Notebook computer to PROFIBUS or MPI, with 32-bit Windows XP Professional/ Windows 2000 Professional, executable under 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional and Windows XP Professional in conjunction with STEP 7 V5.2; German/English

6GK1 551-2AA00

SOFTNET-S7 Edition 2005 Software for S7 communication incl. FDL protocol with OPC server and NCM PC single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server, Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, for CP 5512, CP 5611, CP 5611 A2; German/English

6GK1 704-5CW63-3AA0

SOFTNET-DP Edition 2005 Software for DP protocol (Master Classes 1 and 2), incl. FDL protocol with OPC server and NCM PC; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server, Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, for CP 5512, CP 5611, CP 5611 A2; German/English

6GK1 704-5DW63-3AA0

SOFTNET-DP Slave Edition 2005 Software for DP slave, with DP OPC server and NCM PC, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server, Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, for CP 5512, CP 5611, CP 5611 A2; German/English

6GK1 704-5SW63-3AA0


6GK1 500-0FC00

PROFIBUS adapter for CP 5512

C79459-A1890-A10

SIMATIC NET Software Update Service For Industrial Ethernet, PROFIBUS, OPC server, for one year warranty incl. manuals on CD-ROM Prerequisite: SIMATIC NET PC/Windows products; German/English

6GK1 704-0AA00-3AA2

PROFIBUS


■ Overview

■ Application

The CP 5611 A2 is used to connect programming devices and PCs to PROFIBUS and to the multipoint MPI interface of SIMATIC S7: • for programming devices and PCs with a PCI slot

■ Design

DP-M

DP-S

PG

S7

S5

FMS

UDP OPC

• • • • •

Short PCI card Operation possible in 3.3 V and 5 V PCI slots (universal key) 33 MHz or 66 MHz PCI clock Operation possible as 32-bit card in a 64-bit PCI X-slot 9-pin Sub-D socket for connection to PROFIBUS

■ Function • PCI card (universal key 5 V/3.3 V) for connecting PCs and SIMATIC PG/PC to PROFIBUS up to 12 Mbit/s and to the MPI interface of SIMATIC S7 • Communication services: - PROFIBUS DP Master Class 1 including acyclic DP expansions with SOFTNET-DP - PROFIBUS DP Master Class 2 including acyclic DP expansions with SOFTNET-DP - PROFIBUS DP slave with SOFTNET-DP slave - PG/OP communication - S7 communication with SOFTNET-S7 - S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE based on the FDL interface) with SOFTNET-DP or SOFTNET-S7 • Can be used with: - STEP 7, STEP 7-Micro/Win, ProTool, ProTool/Pro, SIMATIC PDM (for PG/OP communication) - COM PROFIBUS - SOFTNET-S7 (for S7 communication) - SOFTNET-DP, SOFTNET-DP slave (for DP) • The appropriate OPC server and configuration tools are included in the scope of supply of the respective communication software

■ Benefits

• Interface for portable PCs (e.g. for diagnostics and commissioning) • Easy installation and startup • Optimally matched to SOFTNET • OPC as standard interface • Uniform procedure and configuration functions for NCM PC and STEP 7 • Flexible use possible in PG/PC through PCI 3.3/5 V, 33/66 MHz and compatibility with 64-bit PCI X-slot

Various software packages can be used to operate the CP 5611 A2, which allows the user to execute programming device functions and PC functions over PROFIBUS and the multipoint interface MPI. Only one CP can be used per PG or PC. Similarly only one protocol (PROFIBUS DP, S7 communication or FDL) can be used per CP. The following software packages support the CP 5611 A2: • STEP 7 V3.2 and higher; drivers for the CP 5611 A2 are included in the scope of supply of STEP 7. • SOFTNET-S7 V3.2 and higher; this package allows the S7 programming interface to be used. • SOFTNET-DP V3.2 and higher; the CP 5611 A2 can be used as a PROFIBUS DP Master Class 1 or 2. • SOFTNET DP slave V3.2 and higher; for using the CP 5611 A2 as a PROFIBUS DP slave. • COM PROFIBUS V3.3 and higher; the CP 5611 A2 can be used in combination with this package for start-up or diagnostics (DP online functions) for PROFIBUS DP systems. • STEP 7-Micro/WIN V2.1 and higher; hardware basis for the programming software of SIMATIC S7-200 automation systems • ProTool, ProTool/Pro; the CP 5611 A2 can be used as a hardware basis for the configuration tool for all SIMATIC Operator Panels, Touch Panels and Text Displays. • NCM PC; drivers for the CP 5611 A2 are included in the scope of supply.


4/141

4

PROFIBUS





9-pin Sub-D socket


PCI (32 bit, 3.3 V/5 V; universal key; 33/66 MHz)

Power supply

+5 V DC ± 5 %

Current consumption

0.5 A

Power loss

2.0 W


4


+5 °C to +40 °C


-20 °C to +60 °C


max. 95% at +25 °C


PCI card


102 x 130

• Weight

approx. 100 g


1 x PCI slot (32 bit, 3.3 V/5 V; universal key; 33/66 MHz)

DP master

DP-V0, DP-V1 with SOFTNET-DP

DP slave

DP-V0, DP-V1 with SOFTNET-DP slave

4/142


Order No.

CP 5611 A2 communications processor PCI card (32 bit) for connection of a programming device or PC to PROFIBUS

6GK1 561-1AA01

CP 5611 MPI communications processor Comprising a PCI card (32 bit, 3.3 V/5 V, 33/66 MHZ) CP 5611 A2 and MPI cable, 5m

6GK1 561-1AM01

SOFTNET-S7 Edition 2005 Software for S7 communication incl. FDL protocol with OPC server and NCM PC single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server, Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, for CP 5512, CP 5611, CP 5611 A2; German/English

6GK1 704-5CW63-3AA0

SOFTNET-DP Edition 2005 Software for DP protocol (Master Classes 1 and 2), incl. FDL protocol with OPC server and NCM PC; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server, Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, for CP 5512, CP 5611, CP 5611 A2; German/English

6GK1 704-5DW63-3AA0

SOFTNET-DP Slave Edition 2005 Software for DP slave, with DP OPC server and NCM PC, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server, Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, for CP 5512, CP 5611, CP 5611 A2; German/English

6GK1 704-5SW63-3AA0


6GK1 500-0FC00


6GK1 500-0AA10

SIMATIC NET Software Update Service For Industrial Ethernet, PROFIBUS, OPC server, for one year warranty incl. manuals on CD-ROM Prerequisite: SIMATIC NET PC/Windows products German/English

6GK1 704-0AA00-3AA2

PROFIBUS

System interfacing for PG/PC SOFTNET for PROFIBUS

■ Overview

■ Benefits PC/PG with CP 5611 A2/ CP 5512 and SOFTNET for PROFIBUS

S5-115U to S5-155U with CP 5431 FMS/DP

DP-M

DP-S

PG

S7-300 with CP 342-5 or CP 343-5

S7

S5

FMS

S7-400 with CP 443-5

G_IK10_XX_50039

PROFIBUS

• Low-cost integration - as PROFIBUS DP Master Class 1 or Master Class 2 with SOFTNET DP - as a PROFIBUS DP slave with SOFTNET DP slave - S7 communication with SOFTNET S7 • OPC as standard interface • Uniform procedure and configuration functionality with NCM PC and STEP 7.

4

■ Application

UDP OPC

• Software for coupling PCs/programming devices and notebooks to automation systems • Can be used together with CP 5512 (PC card, CardBus 32 bit). CP 5611 A2 (PCI) and integral PROFIBUS interface of the SIMATIC PG/PC • Communication services: - PROFIBUS DP Master Class 1 and 2 with acyclic expansions - PROFIBUS DP slave - PG/OP communication - S7 communication - S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE based on the FDL interface) • The appropriate OPC servers are included in the scope of supply of the respective communication software

With SOFTNET for PROFIBUS, PCs can be connected to automation systems such as SIMATIC S7, over PROFIBUS. The following user interfaces are available: • DP protocol • PG/OP communication for SIMATIC S7 • S7 communication • S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE based on the FDL interface) SOFTNET is available for the following interfaces: • CP 5512 (PC card, CardBus 32-bit) • CP 5611 A2 (PCI card) • Integral PROFIBUS interfaces of SIMATIC PGs/PCs The operating systems that are supported are listed in the ordering data for the SOFTNET software.


4/143

PROFIBUS


■ Function Software for DP protocol (SOFTNET-DP)

The following services are available with S7 communication:

DP Master Class 1

Administrative services • Connection management • Mini database • Trace

SOFTNET-DP provides DP Master Class 1 functionality in combination with the CP 5512 or CP 5611 A2. The central controller exchanges information with the DP slaves (e.g. ET 200S) in a fixed, repeating message cycle. The DP programming interface (DPLib.DLL) provides the PC programmer with function calls for data transfer. The DP interface also provides the SYNC and FREEZE functions as well as activation and deactivation of slaves.

4

The DP function expansions for Master Class 1 make it possible to perform read and write functions (DS_READ, DS_WRITE) as well as acknowledgement of alarms (ALARM_ACK) at the same time as processing cyclic data communication. Data that is to be transferred in acyclic mode (e.g. parameterization data) is only rarely changed, in comparison to the cyclic measured values, and is transferred at lower priority in parallel with the cyclic highspeed useful data transfer. Alarm acknowledgement by the master ensures reliable transfer of the alarms from DP slaves (DS_READ, DS_WRITE). DP Master Class 2 In addition to DP Master Class 1 services, SOFTNET-DP also provides DP Master Class 2 services. Devices of this type are used (programming, configuration or control devices) during start-up, for configuring the DP system or for controlling the plant during normal operation (diagnostics). The DP programming interface provides the following services: Reading master diagnostics, slave diagnostics, inputs/outputs of a slave, configuration data and modifying slave addresses. These extended DP functions comprise acyclic access to the parameters and measured values of a slave (e.g. field devices of process automation and intelligent HMI devices). This type of slave must be supplied with extensive parameter data during start-up and during normal operation (DS_READ, DS_WRITE). DP slave (SOFTNET-DP slave) A DP slave is an I/O station that reads in input data and transfers output data to the I/O. The volume of input and output information is determined by the user application and can be a maximum of 122 byte each. For the slave interface, a simple example GSD file is provided that can be adapted by the user to the slave application. This GSD file can be configured using any configuration tool which complies with the PROFIBUS DP specification IEC 61158/EN 50170, e.g. STEP 7, NCM PC or COM PROFIBUS. Software for PG/OP communication Special programming device packages are not required for the CP 5512 and CP 5611 A2 because the drivers are included in the STEP 7 scope of supply.

Data transfer services • Read/write variables • BSEND/BRECEIVE (up to 64 KB per task) Software for S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE based on the FDL interface) This interface based on Layer 2 is used for communication between • PG/PC and SIMATIC S5 • PG/PC and SIMATIC S7 • PG/PC and PG/PC used SEND/RECEIVE offers the following services: • Management services • Connection establishment services • Data transfer services This interface is included in SOFTNET-DP and SOFTNET-S7. No configuration is necessary. User interfaces OPC interface The OPC server included in the respective software package can be used as the standard programming interface for the PROFIBUS DP, S5-compatible communication and S7 communication protocols for linking automation technology applications to OPC-capable Windows applications (Office, HMI systems, etc.). Programming interface through C library The programming interfaces for existing applications are implemented as Dynamic Link Libraries (DLL). This means that the following compilers can be used in combination with the SIMATIC NET products: • Microsoft Visual C/C++ Version 6.0 • Microsoft Visual Basic Version 6.0 • Microsoft Visual C V7.x For Borland programming interfaces (e.g. DELPHI), partner solutions from AIXO are offered.

Software for S7 communication (SOFTNET-S7)

Mode of operation

SIMATIC S7 system components communicate with each other using S7 communication functions. The S7 programming interface provides programming device/PC user programs with access to SIMATIC S7 system components. This provides easy, flexible access to the data of the SIMATIC S7 controller.

With SOFTNET, the complete protocol stack is processed in the PC. This architecture means that in contrast to the CP 5613 or CP 5614 products, the performance of the SOFTNET packages is dependent on the configuration or loading of the PC used. Configuration • The S7 communication protocol, S5-compatible communication protocol and DP protocol are configured in STEP 7/ NCM PC V5.1 + SP2 and higher. • The configuration tool NCM PC is included in the PROFIBUS software packages. • NCM PC is a component part of Advanced PC Configuration.

4/144


PROFIBUS



■ Ordering data CP 5511 2)

CP 5611 A2/ CP 5512


≤ 32 1)

max. 60


max. 32

max. 100

• Number of PG/OP and S7 connections - DP master - DP slave

max. 8

max. 8

Performance data Mono protocol mode

DP-V0, DP-V1 with SOFTNET-DP DP-V0, DP-V1 with SOFTNET-DP slave

1) Depends on memory available in the adapter area of the notebook 2) Predecessor module (16-bit PCMCIA) is no longer available

Order No.

SOFTNET-S7 Edition 2005 Software for S7 communication incl. FDL protocol with OPC server and NCM PC single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server, Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, for CP 5512, CP 5611 A2 German/English

6GK1 704-5CW63-3AA0

SOFTNET-DP Edition 2005 Software for DP protocol (Master Classes 1 and 2), incl. FDL protocol with OPC server and NCM PC; single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server, Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, for CP 5512, CP 5611 German/English

6GK1 704-5DW63-3AA0

SOFTNET-DP Slave Edition 2005 Software for DP slave, with DP OPC server and NCM PC, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows 2000 Professional/Server, Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, for CP 5512, CP 5611 A2 German/English

6GK1 704-5SW63-3AA0

SIMATIC NET Software Update Service For Industrial Ethernet, PROFIBUS, OPC server, for one year warranty incl. manuals on CD-ROM Prerequisite: SIMATIC NET PC/Windows products German/English

6GK1 704-0AA00-3AA2


4

4/145

PROFIBUS

System interfacing for PG/PC OPC Server for PROFIBUS

■ Overview • Standardized, open, manufacturer-independent interface • Interfacing of OPC-capable Windows applications to DP, FMS and S7-communication and S5-compatible communication functions (SEND/RECEIVE) based on the FDL interface

• OPC Scout with browser functions as OPC client and OCX Data Control • The appropriate OPC servers are included in the scope of supply of the respective communication software

PC/Windows PC SIMATIC NET OPC scout


WinCC OPC client

OPC XML Webclient

4 COM/DCOM

S7 OPC server

S5 OPC server


SNMP OPC server

OPC XML DA as web service

S7-communication

S5 compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE)

PROFINET

SNMP

DX OPC server

DP OPC server FMS OPC server

DP protocol FMS protocol

S7-400 FMS-PC

ET 200pro

System integration with the OPC serverr

■ Benefits

• Different networks and protocols can be easily used thanks to the uniform interface • Reduced training and familiarization costs • Easy interfacing in the system environment and office applications over C++, Visual Basic and .NET interfaces • Fast creation of applications • Easy handling and cost-effective because the corresponding OPC server is included in the scope of supply of the respective communications software

4/146


SIMATIC S5 (SEND/RECEIVE only)

S7-PC G_IK10_XX_50700

PROFIBUS

SIMATIC S5

Industrial Ethernet

S7-300

PROFIBUS


■ Application

OOPC (OLE for Process Control) is implemented as an expansion of the COM (Component Object Model) communications interface and DCOM (Distributed COM) for the user software. The basic principle of OPC is that OPC client applications communicate with the OPC server over a standardized, open and manufacturer-independent interface. It is also possible to connect to OPC-capable Windows applications (Microsoft Office or HMI systems) that are already available on the market. The following communications interfaces are available over OPC for PROFIBUS: • DP communication for PROFIBUS DP • DP-V0 Master Class 1 and Master Class 2 DP-V1 Master Class 1 and Master Class 2 PROFIdrive V3 interface for profile server • FMS communication for PROFIBUS FMS • S7 communication • S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) based on the FDL interface

■ Function • Open standardization of the addressing using logical names for objects from an automation component or an automation system • Supports STEP 7 symbols • Efficient data transfer from a process component to an application for further processing • One client application can use several servers simultaneously • Simultaneous execution of more than one client is possible on one OPC server • The communication protocols can be operated in parallel • Interfaces - "Custom Interface“ for high-performance C++/.NET applications - "Automation Interface" for easily created Visual Basic applications (or similar) - OCX Data Control for simple connection to Windows applications that support COM/DCOM - XML DA interface; Data access to S7 CPUs is therefore possible over the Internet. Configuration The communication parameters are configured using only the tools of the installed software Advanced PC Configuration (configuration console, SIMATIC NCM PC or STEP 7 V5.1 + SP2 and higher)

The OPC server offers: • Data Access interface 2.05 • Alarm&Event interface 1.1 • OPC XML DA interface 1.0 • Integration of automation products of different manufacturers • The same, easy user interface for different components • Can be accessed from every computer in the LAN • High-performance data access over the Custom Interface (C++, .NET) • Easy to use with the "Automation Interface" (VB, .NET) or the supplied OCX Data Control • Grouping of variables (items) which allows a large quantity of data to be processed in a short time. • Other compilers can be used over the OPC server, but the compiler must support the COM interface (Microsoft component model)


4/147

4

PROFIBUS


■ Function (continued) Application X

Application Y

WinCC OPC client

Application X OPC client

Server A

Server B

Server C

PN OPC server

S7 OPC server

FMS OPC server

DP OPC server

XY OPC server

Comparison of conventional client/server architecture with an OPC architecture


Interfaces

Product variants

include OPC servers for:

DP-5613

PROFIBUS DP, XML-DA

S7-5613

S7 communication, XML-DA

FMS-5613

FMS communication, XML-DA

SOFTNET-S7 for PROFIBUS

S7 communication, XML-DA

SOFTNET DP

PROFIBUS DP, XML-DA

• Custom Interface (C++, .NET) for high OPC performance • Automation Interface (VB, Excel, Access, Delphi, ...) for ease-of-use • Graphics with OCX for configuring instead of programming • OPC XML-Interface for Data Access

SOFTNET-DP slave

PROFIBUS DP slave, XML-DA

CP 5613 A2/5614 A2 and CP 5613 FO/5614 FO with DP-Base software

S5-compatible communication (FDL) PROFIBUS DP master, access to DP slave of the CP 5614 A2, XML-DA

• S7 communication • S5-compatible communication (SEND/RECEIVE) • PROFIBUS DP • PROFIBUS FMS

Protocols

4/148

• Synchronous and asynchronous reading and writing of variables • Monitoring of variables using the OPC server with a signal to the client when a change occurs • Use of quantity operations; so a large amount of data can be processed in a short time.


G_IK10_XX_50042

4

PROFIBUS

Connection options for SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC S7

■ Overview The following types of interfaces are supported with respect to the link between SIMATIC TP/OP/MP and SIMATIC S7. • PPI interface: Link between SIMATIC TP/OP/MP and SIMATIC S7-200 via PPI. Communication runs on the PPI protocol, a standard FB as with SIMATIC S5 is not required. • MPI interface: Link from SIMATIC TP/OP/MP to SIMATIC S7 via the integrated PPI interface with S7-200 or MPI interface with S7-300/-400 or alternatively via the MPI interface of a separate interface module and the bus backplane to the SIMATIC S7-CPU. Communication runs on the MPI protocol (PG/OP communication), a standard FB as with SIMATIC S5 is not required. • PROFIBUS interface: Link from SIMATIC TP/OP/MP to SIMATIC S7 via the integrated PROFIBUS interface of the CPU or alternatively via the PROFIBUS interface on a separate interface module and the bus backplane to the SIMATIC S7-CPU. Communication runs on the MPI protocol (PG/OP communication), a standard FB as with SIMATIC S5 is not required. • PROFINET interface: Link from SIMATIC TP/OP/MP to SIMATIC S7 via the integrated PROFINET interface on the CPU or alternatively via the Industrial Ethernet interface on a separate interface module and the bus backplane to the SIMATIC S7-CPU. Communication runs on the MPI protocol (PG/OP communication), a standard FB as with SIMATIC S5 is not required. The maximum possible number of S7 connections of one CPU is determined by its power (see Catalog ST 70); from the point of view of SIMATIC TP/OP/MPs the following restrictions apply: • TP 070, TP 170micro, OP 73micro, TP 177micro: 1 connection • OP 73: Max. 2 connections • OP 77A, TP 177A, OP 77B, TP 170A, TP 170B, TP177B, OP 170B, OP 177B, Mobile Panel 177: Max. 4 connections • TP 270, OP 270, TP 277, OP 277; Mobile Panel 277, MP 270B, MP 277, MP 370: Max. 6 connections • PC with ProTool/Pro Runtime or WinCC flexible Runtime: Max. 8 connections

PPI interface (not for TP 070, OP73micro, TP 177micro, OP 73, OP 77A, TP 177A) From the point of view of the concept, the PPI interface is a pointto-point connection between a SIMATIC TP/OP/MP (PPI master) or alternatively a PG (PPI master) and an S7-200 (PPI slave). However, a link between a SIMATIC TP/OP/MP and/or a PG and an S7-200 (sequential logic point-to-point link, i.e. from the point of view of the S7-200 only one connection is ever active at any one time) is also possible (network topology: PPI only). MPI interface/PROFIBUS interface/Industrial Ethernet interface The multipoint-capable communication interfaces of SIMATIC TP/OP/MP and SIMATIC S7 are used. Options are: • Interface between one or a number of TP/OP/MPs (MPI master) and one or a number of S7-300/400s or WinAC (MPI master). (possible network topology: MPI/PROFIBUS/Industrial Ethernet) • Interface between one or a number of TP/OP/MPs (MPI master) and one or a number of S7-200s (MPI slave) 1) (possible network topology: PPI/MPI/PROFIBUS) Unlike PPI connections, MPI connections are static connections that are set up during booting and then monitored. The original format of a master/master link has in the meantime been joined by a master/slave link, which has enabled integration of the S7-200 (except CPU 212). 1) In principle this type of information exchange between SIMATIC TP/OP/MP and SIMATIC S7 is independent of the network used, PPI, MPI, PROFIBUS or Industrial Ethernet: SIMATIC TP/OP/MPs are S7 clients and SIMATIC S7-CPUs are S7 servers. 1) Constraints with regard to baud rate for S7-200; see Catalog ST 70.


4/149

4

PROFIBUS


■ Overview (continued) PLC

SIMATIC HMI

Target hardware (PROTOCOL) (physics)

TD 200

TP 070

TP 170micro

OP73 micro TP 177micro

OP 73 OP 77A TP 177A

Connection via

via PPI on S7-200 (PPI)

■ 1)

–

■ 4)

–

–

MPI cable 7)

via MPI or PROFIBUS (PG/OP communication) with S7-200

–

■ 2)

■ 3) 4)

■ 5)

■ 6)

MPI cable 7)

via MPI or PROFIBUS (PG/OP communication) with S7-300, -400

–

–

–

–

■ 6)

MPI cable 7)

via PPI network (PPI) with max. 1 x S7-200

■ 1)

–

■ 4)

–

–

PPI network 8) (see Catalog ST 70)

via PPI network (PG/OP communication) with max. 4 x S7-200

■ 1)

–

–

■ 5)

■ 6)


vis MPI or PROFIBUS network (PG/OP communication) with max. 4 x S7-200

–

–

■ 3) 4)

■ 5)

■ 6)

MPI or PROFIBUS network 8) (see Catalog ST 70)

via MPI or PROFIBUS network (PG/OP communication) with max. 4 x S7-300, -400, WinAC

–

–

–

–

■ 6)


via Industrial Ethernet (TCP/IP) (PG/OP communication) with max. 4 x S7-200, -300, -400, WinAC

–

–

–

–

–

Industrial Ethernet

SIMATIC S7 (PPI/MPI)

4

3)

■ System interface possible

– System interface not possible 1) TD 200 can only be interfaced with max. 1 x S7-200 via PPI (PPI/MPI); network operation (parallel PG, etc.) possible; data transmission rate max. 187.5 kbit/s; cable included in scope of supply 2) TP 070 can only be connected to S7-200 via MPI point-to-point (MPI); no network operation (parallel PG, etc.) possible; data transmission rate max. 19.2 kbit/s 3) Only on passive S7-200 4) TP 170micro can only be interfaced with max. 1 x S7-200 (PPI/MPI); network operation (parallel PG, etc.) possible; data transmission rate max. 187.5 kbit/s 5) OP 73micro, TP 177 micro can only be interfaced with max. 1 x S7-200 (MPI); network operation (parallel PG, etc.) possible; data transmission rate max. 187.5 kbit/s 6) OP 73 can be interfaced with no more than 2 x SIMATIC S7 (MPI); network operation (parallel PG, etc.) possible; 7) Data transmission rate max. 1.5 Mbit/s 8) MPI cable 6ES7 901-0BF00-0AA0 (max. 187.5 kbit/s) included in PG scope of delivery 9) Bus connector 6GK1 500-0EA02

4/150


PROFIBUS


■ Overview (continued) PLC

SIMATIC HMI

Target hardware (PROTOCOL) (physics)

TP 170A

OP 77B TP 170B OP 170B TP 177B OP 177B Mobile Panel 177 TP 177B DP/PN

TP 270 MP 370 OP 270 TP 277 OP 277 Mobile Panel 277 MP 270B MP 277

ProTool/Pro Runtime WinCC flexible Runtime

Connection via

via PPI on S7-200 (PPI)

■ 1)

■ 1) 4)

■ 1) 5)

■ 1)

■ 1) 6)

MPI cable 11)

via MPI or PROFIBUS (PG/OP communication) with S7-200

■ 2) 3)

■ 3) 4)

■ 3) 5)

■ 3)

■ 3) 6)

MPI cable 11)

via MPI or PROFIBUS (PG/OP communication) with S7-300, -400

■ 2)

■ 4)

■ 5)

–

■ 6)

MPI cable 11)

via PPI network (PPI) with max. 1 x S7-200

■ 1)

■ 1) 4)

■ 1) 5)

■ 1)

■ 1) 6)


via PPI network (PG/OP communication) with max. 4 x S7-200

–

–

–

–

–


via MPI or PROFIBUS network (PG/OP communication) with max. 4 x S7-200

■ 2)

■ 3) 4)

■ 3) 5) 7)

■ 3) 7)

■ 3) 6) 7)


via MPI or PROFIBUS network (PG/OP communication) with max. 4 x S7-300, -400, WinAC

■ 2)

■ 4)

■ 5) 7)

■ 7)

■ 6) 7)


via Industrial Ethernet (TCP/IP) (PG/OP communication) with max. 4 x S7-200, -300, -400, WinAC

–

■ 8)

■ 5) 7) 9)

■ 7) 9)

■ 7) 10)

Industrial Ethernet

SIMATIC S7 (PPI/MPI)

3)

4

■ System interface possible

– System interface not possible 1) Can only be interfaced with max. 1 x S7-200 via PPI (PPI); network operation (parallel PG, etc.) possible 2) TP 170A under ProTool can only be interfaced with 1 x SIMATIC S7 (PPI/MPI); network operation (parallel PG, etc.) possible; data transmission rate max. 1.5 Mbit/s TP 170A under WinCC flexible can be interfaced with max. 4 x SIMATIC S7 (PPI/MPI); data transmission rate max. 1.5 Mbit/s 3) Only with passive S7-200 4) Not Mobile Panel 177 PN Connection of Mobile Panel 177 DP via special connecting cable and connection box (see Mobile Panel, Ordering data for Order Nos.); see Manual for cable assignment 5) Mobile Panel 277 connection via special connecting cable and junction box (see Mobile Panel, Ordering data for Order Nos.); see Manual for cable assignment. 6) Connection via integrated MPI/PROFIBUS interface, use the CP 5611 A2 with a standard PC 7) Depending on the scope of the configuration (communication), up to eight S7 connections are possible 8) Only TP 177B DP/PN, OP 177B DP/PN, Mobile Panel 177 PN Connection of Mobile Panel 177 PN via special connecting cable and connection box (see Mobile Panel, Ordering data for Order Nos.); see Manual for cable assignment 9) Not available under ProTool, only when configuring with WinCC flexible: for TP 277, OP 277, MP 270B, MP 277, MP 370 via integrated Industrial Ethernet interface; for TP 270, OP 270 a commercially available Ethernet CF card is required. 10) Connection via integrated Industrial Ethernet interface; use the CP 1612 or CP 1613 A2 with a standard PC If you are using an integrated Industrial Ethernet interface or the CP 1612, you will also need the SIMATIC NET driver software Industrial Ethernet SOFTNET S7-Lean 2005 (6GK1 704-1LW63-3AA0) or Industrial Ethernet SOFTNET-S7 V6.1 (6GK1704-1CW61-3AA0) (Industrial Ethernet SOFTNET-S7 Lean 2005 is included in the scope of delivery of WinCC flexible 2005 Runtime). If you are using the CP 1613 A2, you will also need the SIMATIC NET driver software S7-1613-2005 (6GK1 716-1CB63-3AA0). 11) MPI cable 6ES7 901-0BF00-0AA0 (max. 187.5 kbit/s) included in PG scope of delivery 12) Bus connector 6GK1 500-0EA02


4/151

PROFIBUS

Connection options for SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC ProTool/Pro

■ Overview

■ Integration Protocol

PC interfaces

SIMATIC S7 via PPI S7-200

CP 5511 1) CP 5512 1) CP 5611 1) CP 5611 A2 1) CP 5613 1) 6) CP 5613 A2 1) 6) CP 5614 1) 6) CP 5614 A2 1) 6) PC/PPI adapter 2)

SIMATIC S7 via MPI S7-200 (except CPU 212) 3)

4

S7-300 S7-400 WinAC Basis (V3.0 and higher) WinAC RTX

• PC-based HMI solution for single-user systems directly at the machine • SIMATIC ProTool/Pro comprises: - SIMATIC ProTool/Pro RT runtime software for PC-based systems - SIMATIC ProTool/Pro Configuration (CS) configuration software for configuring PC-based systems and for configuring of SIMATIC operator panels • Executable under Windows 98 SE/ME and Windows NT4.0/2000/XP Professional • Current version: - SIMATIC ProTool/Pro Configuration V6.0 + SP3 - SIMATIC ProTool/Pro Runtime V6.0 + SP3

SIMATIC S7 via PROFIBUS DP 4) S7-215 3) S7-300 CPUs with integr. PROFIBUS interface S7-300 with CP 342-5 S7-400 CPUs with integr. PROFIBUS interface

CP 5511 1) CP 5512 1) CP 5611 1) CP 5611 A2 1) CP 5613 1) 6) CP 5613 A2 1) 6) CP 5614 1) 6) CP 5614 A2 1) 6)

S7-400 with CP 443-5 or IM 467 WinAC Basis (V3.0 and higher) WinAC RTX

■ Benefits • Integral component of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA): The full integration of ProTool/Pro in the SIMATIC S7 environment provides conformity in communications, in data management and in configuration and programming • Openness: Consistent support of the Windows standards such as OLEAutomation and OPC (OLE for Process Control) • Flexibility: Individual function expansions can be implemented with Visual Basic scripts Archiving of process data and alarms, e.g. in an ODBC (Open Data Base Connectivity) database • Convenient process visualization: Ranging from archiving through print functions, graphics libraries, trend displays, messaging system, logging system, recipe management through to comprehensive controller drivers • Language selection: Reduction in handling and configuration costs by management of up to 32 languages in the project and online switching of up to 5 languages on the device

4/152

CP 5511 1) CP 5512 1) CP 5611 1) CP 5611 A2 1) CP 5613 1) 6) CP 5613 A2 1) 6) CP 5614 1) 6) CP 5614 A2 1) 6) PC/MPI adapter 5) Teleservice V5.1


1) For Panel PC 670/870 via internal MPI interface 2) Only point-to-point to S7-200; no configuration download, operating systems: Windows 98/ME/2000/XP; Order No.: 6ES7 901-3CB30-0AX0 3) Constraint with regard to baud rate for S7-200; see Catalog ST 70 4) ProTool/Pro RT is active: communication with S7 functions 5) Only point-to-point to S7-300/-400; no configuration download, operating systems: Windows 98/ME/2000/XP; Order No.: 6ES7 972-0CA23-0XA0 6) When used with ProTool/Pro only released for communication with SIMATIC S7; no configuration download

PROFIBUS

Connection options for SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC ProTool/Pro

■ Integration (continued) Higher-level visualisation system WinCC

OPC-Client

4

Industrial Ethernet / TCP/IP On-site visualisation

OPC-Server

OPC-Server

ProTool/ Pro

ProTool/ Pro

OPC-Client

SIMATIC S7-300

OPC-Server


G_ST80_DE_00003

PROFIBUS

SIMATIC ProTool/Pro application example

■ More information Additional information is available in Catalog ST 80 and in the Internet http://www.siemens.com/protoolpro


4/153

PROFIBUS

Connection options for SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC WinCC flexible RT

■ Overview

■ Integration SIMATIC WinCC flexible Runtime supports linking to: Protocol

PC interfaces

SIMATIC S7 via PPI S7-200

CP 5512 1) CP 5611 A2 1) CP 5613 A2 1) 6) CP 5614 A2 1) 6) PC/PPI adapter 2)

SIMATIC S7 via MPI S7-200 (except CPU 212) 3) S7-300

4

S7-400 WinAC Basis (V3.0 and higher) WinAC RTX

CP 5512 1) CP 5611 A2 1) CP 5613 A2 1) 6) CP 5614 A2 1) 6) PC/MPI adapter 5) PC adapter USB 5) Teleservice V5.1

SIMATIC S7 via PROFIBUS DP 4)

• PC-based visualization software for single-user systems directly at the machine • Executable under Windows 2000/XP Professional • Current version: - SIMATIC WinCC flexible 2005 SP1 Runtime with 128, 512 or 2048 PowerTags

S7-215 3) S7-300 CPUs with integr. PROFIBUS interface

CP 5512 1) CP 5611 A2 1) CP 5613 A2 1) 6) CP 5614 A2 1) 6)

S7-300 with CP 342-5 S7-400 CPUs with integr. PROFIBUS interface S7-400 with CP 443-5 or IM 467

Note: Service Pack 1 is also available for download free of charge in the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/ww/view/de/23059737); CD available on request

■ Benefits • Optimum price/performance ratio thanks to individually scalable system functionality • Functions for all visualization tasks: Operator functions, graphics and trend displays, signaling system, log system, archiving (option), recipe management (option), Audit Trail (option), process fault diagnostics (option) • Flexible runtime functionality thanks to Visual Basic scripts • Innovative service concepts with remote operation, diagnostics and administration via intranet and Internet as well as e-mail communication to increase availability (option) • Support for simple distributed automation solutions based on TCP/IP networks at the machine level (option) • User-configurable layout • Transparency, fast remedy of faults, extended machine runtimes and proof of availability of production equipment/units.

4/154


WinAC Basis (V3.0 and higher) WinAC RTX 1) For Panel PC 477/677/877 via internal MPI interface 2) Only point-to-point to S7-200; no configuration download, operating systems: Windows 2000/XP; Order No.: 6ES7 901-3CB30-0AX0 3) Constraint with regard to baud rate for S7-200; see Catalog ST 70 4) WinCC flexible RT is active (master); communication with S7 functions 5) Only point-to-point to S7-300/-400; no configuration download, operating systems: Windows 2000/XP; Order No.: 6ES7 972-0CA23-0XA0 (COM) or 6ES7 972-0CB20-0XA0 (USB) 6) When used with WinCC flexible, only released for communication with SIMATIC S7; no configuration download

PROFIBUS

Connection options for SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC WinCC flexible RT

■ Integration (continued) Higher level visualization system WinCC

OPC-Client

4

Industrial Ethernet/TCP/IP

OPC-Server

OPC-Server

PROFIBUS

SIMATIC S7-300

OPC-Client 3rd Party OPC-Server


G_ST80_EN_00077

On-site visualization

SIMATIC WinCC flexible Runtime application example

■ More information Additional information is available in Catalog ST 80 and in the Internet http://www.siemens.com/wincc-flexible


4/155

PROFIBUS

Connection options for SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC WinCC

■ Overview

■ Integration Integration in enterprise-wide solutions (IT and Business Integration) WinCC is based on Microsoft technologies, ensuring maximum openness and scope for integration. ActiveX controls support technology- and sector-specific expansions. Even cross-vendor communication is made easy. Why? Because WinCC is OPCcompliant and can, therefore, be used as an OPC client and server. Furthermore, in addition to access to current process values, it also supports standards such as OPC HDA (Historical Data Access) and OPC Alarm & Events. Other important features include: Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) for userspecific expansions to the WinCC Graphics Designer and Visual Basic Scripting (VBS) as an easy-to-learn, open runtime language. Professional application developers can also use ANSI-C on request. What’s more, the ODK (Open Development Kit) makes access to APIs really easy.

4 • PC-based operator control and monitoring system for visualizing and operating processes, production flows, machines and plants in all sectors – with the simple single-user station through to distributed multi-user systems with redundant servers and cross-location solutions with Web clients. WinCC is the information hub for corporation-wide vertical integration. • The basic system configuration (WinCC basic software) includes industry-standard functions for signaling and acknowledging events, archiving of messages and measured values, logging of all process and configuration data, user administration and visualization. • The WinCC basic software forms the core of a wide range of different applications. Based on the open programming interfaces, a wide range of WinCC options (from Siemens A&D) and WinCC add-ons have been developed (by Siemens-internal and external partners). • Current versions: - SIMATIC WinCC V6.0 SP4: Runs under Windows XP Professional/Windows 2003 Server and Windows 2000 - SIMATIC WinCC V5.1 SP2: Runs under Windows NT 4.0/2000

For the first time, the WinCC V6 basic system features an integrated powerful and scalable Historian function based on the Microsoft SQL Server 2000. The possibilities thereby afforded to users are endless: From high-performance archiving of current process data through long-term archiving with high data compression and beyond to a central information hub in the form of an enterprise-wide Historian Server. Versatile clients and tools for evaluation, open interfaces, special options (Connectivity Pack , IndustrialDataBridge, Client Access licenses) provide the basis for effective IT and Business Integration. Integration in automation solutions (valid for WinCC V6.0 and higher) WinCC is an open process visualization system and supports the connection of all types of PLC. Released communications software Only communications software with the versions listed (or higher) can be used. Corresponding SIMATIC NET updates are available for upgrading older versions and releases (these are supplied with the WinCC basic package/upgrade). Number of connectable PLCs The number of PLCs that can be connected via Industrial Ethernet CP 1613 with a maximum message-frame length of 512 KB is determined as follows: Type of connection

Number of stations

SIMATIC S5 Ethernet Layer 4 + TCP/IP

Up to 60

SIMATIC S5 Ethernet TF

Up to 60


Up to 64

SIMATIC 505 Ethernet Layer 4 + TCP/IP

Up to 60

Up to 8 (with CP 5611) or up to 44 (CP 5613) PLCs can be connected via PROFIBUS. The use of Industrial Ethernet is recommended for approx. 10 PLCs and more.

4/156


PROFIBUS


■ Integration (continued) Mixed operation with different PLCs With their multiprotocol stack, CP 1613 and CP 5613 communications processors support the parallel operation of two protocols, e.g. for mixed operation of a variety of PLCs via a bus cable. WinCC supports the operation of two interface boards of the same type only in conjunction with the following channels: SIMATIC S5 Ethernet Layer 4 (2 x CP 1613), SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite (2 x CP 1613, 2 x CP 5613) and PROFIBUS DP (4 x CP 5613; max. 122 slaves per CP 5613). In addition to communication via Industrial Ethernet CP 1613 or PROFIBUS CP 5613 one CP 5511 or CP 5611 can be used for communication with SIMATIC S7 via MPI.

Overview of interfaces (WinCC V6.0 and higher) Protocol SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite

Communication redundancy WinCC itself does not support redundant LAN interfaces. The S7-REDCONNECT software package is required for the redundant connection of PCs via 2 x Industrial Ethernet on SIMATIC S7. This connects the SIMATIC S7 with applications on the PC, e.g. SIMATIC WinCC. Pure communications redundancy can also be achieved by setting up optical rings (see Catalog IK PI). Channel DLL PROFIBUS DP

Channel DLL for S7 functions via MPI, PROFIBUS or Ethernet Layer 4 + TCP/IP

Cross-vendor Windows DDE

Channel DLL for DDE communication, WinCC can acquire data from DDE server applications

OPC client 1)

Channel DLL for OPC communication, WinCC can acquire data from OPC server applications

OPC server

Server applications for OPC communication; WinCC makes process data available for OPC clients

PROFIBUS FMS

Channel DLL for PROFIBUS FMS

PROFIBUS DP

Channel DLL for PROFIBUS DP

Client/server communication Communication between the clients and server takes place on TCP/IP. We recommend setting up a separate PC LAN. For small projects with a correspondingly low volume of message frames, a SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet can be used for both process communication (WinCC/Server ↔ PLC) and for PC-PC communication (WinCC/Client ↔ WinCC/Server).

Description

SIMATIC S7

1) Application note: The parallel use of the OPC client channel supports, for example, connection to an SNMP OPC Server for the purpose of visualizing the data stored there. The SNMP OPC Server provides a means of monitoring network components of any type (e.g. switches) which support the SNMP protocol.

Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/com/14627901

In accordance with the PROFIBUS standard, there is always a fixed assignment between DP/slaves and a DP master, i.e., a second WinCC station (DP/master) cannot have access to the same PLCs (DP/slave). This means that redundant operation of two WinCC stations using the PROFIBUS DP link is not possible. Connection to non-Siemens PLCs: OPC (OLE for Process Control) is recommended for the connection of non-Siemens PLCs. For up-to-date instructions and information about OPC servers from all vendors, please visit: http://www.opcfoundation.org/05_man.asp WinCC supports the following standards: • OPC Data Access 1.1 • OPC Data Access 2.0 • OPC Data Access 3.0 • OPC XML Data Access (Connectivity Pack) • OPC HDA V1.0 (Connectivity Pack) • OPC A&E V1.02 (Connectivity Pack) Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/wincc-connectivity


4/157

4

PROFIBUS


■ Components for communication between PG/PC and SIMATIC (WinCC V6.0 and higher) PROFIBUS

SIMATIC S5 PROFIBUS FDL


PROFIBUS DP

PROFIBUS FMS

Order No.

WinCC – DLL channel SIMATIC S5 PROFIBUS FDL Channel DLL for S5-FDL

■


■

SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite Channel DLL for S7 functions


■

PROFIBUS DP Channel DLL for PROFIBUS DP

■

PROFIBUS FMS Channel DLL for PROFIBUS FMS

4

Included in the basic package Included in the basic package

Communications components for OS/OP expansion CP 5611 A2 PCI card (32-bit) for connecting a PG/PC to PROFIBUS or MPI (communications software included in the WinCC basic package)

■

6GK1 561-1AA01

CP 5512 PCMCIA card (Cardbus 32-bit) for connecting a PG/PC to PROFIBUS or MPI (communications software included in the WinCC basic package)

■

6GK1 551-2AA00

PC/MPI adapter RS 232, 9-pin; male with RS 232/MPI converter max. 19.2 kbit/s

■

6ES7 972-0CA23-0XA0

CP 5613 PCI card for connecting a PC to PROFIBUS (communications software must be ordered separately)

■

■

■

■

6GK1 561-3AA00

CP 5613 A2 PCI card (32 bit) for connecting a PC to PROFIBUS (communications software must be ordered separately)

■

■

■

■

6GK1 561-3AA01

S7-5613 2005 Communications software for S7 functions + FDL • for Windows 2000/XP/2003 Server

■

■

DP-5613 2005 Communications software for DP master + FDL • for Windows 2000/XP/2003 Server

■

FMS-5613 2005 Communications software for PROFIBUS-FMS + FDL • for Windows 2000/XP/2003 Server

■

■ System interface possible Additional information can be found in the Internet under http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/com/14628484

4/158


6GK1 713-5CB63-3AA0

■

6GK1 713-5DB63-3AA0

■

6GK1 713-5FB63-3AA0

PROFIBUS


■ Communication examples SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS (S7 functions) Standard-PC with WinCC e.g. RC 64 k or RT 64 k

- CP 5613 A2 6GK1 561-3AA01 - S7-5613 (communications software) 6GK1 713-5CB63-3AA0

PROFIBUS

4

SIMATIC S7-400 SIMATIC S7-300

- IM 467 (DP/M, S7) 6ES7 467-5GJ02-0AB0

- CP 342-5 (DP, S7, S/R) 6GK7 342-5DA02-0XE0

- CP 443-5 Extended (DP/M, S7, S/R) 6GK7 443-5DX03-0XE0

- CP 343-5 (FMS, S7, S/R) 6GK7 343-5FA01-0XE0

- CP 443-5 Basis (FMS, S7, S/R) 6GK7 443-5FX01-0XE0

- NCM S7 PROFIBUS manual (SIMATIC NET CD or Internet Download) G_ST80_EN_00010

- NCM S7 PROFIBUS manual (SIMATIC NET CD or Internet Download)

WinCC single-user system: PROFIBUS with S7 communication

SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS-FMS Standard-PC with WinCC e.g. RC 64 k or RT 64 k + FMS channel DLL

- CP 5613 A2 6GK1 561-3AA00 - FMS-5613 (communications software) 6GK1 713-5FB63-3AA0

PROFIBUS FMS

SIMATIC S5115/135/155U

SIMATIC S7-300

SIMATIC S7-400

- CP 343-5 - CP 443-5 Basic (FMS, S7, S/R) (FMS, S7, S/R) 6GK7 343-5FA01-0XE0 6GK7 443-5FX01-0XE0

- COM 5431 FMS/DP 6GK1 745-1AD00-0EA0

G_ST80_EN_00012

- CP 5431 FMS/DP 6GK1 543-1AA01

WinCC single-user system: PROFIBUS FMS


4/159

PROFIBUS


■ Communication examples (continued) WInCC Server/Standard PC with WinCC e.g. RC 64 k or RT 64 k

WinCC

+ server option + TCP/IP interface module (e.g. CP 1612)

without control options on the server: 32 clients + 3 Web clients or 50 Web clients + 1 client

WinCC

+ TCP/IP interface module (e.g. CP 1612)

Client

up to 4 clients with control options on the server

Client

TERMINAL BUS TCP/IP

Server

4

WinCC

PROCESS BUS (Industrial Ethernet/PROFIBUS)

SIMATIC S7-400

SIMATIC S7-300

- WinCC single-user system: SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS with S7-functions - WinCC single-user system: SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet with S7-functions - WinCC single-user system: SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS-FMS

WinCC multi-user system with operator-controllable server (for WinCC V6)

4/160


G_ST80_DE_00013

This allows you to set up the following application examples

PROFIBUS


■ Communication examples (continued) Higher-level visualisation system WinCC


OPC-Client

4

Industrial Ethernet/TCP/IP On-site visualization

OPC-Server

OPC-Server

ProTool/ Pro


PROFIBUS

- integrated PROFIBUS interface

OPC-Client OPC-Server

SIMATIC S7-300


- OPC server functionality (included in WinCC basic package) - OPC server required for interfacing with third-party PLCs

G_ST80_DE_00015

- OPC server functionality (included in ProTool/Pro Runtime basic package)

OPC link

■ More information Additional information is available in Catalog ST 80 and in the Internet http://www.siemens.com/wincc


4/161

PROFIBUS

PROFIBUS DP Switching devices, control devices and sensors SIMOCODE pro motor management and control devices

■ Overview

Recording of measurement curves

SIMOCODE pro is a flexible, modular motor management system for motors with constant speeds in the low-voltage performance range. It optimizes the connection between the I&C and motor feeder, increases system availability and allows significant savings to be made by construction startup, operation and maintenance of a system.

4

When SIMOCODE pro is installed in the low-voltage switchgear cabinet, it is the intelligent interface between the higher-level automation system and the motor feeder and includes the following: • Multifunctional, solid-state full motor protection which is independent of the automation system • Flexible software instead of hardware for the motor control • Detailed operational, service and diagnostics data • Open communication via PROFIBUS DP, the standard for fieldbus systems.

■ Benefits General customer benefits • Integrating the whole motor feeder into the process control via a bus significantly reduces the wiring outlay between the motor feeder and PLC. • Distribution of the automated processes by means of configurable control and monitoring functions in the feeder saves resources in the automation system and ensures full functionality and protection of the feeder even if the I&C or bus system fails. • The acquisition and monitoring of operational, service and diagnostics data in the feeder and process control system increases system availability as well as maintenance and service-friendliness. • The high degree of modularity allows users to perfectly implement their plant-specific requirements for each motor feeder. • The SIMOCODE pro system offers functionally graded and space-saving solutions for each customer application. • The replacement of the control circuit hardware with software decreases the number of hardware components and wiring required and in this way limits stock keeping costs and potential wiring errors. • The use of solid-state full motor protection permits better utilization of the motors and ensures long-term stability of the tripping characteristic and reliable tripping even after years of service. Multifunctional, solid-state full motor protection for rated motor currents up to 820 A SIMOCODE pro offers comprehensive protection of the motor feeder by means of a combination of different, multi-step and delayable protection and monitoring functions: • Current-sensitive solid-state overload protection (Class 5 ... 40) • Thermistor motor protection • Phase failure / unbalance protection • Stall protection • Monitoring of adjustable limit values for the motor current • Voltage and power monitoring • Monitoring of the power factor (motor idling/load shedding) • Ground-fault monitoring • Temperature monitoring, e.g. over PT100/PT1000 • Monitoring of operating hours, downtime and number of starts etc.

4/162


SIMOCODE pro can record gradients and can therefore, for example, present the progression of motor current during motor start-up. Flexible motor control implemented with software (instead of comprehensive hardware interlocks) Many predefined motor control functions have already been integrated into SIMOCODE pro, including all necessary logic operations and interlocks. • Direct-on-line and reversing starters • Star/delta starters (also with direction reversal) • Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing switch); also with direction reversal • Two speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings (also with direction reversal) • Slide control • Solenoid valve actuation • Activation of a circuit-breaker • Soft starter actuation, also with direction reversal These control functions have been implemented by means of software and can be freely assigned to the inputs and outputs (including PROFIBUS DP). These predefined control functions can also be flexibly adapted to each customized configuration of a motor feeder by means of freely configurable logic modules (truth tables, counters, timers, edge evaluation ...) and with the help of standard functions (power failure monitoring, emergency start, external faults ...), without additional auxiliary relays being necessary in the control circuit. SIMOCODE pro makes a lot of additional hardware and wiring in the control circuit unnecessary which results in a high level of standardization of the motor feeder in terms of its design and circuit diagrams. Detailed operational, service and diagnostics data SIMOCODE pro makes different operational, service and diagnostics data available and helps to detect potential faults in time and prevent them by means of preventative measures. In the event of a malfunction, a fault can be diagnosed, localized and rectified very quickly – there are no or very short downtimes. Operating data • Motor switching status derived from the current flow in the main circuit • All phase currents • All line voltages • Active power, apparent power and power factor • Phase unbalance and phase sequence • Time to trip • Motor temperature • Remaining cooling time etc. Service data • Motor operating hours • Motor stop times • Number of motor starts • Number of overload trips • Internal comments stored in the device etc. Diagnostic data • Numerous detailed early warning and fault messages • Internal device fault logging with time stamp • Time stamping of freely selectable status, alarm or fault essages etc.

PROFIBUS


■ Benefits (continued) SIMOCODE pro supports among other things: • Baud rates up to 12 Mbit/s • Automatic baud rate detection • Communication with up to 3 masters • Time synchronization over PROFIBUS • Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic services (DPV1) etc. • DPV1 communication after the Y-Link etc.

Communication SIMOCODE pro is equipped with an integral PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D or terminal connection) and can therefore replace all individual wiring (including modular terminals), which would usually be required for exchanging data with the higherlevel automation system, with a single 2-wire line.

Main circuit

Control circuit

Automation level

L1 L2 L3

4 -Q1

PROFIBUS DP

-K1

-K2

SIMOCODE pro

NSA0_00398

Operator panel

Connection cable

Current measuring module Basic unit

-K2

-K1

0

Remote

M

3~

Protect and monitor

(overload, thermistor, earth fault detection ...)

Motor control

(incl. monitoring + interlocking)

Communication

(operational, service, diagnostic data + control commands)

SIMOCODE pro combines all the necessary functions for the motor feeder in a compact system.

■ Application SIMOCODE pro is often used for automated processes where plant downtimes are very expensive (e.g. steel or cement industry) and where it is important to prevent plant downtimes through detailed operational, service and diagnostics data or to localize the fault very quickly in the event of a malfunction. SIMOCODE pro is modular and space-saving and suited especially for use in motor control centers in the process industry and for power plant technology. Applications Protection and control of motors • In hazardous areas for types of protection EEx e/d according to ATEX guideline 94/9/EC • With heavy-duty starting (paper, cement, metal and water industry) • In high-availability plants (chemical, oil, raw material processing industry, power plants)

Industries Today, SIMOCODE pro is mainly used in the chemical (incl. oil and gas), steel, water, pharmaceutical, cement, and glass industry. It is also used for applications in power plants and large diamond, gold and platinum mines. Based on the experience made with the predecessor system SIMOCODE-DP, SIMOCODE pro has been tailored even more specifically to the requirements of these industries. An essential requirement in these industries is the availability of the motors and thus the availability of the whole process. Plant downtimes caused by faults frequently result in high costs. For this reason, it is very important to detect potential faults early on and to initiate countermeasures. SIMOCODE pro offers users an up-to-date motor management system based on years of experience.


4/163

PROFIBUS


■ Selection and

Ordering data Version

Current setting range Overall width A

Order No.

mm

SIMOCODE pro C, basic unit 1, PROFIBUS DP interface, 12 Mbit/s, RS485 4 I/3 O freely assignable, input for thermistor connection, monostable relay outputs, rated control supply voltage Us:

4

• 24 V DC

3UF7 000-1AB00-0

• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC

3UF7 000-1AU00-0

3UF7 000-1A.00-0

SIMOCODE pro V, basic unit 2, PROFIBUS DP interface, 12 Mbit/s, RS485 4 I/3 O freely assignable, input for thermistor connection, monostable relay outputs, rated control supply voltage Us: • 24 V DC

3UF7 010-1AB00-0

• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC

3UF7 010-1AU00-0

3UF7 010-1A.00-0

Current measuring modules Straight-through transformers

Busbar connection 3UF7 100-1AA00-0

0.3 ... 3

45

3UF7 100-1AA00-0

2.4 ... 25

45

3UF7 101-1AA00-0

10 ... 100

55

3UF7 102-1AA00-0

20 ... 200

120

3UF7 103-1AA00-0

20 ... 200

120

3UF7 103-1BA00-0

63 ... 630

145

3UF7 104-1BA00-0

0.3 ... 3

45

3UF7 110-1AA00-0

2.4 ... 25

45

3UF7 111-1AA00-0

10 ... 100

55

3UF7 112-1AA00-0

20 ... 200

120

3UF7 113-1AA00-0

20 ... 200

120

3UF7 113-1BA00-0

63 ... 630

145

3UF7 114-1BA00-0

Current/voltage measuring modules1) Voltage measurement up to 690 V Straight-through transformers

3UF7 110-1AA00-0

3UF7 200-1AA00-0

Busbar connection

Operator panel Installation in control cabinet door or front plate, for plugging into basic unit 10 LEDs for status indication and user-assignable buttons for manual control

3UF7 200-1AA00-0

Note: Expansion modules can only be used in combination with basic unit 2! A total of up to 5 expansion modules can be connected in any order to one basic unit.

Digital modules 4 binary inputs and 2 relay outputs, up to 2 digital modules can be connected per basic unit 2

3UF7 3 7 0-1A 7 00-0

Relay outputs

3UF7 300-1AU00-0

• monostable

0

• bistable

1

Input voltage • 24 V DC

B

• 110 ... 240 V AC/DC

U

1) Only possible with basic unit 2, product version E02 and higher (from April 2005)

4/164


PROFIBUS


■ Selection and

Ordering data (continued) Version Analog modules

Order No. 1)

2 inputs to input and 1 output to output 0/4 ...20 mA signals, up to 1 analog module can be connected per basic unit 2

3UF7 400-1AA00-0

3UF7 400-1AA00-0

4

Earth fault module1) 1 input for connecting a 3UL22 summation current transformer, up to 1 earth fault module can be connected per basic unit 2

3UF7 500-1AA00-0

3UF7 500-1AA00-0

Temperature module1) 3 inputs for connecting up to 3 analog temperature sensors, 1 temperature module can be connected per basic unit 2

3UF7 700-1AA00-0

3UF7 700-1AA00-0

1) Only possible with basic unit 2, product version E02 and higher (from April 2005).

■ Accessories

3UF7 932-0AA00-0

Version

Order No.

Connection cable for connecting basic unit, current measuring module, current/voltage measuring module, operator panel: • Length 0.025 m (flat) Caution: Only suitable for connecting basic unit 2 to its expansion modules or for connecting expansion modules to each other; only when the front plates finish at the same height

3UF7 930-0AA00-0

• Length 0.1 m (flat)

3UF7 931-0AA00-0


3UF7 935-0AA00-0


3UF7 932-0AA00-0

• Length 0.5 m (round)

3UF7 932-0BA00-0


3UF7 937-0BA00-0


3UF7 933-0BA00-0

for PC/PG communication with SIMOCODE pro through the system interface, for connecting to the serial interface of the PC/PG

3UF7 940-0AA00-0

3UF7 940-0AA00-0


4/165

PROFIBUS


■ Selection and

Ordering data (continued) Version

Order No.

for parameterizing SIMOCODE pro without a PC/PG through the system interface

3UF7 900-0AA00-0

for the system interface

3UF7 950-0AA00-0

for assigning the PROFIBUS addresses without using a PC/PG on a basic unit over system interface

3UF7 910-0AA00-0

for external connection of the system interface outside, for example, a control cabinet

3UF7 920-0AA00-0

Speichermodul

3UF7 900-0AA00-0

System interface covers

4

Addressing plug

3UF7 910-0AA00-0

Door adapter

3UF7 920-0AA00-0

Plug-in clips for screw connection e.g. on mounting plates, two items necessary per device

3RB1 900-0B

• can be used for 3UF7 1.0, 3UF7 1.1 and 3UF7 1.2

3RB1 900-0B

• can be used for 3UF7 0, 3UF7 3, 3UF7 4, 3UF7 5, 3UF7 7

3RP1 903

Terminal covers Cover for cable lug connection and rail connection • length 100 mm, can be used for 3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0

3RT19 56-4EA1

• length 120 mm, can be used for 3UF7 1.4-1BA00-0

3RT19 66-4EA1

Cover for box terminal 3RT19 46-4EA1


3RT19 56-4EA2


3RT19 66-4EA2

Cover for screw connection between contactor and current detection module or current detection/voltage measurement module for direct installation 3RT19 36-4EA2

• can be used for 3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0

3RT19 56-4EA3

• can be used for 3UF7 1.4-1BA00-0

3RT19 66-4EA3

Terminal block for round and ribbon cables • up to 70 mm2, can be used for 3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0 • up to 120

mm2,

can be used for 3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0

3RT19 56-4G

• up to 240 mm2, can be used for 3UF7 1.4-1BA00-0

3RT19 66-4G

For conductor cross-section see LV 1 T "Technical Data" 3RT19 5.-4G

4/166

3RT19 55-4G


PROFIBUS


■ Selection and

Ordering data (continued) Version

Order No.

SIMOCODE pro Token fee Languages: • German

3UF7 970-0AA01-0

• English

3UF7 970-0AA00-0

• French

3UF7 970-0AA02-0

3UF7 970-0AA01-0

for integrating SIMOCODE pro into the PCS 7 process control system

3UF7 982-0AA00-0

PCS 7 function block library for SIMOCODE pro, V6.0 Scope of delivery: AS modules and faceplates for integrating SIMOCODE pro into the PCS 7 process control system, for PCS 7 Version V6.0 Engineering software for one engineering station (single license) including runtime software for execution of the AS module in an automation system (single license), English/German, Type of supply: CD incl. documentation

3UF7 982-0AA00-0

PCS 7 function block library for SIMOCODE pro, V6.1 Scope of delivery: AS modules and faceplates for integrating SIMOCODE pro into the PCS 7 process control system, for PCS 7 Version V6.1 Engineering software for one engineering station (single license) including runtime software for execution of the AS module in an automation system (single license), English/German, Type of supply: CD incl. documentation

3UF7 982-0AA02-0

AS modules for integrating SIMOCODE pro into the PCS 7 process control system, for PCS 7 Version V6.x Runtime software for execution of the AS module in an automation system (single license), license without software and documentation

3UF7 982-0AA01-0

4

Parameterization and service software for SIMOCODE pro Executes on PC/PG under Windows2000/XP, without PC cable Type of supply: CD, single license Versions: 3ZS1 312-1CC10-0YA0

• SIMOCODE ES Smart, for parameterizing via the system interface on the device

3ZS1 312-1CC10-0YA0

• SIMOCODE ES Professional, for parameterizing over PROFIBUS or the system interface on the device, incl. STEP 7 object manager

3ZS1 312-2CC10-0YA0

• SIMOCODE ES Graphic, Optional expansion of SIMOCODE ES Smart/ Professional with a graphical editor for user-friendly parameterization by means of Drag & Drop Requirements (minimum): Installed SIMOCODE ES Smart 2004 with SP1 or installed SIMOCODE ES Professional 2004 with SP1

3ZS1 312-3CC10-0YA0


4/167

PROFIBUS



4

Important ordering notes

System manual

SIMOCODE pro is a modularly constructed motor management system which is subdivided into two device series with different functional scopes: • SIMOCODE pro C, as a compact system for direct-on-line starters and reversing starters • SIMOCODE pro V, as a variable system with all control functions and with the possibility of expanding the inputs, outputs and functions of the system at will using expansion modules.

For selection of equipment and for configuration, we recommend consulting the 3UF7 970-0AA0.-0 system manual.

Expansion modules

SIMOCODE pro C SIMOCODE pro V Basic Unit 1 Basic Unit 2

Operator panel

■

■

Current measuring modules

■

■

Current/voltage expansion modules

--

■

-----

■

Expansion modules: • Digital modules (max. 2) • Analog module (max. 1) • Ground fault module (max. 1) • Temperature module (max. 1)

■ ■ ■

■ possible -- not possible

Protection, control and monitoring functions as well as the data and measured values deliverable by each system are directly dependent on the device configuration selected and on the expansion modules used. A detailed description of the functionality of all SIMOCODE pro system components can be found in the system manual or Catalog LV 1T.

4/168


Internet You can find further information in the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/simocode

PROFIBUS

PROFIBUS DP Switching devices, control devices and sensors SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5 motor protection and control devices

■ Overview SIMOCODE-DP is the predecessor of the new SIMOCODE pro motor management system and offers the solution for a wide range of different tasks in a single device. • Multifunctional, electronic motor protection and plant monitoring • Comprehensive motor and plant diagnostics • Integrated control programs (instead of extensive hardware wiring) • Open communication via PROFIBUS DP, the standard for fieldbus systems

4 SIMOCODE-DP Basic Unit, Expansion Module and Operator Module


4/169

PROFIBUS


■ Selection and Ordering data Design

Order No.

Basic unit 4 inputs, 4 outputs For snapping on to 35 mm standard rail to DIN EN 50 022

4

3UF5 001 to 021

Contactors that can be mounted externally Type

Overall width

Setting range

mm

A

--

70

1.251) ... 6.3

3UF5 001-3 7 7 7 0-1

--

70

6.3 ... 25

3UF5 011-3 7 7 7 0-1

--

70

25 ... 100

3UF5 021-3 7 7 7 0-1

3RT1 05

120

50 ... 205

3UF5 031-3 7 7 7 0-1

3RT1 06, 3RT1 07 3RT1 26, 3RT1 27

145

125 ... 500

3UF5 041-3 7 7 7 0-1

3TF6 8, 3TF6 9

230

200 ... 820

3UF5 051-3 7 7 7 0-1

Inputs

3UF5 031 to 051

• Input for thermistor motor protection

A

• Earth-fault detection input (external) (sensing of earth fault currents levels of 0.3 A, 0.5 A and 1 A with summation current transformers 3UL2 20.-A.)

B

Rated control voltage • 24 V DC

B

• 115 V AC

J

• 230 V AC

N

Response of the outputs to a control supply voltage failure • monostable

0

• bistable

1

Expansion module 8 inputs, 4 outputs, For snapping onto 35 mm standard rail to DIN EN 50 022 External supply for inputs • 24 V DC

3UF5 100-0AB00

• 115 V AC

3UF5 100-0AJ00

• 230 V AC

3UF5 100-0AN00

For installation in control cabinet door, For connection to basic unit or expansion module

3UF5 202-1AA00-1

3UF5 100-0A.00 Control module

3UF5 202-1AA00-1 1) The current setting range from 0.25 to 1.25 A is attained by looping the main conducting paths.

4/170


PROFIBUS


■ Accessories Design

Order No.

Win-SIMOCODE-DP/Professional • Parameter setting, operating, monitoring and testing of SIMOCODE-DP: via PROFIBUS or a system interface on the device • PC/PG requirements: Windows 95/98/2000/NT/ME or Windows XP • PC/PG interface requirements: PROFIBUS system interface from Siemens or RS 232 with compatible 3RW2 920-1DA00 interface cable • SIMOCODE-DP requirements: Delivery stage E10 (as of June 1998) • Type of delivery: CD, English/German Incl. online Help and example parameter files, single licence

3UF5 710-0AA00-0

Win-SIMOCODE-DP/Smart • Parameter setting, operating, monitoring and testing: Via system interface on the device • PC/PG requirements: Windows 95/98/2000/NT/ME or Windows XP • PC/PG interface requirements: RS 232 with compatible 3RW29 920-1DA00 interface cable • Type of delivery: CD-ROM, English/German Incl. online Help and example parameter files, single licence

3UF5 711-0AA00-0

OM-SIMOCODE-DP STEP 7 object manager for integrating SIMOCODE-DP as an S7 slave and for calling Win-SIMOCODE-DP/Professional from STEP 7 • Requirements: STEP 7, Version 4.0 or higher • SIMOCODE-DP requirements: Delivery stage E10 (as of June 1998) • Type of delivery: CD-ROM, English/German incl. online Help, single licence

3UF5 712-0AA00-0

PCS 7 function block SIMOCODE-DP Function block for integrating SIMOCODE-DP into the process control system PCS7 Version 6.0 • SIMOCODE-DP requirements: Delivery stage E10 and higher (since June 1998) • Type of delivery: CD-ROM, German/English, single-user license

3UF5 720-0AA10-0

Configuration software

3UF5 710-0AA00-0

3UF5 711-0AA00-0

4

Documentation System manual Containing a description of communication over PROFIBUS DP and a configuring example • German

3UF5 700-0AA00-0

• English

3UF5 700-0AA00-1


4/171

PROFIBUS


■ Selection and

Ordering data Design

Order No.

Connecting cable, installation material Connecting cable For PC communication using the system interface on the device 5 m long

3RW29 20-1DA00

Connecting plug/connecting cable With 3UF5 9 / 3UF1 9 connectors • For connecting the basic unit to the expansion unit, 9-pole, 0.03 m tab connector, shielded

4

3UF1 900-1MA00 3UF1 900-1NA00 3UF1 900-1PA00

3UF5 900-1AA00

• For connecting the basic unit to the expansion unit or operator module, 9-pole - 0.5 m long, shielded plug 45° angular

3UF1 900-1MA00

- 2.0 m long, shielded plug 45° angular

3UF1 900-1NA00

- 2.5 m long, shielded plug 45° angular

3UF1 900-1PA00

- 0.5 m long, with flat plug, shielded

3UF1 900-1DA00

- 1.0 m long, with flat plug, shielded

3UF1 900-1EA00

• For connecting basic unit / expansion module to the control cabinet door It is possible to set parameters, operate and monitor using the PC from the control cabinet door, 9-pole

3UF1 900-1D 3UF1 900-1E

- 0.5 m long, with flat plug and socket, shielded

3UF5 900-0AA00

- 1.0 m long, with flat plug and socket, shielded

3UF5 900-0BA00

T terminal Terminal for bus connection on PROFIBUS DP - RS 485

3UF5 900-1GA00

Bus termination 3UF1 900 Bus termination module with separate supply voltage for terminating the bus following the last unit on the bus line supply voltage: • 115/230 V AC

3UF1 900-1KA00

• 24 V DC

3UF1 900-1KB00

For screw-mounting on mounting plate 2 units are required for each 3UF5 0

3RB19 00-0B

Insertable tabs

3RB1 900-0B Terminal cover • For individual mounting or on the outgoing side with direct mounting - 3UF5 031

3TX7 506-0A

- 3UF5 041

3TX7 536-0A

- 3UF5 051 with 3TF6 8

3TX7 686-0A

- 3UF5 051 with 3TF6 9

3TX7 696-0A

3TX7 506-0A • Between contactor and overload relay for direct mounting

3TX7 506-0B

- 3UF5 031

3TX7 506-0B

- 3UF5 041

3TX7 536-0B

- 3UF5 051 with 3TF6 8

3TX7 686-0B

- 3UF5 051 with 3TF6 9

3TX7 696-0B

■ More information System manual

Internet

It is strongly recommend to used the 3UF5 7 manual before equipment is selected as well as for configuring.

Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/simocode-dp

4/172


PROFIBUS

PROFIBUS DP Switching devices, control devices and sensors 3UF18 current transformers for overload protection

■ Overview The 3UF1 8 current transformers are protective current transformers and are used for triggering overload relays. Protective current transformers are designed to ensure a proportional current transfer up to a multiple of the primary rated current.

■ Selection and

3UF1 8 current transformers secondarily transfer the maximum current of their respective operating range to the standard signal 1 A.

Ordering data Design

Operating range

Order No.

A for installation as a single unit for snap-on and screw mounting onto 35 mm mounting rail

0.25 … 2.51)

3UF18 43-1BA00

1.25 … 12.51)

3UF18 43-2AA00

2.5 … 251)

3UF18 43-2BA00

12.5 … 50

3UF18 45-2CA00

16 … 65

3UF18 47-2DA00

25 … 100

3UF18 48-2EA00

32 … 130

3UF18 50-3AA00

50 … 200

3UF18 52-3BA00

63 … 250

3UF18 54-3CA00

100 … 400

3UF18 56-3DA00

125 … 500

3UF18 57-3EA00

160 … 630

3UF18 68-3FA00

205 … 820

3UF18 68-3GA00

4

3UF18 43 for mounting onto contactors and installation as a single unit for screw mounting

3UF18 68

1) The following setting ranges apply for the protection of EEx e motors: 3UF18 43-1BA00, 0.25 A ... 1.25 A 3UF18 43-2AA00, 1.25 A ... 6.3 A 3UF18 43-2BA00, 2.5 A ... 12.5 A

■ Accessories For contactor type

Order No.

Terminal covers for transformer-contactor combinations and installation as an single unit for transformers (one cover is required per terminal end)

3TX7 466-0A

• 3UF18 45

3TX7 446-0A

• 3UF18 48

3TX7 466-0A

• 3UF18 50, 3UF18 52

3TX7 506-0A

• 3UF18 54 bis 3UF18 57

3TX7 536-0A

• 3UF18 68-3FA00

3TX7 686-0A

• 3UF18 68-3GA00

3TX7 696-0A

for covering the screw connection when mounted directly onto contactor (one cover is required per contactor/transformer combination) • 3UF18 48

3TX7 466-0B

• 3UF18 50, 3UF18 52

3TX7 506-0B

• 3UF18 54 bis 3UF18 57

3TX7 536-0B

• 3UF18 68-3FA00

3TX7 686-0B

• 3UF18 68-3GA00

3TX7 696-0B


4/173

PROFIBUS

PROFIBUS DP Switching devices, control devices and sensors 3UL22 summation current transformers

■ Overview

■ Application

The 3UL22 summation current transformers sense fault currents in machines and plants. Together with the 3UL21 evaluation unit or the SIMOCODE 3UF motor management and control device they enable residual-current and ground-fault monitoring.

■ Selection and

4

The purpose of the residual-current device protection is to prevent the build-up of excessive contact voltage on exposed conductive parts by interrupting all phases and the neutral of the supply line within 0.2 s, in the event of a fault current which exceeds a specified value.

Ordering data Inlet opening Diameter

Rated fault current I∆n

mm

A

Order No.

Summation current transformer for external ground fault monitoring 40

65

3UL22 0.-.A

120

4/174


0.3

3UL22 01-1A

0.5

3UL22 01-2A

1

3UL22 01-3A

0.3

3UL22 02-1A

0.5

3UL22 02-2A

1

3UL22 02-3A

10

3UL22 02-2B

16

3UL22 02-3B

25

3UL22 02-4B

40

3UL22 02-5B

0.3

3UL22 03-1A

0.5

3UL22 03-2A

1

3UL22 03-3A

6

3UL22 03-1B

10

3UL22 03-2B

PROFIBUS

PROFIBUS DP Switching devices, control devices and sensors SENTRON communication-capable circuit-breakers

■ Overview 1 SENTRON 3VL 2 LCD ETU release

19

3 COM10 PROFIBUS

5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

17

4

18

3

6

12

13

14

15

16

5

4 8 9 1

2

7

10 11

NSE0_01105e

4

module including shorttime grading control (ZSI module) Breaker Data Adapter (BDA) BDA Plus with Ethernet interface Browser-capable input and output device (e.g. notebook) SENTRON 3WL COM15 PROFIBUS module Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) Electronic release ETU Metering function Plus Short-time grading control (ZSI module) Digital output module as relay Digital output module as relay, configurable Analog output module Digital input module Switch ES Power on PC PLC e.g. SIMATIC S7 Power Management software

For further information on SENTRON communication-capable circuit-breakers, see • Catalog LV 1/LV 1.T, Chapters 15 and 16 • A&D Mall, section "SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices for Power Distribution"/"Air Circuit-Breakers"/"3WL Air Circuit-Breakers" and/or "SENTRON Switching andProtection Devices for Power Distribution"/"Molded Case Circuit-Breakers"/"3VL Molded Case Circuit-Breakers" 1) Range from 0.3 to 9 A is fixed (wide range) and cannot be set/adjusted manually


4/175

PROFIBUS

SIMATIC FS600 laser scanner PROFIsafe laser scanner

■ Overview Our optical distance sensors provide perfect all-round protection to Category 3 according to EN 954-1. In an operating field of 190° and over a distance of up to 4.0 m (up to 15 m in non safety-related applications), the laser scanner reliably senses every object and every person. And it works so simply – the distance sensor emits light pulses at regular intervals. If they hit an obstruction, the sensor receives the reflected light and evaluates it. If this is evaluated as the predefined area to be protected, a Stop function is triggered. With up to four programmable protective field pairs that can be selected during operation, our laser scanners can be optimally adapted to any application – on machines, production robots, conveyor systems or vehicles.

4

Different versions support optimal integration in the automation system – whether conventionally in the safety circuit, over PROFIBUS with PROFIsafe or over AS-Interface with ASIsafe.

■ Application Horizontal danger zone protection

Route monitoring for automatic guided vehicle systems

SF4

SF1 SF3

SF2 NSC0_00620

NSC0_00619

• Reliable detection of persons and objects in danger zones around machines and plants. • Flexible programming of almost any protection and warning zones.

• Reliable detection of persons and objects approaching the vehicle. • The laser scanner offers a greater protection range than bumpers and, therefore, permits higher speeds.

Horizontal danger zone protection with more than one protective field

Collision protection for shifting units

c

c

SF 2 WF 2

SF1

SF 1 (active)

SF2 b

WF 1 (active) NSC0_00646

NSC0_00622

• Reliable detection of persons in different danger zones by switching between protective fields. • Increased availability due to accurate protection of just the fields that are currently active.

4/176


• Reliable protection of persons in the path of the vehicle. • Objects in the path of the vehicle are detected in good time and damage to the vehicle or its load is prevented.

PROFIBUS


■ Application (continued) Other applications • Many different types of hazardous area protection • Protection for rooms and entrances

• Projecting object monitoring to protect machines and personnel • Non-safety-relevant measuring or detection tasks (e.g. determining distances, positions, or contours).

■ Function The LS4 laser scanner is an optical, contact-free surface scanner – designed primarily for operator protection.

E

Four protective field/warning field pairs Four variable protective field pairs for the personnel protective field and warning field, which can be easily set on the PC, ensure that the LS4 laser scanner can be adapted to suit any requirement.

4

Sc

Reflection SF 3

SF 1

SF 4

SF 2 NSC0_00623

Using a laser diode with transmission optics, the laser scanner continuously generates bundled light pulses that are scattered throughout the operating range by an integrated rotating mirror. If objects or persons enter the field, it evaluates the reflected light pulses and continuously calculates the exact position coordinates on the basis of the light propagation time. If the defined personnel protective field is penetrated, the laser scanner stops the machine immediately (within the system response time). The Stop function is reset when the protective field is free again, either automatically or following acknowledgement (depending on the operating mode). The operating range of the LS4 laser scanner spans 190° and is subdivided into angle segments of 0.36°.

NSC0_00625

It can be implemented in stationary applications (machines and installations) or mobile applications (vehicles, automatic guided vehicle systems, or shifting units). In the case of a robot, for example, different operating ranges can be protected, whereby the laser scanner operates in succession with regard to time and space. In the case of automatic guided vehicle systems, four programmable protective fields can be protected, e.g. rapid travel, slow travel, turning left, turning right. LS4soft operator software Thanks to the PC operator software LS4soft, it could not be easier to optimize the laser scanner settings. The following functions have been integrated: • User-friendly configuration of the protective field using a PC or laptop • Configuration of additional functions, such as protective field selection, restart inhibit, etc. by means of a software wizard • Comprehensive range of displays, e.g. defined protective fields, current scan contours, system settings, etc. reliable, password-protected access with different authorization levels • Executable under Microsoft Windows 95/98/NT/2000/XP

0.36°

5°

Only personnel protective fields are shown

185°

NSC0_00624

The scan rate is 25 scans/second, i.e. one light pulse every 40 ms in each segment. A special algorithm ensures that objects larger than 70 mm (this corresponds to the scanner resolution) can be reliably detected and that contamination (e.g. dust) does not reduce system availability. The LS4 laser scanner detects people (even if they are wearing dark clothing) at a distance of up to 4 m (fail-safe). People or objects can, however, be detected at a distance of up to 15 m so that a warning can be output, for example (not safety relevant).


4/177

PROFIBUS


■ Integration PROFIsafe laser scanner 3SF78 34-6PB00

X5 X1 or

X2

or

or

X3 X4

4

FS10_00137

Connector pin assignment Connection

Description

Position

X1

M12 connector for connecting a restart but- $

Connectable accessories

Order No.

M12 connector with terminal housing, 5-pin

3RX8 000-0CD55

%

Terminating resistor for PROFIBUS DP

6GK1 905-0EC00

&

PROFIBUS M12 connecting cable, with plug and socket, 2-pin

6XV1 830-3DE50 (0.5 m) 6XV1 830-3DH15 (1.5 m) 6XV1 830-3DH30 (3 m) 6XV1 830-3DH50 (5 m) 6XV1 830-3DN10 (10 m) 6XV1 830-3DN15 (15 m)

(

PROFIBUS M12 connecting plug with male insert

6GK1 905-0EA00

&

PROFIBUS M12 connecting cable, with plug and socket, 2-pin

6XV1 830-3DE50 (0.5 m) 6XV1 830-3DH15 (1.5 m) 6XV1 830-3DH30 (3 m) 6XV1 830-3DH50 (5 m) 6XV1 830-3DN10 (10 m) 6XV1 830-3DN15 (15 m)

)

PROFIBUS M12 connecting plug with female insert

6GK1 905-0EB00

ton (optional) X2

X3

M12 socket for PROFIBUS output cable

M12 plug for PROFIBUS input cable

X4

M12 plug for 24 V DC power supply

*

M12 cable socket with terminal housing, 5-pin

3RX8 000-0CB55

X5

Optical PC interface

+

PC connecting cable for LS4 with optical interface, 9-pin

3RG78 38-1DC

4/178


PROFIBUS



3SF78 34-6PB00

Protective field Detection range

0 ... 4 m min. 1.8 %

Object size and diameter

70 mm (cylindrical test body)

• adjustable up to 16 scans

3SF78 34-6PB00

Inputs

Luminance factor Response time • dual evaluation (2 scans)

Type

80 ms (only laser scanner without PROFIBUS system times) 640 ms (only laser scanner without PROFIBUS system times)

Number

4 (can be switched via PROFIBUS)

Safety category

Category 3 to EN 954-1, type 3 to IEC 61496-1 or EN 61496-3

Output

Restart/Reset

Signal definition • High (logical 1) • Low (logical 0) Control cable • Length

Connection of a command device for "with restart inhibit" mode and/or device resets, monitored dynamically 16 ... 30 V <3V max. 50 m (cable cross-section: 0.5 mm2, shielded)

Field pair changeover

Field pair switchover via PROFIBUS (PROFIsafe profile)

PROFIBUS (PROFIsafe profile)

RS232 interfaces via infrared interface

For device parameterization and field definition

Start

Start test and start inhibit can be set separately

Optics

Restart

160 ms to 10 s (can be set or is manual)

Rotation angle

190 °

Angle resolution

0.36 °

Lateral tolerance

Protective field supplement • For deactivated dust suppression

83 mm

± 0.18 °

• For activated dust suppression - protective field size < 3.5 mm - protective field size > 3.5 mm

• without assembly system (for rear of enclosure)

83 mm 100 mm

• with assembly system (for mounting surface)

± 0.22 °

Scan rate

25 scans/s or 40 ms/scan

• Additional supplement in the case of existing retro-reflectors or highly reflective surfaces (e.g. certain metals or ceramics) in the scan plane - more than 1.2 m behind the protective field line - in protective field or up to 1.2 m behind the protective field line

Laser protection class

0 mm 110 mm

• to standard

EN 60825-1, class 1 (eye safe)

• wave length

905 nm

• beam divergence

2 mrad

• Time Base

100 s

Environment and material

Warning field


IP65

Detection range

0 ... 15 m

Ambient temperature

Luminance factor

min. 20 %

• Operation

0 ... +50 °C

Object size

150 × 150 mm

• Storage

-20 ... +60 °C

Enclosure insulation class

Protection class 2

Humidity

To DIN 40040, table 10, code E (fairly dry)

Dimensions (W × H × D) in mm

141 × 167 × 168

Emitter

Infrared laser diode (λ = 905 nm)

Casing

Cast aluminum, plastic, steel connection plate

Vibratory load over 3 axes to IEC 60068, part 2-6

10 ... 150 Hz, max. 5 g

Response time • dual evaluation (2 scans) • adjustable up to 16 scans

80 ms (only laser scanner without PROFIBUS system times) 640 ms (only laser scanner without PROFIBUS system times)

No. of warning fields

4 (can be switched via PROFIBUS)

Output

PROFIBUS

Contour measurement Detection range

0 ... 50 m

Luminance factor

min. 20 %

Continuous shock over 3 axes to IEC 60068, part 2-29

10 g, 16 ms

Output

RS 232 serial interface via infrared interface

Rotating mirror drive

Brushless DC motor

Rotating mirror bearing

Maintenance-free ball bearing

Radial resolution

5 mm

Lateral resolution

0.36 °

Supply voltage • Via external supply • Note

24 V DC (+20 % / -30 %) The power pack for the external power supply must have a safe line separation to IEC 60742 and must bridge brief power failures of up to 20 ms.

Overcurrent protection

Fuse 1.25 A (medium slow)

Current consumption

350 mA typical


4/179

4

PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data

Order No.

Order No.

SIMATIC FS620I PROFIsafe laser scanner Including LS4soft software for securing danger zones

3SF78 34-6PB00

Connectors and cables 3RG78 38-1DC

SIMATIC FS660I PROFIsafe laser scanner with vertical protection for securing danger zones, hazardous and access locations incl. LS4soft software

3SF78 34-6PE00

PC connection cable for LS4 AS-Interface and PROFIBUS, including plug (9-pin), and optical interface PROFIBUS M12 terminating connector For PROFIBUS DP 1 packet = 5 items

6GK1 905-0EC00

PROFIBUS M12 connectors 1 pack = 5 items

4

6GK1 905-0EA00

• Socket insert

6GK1 905-0EB00

PROFIBUS M12 plug-in cables 2-core (inverted coding) preassembled, with M12 connectors, in different lengths:

Accessories Assembly system, twistable, for simple adjustment

• Male insert

3RG78 38-1AA

• 0.5 m

6XV1 830-3DE50

• 1.5 m

6XV1 830-3DH15

•3m

6XV1 830-3DH30

•5m

6XV1 830-3DH50

• 10 m

6XV1 830-3DN10

• 15 m

6XV1 830-3DN15

Test body (cylindrical) 3RG78 38-1AB

• Length: 500 mm; diameter: 70 mm (stationary applications)

3RG78 38-7GB

Adapter plate for PLS mounting support

3RG78 38-7RS

• Length: 1000 mm; diameter: 200 mm (mobile applications)

3RG78 38-7GD

Cleaning set Includes cleaning fluid (1000 ml), cloths (x 100)

4/180


PROFIBUS


■ Dimension drawings PROFIsafe laser scanner 3SF78 34-6PB00 122.3 61

143.8

s

a

b

48.75

b

167

a

148

Top view approx. 230

R 2.6

R 2.6

4

64

5

130 approx. 140

132 approx. 168

a = Rotating mirror axis b = Scan planes

155,4

51,5 74,4 90

23 56,6

Assembly system 3RG78 38-1AA

NSC 00610

9 158 166 192

9°

■ Schematics X5

X1 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5

X2

X3

X4

Connection restart button PROFIBUS output wire link PROFIBUS input wire link Connection supply voltage Optical PC Interface


4/181

PROFIBUS

RFID System communications modules ASM 450/452

■ Overview

■ Function The PROFIBUS DP procedure according to EN 50170 Vol. 2 PROFIBUS for communication between ASM and SIMATIC S5/S7 (or any PROFIBUS master) and the MOBY-specific procedures for communication between ASM and SLG are implemented on the ASMs. In principle, access to the data in the MDS can take place as follows: • Direct addressing via absolute addresses • Conveniently via the MOBY file handler (MOBY I/U only) using file name On the PROFIBUS DP/DP-V1, the ASM occupies a node address on the bus that is set on the basic module. The ASM is integrated into the hardware configuration by means of a device master (GSD) file. Then the ASM can be configured by means of the software tool HW_Config of the SIMATIC Manager or another PROFIBUS tool.

4 The low-cost ASM 450 and ASM 452 communications modules are autonomous PROFIBUS DP slaves for the connection of MOBY components via the PROFIBUS DP/DP-V1 to: • SIMATIC S7 (including FB/FC software) • SINUMERIK • SICOMP IMC, PC, PLC Thanks to their high degree of protection and ruggedness, they are particularly suitable for machine-level use.

■ Design

For the connection to any PROFIBUS DP master, the software interface is disclosed in the documentation. The IP67 connectors (Order No. 6ES7194-1AA01-0XA0) are to be ordered separately! ASM 450 (for MOBY E/I) The ASM 450 has two SLG interfaces. When using two SLG interfaces, the module operates in multiplex mode so that the MDS can only be read reliably when it is not moving. The data in the MDS is accessed direct by means of absolute addresses. Using the FB240/FC44 software functions for the SIMATIC S5/S7, the ASM operates in cyclic mode, i.e. the data throughput depends among other things on the size of the address window (max. 208 byte), number of slaves, etc.

AT-comp. PC

PROFIBUS-DP master module, e.g. S7-400 CPU

Error messages and operating states (MDS in the field, transmission, etc.) are indicated additionally by means of LEDs and simplify commissioning and service.

ASM 452 (for MOBY E/I/U/D/RF300)

24 V for SLGs

2nd SLG 1st (not for Filehandler) SLG

* Standard cable length

MDS

MDS

G_KT01_EN_00052a

to further PROFIBUSstations

2 m*

PROFIBUS-cable

Configuration

The ASM communications modules are mounted on the ET 200X standard module. The relevant configuration and mounting instructions should be referred to in the ET 200X manual. Expansion modules from the ET 200X spectrum cannot be used.

4/182


The ASM 452 has two SLG interfaces (for MOBY U/D/RF300 only one SLG can be connected). When using two SLG interfaces, the module operates in quasi-parallel mode so that the MDS can only be processed reliably (e.g. read data) when it is not moving. Data in the MDS can be accessed directly using absolute addresses (FC45, FC55) or conveniently by means of the MOBY file handler (FC46, FC56) using data names, the ASM being operated in acyclic mode via PROFIBUS DP-V1. In this mode a very large amount of data can be transferred to/from the ASM without overloading the PROFIBUS cycle. This has advantages when transferring large volumes of data. In addition, the ASM can process concatenated MDS commands very quickly in this mode.

PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data

Order No.

Order No.

ASM 450 communications module Max. 2 SLGs can be connected in multiplex mode, without connectors

6GT2 002-0EB00

Accessories 6ES7194-1AA01-0XA0

ASM 452 communications module For PROFIBUS DP V1, 1 SLG U92 or 2 SLG 4x, 7x, 8x can be connected, without connector

6GT2 002-0EB20

Connector For ASM 450/452 for the PROFIBUS DP interface and 24 V supply, 3 units per ASM 450/452 are necessary MOBY M12 dual-pin connector for ASM 450/452 For mounting individual ASM SLG, without cable

6GT2 090-0BC00

MOBY E, I, U connecting cable Preassembled, between ASM 450/452/473 and read/write device, angled connector, in the following lengths:

4

• 2 m (preferred length)

6GT2 091-1CH20

•5m

6GT2 091-1CH50

• 10 m

6GT2 091-1CN10

• 20 m

6GT2 091-1CN20

• 50 m

6GT2 091-1CN50

Preassembled, between ASM 450/452/473 and SLG 8x, straight connector, 2 m long

6GT2 091-2CH20

MOBY D connecting cable Preassembled, between ASM 475 and SLG 8x, IP65, angled connector, in the following lengths: • 2 m (preferred length)

6GT2 491-1CH20

•5m

6GT2 491-1CH50

SIMATIC RF300 connecting cable Preassembled, between ASM 452/473 and RF3xxR, IP65, straight connector, in the following lengths1): •2m

6GT2 891-1CH20

•5m

6GT2 891-1CH50

CD "RFID Systems Software & Documentation" FB/FC for SIMATIC, 3964R driver for DOS/Windows 95/NT/2000/XP, C-libraries, PC presentation program, RFID documentation

6GT2 080-2AA10

1) The connecting cables can be extended using the RF300 connecting cable for the ASM 456. These connecting cables are supplied in the lengths 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m and 50 m (6GT2 891-0Fxxx).


4/183

PROFIBUS

RFID System communications modules ASM 456

■ Overview

■ Application The ASM 456 communication module has been specially designed for a wide range of applications in industrial automation and logistics. Thanks to the high degree of protection of IP67, the ASM 456 can be installed in the process without a control cabinet. Used primarily for the ASM 456: • Mechanical engineering, automation systems, conveyor systems • Ancillary assembly lines in the automobile industry/suppliers • Small assembly lines

■ Design

4

PROFIBUS DP master module e.g. S7-400 CPU

The cost-effective ASM 456 communication module is a standalone PROFIBUS DP slave used to operate the RFID systems MOBY D/E/I/U and SIMATIC RF300 over PROFIBUS DP/DP-V1: • SIMATIC S7 (including FB/FC software) • SINUMERIK • SICOMP IMC, PC, PLC

ASM 456

Thanks to their high degree of protection and ruggedness, they are particularly suitable for machine-level use. The modular structure with different PROFIBUS connection systems allows them to be used in all applications. The system-wide, plug-in connection technique ensures rapid start-up.

X2

• Two parallel MOBY channels ensure real-time mode at dynamic read points. • Modular design with different bus interfacing possibilities ensures universal implementation. • SLG connection using an 8-pin M12 connector for quick mounting of all components. • Easy changeover from ASM 452 to ASM 456 thanks to 100% software compatibility. • High-performance hardware ensures fast data exchange with the SLG (reader). Consequently the data are available for the application even faster. • Easy downloading of firmware via SIMATIC Manager for function expansions and error rectification ensure high-availability of the RFID system. • The adjustable and parameterizable MOBY-specific PROFIBUS diagnostics facilitate start-up and troubleshooting. • A wide selection of pre-assembled PROFIBUS connecting cables can be ordered for ASM 456. This saves time and money during installation and assures better quality.


PROFIBUS 24 V for ASM 456 and SLGs to other PROFIBUS bus participants 2. SLG

1. SLG

MDS

MDS

G_FS10_XX_00103

■ Benefits

4/184

X1

PROFIBUS


■ Function

■ Ordering data

Order No. 6GT2002-0ED00

The ASM 456 comprises a basic module and a connection block that must be ordered separately. When connecting PROFIBUS, the customer can choose between ECOFAST connections and M12, 7/8" connections.

ASM 456 communications module For connection of 2 read/write devices

One or two read/write devices are connected to the ASM with a read/write device cable pre-assembled and ready to use. The standard length of the cable is 2 m. If other cable lengths to the read/write device are required, an extension cable measuring between 2 m and 50 m can be used. The cable can also be assembled by the customer as required.

Accessories for ECOFAST connection

• With male insert (5 per pack)

6GK1 905-0CA00

The PROFIBUS DP procedure according to EN 50170 Vol. 2 PROFIBUS for the communication between ASM and SIMATIC S5/S7 (or any PROFIBUS master) and the MOBY-specific procedures for communication between ASM and SLG are implemented on the ASMs.

• With socket insert (5 per pack)

6GK1 905-0CB00

PROFIBUS ECOFAST termination plug with terminating resistors

6GK1 905-0DA10

ECOFAST hybrid cable (pre-assembled)

6XV1 830-7Bxxx 1)

ECOFAST hybrid cable (non-assembled)

6XV1 830-7AH10

In principle, access to the data in the MDS can take place as follows: • Direct addressing via absolute addresses • Conveniently via the MOBY file handler (MOBY I/U only) using file names On the PROFIBUS DP/DP-V1, the ASM occupies a node address on the bus that is set on the connection block. The ASM is integrated into the hardware configuration by means of a device master (GSD) file. Then the ASM can be configured by means of the software tool HW_Config of the SIMATIC Manager or another PROFIBUS tool. Error messages and operating states (MDS in the field, transmission, etc.) are indicated additionally by means of LEDs and simplify commissioning and service. The ASM 456 has two SLG interfaces. The data in the MDS can be directly accessed by means of absolute addresses (FB/FC45, FB/FC55) or more conveniently using the MOBY file handler (FC 46/56) by means of the file names. The ASM is operated in acyclic mode over PROFIBUS DP V1. Consequently, a very large amount of data can be transferred to/from the ASM without overloading the PROFIBUS cycle. This has advantages when transferring large volumes of data. In addition, the ASM can process concatenated MDS commands very quickly in this mode.

ECOFAST connection block

6ES7194-3AA00-0AA0

PROFIBUS ECOFAST HYBRID plug 180

4

Accessories M12, 7/8“ connection M12, 7/8" connection block

6ES7194-3AA00-0BA0

M12 terminating resistor for PROFIBUS (5 per pack)

6GK1 905-0EC00

PROFIBUS cable with pre-assembled M12 connectors

6XV1 830-3Dxxx 1)

Cable for supply voltage with pre-assembled 7/8" connectors

6XV1 822-5Bxxx 1)

PROFIBUS FC standard cable non-assembled

6XV1 830-0EH10

PROFIBUS M12 connecting plug (5 per pack) • With male insert

6GK1 905-0EA00

• With socket insert

6GK1 905-0EB00

Connecting plug 7/8" for voltage (5 per pack) • With male insert

6GK1 905-0FA00

• With socket insert

6GK1 905-0FB00

Accessories MOBY SLG cable for MOBY I/E/U; 2 m

6GT2091-0FH20

SLG cable for MOBY I/E/U; 5 m

6GT2091-0FH50

SLG cable for MOBY D; 2 m

6GT2691-0FH20

SLG cable RF300 extension cable MOBY I/E/U/D/RF300; 2 m

6GT2891-0FH20


6GT2891-0FH50

SLG cable RF300 extension cable MOBY I/E/U/D and SIMATIC RF300; 10 m

6GT2891-0FN10


6GT2891-0FN20


6GT2891-0FN50

1) This cable is available in different lengths (see page 4/48)


4/185

PROFIBUS


■ Overview

■ Function As many as eight ASM communication modules can be plugged into one SIMATIC S7-300 rack and operated. In a configuration with several racks (max. 4), the ASMs can be plugged into and operated on any rack. This means that as many as 32 ASMs can be operated in the maximum configuration of a SIMATIC S7-300. The electrical isolation between read/write device and SIMATIC S7-300 bus ensures a noise-resistant setup. Error messages and operating states (MDS in field, command active etc.) are indicated using LEDs. Communication between the ASM 475 and S7-CPU takes place by means of acyclic message frames of the P-bus, so that the useful data (max. 238 byte) is transmitted very quickly and effectively. The ASM 475 is fully integrated into the diagnostics of the SIMATIC Manager by means of an Object Manager (OM). Depending on the PROFIBUS master, as many as 126 ET 200M modules can be operated on one PROFIBUS line.

4

ASM 470 (for MOBY I/E) The ASM 470 and 475 are low-cost modules for connecting the MOBY D, E, I, U and RF300 identification systems to the S7-300 and ET 200M.

■ Application

ASM 475 (for MOBY I/E/U/D/RF300)

The ASM 470 and ASM 475 communications modules integrate the MOBY identification systems into the following systems: • SIMATIC S7-300 • S7-400, PC (CP5412 (A2)) via ET 200M • SINUMERIK 840D/810D A maximum of two SLGs can be connected and operated in parallel mode (ASM 470 only in multiplex mode).

■ Design

ASM 470 ASM 475

Shield support element (6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0) for 2 modules

Shield terminal (6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0)

SLG

SLG

MDS

MDS

Configuration


G_KT01_EN_00053

6GT2 091-0E...

4/186

The data in the MDS is accessed direct by means of physical addresses using the ASM 470. Communication with the ASM takes place in the process image in blocks of 12 byte and is slower than with the ASM 475. Via ET 200M, it can be operated on any non-Siemens PROFIBUS master.

The data in the MDS is accessed direct by means of physical addresses using the ASM 475. The data is transferred between FC45, FC55 and ASM at great speed and without placing a great load on the CPU. In the MOBY I/U mode, the ASM can also be operated with the FC56 (file handler).

PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data

Order No.

ASM 470 MOBY communications module For SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M

6GT2 002-0FA10

ASM 475 MOBY communications module For SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M, parameterizable

6GT2 002-0GA10

Accessories Front connector (1 x per ASM)

6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0

MOBY E, I, U connecting cable Preassembled, between ASM 470/475 and read/write device, angled connector, in the following lengths: •2m

6GT2 091-0EH20

•5m

6GT2 091-0EH50

• 10 m

6GT2 091-0EN10

• 20 m

6GT2 091-0EN20

• 50 m

6GT2 091-0EN50

Preassembled, between ASM 470/475 and read/write device, straight connector, in the following lengths: •2m

6GT2 091-2EH20

•5m

6GT2 091-2EH50

• 10 m

6GT2 091-2EN10

• 50 m

6GT2 091-2EN50

Order No. Accessories (continued) MOBY D connecting cable Preassembled, between ASM 475 and SLG8x, angled connector, in the following lengths: •5m

6GT2 491-0EH50

• 20 m

6GT2 491-0EN20

• 50 m

6GT2 491-0EN50

SIMATIC RF300 connecting cable Preassembled, between ASM 475 and RF3xxR, straight connector, in the following lengths1): •2m

6GT2 891-0EH20

•5m

6GT2 891-0EH50

CD "RFID Systems Software & Documentation" FB/FC for SIMATIC, 3964R driver for DOS/Windows 95/NT/2000/XP, C-libraries, PC presentation program, RFID documentation

6GT2 080-2AA10

4

1) The connecting cables can be extended using the RF300 connecting cable for the ASM 456. These connecting cables are supplied in 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m and 50 m lengths (6GT2 891-0Fxxx)


4/187

PROFIBUS


■ Overview

■ Ordering data ASM 473 MOBY communication module ET 200X expansion module for BM 141/142/143/147, one read/write device can be connected for each ASM 473

Order No. 6GT2 002-0HA10

Accessories MOBY M12 double connector for ASM 450/452/473 For mounting individual ASM SLG, without cable

6GT2 090-0BC00

MOBY E, I, U connecting cable Preassembled, between ASM 450/452/473 and read/write device, angled connector, in the following lengths:

4 The ASM 473 is a low-cost ET200X expansion module for connecting the MOBY D/E/I/U identification systems via the ET 200X to the PROFIBUS DP-V1.

■ Application One read/write device (SLG x) can be connected for each ASM 473, but no more than 7 expansion modules can be connected to a basic module BM141/142/143/147 in connection, for example, with digital input/output modules. On all connected SLGs, the mobile data memories can be securely operated in the dynamic mode (for max. MDS speed, see SLG-MDS combination). The following can be used as PROFIBUS DP-V1 masters: • SIMATIC S7 (FC45, FC55 and FC56 available) • SINUMERIK • SICOMP IMC and PC, any PLC Thanks to its high degree of protection and ruggedness, it is particularly suitable for machine-level use.

■ Design

6GT2 091-1CH20 6GT2 091-1CH50

• 10 m

6GT2 091-1CN10

• 20 m

6GT2 091-1CN20

• 50 m

6GT2 091-1CN50

Preassembled, between ASM 450/452/473 and read/write device, straight connector, 2 m long:

6GT2 091-2CH20

MOBY D connecting cable Preassembled, between ASM 473 and read/write device 8x, IP65, angled connector, in the following lengths: • 2 m (preferred length)

6GT2 491-1CH20

•5m

6GT2 491-1CH50

SIMATIC RF300 connecting cable Preassembled, between ASM 452/473 and RF3xxR, IP65, straight connector, in the following lengths1): •2m

The ASM 473 communications module is an ET 200X expansion module for the basic module BM 141/142/143/147. For the relevant configuring and mounting instructions, see the ET 200X manual.

■ Function With the available software function FC45/FC55/FC56 (MOBY I/U file handler) for the SIMATIC S7-300/400, the ASM operates in acyclic mode via PROFIBUS DP-V1. In this mode a very large amount of data can be transferred to/from the ASM without overloading the PROFIBUS cycle. This has advantages when transferring large volumes of data. In addition, the ASM can process concatenated MDS commands very quickly in this mode. The MDS data is accessed directly by means of physical addressing of the MDS. Error messages and operating states (MDS in the field, transmission, etc.) are indicated additionally by means of LEDs and simplify commissioning and service. The hardware of the ASM 473 is configured with an object manager (OM) that is integrated in the SIMATIC Manager. Depending on the PROFIBUS master, as many as 126 ET 200X modules can be operated on one PROFIBUS line.

4/188

• 2 m (preferred length) •5m


6GT2 891-1CH20

•5m

6GT2 891-1CH50

CD "RFID Systems Software & Documentation"

see Catalog FS 10

1) The connecting cables can be extended using the RF300 connecting cable for the ASM 456. These connecting cables are supplied in the lengths 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m and 50 m (6GT2 891-0Fxxx).

PROFIBUS

RFID System communications modules ASM 454/424, ASM 754/724, ASM 854/824

■ Overview

■ Function As many as four read/write devices or antennas from the respective MOBY system can be connected to the rugged enclosure. The data in the MDS is accessed directly by means of physical addresses. The extended MOBY E functions (multitag, access rights, password, etc.) are not supported. Error messages and operating states (MDS in the field, transmission, etc.) are indicated additionally by means of LEDs and simplify commissioning and service. PROFIBUS DP-V1 interface (ASM 454, ASM 754, ASM 854) Communication with the user is implemented by means of the acyclic protocol service of PROFIBUS DP-V1. The node address on the PROFIBUS is set directly on the ASM by means of DIP switches.

As many as 4 read/write devices or antennas can be connected in parallel to the low-cost communications modules. The user can choose between two interfaces: • PROFIBUS DP-V1 (ASM 454, ASM 754, ASM 854) • RS 232/RS 422; serial interface to the PC/PLC (ASM 424, ASM 724, ASM 824)

The function FC45 or FC55 (multitag) (see also ASM 473) for simple integration into the application is available to the SIMATIC S7 users. The ASM is integrated into the hardware configuration by means of a device master (GSD) file. Then the ASM can be configured by means of the software tool HW_Config of the SIMATIC Manager or another PROFIBUS tool. The programming interface for connection to any PROFIBUS DP-V1 master is described in the FC45 documentation. RS232/RS422 interface (ASM 424, ASM 724, ASM 824) A Windows 98/NT/2000 C Library (MOBY API, DLL functions) incl. 3964R driver with basic functions (open/close channel, read data from data memory, etc.) is available for the PC user’s application.

■ Design Mounting For easy mounting on a standard rail, an optional adapter is available. 24 V= 230 V ~

PROFIBUS: or RS232/RS422

MOBY E As many as four SLA 7x can be connected to the ASM 754/724 in parallel, but are operated internally in multiplex mode. When connecting more than one SLA 7x, the MOBY E data memories can only be read or written securely in the static state. MOBY I/E

SLG

SLG

SLG

SLG

MDS

MDS

MDS

MDS

G_KT01_EN_00055

As many as four SLG 4x or SLG 7x can be connected in parallel to the ASM 454/424, which means that MOBY data memories can be read or written on all four SLGs simultaneously.

Configuration


4/189

4

PROFIBUS

RFID System communications modules ASM 454/424, ASM 754/724, ASM 854/824

■ Ordering data

4

Order No.

ASM 454 communications module With PROFIBUS DP-V1 interface, maximum of four SLG 4x or four SLG 7x can be connected

6GT2 002-2EE00

ASM 424 communications module With serial RS232/RS422 interface, maximum of four SLG 4x or four SLG 7x can be connected

6GT2 002-2CE00

ASM 724 communications module With RS 232/RS 422 serial interface, max. four SLA 7x can be connected

6GT2 302-2CE00

ASM 754 communications module With PROFIBUS DP-V1 interface, maximum of four SLG 7x can be connected

6GT2 302-2EE00

ASM 854 communications module With PROFIBUS DP-V1 interface, maximum of four SLG 8x can be connected

6GT2 402-2BB00

ASM 824 communications module With RS 232/RS 422 serial interface, max. four SLG 8x can be connected

6GT2 402-2CE00

4/190


Order No. Accessories CD "RFID Systems Software & Documentation" FB/FC for SIMATIC, 3964R driver for DOS/Windows 95/NT/2000/XP, C-libraries, PC presentation program, RFID documentation

6GT2 080-2AA10

PROFIBUS


■ Application

■ Function The STEP 7 programming software allows user-prompted parameterization of the distributed I/O as well as field devices on PROFIBUS DP. This primarily includes: • Configuration of the field bus system • Creation of an address list for the master module • Adjustment of data transmission rate on the field bus • Adjustment of the failure mode. The STEP 7 programming software allows identical programming and configuring of centralized and distributed I/O modules. The reference configuration of the PROFIBUS DP field bus is stored on the PROFIBUS DP master module. Diagnostics The diagnostics function can be used during start-up and normal operation to easily localize and rectify errors.

Prior to start-up, the PROFIBUS DP field bus and the individual nodes must be parameterized.

For this purpose, the programming device or PC is connected to PROFIBUS DP or directly to the relevant I/O device or field device.

During configuration and parameterization the user is supported by user-friendly tools. For SIMATIC masters, all functions are integrated in the STEP 7 programming language. These tools enable the PROFIBUS DP fieldbus to be easily • configured • parameterized, • documented, • started up, • tested and • diagnosed.

GSD data

For further information, please refer to "Industrial automation systems; SIMATIC Industrial Software; Software for SIMATIC S7/M7/C7; Standard Tools".

When ET 200 stations are connected to master modules which are not parameterized with COM PROFIBUS or STEP 7 (operation on third-party master modules), a fixed preassigned GSD file can be created with COM PROFIBUS. This file is then loaded into the configuration tool of the third-party manufacturer and can be used for simple parameter assignment of the station. This allows the use of the user-friendly plain-text parameterization feature of COM PROFIBUS; there is no need for hexadecimal code inputs in the manufacturer’s configuring tool.

STEP 7 can also be used to parameterize field devices of other manufacturers. In order to facilitate easy and convenient programming, the product usually comes with GSD files which can be embedded in the parameterization tools. For connection of distributed ET 200 I/O modules to masters of other manufacturers, the GSD files are also centrally available in the interface center These can be requested: • via modem on Tel.: ++49 911/737972 or ++49 911/730983 • at the Internet address http://www.ad.siemens.com/csi/gsd


4/191

4

PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data

Order No.

STEP 7 Version 5.4 Target system: SIMATIC S7-300/-400, SIMATIC C7, SIMATIC WinAC Requirement: Windows 2000 Prof./XP Prof. Delivery package: German, English, French, Spanish, Italian; incl. authorization diskette 3.5”, without documentation

4

Order No. STEP 7 Reference Manuals comprising STL, LAD and SFC Manuals as well as the Reference Manual of Standard and System Functions for SIMATIC S7-300/400 • German

6ES7 810-4CA08-8AW1

• English

6ES7 810-4CA08-8BW1

• French

6ES7 810-4CA08-8CW1

• Floating license on CD

6ES7 810-4CC08-0YA5

• Spanish

6ES7 810-4CA08-8DW1

• Rental license for 50 hours

6ES7 810-4CC08-0YA6

• Italian

6ES7 810-4CA08-8EW1

• Software Update Service on CD

6ES7 810-4BC01-0YX2

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0

• Upgrade Floating License 3.x/4.x/5.x to V5.4; on CD

6ES7 810-4CC08-0YE5

• Powerpack STEP 7 Lite V2.0 to STEP 7 V5.4; Floating License on CD

6ES7 810-4CC08-0YC5

• Trial License STEP 7 V5.4; on CD, 14 day trial

6ES7 810-4CC08-0YA7

SIMATIC Manual Collection Electronic manuals on CD-ROM, five languages: S7-200/300/400, C7, LOGO!, SIMATIC DP, PC, PG, STEP 7, Engineering Software, Runtime Software, PCS 7, SIMATIC HMI, SIMATIC NET SIMATIC Manual Collection Maintenance service for 1 year CD containing the current collection of manuals and the three subsequent updates

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2

EPROM programming device USB-Prommer For linking SIMATIC S7 and CP through MPI (5 m)

6ES7 792-0AA00-0XA0

MPI cable For linking SIMATIC S7 and CP thorugh MPI (5 m)

6ES7 901-0BF00-0AA0

Connecting cable For HMI adapter and PC/TS adapter (RS 232/ null modem cable) 5 m

6ES7 901-1BF00-0XA0

STEP 7 Version 5.3 Japanese Target system: SIMATIC S7-300/-400, SIMATIC C7, SIMATIC WinAC Requirement: Windows XP Professional Japanese Delivery package: English, Japanese; incl. 3.5” automation disk, without documentation • Floating license, Japanese, on CD

6ES7 810-4CC07-0JA5


6ES7 810-4CC07-0JA6

• Upgrade Floating License, Japanese, from 3.x/4.x/5.x to V5.3; on CD

6ES7 810-4CC07-0JE5

Components for connecting a PC to MPI and PROFIBUS • For PCs with a free PCI slot:

STEP 7 Version 5.3, Chinese Target system: SIMATIC S7-300/-400, SIMATIC C7, SIMATIC WinAC Requirement: Windows XP Professional Chinese Delivery package: English, Chinese; incl. 3.5" authorization disk, without documentation

CP 5611 MPI incl. MPI cable (5 m)

6GK1 561-1AM01

CP 5512 for Windows XP Professional 6ES7 810-4CC07-0KA5


6ES7 810-4CC07-0KA6

• Upgrade Floating License Chinese from 3.x/4.x/5.x to V5.3; on CD

6ES7 810-4CC07-0KE5

Documentation package STEP 7 Basics comprising Getting Started, Hardware Configuration Manual, Programming Manual, System Change Manual

6GK1 551-2AA00

• for PCs without a free PCI slot: PC adapter USB For connecting a PC to S7-300/-400/C7 through a USB interface; with USB cable (5 m)

6ES7 972-0CB20-0XA0

Components for connecting a PC to Industrial Ethernet • for PCs with a free PCMCIA slot: SOFTNET-PG 2005

• German

6ES7 810-4CA08-8AW0

• English

6ES7 810-4CA08-8BW0

• French

6ES7 810-4CA08-8CW0

• Spanish

6ES7 810-4CA08-8DW0

• Italian

6ES7 810-4CA08-8EW0


6GK1 561-1AA01

• for PCs with a free PCMCIA slot: (CardBus 32 bit):

• Floating license, Chinese, on CD

4/192

CP 5611 A2

6GK1 704-1PW63-3AA0

PROFIBUS

SIMATIC PDM Process Device Manager Introduction

■ Overview SIMATIC PDM

SIMATIC PCS 7 engineering station with SIMATIC PDM

SIMATIC

PDM

SIMATIC PDM

SIMATIC

Device on the workbench

PDM

Plant bus SITRANS P

S7-400

S7-400 SIMATIC PDM

Stand-alone computer with SIMATIC PDM

SIMATIC

PDM

SIMATIC

PDM

PROFIBUS DP fieldbus

HART protocol

Up to 12 Mbit/s ET 200M (IM 153-2 with HART modules)

MICROMASTER

ET 200iSP

SIMOCODE pro

PROFIBUS PA SIMATIC PDM

RS 232/ RS 485

HART multiplexer

HART

DP/PA link

SIMATIC PDM

SIMATIC

SIMATIC

PDM

PDM

SIMATIC PDM

HART device SIPART PS2

SITRANS P

SITRANS T3K

SIMATIC

SITRANS LR

SITRANS F M

SIPART PS2

PDM

Possible connection point of a PG/PC with SIMATIC PDM (stand-alone operation)

Configuration options with SIMATIC PDM

SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) is a universal, vendorindependent tool for the configuration, parameterization, commissioning, diagnostics and servicing of intelligent field devices (sensors and actuators) and field components (remote I/Os, multiplexers, control room devices, compact controllers), which in the following sections will be referred to simply as devices. Using one software, SIMATIC PDM enables the processing of more than 1,200 devices from Siemens and over 100 vendors worldwide on one homogeneous user interface. With respect to device integration, SIMATIC PDM is the most powerful device manager available on the world market. Devices which previously were not supported can be easily integrated in SIMATIC PDM at any time by importing their device descriptions (EDD). This provides security for your investment and saves you investment costs, training expenses and consequential costs.

Parameters and functions for all supported devices are displayed in a consistent and uniform fashion independent of their communications interface. SIMATIC PDM is integrated in the asset management of SIMATIC PCS 7. The Process Device Manager provides wider information for all devices described by the Electronic Device Description (EDD), e.g. detailed diagnostics information (vendor information, information on fault diagnostics and troubleshooting, further documentation), modification logbook (audit trail), parameter information. You can change directly to SIMATIC PDM from the diagnostics faceplates in the maintenance station.


4/193

4

PROFIBUS


■ Design Product versions A customer-oriented product structure enables you to adapt the scope of functions and the performance of SIMATIC PDM to your individual requirements. You can select the minimum configuration, one of the predefined product configurations, or produce your desired configuration from the individual components offered (see table).

4

Depending on the application environment, SIMATIC PDM can be categorized as follows: • SIMATIC PDM system-integrated: Complete packages for operation in a SIMATIC PCS 7/S7 configuration environment - SIMATIC PDM PCS 7 (for integration in an engineering system for SIMATIC PCS 7) - SIMATIC PDM S7 (for integration in a SIMATIC S7 configuration environment) • SIMATIC PDM stand-alone: Service tools for operation on a mobile computer on the PROFIBUS or with direct connection to the device - SIMATIC PDM Single Point (for processing of a single field device via a point-to-point coupling) - SIMATIC PDM Service (for enhanced servicing, incl. modification logbook and lifelist detailed diagnostics)

SIMATIC PDM stand-alone

SIMATIC PDM system-integrated

Minimum configuration

Components for individual configuration

Predefined product configurations

Product name

SIMATIC PDM Single Point

SIMATIC PDM Basic

SIMATIC PDM Service

SIMATIC PDM S7

SIMATIC PDM PCS 7

TAGs included in scope of delivery

1

4

128

128

128

TAG expansions

not expandable

TAG options - 128 TAGs - 512 TAGs - 1,024 TAGs - 2,048 TAGs and/or PowerPacks

PowerPacks - from 128 to 512 TAGs - from 512 to 1,024 TAGs - from 1,024 to 2,048 TAGs - from 2,048 to unlimited TAGs

Option "Integration in STEP 7/ PCS 7"

×

×

•

•

Option "Routing through S7-400"

×

×

×

•

Option "Communication through standard HART multiplexer"

×

×

×

×

•: Components included in delivery of individual PDM configurations ×: Can be ordered as options

TAG options/PowerPacks The predefined product configurations can be expanded by further functions and PowerPacks. Product configurations with 512, 1,024, 2,048 or unlimited TAGs can be implemented in this manner. In contrast to the PowerPacks, TAG options can only be combined with SIMATIC PDM Basic. They can only be used for product configurations based on individual components. A TAG corresponds to a SIMATIC PDM object, which represents individual field devices or components within a project, e.g. transmitters, positioners, switching devices or remote I/Os. TAGs are also relevant for diagnosis with the lifelist of SIMATIC PDM. In this case, TAGs are considered to be all recognized devices with diagnostics capability, whose detailed diagnosis is effected through the device description (EDD).

4/194


PROFIBUS


■ Function Core functions • Adjustment and modification of device parameters • Comparing (e.g. project and device data) • Plausibility testing of data input • Device identification and testing • Device status indication with operating modes, alarms and states • Device identification and testing • Simulation • Diagnostics • Management (e.g. networks and PCs) • Commissioning functions, e.g. measuring circuit tests of device data • Export/import (parameter data, reports) • Device replacement (lifecycle management) • Global and device-specific modification logbook for user operations (audit trail) • Device-specific calibration reports • Graphic presentations of echo envelope curves, trend display, valve diagnosis results etc. Support of system management SIMATIC PDM supports the operative system management in particular through: • Uniform presentation and operation of devices • Indicators for preventive maintenance and servicing • Detection of changes in the project and device • Increasing the operational reliability • Reducing the investment, operating and maintenance costs Graphical user interface The user interface of SIMATIC PDM satisfies the requirements of the directives VDI/VDE GMA 2187 and IEC 65/349/CD. Even complex devices with several hundred parameters can thus be represented clearly and processed quickly. Using SIMATIC PDM it is very easy to navigate in highly complex stations such as remote I/Os and even connected field devices. Several views are available to users to help them with their tasks: • Hardware project view • Process device network view (preferably for stand-alone application) • Process device plant view as TAG-related view, also with display of diagnosis information • Parameter view for parameterizing the field devices • Lifelist view for commissioning and service Communication SIMATIC PDM supports several communication protocols and components for communicating with devices that have the following interfaces: • PROFIBUS DP/PA interface • HART interface • Modbus interface • Special interface from Siemens

Routing From the central engineering system of the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system it is possible with SIMATIC PDM to reach every EDD-parameterizable device in the field plant-wide through the various bus systems and remote I/Os. SIMATIC PDM can thus perform the following from a central position: • Read diagnosis information from the devices • Modify device settings • Adjust and calibrate devices • Monitor process values • Create simulation values • Reparameterize devices.

4

■ Integration Device Integration SIMATIC PDM supports all devices described by EDD (Electronic Device Description). EDD is standardized to EN 50391 and IEC 61804. Internationally it is the most widely used standardized technology for device integration. At the same time it is the directive of the established organizations for PROFIBUS (PNO: PROFIBUS International) and HART (HCF: HART Communication Foundation). The devices are directly integrated in SIMATIC PDM through their EDD or the current HCF catalog. In the EDD the device is described in terms of its functions and construction using the Electronic Device Description Language (EDDL) specified by PNO. Using this description, SIMATIC PDM automatically creates its user interface with the specific device data. The current device catalog of SIMATIC PDM covers more than 1,000 devices from over 100 manufacturers world-wide. In addition, devices from all manufacturers can be integrated in SIMATIC PDM by simply importing their EDDs. It is thus possible to keep the device range up to date at all times and to add to the number of manufacturers and devices supported by SIMATIC PDM. To permit improved transparency, SIMATIC PDM also allows you to create project-specific device catalogs. If you would like to use any devices which cannot be found in the SIMATIC PDM device catalog, we will be glad to help you integrate them. Contact addresses Siemens AG, Automation and Drives, Technical Support Europe Phone: +49 180 50 50 222 Fax: +49 180 50 50 223 E-mail: [email protected] Asia/Pacific Phone: +86 1064 719 990 Fax: +86 1064 747 474 E-mail: [email protected] America Phone: +1 423 262 2522 Fax: +1 423 262 2289 E-mail: [email protected]


4/195

PROFIBUS


■ Overview

SIMATIC PDM Basic SIMATIC PDM Basic is the basic version with all functions required for operation and parameterization of the devices, and with enabled communications paths for • PROFIBUS DP/PA, • HART communication (modem, RS 232 and PROFIBUS), • Modbus, • SIREC bus and • SIPART DR. The SIMATIC PDM Basic software supports projects with as many as 4 TAGs and, provided the system requirements are met, can be used for stand-alone operation on any computers (PCs/notebooks) with local connection to bus segments or direct connection to the device.

4 PDM lifelist with status and diagnostics display

SIMATIC PDM can be used either integrated in a SIMATIC PCS 7/S7 configuration environment, as a mobile servicing tool on a computer with connection to PROFIBUS, or directly on the device.

■ Design

Functional options SIMATIC PDM option "Integration in STEP 7/PCS 7"

The customer-oriented product structure of SIMATIC PDM offers you many variations. You can select the minimum configuration (SIMATIC PDM Single Point), one of the predefined and application-specific product configurations, or produce your individual configuration from the components offered. Each individual component is available as a floating license for one user, and as a rental license for 50 operating hours. The rental license is particularly suitable for low-price processing of short-term projects. Minimum configuration SIMATIC PDM Single Point The functionality of this minimum configuration is matched to the processing of exactly one field device via a point-to-point coupling. All functions of this device are supported as defined in the device description. These functions include: 7 Unlimited selection of device / management of device catalog 7 Communication through PROFIBUS DP/PA or HART modem 7 Parameterization and diagnostics corresponding to device description 7 Export and import of parameter data 7 Device identification 7 Lifelist The following system functions of SIMATIC PDM Basic are not available with SIMATIC PDM Single Point: • EDD-based diagnostics in the lifelist • Project processing • Save function (only export and import of parameter data) • Record functions • Routing • Communication with HART field devices through remote I/Os SIMATIC PDM Single Point cannot be expanded with respect to its functions (e.g. to SIMATIC PDM Basic or with routing option via S7-400) or by means of the TAG option or PowerPack.

4/196

SIMATIC PDM Basic can be expanded by functional options and TAG options/PowerPacks. Use of the following functions depends on at least 128 TAGs: • Modification logbook • Calibration report • Detailed diagnostics in the lifelist


This option is required for using SIMATIC PDM in a SIMATIC S7 or SIMATIC PCS 7 configuration environment. SIMATIC PDM can thus be started directly from the hardware project (HW Config). SIMATIC PDM Option "Routing through S7-400" This option is required as an add-on to the option "Integration in STEP7/PCS 7" when SIMATIC PDM is to be used in a central engineering system for SIMATIC PCS 7/S7 with Ethernet bus link to the automation systems for the plant-wide configuration, parameterization, commissioning and diagnosis of the devices in the field. SIMATIC PDM Option "Communication through standard HART multiplexer" This option enables SIMATIC PDM to use the HART OPC server for communicating with HART field devices through HART multiplexers. TAG options/PowerPacks With the SIMATIC PDM TAG options it is possible to increase the SIMATIC PDM Basic software from 4 TAGs to 128, 512, 1,024 or 2,048 TAGs, or when using an additive PowerPack even to unlimited TAGs. One TAG corresponds to one SIMATIC PDM object, which represents individual field devices or components within a project, e.g. measuring devices, positioners, switching devices or remote I/Os. TAGs are also relevant for diagnosis with the lifelist of SIMATIC PDM. In this case, TAGs are considered to be all recognized devices with diagnostics capability, whose detailed diagnosis is effected through the device description (EDD). The SIMATIC PDM PowerPacks can be used to subsequently increase the number of available TAGs for all SIMATIC PDM product configurations. PowerPacks can be obtained for expansion to 512, 1,024, 2,048 and unlimited TAGs.

PROFIBUS


■ Design (continued) Predefined product configurations SIMATIC PDM Service This is a product configuration specially predefined for mobile servicing use. SIMATIC PDM Service offers all functions of SIMATIC PDM Basic, including modification logbook, calibration report and detailed diagnostics in the lifelist. In addition, SIMATIC PDM Service can be expanded by the options offered (functional and TAG options). The following program components are part of SIMATIC PDM Service: • SIMATIC PDM Basic • Option: 128 TAGs

■ Technical specifications Requirements for stand-alone operation Hardware

• PG/PC/notebook with processor in accordance with the operating system requirements • 256 MB main memory or more • 210 MB free memory on hard disk or more

Operating system (alternative)

• Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional with SP1 or higher • Microsoft Windows XP Professional with SP1 or higher

SIMATIC PDM S7

Further software components

SIMATIC PDM S7 is a predefined product configuration matched for use of SIMATIC PDM in a SIMATIC S7 configuration environment. It offers all functions of SIMATIC PDM Basic (including modification logbook, calibration report and detailed diagnostics in the lifelist) as well as the functionality for PDM integration in HW Config. SIMATIC PDM S7 can be expanded by the functional options offered and SIMATIC PDM PowerPacks. The following program components are part of SIMATIC PDM S7: • SIMATIC PDM Basic • Option: 128 TAGs • Option: Integration in STEP 7/SIMATIC PCS 7

• SIMATIC PDM integrated in STEP 7

STEP 7 V5.1 or higher with Service Pack 6 or higher, to be ordered separately

SIMATIC PDM PCS 7 SIMATIC PDM PCS 7 is a predefined SIMATIC PDM product configuration for integration into the engineering toolset of the SIMATIC PCS 7 engineering system. It offers all functions of SIMATIC PDM Basic (including modification logbook, calibration report and detailed diagnostics in the lifelist), the functionality for PDM integration in HW Config, as well as routing from the central engineering system to the field devices. SIMATIC PDM PCS 7 can be expanded by the functional options offered and SIMATIC PDM PowerPacks. The following program components are part of SIMATIC PDM PCS 7: • SIMATIC PDM Basic • Option: 128 TAGs • Option: Integration in STEP 7/SIMATIC PCS 7 • Option: Routing through S7-400


4/197

4

PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data

Order No.

4

SIMATIC PDM Single Point V6.0 For operation and parameterization of one field device, communication using PROFIBUS DP/PA or HART modem, incl. 1 TAG Cannot be expanded by further functions or TAG option/PowerPack 5 languages (German, English, French, Spanish, Italian), executes with Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional Floating license for 1 user Type of delivery: License key disk, emergency key disk, certificate of license, terms and conditions; 2 CDs with SIMATIC PDM V6.0 and device library as well as supplementary DVD with Microsoft ServicePacks and tools

6ES7 658-3HX06-0YA5

SIMATIC PDM Basic V6.0 For operation and parameterization of field devices and components, communication using PROFIBUS DP/PA, HART modem/interface, RS 232, Modbus, SIREC bus, SIPART DR, incl. 4 TAGs 5 languages (German, English, French, Spanish, Italian), executes with Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional Type of delivery: License key disk, emergency key disk, certificate of license, terms and conditions; 2 CDs with SIMATIC PDM V6.0 and device library as well as supplementary DVD with Microsoft ServicePacks and tools • Rental license for 50 hours

Routing through S7-400 5 languages (German, English, French, Spanish, Italian), executes with Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional Type of delivery: License key disk, emergency key disk, certificate of license, terms and conditions • Floating license for 1 user

6ES7 658-3CX06-2YB5


6ES7 658-3CX06-2YB6

Communication through standard HART multiplexer 5 languages (German, English, French, Spanish, Italian), executes with Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional Type of delivery: License key disk, emergency key disk, certificate of license, terms and conditions

SIMATIC PDM Basic

• Floating license for 1 user

Order No. Functional options for SIMATIC PDM V6.0 (continued)

SIMATIC PDM Single Point

• Floating License für 1 User

6ES7 658-3EX06-2YB5


6ES7 658-3EX06-2YB6

TAG options/PowerPacks SIMATIC PDM TAG option For TAG expansion, additive to SIMATIC PDM Basic V6.0 5 languages (German, English, French, Spanish, Italian), executes with Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional Floating license for 1 user Type of delivery: License key disk, certificate of license, terms and conditions • Up to 128 TAGs

6ES7 658-3XA06-2YB5

• Up to 512 TAGs

6ES7 658-3XB06-2YB5

6ES7 658-3AX06-0YA5

• Up to 1,024 TAGs

6ES7 658-3XC06-2YB5

6ES7 658-3AX06-0YA6

• Up to 2,048 TAGs

6ES7 658-3XD06-2YB5

Rental license for 50 hours • Up to 512 TAGs

6ES7 658-3XB06-2YB6

Functional options for SIMATIC PDM V6.0 Integration in STEP 7 / SIMATIC PCS 7 Only required if it is intended to the use the integration of SIMATIC PDM in HW Config 5 languages (German, English, French, Spanish, Italian), executes with Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional Type of delivery: License key disk, emergency key disk, certificate of license, terms and conditions

SIMATIC PDM PowerPack For subsequent TAG expansion of all SIMATIC PDM product configurations V6.0 5 languages (German, English, French, Spanish, Italian), executes with Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional Floating license for 1 user Type of delivery: License key disk, certificate of license, terms and conditions

• Floating license for 1 user

6ES7 658-3BX06-2YB5

• From 128 TAGs to 512 TAGs

6ES7 658-3XB06-2YD5


6ES7 658-3BX06-2YB6

• From 512 TAGs to 1,024 TAGs

6ES7 658-3XC06-2YD5

• From 1,024 TAGs to 2,048 TAGs

6ES7 658-3XD06-2YD5

• From 2,048 TAGs to unlimited TAGs

6ES7 658-3XH06-2YD5

4/198


PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data

Order No.

Predefined SIMATIC PDM V6.0 product configurations for special applications SIMATIC PDM Service V6.0 Complete package for standalone users in servicing, with • SIMATIC PDM Basic V6.0 • Option "128 TAGs" 5 languages (German, English, French, Italian and Spanish), executes with Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional, floating license for 1 user Type of delivery: License key disk, emergency key disk, certificate of license, terms and conditions; 2 CDs with SIMATIC PDM V6.0 and device library as well as supplementary DVD with Microsoft ServicePacks and tools

6ES7 658-3JX06-0YA5

SIMATIC PDM S7 V6.0 Complete package for use in a SIMATIC S7 configuration environment, with • SIMATIC PDM Basic V6.0 • Option "Integration in STEP 7/ PCS 7" • Option "128 TAGs" 5 languages (German, English, French, Italian and Spanish), executes with Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional, floating license for 1 user Type of delivery: License key disk, emergency key disk, certificate of license, terms and conditions; 2 CDs with SIMATIC PDM V6.0 and device library as well as supplementary DVD with Microsoft ServicePacks and tools

6ES7 658-3KX06-0YA5

SIMATIC PDM PCS 7 V6.0 Complete package for integration in the engineering toolset of the SIMATIC PCS 7 engineering system Floating license for 1 user, with • SIMATIC PDM Basic • Option "Integration in STEP 7/ PCS 7" • Option "Routing through S7-400" • Option "128 TAGs" 5 languages (German, English, French, Spanish, Italian), executes with Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional Type of delivery: License key disk, emergency key disk, certificate of license, terms and conditions; 2 CDs with SIMATIC PDM V6.0 and device library as well as supplementary DVD with Microsoft ServicePacks and tools

6ES7 658-3LX06-0YA5

Order No. Demo software SIMATIC PDM Demo V6.0 Without online communication and save functionality 5 languages (German, English, French, Spanish, Italian), executes with Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional Type of delivery: 2 CDs with SIMATIC PDM V6.0 and device library as well as supplementary DVD with Microsoft ServicePacks and tools

6ES7 658-3GX06-0YC8

4

SIMATIC PDM upgrade/update service SIMATIC PDM Upgrade from V5.x to V6.0 For all product versions and combinations 5 languages (German, English, French, Italian and Spanish), executes with Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional, floating license for 1 user Type of delivery: License key disk, emergency key disk, certificate of license, terms and conditions; 2 CDs with SIMATIC PDM V6.0 and device library as well as supplementary DVD with Microsoft ServicePacks and tools

6ES7 651-5CX06-0YE5

SIMATIC PDM Software Update Service Subscription for 1 year with automatic extension Precondition: current software version

6ES7 658-3XX00-0YL8


4/199

PROFIBUS

Technology Components PROFIBUS DP ASICs

■ Overview

■ Design ASPC 2 The ASPC 2 is a preprocessing communications chip for master applications with a maximum transmission rate of 12 Mbit/s. The ASIC has not been disclosed. The brief user manual describes the pins and the electrical properties of the ASPC 2. A separate microprocessor and the appropriate firmware are required for operation. The firmware is tuned to the 80C165 processor and can be obtained by purchasing a license. SPC 3 The SPC 3 is a preprocessing communications chip with a processor interface. The SPC 3 processes message frame identification, address identification, execution of the data back-up sequences and protocol processing for PROFIBUS DP.

4

Firmware is offered for the Siemens SPC 3 (see ordering data). DPC 31 • Simple connection of field devices to PROFIBUS FMS/ DP/ PA • Low Power Management is integrated for SPC 4-2, DPC 31® and SIM 1 • Various ASICs are available for different functional requirements and applications.

■ Application The PROFIBUS DP ASICs allow equipment manufacturers to connect their devices to PROFIBUS easily. They can be implemented at transmission rates of up to 12 Mbit/s. Different ASICs are available for different functional requirements and fields of application: • Master applications: ASPC 2 for PROFIBUS DP and FMS, with hardware-controlled bus access. • Intelligent slaves: SPC 3 for PROFIBUS DP, with hardware-controlled bus access; DPC 31 for PROFIBUS DP and PROFIBUS PA, with an integrated 8031 core; SPC 4-2 for PROFIBUS DP, PROFIBUS FMS and PROFIBUS PA (intrinsically safe applications) with hardware-controlled bus access. • Connection in intrinsically safe systems: SIM 1 for physical connection in intrinsically safe fieldbus systems as a Medium Attachment Unit for IEC 61158-2 at 31.25 kbit/s. Especially for combining with the SPC 4-2 and DPC 31. • Simple slaves: LSPM 2 with 32 input/output bits for confined spaces • Connection to fiber-optic conductors: FOCSI Module for electrical conditioning of signals already received or to be sent. The module ensures that the optically transmitted signals are properly electrically restored (retiming/retriggering) For initial development, order quantities of 5/6 ASICs are possible (not suitable for batch assembly because the pins of the ASIC can be bent due to the packaging; packing units larger than 5/6 units must be used) The number of ASICs per packing unit depends on the ASIC type (see ordering data). The ASICS ASPC 2, SPC3, DPC31 and LSPM2 can also be supplied in a lead-free design (see ordering data).

4/200


The DPC 31 is a preprocessing communications module with a processor interface and an integrated processor core (C31 core). It supports the connection of intelligent field devices as slaves on PROFIBUS DP and PROFIBUS PA. The DPC 31 autonomously processes all communications tasks and has, in addition, an integral C31 core for further applications. It combines the communication properties of the ASICs SPC 3 and SPC 4-2 in one chip. The integrated C31 core can also be programmed as required. Firmware is offered for the Siemens ASIC DPC 31 (see ordering data). SPC 4-2 The SPC 4-2 is a preprocessing communications chip with a processor interface. It is designed for combined applications and due to the Low Power Management function, it is ideally suited for use in intrinsically safe applications. Firmware is offered for the SPC 4-2 by the company TMG itec 1). The signals are converted for PROFIBUS PA using the SIM 1 function block. 1) Order from: TMG itec 76137 Karlsruhe Tel. +49 (0)721 82 80 60

SIM 1 SIM 1 expands the SPC 4-2 or DPC 31. Only a few external components are required in addition to these ASICs to be able to connect field devices to an intrinsically safe network in accordance with PROFIBUS PA. In combination with the SPC 4-2 or DPC 31, the functions of a PROFIBUS PA slave can be processed from physical linking through to communication control. SIM 1 supports all send and receive functions as well as the high-resistance decoupling of power from the bus cable. It provides three stabilized supply voltages and supports configuration of an electrically isolated power supply. It can be connected to all Manchester encoders/decoders to the IEC 61 158-2 standard at 31.25 kbit/s.

PROFIBUS


■ Design (continued) LSPM 2

FOCSI

LSPM 2 is a single-chip solution with 32 input/output bits. It processes all bus communication autonomously. An additional microprocessor and firmware are not required. The compact MQFP casing with 80 pins makes it ideal for applications with low space requirements.

This ASIC functions as an expansion to the existing PROFIBUS ASICs. The FOCSI module (Fiber Optic Controller from Siemens) ensures proper electrical conditioning and transfer of the received/sent optical signal. To inject the signal into a fiber-optic conductor, apart from FOCSI, the appropriate optical transmitter and receiver will be required. FOCSI can be used with the PROFIBUS DP ASICs described above. Additional ordering data available on request

■ Technical specifications LSPM 2

SPC 3

DPC 31

Listing

PROFIBUS DP

PROFIBUS DP

PROFIBUS DP, PROFIBUS PA

Application range

simple slave application

intelligent slave application



12 Mbit/s

12 Mbit/s

12 Mbit/s

Bus access

in ASIC

in ASIC

in ASIC

Automatic determination of transmission rate

yes

yes

yes

Microprocessor required

no

yes

integrated

Scope of firmware

not necessary

4 to 24 KB

4 to 24 KB

Message buffer

-

1.5 KB

6 KB

Power supply

5 V DC

5 V DC

3.3 V DC

Power loss, max.

0.35 W

0.5 W

0.2 W

Perm. ambient temperature

-40 °C … +75 °C

-40 °C … +85 °C

-40 °C … +85 °C

Casing

MQFP, 80-pin

PQFP, 44-pin

PQFP, 100-pin

Frame size

4 cm2

2 cm2

4 cm2

Delivery quantities (pcs.)

5/66/330/4950

5/96/960/4800

STEP B: 5/60/300/5100 STEP C: 6/66/660/4620

SPC 4-2

ASPC 2

SIM 1

FOCSI

Listing

PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS FMS PROFIBUS PA

PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS FMS PROFIBUS PA

PROFIBUS PA

-

Application range


master application

medium attachment

medium Management Unit


12 Mbit/s

12 Mbit/s

31.25 kbit/s

12 Mbit/s

Bus access

in ASIC

in ASIC

-

-

Automatic determination of transmission rate

yes

yes

-

-

Microprocessor required

yes

yes

-

-

Scope of firmware

3 … 30 KB

80 KB

not necessary

not necessary

Message buffer

3 KB

1 MB (external)

-

-

Power supply

5 V DC, 3.3 V

5 V DC

via bus

3.3 V DC

Power loss, max.

0.6 W at 5V 0.01 W at 3.3 V

0.9 W

0.1 W

0.75 W

Perm. ambient temperature

-40 °C … +85 °C

-40 °C … +85 °C

-40 °C … +85 °C

-40 °C … +85 °C

Casing

TQFP, 44-pin

P-MQFP, 100-pin

TQFP, 44-pin

TQFP, 44-pin

Frame size

2 cm2

4 cm2

2 cm2

2 cm2

Delivery quantities (pcs.)

5/60/300

5/66/660/4620

5/160/1000

10/160


4/201

4

PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data

Order No.

ASIC ASPC 2 For constructing master interfaces (quantity discount) • 6 pieces (lead-free)

6ES7 195-0AA05-0XA0

• 6 pieces (lead-free)

6ES7 195-0BF01-0XA0


6ES7 195-0AA15-0XA0


6ES7 195-0BF11-0XA0


6ES7 195-0AA25-0XA0


6ES7 195-0BF21-0XA0


6ES7 195-0AA35-0XA0


6ES7 195-0BF31-0XA0

ASIC LSPM 2 For constructing simple slave interfaces (quantity discount)

4

Order No. ASIC DPC 31 STEP C For constructing intelligent slave interfaces (quantity discount)

ASIC SPC 4-2 For constructing intelligent slave interfaces (quantity discount)


6ES7 195-0BA02-0XA0


6ES7 195-0BA12-0XA0


6ES7 195-0BA22-0XA0


6ES7 195-0BA32-0XA0

• 5 pieces for lab-development (lead-free)

6GK1 588-3AA00

• 60 pieces (lead-free, 1 tray)

6GK1 588-3AA10

• 300 pieces (lead-free, 1 tray box)

6GK1 588-3AA20

ASIC SIM 1 For connection in accordance with IEC H1 for a transmission rate of 31.25 kbit/s

ASIC SPC 3 For constructing intelligent slave interfaces (quantity discount) • 6 pieces (lead-free)

6ES7 195-0BD04-0XA0 6ES7 195-0BD14-0XA0

• 5 pieces for laboratory development

6GK1 588-3BA00

• 96 pieces (lead-free) • 960 pieces (lead-free)

6ES7 195-0BD24-0XA0

• 160 pieces (lead-free, 1 tray)

6GK1 588-3BA16

6ES7 195-0BD34-0XA0

• 1000 pieces (lead-free, taped and rolled)

6GK1 588-3BA21

• 4800 pieces (lead-free) ASIC FOCSI Fiber Optic Controller from Siemens for conditioning signals for the optical PROFIBUS

Accessories Firmware for Siemens ASIC SPC 3

• 10 pieces

6ES7 195-0EA00-0XA0

• DP firmware

6ES7 195-2BA00-0XA0

• 160 pieces

6ES7 195-0EA10-0XA0

• DPV1 firmware

6ES7 195-2BA01-0XA0

• DPV1 firmware upgrade

6ES7 195-2BA02-0XA0

ASIC DPC 31 STEP B For constructing intelligent slave interfaces (quantity discount)

Firmware for Siemens ASIC DPC 31


6ES7 195-0BE02-0XA0


6ES7 195-0BE12-0XA0


6ES7 195-0BE22-0XA0


6ES7 195-0BE32-0XA0

4/202


• DPV1 firmware

6ES7 195-2BB00-0XA0

PROFIBUS

Technology Components Interface modules / interfaces

■ Application

■ Design

The PROFIBUS DP interface modules make it easy to connect devices to PROFIBUS DP. They are based on the described ASICs from the Siemens AG. The interface modules can be used for a data transmission rate of up to 12 Mbit/s.

IM 180 interface module

Various interface modules are available for different functional requirements and applications.

A dual port RAM interfaces the module to the host system.

Interface modules for master: • IM 180 to connect a field device to PROFIBUS DP in the form of a master • IM 181 PC carrier board to adapt the IM 180 to the ISA bus of a PC

The IM 181 -1 PC carrier board is used to accommodate the IM 180 if this is to be operated in a PC system with ISA bus.

Interface modules for slaves: • IM 182-1PC slave board to connect AT-compatible PCs as DP slaves • IM 183-1 to connect a field device to the PROFIBUS DP as a slave • IM 184 to connect a simple third-party device to the PROFIBUS DP as a slave

IM 182-1 PC slave board

The IM 180 interface module consists primarily of an 80C165 microprocessor, an ASPC 2 ASIC, an OTP-EEPROM and RAM.

IM 181-1 PC carrier board

Drivers for Windows NT and demo software are available as accessories to demonstrate incorporation of the IM 180/IM 181 -1 into the DOS environment.

The single PC slave card (ISA bus) IM 182-1 is based on the ASIC SPC 3. It contains all physical bus components. A 9-pin Sub-D plug is used for connection to PROFIBUS DP. The firmware of the SPC 3 can be used in the PC as an accessory. The 1.5 KB RAM of the SPC 3 forms the interface to the host system. A driver for Windows NT is also available. IM 183-1 interface module The IM 183-1 interface module consists primarily of the SPC 3 ASIC, the 80C32 microprocessor, an OTP EEPROM as well as an RS 485 interface for connection to the PROFIBUS DP. An additional RS 232 interface is located on the module. IM 184 interface module The IM 184 interface module consists primarily of the LSPM 2 ASIC, OTP EEPROM memory as well as an RS 485 interface for connection to the PROFIBUS DP. The IM 184 can provide 32 input/output bit. For further details, see the brochure "PROFIBUS Technology Components", Order No.: 6ZB5310-0CT02-0BA7. Manuals for PROFIBUS DP interface modules are available for free in the Internet. Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi/dp (German) • Distributed I/Os • Others • Technology components, manuals Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.ad.siemens.com/csi_e/dp (English) • Distributed I/O • Others • Development components, manuals


4/203

4

PROFIBUS


■ Technical specifications 6ES7 180-0AA00-0XA0

4

6ES7 181-0AA01-0XA0

6ES7 182-0AA01-0XA0


Yes

Yes


250 mA

250 mA

Interfaces • Host interface

Dual-port RAM


Yes

Yes


12 Mbit/s

12 Mbit/s

Hardware components/ modules/ ASIC • ASIC • Memory configuration • Degree of firmware

ASPC 2 2 x 128 kbyte 80 kbyte

SPC 3

Programming units • Microprocessor type

80C165 (40 MHz)

PG/PC processor

Operating temperature - min - max.

0 °C 70 °C

0 °C 60 °C

General information • Field of application

Master applications

Carrier board for IM 180 connection Slave applications

Dimensions and weight • Board size, width • Board size, height

100 mm 100 mm

168 mm 105 mm

4 to 24 kbyte (incl. test program)


168 mm 105 mm

6ES7 183-0AA01-0XA0

6ES7 184-0AA00-0XA0


Yes

Yes


250 mA

150 mA


Yes

Yes


12 Mbit/s

12 Mbit/s

Hardware components/ modules/ ASIC • ASIC • Memory configuration • Degree of firmware

SPC 3 32 Kbyte SRAM, 64 KByte EPROM 4 to 24 kbyte (incl. test program)

LSPM 2

Programming units • Microprocessor type

80C32 (20 MHz)

not required

Operating temperature - min - max.

0 °C 70 °C

0 °C 70 °C

General information • Field of application

Slave applications

Simple slave applications

Dimensions and weight • Board size, width • Board size, height

86 mm 76 mm

85 mm 64 mm

not required


4/204


PROFIBUS


■ Ordering data

Order No.

SIMATIC S5/S7 IM 180 master module For PROFIBUS DP, max. 12 Mbit/s

6ES7 180-0AA00-0XA0

IM 181 PC carrier module for IM 180 Max. 12 Mbit/s

6ES7 181-0AA01-0XA0

SIMATIC S5/S7 IM 182-1 PC slave board For PROFIBUS DP, max. 12 Mbit/s

6ES7 182-0AA01-0XA0

SIMATIC S5/S7 IM 183-1 slave module For PROFIBUS DP, max. 12 Mbit/s

6ES7 183-0AA01-0XA0

SIMATIC S5/S7 IM 184 slave module For PROFIBUS DP, max. 12 Mbit/s

6ES7 184-0AA00-0XA0

4

Accessories Demonstration software Demonstration of the supply to the DPR interface of the IM 180/IM 181 under MS-DOS

6ES7 195-2AA00-0XA0

Windows NT driver for IM 180 and IM 182

6ES7 195-2AC00-0XA0


4/205

PROFIBUS

Technology Components Development packages

■ Overview Development packages

PROFIBUS DP/PA development package

Using the development packages, PROFIBUS hardware and software applications can be developed and tested using the various PROFIBUS ASICs or the interface modules (IM) provided.

The package facilitates set up of PROFIBUS slaves with a variety of PROFIBUS standards: • PROFIBUS DP-V1 (RS 485) • PROFIBUS PA (IEC 1158) and • PROFIBUS based on fiber-optic cables.

The comprehensive, interacting hardware and software components considerably reduce development costs for a PROFINET device.

4

The development kits provide a fully functional development environment which development engineers can build on with their special requirements for hardware and software. The package documentation is supplied on CD in English and German. The packages make our PROFIBUS know-how accessible to other users. The development team is available to provide advice to new users even with their own developments – this consultancy service is also a component part of the development kit. Following completion of a development, devices can be certified by our experts in the PROFIBUS interface centers – we can help new users here, too. Development package 4 for PROFIBUS-ASIC SPC 3, IM 183-1, IM 184 and IM 180/181 With development package 4 you can develop and test master and slave applications for connection to PROFIBUS DP. Hardware included • Master interface IM 180 and carrier board • Slave interface IM 181-1 (intelligent slave with ASIC SPC 3) • Slave interface IM 184 • Bus connector and bus cable Software included • COM PROFIBUS (for configuring the bus system or IM 180) • Firmware for IM 183-1 (original firmware for ASIC SPC 3, including development license) • Simulation software for development package 4 (for testing and operating development package components) Developing slaves The package contains all the components (hardware, software and firmware) required for developing a PROFIBUS slave with the ASIC SPC 3. It is also possible to develop a PROFIBUS slave directly using the IM 183-1 (as a piggy-back to proprietary electronics). Master system with IM 180 The IM 180 and the simulation software included are used to configure a functional PROFIBUS master. This example and the use of the IM 180 (as piggy-back for separate electronics) enables fast implementation of a master application. Proprietary master systems If you want to develop your own master interface, you should acquire the ASPC 2 master-firmware stack with the appropriate license. This is available as an object code or source code. The firmware is designed to suit Processor 80C165. This license and the firmware are not component parts of the development package. Feel free to consult our experts in the interface centers if you wish.

4/206


The development environment shows applications implemented using PROFIBUS-ASICs DPC 31. The use of ASICs SIM1 as medium attachment unit for adaptation to the PROFIBUS PA physical specification according to IEC 1158-2 is also explained. Hardware included: • DPC 31 development board; for developing/testing proprietary applications • CP 5613 A2; serves as master interface for the PC (PCI card) • Optical bus terminal; for conversion of copper cables to FOCs • Pre-assembled PROFIBUS cables Software included: • Testing and simulation software under WinNT for use on the PC in connection with the CP 5613 master module • Sample program for the DPC 31 board • DPC 31 DPV1 original firmware, including developer license • Parameterization software for CP 5613 "COM PROFIBUS“ for DP operation • PDM (process device manager) demo software for PA operation When developing PROFIBUS PA applications, order a PROFIBUS DP/PA coupler (6ES7 157-0AC80-0XA0) separately. The DP/PA coupler converts the PROFIBUS DP physical specifications into those of PROFIBUS PA. This module is not included in the development package!

■ Ordering data

Order No.

Development package 4 For PROFIBUS ASIC SPC 3, IM 183-1 and CP 5613, English/German

6ES7 195-3BA20-0YA0

DP/PA development package For PROFIBUS ASIC DPC 31 and SIM1, English/German

6ES7 195-3BA10-0YA0

PROFIsafe starter kit V3.3 SIMATIC DP/PA development package (6ES7195-3BA10-0YA0) is required

6ES7 195-3BF00-0YA0

PROFIBUS

Partner solutions

PROFIBUS SCOPE diagnostic software

■ Overview • Diagnostics via mouse click. • Network quick check for immediate and actual status analysis • Plant acceptance test with automatic documentation of the network status • Change management – tracking the changes and the configuration • Diagnostics and long-term measurement for service and maintenance • Early fault detection • Preventive maintenance • Reporting of faults/diagnoses by SMS/e-mail • Protocol analysis and graphical network diagnostics • Comprehensive filter and trigger functions such as live list • Diagnostics over Ethernet • Active PROFIBUS connection cable with integral repeater for reaction-free measurement without the interference of a spur line

■ Application PROFIBUS Scope is an indispensable tool for startup, acceptance testing, acute troubleshooting, and ongoing operation of PROFIBUS installations. Through regular or permanent network monitoring, faults can be detected early and preventive maintenance measures can be quickly put in place. This reduces downtimes and increases plant availability. PROFIBUS systems can be monitored and documented over the entire life cycle. Quality assurance here crosses manufacturer boundaries for all critical network parameters (cycle times, device diagnostics, error message frames, etc.). Configuring errors when replacing devices or when expanding the system can thus be discovered immediately. The extensive trigger functions and recording filters allow complex troubleshooting. Typical errors such as duplicate station addresses, short-circuits, twisted cables or incorrect bus terminating resistors can be detected quickly due to their characteristic message frame sequences. Extensive online help supports the user with practical examples and tips. • Use in all industrial areas with PROFIBUS applications • Validation tool for FDA-regulated systems recommended by Profibus International (Guideline "Validation of PROFIBUS Systems") • Standard testing and measuring tool of numerous service providers, training centers and competence centersks

■ Design Hardware requirements: • USB slot Version 1.1 or higher for the hardware dongle (license)

■ Function Diagnostics operating mode Clear representation of the PROFIBUS network with network tree, status displays, device table and diagnostics table. Message frame traffic is analyzed automatically. Clear plaintext messages facilitate error analysis. The integral network quick check enables immediate analysis that can be documented in the form of a test log. Signals operating mode Recording of I/O data for PROFIBUS DP. These are represented in a y/t diagram. This results in direct monitoring of process data and it is possible to analyze individual measuring points and signals. Messages operating mode Classic bus monitor with comprehensive trigger and re-trigger functions (down to one bit), recording and view filters as well as search functions. Repeat messages and error messages are detected. Complex troubleshooting at the protocol level can thus be carried out. General • Automatic transfer rate detection (max. 12 Mbit/s) • Protocol analysis (DP-V0, DP-V1, DP-V2, FMS, FDL/MPI and PA) • Data export to .CSV • Live list • Language version German/English • Online and offline operation • Online help

■ Ordering data PROFIBUS SCOPE diagnostic software Executable under Windows 2000/XP including start aid, optional active PROFIBUS connecting cable

Order No. Order directly from:

Trebing & Himstedt Prozessautomation GmbH & Co. KG Wilhelm-Hennemann-Straße 13 19061 Schwerin, Germany Tel.: +49(0) 385 3 95 72-0 Fax: +49(0) 385 3 95 72-22 E-Mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.t-h.de

■ More information Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.t-h.de

Communications processor: • CP 5512 • CP 5611 A2 • CP 5611/CP 5611 A2 • xEPI (ETHERNET PROFIBUS INTERFACE) Software requirements: • Windows 2000/XP


4/207

4

PROFIBUS

Partner solutions

Delphi-S7, Delphi-DPLib and Delphi-DPSoftnetSlave

■ Overview


The Delphi software products offer programming interfaces for Delphi developments with access to PROFIBUS. The following protocols are available: • PROFIBUS DP (Delphi-DPLib) for the DP-5613 software with CP 5613 A2/CP 5614 A2 or SOFTNET-DP with CP 5512 or CP 5611 A2 • PROFIBUS DP SOFTNET slave (Delphi-DPSoftnetSlave) for all SIMATIC DP slave products for CP 5611 A2 • S7 communication (Delphi-S7) for the S7-5613 software with CP 5613 A2/CP 5614 A2 or SOFTNET-S7 with CP 5512/CP 5611 A2

4

The products enable easy access to the Siemens SIMATIC NET programming interfaces under Borland Delphi. In its communication functions, the interface for Borland Delphi is analogous to the Siemens interface for the programming language C. All the services of the relevant communication protocols over PROFIBUS are supported.

■ Benefits

• Interfacing the Borland world to SIMATIC NET • Developments can be run on computers with PCI, PCMCIA or PC card slots

Type

Delphi-S7, Delphi-DPLib and Delphi-DPSoftnetSlave for Borland Delphi

System requirements

• Borland Delphi 3.0 or higher • All Windows operating systems from Windows NT 4.0 • CP 5512, CP 5611 A2, CP 5613 A2/CP 5614 A2 • Software packages for CP 5613 A2/CP 5614 A2 or CP 5512, CP 5611 A2

■ Ordering data

Order No.

Delphi-DPLib for Borland Delphi Including example program, documentation German and English

Delphi-DPLib

Delphi-DPSoftnetSlave for Borland Delphi Including example program, documentation German and English

Delphi-DPSoftnetSlave

Delphi-S7 for Borland Delphi Including example program, documentation German and English

Delphi-S7

For more information contact:

SoftwareOption Outsourcing Services GmbH

SoftwareOption Outsourcing Services GmbH, Carsten Buchloh Waldstraße 30 D-52080 Aachen Tel.: +49 - (0)2405 - 47 16 727 Fax: +49 - (0)2405 - 47 16 729 E-mail: [email protected] Internet: www.SoftwareOption.de Note: Fully functional test versions are available for download on the Internet. You can also order the full versions online.

■ More information Additional information can be found in the Internet under: http://www.Aixo.com

7 4/208


ET 200 distributed I/Os

5/2 5/4 5/9 5/11 5/16 5/17 5/21 5/24 5/25 5/26 5/36 5/49 5/50 5/51 5/54 5/55 5/55 5/56 5/57 5/58 5/60 5/62 5/64 5/66 5/69 5/72 5/74 5/77 5/79 5/79 5/81 5/82 5/87 5/95 5/97 5/98 5/99 5/101 5/109 5/114 5/117 5/117 5/120 5/120 5/122 5/123 5/125 5/128

ET 200S IM 151-1 interface modules IM 151-3PN interface modules IM 151-7 CPU interface modules Master interface submodule for IM 151-7 CPU/IM 151-7 F-CPU interface module IM 151-7 F-CPU interface module Power modules for PM-E electronics modules Reserve modules Potential isolation module Digital electronic modules Analog electronic modules Fail-safe Modules PM-E F PROFIsafe F power module F electronic modules F terminal modules IQ-Sense Modules and Sensors 4 IQ-Sense and 8 IQ-Sense sensor modules IQ-Sense proximity switch Technology Modules SSI module 2 PULSE pulse generator 1 STEP stepper module 1 POS U positioning module 1 COUNT 24 V/100 kHz counter module 1 COUNT 5 V/500 kHz counter module 1SI interface module SIWAREX CS SIWAREX CF Terminal Modules Terminal modules for power and electronic modules Motor Starters and Frequency Converters ET 200S motor starters ET 200S FC frequency converter Accessories for frequency converters Power modules for ET 200S motor starters and frequency converters Safety Motor Starter and Frequency Converter Solutions local / PROFIsafe ET 200S fail-safe motor starters ET 200S FC fail-safe frequency converter Safety Module local PROFIsafe Safety Module Terminal modules for ET 200S motor starters and frequency converters Terminal modules for ET 200S motor starters and frequency converters Software Motor Starter ES STARTER drive/commissioning software

5/139 5/141 5/143

ET 200iSP IM 152-1 interface module ET 200iSP digital electronic modules and terminal modules ET 200iSP analog electronic modules and terminal modules ET 200iSP reserve module and terminal modules ET 200iSP power supply unit RS 485-IS coupler

5/145 5/147 5/150 5/153 5/157 5/163 5/164 5/166 5/166 5/168 5/168 5/170 5/171 5/172

ET 200pro IM 154-1 and IM 154-2 interface modules IM 154-4 PN interface modules EM 141 and EM 142 digital expansion modules EM 144 and EM 145 analog expansion modules Fail-safe digital expansion modules PM-E power module RFID systems SIMATIC RF170C Motor starters Standard and High Feature ET 200pro isolator modules Safety local Module Accessories for ET 200pro motor starters

5/133

5/173 5/175 5/181 5/183 5/187 5/190 5/191 5/193 Sec. 4 5/197 5/199 5/200 5/201 5/203 5/208

ET 200X BM 147/CPU intelligent basic modules BM 141 and BM 142 basic modules ECOFAST basic modules EM 141 and EM 142 digital expansion modules PM 148 power module EM 143/DESINA digital expansion module EM 144 and EM 145 analog expansion modules RFID systems communications modules/ASM 473 CP 142-2 EM 148-P pneumatic module EM 148-P pneumatic interface EM 148-FC frequency converter ET 200X motor starter SITOP power, 24 V/10 A power supply

5/210 5/210

ET 200L ET 200L block I/O

5/215 5/216 5/219 5/221 5/222 5/222 5/225 5/227 5/229

5/291 5/291 5/292 5/293 5/293

ET 200M IM 153-1/153-2 SIPLUS IM 153-1 IM 153-2 FO F Digital/Analog Modules SM 326 F digital input - Safety Integrated SM 326 F digital output - Safety Integrated SM 336 F analog input - Safety Integrated SIPLUS SM 326 F digital input module Safety Integrated SIPLUS SM 326 F digital output module Safety Integrated Isolating module SIPLUS S7-300 isolating modulee Digital Modules SM 321 digital input SM 322 digital output SM 323/SM 327 digital input/output SIPLUS SM 321 digital input module SIPLUS SM 322 digital output module SIPLUS SM 323 digital input/output module Analog Modules SM 331 analog input SM 332 analog output SM 334 analog input/output SIPLUS SM 331 analog input module SIPLUS SM 332 analog output module SIPLUS SM 334 analog input/output module Analog Modules with HART Analog input module with HART Analog output module with HART Ex analog input module with HART Ex analog output module with HART Ex Digital Modules Ex digital input modules Ex digital output modules Ex Analog Modules Ex analog input modulesn Ex analog output modules IQ Sense Modules and Sensors IQ-Sense sensor module SIMATIC PXO opto proximity switches with IQ-Sense SIMATIC PXS sonar proximity switches with IQ-Sense Special Modules SM 374 simulator module DM 370 dummy module Power Supplies 2 A, 5 A, 10 A load power supplies

5/297

ET 200eco

5/304

ET 200R

5/230 5/232 5/233 5/234 5/234 5/240 5/246 5/250 5/252 5/254 5/255 5/255 5/262 5/265 5/268 5/269 5/270 5/271 5/271 5/273 5/275 5/277 5/279 5/279 5/281 5/283 5/283 5/285 5/287 5/287 5/288 5/290



ET 200S

Introduction

■ Overview

5

SIMATIC ET 200S • Distributed I/O system to degree of protection IP20 with minimal wiring outlay, also for extremely time-critical tasks such as high-speed closed-loop controls • Can be used with integrated S7-CPU as mini PLC: - also available as fail-safe PROFIsafe version - with optional lower-level PROFIBUS DP • Bit-modular design for exact adaptation to the automation task in hand. • Interface modules available with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET interfaces • Can be built up from digital and analog input or output modules, technology modules, motor starters and frequency converters (new) for controlling drives up to 7.5 or 4 kW • Modules can be replaced during operation (hot swapping) • Channel-specific diagnostics for high availability • Can be supplied with integrated fiber optic interface if required • Transmission rates up to 12 Mbit/s • FastConnect with no-strip fast connection technique • Ex approval to Cat. 3 for Zone 2 acc. to ATEX100 a • Slot reservation with spare modules • Interface module with PROFINET interface • Fail-safe DI modules with safety-related signal processing according to PROFIsafe

5/2


SIMATIC ET 200S COMPACT • Block I/O to degree of protection IP20 with 32 channels, comprising terminal block and electronic block • Discretely modular expansion to maximum of 128 channels or 12 modules • The complete ET 200S module spectrum can be used (with the exception of PROFIsafe modules) • The basis of the block I/O is the interface module ET 200S BASIC • Separation of terminal connections and electronics with permanent wiring • Screw-type and spring-loaded terminal connections • Standard terminal block with 2-wire connection system; 3-wire and 4-wire systems available using additional terminals • Mounting on standard rail • Hot swapping of expansion modules • Communication via PROFIBUS • Up to 100 byte inputs and outputs (address space) The design of the ET 200S allows it to be used in areas subject to increased mechanical stress.


ET 200S

Introduction

■ General technical specifications Degree of protection

IP20

Ambient temperature

0 ... 60 °C

Vibration resistance

2 g continuously, 5 g temporarily (motor starter max. 2 g)

Maximum config. (none of the limits listed below must be exceeded) • Number of modules per IM 151, max.

• Line width, max.

• Parameter length

• Useful data length

Requirements of the DP master system

IM 151-1 BASIC: Up to 12 modules IM 151-1 COMPACT: Up to 12 modules IM 151-1 STANDARD: Up to 63 modules IM 151-1 HIGH-FEATURE: Up to 63 modules IM 151-7 CPU: Up to 63 modules IM 151-3 PN: Up to 63 modules IM 151-1 BASIC: Up to 2 m IM 151-1 COMPACT: Up to 2 m IM 151-1 STANDARD: Up to 2 m IM 151-1 HIGH-FEATURE: Up to 2 m IM 151-7 CPU: up to 1 m IM 151-3 PN: Up to 2 m Depending on the number and type of connected modules IM 151-1 BASIC: 198 byte IM 151-1 COMPACT: 218 byte IM 151-1 STANDARD: Up to 244 byte IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE: Up to 244 byte IM 151-7 CPU: not relevant IM 151-3 PN: Not relevant Depending on the number and type of connected modules IM 151-1 BASIC: Up to 88 byte for inputs and outputs IM 151-1 COMPACT: Up to 100 byte for inputs and outputs IM 151-1 STANDARD: Up to 244 byte for inputs and outputs IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE: Up to 244 byte for inputs and outputs IM 151-7 CPU: not relevant IM 151-3 PN: Not relevant

• PROFIBUS DP master

In accordance with EN 50170

• Parameter length

>32 byte, depending on the number and type of connected modules

• Useful data length

Depending on the number and type of connected modules

• Diagnostics length

6 to max. 128 byte (adjustable)

Standards and approvals • PROFIBUS

EN 50170, Volume 2

• IEC 1131

IEC 1131, Part 2

• UL

acc. to UL508 standard, File No. E 116536/E 75310 (AC modules)

• C-Tick


• CSA

Acc. to standard C22.2 No. 142, File No. LR 48323/LR 44226 (AC modules)

• cULus for hazardous locations

acc. to UL 508 standard, File No. E 116536 acc. to hazardous locations UL 1604, File no. E 222109 acc. to CSA C22.2 standard, No. 142

• FM

Standard Class No. 3611, Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D, Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC (without motor starter and frequency converter)

• Shipbuilding

American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas Det Norske Veritas German Lloyd Lloyds Register of Shipping Nippon Kaiji Kyokai (without motor starters and frequency converters)

• Ex approval Cat. 3 (for Zone 2 acc. to ATEX–100a)

EN 50021

Within the context of converting SIMATIC from UL / CSA to cULus, the ET 200S modules will also be converted

■ Dimension drawings Dimensions in mm IM 151

35

PM EM EM EM PM EM EM EM

20

20

35 35

15

G_IK10_XX_50071

15


5/3

5


ET 200S

IM 151-1 interface modules

■ Overview • Interface module for linking the ET 200S to PROFIBUS DP • Handles all data exchange with the PROFIBUS DP master • 6 versions: - IM 151-1 BASIC (RS485) - IM 151-1 COMPACT 32DI DC24V (RS485) - IM 151-1 COMPACT 16DI DC24V / 16DO DC24V/0.5A (RS485) - IM 151-1 STANDARD (RS485) - IM 151-1 STANDARD (FO) - IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE (RS485)

5

The main differences between the IM 151-1 versions: IM 151-1 BASIC

IM 151-1 COMPACT

IM 151-1 STANDARD

IM 151-1 FO STANDARD

IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE

Order number 6ES7 151-

1CA00-0AB0

1CA00-1BL00 1CA00-3BL00

1AA04-0AB0

1AB02-0AB0

1BA01-0AB0

Integral I/O

-

32 DI 16DI / 16 DO

-

-

-

Maximal number of I/O modules

12

12

63

63

63

Maximum station width

2m

2m

2m

1m

2m

Maximal number of parameters

198 byte

218 byte

244 byte

244 byte

244 byte

Maximum address space for inputs and outputs

88 byte each

100 byte each

244 byte

128 byte

Depending on the DP master: 244 byte or not relevant

Maximum diagnostics length

6 ... 43 byte

6 ... 44 byte

6 ... 122 byte

6 ... 64 byte

6 ... 128 byte

Protocol

DP V0

DP V0

DP V0 and DP V1

DP V0

DP V0 and DP V1

DP connection type

RS485

RS485

RS485

Fiber-optic cable

RS485

Firmware update

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

Option handling

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Isochronous mode

No

No

No

No

Yes

Maximum address volume per module

8 byte

8 byte

32 byte

8 byte

32 byte

Identification data

No

No

Yes

No

Yes

Use of fail-safe modules (PROFIsafe)

No

No

No

No

Yes

I-slave-to-slave communication

No

No

No

No

Yes

5/4



ET 200S


■ Technical specifications 6ES7 151-1AA04-0AB0

6ES7 151-1AB02-0AB0

6ES7 151-1BA01-0AB0

6ES7 151-1CA00-0AB0

24 V Yes

24 V Yes

24 V Yes

24 V Yes

20 ms

20 ms

20 ms

from supply voltage 1L+, max.

200 mA

200 mA

70 mA

Power loss, typ.

3.3 W

3.3 W

1.5 W

Supply voltages Supply voltage of electronics 1L+ • Rated value (DC) • reverse polarity protection Voltages and currents Mains/voltage failure jumpering, min. Current consumption

700 mA

Current output to backplane bus (DC 5 V), max. Address area Adressing volume • Outputs • Inputs

244 Byte 244 Byte

128 Byte 128 Byte

244 Byte 244 Byte

88 Byte 88 Byte

5

interfaces PROFIBUS DP, Output current, max. 80 mA interface physics, RS 485

80 mA

Yes

Yes Yes; 4 x simplex jack

interface physics, LWL

Yes

No

Connection point RJ45

No

Protocols PROFIBUS DP protocol

Yes

Yes

Yes

TCP/IP protocol

No

PROFINET IO

No

Yes

PROFIBUS DP Transmission speed, max.

12 Mbit/s; 9.6 / 19.2 / 45.45 / 93.75 / 187.5 / 500 kbauds; 1.5 / 3 / 6 / 12 Mbps

12 Mbit/s; 9.6 / 19.2 / 45.45 / 93.75 / 187.5 / 500 kbauds; 1.5 / 12 Mbps

12 Mbit/s

12 Mbit/s; 9.6 / 19.2 / 45.45 / 93.75 / 187.5 / 500 kbauds; 1.5 / 3 / 6 / 12 Mbps

Cable length, max.

1,200 m

2m

SYNC capability

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

FREECE capability

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

direct data exchange (cross traffic)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Isochronous mode

No

No

Yes

No

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Alarms • Alarms

Yes

No

Yes

No

Diagnoses • Diagnostic functions

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Diagnostics indication LED • Bus error BF (red) Yes Yes • Collective error SF (red) • Monitoring 24 V voltage supply ON Yes (green)

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

500 V DC

57 V DC / 60 V AC

500 V DC

500 V DC

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Isochronous mode

Isolation Isolation checked with Isolation between backplane bus and electronics between electronic block and PROFIBUS DP

Yes

between supply voltage and electronics

No

No


5/5


ET 200S


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 151-1AA04-0AB0

6ES7 151-1AB02-0AB0

6ES7 151-1BA01-0AB0

6ES7 151-1CA00-0AB0

500 V DC

500 V DC

75V DC, 60V AC

500 V DC

806Ah

806Bh

Width

45 mm

45 mm

45 mm

45 mm

Height

119.5 mm

119.5 mm

119.5 mm

119.5 mm

Depth

75 mm

75 mm

75 mm

75 mm

150 g

150 g

150 g

150 g

Permissible potential difference between different circuits General information Vendor identification (VendorID)

80F3h


Weights Weight, approx.

6ES7 1511CA00-1BL0

5

6ES7 1511CA00-3BL0

Supply voltages Supply voltage of electronics 1L+

6ES7 1511CA00-1BL0

6ES7 1511CA00-3BL0

Digital outputs Number of digital outputs

16

• Rated value (DC)

24 V

24 V

Cable length unshielded, max.

1,000 m

• reverse polarity protection

Yes

Yes

Short-circuit protection of the output

Yes

Current consumption

Lamp load, max.

5W


Controlling a digital input

Yes

100 mA

Address area

Output current

Adressing volume

• for signal "1" permissible range for 0 to 60 °C, min.

0.6 A

• for signal "0" residual current, max.

7 mA

• Outputs

100 Byte

100 Byte

• Inputs

100 Byte

100 Byte Output delay at resistive load

Interfaces PROFIBUS DP, Output current, max.

80 mA

interface physics, RS 485

Yes

Yes

interface physics, LWL

No

No


Yes

Yes No

TCP/IP protocol PROFINET IO

No

PROFIBUS DP

• "0" to "1", max.

0.5 ms

• "1" to "0", max.

1.3 ms

Switching frequency • with resistive load, max.

100 Hz

• with inductive load, max.

2 Hz

• on lamp load, max.

10 Hz

Aggregate current of the outputs (per group) • up to 60 °C, max.

2A

Cable length, max.

1,200 m

1,200 m

Encoder


Yes

Yes

Connectable encoders • 2-wire BEROS

Yes

12 Mbit/s

• permissible quiescent current (2-wire BEROS), max.

1.5 mA

No

No

Status information/ alarms/ diagnostics

32

16

Alarms • Alarms

No

No

1,000 m

1,000 m


Yes

Yes

PROFINET IO Transmission speed, max. Isochronous mode Isochronous mode Digital inputs Number of digital inputs Cable length • Cable length unshielded, max.

Diagnostic indication LED

Input voltage • Rated value, DC

24 V

24 V

Input current • for signal "1", typ.

4 mA

3 mA

Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) • for standard inputs - at "0" to "1", min. - at "0" to "1", max.

5/6


3 ms 3 ms

3 ms 3 ms

• Run mode RUN (green) • Collective error SF (red)

Yes Yes

Yes

• Status indicator digital output (green)

Yes

• Status indicator digital input (green)

Yes

• Monitoring 24 V voltage supply ON Yes (green)

Yes

• Connection to network LINK (green)

No

• Transmit/receive RX/TX (yellow)

No


ET 200S


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 1511CA00-1BL0

6ES7 1511CA00-3BL0

6ES7 1511CA00-1BL0

6ES7 1511CA00-3BL0

Environmental requirements Degree and class of protection • IP 20

Yes

Yes

Dimensions and weight Width

120 mm

120 mm

Height

81 mm

81 mm

Yes

Depth

758 mm

58 mm

No


Isolation between backplane bus and electronics

No


No

Isolation, digital outputs • Galvanic isolation, digital outputs Galvanic isolation, digital inputs • Galvanic isolation, digital inputs

■ Ordering data

Order No.

IM 151-1 BASIC interface module for ET 200S; data transmission rates up to 12 Mbit/s; max. 12 power-, electronic and motor start modules can be connected, bus connection via 9-pin D-sub incl. termination module

6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0

IM 151-1 COMPACT 32 DI 24 V DC interface module for ET 200S; data transmission rates up to 12 Mbit/s; max. 32 digital inputs, can be expanded by max. 12 power-, electronic and motor start modules, bus connection via 9-pin D-sub incl. termination module

6ES7151-1CA00-1BL0

IM 151-1 COMPACT 16 DI 24 V DC / 16 DO 24 V/0.5 A interface module for ET 200S; data transmission rates up to 12 Mbit/s; max. 16 digital inputs and 16 digital outputs, can be expanded by max. 12 power-, electronic and motor start modules, bus connection via 9-pin D-sub incl. termination module

6ES7151-1CA00-3BL0

230 g

Order No. IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module for ET 200S; data transmission rates up to 12 Mbit/s; Data volumes 244 byte each for inputs and outputs, max. 63 power-, electronic and motor start modules can be connected; bus connection via 9-pin D-sub incl. termination module

6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0

IM 151-1 FO STANDARD interface module for ET 200S; data transmission rates up to 12 Mbit/s; Data volumes 128 byte each for inputs and outputs, max. 63 power-, electronic and motor start modules can be connected; bus connection via integrated fiber-optic cable incl. terminating module

6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0

IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module for ET 200S; data transmission rate up to 12 Mbit/s; data volumes 244 byte each for I/O, up to 63 modules can be connected; connection of PROFIsafe modules, isochronous mode (clock synchronization); bus connection via 9-pin Sub-D incl. terminating module

6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0

5


5/7


ET 200S


■ Ordering data

Order No.

TM-C120S terminal module Terminal module for ET 200S COMPACT, screw-type terminals

6ES7 193-4DL10-0AA0

TM-C120C terminal module Terminal module for ET 200S COMPACT, spring-loaded terminals

6ES7 193-4DL00-0AA0

TE-U120S4x10 terminal module

6ES7 193-4FL10-0AA0

Add-on terminal for TM-C120x terminal modules of ET 200S COMPACT; screw-type terminals for 3-wire connection; please order two for 4-wire connection Can also be attached to TME/TM-P, if the same construction height of the terminal module exists for at least 120 mm construction width

5

6ES7 193-4FL00-0AA0

ET 200S distributed I/O system manuals are available on the Internet as a PDF file:


SIMATIC Manual Collection Electronic manuals on DVD, multilingual: S7-200, TD 200, S7-300, M7-300, C7, S7-400, M7-400, STEP 7, Engineering Tools, Runtime Software, SIMATIC DP (Distributed I/O), SIMATIC HMI (Human Machine Interface), SIMATIC NET (Industrial Communication)

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


SIMATIC Manual Collection – Update service for 1 year Scope of delivery: Current DVD "S7 Manual Collection" and the three subsequent updates

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2

100 Simplex connectors For plastic fiber-optic cable incl. 5 polishing sets

6GK1 901-0FB00-0AA0

50 plug adapters For 2 Simplex connectors each

6ES7 195-1BE00-0XA0

Label sheets DIN A4 (10 pieces) Each sheet contains 60 label strips for peripheral modules and 20 label strips for interface modules

TE-U120C4x10 terminal module Add-on terminal for TM-C120x terminal modules of ET 200S COMPACT; spring-loaded terminals for 3-wire connection; please order two for 4-wire connection Can also be attached to TM-E/TM-P, provided at least 1 20 mm of the construction width attains the same overall height as the terminal module

5/8


Accessories

• petrol

6ES7 193-4BH00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 193-4BD00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 193-4BB00-0AA0

• light beige

6ES7 193-4BA00-0AA0

Label sheets DIN A4 (10 pieces) Can be used for ET 200S COMPACT. Each sheet has 10 label strips • beige

6ES7 193-4BA10-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 193-4BB10-0AA0

• red

6ES7 193-4BD10-0AA0

• petrol

6ES7 193-4BH10-0AA0

Terminating module as spare part for ET 200S

6ES7 193-4JA00-0AA0

SIMATIC S5, 35 mm DIN rail, length 483 mm for 19'' cabinets

6ES5 710-8MA11

SIMATIC S5, 35 mm DIN rail, length 530 mm for 600 mm cabinets

6ES5 710-8MA21


6ES5 710-8MA31

SIMATIC S5, 35 mm DIN rail, length 2 m

6ES5 710-8MA41


ET 200S

IM 151-3PN interface modules

■ Overview


6ES7 1513BA20-0AB0


24 V

24 V


Yes

Yes

20 ms

20 ms


250 mA

250 mA

Power loss, typ.

2.5 W

2.5 W

• Outputs

256 Byte

256 Byte

• Inputs

256 Byte

256 Byte

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Transmission speed, max.

100 Mbit/s

100 Mbit/s


Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• Bus error BF (red)

Yes

Yes

• Collective error SF (red)

Yes

Yes


Yes

• Connection to network LINK (green)

Yes

Yes

• Transmit/receive RX/TX (yellow)

Yes

Yes

between backplane bus and electronics

No

No

between Ethernet and electronics

Yes

Yes


No

No

Vendor identification (VendorID)

002AH

002AH

Device identifier (DeviceID)

0301

0301H

Width

60 mm

60 mm

Height

119.5 mm

119.5 mm

Depth

75 mm

75 mm

120 g

135 g


Voltages and currents Mains/voltage failure jumpering, min. Current consumption

Address area Adressing volume

• Interface module for linking the ET 200S to PROFInet • Handles all data exchange with the PROFIBUS I/O Controller • 2 versions: - IM 151-3 PN STANDARD - IM 151-3 PN HIGH FEATURE (available soon); supports, in contrast to the STANDARD version, the operation of PROFIsafe F modules • with integrated 2-port switch for line topology Note: Micro Memory Card required for operation of CPU.

5

Connection point RJ45 Protocols PROFINET IO PROFINET IO

Isochronous mode Isochronous mode Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Alarms • Alarms Diagnoses • Diagnostic functions Diagnostics indication LED

Isolation

General information




5/9


ET 200S

IM 151-3PN interface modules

■ Ordering data

Order No.

6ES7 151-3AA20-0AB0

• High Feature

6ES7 151-3BA20-0AB0

Accessories

5

Industrial Ethernet FC RJ45 Plug 90 RJ45 plug connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 90° cable outlet • 1 piece • 10 pieces • 50 pieces

6GK1 901-1BB20-2AA0 6GK1 901-1BB20-2AB0 6GK1 901-1BB20-2AE0


6XV1 840-2AH10

6XV1 840-3AH10

6XV1 870-2D

6XV1 870-2F

6XV1 840-4AH10

Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect stripping tool

6GK1 901-1GA00

MMC 64 KB 1) For storing the device name

6ES7 953-8LF11-0AA0


6ES7 953-8LG11-0AA0


6ES7 953-8LJ11-0AA0

MMC 2 MB 1) For storing the device name and/or firmware update

6ES7 953-8LL11-0AA0


6ES7 953-8LM11-0AA0


6ES7 953-8LP11-0AA0

1) For operating the IM 151-3, an MMC is essential

5/10



IM 151-3 PN interface module For ET 200S; data transmission rates up to 100 Mbit/s; data volume depends on the number of modules inserted, up to 63 modules can be connected, bus connection through RJ45 • Standard



SIMATIC Manual Collection Electronic manuals on DVD, multilingual: S7-200, TD 200, S7-300, M7-300, C7, S7-400, M7-400, STEP 7, Engineering Tools, Runtime Software, SIMATIC DP (Distributed I/O), SIMATIC HMI (Human Machine Interface), SIMATIC NET (Industrial Communication)

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0

SIMATIC Manual Collection – Update service for 1 year Scope of delivery: Current DVD "S7 Manual Collection" and the three subsequent updates

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


6ES7 193-4BH00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 193-4BD00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 193-4BB00-0AA0

• light beige

6ES7 193-4BA00-0AA0


6ES7 193-4JA00-0AA0


6ES5 710-8MA11


6ES5 710-8MA21


6ES5 710-8MA31


6ES5 710-8MA41


ET 200S

IM 151-7 CPU interface modules

■ Overview • Interface module for SIMATIC ET 200S with integrated S7-CPU • For high-performance control solutions in ET 200S • Increases the availability of plants and machinery • Programming via PROFIBUS DP • Compact SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC) • Integrated 12 Mbit/s PROFIBUS DP slave/MPI interface in copper design • Integrated CPU based on CPU S7-314 • IM 151-7 CPU FO available • Fail-safe IM 151-7 F-CPU PROFIsafe available Note: Micro Memory Card required for operation of CPU.

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 1517AB00-0AB0

6ES7 1517AA13-0AB0

Product status associated programming package

STEP 7 V5.3 or hgiher + HW update

Voltages and currents Mains/voltage failure jumpering, min.

5 ms

Load voltage L+ 24 V

• Short-circuit protection

Yes


Yes

• permissible range, lower limit (DC)

20.4 V

• permissible range, upper limit (DC)

28.8 V

FB • Number, max.

FC • Number, max.

3.5 A

1,024; In number band of FB0 to FB2047 16 KByte

128

1,024; In number band of FC0 to FC2047 16 KByte

Power loss, typ.

3.3 W

Current output to backplane bus (DC 5 V), max.

700 mA


48 KByte; as of FW V1.13 48 KB, previously 24 KB

see Instruction List 16 KByte

• Size, max. Nesting depth • per priority class • additional within an error OB

96 KByte; for program and data, less the display data No

8

8 4

for bit operations, min.

0.1 µs

0.1 µs

for word operations, min.

1 µs

0.2 µs

for fixed point arithmetic, min.

2 µs

2 µs

for floating point arithmetic, min.

20 µs

3 µs

256

256

Times/counters and their remanence S7 counter • Number

Yes 8 MByte

CPU/blocks Number of blocks (total)

128

• Size, max.

250 mA; 280 mA with DP master module

• Load memory - pluggable (MMC) - pluggable (MMC), max.

511; from DB1 to DB511 16 KByte

• Size, max.


- expandable

127

OB • Number, max.

Current consumption


6ES7 1517AA13-0AB0

• Size, max.


Inrush current, max.

DB • Number, max.

6ES7 1517AB00-0AB0

1,024; (DBs, FCs, FBs) The maximum number of loadable blocks can be reduced by the MMC that you use.

• Remanence - adjustable - lower limit - upper limit - preset • Counting range - adjustable - lower limit - upper limit

Yes 0 255 From Z 0 to Z 7 Yes 1 999

Yes 0 999


5/11

5


ET 200S


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 1517AB00-0AB0

6ES7 1517AA13-0AB0

IEC counter

6ES7 1517AA13-0AB0

Adressing volume

• Type

SFB

• Outputs

244 Byte

• Number

Unlimited (limited only by RAM capacity)

• Inputs

244 Byte

S7 times • Number

256

• Remanence - adjustable - lower limit - upper limit - preset

5

6ES7 1517AB00-0AB0


256 Yes 0 255 no timers retentive

10 ms 9,990 s

10 ms 9,990 s

Hardware config. Number of modules per system, max.

63

Connectable programming devices/PCs

PG/OPs with STEP 7 connectable via PROFIBUS interface

Time Clock • Hardware clock (real-time clock)

Yes

• Battery backed and synchronized

Yes

• Backup time

6 w; at 40 °C ambient temperature, typically

• Deviation per day, max.

10 s

IEC timer • Type

SFB

• Number

Unlimited (limited only by RAM capacity)

Data areas and their remanence remanent data area in total (incl. times, counters, flags), max.

4 KByte

64 KByte

Operating hours counter • Number

1

• Number/Number range

0

• Range of values

0 to 2^31 hours (when using SFC101)

• Granularity

1 hour

• remanent

Yes; must be restarted at each warm restart

Flag • Number, max. • Remanence available

256 Byte

256 Byte Yes

• Remanence preset

MB 0 to MB 15

• Number of clock memories

8; 1 memory byte

Data blocks

Clock synchronization

• Number, max.

511; DB 0 reserved

• supports

Yes

• Size, max.

16 KByte

• to MPI, Master

Yes

• to MPI, Slave

Yes

• in AS, Master

No

Address area

• in AS, Slave

No

I/O address area



510 Byte

• Inputs

2,048 KByte

• Outputs

2,048 KByte


12; depending on the connections configured for PG/OP and ; S7 basic communication

Process image • Inputs

128 Byte; not adjustable

• Outputs

128 Byte; not adjustable


Yes; ALARM_S, ALARM_SC, ALARM_SQ

• Inputs

16,336


40

• Outputs

16,336

• Inputs, of which central

248

• Outputs, of which central

248

Digital channels

Analog channels • Inputs

1,021

• Outputs

1,021


124


124

5/12


Test commissioning functions Status/control • Status/control variable

Yes

• Variables

Inputs, outputs, memory bits, DB, times, counters


ET 200S


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 1517AB00-0AB0

6ES7 1517AA13-0AB0

Monitoring functions • Number of variables, max.

30

• of which status variable, max.

30

• of which control variable, max.

14

6ES7 1517AB00-0AB0

6ES7 1517AA13-0AB0

• reserved for S7-Basic communication

0

• usable for routing

4; as slave only with active interface, with IM 151-7 CPU as DP master

Forcing • Forcing

Yes

• Force, variables

Inputs, outputs

1st interface

• Forcing, number of variables, max.

10

Type of interface


Status block

Yes

Physics

RS 485

Single step

Yes

isolated

Yes


2

Power supply to interface (15 to 30 V DC), max.

80 mA

Diagnostic buffer • present

Yes

Yes

Functionality

• Number of entries, max.

100

100

• MPI

Yes

No

• DP master

No

• adjustable Communication functions PG/OP communication

• DP slave

Yes

Yes • Point-to-point coupling

Global data communication • supported

Yes

• Number of GD packets, max.

4

• Number of GD packets, transmitter, max.

4

• Number of GD packets, receiver, max.

4

• Size of GD packets, max.

22 Byte

• Size of GD packet (of which consistent), max.

22 Byte


Yes

• Useful data per job, max.

76 Byte

• Useful data per job (of which consistent) max.

76 Byte; 76 bytes (XSEND/XRCV), 64 bytes (XPUT/XGET) as server Yes

• as server

Yes

• as client

No


180 Byte

• Useful data per job, of which consistent, max.

64 Byte


No

Standard communication (FMS) • supported

No

No

• Number of connections

12; Caution: 12 connections per CPU, not per interface

• Services - PG/OP communication - Routing -

Yes Yes; with master module Yes Yes Yes No Yes

Global data communication S7 basic communication S7 communication S7 communication, as client S7 communication, as server


12 Mbit/s

DP slave • Number of connections

11

12; Caution: 12 connections per CPU, not per interface

• Services - PG/OP communication - Routing

Yes

Yes Yes; only when interface active and in master mode Yes

- direct data exchange (cross traffic) - DPV1

Yes

No http://www.ad. siemens.de/ csi_e/gsd

• GSD file

Number of connections • overall

12

• usable for PG communication

11

• reserved for PG communication

1

• usable for OP communication

11

• reserved for OP communication

1

• usable for S7 basic communication

10

Yes; active/passive

MPI


5

• Transmission speeds, max. • automatic baud rate search

• Transfer memory - Inputs - Outputs

12 Mbit/s

12 Mbit/s Yes; only with passive interface 244 Byte 244 Byte


5/13


ET 200S


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 1517AB00-0AB0 • Address area, max. • Useful data per address area, max.

6ES7 1517AA13-0AB0 32 32 Byte; up to max. size of the transfer memory

2nd interface Type of interface

External inteface via master module 6ES71384HA00-0AB0

Physics

RS 485

isolated

Yes


No

6ES7 1517AB00-0AB0 Programming language • STEP 7 • LAD • FUP • AWL • SCL • GRAPH

5

No

• DP master

Yes

• Point-to-point coupling

No

DP master • Number of connections, max.

• Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - Global data communication - S7 basic communication - S7 communication - S7 communication, as client - S7 communication, as server - equidistance support - SYNC/FREEZE - Activation/deactivation of DP slaves - direct data exchange (cross traffic) - DPV1

12; Caution: 12 connections per CPU, not per interface Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes

Binary links, see Instruction bracketed oper- List ations, result allocation, saving, counting, loading, transferring, comparing, shifting, rotating, complementation, calling blocks, fixed point arithmetic, floating point arithmetic, jump functions.

Nesting levels

8

8


Yes

Yes


Interrupt and see Instruction error handling, List copying of data, clock functions, diagnostic functions, module parameter assignment, mode changes

Isolation Isolation checked with

500 V DC

between load voltage and all other switching components

Yes

Yes

between PROFIBUS DP all all other circuits

Yes

• Number of DP slaves, max.

32; per station

Permissible potential difference between different circuits


2 KByte 2 KByte

• Useful data per DP slave - Inputs, max. - Outputs, max.

244 Byte 244 Byte

Isochronous mode Isochronous mode

No


see Instruction List

Yes

12 Mbit/s

5/14


Isolation


CPU/programming Configuration rules

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes; optional Yes; optional

Operational stocks

Functionality • MPI

Yes

6ES7 1517AA13-0AB0

max. 63 peripheral modules per station; Station width <1 m or <2 m; max. 10 A per load group (power module); Master interface module on right next to IM 151-7 CPU (X2-interface)

500 V DC

Environmental requirements Operating termperature • min.

0 °C

• max.

60 °C


60 mm

60 mm; DP master module: 35 mm

Height

119.5 mm

119.5 mm

Depth

75 mm

75 mm

200 g

200 g



ET 200S


■ Ordering data

Order No.

Interface module IM 151/CPU (48 K) Including termination module

6ES7 151-7AA11-0AB0

Interface module IM 151/CPU FO (48 K) Including termination module

6ES7 151-7AB00-0AB0

Accessories 1)

MMC 64 KB for program backup

6ES7 953-8LF11-0AA0

MMC 128 KB 1) for program backup

6ES7 953-8LG11-0AA0

MMC 512 KB 1) for program backup

Order No. Label sheets DIN A4 (10 pieces) Each sheet contains 60 label strips for peripheral modules and 20 label strips for interface modules • petrol

6ES7 193-4BH00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 193-4BD00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 193-4BB00-0AA0

• light beige

6ES7 193-4BA00-0AA0 http://www.siemens.com/ simatic-docu

6ES7 953-8LJ11-0AA0


6ES7 953-8LL11-0AA0

Terminating module for ET 200S

6ES7 193-4JA00-0AA0

MMC 2 MB 1) for program backup and/or firmware update

6ES5 710-8MA11

MMC 4 MB 1) for program backup

SIMATIC S5, 35 mm DIN rail, length 483 mm for 19'' cabinets 6ES7 953-8LM11-0AA0

6ES5 710-8MA21

MMC 8 MB for program backup

6ES7 953-8LP11-0AA0


6ES7 792-0AA00-0XA0


6ES5 710-8MA31

External prommer for e.g. MMC with USB interface

upon request


6ES5 710-8MA41

PG with integrated MMC interface

1)

5

1) For operating the CPU, an MMC is essential


5/15


ET 200S

Master interface submodule for IM 151-7 CPU/IM 151-7 F-CPU interface module

■ Overview

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 138-4HA00-0AB0 Hardware config. Number of modules per CPU

1


35 mm

Height

119.5 mm

Depth

75 mm


■ Ordering data Master interface module for IM 151-7 CPU / IM 151-7 F-CPU interface modules

100 g

Order No. 6ES7 138-4HA00-0AB0

Accessories

5

PROFIBUS DP master interface module for IM 151-7 CPU and IM 151-7 F-CPU interface modules • Integrated 12 Mbit/s PROFIBUS DP master interface in copper design • Facilitates parallel operation of two PROFIBUS DP interfaces on one IM 151-7 CPU • Increases the availability of plants and machinery • Functionality corresponds to the interface of an S7-314 CPU configured as DP master Programming is with STEP 7 from Version V5.2 with Service Pack 1.

5/16



6ES7 193-4BH00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 193-4BD00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 193-4BB00-0AA0

• light beige

6ES7 193-4BA00-0AA0




ET 200S

IM 151-7 F-CPU interface module

■ Overview • Interface module with integrated fail-safe CPU for SIMATIC ET 200S • With DP/MPI interface • For design of a fail-safe automation system for plants with increased safety requirements • Complies with safety requirements up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 and Cat. 4 according to EN 954-1 • Fail-safe I/O modules can be connected in a distributed configuration through DP master modules (PROFIsafe) • The fail-safe I/O modules of ET200S PROFIsafe can be connected in a centralized configuration • Standard modules can be used for non-safety-relevant applications Note: Micro Memory Card required for operation of CPU.

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 151-7FA01-0AB0 Product status associated programming package

Voltages and currents Mains/voltage failure jumpering, min.

FC STEP 7 V5.2 or higher + SP1, Distributed Safety 5.2 or higher + SP1

• Number, max.

512

• Size, max.

16 KByte

OB 5 ms

• Size, max.

16 KByte

Nesting depth

Load voltage L+ • Rated value (DC)

24 V


Yes


Yes

• per priority class

8

• additional within an error OB

4


• permissible range, lower limit (DC) 20.4 V


0.1 µs



0.2 µs


2 µs


3 µs

Current consumption from supply voltage 1L+, max.

28.8 V

250 mA; 280 mA with DP master module

Power loss, typ.

3.3 W

Current output to backplane bus (DC 5 V), max.

700 A


- expandable • Load memory - pluggable (MMC) - pluggable (MMC), max. CPU/blocks Number of blocks (total)

5

6ES7 151-7FA01-0AB0

Times/counters and their remanence S7 counter • Number

256

• Remanence - adjustable

Yes

- preset 64 KByte; (freely available); approx 10 K instructions; The number of F instructions compared with a standard program is limited due to F-specific overheads. No

• Counting range - adjustable

1,024

DB • Number, max.

511

• Size, max.

16 KByte

FB

Yes

- lower limit

0

- upper limit

999

IEC counter • Type

Yes 8 MByte

From Z 0 to Z 7

SFB

S7 times • Number

256

• Remanence - adjustable - preset

Yes no timers retentive


10 ms 9,990 s

• Number, max.

512

IEC timer

• Size, max.

16 KByte

• Type

SFB


5/17


ET 200S


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 151-7FA01-0AB0 Data areas and their remanence Flag • Number, max.

256 Byte

• Remanence available

Yes


MB 0 to MB 15


8; 1 memory byte

Data blocks • Number, max.

511; DB 0 reserved

• Size, max.

16 KByte


510 Byte

Address area I/O address area

5

6ES7 151-7FA01-0AB0 Test commissioning functions Status/control • Status/control variable • Variables Monitoring functions • Number of variables, max. • of which status variable, max. • of which control variable, max.


Forcing • Forcing Yes Inputs, outputs • Force, variables • Forcing, number of variables, max. 10 Status block

Yes

• Inputs

2,048 KByte

Single step

Yes

• Outputs

2,048 KByte


2


Yes 100 No

Communication functions PG/OP communication

Yes

Process image • Inputs

128 Byte

• Outputs

128 Byte

Digital channels • Inputs

16,336

• Outputs

16,336


248


248

Analog channels • Inputs

1,021

• Outputs

1,021


124


124


Yes


Yes

• Backup time

6 w; at 40 °C ambient temperature, typically


10 s

Operating hours counter

Global data communication • supported • Number of GD packets, max. • Number of GD packets, transmitter, max. • Number of GD packets, receiver, max. • Size of GD packets, max. • Size of GD packet (of which consistent), max. S7 basic communication • supported • Useful data per job, max. • Useful data per job (of which consistent) max.

Yes 4 4 4 22 Byte 22 Byte

Yes 76 Byte 76 Byte; 76 bytes (XSEND/XRCV), 64 bytes (XPUT/XGET) as server


Yes

• Number

1

• as server

Yes


0


180 Byte

• Range of values



64 Byte

• Granularity

1 hour

• remanent



No

Standard communication (FMS) • supported

No

Number of connections • overall

12

• usable for PG communication

11


1

• usable for OP communication

11


1

• usable for S7 basic communication • reserved for S7-Basic communication • usable for routing

10

Clock synchronization • supports

Yes

• to MPI, Master

Yes

• to MPI, Slave

Yes

• in AS, Master

No

• in AS, Slave

No


12; depending on the connections configured for PG/OP and ; S7 basic communication


Yes; ALARM_S, ALARM_SC, ALARM_SQ


40

5/18


0 4; only when interface active and in master mode


ET 200S


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 151-7FA01-0AB0 1st interface Type of interface


Physics

RS 485

isolated

Yes


80 mA


Yes

• DP master

No

• DP slave

Yes; active/passive


No

MPI • Number of connections • Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - Global data communication - S7 basic communication - S7 communication - S7 communication, as client - S7 communication, as server • Transmission speeds, max.

12 Yes Yes; with master module Yes Yes Yes No Yes 12 Mbit/s

• Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - direct data exchange (cross traffic) - DPV1 • GSD file • Transmission speeds, max. • automatic baud rate search

No http://www.ad.siemens.de/gsi_e/gsd 12 Mbit/s Yes; only with passive interface


244 Byte 244 Byte


32

• Useful data per address area, max.

32 Byte

2nd interface Type of interface

External inteface via master module 6ES7138-4HA00-0AB0

Physics

RS 485

isolated

Yes


No

• DP master

Yes


No

DP master • Number of connections, max.

12

Yes Yes 12 Mbit/s

• Number of DP slaves, max.

32


2 KByte 2 KByte

• Useful data per DP slave - Inputs, max. - Outputs, max.

244 Byte 244 Byte

5


12 Yes Yes; only when interface active and in master mode Yes

Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes


CPU/programming Configuration rules


6ES7 151-7FA01-0AB0 • Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - Global data communication - S7 basic communication - S7 communication - S7 communication, as client - S7 communication, as server - SYNC/FREEZE - Activation/deactivation of DP slaves - direct data exchange (cross traffic) - DPV1

Yes max. 63 peripheral modules per station; Station width <1 m or <2 m; max. 10 A per load group (power module); Master interface module on right next to IM 151-7 CPU (X2-interface)


Yes

• LAD

Yes

• FUP

Yes

• AWL

Yes

• SCL

Yes; optional

• GRAPH

Yes; optional

Operational stocks


Nesting levels

8


Yes






500 V DC

Isolation between load voltage and all other switching components between PROFIBUS DP all all other circuits Permissible potential difference between different circuits Dimensions and weight Width

Yes Yes

500 V DC 60 mm; DP master module: 35 mm

Height

119.5 mm

Depth

75 mm


200 g


5/19


ET 200S


■ Ordering data IM 151-7 F-CPU interface module For configuring a fail-safe automation system

Order No. 6ES7 151-7FA01-0AB0

Accessories Distributed Safety V5.4 programming tool Task: Software for configuring fail-safe user programs for SIMATIC S7-300F, S7-400F, ET 200S Requirement: STEP 7 V5.3 SP3 and higher

5

• Floating license

6ES7 833-1FC02-0YA5


6ES7 833-1FC00-0YX2


6ES7 833-1FC02-0YE5

MMC 64 kbyte for program backup

6ES7 953-8LF11-0AA0


6ES7 953-8LG11-0AA0


6ES7 953-8LJ11-0AA0

5/20


Order No. MMC 2 Mbyte For program backup and/or firmware update

6ES7 953-8LL11-0AA0

MMC 4 Mbyte for program backup

6ES7 953-8LM11-0AA0

External prommer for MMC with USB interface

6ES7 792-0AA00-0XA0


6ES7 193-4JA00-0AA0


6ES5 710-8MA11


6ES5 710-8MA21


6ES5 710-8MA31


6ES5 710-8MA41


ET 200S

Power modules for PM-E electronics modules

■ Overview • For monitoring and, depending on the version, fusing the load and sensor supply voltage • Can be plugged onto TM-P terminal modules with automatic coding. • Diagnostics message for voltage and blown fuse (can be switched off via configuration) • Fail-safe PM-E F PROFIsafe power module for safe switching off of sequentially plugged-in 24 V DC to 10 A digital output modules or external loads; 3 additional integrated fail-safe 24 V DC / 2 A outputs • 24 to 48 V DC PM-E power module - with status information and diagnosis "Load voltage present“ - for option handling • PM-E 24 V DC to 230 V AC power module - power module for universal use - for option handling

■ Design

5

Possible combinations of the TM-E terminal modules and power modules Power modules

TM-P terminal modules for power modules

Screw-type terminal

→

15S23-A1

15S23-A0

15S22-01

30S44-A0

F30S47-F0

Order No. 6ES7 193…

→

…4CC20-0AA0

…4CD20-0AA0

…4CE00-0AA0

…4CK20-0AA0

3RK1903-3AA0

Spring-loaded terminal

→

15C23-A1

15C23-A0

15C22-01

30C44-A0

–


→

…4CC30-0AA0

…4CD30-0AA0

…4CE10-0AA0

…4CK30-0AA0

Fast Connect

→

15N23-A1

15N23-A0

15N22-01

–


→

…4CC70-0AA0

…4CD70-0AA0

…4CE60-0AA0

PM-E 24 V DC

■

■

■

PM-E 24 to 48 V DC

■

■

■

PM-E 24 ... 48 V DC/24 ... 230 V AC

■

■

■

–

■

PM-E F 24 V DC PROFIsafe

■

PM-D F 24 V DC PROFIsafe

Possible combinations of the electronics modules and power modules Power modules

Electronic modules

PM-E 24 V DC

Can be used for all electronics modules except 2 DI 120 V AC ST, 2 DI 230 V AC ST and 2 DO 120/230 V AC

PM-E 24 … 48 V DC

Can be used for all electronics modules of 15 mm in width except 2 DI 120 V AC ST, 2 DI 230 V AC ST and 2 DO 120/230 V AC as well as for 4 DI 24 to 48 V UC in AC operation

PM-E 24 ... 48 V DC/24 ... 230 V AC

Can be used with all electronic modules of 15 mm in width.

PM-E F pp 24 V DC PROFIsafe

For the fail-safe modules See Manual "ET 200S fail-safe modules" in the documentation packages "S7 F Systems" and "S7 Distributed Safety"

PM-D F pm 24 V DC PROFIsafe


5/21


ET 200S


■ Technical specifications 6ES7 1384CA01-0AA0

6ES7 1384CB10-0AB0

Power supply

Isolation

Protection and monitoring

Isolation checked with

• Output overload protection

Yes

5

6ES7 1384CB10-0AB0

500 V DC

1500 V AC

Yes; between rated load voltage and backplane bus, between power modules


Isolation primary/secondary

Current carrying capacity

6ES7 1384CA01-0AA0

• Current carrying capacity to 30 °C, max.

10 A; 10 A (24 to 56.7 V DC), 8 A (24 to 48 V AC / 120 V / 230 V)

• Current carrying capacity to 40 °C, max.

9 A; 9 A (DC 24 to 56.7 V), 7 A (AC 24 to 48 V / 120 V / 130 V)

Width

15 mm

15 mm

Height

81 mm

81 mm

Depth

52 mm

52 mm

7 A; 7 A (24 to 56.7 V DC), 5 A (24 to 48 V AC / 120 / 230 V)

Weight, approx.

35 g

34 g

• Current carrying capacity to 60 °C, 10 A max.


Weights

6ES7 138-4CA50-0AB0

Power supply

Voltages and currents

Current carrying capacity

Load voltage L+

• Current carrying capacity to 60 °C, 10 A max.

• Rated values

24 V to 56.7 V DC, 24 to 48 V / 120 V/130 V AC


24 V


No; external (e.g. automatic circuit breaker), tripping characteristic C


Yes; IEC 127-2/1, internal with fuse (5 x 20 mm), 250 V, 10 A, quick-acting, replaceable

Yes

Yes

4 mA

9 mA

Current consumption from load voltage 1L+ (without load), max.

9.5 mA

from backplane bus DC 24 V, max. Power loss, typ.

0.1 W

5W

Voltages and currents Load voltage L+ • Rated values

24 V to 48 V DC


No; external (e.g. automatic circuit breaker), tripping characteristic B, C


Yes


12 mA

Power loss, typ.

500 W

Parameter Remark

3 bytes

missing load voltage

disable/enable

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics

Parameter Remark

3 bytes

Diagnosis: fuse blown missing load voltage

disable/enable

Load voltage

3 bytes

Diagnoses

disable/enable

• Diagnostics

Yes

disable/enable

• missing load voltage

Yes

DC/AC

Diagnostics indication LED

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Diagnoses • Diagnostic information readable • Diagnostics

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

• Fuse blown • missing load voltage

Yes

Yes

• Rated load voltage PWR (green)

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes


Yes


Yes

Isolation Isolation checked with primary/secondary


• Fuse OK FSG (green)

Yes




15 mm


5/22

500 V DC

Isolation

35 g


ET 200S


■ Ordering data

Order No.

PM-E 24 V DC power module 1) For electronic modules; with diagnostics

6ES7 138-4CA01-0AA0

24 to 48 V DC PM-E power module For electronic modules; with diagnostics, with status bit "load voltage" present

6ES7 138-4CA50-0AB0

Power module PM-E 24 V DC to 48 V, 42 to 230 V AC For electronic modules; with diagnostics and fuse

6ES7 138-4CB10-0AB0

Accessories Label sheets DIN A4 (10 pieces) Each sheet contains 60 label strips for peripheral modules and 20 label strips for interface modules • petrol

6ES7 193-4BH00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 193-4BD00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 193-4BB00-0AA0

• light beige

6ES7 193-4BA00-0AA0

5

1) Can be used for all electronic and technology modules except 2 DI 120 V AC / 2 DI 230 V AC / 2 DO 120/230 V AC


5/23


ET 200S

Reserve modules

■ Overview

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 1384AA01-0AA0

6ES7 1384AA11-0AA0

0.025 W

0.025 W

according to configured module

according to configured module

No

No

No

No

Width

15 mm

30 mm

Height

81 mm

81 mm

Depth

52 mm

52 mm

33 g

55 g

Current consumption Power loss, typ. Parameter Remark

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Diagnoses • Diagnostic functions Diagnostics indication LED • Status indicator digital input (green) Dimensions and weight

5

• Suitable for all TM-E terminal modules (15 mm and 30 mm construction width) • Reserves one slot for any electronic module. The reserve module is inserted into the reserved slot of the ET 200S configuration. • Terminal module can be wired up for the function to be used later • The reserve module has no connection to the terminals of the TM-E terminal module. The TM-E terminal module can therefore by completely wired up and prepared for its future purpose. • Parameterizable diagnostic response with IM 151-1 STANDARD and IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE • Facilitates retroffiting of I/O modules during operation • Options can be released via the PLC program without the need for re-engineering

5/24



■ Ordering data

Order No.

Reserve modules for ET 200S for reserving unused slots • 15 mm overall width (5 units)

6ES7 138-4AA01-0AA0

• 30 mm overall width (1 unit)

6ES7 138-4AA11-0AA0


ET 200S

Potential isolation module

■ Overview • Potential isolation module with 4 outputs • Output current 5 A per output / 10 A per module • Nominal load voltage: According to the load voltage on the power module of this load voltage group • Is suitable for all terminal modules TM-E (construction width 15 mm)

■ Ordering data Potential isolation module for ET 200S for preparing the load voltage on additional terminals, 15 mm construction width, 1 piece

Order No. 6ES7138-4FD00-0AA0

Accessories for labeling Label sheets DIN A4 (10 pieces)) Each sheet contains 60 label strips for peripheral modules and 20 label strips for interface modules • petrol

6ES7 193-4BH00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 193-4BD00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 193-4BB00-0AA0

• light beige

6ES7 193-4BA00-0AA0

5


5/25


ET 200S

Digital electronic modules

■ Overview • 2- and 4-channel digital inputs and outputs for the ET 200S • Can be plugged onto TM-E terminal modules with automatic coding. • High-feature versions for enhanced plant availability, additional functions and comprehensive diagnostics • Hot swapping of modules possible

5

■ Design Possible combinations of the TM-E terminal modules and digital modules Electronic modules

TM-E terminal modules for electronics modules

Screw-type terminal

→ 15S26-A1


→ …4CA40-0AA0 …4CA20-0AA0 …4CB20-0AA0 …4CB00-0AA0 …4CL20-0AA0 …4CG20-0AA0 …4CF40-0AA0

15S24-A1

15S24-01

15S23-01

15S24-AT

30S44-01

30S46-A1


→ 15C26-A1



Fast Connect

→ 15N26-A1


→ …4CA80-0AA0 …4CA70-0AA0 …4CB70-0AA0 …4CB60-0AA0

15C24-A1

15N24-A1

15C24-01

15N24-01

15C23-01

15N23-01

2DI 24 V DC ST 2DI 24 V DC HF 4DI 24 V DC ST 4DI 24 V DC HF 4DI 24 V DC /SRC ST

■

■

■

■

4DI 24 … 48 V UC HF

■

■

■

■

4 DI NAMUR

■

■

■

■

2DI 120 V AC ST

■

■

■

■

2DI 230 V AC ST

■

■

■

■

2 DO 24 V DC/0.5 A ST 2 DO 24 V DC/0.5 A HF 4 DO 24 V DC/0.5 A ST

■

■

■

■

2 DO 24 V DC/2 A ST 2 DO 24 V DC/2 A HF 4 DO 24 V DC/2 A ST

■

■

■

■

2 DO 24 … 230 V AC/2 A

■

■

■

■

2RO NO 24 … 120 V DC/5 A 24 … 230 V AC/5 A 2RO NO/NC 24 … 48 V DC/5 A 24 … 230 V AC/5 A

■

■

■

■

5/26


15C24-AT

–

30C44-01

–

30C46-A1

–


ET 200S


■ Technical specifications 6ES7 131-4BB010AA0

6ES7 131-4BB010AB0

6ES7 131-4BD010AA0

6ES7 131-4BD010AB0

6ES7 131-4BD510AA0

• DC 24 V

Yes; from power module





• Reverse polarity protection

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

from backplane bus DC 3.3 V, max.

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

Power loss, typ.

0.4 W

0.4 W

0.7 W

0.7 W

0.7 W

• with packing

2 Bit

2 Bit

4 Bit

4 Bit

4 Bit

• without packing

1 Byte

1 Byte

1 Byte

1 Byte

1 Byte

2

2

4

4

4

• cable length, shielded, max.

1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m

• Cable length unshielded, max.

600 m

600 m

600 m

600 m

600 m

Input characteristic curve to IEC 1131, Typ 1

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• Rated value, DC

24 V

24 V

24 V

24 V

24 V

• for signal "0"

-30 to 5 V

-30 to 5 V

-30 to 5 V

-30 to 5 V

30 to -5 V

• for signal "1"

15 to 30 V

11 to 30 V

15 to 30 V

11 to 30 V

-15 to -30 V

7 mA; at 24 V

8 mA

7 mA; at 24 V

8 mA

7 mA; at 24 V

No

Yes; 0.1 / 0.5 / 3 / 15 ms 0.05 / 0.4 / 2.7 / 14.85 0.15 / 0.6 / 3.3 / 15.15 0.05 / 0.4 / 2.7 / 14.85 0.15 / 0.6 / 3.3 / 15.15

No

Yes; 0.1 / 0.5 / 3 / 15 ms 0.05 / 0.4 / 2.7 / 14.85 0.15 / 0.6 / 3.3 / 15.15 0.05 / 0.4 / 2.7 / 14.85 0.15 / 0.6 / 3.3 / 15.15

No

Supply voltages Rated value

Current consumption

Address area Address space per module

Digital inputs Number of digital inputs

5

Cable length

Input voltage

Input current • for signal "1", typ. Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) • for standard inputs - programmable - at "0" to "1", min.

2 ms; typically 3 ms

- at "0" to "1", max.

4.5 ms

- at "1" to "0", min.

2 ms; typically 3 ms

- at "1" to "0", max.

4.5 ms

2 ms; typically 3 ms 4.5 ms 2 ms; typically 3 ms 4.5 ms

2 ms; typically 3 ms 4.5 ms 2 ms; typically 3 ms 4.5 ms

Encoder supply Output voltage

min. L+ (-0.5 V), under load




max. M + 0.5 V, under load

Output current, rated value

500 mA

500 mA

500 mA

500 mA

500 mA

Output current, permissible range

0 to 500 mA

0 to 500 mA

0 to 500 mA

0 to 500 mA

0 to 500 mA

Yes; electronic

Short-circuit protection

Yes; electronic

Encoder Connectable encoders • 2-wire BEROS

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• permissible quiescent current (2wire BEROS), max.

1.5 mA

1.5 mA

1.5 mA

1.5 mA

1.5 mA

1 byte

3 bytes

1 byte

3 bytes

1 byte

Parameter Remark Diagnosis: short circuit

disable/enable

disable/enable


5/27


ET 200S


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 131-4BB010AA0

6ES7 131-4BB010AB0

6ES7 131-4BD010AA0

6ES7 131-4BD010AB0

6ES7 131-4BD510AA0

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Diagnoses • Diagnostic functions • Short circuit

Yes; Short-circuit to M, module by module

Yes; Short-circuit to M, module by module

Diagnostics indication LED • Collective error SF (red)

No

Yes

No

Yes

No


Yes; per channel

Yes; per channel

Yes; per channel

Yes; per channel

Yes; per channel

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

• between the channels

No

No

No

No

No

• between the channels and the backplane bus

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

Width

15 mm

15 mm

15 mm

15 mm

15 mm

Height

81 mm

81 mm

81 mm

81 mm

81 mm

Depth

52 mm

52 mm

52 mm

52 mm

52 mm

35 g

35 g

35 g

35 g

35 g

Isolation Isolation checked with Isolation

5

Galvanic isolation, digital inputs

Permissible potential difference between different circuits Dimensions and weight


6ES7 131-4CD00-0AB0

6ES7 131-4EB00-0AB0

6ES7 131-4FB00-0AB0

6ES7 131-4RD00-0AB0

Supply voltages Rated value • DC 24 V



24 V


48 V

• AC 24 V

Yes

• AC 120 V

Yes


• AC 230 V

Yes

• permissible range, lower limit (AC)

24 V

• permissible range, upper limit (AC)

48 V


Yes; AC or DC automatic

Current consumption from backplane bus DC 3.3 V, max.

10 mA

6 mA

6 mA

Power loss, typ.

0.7 W

0.5 W

0.7 W

1.6 W

• with packing

4 Bit

2 Bit

2 Bit

4 Bit

• without packing

1 Byte

1 Byte

1 Byte

1 Byte

Yes

No

No



5/28



ET 200S


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 131-4CD00-0AB0

6ES7 131-4EB00-0AB0

6ES7 131-4FB00-0AB0

4

2

2

6ES7 131-4RD00-0AB0

Digital inputs Number of digital inputs Number of NAMUR inputs

4

Number of simultaneously controllable inputs

4

Cable length • cable length, shielded, max.

1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m


600 m

600 m

600 m

Yes

Yes

Yes

120 V

230 V

Parallel switching of inputs Input characteristic curve to IEC 1131, Typ 1

200 m No

Input voltage • Rated value, AC • Rated value, UC

24 V; 24 to 48 V UC

• for signal "0"

-6 to 6 V DC, 0 to 5 V AC

0 to 20 V AC

0 to 40 V AC

• for signal "1"

-15 to -57.6 V DC, 15 to 57.6 V DC, 15 to 48 V AC

79 to 132 V AC

164 to 264 V AC

• Frequency range

47 to 63 Hz

47 to 63 Hz

47 to 63 Hz

10 mA; 4 to 10 mA

3 mA; 3 to 9 mA

5 mA; 5 to 15 mA

5

Input current • for signal "1", typ. • for 10 k switched contact - for signal "0" - for signal "1"

0.35 mA to 1.2 mA 2.1 mA to 7 mA

• for unswitched contact - for signal "0", max. (permissible quiescent current) - for signal "1"

0.5 mA typ. 8 mA

• for NAMUR encoders - for signal "0" - for signal "1"

0.35 mA to 1.2 mA 2.1 mA to 7 mA

Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) • for standard inputs - at "0" to "1", min. - at "0" to "1", max. - at "1" to "0", min. - at "1" to "0", max.

15 ms

15 ms

25 ms

45 ms

15 ms

4.6 µs

15 ms

4.6 µs

Encoder connection • Fixed current limitation for wire break monitoring, min.

18 kΩ; Rated voltage 24 V (15 V to 35 V); rated voltage 48 V (30 V to 60 V): 39 kohms

Encoder supply Number of outputs

1

Output voltage


min. 8.2 V, loaded


500 mA

45 mA


0 to 500 mA


Yes; per module

Yes; electronic


Yes

No

No


2 mA; (0.5 to 2 mA), a minimum load current is necessary in the event of a wire break.

1 mA

2 mA


5/29


ET 200S


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 131-4CD00-0AB0

6ES7 131-4EB00-0AB0

6ES7 131-4FB00-0AB0

6ES7 131-4RD00-0AB0

3 bytes

3 bytes

12 bytes

Parameter Remark Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Alarms • Diagnostic alarm

Yes; can be set

• Process alarm

No


Yes; parameterizable

No

No

No

No

Yes; Diagnostic alarm Yes

• Diagnostic information readable • Short circuit Diagnostics indication LED

5


Yes


Yes; per channel

Yes; per channel

Yes; per channel

Yes Yes; per channel

2500 V DC

2500 V DC

4000 V DC

500 V DC


No

No

No

No


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Isolation Isolation checked with Isolation Galvanic isolation, digital inputs

• between the channels and the load voltage L+

Yes


500 V DC

between M internal and the inputs

500 V DC 1500 V AC

1500 V AC


15 mm

15 mm

15 mm

15 mm

Height

81 mm

81 mm

81 mm

81 mm

Depth

52 mm

52 mm

52 mm

52 mm

35 g

31 g

31 g

35 g


6ES7 132-4BB010AB0

6ES7 132-4BB010AA0

6ES7 132-4BB310AB0

6ES7 132-4BB310AA0

6ES7 132-4BD010AA0

Yes; when using the same load voltage as on the power module






24 V; from the power module Yes; polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through





Current consumption from load voltage L+ (without load), max.

5 mA; per channel

5 mA; per module

5 mA; per channel

5 mA; per channel

5 mA; per channel


10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

Power loss, typ.

0.4 W

0.4 W

1.4 W

1.4 W

0.8 W

Address area Address space per module • with packing • without packing

2 Bit 1 Byte

2 Bit 1 Byte

2 Bit 1 Byte

2 Bit 1 Byte

4 Bit 1 Byte

Voltages and currents Reverse voltage protection


5/30



ET 200S


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 132-4BB010AB0

6ES7 132-4BB010AA0

6ES7 132-4BB310AB0

6ES7 132-4BB310AA0

6ES7 132-4BD010AA0

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

Isochronous mode Isochronous mode Digital inputs Cable length • cable length, shielded, max.

1,000 m


600 m


2

2

2

2

cable length, shielded, max.

1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m

4


600 m

600 m

600 m

600 m


Yes; per channel

Yes; per channel

Yes; per channel

Yes; per channel

Yes; per channel

• Response threshold, typ.

1.5 A

0.7 to 1.8 A

4A

2.8 to 7.2 A

0.7 to 1.5 A

Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to

-55 to -60 V, typically L+( )




-55 to -60 V, L+( )

Lamp load, max.

2.5 W

5W

5W

10 W

5W


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

L+ (-1.0 V)

L+ (-1.0 V)

L+ (-1.0 V)

L+ (-1.0 V)

L+ (-1.0 V)

• for signal "1" rated value

0.5 A

0.5 A

2A

2A

0.5 A


7 mA

7 mA

7 mA

7 mA

7 mA

• for signal "1" permissible range for 0 to 60 °C, max.

600 mA

600 mA

2.4 A

2.4 A

600 mA

• for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.3 mA

0.3 mA

0.5 mA

0.5 mA

0.3 mA

Output voltage • for signal "1", min. Output current

Output delay with resistive load • "0" to "1", max.

100 µs

200 µs

100 µs

200 µs

100 µs

• "1" to "0", max.

400 µs

1.3 ms

400 µs

1.3 ms

300 µs

• for increased power

No

No

No

No

No

• for redundant control of a load

Yes; per module

Yes; per module

Yes; per module

Yes; per module

Yes; per module

• with resistive load, max.

100 Hz

100 Hz

100 Hz

100 Hz

100 Hz


2 Hz

2 Hz

2 Hz; 0.5 H

2 Hz; 0.5 H

2 Hz


10 Hz

10 Hz

10 Hz

10 Hz

10 Hz

1A

1A

4A

4A

2A

• lower limit

48 Ω

48 Ω

12 Ω

12 Ω

48 Ω

• upper limit

3,400 Ω

3,400 Ω

3,400 Ω

3,400 Ω

3,400 Ω

Remark

3 bytes

1 byte

3 bytes

1 byte

1 byte

Diagnosis: wire break

disable/enable

disable/enable

Diagnosis: short circuit

disable/enable

disable/enable

Behavior on CPU/Master STOP, channel-wise

Substitute a value / keep last value


Parallel switching of 2 outputs

Switching frequency

Aggregate current of the outputs (per group) • horizontal installation • up to 60 °C, max. Load impedance range

Parameter


5/31

5


ET 200S


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 132-4BB010AB0

6ES7 132-4BB010AA0

6ES7 132-4BB310AB0

6ES7 132-4BB310AA0

6ES7 132-4BD010AA0

No

No

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Substitute values connectable

Yes; 0/1

Yes; 0/1


Yes; can be read out

No

Yes; can be read out

• Wire break

Yes; channel by channel


• Short circuit




5


Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC


No

No

No

No

No


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Width

15 mm

15 mm

15 mm

15 mm

15 mm

Height

81 mm

81 mm

81 mm

81 mm

81 mm

Depth

52 mm

52 mm

52 mm

52 mm

52 mm

40 g

40 g

40 g

40 g

40 g

Isolation Isolation checked with Isolation Isolation, digital outputs



6ES7 132-4BD31-0AA0

6ES7 132-4FB00-0AB0


Yes; when using the same voltage source as on the power module

6ES7 132-4HB01-0AB0

6ES7 132-4HB10-0AB0

24 V; from the power module


Yes

Yes

30 mA

30 mA

Voltages and currents Reverse voltage protection




Yes; polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through

Yes

Load voltage L1 • Rated value (AC)

24.23 V; from power module

• permissible range, lower limit (AC)

24 V

• permissible range, upper limit (AC)

230 V

• permissible frequency range, lower limit

47 Hz

• permissible frequency range, upper limit

63 Hz


5 mA; per channel

from load voltage L1 (without load), max.

30 mA 15 mA; per channel


10 mA

18 mA

10 mA

10 mA

Power loss, typ.

1.6 W

4W

0.6 W

0.6 W

5/32



ET 200S


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 132-4BD31-0AA0

6ES7 132-4FB00-0AB0

6ES7 132-4HB01-0AB0

6ES7 132-4HB10-0AB0

4 Bit 1 Byte

2 Bit 1 Byte

2 Bit 1 Byte

2 Bit 1 Byte

No

No

No

No

Number of digital outputs

4

2

2

2


1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m


600 m

600 m

600 m

600 m

Yes; via fuse in power module

No; external fusing, max. 6 A quick-acting

No; external fusing, max. 6 A quick-acting

no

no

Yes

Yes

8 mA

8 mA

Address area Address space per module • with packing • without packing Isochronous mode Isochronous mode Digital outputs

Size of motor starter, max.

up to 40 °C size acc. to NEMA: 5; up to 60 °C size acc. to NEMA: 4


Yes; per channel


2.8 to 7.2 A


-55 to -60 V, L+( )

-55 to -60 V

Lamp load, max.

10 W

100 W

Zero-crossing switch Controlling a digital input

5

Yes; max. 25 V Yes

Yes; possible

L+ (-1.0 V)

Ua - 1.5 V


2A

2A


7 mA

0.1 mA


2.4 A

2.2 A


• for signal "1" minimum load current • for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.5 mA

3 mA


200 µs

15 ms

• "1" to "0", max.

1.3 ms

15 ms


No

No

No

No


Yes; per module

Yes; per module

No

No


100 Hz

10 Hz

2 Hz

2 Hz


2 Hz; 0.5 H

0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz


10 Hz

1 Hz

2 Hz

2 Hz

5A

5A


Switching frequency

Aggregate current of the outputs (per group) • horizontal installation • up to 40 °C, max.

2A

• up to 50 °C, max. • up to 60 °C, max.

1.5 A 4A

1A

Load impedance range • lower limit

12 Ω

• upper limit

3,400 Ω

Relay outputs Switching capacity of the contacts • Thermal continuous current, max.


5/33


ET 200S



6ES7 132-4FB00-0AB0

6ES7 132-4HB01-0AB0

6ES7 132-4HB10-0AB0

1 byte

3 bytes

3 bytes

3 bytes



Yes; 0/1

Yes; 0/1

Yes; 0/1

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

500 V DC

2500 V DC

• Channels against backplane bus and load voltage L+

1500 V AC

2500 V DC

• Load voltage L+ against backplane bus

500 V DC

500 V DC

Parameter Remark Behavior on CPU/Master STOP, channel-wise Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Substitute values connectable Diagnoses • Diagnostic functions Diagnostics indication LED • Status indicator digital output (green) Isolation Isolation checked with

5

tested with

Isolation Isolation, digital outputs • between the channels

No

No

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• between the channels and the load voltage L+ Dimensions and weight Width

15 mm

15 mm

15 mm

15 mm

Height

81 mm

81 mm

81 mm

81 mm

Depth

52 mm

52 mm

52 mm

52 mm

40 g

37 g

50 g

50 g


5/34



ET 200S


■ Ordering data

Order No.

Digital input modules Ordering unit 5 pieces


• 2 DI 24 V DC Standard

6ES7 131-4BB01-0AA0

• 2 DI 24 V DC High Feature

6ES7 131-4BB01-0AB0

• 4 DI 24 V DC Standard

6ES7 131-4BD01-0AA0


• 4 DI 24 V DC High Feature

6ES7 131-4BD01-0AB0

• petrol

6ES7 193-4BH00-0AA0

• 2 DI 120 V AC

6ES7 131-4EB00-0AB0

• red

6ES7 193-4BD00-0AA0

• 2 DI 230 V AC

6ES7 131-4FB00-0AB0

• yellow

6ES7 193-4BB00-0AA0

• 4 DI 24 … 48 V UC

6ES7 131-4CD00-0AB0

• light beige

6ES7 193-4BA00-0AA0

• 4 DI 24 V DC SOURCE INPUT

6ES7 131-4BD51-0AA0

Ordering unit 1 piece • 4 DI 24 V DC NAMUR

6ES7 131-4RD00-0AB0

Digital output modules Ordering unit 5 pieces • 2 DO 24 V DC/0.5 A Standard

6ES7 132-4BB01-0AA0

• 2 DO 24 V DC/0.5 A High Feature

6ES7 132-4BB01-0AB0

• 2 DO 24 V DC/2 A Standard

6ES7 132-4BB31-0AA0

• 2 DO 24 V DC/2 A High Feature

6ES7 132-4BB31-0AB0

• 4 DO 24 V DC/0.5 A Standard

6ES7 132-4BD01-0AA0

• 4 DO 24 V DC/2 A Standard

6ES7 132-4BD31-0AA0

• 2 DO 24 … 230 V AC/1 A

6ES7 132-4FB00-0AB0

• 2 DO 24 V DC … 230 V AC/5 A relay, NO contact

6ES7 132-4HB01-0AB0

• 2 DO 24 … 48 V DC to 230 V AC/ 5 A relay, changeover contact

6ES7 132-4HB10-0AB0

5


5/35


ET 200S

Analog electronic modules

■ Overview • Analog inputs and outputs for the ET 200S • Can be plugged onto TM-E terminal modules with automatic coding • High-feature versions with enhanced performance, precision and resolution • Hot swapping of modules possible Note: Consult the configuring guide for selection of the appropriate TM-E terminal modules.

5

■ Design Possible combinations of the TM-E terminal modules and analog modules Electronic modules

Terminal modules TM-E for electronic modules

Screw-type terminal Order No. 6ES7 193-…

→ 15S26-A1 → 4CA40-0AA0

15S24-A1

15S24-01

15S23-01

15S24-AT

30S44-01

30S46-A1

4CA20-0AA0

4CB20-0AA0

4CB00-0AA0

4CL20-0AA0

4CG20-0AA0

4CF40-0AA0

Spring-loaded terminal Order No. 6ES7 193-…

→ 15C26-A1 → 4CA50-0AA0

15C24-A1

15C24-01

15C23-01

15C24-AT

30C44-01

30C46-A1

4CA30-0AA0

4CB30-0AA0

4CB10-0AA0

4CL30-0AA0

4CG30-0AA0

4CF50-0AA0

FastConnect Order No. 6ES7 193-…

→ 15N26-A1 → 4CA80-0AA0

15N24-A1

15N24-01

15N23-01

-

-

-

4CA70-0AA0

4CB70-0AA0

4CB60-0AA0

2AI U ST 2AI U HF

■

■

■

■

2AI I 2WIRE ST

■

■

■

■

AI I 2WIRE ST

■

■

2AI I 2/4WIRE HF

■

■

2 AI I 4WIRE ST

■

■

2AI RTD ST

■

2AI RTD HF

■

■

■

■

2 AI TC ST

■

■

■

■

■

■

2 AI TC HF 2AO U ST 2AO U HF

■

2 AO I ST 2AO I HF

■

4 IQ-SENSE

■

5/36


■ ■

■ ■

■


ET 200S


■ Technical specifications 6ES7 134-4FB010AB0

6ES7 134-4GB010AB0

6ES7 134-4GB110AB0

6ES7 134-4GD000AB0

6ES7 134-4JB000AB0








Yes

Yes; Destruction limit 35 mA per channel

Yes

Yes

Voltages and currents Load voltage L+

Voltage supply to the transducers • present

Yes

• short-circuit proof

Yes; approx. 200 mA for module


30 mA

80 mA

30 mA

125 mA

30 mA


10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

Power loss, typ.

0.6 W

0.6 W

0.6 W

0.6 W

0.6 W

4 Byte

4 Byte

4 Byte

8 Byte

4 Byte

No

No

No

No

No

Number of analog inputs

2

2

2

4

2


200 m

200 m

200 m

200 m

50 m

permissible input frequency for voltage input (destruction limit), max.

35 V; 35 V permanent, 75 V for max. 1 ms (pulse duty factor 1:20)

5

Address area Address space per module • Address space per module, max. Isochronous mode Isochronous mode Analog inputs

permissible input current for current input (destruction limit), max. Cycle time (all channels) max.

Number of active channels per module x conversion time

10 V; permanent

40 mA

40 mA

30 mA; limited electronically



40 ms; 33 to 40 ms

Input ranges (rated values), voltages • Voltage

Yes

• 1 to 5 V

Yes

• -10 V to +10 V

Yes

• -5 V to +5 V

Yes

Yes

• -80 mV to +80 mV

Yes

• Input resistance (-80 mV to +80 mV)

1 MΩ

Input ranges (rated values), currents • Current

Yes

• -20 to +20 mA • 4 to 20 mA

Yes

Yes

Yes; 50 ohms Yes; on 50 ohms

Yes; 50 ohms

Yes; on 25 ohms


5/37


ET 200S


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 134-4FB010AB0

6ES7 134-4GB010AB0

6ES7 134-4GB110AB0

6ES7 134-4GD000AB0

6ES7 134-4JB000AB0

Input ranges (rated values), thermoelements

5

• thermocouple

Yes

• Type B

Yes

• Input resistance (Type B)

1 MΩ

• Type E

Yes

• Input resistance (Type E)

1 MΩ

• Type J

Yes

• Input resistance (type J)

1 MΩ

• Type K

Yes

• Input resistance (Type K)

1 MΩ

• Type L

Yes

• Input resistance (Type L)

1 MΩ

• Type N

Yes

• Input resistance (Type N)

1 MΩ

• Type R

Yes

• Input resistance (Type R)

1 MΩ

• Type S

Yes

• Input resistance (Type S)

1 MΩ

• Type T

Yes

• Input resistance (Type T)

1 MΩ

Characteristic linearization • programmable

Yes; Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T to IEC 584

Temperature compensation • external temperature compensation with compensations socket

Yes; possible, one external compensating box per channel

Analog value creation Measurement principle

integrating

integrating

integrating

integrating

14 Bit; +/-10 V: 13 bits + sign, +/-5 V: 13 bits + sign, 1 to 5 V: 13 bits

13 Bit; 4 to 20 mA: 13 bits

14 Bit; +/-20 mA: 14 bits; 4 to 20 mA: 13 bits

16.7 / 20 ms

16.7 / 20 ms

16.7 / 20 ms

• Interference voltage suppression 60 / 50 Hz for interference frequency f1 in Hz

60 / 50 Hz

60 / 50 Hz

• Conversion time (per channel)

65 ms; 55 / 65 ms

65 ms; 55 / 65 ms

65 ms; 55 / 65 ms

• parameterizable

Yes; in four stages by means of digital filtering



Yes; in 4 stages


• Level: none

Yes; 1 x cycle time

Yes; 1 x cycle time

Yes; 1 x cycle time

Yes; 1 x cycle time

Yes; 1 x cycle time

• Level: weak

Yes; 4x cycle time

Yes; 4x cycle time

Yes; 4x cycle time

Yes; 4x cycle time

Yes; 4x cycle time

• Level: middle

Yes; 32x cycle time

Yes; 32x cycle time

Yes; 32x cycle time

Yes; 16x cycle time

Yes; 32x cycle time

• Level: strong

Yes; 64x cycle time

Yes; 64x cycle time

Yes; 64x cycle time

Yes; 32x cycle time

Yes; 64x cycle time

750 Ω

750 Ω

750 Ω

Integrations and conversion time/resolutionper channel • Resolution with overload area (bit including sign), max.

• Integration time, parameterizable • Integration time, ms

13 Bit; 4 to 20 mA: 13 bits

16 Bit; 15 bit + sign

Yes

Yes

16.7 or 20

16.7 / 20 ms

60 / 50 Hz

60 / 50 Hz 65 ms; 55 / 65 ms (additional 20 ms on activated wire-break test)

Smoothing of measured values

Encoder Connection of signal encoders • for voltage measurement • Burden of 2-wire transmitter, max.

5/38


Yes


ET 200S



6ES7 134-4GB010AB0

6ES7 134-4GB110AB0

6ES7 134-4GD000AB0

6ES7 134-4JB000AB0

+/- 0,01 %

+/- 0,01 %

+/- 0,01 %

+/- 0,01 %

+/- 0,01 %

Temperature error (relative to input areas)

+/- 0,01 %/K

+/- 0,005 %/K

+/- 0,005 %/K

+/- 0,003 %/K

+/- 0,005 %/K

Crosstalk between the inputs, min.

-50 dB

-50 dB

-50 dB

-50 dB

-50 dB

Repeat accuracy in settled status at 25 °C (relative to input area)

+/- 0,05 %

+/- 0,05 %

+/- 0,05 %

+/- 0,05 %

+/- 0,05 %

+/- 0,6 %

+/- 0,6 %

+/- 0,4 %

+/- 0,4 %

+/- 0,4 %

+/- 0,3 %

70 dB

70 dB

70 dB

Errors/accuracies Linearity error (relative to input area)

Operational limit in overall temperature range • Voltage, relative to input area • Current, relative to input area Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C) • Voltage, relative to input area • Current, relative to input area Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (fl +/- 1 %), fl = interference frequency • Series mode interference (peak value of interference < rated value of input range), min. • common mode voltage (USS < 2.5 V) , min.

+/- 0,6 %

+/- 0,6 %

+/- 0,4 %

70 dB

+/- 0,4 %

90 dB

5 70 dB

90 dB

Parameter Remark

4 bytes


inhibit/enable (measuring range 1 to 5 V only)

Measurement type/range

deactivated / +/-5 V / 1 to 5 V / +/-10 V

Collective diagnostics

4 bytes

4 bytes

7 bytes

4 bytes

disable / enable, (only in measuring range 4 to 20 mA)

Yes

inhibit/enable (a break in the wire is only detected on thermocouples)

deactivated / 4 to 20 mA

deactivated / 4 to 20 mA / +/- 20 mA

Yes

Deactivated/ +/- 80 mV/; +/- 250 mV / +/- 500 mV /; +/- 1 V /; TC-EL type T (Cu-CuNi)/ TC-EL type K (NiCr-Ni)/ TC-EL type B; (PtRh-PtRh)/; TC-EL type N; (NiCrSi-NiSi)/; TC-EL type E; (NiCr-CuNi)/; TC-EL type R (PtRh-Pt)/ TC-EL type S (PtRh-Pt)/ TC-EL Type J

disable/enable

disable/enable

disable/enable

Yes

disable/enable

disable/enable

disable/enable

disable/enable

Yes

disable/enable

Slot comparison point 1 to 8 Overflow/underflow

disable/enable

Comparison point

none / RTD

Comparison point number

none / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 /6/7/8

Unit

Celsius


5/39


ET 200S



6ES7 134-4GB010AB0

6ES7 134-4GB110AB0

6ES7 134-4GD000AB0

6ES7 134-4JB000AB0

• Wire break

Yes; only measuring range 1to 5 V

Yes

Yes; only in measuring range 4 to 20 mA

Yes; only in measuring range 1 to 5 V

Yes; A break in the wire is only detected on thermocouples

• Group error

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• Overflow/underflow

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC


No

No

No

No

No


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Status information/alarms/d iagnostics Diagnoses • Diagnostic functions

Yes; can be read out Yes; can be read out

Diagnostics indication LED • Collective error SF (red) Isolation Isolation checked with

5

Isolation Isolation, analog inputs

Permissible potential difference between inputs and MANA (UCM)

2 V AC PP

2 V AC PP

between MANA and M internal (UISO)

75 V DC / 60 V AC

75 V DC / 60 V AC


15 mm

15 mm

15 mm

15 mm

15 mm

Height

81 mm

81 mm

81 mm

81 mm

81 mm

Depth

52 mm

52 mm

52 mm

52 mm

52 mm

40 g

40 g

40 g

40 g

40 g

6ES7 134-4JB500AB0

6ES7 134-4LB020AB0

6ES7 134-4MB020AB0

6ES7 134-4NB010AB0

6ES7 134-4NB510AB0



24 V

24 V




Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• present

Yes

No

Yes


Yes



Voltage supply to the transducers Yes


30 mA

55 mA

48 mA

30 mA

30 mA


10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

Power loss, typ.

0.6 W

0.85 W

1.2 W

0.6 W

0.6 W

4 Byte

4 Byte

4 Byte

4 Byte

4 Byte

No

Yes

Address area Address space per module • Address space per module, max. Isochronous mode Isochronous mode

5/40


No


ET 200S


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 134-4JB500AB0

6ES7 134-4LB020AB0

6ES7 134-4MB020AB0

6ES7 134-4NB010AB0

6ES7 134-4NB510AB0


2

2

2

2

2


200 m

200 m

200 m

50 m

200 m


9V

35 V; 35 V continuous, 75 V for max. 1 ms

20 V; +/- 20 V, permanent

9V

Analog inputs

permissible input current for current input (destruction limit), max.

50 mA

Constant measurement current for resistance-type transmitter, typ.

1.5 mA

Cycle time (all channels) max.


1.25 mA 0.5 ms; 0.5ms for 2 channels without interference suppression 18/21ms per channel with interf.

0.5 ms; 0.5ms for 2 channels without interf. suppression, 18/21ms per channel with interf.

technical unit for temperature measurement, adjustable

Yes

5

Yes


Yes

• 1 to 5 V

Yes

• Input resistance (1 to 5 V)

800 kΩ

• -10 V to +10 V

Yes

• Input resistance (-10 V to +10 V)

800 kΩ

• -5 V to +5 V

Yes


800 kΩ

Yes

• -80 mV to +80 mV

Yes


1 MΩ


Yes

• -20 to +20 mA

Yes

• 4 to 20 mA

Yes

Input ranges (rated values), thermoelements • thermocouple

Yes

• Type B

Yes

• Input resistance (Type B)

1 MΩ

• Type C

Yes

• Input resistance (Type C)

1 MΩ

• Type E

Yes

• Input resistance (Type E)

1 MΩ

• Type J

Yes

• Input resistance (type J)

1 MΩ

• Type K

Yes

• Input resistance (Type K)

1 MΩ

• Type L

Yes

• Input resistance (Type L)

1 MΩ

• Type N

Yes

• Input resistance (Type N)

1 MΩ

• Type R

Yes

• Input resistance (Type R)

1 MΩ

• Type S

Yes

• Input resistance (Type S)

1 MΩ

• Type T

Yes

• Input resistance (Type T)

1 MΩ


5/41


ET 200S



6ES7 134-4LB020AB0

6ES7 134-4MB020AB0

6ES7 134-4NB010AB0

6ES7 134-4NB510AB0

Input ranges (rated values), resistors • Impedance

Yes

Yes

• 0 to 150 Ohm

Yes

Yes

• Input resistance (0 to 150 Ohm)

2,000 kΩ

10 MΩ

• 0 to 300 Ohm

Yes

Yes


2,000 kΩ

10 MΩ

• 0 to 600 Ohm

Yes

Yes


2,000 kΩ

10 MΩ

• 0 to 3000 Ohm

Yes


10 MΩ

Input ranges (rated values), resistance thermometers

5

• Resistance thermometer

Yes

Yes

• Cu 10

Yes 10 MΩ

• Input resistance (Cu 10) • Ni 100

Yes; Standard/AirCon

Yes

• Input resistance (Ni 100)

2,000 kΩ

10 MΩ

• Ni 1000

Yes


10 MΩ

• Ni 120

Yes


10 MΩ

• Ni 200

Yes


10 MΩ

• Ni 500

Yes


10 MΩ

• Pt 100


Yes

• Input resistance (Pt 100)

2,000 kΩ

10 MΩ

• Pt 1000

Yes


10 MΩ

• Pt 200

Yes


10 MΩ

• Pt 500

Yes


10 MΩ


Yes; for Pt 100, Ni 100

• for thermoelements • for thermoresistor

Yes

Yes; for Ptxxx, Nixxx

Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T, C to IEC 584 Pt 100 (standard/climate), Ni 100 (standard/climate)

Ptxxxx and Nixxxx

Temperature compensation • external temperature compensation with compensations socket

Yes; one external compensating box per channel

• internal temperature compensation

Yes; possible with TM-E15S24-AT, TM-E15C24-AT

5/42


Yes


ET 200S



6ES7 134-4LB020AB0

6ES7 134-4MB020AB0

6ES7 134-4NB010AB0

6ES7 134-4NB510AB0

Sigma-Delta

integrating

integrating (Sigma-Delta)

16 Bit

16 Bit; for Pt100, Ni100, Ni120, Pt200, Ni200, Pt 500, Ni 500, Pt 1000, Ni 1000, Cu 10: 15 bits + sign; for 150, 300, 600, 3000 ohms: 15 bits; for PTC: 1 bit


integrating


16 Bit; 150 Ohm: 14 bit; 300, 600 Ohm: 15 bit; Pt100, Ni100: 16 bit

16 Bit; ...5 V: 15 bit, +/-10 V: 16 bit, +/-5 V: 16 bit

16 Bit; as required

Yes

Yes

• Integration time, parameterizable

Yes

• Integration time, ms

16.7 / 20 ms

16.7 / 20 ms

16.7 / 20 ms

• Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz

60 / 50 Hz

60 / 50 Hz / no

60Hz / 50Hz / no

60 / 50 Hz

60 / 50 Hz


110 ms; 110 / 130 ms

0.04 ms; without interference suppression 17ms / 20ms per channel with interference

0.04 ms; without interference suppression 17ms / 20ms per channel with interference

66 ms; 66 / 80 ms; additional conversion time for diagnostic wire break test

• parameterizable


Yes; in 4 stages: 1 x , 4 x , 16 x , 32 x cycle time

Yes; in 4 stages: 1 x , 4 x , 16 x , 32 x cycle time



• Level: none

Yes; 1 x cycle time

Yes; 1 x

Yes; 1 x

Yes; 1 x cycle time

Yes; 1 x cycle time

• Level: weak

Yes; 4x cycle time

Yes; 4 x

Yes; 4 x

Yes; 4x cycle time

Yes; 4x cycle time

• Level: middle

Yes; 32x cycle time

Yes; 16 x

Yes; 16 x

Yes; 32 x cycle time

Yes; 32x cycle time

• Level: strong

Yes; 64x cycle time

Yes; 32 x

Yes; 32 x


Yes; 64x cycle time

5


Encoder Connection of signal encoders • for voltage measurement

Yes

• for resistance measurement with 2-conductor connection

Yes; Line resistances are also measured, jumpers to TR

Yes


Yes; Line resistances are also measured, jumpers to TR

Yes; internal compensation of the line resistances


Yes

Yes

• Burden of 2-wire transmitter, max.

750 Ω

750 Ω


+/- 0,01 %

+/- 0,01 %

+/- 0,03 %

+/- 0.01 %

+/- 0.01 %


+/- 0,005 %/K

+/- 0,003 %/K

+/- 0,03 %/K

+/- 0.005 %/K

+/- 0,0009 %/K


-50 dB

-100 dB

-100 dB

-50 dB

-50 dB


+/- 0,05 %

+/- 0,01 %

+/- 0,01 %

+/- 0.05 %

+/- 0.05 %


5/43


ET 200S



6ES7 134-4LB020AB0

6ES7 134-4MB020AB0

6ES7 134-4NB010AB0

6ES7 134-4NB510AB0

Operational limit in overall temperature range • Voltage, relative to input area

+/- 0,1 %; 0.2% without interefence freqency suppression

• Current, relative to input area

• Resistance-type thermometer, relative to input area

+/- 0.1 %; +/- 1.5 K for thermocouples, +/- 7 K for thermocouples type C,+/2,5 K with static thermal state (ambient temperature change < 0.3 K/min +/- 0,1 %; 0.2% without interefence freqency suppression

+/- 0,6 %

Resistance sensors: +/-0.1%; Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 standard: +/-1,0K; Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 climatic: +/-0,25K; Ni100, Ni120, Ni200, Ni500, Ni 1000 standard and climatic: +/-0,4K; Cu10 +/-1,5K

5 Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C) • Voltage, relative to input area

+/- 0,05 %; 0.1% without inteference frequency suppression



+/- 0.05 %; +/- 1 K with thermocouples, +/- 5 K with thermocouples type C, +/- 1.5 K with static thermal state (ambient temperature change < 0.3 K/min) +/- 0,05 %; 0.1% without inteference frequency suppression

+/- 0,4 %

Resistance sensors: +/-0.05%; Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 standard: +/-0.6K; Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 climatic: +/-0.13K; Ni100, Ni120, Ni200, Ni500, Ni 1000 Standard and climatic: +/-0.2K; Cu10 +/-1K

Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (fl +/- 1 %), fl = interference frequency • Series mode interference 70 dB (peak value of interference < rated value of input range), min.

90 dB

90 dB

70 dB

70 dB

• common mode voltage (USS < 2.5 V) , min.

90 dB

100 dB

100 dB

90 dB

90 dB

Remark

4 bytes

12 bytes, 4 bytes in compatibility mode

12 bytes, 4 bytes in compatibility mode

4 bytes

7 bytes


disable/enable (wire break is detected only on constant current lines)

disable / enable

inhibit/enable (a break in the wire is only detected on thermocouples)

disable/enable

Parameter

5/44



ET 200S



6ES7 134-4LB020AB0

6ES7 134-4MB020AB0

6ES7 134-4NB010AB0


deactivated/ 150 Ohm/; 300 Ohm/600 Ohm/; Pt100 air con/ Pt100 standard-; Ni100 standard / Ni100 air con-

deactivated / +/-5 V / 1 to 5 V / +/-10 V

deactivated / Deactivated/ +/- 20mA 4 to 20 mA +/- 80 mV/; TC-EL type T (Cu-CuNi)/ TC-EL type K (NiCr-Ni)/ TC-EL type B; (PtRh-PtRh)/; TC-EL type c (Wer-Wer); TC-EL type N; (NiCrSi-NiSi)/ , TC-EL type E; (NiCr-CuNi)/; TC-EL type R (PtRh-Pt)/ TC-EL type S (PtRh-Pt)/ TC-EL type J (Fe-Cu-Ni)/ TC

deactivated/ 150 ohms/ 300 ohms/ 600 ohms/ 300 ohms/ Pt100/ Pt200/ Pt500/ Pt1000 each standard or climate range/ Ni100/ Ni120/ Ni200/ Ni500/ Ni1000 each standard or climate range/ Cu10 each standard or climate range / PTC


disable/enable

disable/enable

disable / enable

disable/enable

disable/enable

Overflow/underflow

disable/enable

disable/enable

disable / enable

disable/enable

disable/enable

Comparison point

none / yes, internal

Unit

Celsius / Fahrenheit

6ES7 134-4NB510AB0

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Alarms • Process alarm

Yes

Yes

• Diagnostic functions

Yes; can be read out Yes

Yes

• Wire break

Yes; A wire break is only detected on constand current lines

Yes; only measuring range 1to 5V

Yes; only in measuring range 4 to 20 mA

Yes; only thermocouples

Yes

• Group error

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC


No

No; Functional, yes

No; Functional, yes

No

No


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Diagnoses

Diagnostics indication LED • Collective error SF (red) Isolation Isolation checked with Isolation Isolation, analog inputs

Permissible potential difference between the inputs (UCM)

140 V DC/100 V AC

between inputs and MANA (UCM) between MANA and M internal (UISO)

140 V DC/100 V AC 75 V DC / 60 V AC

75 V DC / 60 V AC

75 V DC / 60 V AC


15 mm

15 mm

15 mm

15 mm

15 mm

Height

81 mm

81 mm

81 mm

81 mm

81 mm

Depth

52 mm

52 mm

52 mm

52 mm

52 mm

15 mm

15 mm

45 g

45 g

40 g

40 g

Module width, max. Weights Weight, approx.

40 g


5/45

5


ET 200S


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 135-4FB01-0AB0

6ES7 135-4GB01-0AB0

6ES7 135-4LB02-0AB0

6ES7 135-4MB02-0AB0




24 V

24 V


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

from load voltage L+ (without load), max.

130 mA

150 mA

80 mA

80 mA


10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

Power loss, max.

2W

2W

1.2 W

1.2 W

4 Byte

4 Byte

4 Byte

4 Byte

Yes

Yes


Current consumption

Address area Address space per module • Address space per module, max. Isochronous mode

5

Isochronous mode Analog outputs Number of analg outputs

2

2

2

2


200 m

200 m

200 m; 100m if Twa < 2ms

200 m; 100m if Twa < 2ms

Voltage output, Short-circuit protection

Yes

Yes

Voltage output, short-circuit current, max..

25 mA

25 mA

Current output, no-load voltage, max. Cycle time (all channels) max.

18 V 1.5 ms

1.5 ms

18 V 0.5 ms; at max. 0.5µF

0.5 ms

Output ranges, voltage • 1 to 5 V

Yes

Yes; -5 to +5V also implemented

• -10 to +10 V

Yes

Yes

Output ranges, current • -20 to +20 mA

Yes

Yes

• 4 to 20 mA

Yes

Yes

Connection of actuators • for voltage output 2-conductor connection

Yes; without compensation of the line resistances

Yes

• for voltage output 4-conductor connection

Yes

Yes

• for current output 2-conductor connection

Yes

Yes


No

No

Load impedance (in rated range of output) • with voltage outputs, min.

1 kΩ

1 kΩ

• with voltage outputs, capacitive load, max.

1 µF

0.5 µF

• with current outputs, max.

500 Ω

500 Ω

• with current outputs, inductive load, max.

1 mH

1 mH

Destruction limits against externally applied voltages and currents • Voltages at the outputs towards MANA

15 V; max. 15 V continuous, 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty ratio 1:20)

15 V; max. 15 V continuous, 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty ratio 1:20)

• Current, max.

50 mA; DC

50 mA; DC

5/46


15 V; as required

50 mA


ET 200S


■ Technical specifications (continued) Analog value creation Integrations and conversion time/resolutionper channel • Resolution with overload area (bit including sign), max.

14 Bit; 1...5 V: 12 bits, +/-10 V: 13 bits + sign

14 Bit; 4 to 20 mA: 13 bits, +/-20 mA: 14 bits

16 Bit; 15 bit + sign

16 Bit

• for resistive load

0.1 ms

0.1 ms

0.2 ms

0.3 ms

• for capacitive load

0.5 ms

0.5 ms

0.5 ms; at max. 0.5µF

1 ms

• for inductive load

0.5 ms

0.5 ms

0.5 ms

0.5 ms

Settling time

Ex(i) characteristics Max. values of output circuits (per channel) • Uo (output no-load voltage), max.

18 V

Errors/accuracies Output ripple (relative to the output area, bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz)

+/- 0,02 %

+/- 0,02 %

+/- 0,02 %

+/- 0,02 %

Linearity error (relative to output area)

+/- 0,02 %

+/- 0,02 %

+/- 0,01 %

+/- 0,01 %

Temperature error (relative to output area)

+/- 0,01 %/K

+/- 0,01 %/K

+/- 0,05 %

+/- 0,05 %

Crosstalk between the outputs, min. Repeat accuracy in settled status at 25 °C (relative to output area)

5

+/- 0,003 %/K 60 dB

60 dB

+/- 0,01 %

+/- 0,01 %

Operational limit in overall temperature range • Voltage, relative to output area

+/- 0,4 %

• Current, relative to output area

+/- 0,1 % +/- 0,5 %

+/- 0,1 %

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C) • Voltage, relative to output area

+/- 0,2 %


+/- 0,05 % +/- 0,3 %

+/- 0,05 %

Parameter Remark

7 bytes

7 bytes

7 bytes

7 bytes

Output type/range

deactivated / 1 to 5 V / +/-10 V

deactivated / 4 to 20 mA / +/-20 mA

deactivated / to 5V / +/ - 10V / +/- 5V

deactivated / 4 to 20mA / +/- 20mA

Diagnosis: wire break Diagnosis: short circuit

disable/enable disable/enable

disable / enable disable / enable

Interference frequency suppression

no

disable / enable


disable/enable

disable/enable

disable / enable

disable / enable

Behavior on CPU/Master STOP

Output current and deenergized/substitute a value/keep last value


Output current and voltage-free /replacement value / keep last value


Yes; 0 to 65535 (range of values must be within the rated range)

Yes; 0 to 65535 (range of values must be within the rated range)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


Diagnoses • Diagnostic information readable Yes

• Wire break

Yes

• Short circuit

Yes

• Group error

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes



5/47


ET 200S


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 135-4FB01-0AB0

6ES7 135-4GB01-0AB0

6ES7 135-4LB02-0AB0

6ES7 135-4MB02-0AB0

500 V DC

500 V DC

Isolation Isolation checked with Isolation Isolation, analog outputs • Galvanic isolation, analog outputs

Yes


No

No

No

No


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

75 V DC / 60 V AC

75 V DC / 60 V AC

75V DC / 60V AC

75 V DC / 60 V AC

Width

15 mm

15 mm

15 mm

15 mm

Height

81 mm

81 mm

81 mm

81 mm

Depth

52 mm

52 mm

52 mm

52 mm

40 g

40 g

40 g

40 g

Permissible potential difference between MANA and M internal (UISO) Dimensions and weight

5


■ Ordering data

Order No.

Analog input modules Ordering unit 1 piece

Order No. Accessories for labeling

• 2 AI U Standard

6ES7 134-4FB01-0AB0

• 2 AI U High Feature

6ES7 134-4LB02-0AB0

• 2 AI I Standard 2-wire

6ES7 134-4GB01-0AB0


• 2 AI I Standard 4-wire

6ES7 134-4GB11-0AB0

• petrol

6ES7 193-4BH00-0AA0

• 2 AI I High Feature 2-wire/4-wire (15-bit + sign)

6ES7 134-4MB02-0AB0

• red

6ES7 193-4BD00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 193-4BB00-0AA0

• 2 AI RTD standard

6ES7 134-4JB50-0AB0

• light beige

6ES7 193-4BA00-0AA0

• 2 AI TC standard

6ES7 134-4JB00-0AB0

Accessories for system-integrated shield connection

• 2 AI RTD High Feature

6ES7 134-4NB51-0AB0 6ES7 134-4NB01-0AB0

• 4 AI Standard 2-wire

6ES7 134-4GD00-0AB0

Shield connection element Ordering unit 5 pieces For plugging into TM-E and TM-P

6ES7 193-4GA00-0AA0

• 2 AI TC High Feature

6ES7 193-4GB00-0AA0

• 2 AO U Standard

6ES7 135-4FB01-0AB0

Shield clamps Ordering unit 5 pieces For 3 × 10 mm busbars

• 2 AO U High Feature

6ES7 135-4LB02-0AB0

8WA2 868

• 2 AO I Standard

6ES7 135-4GB01-0AB0

• 2 AO I High Feature

6ES7 135-4MB02-0AB0

Grounding terminal Ordering unit 1 piece For cable cross-sections up to 25 mm2 3 × 10 mm busbars Ordering unit 1 piece

8WA2 842

Analog output modules Ordering unit 1 piece

5/48



ET 200S — Fail-safe Modules Overview

■ Overview Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) Safety technology (Safety Integrated) is a component of Totally Integrated Automation resulting in the total integration of safety and standard automation (SIMATIC S7). Whereas today, standard automation (conventional PLCs) and safety automation (electromechanics) are still separate, these two worlds are growing closer together to form one uniform, integrated overall system. Siemens can therefore present itself as a complete supplier for automation engineering for which safety technology is part of the standard automation and uniformity exists throughout the complete system.

5

The fail-safe SIMATIC S7 CPUs, plus the fail-safe signal modules of SIMATIC ET 200S / ET200 / 200pro/ ET200eco and ET200M have been specially developed for distributed applications in manufacturing systems. Thanks to the discrete structure of the F I/Os, safety technology is only applied where actually required. The new system replaces conventional electromechanical components, such as: • Freely programmable safe linking of sensors to actuators; • Selective safe shutdown of actuators; • Hybrid configurations of F modules (F stands for fail-safe) and standard modules in a station; • Single-bus concept, F signals and standard signals are transferred over one bus medium (PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET).


5/49


ET 200S — Fail-safe Modules PM-E F PROFIsafe F power module

■ Ordering data

■ Overview Fail-safe PM-E F PROFIsafe power modules for safety shutdown of standard digital output modules. • Up to 2 fail-safe digital outputs onboard (source/sink outputs, up to 2A, up to SIL3/Cat. 4) • The standard digital output modules can be shut down up to Cat.3 (EN 954) and SIL 2 (IEC61508) up to 10 A. The following modules can be used down-circuit of the power modules. - 2DO / 0.5 A ST 6ES7 132-4BB01-0AA0 - 2 DO / 2 A ST 6ES7 132-4BB31-0AA0 - 2 DO / 0.5 A HF 6ES7 132-4BB01-0AB0 - 2 DO / 2 A HF 6ES7 132-4BB31-0AB0 - 4 DO / 0.5 A ST 6ES7 132-4BD01-0AA0 - 4 DO / 2 A ST 6ES7 132-4BD31-0AA0 The modules support PROFIsafe, both in PROFIBUS, and in PROFINET configurations. They can be used with all fail-safe SIMATIC S7-CPUs.


5

IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module For ET 200S; data transmission rate up to 12 Mbit/s; data volumes 244 byte each for I/O, up to 63 modules can be connected; connection of PROFIsafe modules, isochronous mode; bus connection via 9-pin Sub-D incl. terminating module

6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0

TM-P30C44-A0 Ordering unit 1 item 7 x 2 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interrupted to the left, spring-loaded terminals for PM-E F PROFIsafe

6ES7 193-4CK30-0AA0

24 V Yes; electronic No 20 byte inhibit/enable

• Load voltage

DC

Status information/ interrupts/ diagnostics Yes Yes Yes Yes

Dimensions and weight • Weight, approx.

88 g

• Width

30 mm


Accessories

10 A; 6 A for vertical installation 6A

• No load voltage

5/50

6ES7 138-4CF41-0AB0

6ES7 193-4CK20-0AA0

• Comment

Diagnostic display LED - Rated load voltage PWR (green) - Group fault SF (red) - Status display digital output (green)

Power module PM-E F pp PROFIsafe, 24 V DC For safe shutdown of digital output modules

TM-P30S44-A0 Ordering unit 1 item 7 x 2 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interrupted to the left, screw-type terminals for PM-E F PROFIsafe

Parameters

Diagnostics - Diagnostics

6ES7 138-4CF02-0AB0

Terminal modules for power modules

Voltages and currents Load voltage L+ - Rated value (DC) - Short-circuit protection - Reverse polarity protection

Power module PM-E F pm PROFIsafe, 24 V DC For safe shutdown of digital output modules

6ES7 138-4CF01-0AB0 Power supply Current carrying capacity - Current carrying capacity up to 40 °C, max. - Current carrying capacity up to 60 °C, max.

Order No.

Distributed Safety V5.4 programming tool Task: Software for configuring fail-safe user programs for SIMATIC S7-300F, S7-400F, ET 200S Requirement: STEP 7 V5.3 SP3 and higher Floating license

6ES7 833-1FC02-0YA5


6ES7 833-1FC00-0YX2


6ES7 833-1FC02-0YE5

SIMATIC Manual Collection Electronic manuals on CD-ROM, five languages: S7-200/300/400, C7, LOGO!, SIMATIC DP, PC, PG, STEP 7, engineering software, runtime software, PCS 7, SIMATIC HMI, SIMATIC NET

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0

SIMATIC Manual Collection update service for 1 year

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


ET 200S — Fail-safe Modules F electronic modules

■ Overview Digital inputs/outputs for the fail-safe SIMATIC S7 systems Fail-safe digital input module • For fail-safe reading of sensor information (1 or 2 channels) • Provides integral discrepancy evaluation for 2-out-of-2 signals • 2 internal sensor supplies (incl. test function) onboard Fail-safe digital output module • Fail-safe 2-channel activation (sink/source output) by actuators • Actuators can be driven by up to 2 A All modules are certified up to Cat. 4 (EN 954-1) and up to SIL 3 (IEC 61508). The modules support PROFIsafe, both in PROFIBUS, and in PROFINET configurations. They can be used with all fail-safe SIMATIC S7 CPUs.

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 138-4FA02-0AB0 Supply voltages

Encoder supply

Rated value

Number of outputs

2

Output voltage

min. L+ (-1.5V)


300 mA


0 to 300 mA


Yes; electronic (response threshold 0.7 A to 1.8 A)

• DC 24 V

Yes

• permissible range, lower limit (DC) 20.4 V • permissible range, upper limit (DC)

28.8 V


No

Current consumption Power loss, typ.

4W

Encoder Connectable encoders

Address area

• 2-wire BEROS

Occupied address area • Outputs

4 Byte


• Inputs

6 Byte

Diagnoses

Digital inputs


No

Yes

Number of digital inputs

8; 8 single channel, 4 two-channel


Number of simultanneously controllable inputs

8


Yes


Yes


200 m

Isolation


200 m



Yes


No


Yes


No


24 V

• for signal "0"

-30 to 5 V

• for signal "1"

15 to 30 V


3.7 mA

Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) • for standard inputs - programmable - at "0" to "1", min. - at "0" to "1", max. - at "1" to "0", min. - at "1" to "0", max.

5

6ES7 138-4FA02-0AB0

Yes 0.3 ms 17 ms 0.3 ms 17 ms

Standards, approvals, certificates Highest safety class achievable in safety mode • to EN 954

Cat. 3 (single channel), Cat. 4 (two-channel)

• to IEC 61508

SIL 2 (single channel), SIL 3 (two-channel)


30 mm

Height

81 mm

Depth

52 mm


78 g


5/51



■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 138-4FB02-0AB0 Voltages and currents Load voltage L+ • Rated value (DC)

24 V


No


typically 100 mA


28 mA

Power loss, typ.

3.5 W


5

4

6ES7 138-4FB02-0AB0 Aggregate current of the outputs (per group) • vertical installation - up to 40 °C, max.

4 mA

• horizontal installation - up to 40 °C, max. - up to 55 °C, max.

6A 5A

• up to 60 °C, max.

4 mA

Load impedance range • lower limit

12 Ω

• upper limit

1 kΩ


200 m



200 m

Diagnoses

Short-circuit protection of the output Yes; electronic


Yes


• Wire break

Yes

• Short circuit

Yes

Lamp load, max. Controlling a digital input Output voltage • for signal "1", min.

typically L+ (-47 V) 10 W No L+ (-2,0 V), current sourcing switch: L+ (-1,5 V), voltage drop on current sinking switch: max. 0.5 V

Output current • for signal "1" rated value

2A


Yes


Yes


No Yes No


20 mA



2.4 A



0.5 mA; Current sourcing switch: max. 0.5 mA; current sinking switch: max. 4 mA

Highest safety class achievable in safety mode

Parallel switching of 2 outputs • for increased power • for redundant control of a load

No No

Standards, approvals, certificates

• to EN 954

Cat. 4

• to IEC 61508

SIL 3


Switching frequency

Width

30 mm


30 Hz

Height

81 mm

0.1 Hz

Depth

52 mm

10 Hz

Weights

• with inductive load, max. • on lamp load, max.

Weight, approx.

5/52


85 g



■ Ordering data

Order No.

Order No.

Electronic module 4/8 F-DI PROFIsafe 24 V DC 30 mm construction width, up to Category 4 (EN954-1)

6ES7 138-4FA02-0AB0

Accessories (continued)

Electronic module 4 F-DO PROFIsafe 24 V DC/2A 30 mm construction width, up to Category 4 (EN954-1)

6ES7 138-4FB02-0AB0

Distributed Safety V5.4 programming tool Task: Software for configuring fail-safe user programs for SIMATIC S7-300F, S7-400F, ET 200S Requirement: STEP 7 V5.3 SP3 and higher

Accessories Terminal modules for electronic modules IM 151-1 High Feature interface module For ET200S; transmission rate up to 12 Mbit/s; max. 63 modules can be connected, with isochronous mode, bus connection via 9-pin Sub-D connector incl. terminating module

See F terminal modules 6ES7 151-1BA01-0AB0

Floating license

6ES7 833-1FC02-0YA5


6ES7 833-1FC00-0YX2


6ES7 833-1FC02-0YE5


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2

5


5/53


ET 200S — Fail-safe Modules F terminal modules

■ Overview • Mechanical modules as receptacles for the electronic modules • For setting up permanent wiring through self-configuring voltage buses • Keyed connection technology to ensure an enhanced vibration resistance of up to 5 g • Different versions to accommodate power modules and electronic modules • Replaceable terminal box (even within the station network) • Automatic coding of the electronic modules • Self-shielding of the backplane bus for high data security • Color coding facility for the terminals and for identifying the slot numbers • Alternatively available with screw-type or spring-loaded terminals • For up to 60 % faster process wiring also with FastConnect connection method (av. soon)

5

■ Ordering data

Order No.

Order No.

Terminal modules for power modules

Accessories for coding

TM-P30S44-A0 Ordering unit 1 piece 7 x 2 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interrupted to the left, screw-type terminals for PM-E F PROFIsafe

6ES7 193-4CK20-0AA0

Color coding plates

TM-P30C44-A0 Ordering unit 1 piece 7 x 2 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interrupted to the left, spring-loaded terminals for PM-E F PROFIsafe

6ES7 193-4CK30-0AA0

Ordering unit 200 pieces for TM-P, TM-E • white

6ES7 193-4LA20-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 193-4LB20-0AA0

• yellow/green

6ES7 193-4LC20-0AA0

• red

6ES7 193-4LD20-0AA0

• blue

6ES7 193-4LF20-0AA0

• brown

6ES7 193-4LG20-0AA0

Accessories for shield connecting

• turquoise

6ES7 193-4LH20-0AA0

Shield connecting element 5 pack for TM-E and TM-P

6ES7 193-4GA00-0AA0

Labels, inscribed

Shield clamp 5 pack for busbar 3 × 10 mm

6ES7 193-4GB00-0AA0

Grounding terminal 1 item for cross-sections up to 25 mm2

8WA2 868

Busbar 3 × 10 mm 1 item

8WA2 842

Ordering unit 1 set

Note: Additional terminal modules can be found under “Terminal Modules for Power and Electronic Modules” on page 5/79.

5/54


• 200 items for slot numbering (1 to 20) 10 ×

8WA8 861-0AB

• 200 items for slot numbering (1 to 40) 5 ×

8WA8 861-0AC

• 200 items for slot numbering (1 to 64) 1 ×, (1 to 68) 2 ×

8WA8 861-0DA

Labels, blank 200 pieces for slot numbering

8WA8 848-2AY


ET 200S — IQ-Sense Modules and Sensors 4 IQ-Sense and 8 IQ-Sense sensor modules

■ Overview

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 138-4GA00-0AB0 Voltages and currents Load voltage L+ • Rated value (DC)



Yes


300 mA

Power loss, typ.

0.85 W


4

Cable length

• The 4 IQ-Sense sensor module is an intelligent 4-channel electronic module for the ET 200S distributed I/O in PROFIBUS DP networking systems. It is used to connect photoelectric sensors using IQ-Sense technology. • The 8×IQ-Sense sensor module is an intelligent 8-channel I/O module for SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M and is used to connect photoelectric and ultrasonic sensors using IQ-Sense technology. It is possible to combine different types of sensors on one module.


50 m


50 m


3.24 ms

Encoder Connectable encoders • Description

Photoelectric proximity switches with IQ-SENSE, cycle time 3.24 ms


Standard function blocks are available for simplified handling of a SIMATIC S7. Conventional sensors cannot be operated on these modules.

Diagnoses

The main applications of the IQ-Sense system are found in installations and machines: • with high availability demands • with a high probability of interaction between sensors • with the need for high flexibility and dynamic changing of sensor parameters.


Yes

• Status indicator sensor channel (green)

Yes

■ Design • Module width (15 mm or 40 mm) • LEDs: - 1 green LED for each sensor channel - 1 red LED for group fault display • Maximum cable length to sensor 50 m, standard cables from 0.25 mm2 • The module can be mounted in the same way as any other ET 200S module with permanent wiring, and can be easily installed and removed without tools. The following can be used as terminal modules: - TM-E15S24-01 - TM-E15C24-01 - TM-E15S26-A1 - TM-E15C26-A1

5

Analog inputs


Yes; Diagnostic information readable



500 V DC

Isolation Galvanic isolation, digital inputs • between the channels

No


Yes


500 V DC


15 mm

Height

81 mm

Depth

52 mm


35 g


5/55


ET 200S — IQ-Sense Modules and Sensors 4 IQ-Sense and 8 IQ-Sense sensor modules

■ Ordering data


Sensor module 4IQ-Sense

6ES7 138-4GA00-0AB0


Sensor module 8 x IQ-Sense

6ES7 338-7XF00-0AB0

Load voltage L+

Sensors for connecting to the 4 IQ-Sense sensor module

6ES7 338-7XF00-0AB0


24 V

Current consumption 1A

• Diffuse sensor, type C40 IQ-Sense

3SF7 240-3JQ00

from load voltage L+ (no load), max.

150 mA; typ.

• Diffuse sensor, type K80 IQ-Sense

3SF7 210-3JQ00

from backplane bus 5 V DC, max.

• Reflex sensor, type C40 IQ-Sense

3SF7 241-3JQ00

• Reflex sensor, type K80 IQ-Sense

3SF7 211-3JQ00

• Diffuse sensor with background suppression, type K80 IQ-Sense

3SF7 214-3JQ00

• Ultrasonic sensors M18 IQ-Sense Sensing range 5 to 30 cm

3SF6 232-3JA00

• Ultrasonic sensors M18 IQ-Sense Sensing range 15 to 100 cm

3SF6 233-3JA00

Connection system Requisite front connector

20-pin


8

Length of cable • Length of cable unshielded, max

50 m

Sensor

5

Order No.

Connectable encoders • Description

photoelectronic proximity switches and ultrasonic sensors with IQ-Sense, cycle time 2.88 - 6 ms

Status information/ interrupts/ diagnostics Diagnostic display LED • Status display digital input (green)

Yes

Insulation Insulation tested with

500 V DC

Potentials/ electrical isolation Digital input functions • between the channels

No


Yes


40 mm

Height

125 mm

Depth

120 mm

Weight, approx.

250 g

IQ-Sense proximity switch

■ More information For further information, see ET 200M from page 5/288.

5/56



ET 200S — Technology Modules Overview

■ Design Possible combinations of TM-E terminal modules and electronic modules TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules

Electronic modules Screw-type terminal

→ 15S26-A1



15S24-A1

15S24-01

15S23-01

15S24-AT

30S44-01

30S46-A1


→ 15C26-A1



Fast Connect

→ 15N26-A1


→ …4CA80-0AA0 …4CA70-0AA0 …4CB70-0AA0 …4CB60-0AA0

15C24-A1

15N24-A1

15C24-01

15N24-01

■

■

1 SSI

■

■

1 STEP 5 V/204 kHz

■

■

2 PULSE

■

■

1 COUNT 24 V/100 kHz

15C23-01

15N23-01

15C24-AT

–

30C44-01

–

–

■

1 COUNT 5 V/500 kHz

1 POS INC/Digital

■

1 POS SSI/Digital

■

1 POS INC/Analog

■

1 POS SSI/Analog

■

1 SI 3964/ASCII

■

■

1 SI Modbus/USS

■

■

4/8 F-DI 24 V DC1) 4 F-DO 24 V DC/2 A1) RESERVE (overall width 15 mm)

30C46-A1

■

■

RESERVE (overall width 30 mm)

■

■

5

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

1) See the manual "ET 200S fail-safe modules“ in the "S7 F Systems“ and "S7 Distributed Safety“ documentation packages


5/57


ET 200S — Technology Modules SSI module

■ Overview • 1-channel module for connecting SSI sensors to the ET 200S • For position decoding and simple positioning tasks • With two comparison operations with specifiable comparison values (standard mode) • With a digital input for latching actual values (standard mode) • Can be plugged into TM-E terminal module with automatic coding • Fast mode for high-speed acquisition of encoder values (e.g. for drive controls) • Module replacement possible during operation and when live (hot swapping) • Simple parameterization without additional software Note: We supply positioning systems and prepared connection cables for counting and positioning functions as SIMODRIVE Sensors or Motion Connect 500 (also visit http://www.siemens.com/simatic-technology)

5

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 138-4DB02-0AB0 Voltages and currents Load voltage L+ • Rated value (DC)

24 V


Yes


28.8 V


34 mA


10 mA

Power loss, typ.

0.8 W

Digital inputs 1

Input voltage • for signal "0" • for signal "1"

Number of connectable encoders, max. Connectable encoders • Absolute encoder (SSI)

Yes

• 2-wire BEROS

Yes; Type 2


Yes


Yes

• Status indicator backward counting (green)

Yes

• Status indicator forward counting (green)

Yes

-30 to 5V

Isolation

11 to 30V

Isolation counter

Input current • for signal "0", max. (permissible quiescent current)

2 mA

• for signal "1", typ.

9 mA

Encoder supply Absolute encoder (SSI) encoder supply • Absolute encoder (SSI)

Yes

• Output voltage

L+ (-0.8 V)


Yes


No


15 mm

Height

81 mm

Depth

52 mm


5/58


1


Current consumption


6ES7 138-4DB02-0AB0 Encoder

40 g


ET 200S — Technology Modules SSI module

■ Ordering data SSI module For connecting absolute encoders with an SSI interface

Order No. 6ES7 138-4DB02-0AB0


6ES7 193-4BH00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 193-4BD00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 193-4BB00-0AA0

• light beige

6ES7 193-4BA00-0AA0

Signal cable Preassembled for SSI absolute encoder 6FX2001-5, without Sub-D connector, UL/DESINA

6FX5 002-2CC12-....

5


5/59


ET 200S — Technology Modules 2 PULSE pulse generator

■ Overview • 2-channel pulse generator and timer module for ET 200S • For controlling final control elements, valves, heater elements, etc. • Pulse width modulation (PWM) • Pulse sequences • Pulse trains • Accurately timed switching signals to 24 V DC output

5

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 138-4DD00-0AB0 Voltages and currents

6ES7 138-4DD00-0AB0 Digital outputs

Load voltage L+


2




1,000 m


Yes


600 m


Yes


40 mA


10 A


10 mA


L+ - (50 V to 65 V)

Power loss, typ.

1.8 W

Lamp load, max.

10 W

Accuracy of pulse duration

+/- (pulse duration x 100 ppm) , +/- 100 µs with a load <= 50 Ohm

minimum pulse duration

200 µs


Yes


2

Cable length • cable length, shielded, max. Input characteristic curve to IEC 1131, Typ 2

100 m Yes

Output voltage • for signal "1", min.

L+ (-1.0 V)

Output current


24 V


2A

• for signal "0"

-30 V to 5 V

7 mA

• for signal "1"

11 to 30 V

• for signal "1" permissible range for 0 to 60 °C, min. • for signal "1" permissible range for 0 to 60 °C, max.

2A


9 mA

Input delay (for rated value of input voltage)

Output delay with resistive load

• Input frequency (with 0.1 ms delay), max.

20 kHz

• Minimum pulse width for program reactions

100 µs

5/60


• for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.5 mA • "0" to "1", max.

100 µs

• "1" to "0", max.

200 µs


2.5 kHz


2 Hz


10 Hz


ET 200S — Technology Modules 2 PULSE pulse generator

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 138-4DD00-0AB0 Encoder supply Output voltage

L+ (-0.8 V)


500 mA


Yes


■ Ordering data Pulse generator and timer module 2PULSE For ET 200S

Order No. 6ES7 138-4DD00-0AB0

Accessories Label sheets DIN A4 (10 pieces) Each sheet contains 60 label strips for peripheral modules and 20 label strips for interface modules

• 2-wire BEROS

Yes

• petrol

6ES7 193-4BH00-0AA0


2 mA

• red

6ES7 193-4BD00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 193-4BB00-0AA0

• light beige

6ES7 193-4BA00-0AA0

Pulse generator Number of channels

2; 1 digital input and 1 digital output per channel


5


Yes


Yes


Yes


500 V DC


No


Yes

Galvanic isolation, digital inputs • between the channels

No


Yes


500 V DC


15 mm

Height

81 mm

Depth

52 mm


40 g


5/61


ET 200S — Technology Modules 1 STEP stepper module

■ Overview • Single channel module for ET 200S for the controlled positioning of a stepper motor • Reference point or incremental operating modes • Connection of power circuits with pulse/ direction interface using 5 V differential signals • External stop with/without ramp through digital input • Status display and error display by LED: positioning errors and status errors in the digital inputs are displayed on LEDs and indicated to the interface to the master

5

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 138-4DC00-0AB0 Voltages and currents Load voltage L+ • Rated value (DC)

Connectable encoders 24 V

Current consumption Power loss, typ.

6ES7 138-4DC00-0AB0 Encoder • 2-wire BEROS

1.5 W

Cable length, max.


2 Input REF: reference cams, input DI: pulse disable or external stop

Functions

Yes

Drive technology

Cable length

100 m; twisted and shielded in pairs

Step controllers Connection for stepper motors

Differential signals for pulses (PULSE, notPULSE) and direction (DIR, notDIR) to RS422

Number of stepper motor channels

1


1,000 m



600 m


Repeat frequency, max.

1 kHz

• Description


Yes

1 green LED for status indication "Ready for positioning jobs"

• Positioning mode POS (green)

Yes


Yes


Yes


24 V

• for signal "0"

-30 to +5V ( -15% / + 20%)

• for signal "1"

11 to 30 V


2 mA


9 mA

Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) 300 µs

- at "1" to "0", max.

300 µs


15 mm

Height

81 mm

Depth

52 mm


• for standard inputs - at "0" to "1", max.

5/62


40 g


ET 200S — Technology Modules 1 STEP stepper module

■ Ordering data 1STEP stepper module for simple positioning tasks with stepper motor axes

Order No. 6ES7 138-4DC00-0AB0


6ES7 193-4BH00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 193-4BD00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 193-4BB00-0AA0

• light beige

6ES7 193-4BA00-0AA0

SIMOSTEP stepper motors

See Catalog ST 70

FM STEPDRIVE power module for stepper motors

See Catalog ST 70

5


5/63


ET 200S — Technology Modules 1 POS U positioning module

■ Overview

5


• Positioning module 1 POS U is a single-channel positioning module for ET 200S for the positioning of positioning and operational axes • For controlled positioning using digital outputs according to the rapid/creep feed principle • With actual position value sensing for - incremental encoders with 5 V difference signals or 24 V signals, or for SSI encoders - proportioning mode (single evaluation of encoder signal A only) • Reference-point approach, actual value setting • Parameter change during operation - reversing difference - shutdown difference • Functions - Inching: Direct application of control signals by the master - Traversing: Absolute or relative - Axes: For linear and rotary axes - Latch function: Saves the current value by setting a digital input Note: Siemens is offering position measuring systems and pre-assembled connecting cables for counting and positioning functions under SIMODRIVE Sensor or Motion Connect 500.

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 138-4DL00-0AB0

6ES7 138-4DL00-0AB0 Digital outputs cable length, shielded, max.

1,000 m


600 m

Short-circuit protection of the output • Response threshold, typ.

Yes


Yes; L+ -(55 to 60 V)

Lamp load, max.

5W


Yes

0.7 A to 1.8 A

Output voltage • Rated value (DC)

24 V

• for signal "0" (DC), max.

3V

• for signal "1", min.

L+ -1 V

Output current • for signal "1" permissible range for 0 to 60 °C, min.

7 mA


600 mA

• for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.3 mA Switching frequency • with resistive load, max.

100 Hz


2 Hz


10 Hz


Encoder supply

Load voltage L+

5 V encoder supply


24 V

•5V

Yes


Yes


Yes


20.4 V

• Output current, max.

500 mA


28.8 V

24 V encoder supply


50 mA


10 mA

Power loss, typ.

2W

Digital inputs Cable length • Cable length unshielded, max.

50 m


Yes


24 V

• for signal "0"

-30 V to 5 V

• for signal "1"

11 V to 30 V


2 mA


9 mA

5/64


• 24 V

Yes


Yes


500 mA

Absolute encoder (SSI) encoder supply • Absolute encoder (SSI)

Yes

• Output voltage

L+ -0.8 V


500 mA


Yes


ET 200S — Technology Modules 1 POS U positioning module


■ Ordering data

6ES7 138-4DL00-0AB0

1 POS U positioning module

• Absolute encoder (SSI)

Yes

Single-channel positioning module for ET 200S for positioning the adjustment and operation axes

• 2-wire BEROS

Yes; Type 2


Order No. 6ES7 138-4DL00-0AB0

Encoder signals, incremental encoder (symmetrical) • Encoder signal 5 V - Signal level - Terminating resistor - Differential input voltage, min. - Input frequency, max. - cable length, shielded, max. • Encoder signal 24 V - Rated value DC 24 V - Input voltage for signal "0" - Input voltage for signal "1" - Input current, for signal "0", max.. (permissible idle current) - Input current for signal "1", typ. - Input frequency, max. - cable length, shielded, max.

to RS-422 330 Ω 1V 500 Hz 50 m Yes 5V 30 V 2 mA

5

9 mA 100,000 Hz 50 m

Encoder signals, absolute encoder (SSI) • Updating the encoder value - Telegram runtime at 13 bit, min. - Telegram runtime at 25 Bit, min.

7 ms 13 ms

• Monoflop time

64 ms

Reaction times Updating time of the feedback messages

1 ms

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Diagnostics indication LED • Actual value falling DN (green)

Yes

• Actual value rising UP (green)

Yes

• Positioning mode POS (green)

Yes


Yes


Yes

Isolation between backplane bus and all other circuit parts

Yes

between the channels and backplane bus

Yes


30 mm

Height

81 mm

Depth

52 mm


65 g


5/65


ET 200S — Technology Modules 1 COUNT 24 V/100 kHz counter module

■ Overview • 1-channel 32-bit intelligent counter module for universal count tasks and time-based measuring tasks • For the direct connection of 24 V incremental sensors or initiators • Comparison function with predefinable comparison values • Integrated digital output to output the reaction when the comparison value is attained • Can be plugged into TM-E terminal module with automatic coding • Module replacement possible during operation and under power (hot swapping) • Simple parameterization without additional software Note: Siemens is now able to offer distance measuring systems and pre-assembled connecting cables for counting and positioning functions in the product ranges SIMODRIVE Sensor and Motion Connect 500.

5

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 138-4DA04-0AB0 Voltages and currents

6ES7 138-4DA04-0AB0 Digital outputs

Load voltage L+


1


24 V


1,000 m


Yes


600 m


Yes


2.6 A to 4 A


L+ -(50 to 60 V)

Lamp load, max.

5W


Yes


28.8 V


42 mA


10 mA

Power loss, typ.

1W

Output voltage

Hardware config.


24 V

Yes


3V

Yes


L+ (-1.0 V)

Module exchange • Hot swapping the IM-DP • Module exchange under process voltage

Output current

Digital inputs 1


5 mA

Number of digital inputs Functions

Gate control, synchronization, latch function


2,000 mA


5 mA


500 mA; 1000 mA to 50 °C



100 m; Filter 20 kHz: 100m, Filter 200 kHz: 50m Yes


Input voltage

• "0" to "1", max.

• Rated value, DC

24 V

• for signal "0"

-30 V to 5 V

• for signal "1"

11 to 30 V


2 mA


9 mA

Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) • for standard inputs - at "0" to "1", max.

5/66



2.5 µs; Filter off: 2.5 µs (200 kHz), filter on: 25 µs (20 kHz)

100 µs


100 Hz


2 Hz


10 Hz

Encoder supply 24 V encoder supply • 24 V

Yes; L+ (-0.8 V)


Yes


500 mA



■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 138-4DA04-0AB0 Encoder Number of connectable encoders, max.

1


Connectable encoders • Incremental encoder (asymmetrical)

Yes

• 24 V initiator

Yes

• 2-wire BEROS

Yes

Counters Number of counter inputs

1; 32 bit

Minimum pulse width

2.5 µs; Filter off: 2.5 µs (200 kHz), Filter on: 25 µs (20 kHz)

Frequency measurement Measurement range, min. Measurement range, max.

6ES7 138-4DA04-0AB0 Status information/alarms/ diagnostics

0.1 Hz 100 kHz


Yes


Yes


Yes


Yes


Yes

Isolation Galvanic isolation, digital inputs • galvanic isolation, digital inputs

Cycle duration measurement

Yes


Measuring range, lower limit

10 µs

Measuring range, upper limit

120 s


Yes

1 1/min


No

Measurement range, min. (lower limit) Measurement range, max. (upper limit)

25,000 1/min

Width

15 mm

Height

81 mm

Depth

52 mm

Speed measurement


Parameter Remark

5

No

Isolation counter

16 byte


40 g


5/67



■ Ordering data 1 COUNT 24 V/100 kHz counter module For universal counting and measuring tasks with ET 200S

Order No. 6ES7 138-4DA04-0AB0

Accessories

• With synchronous flange, universal axial/radial cable outlet with connector

Label sheets DIN A4 (10 pieces) Each sheet contains 60 label strips for I/O modules and 20 label strips for interface modules

5

Order No. SIMODRIVE sensor incremental encoder Externally mounted encoder, optical, incremental with HTL level, operating voltage 10 to 30 V

- 100 pulses/revolution

6FX2 001-4DA10


6FX2 001-4DA50

• petrol

6ES7 193-4BH00-0AA0


6FX2 001-4DB00

• red

6ES7 193-4BD00-0AA0


6FX2 001-4DC50

• yellow

6ES7 193-4BB00-0AA0

• light beige

6ES7 193-4BA00-0AA0

• With synchronous flange, radial flange outlet

Shield connection element For TM-P and TM-E terminal modules, as fixing for busbars 3 x 10 mm, 5 pieces

6ES7 193-4GA00-0AA0


6FX2 001-4FA10


6FX2 001-4FA50


6FX2 001-4FB00

Shield clamps For connecting braided cable shields to the busbar, 5 pieces

6ES7 193-4GB00-0AA0


6FX2 001-4FC50

• With synchronous flange, axial flange outlet - 100 pulses/revolution

6FX2 001-4HA10


6FX2 001-4HA50


6FX2 001-4HB00


6FX2 001-4HC50

• With clamping flange, universal axial/radial cable outlet with connector - 100 pulses/revolution

6FX2 001-4NA10


6FX2 001-4NA50


6FX2 001-4NB00


6FX2 001-4NC50

• With clamping flange, radial flange outlet - 100 pulses/revolution

6FX2 001-4QA10


6FX2 001-4QA50


6FX2 001-4QB00


6FX2 001-4QC50

• With clamping flange, axial flange outlet - 100 pulses/revolution

6FX2 001-4SA10


6FX2 001-4SA50


6FX2 001-4SB00


6FX2 001-4SC50

Signal cable Pre-assembled for HTL and TTL encoder, without Sub-D connector, UL/DESINA

5/68


6FX5 002-2CA12-....



■ Overview • 1-channel 32-bit intelligent counter module for universal count tasks and time-based measuring tasks • For direct connection of 5 V incremental encoders (RS 422) • Comparison function with predefinable comparison values • 2 integrated digital outputs to output the response upon reaching the comparison value • Can be plugged into TM-E terminal module with automatic coding • Module replacement possible during operation and under power (hot swapping) • Simple parameterization without additional software Note: Siemens is now able to offer distance measuring systems and pre-assembled connecting cables for counting and positioning functions in the product ranges SIMODRIVE Sensor and Motion Connect 500

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 138-4DE02-0AB0 Voltages and currents

Digital outputs

Load voltage L+


2


24 V


1,000 m


Yes


600 m


Yes


2.6 A to 4 A


L+ -(50 to 60 V)

Lamp load, max.

10 W


Yes


28.8 V


45 mA


10 mA

5

6ES7 138-4DE02-0AB0

Output voltage Power loss, typ.

2W

Hardware config. Module exchange • Hot swapping the IM-DP

Yes

• Module exchange under process voltage

Yes


1

Functions

Gate control, synchronization, latch function

Cable length


24 V


3V


L+ (-1.0 V)


2A


5 mA


2.4 A

• for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.5 mA Output delay with resistive load


50 m


Yes

• "0" to "1", max.

100 µs

Switching frequency

Input voltage


100 Hz

• Rated value, DC

24 V


2 Hz

• for signal "0"

-30 V to 5 V


10 Hz

11 to 30 V

Encoder supply

• for signal "1"

24 V encoder supply


2 mA


9 mA

• 24 V

Yes; L+ (-0.8 V)


Yes


500 mA

Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) • for standard inputs - at "0" to "1", max.

2.5 µs


5/69



■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 138-4DE02-0AB0 Encoder Number of connectable encoders, max.

1


Connectable encoders • Incremental encoder (symmetrical)

Yes

• 2-wire BEROS

Yes

Encoder signals, incremental encoder (symmetrical)

5

6ES7 138-4DE02-0AB0 Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Yes


Yes


Yes


Yes

• Trace mark signals

A, notA, B, notB, A and B offset by 90° N, notN


Yes

• Zero mark signal • Input signal

5 V difference signal (phys. RS 422)


Yes

• Input frequency, max.

500 kHz

• Synchronization SYN (green)

Yes


50 m

Isolation Galvanic isolation, digital inputs

Counters Number of counter inputs

1; 32 bit

Minimum pulse width

1 µs

Frequency measurement

• galvanic isolation, digital inputs

No

Isolation counter • between the channels and the backplane bus

Yes No

Measurement range, min.

0.1 Hz

Measurement range, max.

500 kHz


Measuring range, lower limit

10 µs

Width

30 mm

Measuring range, upper limit

120 s

Height

81 mm

Depth

52 mm

Cycle duration measurement


Speed measurement Measurement range, min. (lower limit)

1 1/min

Measurement range, max. (upper limit)

25,000 1/min

Parameter Remark

5/70

16 byte



65 g



■ Ordering data 1 COUNT 5 V/500 kHz counter module For universal counting and measuring tasks with ET 200S

Order No. 6ES7 138-4DE02-0AB0

Accessories Label sheets DIN A4 (10 pieces) Each sheet contains 60 label strips for I/O modules and 20 label strips for interface modules

Order No. • With synchronous flange, axial flange outlet - 500 pulses/revolution

6FX2 001-2HA50


6FX2 001-2HB00


6FX2 001-2HB02


6FX2 001-2HB25


6FX2 001-2HB50


6FX2 001-2HC00 6FX2 001-2HC04

• petrol

6ES7 193-4BH00-0AA0


• red

6ES7 193-4BD00-0AA0


6FX2 001-2HC50

• yellow

6ES7 193-4BB00-0AA0


6FX2 001-2HD60

6ES7 193-4BA00-0AA0


6FX2 001-2HF00

• light beige Shield connection element For TM-P and TM-E terminal modules, as fixing for busbars 3 x 10 mm, 5 pieces Shield clamps For connecting braided cable shields to the busbar, 5 pieces

6ES7 193-4GA00-0AA0

6ES7 193-4GB00-0AA0

SIMODRIVE Incremental shaft encoder with RS 422 (TTL), operating voltage 10 to 30 V • With synchronous flange, universal axial/radial cable outlet with connector

• With clamping flange, universal axial/radial cable outlet with connector - 500 pulses/revolution

6FX2 001-2NA50


6FX2 001-2NB00


6FX2 001-2NB02


6FX2 001-2NB25


6FX2 001-2NB50


6FX2 001-2NC00


6FX2 001-2NC04


6FX2 001-2NC50


6FX2 001-2ND60


6FX2 001-2NF00


6FX2 001-2DA50


6FX2 001-2DB00


6FX2 001-2DB02


6FX2 001-2DB25


6FX2 001-2QA50

6FX2 001-2DB50


6FX2 001-2QB00

6FX2 001-2DC00


6FX2 001-2QB02


6FX2 001-2DC04


6FX2 001-2QB25


6FX2 001-2DC50


6FX2 001-2QB50

6FX2 001-2DD60


6FX2 001-2QC00

6FX2 001-2DF00


6FX2 001-2QC04


6FX2 001-2QC50


6FX2 001-2QD60 6FX2 001-2QF00

- 1500 pulses/revolution - 2000 pulses/revolution

- 3600 pulses/revolution - 5000 pulses/revolution • With synchronous flange, radial flange outlet

• With clamping flange, radial flange outlet


6FX2 001-2FA50



6FX2 001-2FB00


6FX2 001-2FB02

• With clamping flange, axial flange outlet


6FX2 001-2FB25


6FX2 001-2SA50

6FX2 001-2FB50


6FX2 001-2SB00

6FX2 001-2FC00


6FX2 001-2SB02

6FX2 001-2FC04


6FX2 001-2SB25


6FX2 001-2FC50


6FX2 001-2SB50


6FX2 001-2FD60


6FX2 001-2SC00

6FX2 001-2FF00


6FX2 001-2SC04


6FX2 001-2SC50


6FX2 001-2SD60


6FX2 001-2SF00

- 1500 pulses/revolution - 2000 pulses/revolution - 2048 pulses/revolution


5

Signal cable Pre-assembled for HTL and TTL encoder, without Sub-D connector, UL/DESINA

6FX5 002-2CA12-....


5/71


ET 200S — Technology Modules 1SI interface module

■ Overview • 1-channel module for serial data exchange through point-topoint connection • For message frames max. 200 byte long • RS 232C, RS 422, RS 485 • 2 versions - ASCII and 3964(R) protocol - Modbus and USS protocol • Parameter assignment through GSD file or STEP 7 (V5.1 and newer)

5

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 1384DF01-0AB0

6ES7 1384DF11-0AB0

6ES7 1384DF01-0AB0


Point-to-point

Load voltage L+

Integrated protocol driver


24 V

24 V

Current consumption from backplane bus DC 24 V, max.

• 3964 (R)

Yes

• ASCII

Yes

6ES7 1384DF11-0AB0

80 mA; typically 20 mA

80 mA

• Modbus

Yes


10 mA

10 mA

• Transmission speed, Modbus protocol, max.

Power loss, typ.

1.2 W

1.2 W

5,100 Byte; S_SEND 2700, S_RCV 2400, S_XON 2600, S_RTS 2600, S_V24 2700, S_VSTAT 1800, S_VSET 1800

11,100 Byte; Modbus: S_SEND 2700, S_RCV 2400, S_MODB 6000 USS: S_SEND 2700, S_RCV 2400, S_USST 1900, S_USSR 2600, S_USSI 1500

115.2 kBit/s; half duplex: 110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 76800, 115200 bps

• USS

Yes

• Transmission speed, USS protocol, max.


Memory Memory • Standard blocks

interfaces

Transmission speed, RS 422/485

Number of interfaces

1

1

• with 3964 (R) protocol, max.

RS 232C

Yes; RS 232C signals: 8 (TxD, RxD, RTS, CTS, DTR, DSR, DCD, PE)

Yes; RS 232C signals: 8 (TxD, RxD, RTS, CTS, DTR, DSR, DCD, PE)

RS 422/RS 485

Yes; RS-422 signals: 5 (TxD(A), RxD(A), TxD(B), RxD(B), PE); RS-485 signals: 3 (R/T(A), R/T(B), PE)

Yes; RS-422 signals: 5 (TxD(A), RxD(A), TxD(B), RxD(B), PE); RS-485 signals: 3 (R/T(A), R/T(B), PE)


• with ASCII protocol, max.

RS 232, cable length, shielded, max.

15 m

15 m

115.2 kBit/s; full duplex: 110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 76800, 115200 bps

RS 422/485, cable length, shielded, max.

1,200 m

1,200 m

5/72



ET 200S — Technology Modules 1SI interface module

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 1384DF01-0AB0

6ES7 1384DF11-0AB0

Transmission speed, RS232 • with 3964 (R) protocol, max.

• with ASCII protocol, max.

6ES7 1384DF01-0AB0

6ES7 1384DF11-0AB0

• Receive RxD (green)

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes

• Transmit TxD (green)

Yes

Yes

• between 422/485 and internal power supply

Yes

Yes

• between RS 232 and internal power supply

Yes

Yes




Isolation

115.2 kBit/s; full duplex: 110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 76800, 115200 bps

Isolation interface


Character frame (adjustable)

Operating termperature

• Bits per character

7 or 8

8

• min.

0 °C

0 °C

• Number of start/stop bits

1 or 2

1 or 2 (USS only 1)

• max.

60 °C

60 °C

• Bits per character frame

10

10 or 11 (USS only 11 bits)

• min.

-40 °C

-40 °C

• max.

70 °C

70 °C

none, odd, even (USS only even)


15 mm

15 mm

Height

81 mm

81 mm

Depth

52 mm

52 mm

50 g

50 g

• Parity

none, odd, even, any

Number of bytes per PLC sampling cycle • Data quantity per PLC sampling cycle, receiving

• Data quantity per PLC sampling cycle, transmitting

■ Ordering data

32 Byte; With IM151-1 Standard as of 6ES71511AA04-0AB0; With IM151-1 High Feature as of 6ES71511BA01-0AB0; otherwise 8 bytes




Storage/transport temperature


Order No.

1 SI interface module

5


• ASCII and 3964(R) protocols

6ES7 138-4DF01-0AB0

• Modbus and USS protocols

6ES7 138-4DF11-0AB0

TM-E15S 26-A1 terminal module Ordering unit 5 items

6ES7 193-4CA40-0AA0

TM-E15S 26-A1 terminal module Ordering unit 5 items

6ES7 193-4CA50-0AA0

TM-E15N24-A1 terminal module Ordering unit 5 items

6ES7 193-4CA80-0AA0

TM-E15S24-01 terminal module Ordering unit 5 items

6ES7 193-4CB20-0AA0

TM-E15C24-01 terminal module Ordering unit 5 items

6ES7 193-4CB30-0AA0

TM-E15N24-01 terminal module Ordering unit 5 items

6ES7 193-4CB70-0AA0


5/73


ET 200S — Technology Modules SIWAREX CS

■ Overview SIWAREX CS is a versatile weighing module for all simple weighing and force measuring tasks. The compact module is easy to install in all SIMATIC automation systems. Data can be accessed directly in the SIMATIC.

5

■ Technical specifications Integration in automation systems

Load cell powering

• S7-400, S7-300, C7

Through ET 200S

• Supply voltage Us (rated value)

6 V DC typ.

• IM 151-7 CPU

Through backplane bus

• Max. supply current

≤ 68 mA

• Automation systems from other manufacturers (available soon)

Through ET 200S

Communications interfaces

SIMATIC S7 (ET 200S backplane bus), RS 232, TTY

• Permissible load impedance - RLmin - RLmax

Connection of remote indicators (through TTY serial interface)

Legal-for-trade weight value

Adjustment of scales settings

Using SIMATIC S7/C7 IM 151-7 CPU or SIWATOOL CS PC parameterization software (RS 232)

Measuring properties • Error limit according to DIN 1319-1 0,05 % of full-scale value at 20°C±10K • nIND according to EN 45501 Minimum measuring signal ∆Umin per d

2,000 (legal-for-trade) 1.5 µV

• Internal resolution Data format of weight values

65.535 2 byte (fixed-point)

Number of measurements/second

50

Digital filter

0.05 - 5 Hz (in 7 steps), mean-value filter

Weighing functions • Weight values

Gross, net

• Limits

2 (min./max.)

• Zero setting function

Per command

• Tare function

Per command

• Tare specification

Per command

Load cells

Strain gauges in 4-wire or 6-wire system

5/74


- RLmin - RLmax

> 87 Ω <4010Ω With SIWAREX IS Ex interface: > 87 Ω < 4010 Ω

Load cell characteristic

1 mV/V to 4 mV/V

Permissible range of measuring signal (at greatest set characteristic)

-1.5 to +42.5 mV

Max. distance of load cells

1000 m

Intrinsically-safe load cell powering

Optional (SIWAREX IS Ex interface)

External load cell powering

Possible up to 24 V

Connection to load cells in Ex zone 1

Optionally via SIWAREXIS Ex interface

Ex approvals zone 2 and safety

ATEX 100a, FM, UL, cULUS Haz. Loc. (all available soon)

Supply voltage 24 V DC • Rated voltage

24 V DC

• Max. current consumption

150 mA

Certification

EC type approval (CE, OIML R76)

IP degree of protection to DIN EN 60529; IEC 60529

IP20

Climatic requirements Tmin (IND) to Tmax (IND) (operating temperature) • Vertical installation

-10 ... +60 °C

• Horizontal installation

-10 ... +40 °C

EMC requirements according to

EN 61326, EN 45501 NAMUR NE21, Part 1



■ Ordering data SIWAREX CS Weighing electronics for scales in SIMATIC ET 200S for applications with and without obligation of verification EU type approval 2000 d Note: Observe approval conditions for applications with obligation of verification. It is recommendable to use the calibration set and contact the SIWAREX hotline.

Order No. 7MH4910-0AA01

SIWAREX CS Manual • German, English, Italian, Spanish, French

Free download in the Internet at: www.siemens.com/weighingtechnology

Configuration package SIWAREX CS on CD-ROM for SIMATIC S7, version V5.2 or higher • Software for SIWATOOL CS scale adjustment (German/English) • Manuals on CD (German/English) • S7 function block

7MH4910-0AK01

SIWAREX CS "Getting started" Example software for easy acquaintance with scale programming in STEP 7.


Calibration set for SIWAREX CS For verification of up to 5 scales comprising: • 1 x inscription foil for labeling • 1 x cover for connections • 1 x protection foil • 10 x EC verification marks (black M on green background) • Guidelines for verification, verification certificates and approvals, adaptable label • SIWAREX CS Manual

7MH4910-0AY10

SIWATOOL cable from SIWAREX U/CS with serial PC interface, for 9-pin PC interfaces (RS 232), 3 m long

7MH4607-8CA

Installation material (mandatory) Terminal module TM-E 30 mm wide (required for each SIWAREX module)

6ES7193-4CG20-0AA0

Shield contact element Contents 5 items, sufficient for 5 cables

6ES7193-4GA00-0AA0

or compatible

Order No. Shield connection terminal Contents: 5 items, sufficient for 5 cables Note: one shield connection terminal is required each for the • scales connection and • TTY interface or • RS 232 interface

6ES7193-4GB00-0AA0

N busbar, galvanized 3 x 10 mm, 1.5 m long

8WA2842

Feeder terminal for N busbar

8WA2868

Remote display (option) The digital remote displays can be connected directly to the SIWAREX CS through the TTY interface. The following remote display can be used: S102 Siebert Industrieelektronik GmbH P.O. Box 1180 D-66565 Eppelborn Tel.: +49 6806/980-0 Fax: +49 6806/980-999 Internet: http://www.siebert.de Detailed information available from manufacturer.

5

Accessories SIWAREX JB junction box, aluminium housing for connecting up to 4 load cells in parallel, and for connecting several junction boxes

7MH4710-1BA

SIWAREX JB junction box, stainless steel housing for connecting up to 4 load cells in parallel

7MH4710-1EA

Ex interface, type SIWAREX Pi With UL and FM approvals, but without ATEX approval for intrinsically-safe connection of load cells, suitable for the SIWAREX U, M, FTA, FTC, CS and P weighing modules. Use in the EC is not possible.

7MH4710-5AA

Manual for Ex interface type SIWAREX Pi

C71000-T5974-C29

SIWAREX IS Ex interface With ATEX approval, but without UL and FM approvals for intrinsically-safe connection of load cells, including Manual, suitable for the SIWAREX U, M, FTA, FTC, CS and P weighing modules. Use in the EC is possible. • With short-circuit current < 199 mA DC

7MH4710-5BA

• With short-circuit current < 137 mA DC

7MH4710-5CA


5/75



■ Ordering data

Order No.

Cable (optional)

5

Cable Li2Y 1 x 2 x 0.75 ST + 2 x (2 x 0.34 ST) - CY, orange sheath to connect SIWAREX U, M, P, FTA, FTC and CS to the junction box (JB), extension box (EB) or Ex interface (Ex-I) or between two JBs, for fixed laying, occasional bending is possible, 10.8 mm outer diameter, for ambient temperature –40 to +80 °C

7MH4702-8AG

Cable Li2Y 1 x 2 x 0.75 ST + 2 x (2 x 0.34 ST) - CY, blue sheath to connect the junction box (JB) or extension box (EB) in a potentially explosive atmosphere to the Ex interface (Ex-I), for fixed laying, occasional bending is possible, blue PVC insulating sheath, approx. 10.8 mm outer diameter, for ambient temperature –40 to +80 °C

7MH4702-8AF

Cable LiYCY 4 x 2 x 0.25 mm² for TTY (connect 2 pairs of conductors in parallel), for connection of a remote indicator

7MH4407-8BD0

5/76



ET 200S — Technology Modules SIWAREX CF

■ Overview SIWAREX CF is a transmitter for connecting strain-gauge sensors for measuring force and torque, for example. The compact module is easy to install in all SIMATIC automation systems. Complete data access to the current measured values is then possible via the SIMATIC.

SIWAREX CF force transmitter

5

■ Technical specifications Integration into automation systems • S7-400, S7-300, C7

Through ET 200S

• Automation systems from other vendors

Possible through ET 200S with IM 151-1

Communication interfaces

SIMATIC S7 (ET 200S backplane bus), 8 byte, I/O area

Module parameterization

Not required (module is pre-parameterized)

Measuring properties • Error limit according to DIN 1319-1 of upper limit of effective range at 20°C±10K

≤ 0.15 %

• Signal resolution

14 bit plus 1 bit sign

Number of measurements/second

50

Low-pass filter

Without or 2 Hz

Sensors

In accordance with the principle of expansion measurement (full bridge) 4-wire connection

Permissible sensor cell coefficient

Up to 4 mV/V

Permissible range of the measuring signal

-25.2 to +25.2 mV

Supply voltage 24 V DC • Nominal voltage

24 V DC

• Max. current consumption

150 mA

Voltage supply from backplane bus

Typ. 10 mA

Certification

UL, CSA, FM

IP degree of protection to DIN EN 60529; IEC 60529

IP 20

Climatic requirements Tmin (IND) to Tmax (IND) (operating temperature) • Vertical mounting

0 ... +60 °C

• Horizontal installation

0 ... +40 °C

EMC requirements according to

NAMUR NE21, Part 1 89/386/EEC

Sensor feed • Supply voltage, short-circuit-proof • Permissible sensor resistance - RLmin - RLmax

6 V DC ± 5%

> 250 Ω < 4010 Ω


5/77


ET 200S — Technology Modules SIWAREX CF

■ Ordering data SIWAREX CF Force module for strain-gauge sensors in SIMATIC ET 200S (SIWAREX CF configuring package not required) SIWAREX CF manual • German, English SIWAREX CF "Getting started" Sample software for easy acquaintance with programming in STEP 7.

Order No.

7MH4920-0AA01



Installation material (mandatory)

5

6ES7193-4CG20-0AA0 or compatible

Shield contact element Contents 5 items, sufficient for 5 cables

6ES7193-4GA00-0AA0


6ES7193-4GB00-0AA0

N busbar, galvanized 3 x 10 mm, 1.5 m long

8WA2842

Feeder terminal for N busbar

8WA2868

Accessories SIWAREX EB extension box for extending sensor cables

7MH4710-2AA

Cable (optional)

Terminal module TM-E 30 mm wide (required for each SIWAREX module)

5/78

Order No. Shield terminal element Contents: 5 items, sufficient for 5 cables One shield terminal element is required per sensor cable

Cable Li2Y 1 x 2 x 0.75 ST + 2 x (2 x 0.34 ST) - CY, orange sheath To connect SIWAREX U, M, P, FTA, FTC, CS and CF to the junction box (JB), extension box (EB) or Ex interface (Ex-I) or between two JBs, for fixed laying, occasional bending is possible, 10.8 mm outer diameter, for ambient temperature –40 to +80°C

7MH4702-8AG


ET 200S — Terminal Modules Terminal modules for power and electronic modules

■ Overview • Mechanical modules as receptacles for the electronic modules • For setting up permanent wiring via build-as-you-go voltage buses • Keyed connection technology to ensure an enhanced vibration resistance of up to 5 g • Different variants for accepting power modules and electronic modules • Replaceable terminal box (even within the station network) • Automatic coding of the electronics modules • Build-as-you-go shielding of the backplane bus for high data security • Color coding facility for the terminals and for identifying the slot numbers • Alternatively available with screw-type or spring-loaded terminals as well as with no-strip fast connection system "FastConnect" for up to 60 % quicker process wiring

■ Ordering data

Order No.

TM-P terminal modules for PM-E power modules

5

Order No. TM-P15C22-01 Ordering unit 1 piece 2 x 2 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, spring-loaded terminals

6ES7 193-4CE10-0AA0

TM-P15N22-01 Ordering unit 1 piece 2 x 2 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, FastConnect

6ES7 193-4CE60-0AA0

TM-P30S44-A0 Ordering unit 1 piece 7 x 2 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interrupted to the left, screw-type terminals for PM-E F PROFIsafe

6ES7 193-4CK20-0AA0

TM-P30C44-A0 Ordering unit 1 piece 7 x 2 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interrupted to the left, spring-loaded terminals for PM-E F PROFIsafe

6ES7 193-4CK30-0AA0

TM-P15S23-A1 Ordering unit 1 piece 2 x 3 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, screw-type terminals

6ES7 193-4CC20-0AA0

TM-P15C23-A1 Ordering unit 1 piece 2 x 3 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, spring-loaded terminals

6ES7 193-4CC30-0AA0

TM-P15N23-A1 Ordering unit 1 piece 2 x 3 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, FastConnect

6ES7 193-4CC70-0AA0

TM-P15S23-A0 Ordering unit 1 piece 2 x 3 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interrupted to the left, screw-type terminals

6ES7 193-4CD20-0AA0

TM-P15C23-A0 Ordering unit 1 piece 2 x 3 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interrupted to the left, spring-loaded terminals

6ES7 193-4CD30-0AA0

Terminal module TM-E for electronic modules 1) 6ES7 193-4CA20-0AA0

TM-P15N23-A0 Ordering unit 1 piece 2 x 3 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interrupted to the left, FastConnect

6ES7 193-4CD70-0AA0

TM-E15S24-A1 Ordering unit 5 pieces 2 x 4 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, screw-type terminals

6ES7 193-4CA30-0AA0

TM-P15S22-01 Ordering unit 1 piece 2 x 2 terminals, no terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, screw-type terminals

6ES7 193-4CE00-0AA0

TM-E15C24-A1 Ordering unit 5 pieces 2 x 4 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, spring-loaded terminals TM-E15S24-01 Ordering unit 5 pieces 2 x 4 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, screw-type terminals

6ES7 193-4CB20-0AA0

1) Observe project planning help for selecting the suitable TM-E and TM-P


5/79


ET 200S — Terminal Modules Terminal modules for power and electronic modules

■ Ordering data

Order No.

Terminal module TM-E for electronic modules 1)

5

TM-E15C24-01 Ordering unit 5 pieces 2 x 4 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, spring-loaded terminals

6ES7 193-4CB30-0AA0

TM-E15S23-01 Ordering unit 5 pieces 2 x 3 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, screw-type terminals

6ES7 193-4CB00-0AA0

TM-E15C23-01 Ordering unit 5 pieces 2 x 3 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, spring-loaded terminals

6ES7 193-4CB10-0AA0

TM-E15N23-01 Ordering unit 5 pieces 2 x 3 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, FastConnect

6ES7 193-4CB60-0AA0

TM-E15N24-01 Ordering unit 5 pieces 2 x 4 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, FastConnect

6ES7 193-4CB70-0AA0

TM-E15S26-A1 Ordering unit 5 pieces 2 x 6 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, screw-type terminals

6ES7 193-4CA40-0AA0

TM-E15C26-A1 Ordering unit 5 pieces 2 x 6 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, spring-loaded terminals

6ES7 193-4CA50-0AA0

TM-E15N24-A1 Ordering unit 5 pieces 2 x 4 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, FastConnect

6ES7 193-4CA70-0AA0

TM-E15N26-A1 Ordering unit 5 pieces 2 x 6 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, FastConnect

6ES7 193-4CA80-0AA0

TM-E30S44-01 Ordering unit 1 piece 4 x 4 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, screw-type terminals

6ES7 193-4CG20-0AA0

TM-E30C44-01 Ordering unit 1 piece 4 x 4 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, spring-loaded terminals

6ES7 193-4CG30-0AA0


6ES7 193-4CF40-0AA0

TM-E30C46-A1 Ordering unit 1 piece 4 x 6 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, spring-loaded terminals

6ES7 193-4CF50-0AA0

TM-E15S24-AT Ordering unit 1 piece for internal temperature compensation with 2 AI TC High Feature, screw-type terminal

6ES7 193-4CL20-0AA0

TM-E15C24-AT Ordering unit 1 piece for internal temperature compensation with 2 AI TC High Feature, spring-loaded terminals

6ES7 193-4CL30-0AA0

Accessories for shield connection Shield connection element Ordering unit 5 pieces For plugging into TM-E and TM-P

6ES7 193-4GA00-0AA0

Shield clamps Ordering unit 5 pieces For busbar 3 × 10 mm

6ES7 193-4GB00-0AA0

Grounding terminal Ordering unit 1 item For cable cross-sections up to 25 mm2

8WA2 868

3 × 10 mm busbars Ordering unit 1 item

8WA2 842

Accessories for coding Color coding plates Ordering unit 200 pieces for TM-P, TM-E • white

6ES7 193-4LA20-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 193-4LB20-0AA0

• yellow/green

6ES7 193-4LC20-0AA0

• red

6ES7 193-4LD20-0AA0

• blue

6ES7 193-4LF20-0AA0

• brown

6ES7 193-4LG20-0AA0

• turquoise

6ES7 193-4LH20-0AA0

Labels, inscribed Ordering unit 1 set

1) Observe project planning help for selecting the suitable TM-E and TM-P

5/80

Order No. TM-E30S46-A1 Ordering unit 1 piece 4 x 6 terminals, terminal access to AUX1 bus, AUX1 interconnected to the left, screw-type terminals

200 items for slot numbering (1 to 20) 10 ×

8WA8 861-0AB

200 items for slot numbering (1 to 40) 5 ×

8WA8 861-0AC

200 items for slot numbering (1 to 64) 1 ×, (1 to 68) 2 ×

8WA8 861-0DA

Labels, blank 200 items for slot numbering

8WA8 848-2AY


ET 200S — Motor Starters and Frequency Converters General information

■ Overview

Standard motor starters, DS1-x direct-on-line starter

High Feature motor starters, DS1e-x direct-on-line starter

Motor starters • Completely factory-wired motor starters for switching and protecting any three-phase loads • Can be used as a direct-on-line, reversing or soft starter • Standard motor starter with circuit-breaker contactor combination up to 5.5 kW • High Feature motor starter with a combination comprising starter circuit-breaker, solid-state overload protection and contactor or soft starter up to 7.5 kW • With self-assembling 40/50 A power bus, i.e. the load voltage is only supplied once for a group of motor starters • Hot swapping is permissible • Inputs and outputs for activating and signaling the statistics have been integrated • Diagnostics capability for active monitoring of the switching and protection functions • Can be combined with expansion modules: Brake Control Module for controlling electromechanical brakes in induction motors and with two optional inputs for special functions (for quick stop with the Standard motor starter and for parameterizable special functions with the High Feature motor starter) • Can be combined with SIGUARD safety systems for use in safety-related subsystems (EN 954-1) Frequency converter • For stepless speed control of asynchronous motors • Consisting of the modules for control module ICU24 and power supply IPM25 up to 4.0 kW • Hot swapping of control module and power supply permitted • Low line harmonic distortions • Operation without line commutating reactor • Active braking with line-commutated energy recovery • Can be combined with brake control module for controlling an electromechanical holding brake • With self-assembling 50 A power bus, i. e. the load voltage for a group of frequency converters has to be fed in just once • For achieving EMC Class A (acc. to EN 55011) Connection of an EMC filter before the power bus

ET 200S FC frequency converter


5/81

5


ET 200S — Motor Starters and Frequency Converters ET 200S motor starters

■ Overview (continued) DS1-x direct starter standard

IM 151 electronic modules interface module PM-E power module

PM-D power module

DSS1e-x HF soft starter High Feature

module xB4 brake control

DS1e-x HF High Feature direct starter

DS1e-x HF High Feature direct starter

5

NSA0_00459

TM-P15 terminal module for PM-D

TM-DS45-S32 terminal module for direct starter standard with supply connection PE/N M45-PEN-F terminal block

PE/N M45-PEN-S terminal block

TM-DS45-S31 terminal module for direct starter standard without supply connection

M65-PEN-F power and control modulde

TM-DS65-S32 terminal module for direct starter/soft starter High Feature with supply connection

M65-PEN-S connection module

TM-xB215-S24-01 terminal modul for brake control module

TM-DS65-S31 terminal module for direct starter/soft starter High Feature without supply connection

Interplay of ET 200S motor starter components

■ Application The ET 200S motor starters can be used to protect and switch any three-phase load. The communication interface makes them ideal for use in distributed switchgear cabinets or control boxes. Since the motor starters are fully factory-wired, the installation of power switchgear cabinets requires far less time and space. The bit-modular design makes engineering much simpler. When the ET 200S is used, the parts list is reduced to two essential items per load feeder circuit: the passive terminal module and the motor starter. For this reason, ET 200S is also perfectly suited for modular machine concepts. Expansions can be easily implemented by subsequent connection of additional terminal modules. The new terminal block design (10 mm²) also replaces the previously required distribution wiring. The permanent wiring and the hot-swapping function (connection and disconnection permitted when energized) makes it possible to replace a motor starter in a few seconds, if necessary. This makes the motor starters especially suitable for applications which require a high level of availability.

5/82


Since the motor starters can be expanded with xB1-xB4 brake control modules, they can be used for motors with 24 V DC brakes (xB1, xB3) and with -500 V DC brakes (xB2, xB4). The -24 V DC brakes are supplied externally and can be released independent of the switching status of the motor starter. The 500 V DC brakes, on the other hand, are generally supplied direct from the junction plate of the motor via a rectifier module and can therefore not be released if the motor starter is switched off. These brakes cannot be used in conjunction with the DSS1e-x motor starter (soft starter). The outputs of the brake control modules can also be used for other purposes e.g. for controlling DC valves. Independent special functions can be implemented with the help of the two optional local inputs on the brake control modules (xB3, xB4) and two additional inputs on the control module of the High Feature motor starter. These operate independently of the bus and higher-level control, e.g. to implement rapid stop functions for slide controls. The status of these inputs is also signaled to the control.



■ Application (continued) The selective protection concept with electronic overload evaluation and the use of the SIRIUS switchgear – size S0 – achieves a number of additional advantages for the High Feature motor starters which quickly pay off, especially for manufacturing processes that have high plant downtime costs: • Only two variants up to 7.5 kW • All settings can be configured via the bus • Separate signals for overloads and short-circuits • Overload can be acknowledged via remote reset • Current asymmetry monitoring • Rotor locking protection • Emergency start function in the event of overload • Current value transfer via bus • Current limit value monitoring • Class 10 or Class 20 configurable • Type of coordination 2 (remains functional after a short-circuit of 50 kA) • Very long contract service life Accessories for motor starters The following accessories are available: DM-V15 distance module The distance module is available for applications with high motor currents or high ambient temperatures for standard motor starters. It can be used on the right and left side of a DS1-x direct starter or on the right side of a xB1-4 brake module to improve lateral heat dissipation. The distance module is a completely passive module and does not have to be taken into account when engineering the control. More details on the distance module can be found in the "SIMATIC ET 200S" manual. If you have further queries about the distance module, please contact Technical Support for Siemens low-voltage controlgear, switchgear and systems (fax: 09131/7-42899).

Accessories for frequency converters Following accessories are available: XB1 and XB3 brake control modules If required, the XB1 and XB3 brake control modules can be arranged on the right-hand side next to the IPM25 power section of the ET 200S FC frequency converter. Using the brake control module it is possible to connect a motor brake to the converter. Actuation takes place through the internal brake control of the converter. EMC filter for frequency converters EMC class A is achieved by installing an EMC filter upstream from the power bus of the converter. Shielded motor cables and EMC-compatible wiring are required in addition. The EMC filter is available in two sizes for 25 A and 50 A rated current. Both EMC filters have been designed for a maximum cable length of 350 m. This cable length includes the sum total of all the motor cables of the converters sharing one power bus. MMC parameter memory If required, an additional storage medium can be used for the the parameterization of the frequency converter. The MMC parameter memory permits replacement of the ICU24/ICU24F control module with automatic downloading of parameters from the MMC into the internal parameter memory of the ICU24/ICU24F. The MMC parameter memory fits in the MMC slot of the ICU24/ICU24F control module. Other memory cards are not accepted by the ICU24/ICU24F. Connection cable from a PC to the ICU24/ICU24F control module The cable creates a point-to-point connection from the PC to the ICU24/ICU24F control module for starting up the converter with the "STARTER" PC tool.

Jumper module PE/N The PE/N jumper modules are used to bridge gaps in the PE/N bus e.g. caused by the use of a brake control module, PM-D(F) power module, or PM-X connection module. No additional power is required if jumper modules are used. They are available in 15 mm and 30 mm width. Jumper module L1/L2/L3 The L1/L2/L3 jumper modules are used to bridge a gap in the energy bus (see above). They are available in 15 mm and 30 mm width.


5/83

5



■ Selection and Ordering data Version

Order No.

Standard motor starter with diagnostics, electromechanical, fuseless, expandable with brake control module DS1-x direct-on-line starters Motor rating, standard induction motor

DS1-x

5

Setting range of the overcurrent release

in kW

in A

< 0.06 0.06 0.09

0.14 ... 0.20 0.18 ... 0.25 0.22 ... 0.32

3RK1 301-0BB00-0AA2 3RK1 301-0CB00-0AA2 3RK1 301-0DB00-0AA2

0.10 0.12 0.18

0.28 ... 0.40 0.35 ... 0.50 0.45 ... 0.63

3RK1 301-0EB00-0AA2 3RK1 301-0FB00-0AA2 3RK1 301-0GB00-0AA2

0.21 0.35 0.37

0.55 ... 0.80 0.70 ... 1.00 0.90 ... 1.25

3RK1 301-0HB00-0AA2 3RK1 301-0JB00-0AA2 3RK1 301-0KB00-0AA2

0.55 0.75 0.90

1.1 ... 1.6 1.4 ... 2.0 1.8 ... 2.5

3RK1 301-1AB00-0AA2 3RK1 301-1BB00-0AA2 3RK1 301-1CB00-0AA2

1.1 1.5 1.9

2.2 ... 3.2 2.8 ... 4.0 3.5 ... 5.0

3RK1 301-1DB00-0AA2 3RK1 301-1EB00-0AA2 3RK1 301-1FB00-0AA2

2.2 3.0 4.0 5.5

4.5 ... 6.3 5.5 ... 8.0 7 ... 10 9 ... 12

3RK1 301-1GB00-0AA2 3RK1 301-1HB00-0AA2 3RK1 301-1JB00-0AA2 3RK1 301-1KB00-0AA2

RS1-x reversing starters

RS1-x

5/84

in kW

in A

< 0.06 0.06 0.09

0.14 ... 0.20 0.18 ... 0.25 0.22 ... 0.32

3RK1 301-0BB00-1AA2 3RK1 301-0CB00-1AA2 3RK1 301-0DB00-1AA2

0.10 0.12 0.18

0.28 ... 0.40 0.35 ... 0.50 0.45 ... 0.63

3RK1 301-0EB00-1AA2 3RK1 301-0FB00-1AA2 3RK1 301-0GB00-1AA2

0.21 0.35 0.37

0.55 ... 0.80 0.70 ... 1.00 0.90 ... 1.25

3RK1 301-0HB00-1AA2 3RK1 301-0JB00-1AA2 3RK1 301-0KB00-1AA2

0.55 0.75 0.90

1.1 ... 1.6 1.4 ... 2.0 1.8 ... 2.5

3RK1 301-1AB00-1AA2 3RK1 301-1BB00-1AA2 3RK1 301-1CB00-1AA2

1.1 1.5 1.9

2.2 ... 3.2 2.8 ... 4.0 3.5 ... 5.0

3RK1 301-1DB00-1AA2 3RK1 301-1EB00-1AA2 3RK1 301-1FB00-1AA2

2.2 3.0 4.0 5.5

4.5 ... 6.3 5.5 ... 8.0 7 ... 10 9 ... 12

3RK1 301-1GB00-1AA2 3RK1 301-1HB00-1AA2 3RK1 301-1JB00-1AA2 3RK1 301-1KB00-1AA2




■ Selection and Ordering data (continued) Version

Order No.

DS1e-x direct on-line starter with switch interface Setting range of the overcurrent release in A 0.3 ... 3

3RK1 301-0AB10-0AA4

2.4 ... 8

3RK1 301-0BB10-0AA4

2.4 ... 16

3RK1 301-0CB10-0AA4

RS1e-x reversing starters DS1e-x

Setting range of the overcurrent release in A 0.3 ... 3

3RK1 301-0AB10-1AA4

2.4 ... 8

3RK1 301-0BB10-1AA4

2.4 ... 16

3RK1 301-0CB10-1AA4

DSS1e-x soft starters Setting range of the overcurrent release in A 0.3 ... 3

3RK1 301-0AB20-0AA4

2.4 ... 8

3RK1 301-0BB20-0AA4

2.4 ... 16

3RK1 301-0CB20-0AA4

5

Accessories for Standard motor starters Control kit for manually operating the contactor contacts during start-up and servicing (one set contains five control kits)

3RK1 903-0CA00

Control unit for direct control of contactor (manual control) 24 V DC

3RK1 903-0CG00

DM-V15 distance module for DS1-x direct-on-line starters with high temperature or current load 15 mm wide

3RK1 903-0CD00

3RK1 903-0CA00

3RK1 903-0CG00

3RK1 903-0CD00

Accessories for High Feature motor starters Control module 2DI DC 24 V COM Digital input module with two inputs for local motor starter functions For mounting on front of motor starter Operating voltage 24 V DC (fed from V1), short-circuit-proof, floating contact with serial interface for connection of Switch ES Connection via LOGO! PC cable, max. permissible cable length (forward and return) 50

3RK1 903-0CH20

LOGO PC cable For connecting the High Feature motor starter with Switch ES interface to a PC

6ED1 057-1AA00-0BA0

Hand-held device for ET 200S motor starter ET 200S High Feature, ET 200 PRO and ECOFAST for local operation, serial interface cable must be ordered separately

3RK1 922-3BA00

3RK1 903-0CH20

3RK1 922-3BA00


5/85




Order No.

Accessories for Standard / High Feature motor starters and frequency converters M15-PEN15 bridge block 15 mm wide For bridging a 15 mm module

3RK1 903-0AH00

M30-PEN bridge block 30 mm wide For bridging a 30 mm module

3RK1 903-0AJ00

M15-L123 bridge block 15 mm wide For bridging a 15 mm module

3RK1 903-0AE00

M30-L123 bridge block 30 mm wide For bridging a 30 mm module

3RK1 903-0AF00

3RK1 903-0AH00

5

3RK1 903-0AJ00

3RK1 903-0AE00

3RK1 903-0AF00

3RK1 903-0CB00

Brake control modules For motors with a mechanical brake • xB1 for motor starters and frequency converters 24 V DC / 4 A • xB2 for motor starters and frequency converters 500 V DC / 0.7 A • xB3 for motor starters 24 V DC / 4 A / 2 DI DC 24 V local control With diagnostics; with two inputs • xB4 for motor starters 500 V DC / 0.7 A / 2 DI DC 24 V local control With diagnostics; with two inputs Terminal module for brake control modules • TM-xB15 S24-01 for xB1 or xB2 • TM-xB215 S24-01 for xB3 or xB4 EMC filter for frequency converter For achieving EMC Class A; is connected before shared power bus of frequency converters, installation must comply with EMC guidelines (shielded motor cables) • 25 A rated current • 50 A rated current

5/86

3RK1 903-0CB00

3RK1 903-0CC00

3RK1 903-0CE00

3RK1 903-0CF00

3RK1 903-0AG00 3RK1 903-0AG01

6SL3 203-0BE22-5AA0 6SL3 203-0BE25-0AA0

MMC parameter memory for frequency converter Matches the MMC slot of the ICU24 / ICU24F closed-loop control module; other memory cards are not accepted

6SL3 254-0AM00-0AA0

RS 232/zero modem cable (5 m) Cable for commissioning the ET 200S FC frequency converter using the PC tool "STARTER"

6ES7 901-1BF00-0XA0



ET 200S — Motor Starters and Frequency Converters ET 200S FC frequency converter

■ Overview

■ Benefits • The frequency converter is completely integrated into the ET 200S system and offers all system advantages, such as high availability thanks to the hot swapping function, modular expansion, or reduction of the wiring overhead resulting from the self-assembling terminal module wiring. • With self-assembling 50 A power bus, i.e. the load voltage is only supplied once for a group of frequency converters • Comprehensive diagnostics facilities for high availability • Input for motor encoder for precise speed control • Input for PTC/KTY encoder for comprehensive motor protection • Slot for optional memory card (MMC) to save the parameter settings for fast replacement of modules without tools • All common control modes are available: Frequency control, sensor-less vector control or torque control, closed-loop control with motor encoder • Parameterization takes place using STARTER, the graphical parameterization tool for Siemens drives • Active braking is possible without additional overhead. The line-commutated energy recovery of the frequency converter for the power supply network means that brake chopper modules or pulsed resistors are superfluous.

Components of the ET 200S FC frequency converter

■ Application • New application possibilities are opened up for the ET 200S system where continuous control of the speed of asynchronous motors is required. • The frequency converter handles frequency control and vector control for more complex drive tasks. In addition, the converter also supports torque control for conveyor applications, winding and unwinding drives, as well as hoisting gear. Together with a motor encoder, the range extends up to closed-loop controls for exact control of speeds and torques. • The advantages of line-commutated power regeneration are primarily evident in continuous regenerative operation. Examples include unwinding units, lowering of loads with hoisting gear, or electric braking of large centrifugal masses. • Together with an intelligent header module (IM 151 CPU) and the ET 200S FC frequency converter, the I/O station is expanded to become a complete automation solution for machine modules and plant sections.


5/87

5



■ Design Accessories

5 Design of an ET 200S station with two ET 200S FC frequency converters (only terminal modules on the right)

The ET 200S FC consists of the following components: • ICU24 control unit • IPM25 converter power module • Terminal modules to accommodate control unit and converter power module Following insertion of the modules, the control unit and the converter power module of the frequency converter are interconnected. The PMD power module provides the power supply for one or more control units.

The following accessories are available: • The labeling strips and color coding labels of the ET 200S system can also be used for the frequency converter. • Jumper block L1/L2/L3 The jumper blocks L1/L2/L2 are used to bridge a gap in the power bus. 15 mm wide jumper blocks are used to bridge the control unit of the subsequent frequency converter. If a brake control module is connected, a 30 mm wide jumper block is required in order to pass on the power bus via the brake control module and ICU24 to the subsequent IPM25 converter power module. • Jumper block PE/N The Jumper blocks PE/N are used to bridge a gap in the PE/N bus, e.g. caused by use of a brake control module, a PM-D(F) power module or the control unit of the frequency converter. • EMC filter An EMC filter must be externally connected to the supply of the power bus in order to achieve EMC Class A (according to EN 55011). Shielded motor cables must be used in addition. It must be ensured that the shield is connected correctly. The terminal modules for the converter power module of the frequency converter are equipped for this with an integral shield connecting element. Within the ET 200S system, several frequency converters can be supplied with 400 V over a common power bus. The EMC filter is connected up-circuit of the power bus. The filters are designed for a maximum effective length of 350 m shielded cable. The effective cable length is the combined length of all motor cables of the frequency converter on the common 400 V power bus. The two EMC filters of the ET 200S FC are designed as group filters for more than one frequency converter and have the following properties: EMC filter

Rated current

Maximum cable length

Conductor crosssection

6SL3203-0BE22-5AA0

25 A

350 m

4 mm²

6SL3203-0BE25-0AA0

50 A

350 m

10 mm²

Type

The use of output reactors or LC filters on the converter output does not affect the maximum cable length for the EMC filter.

5/88





■ Function

• Output reactors and LC filters for longer cable lengths Without additional components on the converter output, the maximum length of motor cables on the SIMATIC ET 200S FC frequency converter is 50 m (shielded cable) or 100 m (unshielded). Longer cables are possible when output reactors of LC filters are used: To reduce the capacitive equalizing currents and du/dt for motor cables, output reactors are provided. Consequently when output reactors are used, the maximum permissible cable lengths between the motor and converter are:

The ET 200S FC is capable of dynamic control procedures such as sensorless vector control or torque control. Where particular speed accuracy and dynamic response requirements exist, a motor encoder can be connected to the control module.

IPM25 converter power module

The following accessories are available: • MMC parameter memory If required, the complete parameter settings of the frequency converter can be saved on a memory card (MMC). When servicing, the plant is immediately ready for use again after replacing the frequency converter and inserting the memory card.

Output choke Type

Max. permissible motor cable lengths (shielded/unshielded) for a line voltage of 380 V -15% to 400 V

401 V to 480 V+10%

0.75 kW

6SE64003TC00-4AD2

150 m/ 225 m

100 m/ 150 m

2.2 kW and 4.0 kW

6SE64003TC01-0BD3

150 m/ 225 m

100 m/ 150 m

The ET 200S FC is operated without a line reactor. A PTC or KTY encoder can be connected to the control module to evaluate the motor temperature. Accessories

5

The LC filter limits the rate of rise of voltage and the capacitive charge/discharge currents which occur with converter operation. This means that considerably longer motor cables can be used for operation with LC filters. The service life of the motor is as long as for direct mains operation. It is therefore not necessary to use an output reactor. When LC filters are used, the maximum permissible cable lengths between the motor and converter are: IPM25 converter power module

LC filter Type

Max. permissible motor cable lengths (shielded/unshielded) for a line voltage of 380 V to 480 V -15% +10%

0.75 kW

6SE6400-3TD004AD0

200 m/300 m

2.2 kW and 4.0 kW

6SE6400-3TD010BD0

200 m/300 m

When an output reactor or LC filter is used, it is important to note the following during assembly and start-up: The output reactors and LC filters must be mounted alongside or below the ET 200S station. Vertical alignment is important to ensure adequate cooling. The connecting cable to the converter must be pre-assembled for all components and shortened to a length of approximately 30 cm - the shield of the motor cable must be attached to the output reactor or the LC filter. The pulse frequency of the converter must be reduced to 4 kHz (the factory setting is 8 kHz). In addition, when an LC filter is used, the converter must be operated in V/f mode. • Shield clamps To connect the shield of motor cables • Grounding terminal To ground the 3 x 10 mm busbar for the shield connection • Busbar 3 x 10 mm To accommodate the shield clamps and the grounding terminal • Brake control module xB1 or xB2 to control an external electromechanical brake


5/89



■ Technical specifications Control unit

Converter power modules

ICU24

IPM25, FS A Frame size A

IPM25, FS B Frame size B

Integral safety functions according to Category 3 of EN 954-1 or according to SIL 2 of IEC 61508

-

-

-

Output

-

0.75 kW

2.2 kW

4.0 kW

Rated input current (at 50 °C ambient temperature)

-

1.9 A

5.7 A

9.6 A

Rated output current (at 50 °C ambient temperature)

-

2.1 A

5.9 A

10.2 A

Mounting dimensions (W x H x D) in mm (including terminal module)

15 x 220 x 156

65 x 290 x 156

130 x 290 x 156

Selection features

Electrical data

5

Line voltage

3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC +10%/-15%

Line frequency

47 Hz to 63 Hz

Overload capability

• Overload current 1.5 x rated output current (i.e. 150% overload capability) for 60s, cycle time 300s • Overload current 2 x rated output current (i.e. 200% overload capability) for 3s, cycle time 300s

Output frequency

0 Hz to 650 Hz

Pulse frequency

8 kHz (standard), 2 kHz to 16 kHz (in 2 kHz increments)

System perturbation

Low loading of power supply network by network harmonics (guide values: 5: 20%, 7: 14%, 11: 9%, 13: 8%)

Skipped frequency range

1, programmable

Converter efficiency

≥96 %

Interfaces

• Connection to PROFIBUS or PROFINET over the ET 200 S backplane bus • RS232 interface with USS protocol for commissioning on the PC using the STARTER commissioning software • Slot for an optional memory card (MMC) for uploading or downloading parameter settings • PTC/KTY84 interface for motor temperature monitoring • Speed sensor interface (Sub-D connector) for unipolar HTL incremental position encoder

Functions Control method

• V/f control – linear (M~n) with/without flux current control (FCC), quadratic (M~n2) or parameterizable • Vector control – with or without encoder • Torque control

Operating functions

Jogging mode, free function blocks (FFB), positioning deceleration ramp, automatic restart following interruption due to power failure, bumpless connection of converter to rotating motor

Braking functions

• Regenerative braking operation without brake chopper and pulsed resistor • Control of an electrical holding brake via an optional brake control module

Protection features for

Undervoltage, overvoltage, ground faults, short circuits, stall prevention, thermal motor protection I2t, converter overtemperature, motor blocking protection

Connectable motors

• Low-voltage asynchronous motors • Motor cable lengths: max. 50 m (shielded) max. 100 m (unshielded) If an output reactor or an LC filter is used, longer cable lengths are possible

Mechanical datan Degree of protection

IP20

Operating temperature

• With vertical design of station

-10 °C to +40 °C

• With horizontal design of station

-10 °C to +50 °C/to +60 °C with derating

Standards Compliance with standards

UL, cUL ,CE, c-tick, according to low-voltage directive 73/23/EEC, EMC directive 89/336/EEC

Derating data – Pulse frequency Output

Rated output current in A at a pulse frequency of

kW

2 kHz

4 kHz

6 kHz

8 kHz

10 kHz

12 kHz

14 kHz

16 kHz

0.75

2.1

2.1

2.1

2.1

1.05

1.05

1.05

1.05

2.2

5.9

5.9

5.9

5.9

5.3

5.3

5.3

5.3

4.0

10.2

10.2

10.2

10.2

5.1

5.1

5.1

5.1

The current data apply to an ambient temperature of 50°C unless specified otherwise.

5/90




■ Ordering data Version

Order No.

ICU24 control unit • Control modes: V/f, FCC, SLVC, VC with encoder, torque control • Motor encoder input: HTL unipolar • Motor temperature input: PTC/KTY

6SL3244-0SA00-1AA0

IPM25 converter power module 380 V – 480 V 3 AC +10/-15% 47 Hz - 63 Hz Overload: 150% 60 s 200% 3 s Power: 0.75 kW

IPM25 converter power module 380 V – 480 V 3 AC +10/-15% 47 Hz - 63 Hz Overload: 150% 60 s 200% 3 s Power: 2.2 kW 4.0 kW

5 6SL3225-0SE17-5UA0

6SL3225-0SE22-2UA0 6SL3225-0SE24-0UA0


5/91



Clearance required due to heat build-up, min. 35 mm

■ Dimension drawings 156 137.5


31

Wire range

Clearance G_D011_EN_00054a required due to heat build-up, min. 35 mm

72 161

Clea rance required due to heat build-up, min. 35 mm

5

G_D011_EN_00056a

333

100 194.6 220.5

Mounting rail 35 x 7.5 mm

100


250.5

21 15

66

156 144.5 124

66


11.7

79.6 64.8

Integrated screen support Terminal block PE/N (accessory)

Integrated screen support

IPM25 converter power module, 0.75 kW


ICU24 control unit

Terminal block PE/N (accessory)

156 137.5

144.8 130

100 333


250.5

66

11.7

Motor connections


IPM25 converter power module, 2.2 kW and 4.0 kW

5/92



Wire range


Clearance 31 required due to heat build-up, min. 35 mm

Supply terminal for power bus



Motor connections




■ Dimension drawings (continued) 8

75.5 56

200

1.5

120 141.5

G_D011_EN_00062

24

187 200

35 60

PE M6 x 24 Tightening torque 4.8 0.2 Nm

110

Terminals 10 mm2 Tightening torque of screw 1.2 ... 1.5 Nm

4.5

255 265

3-line filter, 50 A 8

24

5

200 G_D011_EN_00084

1.5

120 141.5 4.5


150 120


Output choke for IPM25 FS A

35 60

G_D011_En_00063

Fixing with M4 bolts

255 265

3-line filter, 25 A


G_D011_EN_00085

70

200 213

Output choke for IPM25 FS B


5/93



75.5 56

■ Dimension drawings (continued)

287 300

110

334

5 G_D011_EN_00086


120

150 138

LC filter for IPM25 FS A

280 293


LC filter for IPM25 FS B

5/94


G_D011_EN_00087

100

340


ET 200S — Motor Starters and Frequency Converters Accessories for frequency converters

■ Overview Accessories for Frequency Converters • "Brake control modules XB1 and XB3 If required, the XB1 and XB3 brake control modules can be arranged on the right-hand side next to the IPM25 power section of the ET 200S FC frequency converter. Using the brake control module it is possible to connect a motor brake to the converter. Actuation takes place through the internal brake control of the converter. • "EMC filter for frequency converters EMC class A is achieved by installing an EMC filter upstream from the power bus of the converter. Shielded motor cables and EMC-compatible wiring are required in addition. The EMC filter is available in two sizes for 25 A and 50 A rated current. Both EMC filters have been designed for a maximum cable length of 350 m. This cable length includes the sum total of all the motor cables of the converters sharing one power bus.

• MMC parameter memory If required, an additional storage medium can be used for the the parameterization of the frequency converter. The MMC permits replacement of the ICU24/ICU24F control module with automatic downloading of parameters from the MMC into the internal parameter memory of the ICU24/ICU24F. Suitable for the MMC slot of the ICU24/ICU24F control module. Other memory cards are not accepted by the ICU24/ICU24F. • Connection cable from a PC to the ICU24/ICU24F control module The cable creates a point-to-point connection from the PC to the ICU24/ICU24F control module for starting up the converter with the "STARTER" PC tool.


3RK1 903-0CB00

Brake control modules For motors with a mechanical brake • xB1 for motor starters and frequency converters 24 V DC / 4 A • xB2 for motor starters and frequency converters 500 V DC / 0.7 A • xB3 for motor starters 24 V DC / 4 A / 2 DI DC 24 V local control With diagnostics; with two inputs • xB4 for motor starters 500 V DC / 0.7 A / 2 DI DC 24 V local control With diagnostics; with two inputs Terminal module for brake control modules • TM-xB15 S24-01 for xB1 or xB2 • TM-xB215 S24-01 for xB3 or xB4

5

Order No.

3RK1 903-0CB00

3RK1 903-0CC00

3RK1 903-0CE00

3RK1 903-0CF00

3RK1 903-0AG00 3RK1 903-0AG01

EMC filter for frequency converter For achieving EMC Class A; is connected before shared power bus of frequency converters, installation must comply with EMC guidelines (shielded motor cables) • 25 A rated current

6SL3 203-0BE22-5AA0

• 50 A rated current

6SL3 203-0BE25-0AA0

MMC parameter memory for frequency converter Matches the MMC slot of the ICU24 / ICU24F closed-loop control module; other memory cards are not accepted

6SL3 254-0AM00-0AA0

RS 232/zero modem cable (5 m) Cable for commissioning the ET 200S FC frequency converter using the PC tool "STARTER"

6ES7 901-1BF00-0XA0

ET 200S FC frequency converter documentation Instruction Manual + Lists Manual for ET 200S FC frequency converter • German

6SL3 298-0CA12-0AP0

• English

6SL3 298-0CA12-0BP0

Instruction Manual + Lists Manual for ET 200S FC frequency converter + ET 200S Manual • German

6SL3 298-0CA12-1AP0

• English

6SL3 298-0CA12-1BP0

CD-ROM with documentation (STARTER etc.) Multilanguage

6SL3 298-0CA11-1MG0


5/95


ET 200S — Motor Starters and Frequency Converters Accessories for frequency converters

■ Dimension drawings 15

66

117,5

195,6

100

194,6

142,2

13,5

NSA00304

5 95

xB1 ... 4 brake control module with TM-xB215 terminal module

5/96


7


ET 200S — Motor Starters and Frequency Converters Power modules for ET 200S motor starters and frequency converters

■ Overview

■ Application PM-D power modules are used to monitor the two 24 V DC auxiliary voltages for the group of motor starters on the righthand side or to supply the group of frequency converters on the right-hand side. The voltage is applied to the self-assembling voltage buses via TM-D terminal modules. Voltage failures are signaled to the higher-level master via PROFIBUS diagnostics. Additional LEDs on site indicate the status of the auxiliary voltages. Since the auxiliary voltages for signal feedback and power module control are separate, the whole group can be shutdown while diagnostics can still be performed.

5

• For supplying and monitoring the auxiliary voltages for motor starters • A whole group of motor starters can be shut down without additional overhead (Safety Category 1 acc. to EN 954-1). • For plugging into TM-P15 terminal module • For supplying and monitoring the power supply for the ET 200S FC frequency converter


Order No.

PM-D power module for 24 V DC with diagnostics

3RK1 903-0BA00

3RK1 903-0BA00

Accessories Color-coding plates 6 x 200 color-coding plates for terminal modules One set contains 10 strips per color with 20 color-coding plates each • white

6ES7 193-4LA10-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 193-4LB10-0AA0

• yellow/green

6ES7 193-4LC10-0AA0

• red

6ES7 193-4LD10-0AA0

• blue

6ES7 193-4LF10-0AA0

• brown

6ES7 193-4LG10-0AA0

• petrol

6ES7 193-4LH10-0AA0


5/97


ET 200S — Safety Motor Starter and Frequency Converter Solutions local / PROFIsafe General information

■ Overview

5

ET 200S Safety Motor Starter Solutions

ET 200S FC Frequency Converter Fail-safe

The ET 200S safety motor starter solutions comprise: • Safety modules • Motor Starters, Standard • Motor starters, High Feature • Fail-safe motor starters

• For stepless speed control of asynchronous motors • Consisting of the modules for control module ICU24F and power section IPM25 up to 4.0 kW • Hot swapping of control module and power supply permitted • Low line harmonic distortions • Operation without line commutating reactor • Active braking with line-commutated energy recovery • Can be combined with Brake Control Module for controlling an electromechanical holding brakee • With self-assembling 50 A power bus, i. e. the load voltage for a group of frequency converters has to be fed in just once • For achieving EMC Class A (acc. to EN 55011) Connection of an EMC filter before the power bus

With the ET 200S safety motor starter solutions there is no complicated and hence cost-intensive configuring and wiring compared to the conventional safety systems. The ET 200S safety motor starter solutions are designed for Category 4 acc. to EN 954- or SIL 3 IEC 61508. They enable the use of safety-oriented direct-on-line starters or reversing starters in the SIMATIC ET 200S distributed peripherals system on PROFINET or PROFIBUS. The fine modular architecture of the system enables optimum imaging of machine or plant applications. Within an ET 200S station the safety motor starter solutions can also be combined with Standard motor starters or High Feature motor starters without safety functions or the SIMATIC ET 200S FC frequency converter up to max. 4 kW up to Category 3 acc. to EN 954-1 or SIL 2 acc. to IEC 61508. The ET 200 Standard and High Feature motor starters can be found beginnning on page 5/81. The ET 200S Configurator software can be found in Catalog CA 01 on CD or DVD (Motor Starter Selection Aid). You can also download the ET 200S Configurator software from the Internet: http://www.siemens.com/sirius-starting http://www.siemens.com/ET200S

The fail-safe ET 200S FC offers comprehensive integrated safety functions (certified acc. to EN 954-1, Category 3 or IEC 61508, SIL 2). Safe standstill: Startup of the drive is prevented. Safely reduced speed: A specified motor speed is monitored to make sure it is not exceeded. Can be used without motor encoder. Safe brake ramp: Braking to standstill or to safely reduced speed is monitored. Can be used without motor encoder.

■ Application The ET 200S safety motor starter solutions are preferred in all production and process automation fields in which the enhancement of plant availability and flexibility plays a key role. • Safety motor starter solutions local are preferred from the safety engineering point of view for locally restricted safety applications. These motor starters are not dependent on a safe control system.

5/98


• Safety motor starter solutions PROFIsafe are often found by contrast in safety applications of the more complex type that are interlinked. In this case a safe control system is used with the bus systems PROFINET or PROFIBUS with the PROFIsafe profile.


ET 200S — Safety Motor Starter and Frequency Converter Solutions local / PROFIsafe ET 200S fail-safe motor starters

■ Overview

■ Benefits Advantages over conventional safety systems: • Significant savings in components (less hardware) • Less mounting and installation work • Motor starters are fail-safe and offer high availability

■ Application Application The Fail-safe motor starter is predestined for use in combination with PROFIsafe (see Figure Fail-safe motor starter with ET 200S PROFIsafe, page 5/115). Another field of application is in combination with ASIsafe or safety relays (see Safety Module local, Overview, Example 2 on page 5/110 Motorstarter Fail-safe with ASisafe and 3TK28).

5

The Fail-safe motor starter has been developed on the basis of the High Feature motor starter. It differs in that, in addition to a circuit-breaker/contactor assembly, a safe solid-state evaluation circuit is installed for error detection purposes which makes the motor starter Fail-safe. If the contactor to be switched fails in an EMERGENCY STOP case, the evaluation solid-states detects a fault and opens the circuit-breaker in the motor starter through a shunt release in a fail-safe manner. The second redundant shutdown components is therefore no longer a main contactor, as is generally the case, but the circuit-breaker installed in the motor. All functions of the High Feature starter are already integrated The new Fail-safe motor starters are characterized by easy, space-saving assembly as well as minimal wiring outlay. Like the High Feature starters, the Fail-safe motor starters have a switching capacity of up to 7.5 kW (16 A) which is achieved with just two motor starter versions. Another important feature is the high availability due to the high short-circuit withstand capability (type of coordination 2).


5/99


ET 200S — Safety Motor Starter and Frequency Converter Solutions local / PROFIsafe ET 200S fail-safe motor starters


Order No.

ET 200S fail-safe motor starters F-DS1e-x direct on-line starter Fail-safe direct on-line starter for up to 7.5 kW Mechanical switching Electronic overload protection

F-DS1e-x direct starter

5

• 0.3 to 3 A

3RK1 301-0AB13-0AA4

• 2.4 to 8 A

3RK1 301-0BB13-0AA4

• 2.4 to 16 A

3RK1 301-0CB13-0AA4

F-DS1e-x reversing starter Fail-safe reversing starter for up to 7.5 kW Mechanical switching Electronic overload protection Fuseless • 0.3 to 3 A

3RK1 301-0AB13-1AA4

• 2.4 to 8 A

3RK1 301-0BB13-1AA4

• 2.4 to 16 A

3RK1 301-0CB13-1AA4

Components for fail-safe motor starters

5/100

TM-FDS65-S32/S31-01 terminal module for F-DS1e-x direct on-line starter with coding • With supply terminals for power bus (TM-FDS65-S32-01) • Without supply terminals for power bus (TM-FDS65-S31-01)

3RK1 903-3AC00

TM-FRS130-S32/S31-01 terminal module for F-RS1e-x reversing starter with coding • With supply terminals for power bus (TM-FRS130-S32-01) • Without supply terminals for power bus (TM-FRS130-S31-01)

3RK1 903-3AD00

3RK1 903-3AC10

3RK1 903-3AD10

M65-PEN-F PE/N terminal block with supply terminals, with covers

3RK1 903-2AC00

M65-PEN-S terminal block without supply terminals

3RK1 903-2AC10



ET 200S — Safety Motor Starter and Frequency Converter Solutions local / PROFIsafe ET 200S FC fail-safe frequency converter

■ Overview

Components of the ET 200S FC fail-safe frequency converter

■ Benefits • The frequency converter is completely integrated into the ET 200S system and offers all system advantages, such as high availability thanks to the hot swapping function, modular expansion, or reduction of the wiring overhead resulting from the self-assembling terminal module wiring. • With self-assembling 50 A power bus, i.e. the load voltage is only supplied once for a group of frequency converters • Comprehensive diagnostics facilities for high availability • Input for motor encoder for precise speed control • Input for PTC/KTY encoder for comprehensive motor protection • Slot for optional memory card (MMC) to save the parameter settings for fast replacement of modules without tools • All common control modes are available: Frequency control, sensor-less vector control or torque control, closed-loop control with motor encoder • Parameterization takes place using STARTER, the graphical parameterization tool for Siemens drives • Active braking is possible without additional overhead. The line-commutated energy recovery of the frequency converter for the power supply network means that brake chopper modules or pulsed resistors are superfluous. • The "safe standstill" is completely electronic and therefore without contacts. This provides reliable and extremely short response times. • Unique is that the "safe reduced speed" and the "safe braking ramp" do not require a motor encoder or other encoder. These functions can therefore be implemented with minimum overhead.

■ Application • New application possibilities are opened up for the ET 200S system where continuous control of the speed of asynchronous motors is required. • The frequency converter handles frequency control and vector control for more complex drive tasks. In addition, the converter also supports torque control for conveyor applications, winding and unwinding drives, as well as hoisting gear. Together with a motor encoder, the range extends up to closed-loop controls for exact control of speeds and torques. • The advantages of line-commutated power regeneration are primarily evident in continuous regenerative operation. Examples include unwinding units, lowering of loads with hoisting gear, or electric braking of large centrifugal masses. • Together with an intelligent header module (IM 151 CPU) and the ET 200S FC frequency converter, the I/O station is expanded to become a complete automation solution for machine modules and plant sections. • The integral safety functions significantly reduce the overhead for drive solutions in plant sections where there is a hazard potential. Monitoring of the safely reduced speed in sensorless standard asynchronous motors is unique in drive engineering.


5/101

5



■ Design • EMC filter An EMC filter must be externally connected to the supply of the power bus in order to achieve EMC Class A (according to EN 55011). Shielded motor cables must be used in addition. It must be ensured that the shield is connected correctly. The terminal modules for the converter power module of the frequency converter are equipped with an integral shield connection element. Within the ET 200S system, several frequency converters can be supplied over a common power bus with 400 V. The EMC filter is connected up-circuit of the power bus. The filters are designed for a maximum effective length of 350 m shielded cable. The effective cable length is the combined length of all motor cables of the frequency converter on the common 400 V power bus. The two EMC filters of the ET 200S FC are designed as group filters for more than one frequency converter and have the following properties: EMC filter

5

Rated current

Maximum cable length

Conductor crosssection

6SL3203-0BE22-5AA0

25 A

350 m

4 mm²

6SL3203-0BE25-0AA0

50 A

350 m

10 mm²

Type

Design of an ET 200S station with two ET 200S FC fail-safe frequency converters (only terminal modules on the right)

The ET 200S FC consists of the following components: The ET 200S FC consists of the following components: • ICU24F control unit (F = with integral safety technology) • IPM25 converter power module • Terminal modules to accommodate control unit and converter power module Following insertion of the modules, the control unit and the converter power module of the frequency converter are interconnected. The PM-D F PROFIsafe or PM-D F X1 power modules provide the power supply for one or more control units.

Accessories The following accessories are available: • The labeling strips and color coding labels of the ET 200S system can also be used for the frequency converter. • Jumper block L1/L2/L3 The jumper blocks L1/L2/L2 are used to bridge a gap in the power bus. 15 mm wide jumper blocks are used to bridge the control unit of the subsequent frequency converter. If a brake control module is connected, a 30mm wide jumper block is required in order to pass on the power bus via the brake control module and ICU24 to the subsequent IPM25 converter power module. • Jumper block PE/N The Jumper blocks PE/N are used to bridge a gap in the PE/N bus, e.g. caused by use of a brake control module, a PM-D(F) power module or the control unit of the frequency converter.

5/102


The use of output reactors or LC filters on the converter output does not affect the maximum cable length for the EMC filter. • Output reactors and LC filters for longer cable lengths Without additional components on the converter output, the maximum length of motor cables on the SIMATIC ET 200S FC frequency converter is 50 m (shielded cable) or 100 m (unshielded). Longer cables are possible when output reactors of LC filters are used: To reduce the capacitive equalizing currents and du/dt for motor cables, output reactors are provided. Consequently when output reactors are used, the maximum permissible cable lengths between the motor and converter are: IPM25 converter power module

Output choke Type

Max. permissible motor cable lengths (shielded/unshielded) for a line voltage of 380 V -15% to 400 V

401 V to 480 V+10%

0.75 kW

6SE64003TC00-4AD2

150 m/ 225 m

100 m/ 150 m

2.2 kW and 4.0 kW

6SE64003TC01-0BD3

150 m/ 225 m

100 m/ 150 m




■ Function

The LC filter limits the rate of rise of voltage and the capacitive charge/discharge currents which occur with converter operation. This means that considerably longer motor cables can be used for operation with LC filters. The service life of the motor is as long as for direct mains operation. It is therefore not necessary to use an output reactor. When LC filters are used, the maximum permissible cable lengths between the motor and converter are:

The ET 200S FC is capable of dynamic control procedures such as sensorless vector control or torque control. Where particular speed accuracy and dynamic response requirements exist, a motor encoder can be connected to the control module.

IPM25 converter power module

LC filter Type

Max. permissible motor cable lengths (shielded/unshielded) for a line voltage of 380 V to 480 V -15% +10%

0.75 kW

6SE6400-3TD004AD0

200 m/300 m

Integral safety functions are selected via the switch-off modules of a series-connected PM-D F: • Safe standstill (the drive is prevented from starting up) • Safely reduced speed (the preset motor speed is monitored for correct speed) • Safe braking ramp (monitoring of braking to standstill or safe reduced speed)

2.2 kW and 4.0 kW

6SE6400-3TD010BD0

200 m/300 m

When an output reactor or LC filter is used, it is important to note the following during assembly and start-up: The output reactors and LC filters must be mounted alongside or below the ET 200S station. Vertical alignment is important to ensure adequate cooling. The connecting cable to the converter must be pre-assembled for all components and shortened to a length of approximately 30 cm – the shield of the motor cable must be attached to the output reactor or the LC filter. The pulse frequency of the converter must be reduced to 4 kHz (the factory setting is 8 kHz). In addition, when an LC filter is used, the converter must be operated in V/f mode. • Shield clamps To connect the shield of motor cables • Grounding terminal To ground the 3 x 10 mm busbar for the shield connection • Busbar 3 x 10 mm To accommodate the shield clamps and the grounding terminal • Brake control module xB1 or xB2 to control an external electromechanical brake

The ET 200S FC is operated without a line reactor. A PTC or KTY encoder in the motor can be evaluated by the control module to evaluate the motor temperature.

The safety functions of the ET 200S FC are certified according to Category 3 of EN 954-1 and to SIL 2 of IEC 61508. Accessories The following accessories are available: • MMC parameter memory If required, the complete parameter settings of the frequency converter can be saved on a memory card (MMC). When servicing, the plant is immediately ready for use again after replacing the frequency converter and inserting the memory card.


5/103

5



■ Technical specifications Control unit

Converter power modules

ICU24

IPM25, FS A Frame size A

IPM25, FS B Frame size B

• Integral safety functions according • Safe stop to Category 3 of EN 954-1 or accord- • Safely-reduceding to SIL 2 of IEC 61508 speed 1) • Safe brake ramp 1)

-

-

• Output

-

0.75 kW

2.2 kW

4.0 kW

• Rated input current (at 50 °C ambient temperature)

-

1.9 A

5.7 A

9.6 A

• Rated output current (at 50 °C ambient temperature)

-

2.1 A

5.9 A

10.2 A

• Mounting dimensions (W x H x D) in mm (including terminal module)

15 x 220 x 156

65 x 290 x 156

130 x 290 x 156

Selection features

Electrical data

5

Line voltage

3 AC 380 V to 480 V +10%/-15%

Line frequency

47 Hz to 63 Hz

Overload capability

• Overload current 1.5 x rated output current (i.e. 150% overload capability) for 60s, cycle time 300s • Overload current 2 x rated output current (i.e. 200% overload capability) for 3s, cycle time 300s

Output frequency

0 Hz to 650 Hz

Pulse frequency

8 kHz (standard), 2 kHz to 16 kHz (in 2 kHz increments)

System perturbation

Low loading of power supply network by network harmonics (guide values: 5: 20%, 7: 14%, 11: 9%, 13: 8%)

Skipped frequency range

1, programmable

Converter efficiency

≥96 %

Interfaces

• Connection to PROFIBUS or PROFINET over the ET 200S backplane bus • RS232 interface with USS protocol for commissioning on the PC using the STARTER commissioning software • Activation of the integrated safety functions via PROFIsafe (PM-DFPROFIsafe) or terminals (PM-DFX1) • Slot for an optional memory card (MMC) for uploading or downloading parameter settings • PTC/KTY84 interface (Sub-D connector) for motor temperature monitoring • Speed sensor interface (Sub-D connector) for unipolar HTL incremental position encoder

Functions Open-loop/closed-loop control procedure

• V/f control – linear (M~n) with/without flux current control (FCC), quadratic (M~n2) or parameterizable • Vector control – with or without encoder • Torque control

Operating functions

Jogging mode, free function blocks (FFB), positioning deceleration ramp, automatic restart following interruption due to power failure, bumpless connection of converter to rotating motor

Braking functions

• Regenerative braking operation without brake chopper and pulsed resistor • Control of an electromechanical holding brake via an optional brake control module

Protective functions

Undervoltage, overvoltage, ground faults, short circuits, stall prevention, motor thermal protection (I2t, or sensor) inverter overtemperature, motor blocking protection

Connectable motors

• Low-voltage asynchronous motors • Motor cable lengths: max. 50 m (shielded) max. 100 m (unshielded) If an output reactor or an LC filter is used, longer cable lengths are possible

Mechanical data Degree of protection

IP20

Operating temperature

• With vertical design of station • With horizontal design of station

-10 °C to +40 °C -10 °C to +50 °C/to +60 °C with derating

Standards Compliance with standards

UL, cUL ,CE, c-tick, low-voltage directive 73/23/EEC, EMC directive 89/336/EEC

1) The safety functions "Safely reduced speed" and "Safe braking ramp" are certified for asynchronous motors without encoders these safety functions are not permitted for pull-through loads as in the case of lifting gear and winders.

5/104




■ Technical specifications (continued) Derating data – Pulse frequency Output

Rated output current in A at a pulse frequency of

kW

2 kHz

4 kHz

6 kHz

8 kHz

10 kHz

12 kHz

14 kHz

16 kHz

0.75

2.1

2.1

2.1

2.1

1.05

1.05

1.05

1.05

2.2

5.9

5.9

5.9

5.9

5.3

5.3

5.3

5.3

4.0

10.2

10.2

10.2

10.2

5.1

5.1

5.1

5.1

The current data apply to an ambient temperature of 50°C unless specified otherwise.

■ Ordering data Version

Order No.

ICU24F control unit • Control modes: V/f, FCC, SLVC, VC with encoder, torque control • Motor encoder input: HTL unipolar • Motor temperature input: PTC/KTY • Integrated safety functions

6SL3244-0SA01-1AA0

5

IPM25 converter power module 380 V – 480 V 3 AC +10/-15% 47 Hz – 63 Hz Overload: 150% 60 s 200% 3 s Power: 0.75 kW

6SL3225-0SE17-5UA0

IPM25 converter power module 380 V – 480 V 3 AC +10/-15% 47 Hz – 63 Hz Overload: 150% 60 s 200% 3 s Power: 2.2 kW 4.0 kW

6SL3225-0SE22-2UA0 6SL3225-0SE24-0UA0


5/105



156 137.5

66 Clearance required due to heat build-up, min. 35 mm

31

Wire range

333 G_D011_EN_00056a


72


5 161

250.5


100 194.6 220.5


79.6 64.8

21 15

66

156 144.5 124

100


11.7


■ Dimension drawings

Integrated screen support Terminal block PE/N (accessory)


IPM25 converter power module, 0.75 kW


ICU24F control unit


156 137.5

100 333


250.5

66

11.7

144.8 130

Motor connections


IPM25 converter power module, 2.2 kW and 4.0 kW

5/106



Wire range


Clearance 31 required due to heat build-up, min. 35 mm




Motor connections




■ Dimension drawings (continued) 8

200

120 141.5

G_D011_EN_00062

75.5 56

24

1.5

187 200

110


35 60


4.5

255 265

3-line filter, 50 A

8

24

200

5

G_D011_EN_00084


1.5

120 141.5 4.5

150 120



35 60

G_D011_En_00063

Output choke for IPM25 FS A

255 265

200 213


G_D011_EN_00085

70

3-line filter, 25 A

Output choke for IPM25 FS B


5/107



75.5 56

■ Dimension drawings (continued)

287 300

110

334

5 G_D011_EN_00086


120

150 138

LC filter for IPM25 FS A

280 293


LC filter for IPM25 FS B

5/108


G_D011_EN_00087

100

340


ET 200S — Safety Motor Starter and Frequency Converter Solutions local / PROFIsafe Safety Module local

■ Overview PM-D F1 safety module

PM-X safety module

DS1-x standard direct starter

PM-D F2 safety module

DS1e-x high feature direct starter

PM-X safety module


G_NSA0_00434

Terminal module for PM-X safety module

5

Terminal module for PM-D F1/2 safety module

Auxiliary switch of the failsafe equipment for F-Kit 1 direct starter Terminal module for direct starter with TM-DS45-S32 supply connection PE/N terminal block with M65-PEN-F supply connection

Terminal module for direct starter without TM-DS65-S31 supply connection Terminal module for PM-D F1/2 safety module Terminal module for PM-X safety module Terminal module for direct starter without TM-DS45-S31 supply connection

Terminal module for direct starter with TM-DS65-S32 supply connection

PE/N terminal block without M65-PEN-S supply connection

Interplay of ET 200S safety motor starters Solutions local components

Safety Motor Starter Solutions local • For use of Standard, High-feature or Fail-safe motor starters in systems with safety categories 2 to 4 (acc. to EN 954-1) • No complex wiring for conventional safety systems • Can also be used in combination with external safety relays • Can also be used to activate external safety systems • Safety module available for function-monitored and automatic starting • Safety module available for Stop category 0 and 1 • Safety module for monitoring the auxiliary voltages for motor starters • Safety modules can be plugged into the TM-PF30 terminal modules.

Safety Modul PM-D F1


5/109




5

PM-D F1/F2/F3/F4/F5 safety modules • PM-D F1/F2/F3/F4 safety modules monitor auxiliary voltages and contain the complete functionality of a safety relay: - PM-D F1 For evaluation of EMERGENCY STOP circuits with the function "monitored start". - PM-D F2 For evaluation of protective doors with the function "automatic start". - PM-D F3 Expansion to PM-D F1/F2 for time-delayed shutdown. - PM-D F4 For expansion of safety circuits with other ET 200S motor starters, e.g. in a different line Zeile. - PM-D F5 Transmits the status from PM-D F1 ... 4 through four floating enabling circuits to external safety equipment (contact mulitpliers) • The PM-D F1 and PM-D F2 modules can be combined with the PM-D F3 or PM-D F4 modules. • A PM-D F5 can be positioned at any point between a PM-D F1 ... 4 and a PM-X. • Safety modules monitor the U1 and U2 auxiliary voltages. A voltage failure is relayed as a diagnostics signal over the bus. - No additional PM-D safety module is required when the safety modules are used. - Each safety circuit, beginning with a PM-D F1 ... 4, must be terminated with one PM-X each.

Example 1:

Fail-safe Kit

Example 2:

PLC

Examples

PM-X

PROFINET / PROFIBUS

ET 200S

Motor 1

Motor 2

Motor 3

EMERGENCY-STOP

Motor 4

Motor 5

Bowden wire NSA0_00433

ET 200S safety motor starter Solutions local with 2 safety circuits (= shutdown groups), Standard motor starters and High Feature motor starters.

PM-D FX1 PROFINET / PROFIBUS

F-Kit 1 supplements the DS1-x direct-on-line starter, F-Kit 2 the RS1-x reversing starter.

High Feature motor starters and their terminal modules come as standard with the functionality of the F-Kits integrated.

PM-D F2 PM-X

The Fail-safe Kit (F-Kit) must be added to each Standard motor starter in a safety segment in order to monitor the switchin function.

The F-Kits are comprised of: • Contact supports for the terminal modules • One or two auxiliary switch blocks for the contactor/contactors of the motor starter • Connecting leads

PM-D F1

ET 200S Standard PLC

Motor 1 Variant 1 Safety relay, e. g. 3TK28

Motor 2

Variant 2 ASIsafe

AS-Interface

The diverse possible uses of the safety motor starter Solutions local are presented in the manual SIMATIC ET 200S Motor Starters in the context of typical sample applications. Safety functional examples for easy, quick and low-cost implementations of applications with safety motor starters Solutions local are available in the Internet: You can find more information in the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/sirius-starting http://www.siemens.com/ET200S

5/110


AS-Interface

NSA0_00431

ET 200S safety motor starter Solutions local with 2 external safety assemblies (= safety relays or ASIsafe monitors) and with Fail-safe motor starters (PM-DFX-1 application). 2 of the 6 available safe shutdown groups are used. Signals with relevance for safety can be input to ET 200S through a PM-DFX1 infeed terminal module through the release circuits of the ASIsafe monitor or the safety relay to control the Fail-safe motor starters which then selectively switch off the downstream motors.



■ Overview (continued) Fail-safe frequency converter Solution local

Example:

Using the PM-D F X1 module, safety-oriented signals can be fed into the ET 200S to activate the fail-safe functions of the ET 200S FC fail-safe frequency converter.

SIMATIC Standard CPU

The fail-safe functions of the ET 200S FC fail-safe frequency converter are assigned by parameter to two of the six shutdown groups. The shutdown groups are evaluated by the ICU24F control module.

PROFINET PROFIBUS

PM-D FX1

PM-D FX1 ET 200S FC failsafe ET 200S

ET 200S FC failsafe

ET 200S

3TK28

3TK28

5 Light curtain NSA0_00454

■ Application Safety Motor Starter Solutions local

Local actuation of the fail-safe frequency converter

With the Safety Motor Starter Solutions local it is easy to configure several safety circuits. The safety sensors are connected directly and locally to the safety modules. These safety modules perform the work of the otherwise obligatory safety relays and safely shut down the downstream motor starters in accordance with the function selected. The crosslinks required for this are already integrated in the system and need no additional wiring. All signals from the safety modules are automatically relayed as diagnostics signals, e.g. in the event of crossover in the EMERGENCY STOP circuit.

The PM-DFX1 safety module is used for feeding in 1 to 6 shutdown groups. The infeed voltage can be switched using 1 to 6 external safety shutdown devices (either ASIsafe monitors or 3TK28 safety relays).

The highest safety category 4 acc. to EN 954-1 can be obtained with safety motor starters Solutions local. They can thus be used for evaluation of EMERGENCY STOP circuits or for monitoring protective doors and also for time-delayed shutdowns. With the contact multiplier the safety-relevant signals can also be made available to external systems. All standard safety applications can be covered through combination of different TM-PF30 terminal modules. Needless to say, ET 200S motor starters can also be used in conjunction with external safety relays or with ASIsafe. Use of the PM-DFX1 safety module: The PM-DFX1 safety module is used for feeding in 1 to 6 shutdown groups. The infeed voltage can be switched using 1 to 6 external safety shutdown devices (either ASIsafe monitors or 3TK28 safety relays). This safety module is used in applications with external safety shutdown devices where there is a need for the fully selective safety shutdown of Fail-safe motor starters/frequency converters.

This safety module is used in applications with external safety shutdown devices where there is a need for actuating the failsafe functions of the ET200S FC fail-safe frequency converter. The safety functions of the ET 200S FC frequency converter are compliant with Category 3 according to EN 954-1 and with SIL2 according to IEC 61508. Terminal modules for (TM-PF30) Safety Module For supplying load and sensor voltage to the potential bars of the motor starters, and for connection of the 2-channel sensor circuit (e.g. EMERGENCY STOP button) and a reset button. Different terminal modules are available for the configuring of separate safety circuits or for the cascading of safety circuits, and for applications with time-delayed shutdown. Terminal module for (TM-X) Safety Module For connection of an external infeed contactors (2nd shutdown possibility). With terminals for contactor coil and feedback contact. Is always required to terminate a group of safety-oriented motor starters.

With the Safety Motor Starter Solutions local, up to 80 % of wiring is saved compared to conventional safety systems with local safety applications.


5/111




Order No.

PM-D F1 SIGUARD with diagnostics Power module for emergency-off application Monitored start

3RK1 903-1BA00

PM-D F2 SIGUARD with diagnostics Power module for protective door monitoring Automatic start

3RK1 903-1BB00

PM-D F3 SIGUARD with diagnostics Power module for the expansion of PM-D F1/2 for an additional voltage group Time-delayed (0 to 15 s)

3RK1 903-1BD00

PM-D F4 SIGUARD with diagnostics Power module for the expansion of PM-D F1/2 for an additional voltage group

3RK1 903-1BC00

PM-D F5 SIGUARD

3RK1 903-1BE00

SIGUARD power modules

3RK1 903-1BA00

5

with diagnostics Power module for the expansion of PM-D F1 ... 4 with four floating release circuits Contact multipliers

3RK1 903-3DA00

PM-D FX1 With diagnostics Infeed terminal module for feeding in 1 to 6 shutdown groups

3RK1 903-3DA00

F-CM contact multipliers With 4 safe floating contacts

3RK1 903-3CA00

PM-X SIGUARD connection module with diagnostics Module for connecting a safety group and for connecting an external infeed contactor or for connecting to an external safety circuit

3RK1 903-1CB00

F Kit 1 Fail-safe equipment for DS1-x Standard motor starter 1)

3RK1 903-1CA00

F Kit 2 Fail-safe equipment for RS1-x standard motor starter 1)

3RK1 903-1CA01

Accessories

3RK1 903-1CA00

3RK1 903-1CA01

1) The function of the fail-safe kit is already integrated into High Feature motor starters.

5/112





Order No.

Components for safety modules Terminal modules

3RK1 903-1AA00

TM-PF30 S47-B1 For PM-D F1/2 Safety Modules With infeed U1/U2 and sensor connection

3RK1 903-1AA00

TM-PF30 S47-B0 For PM-D F1/2 Safety Modules With sensor connection

3RK1 903-1AA10

TM-PF30 S47-C1 For PM-D F3/4 Safety Modules With infeed U1/U2 and actuation input IN+/IN-

3RK1 903-1AC00

TM-PF30 S47-C0 For PM-D F3/4 Safety Modules With infeed U2

3RK1 903-1AC10

TM-PF30 S47-D0 With PM-D F5 safety module

3RK1 903-1AD10

TM-X15 S27-01 For PM-X safety module

3RK1 903-1AB00

TM-P15-S27-01 terminal module For PM-D power module

3RK1 903-0AA00

5

TM-PFX30 S47-G0/G1 terminal module For PM-D FX1 safety module (infeed terminal module) • Infeed left (TM-PFX30 S47-G0)

3RK1 903-3AE10

• Infeed center (TM-PFX30 S47-G1)

3RK1 903-3AE00

TM-FCM30 S47-F01 terminal module For F-CM contact multiplier

3RK1 903-3AB10


5/113


ET 200S — Safety Motor Starter and Frequency Converter Solutions local / PROFIsafe PROFIsafe Safety Module

■ Overview PM-D F PROFIsafe safety module

NSA0_00435


5

Terminal module for PM-D F PROFIsafe TM-PF30 S47-F0

F-RS1e-x failsafe reversing starter

F-DS1e-x failsafe direct starter Terminal module for F-RS1e-x without TM-FRS130-S31-01 supply connection

Terminal module for F-DS1e-x with TM-FDS65-S32 supply connection Terminal module for F-DS1e-x without TM-FDS65-S31 supply connection PE/N terminal block with M65-PEN-F supply connection

PE/N terminal block without M65-PEN-S supply connection

Interplay of ET 200S safety motor starter Solutions PROFIsafe components

Safety motor starters Solutions PROFIsafe

PM-D F PROFIsafe and Terminal module

Sensor and actuator assignment are freely configurable within the framework of the distributed safety concept: The logic of the safety functions is implemented by software. Safety-oriented PROFIsafe communication and the use of a safety-oriented control system are required.

5/114


Integration of the safety system in the standard automation is realized through a single bus system (see Advantages of PROFIsafe), using PROFIBUS as well as PROFINET. • For the use of Fail-safe motor starters in plants with safety category 2 to 4 acc. to EN 954-1 and SIL 2 and 3 acc. to IEC 61508. The use of Standard or High Feature motor starters is also possible with certain assemblies • High flexibility (any assignment of sensors to motor starters using the PLC) • Full selectivity of disconnection of the Fail-safe motor starters • No complex wiring for conventional safety systems, e.g. no infeed contactors even in the highest safety category • Can also be used in combination with external safety relays • Can also be used to activate external safety systems • Safety module available for any safety function • Safety module available for Stop category 0 and 1 • Safety module for monitoring the auxiliary voltages for motor starters • Safety modules can be plugged into the TM-PF30 terminal modules.



■ Overview (continued) ET 200S FC Fail-safe frequency converter

High degree of flexibility with safety engineering Fail-safe motor starter for PROFIsafe: In EMERGENCY STOP applications, the Fail-safe motor starters are selectively switched off through the upstream safety module PM-D F PROFIsafe. For each safety module, six switch-off groups can be formed. In the first delivery stage, the Fail-safe freely-programmable logic of the SIMATIC controller is used to interface with the relevant Fail-safe sensors. The interface between PROFIsafe and installations that use conventional safety systems is implemented through the Fail-safe Contact Multiplier F-CM with four floating contacts.

SIMATIC failsafe CPU

PROFINET PROFIBUS

Internal control of the fail-safe functions of the frequency converter using interface modules

Example: The diverse possible uses of the safety motor starter Solutions PROFIsafe are presented in the manual SIMATIC ET 200S Motor Starters in the context of typical sample applications.

PM-D F F-DI PROFIsafe

ET 200S FC failsafe

Safety functional examples for easy, quick and low-cost implementations of applications with safety motor starters Solutions local are available on the Internet:

IM 151 High Feature

Additional information is available in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/sirius-starting http://www.siemens.com/ET200S

ET 200S FC failsafe IM 151 High Feature

5

PM-D F PROFIsafe

NSA0_00455

PM-D F PROFIsafe

F-SPS

Interplay of the ET 200S FC frequency converter with PROFIsafe components

ET 200S

Actuation of the ET 200S FC fail-safe frequency converter using PROFIsafe safety-oriented communication is realized with the PM-D F PROFIsafe module. Fail-safe motor starters and frequency converters can be operated together behind a PM-D F PROFIsafe module.

PROFINET PROFIBUS

EMERGENCYSTOP

EMERGENCY Position STOP switch

Motor 1

Motor 2

In safety-oriented applications, the fail-safe functions of the converter are selectively actuated through the upstream PM-D F PROFIsafe safety module. Each safety module supplies a total of six shutdown groups. The fail-safe converter always occupies the sixth switch-off group. One of the remaining shutdown groups 1 to 5 must also be assigned to the converter. The failsafe freely-programmable logic of the SIMATIC controller is used to interface with the relevant fail-safe sensors. For plants with distributed configuration the shutdown signals of these shutdown groups are preferably issued by a higher level, safety-oriented control system through PROFIsafe. This permits the greatest flexibility for assigning the frequency converters to different safety circuits.

Cable-operated switch NSA0_00432a

ET 200S safety motor starter Solutions PROFIsafe with Fail-safe motor starters and fully selective shutdown (PM-DF PROFIsafe application)

Within an ET 200S station the Fail-safe motor starters are assigned to one of 6 safety segments. For plants with distributed configuration the shutdown signals of these safety segments are preferably issued by a higher level, safety-oriented control system through PROFIsafe. This permits the greatest flexibility for assigning the motor starters to different safety circuits.

Alternatively, the PM-D F PROFIsafe can also be actuated using an ET 200S F-CPU. Fastest response times through direct signal processing within the ET 200S are thus possible. .

Alternatively, an ET 200S F-CPU can also be used for control purposes.


5/115



■ Application Solution PROFIsafe safety motor starters

PM-D F safety module PROFIsafe

If a safety-oriented SIMATIC CPU is used, the ET 200S is available as a safety-oriented peripheral. Nevertheless, in such a station it is possible to configure conventional motor starters and input/output modules mixed with modules with safety functions.

The PM-D F PROFIsafe safety module receives the shutdown signal from the interface module of the ET 200S and safely switches off 1 to 6 shutdown groups. This safety module is used in PROFIsafe applications where there is a need for the selective safety shutdown of Fail-safe motor starters/frequency converters.

Thanks to the PROFIsafe profile the safety functions are available in the complete network, which means that the Solution PROFIsafe safety motor starters enable the selective shutdown of a group of Standard, High Feature or Fail-safe motor starters regardless of where and on which peripheral station the safe control devices were connected. As such this solution provides an unprecedented level of flexibility and reduction of wiring for applications in wide-spread plants or with a sporadic demand for changes in the assignment of safety segments. The Solution PROFIsafe safety motor starters are ideally suited for safety concepts with Cat. 2 to 4 acc. to EN 954-1- or up to SIL 3 acc. to IEC 61508.

5

Each safety module switches up to 6 shutdown groups for Fail-safe motor starters/frequency converters.


Order No.

PM-D F PROFIsafe safety modules For PROFIBUS and PROFINET For fail-safe motor starters For fail-safe contact multipliers Six switch-off groups (SG1 to SG6)

3RK1 903-3BA01

F-CM contact multipliers With 4 safe floating contacts

3RK1 903-3CA00

Components for safety module PROFIsafe TM-PF30 S47-F0 terminal module For PM-D F PROFIsafe safety module

3RK1 903-3AA00

TM-FCM30 S47-F01 terminal module For F-CM contact multiplier

3RK1 903-3AB10

Components for frequency converters and fail-safe frequency converters TM-ICU15 terminal modules For ICU24 / ICU24F control module of the frequency converter

5/116

3RK1 903-3EA10

TM-IPM65 terminal modules For IPM25 power section 0.75 kW, of the frequency converter • With incoming energy bus connection (TM-IPM65-S32) • Without incoming energy bus connection (TM-IPM65-S31)

3RK1 903-3EC00

TM-IPM130 terminal modules For IPM25 power section 2.2 kW and 4.0 kW of the frequency converter • With incoming energy bus connection (TM-IPM130-S32) • Without incoming energy bus connection (TM-IPM130-S31)

3RK1 903-3ED00

3RK1 903-3EC10

3RK1 903-3ED10

PE/N terminal blocks M65-PEN-F With supply terminals With caps

3RK1 903-2AC00

Terminal block M65-PEN-S Without incoming energy connection

3RK1 903-2AC10



ET 200S — Components for Motor Starters and Frequency Converters Terminal modules for ET 200S motor starters and frequency converters

■ Overview

■ Application Terminal modules for motor starters and frequency converters Terminal modules are purely mechanical components for accommodating the ET 200S peripherals. The self-assembling voltage buses integrated in the terminal modules reduce wiring work to the single infeed. All modules following on the right are automatically supplied upon plugging the terminal modules together. The robust design and keyed connection technology enables use in harsh industrial conditions. The terminal modules for motor starters and frequency converters are available in different variants: • Terminal modules for TM-DS and TM-RS motor starters • Terminal modules for frequency converters: - TM-ICU for the control module - TM-IPM for the power section • Terminal modules for connection modules (TM-xB) Terminal modules for TM-DS and TM-RS motor starters

Terminal modules for motor starters • Mechanical modules in which the motor starter and expansion modules are inserted • For constructing the permanent wiring and self-assembling voltage bus • For connecting the motor connection cables • Positive-locking connection to ensure enhanced vibration resistance Terminal modules for frequency converters • Mechanical modules in which the components of the frequency converter are inserted • For constructing the permanent wiring and self-assembling voltage bus • For connecting the motor cables • Integral shield connecting elements for the 3 x 10 mm busbar Terminal module for power module • Connection via screw-type terminals • Light-colored enclosure for visual distinction • Always before the first TM-DS/TM-RS

The TM-DS and TM-RS terminal modules are available in various versions for the Standard motor starters and the High Feature motor starters. The terminal modules with the suffix "-S32“; have connection terminals for feeding into the integrated 40A/50A power bus and connection terminals for the motor connection cable. They are mounted at the beginning (left) of a power bus segment. The terminal modules with the suffix "–S31“; have only connection terminals for the motor connection cable. These terminal modules follow on the right after a "–S32“; terminal module. To configure a new load group, another "–S32“; terminal module is plugged in. All connection terminals of the terminal modules for motor starters are equipped with strong 10 mm² terminals. The "–S32“; terminal modules are delivered with three caps for closing the power bus contacts on the final terminal module of a segment. Terminal modules for frequency converters The TM-ICU terminal module is used for both versions of the ICU24 / ICU24F control module. A TM-IPM is then always plugged in after a TM-ICU. The TM-IPM with a width of 65 mm is used to accommodate the IPM25 power section with 0.75 kW. A terminal module with a width of 130 mm is needed for the power sections with 2.2 or 4.0 kW. Each TM-IPM terminal module has a shield attachment for accommodating a shield bar. Hence shielded motor lines can be grounded using shield terminals. The terminal modules with the suffix "-S32“; have connection terminals for feeding into the integrated 50 A power bus and connection terminals for the motor connection cable. They are mounted at the beginning (left) of a power bus segment. The terminal modules with the suffix "-S31“; have only connection terminals for the motor connection cable. These terminal modules follow on the right after a "-S32“; terminal module. To configure a new load group, another "-S32“; terminal module is plugged in. All connection terminals of the terminal modules for frequency converters are equipped with strong 10 mm² terminals. The "-S32“; terminal modules are delivered with three caps for closing the power bus contacts on the final terminal module of a segment.


5/117

5



■ Application (continued) Terminal modules for connection modules (TM-xB)

PE/N terminal block

The TM-xB terminal modules are used to accommodate the xB1, xB2, xB3 and xB4 brake control modules. The TM-terminal module must always follow directly after a terminal module for Standard motor starters, High Feature motor starters or frequency converters as control of the solid-state braking switch is provided through an output of the motor starter/frequency converter. The xB215 terminal modules for the brake control modules have not only the terminals for connecting the line for the motor braking unit but also the terminals of the two local acting inputs. These local inputs are not evaluated by a frequency converter; for this reason the xB215 terminal module may be plugged in only downstream from a motor starter (Technical Specifications, Selection and Ordering Data, see the section "Accessories for Motor Starters and Frequency Converters“).

The PE/N terminal block is required for direct connection of the motor connection cables without intermediate terminals. It is plugged together with the terminal module for motor starters / frequency converters before the latter is mounted on the standard mounting rail. With two PE terminals and one N terminal the "-F“; variant is connected to the "-S32" terminal modules for motor starters / frequency converters. The "-S“; variant is combined with the "-S31“; terminal module. The "F“; terminal modules are delivered with two caps for closing the PE/N bus contacts on the final terminal module of a segment. The modules for the Standard motor starters have a width of 45 mm and the modules for the High Feature motors starters / frequency converters have a width of 65 mm. There is no electrical connection between the terminals of the terminal block PE/N and the internal shielding of the frequency converter. The terminal block PE/N must not be used for the shielding of the motor cable. When wiring the frequency converter according to EMC, the shielding of the motor cable has to be connected by a shielding busbar to the integrated shielding element in the terminal module of the converter. Additionally, when connecting the shielding busbar to the EMC filter, the distance between the two elements has to be as short as possible.

5 ■ Selection and Ordering data Version

Order No.

Components for standard motor starters Terminal moduls • TM-DS45-S32 for DS1-x direct on-line starter with incoming-feeder connection for power bus incl. three caps for terminating the power bus.

3RK1 903-0AB00

• TM-DS45-S31 for DS1-x direct on-line starter, without supply cable connection for power bus

3RK1 903-0AB10

• TM-RS90-S32 for RS1-x reversing starter with supply cable connection for power bus incl. three caps for terminating the power bus

3RK1 903-0AC00

• TM-RS90-S31 for RS1-x reversing starter without supply cable connection for power bus

3RK1 903-0AC10

3RK1 903-0AB00

3RK1 903-0AB10

3RK1 903-0AC00

5/118





Order No.

PE/N M45-PEN-F terminal block 45 mm wide incl. two caps in conjunction with TM-DS45-S32 / TM-RS90-S32

3RK1 903-2AA00

PE/N M45-PEN-S terminal block 45 mm wide in conjunction with TM-DS45-S31 / TM-RS90-S31

3RK1 903-2AA10

3RK1 903-2AA00

3RK1 903-2AA10

5

Components for High Feature motor starters

3RK1 903-0AK00

Terminal modules • TM-DS65-S32 for direct on-line starters DS1e-x, DSS1e-x with supply cable connection for power bus incl. three caps for terminating the power bus • TM-DS65-S31 for direct on-line starters DS1e-x, DSS1e-x without supply cable connection for power bus • TM-RS130-S32 for RS1e-x reversing starter with supply cable connection for power bus incl. three caps for terminating the power bus • TM-RS130-S31 for RS1e-x reversing starter without supply cable connection for power bus

3RK1 903-0AK00

3RK1 903-0AK10

3RK1 903-0AL00

3RK1 903-0AL10

M65-PEN-F power & control module 65 mm wide incl. two caps in conjunction with TM-DS65-S32 / TM-RS130-S32

3RK1 903-2AC00

M65-PEN-S connection module 65 mm wide in conjunction with TM-DS65-S31 / TM-RS130-S31

3RK1 903-2AC10

Components for power modules

3RK1 903-0AA00

TM-P15 S27-01 terminal module for PM-D power module

3RK1 903-0AA00

TM-ICU15 terminal module for ICU24 / ICU24F closed-loop control module of the frequency converter

3RK1 903-3EA10

TM-IPM65 terminal module for IPM25 power section, 0.75 kW of frequency converter • With supply terminals for power bus (TM-IPM65-S32) • Without supply terminals for power bus (TM-IPM65-S31) TM-IPM130 terminal module for IPM25 power section, 2.2 kW and 4.0 kW of frequency converter • With supply terminal for power bus (TM-IPM130-S32) • Without supply terminal for power bus (TM-IPM130-S31)

3RK1 903-3EC00 3RK1 903-3EC10

3RK1 903-3ED00 3RK1 903-3ED10

M65-PEN-F power & control module

3RK1 903-2AC00

M65-PEN-S connection module

3RK1 903-2AC10


5/119


ET 200S — Software Motor Starter ES

■ Overview Motor Starter ES is used for start-up, parameterization, diagnostics, documentation and for preventative maintenance of the High Feature motor starters of the SIMATIC ET 200S and ECOFAST product families. Interfacing is performed • either via the serial device interface (applies to ET 200S / ECOFAST) or • with PROFIBUS DP V1 capable motor starters from any point in PROFIBUS (for ECOFAST). Using Motor Starter ES, the communication-capable motor starters are easily parameterized during start-up, monitored during normal operation and successfully diagnosed for service purposes. Preventative maintenance is supported by a function for reading out diverse statistical data (e.g. operating hours, operating cycles, cut-off currents, etc.). The user is supported during these procedures with comprehensive Help functions and plain text displays.

5

Motor Starter ES for parameterization, visualization, diagnostics and testing of ECOFAST motor starters

Motor Starter ES can either be used as a stand-alone program or it can be integrated into STEP 7 V5.1 SP3 upwards via an object manager. The following components are required for a serial connection: ET200S High Feature motor starters: • 2DI 24V COM control modul 3RK1 903-0CH10 • LOGO! PC cable 6ED1 057-1AA00-0BA0 ET 200pro motor starters: • RS 232 interface cable 3RK1 922-2BP00 ECOFAST High Feature motor starters: • PC cable 3RK1 911-0BN20

5/120



ET 200S — Software Motor Starter ES

■ Ordering data

Order No.

Motor Starter ES 2006 Smart Single license, comprising • Motor Starter ES for parameterizing, monitoring, diagnosing and testing the ECOFAST motor starters, SIMATIC ET 200S High Feature Starters and SIMATIC ET 200pro motor starters over a serial connection - With Online Help German/English selectable - Operating system: Windows 2000/XP • System requirements: - Cable for serial communication through a serial interface - CD-ROM drive

3ZS1 310-1CC10-0YA0

Motor Starter ES 2006 Professional Single license, comprising • Motor Starter ES for parameterizing, monitoring, diagnosing and testing the ECOFAST motor starters, SIMATIC ET 200S High Feature Starters and SIMATIC ET 200pro motor starters over PROFIBUS DP or a serial connection - With Online Help German/English selectable - Operating system: Windows 2000/XP • STEP 7 Object Manager (OM) For integrating the ECOFAST starter as S7 slave in SIMATIC S7 For calling Motor Starter ES from STEP 7

3ZS1 310-2CC10-0YA0

Motor Starter ES 2006 Professional Upgrade Single license, comprising • Upgrade from Switch Motor Starter ES 2004 or Motor Starter ES Smart 2005 to Motor Starter ES 2006 Professional

3ZS1 310-2CC10-0YE0

Order No. Accessories for ET 200S High Feature motor starters Control module 2DI DC 24 V COM Digital input module with 2 inputs for local motor starter functions for mounting onto the front of motor starters Operatinal voltage 24 V DC (supplied from U1), short-circuit proof, floating contact with serial interface for connecting to Motor Starter ES Connected using LOGO! PC cable, max. cable length (out and back) 50 m

3RK1 903-0CH10

LOGO! PC cable For connecting the high feature motor starter with Motor Starter ES interface to a PC

6ED1 057-1AA00-0BA0

Accessories for ET 200pro motor starters RS 232 interface cable For serial data connection between an ET 200pro motor starter and a laptop/PC/PG

5

3RK1 922-2BP00

Accessories for ECOFAST High Feature motor starters (interface cable) PC cable

3RK1 911-0BN20


5/121


ET 200S — Software

STARTER drive/commissioning software

■ Overview In addition, the following functions are available for optimization purposes: • Self-optimization • Trace (depending on drive) Diagnostics functions provide information about: • Control/Status Words • Parameter status • Operating conditions • Communication states

5

The easy-to-use STARTER drive/commissioning software can be used to: • Start up • Optimize and • Diagnostics. This software can be operated either as a standalone PC application or can be integrated into the SCOUT engineering system (on SIMOTION) or STEP 7 (with Drive ES Basic). The basic functions and handling are the same regardless. In addition to the SINAMICS drives, the current version of STARTER also supports MICROMASTER 4 devices and inverters for the SIMATIC ET 200S FC distributed I/O system. The project wizards can be used to create the drives within the structure of the project tree. Beginners are supported by solution-based dialog guidance, whereby a standard graphics-based display maximizes clarity when setting the drive parameters. First commissioning is guided by wizards, which make all the basic settings in the drive. This ensures that even though only a small number of parameter settings have been made, the drive configuration has already progressed far enough to permit axis movement. The individual settings required are made using graphics-based parameterization screen forms, which also display the mode of operation. Examples of individual settings that can be made include: • terminals • bus interface • Setpoint channel (e.g. fixed setpoints) • Closed-loop speed control (e.g. ramp-function generator, limits) • BICO interconnections • Diagnosis Experts can gain rapid access to the individual parameters via the Expert List and do not have to navigate dialogs.

5/122


Performance features • Easy to use: Only a small number of settings need to be made for successful first commissioning: axis turning • Solution-based dialog-based user guidance simplifies commissioning • Self-optimization functions reduce manual effort for optimization • The built-in trace function provides optimum support during commissioning, optimization and troubleshooting. Minimum hardware and software requirements Programming device or PC with Pentium™ II 400 MHz (Windows™ 2000), Pentium™ III 500 MHz (Windows™ XP) 256 MB RAM (512 MB recommended) Monitor resolution, 1024×768 pixels Windows™ 2000 SP3, XP Professional SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01

■ Integration A PROFIBUS communications module and a connecting cable are required to make the communication link between the PG/PC and a control unit. For example, PROFIBUS communications module CP 5512 (PCMCIA type 2 card + adapter with 9-pin SUB-D socket for connection to PROFIBUS). For Windows 2000/XP Professional and PCMCIA 32) Order No.: 6GK1551-2AA00 and connecting cable between CP 5512 and PROFIBUS Order No.: 6ES7901-4BD00-0XA0 PC converter connecting sets are available for MICROMASTER 4, SINAMICS G110 and SINAMICS G120 for a safe point-to-point connection to the PC. Order No. for MICROMASTER 4: 6SE6400-1PC00-0AA0 (the scope of supply includes a 9-pin Sub-D connector and an RS232 standard cable, 3 m) Order No. for SINAMICS G110 and SINAMICS G120: 6SL3255-0AA00-2AA1 (the scope of supply includes a 9-pin Sub-D connector and an RS232 standard cable, 3 m, and the STARTER startup tool on CD-ROM)

■ Ordering data STARTER commissioning tool for SINAMICS and MICROMASTER German / English / French / Italian

Order No. 6SL3072-0AA00-0AG0


ET 200iSP Introduction

■ Overview • Fail-safe distributed I/O system to degree of protection IP30 for use in hazardous gaseous and dusty areas, i.e. in Zones 1 and 2 as well as 21 and 22 • Sensors and actuators can also be situated directly in Zone 0 or 20. • Individual configuration and flexible expansion with the modular design for optimization to the respective automation task • Independent wiring enables prewiring without the electronics connected • Optimized for integration into process control systems (e.g. SIMATIC PCS 7) • Parameters can be assigned using SIMATIC PDM • Optimal integration of HART field devices (HART transparency) • Connection to PROFIBUS DP via isolating transformers • Module replacement (hot swapping) and configuration expansion (Configuration in Run) possible during operation • Extensive diagnostics possibilities • Condensation-proof modules in temperature range -20 °C … +60 °C • Full redundancy of PROFIBUS and power supply

■ Application The ET 200iSP distributed I/O system has degree of protection IP30. It is used wherever explosion protection for gases and dusts is required in compliance with CENELEC: II 2 G (1) GD EEx d e [ib/ia] IIC T4. The ET 200iSP system has been designed in accordance with the 94/9/EG guideline which must be complied with when new devices for potentially explosive atmospheres are introduced onto the European market. The design of the system allows it to be used under high mechanical loads i.e. on oil platforms. The system consists of terminal modules to which the corresponding functional units such as the power supply, interface module and electronic modules are connected. This modular design ensures optimal adaptation to the plantspecific installation requirements in potentially explosive atmospheres. This ensures fast hot-swapping of individual functional units. In the case of a fault, only small parts of the plant are affected since only a few channels are processed in a module. Using an ET 200iSP station can save significant costs compared with a conventional design. Isolating stages and sub-distribution boards are no longer required and the cabling outlay is reduced since the station functions in a similar way to a local modular terminal. Commissioning and troubleshooting are simplified by the comprehensive diagnosis options. In addition to the analog input modules and analog output modules with and without HART functionality, the existing product range of I/O modules also includes digital I/O modules whose functionalities are configurable. The system has been designed to function optimally with SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC PCS 7. It can also be used with other process control systems and SIMATIC S5 via an interface using a GSD file.


5/123

5


ET 200iSP Introduction

■ Design

■ Function

A distributed I/O station (= Remote I/O) ET 200iSP comprises: • A terminal module for the power supply unit as well as the associated power supply module to the EX d degree of protection (flameproof enclosure) • A terminal module for the PROFIBUS interface as well as the associated interface module IM 152 In the case of a single PROFIBUS interface, another slot is available on the terminal module for an electronics module. If the PROFIBUS interface is implemented redundantly, a terminal module is available that can carry two IM 152 modules. • Up to 32 terminal modules for the electronics modules as well as the digital and analog electronics modules that can be plugged into them. One terminal module can accept up to 2 electronics modules. • One terminating module that is included in the scope of supply of the IM 152.

5

The stations are connected together on an S7-300 rail in accordance with the above list starting with the terminal module of the power supply unit, followed by the terminal module for the PROFIBUS interface followed by the required terminal modules for the electronics modules. When the terminal modules are mounted, the wiring can be completed and tested without the need for electronics modules. The appropriate electronics modules are plugged onto the terminal modules. The inserted electronics modules are mechanically coded initially to prevent inadvertent swapping later. No tools are required for mounting the terminal modules and electronics modules. The maximum configuration is limited by the 32 electronics modules, which corresponds to a maximum station length of 107 cm. The maximum possible number of modules can be limited as a result of the power consumption of the modules used. Up to 16 modules can be used without constraints, for a larger number, the planning rules must be taken into account. PROFIBUS must be routed intrinsically safe into the hazardous area through a suitable fieldbus isolating transformer (RS 485IS coupler). The 24 V connection to the power supply terminal is routed through EX e terminals. This connection is not permitted to be removed under Ex conditions. The feeder power supply must be installed in the safe area. Installation in an EX e housing with at least degree of protection IP54 is a requirement for use in explosion-hazard areas. Accessories: The following accessories are available for the ET 200iSP: • Pre-perforated DIN A4 labeling sheets for electronic modules in various colors, machine-printable • Slot number plate for identification of terminal modules

Operating mode Through PROFIBUS DP (up to 1.5 Mbit/s), a central PLC can access the electronic modules of the ET 200iSP station just like a central I/O module. Communication is handled by the master interface in the central PLC and the interface module of the ET 200iSP (= IM 152-1). The diagnostics integrated in the system reduce startup and debugging times. The physical bus setup for devices in hazardous areas requires special protective measures. The method of the intrinsically safe PROFIBUS has been selected for ET 200iSP. This demands segmentation and power limiting on the bus (PROFIBUS RS 485-IS). A commercially available "Fieldbus isolating transformer" (RS 485IS coupler) is used for this purpose. It can be installed in areas up to Zone 2. This converts the PROFIBUS DP to an intrinsically safe PROFIBUS RS 485-IS, which allows modules to be plugged and pulled – even under potentially explosive conditions. Configuration An ET 200iSP station can be connected to higher level PLCs as a DP V0 or DP V1 slave. In an S7/ PCS 7 environment, configuration and parameterization of an ET 200iSP station is executed using SIMATIC STEP 7 hardware manager. This defines the station design (which module where). This software is opened by double-clicking one of the implemented modules/stations. Software requirements • SIMATIC STEP 7, Version 5.3 + SP1 incl. Hardware Support Package (HSP) • SIMATIC PCS 7, Version V6.1 • For configuring HART field devices, the current version of the PDM configuring software is required. Configuring in non-Siemens systems and older PCS 7/STEP 7 versions In all other applications, the configuration of the station must be relayed to the PROFIBUS DP network through the GSD file. In this case, parameterization is carried out through PDM, whereby a comparison of the configuration between PDM and GSD file is not possible. It is not possible to commission an ET 200iSP without the PDM configuration software. The parameters of this module can then be defined in the PDM dialog fields, such as alarm limits for analog modules, sensor selection for digital modules, settings for the release of analog values and the output of HART commands for analog HART modules.

■ Technical specifications – general Degree of protection

IP30

Ambient temperature

- 20 °C to + 70 °C

Vibration-proof

permanent: 0.5 g, intermittent: 1 g

Standards and approvals

5/124


• PROFIBUS

EN 50170, Volume 2

• EU directive

94/9/EG (ATEX 100a)

• CENELEC

II 2 G (1) GD EEx d e [ib/ia] IIC T4

• IEC

IEC 61131, Part 2

• CE

According to 89/336/EEC and 73/23/EEC


ET 200iSP

IM 152-1 interface module

■ Overview • The IM 152 interface module is plugged onto the corresponding terminal module TM-IM/EM (to be ordered separately). For redundant operation, two IM 152 are used. They are plugged onto the TM-IM/IM. • The interface module IM 152 has the following properties: - connects the ET 200iSP to PROFIBUS DP - prepares data for the fitted electronic modules - the PROFIBUS address of ET 200iSP can be adjusted by switch - slot for MMC - firmware updating over PROFIBUS DP or MMC • Shutting down the 24 V DC supply voltage at the terminal module TM-PS also shuts down the interface module IM 152. • The maximum address size is 244 byte inputs and 244 byte outputs.

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 152-1AA00-0AB0 Current consumption

Time stamping


30 mA

Power loss, typ.

0.5 W

interfaces interface physics, RS 485

Description

per digital input per digital input module entire ET 200iSP

Accuracy

20 ms

Yes

Number of stampable digital inputs, max.

64; for accuracy class 20 ms

Yes

Time format

RFC 1119 Internet (ISP)

Time resolution

1 ms


5

6ES7 152-1AA00-0AB0


1.5 Mbit/s; 9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500 kbauds

Time interval for transmitting the message buffer if a message is present

1,000 ms

SYNC capability

Yes

Time stamp on signal change

FREECE capability

Yes

rising/falling edge as event entering or exiting state


Yes; Slave to slave as publisher


No


Yes

• Acyclic function, interrupts

Yes

• Acyclic function, parameter

Yes


Yes

Diagnostics indication LED • Bus error BF (red)

Yes


Yes


Isolation between supply voltage and electronics

Yes

Standards, approvals, certificates CE symbol

Yes

Type of protection to EN 50020 (CENELEC)

II2 G EEx ib IIC T4

Type of protection to KEMA

04 ATEX 1243

General information Vendor identification (VendorID)

8110H


30 mm

Height

129 mm

Depth

136.5 mm


245 g


5/125


ET 200iSP


■ Technical specifications (continued) Standards, approvals, certificates CE symbol

6ES7 193-7AA10-0AA0

6ES7 193-7AB00-0AA0

No

No

No


no

no

no

Test number KEMA

04 ATEX 2242

04 ATEX 2242

04 ATEX 2242


60 mm

60 mm

60 mm

Height

190 mm

190 mm

190 mm

Depth

52 mm

52 mm

52 mm


235 g

235 g

195 g

■ Ordering data

5

6ES7 193-7AA00-0AA0

Order No.

• ET 200iSP-IM 152-1

6ES7 152-1AA00-0AB0

Terminal modules for IM 152 • TM-IM/EM60S

6ES7 193-7AA00-0AA0

• TM-IM/EM60C

6ES7 193-7AA10-0AA0

• TM-IM/IM

6ES7 193-7AB00-0AA0

Accessories ET 200iSP product manual • German

6ES7 152-1AA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 152-1AA00-8BA0

Plug connector PROFIBUS connector with active terminating resistor For RS 485-IS circuit; 1.5 Mbit/s

6ES7 972-0DA60-0XA0

RS 485-IS segment Isolating transition for coupling PROFIBUS DP to PROFIBUS RS 485-IS

6ES7 972-0AC80-0XA0

Sheet of labels DIN A4, perforated, consisting of 10 sheets each with 30 labels for electronic modules and 20 labels for IM 152 • petrol

6ES7 193-7BH00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 193-7BD00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 193-7BB00-0AA0

• light beige

6ES7 193-7BA00-0AA0

Identification labels, inscribed Order quantity 1 set of 200 of each color for slot numbering • 10 x slot 1 to 2

8WA8 861-0AB

• 5 x slot 1 to 40

8WA8 861-0AC

• 1 x slot 1 to 64 2 x slot 1 to 68

8WA8 861-0DA

Identification labels, blank Order quantity 1 set of 200 of each color for slot numbering

8WA8 848-2AY

Standard rails S7-300 Standard rail 585 mm

6ES7 390-1AF85-0AA0

Standard rail 885 mm

6ES7 390-1AJ85-0AA0

5/126



IM 152 including the terminating module

Stainless steel housing IP66 for hazardous Zone 1 with safety class EEx e Empty housing with no modules installed, for use in gaseous atmospheres, IP65 (IP54 if a breather gland is used) • Wall housing 650 x 450 x 230 for the installation of up to 15 ET 200iSP modules, for use in gaseous atmospheres, with 3 rows of cable glands M16 (41 pieces) and 2 rows of cover plugs

6DL2 804-0AD30

• Wall housing 650 x 450 x 230 for the installation of up to 15 ET 200iSP modules for use in gaseous atmospheres with 5 rows of cable glands M16 (66 pieces)

6DL2 804-0AD50

• Wall housing 950 x 450 x 230 for the installation of up to 25 ET 200iSP modules, for use in gaseous atmospheres, with 3 rows of cable glands M16 (68 pieces) and 2 rows of cover plugs

6DL2 804-0AE30

• Wall housing 950 x 450 x 230 6DL2 804-0AE50 for the installation of up to 25 ET 200iSP modules for use in gaseous atmospheres with 5 rows of cable glands M16 (111 pieces) Empty housing with no modules installed, for use in dusty atmospheres, IP65 • Wall housing 650 x 450 x 230 for the installation of up to 15 ET 200iSP modules, for use in dusty atmospheres, with 3 rows of cable glands M16 (41 pieces) and 2 rows of cover plugs

6DL2 804-0DD30

• Wall housing 650 x 450 x 230 for the installation of up to 15 ET 200iSP modules for use in dusty atmospheres with 5 rows of cable glands M16 (66 pieces)

6DL2 804-0DD50

• Wall housing 950 x 450 x 230 for the installation of up to 25 ET 200iSP modules, for use in dusty atmospheres, with 3 rows of cable glands M16 (68 pieces) and 2 rows of cover plugs

6DL2 804-0DE30


6DL2 804-0DE50


ET 200iSP


■ Ordering data

Order No.

Order No.



Housing with ET 200iSP modules installed, for use in gaseous atmospheres, IP65 (IP54 when using a breather gland), the ET 200iSP components must be ordered separately

Housing with modules installed, for use in dusty atmospheres, IP65, the ET 200iSP components must be ordered separately


6DL2 804-1AD30


6DL2 804-1AD50


6DL2 804-1AE30


6DL2 804-1AE50


6DL2 804-1DD30


6DL2 804-1DD50


6DL2 804-1DE30


6DL2 804-1DE50


5

5/127


ET 200iSP

ET 200iSP digital electronic modules and terminal modules

■ Overview • The electronic modules are plugged into the associated terminal modules that must be ordered separately (with screw-type or spring-loaded terminals). • When plugged in, the modules are automatically uniquely coded mechanically. • Modules can be replaced under potentially explosive conditions during runtime.

5

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 131-7RF00-0AB0 Digital inputs Number of NAMUR inputs

8

6ES7 131-7RF00-0AB0 Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Alarms


200 m

Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) • for standard inputs - at "0" to "1", min. - at "0" to "1", max. - at "1" to "0", min. - at "1" to "0", max.

• Diagnostic alarm


• Process alarm

No

Diagnoses 2.8 µs 3.5 µs 2.8 ms 3.5 µs


Yes

• Diagnostic information readable

Yes

• Short circuit

Yes; R load < 150 ohms with NAMUR sensor/sensor and NAMUR changeover contact/sensor to DIN 19234

Encoder Number of connectable encoders, max.

8

Connectable encoders • NAMUR encoder


Yes

NAMUR encoder

Yes


No

2.1 mA


Yes

Frequency meter

Yes

between different circuits

Frequency measurement

Yes; (GATE time) 50 ms; 200 ms; 1 s

• Input current, for signal "0", max.

1.2 mA

• Input current, for signal "1", min. Integrated Functions

Number of frequency meters

Permissible potential difference

2

Counters Number of counter inputs Input frequency, max.

2; normal and periodic count function 5 kHz; at cable length 20 m 5 kHz; cable length 100 m 1 kHz; cable length 200 m 500 Hz

60 V DC, 30 V AC


Yes


II2 G (1) GD EEx ib[ia] IIC T4


04 ATEX 1248


30 mm

Height

129 mm

Depth

136.5 mm


5/128


255 g


ET 200iSP


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 132-7RD01-0AB0

6ES7 132-7RD11-0AB0

6ES7 132-7RD21-0AB0


340 mA

300 mA

400 mA


10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

Power loss, typ.

2.5 W

2.1 W

2.8 W

Address area Address space per module • without packing

2 Byte

2 Byte

2 Byte


4

4

4


200 m

200 m

200 m


200 m

200 m

200 m

Yes

Yes 17.4 V

Digital outputs

Short-circuit protection of the output Yes No-load voltage Uao (DC)

23.1 V

17.4 V

Internal resistor Ri

275 Ω

150 Ω

Trend key points E • Voltage Ue (DC) • Current Ie

17.1 V 20 mA

13.2 V 27 mA

11 V 40 mA; 80 mA when outputs connected in parallel

• "0" to "1", max.

2 ms

2 ms

2 ms

• "1" to "0", max.

1.5 ms

1.5 ms

1.5 ms

Parallel switching of 2 outputs • for increased power

No

Yes

Yes

Switching frequency • with resistive load, max. • with inductive load, max.

100 Hz 2 Hz

100 Hz 2 Hz

100 Hz 2 Hz

70 °C

70 °C

70 °C

Yes

No Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes

• Wire break • Short circuit

Yes Yes;R< 800 ohms (one output), R< 40 ohms (outputs connected in parallel)

Yes Yes

Yes Yes; R< 800 ohms (one output), R< 40 ohms (outputs connected in parallel)

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

CE symbol

Yes

Yes

Yes






30 mm

30 mm

30 mm

Height

129 mm

129 mm

129 mm

Depth

136.5 mm

136.5 mm

136.5 mm


255 g

255 g

255 g


Ex(i) characteristics Max. values of output circuits (per channel) • Ta (permissible ambient temperature), max. Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Alarms • Alarms • Diagnostic alarm Diagnoses

Diagnostics indication LED • Collective error SF (red) • Status indicator digital output (green) Standards, approvals, certificates


5/129

5


ET 200iSP


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 132-7GD00-0AB0

6ES7 132-7GD10-0AB0

6ES7 132-7GD20-0AB0


340 mA

300 mA

400 mA


10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

Power loss, typ.

2.5 W

2.1 W

2.8 W

Address area Address space per module • without packing

2 Byte

2 Byte

2 Byte


4

4

4


200 m

200 m

200 m


200 m

200 m

200 m

Yes

Yes

17.4 V

17.4 V

150 Ω

150 Ω

Short-circuit protection of the output Yes No-load voltage Uao (DC)

5

23.1 V

Internal resistor Ri Trend key points E • Voltage Ue (DC) • Current Ie

17.1 V 20 mA

13.2 V 27 mA; 54 mA when outputs connected in parallel

40 mA; 80 mA when outputs connected in parallel

Output delay with resistive load • "0" to "1", max. • "1" to "0", max.

2 ms 1.5 ms

2 ms 1.5 ms

2 ms 1.5 ms


No

Yes

Yes

Switching frequency • with resistive load, max. • with inductive load, max.

100 Hz 2 Hz

100 Hz 2 Hz

100 Hz 2 Hz

70 °C

70 °C

70 °C

Yes

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes

• Wire break

Yes

Yes

Yes

• Short circuit

Yes

Yes; R< 800 ohms (one output), R< 40 ohms (outputs connected in parallel)

Yes; R< 800 ohms (one output), R< 40 ohms (outputs connected in parallel)


Yes

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes

CE symbol

Yes

Yes

Yes





Width

30 mm

30 mm

30 mm

Height

129 mm

129 mm

129 mm

Depth

136.5 mm

136.5 mm

136.5 mm

255 g

255 g

255 g

Ex(i) characteristics Max. values of output circuits (per channel) • Ta (permissible ambient temperature), max. Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Alarms • Diagnostic alarm Diagnoses





5/130



ET 200iSP


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 193-7CA00-0AA0

6ES7 193-7CA10-0AA0

CE symbol

No

No


no

no

Test number KEMA

04 ATEX 2242

04 ATEX 2242

Width

60 mm

60 mm

Height

190 mm

190 mm

Depth

52 mm

52 mm

275 g

275 g




■ Ordering data

Order No.

Digital input module 8 DI NAMUR 8 x DI NAMUR

6ES7 131-7RF00-0AB0

Digital output module 4 DO 23.1 V DC /20 mA

6ES7 132-7RD01-0AB0


6ES7 132-7RD11-0AB0

Digital output module 4 DO 17.4 V DC /40 mA 4 x DO; 1 additional intrinsically safe input for "H" shut-off

Order No. Accessories • German

6ES7 152-1AA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 152-1AA00-8BA0

6ES7 132-7RD21-0AB0

Connectors PROFIBUS connector with active termination resistor For RS 485-IS circuit; 1.5 Mbit/s

6ES7 972-0DA60-0XA0


6ES7 132-7GD00-0AB0


6ES7 132-7GD10-0AB0

RS 485-IS Coupler Isolating transformer for coupling from PROFIBUS DP and PROFIBUS RS 485-IS

Digital output module 4 DO 17.4 V DC /40 mA 4 x DO; 1 additional intrinsically safe input for "L" shut-off

6ES7 132-7GD20-0AB0

TM-EM/EM60S Terminal module E60S (screw-type terminal)

6ES7 193-7CA00-0AA0

TM-EM/EM60C Terminal module E60S (spring-loaded terminal)

5

ET 200iSP product manual

6ES7 193-7CA10-0AA0

6ES7 972-0AC80-0XA0

Labeling sheet DIN A4, perforated, each consisting of 10 sheets of 30 strips each, used for electronic modules and 20 strips, used for IM 151 • petrol

6ES7 193-7BH00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 193-7BD00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 193-7BB00-0AA0

• light beige

6ES7 193-7BA00-0AA0

Labels, inscribed Ordering unit 1 set with 200 pieces each for slot numbering • 10 x slots 1 to 2

8WA8 861-0AB

• 5 x slots 1 to 40

8WA8 861-0AC

Labels, blank Ordering unit 1 set with 200 pieces each for slot numbering

8WA8 848-2AY

S7-300 rail Standard rail 585 mm

6ES7 390-1AF85-0AA0


6ES7 390-1AJ85-0AA0


5/131


ET 200iSP


■ Ordering data (continued)


Stainless steel enclosure IP66 for Ex-Zone 1 in protection class EEx e,

Enclosure with installation of ET 200iSP modules for use in gaseous area, IP65 (IP54 when using an air-conditioning nozzle), ET 200iSP components must be ordered separately

Empty housing without installation of modules, for use in gaseous area, IP65 (IP54 when using an airconditioning nozzle)

5

Order No.


• Wall housing 650 x 450 x 230, for installation of max. 15 ET 200iSP modules, for use in gaseous area, with 3 rows of M16 cable glands (41 pieces) and 2 rows of blanking plugs

6DL2 804-0AD30

• Wall housing 650 x 450 x 230, for installation of max. 15 ET 200iSP modules, for use in gaseous area, with 5 rows of M16 cable glands (66 pieces)

6DL2 804-0AD50


6DL2 804-0AE30


6DL2 804-0AE50

• Wall housing 650 x 450 x 230, for installation of max. 15 ET 200iSP modules, for use in dusty area, with 3 rows of M16 cable glands (41 pieces) and 2 rows of blanking plugs

6DL2 804-0DD30

• Wall housing 650 x 450 x 230, for installation of max. 15 ET 200iSP modules, for use in dusty area, with 5 rows of M16 cable glands (66 pieces)

6DL2 804-0DD50

• Wall housing 950 x 450 x 230, for installation of max. 25 ET 200iSP modules, for use in dusty area, with 3 rows of M16 cable glands (total 68 pieces) and 2 rows of blanking plugs

6DL2 804-0DE30


6DL2 804-0DE50


6DL2 804-1AD30


6DL2 804-1AD50


6DL2 804-1AE30


6DL2 804-1AE50

Enclosure with installation of modules, for use in dusty area, IP65, the ET 200iSP components must be ordered separately

Empty housing without installation of modules, for use in dusty area, IP65

5/132



6DL2 804-1DD30


6DL2 804-1DD50


6DL2 804-1DE30


6DL2 804-1DE50


ET 200iSP

ET 200iSP analog electronic modules and terminal modules

■ Overview • The electronic modules are plugged into the associated terminal modules that must be ordered separately (with screw-type or spring-loaded terminals). • When plugged in, the modules are automatically uniquely coded mechanically. • Modules can be replaced under potentially explosive conditions during runtime.

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 134-7SD00-0AB0

6ES7 134-7SD50-0AB0

6ES7 134-7TD00-0AB0

6ES7 134-7TD50-0AB0

Voltages and currents Voltage supply to the transducers • short-circuit proof

Yes

• Feed current, max.

23 mA; per channel

Current consumption from supply voltage L+, max.

30 mA

22 mA

320 mA

30 mA

Power loss, typ.

0.4 W

0.4 W

2.7 W

0.4 W


4

4

4

4


50 m

200 m

200 m

200 m

90 mA

50 mA

Yes

Yes

• Current

Yes

Yes

• 4 to 20 mA

Yes

Yes; min. 295 ohms

Analog inputs

permissible input current for current input (destruction limit), max. technical unit for temperature measurement, adjustable

Yes

Yes


Yes

• -80 mV to +80 mV

Yes


1,000 kΩ

Input ranges (rated values), currents


5/133

5


ET 200iSP


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 134-7SD00-0AB0

5

Input ranges (rated values), thermoelements • thermocouple • Type B • Input resistance (Type B) • Type C • Input resistance (Type C) • Type E • Input resistance (Type E) • Type J • Input resistance (type J) • Type K • Input resistance (Type K) • Type L • Input resistance (Type L) • Type N • Input resistance (Type N) • Type R • Input resistance (Type R) • Type S • Input resistance (Type S) • Type T • Input resistance (Type T) • Type U • Input resistance (Type U)

6ES7 134-7SD50-0AB0

6ES7 134-7TD00-0AB0

6ES7 134-7TD50-0AB0

Yes Yes 1,000 kΩ Yes 1,000 kΩ Yes 1,000 kΩ Yes 1,000 kΩ Yes 1,000 kΩ Yes 1,000 kΩ Yes 1,000 kΩ Yes 1,000 kΩ Yes 1,000 kΩ Yes 1,000 kΩ Yes 1,000 kΩ


Yes


0.6 kΩ

Input ranges (rated values), resistance thermometers • Resistance thermometer

Yes

• Ni 100

Yes


2,000 kΩ

• Pt 100

Yes


2,000 kΩ


Yes

• for thermoelements

Yes

• for thermoresistor Temperature compensation • external temperature compensation with compensations socket

Yes Yes


Yes; via temperature value, acquired by an analog module of the same ET 200iSP-station Yes; via supplied TC sensor module






16 Bit

16 Bit

13 Bit

12 Bit; + sign

Yes 80 ms at 50 Hz; 66 ms at 60 Hz 5

Yes 80 ms at 50 Hz; 66 ms at 60 Hz 5

No

Yes 30

50 Hz and 60 Hz

50 and 60 Hz

50 and 60 Hz

50 and 60 Hz

Integrations and conversion time/resolutionper channel • Resolution with overload area (bit including sign), max. • Integration time, parameterizable • Basic conversion time, including integration time, ms • additional conversion time for wire break monitoring • Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz

5/134



ET 200iSP



6ES7 134-7SD50-0AB0

6ES7 134-7TD00-0AB0

6ES7 134-7TD50-0AB0

• parameterizable

Yes; in 4 stages

Yes; in 4 stages

Yes; in 4 stages

Yes; in 4 stages

• Level: none

Yes; 1 x cycle time

Yes; 1 x cycle time

Yes; 1 x cycle time

Yes; 1 x cycle time

• Level: weak

Yes; 4x cycle time

Yes; 4 x cycle time

Yes; 4x cycle time

Yes; 4x cycle time

• Level: middle





• Level: strong






Encoder Connection of signal encoders • for current measurement as 2-wire transducer

Yes

• for current measurement as 4-wire transducer

Yes


Yes


Yes


Yes

5 750 Ω

• Burden of 2-wire transmitter, max. Errors/accuracies Linearity error (relative to input area)

+/- 0.015 %

+/- 0.015 %

+/- 0.015 %

+/- 0.015 %


+/- 0.02 %

+/- 0.02 %

+/- 0.005 %/K

+/- 0.005 %/K


-50 dB

-50 dB

-50 dB

-50 dB


+/- 0.01 %

+/- 0.01 %

+/- 0.01 %

+/- 0.01 %

+/- 0.15 %

+/- 0.15 %

+/- 0.1 %

+/- 0.1 %

70 dB

70 dB


+/- 0.15 %

• Current, relative to input area • Resistance-type thermometer, relative to input area

+/- 0.15 %

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C) • Voltage, relative to input area

+/- 0.1 %

• Current, relative to input area • Resistance-type thermometer, relative to input area

+/- 0.1 %

Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (fl +/- 1 %), fl = interference frequency • Series mode interference (peak value of interference < rated value of input range), min.

70 dB

70 dB

• common mode voltage, min.

90 dB

90 dB






• Limit value alarm





Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Alarms

Diagnoses • Diagnostic information readable • Wire break

Yes

• Short circuit Diagnostics indication LED • Collective error SF (red)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


5/135


ET 200iSP



6ES7 134-7SD50-0AB0

6ES7 134-7TD00-0AB0

6ES7 134-7TD50-0AB0


Yes; functional

Yes

No

No


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

CE symbol

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes



II2 G (1) GD Eex ib[ia] IIC T4




04 ATEX 1246

04 ATEX 1247

04 ATEX 1244

04 ATEX 1245

Width

30 mm

30 mm

30 mm

30 mm

Height

129 mm

129 mm

129 mm

129 mm

Depth

136.5 mm

136.5 mm

136.5 mm

136.5 mm

230 g

230 g

230 g

230 g

Isolation Isolation, analog inputs



5


6ES7 135-7TD00-0AB0 Current consumption from load voltage1L+, max.

330 mA

Power loss, max.

2.7 W

Analog outputs

6ES7 135-7TD00-0AB0 Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Substitute values connectable

Yes

Alarms • Diagnostic alarm

Yes

Diagnoses • Diagnostic information readable

Yes Yes Yes

Number of analg outputs

4


200 m

• 4 to 20 mA

Yes


Yes



750 Ω


Yes

Isolation • between the channels

No

Analog value creation Integrations and conversion time/resolutionper channel • Resolution with overload area (bit including sign), max.

14 Bit


4 ms


40 ms


40 ms



Yes


Errors/accuracies Linearity error (relative to output area)


+/- 0.015 % +/- 0.005 %/K


04 ATEX 1250


30 mm

Height

129 mm

Depth

136.5 mm


265 g

Crosstalk between the outputs, min. -50 dB Repeat accuracy in settled status at 25 °C (relative to output area)

+/- 0.15 %

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C) • Current, relative to output area

6ES7 1937CA10-0AA0

CE symbol

No

No


no

no

Test number KEMA

04 ATEX 2242

04 ATEX 2242

Width

60 mm

60 mm

Height

190 mm

190 mm

Depth

52 mm

52 mm

275 g

275 g


Operational limit in overall temperature range • Current, relative to output area

6ES7 1937CA00-0AA0

+/- 0.01 %

+/- 0.1 %



5/136



ET 200iSP


■ Ordering data

Order No.

4 AI I 2WIRE HART

6ES7 134-7TD00-0AB0

4 AI I 4WIRE HART

6ES7 134-7TD50-0AB0

4 AI RTD

6ES7 134-7SD50-0AB0

4 AI TC

6ES7 134-7SD00-0AB0

Analog output modules 4 AO I HART

6ES7 135-7TD00-0AB0

Terminal modules TM-EM/EM60S Terminal module E60S (screw-type terminals)

6ES7 193-7CA00-0AA0

TM-EM/EM60C Terminal module E60C (spring-loaded terminals)

6ES7 193-7CA10-0AA0

Accessories ET 200iSP product manual • German

6ES7 152-1AA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 152-1AA00-8BA0


6ES7 972-0DA60-0XA0



Analog input modules

6ES7 972-0AC80-0XA0

Sheet of labels DIN A4, perforated, consisting of 10 sheets each with 30 labels for electronic modules and 20 labels for IM 151

Stainless steel housing IP66 for hazardous Zone 1 with safety class EEx e Empty housing with no modules installed, for use in gaseous atmospheres, IP65 (IP54 if a breather gland is used) • Wall housing 650 x 450 x 230 for the installation of up to 15 ET 200iSP modules, for use in gaseous atmospheres, with 3 rows of cable glands M16 (41 pieces) and 2 rows of cover plugs

6DL2 804-0AD30


6DL2 804-0AD50


6DL2 804-0AE30


6DL2 804-0AE50

5

Empty housing with no modules installed, for use in dusty atmospheres, IP65

• petrol

6ES7 193-7BH00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 193-7BD00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 193-7BB00-0AA0

• light beige

6ES7 193-7BA00-0AA0

Identification labels, inscribed Order quantity 1 set of 200 of each color for slot numbering • 10 x slot 1 to 2

8WA8 861-0AB

• 5 x slot 1 to 40

8WA8 861-0AC


8WA8 848-2AY


6ES7 390-1AF85-0AA0


6ES7 390-1AJ85-0AA0


6DL2 804-0DD30


6DL2 804-0DD50


6DL2 804-0DE30


6DL2 804-0DE50


5/137


ET 200iSP


■ Ordering data

5

Order No.

Order No.






6DL2 804-1AD30


6DL2 804-1AD50


6DL2 804-1AE30


6DL2 804-1AE50

5/138



6DL2 804-1DD30


6DL2 804-1DD50


6DL2 804-1DE30


6DL2 804-1DE50


ET 200iSP

ET 200iSP reserve module and terminal modules

■ Overview

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 138-7AA00-0AA0 Standards, approvals, certificates CE symbol

Yes


II2 G EEx ib IIC T4

Test number KEMA

04 ATEX1251


30 mm

Height

129 mm

Depth

136.5 mm


• The reserve module is plugged onto the relevant terminal module (to be ordered separately; screw-type or springloaded connection). • Modules can be replaced under potentially explosive conditions during runtime.

180 g

6ES7 1937CA00-0AA0

6ES7 1937CA10-0AA0

CE symbol

No

No


no

no

Test number KEMA

04 ATEX 2242

04 ATEX 2242

Width

60 mm

60 mm

Height

190 mm

190 mm

Depth

52 mm

52 mm

275 g

275 g

5




■ Ordering data Reserve module

Order No. 6ES7 138-7AA00-0AA0

Terminal modules TM-EM/EM60S Terminal module E60S (screw-type terminals)

6ES7 193-7CA00-0AA0

TM-EM/EM60C Terminal module E60C (spring-loaded terminals)

6ES7 193-7CA10-0AA0

Order No. Accessories (continued) Sheet of labels DIN A4, perforated, consisting of 10 sheets each with 30 labels for electronic modules and 20 labels for IM 151 • petrol

6ES7 193-7BH00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 193-7BD00-0AA0

Accessories

• yellow

6ES7 193-7BB00-0AA0

ET 200iSP product manual

• light beige

6ES7 193-7BA00-0AA0

• German

6ES7 152-1AA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 152-1AA00-8BA0

Identification labels, inscribed Order quantity 1 set of 200 of each color for slot numbering


6ES7 972-0DA60-0XA0


6ES7 972-0AC80-0XA0

• 10 x slot 1 to 2

8WA8 861-0AB

• 5 x slot 1 to 40

8WA8 861-0AC


8WA8 848-2AY


6ES7 390-1AF85-0AA0


6ES7 390-1AJ85-0AA0


5/139


ET 200iSP

ET 200iSP reserve module and terminal modules

■ Ordering data


Stainless steel housing IP66 for hazardous Zone 1 with safety class EEx e


Empty housing with no modules installed, for use in gaseous atmospheres, IP65 (IP54 if a breather gland is used)

5

Order No.



6DL2 804-0AD30


6DL2 804-0AD50


6DL2 804-0AE30


6DL2 804-0AE50


6DL2 804-0DD30


6DL2 804-0DD50


6DL2 804-0DE30


6DL2 804-0DE50


6DL2 804-1AD30


6DL2 804-1AD50


6DL2 804-1AE30


6DL2 804-1AE50


Empty housing with no modules installed, for use in dusty atmospheres, IP65

5/140



6DL2 804-1DD30


6DL2 804-1DD50


6DL2 804-1DE30


6DL2 804-1DE50


ET 200iSP

ET 200iSP power supply unit

■ Overview

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 138-7EA01-0AA0 Voltages and currents Mains/voltage failure jumpering, min.

0.25 ms; for powerbus and backplane bus 15ms for IM 152


24 V


Yes

Current consumption from supply voltage L+, max.

4A

Power loss, typ.

20 W

Ex(i) characteristics Max. values of input circuits (per channel) • Um (fault voltage), max.

The power supply (PS) is plugged into the associated terminal module TM-PS-A or TM-PS-B (with redundancy; to be ordered separately). The power supply unit fulfills the following functions: • It provides reliable isolated power supply for the ET 200iSP with the necessary operating voltages for - logic (through the backplane bus) - PROFIBUS DP interface of IM 152-1 - powerbus (for supplying the electronic modules) • Takes over the safety limit of the output voltage • Has an explosion-proof metal enclosure (explosion protection EEx d) • Can be redundantly configured

250 V; AC

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Status indicator

5

Yes

Alarms • Alarms

No


Yes; via IM 152


No

Isolation tested with • between all secondary voltages

no electrical isolation

• between supply voltage and all secondary voltages

600V DC

Isolation primary/secondary

Yes


No


Yes


Ex de [ib]IIC T4


04 ATEX 2263


60 mm

Height

190 mm

Depth

136.5 mm


2,700 g


5/141


ET 200iSP

ET 200iSP power supply unit

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 1937DA10-0AA0

■ Ordering data 6ES7 1937DB10-0AA0


Yes


II2 G (1) GD II2 G (1) GD EEx de[ia/ib] IIC EEx de[ia/ib] IIC T4 T4

Yes

Test number KEMA

04 ATEX 2242

04 ATEX 2242

Width

60 mm

60 mm

Height

190 mm

90 mm

Depth

52 mm

52 mm

235 g

235 g



5

5/142


Order No.

Power supply module PS

6ES7 138-7EA01-0AA0

Terminal module TM-PS-A Standard

6ES7 193-7DA10-0AA0

Terminal module TM-PS-B for redundant operation

6ES7 193-7DB10-0AA0


ET 200iSP

RS 485-IS coupler

■ Overview • Coupler for conversion from PROFIBUS DP to PROFIBUS RS 485-IS intrinsically safe (Intrinsically Safe i type of protection) • Required to connect intrinsically safe PROFIBUS DP stations (e.g. ET 200iS, ET 200iSP) and all third party devices which have an Ex i DP interface

• Can also be implemented as a repeater in hazardous areas • Acts as a safety barrier • Passive bus stations, configuration is not necessary

■ Technical specifications Dimensions and weight

Status, alarms, diagnostics

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

80 x 125 x 130

Status display

No

Weight

approx. 500 g

Alarms

None

Diagnostic functions

Yes

• Bus monitoring PROFIBUS DP (primary)

Yellow LED "DP1"

Technical specifications – General Degree of protection

IP20

Ambient temperature

-20 °C ... +60 °C

• Bus monitoring PROFIBUS RS 485-IS (secondary)

Yellow LED "DP2"

• PROFIBUS

IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1

• Monitoring 24 V power supply

Green LED "ON"

• EU directive

94/9/EG (ATEX 100a)

• CENELEC

II 3 (2) G EEx nA[ib] IIC T4

• UL und CSA

Class I, Division2, Group A, B, C, D T4 Class I Zone 2, Group IIC T4 AIS Class I, Divison 1, Group A, B, C, D [Aexib] IIC, Class I, Zone1, 2, Group IIC

• FM

Class I, Division2, Group A, B, C, D T4 Class I Zone 2, Group IIC T4 AIS Class I, Divison 1, Group A, B, C, D [Aexib] IIC, Class I, Zone1, 2, Group IIC

Technical safety notice • VDC • ISC • P0 • Vmax • LI • Ci • Um • Ta

±4.2 V ±93 mA 0.1 W ±4.2 V 0 0 250 V AC –25 ... +60 °C

RS 485-IS- segment Permitted cable length on a single line

RS 485–IS

DP Ex i

• 9,6 ... 187.5 kbit/s

1,000 m

200 m

IEC 61131-2, Part 2

• 500 kbit/s

400 m

200 m

Conforming with 89/336/EWG Conforming with 73/23/EWG

• 1.5 Mbit/s

200 m

200 m

Number of PROFIBUS DP nodes that can be connected, max.

31

16

PROFIBUS RS 485-IS bus termination switch

integrated, can be added

Standards and approvals

• IEC • CE • Ship-building certification

Classification companies • ABS (American Bureau of Shipping) • BV (Bureau Veritas) • DNV (Det Norske Veritas) • GL (Germanischer Lloyd) • LRD (Lloyds Register of Shipping) • Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)

Module-specific specifications Data transmission rate on PROFIBUS DP, PROFIBUS RS 485-IS

9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500 kbit/s 1.5 Mbit/s

Bus protocol

PROFIBUS DP

5

Voltages, currents, potentials Nominal supply voltage for RS 485-IS coupler

24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)

• Polarity reversal protection

Yes

• Voltage drop bypass

Min. 5 ms

Potential isolation for 24 V power supply • to PROFIBUS DP - tested with • to PROFIBUS RS 485-IS - tested with

Yes 500 V DC Yes 500 V AC

Current consumption RS 485-IS coupler (24 V DC), max.

150 mA

Power loss of the module, typically

3 Watts


5/143


ET 200iSP

RS 485-IS coupler

■ Ordering data RS 485-IS segment Isolating transition for coupling PROFIBUS DP to PROFIBUS RS 485-IS

Order No. 6ES7 972-0AC80-0XA0

Accessories PROFIBUS connector with passive terminating resistance

6ES7 972-0DA30-0XA0

PROFIBUS connector with active terminating resistor For RS 485-IS circuit; 1.5 Mbit/s

6ES7 972-0DA60-0XA0

PROFIBUS plug connector For the intrinsically safe PROFIBUS, 1.5 Mbit/s

6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0

Sectional rail

5

• 160 mm

6ES7 390-1AB60-0AA0

• 482 mm

6ES7 390-1AE80-0AA0

• 530 mm

6ES7 390-1AF30-0AA0

• 830 mm

6ES7 390-1AJ30-0AA0

• 2000 mm

6ES7 390-1BC00-0AA0

PROFIBUS Fast Connect bus line Standard type specially designed for snap-on mounting, 2-core, shielded, sold by the meter; maximum length supplied 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

6XV1 830-0EH10

5/144



ET 200pro Introduction

■ Overview

■ Design The tried and tested separation of module and bus/power connection technology, which has already been used for the ET 200eco, is now also used for the digital and analog expansion modules of the ET 200pro. For the interface module this allows use of the T-functionality for the bus and 24 V power supply, and for the expansion modules it permits pre-wiring of sensor/actuator connections. This permanent wiring allows exactly one electronics module to be hot-swapped in the event of a fault without having to switch off the whole station. It can continue to operate fault-free while the module is being replaced. This ensures very high plant availability. When an electronics component is replaced, the whole I/O wiring can remain on the connecting module and does not have to be marked or removed. Modules

• Distributed I/O system with degree of protection IP65/67 for cabinet-free use at the machine. • Small, multifunctional complete solution: Digital inputs/ outputs, fail-safe modules, motor starters up to 5.5 kW, etc. • Communication over PROFIBUS or PROFINET • Mixed arrangement of fail-safe and standard modules in the same station • Freely selectable connection technique: Direct, ECOFAST or M12 7/8" • Power module for easy implementation of load groups • Module replacement during operation (hot swapping) • Easy installation as well as permanent wiring • Data transmission rates of up to 12 Mbit/s • Extensive diagnostics: Module-specific or channel-specific • Intelligent motor starters for starting and protection of motors and loads up to 5.5 kW - Versions: Direct and reversing starters – Standard and HighFeature • Fail-safe modules with safety-related signal processing according to PROFIsafe

■ Application SIMATIC ET 200pro is the new modular I/O system with high degree of protection IP65/66/67 for local, cabinetless applications. ET 200pro distinguishes itself through a small frame size and an innovative installation concept. ET 200pro can be optimized and very flexibly adapted to the requirements of the corresponding automation task with respect to the connection method, required I/Os and fieldbus connection. New features such as the integrated PROFIsafe safety technology, the PROFINET interface and the ability to hotswap modules permit it to be used for a wide range of applications. With the integrated motor starters, conveyor applications can be implemented optimally, or drives of up to 5.5 kW can be controlled without control cabinet.

The modules of the ET 200pro usually have two or three components. Interface and power modules as well as digital and analog expansion modules comprise: • One bus connector which constitutes the backplane bus of the system • One electronics module or interface module • One connecting module A backplane bus module is required for operation of motor starters. A station is constructed from: • One rack • One interface module for PROFIBUS DP • One connecting module for the interface module for PROFIBUS DP - CM IM DP direct with up to 6 M20 screwed cable glands - CM IM DP ECOFAST Cu (available soon) - CM IM DP M12, 7/8" (available soon) Or optionally • One interface module for PROFINET IO (available soon) with integrated M12 7/8" connection system • Max. 16 expansion modules that can be mounted in stations up to 1 m in width Expansion modules The following expansion modules are available: • Digital I/Os • Analog inputs • Analog outputs (available soon) • Connecting modules IO - CM IO 4x M12 for digital or analog electronic modules - CM IO 8x M12 for digital electronic modules • Electronic power modules (available soon) • Connecting modules for power modules - CM PM-E directly with up to 2 M20 screwed cable glands - CM PM-E ECOFAST Cu - CM PM-E 7/8” • Motor starter


5/145

5


ET 200pro Introduction


■ Technical specifications – General

Rack

Electronics modules

Two different racks are available for mounting the ET 200pro: • Narrow rack The narrow rack supports complete pre-assembly on the workbench by means of two mounting flanges outside of the ET 200pro station.

Motor starter

• Digital inputs/outputs • Analog inputs • Analog outputs (available soon)

Cables and connections

M12 circular connector with standard assignment for actuator/sensor

Transmission rate, max.

12 Mbit/s (PROFIBUS DP), 100 Mbit/s (PROFINET IO)

Supply voltage

24 V DC

Current consumption of one ET 200pro (internal and encoder supply, non-switched voltage), up to 55 °C, max.

≤5A

Current consumption of one 10 A ET 200pro per infeed (IM, PM, switched voltage, up to 55 °C, max.)

5 • Compact rack When the compact rack is used, the small footprint of the ET 200pro system can be used to best advantage.

For overall configuration with l ooping through (several ET 200pro), up to 55 °C, max.

16 A (with connecting module, directly)


IP65/66/IP67 for interface, digital and analog modules

Material

Thermoplastic (reinforced with glass fiber)

Ambient conditions Temperature

from 0 ... 55 °C (-25 °C on request)

Relative humidity

from 5 to 100%

Atmospheric pressure

from 795 to 1080 hPa

Mechanical stress • Vibrations

Vibration test conforming to IEC 60068, Part 2-6 (sinusoidal) • Constant acceleration 5 g, occasionally 10 g for interface, digital and analog modules • 2 g motor starters

■ Function The SIMATIC ET 200pro is easily configured with STEP 7. A GSD file is available for interfacing with systems of other manufacturers.

5/146


• Shock

• Shock test according to IEC 680068 Part 2 - 27, halfsine, 30 g, 18 ms duration for interface, digital and analog modules • 15 g, 11 ms duration for motor starters

Approvals

UL, CSA or cULus


ET 200pro

IM 154-1 and IM 154-2 interface modules

■ Overview Interface modules for handling communication between the ET 200pro and the higher-level master over PROFIBUS DP.


6ES7 1542AA00-0AB0

Supply voltages

6ES7 1541AA00-0AB0

6ES7 1542AA00-0AB0

Process alarm

parameterizable

parameterizable

Supply voltage of electronics 1L+ • Rated value (DC)

24 V

24 V

Swapping interrupt


Yes; over exchangeable fuses


parameterizable

parameterizable

Hot swapping of modules

possible

possible

Yes; against destruction


Yes

Yes

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Diagnostics indication LED • Bus error BF (red) • Collective error SF (red) • Monitoring 24 V voltage supply ON (green) • Load voltage monitoring DC 24 V (green)

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes; integrated power module

Yes

500 V DC

500 V DC


No

No

Yes

Yes

• reverse polarity protection Rated value • DC 24 V


20.4 V


28.8 V

28.8 V

200 mA

200 mA

Current consumption from supply voltage 1L+, max.

Isolation

Address area

Isolation checked with Isolation

Adressing volume • Outputs

244 Byte

244 Byte

• Inputs

244 Byte

244 Byte


Yes

Yes

Type of interface

PROFIBUS DP

PROFIBUS DP

Environmental requirements Operating termperature • min. • max.

-25 °C 55 °C

-25 °C 55 °C

Physics

RS 485

RS 485

Storage/transport temperature • min. • max.

-40 °C 70 °C

-40 °C 70 °C

Degree and class of protection • IP 65 • IP 66 • IP 67

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes


90 mm

90 mm

Height

130 mm

130 mm

Depth

59.3 mm

59.3 mm


395 g

415 g

PROFIBUS DP automatic detection of transmission speed 1st interface

Functionality • DP slave

Yes

Yes

DP slave • Services - SYNC/FREEZE - direct data exchange (cross traffic)

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

• Transmission speeds, min.

9.6 kBit/s

9.6 kBit/s


12 Mbit/s

12 Mbit/s

DPV1 operation

possible

possible

Diagnostic alarm

parameteriable

parameteriable

Parameter


5/147

5


ET 200pro


■ Ordering data

Order No.

IM 154-1 interface module For ET 200pro; for communication between ET 200pro and higherlevel masters over PROFIBUS DP

6ES7 154-1AA00-0AB0

IM 154-2 High Feature interface module For ET 200pro; for communication between ET 200pro and higherlevel masters over PROFIBUS DP; support of PROFIsafe

6ES7 154-2AA00-0AB0

Accessories

5

CM IM DP ECOFAST connecting module For connecting PROFIBUS DP and the 24 V power supply to PROFIBUS interface modules, 2 ECOFAST Cu connections

6ES7 194-4AA00-0AA0

CM IM DP direct connecting module For connecting PROFIBUS DP and the 24 V power supply directly to the PROFIBUS interface modules, up to six M20 screwed cable glands

6ES7 194-4AC00-0AA0

CM IM DP M12, 7/8" connecting module For connecting PROFIBUS DP and the 24 V power supply to PROFIBUS interface modules, 2 x M12 and 2 x 7/8"

6ES7 194-4AD00-0AA0

Accessories for CM IM DP ECOFAST PROFIBUS ECOFAST hybrid cable, pre-assembled With 2 ECOFAST connectors, trailing-type cable 2 x CU 0.64 mm2 and 4 x Cu 1.5 mm2

Order No. PROFIBUS ECOFAST hybrid cable GP, pre-assembled With 2 ECOFAST connectors, trailing-type cable 2 x CU 0.64 mm2 and 4 x Cu 1.5 mm2 • 1.5 m long

6XV1 860-3PH15

• 3 m long

6XV1 860-3PH30

• 5 m long

6XV1 860-3PH50

• 10 m long

6XV1 860-3PN10

• 15 m long

6XV1 860-3PN15

• 20 m long

6XV1 860-3PN20

• 25 m long

6XV1 860-3PN25

• 30 m long

6XV1 860-3PN30

• 35 m long

6XV1 860-3PN35

• 40 m long

6XV1 860-3PN40

• 45 m long

6XV1 860-3PN45

• 50 m long

6XV1 860-3PN50

PROFIBUS ECOFAST hybrid cable, non-assembled Trailing-type cable 2 x CU 0.64 mm2 and 4 x Cu 1.5 mm2 • 50 m long

6XV1 830-7AN50

• 100 m long

6XV1 830-7AT10

PROFIBUS ECOFAST hybrid cable GP, non-assembled Trailing-type cable 2 x CU 0.64 mm2 and 4 x Cu 1.5 mm2 • 50 m long

6XV1 860-4PN50

6XV1 830-7BH15

• 100 m long

6XV1 860-4PT10

• 3 m long

6XV1 830-7BH30

• 5 m long

6XV1 830-7BH50

• 10 m long

6XV1 830-7BN10

PROFIBUS ECOFAST hybrid connector 180 ECOFAST Cu, 2 x Cu, 4 x 1.5 mm2,, HANBRID connector

• 15 m long

6XV1 830-7BN15

• with male insert, 5 per pack

6GK1 905-0CA00

• 20 m long

6XV1 830-7BN20


6GK1 905-0CB00

• 25 m long

6XV1 830-7BN25

• 30 m long

6XV1 830-7BN30

• 35 m long

6XV1 830-7BN35

PROFIBUS ECOFAST hybrid connector angular ECOFAST Cu, 2 x Cu, 4 x 1.5 mm2,, HANBRID connector

• 40 m long

6XV1 830-7BN40


6GK1 905-0CC00

• 45 m long

6XV1 830-7BN45


6GK1 905-0CD00

• 50 m long

6XV1 830-7BN50

ECOFAST covering cap For protecting unused bus connections for ET 200pro; 10 items per pack

6ES7 194-1JB10-0XA0

• 1.5 m long

Accessories for CM IM DP direct

5/148


PROFIBUS trailing cable Max. acceleration 4 m/s2, at least 3000000 bending cycles, bending radius 60 mm, 2-core shielded, sold by the meter, minimum order quantity 20 m, maximum order quantity 1000 m

6XV1 830-3EH10

PROFIBUS FC Food bus cable With PE sheath for use in the food and beverages industry, 2-core, shielded, sold by the meter, minimum order quantity 20 m, maximum order quantity 1000 m

6XV1 830-0GH10


ET 200pro


■ Ordering data

Order No.

PROFIBUS FC Robust bus cable With PUR sheath for use under conditions of extreme mechanical stress and aggressive chemicals, 2-core, shielded, sold by the meter, minimum order quantity 20 m, maximum order quantity 1000 m

6XV1 830-0JH10

PROFIBUS Hybrid standard cable 5-core, 5 x 1.5 mm2, trailing type, sold by the meter, minimum order quantity 20 m, maximum order quantity 1000 m

6XV1 860-2R

Order No. General accessories ET 200pro rack • Narrow, for interface, electronics and power modules

PROFIBUS FC Robust bus cable With PUR sheath for use under conditions of extreme mechanical stress and aggressive chemicals, 2-core, shielded, sold by the meter, minimum order quantity 20 m, maximum order quantity 1000 m

6XV1 860-2S

Power cable 5-core, 5 x 1.5 mm2, trailing type, sold by the meter, minimum order quantity 20 m, maximum order quantity 1000 m

6XV1 830-8AH10

- 500 mm

6ES7 194-4GA00-0AA0

- 1000 mm

6ES7 194-4GA10-0AA0


6ES7 194-4GA20-0AA0


6ES7 194-4GC00-0AA0

- 1000 mm

6ES7 194-4GC10-0AA0


6ES7 194-4GC20-0AA0

• Wide, for interface, electronics, power modules and motor starters

Accessories for CM IM DP M12 7/8“ PROFIBUS M12 connecting cable Pre-assembled with two M12 connectors, 5-pin • 1.5 m long

6XV1 830-3DH15

• 2 m long

6XV1 830-3DH20

• 3 m long

6XV1 830-3DH30

• 5 m long

6XV1 830-3DH50

• 10 m long

6XV1 830-3DN10

• 15 m long

6XV1 830-3DN15


6XV1 822-5BH15

• 2 m long

6XV1 822-5BH20

• 3 m long

6XV1 822-5BH30

• 5 m long

6XV1 822-5BH50

• 10 m long

6XV1 822-5BN10

• 15 m long

6XV1 822-5BN15

M12 cable connector For ET 200eco, with axial cable outlet • with male insert, 5 per pack

6GK1 905-0EA00


6GK1 905-0EB00

7/8" cable connector For ET 200eco, with axial cable outlet • with male insert, 5 per pack

6GK1 905-0FA00


6GK1 905-0FB00

M12 covering cap For protection of unused M12 connections with ET 200pro

3RX9 802-0AA00

Sealing cap 7/8" For protecting unused 7/8" connections for ET 200pro; 10 items per pack

6ES7 194-3JA00-0AA0

- 500 mm

6ES7 194-4GB00-0AA0

- 1000 mm

6ES7 194-4GB10-0AA0


6ES7 194-4GB20-0AA0


6ES7 194-4HB00-0AA0

Technical product data For CAX applications, one-off license

6ES7 991-0CC00-0YX0

Technical product data For CAX applications, one-off license, update service

6ES7 991-0CC00-0YX2


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


5

5/149


ET 200pro


■ Overview Interface module for processing the communication between ET 200pro and a higher-level controller over PROFINET IO.

5

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 154-4AB00-0AB0 Supply voltages Supply voltage of electronics 1L+ • Rated value (DC)

24 V




6ES7 154-4AB00-0AB0 Status information/alarms/ diagnostics


Diagnostics indication LED • Bus error BF (red)

Yes


Yes


Rated value • DC 24 V

Yes


• Load voltage monitoring DC 24 V (green)



28.8 V


Power loss, typ.

4.5 W

Memory Memory Yes

Address area Adressing volume • Outputs

256 Byte

• Inputs

256 Byte

Protocols PROFINET IO

Isolation 500 V DC

Isolation


• Micro Memory Card

Yes

Yes

PROFINET IO Transmission speed, max.

100 Mbit/s; full duplex


Yes

Services

Network management functions, network diagnostics (SNMP), ping, arp


Yes


Yes


-25 °C

• max.

55 °C

Storage/transport temperature • min.

-40 °C

• max.

70 °C

Degree and class of protection • IP 65

Yes

• IP 66

Yes

• IP 67

Yes


90 mm

Height

130 mm

Depth

71 mm


5/150


480 g


ET 200pro


■ Ordering data IM 154-4 PN High Feature interface module For communication between ET 200pro and higher-level controllers over PROFINET IO; support of PROFIsafe

Order No. 6ES7 154-4AB00-0AB0

7/8" cable connector For ET 200eco, with axial cable outlet

Accessories M12 covering cap


3RX9 802-0AA00

For protection of unused M12 connections with ET 200pro Micro Memory Card, 3.3 V, NFLASH • 64 KB

6ES7953-8LF11-0AA0

• 128 KB

6ES7953-8LG11-0AA0

• 512 KB

6ES7953-8LJ11-0AA0

• 2 MB

6ES7953-8LL11-0AA0

• 4 MB

6ES7953-8LM11-0AA0

• 8 MB

6ES7953-8LP11-0AA0

IE M12 connecting cables Pre-assembled with two M12 connectors • 0.3 m long

6XV1 870-8AE30

• 0.5 m long

6XV1 870-8AE50

• 1 m long

6XV1 870-8AH10

• 1.5 m long

6XV1 870-8AH15

• 2 m long

6XV1 870-8AH20

• 3 m long

6XV1 870-8AH30

• 5 m long

6XV1 870-8AH50

• 10 m long

6XV1 870-8AN10

• 15 m long

6XV1 870-8AN15


6XV1 822-5BH15

• 2 m long

6XV1 822-5BH20

• 3 m long

6XV1 822-5BH30

• 5 m long

6XV1 822-5BH50

• 10 m long

6XV1 822-5BN10

• 15 m long

6XV1 822-5BN15

Power cables 5-core, 5 x 1.5 mm2, trailing type, sold by the meter, minimum order quantity 20 m, maximum order quantity 1000 m

6XV1 830-8AH10


6GK1 905-0FA00


6GK1 905-0FB00

7/8“-Power T-Tap PRO energy-t-connector for ET200 with 2 7/8"socket inserts and one 7/8"pin insert, 5 pieces per packaging unit

6GK1 905-0FC00


6XV1 840-2AH10

6XV1 840-3AH10

5

6XV1 870-2D

6XV1 870-2F

6XV1 840-4AH10

IE M12 Plug PRO Cabinet bushing for transfer of M12 connection method (d coded, IP65) to RJ45 connection method (IP20) • 1 piece

6GK1 901-0DB10-6AA0

• 8 pieces

6GK1 901-0DB10-6AA8

IE Panel Feedthrough M12 plug connector suitable for on-site assembly (d coded), metal housing, rapid connection method for SCALANCE X208PRO and IM 154-4 PN • 1 package = 5 pieces

6GK1 901-0DM20-2AA5


5/151


ET 200pro


■ Ordering data

Order No.

General accessories ET 200pro rack • Narrow, for interface, electronics and power modules - 500 mm

6ES7 194-4GA00-0AA0

- 1000 mm

6ES7 194-4GA10-0AA0


6ES7 194-4GA20-0AA0


6ES7 194-4GC00-0AA0

- 1000 mm

6ES7 194-4GC10-0AA0


6ES7 194-4GC20-0AA0

• Wide, for interface, electronics, power modules and motor starters

5

- 500 mm

6ES7 194-4GB00-0AA0

- 1000 mm

6ES7 194-4GB10-0AA0


6ES7 194-4GB20-0AA0

5/152


Order No. Spare fuse 12.5 A quick-response, for interface and power modules, 10 items per package unit

6ES7 194-4HB00-0AA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


ET 200pro

EM 141 and EM 142 digital expansion modules

■ Overview • Expansion modules with digital inputs/outputs for connection of actuators/sensors • With scalable diagnostics - standard modules with module-specific diagnostics - high Feature modules with channel-specific diagnostics and parameterizable input delay or process interrupts (DI, up to 6 channels) • Double or single assignment can be implemented for each M12 in the case of the 8DI and 8DO module by selecting CM IO 4 x M12 or CM IO 8 x M12

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 1414BF00-0AA0

6ES7 1414BF00-0AB0

6ES7 1414BF00-0AA0

6ES7 1414BF00-0AB0

Supply voltages

Input voltage

Rated value

• Rated value, DC

24 V

24 V

Yes

• for signal "0"

-3 to +5 V

-3 to +5 V


20.4 V

• for signal "1"

13 to 30 V

11 to 30 V


28.8 V

28.8 V

Input current 7 mA

7 mA


Yes; against destruction; encoder power supply outputs applied with reversed polarity

Yes; against destruction; load increasing


20 mA

40 mA


20 mA

20 mA

Power loss, typ.

2.5 W

2.5 W

• DC 24 V

Yes

• for signal "1", typ. Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) • for standard inputs - programmable

No

Yes

- at "0" to "1", min.

1.2 ms

0.5 ms; 0.5 ms/ 3 ms/ 15 ms/ 20 ms

- at "0" to "1", max.

4.8 ms

20 ms

- at "1" to "0", min.

1.2 ms

0.5 ms; 0.5 ms/ 3 ms/ 15 ms/ 20 ms

- at "1" to "0", max.

4.8 ms

20 ms

8

8

1A

1A

• 2-wire BEROS

Yes

Yes


• permissible quiescent current (2wire BEROS), max.

1.5 mA

1.5 mA

• all mounting positions - up to 55 °C, max.

Diagnostic alarm

Yes

Cable length

Process alarm

for 6 channels


30 m

30 m


channel by channel


30 m

30 m


Yes

No


No

Yes

Current consumption

Address area Occupied address area • Inputs

1 Byte

1 Byte

Encoder supply

FH technology

Number of outputs

Module for fail-safe applications

Output current

No

No

Isochronous mode


Isochronous mode

Encoder

No

No

Connectable encoders


8

8

Parameter 8

8


Sensor supply to M; module by module

channel by channel


5/153

5


ET 200pro


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 1414BF00-0AA0

6ES7 1414BF00-0AB0



5


No

No


Yes

Yes

75 V DC/ 60 V AC

75 V DC/ 60 V AC

Galvanic isolation, digital inputs Yes

Yes

• Wire break

• Short circuit

6ES7 1414BF00-0AB0

Isolation


6ES7 1414BF00-0AA0

Yes; Sensor supply to M; module by module

Yes; channel by channel, parameterizable Yes


Yes; Monitoring, I < 0.3 mA

Degree and class of protection

Yes

• IP 65

Yes

Yes

• IP 66

Yes

Yes

• IP 67

Yes

Yes




Yes

Yes

Width

45 mm

45 mm


Yes; per channel

Yes; per channel

Height

130 mm

130 mm

Depth

35 mm

35 mm; without terminal module

500 V DC

500 V DC

140 g

140 g



6ES7 142-4BD00-0AA0

6ES7 142-4BD00-0AB0

6ES7 142-4BF00-0AA0


24 V

24 V

24 V


Yes; per channel, electronic







from load voltage 2L+ (without load), max.

20 mA

40 mA

30 mA


20 mA

40 mA

30 mA

Power loss, typ.

2W

2.5 W

2W

• with packing

4 Bit

4 Bit

8 Bit

• without packing

1 Byte

1 Byte

1 Byte

No

No

No


4

4

8


30 m

30 m

30 m


30 m

30 m

30 m



Voltages and currents Load voltage 2L+

Current consumption


FH technology Module for fail-safe applications Digital outputs

Short-circuit protection of the output Yes; per channel, electronic • Response threshold, typ.

3

3

0.7


2L+ (- 47 V)

2L+ (- 47 V)

2L+ (- 47 V)

Lamp load, max.

10 W

10 W

5W


Yes

Yes

Yes; Isolation between 1L+ and 2L+ is no longer provided, as 1M and 2M are jumpered

2L+ (- 0.8 V)

2L+ (- 0.8 V)

2L+ (- 0.8 V)


5/154



ET 200pro



6ES7 142-4BD00-0AB0

6ES7 142-4BF00-0AA0

2A

2A

0.5 A

0.5 mA

0.5 mA


• for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.5 mA Parallel switching of 2 outputs • for increased power

No

No

No


Yes

Yes

Yes


100 Hz

100 Hz

100 Hz


0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz


1 Hz

1 Hz

1 Hz

4A

4A

4A

• lower limit

12 Ω

12 Ω

48 Ω

• upper limit

4 kΩ

4 kΩ

4 kΩ

Switching frequency

Aggregate current of the outputs (per group) • up to 55 °C, max. Load impedance range

5

Parameter Diagnosis: wire break

channel by channel


channel by channel


channel by channel


Yes


Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


Yes; short-circuit of outputs to M; module by module

Yes

Yes; short-circuit of outputs to M; module by module


Yes

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes


• Channel error indicator F (red)

Yes


500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC


Yes

between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Isolation, digital outputs • between the channels

No

No

No


Yes

Yes

Yes


75 V DC/60 V AC


45 mm

45 mm

45 mm

Height

130 mm

130 mm

130 mm

Depth

35 mm

35 mm; without terminal module

35 mm

140 g

140 g

140 g



5/155


ET 200pro


■ Ordering data

5

Order No.

Order No.

8 DI digital input module 24 V DC, with module-specific diagnostics, including bus module. Connecting module must be ordered separately

6ES7 141-4BF00-0AA0

Accessories 6ES7 194-4CA00-0AA0

8 DI High Feature digital input module 24 V DC, with channel-specific diagnostics, including bus module Connecting module must be ordered separately

6ES7 141-4BF00-0AB0

CM IO 4 x M12 connecting module 4 M12 sockets for connecting digital or analog sensors or actuators to ET 200pro CM IO 8 x M12 connecting module 8 M12 sockets for connecting digital sensors or actuators to ET 200pro

6ES7 194-4CB00-0AA0

4 DO digital output module 24 V DC, 2 A, with module-specific diagnostics, including bus module. Connecting module must be ordered separately

6ES7 142-4BD00-0AA0

Module identification labels For color coding of the CM IOs in the colors of white, red, blue and green; pack with 100 units each

6ES7 194-4HA00-0AA0

3RX9 802-0AA00

6ES7 142-4BD00-0AB0


3RT1 900-1SB20

6ES7 142-4BF00-0AA0

Inscription labels 20 x 7, pale turquoise, 340 items per pack M12 connector, can be assembled in the field 5-pin, for connecting digital sensors and actuators, 1 unit

On request

4 DO High Feature digital output module 24 V DC, 2 A, with channel-specific diagnostics, including bus module. Connecting module must be ordered separately 8 DO digital output module 24 V DC, 0,5 A, with module-specific diagnostics, including bus module. Connecting module must be ordered separately

M12 connecting cable With PUR sheath, for connecting digital sensors and actuators, pre-assembled, with connector and socket at each end

5/156


• 3 x 0.34 mm2, fixed lengths, 1 unit - 0.6 m - 1m - 1.5 m

On request On request On request


On request On request On request


ET 200pro

EM 144 and EM 145 analog expansion modules

■ Overview • Expansion modules with analog inputs and outputs for connecting sensors/actuators • With diagnostics functionality, limit values and substitute values

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 144-4FF00-0AB0

6ES7 144-4GF00-0AB0

6ES7 144-4JF00-0AB0


24 V

24 V

24 V






10 mA

10 mA

10 mA; typically

Power loss, typ.

1.1 W

1.1 W

0.7 W

8 Byte

8 Byte

8 Byte


4

4

4


30 m

30 m

30 m

5


Current consumption

Address area Address space per module • Address space per module, max. Analog inputs

permissible input frequency for volt- 35 V age input (destruction limit), max. permissible input current for current input (destruction limit), max.

40 mA

Constant measurement current for resistance-type transmitter, typ. Cycle time (all channels) max.

1.25 mA; 1.25 / 0.5 mA depending on measuring range 267 ms

267 ms

technical unit for temperature measurement, adjustable

83 ms; 83ms at 50Hz; 69ms at 60 Hz Yes


Yes

• 1 to 5 V

Yes

• -10 V to +10 V

Yes


100 kΩ

• -5 V to +5 V

Yes


Yes

• -20 to +20 mA

Yes

• Input resistance (-20 to +20 mA)

50 Ω

• 4 to 20 mA

Yes

• Input resistance (4 to 20 mA)

50 Ω


5/157


ET 200pro


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 144-4FF00-0AB0

6ES7 144-4GF00-0AB0

6ES7 144-4JF00-0AB0


Yes

• 0 to 150 Ohm

Yes


10,000 kΩ

• 0 to 300 Ohm

Yes


10,000 kΩ

• 0 to 600 Ohm

Yes


10,000 kΩ

• 0 to 3000 Ohm

Yes


10,000 kΩ

Input ranges (rated values), resistance thermometers

5

• Ni 100

Yes


10,000 kΩ

• Ni 1000

Yes


10,000 kΩ

• Ni 120

Yes


10,000 kΩ

• Ni 200

Yes


10,000 kΩ

• Ni 500

Yes


10,000 kΩ

• Pt 100

Yes


10,000 kΩ

• Pt 1000

Yes


10,000 kΩ

• Pt 200

Yes


10,000 kΩ

• Pt 500

Yes


10,000 kΩ


Yes

• for thermoresistor

Ptxxx, Nixxx


integrating

integrating

integrating

• Resolution with overload area (bit including sign), max.

15 Bit; at +/- 10 V, at +/- 5 V 14 bits at 0 to 10, at 1 to 5 V

15 Bit; at +/- 20 mA 14 bits at 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA

15 Bit; at 150, 300, 600 and 3000 Ohm; otherwise 15 bit + sign


20/ 16.667

Integrations and conversion time/resolutionper channel

20/ 16.667

20/ 16.667

• Interference voltage suppression 50/ 60 for interference frequency f1 in Hz

50/ 60

50/ 60


67 ms

67 ms

20.625 ms; 20.625ms at 50Hz; 17.25ms at 60Hz

• parameterizable

Yes

Yes

Yes

• Level: none

Yes; 1 x cycle time

Yes; 1 x cycle time

Yes; 1 x cycle time

• Level: weak

Yes; 4x cycle time

Yes; 4x cycle time

Yes; 4x cycle time

• Level: middle




• Level: strong





5/158



ET 200pro



6ES7 144-4GF00-0AB0

Yes; per module; electronic to chassis

Yes; per module, electronic to chassis

6ES7 144-4JF00-0AB0

Encoder supply Short-circuit protection Encoder Connection of signal encoders • for current measurement as 2-wire transducer

Yes


Yes


Yes; Line resistances are also measured


Yes


Yes

5


+/- 0.01 %

+/- 0.01 %

+/- 0.05 %


+/- 0.002 %/K

+/- 0.002 %/K

+/- 0.002 %/K


-50 dB

-50 dB

-50 dB


+/- 0.025 %

+/- 0.025 %

+/- 0.015 %


+/- 0.15 %


+/- 0.15 %


+/- 0.175 %


+/- 0.1 %


+/- 0.1 %


+/- 0.125 %

Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (fl +/- 1 %), fl = interference frequency • Series mode interference (peak value of interference < rated value of input range), min.

50 dB

50 dB

• common mode voltage (USS < 2.5 V) , min.

70 dB; Interference voltage < 5 V

70 dB; Interference voltage < 5 V

Parameter Diagnosis: wire break

Yes


R4L / R3L / R2L/ TR4L / TR3L / TR2L

Interference frequency suppression

50 Hz / 60 Hz


Yes

Overflow/underflow

Yes

Unit

Degrees C / Degrees F


5/159


ET 200pro



6ES7 144-4GF00-0AB0

6ES7 144-4JF00-0AB0




Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Alarms • Diagnostic alarm • Limit value alarm • Process alarm

Yes Yes; (limit value alarm), can be set for channel 0

Yes; (limit value alarm), can be set for channel 0

Diagnoses • Diagnostics

Yes

• Wire break

Yes; at 1 to 5 V

Yes; at 4 to 20 mA

• Short circuit

Yes; at 1 to 5 V

Yes; at 4 to 20 mA

• Group error

Yes


Yes Yes Yes


5


Yes

Yes

Yes

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC


No

No


Yes

Yes

between inputs and MANA (UCM)

5 Vpp AC

5 Vpp AC

between MANA and M internal (UISO)

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

Width

45 mm

45 mm

45 mm

Height

130 mm

130 mm

130 mm

Depth

35 mm

35 mm

35 mm

150 g

150 g

150 g

Isolation Isolation checked with Isolation Isolation, analog inputs Yes




6ES7 1454FF00-0AB0

6ES7 1454GF00-0AB0



Load voltage L+

Output ranges, voltage

6ES7 1454FF00-0AB0

6ES7 1454GF00-0AB0

3 ms

3 ms


24 V

24 V

• 0 to 10 V

Yes




• 1 to 5 V

Yes

• -10 to +10 V

Yes

Current consumption from backplane bus DC 3.3 V, max.

Output ranges, current 10 mA

10 mA

Address area Address space per module • Address space per module, max.

8 Byte

8 Byte


4

4


30 m

30 m


Yes; per channel, electronic to chassis

Yes; per module, electronic to chassis


50 mA

Analog outputs

Current output, no-load voltage, max.

5/160


16 V

• 0 to 20 mA

Yes

• -20 to +20 mA

Yes

• 4 to 20 mA

Yes

Connection of actuators • for voltage output 2-conductor connection

Yes


Yes


Yes


Yes


ET 200pro


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 1454FF00-0AB0

6ES7 1454GF00-0AB0

Load impedance (in rated range of output)

6ES7 1454GF00-0AB0

Yes

Yes

Parameter

• with voltage outputs, min.

1,000 Ω


1 µF

Output type/range Diagnosis: wire break


600 Ω


1 mH

Destruction limits against externally applied voltages and currents • Voltages at the outputs towards MANA

6ES7 1454FF00-0AB0

Yes


Outputs; sensor supply to M

Sensor supply to M


Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics 16 V; permanent

• Current, max.

Substitute values connectable 100 mA

Alarms

Analog value creation


Yes; parameter- Yes; parameterizable izable


• Process alarm

No



15 Bit; at -10 to +10 V; 14 bits at 1 to 5 V; 15 bits at 0 to 10 V

15 Bit; at +/- 20 mA; 14 bits at 0 to 20 mA; 15 bits at 4 to 20 mA

0.7 ms

0.7 ms

Settling time • for resistive load

0.1 ms


6 ms


• Diagnostic functions • Diagnostic information readable

Yes No

• Short circuit

Yes; per channel; not in zero range

• Short circuit encoder supply

Yes; per module

Yes; per module

Yes

Yes


No

No


Yes

Yes

Width

45 mm

45 mm

Height

130 mm

130 mm

Depth

35 mm

35 mm

150 g

150 g

0.1 ms 1 ms Diagnostics indication LED

Output ripple (relative to output area, bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz)

+/- 0.02 %

+/- 0.02 %


Linearity error (relative to output area)

+/- 0.1 %

+/- 0.1 %

Isolation, analog outputs


+/- 0.01 %

+/- 0.01 %

Repeat accuracy in settled status at 25 °C (relative to output area)

+/- 0.05 %

+/- 0.05 %

+/- 0.2 %


+/- 0.2 %


Yes; per channel, not in zero range

Isolation

Operational limit in overall temperature range

• Voltage, relative to output area

5

Yes

• Wire break

Errors/accuracies


No

Diagnoses



+/- 0.15 % +/- 0.15 %


5/161


ET 200pro


■ Ordering data

5

Order No.

4AI U analog input module High Feature, ±10 V; ±5 V; 0 to 10 V; 1 to 5 V, channel-specific diagnostics, including bus module. Connecting module must be ordered separately

6ES7 144-4FF00-0AB0

4AI I analog input module High Feature, ±20 mA; 0 to 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA, channel-specific diagnostics, including bus module. Connecting module must be ordered separately

6ES7 144-4GF00-0AB0

4AI RTD analog input module High Feature; resistances: 150, 300, 600 and 3000 Ohm; resistance thermometer: Pt100, 200, 500, 1000, Ni100, 120, 200, 500 and 1000; channel-discrete diagnostics, incl. bus module. Connecting module must be ordered separately

6ES7 144-4JF00-0AB0

4AO U analog output module High Feature, ±10 V; 0 to 10 V; 1 to 5 V, channel-specific diagnostics, including bus module. Connecting module must be ordered separately

6ES7 145-4FF00-0AB0

4AO I analog output module High Feature, ±20 mA; 0 to 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA, channel-specific diagnostics, including bus module. Connecting module must be ordered separately

6ES7 145-4GF00-0AB0

5/162


Order No. Accessories CM IO 4 x M12 connecting module 4 M12 sockets for connecting digital or analog sensors or actuators to ET 200pro

6ES7 194-4CA00-0AA0

Module identification labels For color coding of the CM IOs in the colors of white, red, blue and green; pack with 100 units each

6ES7 194-4HA00-0AA0


3RX9 802-0AA00


ET 200pro

Fail-safe digital expansion modules

■ Overview

■ Ordering data

Order No.

Fail-safe digital input module 8/16 F-DI PROFIsafe 24 V DC, including bus module Connecting module must be ordered separately

6ES7 148-4FA00-0AB0

Fail-safe digital input/output module 4/8 F-DI, 4 F-DO 2 A 24 V DC, including bus module Connecting module must be ordered separately

6ES7 148-4FC00-0AB0

Accessories

Fail-safe digital inputs/outputs with degree of protection IP65/66/67 for application on the machine level without control cabinet Fail-safe digital inputs • For fail-safe reading of sensor information (1 or 2 channels) • Provide integral discrepancy evaluation for 2-out-of-2 signals • Internal sensor supplies (incl. test function) available Fail-safe digital outputs • Fail-safe 2-channel activation (sink/source output) by actuators • Actuators can be driven by up to 2 A All modules are certified up to Cat. 4 (EN 954-1) and up to SIL 3 (IEC 61508) and feature detailed diagnostics. The modules support PROFIsafe, both in PROFIBUS, and in PROFINET configurations. They can be used with IM 151-7 F-CPU, CPU 31xF-2 DP, CPU 31xF-2 PN/DP and CPU 416F-2.

■ Application The fail-safe modules of ET200pro can be used to implement the safety-related application requirements as an integral part of the overall automation. The safety functions required for fail-safe operation are integrated in the modules. The modules can be used for safety circuits up to Cat. 4/ SIL 3. Communication to fail-safe SIMATIC S7 CPUs is performed by means of PROFIsafe.

Connection module For the fail-safe electronic module 4/8 F-DI/4 F DO, 24 V DC/2 A

6ES7 194-4DC00-0AA0

Connection module For the fail-safe electronic module 8/16 F-DI, 24 V DC/2 A

6ES7 194-4DD00-0AA0

IM 154-2 High Feature interface module For ET 200pro, incl. termination module

6ES7 154-2AA00-0AB0

PROFINET interface module IM 154-4 PN Including termination module

6ES7 154-4AB00-0AB0


3RX9 802-0AA00

M12 connector, can be assembled in the field 5-pin, for connecting digital sensors and actuators, 1 unit

3RX1 667

5

M12 connecting cable With PUR sheath, for connecting digital sensors and actuators, pre-assembled, with connector and socket at each end • 3 x 0.34 mm2, fixed lengths, 1 unit - 0.6 m - 1m - 1.5 m

3RX1 633 3RX1 634 3RX1 635


3RX1 640 3RX1 641 3RX1 642

The modules can be operated in a distributed configuration down-circuit of the IM 154-2 High Feature and IM 154-4 PROFINET High Feature interface modules. A standard power module is required to supply the modules.


5/163


ET 200pro

PM-E power module

■ Overview

■ Application The PM-E 24 V DC power module is used for supplementary supply or grouping of the 24 V load voltage for electronic modules within an ET 200pro station. The following module is available: • PM-E 24 V DC PM-E connection module (must be ordered separately): • CM PM-E directly (with up to two M20 screwed cable glands) • CM PM-E ECOFAST Cu (with one ECOFAST Cu connection) • CM PM-E 7/8" (with one 7/8" socket)

5

• PM-E 24 V DC power module

5/164



ET 200pro

PM-E power module


■ Ordering data 6ES7 148-4CA00-0AA0

Power supply Input voltage • Rated value, DC 24 V

Yes 10 A; up to 55 °C; on an internal power rail of the ET 200pro

Voltages and currents Load voltage 2L+ • Short-circuit protection

Yes; via an exchangeable fuse in the power module



Parameter missing load voltage

Potential group of the power module

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Diagnoses • Diagnostic functions

Yes


Yes


Yes


Yes

• Load voltage monitoring DC 24 V (green)

Yes


500 V DC

Environmental requirements Degree and class of protection • IP 65

Yes

• IP 66

Yes

• IP 67

Yes


6ES7148-4CA00-0AA0

CM PM-E ECOFAST connecting module For backfeed of 24 V load voltage, 1 ECOFAST Cu connection

6ES7 194-4BA00-0AA0

CM PM-E direct connecting module For backfeed of 24 V load voltage, up to 2 M20 screwed cable glands

6ES7 194-4BC00-0AA0

CM PM-E 7/8" connecting module For backfeed of 24 V load voltage, 1 x 7/8"

6ES7 194-4BD00-0AA0


6ES7 194-4HB00-0AA0

PROFIBUS FC Food bus cable With PE sheath for use in the food and beverages industry, 2-core, shielded, sold by the meter, minimum order quantity 20 m, maximum cable length 1000 m

6XV1 830-0GH10

PROFIBUS FC Robust bus cable With PUR sheath for use in environments in which aggressive chemicals and mechanical loads are encountered, 2-core, shielded, sold by the meter, minimum order quantity 20 m, maximum cable length 1000 m

6XV1 830-0JH10

PROFIBUS FC trailing cable Minimum bending radius approx. 60 mm, 2-core, shielded, sold by the meter, minimum order quantity 20 m, max. cable length 1000 m

6XV1 830-3EH10

5

Accessories for CM PM-E direct

Width

15 mm

Height

81 mm

Depth

52 mm


Order No.

Accessories

Current carrying capacity • Current carrying capacity, max.

PM-E 24 V DC power module For backfeed and group formation of the 24 V DC load supply for electronic modules within an ET 200pro station.

35 g

Power cable 5-core, 5 x 1.5 mm2, trailing type, sold by the meter, minimum order quantity 20 m, maximum order quantity 1,000 m

6XV1 830-8AH10

Accessories for CM PM-E 7/8“ 7/8" connecting cable to power supply 5-core, 5 x 1.5 mm2, trailing type, pre-assembled with two 7/8" connectors, 5-pin • 1.5 m long

6XV1 822-5BH15

• 2.0 m long

6XV1 822-5BH20

• 3.0 m long

6XV1 822-5BH30

• 5.0 m long

6XV1 822-5BH50

• 10 m long

6XV1 822-5BN10

• 15 m long

6XV1 822-5BN15

7/8" cable connector With axial cable outlet • with male insert, 5 per pack

6GK1 905-0FA00


6GK1 905-0FB00


5/165


ET 200pro — RFID systems SIMATIC RF170C

■ Overview

■ Application The ET 200pro distributed I/O system with the RF170C communication module has been specially designed for a wide range of applications in industrial automation and logistics. Thanks to the high degree of protection of IP67, the RF170C can be installed without a control cabinet. Used primarily for the RF170C: • Mechanical engineering, automation systems, conveyor systems • Ancillary assembly lines in the automobile industry/suppliers • Small assembly lines

■ Design PROFIBUS / PROFINET master module e.g. S7-400 CPU

The RF170C is a communications module for connecting the Siemens RFID systems to the ET 200pro distributed I/O system. The readers (SLGs) of all RFID systems can be operated on the RF170C. Thanks to its high degree of protection and ruggedness, ET 200pro is particularly suitable for machine-level use. The modular structure with PROFIBUS and PROFINET connection systems allows them to be used in all applications. The systemwide, plug-in connection technique ensures rapid start-up.

■ Benefits

PROFINET PROFIBUS

• Two parallel MOBY channels ensure real-time mode at dynamic read points. • By selecting the relevant header module, the RFID systems can be connected via PROFIBUS or PROFINET. • The modular design with interface modules for PROFIBUS and PROFINET supports universal implementation. • Reader connection using an 8-pin M12 connector for fast installation of all components. • Easy changeover from ET 200X with ASM 473 to ET 200pro with RF170C thanks to 100% software compatibility. • High-performance hardware ensures fast data exchange with the SLG (reader). Consequently the data are available for the application even faster. • Easy downloading of firmware via SIMATIC Manager for function expansions and error rectification ensure high-availability of the RFID system. • The parameterizable RFID-specific diagnostics support startup and troubleshooting • A wide selection of pre-assembled connecting cables can be ordered for ET 200pro and RF170C. This saves time and money during installation and assures better quality.

5/166

Interface module SIMATIC RF170C ET 200pro


to other PROFIBUS bus participants 24 V for ET 200pro, RF170C and Reader

2. Reader

1. Reader

Tag / MDS

G_FS10_XX_00177

5


ET 200pro — RFID systems SIMATIC RF170C

■ Function


The RF170C comprises an electronics module and a connection block that must be ordered separately. The interface module is available in the PROFIBUS or PROFINET variants. For the PROFIBUS connection, you can choose from the connection systems of ECOFAST, M12, 7/8", or screwed cable gland. For the PROFINET interface module, M12, 7/8" connection is available.

Communication module

RF170C

Ambient temperature • During operation • During storage

-25 to +55 °C -40 to +70 °C 20 K/h

Relative humidity

5 to max. 100%

Integration of RF170C into SIMATIC STEP 7 is achieved by means of an object manager (OM). The GSD file of the ET 200pro system is available for integration into non-Siemens systems. Then the RF170C can be configured by means of the software tool HW_Config of the SIMATIC Manager or another PROFIBUS/PROFINET tool.


from 795 to 1080 hPa

Resistance to shock

as for ET 200pro

Vibration

as for ET 200pro

Power supply • Rated value • Permitted range

24 V DC 20.4 V to 28.8 V DC

Current consumption • Without reader • With 2 readers

typ. 130 mA Max. 1000 mA

One or two readers are connected to the interface module using an off-the-shelf reader cable. The standard length of the cable is 2 m. If other cable lengths to the reader are required, an extension cable measuring between 2 m and 50 m can be used. The cable can also be assembled by the customer as required. In principle, access to the data in the transponder can take place as follows: • Direct addressing via absolute addresses • Conveniently via the MOBY file handler (MOBY I/U only) using file names Error messages and operating states (tag in the field, transmission, etc.) are indicated additionally by means of LEDs and simplify commissioning and service. The RF170C has two reader interfaces from which the readers are also supplied with power. In the RF170C, the power supply for the readers has an electronic fuse. The maximum permissible current per RF170C for the readers is 0.8 A. It is of no importance here whether the current is drawn by one or more readers. The data in the MDS can be directly accessed by means of absolute addresses (FB/FC45, FC55) or more conveniently using the MOBY file handler (FB, FC 56) by means of the file names. When the ET 200pro is operated with a PROFINET interface, use of the FB (FB45, FB56) is mandatory. Communication between the RF170C and the controller is acyclic. Consequently, a very large amount of data can be transferred to/from the RF170C without overloading the bus cycle. This has advantages when transferring large volumes of data. In addition, the RF170C can process concatenated tag commands very quickly in this mode.

■ Ordering data RF170C communications module For connecting to the distributed I/O system ET 200pro

Casing • Degree of protection • Enclosure material • Housing color

IP67 Thermoplastic (reinforced with glass fiber) IP Basic 714

Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm • RF170C without connection block • RF170C with connection block

60 x 210 x 30 60 x 210 x 60

Weight • Without connection block • With connection block

Approx. 270 g Approx. 770 g

Serial reader interface (gross transmission rate)

MOBY I/E: 19200 baud MOBY U/D, RF300: 19200, 57600, 115200 baud

Connectors

2 x M12 coupler plug, 7-pole

Cable length to reader • Standard length • Optional preassembled cables • Cable for self-assembly Supply voltage to reader

24 V

Max. current; 2 readers connected

0.4 A per reader

Max. current; 1 readers connected

0.8 A per reader

Order No. 6GT2002-0HD00

Accessories MOBY SLG cable for MOBY I/E/U 2m

6GT2091-0FH20

SLG cable for MOBY I/E/U 5m

6GT2091-0FH50

SLG cable for MOBY D 2m

6GT2691-0FH20

SLG cable RF300 extension cable MOBY I/E/U/D and SIMATIC RF300 2m

6GT2891-0FH20

2m 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 50 m According to write/read device. Up to 1000 m

Order No. SLG cable RF300 extension cable MOBY I/E/U/D and SIMATIC RF300 5m

6GT2891-0FH50

SLG cable RF300 extension cable MOBY I/E/U/D and SIMATIC RF300 10 m

6GT2891-0FN10


6GT2891-0FN20


6GT2891-0FN50


5/167

5


ET 200pro — Motor starters Standard and High Feature

■ Overview

■ Benefits ET 200pro motor starters provide the following advantages: • High flexibility thanks to a modular and compact design • Little variance among all motor starter versions (2 units up to 5.5 kW) • Extensive parameterization using STEP 7 HW-Config • Increase of plant availability through fast replacement of units (easy mounting and plug-in technology) • Extensive diagnostics and information for preventive maintenance • Parameterizable inputs for local control functions (High Feature) • Cabinet-free construction thanks to high degree of protection IP65

■ Application

5

Motor starters • Only two variants up to 5.5 kW • All settings can be parameterized by bus • Comprehensive diagnostics signals • Overload can be acknowledged by remote reset • Current unbalance monitoring • Stall protection • Emergency start function in the event of overload • Current value transmission by bus • Current limit monitoring • Direct-on-line or reversing starters • Power bus can be plugged in using the new HAN Q4/2 plug-in connectors • Conductor cross-sections up to 6 x 4 mm² • 25 A per segment (power looped through using jumper plug) • Supplied with 400 V AC brake contact as an option Isolator module The isolator module with switch disconnector function is used for safe disconnection of the 400 V operating voltage during repair work in the plant and provides an integrated group fusing function (i.e. additional group short-circuit protection for all subsequently supplied motor starters). Depending on the power distribution concept, all stations can be equipped with an isolator module as an option. Safety Local Isolator Module With the Safety Modules local • Safety Local Isolator Module and • 400 V disconnecting module it is possible to achieve safety Category 4 with an appropriate circuit. The Safety local isolator module is a maintenance switch with integrated safety evaluation functions that can be parameterized over DIP switch. It is used for: • Connection of a 1 or 2-channel EMERGENCY STOP circuit up to Cat. 3-4/Sil3 (protective door or EMERGENCY STOP buttons) and parameterizable start behavior • Control of the 400 V disconnecting module by means of a safety rail signal

5/168


With the ET 200pro motor starters, any three-phase loads can be protected and switched. They are an integral part of ET 200pro and have a high degree of protection IP65. This makes them ideal for use in modular, distributed peripherals without control cabinets or control enclosures. As the result of the protection concept with solid-state overload evaluation and the use of SIRIUS switching devices size S00, additional advantages are realized on the Standard and HighFeature motor starters - advantages which soon make themselves positively felt particularly in manufacturing processes with high plant stoppage costs: • Configuring is made easier by the fine modular structure. When using the ET 200pro motor starters, the list of parts per load feeder is reduced to two main items: The bus module and the motor starter. This makes the ET 200pro ideal for modular machine concepts or solutions for conveying systems and in machine-tool building. • Expansions are easily possible through the subsequent adding of modules. The innovative plug-in technology also does away with the wiring needed up to now. Through the hot swapping function (disconnection and connection during operation) a motor starter can be replaced within seconds if necessary, without having to shut down the ET 200pro station and with it the process in the plant. The motor starters are therefore recommendable in particular for applications with special demands on availability. Storage costs are optimized in addition by the low level of variance (2 units up to 5.5 kW). The ordering option for motor starters with a 400 V AC brake output provides the possibility of controlling motors with 400 V AC brakes. With four locally acting inputs available on the High Feature motor starter it is possible to realize autonomous special functions which work independently of the bus and the higher level control system, e.g. as a quick stop on gate valve controls or limit position disconnectors. In parallel with this, the states of these inputs are signaled to the control system. When using the optional isolator module with switch disconnector and group fusing function for the ET 200pro, the 400 V supply of the motor starters can be switched on and off directly in the field, i.e. locally.


ET 200pro — Motor starters Standard and High Feature


Order No.

Motor starter Standard mechanical, Motor protection: Thermal model Direct starter Dse 1) • without brake output

3RK1 304-5 7 S40-4AA0

• with brake output 400 V AC

3RK1 304-5 7 S40-4AA3

Reversing starter RSe 1) • without brake output

3RK1 304-5 7 S40-5AA0


3RK1 304-5 7 S40-5AA3

DSe Standard

Motor starter High Feature mechanical, Motor protection: Thermal model Direct starter DSe 1) 3RK1 304-5 7 S40-2AA0

• without brake output • with brake output 400 V AC Reversing starter RSe

3RK1 304-5 7 S40-2AA3

1)

• without brake output

3RK1 304-5 7 S40-3AA0


3RK1 304-5 7 S40-3AA3

RSe High Feature

Setting range for rated operating current • 0.15 ... 2.0 A

K

• 1.5 ... 12.0 A

L

1) Functions only in combination with the backplane bus module and the wide rack. The backplane bus module and the wide rack must be ordered separately (see accessories for the ET 200pro motor starters).


5/169

5


ET 200pro — Motor starters ET 200pro isolator modules

■ Overview

■ Benefits

The isolator module with integrated group fusing function (i.e. additional group short-circuit protection for all subsequently supplied motor starters) and switch disconnector function is used for safe disconnection of the 400 V operating voltage in the plant.

The following properties apply to the isolator module: • Increase of plant availability through fast replacement of units (easy mounting and plug-in technology) • Cabinet-free construction thanks to high degree of protection IP65

Depending on the power distribution concept, all stations can be equipped with an isolator module as an option. The isolator module is available in addition in a safety version. See Safety Local Isolator Module.


Order No.

ET 200pro isolator modules, mechanical Isolator module 1)

3RK1 304-0HS00-6AA0

Rated operating current 25 A

5 Safety local isolator module 2) 3)

3RK1 304-0HS00-7AA0


1) Functions only in combination with the backplane bus module and the wide rack. The backplane bus module and the wide rack must be ordered separately (see Accessories for the ET 200pro motor starters). 2) The safety local maintenance isolator module only operates when combined with the 400 V shutdown module. 3) Only in connection with the special backplane bus module for Safety local RSM (see Accessories for ET 200pro motor starters).

5/170



ET 200pro — Motor starters Safety local Module

■ Overview

■ Application Safety Local Isolator Module The Safety Local Isolator Module features the same functions as a standard isolator module with an additional local safety function. The Safety Local Isolator Module contains a 3TK28 41 module and is equipped with M12 terminals for the connection of external safety components. Terminals 1 and 2 can be used to connect either 1-channel or 2-channel EMERGENCY STOP circuits or protective door circuits (IN 1, IN 2). For monitored starts, an external START switch can be connected to terminal 3. The required safety functions can be set using 2 slide switches located under the left M12 opening.

Safety Local Isolator Module

In the event of an EMERGENCY STOP, the Safety local isolator module trips the downstream 400 V disconnecting module. This safely isolates the 400 V circuit up to CAT 4

The Safety Local Isolator Module is a maintenance switch with integrated safety evaluation functions that can be parameterized using DIP switches.

In combination with the 400 V disconnecting module, the Safety Local Isolator Module can be used for safety applications up to Category 4 to EN 954-1.

It is used for: • Connection of a single-channel or 2-channel EMERGENCY STOP circuit up to Cat. 3-4/Sil3 (protective door or EMERGENCY STOP buttons) and parameterizable start behavior • Control of the 400 V disconnecting module by means of a safety rail signal

400 V disconnecting module

The 400 V disconnecting module

In combination with the Safety Local Isolator Module, the 400 V disconnecting module can be used for safety applications up to Category 4 to EN 954-1.

The 400 V disconnecting module enables the safe disconnection of the operating voltage of 400 V up to Cat. 3-4/Sil3. It only functions in combination with the Safety Local Isolator Module.

The 400 V disconnecting module can be used together with the Safety Local Isolator Module for local safety applications. It contains two contactors connected in series for safety-oriented tripping of the main circuit. The auxiliary circuit supply of the device is over a safety power rail in the backplane bus module.


Order No.

ET 200pro Safety Local Isolator Modules, mechanical Safety local isolator module 2) 4)

3RK1 304-0HS00-7AA0


400 V disconnecting module 1) 3)

3RK1 304-0HS00-8AA0


1) Only functions when used together with the backplane bus module and the wide module rack. The backplane bus module and the wide module rack must be ordered separately (see "Accessories for ET 200pro motor starter). 2) The safety local isolator module only functions when used together with the 400 V disconnecting module. 3) The 400 V disconnecting module only functions when used together with the safety local isolator module. 4) Only in connection with the special backplane bus module for Safety local RSM (see Accessories for ET 200pro motor starters).


5/171

5


ET 200pro — Motor starters

Accessories for ET 200pro motor starters

■ Selection and Ordering Data Version

Order No.

ET 200pro accessories Wide module rack1)

Hand-held device 3RK1 922-3BA0

• Length 500 mm

6ES7 194-4GB00-0AA0

• Length 1000 mm

6ES7 194-4GB10-0AA0

• Length 2000 mm

6ES7 194-4GB20-0AA0

Backplane bus module 110 mm 2)

3RK1 922-2BA00

Backplane bus module for Safety local RSM

3RK1 922-2BA01

RS 232 interface cable

3RK1 922-2BQ00

Hand-held device for ET 200 pro motor starter, ET 200S High Feature and ECOFAST for local operation, serial interface cable must be ordered separately

3RK1 922-3BA00

Power jumper plug

3RK1 922-2BP00

Plug set for incoming energy supply (HAN Q4/2)

5

• 2.5 mm2

3RK1 911-2BE50

• 4.0 mm2

3RK1 911-2BE10

• 6.0 mm2

3RK1 911-2BE30

Plug set for motor connection (HAN Q8/0) • 1.5 mm2

3RK1 902-0CE00

2

• 2.5 mm

3RK1 902-0CC00

Sealing cap (for power supply)

3RK1 902-0CJ00

Plug set for power transmission (Han Q4/2) Han Q4/2-pin (angled) • 2.5 mm2

3RK1 911-2BF60

• 4.0 mm2

3RK1 911-2BF20

Crimping tool for contact pins and sockets up to 4.0 mm2 (HAN Q8/0)

3RK1 902-0CT00

Dismantling tool for contact pins and sockets (HAN Q8/0)

3RK1 902-0AJ00

M12 sealing cap

3RX8 000-0JA00

1) The wide module rack can accommodate all ET 200pro motor starters and any optional modules (isolator module, safety local isolator module and 400 V disconnecting module). 2) The backplane bus module is a prerequisite for operation of the ET 200pro motor starter and the optional modules (isolator module, safety local isolator module and 400 V disconnecting module).

5/172



ET 200X

Introduction

■ Overview

■ Design The ET 200X distributed I/O station comprises: • One basic module, alternatively - digital inputs - digital outputs - PLC functionality - ECOFAST-conform - DESINA-compliant with parameterizable inputs and outputs • Up to 7 expansion modules.

• Distributed I/O station with degree of protection IP65/67 for use in cabinet-less applications in the machine environment • Modular design adapts to the automation task • I/O modules, motor starters, pneumatic modules and signal processing modules (CPU), frequency converters • Can also be used for extremely time-critical tasks • Separate auxiliary power supply for easy implementation of load groups • DESINA-compliant modules

■ Application The SIMATIC ET 200X is a distributed I/O station with degree of protection IP65/IP67. Due to the high degree of protection and its rugged design, the ET 200X is particularly suitable for implementation in the machine environment. Its modular design, high degree of protection, sole use of plugin wiring and integration of pneumatic and drive components permit fast and optimum adaptation to a machine’s technological function units. Even when requirements change frequently, replacement or combining of different basic and expansion modules can noticeably reduce setting-up times. With a data signalling rate of up to 12 Mbit/s on the PROFIBUS DP, the ET 200S is also eminently suitable for extremely timecritical applications.

The following expansion modules are available: • Digital inputs/ outputs • Digital input/ output modules, DESINA-compliant • Analog input/ output modules • Modules with and without channel diagnostics • CP 142-2 communications processors for connection to AS-Interface • Moby Ident System • Pneumatic module with integrated valves • Pneumatic interface for adapting a CPV valve terminal from FESTO; up to 6 interfaces per ET 200X station • Motor starters (electromechanical or electronic) to drive any 3-phase AC load (up to 5.5 kW at 400 V AC); up to 6 motor starters per ET 200X station • Frequency converter (max. 1.5 kW, 400 V AC) • Up to 6 motor starters or frequency inverters per ET 200X station • SITOP power current supply (24 V DC optional) The expansion modules are installed side by side using integrated connectors. This means that all the signal leads and auxiliary voltages for the inputs and outputs are connected through. The modules can be replaced for service purposes without the need to disassemble the entire station. Connection to PROFIBUS DP An ET 200X occupies only one node address on the PROFIBUS DP installed on the basic module. A separate I/O address can be assigned to each basic and expansion module. In the basic module with PLC functionality, the addresses of the expansion modules are already determined by the slot. The ET 200X is compliant with EN 50170 for PROFIBUS DP and can be used with all standardized master stations. The fast data transfer rate of 12 Mbit/s also allows implementation of fast machine functions.

By supplying separate auxiliary voltages (load supplies) from the power module it is possible to selectively deactivate individual modules or module groups.


5/173

5


ET 200X

Introduction

■ Function Operating mode The addressing of the inputs and outputs of the ET 200X differs depending on the type of the basic module: • Basic module without PLC functionality: Access via the user program in the central programmable controller, in the same way as central I/Os • Basic module with PLC functionality: Access via the user program of the basic module The slave interface in the basic module is entirely responsible for communications through PROFIBUS DP. There are diagnostics functions to monitor the functionality of the ET 200X. The ET 200X diagnoses: • Internal station/ configuration fault • Short-circuit, wire breakage (for specific modules) • Bus error (erroneous data transmission) • Module fault, 24 V DC load power supply

5

The diagnostic data is analyzed as follows: • Decentrally with diagnostic LEDs on the basic module • With programming devices or PC with the COM PROFIBUS or STEP 7 parameterization software • Centrally through the CPU in the automation system Parameter assignment When the station is connected to master modules which were not parameterized with COM PROFIBUS or STEP 7 (operation on third-party master modules), a fixed preassigned GSD file can be created with COM PROFIBUS from Version 3.1. This file is then loaded into the configuration tool of the third-party manufacturer and can be used for simple parameter assignment of the station. This allows the use of the user-friendly plain-text parameterization feature of COM PROFIBUS; there is no need for hexadecimal code inputs in the third-party configuring tool.

■ Technical specifications – General Plug-in electronic modules

Connection method

• AS-Interface CP • Digital inputs/outputs • Analog inputs/outputs • Motor starters/Frequency converters • Pneumatic module/interface M12 round connector with standard pinout or DESINA assignment for actuators/sensors HAN Q8 for power supply, forwarding and motor feeder in motor starters and frequency converters


12 Mbit/s

Galvanic isolation

Yes, between PROFIBUS DP and internal electronics and partly between outputs and internal electronics

Supply voltage

24 V DC

Supply current (internal electronics and encoder supply) for overall configuration

Supply voltage for loads for total assembly (several motor starters or frequency converters) • For core cross-section of 1.5 mm2, max.

12 A

• For core cross-section of 2.5 mm2, max.

20 A


IP65 for ET 200X with motor starters, frequency converters or pneumatic modules; IP66/IP67 for digital and analog modules

Material

Thermoplastic (fiber-glass reinforced)

Ambient conditions Temperature

From 0 to 55 °C

Temperature gradient

From 15 to 95%

Relative humidity

RH severity level 2 in accordance with IEC 1131-2


From 795 to 1080 hPa

Mechanical strength

• Up to 40 °C, max.

6A


4A

• Vibration

Vibration tested in acc. with IEC 68 Part 2-6 (sine) • 10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 58 Hz (const. amplitude 0.075 mm); • 58 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz (const. acceleration 5 g, tested with 10 g) motor starters (const. acceleration 2 g)

• Shock

Shock tested in acc. with IEC 68 Part 2- 27, half-sine, 15 g, 11 ms

Approvals

UL, CSA

Current consumption of an ET 200X (internal and sensor supply, non-switched voltage) • Up to 40 °C, max.

≤1A


≤ 0.8 A

with DESINA • Up to 40 °C, max.

10 A


8A

Load current for ET 200X per incoming supply (BM, PM, switched voltage) • Up to 40 °C, max.

10 A


8A

For overall configuration with further looping (several ET 200Xs) • Up to 40 °C, max.

16 A


12 A

5/174



ET 200X

BM 147/CPU intelligent basic modules

■ Overview • Basic modules for exchanging preprocessed I/O data between an ET 200X and a higher level master through PROFIBUS DP • Two versions: - BM147-1 with DP slave functionality and - BM147-2 with additional DP master functionality • CPU for PLC functionality equivalent to S7-314, in other words, distributed intelligence for preprocessing • For reducing the overhead on the central PLC and PROFIBUS • With greatly reduced response times to critical signals locally • Standalone operation, for example it is still possible to operate even if the DP master fails • Fast, simple and integrated programming of a system with modular programs through STEP 7


5

6ES7 147-1AA11-0XB0

6ES7 147-2AA01-0XB0

6ES7 147-2AB01-0XB0


24 V; p ermitted range 20.4 to 28.8 V

24 V; permitted range 20.4 to 28.8 V



Yes

Yes; internal (thermally reversible); no for looping through

Yes; internal (thermally reversible); no for looping through


No

No

No



24 V; permitted range 20.4 to 28.8

24 V; permitted range 20.4 to 28.8


No

No

No

3W

3W

3W

64 KByte; 21 K instructions No



8 MByte; can be plugged in as MMC



Yes; Guaranteed by MMC (maintenance-free)



1,024; DBs, FCs, FBs



• Number, max.

511

511

511

• Size, max.

16 KByte

16 KByte

16 KByte

• Number, max.

512; In number band of FB0 to FB2047



• Size, max.

16 KByte

16 KByte

16 KByte



Current consumption Power loss, typ. Memory Memory • RAM - integrated - expandable • Load memory - expandable FEPROM, max. Backup • present CPU/blocks Number of blocks (total) DB

FB


5/175


ET 200X


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 147-1AA11-0XB0

6ES7 147-2AA01-0XB0

6ES7 147-2AB01-0XB0

• Number, max.

512; In number band of FC0 to FC2047



• Size, max.

16 KByte

16 KByte

16 KByte

• Description




• Size, max.

16 KByte

16 KByte

16 KByte

• per priority class

8

8

8

• additional within an error OB

4

4

4


0.1 µs

0.1 µs

0.1 µs


0.2 µs

0.2 µs

0.2 µs


2 µs

2 µs

2 µs


3 µs

3 µs

3 µs

• Number

256

256

256


Yes From Z 0 to Z 7

Yes From Z 0 to Z 7

Yes From Z 0 to Z 7

• Counting range - lower limit - upper limit

0 999

0 999

0 999

• present

Yes; Number unlimited (limited only by work memory)



• Type

SFB

SFB

SFB

• Number

256

256

256


Yes no retentivity

Yes no retentivity

Yes no retentivity


10 ms 9,990 s

10 ms 9,990 s

10 ms 9,990 s

• present




• Type

SFB

SFB

SFB

• Number, max.

256 Byte

256 Byte

256 Byte

• Remanence available

Yes

Yes

Yes


MB 0 to MB 15

MB 0 to MB 15

MB 0 to MB 15


8; 1 memory byte

8; 1 memory byte

8; 1 memory byte

510 Byte

510 Byte

510 Byte

FC

OB

Nesting depth


5

Times/counters and their remanence S7 counter

IEC counter

S7 times

IEC timer

Data areas and their remanence Flag


5/176



ET 200X



6ES7 147-2AA01-0XB0

6ES7 147-2AB01-0XB0

• Inputs

1 KByte

1 KByte

1 KByte

• Outputs

1 KByte

1 KByte

1 KByte

• Inputs

128 Byte

128 Byte

128 Byte

• Outputs

128 Byte

128 Byte

128 Byte

• Number of expansion modules, max.

7

7

• of which motor starters/frequency converters, max.

6

6

• of which, pneumatic interfaces, max.

6

6

Address area I/O address area

Process image

Hardware config. Expansion modules

5


Yes

Yes

Yes


Yes; Backup time typically 6 weeks (at 40°C ambient temperature)




10 s

10 s

10 s

• Number

1

1

1


0

0

0

• Range of values




• Granularity

1 hour

1 hour

1 hour

• remanent




• supports

Yes

Yes

Yes

• to MPI, Slave

Yes

Yes

Yes

• in AS, Master

Yes

Yes

Yes

• in AS, Slave

Yes

Yes

Yes


12; depending on the configured connections for PG/OP and S7 basic communication




Yes

Yes

Yes


40

40

40

• Status/control variable

Yes

Yes

Yes

• Variables




• Number of variables, max.

30

30

30

• of which status variable, max.

30

30

30

• of which control variable, max.

14

14

14

• Forcing

Yes

Yes

Yes

• Force, variables

Inputs, outputs

Inputs, outputs

Inputs, outputs

10

10


Clock synchronization


Test commissioning functions Status/control

Monitoring functions

Forcing

• Forcing, number of variables, max. 10


5/177


ET 200X



6ES7 147-2AA01-0XB0

6ES7 147-2AB01-0XB0

Status block

Yes

Yes

Yes

Single step

Yes

Yes

Yes


2

2

2

• present

Yes

Yes

Yes

• Number of entries, max.

100

100

100

• adjustable

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

• supported

Yes

Yes

Yes

• Number of GD packets, max.

4

4

4

• Number of GD packets, transmitter, max.

4

4

4

• Number of GD packets, receiver, max.

4

4

4

• Size of GD packets, max.

22 Byte

22 Byte

22 Byte

• Size of GD packet (of which consistent), max.

22 Byte

22 Byte

22 Byte

• supported

Yes

Yes

Yes


76 Byte

76 Byte

76 Byte

• Useful data per job (of which consistent) max.

76 Byte; 76 bytes (for X_SEND or X_RCV), 64 bytes (for X_PUT or X_GET as server)



• supported

Yes

Yes

Yes

• as server

Yes

Yes

Yes

• as client

No

No

No


180 Byte; bei PUT/GET




64 Byte

64 Byte

64 Byte

No

No

No

• overall

12

12

12


1

1

1

• adjustable for PG communication, max.

11

11

11


1

1

1

• adjustable for OP communication, max.

11

11

11

• reserved for S7-Basic communication

10

10

10

• adjustable for S7-Basic communication, max.

11

11

11

Type of interface

Coexistent, integrated RS 485 interface



Physics

RS 485

RS 485

RS 485

isolated

Yes

Yes

Yes

• MPI

Yes

Yes

Yes

• DP master

No

Yes

Yes

• DP slave

Yes; active / passive




No

No

No

Diagnostic buffer

Communication functions PG/OP communication Global data communication

5

S7 basic communication

S7 communication

S5-compatible communication • supported Number of connections

1st interface

Functionality

5/178



ET 200X



6ES7 147-2AA01-0XB0

6ES7 147-2AB01-0XB0

• Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - Global data communication - S7 basic communication - S7 communication - S7 communication, as server

Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes




12 Mbit/s

12 Mbit/s

12 Mbit/s

Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

MPI

DP master • Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - Global data communication - S7 basic communication - S7 communication - S7 communication, as server - equidistance support - SYNC/FREEZE - Activation/deactivation of DP slaves - direct data exchange (cross traffic) - DPV1

5

Yes

Yes


1 KByte 1 KByte

1 KByte 1 KByte

• Useful data per DP slave - Useful data per DP slave, max.

244 Byte; 244 bytes/244 bytes

244 Byte; 244 bytes/244 bytes


12

12

12

• Services - PG/OP communication - Routing - S7 communication, as client - S7 communication, as server

Yes No No No

Yes Yes; when interface active No No

Yes Yes; when interface active No No


12 Mbit/s

12 Mbit/s

12 Mbit/s


244 Byte 244 Byte

244 Byte 244 Byte

244 Byte 244 Byte


32

32

32

• Useful data per address area, max.

32 Byte

32 Byte

32 Byte

Yes; V5.2 SP1

Yes; V5.2 SP1

Yes; V5.2 SP1

Width

175 mm

175 mm

175 mm

Height

110 mm

110 mm

110 mm

Depth

90 mm

90 mm

90 mm

CPU/programming Programming language • STEP 7 Dimensions and weight


5/179


ET 200X


■ Ordering data BM 147-1 CPU basic module With integrated PLC functionality, with 64 KB main memory

Order No. 6ES7 147-1AA11-0XB0

BM 147-2 CPU basic module With integrated PLC functionality and additional PROFIBUS master interface • With 64 KB main memory

6ES7 147-2AA01-0XB0

• With 128 KB main memory

6ES7 147-2AB01-0XB0

Manual for ET 200X distributed I/O station • German

6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0

• English

6ES7 198-8FA01-8BA0

• French

6ES7 198-8FA01-8CA0

Cover plates for ET 200X basic modules Protective cover for bus and power supply connections (pack of 10)

6ES7 194-1JB00-0XA0

Simple mounting rails for SIMATIC ET 200X (narrow) • 400 mm long for basic module + 3 expansion modules (60 mm) • 640 mm long for basic module + 7 expansion modules (60 mm) • 2000 mm long for customized lengths Double mounting rails for SIMATIC ET 200X (wide) • 520 mm long for basic module + 1 expansion module (60 mm) + 2 motor starters/frequency converters/pneumatic interfaces • 1000 mm long for basic module + 1 expansion module (60 mm) + 6 motor starters/frequency converters

5/180


Fixing screws M5 x 20, 1 pack = 100 pieces

6ES7 194-1KC00-0XA0

Connecting cable for PROFIBUS 12 Mbaud, for PG connection to PROFIBUS DP, pre-assembled with 2 x 9-pole Sub-D connector, 3.0 m

6ES7 901-4BD00-0XA0

ECOFAST hybrid cable Pre-assembled with ECOFAST plug connectors

Accessories

5


• 1.5

6XV1 830-7BH15

•3

6XV1 830-7BH30

•5

6XV1 830-7BH50

• 10

6XV1 830-7BN10

• 15

6XV1 830-7BN15

ECOFAST terminating resistor

6ES7 194-1GA00-0XA0

6ES7 194-1GA10-0XA0

6ES7 194-1GA20-0XA0

6ES7 194-1GB00-0XA0

6ES7 194-1GB10-0XA0

• Ordering unit 1 piece

6GK1 905-0DA10

• Ordering unit 5 pieces

6GK1 905-0DA00

ECOFAST plug connector, can be pre-assembled Male contacts; Ordering unit 5 pieces

6GK1 905-0CA00

ECOFAST plug connector, can be pre-assembled Female contacts; Ordering unit 5 pieces MMC memory cards up to 8 MB (as for S7-314)

6GK1 905-0CB00


ET 200X

BM 141 and BM 142 basic modules

■ Overview • Basic modules to process communications between ET 200X and higher level masters through PROFIBUS DP • With additional integrated inputs or outputs

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 1411BF12-0XB0

6ES7 1421BD22-0XB0

6ES7 1411BF12-0XB0

Supply voltages

Digital inputs

Supply voltage of electronics 1L+


8


24 V

24 V

Cable length


Yes; electronic

Yes; electronic


30 m


Yes

Yes Input characteristic curve to IEC 1131, Typ 1

Yes

Voltages and currents Load voltage 2L+ 24 V

24 V

• Rated value, DC

24 V


No

No

• for signal "0"

-3 to 5 V

• for signal "1"

13 to 30 V


from load voltage 2L+ (without load), max. from supply voltage 1L+, max. Power loss, typ.

3.5 W

Input current 12 mA


180 mA


4W

Hardware config. Expansion modules • Number of expansion modules, max.

7

7 6

• of which, motor starters, max. • of which motor starters/frequency converters, max.

6

• of which, pneumatic interfaces, max.

6

6

1st interface Yes

Yes

DP slave • Services - direct data exchange (cross traffic) • Transmission speeds, min. • Transmission speeds, max.

• for standard inputs - at "0" to "1", min. - at "0" to "1", max.

7 mA

1.2 ms 4.8 ms


4


30 m


Yes; electronic


3A

Lamp load, max.

10 W

Output current

Functionality • DP slave

30 m; Signal cables

Input voltage


from load voltage1L+, max.

6ES7 1421BD22-0XB0

Yes 9.6 kBit/s 12 Mbit/s

Yes; Sender


2 A; at 24 V DC


0.5 mA


100 Hz

9.6 kBit/s


0.5 Hz

12 Mbit/s; 9.6 / 19.2 / 93.75 / 187.5 / 500 Kbps; 1.5 / 3 / 6 / 12 Mbps


1 Hz


6A


4A


5/181

5


ET 200X

BM 141 and BM 142 basic modules

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 1411BF12-0XB0

6ES7 1421BD22-0XB0

Encoder

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Alarms • Diagnostic alarm

■ Ordering data


Yes 1.5 mA

Yes

Yes

No

No

Galvanic isolation, digital inputs • between the channels

Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes

6ES7 141-1BF12-0XB0

BM 142 basic module DO 4 × 24 V DC/2 A

6ES7 142-1BD22-0XB0

Accessories Manual for ET 200X distributed I/O station • German

6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0

• English

6ES7 198-8FA01-8BA0

• French

6ES7 198-8FA01-8CA0

Double mounting rails for SIMATIC ET 200X (wide) • 520 mm long for basic module + 1 expansion module (60 mm) + 2 motor starter/frequency converter/pneumatic interfaces • 1000 mm long for basic module + 1 expansion module (60 mm) + 6 motor starters/frequency converters

6ES7 194-1GA00-0XA0 6ES7 194-1GA10-0XA0 6ES7 194-1GA20-0XA0

6ES7 194-1GB00-0XA0

6ES7 194-1GB10-0XA0


6ES7 194-1KC00-0XA0

Connector plate for BM 141, BM 142 T functionality for PROFIBUS DP (spare part)

6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0

Plug connector for PROFIBUS DP Control and auxiliary voltage (incl. 2 PG cable glands and 1 blanking plug); 3 connectors are required per basic module

6ES7 194-1AA01-0XA0



134 mm

134 mm; Panel width 107 mm

Height

110 mm

110 mm

Depth

55 mm

55 mm

Order No.

BM 141 basic module DI 8 × 24 V DC

Simple mounting rails for SIMATIC ET 200X (narrow) • 400 mm long for basic module + 3 expansion modules (60 mm) • 640 mm long for basic module + 7 expansion modules (60 mm) • 2000 mm long for customized lengths

Yes


Diagnostics indication LED • Bus error BF (red) Yes Yes • Collective error SF (red) • Monitoring 24 V voltage supply ON Yes (green)

5/182

6ES7 1421BD22-0XB0

Isolation

Connectable encoders • 2-wire BEROS • permissible quiescent current (2-wire BEROS), max.

5

6ES7 1411BF12-0XB0

Order No. Cable 5-core for bus signals, power supply, sold by the meter, minimum order quantity: 10 m • PVC sheath (Standard) • PUR sheath (can be trailed, oil-resistant, partially weld-resistant)

6ES7 194-1LY00-0AA0 Length must be specified in m (minimum length 10 m) 6ES7 194-1LY10-0AA0 Length must be specified in m (minimum length 10 m)

Cover plates For protection of the bus and power supply connections on BM 141, BM 142, BM 147 (10 pieces per package unit)

6ES7 194-1JB00-0XA0

M12 coupler plug For connecting actuators and sensors, 5-pole

3RX1 667

M12 angular coupler plug For connecting actuators and sensors, 5-pole

3RX1 668

M12 Y-coupler plug For dual connection of sensors using single cable, 5-pole

6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0

Pre-assembled Y-cable For actuators/sensors

Available from: Franz Binder GmbH & Co. P.O. Box 1152 D-74148 Neckarsulm, Germany Plug connector catalog

M12 sealing caps For sealing unused input or output sockets

3RX9 802-0AA00

S7 Manual Collection Electronic manuals on CD, multi-language: S7-200, TD 200, S7-300, M7-300, C7, S7-400, M7-400, STEP 7, Engineering Tools, Runtime Software, SIMATIC DP (Distributed I/O), SIMATIC HMI (Human Machine Interface), SIMATIC NET (Industrial Communication)

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0

S7 Manual Collection – Update service for one year Scope of supply: Current S7 Manual Collection CD as well as the subsequent three updates

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


ET 200X

ECOFAST basic modules

■ Overview • BM 141 and BM 143 basic modules handle communication between ET 200X and higher level master through PROFIBUS DP • ECOFAST-compatible connection method • Can be combined with all available expansion modules of the ET 200X

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0

6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0

6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0

6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0


24 V

24 V

24 V

24 V


No

No

No

No


24 V

24 V

24 V

24 V


No

No

No

No

from load circuit 1 (unswitched voltage/supply voltage) to 40 °C

10 A

10 A

10 A

10 A

from load voltage 1 (unswitched voltage/power supply) to 55 °C

8A

8A

8A

8A

from load voltage 2 (unswitched voltage/power supply) to 40 °C

10 A

10 A

10 A

10 A

from load circuit 2 (unswitched voltage/power supply) to 55 °C

8A

8A

8A

8A

from load voltage 1L+ (unswitched voltage)

180 mA

180 mA

180 mA

180 mA

Power loss, typ.

3.5 W

3.5 W

3.5 W

3.5 W

7

7

7

7

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• Services - direct data exchange (cross traffic)

Yes; Sender

Yes; Sender

Yes; Sender

Yes; Sender

• Transmission speeds, min.

9.6 kBit/s

9.6 kBit/s

9.6 kBit/s

9.6 kBit/s


12 Mbit/s; 9.6 / 19.2 / 45.45 / 93.75 / 187.5 / 500 Kbps; 1.5 / 12 Mbps

12 Mbit/s; 9.6 / 19.2 / 45.45 / 93.75 / 187.5 / 500 Kbps; 1.5 / 12 Mbps

12 Mbit/s; 9.6 / 19.2 / 45.45 / 93.75 / 187.5 / 500 Kbps; 1.5 / 12 Mbps

12 Mbit/s; 9.6 / 19.2 / 45.45 / 93.75 / 187.5 / 500 Kbps; 1.5 / 12 Mbps



Current consumption

Hardware config. Expansion modules • Number of expansion modules, max. • of which motor starters/frequency converters, max. • of which, pneumatic interfaces, max. 1st interface Functionality • DP slave DP slave


5/183

5


ET 200X


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0

6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0

6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0

6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0

8; 8 process channels DI, single channel connector

8; 8 process channels DI, single channel connector

8; 8 process channels; parameter assignment as DI/DO 8 function channels, parameter assignment as diagnostic/NC input

8; 8 process channels; parameter assignment as DI/DO 8 function channels, parameter assignment as diagnostic/NC input


Number of simultanneously controllable inputs • Number of simultaneously controllable inputs, up to 60 °C

8

Cable length

5


30 m; for signal lines


Yes





Yes

Yes

Yes


24 V

24 V

24 V; Input voltage for DI (Pin 4) set in parameters:; rated value 24 V DC; for signal "1" 13 to 30 V; for signal "0" -30 to 5 V; Input voltage for function input (pin 2):; rated value 24 V DC; for signal "1" 13 to 30 V; for signal "0" -30 to 2 V

24 V; Input voltage for DI (Pin 4) set in parameters:; rated value: 24 V DC; for signal "1": 13 to 30 V; for signal "0": -30 to 5 V; ; Input voltage for function input (pin 2):; rated value: 24 V DC; for signal "1": 13 to 30 V; for signal "0": -30 to 2 V

• for signal "0"

-3 to 5 V

-3 to 5 V

-3 to 5 V

-3 to 5 V

• for signal "1"

13 to 30 V

13 to 30 V

13 to 30 V

13 to 30 V

7 mA

10 mA

5 mA

5 mA

1.2 ms 4.8 ms

1.2 ms 4.8 ms


8; 8 process channels, parameter assignment as DI/DO, 8 function channels, parameter assignment as diagnostic/NC input

8; 8 process channels, parameter assignment as DI/DO, 8 function channels, parameter assignment as diagnostic/NC input


30 m

30 m


Yes; electronic

Yes; electronic


1.8 A

1.8 A

Lamp load, max.

10 W

10 W


1.2 A

1.2 A


5 mA

5 mA


1.3 A

1.3 A


0.5 mA

0.5 mA


100 Hz

100 Hz


2 Hz

2 Hz


1 Hz

1 Hz

Input current • for signal "1", typ. Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) • for standard inputs - programmable - at "0" to "1", min. - at "0" to "1", max.

Yes; 0.5 / 3 / 15 / 20 ms 1.2 ms 4.8 ms

Digital outputs

Output current

Switching frequency

5/184



ET 200X


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0

6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0

6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0

6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0

• 2-wire BEROS

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


1.5 mA

1.5 mA

1.5 mA

1.5 mA

Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes; complying with DESINA

Yes; complying with DESINA


Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Alarms • Diagnostic alarm Diagnoses • Diagnostics • Wire break


• Short circuit



5

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Galvanic isolation

no electrical isolation between the load voltages and between the load voltages and all the other circuit components





Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


No

No

No

No


No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Width

175 mm; 180 when screw mounted




Height





Depth





Isolation


Environmental requirements Degree and class of protection • IP 67 Dimensions and weight


5/185


ET 200X


■ Ordering data

5

Order No.

Order No.

BM 141/ECOFAST basic module 8 DI, 24 V DC, 5-pole, M12 with single-channel connection hybrid fieldbus connection (copper), identification plug, IP67

6ES7 141-1BF01-0AB0

Accessories (continued) See page 4/38

BM 141/ECOFAST RS 485 basic module 8 DI, 24 V DC, 5-pole, M12 channel diagnostics, short-circuit and wire-break, process interrupts, input delay: 0.5 ms/3 ms/15 ms/20 ms

6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0

PROFIBUS ECOFAST Hybrid Cable – Cu Cable suitable for trailing with 4 copper cores, 1.5 mm2 and 2 copper cores, shielded

See page 4/38

BM 143/DESINA basic module 8 DI/DO, parameterizable, additional diagnostic inputs, hybrid fieldbus interface (copper), identification plug, IP67

6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0

PROFIBUS ECOFAST Hybrid Cable – FOC Cable suitable for trailing with two plastic fiber-optic conductors for PROFIBUS DP and four copper cores of 1.5 mm2 cross-section exclusively for use in devices compatible with DESINA

6ES7 194-1KB00-0XA0

BM 143/DESINA basic module 8 DI/DO, parameterizable, additional diagnostic inputs, hybrid fieldbus interface (fiberoptic cable), identification plug, IP67

6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0

Identification plug For setting the PROFIBUS station address (already included in scope of supply of BM 143/ DESINA) M12 coupler plug For connecting actuators and sensors, 5-pole

3RX1 667


3RX1 668


Available from: Franz Binder GmbH & Co. Plug connector catalog P.O. Box 1152 74148 Neckarsulm, Germany


3RX9 802-0AA00

Accessories Manual for ET 200X distributed I/O station • German

6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0

• English

6ES7 198-8FA01-8BA0

• French

6ES7 198-8FA01-8CA0

Cover plates for ET 200X basic modules Protective cover for bus and power supply connections (pack of 10)

6ES7 194-1JB00-0XA0

Crimping tool For male and female contacts

Simple mounting rails for SIMATIC ET 200X (narrow) • 400 mm long for basic module + 3 expansion modules (60 mm)

6ES7 194-1GA00-0XA0

• 640 mm long for basic module + 7 expansion modules (60 mm)

6ES7 194-1GA10-0XA0

• 2000 mm long for customized lengths

6ES7 194-1GA20-0XA0

Double mounting rails for SIMATIC ET 200X (wide) • 520 mm long for basic module + 1 expansion module (60 mm) + 2 motor starter/frequency converter/pneumatic interfaces

6ES7 194-1GB00-0XA0

• 1000 mm long for basic module + 1 expansion module (60 mm) + 6 motor starters/frequency converters

6ES7 194-1GB10-0XA0


6ES7 194-1KC00-0XA0

5/186


• 1.5 to 2.5 mm2

3RK1 902-0AH00

• 1.5 to 4 mm2

3RK1 902-0CT00

Deinstallation tool For male and female contacts for 9-pole inserts for copper conductors

3RK1 902-0AJ00


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


ET 200X


■ Overview • Expansion modules with digital inputs/ outputs for connection of actuators/ sensors • Optionally with diagnostic functions (single-channel diagnostics) - parameterizable input delay - process alarms (available soon) - short and long designs - double or single assignment for each M12 • Optional additional auxiliary voltage supply (load supply)

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 141-1BD310XA0

6ES7 141-1BF310XA0

6ES7 141-1BF300XB0

6ES7 141-1BF400XB0

6ES7 141-1BF410XA0

from backplane bus DC 5 V, max.

16 mA

16 mA

30 mA

30 mA

10 mA

Power loss, typ.

1.5 W

1.5 W

1.5 W

1.5 W

1.5 W

4

8

8

8

8


30 m

30 m

30 m

30 m

30 m


Yes

Yes

Current consumption

Digital inputs Number of digital inputs Cable length


Yes Yes

Yes


24 V

24 V

24 V

24 V

24 V

• for signal "0"

-3 to 5 V

-3 to 5 V

-3 to 5 V

-3 to 5 V

-3 to 5 V

• for signal "1"

13 to 30 V

13 to 30 V

13 to 30 V

13 to 30 V

13 to 30 V

Yes; 0.5 / 3 / 15 / 20 ms

Yes; 0.5 / 3 / 15 / 20 ms

Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) • for standard inputs - programmable - at "0" to "1", min. - at "0" to "1", max.

1.2 ms 4.8 ms

1.2 ms 4.8 ms

1.2 ms 4.8 ms

Digital outputs Aggregate current of the outputs (per group) • up to 40 °C, max.

900 mA


400 mA


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


1.5 mA

1.5 mA

1.5 mA

1.5 mA

1.5 mA


5/187

5


ET 200X


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 141-1BD310XA0

6ES7 141-1BF310XA0

6ES7 141-1BF300XB0

6ES7 141-1BF400XB0

• Wire break



• Short circuit



6ES7 141-1BF410XA0

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Diagnoses


87 mm; Spacing 60 mm





Height

110 mm

110 mm

110 mm

180 mm

180 mm

Depth

55 mm

55 mm

55 mm

55 mm

55 mm

6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0

5

6ES7 142-1BD40-0XA0

6ES7 142-1BD30-0XA0

6ES7 142-1BF30-0XA0

Voltages and currents Load voltage 2L+ • Short-circuit protection

Yes; clocked electronically


40 mA

28.5 mA

28.5 mA

35 mA

Power loss, typ.

2.5 W

2.1 W

1.2 W

1.5 W


4

4

4

8


30 m

30 m

30 m

30 m


Yes; electronic

Yes; electronic

Yes; electronic

Yes; electronic

2 A; at 24 V DC

2 A; at 24 V DC

0.5 A; at 24 V DC

1.2 A; at 24 V DC

0.5 mA

0.1 mA

0.5 mA

Digital outputs



100 Hz

100 Hz

100 Hz

100 Hz


0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz


1 Hz

1 Hz

1 Hz

1 Hz


6 mA

6A

2A

6A


4 mA

4A

2A

4A

Aggregate current of the outputs (per group)

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Diagnoses • Wire break


• Short circuit







Height

110 mm

110 mm

110 mm

180 mm

Depth

55 mm

55 mm

55 mm

55 mm

5/188



ET 200X


■ Ordering data

Order No.

EM 141 expansion modules


• 8 DI × 24 V DC, dual assignment

6ES7 141-1BF31-0XA0

• 8 DI × 24 V DC, dual assignment with single-channel diagnostics

6ES7 141-1BF30-0XB0

• German

6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0

• 4 DI × 24 V DC

6ES7 141-1BD31-0XA0

• English

6ES7 198-8FA01-8BA0

• 8 DI × 24 V DC, single assignment

6ES7 141-1BF41-0XA0

• French

6ES7 198-8FA01-8CA0

• 8 DI × 24 V DC, single assignment with single-channel diagnostics

3RX1 667

6ES7 141-1BF40-0XB0

M12 connector For connecting actuators or sensors, 5-pin M12 angular circular connector For connecting actuators or sensors, 5-pin

3RX1 668

M12 Y circular connector For the double connection of sensors by means of single cable, 5-pin

6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0




3RX9 802-0AA00


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0

S7 Manual Collection update service for 1 year Scope of supply: Up-to-date CD S7 Manual Collection as well as the three subsequent updates

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2

EM 142 expansion modules • 4 DO × 24 V DC, 2 A without diagnosis

6ES7 142-1BD40-0XA0

• 4 DO × 24 V DC, 2 A with diagnosis

6ES7 142-1BD40-0XB0

• 4 DO × 24 V DC; 0.5 A

6ES7 142-1BD30-0XA0

• 8 DO × 24 V DC /1.2 A single assignment

6ES7 142-1BF30-0XA0

Manual for ET 200X distributed I/O station


5/189

5


ET 200X

PM 148 power module

■ Overview • Expansion module with digital outputs for connecting actuators • With diagnostics functionality • With additional auxiliary voltage supply (load supply)

5


■ Ordering data 6ES7 148-1CA00-0XB0

PM 148 power module DO 4 x 24 V DC/2A, with diagnostics and supply for auxiliary voltage (load)


24 V

Accessories


Yes


No



60 mA


40 mA

Power loss, typ.

2.5 W


4


30 m

Short-circuit protection of the output Yes; electronic Output current • for signal "1" rated value

Manual ET 200X distributed I/O device • German

6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0

• English

6ES7 198-8FA01-8BA0

• French

6ES7 198-8FA01-8CA0

Circular connector M12 For connecting actuators or sensors, 5-pin

3RX1 667

Angular circular connector M12 For connecting actuators or sensors, 5-pin

3RX1 668



M12 covers For covering unused input or output sockets

3RX9 802-0AA00

Connector for PROFIBUS DP Control and auxiliary power (incl. 2 heavy gauge threaded joints and 1 blanking plug); 3 connectors required per basic module

6ES7 194-1AA01-0XA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2

2 A; at 24 V DC


100 Hz


0.5 Hz


1 Hz


6A


4A

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Diagnoses • Wire break


• Short circuit



Yes



Height

165 mm

Depth

67 mm; incl. connector

5/190


Order No. 6ES7 148-1CA00-0XB0


ET 200X

EM 143/DESINA digital expansion module

■ Overview • Desina-compliant expansion module with user-parameterizable digital inputs/outputs for the connection of actuators/ sensors • Also with diagnostics input/ NC input per channel • Can be connected to BM 143/DESINA

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 143-1BF30-0XB0 Output current


40 mA


1.2 A

Power loss, typ.

1.5 W


5 mA


1.3 A



8; 8 function inputs (diagnostic inputs or inputs with opener function) 8


100 Hz

Cable length


2 Hz




1 Hz

Yes

Encoder supply


Output current



1A


0.8 A

24 V; Input voltage for parameterized DI (Pin 4) / Input voltage for function input (Pin 2)


• for signal "0"

-30 V to 5 V

• 2-wire BEROS

Yes

• for signal "1"

13 to 30 V


1.5 mA

5 mA



Encoder



• for standard inputs - at "0" to "1", min.

Yes

1.2 ms

• Status indicator per channel (yellow)

- at "0" to "1", max.

4.8 ms

• Indicator function input per channel (yellow/red)

Yes



Isolation 8; 8 process channels, parameter assignment as DI/DO, 8 function channels, parameter assignment as diagnostic/NC input

Isolation, digital outputs



Short-circuit protection of the output Yes; electronic • Response threshold, typ.

5

6ES7 143-1BF30-0XB0

1.8 A


No

Galvanic isolation, digital inputs No



Height

180 mm

Depth

55 mm


5/191


ET 200X

EM 143/DESINA digital expansion module

■ Ordering data EM 143/DESINA expansion module 8 I/O DESINA

Order No. 6ES7 143-1BF30-0XB0

Accessories Manual ET 200X distributed I/O device

5

• German

6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0

• English

6ES7 198-8FA01-8BA0

• French

6ES7 198-8FA01-8CA0

Circular connector M12 For connecting actuators or sensors, 5-pin

3RX1 667

Angular circular connector M12 For connecting actuators or sensors, 5-pin

3RX1 668



5/192


Order No. Accessories (continued) M12 covers For covering unused input or output sockets

3RX9 802-0AA00


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


ET 200X


■ Overview • Expansion modules with analog inputs/ outputs for connection of actuators/ sensors • With diagnostics functionality, limit values and substitute values

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 144-1FB31-0XB0

6ES7 144-1GB31-0XB0

6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0

6ES7 144-1JB31-0XB0


40 mA

40 mA

80 mA

40 mA

Power loss, max.

0.9 W

0.9 W

1W

0.9 W

4/5-pin M12 round connectors





2

2

2

2


30 m

30 m

30 m

30 m

Current consumption

Connection point Inputs/outputs Analog inputs

permissible input frequency for volt- 30 V age input (destruction limit), max. permissible input current for current input (destruction limit), max.

30 V 40 mA

40 mA

Constant measurement current for resistance-type transmitter, typ.

1.5 mA


Yes

• -10 V to +10 V

Yes


100 kΩ


Yes

• -20 to +20 mA

Yes

Yes; 4 to 20 mA

• Input resistance (-20 to +20 mA)

25 Ω

• 4 to 20 mA

Yes

Yes


25 Ω

25 Ω

Input ranges (rated values), resistance thermometers • Resistance thermometer

Yes

• Pt 100

Yes; Standard


10 MΩ


Yes

Analog outputs Voltage output, short-circuit current, max..

65 mA


5/193

5


ET 200X


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 144-1FB31-0XB0

6ES7 144-1GB31-0XB0

6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0

6ES7 144-1JB31-0XB0

Analog value display (parameterizable)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Measurement principle

integrating

integrating

integrating

integrating


12 Bit; + sign; overrange 17.5%





Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


16.7 / 20 ms

16.7 / 20 ms

16.7 / 20 ms

16.7 / 20 ms

Yes; electronic

Yes; electronic

Yes


No

Yes


Yes

Yes



Encoder supply Short-circuit protection Encoder Connection of signal encoders

5


Yes


Yes


Yes 750 Ω

• Burden of 2-wire transmitter, max. Errors/accuracies Operational limit in overall temperature range • Voltage, relative to input area

+/- 1,2 %

+/- 1,2 %

+/- 1,2 %

+/- 1,2 %


+/- 1,2 %

+/- 1,2 %

+/- 1,2 %

+/- 1,2 %


+/- 1,2 %


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


Yes; upper limit, channel by channel/ lower limit channel by channel




• Process alarm

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes; Diagnostic LED

Yes

Yes

Yes

Diagnoses • Diagnostics • Wire break


• Short circuit







Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

Width





Height

110 mm

110 mm

110 mm

110 mm

Depth

55 mm

55 mm

55 mm

55 mm

250 g

250 g

250 g

250 g



Diagnostics indication LED • Collective error SF (red) Isolation Isolation, analog inputs • Isolation, analog inputs Dimensions and weight


5/194



ET 200X


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 1451FB31-0XB0

6ES7 1451GB31-0XB0


110 mA

Power loss, max.

1.5 W

2.3 W

Yes

Yes


11 Bit; + sign

11 Bit; + sign


1 ms

1 ms


0.6 ms

0.6 ms


6 ms

6 ms


+/- 1 %

+/- 1 %


+/- 1 %

+/- 1 %

No; channel by channel

No; channel by channel

Yes

Yes

Analog value display (parameterizable) Integrations and conversion time/resolutionper channel

Connection point 4/5-pin M12 round connectors


Analog outputs Number of analg outputs

2

2


30 m

30 m


Yes


30 mA

Settling time

Errors/accuracies


Operational limit in overall temperature range 15 V

Output ranges, voltage • -10 to +10 V

6ES7 1451GB31-0XB0



Inputs/outputs

6ES7 1451FB31-0XB0

Yes

Output ranges, current

Substitute values connectable

• -20 to +20 mA

Yes

• 4 to 20 mA

Yes

Connection of actuators



Yes


Yes


Yes

Diagnoses • Wire break

Yes


• Short circuit

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Width



Height

110 mm

110 mm

Depth

55 mm

55 mm

250 g

250 g

Diagnostics indication LED 1 kΩ



0.1 µF

Isolation


500 Ω


0.1 mH

Isolation, analog outputs • Galvanic isolation, analog outputs Dimensions and weight

Destruction limits against externally applied voltages and currents

• Current, max.

Yes; channel by channel Yes; channel by channel


• Voltages at the outputs towards MANA

5


15 V 40 mA



5/195


ET 200X


■ Ordering data

Order No.

EM 144 expansion modules With diagnostics / limit values


• AI 2 × ±10 V

6ES7 144-1FB31-0XB0

Manual ET 200X distributed I/O device

• AI 2 × ±20 mA, 4DMU

6ES7 144-1GB31-0XB0

• German

6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0

• AI 2 × 4 to 20 mA, 2DMU

6ES7 144-1GB41-0XB0

• English

6ES7 198-8FA01-8BA0

6ES7 144-1JB31-0XB0

• French

6ES7 198-8FA01-8CA0 6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0

• AO 2 × ±10 V

6ES7 145-1FB31-0XB0

• AO 2 × ± 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA

6ES7 145-1GB31-0XB0

S7 Manual Collection Electronic manuals on CD, multilingual: S7-200, TD 200, S7-300, M7-300, C7, S7-400, M7-400, STEP 7, Engineering Tools, Runtime Software, SIMATIC DP (Distributed I/O), SIMATIC HMI (Human Machine Interface), SIMATIC NET (Industrial Communication) S7 Manual Collection Maintenance service for 1 year

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2

• AI 2 × RTD (Pt100)10 V EM 145 expansion modules With diagnostics / replacement values

Scope of supply: CD containing the current S7 Manual Collection and the three subsequent updates

5

5/196



ET 200X CP 142-2

■ Overview

■ Application The CP 142-2 enables the connection of the distributed I/O system ET 200X to AS-Interface. This module can be used to activate up to 31 AS-Interface slaves and, if bi-directional slaves are implemented, up to 248 binary components. Up to 6 CP 142-2 can be operated on the ET 200X.

■ Design

■ Benefits

• In connection with the BM 147, the ET 200X enables PLC functionality in degree of protection IP65 • Can also be used in a rugged industrial environment without additional casing due to the high degree of protection IP67 • More flexible and extended application options of the ET 200X thanks to considerable increase in available inputs/outputs • Shorter startup times due to easy configuration at the press of a button • Reduction of standstill or service times in the event of a fault through LED displays: - status of the AS-Interface network - connected slaves and their operational readiness - monitoring of the AS-Interface voltage level

■ Function The CP 142-2 can be used in two operating modes: • Standard mode with BM 141/BM 142/BM 147 • A maximum of 124 input bits and output bits of the AS-Interface slaves can be addressed. • Extended mode with BM 147 An FC (Function Call) enables master calls to be used in accordance with the AS-Interface specification V2.0 (e.g. write parameters). The calls are described in the manual. Program examples are supplied with the manual.

PROFIBUS

AS-Interface

ET 200X with CP 142-2

AS-Interface shaped cable

G_IK10_XX_20013

• Master connection for the ET 200X distributed I/O station to AS-Interface over a 12-pin connector • Easy operation in the I/O address area of SIMATIC ET 200X • No CP configuration required for AS-Interface • Activation of up to 31 AS-Interface slaves in accordance with the AS-Interface specification V2.0 • Monitoring of the supply voltage on the AS-Interface shaped cable • Significant increase in the number of inputs and outputs of ET 200X

• 16 byte inputs and 16 byte outputs are used in the address space of the ET 200X • Operating statuses displayed by LEDs in the frontplate • Display of the connected and activated slaves and their operational readiness by LEDs • One pushbutton for switching the operating status, entering the existing configuration and switching the display • Connection of the AS-Interface cable to M12 connector • Monitoring of the supply voltage on the AS-Interface cable

Example configuration

Configuration Parameterization of the CP 142-2 is performed with the STEP® 7 basic package V2.1 and higher. No additional configuration is required for AS-Interface.


5/197

5


ET 200X CP 142-2

■ Technical specifications Bus cycle time

■ Ordering data 5 ms with 31 slaves

Configuration • AS-Interface

Using pushbutton on front plate

• PROFIBUS

The CP 142-2 occupies 16 byte inputs and 16 byte outputs in the PROFIBUS configuration of the ET200X

AS-Interface Specification

V 2.0

• With BM 141/BM 142

Only IO transmission

• With BM 147 and FC, ASI-3422

All functions

Connection of the AS-Interface cable

Through M12 connector on the front plate

Address range

16 input byte 16 output byte

Supply voltage

5

• Through backplane bus

24 V DC

• From the AS-Interface shaped cable

According to the AS-Interface Specification V2.0

Power loss

2W

Current consumption • Through backplane bus

Typ. 50 mA at 24 V DC

• Through AS-Interface from the AS-Interface shaped cables

According to the AS-Interface specification V 2.0


0 °C ... +55 °C


-40 °C ... +70 °C


95% at +25 °C

Design

ET 200X design

• Module format

Expansion module


87 x 110 x 63

• Weight

Approx. 310 g

• Space required

1 slot


IP66/67

5/198


Order No.

CP 142-2 communications processor For connecting SIMATIC ET 200X to AS-Interface

6GK7 142-2AH00-0XA0

CP 142-2 manual • German

6GK7 142-2AH00-8AA0

Electronic manuals Communications systems, protocols, products on CD-ROM German/English

6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0


ET 200X

EM 148-P pneumatic module

■ Overview • The module for standard applications in pneumatics • For controlling two simple or double-action pneumatic cylinders • Electronics and pneumatics on one module • With integrated digital inputs for recording the cylinder positions Note: Cannot be used with DESINA/ECOFAST basic modules

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 148-1DA00-0XA0 Current consumption

5

6ES7 148-1DA00-0XA0 Pneumatics

from load voltage L2+ (including valve), max.

130 mA

Connection point, pneumatic connect.


40 mA 50 mA

• Number of outputs for valve control

2

per valve, max. Power loss, typ.

3W

• Switching outputs

Quickstar QS 6

• Air supply/exhaust

Quickstar QS 8, jointly recorded for both valves

4; electrical

• Controllable pneumatic cylinders, dual action cylinders

Yes

30 m

• Controllable pneumatic cylinders, single action cylinders

Yes

Valve type

2 x monostable 4/2-way valve with spring reset

Digital inputs Number of digital inputs Cable length • Cable length unshielded, max. Input voltage • Rated value, DC

24 V

• for signal "0"

-3 to 5 V

Print area

3 to 8 bar

• for signal "1"

13 to 30 V

Rated flow

300 l/min

Valve switching times

20 ms; On, about: 20 ms; Off: 20 ms

Manual operation

Yes, momentary contact

Medium

Compressed air filtered (40 µm), oiled (oil: VG 32), unoiled


7 mA


1.2 ms 4.8 ms


Yes


1.5 mA

■ Ordering data EM 148-P pneumatic module DI 4 x 24 V DC/DO 2 x P With 2 integrated 4/2-way valves



Height

173 mm

Depth

88 mm

Order No. 6ES7 148-1DA00-0XA0

Accessories Silencer for pneumatic module

6ES7 194-1EA00-0XA0

Sealing plugs for pneumatic module For using 4/2-way valves as 3/2-way valves, to protect the connections

6ES7 194-1JA00-0XA0


5/199


ET 200X

EM 148-P pneumatic interface

■ Overview

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 1481EH01-0XA0

6ES7 1481EH11-0XA0

from load voltage L2+ (including valve), max.

370 mA

520 mA


35 mA

45 mA

per valve, max.

20 mA

32 mA

Power loss, typ.

6W

9W

• Number of outputs for valve control

16

16

Print area

3 to 8 bar

3 to 8 bar

Rated flow

400 l/min

800 l/min

Connectable valves

CPV 10 standard spectrum

CPV 14 standard spectrum

Number of connectable valves, max.

8; 8 valve disks (up to 16 valve functions)

8; 8 valve disks (up to 16 valve functions)

Medium

Compressed air, filtered (40 µm), oiled (oil: VG 32), unoiled/vacuum

Compressed air, filtered (40 µm), oiled (oil: VG 32), unoiled/vacuum


Yes

Yes

• between the channels, in groups of

16

16


Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Current consumption

Pneumatics Connection point, pneumatic connect.

5

• Interface to accept an original FESTO valve terminal CPV 10 compact performance valve terminal or CPV 14 • For use of the ET 200X for applications with flexible pneumatics • High level of flexibility in pneumatics thanks to the different valve functions and different flow rate volumes

Isolation Isolation, valve outputs


147 mm; Width 147 mm; Width module 120 mm module 120 mm

Height

152 mm

152 mm

Depth

53 mm

53 mm

■ Ordering data EM 148-P pneumatic interface • DO 16 × P/CPV 10 for directly adapting the FESTO valve terminal CPV 10 16 DO × P • DO 16 × P/CPV 14 for directly adapting the FESTO valve terminal CPV 14 16 DO × P

5/200


Order No. 6ES7 148-1EH01-0XA0

6ES7 148-1EH11-0XA0

FESTO CPV 10 valve terminal

Available from Fa. FESTO

FESTO CPV 14 valve terminal

Available from Fa. FESTO FESTO AG & Co Ruiterstr. 82 D-73732 Esslingen, Germany Further addresses can be found in the Internet at http://www.festo.de


ET 200X

EM 148-FC frequency converter

■ Overview • Expansion module with integrated frequency converter for ET 200X • For driving three-phase AC motors (380 … 500 V AC) up to 1.5 kW • Integral component of ECOFAST within the framework of ET 200X DESINA • Degree of protection IP65 • Can be combined with all ET 200X modules without any restrictions • Simple configuring and parameterization through PROFIBUS DP using STEP 7 and configuring tools in compliance with standards

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 148-1FA10-0XB0

5

6ES7 148-1FA10-0XB0


Continuous output current at 55 °C

Input voltage to VDE

• at 2 kHz and 4 kHz, max.

2.1 A; Continuous currents > 1.9 A are only permissible if at least one of the following conditions is met: - Ambient temperature < 50 °C; - Continuous input current when the load supply voltage is looped through < 8 A

• at 8 kHz, max.

1.7 A

• at 16 kHz, max.

1.05 A

• permissible range, lower limit (AC) 340 V • permissible range, upper limit (AC)

500 V

Input voltage to UL • permissible range, upper limit (AC)

340 V

• permissible range, lower limit (AC) 480 V Mains frequency

Current consumption

• permissible range, lower limit

47 Hz

• permissible range, upper limit

63 Hz


125 mA

Mains filter

from backplane bus DC 5 V, typ.

50 mA

• integrated - Class A

Yes; Type A (to EN 55011)

Module power loss

Yes; to EN 55011

• in intermittent operation, max.

70 W

97%

• in continuous operation, max.

42 W

Degree of efficiency of the converter, typ.

Drive technology

Operations for power failure bridging time (20 ms)

Control/mode

• Max. current for Ue < 380 V

1.85 A; at 3.8 A approx. 8 ms

• Max. current for Ue >= 380 V

2.1 A; at 3.8 A approx. 8 ms

Continuous current on continued looping of the supply voltage, max.

16 A

Continuous output current at 40 °C • at 2 kHz and 4 kHz, max.

• at 8 kHz, max.

• at 16 kHz, max.

3.8 A; Continuous currents > 1.9 A are only permissible if at least one of the following conditions is met: - Ambient temperature < 50 °C; - Continuous input current when the load supply voltage is looped through < 8 A 3 A; Continuous currents > 1.9 A are only permissible if at least one of the following conditions is met: - Ambient temperature < 50 °C ; - Continuous input current when the load supply voltage is looped through < 8 A 1.45 A

• U/f characteristic

Yes

• four quadrants

Yes

Motor output, Cable length max.

10 m

Overload capability

150%; for 60 s, relative to rated current

Output frequency, min.

0 Hz

Output frequency, max.

300 Hz

Output frequency, resolution

0.01 Hz

Motor Rated motor power at 3 x 400 V AC • to VDE, max. • to UL, max.

1.5 kW 2 hp

Power factor (cos phi), min.

0.7

No. of pins

2, 4 or 6

Motor brake

AC (rated voltage according to infeed supply voltage) / max. 1 A No; internal fuse 4 A provided

• short-circuit proof Thermistor

Response range about 4 to 5 kOhm; channel related error message: overload


5/201


ET 200X

EM 148-FC frequency converter

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 148-1FA10-0XB0 Status information/alarms/ diagnostics

6ES7 148-1FA10-0XB0 Permissible potential difference between different circuits


Yes

Diagnoses

Degree and class of protection • Protection against

• Diagnostics

Yes


Yes

• Status indicator STAT (yellow)

Yes

• Monitoring the power supply, power module PWR (green)

Yes


2830 V DC

Isolation

5

1500 V AC


between the load voltages

Yes

between load voltage and all other switching components

Yes

■ Ordering data EM 148-FC frequency converter For driving three-phase AC motors (380 V … 500 V AC) up to 1.5 kW; with integrated mains filter Accessories Connector for motor outgoing feeder HAN Q8 shielded, assignment to DESINA specification


120 mm

Height

265 mm

Depth

181 mm


Order No. 6ES7 148-1FA10-0XB0

6ES7 194-1AB01-0XA0

Excess temperature in the converter; Excess temperature in the motor; Overvoltage and undervoltage; Short circuit (motor) and ground fault; No-load protection (interrupt)

3 kg

Order No. Accessories (continued) Handheld operator panel with 0.5 m connecting cable and connector

3RK1 902-0AM00

Identification plate for identification of inputs and outputs, as item code; 20 frames with 40 nameplates each, 8 x 10 mm, petrol color

6ES7 194-1BA00-0XA0

Manual for ET 200X distributed I/O station

Connector set HAN Q8 for power supply

• German

6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0

• 2.5 mm2, 9-pin

3RK1 902-0CA00

• English

6ES7 198-8FA01-8BA0

• 4 mm2, 9-pin

3RK1 902-0CB00

• French

6ES7 198-8FA01-8CA0

S7 manual collection Electronic manuals on CD, multi-language: S7-200, TD 200, S7-300, M7-300, C7, S7-400, M7-400, STEP 7, Engineering Tools, Runtime Software, SIMATIC DP (Distributed I/O), SIMATIC HMI (Human Machine Interface), SIMATIC NET (Industrial Communication)

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0

S7 Manual Collection update service for 1 year Scope of supply: Up-to-date CD S7 manual collection as well as the three subsequent updates

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2

for power transmission • 2.5 mm2, 9-pin

3RK1 902-0CC00

• 4 mm2, 9-pin

3RK1 902-0CD00

Motor cable Pre-assembled, shielded, HAN Q8 open end • 1.5 m

6ES7 194-1LA01-0AA0

•3m

6ES7 194-1LB01-0AA0

•5m

6ES7 194-1LC01-0AA0

• 10 m

6ES7 194-1LD01-0AA0

Sealing cap for 9-pin power socket, 1 pack = 10 pieces

3RK1 902-0CJ00

Dismantling tool for loosening contact pins and contact sockets in 6-pin units

3RK1 902-0AJ00

5/202



ET 200X

ET 200X motor starter

■ Overview

■ Application Any three-phase load, e.g. three-phase motors, can be switched and protected with the ET 200X via motor starters. Motor starters are available in two variants: • Electromechanical motor starters for electrical isolation of loads from the supply • Electronic motor starters - can be used for high starting frequency - The response in the event of overload can be specifically configured, e.g. emergency operation on overload, remote reset via bus following overload tripping Motor starters can be operated with a handheld operator panel which makes start-up easier.

5

• • • •

For switching and protecting any three-phase load Direct-on-line or reversing starters Electromechanical or solid-state Power bus can be plugged in using the new HAN Q8 plug-in connectors • Conductor cross-sections up to 4 mm2 • 35 A per segment • Supplied with different brake contacts as an option


5/203


ET 200X



Order No.

Expansion modules for electromechanical motor starters

5

Expansion module EM 300 DS Electromechanical direct-on-line starter

3RK1 300- 7 7 S01-0AA 7

Expansion module EM 300 RS Electromechanical reversing starter

3RK1 300- 7 7 S01-1AA 7

Three-phase motor 4-pole at 400 V AC standard output P in kW

Setting range of the overcurrent release in A

< 0.06 0.06 0.09 0.10

0.14 up to 0.20 0.18 up to 0.25 0.22 up to 0.32 0.28 up to 0.40

0B 0C 0D 0E

0.12 0.18 0.21 0.25


0F 0G 0H 0J

0.37 0.55 0.75 0.90


0K 1A 1B 1C

1.1 1.5 1.9 2.2


1D 1E 1F 1G

3.0 4.0 5.5

5.5 up to 8.0 7 up to 10 9 up to 12

1H 1J 1K

• Standard version

0

• Version with brake contact for 24 V DC/3 A externally-fed brakes

1

• Design with brake contact for 400 V AC/0.5 A infeed for brake rectifier

3

• Version with brake contact for DC-side switching of the brake with 500 V DC/0.2 A

4

N S A 0_0009

Expansion module for solid-state motor starter

5/204

Expansion module EM 300 EDS Solid-state direct-on-line starter

3RK1 300- 7 7 S10-0AA 7

Expansion module EM 300 ERS Solid-state reversing starter

3RK1 300- 7 7 S10-1AA 7

Three-phase motor 4-pole at 400 V AC standard output P in kW

Setting range of the overcurrent release in A

0.18 up to 0.80

0.60 up to 2.18

0A

0.75 up to 2.20

2.00 up to 5.95

0B

• Standard version

0

• Version with brake contact for 24 V DC/3 A externally-fed brakes

1

• Design with brake contact for 400 V AC/0.5 A infeed for brake rectifier

3

• Version with brake contact for DC-side switching of the brake with 500 V DC/0.2 A

4



ET 200X



Order No.

Accessories for DC 24 V Manual

6ES7 194-1AA00-0XA0

6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0

• German

6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0

• English

6ES7 198-8FA01-8BA0

• French

6ES7 198-8FA01-8CA0

Connecting plug for PROFIBUS DP, control and auxiliary voltage (including two conduit threads)

6ES7 194-1AA00-0XA0

Cable for bus and control voltage 5-core Unprepared Any length 1) • PVC

6ES7 194-1LY00-0AA0

• PUR Can be trailed Oil-resistant Partially weld-resistant

6ES7 194-1LY10-0AA0

5

M12 coupler plug • 5-pole for connecting actuators and sensors

3RX8 000-0CD55

• 4-pole shielded for connecting the analog expansion modules

Available from: Franz Binder GmbH & Co, PO BOX 11 52D, 74148 Neckarsulm, Germany

M12 angular coupler plug • 5-pole for connecting actuators and sensors

3RX8 000-0CE55

• 4-pole shielded for connecting the analog expansion modules

Available from: Franz Binder GmbH & Co, PO BOX 11 52D, 74148 Neckarsulm, Germany

M12 Y-coupling connector 5-pole for connecting two sensors with a single cable

6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0

M12 sealing caps for closing unused input or output sockets (each set contains ten sealing caps)

3RK1 901-1KA00


5/205


ET 200X



Order No.

Accessories for motor starter EM 300, 9-pole connector (Han Q8/0) Connector set for power supply 9-pole Comprising: one connector housing with Pg 16 screw connection one socket holder, 9-pole six contact sockets, suitable for cable 3RK1 902-0CA00

• 4 x 2.5 mm2, 6 x 2.5 mm2

3RK1 902-0CA00

• 4 x 4 mm2, 6 x 4 mm2

3RK1 902-0CB00

Connector set for power transmission 9-pole Comprising: one connector housing with Pg 16 screw connection one pin holder, 9-pole six contact pins, suitable for cable 3RK1 902-0CC00

5 3RK1 902-0CH00

• 6 x 2.5 mm2

3RK1 902-0CC00

• 4 x 4 mm2, 6 x 4 mm2

3RK1 902-0CD00

Connector set for motor connection 1.5 mm2 9-pole Comprising: one connector housing with Pg 16 screw connection one pin holder, 9-pole eight contact pins 1.5 mm2

3RK1 902-0CE00

Sealing cap for 9-pole power socket (-X3) • One set comprises ten sealing caps

3RK1 902-0CJ00

• One set comprises one sealing cap

3RK1 902-0CK00

Power connecting cable 0.12 m long • From the motor starter to the frequency converter, DESINA - 5 x 4 mm2 , without brake lead

3RK1 902-0CF00

- 7 x 4 mm2 , with brake lead

3RK1 902-0CU00

• From motor starter to motor starter - 4 x 4 mm2

3RK1 902-0CG00

- 6 x 4 mm2

3RK1 902-0CH00

Motor connection cable, 4 x 1.5 mm 2 with power connector 9-pole • 1.5 m

3RK1 902-0CL00

•3m

3RK1 902-0CM00

•5m

3RK1 902-0CP00

• 10 m

3RK1 902-0CQ00

Motor connection cable, 6 x 1.5 mm 2 with power connector 9-pole

5/206

•3m

3RK1 902-0CN00

•5m

3RK1 902-0CR00

• 10 m

3RK1 902-0CS00



ET 200X



Order No.

Mounting accessories Single mounting rails for SIMATIC ET 200X (narrow) 3RK1 194-1GA.0-0XA0

• 400 mm long for basic module + three expansion modules (60 mm)

6ES7 194-1GA00-0XA0

• 640 mm long for basic module + seven expansion modules (60 mm)

6ES7 194-1GA10-0XA0

• 2000 mm long for customer-specific lengths

6ES7 194-1GA20-0XA0

Double mounting rails for SIMATIC ET 200X (wide) 3RK1 902-0AH00

• 520 mm long for basic module + one expansion module (60 mm) + two motor starters/frequency converters

6ES7 194-1GB00-0XA0

• 1,000 mm long for basic module + one expansion module (60 mm) + six motor starters/frequency converters

6ES7 194-1GB10-0XA0

Fastening screws M5 x 20 One set contains 100 fastening screws

6ES7 194-1KC00-0XA0

5

Crimping tool for contact pins and contact sockets in one size from • 1.5 to 2.5

mm2

3RK1 902-0AH00

• 1.5 to 4 mm2

3RK1 902-0CT00

Disassembly tool for disassembling male and female contacts in 9-pole inserts

3RK1 902-0AJ00

Handheld operator panel for startup with 0.5 m connecting cable and plug connector

3RK1 902-0AM00

Identification plate for labeling the inputs and outputs as well as item code One set contains 20 frames with 40 labels each, 8 x 10 mm, petrol color

6ES7 194-1BA00-0XA0

Miscellaneous accessories

3RK1 902-0AM00

6ES7 194-1BA00-0XA0

1) The suffix "-Z" must be appended to the order number and the length must be specified in plain text. Example of a cable with a PVC sheath and a length of 35 m: 6ES7 194-1LY00-0AA0-Z Y01 35 m


5/207


ET 200X

SITOP power, 24 V/10 A power supply

■ Overview

■ Application Power supply unit with degree of protection IP65, design and functionality optimally matched to ET 200X distributed I/O devices. When using without ET 200X, the connector seal accessory is required.

5

• Primary clocked power supply for the ET 200X • Adapted in terms of design and functionality • Can be installed without expensive wiring • The separate screw terminals to tap voltage mean that it can also be used for other applications Note: For further information on SITOP power supplies see Catalog KT 10.1

5/208



ET 200X

SITOP power, 24 V/10 A power supply

■ Technical specifications Power supply, type

10 A

Power supply, type

Order No.

6EP1 334-2CA00


10 A

Input

Single-phase AC

Output overvoltage protection

Yes, acc. to EN 60950

Rated voltage Vin rated

120/230 V AC Settable using wire jumper

Current limitation type

typ. 9 to 11 A


Choice of automatic restart or latching shutdown

Voltage range

93 to 132/187 to 264 V AC

Overvoltage strength

2.3 x Vin rated, 1.3 ms

RMS sustained short-circuit current

< 21 A

Mains buffering at Iout rated

> 20 ms at Vin = 93/187 V

Overload/short-circuit indicator

Rated line frequency; range

50/60 Hz; 47 to 63 Hz

Red LED for overtemperature switch-off

Rated current Iin rated

4.3/2.6 A

Inrush current limitation (+25 °C)

Safety

< 65 A, typ. 3 ms

Galvanic isolation primary/secondary

Yes, SELV output voltage Vout acc. to EN 60950

I2t

< 2.5 A2s

Protective class

Class I

Integrated line-side fuse

T 6.3 A/250 V (not accessible)

Discharge current

< 3.5 mA (typ. 0.9 mA)

Recommended circuit-breaker (IEC 898) in mains supply line

From 16 A, Characteristic C

TÜV test

Yes

CE marking

Yes

UL/cUL (CSA) approval

Yes, UL listed (UL 508), File E143289, CSA (CSA 22.2 No. 14-95)

Output

Stabilized, floating direct voltage

Rated voltage Vout rated

24 V DC

Total tolerance • Stat. mains compensation • Stat. load compensation

±3% Approx. 0.2 % Approx. 1 %

FM approval

-

Appr. for use in marine vessels

-

Residual ripple (clock frequency: approx. 50 kHz)

< 150 mVpp

Degree of protection (EN 60529)

IP65

Spikes (bandwidth: 20 MHz)

< 240 mVpp

Setting range

22.8 to 25.2 V

Status display Power ON/OFF behavior

Green LED for 24 V O.K. No overshoot of Vout (soft start)

Starting delay/voltage rise

< 3 s/typ. 80 ms

Rated current Iout rated

10 A

Current range • Up to +45 °C • Up to +60 °C

0 to 10 A (up to +40 °C) 0 to 8 A (up to +55 °C)

Dyn. V/I with • Starting on short circuit • Short-circuit in operation

typ. 38 A for 200 ms

Parallel connection for increased output

Yes, 2

Efficiency Efficiency at Vout rated, Iout rated

Approx. 87 %

Power loss at Vout rated, Iout rated

Approx. 36 W

Dyn. mains compensation (Vin rated ± 15 %)

± 0.3 % Vout

Dyn. load compensation (Iout: 50/100/50 %)

± 5 % Vout

Settling time • Load step from 50 to 100 % • Load step from 100 to 50 %

■ Ordering data

EMC Interference emission

EN 55011 Class A

Line harmonics limitation

-

Interference immunity

EN 61000-6-2

Operating specifications Ambient temperature range

-25 to +55 °C (power derating above +40 °C)

Transportation and storage temperature range

-40 to +70 °C

Humidity rating

Climatic class 3K3 acc. to EN 60721, no condensation

Mechanical specifications Connections • Mains input L, N, PE

• Output L+

• Output M

Control

typ. 0.2 ms typ. 0.2 ms

5

Screw-type terminals 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 (PG11 screwed gland) Screw terminals, or connection via expansion interface on the backplane bus of the ET 200X Screw terminals, or connection via expansion interface on the backplane bus of the ET 200X


140 x 270 x 126

Weight approx.

1.7 kg

Mounting

Wall mounting, a ny mounting position

Accessories

IP65 connector seal

Order No.

SITOP power 24 V/10 A power supply for ET 200X 120/230 V AC; 24 V DC, 10 A

6EP1 334-2CA00

SITOP power accessories connector seal IP65 required for the power supply to operate in standalone mode

6EP1 971-2CA00


5/209


ET 200L

ET 200L block I/O

■ Design Terminal block The terminal block accommodates the electronic module. It carries the wiring, so that no cables need to be separated when the electronic module is replaced. The terminal block can be mounted on a standard rail. In addition to horizontal mounting all other mounting positions are permissible. A total of 4 terminal blocks are available for SIMATIC ET 200L: • 16 channels with screw-type terminals or spring-type terminals • 32 channels with screw-type terminals or spring-type terminals Electronic module The electronic modules contain the digital input and output channels.

5

ET 200L block I/O (with 16 channels)

The SIMATIC ET 200L compact I/O station comprises • one terminal block and • one electronic module Connection to the PROFIBUS DP field bus is through the interface integrated in the electronic module. The ET 200L block I/O is not expandable.

The following digital electronic modules are available for 24 V DC: • 16 DI; with 16 digital inputs • 16 DO; with 16 digital outputs, 0.5 A • 32 DI; with 32 digital inputs • 32 DO; with 32 digital outputs, 0.5 A • 16 DI/16 DO; with 16 digital inputs and outputs, 0.5 A. Blocks for AC: • 16 DO/1 A • 16 DO/ 2 A • 16 DI • 8 DI/8 RO/2 A PROFIBUS DP station address The address of the compact ET 200L I/O station is set on the electronic module by way of a rotary coding switch. Bus line termination: If the ET 200L is used at the end of a bus segment, it requires a bus connector with terminating resistance. Accessories Perforated labeling sheets (DIN A4) suitable for machine printing are available as accessories. The terminal blocks come with 2-wire connection as standard. Optional supplementary terminals enable the use of 3-wire or 4-wire connections.

■ Technical specifications – general Connection method

Screw-type terminals and springloaded terminals, fixed wiring; Standard: 2-wire method Optional: 3-wire and 4-wire connection

Ambient temperature on vertical wall (preferred installation position) • With horizontal installation • With other installation


1.5 Mbit/s

Relative humidity

5 to 95 % (RH severity level 2 in accordance with IEC 1131-2)

Direct data exchange

Sender (for digital outputs and ET 200L mixed modules; not for L-SC or IM-SC)


795 to 1080 hPa

Galvanic isolation

Yes, between PROFIBUS DP and internal electronics

Supply voltage

24 V DC, reverse polarity protection


IP20

5/210


Mechanical rating: • Vibration

• Shock

0 °C to +60 °C 0 to 40 °C

IEC 68, Part 2 – 6 10 - 57 Hz (const. amplitude 0.075 mm) 57 - 150 Hz (constant acceleration 1 g) IEC 68, Part 2–27 Half-sine, 15 g, 11 ms


ET 200L

ET 200L block I/O

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 1311BH01-0XB0

6ES7 1311BL01-0XB0

Supply voltages • DC 24 V

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes

Hardware config. Rack TB 16L

TB 32L

Connection point Inputs/outputs

Yes

Yes


No

No

• between the channels and PROFIBUS DP

Yes

Yes

• horizontal installation, min.

0 °C

0 °C

• horizontal installation, max.

60 °C; 40°C for other mountings

60 °C; 40°C for other mountings

• permissible range, min.

795 hPa

795 hPa

• permissible range, max.

1,080 hPa

1,080 hPa

• Operation, min.

5%

5%

• Operation, max.

95%; RH stressing level 2 in accordance with IEC 1131-2

95%; RH stressing level 2 in accordance with IEC 1131-2

Yes; IEC 68, Part 2-6 10 - 57 Hz (const. amplitude 0.075 mm) 57 - 150 Hz (constant acceleration 1 g)

Yes; IEC 68, Part 2-6 10 - 57 Hz (const. amplitude 0.075 mm) 57 - 150 Hz (constant acceleration 1 g)

Yes; IEC 68, Part 2-27 half sine, 15 g, 11 ms


Yes

Yes

between PROFIBUS DP all all other circuits Galvanic isolation, digital inputs

Environmental requirements Operating termperature

Screw and spring-latch techniques, in vertical wiring; standard: 2-wire technique optional: 3-wire and 4wire techniques

Screw and spring-latch techniques, in vertical wiring; standard: 2-wire technique optional: 3-wire and 4wire techniques


1.5 Mbit/s

1.5 Mbit/s


Yes; Transmitter (for digital outputs and hybrid modules ET 200L: not for L-SC or IM-SC)


Air pressure

Relative humidity

Vibrations • Operation checked according to IEC 60068-2-6


6ES7 1311BL01-0XB0

Isolation

Rated value

• Required terminal block

6ES7 1311BH01-0XB0

16

32

1,000 m

1,000 m

• Rated value, DC

24 V

24 V

• for signal "0"

-30V to 5 V

-30V to 5 V

• for signal "1"

13 to 30 V

13 to 30 V

5 mA

5 mA

Cable length • Cable length for NAMUR input, shielded, max. Input voltage

Shock test • checked according to IEC 60068-2-27


• for standard inputs - at "0" to "1", min. - at "0" to "1", max.


Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) 2 ms 4.5 ms

2 ms 4.5 ms


5/211

5


ET 200L

ET 200L block I/O

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 1321BH00-0XB0

6ES7 1321BL00-0XB0

Rated value • DC 24 V

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes

0.5 A

0.5 A

• for signal "0" residual current, max. 1 mA

1 mA

• for signal "1" permissible range for 0 to 60 °C, max. Output delay with resistive load

Voltages and currents 20 ms

20 ms

Load voltage 2L+ • Rated value (DC)

6ES7 1321BL00-0XB0

Output current

Supply voltages

Mains/voltage failure jumpering, min.

6ES7 1321BH00-0XB0

• "0" to "1", max.

50 ms

50 ms

• "1" to "0", max.

200 ms

200 ms


No

No


Yes; only outputs of the same group



100 Hz

100 Hz

0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz


8 Hz

8 Hz

• all other mounting positions - up to 40 °C, max.

2A

2A


4A

4A

• horizontal arramgement, to 40 °C, max.

3,000 mA

3,000 mA

• horizontal arrangement, to 60 °C, max.

2,000 mA

2,000 mA

• lower limit

41 Ω

41 Ω

• upper limit

28,000 Ω

28,000 Ω

No

No

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes


Yes

Parallel switching of 2 outputs 24 V; 1L+, 2L+, 3L+

24 V; 1L+, 2L+, 3L+

50 mA; per load group (from L1+ or L2+ / L3+)

100 mA; per load group (L1+ or L2+ / L3+)

Current consumption from load voltage L1 (without load), max.

5

from supply voltage L+, max. Power loss, typ.

70 mA; L4+ / L5+

70 mA; L4+ / L5+


5W

7W


Hardware config. Rack • Required terminal block

TB 16L

TB 32L

Communication functions Bus protocol/transmission protocol

PROFIBUS-DP

PROFIBUS-DP

Screw and spring-latch techniques, in vertical wiring; standard: 2-wire technique optional: 3-wire and 4-wire techniques

Screw and spring-latch techniques, in vertical wiring; standard: 2-wire technique optional: 3-wire and 4-wire techniques


1.5 Mbit/s

1.5 Mbit/s

SYNC capability

Yes

Yes





16

32


1,000 m

1,000 m


600 m

600 m

Connection point Inputs/outputs

PROFIBUS DP

Load impedance range


Digital outputs

Short-circuit protection of the output Yes; electronic Response threshold, typ.

Switching frequency

0.7 A

Diagnoses • Diagnostic functions Diagnostics indication LED

Yes; electronic

Isolation

0.7 A


500 V DC

500 V DC

Yes

Yes


typically L1+ (-55 V) or L2+ / L3+ (-55 V)

typically L1+ (-55 V) or L2+ / L3+ (-55 V)

Lamp load, max.

5W

5W



Yes

Yes


No

No

• between the channels and PROFIBUS DP

Yes; Optocoupler

Yes


24 V

24 V


Ua - 3 V

Ua - 3 V

5/212




ET 200L

ET 200L block I/O

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 1321BH00-0XB0 Environmental requirements Operating termperature • horizontal installation, min. • horizontal installation, max.

Air pressure • permissible range, min. • permissible range, max. Relative humidity • Operation, min. • Operation, max.

Vibrations • Operation checked according to IEC 60068-2-6


6ES7 1321BL00-0XB0

0 °C 60 °C; 40°C for other mountings


795 hPa 1,080 hPa

795 hPa 1,080 hPa

5% 95%; RH stressing level 2 in accordance with IEC 1131-2 Yes; IEC 68, Part 2-6 10 - 57 Hz (const. amplitude 0.075 mm) 57 - 150 Hz (constant acceleration 1 g)


Yes;IEC 68, Part Yes;IEC 68, Part 2-27 half sine, 2-27 half sine, 15 g, 11 ms 15 g, 11 ms


Yes

Yes


0016h

0011h


145 mm

145 mm

Height

60 mm

60 mm

Depth

60.5 mm

60.5 mm

130 g

150 g


6ES7 133-1BL01-0XB0 Supply voltages Rated value • DC 24 V • Reverse polarity protection Hardware config. Rack • Required terminal block Connection point Inputs/outputs

PROFIBUS DP Transmission speed, max. direct data exchange (cross traffic)


Yes Yes

TB 32L Screw and spring-latch techniques, in vertical wiring; standard: 2-wire technique optional: 3-wire and 4-wire techniques 1.5 Mbit/s Yes; Transmitter (for digital outputs and hybrid modules ET 200L: not for L-SC or IM-SC) 16

6ES7 133-1BL01-0XB0 Cable length • Cable length for NAMUR input, shielded, max.

1,000 m

Input voltage • Rated value, DC • for signal "0" • for signal "1"

24 V -30 V to 5 V 13 to 30 V


5 mA


2 ms 4.5 ms


16


1,000 m

5

Short-circuit protection of the output Yes; electronic Output voltage • Rated value (DC) • for signal "1", min.

24 V Ua - 3 V

Output current • for signal "1" permissible range 0.5 mA for 0 to 60 °C, max. • for signal "0" residual current, max. 1 mA Switching frequency • with resistive load, max. • with inductive load, max. • on lamp load, max.

100 Hz 0.5 Hz 8 Hz

Aggregate current of the outputs (per group) • horizontal installation • up to 60 °C, max.

4A

Isolation between PROFIBUS DP all all other circuits

Yes

Galvanic isolation, digital inputs • between the channels • between the channels and PROFIBUS DP

No Yes

Environmental requirements Operating termperature • horizontal installation, min. • horizontal installation, max.


Air pressure • permissible range, min. • permissible range, max.

795 hPa 1,080 hPa

Relative humidity • Operation, min. • Operation, max. Vibrations • Operation checked according to IEC 60068-2-6





Yes


5/213


ET 200L

ET 200L block I/O

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 193-1CH000XA0

6ES7 193-1CH100XA0

6ES7 193-1CH200XA0

6ES7 193-1CL000XA0

6ES7 193-1CL100XA0

Width

145 mm

145 mm

191 mm

191 mm

191 mm

Height

100 mm; Height with electronics block from top edge of DIN rail (with bus connector ): 6ES7 972-0CA300XA0): 82 mm


100 mm; Height with electronics block from top edge (with bus connector ): 98.5 mm



Depth

40.5 mm

40.5 mm

40.5 mm

40.5 mm

40.5 mm

230 g

230 g

283 g

350 g

350 g



■ Ordering data

5

Order No.

Electronic block for ET 200L With digital inputs/outputs for 24 V DC

Labeling sheet with strips for 10 electronic blocks for

• 16 DI

6ES7 131-1BH01-0XB0

• 32 DI

6ES7 131-1BL01-0XB0

• 16 DO; 0.5 A

6ES7 132-1BH00-0XB0

• 32 DO; 0.5 A

6ES7 132-1BL00-0XB0

• 16 DI/16 DO; 0.5 A

6ES7 133-1BL01-0XB0

Terminal block for ET 200L and ET 200L-SC For mounting the electronic blocks TB 16L • 16 channels, screw-type terminals • 16 channels, spring-loaded terminals TB 32L • 32 channels, screw-type terminals • 32 channels, spring-loaded terminals TB 16L AC • 16 channels, screw-type terminals

6ES7 193-1CH00-0XA0 6ES7 193-1CH10-0XA0

6ES7 193-1CL00-0XA0 6ES7 193-1CL10-0XA0

6ES7 193-1CH20-0XA0

Add-on terminal for ET 200L and ET 200L-SC 16 channels; 1 tier • Screw-type terminals

6ES7 193-1FH20-0XA0

• Spring-loaded terminals

6ES7 193-1FH50-0XA0

16 channels; 2 tiers • Screw-type terminals

6ES7 193-1FH30-0XA0


6ES7 193-1FH60-0XA0

32 channels; 1 tier • Screw-type terminals

6ES7 193-1FL20-0XA0


6ES7 193-1FL50-0XA0

32 channels; 2 tiers • Screw-type terminals

6ES7 193-1FL30-0XA0


6ES7 193-1FL60-0XA0

5/214



• 16-channel electronic blocks incl. add-on terminals

6ES7 193-1BH00-0XA0

• 32-channel electronic blocks incl. add-on terminals

6ES7 193-1BL00-0XA0

PROFIBUS bus connector • 90° cable outlet, FastConnect terminating resistor with isolating function, without PG socket, up to 12 Mbit/s

6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0

• Angular outgoing cable, insulation displacement terminals, without bus terminating resistor, without PG connection socket, up to 1.5 Mbit/s

6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0

• 90° cable outlet, FastConnect terminating resistor with isolating function, with PG socket, up to 12 Mbit/s

6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0


ET 200M

Introduction

■ Application

■ Technical specifications – General Connection method

Screw-type and spring-loaded method, hard-wired


IP20

Ambient temperature on vertical wall (preferred installation position) • With horizontal installation

0 ... + 60 °C

• With other installation

0 ... + 40 °C

Relative humidity

5 ... 95 % (RH severity level 2 in accordance with IEC 1131-2)


795 to 1080 hPa

Mechanical strength

• Modular I/O system with degree of protection IP20, particularly suitable for user-specific and complex automation tasks. • Can be expanded with S7-300 automation system signal, communication and function modules • Applicable Ex analog input or output modules with HART optimize the ET 200M for use in process engineering. • Can be used in redundant systems (S7-400H, S7-400F/FH) • Comprises a PROFIBUS DP interface with IM 153, up to eight S7-300 I/O modules (set up with bus connectors or active bus modules) and, if applicable, a power supply unit. • Modules can be replaced during operation (hot swapping) with the bus modules active • Can be supplied with integrated fiber optic interface if required • Transmission rates up to 12 Mbit/s • Ex approval to Cat. 3 for Zone 2 acc. to ATEX100 a • Fail-safe digital inputs and outputs as well as analog inputs for safety-related signal processing according to PROFIsafe.

• Vibration

IEC 68, Part 2 - 6: 10 ... 57 Hz (const. amplitude 0.075 mm) 57 ... 150 Hz (constant acceleration 1 g)

• Shock

IEC 68, Part 2–27 Half-sine, 15 g, 11 ms

■ Ordering data Peripheral modules, profile rail, accessories

5

Order No. See Catalog ST 70

PROFIBUS bus connector 90° cable outlet terminating resistor with isolating function, up to 12 Mbit/s • without PG socket

6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0

• with PG socket

6ES7 972-0BB12-0XA0

Insulation displacement method, FastConnect • without PG socket

6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0

• with PG socket

6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0

Angular outgoing cable insulation displacement terminals, without bus terminating resistor, up to 1.5 Mbit/s • without PG connection socket

6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0

Accessories ET 200M distributed I/O devices manual The manual can be downloaded as a pdf file at no cost under

http://support.automation. siemens.com Entry ID: 1242798

DIN rail for active bus modules For max. 5 active bus modules • Length 19"

6ES7 195-1GA00-0XA0

• 530 mm long

6ES7 195-1GF30-0XA0

Active bus modules • BM PS/IM for power supply and IM 153, incl. 1 bus module cover

6ES7 195-7HA00-0XA0

• BM IM 153/IM 153 bus module for 2 x IM 153-2/FO redundant

6ES7 195-7HD10-0XA0

• BM 2 x 40 for 2 modules with 40 mm width

6ES7 195-7HB00-0XA0

• BM 1 x 80 for 1 module with 80 mm width

6ES7 195-7HC00-0XA0

Ex partition

6ES7 195-7KA00-0XA0


5/215


ET 200M

IM 153-1/153-2

■ Overview • For connecting ET 200M as slave to PROFIBUS DP (via copper conductors) • IM 153-2 can also be used in redundant PROFIBUS DP systems with the S7-400H, software redundancy and the S5-155H • With time stamp functionality and time-of-day synchronization • Suitable for synchronous operation

5

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 1531AA03-0XB0

6ES7 1532BA01-0XB0

Power supply

Communication functions Bus protocol/transmission protocol

Input voltage

6ES7 1531AA03-0XB0

6ES7 1532BA01-0XB0

PROFIBUS DP to EN 50 170

PROFIBUS DP

• Rated value, DC 24 V

Yes


20.4 V; Ripple included

interfaces PROFIBUS DP, Output current, max. 90 mA

70 mA


28.8 V; Ripple included

interface physics, RS 485

Yes

Yes

Input current • Rated value at DC 24 V Output voltage • Rated value, DC 5 V

9-pin -D-sub female connector

9-pin SUB-D

625 mA Yes

PROFIBUS DP Transmission procedure

1A


12 Mbit/s

Node addresses

1 to 125 permit- 1 to 125 ted

Output current • for backplane bus (DC 5 V), max.

Connection point PROFIBUS DP


RS-485 12 Mbit/s

Yes

Yes


Yes

• DC 24 V • permissible range (ripple included), lower limit (DC)

20.4 V

SYNC capability

Yes

Yes

FREECE capability

Yes

Yes

• permissible range (ripple included), upper limit (DC)

28.8 V


Yes; S ender

Yes; only with F- DO

Power supply and voltage jumpering • Mains/voltage failure jumpering

1st interface 5 ms

5 ms

Voltages and currents external protection for supply cables (recommendation)

not necessary

DP slave • GSD file

(for DPV1) SI03801E.GSG SIEM801D.GSD; SI01801D.GSG

• automatic baud rate search

Yes

2.5A

Current consumption

Yes

CPU/programming

Inrush current, typ.

2.5 A

3.5 A


I²t

0.1 A²s

0.08 A²s

• STEP 7

Current consumption, max.

350 mA

470 mA

Time stamping

Power loss, typ.

3W

4W

Yes

Accuracy

1 ms

Address area

Number of message buffers

15

Adressing volume

128

• Outputs

128 Byte

128 Byte


• Inputs

128 Byte

128 Byte

Time format

RFC 1119 Internet ISP

Time resolution

0.466 ns

8

8


Yes

Hardware config. Number of modules per DP slave interface, max.

5/216



ET 200M

IM 153-1/153-2

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 1531AA03-0XB0

6ES7 1532BA01-0XB0

6ES7 1957HA000XA0


6ES7 1957HB000XA0

6ES7 1957HC000XA0


Isolation voltage 500 V

• Weight, approx.

111 g

140 g

127 g


0 °C

0 °C

• max.

60 °C

60 °C

Air pressure • Operating height above sea level, max.

3,500 m


Yes

Yes

801Dh

801E

Width

40 mm

40 mm

Height

125 mm

125 mm

Depth

117 mm

117 mm

360 g

350 g


5




5/217


ET 200M

IM 153-1/153-2

■ Ordering data IM 153-1 interface module Slave interface for connecting an ET 200M to PROFIBUS DP Standard temperature range IM 153-2 interface module Slave interface for connecting an ET 200M to PROFIBUS DP; also for use in redundant systems High Feature Active IM 153 /IM 153 bus module For two IM 153-2 High Feature modules for designing redundant systems

5

Bus module for ET 200M • To accommodate a power supply and an IM 153 module for hot swapping functionduring RUN time including bus module cover • To accommodate two 40-mm wide I/O modules for hot swapping function • To accommodate one 80-mm wide I/O module for hot swapping function ET 200M redundancy bundle Comprising two IM 153-2 High Feature modules and one IM 153/IM 153 bus module

5/218


Order No.


6ES7 153-1AA03-0XB0

ET 200M distributed I/O devices manual The manual can be downloaded as a pdf file at no cost under

6ES7 153-2BA01-0XB0

PROFIBUS bus connector 90° cable outlet terminating resistor with isolating function, up to 12 Mbit/s

6ES7 195-7HD10-0XA0

http://support.automation. siemens.com Entry ID: 1242798

• without PG socket

6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0

• with PG socket

6ES7 972-0BB12-0XA0

Insulation displacement method, FastConnect 6ES7 195-7HA00-0XA0

6ES7 195-7HB00-0XA0

6ES7 195-7HC00-0XA0

6ES7153-2AR01-0XA0


6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0

• with PG socket

6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0

Angular outgoing cable insulation displacement terminals, without bus terminating resistor, up to 1.5 Mbit/s • without PG connection socket

6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0

SIMATIC DP rail for ET 200M For insertion of up to 5 bus modules for • 483 mm long

6ES7 195-1GA00-0XA0

• 530 mm long

6ES7 195-1GF30-0XA0

SIMATIC S7-300 rail • 160 mm long

6ES7 390-1AB60-0AA0

• 480 mm long

6ES7 390-1AE80-0AA0

• 530 mm long

6ES7 390-1AF30-0AA0

• 830 mm long

6ES7 390-1AJ30-0AA0

• 2000 mm long

6ES7 390-1BC00-0AA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0

S7 Manual Collection update service for 1 year Scope of delivery: Current CD "S7 Manual Collection" and the three subsequent updates

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


ET 200M

SIPLUS IM 153-1/153-2 interface module (extended temperature range)

■ Overview • For connecting ET 200M as slave to PROFIBUS DP (via copper conductors) • IM 153-2 can also be used in redundant PROFIBUS DP systems with the S7-400H, software redundancy and the S5-155H • With time stamp functionality and time-of-day synchronization • Suitable for synchronous operation

SIPLUS IM 153-1

SIPLUS IM 153-2

Order No.

6AG1 153-1AA03-2XB0

6AG1 153-2BA00-2XB0

Order No. based on

6ES7 153-1AA03-0XB0

6ES7 153-2BA00-0XB0

Ambient temperature range

-25 to +60 °C; -25 to +55 °C (for applications with cUL approval), condensation permissible

Ambient conditions

Suitable for extraordinary medial load (for example by chloric and sulphuric atmospheres).

Approvals

CE, cUL (available soon)

Conformity with standard for electronic devices on rail vehicles ( EN 50155, temperature T1, category 1).

Yes

Technical data

The technical data is identical with the technical data of the based on modules.

■ Ordering data

5

No

Order No.

SIPLUS IM 153-1 Expanded temparature range and medium load; slave interface module for connecting a ET 200M to PROFIBUS DP

6AG1 153-1AA03-2XB0

IM 153-2 Expanded temparature range and medium load; slave interface module for connecting a ET 200M to PROFIBUS DP; also for use in redundant systems

6AG1 153-2BA00-2XB0

Accessories

see ordering data to IM 153-1/153-2


5/219


ET 200M

IM 153-2 FO

■ Overview • For connecting the ET 200M as a slave to the optical PROFIBUS • Optical expansion to IM 153-2 (High Feature) (RS 485) • Integral fiber-optic interface for plastic and PCF cables • Redundancy capability • With time stamping functionality and time synchronization

5

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 153-2BB00-0XB0 Power supply Output voltage • Rated value (DC)

6ES7 153-2BB00-0XB0 PROFIBUS DP

5V

Transmission procedure

LWL, wavelength 660 nm


12 Mbit/s; 9.6 / 19.2 / 45.45 / 93.75 / 187.5 / 500 kBaud 1.5 / 12 Mbaud

Node addresses

1 to 125 permitted


Yes

SYNC capability

Yes

FREECE capability

Yes


Yes; Sender

Output current • for backplane bus (DC 5 V), max.

1A

Supply voltages Rated value • DC 24 V

Yes

• permissible range (ripple included), lower limit (DC)

20.4 V

• permissible range (ripple included), upper limit (DC)

28.8 V

1st interface

Voltages and currents external protection for supply cables (recommendation)

DP slave not necessary

• GSD file

(for DPV1) SIEM8071.GSD; SI018071.GSG (for IM 153-2AB0x); SI028071.GSG (for IM 153-2BB0x) Yes

Current consumption Inrush current, typ.

3.5 A

I²t

0.1 A²s

• automatic baud rate search

Current consumption, max.

500 mA

CPU/programming

Power loss, typ.

4.5 W


Address area

• STEP 7

Adressing volume

Yes; STEP 7 / COM PROFIBUS / non-Siemens tools via GSD file

• Outputs

128 Byte

Time stamping

• Inputs

128 Byte

Accuracy

10 ms; 10 ms / 3 ms

Number of message buffers

15

Messages per message buffer

20


128

Time format

RFC 1119 Internet (ISP)

Time resolution

1 ms

Time interval for transmitting the message buffer if a message is present

1,000 ms


rising / falling edge as signal entering or exiting state

interfaces interface physics, LWL

Yes

Connection point PROFIBUS DP

5/220


optical, 2 x duplex sockets


ET 200M

IM 153-2 FO

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 153-2BB00-0XB0 Isolation Isolation checked with

6ES7 153-2BB00-0XB0 General information

Isolation voltage 500 V



8071h


Operating termperature

Width

40 mm

• min.

0 °C

Height

125 mm

• max.

60 °C

Depth

117 mm

Air pressure • Operating height above sea level, max.

Weights 3,000 m

Weight, approx.

360 g


Yes

6ES7 195-7HA00-0XA0

6ES7 195-7HB00-0XA0

6ES7 195-7HC00-0XA0

111 g

140 g

127 g

Dimensions and weight Weight, approx.

5

6ES7 195-7HD10-0XA0 Accessories belongs to product

ET 200M


■ Ordering data

133 g

Order No.

IM 153-2 FO interface module High Feature for max. 8 S7-300 modules, redundancy capable, with integrated FOC interface for assembling an optical line

6ES7 153-2BB00-0XB0

IM 153/IM 153 active bus module For 2 IM 153-2 FO for assembling redundant systems

6ES7 195-7HD10-0XA0

Bus module for ET 200M • For accommodating an SV and an IM 153 for hot swapping incl. bus module cover

6ES7 195-7HA00-0XA0

• For accommodating two 40 mm wide I/O modules for hot swapping

6ES7 195-7HB00-0XA0

• For accommodating one 80 mm wide I/O module for hot swapping

6ES7 195-7HC00-0XA0

Accessories PROFIBUS plastic fiber-optic connector / polishing kit 100 Simplex plugs and 5 polishing kits, for assembling PROFIBUS plastic fiber-optic cables for the optical PROFIBUS DP; for 25 modules

6GK1 901-0FB00-0AA0

PROFIBUS plastic fiber-optic stripping tool set To remove the external or core sleeve of plastic fiber-optic cables

6GK1 905-6PA10

Order No. Connection adapters Packet of 50 for using Simplex plugs in integrated FO interfaces; for 25 modules

6ES7 195-1BE00-0XA0

SIMATIC DP profile rail for ET 200M For accommodating max. 5 bus modules for • Length 483 mm

6ES7 195-1GA00-0XA0

• Length 530 mm

6ES7 195-1GF30-0XA0

SIMATIC S7-300 profile rail • Length 160 mm

6ES7 390-1AB60-0AA0

• Length 480 mm

6ES7 390-1AE80-0AA0

• Length 530 mm

6ES7 390-1AF30-0AA0

• Length 830 mm

6ES7 390-1AJ30-0AA0

• Length 2000 mm

6ES7 390-1BC00-0AA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


5/221


ET 200M — F Digital/Analog Modules SM 326 F digital input - Safety Integrated

■ Overview • Digital inputs for the fail-safe SIMATIC S7 systems • They are suitable for connecting: - switches and 2-wire proximity switches (BEROs) - sensors according to NAMUR and mechanical contacts, also for signals from hazardous areas • With integral safety functions for fail-safe operation • Can be used in fail-safe mode - centrally: With S7-31xF-2 DP - distributed in ET 200M: With SIMATIC IM 151-7 F-CPU, S7-31xF-2 DP, S7-416F-2 and S7-400F/FH • Can be used in standard mode as an S7-300 module

5

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 3261RF00-0AB0

6ES7 3261BK01-0AB0

6ES7 3261RF00-0AB0

6ES7 3261BK01-0AB0 4; electrically isolated

Supply voltages

Encoder supply

Supply voltage of electronics and encoders 1L+/2L+

Number of outputs

8

Output voltage

8.2 V DC


24 V

24 V

Current consumption



160 mA

450 mA

Encoder


90 mA

100 mA

Power loss, typ.

4.5 W

10 W

40-pin

400 mA

Connectable encoders • 2-wire BEROS

Yes; if shortcircuit test is deactivated


2 mA

40-pin

Digital inputs

Ex(i) characteristics


24

Module for Ex(i) protection

Connection point required front connectors

8; 8 (one-channel); 4 (two-channel)

Number of simultanneously controllable inputs • Number of simultaneously controllable inputs, up to 40 °C

8; vertical setup 24

• Number of simultaneously controllable inputs, up to 60 °C

8; horizontal set up

24; (at 24 V) or 18 (at 28.8 V)


200 m

200 m


100 m

100 m

Cable length

Input voltage

Max. values of input circuits (per channel) • Co (permissible external capacity), max. • Io (short-circuit current), max. • Lo (permissible external inductivity), max. • Po (power of load), max. • Uo (output no-load voltage), max. • Ta (permissible ambient temperature), max.

3 µF 13.9 mA 80 mH 33.1 mW 10 V 60 °C

60 °C

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

500 V DC

500 V DC / 350 V AC

Yes

Yes


• Rated value, DC

24 V

• for signal "0"

-30V to 5 V

Diagnoses

• for signal "1"

11 to 30 V


Input current


Isolation

• for signal "0", max. (permissible quiescent current)

2 mA


10 mA




• for standard inputs - at "0" to "1", max. - at "1" to "0", max.


5/222

Yes


• between the channels 3.4 ms 3.4 ms


12 Yes

Yes



■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 3261RF00-0AB0

6ES7 3261BK01-0AB0


6ES7 3261RF00-0AB0

6ES7 3261BK01-0AB0

Width

80 mm

80 mm

Height

125 mm

125 mm

Depth

120 mm

120 mm

482 g

442 g



II(2)G [EEx ib] IIC to EN 50020

Test number KEMA

99 ATEX 2671 X

Highest safety class achievable in safety mode

Weights

• to DIN VDE 0801

AK 4 (one channel), AK 5 und 6 (two channel)

AK 6

• to EN 954

Cat. 3 (single channel), Cat. 4 (two-channel)

Cat. 4

• to IEC 61508

SIL 2 (single channel), SIL 3 (two-channel)

SIL 3

Weight, approx.

5


5/223



■ Ordering data

Order No.

F digital input module SM 326 • 24 inputs, 24 V DC

6ES7 326-1BK01-0AB0

• 8 inputs, 24 V DC, NAMUR

6ES7 326-1RF00-0AB0


6ES7 195-7HC00-0XA0

SITOP power supply module for ET 200M; 120/230 V AC, 24 V DC, 5 A; Type PS 307-1E

6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0

Front connector 40-pin, with screw contacts • 1 piece

6ES7 392-1AM00-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AM00-1AB0 6ES7 392-1BM01-0AA0


6ES7 833-1FC02-0YA5


6ES7 833-1FC00-0YX2

40-pin with cage clamp contacts • 1 piece

6ES7 833-1FC02-0YE5

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1BM01-1AB0

Labeling strips For fail-safe modules (spare part); 10 pieces

6ES7 392-2XX20-0AA0

Label cover For fail-safe modules (spare part); 10 pieces

6ES7 392-2XY20-0AA0

LK 393 cable guide For F modules; L+ and M connections; 5 pieces

6ES7 393-4AA10-0AA0


5

Order No. Active bus module BM 1 x 80 for 1 module with 80 mm width

Labeling sheet with strips for 10 electronic blocks • For 16-channel electronic blocks incl. add-on terminals • For 32-channel electronic blocks incl. add-on terminals Connecting cable for PROFIBUS 12 Mbit/s, for connecting PG to PROFIBUS DP, pre-assembled with 2 x 9-pin Sub-D connector, 3m

6ES7 193-1BH00-0XA0 6ES7 193-1BL00-0XA0 6ES7 901-4BD00-0XA0


PROFIBUS bus connector 90° cable outlet Terminating resistor with isolating function, up to 12 Mbit/s

• German

6ES7 398-8FA10-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8FA10-8BA0

• French

6ES7 398-8FA10-8CA0


6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8FA10-8DA0

• with PG socket

6ES7 972-0BB12-0XA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8FA10-8EA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0

SIMATIC Manual Collection update service for 1 year Current "S7 Manual Collection" CD and the three subsequent updates

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2

Insulation displacement method FastConnect • without PG socket

6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0

• with PG socket

6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0

Angled cable outlet insulation displacement terminals, without bus connecting resistor, up to 1.5 Mbit/s • without PG connecting socket

6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0

DIN rail for active bus modules for max. 5 active bus modules for hot swapping function • 483 mm long

6ES7 195-1GA00-0XA0

• 530 mm long

6ES7 195-1GF30-0XA0

• 620 mm long

6ES7 195-1GG30-0XA0

• 2000 mm long

6ES7 195-1GC00-0XA0

5/224



ET 200M — F Digital/Analog Modules SM 326 F digital output - Safety Integrated

■ Overview • Digital outputs for the fail-safe SIMATIC S7 systems • Two variants (1 x source/source output, 1 x source/sink output) • For connection of solenoid valves, DC contactors and signaling lamps • With integral safety functions for fail-safe operation • Can be used in fail-safe mode - centrally: With S7-31xF-2 DP - distributed in ET 200M: With SIMATIC IM 151-7 F-CPU, S7-31xF-2 DP, S7-416F-2 and S7-400F/FH • Can be used in standard mode as an S7-300 module (only applies to 6ES7326-2BF01-0AB0)

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 3262BF01-0AB0

6ES7 3262BF40-0AB0

6ES7 3262BF01-0AB0

6ES7 3262BF40-0AB0


Output current

Load voltage L+


2A

2A


7 mA

7 mA


2 A; 2 A for horizontal installation, 1 A for vertical installation

2 A; A for horizontal installation, 1 A for vertical installation 7 mA


24 V; 1L+, 2L+, 3L+

24 V; 1L+, 2L+, 3L+

Current consumption from load voltage1L+, max.

70 mA; from supply voltage

75 mA; from supply voltage


100 mA

100 mA


7 mA


100 mA

100 mA


1 A; for horizon- 1 A; for horizontal installation tal installation


100 mA

100 mA


Power loss, typ.

12 W

12 W


40-pin

40-pin


10

8


1,000 m; 200 m for SIL3, AK 6, Cat 4

30 m


600 m

50 m


Yes; electronic

Yes; electronic


L+ (-53 V) without series diode, L+ (33 V) with series diode

L+ (-33 V)

Lamp load, max.

5W

5W


10 Hz

30 Hz


2 Hz

2 Hz


10 Hz

10 Hz

5 A; without series diode, 4 A with series diode

5A

7.5 A; without series diode, 5 A with series diode 5 A; without series diode, 4 A with series diode

7.5 A

Yes


Yes

Yes

500 V DC / 350 V AC

500 V DC / 350 V AC

Aggregate current of the outputs (per group) • vertical installation - up to 40 °C, max.

• horizontal installation - up to 40 °C, max.

- up to 60 °C, max.

Output voltage • for signal "1" with series diode, min.

L+ (-1.8 V)

• for signal "1" without series diode, min.

L+ (-1.0 V)

L+ (-1.0 V)

0.5 mA


5A

Diagnoses • Diagnostic information readable Isolation Isolation checked with


5/225

5


ET 200M — F Digital/Analog Modules SM 326 F digital output - Safety Integrated

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 3262BF01-0AB0

6ES7 3262BF40-0AB0


Yes

Yes


5

4


Yes

Yes

• between the channels and the voltage supply to the electronics

Yes

Yes

■ Ordering data

5

6ES7 3262BF40-0AB0

Standards, approvals, certificates Highest safety class achievable in safety mode • to DIN VDE 0801 • to EN 954 • to IEC 61508

AK 5 and 6 Cat. 4 SIL 3

Cat. 4 SIL 3


80 mm

80 mm

Height

125 mm

125 mm

Depth

120 mm

120 mm


465 g

465 g

Order No.

SM 326 F digital output module 10 outputs, 24 V DC, 2 A

6ES7 326-2BF01-0AB0

8 outputs, 24 V DC, 2 A

6ES7 326-2BF40-0AB0

Distributed Safety V5.4 programming tool Task: Software for configuring fail-safe user programs for SIMATIC S7-300F, S7-400F, ET 200S Requirement: STEP 7 V5.3 SP3 and higher Floating license

6ES7 3262BF01-0AB0


6ES7 195-7HC00-0XA0

SITOP power supply module for ET 200M; 120/230 V AC, 24 V DC, 5 A Type PS 307-1E

6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0


6ES7 392-1AM00-0AA0

6ES7 833-1FC02-0YA5

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AM00-1AB0


6ES7 833-1FC00-0YX2


6ES7 833-1FC02-0YE5


6ES7 392-1BM01-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1BM01-1AB0

Labeling strips For fail-safe modules (spare part), 10 pieces

6ES7 392-2XX20-0AA0

Label cover For fail-safe modules (spare part), 10 pieces

6ES7 392-2XY20-0AA0

LK 393 cable guide For F modules; L+ and M connections, 5 pieces

6ES7 393-4AA10-0AA0

Labeling sheet with strips for 10 electronic blocks • For 16-channel electronic blocks incl. add-on terminals • For 32-channel electronic blocks incl. add-on terminals Connecting cable for PROFIBUS 12 Mbit/s, for connecting PG to PROFIBUS DP, pre-assembled with 2 x 9-pin Sub-D connector, 3 m

6ES7 193-1BH00-0XA0 6ES7 193-1BL00-0XA0 6ES7 901-4BD00-0XA0


6ES7 398-8FA10-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8FA10-8BA0

PROFIBUS bus connector 90° cable outlet Terminating resistor with isolating function, up to 12 Mbit/s • without PG socket

6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0

• French

6ES7 398-8FA10-8CA0

• with PG socket

6ES7 972-0BB12-0XA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8FA10-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8FA10-8EA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0

• with PG socket

6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0


6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0

DIN rail for active bus modules for max. 5 active bus modules, for function "Insertion and removal" • 483 mm long

6ES7 195-1GA00-0XA0

• 530 mm long

6ES7 195-1GF30-0XA0

• 620 mm long

6ES7 195-1GG30-0XA0

• 2000 mm long

6ES7 195-1GC00-0XA0

5/226



ET 200M — F Digital/Analog Modules SM 336 F analog input - Safety Integrated

■ Overview • • • •

Analog inputs for the fail-safe SIMATIC S7 systems For connection of analog voltage and current sensors With integral safety functions for fail-safe operation For use in the ET 200M distributed I/O station with SIMATIC IM 151-7 F-CPU, S7-31xF-2 DP, S7-416F-2 and S7-400F/FH • Can be used in standard mode as an S7-300 module

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 336-1HE00-0AB0 Voltages and currents Load voltage L+ • Rated value (DC) • reverse polarity protection

5

Errors/accuracies Operational limit in overall temperature range

24 V Yes

Current consumption

• Voltage, relative to input area

+/- 0,48 %


+/- 0,48 %


90 mA

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C)

from supply voltage L+, max.

160 mA; typically


+/- 0,4 %

4.25 W


+/- 0,4 %

Power loss, typ.



40-pin

Analog inputs Number of analog inputs

6

Number of analog inputs for voltage measurement

4


200 m

permissible input frequency for volt- 30 V age input (destruction limit), max. permissible input current for current input (destruction limit), max. Input ranges (rated values), voltages • 0 to +10 V Input ranges (rated values), currents • 0 to 20 mA • 4 to 20 mA

40 mA

Yes

Yes Yes

Analog value creation Integrations and conversion time/resolutionper channel




Yes


500 V DC / 350 V AC

Isolation Isolation, analog inputs • between the channels

No


Yes

• between the channels and the voltage supply to the electronics

Yes; only if sensors are externally supplied

Standards, approvals, certificates Highest safety class achievable in safety mode • to DIN V 19250

AK 6

• to EN 954

Cat. 4 SIL 3


14 Bit

• to IEC 61508


20 ms (at 50 Hz); 16.66 ms (at 60 Hz)

Width

80 mm

Height

125 mm

Depth

120 mm

• Interference voltage suppression 38 dB for interference frequency f1 in Hz Encoder


Weights

Connection of signal encoders • for current measurement as 2-wire transducer

Yes


Yes

Weight, approx.

480 g


5/227


ET 200M — F Digital/Analog Modules SM 336 F analog input - Safety Integrated

■ Ordering data F analog input module SM 326 6 inputs, 14 bit

Order No. 6ES7 336-1HE00-0AB0


6ES7 195-7HC00-0XA0

SITOP power supply module for ET 200M; 120/230 V AC, 24 V DC, 5 A Type PS 307-1E

6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0


6ES7 392-1AM00-0AA0

Floating license

6ES7 833-1FC02-0YA5

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AM00-1AB0


6ES7 833-1FC00-0YX2



6ES7 392-1BM01-0AA0

6ES7 833-1FC02-0YE5

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1BM01-1AB0

Labeling strips For fail-safe modules (spare part), 10 pieces

6ES7 392-2XX20-0AA0

Label cover For fail-safe modules (spare part), 10 pieces

6ES7 392-2XY20-0AA0

LK 393 cable guide For F modules; L+ and M connections, 5 pieces

6ES7 393-4AA10-0AA0

Labeling sheet with strips for 10 electronic blocks

5


• For 16-channel electronic blocks incl. add-on terminals

6ES7 193-1BH00-0XA0

• For 32-channel electronic blocks incl. add-on terminals

6ES7 193-1BL00-0XA0

Connecting cable for PROFIBUS

6ES7 901-4BD00-0XA0

12 Mbit/s, for connecting PG to PROFIBUS DP, pre-assembled with 2 x 9-pin Sub-D connector, 3m


PROFIBUS bus connector 90° cable outlet Terminating resistor with isolating function, up to 12 Mbit/s

• German

6ES7 398-8FA10-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8FA10-8BA0

• French

6ES7 398-8FA10-8CA0


6ES7 972-0BA12-0XA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8FA10-8DA0

• with PG socket

6ES7 972-0BB12-0XA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8FA10-8EA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0

• with PG socket

6ES7 972-0BB50-0XA0


6ES7 972-0BA30-0XA0

DIN rail for active bus modules for max. 5 active bus modules for hot swapping function • 483 mm long

6ES7 195-1GA00-0XA0

• 530 mm long

6ES7 195-1GF30-0XA0

• 620 mm long

6ES7 195-1GG30-0XA0

• 2000 mm long

6ES7 195-1GC00-0XA0

5/228



ET 200M — F Digital/Analog Modules SIPLUS SM 326 F digital input module Safety Integrated

■ Overview

■ Ordering data SIPLUS SM 326 F digital input module Expanded temperature range and medial load 24 inputs, 24 V DC Accessories

Order No.

6AG1 326-1BK01-2AB0 see Ordering data for SM 326 F digital input moduel

• Digital inputs for the fail-safe SIMATIC S7 systems • They are suitable for connecting: - switches and 2-wire proximity switches (BEROs) - sensors according to NAMUR and mechanical contacts, also for signals from hazardous areas • With integral safety functions for fail-safe operation • Can be used in fail-safe mode - centrally: With S7-31xF-2 DP - distributed in ET 200M: With SIMATIC IM 151-7 F-CPU, S7-31xF-2 DP, S7-416F-2 and S7-400F/FH • Can be used in standard mode as an S7-300 module

5

SIPLUS SM 326 fail-safe digital input module Order No. Order No. based on

6AG1 326-1BK01-2AB0 6ES7 326-1BK01-0AB0


-25 ... +60 °C, condensation permissible

Ambient conditions


Technical data



5/229


ET 200M — F Digital/Analog Modules SIPLUS SM 326 F digital output module Safety Integrated

■ Overview SIPLUS SM 326 fail-safe digital output module

5

• Digital outputs for the fail-safe SIMATIC S7 systems • Two variants (1 x source/source output, 1 x source/sink output) • For connection of solenoid valves, DC contactors and signaling lamps • With integral safety functions for fail-safe operation • Can be used in fail-safe mode - centrally: With S7-31xF-2 DP - distributed in ET 200M: With SIMATIC IM 151-7 F-CPU, S7-31xF-2 DP, S7-416F-2 and S7-400F/FH • Can be used in standard mode as an S7-300 module (only applies to 6ES7326-2BF01-0AB0)

5/230


Order No. Order No. based on

6AG1 326-2BF01-2AB0 6ES7 326-2BF01-0AB0



Ambient conditions


Conformity with standard for electronic devices on rail vehicles (EN 50155, temperature T1, category 1).

Yes

Technical data



ET 200M — F Digital/Analog Modules SIPLUS SM 326 F digital output module Safety Integrated

■ Ordering data SIPLUS SM 326 F digital output module Expanded temperature range and medial load 10 outputs, 24 V DC, 2 A Accessories

Order No.

6AG1 326-2BF01-2AB0 see Ordering data for SM 326 F digital output module

5


5/231


ET 200M — F Digital/Analog Modules Isolating module

■ Overview


• Supports mixed operation of fail-safe signal modules in safety mode and S7-300 standard modules in an ET 200M when Cat. 4 or SIL 3 has to be achieved. • The isolating module is not required if the safety class or safety category to be achieved is less than SIL 3 or Cat. 4, respectively. When Cat. 4/SIL 3 is required, the isolating module must be implemented in the following situations: Application

Isolation module must be used

Central use after CPU 31xF-2 DP or CPU 31xF-2 PN/DP • Only fail-safe modules in the tier • Standard and fail-safe modules in the tier

5

Central use after CPU 31xF-2 DP or CPU 31xF-2 PN/DP in an expansion rack • Only fail-safe modules in the tier • Standard and fail-safe modules in the tier Distributed behind the IM 153-2 with copper connection • Only fail-safe modules in the station • Standard and fail-safe modules in the station Distributed behind the IM 153-2 with fiber-optic connection • Only fail-safe modules in the station • Standard and fail-safe modules in the station

5/232


Yes, behind the CPU Yes, after the last standard module and before the first fail-safe module

Yes, after the IM 36x Yes, after the last standard module and before the first fail-safe module

Yes, after the IM 153-2 Yes, after the last standard module and before the first fail-safe module

No Yes, after the last standard module and before the first fail-safe module

6ES7 195-7KF00-0XA0 Weight • Weight, approx.

■ Ordering data

10 g

Order No.

Isolating module for simultaneous operation of fail-safe and standard modules in an ET 200M

6ES7 195-7KF00-0XA0

Isolating bus module for accommodating the isolating module in an ET 200M

6ES7 195-7HG00-0XA0


ET 200M — F Digital/Analog Modules SIPLUS S7-300 isolating module (extended temperature range)

■ Overview

■ Ordering data SIPLUS isolating module Expanded temperature range and medial load

Order No. 6AG1 195-7KF00-2XA0

for simultaneous operation of fail-safe and standard modules in an ET 200M Accessories

see Ordering data for isolating module

• Hybrid operation of fail-safe signal modules in safety operation and S7-300 standard modules in an ET 200M • Configuration of PROFIBUS-DP lines with Cu bus cables; fiber-optic cables are not necessary • Any IM 153-x can be used

5

The isolating module is not required if safety class SIL 2 has to be achieved. SIPLUS S7-300 isolating module Order No. Order No. based on

6AG1 195-7KF00-2XA0 6ES7 195-7KF00-0XA0


-25 °C to +60 °C, condensation permissible

Ambient conditions



Yes

Technical data

The technical data are identical with the technical data of the based on modules.


5/233


ET 200M — Digital Modules SM 321 digital input

■ Overview • Digital inputs • For connecting standard switches and two-wire proximity switches (BERO)

5

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 321-1BH02-0AA0

6ES7 321-1BH50-0AA0

6ES7 321-1BL00-0AA0

6ES7 321-1BH10-0AA0

24 V

24 V

24 V

24 V

Voltages and currents Load voltage L+ • Rated value (DC) Current consumption from load voltage L+ (without load), max.

25 mA


10 mA

10 mA

15 mA

110 mA

Power loss, typ.

3.5 W

3.5 W

6.5 W

3.8 W

20-pin

20-pin

40-pin

20-pin

No

No

No

Yes

16

16

32

16

• vertical installation - up to 40 °C, max.

16

16

32

16


16

16

32 16

16


1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m


600 m

600 m

600 m

600 m


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• Rated value, DC

24 V

24 V

24 V

24 V

• for signal "0"

-30 V to 5 V

30 V to -5V

-30V to 5 V

-30 V to 5 V

• for signal "1"

13 to 30 V

-13 to -30 V

13 to 30 V

13 to 30 V

7 mA

7 mA

7 mA

7 mA

1.2 ms 4.8 ms

1.2 ms 4.8 ms

1.2 ms 4.8 ms

25 µs 75 µs

Connection point required front connectors Isochronous mode Isochronous mode Digital inputs Number of digital inputs Number of simultanneously controllable inputs

Cable length

Input voltage

Input current • for signal "1", typ. Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) • for standard inputs - at "0" to "1", min. - at "0" to "1", max.

5/234




■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 321-1BH02-0AA0

6ES7 321-1BH50-0AA0

6ES7 321-1BL00-0AA0

6ES7 321-1BH10-0AA0

• 2-wire BEROS

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


1.5 mA

1.5 mA

1.5 mA

1.5 mA

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC


16

16

16

16


Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Width

40 mm

40 mm

40 mm

40 mm

Height

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

Depth

120 mm

120 mm

120 mm

120 mm

200 g

200 g

260 g

200 g

6ES7 321-7BH01-0AB0

6ES7 321-1CH00-0AA0

6ES7 321-1CH20-0AA0

6ES7 321-1FH00-0AA0

24 V

24 V

48 V


Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Alarms • Alarms Diagnoses • Diagnostic functions Diagnostics indication LED • Status indicator digital input (green) Isolation Isolation checked with

5


Yes



Voltages and currents Load voltage L+ • Rated value (DC) Load voltage L1 • Rated value (AC)

24 V

230 V; 120/230 V AC; all load voltages must have the same phase.


90 mA


130 mA

100 mA

40 mA

29 mA

Power loss, typ.

4W

1.5 W

4.3 W

4.9 W

20-pin

40-pin

20-pin

20-pin

Yes

No

No

No

Connection point required front connectors Isochronous mode Isochronous mode


5/235



■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 321-7BH01-0AB0

6ES7 321-1CH00-0AA0

6ES7 321-1CH20-0AA0

6ES7 321-1FH00-0AA0

16

16

16

16


16

16

8

16


16

16

8 8; 6 to Ue 146 V

16


1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m


600 m

600 m

600 m

600 m

Yes

Yes

Yes

Digital inputs Number of digital inputs Number of simultanneously controllable inputs

Cable length


5


Yes

Input voltage • Rated value, AC

24 V; AC 24 or 48 V

230 V; 120/230 V AC

• Rated value, DC

24 V

24 V; DC 24 or 48 V

48 V; DC 48 to 125 V

• for signal "0"

-30V to 5 V

-5 to 5 V AC

-146 V to 15 V DC

0 to 40 V

• for signal "1"

13 to 30 V

14 to 60 V AC

30 to 146 V DC

85 to 264 V

0 to 63 Hz

• Frequency range

47 to 63 Hz

Input current • for signal "1", typ. Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) • for standard inputs - programmable

7 mA

2.7 mA

Yes; 0.1 / 0.5 / 3 / 15 / 20 ms

No

- at "0" to "1", min. - at "0" to "1", max.

3.5 mA

8 mA; (120V, 60Hz), 16 mA (230V, 50Hz)

No

16 ms

0.1 ms 3.5 ms

25 ms


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


2 mA

1 mA

1 mA

2 mA

• Alarms

Yes

No

No

No



No

No

No

• Process alarm


No

No

No


No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

500 V DC

1500 V AC

1500 V DC

4000 V DC


Diagnoses • Diagnostic functions Diagnostics indication LED • Status indicator digital input (green) Isolation Isolation checked with Isolation Galvanic isolation, digital inputs • between the channels

Yes

Yes

Yes


16

1

8

4


Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

5/236




■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 321-7BH01-0AB0

6ES7 321-1CH00-0AA0

6ES7 321-1CH20-0AA0

6ES7 321-1FH00-0AA0

Width

40 mm

40 mm

40 mm

40 mm

Height

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

Depth

120 mm

120 mm

120 mm

120 mm

200 g

260 g

200 g

240 g



6ES7 321-1EL00-0AA0

6ES7 321-1FF01-0AA0

6ES7 321-1FF10-0AA0

120 V

230 V; 120V/230V AC

230 V; 120/230 V AC; all load voltages must have the same phase.


16 mA

29 mA

100 mA

Power loss, typ.

4W

4.9 W

4.9 W

40-pin

20-pin

40-pin

No

No

No

32

8

8


32

8

8


32 24

8

8


1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m


600 m

600 m

600 m

Yes

Yes

Voltages and currents Load voltage L1 • Rated value (AC)

Current consumption

5


Cable length

Input characteristic curve to IEC 1131, Typ 1 Input characteristic curve to IEC 1131, Typ 2

Yes

Input voltage • Rated value, AC

120 V

230 V; 120/230 V AC

120 V; 120/230 V AC

• for signal "0"

0 to 20 V

0 to 40 V

0 to 40 V

• for signal "1"

74 to 132 V

85 to 264 V

85 to 264 V

• Frequency range

47 to 63 Hz

47 to 63 Hz

47 to 63 Hz

21 mA

6.5 mA; (120 V); 11mA (230 V)

7.5 mA; (120 V); 17.3 mA (230 V)

No 15 ms

No 25 ms

No 25 ms

• 2-wire BEROS

Yes

Yes

Yes


4 mA

2 mA

2 mA

Input current • for signal "1", typ. Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) • for standard inputs - programmable - at "0" to "1", max. Encoder Connectable encoders


5/237



■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 321-1EL00-0AA0

6ES7 321-1FF01-0AA0

6ES7 321-1FF10-0AA0

• Alarms

No

No

No


No

No

No

• Process alarm

No

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

2500 V DC

4000 V DC

1500 V AC


Yes

Yes

Yes


8

2

1


Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Width

40 mm

40 mm

40 mm

Height

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

Depth

120 mm

120 mm

120 mm

300 g

240 g

240 g


Diagnoses • Diagnostic functions Diagnostics indication LED • Status indicator digital input (green) Isolation Isolation checked with Isolation

5




5/238




■ Ordering data

Order No.

SM 321 digital input modules incl. labeling strips, bus connector • 16 inputs, 24 V DC

6ES7 321-1BH02-0AA0

• 16 inputs, 24 V DC, active low

6ES7 321-1BH50-0AA0

• 32 inputs, 24 V DC

6ES7 321-1BL00-0AA0

• 16 inputs, 24 ... 48 V DC

6ES7 321-1CH00-0AA0

• 16 inputs, 48 ... 125 V DC

6ES7 321-1CH20-0AA0

• 16 inputs, 24 V DC, for isochronous mode

6ES7 321-1BH10-0AA0

Order No. S7 SmartLabel Software for automatic labeling of modules based on data of the STEP 7 project

2XV9 450-1SL01-0YX0

Labeling sheets for machine inscription for 16-channel signal modules, DIN A4, for printing with laser printer; 10 pieces • petrol

6ES7 392-2AX00-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX00-0AA0

6ES7 321-1EL00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX00-0AA0

• 8 inputs, 120/130 V AC

6ES7 321-1FF01-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX00-0AA0

• 8 inputs, 120/130 V AC, single root

6ES7 321-1FF10-0AA0

for 32-channel signal modules, DIN A4, for printing with laser printer; 10 pieces

• 16 inputs, 120/130 V AC

6ES7 321-1FH00-0AA0

• 16 inputs, 24 V DC, for isochronous mode, diagnostics-capable

6ES7 321-7BH01-0AB0

• 32 inputs, 120 V AC

• petrol

6ES7 392-2AX10-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX10-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX10-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX10-0AA0

SIMATIC Manual Collection Electronic manuals on CD-ROM, multilingual: S7-200, S7-300, C7, S7-400, SIMATIC DP (Distributed I/O), SIMATIC PC, SIMATIC PG, STEP 7, Engineering Tools, Runtime Software, SIMATIC PCS 7, SIMATIC HMI (Human Machine Interface), SIMATIC NET (Industrial Communication), SIMATIC Machine Vision, SIMATIC Sensors

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0

SIMATIC Manual Collection update service for 1 year Current S7 Manual Collection CD and the three subsequent updates

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2

Front connectors 20-pin, with screw contacts • 1 piece

6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AJ00-1AB0

20-pin, with cage clamp contacts • 1 piece

6ES7 392-1BJ00-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1BJ00-1AB0

40-pin, with screw contacts • 1 piece

6ES7 392-1AM00-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AM00-1AB0


6ES7 392-1BM01-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1BM01-1AB0

Front door, elevated design e.g. for 32-channel modules; enables connection of 1.3 mm2/16 AWG wires

6ES7 328-0AA00-7AA0

SIMATIC TOP connect

See Catalog ST 70

• German

6ES7 398-8FA10-8AA0

Bus connectors 1 piece (spare part)

6ES7 390-0AA00-0AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8FA10-8BA0

• French

6ES7 398-8FA10-8CA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8FA10-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8FA10-8EA0

5


Labeling strips 10 pieces (spare part) • for modules with 20-pin front connector • for modules with 40-pin front connector

6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0

Label cover 10 pieces (spare part) • for modules with 20-pin front connector • for modules with 40-pin front connector

6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0

6ES7 392-2XX10-0AA0

6ES7 392-2XY10-0AA0


5/239


ET 200M — Digital Modules SM 322 digital output

■ Overview • Digital outputs • For connecting solenoid valves, contactors, low-power motors, lamps and motor starters

5

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 3221BH01-0AA0

6ES7 3221BH10-0AA0

6ES7 3221BL00-0AA0

6ES7 3228BF00-0AB0

6ES7 3225GH00-0AB0

6ES7 3221CF00-0AA0

24 V

24 V

24 V

24 V

24 V; 24/48

48 V; 48 to 125 V DC


80 mA

110 mA

160 mA

90 mA

200 mA

2 mA


80 mA

70 mA

110 mA

70 mA

100 mA

100 mA

Power loss, typ.

4.9 W

5W

6.6 W

5W

2.8 W

7.2 W

20-pin

20-pin

40-pin

20-pin

40-pin

20-pin


16

16

32

8

16

8


1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m


600 m

600 m

600 m

600 m

600 m

600 m


Yes; electronic

Yes; electronic

Yes; electronic

Yes; electronic

No; to be provided externally

Yes; electronic


L+ (-53 V)

L+ (-53 V)

L+ (-53 V)

L+ (-45 V)

Lamp load, max.

5W

5W

5W

5W

2.5 W

15 W; 15 W (48 V) or 40 W (125 V)

L+ (-0.8 V)

L+ (-0.8 V)

L+ (-0.8 V)

L+ (-0.8 V to -1.6 V)

L+ (-0.25 V)

L+ (-1.2 V)


0.5 A

0.5 A

0.5 A

0.5 A

0.5 A

1.5 A


5 mA

5 mA

5 mA

10 mA

10 mA


0.6 A

0.6 A

0.6 A

0.6 A

1.5 A


5 mA

5 mA

5 mA

10 mA

10 mA


0.6 A

0.6 A

0.6 A

0.6 A

1.5 A

• for signal "1" minimum load current 5 mA

5 mA

5 mA

10 mA

Voltages and currents Load voltage L+ • Rated value (DC) Current consumption

Connection point required front connectors Digital outputs

M (-1V)


• for signal "1" permissible peak current, max. • for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.5 mA

5/240


0.5 mA

0.5 mA

0.5 mA

10 mA 1.5 A; for 50 ms, 1 A2s one-time

3 A; for 10 ms

10 µA

0.5 mA



■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 3221BH01-0AA0

6ES7 3221BH10-0AA0

6ES7 3221BL00-0AA0

6ES7 3228BF00-0AB0

6ES7 3225GH00-0AB0

6ES7 3221CF00-0AA0


100 Hz

1,000 Hz

100 Hz

100 Hz

10 Hz

25 Hz


0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz

2 Hz


10 Hz

10 Hz

10 Hz

10 Hz

2A

2A

2A

4A

4A

4A

4A

4A

4A

3A

3A

3A

3A

6A 4A 3A

Switching frequency 0.5 Hz 0.5 Hz

10 Hz

Aggregate current of the outputs (per group) • vertical installation - up to 40 °C, max. • horizontal installation - up to 40 °C, max. - up to 50 °C, max. - up to 60 °C, max. • all other mounting positions - up to 40 °C, max.

0.5 A 0.5 A

5


No

No

No



No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes; Parameters No can be assigned

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

1500 V AC

1500 V AC


8

8

8

8

1

4


Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Width

40 mm

40 mm

40 mm

40 mm

40 mm

40 mm

Height

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

Depth

120 mm

120 mm

120 mm

120 mm

120 mm

120 mm

190 g

200 g

260 g

210 g

260 g

250 g

6ES7 3221BF01-0AA0

6ES7 3221FF01-0AA0

6ES7 3225FF00-0AB0

6ES7 3221FH00-0AA0

6ES7 3221FL00-0AA0

6ES7 3221HF01-0AA0

Diagnoses • Diagnostics Isolation Isolation checked with Isolation Isolation, digital outputs



Voltages and currents Load voltage L+ • Rated value (DC)

24 V

24 V

Load voltage L1 • Rated value (AC)

230 V; 120/230 V 230 V; 120/230 V 230 V; 120/230 V 120 V; 120/230 V AC AC AC AC


60 mA

from load voltage L1 (without load), max.

2 mA

110 mA; Current consumption of relay

2 mA

2 mA

3 mA

10 mA

110 mA


40 mA

100 mA

100 mA

200 mA

190 mA

40 mA

Power loss, typ.

6.8 W

8.6 W

8.6 W

8.6 W

25 W

3.2 W


5/241




6ES7 3221FF01-0AA0

6ES7 3225FF00-0AB0

6ES7 3221FH00-0AA0

6ES7 3221FL00-0AA0

6ES7 3221HF01-0AA0

20-pin

20-pin

40-pin

20-pin

20-pin

20-pin


8

8

8

16

32

8; Relay


1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m


600 m

600 m

600 m

600 m

600 m

600 m


Yes; electronic

Yes; Fuse, 8 A / 250 V: per group

Yes; to be provided externally; fuse 3,15 A / 250 V, quick response

Yes; Fuse 8 A, 250 V; per group

No


L+ (-48 V)

Lamp load, max.

10 W

50 W

50 W

50 W

50 W

L+ (-0.8 V)

L1 (-1.5 V)

L1 (-8.5 V)

L+(-0.8 V)

L1 (-0.8 V)


2A

2A

2A

1A

1A


5 mA

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA


2.4 A

2A

2A

1A

1A


5 mA

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA


2.4 A

1A

1A

0.5 A

1A

• for signal "1" minimum load current

5 mA


5

50 W


10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

10 mA

• for signal "1" permissible peak current, max.

20 A; max. 1 AC cycle

20 A; with 2 half waves

20 A; with 2 half waves

10 A; per group (for 2 AC cycles)


2 mA

2 mA

2 mA

2 mA

5 mA


100 Hz

10 Hz

10 Hz

10 Hz

10 Hz

2 Hz


0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz


10 Hz

1 Hz

1 Hz

1 Hz

1 Hz

2 Hz

• mechanical, max.

10 Hz

Aggregate current of the outputs (per group) • vertical installation - up to 40 °C, max.

4A

2A

4A

2A

4A


4A

4A 2A

8A 4A

4A 2A

4A 3A

Relay outputs Rated input voltage of relay L+ (DC)

24 V; 110 mA

Number of operating cycles

300,000; 230 V AC: 100000, 120 V AC: 200000, 24 V DC: 300000 (at 2 A)

Switching capacity of the contacts • with inductive load, max.

2 A; 2 A (230 V AC), 2 A (24 V DC)


2A

5/242





6ES7 3221FF01-0AA0

6ES7 3225FF00-0AB0

6ES7 3221FH00-0AA0

6ES7 3221FL00-0AA0

6ES7 3221HF01-0AA0

No

No


No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes; Off / last value / substitute value

Yes

Yes

No

500 V DC

1500 V AC

1500 V AC

4000 V DC

4000 V DC

1500 V AC


4

4

1

8

8

2


Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Width

40 mm

40 mm

40 mm

40 mm

80 mm

40 mm

Height

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

Depth

120 mm

120 mm

120 mm

120 mm

117 mm

120 mm

190 g

275 g

275 g

275 g

500 g

190 g

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Alarms • Diagnostic alarm Diagnoses • Diagnostics

Isolation Isolation checked with Isolation Isolation, digital outputs



6ES7 322-1HF10-0AA0

6ES7 322-5HF00-0AB0

6ES7 322-1HH01-0AA0

120 V

24 V

120 V

230 V

230 V

230 V


40 mA

100 mA

100 mA

Power loss, typ.

4.2 W

3.5 W

4.5 W

40-pin

40-pin

20-pin


8; Relay

8; Relay

16; Relay


1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m


600 m

600 m

600 m

Voltages and currents Load voltage L+ • Rated value (DC) Load voltage L1 • Rated value (AC) Current consumption


Short-circuit protection of the output No; to be provided externally

No; to be provided externally

Lamp load, max.

1,500 W; AC 230 V

1,500 W; AC 230 V

50 W; AC 230 V

5 mA

10 mA

10 mA


2 Hz

2 Hz

1 Hz


0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz


2 Hz

2 Hz

1 Hz

• mechanical, max.

10 Hz

10 Hz

10 Hz

Output current • for signal "1" minimum load current Switching frequency


5/243

5



■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 322-1HF10-0AA0

6ES7 322-5HF00-0AB0

6ES7 322-1HH01-0AA0


5A

5A

8A

• horizontal installation - up to 60 °C, max.

5A

5A

8A


Relay outputs Rated input voltage of relay L+ (DC)

24 V

24 V

Number of operating cycles

300,000; 300000 (DC 24 V, at 2 A), 200000 (AC 120 V, at 3 A), 100000 (AC 230 V, at 3 A)

100,000; 100,000 (DC 24 V, at 5 A), 100,000 (AC 230 V, at 5 A)

100,000; 50000 (24 V DC, at 2 A), 700000 ( 120 V AC, at 2 A), 100000 (230 V AC, at 2 A)


3 A; 3 A (230 V AC), 2 A (24 V DC)

5 A; 5 A (230 V AC), 5 A (24 V DC)

2 A; 2 A (230 V AC), 2 A (24 V DC)


8 A; 8 A (230 V AC), 5 A (24 V DC)

5 A; 5 A (230 V AC), 5 A (24 V DC)

2 A; 2 A (230 V AC), 2 A (24 V DC)

No


No

No

Yes; Off / last value / substitute value

No

2000 V AC

1500 V AC

1500 V AC


1

1

8


Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Width

40 mm

40 mm

40 mm

Height

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

Depth

120 mm

120 mm

120 mm

320 g

320 g

250 g

Switching capacity of the contacts

5

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Alarms • Diagnostic alarm Diagnoses • Diagnostics Isolation Isolation checked with Isolation Isolation, digital outputs



5/244




■ Ordering data

Order No.

SM 322 digital output modules incl. labeling strips, bus connector

Order No. Label cover 10 pieces (spare part) • for modules with 20-pin front connector

6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0

• for modules with 40-pin front connector

6ES7 392-2XY10-0AA0

• 8 outputs, 24 V DC, 2 A

6ES7 322-1BF01-0AA0

• 16 outputs, 24 V DC, 0.5 A

6ES7 322-1BH01-0AA0

• 16 outputs, 24 V DC, 0.5 A, high speed

6ES7 322-1BH10-0AA0

• 32 outputs, 24 V DC, 0.5 A

6ES7 322-1BL00-0AA0

• 8 outputs, 24 V DC, 0.5 A, diagnostics-capable

6ES7 322-8BF00-0AB0

• 16 outputs, 24/48 V DC, 0.5 A

6ES7 322-5GH00-0AB0

• 8 outputs, 48 to 125 V DC, 1.5 A

6ES7 322-1CF00-0AA0

• 8 outputs, 120/230 V AC, 1 A

6ES7 322-1FF01-0AA0


• 8 outputs, 120/230 V AC, 2 A

6ES7 322-5FF00-0AB0

• petrol

6ES7 392-2AX00-0AA0

• 16 outputs, 120/230 V AC, 1 A

6ES7 322-1FH00-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX00-0AA0

• 32 outputs, 120 V AC, 1 A

6ES7 322-1FL00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX00-0AA0

• 8 outputs, relay contacts, 2 A

6ES7 322-1HF01-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX00-0AA0


6ES7 322-1HF10-0AA0

• 8 outputs, relay contacts, 5 A, with RC filter, overvoltage protection

6ES7 322-5HF00-0AB0



6ES7 322-1HH01-0AA0


6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AJ00-1AB0


6ES7 392-1BJ00-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1BJ00-1AB0

40-pin, with screw contacts


2XV9 450-1SL01-0YX0

• petrol

6ES7 392-2AX10-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX10-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX10-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX10-0AA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2

• 1 piece

6ES7 392-1AM00-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AM00-1AB0


6ES7 392-1BM01-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1BM01-1AB0

Front door, elevated design e.g. for 32-channel modules; for connecting 1.3 mm2/16 AWG conductors

6ES7 328-0AA00-7AA0

SIMATIC TOP connect

See Catalog ST 70



6ES7 390-0AA00-0AA0

• German

6ES7 398-8FA10-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8FA10-8BA0

Set of fuses for SM 322 10 fuses, 8 A fast, 2 fuse holders

6ES7 973-1HD00-0AA0

• French

6ES7 398-8FA10-8CA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8FA10-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8FA10-8EA0

Labeling strips 10 pieces (spare part) • for modules with 20-pin front connector • for modules with 40-pin front connector

5

6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0 6ES7 392-2XX10-0AA0


5/245


ET 200M — Digital Modules

SM 323/SM 327 digital input/output

■ Overview • Digital inputs and outputs • For connecting standard switches, two-wire proximity switches (BERO), solenoid valves, contactors, low-power motors, lamps and motor starters

5

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 323-1BH01-0AA0

6ES7 323-1BL00-0AA0

6ES7 327-1BH00-0AB0

24 V

24 V

24 V


40 mA

80 mA

20 mA


40 mA

80 mA

60 mA

Power loss, typ.

3.5 W

6.5 W

3W

20-pin

40-pin

20-pin

No

No

No

8

16

8; 8 hardwired, and 8 others individually parameterizable


8

16

16


8

8

16


1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m


600 m

600 m

600 m


Yes

Yes

Yes

• Rated value, DC

24 V

24 V

24 V

• for signal "0"

-30V to 5 V

-30V to 5 V

-30V to 5 V

• for signal "1"

13 to 30 V

13 to 30 V

15 to 30 V


7 mA

7 mA

6 mA

Input delay (for rated valu e of input voltage) • for standard inputs - at "0" to "1", min. - at "0" to "1", max. - at "1" to "0", min. - at "1" to "0", max.

1.2 ms 4.8 ms 1.2 ms 4.8 ms

1.2 ms 4.8 ms 1.2 ms 4.8 ms

1.2 ms 4.8 ms 1.2 ms 4.8 ms



Cable length

Input voltage

Input current

5/246






6ES7 323-1BL00-0AA0

6ES7 327-1BH00-0AB0


8

16

8; can also be parameterized individually as DI


1,000 m

1,000 m

1,000 m


600 m

600 m

600 m


Yes; electronic

Yes; electronic

Yes; electronic


1A

1A

1A


L+ (-53 V)

L+ (-48 V)

L+ (-54 V)

Lamp load, max.

5W

5W

5W


Yes

Yes

Yes

L+ (-0.8 V)

L+ (-0.8 V)

L+ (-1.5 V)

0.5 A

0.5 A

0.5 A

Digital outputs


5

Output current • for signal "1" rated value • for signal "1" permissible range for 0 to 60 °C, min.

5 mA


0.6 A

• for signal "1" minimum load current

5 mA


5 mA 0.5 mA

0.5 mA


100 µs

100 µs

350 µs

• "1" to "0", max.

500 µs

500 µs

500 µs


No

No

No


Yes; Outputs of the same group only

Yes; Outputs of the same group only



100 Hz

100 Hz

100 Hz


0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz


10 Hz

100 Hz

10 Hz


4A

2A

2A


4A

4A 3A

4A 3A

• lower limit

48 Ω

48 Ω

48 Ω

• upper limit

4 kΩ

4 kΩ

4 kΩ

• 2-wire BEROS

Yes

Yes

Yes


2 mA

1.5 mA

1.5 mA


Switching frequency





5/247





6ES7 323-1BL00-0AA0

6ES7 327-1BH00-0AB0

No

No

No

No

No

No


Yes

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC


Yes

Yes

No


8

8


Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler


Yes

Yes

No


8

16


Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

Yes; Optocoupler

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

Width

40 mm

40 mm

40 mm

Height

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

Depth

120 mm

120 mm

120 mm

220 g

260 g

200 g

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Alarms • Alarms Diagnoses • Diagnostic functions Diagnostics indication LED

Isolation Isolation checked with Isolation

5



Permissible potential difference between different circuits Dimensions and weight


5/248





■ Ordering data

Order No.

SM 323 digital input/output modules incl. labeling strips, bus connector 8 inputs, 8 outputs

6ES7 323-1BH01-0AA0

16 inputs, 16 outputs

6ES7 323-1BL00-0AA0

SM 327 digital input/output modules incl. labeling strips, bus connector 8 inputs, 8 inputs or outputs (can be configured)


6ES7 327-1BH00-0AB0

2XV9 450-1SL01-0YX0

Labeling sheets for machine inscription For 16-channel signal modules, DIN A4, for printing with laser printer; 10 pieces • petrol

6ES7 392-2AX00-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX00-0AA0


6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AJ00-1AB0


• petrol

6ES7 392-2AX10-0AA0

6ES7 392-1BJ00-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX10-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1BJ00-1AB0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX10-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX10-0AA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


6ES7 392-1AM00-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AM00-1AB0


6ES7 392-1BM01-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1BM01-1AB0

Front door, elevated design e.g. for 32 channel modules; enables connection of 1.3 mm2/16 AWG wires

6ES7 328-0AA00-7AA0

SIMATIC TOP connect

See Catalog ST 70


6ES7 390-0AA00-0AA0

Labeling strips 10 pieces (spare part) • for modules with 20-pin front connector • for modules with 40-pin front connector Label cover 10 pieces (spare part) • for modules with 20-pin front connector • for modules with 40-pin front connector

6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0 6ES7 392-2XX10-0AA0

6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0 6ES7 392-2XY10-0AA0


5


6ES7 398-8FA10-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8FA10-8BA0

• French

6ES7 398-8FA10-8CA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8FA10-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8FA10-8EA0


5/249



SIPLUS SM 321 digital input module (extended temperature range)

■ Overview • Digital inputs • For connecting standard switches and two-wire proximity switches (BERO)

5

SIPLUS SM 321

16 DI

32 DO


6AG1 321-1BH02-2AA0 6ES7 321-1BH02-0AA0

6AG1 321-1BL00-2AA0 6ES7 321-1BL00-0AA0



Ambient conditions



Yes

Technical data


SIPLUS SM 321

16 DI


6AG1 321-7BH01-2AB0 6ES7 321-7BH01-0AB0



Ambient conditions



Yes

Technical data


SIPLUS SM 321

16 DI – 48 ... 125 V DC


6AG1 321-1CH20-2AA0 6ES7 321-1CH20-0AA0



Ambient conditions



Yes

Technical data


SIPLUS SM 321

8 DI – 120/230 V AC


6AG1 321-1FF01-2AA0 6ES7 321-1FF01-0AA0



Yes

Ambient conditions



Yes

Technical data


5/250




SIPLUS SM 321 digital input module (extended temperature range)

■ Ordering data

Order No.

SIPLUS SM 321 digital input modules Expanded temperature range and medial load including labeling strips, bus connectors • 16 inputs, 24 V DC

6AG1 321-1BH02-2AA0

• 32 inputs, 24 V DC

6AG1 321-1BL00-2AA0

• 16 inputs, 48 ... 125 V DC

6AG1 321-1CH20-2AA0

• 8 inputs, 120/230 V AC

6AG1 321-1FF01-2AA0

• 16 inputs, 24 V DC, for isochrone mode, diagnostics capability

6AG1 321-7BH01-2AB0

Accessories

see Ordering data for SM 321 digital input modules

5


5/251



SIPLUS SM 322 digital output module (extended temperature range)

■ Overview • Digital outputs • For connecting solenoid valves, contactors, low-power motors, lamps and motor starters

5

SIPLUS SM 322

16 DO

SIPLUS SM 322

8 DO – 48 ... 125 V DC


6AG1 322-1BH01-2AA0 6ES7 322-1BH01-0AA0


6AG1 322-1CF00-2AA0 6ES7 322-1CF00-0AA0





Ambient conditions


Ambient conditions


Yes

Suitable for extraordinary medial load (for example by chloric and sulphuric atmospheres). Yes

Technical data

The technical data is identical with the technical data of the based on modules.The technical data is identical with the technical data of the based on modules.

Conformity with standard for electronic devices on rail vehicles (EN 50155, temperature T1, category 1). Technical data


SIPLUS SM 322

8 DO – 120/230 V AC


6AG1 322-1FF01-2AA0 6ES7 322-1FF01-0AA0



Ambient conditions



Yes

Technical data


SIPLUS SM 322 Order No. Order No. based on

8 DO, DC 24 V, 0,5 A

8 DO, DC 24 V, 2A

6AG1 3228BF00-2AB0 6ES7 3228BF00-0AB0

6AG1 3221BF01-2XB0 6ES7 3221BF01-0AA0



Ambient conditions



Yes

Technical data


5/252


Yes



SIPLUS SM 322 digital output module (extended temperature range)


■ Ordering data

Order No.

SIPLUS SM 322

8 RO


6AG1 322-1HF10-2AA0 6ES7 322-1HF10-0AA0



Ambient conditions


• 8 outputs, 24 V DC, 2 A

6AG1 322-1BF01-2XB0

• 16 outputs, 24 V DC, 0.5 A

6AG1 322-1BH01-2AA0


Yes

• 32 outputs, 24 V DC, 0.5 A

6AG1 322-1BL00-2AA0

• 8 outputs, 24 V DC, 0.5 A, diagnostics capability

6AG1 322-8BF00-2AB0

• 8 outputs, 48 ... 125 V DC, 1.5 A

6AG1 322-1CF00-2AA0

Technical data


• 8 outputs, 120/230 V AC, 1 A

6AG1 322-1FF01-2AA0


6AG1 322-1HF10-2AA0

• 16 outputs, relay contcts, 8 A

6AG1 322-1HH01-2AA0

Accessories

see Ordering data for SM 322 digital output modules

SIPLUS SM 322

32 DO

16 RO

Order No.

6AG1 3221BL00-2AA0 6ES7 3221BL00-0AA0

6AG1 3221HH01-2AA0 6ES7 3221HH01-0AA0

Order No. based on Ambient temperature range


Ambient conditions



Yes

Technical data


SIPLUS SM 322 digital output modules Expanded temperature range and medial load including labeling strips, bus connectors

Yes


5/253

5



SIPLUS SM 323 digital input/output module (extended temperature range)

■ Overview • Digital inputs and outputs • For connecting standard switches, two-wire proximity switches (BERO), solenoid valves, contactors, low-power motors, lamps and motor starters

5

SIPLUS SM 323

8 DI/8 DO


6AG1 323-1BH01-2AA0 6ES7 323-1BH01-0AA0



Ambient conditions



Yes

Technical data


■ Ordering data

Order No.

SIPLUS SM 323 digital input/output modules Expanded temperature range and medial load including labeling strips, bus connectors 8 inputs, 8 outputs

5/254

6AG1 323-1BH01-2AA0 see Ordering data for SM 323 digital input/output modules

Accessories



ET 200M — Analog Modules SM 331 analog input

■ Overview • Analog inputs • For connection of voltage and current sensors, thermocouples, resistors and resistance thermometers

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 331-7KF02-0AB0

6ES7 331-7HF01-0AB0

6ES7 331-1KF01-0AB0

6ES7 331-7KB02-0AB0


24 V

24 V

24 V


Yes

Yes

Yes


200 mA

50 mA

80 mA


50 mA

60 mA

90 mA

50 mA

Power loss, typ.

1W

1.5 W

0.4 W

1.3 W

20-pin

20-pin

40-pin

20-pin

No

Yes

No

No


8

8

8

2

Number of analog inputs for resistance measurement

4

8

1


200 m; 50 m at 80 mV and with thermocouples

200 m

200 m; max. 50 m at 50 mV

200 m; 50 m at 80 mV and with thermocouples


20 V; continuous; 75 V for max. 1s (mark to space ratio 1:20)

20 V; 20 V continuous, 75 V for max. 1s (mark to space ratio 1:20)

30 V; 12 V continuous, 30 V for max. 1 s



40 mA

40 mA

40 mA

40 mA

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No


Current consumption

Connection point required front connectors Isochronous mode Isochronous mode Analog inputs

Input ranges (rated values), voltages • 0 to +10 V • 1 to 5 V

Yes

• 1 to 10 V

Yes

• -1 V to +1 V

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• -10 V to +10 V

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• -2.5 V to +2.5 V

Yes

No

Yes

• -250 mV to +250 mV

Yes

No

Yes

• -5 V to +5 V

Yes

Yes

Yes

• -50 mV to +50 mV

Yes

Yes

• -500 mV to +500 mV

Yes

• -80 mV to +80 mV

Yes

Yes

Yes Yes


5/255

5



■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 331-7KF02-0AB0

6ES7 331-7HF01-0AB0

6ES7 331-1KF01-0AB0

6ES7 331-7KB02-0AB0

• 0 to 20 mA

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• -10 to +10 mA

Yes

• -20 to +20 mA

Yes

Yes

Yes

• -3.2 to +3.2 mA

Yes

• 4 to 20 mA

Yes

Yes

Yes

Input ranges (rated values), currents Yes Yes Yes Yes


5

• Type E

Yes

Yes

• Type J

Yes

Yes

• Type K

Yes

Yes

• Type N

Yes

Yes

• 0 to 150 Ohm

Yes

Yes

• 0 to 300 Ohm

Yes

• 0 to 600 Ohm

Yes

Input ranges (rated values), resistors Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

• 0 to 6000 Ohm Input ranges (rated values), resistance thermometers • Ni 100

Yes; Standard


Yes


• LG-Ni 1000 • Pt 100

Yes; Standard


Yes

• programmable

Yes

Yes

Yes

• for thermoelements

Type N, E, J, K, L

• for thermoresistor

Pt 100 (Standard, climatic range), Ni 100 (Standard, climatic range)

Characteristic linearization Type N, E, J, K, L Yes; Pt100 standard/air con.; Ni100 standard/air con.; Ni1000 standard/air con.; LG-Ni1000 standard/air con.

Pt 100 (Standard, climatic range), Ni 100 (Standard, climatic range)

Temperature compensation • programmable

Yes

Yes

• external temperature compensation with compensations socket

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes


integrating

Conversion of instantaneous values

integrating

integrating


15 Bit; unipolar: 9 / 12 / 12 / 14 bit, bipolar: 9 + sign/ 12 + sign/12 + sign/ 14 + sign bit

14 Bit; unipolar: 14 bit; bipolar: 13+sign bit

13 Bit

15 Bit; unipolar: 9 / 12 / 12 / 14 bit, bipolar: 9 + sign/ 12 + sign/12 + sign/ 14 + sign bit


Yes; 2.5 / 16.67 / 20 / 100 ms

Yes

Yes; 60 / 50 ms

Yes; 2.5 / 16.67 / 20 / 100 ms

• Basic conversion time, including integration time, ms

3/ 17/ 22/ 102 ms

66 / 55 ms

6/ 34/ 44/ 204 ms


• Basic conversion time, ms

52 µs per channel

66 / 55 ms

• Interference voltage suppression 400 / 60 / 50 / 10 Hz for interference frequency f1 in Hz

400 / 60 / 50 / 10 Hz

50 / 60 Hz

5/256


400 / 60 / 50 / 10 Hz



■ Technical specifications (continued) Encoder Connection of signal encoders • for current measurement as 2-wire transducer • for current measurement as 4-wire transducer • for resistance measurement with 2-conductor connection • for resistance measurement with 3-conductor connection • for resistance measurement with 4-conductor connection Errors/accuracies Operational limit in overall temperature range • Voltage, relative to input area

6ES7 331-7KF02-0AB0

6ES7 331-7HF01-0AB0

6ES7 331-1KF01-0AB0

6ES7 331-7KB02-0AB0

Yes

Yes

Yes; with external supply

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

+/- 0,6 %; +/- 0.6% (+/-5V,10V,1-5V, 0-10V; +/-0,5% (+/-50 mV, 500 mV, 1 V +/- 0,5 %; +/-20mA,0-20mA,4-20mA +/- 0,5 %; 0-6kOhm, 0-600kOhm

+/- 1 %; +/-1% (80mV), +/- 0.6% (250-1000mV), +/- 0.8% (2.5-10V)

+/- 0,4 %; 0.4% (+/-5V,10V,1-5V, 0-10V); 0.3% (+/-50mV,500mV,1V) +/- 0,3 %; +/-20mA,0-20mA,4-20mA +/- 0,3 %; 0-6kOhm, 0-600kOhm

+/- 0.6 %; +/-0.6% (80mV, 2.5-10V); +/-0.4% (250-1000mV)

+/- 1 %; +/-1% (80mV), +/-0.6% (250-1000mV), +/-0.8% (2.5-10mV)

+/- 0,4 %

+/- 0,7 %; from 3.2 to 20mA +/- 0,7 %; 150, 300, 600 Ohm +/- 0,7 %; +/-0.7% (Pt100/ Ni100); +/-0.8% (Pt100 climat)

+/- 0,3 %

+/- 0,6 %; +/-0.4% (250-1000mV); +/-0.6% (2.5-10mV); +/-0.7% (80mV) +/- 0,5 %; 3,2 to 20mA +/- 0,5 %; 150, 300, 600 Ohm +/- 0,6 %; +/-0.5% (Pt100/ Ni100); +/-0.6% (Pt100 climatic)

+/- 0,25 %


No

Yes


Yes; parameterizable channels 0 and 2 Yes; parameterizable

Yes; parameterizable channels 0 and 2

No

Yes; parameterizable; Channel 0


Yes

Yes

No

Yes


500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

Yes 2

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Width

40 mm

40 mm

40 mm

40 mm

Height

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

Depth

120 mm

120 mm

117 mm

120 mm

250 g

200 g

250 g

250 g

• Current, relative to input area • Impedance, relative to input area • Resistance-type thermometer, relative to input area Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C) • Voltage, relative to input area

• Current, relative to input area • Impedance, relative to input area • Resistance-type thermometer, relative to input area Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Alarms • Diagnostic alarm

Isolation Isolation, analog inputs • between the channels • between the channels, in groups of • between the channels and the backplane bus

+/- 0,2 %

+/- 0,7 %; from 3.2 to 20mA +/- 0,7 %; 150, 300, 600 Ohm +/- 0,7 %; +/-0.7% (Pt100/ Ni100); +/-0.8% (Pt100 climat)

+/- 0,5 %; 3,2 to 20mA +/- 0,5 %; 150, 300, 600 Ohm +/- 0.6 %; +/-0.5% (Pt100/ Ni100); +/-0.6% (Pt100 climatic)




5/257

5



■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 331-7PF01-0AB0

6ES7 331-7PF11-0AB0

6ES7 331-7NF00-0AB0

6ES7 331-7NF10-0AB0


24 V

24 V

24 V


Yes

Yes

Yes


240 mA

200 mA

200 mA


100 mA

100 mA

130 mA

100 mA

Power loss, typ.

4.6 W

3W

0.6 W

3W

40-pin

40-pin

40-pin

40-pin

No

No

No

No


8

8

8

8


8


200 m

100 m

200 m

200 m


75 V; 35 V continuous, 75 V for max. 1 s (mark to space ratio 1:20)

75 V; 20 V DC permanent, 75 V DC for max. 1 s (pulse duty factor 1:20)

50 V; permanent

75 V; 35 V continuous, 75 V for max. 1 s (mark to space ratio 1:20)

32 mA

40 mA

• 1 to 5 V

Yes

Yes

• -10 V to +10 V

Yes

Yes

• -5 V to +5 V

Yes

Yes

• 0 to 20 mA

Yes

Yes

• -20 to +20 mA

Yes

Yes

• 4 to 20 mA

Yes

Yes


Current consumption

Connection point required front connectors Isochronous mode Isochronous mode Analog inputs

5

permissible input current for current input (destruction limit), max. Input ranges (rated values), voltages


Input ranges (rated values), thermoelements • Type B

Yes

• Type E

Yes

• Type J

Yes

• Type K

Yes

• Type L

Yes

• Type N

Yes

• Type R

Yes

• Type S

Yes

• Type T

Yes

• Type U

Yes

• Typ TXK/TXK(L) to GOST

Yes

Input ranges (rated values), resistors • 0 to 150 Ohm

Yes

• 0 to 300 Ohm

Yes

• 0 to 600 Ohm

Yes

5/258





6ES7 331-7PF11-0AB0

6ES7 331-7NF00-0AB0

6ES7 331-7NF10-0AB0

Input ranges (rated values), resistance thermometers • Cu 10

Yes

• Ni 100

Yes

• Ni 1000

Yes

• Ni 120

Yes

• Ni 200

Yes

• Ni 500

Yes

• Pt 100

Yes

• Pt 1000

Yes

• Pt 200

Yes

• Pt 500

Yes


Yes

• for thermoelements • for thermoresistor

Yes

5

Type B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S. T, U, C Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000, Ni 100, Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500, Ni 1000, Cu 10 (Standard/AirCon)

Temperature compensation • programmable

Yes

• external temperature compensation with compensations socket

Yes

• external temperature compensation with Pt100

Yes


Yes


integrating

integrating

integrating

integrating


16 Bit; Two’s complement

16 Bit; Two’s complement

16 Bit; unipolar: 15 / 15 / 15 / 15 bit, bipolar: 15 + sign/15 + sign/15 + sign/15 + sign

16 Bit; unipolar: 15 / 15 / 15 / 15 bit, bipolar: 15 + sign/15 + sign/15 + sign/15 + sign


Yes

Yes

Yes; 10 / 16.67 / 20 / 100 ms

Yes; 23 / 72 / 83 / 95 ms


up to 4 channels: 10 ms per module, over 5 channels: 1 90 ms per module, 8 channels: 80 ms

up to 4 channels: 10 ms per module, as of 5 channels: 190 ms per module


• Interference voltage suppression 400 / 60 / 50 Hz for interference frequency f1 in Hz

400 / 60 / 50 Hz

10 ms (4-channel mode) 95 / 83/ 72/ 23 ms (8-channel mode)

400 / 60 / 50 / 10 Hz

400 / 60 / 50 Hz, combinations of 400, 60, 50 Hz


Yes; with external transmitter; possible with separate supply for transmitter

Yes; with external transmitter, current supply; possible with separate supply for transmitter


Yes

Yes

Encoder Connection of signal encoders


Yes; without resistance correction


Yes


Yes


5/259




6ES7 331-7PF11-0AB0

6ES7 331-7NF00-0AB0

6ES7 331-7NF10-0AB0

+/- 1 K

+/- 0,1 %; +/-0.7%

+/- 0,1 %

+/- 0,3 %; +/-0.9%

+/- 0,1 %

+/- 0,05 %

+/- 0,05 %

+/- 0,05 %

+/- 0,05 %

Errors/accuracies Operational limit in overall temperature range • Voltage, relative to input area • Current, relative to input area • Impedance, relative to input area

+/- 0,1 %


+/- 0.5 K

• Current, relative to input area • Impedance, relative to input area

+/- 0,05 %


5


Yes; parameters can be set per group

Yes; parameters can be set per group






Yes; parameterizable channels 0 and 2

Yes; parameterizable all channels (end of cycle interrupt is also supported across modules)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V AC


Yes

Yes

Yes


2

2

2


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Width

40 mm

40 mm

40 mm

40 mm

Height

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

Depth

120 mm

120 mm

120 mm

120 mm

272 g

272 g

272 g

272 g

Diagnoses • Diagnostic information readable Isolation Isolation checked with Isolation Isolation, analog inputs



5/260




■ Ordering data

Order No.

SM 331 analog input modules Including labeling strips, bus connector, measuring range modules

Order No. Label cover 10 pieces (spare part), for modules with 20-pin front connector

6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0

Labeling strips 10 pieces (spare part), for modules with 20-pin front connector

6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0


2XV9 450-1SL01-0YX0

• 8 inputs, 13-bit resolution

6ES7 331-1KF01-0AB0

• 8 inputs, resolution 9/12/14 bit

6ES7 331-7KF02-0AB0


6ES7 331-7KB02-0AB0

• 8 inputs, enhanced resolution 16 bit

6ES7 331-7NF00-0AB0

• 8 inputs, enhanced resolution 16 bit, 4-channel mode

6ES7 331-7NF10-0AB0

• 8 inputs, resolution 14 bit, for isochronous mode

6ES7 331-7HF01-0AB0

• 8 inputs, for thermal resistors

6ES7 331-7PF01-0AB0

• 8 inputs, for thermoelements

6ES7 331-7PF11-0AB0

Labeling sheets for machine labeling For 16-channel signal modules, DIN A4, for printing with laser printer; 10 pieces

Measuring range module for analog inputs 1 module for 2 analog inputs; 2 pieces (spare part)

6ES7 974-0AA00-0AA0

• petrol

6ES7 392-2AX00-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX00-0AA0

Front connectors

• red

6ES7 392-2DX00-0AA0


6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0


• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AJ00-1AB0

• petrol

6ES7 392-2AX10-0AA0

20-pin, with cage clamp terminals

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX10-0AA0

• 1 piece

6ES7 392-1BJ00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX10-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1BJ00-1AB0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX10-0AA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


6ES7 392-1AM00-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AM00-1AB0

40-pin, with cage clamp terminals • 1 piece

6ES7 392-1BM01-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1BM01-1AB0

Front door, elevated design e.g. for 32-channel modules; for connecting 1.3 mm2/16 AWG wires

6ES7 328-0AA00-7AA0

SIMATIC TOP connect

See Catalog ST 70


6ES7 390-0AA00-0AA0

Shield connecting element 80 mm wide, with 2 rows for 4 shielding connection clamps each

6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0

Shielding connection clamps 2 pieces • For 2 cables with 2 mm to 6 mm diameter

6ES7 390-5AB00-0AA0

• For 1 cable with 3 mm to 8 mm diameter

6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0


6ES7 390-5CA00-0AA0

5


6ES7 398-8FA10-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8FA10-8BA0

• French

6ES7 398-8FA10-8CA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8FA10-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8FA10-8EA0


5/261


ET 200M — Analog Modules SM 332 analog output

■ Overview • Analog outputs • For the connection of analog actuators

5

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 332-5HB01-0AB0

6ES7 332-5HD01-0AB0

6ES7 332-5HF00-0AB0

6ES7 332-7ND02-0AB0

24 V

24 V

24 V

24 V


135 mA

240 mA

340 mA

290 mA


60 mA

60 mA

100 mA

120 mA

Power loss, typ.

3W

3W

6W

3W

20-pin

20-pin

40-pin

20-pin


2

4

8

4; isochronous mode


200 m

200 m

200 m

200 m


Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


25 mA

25 mA

25 mA

40 mA


18 V

18 V

18 V

18 V

• 0 to 10 V

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• 1 to 5 V

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• -10 to +10 V

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• 0 to 20 mA

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• -20 to +20 mA

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

• 4 to 20 mA

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes


1 kΩ

1 kΩ

1 kΩ

1 kΩ


1 µF

1 µF

1 µF

1 µF


500 Ω

500 Ω

500 Ω

500 Ω


10 mH

10 mH

10 mH

1 mH


Connection point required front connectors Analog outputs

Output ranges, voltage



5/262




■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 332-5HB01-0AB0

6ES7 332-5HD01-0AB0

6ES7 332-5HF00-0AB0

6ES7 332-7ND02-0AB0


12 Bit; +/- 10 V, +/- 20mA, 4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5 V: 11 bit + sign , 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA: 12 bit

12 Bit; +/- 10 V, +/- 20mA, 4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5 V: 11 bit + sign, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA: 12 bit

12 Bit; +/- 10 V, +/- 20mA, 4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5 V: 11 bit + sign, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA: 12 bit

16 Bit


0.8 ms

0.8 ms

0.8 ms

200 µs; in clocked mode 640µs


0.2 ms

0.2 ms

0.2 ms

0.2 ms


3.3 ms

3.3 ms

3.3 ms

3.3 ms


0.5 ms; 0.5 ms (1mH); 3.3 ms (10mH)

0.5 ms; 0.5ms (1mH); 3.3 ms (10mH)

0.5 ms; 0.5ms (1mH); 3.3 ms (10mH)

0.5 ms

Analog value creation Integrations and conversion time/resolutionper channel

Settling time

Errors/accuracies

5

Operational limit in overall temperature range • Voltage, relative to output area

+/- 0,5 %

+/- 0,5 %

+/- 0,5 %

+/- 0,12 %


+/- 0,6 %

+/- 0,6 %

+/- 0,6 %

+/- 0,18 %


+/- 0,4 %

+/- 0,4 %

+/- 0,4 %

+/- 0,02 %


+/- 0,5 %

+/- 0,5 %

+/- 0,5 %

+/- 0,02 %








Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

1500 V DC

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Width

40 mm

40 mm

40 mm

40 mm

Height

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

125 mm

Depth

120 mm

120 mm

120 mm

120 mm

220 g

220 g

272 g

220 g


Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Substitute values connectable Alarms • Diagnostic alarm Diagnoses • Diagnostic information readable Isolation Isolation checked with Isolation Isolation, analog outputs • between the channels and the backplane bus Dimensions and weight



5/263



■ Ordering data

Order No.

SM 332 analog output modules incl. labeling strips, bus connector • 4 outputs, 11/12 bit

6ES7 332-5HD01-0AB0

• 4 outputs, 16 bit

6ES7 332-7ND02-0AB0

• 2 outputs, 11/12 bit

6ES7 332-5HB01-0AB0


6ES7 332-5HF00-0AB0


6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AJ00-1AB0


6ES7 392-1BJ00-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1BJ00-1AB0

40-pin, with screw contacts

5

• 1 piece

6ES7 392-1AM00-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AM00-1AB0


6ES7 392-1BM01-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1BM01-1AB0

Front door, elevated design e.g. for 32 channel modules; for connecting 1.3 mm2/16 AWG wires

6ES7 328-0AA00-7AA0

SIMATIC TOP connect

See Catalog ST 70


6ES7 390-0AA00-0AA0


6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0

6ES7 390-5AB00-0AA0


6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0


6ES7 390-5CA00-0AA0

Label cover 10 pieces (spare part), for modules with 20-pin front connector

6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0


6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0

5/264


2XV9 450-1SL01-0YX0

Labeling sheets for machine labeling For 16-channel signal modules, DIN A4, for printing with laser printer; 10 pieces • petrol

6ES7 392-2AX00-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX00-0AA0

For 32-channel signal modules, DIN A4, for printing with laser printer; 10 pieces • petrol

6ES7 392-2AX10-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX10-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX10-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX10-0AA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


Shielding connection clamps 2 pieces • For 2 cables with 2 mm to 6 mm diameter


• German

6ES7 398-8FA10-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8FA10-8BA0

• French

6ES7 398-8FA10-8CA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8FA10-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8FA10-8EA0


ET 200M — Analog Modules SM 334 analog input/output

■ Overview • Analog inputs and outputs • For the connection of analog sensors and actuators

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 3340CE01-0AA0

6ES7 3340KE00-0AB0

6ES7 3340CE01-0AA0

6ES7 3340KE00-0AB0


Analog outputs

Load voltage L+


2

2


200 m

100 m


Yes

Yes


11 mA

10 mA

15 V


24 V

24 V


110 mA

80 mA


55 mA

60 mA

Power loss, typ.

3W

2W


20-pin

20-pin

Output ranges, voltage • 0 to 10 V

Yes

Output ranges, current • 0 to 20 mA

Yes

Connection point required front connectors Analog inputs Number of analog inputs

4

4

Number of analog inputs for voltage measurement

4

2


4


20 V


40 mA


5 ms


Load impedance (in rated range of output) • with voltage outputs, min. • with voltage outputs, capacitive load, max. • with current outputs, max. • with current outputs, inductive load, max.

Input ranges (rated values), voltages

Analog value creation Integrations and conversion time/resolutionper channel • Resolution with overload area (bit including sign), max. • Integration time, ms

• 0 to +10 V

Settling time

Yes

85 ms

Yes

Input ranges (rated values), currents • 0 to 20 mA

Yes

Input ranges (rated values), resistors • 0 to 10000 Ohm

Yes

Input ranges (rated values), resistance thermometers • Pt 100

Yes; only climatic range

5 kΩ 1 µF

Yes

2.5 kΩ 1 µF

300 Ω 1 mH

8 Bit

12 Bit 16.67; 20


0.3 ms

0.8 ms


3 ms

0.8 ms


0.3 ms

Encoder Connection of signal encoders • for current measurement as 4-wire transducer • for resistance measurement with 2-conductor connection • for resistance measurement with 3-conductor connection • for resistance measurement with 4-conductor connection

Yes Yes Yes Yes


5/265

5



■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 3340CE01-0AA0

6ES7 3340KE00-0AB0

6ES7 3340CE01-0AA0

6ES7 3340KE00-0AB0

No

No

No

No

500 V DC

500 V DC

No

Yes

No

Yes

Width

40 mm

40 mm

Height

125 mm

125 mm

+/- 2,8 %; 10 kOhm

Depth

120 mm

120 mm

+/- 0,8 %

Weights 285 g

200 g

Errors/accuracies



Alarms


+/- 0,6 %


+/- 1 %


+/- 0,9 %


+/- 1 %

Diagnoses +/- 0,7 %; 0 to 10 V

+/- 0,8 %

• Impedance, relative to input area

+/- 3,5 %; 10 kOhm


+/- 1 %

+/- 0,5 %


+/- 0,5 %


+/- 0,7 %


+/- 0,6 %


5/266


Isolation Isolation checked with Isolation Isolation, analog outputs

Isolation, analog inputs


• Impedance, relative to input area




5

• Alarms

+/- 0,85 % +/- 0,5 %; 0 to 10 V

• between the channels and the backplane bus Dimensions and weight

Weight, approx.



■ Ordering data

Order No.

SM 334 analog input/output modules incl. labeling strips, bus connector


• 4 inputs, 2 outputs

6ES7 334-0CE01-0AA0

• 4 inputs, 2 outputs, resistance measurement, Pt 100

6ES7 334-0KE00-0AB0

Front connectors 20-pin, with screw contacts

2XV9 450-1SL01-0YX0

Labeling sheets for machine labeling for 16-channel signal modules, DIN A4, for printing with laser printer; 10 pieces • petrol

6ES7 392-2AX00-0AA0

• 1 piece

6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX00-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AJ00-1AB0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX00-0AA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


6ES7 392-1BJ00-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1BJ00-1AB0

Front door, elevated design e.g. for 32 channel modules; for connecting 1.3 mm2/16 AWG wires

6ES7 328-0AA00-7AA0

SIMATIC TOP connect

See Catalog ST 70


6ES7 390-0AA00-0AA0


6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0

Shielding connection clamps 2 pieces

5

• For 2 cables with 2 mm to 6 mm diameter

6ES7 390-5AB00-0AA0



6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0

• German

6ES7 398-8FA10-8AA0 6ES7 398-8FA10-8BA0


6ES7 390-5CA00-0AA0

• English • French

6ES7 398-8FA10-8CA0


6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0

• Spanish

6ES7 398-8FA10-8DA0

• Italian

6ES7 398-8FA10-8EA0


6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0


5/267


ET 200M — Analog Modules

SIPLUS SM 331 analog input module (extended temperature range)

■ Overview • Analog inputs • For connection of voltage and current sensors, thermocouples, resistors and resistance thermometersn

5

SIPLUS SM 321

2 AI

8 AI

8 AI, 16 bit

8 AI, 16 bit

8 AI, 40-pole

Order No.

6AG1 331-7KB022AB0 6ES7 331-7KB020AB0

6AG1 331-7KF022AB0 6ES7 331-7KF020AB0

6AG1 331-7NF002AB0 6ES7 331-7NF000AB0

6AG1 331-7NF102AB0 6ES7 331-7NF100AB0

6AG1 331-7PF012AB0 6ES7 331-7PF010AB0

Order No. based on Ambient temperature range


Ambient conditions



Yes

Technical data


■ Ordering data

No

Order No.

SIPLUS SM 331 analog input modules Expanded temperature range and medial load including labeling strips, bus connectors • 8 inputs, resolution 9/12/14 bit

6AG1 331-7KF02-2AB0


6AG1 331-7KB02-2AB0

• 8 inputs, resolution 16 bit

6AG1 331-7NF00-2AB0

• 8 inputs, enhanced resolution, 16 bit, 4 channel mode

6AG1 331-7NF10-2AB0

• 8 inputs, enhanced resolution, for temperature sensor

6AG1 331-7PF01-2AB0

Accessories

see Ordering data for SM 331 analog input modules

5/268


Yes

No

No



SIPLUS SM 332 analog output module (extended temperature range)

■ Overview • Analog outputs • For the connection of analog actuators

SIPLUS SM 321

2 AO

8 AO


6AG1 332-5HB01-2AB0 6ES7 332-5HB01-0AB0

6AG1 332-5HF00-2AB0 6ES7 332-5HF00-0AB0



Ambient conditions



Yes

Technical data


■ Ordering data

5

No

Order No.

SIMPLUS SM 332 analog output modules Expanded temperature range and medial load including labeling strips, bus connectors • 2 outputs, 11/12 bit

6AG1 332-5HB01-2AB0


6AG1 332-5HF00-2AB0

Accessories

see Ordering data for SM 332 analog output modules


5/269



SIPLUS SM 334 analog input/output module (extended temperature range)

■ Overview • Analog inputs and outputs • For the connection of analog sensors and actuatorsn

5

SIPLUS SM 334

2 AO


6AG1 334-0KE00-2AB0 6ES7 334-0KE00-0AB0



Ambient conditions


Technical data


■ Ordering data SIPLUS SM 334 analog input/output modules Expanded temperature range and medial loading including labeling strips, bus connectors 4 inputs, 2 outputs, resistance measurement, Pt 100

6AG1 334-0KE00-2AB0 see Ordering data for SM 334 analog input/output modules

Accessories

5/270

Order No.



ET 200M — Analog Modules with HART Analog input module with HART

■ Overview For plugging into ET 200M exclusively with IM 153-2 and IM 153-2 FO.

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 331-7TF00-0AB0 Voltages and currents

Encoder

Load voltage L+

Connection of signal encoders


24 V


Yes



Yes


Yes

20 mA

Errors/accuracies


120 mA


Power loss, typ.

1.5 W


20-pin


Connection point required front connectors Isochronous mode


Isochronous mode


No

Analog inputs 8


0


800 m

Diagnoses


40 mA


Yes

• -20 to +20 mA

Yes

• 4 to 20 mA

Yes

Analog value creation Sigma Delta




Yes


Yes


• 0 to 20 mA


+/- 0,1 %

Yes

Isolation



+/- 0,15 %

Alarms


Measurement principle

5

6ES7 331-7TF00-0AB0

500

Isolation Isolation, analog inputs • between the channels

No


8


Yes

Dimensions and weight 16 Bit Yes 20ms@50Hz / 16,6ms@60Hz / 100ms@100Hz


65ms@50Hz

• Interference voltage suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz

60/50/10 Hz

Width

40 mm

Height

125 mm

Depth

117 mm


205 g


5/271


ET 200M — Analog Modules with HART Analog input module with HART

■ Ordering data SM 331 HART analog input module 8 inputs, 0/4 … 20 mA, HART for ET 200M with IM 153-2 interface module

Order No. 6ES7 331-7TF00-0AB0


6ES7 390-1AB60-0AA0

• 480 mm long

6ES7 390-1AE80-0AA0

Accessories

• 530 mm long

6ES7 390-1AF30-0AA0

Front connectors

• 830 mm long

6ES7 390-1AJ30-0AA0

• 20-pin, with screw-type contacts

• 2000 mm long

6ES7 390-1BC00-0AA0

Label cover (10 pieces, spare part) for signal modules (not 32-channel modules), function modules and CPU 312 IFM

6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0

Labeling strips (10 pieces, spare part) for signal modules (not 32-channel modules), function modules and CPU 312 IFM

6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0

- 1 piece

6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0

- 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AJ00-1AB0

• 20-pin, with spring contacts - 1 piece

6ES7 392-1BJ00-0AA0

- 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1BJ00-1AB0

LK 393 cable guide Mandatory for operation in hazardous areas

5


6ES7 393-4AA00-0AA0

SIMATIC DP rail for ET 200M For insertion of up to 5 bus modules for • length of 483 mm

6ES7 195-1GA00-0XA0

• length of 530 mm

6ES7 195-1GF30-0XA0

5/272



ET 200M — Analog Modules with HART Analog output module with HART

■ Overview For plugging into ET 200M exclusively with IM 153-2 and IM 153-2 FO

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 332-8TF00-0AB0 Voltages and currents

Errors/accuracies

Load voltage L+



24 V



350 mA


100 mA

Power loss, typ.

6W

Connection point required front connectors Analog outputs


• Diagnostic alarm Diagnoses


800 m



24 V


Yes

• -20 to +20 mA

No

• 4 to 20 mA

Yes

Load impedance (in rated range of output) • with current outputs, max. • with current outputs, inductive load, max.

Yes Yes 500 V DC

Isolation Isolation, analog outputs • between the channels and the backplane bus

Yes

Dimensions and weight 750 Ω 10 mH

Width

40 mm

Height

125 mm

Depth

117 mm


Weights


Weight, approx.


Yes

Alarms

8

• 0 to 20 mA

+/- 0,1 %




+/- 0,2 %


Substitute values connectable 20-pin

5

6ES7 332-8TF00-0AB0

220 g

16 Bit


0.1 ms


0.5 ms


5/273


ET 200M — Analog Modules with HART Analog output module with HART

■ Ordering data SM 332 HART analog output module HART analog output, 8 outputs, 0/4 … 20 mA, HART for ET 200M with IM 153-2


Reference Manual for EX I/O for S7-300, M7-300, ET 200M

Accessories Front connectors • 20-pin, with screw-type contacts - 1 piece

6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0

- 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AJ00-1AB0

• 20-pin, with spring contacts - 1 piece

6ES7 392-1BJ00-0AA0

- 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1BJ00-1AB0


5

6ES7 393-4AA00-0AA0

SIMATIC DP rail for ET 200M For insertion of up to 5 bus modules for • length of 483 mm

6ES7 195-1GA00-0XA0

• length of 530 mm

6ES7 195-1GF30-0XA0


6ES7 390-1AB60-0AA0

• 480 mm long

6ES7 390-1AE80-0AA0

• 530 mm long

6ES7 390-1AF30-0AA0

• 830 mm long

6ES7 390-1AJ30-0AA0

• 2000 mm long

6ES7 390-1BC00-0AA0

5/274



• German

6ES7 398-8RA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8RA00-8BA0


6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0


6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


ET 200M — Analog Modules with HART Ex analog input module with HART

■ Overview • For connecting HART devices in hazardous areas. • For plugging exclusively into ET 200M

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 331-7TB00-0AB0 Voltages and currents

Encoder

Load voltage L+

Connection of signal encoders


24 V


Yes

Voltage supply to the transducers


Yes


Yes

• present

Yes


15 V; at 22 mA


Yes; approx. 30 mA

• No-load voltage (DC)

29.6 V

Max. values of input circuits (per channel)

100 mA

• Co (permissible external capacity), max.

62 nF

from backplane bus DC 5 V, max. from supply voltage L+, max.

180 mA

• Io (short-circuit current), max.

96.1 mA

4.5 W

• Lo (permissible external inductivity), max.

3 mH

• Po (power of load), max.

511 mW

• Uo (output no-load voltage), max.

26 V

• Um (fault voltage), max.

250 V; DC

• Ta (permissible ambient temperature), max.

0.6 °C

Current consumption

Power loss, typ. Analog inputs Number of analog inputs

2


400 m


40 mA

Ex(i) characteristics Module for Ex(i) protection

Yes


Errors/accuracies

• Current

Yes

Linearity error (relative to input area)

+/- 0.01 %

• 0 to 20 mA

Yes

+/- 0.01 %

50 Ω




130 dB

• 4 to 20 mA

Yes 50 Ω

+/- 0.05 %



SIGMA-DELTA

Operational limit in overall temperature range • Current, relative to input area


16 Bit; 10 to 15 bit + sign

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C) • Current, relative to input area


Yes


2.5 / 16.67 / 20 / 100 ms


2.5 / 16.67 / 20 / 100 (1 channel enabled); 7.5 / 50 / 60 / 300 (2 channels enabled)

Analog value creation Measurement principle Integrations and conversion time/resolutionper channel

• Interference voltage suppression 10 / 50 / 60 / 400 Hz for interference frequency f1 in Hz

5

6ES7 331-7TB00-0AB0

+/- 0,45 %; from 0/4 to 20 mA

+/- 0,1 %; from 0/4 to 20 mA

Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (fl +/- 1 %), fl = interference frequency • Series mode interference 60 dB (peak value of interference < rated value of input range), min. • common mode voltage, min. 130 dB Siemens IK PI · 2007

5/275


ET 200M — Analog Modules with HART Ex analog input module with HART


SM 331 HART analog input module 2 inputs, 0/4 … 20 mA, HART for ET 200M with IM 153-2 interface module



Accessories


Yes; parameterizable, channels 0 and 1

Front connector 1) 20-pin, with screw-type contacts



Yes; parameterizable, red LED, alarm message


Yes

• Overrange

Yes; red LED, signal

• Wire break in signal encoder cable Yes; red LED, signal

5

■ Ordering data

6ES7 331-7TB00-0AB0

• Short circuit of the signal encoder cable

Yes; red LED, signal

• HART communication, active

Yes; green LED (H)

Diagnostics indication LED • Collective error SF (red) • Channel error indicator F (red)

Yes Yes

Isolation tested with

Order No. 6ES7 331-7TB00-0AB0

• 1 piece

6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AJ00-1AB0

LK 393 cable guide mandatory for operation in hazardous areas

6ES7 393-4AA00-0AA0

SIMATIC DP DIN rail for ET 200M For insertion of up to 5 bus modules for • Length: 483 mm

6ES7 195-1GA00-0XA0

• Length: 530 mm

6ES7 195-1GF30-0XA0

SIMATIC S7-300 DIN rail • Length: 160 mm

6ES7 390-1AB60-0AA0

• Length: 480 mm

6ES7 390-1AE80-0AA0

• Length: 530 mm

6ES7 390-1AF30-0AA0

• Length: 830 mm

6ES7 390-1AJ30-0AA0 6ES7 390-1BC00-0AA0

• Channels against backplane bus and load voltage L+

1500 V AC

• Channels among one another

1500 V AC

• Length: 2000 mm

• Load voltage L+ against backplane bus

500 V DC

Reference Manual for EX I/O for S7-300, M7-300, ET 200M • German

6ES7 398-8RA00-8AA0

Yes

• English

6ES7 398-8RA00-8BA0 6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0


Yes


Yes

Label cover (10 pieces, spare part) for signal modules (not 32-channel modules), function modules and CPU 312 IFM Labeling strips (10 pieces, spare part) for signal modules (not 32-channel modules), function modules and CPU 312 IFM

6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0

Isolation between the channels and backplane bus Isolation, analog outputs

Isolation, analog inputs • Isolation, analog inputs

Yes

Permissible potential difference between the inputs (UCM)

60 V DC / 30 V AC

Environmental requirements Operating termperature • max.

60 °C

Standards, approvals, certificates Type of protection to EN 50020 (CENELEC)

[EEx ib] IIC

Type of protection to FM

Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4, Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4


II 3 (2) G Eex nA [ib] IIC T4

Test number KEMA

KEMA 97; ATEX3039 X


40 mm

Height

125 mm

Depth

120 mm


260 g 1) A connector with spring-loaded terminals cannot be used if the cable guide is used.

5/276



ET 200M — Analog Modules with HART Ex analog output module with HART

■ Overview • For using HART devices in hazardous areas • Plugs exclusively into ET 200M

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 332-5TB00-0AB0 Voltages and currents


Load voltage L+

Module for Ex(i) protection


24 V


Yes

Current consumption

Yes

Max. values of output circuits (per channel) • Co (permissible external capacity), max.

230 nF


100 mA


66 mA


150 mA

7.5 mH

Power loss, typ.

3.5 W

• Lo (permissible external inductivity), max. • Po (power of load), max.

506 mW

2


19 V

400 m

• Um (fault voltage), max.

60 V; DC


Yes

• Ta (permissible ambient temperature), max.

60 °C


19 V

Errors/accuracies +/- 0.02 %


5 ms

Output ripple (relative to the output area, bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz) Linearity error (relative to output area)

+/- 0.03 %


+/- 0.01 %

Analog outputs Number of analg outputs cable length, shielded, max.

Output ranges, current • 0 to 20 mA

Yes

• 4 to 20 mA

Yes

Connection of actuators • for current output 2-conductor connection

5

6ES7 332-5TB00-0AB0

Crosstalk between the outputs, min. 130 dB Yes


Repeat accuracy in settled status at 25 °C (relative to output area)

+/- 0.005 %



650 Ω


7.5 mH



+/- 0,55 %


+/- 0,15 %


12 Bit; Output value; 8 bit (+ sign) read back value


40 ms


2.5 ms


4 ms


2.5 ms


5/277


ET 200M — Analog Modules with HART Ex analog output module with HART

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 332-5TB00-0AB0 Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Substitute values connectable


Alarms

SM 332 HART analog output module HART analog output, 8 outputs, 0/4 … 20 mA, HART for ET 200M with IM 153-2


Accessories



Front connectors 20-pin, with screw-type contacts



• 1 piece

6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0


Yes

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AJ00-1AB0

• Diagnostics

Yes

6ES7 393-4AA00-0AA0

• Overrange

Yes


• Wire break

Yes; as of output value > 0.5 mA

• Wire break in acutator cable

Yes

• HART communication, active

Yes; green LED (H)

Diagnoses

5

■ Ordering data

SIMATIC DP rail for ET 200M For insertion of up to 5 bus modules for


• 483 mm long

6ES7 195-1GA00-0XA0


Yes; Additional group message per channel

• 530 mm long

6ES7 195-1GF30-0XA0

Yes; per channel



6ES7 390-1AB60-0AA0

Isolation

• 480 mm long

6ES7 390-1AE80-0AA0

tested with

• 530 mm long

6ES7 390-1AF30-0AA0

• 830 mm long

6ES7 390-1AJ30-0AA0

• 2000 mm long

6ES7 390-1BC00-0AA0

• Channels against backplane bus and load voltage L+ • Channels among one another • Load voltage L+ against backplane bus

1500 V AC 1500 V AC 500 V DC

Isolation between the channels and backplane bus

Yes

Isolation, analog outputs • Galvanic isolation, analog outputs

Yes


Yes


Yes

Permissible potential difference between the outputs (UCM)

60 V DC / 30 V AC

between M internal and the outputs

60 V DC / 30 V AC

Standards, approvals, certificates Type of protection to EN 50020 (CENELEC)

[Eex ib] IIC


Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4; Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4


II 3 (2) G Eex nA [ib] IIC T4

Test number KEMA

97; ATEX 2359 X


40 mm

Height

125 mm

Depth

120 mm


5/278


280 g

Reference Manual for EX I/O for S7-300, M7-300, ET 200M • German

6ES7 398-8RA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8RA00-8BA0


6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0


6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


ET 200M — Ex Digital Modules Ex digital input modules

■ Overview • Digital inputs for signals from the Ex field • For connecting intrinsically-safe digital equipment from the Ex field

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 321-7RD00-0AB0 Voltages and currents

Encoder supply

Load voltage L+

Output voltage


24 V


50 mA


80 mA


Power loss, typ.

1.1 W

Max. values of input circuits (per channel)

Connection point 20-pin

Digital inputs Number of NAMUR inputs

Yes; Two-wire connection


3 µF


14.1 mA


100 mH

200 m


33.7 mW


10 V


• NAMUR encoder

4

Cable length • Cable length unshielded, max.

via the inputs


Current consumption

required front connectors

5

6ES7 321-7RD00-0AB0

8.2 V; from internal power circuit supply

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Diagnoses

Input current 0.1 mA


• on short -circuit, max.

8.5 mA

Isolation

• for NAMUR encoders - for signal "0" - for signal "1"

0.35 to 1.2 mA 2.1 to 7 mA

• galvanic isolation, digital inputs

Yes


1

2 kHz


[EEx ib] IIC


CL.2, DIV 2, GP A,B,C,D T4

Test number PTB

Ex-96.D.2094X

• on wire break, max.


Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) • Input frequency (with 0.1 ms delay), max. • for NAMUR inputs - programmable

Yes


Yes; 0.1 / 0.5 / 3 / 15 / 20 ms (plus 0.25 ms preparation time)


230 g


5/279


ET 200M — Ex Digital Modules Ex digital input modules

■ Ordering data Ex digital input module 4 inputs, isolated, NAMUR

Order No. Labeling sheets for machine inscription For 16-channel signal modules, DIN A4, for printing with laser printer; 10 pieces

• 1 piece

6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0

• petrol

6ES7 392-2AX00-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AJ00-1AB0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX00-0AA0


6ES7 328-0AA00-7AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX00-0AA0 6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0

LK 393 cable guide Mandatory for operation in Ex-hazard areas

6ES7 393-4AA00-0AA0


6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0


6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


2XV9 450-1SL01-0YX0



5

Order No.

6ES7 321-7RD00-0AB0

5/280


Reference manual Ex I/O station S7-300, ET 200M • German

6ES7 398-8RA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8RA00-8BA0


ET 200M — Ex Digital Modules Ex digital output modules

■ Overview • Digital outputs for signals from the Ex field • For connecting intrinsically-safe digital equipment from the Ex field

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 3225SD00-0AB0

6ES7 3225RD00-0AB0

6ES7 3225SD00-0AB0

6ES7 3225RD00-0AB0


90 nF

500 nF



Load voltage L+

Max. values of output circuits (per channel)


24 V

24 V


160 mA

160 mA


70 mA

85 mA


70 mA

70 mA


6.7 mH

5 mH

Power loss, typ.

3W

3W


440 mW

335 mW


25.2 V

15.75 V


20-pin

20-pin



4

4

Diagnoses


200 m

200 m


Yes

Yes


Yes; electronic

• Short circuit

Yes

Yes


Output current with short-circuit protection, min. 20.5 mA + 10 %

• Group error

Yes

Yes

• Galvanic isolation, digital outputs

Yes

Yes

1

1

Digital outputs

Output current with short-circuit protection, min. 10 mA + 10 %


24 V

15 V

10 mA; +/- 10%

20 mA; +/- 10%


[EEx ib] IIC

[EEx ib] IIC

Type of protection to FM 100 Hz

100 Hz

CL I, DIV 2, GP A,B,C,D T4

AIS CL.1, DIV 1, GP A,B,C,D; CL.I, DIV 2, GP A,B,C,D T4

390 Ω; Two-wire connection

200 Ω; Two-wire connection

Test number PTB

Ex-96.D.2093X

Ex-96.D.2102X

230 g

230 g



Isolation, digital outputs • between the channels, in groups of

Output current • for signal "1" permissible range for 0 to 60 °C, max.

Isolation

Load impedance range • upper limit



5/281

5


ET 200M — Ex Digital Modules Ex digital output modules

■ Ordering data

Order No.

Ex digital output modules • 4 outputs, isolated, 24 V DC, 10 mA

6ES7 322-5SD00-0AB0

• 4 outputs, isolated, 15 V DC, 20 mA

6ES7 322-5RD00-0AB0


6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AJ00-1AB0


5

6ES7 328-0AA00-7AA0

LK 393 cable guide Mandatory for operation in Ex-hazard areas

6ES7 393-4AA00-0AA0


6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0


6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0


2XV9 450-1SL01-0YX0

5/282


Order No. Labeling sheets for machine inscription For 16-channel signal modules, DIN A4, for printing with laser printer; 10 pieces • petrol

6ES7 392-2AX00-0AA0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX00-0AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX00-0AA0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2

Reference manual Ex-Peripherals S7-300, ET 200M • German

6ES7 398-8RA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8RA00-8BA0


ET 200M — Ex Analog Modules Ex analog input modules

■ Overview • Analog inputs for signals from the Ex area • For connecting intrinsically-safe analog equipment from the Ex field

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 3317RD00-0AB0

6ES7 3317SF00-0AB0

24 V

24 V

Voltage supply to the transducers • present

Yes


13 V; at 22 mA

• No-load voltage (DC)

25.2 V


60 mA


150 mA

Power loss, typ.

3W

0.6 W

120 mA

20-pin

20-pin

Connection point required front connectors Analog inputs Number of analog inputs

6ES7 3317SF00-0AB0


Voltages and currents Load voltage L+ • Rated value (DC)

6ES7 3317RD00-0AB0

4


200 m


40 mA

Input ranges (rated values), currents • 0 to 20 mA

Yes

• 4 to 20 mA

Yes

8; 8 x thermocouples, 4 x RTD thermistors 200 m; HTC:50 m

• Type B

Yes

• Type E

Yes

• Type J

Yes

• Type K

Yes

• Type L

Yes

• Type N

Yes

• Type R

Yes

• Type S

Yes

• Type T

Yes

• Type U

Yes

Input ranges (rated values), resistance thermometers • Ni 100

Yes

• Pt 100

Yes

• Pt 200

Yes


SIGMA-DELTA

SIGMA-DELTA





Yes; 2.5 to 100 ms

Yes; 2.5 to 100 ms


• Interference voltage suppression 10 to 400 Hz for interference frequency f1 in Hz

10 to 400 Hz

Encoder Connection of signal encoders • for current measurement as 2-wire transducer

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes


5/283

5


ET 200M — Ex Analog Modules Ex analog input modules

■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 3317RD00-0AB0

■ Ordering data 6ES7 3317SF00-0AB0

Ex(i) characteristics Max. values of input circuits (per channel)

• 4 inputs, isolated, 0/4 to 20 mA, 15 bit

6ES7 331-7RD00-0AB0

• 8/4 inputs, isolated, for thermocouples and Pt100, Pt200, Ni100

6ES7 331-7SF00-0AB0


90 nF

60 µF



68.5 mA

28.8 mA

• 1 piece

6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0


7.5 mH

40 mH

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AJ00-1AB0 6ES7 328-0AA00-7AA0


431 mW

• Ri, max.

50 Ω


25.2 V

Front door, elevated design e.g. for 32 channel modules; enables connection of 1.3 mm2/16 AWG wires LK 393 cable guide Mandatory for operation in Ex-hazard areas

6ES7 393-4AA00-0AA0


6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0


6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0


2XV9 450-1SL01-0YX0

41.4 mW 5.9 V

Errors/accuracies

5

Order No.

Ex analog input modules

Operational limit in overall temperature range • Current, relative to input area

+/- 0,45 %

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C) • Current, relative to input area

+/- 0,1 %


+/- 0,1 %

Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (fl +/- 1 %), fl = interference frequency • Series mode interference 60 dB (peak value of interference < rated value of input range), min.

60 dB

• common mode voltage, min.

130 dB



Diagnoses

• petrol

6ES7 392-2AX00-0AA0

130 dB


Yes

Yes

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX00-0AA0

• Overrange

Yes

Yes

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX00-0AA0

• Wire break in signal encoder cable Yes

Yes

• red

6ES7 392-2DX00-0AA0

• Short circuit of the signal encoder cable

Yes

Yes

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0

Yes

Yes

between the inputs (UCM)

60 V DC

60 V DC

between inputs and MANA (UCM)

60 V DC

30 V DC


[EEx ib] IIC

[EEx ib] IIC


CL.I, DIV 2, GP A,B,C,D T4



6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


Test number PTB

Ex-96.D.2092X

Ex-96.D.2108X

290 g

210 g

Isolation Isolation, analog inputs • Isolation, analog inputs Permissible potential difference



5/284



6ES7 398-8RA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8RA00-8BA0


ET 200M — Ex Analog Modules Ex analog output modules

■ Overview • Analog outputs for signals from the Ex area • For connecting intrinsically-safe analog equipment from the Ex field

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 332-5RD00-0AB0 Voltages and currents


Load voltage L+

Max. values of output circuits (per channel)


24 V

Current consumption


850 nF


180 mA


70 mA


80 mA


6.6 mH

Power loss, typ.

4W


440 mW


14 V


20-pin

Errors/accuracies


4



200 m



Yes



70 mA



14 V


Analog outputs

+/- 0,55 %

+/- 0,2 %

Diagnoses



Yes

• 0 to 20 mA

Yes

• Overrange

Yes

• 4 to 20 mA

Yes

• Wire break in acutator cable

Yes

• Group error

Yes

Connection of actuators • for current output 2-conductor connection

Yes

Isolation Isolation, analog outputs

Load impedance (in rated range of output) • with current outputs, max.

5

6ES7 332-5RD00-0AB0

• Galvanic isolation, analog outputs Yes 500 Ω



between outputs and MANA (UCM)

60 V DC / 30 V AC


between the outputs (UCM)

60 V DC/30 V AC



15 Bit


2.5 ms


[EEx ib] IIC



Test number PTB

Ex-96.D.2026X


280 g


5/285


ET 200M — Ex Analog Modules Ex analog output modules

■ Ordering data Ex analog output module 4 outputs, isolated, 0/4 to 20 mA

Order No. Labeling sheets for machine inscription For 16-channel signal modules, DIN A4, for printing with laser printer; 10 pieces

• 1 piece

6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0

• petrol

6ES7 392-2AX00-0AA0

• 100 pieces

6ES7 392-1AJ00-1AB0

• light-beige

6ES7 392-2BX00-0AA0

Front door, elevated design e.g. for 32 channel modules; enables connection of 1.3mm2/16 AWG wires

6ES7 328-0AA00-7AA0

• yellow

6ES7 392-2CX00-0AA0

• red

6ES7 392-2DX00-0AA0 6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0

LK393 cable guide Mandatory for operation in Ex-hazard areas

6ES7 393-4AA00-0AA0


6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0


6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0

SIMATIC Manual Collection Electronic manuals on CD-ROM, multilingual: S7-200, S7-300, C7, S7-400, SIMATICDP (Distributed I/O), SIMATIC PC, SIMATIC PG, STEP 7, Engineering Tools, Runtime Software, SIMATIC PCS 7, SIMATIC HMI (Human Machine Interface), SIMATIC NET (Industrial Communication), SIMATIC Machine Vision, SIMATIC Sensors

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2


2XV9 450-1SL01-0YX0



5

Order No.

6ES7 332-5RD00-0AB0

5/286



6ES7 398-8RA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 398-8RA00-8BA0


ET 200M — IQ Sense Modules and Sensors IQ-Sense sensor module

■ Overview • Intelligent 8-channel electronics module for S7-300/ET 200M • For the connection of up to 8 IQ-Sense sensors: - Optoelectronic sensors - Ultrasound sensors • With standard function blocks for the various sensor technologies for simplified handling on a SIMATIC S7 • Conventional sensors cannot be operated.


■ Ordering data 6ES7 338-7XF00-0AB0

Voltages and currents 24 V


1A


150 mA; typically 20-pin


8

Cable length • Cable length unshielded, max.

Diffuse sensors • Model C40 IQ-Sense

3SF7 240-3JQ00

• Model K80 IQ-Sense

3SF7 210-3JQ00

• with background fading, model K80 IQ-Sense

3SF7 214-3JQ00

Diffuse barrier


5

Order No. 6ES7 338-7XF00-0AB0

Sensors for connecting to the sensor module


8x IQ-Sense sensor module

50 m

Encoder

• Model C40 IQ-Sense

3SF7 241-3JQ00

• Model K80 IQ-Sense

3SF7 211-3JQ00

Ultrasound sensor • Model M18 IQ-Sense; Range 6-30 cm

3SF6 232-3JA00

• Model M18 IQ-Sense; Range 15-100 cm

3SF6 233-3JA00

Connectable encoders • Description

photoelectronic proximity switches and ultrasonic sensors with IQ-Sense, cycle time 2.88 to 6 ms

Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Diagnostics indication LED • Status indicator digital input (green)

Yes


500 V DC


No


Yes


40 mm

Height

125 mm

Depth

120 mm


250 g


5/287


ET 200M — IQ Sense Modules and Sensors SIMATIC PXO opto proximity switches with IQ-Sense

■ Overview

5

Opto BERO with IQ-Sense, C40 design IQ-Sense

Opto BERO with IQ-Sense, K80 design IQ-Sense

The photoelectric proximity switches react to changes in the received quantity of light. The light beam emitted from the emitter diode is interrupted or reflected by the object to be detected.

Depending on the typ of BERO, the interruption or reflection of the light beam is evaluated. The following operating modes are possible with IQ-Sense: 7 Diffuse sensors (energetic) 7 Diffuse sensor (with background suppression) 7 Reflex sensors

These sensors detect all objects regardless of their composition, whether metal, wood or plastic.

Features: 7 Designs K80 IQ-Sense and C40 IQ-Sense 7 IntelliTeach functionality 7 Integrated anti-interference function 7 Pre-failure warning (fouling/misalignment)

■ Technical specifications Design

C40 design IQ-Sense

K80 design IQ-Sense 2

Diffuse sensor (energetic) Sensing range

m

0.7

Standard test object

mm

200 × 200 (white)

Transmitter (type of light)

nm

Red LED, 660

Supply current

mA

50

Response time

ms

1

LEDs

Switching status (yellow), surplus light (green)

Enclosure material

ABS + PBTP

Protection

IR LED, 880

PBTP

IP67

Dimensions

mm

40 × 40 × 53

83 × 65 × 25

Diffuse sensor with background suppression Sensing range

m

–

0.2 ... 1


mm

–

200 × 200 (white)


nm

–

IR-LED, 880

Supply current

mA

–

50

Response time

ms

–

2

LEDs

–


Enclosure material

–

PBTP

Protection

–

IP67

–

83 × 65 × 25

Dimensions

5/288

mm



ET 200M — IQ Sense Modules and Sensors SIMATIC PXO opto proximity switches with IQ-Sense

■ Technical specifications (continued) Design

C40 IQ-Sense

K80 IQ-Sense

6

8

Reflex sensor Sensing range

m


Reflector D84, 3RX7916


nm

Red LED 660 nm, polarized

Supply current

mA

50

Response time

ms

1

LEDs


Enclosure material

ABS + PBTP

Protection

IP67

Dimensions

mm

PBTP

40 × 40 × 53

83 × 65 × 25


Design

Type

Order No.

Photoelectric sensors for connection to the 4 IQ-Sense sensor module

C40 IQ-Sense

Diffuse sensor

3SF7 240-3JQ00

Reflex sensor

3SF7 241-3JQ00

Diffuse sensor

3SF7 210-3JQ00

Diffuse sensor (with background suppression)

3SF7 214-3JQ00

Reflex sensor

3SF7 211-3JQ00

K80 IQ-Sense

5

■ Dimension drawings 25

65

N S D 0 _ 0 1 1 8 4 a

L E D

5,5

10

NSA0_00330

5

8,2

6 9

5 5

73

83

62

4 6

4 0

max.90°

5 ,3 x 7 ,3 3 0

20

4 0 30 36

M

M12x1 50

1 2 x 1 4 0

8,1

Opto BERO with IQ-Sense, K80 IQ-Sense design

Opto BERO with IQ-Sense, C40 IQ-Sense design


5/289


ET 200M — IQ Sense Modules and Sensors SIMATIC PXS sonar proximity switches with IQ-Sense

■ Overview


3SF62 32–3JA00 3SF62 33–3JA00

Sensing range • Rated value

cm

5 ... 30

15 ... 100

• Maximum value

cm

5 ... 50

15 ... 150


mm

10 × 10

20 × 20

Differential travel H (adjustable)

mm

3 ... 30

10 ... 100

Repeat accuracy R

mm

1

2

Operating voltage (DC)

of IQ-Sense

Rated operational current Ie

of IQ-Sense

No-load current I0

of IQ-Sense

Adjustment / configuration

Beginning and end of switching range via IQ-Sense (IntelliTeach) or local teach-in via potentiometer

Ultra-sound frequency

5

The sonar BEROs of the M18 IQ compact series are ready-touse complete units with a cylindrical M18 housing for connection to the S7-300/ET 200M IQ-Sense module SM338, 8×IQ-Sense. 7 Five operating modes: – Operation as measuring sensor (“analog signal“) – Diffuse sensor with background blanking – Diffuse sensor with differential travel – Diffuse sensor with foreground and background blanking – Retroreflective sensor. 7 Statically configurable using STEP 7, 7 Dynamically configurable using an S7 function block 7 Measured distance to object is always transmitted 7 Synchronizable, multiplex operation 7 Temperature compensation, 7 Connection with M12 connector 7 Non-polarized 2-conductor connection (protected against polarity reversal), 7 Channel-specific system diagnosis (e.g. wire-break, short-circuit, parameterization error).

kHz

400

200

Switching frequency f

Hz

8

4

Response time

ms

54

110

Measuring rate

ms

13.44

26.88

Status display

yellow LED

Casing material

nickel-plated brass, Transformer cover CRASTIN, Transformer surface epoxy resin


IP67

Ambient temperature • Operation

°C

–25 ... +70

• Storage

°C

–40 ... +85


Type

Sensing range

Order No.

Ultrasonic sensors For connection to IQ-Sense

M18 IQ-Sense

5 ... 30

3SF62 32–3JA00

15 ... 100

3SF62 33–3JA00

5/290



ET 200M — Special Modules SM 374 simulator module

■ Overview • Simulator module for testing programs during startup and operation • For simulation of sensor signals using switches • For indicating signal statuses at the outputs using LEDs


■ Ordering data 6ES7 374-2XH01-0AA0

Current consumption

6ES7 374-2XH01-0AA0


80 mA

Power loss, typ.

0.35 W

Bus connector 1 unit (spare part)

6ES7 390-0AA00-0AA0

Labeling strip 10 units (spare part)

6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0

16; Switch

S7-SmartLabel Software for machine labeling of modules directly from the STEP 7 project

2XV9 450-1SL01-0YX0

16; LEDs

Digital inputs Number of digital inputs Digital outputs Number of digital outputs Isolation Isolation, digital outputs • between the channels and the backplane bus

No

Galvanic isolation, digital inputs • between the channels and the backplane bus

No

Labeling sheets for machine labeling for 16-channel signal modules, DIN A4, for printing using laser printer; 10 units • Petrol

6ES7 392-2AX00-0AA0


• Light beige

6ES7 392-2BX00-0AA0

Width

40 mm

• Yellow

6ES7 392-2CX00-0AA0

125 mm

• Red

6ES7 392-2DX00-0AA0

120 mm

Label cover

6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0

Height Depth

10 units (spare part)


5

Order No.

SM 374 simulator module Including bus connector and labeling strip

190 g


5/291


ET 200M — Special Modules DM 370 dummy module

■ Overview • Dummy module for reserving slots for non-parameterized signal modules • Structure and address allocation is retained when replaced with a signal module

5


■ Ordering data 6ES7 370-0AA01-0AA0

Current consumption

Order No.

DM 370 dummy module Including bus connector and labeling strip

6ES7 370-0AA01-0AA0


5 mA

Power loss, max.

0.03 W

Bus connector 1 unit (spare part)

6ES7 390-0AA00-0AA0

40 mm

Labeling strip 10 units (spare part)

6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0

Width Height

125 mm 120 mm

S7-SmartLabel Software for machine labeling of modules directly from the STEP 7 project

2XV9 450-1SL01-0YX0

Depth



5/292


180 g

Labeling sheets for machine labeling for 16-channel signal modules, DIN A4, for printing using laser printer; 10 units • Petrol

6ES7 392-2AX00-0AA0

• Light beige

6ES7 392-2BX00-0AA0

• Yellow

6ES7 392-2CX00-0AA0

• Red

6ES7 392-2DX00-0AA0

Label cover 10 units (spare part)

6ES7 392-2XY00-0AA0


ET 200M — Power Supplies

2 A, 5 A, 10 A load power supplies

■ Overview • Load power supplies for S7-300/ET 200M • For conversion of the line voltage to the required operating voltage of 24 V DC • Output current of 2 A, 5 A or 10 A


5

Power supply, type

2A

2A

5A

5A

10 A

Order No.

6ES7 307-1BA000AA0

6ES7 305-1BA800AA0

6ES7 307-1EA000AA0

6ES7 307-1EA800AA0

6ES7 307-1KA010AA0

Order No. SIPLUS

6AG1 305-1BA802AA0 1)

6AG1 307-1EA802AA0 1)

Input

Single-phase AC

DC voltage

Single-phase AC

Single-phase AC

Single-phase AC

Rated voltage Vin rated

120/230 V AC Settable via selector switch on device

24 V ... 110 V DC Wide-range input


120/230 V AC Set via switch on device


Voltage range

85 ... 132 V/ 170 ... 264 V AC

16.8 ... 138 V DC

85 ... 132 V/ 170 ... 264 V AC

93 ... 132 V AC/ 187 ... 264 V AC

85 ... 132/ 170 ... 264 V AC

Overvoltage strength

2.3 x -pole, 1.3 ms

154 V; 0.1 s

2.3 x -pole, 1.3 ms

2.3 x Vin rated, 1.3 ms

2.3 x -pole, 1.3 ms

Mains buffering Iout rated

> 20 ms at Vin = 93/187 V

> 10 ms at Vin rated

> 20 ms at Vin = 93/187 V

> 20 ms at Vin = 93/187 V

> 20 ms at Vin = 93/187 V

Rated line frequency; range

50/60 Hz; 47 ... 63 Hz

-

50/60 Hz; 47 ... 63 Hz

50/60 Hz, 47 ... 63 Hz

50/60 Hz; 47 ... 63 Hz

Rated current Iin rated

0.9/0.6 A

2.7-0.6 A (4-0.9 A)

2.1/1.3 A

2.1/1.2 A

4.1/1.8 A

Inrush current limitation (+25°C)

< 20 A, < 3 ms

< 20 A, < 10 ms

< 45 A, < 3 ms

< 45 A, < 3 ms

< 55 A, < 3 ms

2

2

2

2

I t

< 1.0 A s

<5A s

< 1.2 A2s

< 1.8 A s (typ. 1.2 A2s)

< 3.3 A2s

Integrated line-side fuse


T 6.3 A/250 V (inaccessible)

F 4 A/250 V (not accessible)



Recommended circuit-breaker (IEC 898) in mains supply line

3 A, Characteristic C

At and above 10 A, C characteristic, suitable for DC


At and above 10 A, Characteristic C or at and above 6 A, Characteristic D


1) SIPLUS module for temperature range -25 ... +60°C and use under medial load (e.g. sulphur chloride atmosphere). This SIPLUS power supply conforms with standards for electronic equipment used on rolling stock (EN 50155, temperature T1, category 1).


5/293




■ Technical specifications (continued) Power supply, type

2A

2A

5A

5A

10 A

Order No.

6ES7 307-1BA000AA0

6ES7 305-1BA800AA0

6ES7 307-1EA000AA0

6ES7 307-1EA800AA0

6ES7 307-1KA010AA0

Order No. SIPLUS

5

6AG1 305-1BA802AA0 1)

6AG1 307-1EA802AA0 1)

Output


Controlled, isolated DC voltage


Controlled, isolated DC voltage


Rated voltage Vout rated

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

Total tolerance

±3%

±3%

Approx. 0.1 %

Approx. 0.1 %

±3% Approx. ± 0.2 %

±3%

• Stat. mains compensation

±3% Approx. 0.2 %

• Stat. load compensation

Approx. 0.2 %

Approx. 0.4 %

Approx. 0.2 %

Approx. ± 0.4 %

Approx. 0.5 %

Residual ripple (clock frequency: approx. 50 kHz)

< 150 mVpp (typ. < 20 mVpp)

< 150 mVpp (typ. < 30 mVpp)

< 150 mVpp (typ. 40 mVpp)



Spikes (bandwidth: 20 MHz)

< 240 mVpp (typ. < 150 mVpp)

< 240 mVpp (typ. < 150 mVpp)




Approx. 0.1 %

Setting range

-

-

-

-

-

Status display

Green LED for 24 V O.K.





Power ON/OFF behavior

No overshoot of Vout (soft start)





Starting delay/voltage rise

< 3 s/typ. 60 ms

< 3 s (typ.7 ms)/ typ. 5 ms

< 2 s/typ. 60 ms

< 3 s/typ.100 ms

< 1.5 s/typ. 80 ms

Rated current Iout rated

2A

2A (3 A with Vin > 24 V)

5A

5A

10 A

• Up to +45 °C

0 ... 2 A

0 ... 2 A (3 A)

0 ... 5 A

0 ... 5 A

0 ... 10 A

• Up to +60 °C

0 ... 2 A

0 ... 3 A (3 A)

0 ... 5 A

0 ... 5 A

0 ... 10 A

typ. 10 A for 90 ms

typ. 9 A for 270 ms

typ. 20 A for 75 ms


typ. 35 A for 80 ms

• Short-circuit in operation

typ. 10 A for 90 ms

typ. 9 A for 270 ms

typ. 20 A for 75 ms

typ. 20 A for 80 ms


Parallel connection for increased output

Not permissible

Yes, 2 units

Not permissible

Not permissible

Not permissible

Efficiency at Vout rated, Iout rated

Approx. 83 %

Approx. 75%

Approx. 87 %

Approx. 84 %

Approx. 87 %

Power loss at Vout rated, Iout rated

Approx. 10 W

Approx. 16 W (24 W) Approx. 18 W

Approx. 23 W

Approx. 34 W

Dyn. mains compensation (Vin rated ± 15 %)

± 0.3 % Vout

± 0.3 % Vout

± 0.3 % Vout

± 0.3 % Vout

± 0.3 % Vout

Dyn. load compensation (Iout: 50/100/50 %)

± 0.8 % Vout

± 2.5 % Vout

± 2.5 % Vout

± 3 % Vout

± 2.5 % Vout

• Load step from 50 to 100 %

< 5 ms (typ. 2.5 ms)

< 5 ms (typ. 2.5 ms)

typ. 0.1 ms

< 5 ms (typ. 0.2 ms)

< 5 ms

• Load step from 100 to 50 %

< 5 ms (typ. 2.5 ms)

< 5 ms (typ. 2.5 ms)

typ. 0.1 ms

< 5 ms (typ. 0.2 ms)

< 5 ms

Output overvoltage protection

Additional control loop, shutdown at approx. 30 V, automatic restart





Current limitation

2.2 ... 2.6 A

3.3 ... 3.9 A

5.5 ... 6.5 A

5.5 ... 6.5 A

11 ... 12 A


Electronic shutdown, automatic restart





RMS sustained short-circuit current

<4A

<2A

<9A

<5A

< 10 A

Overload/short-circuit indicator

-

-

-

-

-

Current range

Dyn. V/I with • Starting on short circuit

Efficiency

Control

Settling time


1) SIPLUS module for temperature range -25 ... +60°C and use under medial load (e.g. sulphur chloride atmosphere). This SIPLUS power supply conforms with standards for electronic equipment used on rolling stock (EN 50155, temperature T1, category 1).

5/294





■ Technical specifications (continued) Power supply, type

2A

2A

5A

5A

10 A

Order No.

6ES7 307-1BA000AA0

6ES7 305-1BA800AA0

6ES7 307-1EA000AA0

6ES7 307-1EA800AA0

6ES7 307-1KA010AA0

Order No. SIPLUS Safety Electrical isolation primary/secondary

6AG1 305-1BA802AA0 1)

6AG1 307-1EA802AA0 1)

Yes, SELV output voltage Vout acc. to EN 60950 and EN 50178

Yes, safety extra-low output voltage Vout to EN 60950 and EN 50178, creepages and clearances > 5 mm


Yes, safety extra-low output voltage Vout to EN 60950 and EN 50178, creepages and clearances > 8 mm


Protective class

Class I

Class I

Class I

Class I

Class I

Discharge current

< 3.5 mA (typ. 0.7 mA)

< 3.5 mA (typ. 0.7 mA)

< 3.5 mA (typ. 0.3 mA)

< 3.5 mA (typ. 0.3 mA)

< 3.5 mA (typ. 0.5 mA)

TÜV test

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

CE marking

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

UL/cUL (CSA) approval


Yes, UL-listed (UL 508), file E143289, CSA (CSA22.2 no. 14-95)


Yes, UL-listed (UL 508), file E143289, CSA (CSA22.2 no. 14-95)

Yes, UL listed (UL 508) File E143289, CSA (CSA 22.2 No. 14-95)

FM approval

Yes, Class I Div. 2 Group A, B, C, D, T4

-

Yes, Class I Div. 2 Group A, B, C, D, T 4

-

Yes, Class I Div. 2, A, B, C, D, T4

Appr. for use in marine vessels

in the S7-300 system

Yes, GL, LRS


Yes, GL, LRS


Degree of protection (EN 60529)

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

IP20

EMC Interference emission

EN 55022 Class B

EN 55011 Class A

EN 55022 Class B

EN 55011 Class A

EN 55022 Class B

Line harmonics limitation

Not applicable

Not applicable

EN 61000-3-2

-

EN 61000-3-2

Interference immunity

EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-2

EN 61000-6-2


0 ... +60 °C with natural convection

-25°C ... +70°C with natural convection

0 ... +60 °C with nat- -25°C ... +70°C with natural convection ural convection

0 ... +60°C with natural convection

Transportation and storage temperature range

-40 ... +85 °C

- 40 ... + 85 °C

-40 ... +85 °C

- 40 ... + 85 °C

-40 ... +85 °C

Humidity rating


Climate class 3K5 to EN 60721, transient condensation permitted


Climate class 3K5 to EN 60721, transient condensation permitted


One screw-type terminal each for 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 singlecore/finely stranded 2 screw-type terminals for 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 2 screw-type terminals for 0.5 to 2.5 mm2

Solid/finely-stranded per screw-type terminal for 0.5 mm to 2.5 mm2 3 screw-type terminals for 0.5 mm to 2.5 mm2 3 screw-typeterminals for 0.5 mm to 5 mm2


Solid/finely-stranded per screw-type terminal for 0.5 mm to 2.5 mm2 3 screw-type terminals for 0.5 mm to 2.5 mm2 3 screw-type terminals for 0.5 mm to 2.5 mm2



50 x 125 x 120

80 x 125 x 120

80 x 125 x 120

80 x 125 x 120

120 x 125 x 120 1)

Weight approx.

0.42 kg

0.75 kg

0.74 kg

0.57 kg

1.1 kg

Mounting

Snap-mounting on S7 rail

Snaps onto S7 busbar

Snap-mounting on S7 rail

Snaps onto S7 busbar

Snap-mounting on S7 rail 1)

Accessories

Mounting adapter for DIN rail and PS-CPU power connector


Mounting adapter for DIN rail and power connector



Operating specifications

Mechanical specifications Connections • 〈Mains input L, N, PE (DC input: L+1, M1, PE) • 〈Output L+ • 〈Output M

1) SIPLUS module for temperature range -25 ... +60°C and use under medial load (e.g. sulphur chloride atmosphere). This SIPLUS power supply conforms with standards for electronic equipment used on rolling stock (EN 50155, temperature T1, category 1). Siemens IK PI · 2007

5/295

5




■ Ordering data

Order No.

PS 305/307 load power supply incl. power connector • 120/230 V AC / 24 V DC; 2 A

6ES7 307-1BA00-0AA0

• 24 … 110 V DC / 24 V DC; 2 A, for extended temperature range

6ES7 305-1BA80-0AA0

• 120/230 V AC / 24 V DC; 5 A

6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0

• 120/230 V AC / 24 V DC; 5 A, for extended temperature range

6ES7 307-1EA80-0AA0

• 120/230 V AC / 24 V DC; 10 A

6ES7 307-1KA01-0AA0

5

5/296


Order No. SIPLUS load power supply PS 305/307 for temperature range -25 … +60 °C and use under medial load (e.g. sulphur chloride atmosphere). Conforms with standard for electronic equipment used on rolling stock (EN 50155, temperature T1, category 1). • 24 … 110 V DC / 24 V DC; 2 A

6AG1 305-1BA80-2AA0

• 120/230 V AC / 24 V DC; 5 A

6AG1 307-1EA80-2AA0

Installation adapter For snapping the PS 307 onto a 35 mm DIN rail (EN 50022)

6ES7 390-6BA00-0AA0

PS-CPU power connector Spare part

6ES7 390-7BA00-0AA0

ET 200 distributed I/Os ET 200eco

■ Overview • Compact, cost-effective I/O devices for processing digital signals • Design without control cabinet with degree of protection IP65/67 with flexible and fast connections • Comprises a basic module and various connection blocks for application-specific implementation options: - ECOFAST: 2 x RS 485 hybrid fieldbus connection with identification plug for setting the PROFIBUS address - M12: 2 x M12 and 2 x 7/8" with 2 rotary coding switches for assigning the PROFIBUS address • Connection block contains T-functionality for bus and power supply so that during commissioning and service, the modules can be disconnected from and reconnected to the PROFIBUS without interruption • Module variance: 8DI, 16DI, 8DI/8DO (1.3 A), 8DI/8DO (2.0 A), 8DO (2.0 A), 16DO (0.5 A) • Transmission rates up to 12 Mbit/s • Fail-safe DI modules 4/8 F-DI with safety-related signal processing according to PROFIsafe

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 141-3BF00-0XA0

6ES7 141-3BH00-0XA0

6ES7 148-3FA00-0XB0


24 V

24 V

24 V


Yes

Yes

No


70 mA; typically

70 mA; typically

100 mA

Power loss, typ.

2.4 W

3.6 W

3W


Current consumption

FH technology Module for fail-safe applications

Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes

12 Mbit/s; 9.6 / 19.2 / 45.45 / 93.75 / 187.5 / 500 kBaud 1.5 / 3 / 6 / 12 Mbaud


12 Mbit/s


8

16



8; all mounting positions up to 55 °C




30 m

30 m

30 m


Yes

Yes

Yes

• Rated value, DC

24 V

24 V

24 V

• for signal "0"

-3 to 5 V

-3 to 5 V

-30V to 5 V

• for signal "1"

13 to 30 V

13 to 30 V

15 to 30 V

7 mA

7 mA

3.7 mA

3 ms; typ. 3 ms; typically



Digital inputs

Cable length

Input voltage

Input current • for signal "1", typ. Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) • for standard inputs - at "0" to "1", max. - at "1" to "0", max.


5/297

5


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 141-3BF00-0XA0

6ES7 141-3BH00-0XA0

6ES7 148-3FA00-0XB0

Number of outputs

8

8

2

Output voltage

24 V DC

24 V DC

min. L+ (-1.5V)


1 A; Aggregate current up to 55 °C

1 A; Aggregate current up to 55 °C

300 mA


Yes; electronic

Yes; electronic

Yes

• 2-wire BEROS

Yes

Yes

No


1.5 mA

1.5 mA

Yes

Yes

No

No




Yes

Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes

Yes


No

No

No

500 V DC

500 V DC

350 V AC/ 1min

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

500 V DC

500 V DC

500 V DC

Encoder supply



5

Alarms • Alarms Diagnoses • Diagnostics Diagnostics indication LED

Isolation Isolation checked with Isolation between PROFIBUS DP all all other circuits Galvanic isolation, digital inputs • between the channels Permissible potential difference between different circuits Standards, approvals, certificates Highest safety class achievable in safety mode • to EN 954

Cat.3 (one-channel), Cat.4 (two-channel)

• to IEC 61508

SIL 2 (one channel), SIL 3 (two channel)


80DBh

80DAh

Width

60 mm

60 mm

60 mm

Height

210 mm

210 mm

210 mm

Depth

28 mm

28 mm

28 mm

210 g

210 g

220 g



5/298



■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 1423BF00-0XA0

6ES7 1423BH00-0XA0

6ES7 1423BF00-0XA0

6ES7 1423BH00-0XA0

4 A; 4 A each for sockets X1, X3, X5, X7, 4 A each for X2, X4, X6, X8; note the current carrying capacity of the cable

4 A; Please note the current carrying capacity of the cable.

• lower limit

12 Ω

12 Ω

• upper limit

4 kΩ

4 kΩ

Yes

Yes

No

No




Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes


No

No

500 V DC

500 V DC

Yes

Yes

No

No

500 V DC

500 V DC

80DDh

80FBh

Width

60 mm

60 mm

Height

210 mm

210 mm

Depth

28 mm

28 mm

210 g

210 g


Supply voltages Supply voltage of electronics 1L+ • Rated value (DC)

24 V

24 V


Yes

Yes


24 V

24 V


Yes

Yes

60 mA; typically

80 mA; typically



Current consumption from load voltage 2L+ (without load), max. from supply voltage 1L+, max. Power loss, typ.


70 mA; typically

70 mA; typically

4W

4W

Status indicator


Yes

Yes




8

16


30 m

30 m

Short-circuit protection of the output Yes; electronic • Response threshold, typ.

4A (per channel)

Yes; electronic



Isolation

1.4 A (per channel)



2L+ (-44 V)

2L+ (-47 V)

Isolation

Lamp load, max.

10 W

5W



Yes

Yes



Output voltage 2L+ (- 0.8 V)

2L+ (- 0.8 V)

5

Alarms • Alarms




Output current



2A

0.5 A

General information


5 mA

5 mA



2.4 A



1A 0.1 mA


No

No


Yes

Yes


100 Hz

100 Hz


0.5 Hz; to IEC 947-5-1, DC13

0.5 Hz; to IEC 947-5-1, DC13


1 Hz

1 Hz


Switching frequency


5/299


■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 1433BH00-0XA0

6ES7 1433BH10-0XA0

Supply voltages

6ES7 1433BH10-0XA0

Digital outputs

Supply voltage of electronics 1L+


8

8


24 V

24 V


30 m

30 m


No

Yes


Voltages and currents Load voltage 2L+ • Rated value (DC)

24 V

24 V


No

Yes

Current consumption

5

6ES7 1433BH00-0XA0

Yes; electronic


4 A per channel 4 A per channel


2L+ (-44 V)

2L+ (-44 V)

Lamp load, max.

10 W

10 W


Yes

Yes

2L+ (- 0.8 V)

2L+ (-1.2 V)

Output voltage


60 mA; typically 60 mA; typically


70 mA; typically 70 mA; typically

Output current

Power loss, typ.

5W


2A

1.3 A


5 mA

5 mA


2.4 A

1.8 A

• for signal "1", min. 5W


Yes

Yes





8

8




Digital inputs


Yes

Yes

• for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.5 mA • for increased power

No

No


Yes

Yes


100 Hz

100 Hz


0.5 Hz; to IEC 947-5-1, DC13

0.5 Hz; to IEC 947-5-1, DC13


1 Hz

1 Hz

4 A; 4 A each for sockets X1, X3, X5, X7 and 4 A each for sockets X2, X4, X6, X8; note the current carrying capacity of the cable

5.2 A; Please note the current carrying capacity of the cable.

• lower limit

12 Ω

12 Ω

• upper limit

4 kΩ

4 kΩ

Switching frequency



24 V

24 V

• for signal "0"

-3 to 5 V

-3 to 5 V

• for signal "1"

13 to 30 V

13 to 30 V

7 mA

7 mA

Input current • for signal "1", typ. Input delay (for rated value of input voltage) • for standard inputs - at "0" to "1", max. - at "1" to "0", max.

5/300


0.5 mA


Load impedance range 3 ms; typ. 3 ms; typically



■ Technical specifications (continued) 6ES7 1433BH00-0XA0

6ES7 1433BH10-0XA0

Encoder supply

6ES7 1433BH00-0XA0

6ES7 1433BH10-0XA0

500 V DC

500 V DC

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

500 V DC

500 V DC

80DCh

80FCh

Width

60 mm

60 mm

Height

210 mm

210 mm

Depth

28 mm

28 mm

210 g

210 g

6ES7 1943AA00-0AA0

6ES7 1943AA00-0BA0

2W

2W

Width

79 mm

79 mm

Height

60 mm

60 mm

Depth

30 mm

29 mm

313 g

392 g

Isolation

Number of outputs

8

Output voltage

24 V DC


0.75 A; up to 55°C max. 0.75 A (summation current)

1 A; up to 55°C max. 1 A (summation current)


Yes; electronic

Yes; electronic



8



Encoder




• 2-wire BEROS

Yes

Yes



1.5 mA

1.5 mA



Dimensions and weight Yes

Yes

Alarms • Alarms

No

No

Weights




Yes

Yes

Weight, approx.

Diagnostics indication LED • Collective error SF (red) • Status indicator digital output (green)

Yes


Yes

Yes


No

No

Yes

Current consumption Power loss, typ. Dimensions and weight



5/301

5


■ Ordering data ET 200eco BM 141 basic module • 8 DI 24 V DC 8 x M12, single assignment, degree of protection IP65/67 connection block 6ES7194-3AA00-0.A0 to be ordered separately • 16 DI 24 V DC 8 x M12, dual assignment, degree of protection IP65/67 connection block 6ES7194-3AA00-0.A0 to be ordered separately

5

ET 200eco BM 142 basic module • 8 DO 24 V DC/ 1.2 A 8 x M12, single assignment, degree of protection IP65/67 connection block 6ES7194-3AA00-0.A0 to be ordered separately • 16 DO 24 V DC/0.5 A 8 x M12, dual assignment degree of protection IP65/67; Connection block 6ES7 194-3AA00-0.A0 to be ordered separately ET 200eco BM 143 basic module • 8 DI/8 DO, 2 A; 8 x M12, IP65/67 connection block 6ES7194-3AA00-0.A0 to be ordered separately • 8 DI/8 DO, 1.3 A; 8 x M12, dual assignment, degree of protection IP65/67 connection block 6ES7 194-3AA00-0.A0 to be ordered separately ET 200eco BM 148 basic module • 4/8 F-DI, 8 x M12, connection block 6ES7194-3AA00-0.A0 to be ordered separately

Order No.

6ES7 141-3BF00-0XA0

6ES7 141-3BH00-0XA0

6ES7 142-3BF00-0XA0

6ES7 142-3BH00-0XA0

6ES7 143-3BH00-0XA0

6ES7 143-3BH10-0XA0

6ES7 148-3FA00-0XB0

ECOFAST connection block For ET 200eco, 2 x ECOFAST connection RS 485 identification plug for PROFIBUS DP, address setting

6ES7 194-3AA00-0AA0

M12 connection block, 7/8" For ET 200eco, 2 x M12 and 2 x 7/8" 2 rotary coding switches for PROFIBUS DP, address setting

6ES7 194-3AA00-0BA0

5/302


Order No. Accessories F programming tool “Distributed Safety” V5.4 Floating license for one user, with three-language documentation (German, English, French), on CD, executes as of STEP 7 V5.3 SP3

6ES7 833-1FC02-0YA5

F programming tool “Distributed Safety” upgrade from V5.x to V5.4

6ES7 833-1FC02-0YE5

F programming tool “Distributed Safety” Software update service for 1 year, with automatic extension; prerequisite – current software version

6ES7 833-1FC02-0YX2

Inscription labels

3RT1 900-1SB20

Module description “ET 200eco distributed I/O device” except F-DI Paper • German

6ES7 198-8GA00-8AA0

• English

6ES7 198-8GA00-8BA0

• French

6ES7 198-8GA00-8CA0

PROFIBUS ECOFAST Hybrid cable – Cu

See ECOFAST bus cables

PROFIBUS ECOFAST Terminating plug ECOFAST terminating resistor for PROFIBUS DP • 1 package = 1 item

6GK1 905-0DA10

• 1 package = 5 items

6GK1 905-0DA00

M12 sealing caps For covering input or output sockets

3RX9 802-0AA00


■ Ordering data

Order No.

Order No.

Accessories for M12, 7/8“ connecting block

Accessories for M12, 7/8“ connecting block (continued)

PROFIBUS M12 connecting cable 2-core (inverse coded) pre-assembled with M12 plugs in various lengths:

PROFIBUS M12 plug connector 1 pack = 5 items • Connector insert

6GK1 905-0EA00

• Socket insert

6GK1 905-0EB00

• 0.3 m

6XV1 830-3DE30

• 0.5 m

6XV1 830-3DE50

7/8" cable connector 1 pack = 5 pieces

• 1.0 m

6XV1 830-3DH10

• Male insert

6GK1 905-0FA00

• 1.5 m

6XV1 830-3DH15

• Female insert

6GK1 905-0FB00

• 2.0 m

6XV1 830-3DH20

6ES7 194-3JA00-0AA0

• 3.0 m

6XV1 830-3DH30

7/8" sealing caps 1 pack = 10 items

• 5.0 m

6XV1 830-3DH50 6XV1 830-3DN10

• 15.0 m

6XV1 830-3DN15

M12 Y-coupler plug For dual connection of sensors using single cable, 5-pole; not used with F-DI4/8

6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0

• 10.0 m

M12 coupler plug For connecting actuators and sensors, 5-pole

3RX1 667

3RX1 668

SIMATIC NET Energy Cable 5-core power cable, 5 x 1.5 mm2 conductors, can be trailed • Sold by the meter, minimum length = 20 m

6XV1 830-8AH10

PROFIBUS M12 bus terminating connector

6GK1 905-0EC00


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0

• 0.3 m

6XV1 822-5BE30


• 0.5 m

6XV1 822-5BE50 6XV1 822-5BH10

• 1.5 m

6XV1 822-5BH15

• 2.0 m

6XV1 822-5BH20

• 3.0 m

6XV1 822-5BH30


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2

• 1.0 m

• 5.0 m

6XV1 822-5BH50

• 10.0 m

6XV1 822-5BN10

• 15.0 m

6XV1 822-5BN15

For PROFIBUS DP, 1 pack = 5 pieces 7/8“ connecting cable for power supply 5-core pre-assembled with 7/8" plugs in various lengths:


5

5/303

ET 200 distributed I/Os ET 200R

■ Overview • • • • •

Distributed I/O to the degree of protection IP65 Die-cast aluminum housing Integrated repeater Parameterizable inputs/ outputs: 8 DI/8 DO up to 16 DI Terminal strip at rear for connecting up analog signals for welding transformers • Connection through hybrid line to 17-pin M23 connector

5

■ Technical specifications 6ES7 1432BH00-0AB0

6ES7 1432BH50-0AB0

• DC 24 V

Yes; -15 / +20 % Yes; -15 / +20 %


20.4 V


28.8 V

28.8 V


Yes; also electronic protection

Yes; also electronic protection

Bus and voltage: X01/X02: 2 x M23 (17-pin)

Bus and voltage: X01/X02: 2 x M23 (17-pin)

8 x 5-pin plug M12x1

8 x 5-pin plug M12x1

Yes; Run-up time at 12 Mbaud: about 80 ms

Yes

20.4 V


3 ms; typ.


8; 16 process channels, 8 DI fixed, 8 DI/DO parameterizable



10 m

10 m


Yes; electronic

Yes; electronic

Output current • for signal "1" permissible range for 0 to 55 °C,, max.

0.5 A

0.5 A


100 Hz

100 Hz


2A

2A

Number of outputs

8

8


0.5 A; 8 channels each

0.5 A; 8 channels each

Yes

Yes


Yes; Diagnostic frames

Yes; Diagnostic frames

• Short circuit

Yes; (Digital outputs) per group; X0 to X1 or X2 to X3

Yes; (Digital outputs) per group - X0 to X1 or X2 to X3

Encoder supply

PROFIBUS DP Cable length, max.

3 ms; typ.

• for standard inputs - at "0" to "1", max. Digital outputs

Connection point

Inputs/outputs

6ES7 1432BH50-0AB0



Bus cables

6ES7 1432BH00-0AB0

30 m; per chain, 30 m; per chain, shielded shielded








Yes

Yes

• for signal "0"

-3 to 5 V

-3 to 5 V

• for signal "1"

15 to 30 V

15 to 30 V

• Short circuit encoder supply

Yes; per group X0 to X3 or X4 to X7

Yes; per group X0 to X3 or X4 to X7

7 mA

7 mA


Yes

Yes

Cable length

Encoder Connectable encoders • 2-wire BEROS Status information/alarms/ diagnostics Diagnoses

Input voltage


5/304


ET 200 distributed I/Os ET 200R


■ Ordering data

6ES7 1432BH00-0AB0

6ES7 1432BH50-0AB0

• Description

Channel 01, Channel 02

Channel 01, Channel 02


Yes

Yes


Yes; 24 V DC (load voltage) US2

Yes; 24 V DC (load voltage) US2


Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes


Yes

Yes


• Monitoring 24 V voltage supply ON Yes; (green) (Logic circuits/ encoder voltage) US1

Yes; (Logic circuits/ encoder voltage) US1

6ES7 143-2BH00-0AB0

ET 200R welding module IP65 metal casing 8 DI + 8 DI/DO, configurable; 24 V DC, 5-pole, 8 x M12, 2 x M23 (DP, PS, analog)

6ES7 143-2BH50-0AB0

Accessories ELOCAB cables

Can be ordered at: ELOCAB Sonderkabel Obere Lerch 34 D-91166 Georgensmünd, Germany Tel.: ++49 (0) 91 72 69 80-0 Fax: ++49 (0) 91 72 20 29

Interconnectron M23 connector

Can be ordered at: Hypertac GmbH Auwiesenstr. 5, PO Box 14 65 D-94454 Deggendorf, Germany

S7 manual collection Electronic manuals on CD, multi-language: S7-200, TD 200, S7-300, M7-300, C7, S7-400, M7-400, STEP 7, Engineering Tools, Runtime Software, SIMATIC DP (Distributed I/O), SIMATIC HMI (Human Machine Interface), SIMATIC NET (Industrial Communication)

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0

S7 Manual Collection update service for 1 year Scope of supply: Up-to-date CD S7 Manual Collection as well as the three subsequent updates

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2

Environmental requirements Operating termperature • max.

55 °C

55 °C

Yes

Yes

CE symbol

Yes

Yes

CSA approval

Yes; ES 02 or higher

Yes

UL Approval

Yes; ES 02 or higher

Yes

Die-cast aluminum

Die-cast aluminum

Width

54 mm

54 mm

Height

55 mm; 64 mm incl. overall plug height

55 mm; 64 mm incl. overall plug height

Length

150 mm

150 mm

780 g

780 g

Degree and class of protection • IP 65 Standards, approvals, certificates

General information Housing

Order No.

ET 200R handling module IP65 metal casing 8 DI + 8 DI/DO, configurable; 24 V DC, 5-pole, 8 x M12, 2 x M23 (DP, PS, analog)

5




5/305


5

7 5/306


AS-Interface

6/2 6/2 6/3 6/4 6/5

Introduction Transmission technology Configuration examples Communications overview AS-Interface specification

6/7 6/7 6/8 6/9 6/11 6/12

ASIsafe Introduction AS-Interface safety monitors AS-Interface safety modules Position switches – General information Position switches – Molded-plastic enclosures, 31 mm and 50 mm Position switches – Metal enclosures, 40 mm and 56 mm Position switches with separate actuator – Molded-plastic enclosures, 31 mm and 52 mm Position switches with separate actuator – Metal enclosures, 40 mm Position switches with tumbler – Moldedplastic enclosures, 1200 N locking force Position switches with tumbler – Metal enclosures, 2000 N locking force 3SF2 AS-Interface cable-operated switches SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light arrays SIMATIC FS400 light curtains with integrated evaluation unit ASIsafe, Category 4 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains with external evaluation ASIsafe, Category 4 Accessories SIMATIC FS600 laser scanner AS-Interface LS4 laser scanner AS-Interface EMERGENCY STOP/OFF pushbuttons

6/13 6/14

6/15 6/16 6/17 6/18 6/19 6/24

6/28 6/34 6/43 6/46 6/50 6/51 6/51 6/51 6/53 6/55 6/57

AS-Interface Master Masters for SIMATIC S7 CP 142-2 CP 243-2 CP 343-2 CP 343-2 P ST 70 1) Master for SIMATIC C7 Sec.8 2) AS-Interface network transitions

IE/AS-i LINK PN IO DP/AS-i LINK Advanced DP/AS-Interface Link 20E 6/59 6/59 6/59 6/60 6/62 6/65 6/66 6/72 6/73

AS-Interface Slaves I/O modules for operation in the field Introduction IP67 – K60 digital I/O modules IP68 / IP69K – K60R digital I/O modules IP67 – K45 digital I/O modules IP67 – K20 digital I/O modules IP67 digital I/O modules – Application modules IP67 – K60 analog I/O modules

6/77

6/105 6/106 6/107 6/112 LV1 3)

IP20 I/O modules for operation in the control cabinet Introduction SlimLine Module F90 Flat module Special integrated solutions AS-Interface communication modules Modules with special functions Counter modules Ground fault detection modules Overvoltage protection module IP65/67 Motor Starters and Load Feeders Compact starters (400 V AC) Motor starters (24 V DC) 3RK1 3 ECOFAST motor starters and soft starters IP20 Motor Starters and Load Feeders AS-Interface load feeder module Direct-on-line starters for busbar systems Reversing starters for busbar systems SIRIUS soft starters Communications capable contactors 55 to 250 kW 3SF5 Pushbutton Unit and Indicator Lights AS-Interface F Adapters for EMERGENCY STOP/EMERGENCY OFF Control Devices AS-Interface Enclosures – General data AS-Interface Enclosures with Standard Fittings AS-Interface Components for Enclosures AS-Interface Customized Enclosures AS-Interface Front Panel Module AS-Interface connection for LOGO! AS-Interface signal columns

6/113 6/113

AS-Interface Power Supplies AS-Interface Power Supplies, IP20

6/115 6/115

Transmission media AS-Interface shaped cables

6/116 6/116 6/118 6/120 6/121 6/124

System Components and Accessories Repeaters/Extenders Extension Plug Addressing units Analyzer Miscellaneous Accessories

6/77 6/78 6/80 6/81 6/82 6/82 6/84 6/84 6/85 6/86 6/88 6/88 6/91 6/93 6/94 6/94 6/96 6/98 6/101 LV1 3) 6/102 6/102

6/103 6/104

1)

2) 3)

see Catalog ST 70 “Products for Totally Integrated Automation and Micro Automation” see Section 8 see Catalog LV 1 “Switchgear for Industrie”


AS-Interface

AS-Interface

Introduction

Transmission technology

■ Overview The AS-Interface is an open, international standard in accordance with EN 50295 and IEC 62026-2 for process and field communication. Leading manufacturers of actuators and sensors worldwide support AS-Interface. The electrical and mechanical specifications of the AS-Interface Association are made open to interested companies.

The AS-Interface is a single master system. For automation systems from Siemens, there are communications processors (CPs) and network transitions (Links) that function as masters to control process or field communication as well as sensors and actuators that are accessed as AS-Interface slaves.


PROFIBUS PA

PROFIBUS

KNX

AS-Interface

■ Benefits

G_IK10_XX_20002

6

Industrial Ethernet

■ Application Operating modes In general, the following operating modes are distinguished with the master interface modules:

An important characteristic of the AS-Interface technology is the use of a common two-core cable for data transmission and distribution of auxiliary power to the sensors and actuators. For distributing the auxiliary power, an AS-Interface power supply is used which satisfies the requirements of the AS-Interface transmission procedure. The AS-Interface cable is mechanically coded which prevents polarity reversal during wiring, and the insulation displacement methods allows easy contact. Complex control cable wiring in the control cabinet and terminal blocks can be replaced with AS-Interface. Thanks to a specially developed cable and insulation displacement technology, the AS-Interface cable can be connected anywhere. This concept results in enormous flexibility and significant cost savings.

6/2


I/O data exchange In this operating mode, the inputs and outputs of the binary AS-Interface slaves are read and written to. Analog value transmission AS-Interface master in accordance with AS-Interface specification V2.1 or V3.0 support integral analog value processing. This makes data exchange with analog AS-Interface slaves (in accordance with analog profile 7.3 or 7.4) as easy as with digital slaves. Command interface As well as I/O data exchange with binary and analog AS-Interface slaves, the AS-Interface masters provide a range of other functions using the command interface. Thus for example, slave addresses can be allocated, parameter values can be transferred or diagnostics information can be read out from user programs.

AS-Interface

Introduction


■ Design In practice, this means: Installation runs smoothly because data and power are transported together on one cable. No special expertise is required for installation and start-up. Furthermore, through simple cable laying and the clear cable structure as well as the special design of the cable, you not only significantly reduce the risk of errors but also the service and maintenance costs.

Process or field communication AS-Interface is used wherever individual actuators and sensors are distributed throughout the machine (e.g. in a bottling plant or production line, etc.). AS-Interface replaces complex cable trees and connects binary and analog actuators and sensors such as proximity switches, valves or LEDs to a programmable controller such as SIMATIC or a PC.

SIMATIC/ SIMOTION

* Only one master can be optionally connected to an AS-i segment

PROFINET Industrial Ethernet SIMATIC C7 AS-Interface power supply

AS-Interface-Master * DP/AS-Interface Link 20E SIMOTION C

S7-200

S7-300

AS-Interface distributor


S7-200

IE/AS-i LINK PN IO

6

SIMATIC C7 S7-200

AS-Interface

(without AS-Interface chip)

PROFIBUS DP AS-Interface Master * S7-300 with PROFINET-CPU

AS-Interface power supply unit

24 V DC power supply unit

LOGO! Repeater AS-Interface-distributor (without AS-Interface-Chip)

Control panel Digital/analog I/O module

Signal evaluation

Safety monitor

Safe slave with Emergency Stop

Max. AS-i cable length per segment: 100 m without Extension Plug 200 m with Extension Plug

Compact starter IP65 AS-i Extension Plug (for segment length up to 200 m)

G_IK10_XX_20027

Max. AS-i cable length per segment: 100 m without Extension Plug 200 m with Extension Plug

System configuration example


6/3

AS-Interface

Introduction


■ Overview


System components

Standard

EN 50295 / IEC 61158

Numerous system components are offered to implement the communication. The main components of a system installation are: • Master interfaces for central control units such as SIMATIC S5 and SIMATIC S7, ET 200® M/X distributed I/O, • The AS-Interface shaped cable, • Network components such as repeaters/extenders, • The power supply unit for supplying the slaves, modules for connecting standard sensors and actuators, • Actuators and sensors with an integrated slave ASIC, • Secure modules for transferring secure data over AS-Interface, • The address programmer for setting the slave address.

Topology

Line, star or tree topology (same as electrical installation)

Transmission medium

unshielded twisted pair (2 x 1.5 mm2) for data and auxiliary power

Cables and connections

Contacting of the AS-Interface cable using insulation displacement

Max. cable length

100 m without Repeater/Extender; 200 m with Extension Plug; 300 m with Repeater or Extender; 600 m with Repeater/Extender and Extension Plug (repeaters connected in parallel)

Max. cycle time

5 ms at maximum capacity, 10 ms if A/B method is used, profile-specific with spec 3.0 slaves;

Number of stations per AS-Interface segment

31 slaves acc. to AS-Interface spec. V2.0 ; 62 slaves (A/B method) in accordance with AS-Interface spec. V2.1 and V3.0 integrated analog value transmission

Number of binary sensors/actuators

max. 124 I/124 O acc. to spec. V2.0; max. 248 I /186 O acc. to spec. V2.1; max. 496 I /496 O acc. to spec. 3.0

Access methods

Cyclic polling master/slave procedure, cycle data reception by host (PLC, PC)

Error protection

Identification and resending of faulty messages

AS-Interface Master SIMATIC C7-621 ASi

Integral interface SIMATIC ET 200X

6

CP 142-2

SIMATIC S7-300

CP 343-2 CP 343-2 P SIMATIC C7


SIMOTION C

Please note the operating framework conditions in each case for the specified SIMATIC NET products (Order No. 6GK..., 6XV1...), which you will find on the Internet page listed below.

CP 343-2 P

Additional information can be found in the Internet under:

SIMATIC S7-200


CP 243-2

AS-Interface Links DP/AS-i LINK Advanced DP/AS-Interface Link 20E

IE/AS-i LINK PN IO

G_IK10_XX_20009

AS-Interface master and AS-Interface Links (see network transitions)

6/4


AS-Interface AS-Interface specification

■ Overview

Speed/Flexibility

• 4DI/4DO in A/B technology • 8DI/8DO in A/B technology • Additional analog profiles • Transmission of serial data • Safety monitor • Safe input slaves ASi Spec. V3.0

• • •

ASIsafe

31 Slaves

5 ms bus cycle time

ASi Spec. V2.1

NSA0_00453a

• •

62 Slaves (10 ms)

Analog profiles Diagnostics peripherals

ASi Spec. V2.0

2001

1998

1994

2005/2006

Technical development of AS-Interface

System limitations of AS-Interface specification AS-Interface specification

Maximum number of slaves



Digital

Analog

ASIsafe

Version 2.0

31

31

Version 2.1

62

31

31

31 × 4 = 124

31 × 4 = 124

31

62 × 4 = 248

Version 3.0

62

62

62 × 3 = 186

31

62 × 8 = 496

62 × 8 = 496

Expansions of AS-Interface Specification 2.1 • AS-Interface Specification 2.1 enables the number of network stations to be doubled from 31 to 62. Using the so-called expanded addressing system, the 31 addresses available in an AS-Interface network can be split into two. • If this option is used for each of the 31 slaves, the maximum number of stations in an AS-Interface network is then 62. The so-called A/B slaves can have a maximum of four inputs and three outputs. Expanded addressing is only possible for digital slaves, not for analog slaves and safety-oriented slaves (ASIsafe). • Another function of the AS-Interface Specification V2.1 is the integrated analog value transfer function. In this case "integrated" means that no special function blocks are required for accessing the analog values. It is just as easy to access the analog values as the digital values. The integrated analog value transfer function can be used with analog slaves which support the profiles 7.3 and 7.4.

Expansions of AS-Interface specification 3.0 • The AS-Interface Specification 3.0 enables connection of a maximum of 1000 digital inputs/outputs (profile S-7.A.A: 8DI/8DO as A/B slave). • New profiles have also enabled the option of expanded addressing for analog slaves. • Acceleration of analog value transfer through "fast analog profile". • Variable use of analog modules: Optional parameterization of resolution (12/14 bit) and 1 and 2-channel capability. • Asynchronous serial protocol 100 baud or 50 baud, bidrectional.


6/5

6

AS-Interface AS-Interface specification

■ Overview (continued) AS-Interface master To be able to operate A/B slaves on an AS-Interface network you must also use master modules that meet the minimum requirements of Specification 2.1. A/B technology is supported by the masters of the SIMATIC S7 and the DP/AS-Interface links from Siemens. Only standard slaves and A slaves (= A/B slave with an A address) can be operated on masters which do not support Specification 2.1.

The subaddress of A/B slaves is set to "A" in the as-delivered state. The new masters that comply with Specification 3.0 support all new slave profiles, but are also fully backwards compatible.

AS-Interface specification

Available masters

Version 2.1

S7-200 (CP 243-2), S7-300 (CP 343-2, 343-2P), DP/AS-i Link 20E

Version 3.0

DP/AS Link Advanced

The AS-Interface specification relevant for the respective slave can be found in the section Selection and Ordering data. The exact slave profile can be found in the section Technical Specifications. Communication cycle AS-Interface specification

Maximum cycle time

Slave profile

Version 2.0

5 ms

S-X.0, S-X.1, S-X.F

Version 2.1

5 ms with 31 slaves 10 ms with 62 slaves

S-X.A, S-7.3, S-7.4, S-7.F

Version 3.0

as for Version 2.1, and profile-specific 10 ms for inputs/outputs (e.g. 20 ms for 4DI/4DO and 40 ms for 8DI/8DO)

S-7.5.5; S-7.A.5, S-B.A.5; S-7.A.7, S-7.A.8; S-7.A.9, S-7.A.A, S-6.0

6

Standard slaves are queried in each cycle (max. cycle time: 5 ms). If only one A or B slave is installed at an address, this slave will be queried in each cycle (max. cycle time: 5 ms). If an A/B slave pair is installed at an address, the A slave will be queried in one cycle and the B slave in the next cycle (max. cycle time: 10 ms). If only standard and/or A slaves are installed in a network, the cycle time is identical to the standard masters (max. cycle time: 5 ms).

■ Benefits • Lower costs for masters and power supply units thanks to increased number of slaves or I/Os per AS-Interface string • Enhanced decentralization in installations with numerous, widely distributed signals • Further expansion of AS-Interface systems is possible

6/6


Whether an AS-Interface slave is a standard slave or an A/B slave is noted in the section Selection and Ordering data in the column Slave Type and can be deduced from the section Technical Specifications of the slave in question. All slave types can be combined within a single AS-Interface network.

AS-Interface

ASIsafe

Introduction

Power supply unit

Safety monitor

AS-i POWER

Standard PLC Standard-Master

NSA0_00005c

■ Overview

StandardSlave

Safe slave with EMERGENCY STOP Signal evaluation of slave/safety monitor

6

Master information (via standard I/O transfer)

Safety is included The ASIsafe concept supports the direct integration of safetyrelated components, such as Emergency Stop switches, protective door switches or safety light arrays, in the AS-Interface network. These are fully compatible with the familiar AS-Interface components (masters, slaves, power supplies, repeaters, etc.) in according to IEC 62026/EN 50295 and are operated in conjunction with them on the yellow AS-Interface cable. The signals of the fail-safe sensors are evaluated by a safety monitor which not only monitors the switching signals of the failsafe sensors but also continuously checks that the data transmission works correctly. The safety monitor has one or two enabling circuits which are configured with two channels and are used to switch the machine or plant to the safe state. Sensors and monitors can be connected to any points of the AS-Interface network. Also, several monitors can be used on one network. A failsafe controller or a special master is not required. The master regards safety slaves like all other slaves and receives the safety data solely for information purposes. Hence it is also possible to expand all existing AS-Interface networks. ASIsafe ensures a maximum response time of 40 ms. This is the time between the signal being applied to the input of the safe slave and the output on the safety monitor being switched off.

■ Benefits • No fail-safe PLC or special master is required. • Simple system structure thanks to standardized AS-Interface technique. • Safety-related and standard data on the same bus. • Existing systems can be expanded quickly and easily. • Optimal integration in TIA (Safety Diagnose) and Safety Integrated • Safe signals can be grouped. • Integration of safety signals into plant diagnostics, also on existing HMI panels. • Approval granted up to Category 4 acc. to EN 954-1, or SIL 3 acc. to IEC 61508. • ASIsafe has been certified by TÜV (German Technical Inspectorate) as well as by NRTL and INRS.

■ Application Integrated safety systems using AS-Interface can be used in applications for which EMERGENCY STOP pushbuttons, protective door locks, Stop category 0 and 1, two-handed operation and light arrays are currently installed.

Tested safety The system was tested and approved by TÜV (Germany), NRTL (USA) and INRS (France). The transmission method for safetyoriented signals is designed so that applications up to Category 4 according to EN 954-1 and SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 can be realized. Software The safety-oriented applications can be compiled and transferred into the monitor using the “asimon” configuration software. The software also enables online diagnostics.


6/7

AS-Interface

ASIsafe

AS-Interface safety monitors

■ Overview The monitor comes in two expansion levels: • Basic safety monitor with starter set of blocks and basic functionality • Expanded safety monitor with expanded features and functionality Both expansion levels are available with one or two enabling circuits with two-channel configuration. The safety monitor is used in an AS-Interface bus system to monitor protective devices, e.g. EMERGENCY STOP switches. It is classified in Safety Category 4 according to EN 954-1. According to IEC 61508 the safety monitor can be used in loops up to SIL3. The user must calculated the PFD value of the total loop.

The safety monitor is the centerpiece of ASIsafe. A safe application is configured using a PC and the safety monitor. Various application-specific operating modes can be selected for this. They include, for example, an EMERGENCY STOP function, tumbler and selection of stop Category 0 or Category 1.

6

To be able to make full use of the AS-Interface diagnostics options, the monitor can also be operated with an AS-Interface address if required. With the help of the diagnostics block for STEP 7, which is included on the ASIsafe CD, the full diagnostics spectrum can be processed further in the higher-level PLC.

ON period in months

Total operating time in years

PFD

3

10

≤ 4 × 10-5

6

10

≤ 6 × 10-5

9

10

≤ 9 × 10-5

Note: Depending on the choice of safety components used, the complete safety system may also be classified in a lower safety category.


Order No.

Basic safety monitor • One enabling circuit

3RK1 105-1AE04-0CA0

• Two enabling circuits

3RK1 105-1BE04-0CA0

Expanded safety monitor • One enabling circuit

3RK1105-1AE04-2CA0

• Two enabling circuits

3RK1105-1BE04-2CA0

ASIsafe CD • Configurations software asimon V2 • Diagnostics package for STEP7 (FB102)

3RK1 802-2FB06-0GA0

Cable set • PC configuration cable • Transfer cable

3RK1 901-5AA00

Sealable cover

3RP1 902

3RK1 105-1BE04-0CA0

3RK1 901-5AA00

6/8


AS-Interface

ASIsafe

AS-Interface safety modules

■ Overview Safety modules for AS-Interface (ASIsafe modules) are available for field use in degree of protection IP67 (K20F, K45F and K60F compact modules) and for the control cabinet (SlimLine Modul S22.5F) in degree of protection IP20: K45F compact safety modules for operation in the field The K45F compact safety module is equipped with two "safe" inputs. For applications up to Category 2 according to EN 954-1 the two inputs can be separately assigned. If Category 4 is required a two-channel input is available on the module. A new addition to the range is the K45F module, which has two standard outputs in addition to the two safe inputs. K60F compact safety modules for operation in the field The K60F compact safety module similarly has two standard outputs in addition to two safety inputs (see K45F for categories); power is supplied from either the yellow AS-Interface cable or as auxiliary voltage from the black 24 V DC cable. K20F compact safety modules for operation in the field Being only 20 mm wide, the K20F module is particularly well suited for applications where modules need to be arranged in the most confined space. The K20F modules are connected to the AS-Interface with a round cable with M12 cable box instead of with the AS-Interface flat cable. This enables extremely compact installation. The flexibility of the round cable means that it can also be used on moving machine parts without any problems. The K20 modules are also ideal for such applications as their non-encapsulated design makes them particularly light in weight. S22.5F SlimLine safety modules for operation in controlgear cabinets and local control boxes The S22.5F SlimLine safety module has two safety inputs. The safe linking of signals to ASIsafe networks in the cabinet is therefore also possible. For operation up to Category 2, both inputs can be assigned separately; if Category 4 is required, a two-channel input is available on the module. New in the range are two S22.5F module versions which have two standard outputs in addition to the two safety inputs; power is supplied either from only the yellow AS-Interface cable or as auxiliary voltage from the black 24 V DC cable.


6/9

6

AS-Interface

ASIsafe

AS-Interface safety modules


Order No.

K20F safe compact module I/O type

Uaux 24 V

2 F-DI

--

3RK1 205-0BQ30-0AA3

3RK1 205-0BQ30-0AA3 K45F safe compact module 1) I/O type

Uaux 24 V

2 F-DI

--

3RK1 205-0BQ00-0AA3

2 F-DI / 2 DO new

3RK1 405-1BQ20-0AA3

3RK1 205-0BQ00-0AA3 K45 mounting plate

6

• For wall mounting

3RK1 901-2EA00

• For standard rail mounting

3RK1 901-2DA00

3RK1 901-2EA00 K60F safe compact module 1) I/O type

Uaux 24 V

2 F-DI / 2 DO

--

3RK1 405-0BQ00-0AA3

3RK1 405-1BQ00-0AA3

3RK1 405-1BQ00-0AA3 S22.5F safe slimline module

3RK1 205-0BE00-0AA2

Connection

I/O type

Uaux 24 V

Screw

2 F-DI

--

3RK1 205-0BE00-0AA2

2 F-DI / 2 DO new

--

3RK1 405-0BE00-0AA2

2 F-DI / 2 DO new

3RK1 405-1BE00-0AA2

2 F-DI

--

3RK1 205-0BG00-0AA2

2 F-DI / 2 DO new

--

3RK1 405-0BG00-0AA2

2 F-DI / 2 DO new

3RK1 405-1BG00-0AA2

Spring-loaded connection

K60 mounting plate • Wall mounting

3RK1 901-0CA00

• Standard rail mounting

3RK1 901-0CB01

3RK1 901-0CA00 Input bridge for K45/K60F

3RK1 901-1AA00

• Black version

3RK1 901-1AA00

• Red version

3RK1 901-1AA01

AS-Interface covering caps M12, tamper-proof for free M12 sockets

3RK1 901-1KA01

3RK1 901-1KA01 1) Modules are supplied without mounting plate.

6/10


AS-Interface

ASIsafe

Position switches – General information

■ Overview It is also possible now to directly connect position switches via the standard AS-Interface with safety-oriented communication. In this case, the safety functions no longer have to be conventionally wired up. Position switches convert the mechanical positions of moving machine components into electrical signals. Position switches with AS-Interface F-adapter

■ Application Position switch with separate actuator Position switches with separate actuator are used where the position of doors, covers or safety screens must be monitored for safety reasons. The position switch can only be operated with the matching coded actuator. Simple overruling by hand or auxiliary devices is impossible. Position switches with tumbler The position switches with tumbler are exceptional safetyrelated devices which prevent an unforeseen or intentional opening of protective doors, protective grilles or other covers as long as a dangerous situation is present, i.e. follow-on motion of the switched off machine. The safety switch with tumbler basically has two main functions: • Enabling the machine with closed and locked protective system • Locking the machine with opened protective system. The position switch can only be operated with the matching coded actuator. Simple overruling by hand or auxiliary devices is impossible.

6

Position switch from left to right: Standard / Standard, with M12 connector / with tumbler

On the 3SF3 version the F-Adapter is used for connection to the yellow AS-Interface shaped bus cable (without external supply of auxiliary power). Individual enclosure variants are available with an additional M12 connector socket. They are suitable for use up to Category 4 according to EN 954-1.


6/11

AS-Interface

ASIsafe

Position switches – Molded-plastic enclosures, 31 mm and 50 mm

■ Selection and Ordering data Moving double-break contacts · Degree of protection IP65 · EN 50047 · Special width 50 mm Version1)

Actuator design Enclosure width acc. to EN 50047

Order No.

Basic switch2)

Rounded plunger

B

31 mm

3SF3 200-6CV00-0BA1

3SE2 200-6C

Roller plunger

C

31 mm

3SF3 200-6DV00-0BA1

3SE2 200-6D

With AS-Interface F-adapters Slow-action contacts, 2 NC

Roller lever

E

31 mm

3SF3 200-6EV00-0BA1

3SE2 200-6E

Angular roller lever

–

31 mm

3SF3 200-6FV00-0BA1

3SE2 200-6F

Twist lever, finely adjustable from 10° to 10°

A

31 mm

3SF3 200-6GV00-0BA1

3SE2 200-6G

B

31 mm

3SF3 200-8CV00-0BA1

3SE2 200-8CV00

Snap-action contact, 1 NC Rounded plunger Roller plunger

C

31 mm

3SF3 200-8DV00-0BA1

3SE2 200-8DV00

Roller lever

E

31 mm

3SF3 200-8EV00-0BA1

3SE2 200-8EV00


–

31 mm

3SF3 200-8FV00-0BA1

3SE2 200-8FV00


A

31 mm

3SF3 200-8GV00-0BA1

3SE2 200-8GV00

With AS-Interface F-adapters and additional M12 plug 3) Slow-action contact, 1 NC

6

Rounded plunger

B

50 mm

3SF3 210-0CV00-0BA2

3SE2 210-0C

Roller plunger

C

50 mm

3SF3 210-0DV00-0BA2

3SE2 210-0D

Roller lever

E

50 mm

3SF3 210-0EV00-0BA2

3SE2 210-0E


–

50 mm

3SF3 210-0FV00-0BA2

3SE2 210-0F


A

50 mm

3SF3 210-0GV00-0BA2

3SE2 210-0G

Rounded plunger

B

50 mm

3SF3 210-1CV00-0BA2

3SE2 210-1C

Roller plunger

C

50 mm

3SF3 210-1DV00-0BA2

3SE2 210-1D

Roller lever

E

50 mm

3SF3 210-1EV00-0BA2

3SE2 210-1E


–

50 mm

3SF3 210-1FV00-0BA2

3SE2 210-1F


A

50 mm

3SF3 210-1GV00-0BA2

3SE2 210-1G

Snap-action contact, 1 NC

Positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) The actuator heads can be subsequently replaced with other versions (see Catalog LV1, Chapter 8). 2) For technical Information, circuit diagrams, contact travels and dimension drawings see Catalog LV1, Chapter 8. 3) M12 plug for connection of another position switch, usable up to category 4 according to EN 954-1. For matching cable boxes, see Catalog LV1, Chapter 8.

6/12


AS-Interface

ASIsafe

Position switches – Metal enclosures, 40 mm and 56 mm


Actuator design Enclosure width acc. to EN 50047

Order No.

Basic switch 2)

Rounded plunger

B

40 mm

3SF3 120-6CV00-0BA1

3SE2 120-6C

Roller plunger

C

40 mm

3SF3 120-6DV00-0BA1

3SE2 120-6D


Roller lever

–

40 mm

3SF3 120-6EV00-0BA1

3SE2 120-6E


–

40 mm

3SF3 120-6FV00-0BA1

3SE2 120-6F


A

40 mm

3SF3 120-6GW00-0BA1

3SE2 120-6GW

B

40 mm

3SF3 120-8CV00-0BA1

3SE2 120-8CV00

Snap-action contact, 1 NC Rounded plunger Roller plunger

C

40 mm

3SF3 120-8DV00-0BA1

3SE2 120-8DV00

Roller lever

–

40 mm

3SF3 120-8EV00-0BA1

3SE2 120-8EV00


–

40 mm

3SF3 120-8FV00-0BA1

3SE2 120-8FV00


A

40 mm

3SF3 120-8GW00-0BA1

3SE2 120-8GW00

With AS-Interface F-adapters and additional M12 plug3) Slow-action contact, 1 NC Rounded plunger

B

56 mm

3SF3 100-0CV00-0BA2

3SE2 120-0C

Roller plunger

C

56 mm

3SF3 100-0DV00-0BA2

3SE2 120-0D

Roller lever

–

56 mm

3SF3 100-0EV00-0BA2

3SE2 120-0E


–

56 mm

3SF3 100-0FV00-0BA2

3SE2 120-0F


A

56 mm

3SF3 100-0GW00-0BA2

3SE2 120-0GW

Rounded plunger

B

56 mm

3SF3 100-1CV00-0BA2

3SE2 120-1C

Roller plunger

C

56 mm

3SF3 100-1DV00-0BA2

3SE2 120-1D

Roller lever

–

56 mm

3SF3 100-1EV00-0BA2

3SE2 120-1E


–

56 mm

3SF3 100-1FV00-0BA2

3SE2 120-1F


A

56 mm

3SF3 100-1GW00-0BA2

3SE2 120-1GW

Snap-action contact, 1 NC

Positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) The actuator heads can be subsequently replaced with other versions (see Catalog LV1, Chapter 8). 2) For technical Information, circuit diagrams, contact travels and dimension drawings see Catalog LV1, Chapter 8. 3) M12 plug for connection of another position switch, usable up to category 4 according to EN 954-1. For matching cable boxes, see Catalog LV1, Chapter 8.


6/13

6

AS-Interface

ASIsafe

Position switches with separate actuator – Molded-plastic enclosures, 31 mm and 52 mm


Enclosure width

Order No.

Basic switch2)

• Lateral actuation

31 mm

3SF3 200-6XX03-0BA1

3SE2 200-6XX03

• Front-end actuation

31 mm

3SF3 200-6XX04-0BA1

3SE2 200-6XX04

• Lateral and front-end actuation

52 mm

- Extraction force 5 N

3SF3 243-0XX40-0BA1

3SE2 243-0XX40


3SF3 243-0XX00-0BA1

3SE2 243-0XX

- With automatic ejection

3SF3 243-0XX30-0BA1

3SE2 243-0XX30


3SF3 257-6XX40-0BA2

3SE2 257-6XX40


3SF3 257-6XX00-0BA2

3SE2 257-6XX

- With automatic ejection

3SF3 257-6XX30-0BA2

3SE2 257-6XX30


With AS-Interface F-adapters and additional M12 plug 3) Slow-action contact, 1 NC • Lateral and front-end actuation

6

52 mm

Accessories Actuators for 3SF3 200

• Standard, length 50 mm

3SX3 196

• Standard, length 70 mm

3SX3 195

Actuators for 3SF3 243 and 3SF3 257

• Standard actuator (rmin = 150 mm), length 28 mm

3SX3 218

• Universal radius actuator (rmin = 45 mm), length 33 mm

3SX3 228

• Radius actuator, length 82 mm

3SX3 256

• Ball locating (up to max. 100 N), length 28 mm

3SX3 217

• Actuator, length 34 mm, with dust protection and slit cover

3SX3 234

Accessories for 3SF3 243 and 3SF3 257

• Slit cover (1 set = 3 units)

3SX3 233

Positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) Supplied without actuator 2) For technical Information, circuit diagrams, contact travels and dimension drawings see Catalog LV1, Chapter 8. 3) M12 plug for connection of another position switch, usable up to category 4 according to EN 954-1. For matching cable boxes, see Catalog LV1, Chapter 8.

6/14


AS-Interface

ASIsafe

Position switches with separate actuator – Metal enclosures, 40 mm

■ Selection and Ordering data Moving double-break contacts · Degree of protection IP65 · EN 50041 Version1)

Enclosure width

Order No.

Basic switch2)

40 mm

3SF3 120-6XX00-0BA1

3SE2 120-6XX

With AS-Interface F-adapters Slow-action contacts, 2 NC • Lateral actuation

Accessories Actuator for 3SF3 120 • Standard, length 79 mm

3SX3 197

• Standard actuator for approach from the left, length 132 mm

3SX3 207

• With transverse fixing, length 50 mm

3SX3 206

• With vertical fixing, length 50 mm

3SX3 306

• Universal radius actuator, length 80 mm

3SX3 203

6

Positive opening according to IEC 60947-5-1, Appendix K. 1) Supplied without actuator 2) For technical Information, circuit diagrams, contact travels and dimension drawings see Catalog LV1, Chapter 8.


6/15

AS-Interface

ASIsafe

Position switches with tumbler – Molded-plastic enclosures, 1200 N locking force

■ Selection and Ordering data Moving double-break contacts · 5 directions of approach · Degree of protection IP65 Magnet: Rated operating voltage DC 24 V Version1)

Enclosure width

Order No.

Basic switch2)

- 1200 N locking force, spring-actuated lock

56 mm

3SF3 760-6XX00-0BA1

3SE3 760-6XX00

- 1200 N locking force, magnet field lock

56 mm

3SF3 750-6XX00-0BA1

3SE3 750-6XX00

With AS-Interface F-adapters Slow-action contacts, 2 NC • 5 directions of approach

Accessories Actuator for 3SF3 750 and 3SF3 760

6

• Standard actuator, length 44 mm

3SX3 252


3SX3 253


3SX3 254


6/16


AS-Interface

ASIsafe

Position switches with tumbler – Metal enclosures, 2000 N locking force

■ Selection and Ordering data Moving double-break contacts · 5 or 4 directions of approach · Degree of protection IP65 Magnet: Rated operating voltage DC 24 V Version1)

Enclosure width

Order No.

Basic switch2)


56 mm

3SF3 860-6XX00-0BA1

3SE3 860-6XX00

- 1200 N locking force, magnetic field lock

56 mm

3SF3 850-6XX00-0BA1

3SE3 850-6XX00


90 mm

3SF3 840-6XX00-0BA1

3SE2 840-6XX00

- 2000 N locking force, magnetic field lock

90 mm

3SF3 830-6XX00-0BA1

3SE2 830-6XX00

With AS-Interface F-adapters Slow-action contacts, 2 NC • 5 directions of approach

• 4 directions of approach

Accessories

6



3SX3 252


3SX3 253


3SX3 254



3SX3 197

- For approach from the left, length 132 mm

3SX3 207

- With transverse fixing, length 50 mm

3SX3 206

- With vertical fixing, length 50 mm

3SX3 306

• Universal radius actuator, length 80 mm

3SX3 203



6/17

AS-Interface

ASIsafe

3SF2 AS-Interface cable-operated switches

■ Overview

■ Application SIRIUS cable-operated switches are used for monitoring or for EMERGENCY STOP facilities on particularly endangered system sections. As the effective range of a cable-operated switch is only limited by the length of the pull-wire, large systems can also be protected. Standards Switches with latching for implementation in EMERGENCY STOP equipment correspond to the ISO 13850 or EN 418 standard.

It is also possible to connect AS-Interface cable-operated switches via the standard AS-Interface with safety-oriented communication. In this case, the safety functions no longer have to be conventionally wired up.

6

■ Selection and Ordering data Order No.

Basic switch 1)

• For cable lengths up to 10 m, with adjustment window

3SF2 120-1BF00-0BA1

3SE7 120-1BF00

• For cable lengths up to 25 m, with adjustment window

3SF2 150-1BF00-0BA1

3SE7 150-1BF00

• For cable lengths up to 50 m

3SF2 140-1BF00-0BA1

3SE7 140-1BF00

Version General information All products of the Section AS-Interface cable-operated switches allow positive opening according to IEC 60 947-5-1, Appendix K AS-Interface cable-operated switches with direct AS-Interface connection to Safety at Work Metal housing with dust protection Can be used up to Category 4 acc. to EN 954-1 IP65 Latching acc. to EN 418 Pushbutton unlatching 2 NC contacts

1) Accessories, technical specifications, contact travel, switching diagrams and dimension drawings can be found for the basic switch in the Catalog LV 1T

6/18


AS-Interface

ASIsafe

SIMATIC FS400 light curtains and light arrays

■ Overview

■ Benefits Integrated functions: 7 Start-up/restart inhibit 7 Contactor control 7 "Blanking" function package with - fixed blanking - floating blanking - reduced resolution 7 "Muting" function package 7 Multi-scan function 7 Cycle control (optional)

Light curtains and light arrays 3RG78 4 and 3SF78 4 (for AS-Interface) 7 are active optoelectronic protective devices (AOPD), 7 are in accordance with Type 2 or 4 of EN 61496-1, -2, 7 are EU prototype tested, 7 protect the operating personnel at or near dangerous machines, 7 operate contact-free, 7 are free of wear in comparison to mechanical systems (e.g. safety mats). For further details, please refer to the "Safety Integrated" manual and the operating instructions for the respective devices.

Configuration: 7 Via teach-in key and opto-magnetic key 7 Transmission of the configuration data via a plug-in configuration card 7 2 transmission channels 7 Cascading of host and guest devices 7 Expanded display (2 × 7 segments) Outputs/connections: 7 Local interface 7 Hirschmann connection (optional) 7 Brad Harrison connection 7 Transistor outputs 7 Relay outputs 7 Connection to AS-Interface

6

■ Application

Tests/service

Light curtains for finger and hand protection in danger zones

The devices are EU prototype tested (German Technical Inspectorate (TÜV) Product Service in cooperation with the German Statutory Industrial Accident Insurance Institution (BIA)).

Protection against touching danger zones where light curtains are mounted close to dangerous machine parts (finger and hand protection).

Where necessary tests can be performed before initial start-up as well as during the annual inspection (e.g. as per regulatory requirements for presses). Please contact your Siemens representative.

Device selection Light curtains for Category 2 or 4, with 14 and 30 mm resolution Applications e.g. presses, punches, filter presses, cutting machines


6/19

AS-Interface

ASIsafe


■ Application Light curtains for horizontal danger zone protection at floor level

Light arrays for access protection Reliable detection of persons entering danger zones

Reliable detection of persons in danger zones when the light curtain is mounted close to the floor (crawling underneath is not possible)

Device selection 2, 3, or 4-beam light array for Category 4 with 18 m range

6

Device selection

Applications

Light curtains for Category 2 or 4, with 50 mm or 55 mm resolution

Access protection (e.g. on robots or handling machines)

Applications e.g. welding and assembly lines/robots in the automotive industry

Light arrays for access protection of large areas Reliable detection of persons entering danger zones

Light curtains for horizontal danger zone protection Reliable detection of persons in danger zones when the light curtain is mounted at a height of between 0.6 to 1 m

Protecting large danger zones with a 60 / 70 m range Device selection 2, 3, or 4-beam light array for Category 4 with a 60 to 70 m range. Applications Device selection Light curtains for Category 2 or 4, with 80 or 90 mm resolution

Access protection (e.g. on automatic machining centers or palletizing machines).

Applications

Safety categories

e.g. welding and assembly lines/robots in the automotive industry

Depending on the safety category to EN 954-1 required in accordance with the C standard or on the basis of a risk analysis carried out for the machine or plant, Type 2 (up to Category 2) or Type 4 (up to Category 4) light curtains or arrays can be used.

6/20


AS-Interface

ASIsafe


■ Design A light curtain or light array comprises an emitter and a receiver, which must be mounted opposite each other. Depending on the resolution and the length, a certain number of transmit and receive diodes are arranged on top of each other. The infrared LEDs of the emitter emit short light pulses that are detected by the receive diodes. • 3RG78 42 and 3SF78 42 light curtains and arrays for Category 4 to EN 954-1 - resolution 14, 30, 50 and 90 mm - protective field heights from 150 mm to 3000 mm - 2, 3, or 4-beam light arrays - cascading of host and guest devices for greater protective field heights or lengths or for an angular arrangement (as an option). • 3RG78 44 and 3SF78 44 light curtains and arrays with integrated processing unit for Category 4 to EN 954-1 - resolution 14, 30, 50 and 90 mm - protective field height: 150 mm to 3000 mm - 2-beam, 3-beam or 4-beam light arrays - transceiver, 2-beam with reflecting mirror - cascading of host and guest devices for greater protective field heights or lengths or for an angular arrangement (as an option). • 3RG78 41 light curtains for Category 2 to EN 954-1 - resolution: 30, 55, and 80 mm - protective field height: 150 mm to 1800 mm - cascading of host and guest devices for greater protective field heights or lengths or for an angular arrangement (as an option). • 3RG78 43 light curtains for Category 2 according to EN 9541, developed to EN 61508 (SIL 2), suitable for risk assessment according to pr EN ISO 13489 - resolution 20, 30, 40 and 90 mm. - protective field heights from 150 mm to 1800 mm • 3RG78 46 light curtains with integrated evaluation for Category 4 to EN 954-1 - resolution 20, 30, 40 and 90 mm. - protective field heights from 150 mm to 1800 mm Standards 7 EN 61496-1, -2, IEC 61496-1, -2 (requirements for non-contact protection systems) 7 EN 999 (including calculation of safety clearances) 7 EN 954-1 (machine safety, safety-related parts of control systems)

■ Function Blanking function package The light curtains can also be supplied with an optional blanking function. Fixed blanking If an object is permanently located in the light path, the corresponding zone can be suppressed. This is achieved by suppressing the required number of beams. The suppressed objects must be permanently located in the protective zone, otherwise safety cannot be guaranteed. The light curtain switches the equipment off. Configuration is carried out using a teach-in function by means of the safety key or using the programming and diagnostics software SafetyLab. NSC0_00632

6 Active beams Permanently suppressed beams

Floating blanking If moving objects are located in the light path, any number of beams can be suppressed. The objects can move within the suppressed beams without the light curtain switching off. If the moving objects are removed from the zone, the light curtain will interrupt the hazardous movement, otherwise safety can no longer be guaranteed. Configuration is carried out using a teach-in function by means of the safety key or using the programming and diagnostics software SafetyLab. NSC0_00633

Active beams Permanently suppressed beams Temporarily suppressed beams


6/21

AS-Interface

ASIsafe


■ Function (continued) Reduced resolution

4-sensor sequential muting

If an object is located in the light path, two or three beams can be suppressed. The difference between reduced resolution and floating blanking is that continuous monitoring does not take place.

If the material that is to be transported in the danger zone always has the same dimensions and there is no lack of space, the use of sequential muting is preferred. With sequential muting, four muting sensors are connected. These must be activated in a predefined sequence to trigger muting. They can be activated in either of the following sequences: M1, M2, M3, M4 or M4, M3, M2, M1. The transported goods must be of sufficient length to briefly activate all 4 sensors simultaneously. Sequential muting is successfully completed when the third muting sensor to be activated is not activated any longer. The SafetyLab software can be used to select a muting variant in which the second muting sequence is triggered before the first has finished (sequential muting with two objects). This variant saves time and, in turn, production costs for the user.

A DIP switch is used for configuration or the programming and diagnostics software SafetyLab. NSC0_00634b

Start M1 Active beams

M2

E

E

S

S

M3 E

M4 E

E

S

S

Danger Zone

Area with reduced resolution

6

"Muting" function package When arranged vertically, light curtains, light arrays, and transceivers are often used for protecting access points. With additional sensor signals, the protective function can be suppressed to allow materials to be transported in or out of hazardous areas, for example. The protective field is temporarily suppressed and, once the goods have passed through, reactivated. Personnel must not be allowed to enter the hazardous area while muting is active. Using the number of connected sensors or the sequence of the muting signals, the devices automatically recognize the "sequential muting" mode when inputs M1 to M4 are assigned and "2-sensor parallel muting" when the signals M2 and M3 are assigned. A DIP switch can be used to set "4-sensor parallel muting". Muting restart If the power fails while goods are passing the muting sensors, for example, the valid muting sequence is interrupted. When the power supply has been restored, muting is not automatically resumed because the muting sequence is not as expected. To remove the goods from the area covered by the muting sensors, an integrated retraction mode can be activated using the start key. The light curtain attempts to find a valid muting sequence from the muting sensors. If successful, the muting indicator lamp stops flashing and is lit continuously. If unsuccessful, the start key must be kept depressed until the muting path is completely free.

S

2-sensor parallel muting Parallel muting is ideal in plants in which the dimensions of the goods are not constant or space requirements must be kept to a minimum. Two muting sensors can be used, whose beams intersect behind the protective field in the danger zone. Parallel muting is used when signals M2 and M3 are switched simultaneously without M1 and M4 having been activated or connected beforehand or simultaneously. Two-sensor parallel muting is straightforward because only two muting sensors are required. Goods can also be moved forwards and backwards within the muting area.

Start M2 E

Danger Zone

S M3

6/22


AS-Interface

ASIsafe


■ Function (continued) 3-sensor direction muting

PC software

Three-sensor direction muting is configured in a similar way to 2-sensor parallel muting. Material can only be transported through the light curtain in one direction. To trigger the muting function, muting sensor M1 must first be activated, followed by muting sensors M2 and M3. If the paths for muting sensors M2 and M3 are interrupted, sensor M1 does not need to be activated.

PC software can be used to visualize and record the function of the light curtains.

Start

M1

SafetyLab is the diagnostic and parameterization software for 3RG78 44 / 3SF78 44 light curtains, light arrays and transceivers. SafetyLab can be used for all available function packages of the light curtains and light arrays from firmware Version 3.10: • Blanking function package • Muting function package • Sequence control system function package The firmware version of the receiver is indicated on the 7-segment display during start-up.

M2 E

E

Mounting sets

Danger zone

To facilitate installation, alignment, commissioning, and troubleshooting, a practical accessories package containing mounting columns, reflecting mirror columns, reflecting mirrors, mounting supports, and laser alignment tools is available.

S

S

M3

6

Parallel muting with 4 sensors 4-sensor parallel muting can be used advantageously wherever • the transported material is too small to be acquired simultaneously by 4 sensors arranged sequentially, • the available space is too small even for the crossover light beams of 2-sensor parallel muting. The function of 4-sensor parallel muting corresponds to that of 2-sensor parallel muting with the additional characteristic of the muting activation signal being obtained from two sensor pairs. Muting is triggered when within a 2.5 s interval, M2 is activated with M3 or M1 is activated with M4.

Start

M2

M1 E

Danger zone

S M3

M4


6/23

AS-Interface

ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains with integrated evaluation unit ASIsafe, Category 4

■ Overview

6


3RG78 44 and 3SF78 44 light curtains and arrays (for AS-Interface) with integrated evaluation unit for Category 4 to EN 954-1 • Resolution: 14, 30, and 50 mm • Protective field height: 150 mm to 3000 mm • 2-beam, 3-beam or 4-beam light arrays • Cascading of host and guest devices for greater protective field heights or lengths or for an angular arrangement (as an option). Two 3RG78 48-0AB standard mounting brackets each are enclosed with all devices (can also be ordered as accessories).

Type

3SF78 44

Safety category to EN, IEC 61496-1, -2

Type 4

Protective field height • 14 mm and 30 mm resolution • for 50 mm resolution

150 ... 1800 mm 450 ... 3000 mm

Protective field width, range • for 14 mm resolution • for 30 and 50 mm resolution

0 ... 6 m 0 ... 18 m

Detection capability (resolution)

14 mm, 30 mm, 50 mm

Supply voltage (emitter and receiver)

24 V DC ± 20% (external power pack with safe isolation and compensation of 20 ms voltage dip is necessary)

Residual ripple

<5%

Current consumption • Emitter • Receiver

75 mA 160 mA (without external load)

General value for external fuse in the emitter and receiver supply leads

4A

Wave length

880 nm (infrared)

Synchronization

Optically between emitter and receiver

Ambient temperature • Operation • Storage

0 ... +50 °C –25 ... +70 °C

Relative humidity

15 ... 95 %


IP65

Safety class to DIN VDE 0106

III

Vibration resistance

5 g, 10 to 55 Hz acc. to IEC/EN 60068-2-6

Shock resistance

10 g, 16 ms to IEC/EN 60068-2-29

Signal inputs and outputs (local socket, optional) Signal inputs • Restart inhibit unlocking - min. switching time - max. switching time • Teach-in - simultaneity Voltage output (for command devices or safety sensors only)

6/24


1 button with 1 NO contact (floating) 300 ms 4s 2-pole key-operated switch (selector switch), floating < 500 ms 24 V DC ± 20 %, max 0.5 A

AS-Interface


■ Technical specifications (continued) Receiver/transceiver machine interface, ASIsafe OSSDs safety switching outputs

4 bit AS-i data Minimum

Typical

Maximum

Permissible cable length

-

-

100 m

Restart time after beam interruption

-

140 ms

-

Slave address area

1

-

31

Slave address area (WE)

0 (ex works)

ID code / IO code transmitter

-

ID code receiver

B

IO code receiver

0

AS-i profile

Secure slave

Cycle time in accordance with AS-I specification

5 ms

OSSD response time

See table above

Additional response time of the AS-i system

40 ms

■ Selection and Ordering data Light curtains (Category 4) with internal processing unit, 14 mm and 30 mm resolution Blanking function package, ASIsafe Light curtain height [mm]

Type

Order No. Standard device 14 mm resolution

Order No. Standard device 30 mm resolution

300

Receiver

3SF7844-6BB04-0SS1

3SF7844-6BD04-0SS1

300

Emitter

3SF7844-6SB04-0SS0

3SF7844-6SD04-0SS0

450

Receiver

3SF7844-6BB06-0SS1

3SF7844-6BD06-0SS1

450

Emitter

3SF7844-6SB06-0SS0

3SF7844-6SD06-0SS0

600

Receiver

3SF7844-6BB08-0SS1

3SF7844-6BD08-0SS1

600

Emitter

3SF7844-6SB08-0SS0

3SF7844-6SD08-0SS0

750

Receiver

3SF7844-6BB11-0SS1

3SF7844-6BD11-0SS1

750

Emitter

3SF7844-6SB11-0SS0

3SF7844-6SD11-0SS0

900

Receiver

3SF7844-6BB13-0SS1

3SF7844-6BD13-0SS1

900

Emitter

3SF7844-6SB13-0SS0

3SF7844-6SD13-0SS0

1050

Receiver

3SF7844-6BB15-0SS1

3SF7844-6BD15-0SS1

1050

Emitter

3SF7844-6SB15-0SS0

3SF7844-6SD15-0SS0

1200

Receiver

3SF7844-6BB17-0SS1

3SF7844-6BD17-0SS1

1200

Emitter

3SF7844-6SB17-0SS0

3SF7844-6SD17-0SS0

1350

Receiver

On request

3SF7844-6BD20-0SS1

1350

Emitter

On request

3SF7844-6SD20-0SS0

1500

Receiver

On request

3SF7844-6BD22-0SS1

1500

Emitter

On request

3SF7844-6SD22-0SS0

1650

Receiver

On request

3SF7844-6BD24-0SS1

1650

Emitter

On request

3SF7844-6SD24-0SS0

1800

Receiver

On request

3SF7844-6BD26-0SS1

1800

Emitter

On request

3SF7844-6SD26-0SS0


6

6/25

AS-Interface


■ Selection and Ordering data (continued) Light curtains (Category 4) with internal processing unit and 30 mm resolution Muting function package, ASIsafe

6

Light curtain height [mm]

Type

Order No. Standard device

Order No. Host device

Order No. Guest device

300

Receiver

3SF7844-6MD04-0SS1

On request

3RG7842-6DD21

300

Emitter

3SF7844-6SD04-0SS0

On request

3RG7842-6DD20

450

Receiver

3SF7844-6MD06-0SS1

On request

3RG7842-6DE21

450

Emitter

3SF7844-6SD06-0SS0

On request

3RG7842-6DE20

600

Receiver

3SF7844-6MD08-0SS1

On request

3RG7842-6DF21

600

Emitter

3SF7844-6SD08-0SS0

On request

3RG7842-6DF20

750

Receiver

3SF7844-6MD11-0SS1

On request

3RG7842-6DG21

750

Emitter

3SF7844-6SD11-0SS0

On request

3RG7842-6DG20

900

Receiver

3SF7844-6MD13-0SS1

On request

3RG7842-6DH21

900

Emitter

3SF7844-6SD13-0SS0

On request

3RG7842-6DH20

1050

Receiver

3SF7844-6MD15-0SS1

On request

3RG7842-6DJ21

1050

Emitter

3SF7844-6SD15-0SS0

On request

3RG7842-6DJ20

1200

Receiver

3SF7844-6MD17-0SS1

On request

3RG7842-6DK21

1200

Emitter

3SF7844-6SD17-0SS0

On request

3RG7842-6DK20

1350

Receiver

3SF7844-6MD20-0SS1

On request

3RG7842-6DL21

1350

Emitter

3SF7844-6SD20-0SS0

On request

3RG7842-6DL20

1500

Receiver

3SF7844-6MD22-0SS1

On request

3RG7842-6DM21

1500

Emitter

3SF7844-6SD22-0SS0

On request

3RG7842-6DM20

1650

Receiver

3SF7844-6MD24-0SS1

On request

3RG7842-6DN21

1650

Emitter

3SF7844-6SD24-0SS0

On request

3RG7842-6DN20

1800

Receiver

3SF7844-6MD26-0SS1

On request

3RG7842-6DP21

1800

Emitter

3SF7844-6SD26-0SS0

On request

3RG7842-6DP20

Light curtains (Category 4) with internal processing unit and 18 m range Muting function package, ASIsafe No. of beams

Beam distance [mm]

Type


4 beam

300

Receiver

3SF7844-6MM50-0SS1

4 beam

300

Emitter

3SF7844-6SM50-0SS0

3 beam

400

Receiver

3SF7844-6MP50-0SS1

3 beam

400

Emitter

3SF7844-6SP50-0SS0

2 beam

500

Receiver

3SF7844-6MS50-0SS1

2 beam

500

Emitter

3SF7844-6SS50-0SS0

Transceiver (Category 4) with internal processing unit and 6 m resolution Muting function package, ASIsafe No. of beams

Beam distance [mm]

Type


2 beam

500

Transceiver

3SF7844-6MS50-0ST0

Reflective mirror for transceiver

6/26


3RG7848-0TL

AS-Interface


■ Dimension drawings Standard 3RG78 44 and 3SF78 44 light curtains and arrays, with integrated evaluation unit

3SF78 44 light arrays with integrated evaluation unit, additional dimensions

1

3RG78 48-0TL reflective mirror (left) and muting transceiver (right)

1

5 2

4 0

B Total length = protective field height A + 134 mm

Additional dimensions (for light arrays only) Type

B

C

Beams

3SF78 44-..M

1,184

300

4

3SF78 44-..P 3SF78 44-..S

1,034 734

400 500

3 2

7 3 4 1 4 0

(receiver only, for local interface)) A Protective field height (see order data)

5 5 1 0 7

$ Screw cap Pg 9

5 2

3 3

2 2 5 5

N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 4 8

2 2 5 2

N S C 0 _ 0 0 6 4 7

6 8 4 5 0 0

A

C

B

B

4 0

1 4 0 ,1

7 2

7 2

5 2

6


6/27

AS-Interface

ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains with external evaluation ASIsafe, Category 4

■ Overview

■ Design 3SF7842 Emitter Host

3SF7842 Emitter Guest B 22

b=40

22

A

c

6

3RG78 42 light curtains and light arrays for Category 4 according to EN 954-1 • Resolution 14, 30, 50 and 90 mm • Protective field heights from 150 mm to 3000 mm • 2-beam, 3-beam or 4-beam light arrays • Connection to AS-Interface • Cascading of host and guest devices for greater protective field heights and lengths or for an angular arrangement as an option.

3SF7842 Receiver Host

3SF7842 Receiver Guest

Two standard 3RG78 48-0AB mounting brackets each are enclosed with all devices (can also be ordered as accessories).

c

Host/guest: Cascading of basic device/follow-on device

6/28


AS-Interface


■ Selection and Ordering data Light curtains with external evaluation (Category 4) with 14 mm resolution, ASIsafe Light curtain height [mm]

Type




150

Emitter

3SF7842-6BB00

On request

On request

150

Receiver

3SF7842-6BB01

On request

On request

225

Emitter

3SF7842-6BC00

3SF7842-6BC10

On request

225

Receiver

3SF7842-6BC01

3SF7842-6BC11

On request

300

Emitter

3SF7842-6BD00

3SF7842-6BD10

On request

300

Receiver

3SF7842-6BD01

3SF7842-6BD11

On request

450

Emitter

3SF7842-6BE00

3SF7842-6BE10

On request

450

Receiver

3SF7842-6BE01

3SF7842-6BE11

On request

600

Emitter

3SF7842-6BF00

3SF7842-6BF10

On request

600

Receiver

3SF7842-6BF01

3SF7842-6BF11

On request

750

Emitter

3SF7842-6BG00

3SF7842-6BG10

On request

750

Receiver

3SF7842-6BG01

3SF7842-6BG11

On request

900

Emitter

3SF7842-6BH00

3SF7842-6BH10

On request

900

Receiver

3SF7842-6BH01

3SF7842-6BH11

On request

1050

Emitter

3SF7842-6BJ00

3SF7842-6BJ10

On request

1050

Receiver

3SF7842-6BJ01

3SF7842-6BJ11

On request

1200

Emitter

3SF7842-6BK00

3SF7842-6BK10

On request

1200

Receiver

3SF7842-6BK01

3SF7842-6BK11

On request

1350

Emitter

3SF7842-6BL00

3SF7842-6BL10

On request

1350

Receiver

3SF7842-6BL01

3SF7842-6BL11

On request

1500

Emitter

3SF7842-6BM00

3SF7842-6BM10

On request

1500

Receiver

3SF7842-6BM01

3SF7842-6BM11

On request

1650

Emitter

3SF7842-6BN00

3SF7842-6BN10

On request

1650

Receiver

3SF7842-6BN01

3SF7842-6BN11

On request

1800

Emitter

3SF7842-6BP00

3SF7842-6BP10

On request

1800

Receiver

3SF7842-6BP01

3SF7842-6BP11

On request


6

6/29

AS-Interface


■ Selection and Ordering data (continued) Light curtains with external evaluation (Category 4) with 30 mm resolution, ASIsafe

6


Type




150

Emitter

3SF7842-6DB00

On request

3RG7842-6DB21

150

Receiver

3SF7842-6DB01

On request

3RG7842-6DB20

225

Emitter

3SF7842-6DC00

3SF7842-6DC10

3RG7842-6DC21

225

Receiver

3SF7842-6DC01

3SF7842-6DC11

3RG7842-6DC20

300

Emitter

3SF7842-6DD00

3SF7842-6DD10

3RG7842-6DD21

300

Receiver

3SF7842-6DD01

3SF7842-6DD11

3RG7842-6DD20

450

Emitter

3SF7842-6DE00

3SF7842-6DE10

3RG7842-6DE21

450

Receiver

3SF7842-6DE01

3SF7842-6DE11

3RG7842-6DE20

600

Emitter

3SF7842-6DF00

3SF7842-6DF10

3RG7842-6DF21

600

Receiver

3SF7842-6DF01

3SF7842-6DF11

3RG7842-6DF20

750

Emitter

3SF7842-6DG00

3SF7842-6DG10

3RG7842-6DG21

750

Receiver

3SF7842-6DG01

3SF7842-6DG11

3RG7842-6DG20

900

Emitter

3SF7842-6DH00

3SF7842-6DH10

3RG7842-6DH21

900

Receiver

3SF7842-6DH01

3SF7842-6DH11

3RG7842-6DH20

1050

Emitter

3SF7842-6DJ00

3SF7842-6DJ10

3RG7842-6DJ21

1050

Receiver

3SF7842-6DJ01

3SF7842-6DJ11

3RG7842-6DJ20

1200

Emitter

3SF7842-6DK00

3SF7842-6DK10

3RG7842-6DK21

1200

Receiver

3SF7842-6DK01

3SF7842-6DK11

3RG7842-6DK20

1350

Emitter

3SF7842-6DL00

3SF7842-6DL10

3RG7842-6DL21

1350

Receiver

3SF7842-6DL01

3SF7842-6DL11

3RG7842-6DL20

1500

Emitter

3SF7842-6DM00

3SF7842-6DM10

3RG7842-6DM21

1500

Receiver

3SF7842-6DM01

3SF7842-6DM11

3RG7842-6DM20

1650

Emitter

3SF7842-6DN00

3SF7842-6DN10

3RG7842-6DN21

1650

Receiver

3SF7842-6DN01

3SF7842-6DN11

3RG7842-6DN20

1800

Emitter

3SF7842-6DP00

3SF7842-6DP10

3RG7842-6DP21

1800

Receiver

3SF7842-6DP01

3SF7842-6DP11

3RG7842-6DP20

6/30


AS-Interface


■ Selection and Ordering data (continued) Light curtains with external evaluation (Category 4) with 50 mm resolution, ASIsafe Light curtain height [mm]

Type




450

Emitter

3SF7842-6EE00

3SF7842-6EE10

3RG7842-6EE21

450

Receiver

3SF7842-6EE01

3SF7842-6EE11

3RG7842-6EE20

600

Emitter

3SF7842-6EF00

3SF7842-6EF10

3RG7842-6EF21

600

Receiver

3SF7842-6EF01

3SF7842-6EF11

3RG7842-6EF20

750

Emitter

3SF7842-6EG00

3SF7842-6EG10

3RG7842-6EG21

750

Receiver

3SF7842-6EG01

3SF7842-6EG11

3RG7842-6EG20

900

Emitter

3SF7842-6EH00

3SF7842-6EH10

3RG7842-6EH21

900

Receiver

3SF7842-6EH01

3SF7842-6EH11

3RG7842-6EH20

1050

Emitter

3SF7842-6EJ00

3SF7842-6EJ10

3RG7842-6EJ21

1050

Receiver

3SF7842-6EJ01

3SF7842-6EJ11

3RG7842-6EJ20

1200

Emitter

3SF7842-6EK00

3SF7842-6EK10

3RG7842-6EK21

1200

Receiver

3SF7842-6EK01

3SF7842-6EK11

3RG7842-6EK20

1350

Emitter

3SF7842-6EL00

3SF7842-6EL10

3RG7842-6EL21

1350

Receiver

3SF7842-6EL01

3SF7842-6EL11

3RG7842-6EL20

1500

Emitter

3SF7842-6EM00

3SF7842-6EM10

3RG7842-6EM21

1500

Receiver

3SF7842-6EM01

3SF7842-6EM11

3RG7842-6EM20

1650

Emitter

3SF7842-6EN00

3SF7842-6EN10

3RG7842-6EN21

1650

Receiver

3SF7842-6EN01

3SF7842-6EN11

3RG7842-6EN20

1800

Emitter

3SF7842-6EP00

3SF7842-6EP10

3RG7842-6EP21

1800

Receiver

3SF7842-6EP01

3SF7842-6EP11

3RG7842-6EP20

2100

Emitter

3SF7842-6ER00

3SF7842-6ER10

3RG7842-6ER21

2100

Receiver

3SF7842-6ER01

3SF7842-6ER11

3RG7842-6ER20

2400

Emitter

3SF7842-6ES00

3SF7842-6ES10

3RG7842-6ES21

2400

Receiver

3SF7842-6ES01

3SF7842-6ES11

3RG7842-6ES20

2700

Emitter

3SF7842-6ET00

3SF7842-6ET10

3RG7842-6ET21

2700

Receiver

3SF7842-6ET01

3SF7842-6ET11

3RG7842-6ET20

3000

Emitter

3SF7842-6EU00

3SF7842-6EU10

3RG7842-6EU21

3000

Receiver

3SF7842-6EU01

3SF7842-6EU11

3RG7842-6EU20


6/31

6

AS-Interface


■ Selection and Ordering data (continued) Light curtains with external evaluation (Category 4) with 90 mm resolution, ASIsafe

6


Type




750

Emitter

3SF7842-6JG00

3SF7842-6JG10

3RG7842-6JG21

750

Receiver

3SF7842-6JG01

3SF7842-6JG11

3RG7842-6JG20

900

Emitter

3SF7842-6JH00

3SF7842-6JH10

3RG7842-6JH21

900

Receiver

3SF7842-6JH01

3SF7842-6JH11

3RG7842-6JH20

1050

Emitter

3SF7842-6JJ00

3SF7842-6JJ10

3RG7842-6JJ21

1050

Receiver

3SF7842-6JJ01

3SF7842-6JJ11

3RG7842-6JJ20

1200

Emitter

3SF7842-6JK00

3SF7842-6JK10

3RG7842-6JK21

1200

Receiver

3SF7842-6JK01

3SF7842-6JK11

3RG7842-6JK20

1350

Emitter

3SF7842-6JL00

3SF7842-6JL10

3RG7842-6JL21

1350

Receiver

3SF7842-6JL01

3SF7842-6JL11

3RG7842-6JL20

1500

Emitter

3SF7842-6JM00

3SF7842-6JM10

3RG7842-6JM21

1500

Receiver

3SF7842-6JM01

3SF7842-6JM11

3RG7842-6JM20

1650

Emitter

3SF7842-6JN00

3SF7842-6JN10

3RG7842-6JM21

1650

Receiver

3SF7842-6JN01

3SF7842-6JN11

3RG7842-6JN20

1800

Emitter

3SF7842-6JP00

3SF7842-6JP10

3RG7842-6JP21

1800

Receiver

3SF7842-6JP01

3SF7842-6JP11

3RG7842-6JP20

2100

Emitter

3SF7842-6JR00

3SF7842-6JR10

3RG7842-6JR21

2100

Receiver

3SF7842-6JR01

3SF7842-6JR11

3RG7842-6JR20

2400

Emitter

3SF7842-6JS00

3SF7842-6JS10

3RG7842-6JS21

2400

Receiver

3SF7842-6JS01

3SF7842-6JS11

3RG7842-6JS20

2700

Emitter

3SF7842-6JT00

3SF7842-6JT10

3RG7842-6JT21

2700

Receiver

3SF7842-6JT01

3SF7842-6JT11

3RG7842-6JT20

3000

Emitter

3SF7842-6JU00

3SF7842-6JU10

3RG7842-6JU21

3000

Receiver

3SF7842-6JU01

3SF7842-6JU11

3RG7842-6JU20

Light array (Category 4) with 18 m and 60 m sensing range, ASIsafe No. of beams

Beam distance [mm]

Type

Order No. 18 m range

Order No. 60 m range

4 beam

300

Emitter

3SF7842-6MH00

3SF7842-6MH50

4 beam

300

Receiver

3SF7842-6MH01

3SF7842-6MH51

3 beam

400

Emitter

3SF7842-6PG00

3SF7842-6PG50

3 beam

400

Receiver

3SF7842-6PG01

3SF7842-6PG51

2 beam

500

Emitter

3SF7842-6SE00

3SF7842-6SE50

2 beam

500

Receiver

3SF7842-6SE01

3SF7842-6SE51

6/32


AS-Interface



9 9 ,5

3SF78 42 light array with separate evaluation unit, additional dimensions

5 2

5 5

A Protective field height (see order data)) B Total length = protective field height A +84 mm

2 2

2 2

9 9 ,5

A

B

B

C

s

s

2 2

4 0

3SF78 42 light curtains and 3SF78 42 light arrays with separate evaluation unit, standard, host, and guest devices

5 5

5 2

Additional dimensions (for light arrays only) Type

B (mm) C (mm) Beams

3SF78 42-6M… 3SF78 42-6P…

521 621

300 400

4 3

3SF78 42-6S…

721

500

2

6


6/33

AS-Interface

ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS400 light curtains Accessories

■ Overview Installation, calibration, start-up and fault localization are aided by a wide range of practical accessories which include fixing columns, reflective mirror columns, reflective mirrors, brackets and laser alignment assistance.

Furthermore, the function of the light curtains as well as that of the evaluation units can be visualized and recorded using PC software.

■ Selection and Ordering data Length in mm

Order No.

1060

3RG78 48-0CL

1360

3RG78 48-0CP

1660

3RG78 48-0CR

1960

3RG78 48-0CU

Fixing columns

Deflection mirror for light curtains Deflection mirror

6

345

3RG78 48-1DL

495

3RG78 48-1DM

645

3RG78 48-1DN

795

3RG78 48-1DP

945

3RG78 48-1DR

1095

3RG78 48-1DU

Reflective mirror columns 1060

3RG78 48-0DL

1360

3RG78 48-0DP

1660

3RG78 48-0DR

1960

3RG78 48-0DU

Reflective mirror columns for light arrays Adjustable separate mirrors 1060, 2-beam

3RG78 48-0FL

1360, 3-beam

3RG78 48-0FP

1360, 4-beam

3RG78 48-0FR

Version

Order No.

Bracket, hinged with vibration damping (incl. 2 screws and 2 keyway slides)

3RG78 48-0BB

Standard holding bracket kit (1 set = 2 units, incl. screws)

3RG78 48-0AB

Keyway blocks (1 set = 2 units), M6

3RG78 48-0AC

Muting mounting system for fixing column, active length 1000 mm

3RG78 48-2AF

Holding bar for mounting to Muting mounting system, diameter 12 mm, length 200 mm

3RX7 315

Holding bar for mounting to Muting mounting system, diameter 12 mm, length 300 mm

3RX7 316

Holding plate for the installation of sensors to 12 mm round bar for sensor fixing system

3RX7 326

Mounting base with 12 mm receptacle for fixing system

3RX7 322

Mounting accessories

6/34


AS-Interface



Order No.

Safety key for teach-in

3RG78 48-2AH

Magnetic key for alignment display

3RG78 48-2BH

Standard version (only for use in conjunction with type 4 light curtain)

3RG78 48-1AB

For installation with fixing columns

3RG78 48-1AG

for 3RG78 41 and 3RG78 42, resolutions 14 mm and 30 mm

3RG78 48-0AH

Set for 3RG78 44 light curtains

3RG78 48-0FH

for evaluation units, including PC cable

3RG78 48-1AC

Keys

Laser alignment aids

Test rods

Diagnostics software

6 SafetyLab diagnostics and parameterization software with PC cable C

3RG78 48-4AC

PC connecting lead, including connector, 9-pole with optical interface

3RG78 48-2SL

for diagnostics interface

3RG78 48-1AD

RS232 connecting cable

3RG78 48-1AE

RS485/232 converter

Cables for diagnostics

Diagnostics cable Kit • for light curtains Cat. 4 Pg

3RG78 48-1AF

• for light curtains Cat. 2, straight connector

3RG78 48-1AL

• for light curtains Cat. 2, angled connector

3RG78 48-1AM


6/35

AS-Interface



Length in m Pole

Order No.

AS-i adapter AS-i adapters for 3SF78 44 receivers, for bus connection and 24 V power supply

3RG78 38-1DG

AS-i adapter for 3SF78 4 emitters and receivers, M12 bus terminal for AS-i flat channel

3RX98 01-0AA00

Connecting cable M12 - AS-i adapter for 3SF78 44 M12

1

5-pole

3RG78 38-1EA

Connecting cable M12 - AS-i adapter for 3SF78 44 M12

2

5-pole

3RG78 38-1EB

12-pole

3RG78 48-2DA

12-pole

3RG78 48-2DB

Hirschmann type cables and cable plugs Cable plug Angular cable socket Cable for machine interface, straight plug

10

3RG78 48-2CK

Cable for machine interface, straight plug

25

3RG78 48-2DK

Cable for machine interface, straight plug

50

3RG78 48-2EK

Brad-Harrison type cable (MIN series) for 3RG78 42 light curtains

6

Connecting cables for receivers

4

7-pole

3RG78 48-0DB01

Connecting cables for emitters Connecting cables for receivers

4

5-pole

3RG78 48-0DB00

12

7-pole

3RG78 48-0KB01

Connecting cables for emitters

12

5-pole

3RG78 48-0KB00

Connecting cables for receivers

20

7-pole

3RG78 48-0LB01

Connecting cables for emitters

20

5-pole

3RG78 48-0LB00

Cables and cable plugs for all types Cable for local connection, with M12 angular connector

3

3RG78 48-2AK

Cable for local connection, with M12 angular connector

10

3RG78 48-2BK

External local connection box, with 6 M12 sockets and cables

0.5

3RG78 48-2AB

Version

Rated voltage

Order No.

24 ... 230 AC/DC

8WD42 00-1AE

Muting lamp and accessories Continuous light element, clear

Connecting element with end cover for conduit, floor and angled installation

8WD42 08-0AA

Conduit, single, length 100 mm

8WD42 08-0EF

Foot, single, in plastic, for floor installation

8WD42 08-0DE

Bracket for wall mounting

8WD42 08-0CA

Incandescent lamp, 5 W, BA 15d base

6/36


24 AC/DC

8WD43 28-1XX

AS-Interface


■ Selection and Ordering data (continued) Length

Version

Order No.

Safety and mounting profiles for 3RG78 41 light curtains 150 mm

3RG78 48-0GB

225 mm

3RG78 48-0GC

300 mm

3RG78 48-0GD

450 mm

3RG78 48-0GE

600 mm

3RG78 48-0GF

750 mm

3RG78 48-0GG

900 mm

3RG78 48-0GH

1050 mm

3RG78 48-0GJ

1200 mm

3RG78 48-0GK

1350 mm

3RG78 48-0GL

1500 mm

3RG78 48-0GM

1650 mm

3RG78 48-0GN

1800 mm

3RG78 48-0GP

Connecting cable with M12 socket for 3RG78 41 light curtains 5m

straight

3RG78 48-1BA

5m

angled

3RG78 48-1BC

15 m

straight

3RG78 48-1BD

15 m

angled

3RG78 48-1BE

5m

straight

3RG78 48-2EA

5-pole, shielded

5m

angled

3RG78 48-2EB

5-pole, shielded

10 m

straight

3RG78 48-2EC

5-pole, shielded

10 m

angled

3RG78 48-2ED

5-pole, shielded

15 m

straight

3RG78 48-2EE

5-pole, shielded

15 m

angled

3RG78 48-2EF

6

Connecting cable with M12 connector for the 3RG78 43 light curtain emitter 5-pole, shielded

Connecting cable with M12 connector for the 3RG78 43 light curtain receiver 8-pole, shielded

5m

straight

3RG78 48-2CA

8-pole, shielded

5m

angled

3RG78 48-2CB

8-pole, shielded

10 m

straight

3RG78 48-2CC

8-pole, shielded

10 m

angled

3RG78 48-2CD

8-pole, shielded

15 m

straight

3RG78 48-2CE

8-pole, shielded

15 m

angled

3RG78 48-2CF


6/37

AS-Interface


■ Selection and Ordering data (continued) Designation

Order No.

Installation material for 3RG78 43 light curtains

6

360° bracket

3RG78 48-2BA

L bracket

3RG78 48-2BB

Z bracket

3RG78 48-2BC

360° bracket kit

3RG78 48-2BD

L bracket kit and holder kit

3RG78 48-2BE

Z bracket kit and holder kit

3RG78 48-2BF

Holder, swivel-mounted, with vibration damping

3RG78 48-0BB

20 mm test rod

3RG78 48-1CH

30 mm test rod

3RG78 48-0AH

40 mm test rod

3RG78 48-1BH

Test rods

6/38


AS-Interface


■ Dimension drawings L bracket:

Z bracket:

4

R3,1

25

12,1

R3,1 R3,1 R10 73 61

16

39 29

R10

R6

10

22

12 30

6,2

FS10_00079

R10

6,2

FS10_00080

R3,1

18,4

31,7

10,8

4

R3,1

R10

12

6

6,2

9

8,2 20 34

24 32

8

(34-37)

(50-53)

(34-37)

(50-53)

FS10_00082

FS10_00083

29,1

24,5

41,2

9,1

9,1

6,2

29,1

41,2

8

24,5

34 20 8,2

9

360° fixing bracket:

24 32


6/39

AS-Interface


■ Dimension drawings (continued) Swivel bracket

Bracket for wall mounting -26,5

12

a

32

72

11,3

FS10_00152

10

35

50

60

70

38

FS10_00084

-40 -34

Connection element 0 1 4

b

21,3

a = Elongated hole 13 x 6 b = Swivel angle ± 8° FS10_00153

Signaling column with steady-light element, tube and base Ø 50 25 31,4

FS10_00150

Ø 21,6 Ø 52

117 132,7

Fixing column

1,5

Ø 70

NSC0_00431a

98,4 94,4

2

A

Ø 70

37

Ø 5,5

3

60

Base

FS10_00151

6/40


95,6

4

54

Ø 160

1 Ø 70

1,5

6

2 3

AS-Interface


■ Dimension drawings (continued) Reflective mirror column

Deflection mirror 83

D

C

A 71

60

3

E

B

NSC0_00432a

6 x ø 6,5

25

Ø 160

63

4

29,2

100 161 150 NSC00433

➀ light curtain ➁ 8 bore holes, diameter = 16 mm ➂ plastic spring elements with automatic return mechanism ➃ 3 bore holes in base for dowels, diameter = 10 mm, depth = 80 mm

Type

C

D

E

3RG78 48-0ED

480

460

410

3RG78 48-0EE

580

560

510

3RG78 48-0EF

695

675

625

3RG78 48-0EG

810

790

740

3RG78 48-0EH

900

880

830

3RG78 48-0EJ

1000

980

930

3RG78 48-0EK

1100

1080

1030

3RG78 48-0EL

1195

1175

1125

3RG78 48-0EM

1290

1270

1220

3RG78 48-0EN

1435

1415

1365

3RG78 48-0EP

1580

1560

1510

3RG78 48-0EQ

1720

1700

1650

3RG78 48-0ER

1900

1880

1830

Type

A

B

3RG78 48-0.L

1060

974

3RG78 48-0.P

1360

1274

3RG78 48-0.R

1660

1574

3RG78 48-0.U

1960

1874


6

6/41

AS-Interface


■ Dimension drawings (continued) Muting mounting system

1000

44

=

22

40

33,5

9,5

54

10

(24)

6,2

FS1000108

90°

M6

4

6,2

A B C D

Support, swivel-mounted, with vibration damping

Slot 13 x 6

35

60

70

NSC0_00435

ca. 24,5

10

6 ca. 40 ca. 34

11,3

M6 Swivel angle

6/42


=

R 10

V2A circular bar 12 x 100 mm Fixing plate Aluminum profile Cover

100

NSC00434

Standard mounting bracket (included in scope of supply)

AS-Interface

ASIsafe

SIMATIC FS600 laser scanner

■ Overview

■ Application Horizontal danger zone protection

NSC0_00619

Our optical distance sensors provide perfect all-round protection to Category 3 according to EN 954-1. In an operating field of 190° and over a distance of up to 4 m (up to 15 m in non safety-related applications), the laser scanner reliably senses every object and every person. And it works so simply – the distance sensor emits light pulses at regular intervals.

• Reliable detection of persons and objects in danger zones around machines and plants. • Flexible programming of almost any protection and warning zones. Horizontal danger zone protection with more than one protective field

6

If they hit an obstruction, the sensor receives the reflected light and evaluates it. If this is evaluated as the predefined area to be protected, a Stop function is triggered. With up to four programmable protective field pairs that can be selected during operation, our laser scanners can be optimally adapted to any application – on machines, production robots, conveyor systems or vehicles.

SF 2 WF 2 SF 1 (active)

Different versions support optimal integration in the automation system – whether conventionally in the safety circuit, over PROFIBUS with PROFIsafe or over AS-Interface with ASIsafe.

WF 1 (active) NSC0_00646

• Reliable detection of persons in different danger zones by switching between protective fields. • Increased availability due to accurate protection of just the fields that are currently active.


6/43

AS-Interface

ASIsafe


■ Application

■ Function

Route monitoring for automatic guided vehicle systems

The LS4 laser scanner is an optical, contact-free surface scanner – designed primarily for operator protection.

E

Sc

Reflection

SF4

SF1 SF3

SF2 NSC0_00620

NSC0_00623

• Reliable detection of persons and objects approaching the vehicle. • The laser scanner offers a greater protection range than bumpers and, therefore, permits higher speeds. Collision protection for shifting units

6

c

c

Using a laser diode with transmission optics, the laser scanner continuously generates bundled light pulses that are scattered throughout the operating range by an integrated rotating mirror. If objects or persons enter the field, it evaluates the reflected light pulses and continuously calculates the exact position coordinates on the basis of the light propagation time. If the defined personnel protective field is penetrated, the laser scanner stops the machine immediately (within the system response time). The Stop function is reset when the protective field is free again, either automatically or following acknowledgement (depending on the operating mode). The operating range of the LS4 laser scanner spans 190° and is subdivided into angle segments of 0.36°.

SF1

0.36°

SF2 b

NSC0_00622

• Reliable protection of persons in the path of the vehicle. • Objects in the path of the vehicle are detected in good time and damage to the vehicle or its load is prevented. Other applications • Many different types of hazardous area protection • Protection for rooms and entrances • Projecting object monitoring to protect machines and personnel • Non-safety-relevant measuring or detection tasks (e.g. determining distances, positions, or contours).

6/44


5°

185°

NSC0_00624

The scan rate is 25 scans/second, i.e. one light pulse every 40 ms in each segment. A special algorithm ensures that objects larger than 70 mm (this corresponds to the scanner resolution) can be reliably detected and that contamination (e.g. dust) does not reduce system availability. The LS4 laser scanner detects people (even if they are wearing dark clothing) at a distance of up to 4 m (fail-safe). People or objects can, however, be detected at a distance of up to 15 m so that a warning can be output, for example (not safety relevant).

AS-Interface

ASIsafe


■ Function (continued) Four protective field/warning field pairs

LS4soft operator software

Four variable protective field pairs for the personnel protective field and warning field, which can be easily set on the PC, ensure that the LS4 laser scanner can be adapted to suit any requirement.

Thanks to the PC operator software LS4soft, it could not be easier to optimize the laser scanner settings. The following functions have been integrated: 7 User-friendly configuration of the protective field using a PC or laptop 7 Configuration of additional functions, such as protective field selection, restart inhibit, etc. by means of a software wizard 7 Comprehensive range of displays, e.g. defined protective fields, current scan contours, system settings, etc. reliable, password-protected access with different authorization levels 7 Executable under Microsoft Windows 95/98/NT/2000/XP

SF 3

SF 1

SF 4

SF 2

Only personnel protective fields are shown NSC0_00625

It can be implemented in stationary applications (machines and installations) or mobile applications (vehicles, automatic guided vehicle systems, or shifting units). In the case of a robot, for example, different operating ranges can be protected, whereby the laser scanner operates in succession with regard to time and space. In the case of automatic guided vehicle systems, four programmable protective fields can be protected, e.g. rapid travel, slow travel, turning left, turning right.

6


6/45

AS-Interface

ASIsafe — SIMATIC FS600 laser scanner AS-Interface LS4 laser scanner

■ Integration

X5 and and

X1

or

X2 X3 X4

FS10_00136

6

Connection

Description

Position

Connectable accessories

Order No.

X1

M12 connector for AS-Interface connection (bus connection and 24 V DC power supply)

1

LS4 connecting cable to M12 AS-Interface adapter

3RG78 38-1EA (1 m) 3RG78 38-1EB (2 m)

2

M12 AS-Interface adapter

3RG78 38-1DG

Connection for AS-Interface addressing and diagnostics unit

3

AS-Interface addressing and diagnostics unit

3RK1 904-2AB01

4

Connecting cable with M12 socket and M12 plug (3-core)

3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5 (1.5 m)

5

M12 jumper plug (suitable for protection field 1)

3RG78 38-1DF

6

M12 connector with terminal housing, 5-pin

3RX8 000-0CD55

X2

X3

M12 socket for connecting the changeover for the protective fields

X4

M12 connector for connecting a restart button (optional)

7

M12 cable socket with terminal housing, 5-pin

3RX8 000-0CB55

X5

Optical PC interface

8

PC connecting cable for LS4 with optical interface, 9-pin

3RG78 38-1DC


3SF7 834-6DD00

Protective field

Type

3SF7 834-6DD00

Protective field supplement

• Detection range

0 ... 4 m

• For deactivated dust suppression

83 mm

• Luminance factor

min. 1.8 %

• Object size and diameter

70 mm (cylindrical test body)

• For activated dust suppression - protective field size < 3.5 mm - protective field size > 3.5 mm

83 mm 100 mm

• Response time - dual evaluation (2 scans)

- adjustable up to 16 scans

85 ms (laser scanner only, without AS-Interface system times) 645 ms (laser scanner only, without AS-Interface system times)

• Number

4 (selectable via switching inputs)

• Safety category

Category 3 to EN 954-1, type 3 to IEC 61496-1 or EN 61496-3

• Output

Secure AS-Interface interface

• Start

Start test and start inhibit can be set separately

• restart

160 ms to 10 s (can be set or is manual)

6/46


• Additional supplement in the case of existing retroreflectors or highly reflective surfaces (e.g. certain metals or ceramics) in the scan plane - more than 1.2 m behind the protective field line - in protective field or up to 1.2 m behind the protective field line

0 mm 110 mm

AS-Interface



3SF7 834-6DD00

Warning field 0 ... 15 m


min. 20 %

• Object size

150 × 150 mm

- adjustable up to 16 scans

3SF7 834-6DD00

Control cable

• Detection range

• Response time - dual evaluation (2 scans)

Type

85 ms (laser scanner only, without AS-Interface system times) 645 ms (laser scanner only, without AS-Interface system times)

• No. of warning fields

4 (selectable via switching inputs)

• Output

AS-Interface

• Length

max. 50 m (cable cross-section: 0.5 mm2, shielded)

AS-Interface address programming

Connection of a standard AS-Interface address programming device

RS232 interfaces via infrared interface

For device parameterization and field definition

Optics • Rotation angle

190 °

• Angle resolution

0.36 °

• Detection range

0 ... 50 m

• Lateral tolerance - without assembly system (for rear of enclosure) - with assembly system (for mounting surface)


min. 20 %

• Scan rate

25 scans/s or 40 ms/scan

• Output

RS 232 serial interface via infrared interface

• Radial resolution

5 mm

• Lateral resolution

0.36 °

• Laser protection class - to standard - wave length - beam divergence - Time Base

EN 60825-1, class 1 (eye safe) 905 nm 2 mrad 100 s

29.5 ... 31.6 V (to AS-Interface specification)


IP65

• Via external supply

24 V DC (+/-20 %)

• Operation

0 ... +50 °C

• Note

The power pack for the external power supply and the AS-Interface power pack for supplying the AS-Interface components must have a safe isolation to IEC 60742 and must bridge brief power failures of up to 20 ms (e.g. AS-Interface power pack 3RX9 307-0AA00).

• Storage

-20 ... +60 °C

Enclosure insulation class

Protection class 2

Humidity

To DIN 40040, table 10, code E (fairly dry)

Dimensions (W × H × D) in mm

141 × 167 × 168

Weight

2.25 kg

Fuse 1.25 A (medium slow)

Emitter

Infrared laser diode (λ = 905 nm)

Typical current consumption from supply circuit

400 mA

Casing

Cast aluminum, plastic, steel connection plate

Typical current consumption from AS-Interface circuit

50 mA

Vibratory load over 3 axes to IEC 60068, part 2-6

10 ... 150 Hz, max. 5 g

Continuous shock over 3 axes to IEC 60068, part 2-29

10 g, 16 ms

Rotating mirror drive

Brushless DC motor

Rotating mirror bearing

Maintenance-free ball bearing

Contour measurement

Supply voltage • Via AS-Interface network

Overcurrent protection

Inputs • Restart/reset

• Field pair changeover

• Signal definition - High (logical 1) - Low (logical 0)

Connection of a command unit for operating mode with restart inhibit and/or device reset, dynamically monitored, 24 V DC optically decoupled Selection from four field pairs via 4 control leads with internal monitoring (1 field pair = 1 protective field and 1 warning field), 24 V optically decoupled 16 ... 30 V <3V

± 0.18 ° ± 0.22 °

6

Ambient temperature

AS Interface • ID code

B

• I/O code

0 (four data bits as outputs)

• Slave address

Programmed by user in the range 1 ... 31 (on delivery = 0)

• Cycle time in accordance with AS- 5 ms Interface specification • Profile

Reliable slave


6/47

AS-Interface


■ Ordering data ASIsafe LS4 laser scanner Including LS4soft software

Order No.

Order No.

3SF7 834-6DD00

Connectors and cables 3RG7 838-1DC

Assembly system

3RG7 838-1AA

PC connection cable for LS4 AS-Interface and PROFIBUS Includes plug (9-pin) and optical interface

Adapter plate for PLS mounting support

3RG7 838-1AB

M12 jumper plug (suitable for protection field 1)

3RG7 838-1DF

Cleaning set Includes cleaning fluid (1000 ml), cloths (x 100)

3RG7 838-7RS

M12 adapter For AS-Interface and power supply

3RG7 838-1DG

Accessories

LS4 M12 – M12 adapter connection cable • 5-pin, 1 m

3RG7 838-1EA

• 5-pin, 2 m

3RG7 838-1EB

Test body (cylindrical)

6

6/48


• Length: 500 mm; diameter: 70 mm (stationary applications)

3RG7 838-7GB

• Length: 1,000 mm; diameter: 200 mm (mobile applications)

3RG7 838-7GD

AS-Interface


■ Dimension drawings 122.3 61

143.8

s

148

a

a

b

48.75

b

167

Top view approx. 220

R 2.6

R 2.6 130

5

64

approx. 140

132 approx. 168

a = rotating mirror axis b = scan plane

23 56,6

ASIsafe laser scanner 3SF7 834-6DD00

155,4

51,5 74,4 90

6

NSC 00610

9 158 166 192

9°

Assembly system 3RG7 838-1AA

■ Schematics X5

X1 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5

X2

X3

X4

AS-Interface connection (Bus connction and 24 Volt power supply) AS-Interface connection for address programming device Connection protective fields switchover Connection restart button Optical PC Interface


6/49

AS-Interface

ASIsafe

AS-Interface EMERGENCY STOP/OFF pushbuttons

■ Overview It is possible to directly connect EMERGENCY STOP/OFF devices over the standard AS-Interface using failsafe communication. This only applies to EMERGENCY STOP devices in the SIRIUS 3SB3 series for mounting in front panels and enclosures.

AS-Interface F adapter for front panel mounting

AS-Interface EMERGENCY STOP/OFF enclosure

The AS-Interface F adapter links an EMERGENCY STOP/OFF mushroom pushbutton (ISO 13850 or EN 418, 3SB3 series) to the AS-Interface bus system.

6

The enclosure with a yellow top is supplied fully equipped and wired. It includes: • SIRIUS 3SB3 EMERGENCY STOP/OFF mushroom pushbutton • Contact blocks • F-slave with 2 safe inputs • Inscription plate The molded-plastic designs of the enclosure incorporate a terminal for the AS-Interface shaped cable (the cable is connected by means of insulation displacement and runs past the outside of the enclosure). In the metallic versions, the AS-Interface shaped cable (or round cable) is inserted into the enclosure.

The F adapter has a secure AS-Interface slave 2E and is snapped onto the EMERGENCY STOP/OFF pushbutton (actuator only) from the back. Depending on the version, the connection is made via screw or spring terminals. In the expanded 2E/1A version, an output to control the LED indicator light is available. The module is addressed using the AS-Interface connections or the integrated addressing socket. Safety Category 4 (SIL 3) is achieved with the adapter.


Connection

Order No.

Insulation displacement

3SF5 811-0AA08

AS-Interface EMERGENCY STOP/OFF enclosure, molded plastic enclosure • Yellow cover • Yellow cover with protective collar

3SF5 811-0AB08

AS-Interface EMERGENCY STOP/OFF enclosure, metal enclosure • Yellow cover 3SF5 811-0AA08

Cable gland

• Yellow cover with protective collar

3SF5 811-2AA08 3SF5 811-2AB08

AS-Interface F adapter EMERGENCY STOP/OFF SIRIUS 3SB3 1) For front panel assembly •2I

Screw terminal

• 2 I/1 O, output for LED control •2I 3SF5 402-1AB03

• 2 I/1 O, output for LED control

3SF5 402-1AA03 3SF5 402-1AB03

Spring terminal

3SF5 402-1AA04 3SF5 402-1AB04

Safety Integrated manual • German

E20001-A110-M103

• English

E20001-A110-M103-X-7600

1) The EMERGENCY OFF actuator is not included in the scope of supply See Catalog LV 1, Section 9 Commanding and Signaling Devices

6/50


AS-Interface Master

Masters for SIMATIC S7 CP 142-2

■ Overview

■ Application The CP 142-2 enables the connection of the distributed I/O system ET 200X to AS-Interface. This module can be used to activate up to 31 AS-Interface slaves and, if bi-directional slaves are implemented, up to 248 binary components. Up to 6 CP 142-2 can be operated on the ET 200X.

■ Design

• Master connection for the ET 200X distributed I/O station to AS-Interface over a 12-pin connector • Easy operation in the I/O address area of SIMATIC ET 200X • No CP configuration required for AS-Interface • Activation of up to 31 AS-Interface slaves in accordance with the AS-Interface specification V2.0 • Monitoring of the supply voltage on the AS-Interface shaped cable • Significant increase in the number of inputs and outputs of ET 200X

■ Benefits

• In connection with the BM 147, the ET 200X enables PLC functionality in degree of protection IP65 • Can also be used in a rugged industrial environment without additional casing due to the high degree of protection IP67 • More flexible and extended application options of the ET 200X thanks to considerable increase in available inputs/outputs • Shorter startup times due to easy configuration at the press of a button • Reduction of standstill or service times in the event of a fault through LED displays: - status of the AS-Interface network - connected slaves and their operational readiness - monitoring of the AS-Interface voltage level

• 16 byte inputs and 16 byte outputs are used in the address space of the ET 200X • Operating statuses displayed by LEDs in the frontplate • Display of the connected and activated slaves and their operational readiness by LEDs • One pushbutton for switching the operating status, entering the existing configuration and switching the display • Connection of the AS-Interface cable to M12 connector • Monitoring of the supply voltage on the AS-Interface cable

■ Function The CP 142-2 can be used in two operating modes: • Standard mode with BM 141/BM 142/BM 147 • A maximum of 124 input bits and output bits of the AS-Interface slaves can be addressed. • Extended mode with BM 147 An FC (Function Call) enables master calls to be used in accordance with the AS-Interface specification V2.0 (e.g. write parameters). The calls are described in the manual. Program examples are supplied with the manual.

PROFIBUS

AS-Interface

ET 200X with CP 142-2


G_IK10_XX_20013

erface Master

Example configuration

Configuration Parameterization of the CP 142-2 is performed with the STEP 7 basic package V2.1 and higher. No additional configuration is required for AS-Interface.


6/51

6

AS-Interface Master


■ Technical specifications V 2.0 I/O transmission only All functions

Bus cycle time

5 ms with 31 slaves

Configuration • AS-Interface • PROFIBUS

6

■ Ordering data

AS-Interface specification • with BM 141/BM 142 • with BM 147 and FC, ASI-3422

Via key on the front panel The CP 142-2 occupies 16 byte of inputs and 16 byte of outputs in the PROFIBUS configuration of the ET 200X

Connection of the AS-Interface cable

Via M12 connector on the front panel

Address area

16 input byte 16 output byte

Supply voltage • through backplane bus • from the AS-Interface shaped cable

24 V DC According to AS-Interface specification V2.0

Power loss

2W

Current consumption • through backplane bus • via AS-Interface from the AS-Interface shaped cables

Typ. 50 mA for 24 V DC According to AS-Interface specification V 2.0


0 °C … +55 °C -40 °C … +70 °C 95% at +25°C

Construction • Module format • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm • Weight • Space requirements

ET 200X construction Expansion module 87 x 110 x 63 approx. 310 g 1 slot


IP66/67

6/52


Order No.

CP 142-2 communications processor For connecting SIMATIC ET 200X to AS-Interface

6GK7 142-2AH00-0XA0

CP 142-2 manual • German

6GK7 142-2AH00-8AA0

Electronic manuals Communications systems, protocols, products on CD-ROM German/English

6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

AS-Interface Master


■ Overview

■ Application The CP 243-2 is the AS-Interface master connection exclusively for the CPUs 22x of the innovated SIMATIC S7-200 generation. By connecting to AS-Interface, the available digital inputs and outputs for S7-200 are significantly increased (max. 248 DI / 186 DO on AS-Interface per CP). In addition, the integrated analog value processing also makes analog values (per CP max. 31 analog slaves, each with up to 4 channels) available to the S7-200 at the AS-Interface. Up to two CP 243-2s can be operated simultaneously on the S7-200.

■ Design

The CP 243-2 is the AS-Interface master for the innovated generation of SIMATIC S7-200. The communications processor (6GK1 243-2AX01-0AX0) supports the extended AS-Interface specification V2.1 and has the following functions: • Up to 62 AS-Interface slaves can be connected and integrated analog value transfer (according to the extended AS-Interface specification V2.1) • Supports all AS-Interface master functions in accordance with the extended AS-Interface specification V2.1 • Status displays for operating states and display of the functional readiness of connected slaves with LEDs in the front panel • Indication of errors (incl. AS-Interface voltage errors, configuration errors) with LEDs in the front panel • Compact enclosure designed to match the new generation of SIMATIC S7-200.

■ Benefits

The CP 243-2 is connected to the S7-200 like an expansion module. It features: • Two terminals for direct connection of the AS-Interface cable • LEDs in the front panel for displaying the operating status and the operational readiness of all connected and activated slaves • Two pushbuttons for displaying the status information of the slaves, for switching the operating status and entering the existing ACTUAL configuration as the SETPOINT configuration

■ Function The CP 243-2 supports all functions specified by the extended AS-Interface specification V2.1. With this specification it is possible to operate up to 62 digital or 31 analog slaves on the AS-Interface by means of double address assignment (A-B). The integrated analog value processing permits the analog values to be accessed as easily as the digital values. The CP 243-2 occupies a digital input byte (status byte), a digital output byte (control byte) as well as 8 analog input and 8 analog output words in the process image of the S7-200. The CP 243-2 therefore requires two slots. Application programs use the status and control byte to set the operating mode of the CP 243-2. Depending on the operating mode, the CP 243-2 either uses the analog address space of the S7-200 to store the I/O data of the AS-Interface slaves or diagnostics values or enables master calls (e.g. re-addressing of slaves). Configuring

• More flexible and extended application options of the SIMATIC S7-200 due to the considerable increase in the available digital and analog inputs/outputs • Shorter startup times due to easy configuration at the press of a button • In the event of a fault, shorter standstill and service times due to LED indication of: • Status of the CPs - connected slaves and their operational readiness - monitoring of the AS-Interface voltage level

All connected AS-Interface slaves are configured at the press of a button. More comprehensive configuration of the CPs is not necessary.


6/53

6

AS-Interface Master



■ Ordering data


V 2.1

Bus cycle time

5 ms with 31 slaves 10 ms with 62 slaves

Interfaces • Allocation of analog address space in the PLC • AS-Interface connection

corresponding to two I/O modules (8 DI/8 DO and 8 AI/ 8 AO) terminal connection

Current consumption • through backplane bus • via AS-Interface from the AS-Interface shaped cables

type. 220 mA for 5 V DC max. 100 mA

Power loss

approx. 2 W

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature - horizontal installation - vertical mounting

0 °C … +55 °C 0 °C … +45 °C


- 40 °C … +70 °C


max. 95% at +25 °C

Construction • Module format • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm

6

• Weight • Space requirements

6/54


S7-22x expansion module 71.2 x 80 x 62 (H+16 mm with holes for wall mounting) approx. 250 g 1 slot

CP 243-2 communications processor For connection of SIMATIC S7-200 (2nd generation) to AS-Interface with bus connector

Order No. 6GK7 243-2AX01-0XA0

Manual for CP 243-2 Including AS-Interface fundamentals and diskette with program examples paper version • German

6GK7 243-2AX00-8AA0

• English

6GK7 243-2AX00-8BA0

• French

6GK7 243-2AX00-8CA0

• Spanish

6GK7 243-2AX00-8DA0

• Italian

6GK7 243-2AX00-8EA0

AS-Interface Master


■ Overview

■ Application The CP 343-2 is the AS-Interface master connection for SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M. Connection to the AS-Interface allows access to max. 248 DI/186 DO per CP. The integrated analog value processing also supports evaluation of very simple analog signals (per CP at max. 31 analog slaves, each with four channels).

■ Design The CP 343-2 is connected to the S7-300 like an expansion module. It features: • Two terminals for direct connection of the AS-Interface cable • LEDs in the frontplate for displaying the operating status and the operational readiness of all connected and activated slaves • Pushbuttons for displaying the status information of the slaves, for switching the operating status and entering the existing ACTUAL configuration as the SETPOINT configuration The CP 343-2 is the AS-Interface master for the SIMATIC S7-300 programmable controller and the ET 200 M distributed I/O station. The functions of the communications processor are as follows: • Up to 62 AS-Interface slaves can be connected and integrated analog value transfer (according to the extended AS-Interface specification V2.1) • Supports all AS-Interface master functions in accordance with the extended AS-Interface specification V2.1 • Status displays for operating states and display of the functional readiness of connected slaves with LEDs in the front panel • Indication of errors (incl. AS-Interface voltage errors, configuration errors) with LEDs in the front panel • Compact enclosure designed to match the SIMATIC S7-300

■ Benefits

■ Function The CP 343-2 supports all functions specified by the extended AS-Interface specification V2.1. With this specification it is possible to operate up to 62 digital or 31 analog slaves on the AS-Interface by means of double address assignment (A-B). The integrated analog value processing permits easy access to the analog values. In I/O mode, the CP 343-2 occupies 16 byte in the analog address area of the SIMATIC S7-300. The I/O data of the standard slaves (A-Slaves) are stored in this area. The I/O data of the B-Slaves can be accessed with the "Read/Write dataset" function. A and B-Slaves are slaves according to the extended AS-Interface specification V2.1. A function call (FC) is available for the AS-Interface master calls (e.g. writing parameters, reading diagnostics values). The function call is available on a diskette enclosed with the user manual. Configuring

• Shorter startup times due to easy configuration at the press of a button • Flexible decentralized topologies can be constructed by using this communications processor in the ET 200M DP slave. • Reduction of standstill or service times in the event of a fault through LED displays: - status of the AS-Interface network - connected slaves and their operational readiness - monitoring of the AS-Interface voltage level • Reduced costs for spare parts inventories because the CP can be used in both the SIMATIC S7-300 and in ET 200M. • Ideal for complex applications through the connection option of 62 slaves and integrated analog value processing

All connected AS-Interface slaves are configured at the press of a button. More comprehensive configuration of the CPs is not necessary.


6/55

6

AS-Interface Master



■ Ordering data

AS-Interface Specification

V 2.1

Bus cycle time

5 ms for 31 slaves 10 ms for 62 slaves

Interfaces • Assignment of analog address space in the PLC

16 byte I/O and P-bus S7-300

• AS-Interface connection

S7-300 front connector with terminal

Supply voltage

+5 V DC through backplane bus

6GK7 343-2AH00-0XA0

Front connector 20-pin, with screw contacts

6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0


typ. 200 mA at 5 V DC

CP 343-2 and CP 343-2 P manual including software (FC) and examples paper version

• Through AS-Interface from the AS-Interface shaped cables

max. 100 mA

• German

6GK7 343-2AH00-8AA0

• English

6GK7 343-2AH00-8BA0

Power loss

2W

• French

6GK7 343-2AH00-8CA0

• Spanish

6GK7 343-2AH00-8DA0

• Italian

6GK7 343-2AH00-8EA0

Electronic manuals Communication systems, logs, products on CD-ROM German/English

6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

Current consumption


0°C to +60°C


-40 °C to +70 °C

• Relative humidity, max.

95% at +25 °C

Design

6

Order No.

CP 343-2 communications processor For connection of SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M to the AS-Interface; without front connector

• Module format

S7-300 design


40 x 125 x 120

• Weight

approx. 190 g

• Space required

1 slot

6/56


AS-Interface Master

Masters for SIMATIC S7 CP 343-2 P

■ Overview

■ Application The CP 343-2 P is the AS-Interface master connection for SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M. Connection to the AS-Interface allows access to max. 248 DI/186 DO per CP. The integrated analog value processing also supports evaluation of very simple analog signals (per CP at max. 31 analog slaves, each with four channels). The CP 343-2 P functionality is identical to that of the CP 342-2. An old S7 user program can therefore be used with the new CP without any limitations. Also, the AS-Interface configuration can be downloaded or uploaded with the STEP 7 hardware configuration.

■ Design

The CP 343-2 P is the AS-Interface master for the SIMATIC S7-300 programmable controller and the ET 200M distributed I/O station. The functions of the communications processor are as follows: • It supports configuration of the AS-Interface network with STEP 7 V5.2 and higher • Up to 62 AS-Interface slaves can be connected and integrated analog value transfer (according to the extended AS-Interface specification V2.1) • Supports all AS-Interface master functions in accordance with the extended AS-Interface specification V2.1 • Indication of errors (incl. AS-Interface voltage errors, configuration errors) with LEDs in the front plate • Compact enclosure designed to match the SIMATIC S7-300

■ Benefits

The CP 343-2 P is connected to the S7-300 like an expansion module. It features: • Two terminals for direct connection of the AS-Interface cable • LEDs in the frontplate for displaying the operating status and operational readiness of all connected and activated slaves • Pushbuttons for displaying the status information of the slaves, for switching the operating status and entering the existing ACTUAL configuration as the SETPOINT configuration

■ Mode of operation In I/O mode, the CP 343-2 P reserves 16 byte in the analog address space of the SIMATIC S7-300. The I/O data of the standard slaves or A slaves is stored here. The I/O data of the B slaves can be accessed using the "read/ write data record“ function. A and B slaves are slaves in accordance with the extended ASInterface Specification V2.1. For the AS-Interface master calls (e.g. Write parameter, read diagnostic values), a Function Call (FC) is provided on the diskette that accompanies the manual. All connected AS-Interface slaves are configured at the press of a button. No further configuration of the CP is necessary.

■ Function • Improved plant documentation and support for servicing thanks to documentation of the AS-Interface configuration in the STEP 7 project • Diagnosis of the AS-Interface network is supported • Shorter startup times due to easy configuration at the press of a button • Flexible decentralized topologies can be constructed by using this communications processor in the ET 200M DP slave. • Reduction of standstill or service times in the event of a fault through LED displays: - status of the AS-Interface network - connected slaves and their operational readiness - monitoring of the AS-Interface voltage level • Reduced costs for spare parts inventories because the CP can be used in both the SIMATIC S7-300 and in ET 200M. • Ideal for complex applications through the connection option of 62 slaves and integrated analog value processing

The CP 343-2 P supports all functions specified by the extended AS-Interface specification V2.1. With this specification it is possible to operate up to 62 digital or 31 analog slaves on the AS-Interface by means of double address assignment (A-B). The integrated analog value processing permits easy access to the analog values. Configuring All connected AS-Interface slaves are configured at the press of a button. More comprehensive configuration of the CPs is not necessary. The CP 343-2 P also supports configuration of the AS-Interface network with STEP 7 (V5.2 and higher).


6/57

6

AS-Interface Master

Masters for SIMATIC S7 CP 343-2 P


■ Ordering data


V 2.1

Bus cycle time


Interfaces • Allocation of analog address space in the PLC • AS-Interface connection

16 byte I/O and P-Bus S7-300

Supply voltage

+5 V DC via backplane bus

S7-300 front connector with terminal connection

6GK7 343-2AH10-0XA0

Front connector 20-pin, with screw contacts

6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0


typ. 200 mA for 5 V DC

CP 343-2 and CP 343-2 P manual including software (FC) and examples paper version

• Via AS-Interface from the AS-Interface shaped cables

max. 100 mA

• German

6GK7 343-2AH00-8AA0

• English

6GK7 343-2AH00-8BA0

• French

6GK7 343-2AH00-8CA0

• Spanish

6GK7 343-2AH00-8DA0

• Italian

6GK7 343-2AH00-8EA0

Electronic manuals Communication systems, logs, products on CD-ROM German/English

6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

Current consumption

2W

Power loss Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature

0 °C … +60 °C


-40 °C … +70 °C


95% at +25 °C

Construction

6

Order No.

CP 343-2 P communications processor For connection of SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M to the AS-Interface; without front connector

• Module format

S7-300 construction


40 x 125 x 120

• Weight

approx. 190 g


1 slot


Optional: STEP 7 V5.2 and higher

6/58


AS-Interface Slaves

I/O modules for operation in the field Introduction erface Slaves

■ Overview

K20

K60

Three coordinated ranges of AS-Interface compact modules with digital and analog compact modules and a high degree of protection are available for operation in the field: • Series K60 (digital and analog) • Series K45 (digital) • Series K20 (digital) All compact modules are characterized by particularly simple handling. The K60 and K45 modules are mounted with a mounting plate. The mounting plate is used to receive the AS-Interface flat cables and enables mounting on a wall or standard mounting rail. The K20 modules are directly mounted without a mounting plate and connected to the AS-Interface using a round cable. Overview of digital compact modules The following table provides an overview of the important features of the digital compact modules. For exact details, see the section technical specifications in the section on the respective product.

K45

Version

K60

K45

K20

8 inputs / 2 outputs

• • • • • •

--

--

--

--

--

•

--

--

--

--

• • • •

• •

8 inputs 4 inputs / 4 outputs 4 inputs / 3 outputs 4 inputs / 2 outputs 4 inputs 2 inputs / 2 outputs

--

4 outputs

•

3 outputs

--

AS-Interface connection

Flat cable / round cable

Flat cable

Round cable

I/O connection method

M12

M12 / M8

M12 / M8

Pin assignment

Standard / Y-II / Y

Standard / Y

Standard / Y


IP65/67/68/69K

IP65/67

IP65/67

ATEX 3D (Zone 22)

• • • Yes

--

--

•

•

Extended address mode

---

– N/A


6/59

6

AS-Interface Slaves

I/O modules for operation in the field IP67 - K60 digital I/O modules

■ Overview The K60 digital AS-Interface compact modules are characterized by optimized handling characteristics and user-friendliness. They permit the mounting times and start-up times of AS-Interface to be reduced by up to 40 %. Assembly of the K60 modules is performed with a mounting plate which accommodates the AS-Interface shaped cables. Two different mounting plates are offered for • wall mounting and • standard rail mounting. Addressing of the K60 modules is performed using an addressing socket integrated in the module. The addresses can also be assigned after installation. K60 compact modules with a maximum of four digital inputs and outputs These compact modules contain the communication electronics and the M12 standard connections for inputs and outputs. Using M12 standard connectors, a maximum of four sensors and four actuators can be simply and reliably connected to the compact module. The mounting plate and the compact module are joined together by means of a screw, with simultaneous contacting of the AS-Interface cable by the service-proven insulation piercing method.

6

K60 compact modules with a maximum of eight digital inputs These modules have eight digital inputs for connection through M12 connectors. The module requires two AS-Interface addresses for processing all eight inputs. As with every compact module, addressing can be performed through a double addressing socket.

K60 compact modules with a four digital inputs and outputs according to AS-i Specification 3.0 The new AS-i Specification 3.0 adds a number of completely new features to the AS-Interface bus system. The extended address mode (A/B addresses) enables the connection of up to 62 slaves on one AS-i network. With the extended address mode according to Specification 3.0, four outputs are now possible even with A/B slaves (instead of only three outputs possible up to now with Specification 2.1). Hence with full expansion of an AS-i network, there are now 248 inputs as well as 248 outputs available on one AS-i system. Modules with four inputs and four outputs as A/B slaves according to Specification 3.0 are also available as K60 compact modules. Please note that these modules can be used only with a new master according to AS-i Specification 3.0 (e.g.the new DP/AS-i LINK Advanced or IE/AS-i LINK PN IO) and that the cycle times for the outputs can extend to max. 20 ms. K60 data couplers An AS-Interface data coupler has been added to the K60 compact module range. Integrated in this module are two AS-i slaves which are connected to two different AS-i networks. Each of the two integrated slaves has four virtual inputs and four virtual outputs. The bidirectional data transmission of 4 data bits between two AS-i networks is thus possible in a simple and costeffective manner. The data coupler need its own address in each AS-i network. Each AS-i network works with a different cycle time depending on the number of stations. Hence two AS-i networks are not necessarily synchronous. For this reason the AS-i data coupler can be used to transmit only standard data and no safe data. K60 compact modules for use in hazardous areas (ATEX) Two versions of the K60 modules are available for use in Zone 22 hazardous areas according to Classification II 3D (dusty atmosphere, non-conductive dust). The version with four inputs and four outputs has the designation (Ex) II 3D T75 °C IP65X and the version with four inputs has the designation (Ex) II 3D T60 °C IP65X. Special conditions have to be observed for the safe operation of these devices. In particular the module must be protected by suitable measures from mechanical damage. Other conditions for safe operation see section Technical Specifications in Catalog LV 1 T.

6/60


AS-Interface Slaves



Order No.

Digital I/O modules IP67 - K60 • PNP transistor • Current carrying capacity of the inputs: 200 mA • Connection system: M12 • Modules supplied without mounting plate Type

Current carrying capacity of outputs

Slave type

Pin assignment


2A

A/B

Special

3RK2 400-1HQ00-0AA3

8 inputs

--

Standard

Y-II

3RK1 200-0DQ00-0AA3

3RK1 400-1DQ00-0AA3

A/B 4 inputs / 4 outputs

2A

A/B (Spec. 3.0)

3RK2 200-0DQ00-0AA3 Y-II

Standard 1A 4 inputs / 3 outputs

2A

4 inputs / 2 outputs 4 inputs

A/B

3RK2 400-1DQ00-0AA3 3RK1 400-1DQ00-0AA3

Standard

3RK1 400-1CQ00-0AA3

Y-II

3RK1 400-1DQ01-0AA3

Standard

3RK1 400-1DQ03-0AA3

Y-II

3RK2 400-1FQ03–0AA3

Standard

3RK1 400–1MQ00-0AA3

--

3RK1 200-0CQ00-0AA3

2x2 inputs / 2x2 outputs 1 A

Y

3RK1 400-1DQ02-0AA3

4 outputs

Y-II

3RK1 100-1CQ00-0AA3

2A

Digital I/O modules IP67 - K60; version ATEX (Ex) II 3D IP65 X • PNP transistor • Current carrying capacity of the inputs: 200 mA • Connection system: M12 • Modules supplied without mounting plate Type 4 inputs / 4 outputs

Current carrying capacity of outputs 2A

4 inputs

--

6

Slave type

Pin assignment

Standard

Y-II

3RK1 400-1DQ05-0AA3 3RK1 200-0CQ05-0AA3

Digital I/O modules IP67 – K60 data coupler Type Data coupler 4 inputs / 4 outputs (virtual)

Current carrying capacity of outputs --

Slave type

Pin assignment

Standard

--

3RK1 408-8SQ00-0AA3

Accessories Mounting plate K60 suitable for all compact modules K60 • Wall mounting

3RK1 901-0CA00


3RK1 901-0CB01

AS-Interface covering caps M12 for free M12 sockets

3RK1 901-1KA00

AS-Interface covering caps M12, tamper-proof for free M12 sockets

3RK1 901-1KA01

Sealing set • For mounting plate K60 and distribution board • Cannot be used for mounting plate K45 • One set contains one straight and one shaped seal

3RK1 902-0AR00

3RK1 901-0CA00

3RK1 901-1KA00

3RK1 901-1KA01

3RK1 902-0AR00


6/61

AS-Interface Slaves

I/O modules for operation in the field IP68 / IP69K - K60R digital I/O modules

■ Overview

■ Design Mounting The same mounting plates are used as for the K60 modules. Instead of using flat cables the K60R is connected using a 4-pole round cable with an M12 connection. With the K60R the mounting plate thus serves only as a fixture and ground terminal. Addressing Addressing is performed using the same socket as for the bus connection. Connecting the module to the 3RK1 904-2AB01 addressing unit is performed using a standard M12 cable (e.g. 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5). If the older version of the 3RK1 9042AB00 addressing unit is used, a special addressing cable (3RK1 901-3RA00) is required. When the mounting is finished, the module is connected with the addressing cable to the addressing unit and addressed. The addressing cable is then removed and the module connected to the bus line. Connection 3RX8 000-0CD42-1AF0 (5.0 m) 3RX8 000-0CE42-1AF0 (5.0 m)

Modules with degree of protection IP67 cannot be used in areas exposed to permanently high levels of humidity, in applications with drilling emulsions and cutting oils or when cleaning with high-pressure cleaners. The answer for these applications is provided by the expansion of the K60 compact modules with the K60R module with IP68/IP69K protection.

6

NSA0_00339c

The K60R modules are connected instead of the AS-Interface flat cable using a round cable with M12 cable box. The AS-Interface bus cable and the 24 V DC auxiliary power supply are routed in this case in a shared round cable. IP68 protection permits many new applications, which were impossible with the former field modules with degree of protection IP67. In applications such as filling plants or machine tools the K60R with degree of protection IP68 enables the module to be used directly in zones exposed to permanent loading by humidity. It is thus possible to make even more rigorous savings in wiring with AS-Interface. IP68 test conditions see section Tests IP68/IP69K.

K60R

K60R 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 (0.5 m) 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 (1.0 m) 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 (1.5 m)

K60R max. 1.5 m

Distribution board

Cleaning with high-pressure cleaners, such as is regularly performed in the food drinks industry for instance, is possible without difficulty (IP69K).

3RK1 901-1TR00

In applications with tow chains, many users rely on placing the AS-Interface bus cable in a round cable. With the K60R module there is a round cable connection for direct connection to a round cable. No adapter is required.

max. 5.0 m

IP67 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 3RX8 000-0CB42-1AF0 3RX8 000-0CC42-1AF0 1)

IP68

(0.5 m) (1.0 m) (1.5 m) (5.0 m)1) (5.0 m)1) plus connector 3RX8 000-0CD45 or 3RX8 000-0CE45

K60R connection options

In the IP67 environment the service-proven standard components are connected using flat cables. Spur lines are laid into the IP68 environment by means of an AS-Interface M12 feeder (3RK1 901-1NR..). The module is connected with a round cable to an M12 cable box. For this purpose the module has an M12 bus connection instead of the former addressing socket. The AS-Interface bus cable and the 24 V DC auxiliary power supply are routed together in a 4-pole round cable. There must be no ground conductor in this round cable. Connection to ground is made through the mounting plate.

6/62


AS-Interface Slaves


■ Design (continued) In the IP68 environment only cables with extruded M12 connectors may be used. These cables are available preassembled as an M12 cable plug/cable box version: • 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6: 0.5 m long • 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0: 1.0 m long • 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5: 1.5 m long To connect the distribution board and the K60R module over long distances it is also possible to use freely configurable cables with an M12 cable box and an open cable end, which are fitted with an M12 connector (straight version: 3RX8 000-0CD45, angle plug 3RX8 000-0CE45) and connected to the distribution board. This cable is available in two versions: • 3RX8 000-0CB42-1AF0: 5 m long, with M12 cable box • 3RX8 000-0CC42-1AF0: 5 m long, with M12 angle cable box To connect more than one K60R module to one spur line, the spur line can be split again using a T distributor (3RK1 9011TR00) with degree of protection IP68. Please note the following boundary conditions: • The configuration guidelines for AS-Interface apply. For all M12 connecting cables the maximum permissible current is limited to 4 A. The cross-section of these cables amounts to just 0.34 mm². For connection of the K60R modules, the aforementioned M12 connecting cables can be used for the spur lines. The voltage drop caused by the ohmic resistance (approx. 0.11 Ω/m) must be taken into account. • For round cable connections with shared AS-i and UAUX in a single cable, the following maximum lengths apply: - per spur line from feeder to module: maximum 5 m - total of all round cable segments in an AS-Interface network: maximum 20 m

Tests IP68/IP69K K60R modules were tested with the following tests: • Stricter test than IP67: 90 min at 1.8 m depth of water (IP67: 30 min at 1 m depth of water) • Salt water test: Five months in salt water, 20 cm deep, at room temperature • Test with particularly creepable oil: Five months completely under oil at room temperature • Test with drilling emulsion: Five months at room temperature (components of the drilling emulsion: Anionic and non-ionic emulsifiers, paraffinic lowaromatic mineral oil, boric acid alkanolamines, corrosion inhibitors, oil content 40 %) • Test in oil bath (Excelence 416 oil) with alternating oil bath temperature: 130 cycles of 15 to 55 °C, two months • Cleaning with a high-pressure cleaner according to IP69K: 80 to 100 bar, 10 to 15 cm distance, time per side > 30 sec, water temperature 80 °C To simulate requirements as realistically as possible the modules were artificially aged prior to the tests by 15 temperature cycles of -25/+85 °C. During the test the modules were connected to 3RX1 connecting cables. Unassigned connections were closed with 3RK1 901-1KA00 caps. Note: Sealing caps and M12 connections must be tightened with the correct torque

■ Selection and Ordering data

3RK1 400-1CR00-0AA3

Version

Order No.

Digital I/O modules IP68 / IP69K - K60R • 4 inputs / 4 outputs • IP68/IP69K • Standard assignment • Current carrying capacity: - 200 mA (inputs) - 2 A (outputs) • Standard slave • Modules supplied without mounting plate

3RK1 400-1CR00-0AA3


6/63

6

AS-Interface Slaves



Order No.

Accessories Mounting plate K60 suitable for all compact modules K60 and K60R • Wall mounting

3RK1 901-0CA00


3RK1 901-0CB01

AS-Interface M12 sealing cap for free M12 sockets

3RK1 901-1KA00

3RK1 901-0CA00

3RK1 901-1KA00 AS-Interface M12 feeder

3RX9 801-0AA00

for flat cable

on

AS-i

M12 socket

--

3RX9 801-0AA00

M12 cable box

1m

3RK1 901-1NR11

AS-i / Uaux

6

2m

3RK1 901-1NR12

M12 socket

--

3RG7 838-1DG

M12 cable box

1m

3RK1 901-1NR21

2m

3RK1 901-1NR22

--

3RK1 901-1NR00

4-fold M12 socket delivery including coupling module

3RK1 901-1NR11

cable length

3RG7 838-1DG

3RK1 901-1NR21

3RK1 901-1NR00

3RK1 901-1TR00

M12-T distribution board • IP68 • 1 x M12 connector • 2 x M12 box

3RK1 901-1TR00

M12 addressing cable • For addressing K60R modules • Required for addressing unit 3RK1 904-2AB00 only; if the latest version of the addressing unit 3RK1 904-2AB01 is used, the addressing is performed with a standard M12 cable 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5

3RK1 901-3RA00

3RK1 901-3RA00

6/64


AS-Interface Slaves


■ Overview The large industry-proven K60 compact modules are ideally complemented by the K45 compact module series. They round off the existing product range of smaller modules. The acknowledged advantages of the existing K60 compact modules can all be found in the significantly smaller K45 modules. Their base is the same size as the application modules. The mounting depth, however, is only 2/3 of that of the application module and therefore ideally fits to the compact module series. Despite these small dimensions all modules have large labeling plates and an integrated address jack.

Two mounting plates are available for the K45 compact modules: • The first mounting plate has the identical hole pattern as the K60 compact modules. This allows K60 compact modules to be combined with K45 modules in a single alignment. The ribbon cables can be easily placed into the recesses of the mounting plates. • The mounting plate for standard mounting rail fixing has the same hole pattern as the application modules. Installing the ribbon cables has become even easier. The yellow and black AS-Interface ribbon cable can be inserted into the mounting plates from the left or right regardless of the position of the coding pins. The correct polarity of the voltages applied is always ensured. Sensors and actuators are connected via M12 sockets. The 4E module can also be ordered with M8 connection sockets.


Order No.

IP67 - K45 digital I/O modules • PNP transistor • Current carrying capacity of the inputs: 200 mA • Modules supplied without mounting plate Type

4 inputs

Current carry- Slave type ing capacity of outputs -Standard

Pin assignment Standard

3RK1 400-0GQ20-0AA3 A/B

Connections

M12

3RK1 200–0CQ20–0AA3

M8 screw fitting

3RK1 200–0CT20–0AA3

M8 snap fitting

3RK1 200–0CU20–0AA3

M12

3RK2 200–0CQ20–0AA3

M8 screw fitting

3RK2 200–0CT20–0AA3

M8 snap fitting

3RK2 200–0CU20–0AA3

M12

3RK2 200–0CQ22–0AA3

2 x 2 inputs

--

A/B

Y


2 A 1)

Standard

Standard

3RK1 400–1BQ20–0AA3

2 x (1 input / 1 output)

0.2 A

Y

3RK1 400–0GQ20–0AA3

4 outputs

1A

Standard

3RK1 100–1CQ20–0AA3

3 outputs 2 outputs / 2 inputs

A/B 2A

3RK2 100–1EQ20–0AA3 3RK2 400–1BQ20–0AA3

Accessories Mounting plate K45 • For wall mounting

3RK1 901–2EA00


3RK1 901–2DA00

3RK1 901–2EA00 AS-Interface sealing caps • For free M12 sockets

3RK1 901–1KA00

• For free M8 sockets

3RK1 901–1PN00

Cable terminating piece for sealing open cable ends (shaped AS-Interface cable) in IP67

3RK1 901–1MN00

3RK1 901–1KA00

3RK1 901–1PN00

3RK1 901–1MN00 1) The typical current carrying capacity per output increases with version "E12" from 1.5 to 2 A (available since approx. 07/2003). Siemens IK PI · 2007

6/65

6

AS-Interface Slaves


■ Overview Mounting

The K20 compact module range rounds off the AS-Interface compact modules with a particularly slim design and a width of a mere 20 mm. Thanks to its extremely compact dimensions, these modules are particularly suited for handling machine applications in the field of production engineering where modules need to be arranged in the smallest of spaces.

The K20 modules are mounted using two screws. No mounting plate is required. The modules can be mounted either on the front or the side. This flexibility allows users to place them where they will be best protected and save the most space, e.g. on standard mounting rails. Addressing 3RK1 904-2AB01

The flexibility of the round cable means that it can also be used on moving machine parts without any problems. The K20 modules are also ideal for this particular task as they are extremely lightweight thanks to their non-encapsulated design.

AS-Interface: 1 ... 31 (1A ... 31B)

Many users also prefer to place the AS-Interface bus cable in a round cable for applications with tow chains. In this case, the K20 modules support direct connection to the round cable. No flat to round cable adapter is required. The K20 compact module range includes standard AS-Interface modules, as well as an ASIsafe model for the connection of failsafe sensors, such as emergency stop pushbuttons or safety door monitoring. All standard AS-Interface K20 modules support expanded address mode (A/B addresses) according to AS-Interface Specification 2.1, which enables connection of 62 stations to an AS-Interface network. The K20 module with four inputs and four outputs works in expanded address mode according to AS-Interface Specification 3.0 which, for the first time, supports four outputs with an A/B slave, thus enabling 248 inputs and 248 outputs in a fully expanded AS-Interface network. For particularly space-saving dimensions, the sensors and actuators are connected over M8 connectors. Alternatively, M12 connectors with Y assignment can be used.

6/66


ASi3

ASi+ 1

ASi3

4

3

2

4

1

ASi+ 1

NSA0_00443a

6

Robotics is yet another application area. Instead of the AS-Interface flat cable, the K20 modules are connected to AS-Interface over a round cable with M12 cable box. In this case the AS-Interface bus cable and the 24 V DC auxiliary power supply are routed in a shared round cable. This enables extremely compact installation.

Mounting the K20 modules: on the front (see left) or laterally (see right)

3RX8 000-0GF32-1AA6 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB0 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5

Addressing the K20 modules

The K20 modules are addressed using the same socket as for the bus connection. For addressing, the module is connected to the 3RK1 904-2AB01 addressing device using a standard M12 connecting cable (2 or 3-pole), e.g. 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5. If the older version of the 3RK1 904-2AB00 addressing unit is used, a special addressing cable (3RK1 901-3RA00) is required for connection to the addressing unit. After addressing, the addressing cable is then removed and the module connected to the bus line. Do not use 4 or 5-pole connecting cables for addressing.

AS-Interface Slaves


■ Overview (continued) All standard K20 modules (not ASIsafe models) support expanded address mode and can be addressed over an A or B address. This means that up to 62 Slaves can be operated on an AS-Interface network. The model with four inputs and four outputs (3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3) operates according to the new AS-Interface Specification 3.0. Specification 3.0 also supports 4 outputs for A/B slaves (instead of the 3 outputs supported by Specification 2.1). Please note, however, that this module can only be operated with a new master that complies with AS-Interface Specification 3.0 (e.g. the new DP/AS-i LINK Advanced) and that cycle times for outputs must not exceed 20 ms. Connection

A new range of AS-Interface distributors and M12 feeders are now available for simple connection of K20 modules to the AS-Interface flat cable: AS-Interface distributors Like the standard 3RK1 901-1NN00 AS-Interface distributor, the new compact 3RK1 901-1NN10 AS-Interface distributor allows the AS-Interface flat cable to be split over several strands. The compact distributors can be used for a current carrying capacity of up to 6 A. It is particularly easy to use: • Insert cable, • close and • just secure with a single captive screw. No additional seals are required for the compact distributors. The AS-Interface flat cable must always be routed through the compact distributors, i.e. it must not end in the compact distributor. For larger currents, and in the event that one of the two flat cables needs to end in the distributor, standard distributors must be used. AS-Interface M12 feeders

AS-Interface M12 feeders and distributors, closed

AS-Interface M12 feeders are also available in the same compact design as the compact distributors. These are required to adapt the AS-Interface flat cable to round cable. The spectrum includes AS-Interface M12 feeders with different cable lengths (1 and 2 m) and makes a distinction between M12 feeders for AS-i/Uaux for connection of I/O modules or AS-Interface without Uaux for connection of modules with inputs. These AS-Interface M12 feeders are just as simple to use as the AS-Interface compact distributors. The flat cable must always be routed through the compact distributors, i.e. it must not end in the compact M12 distributors. In the event that the AS-Interface flat cable is to end in the M12 feeder, the standard M12 feeder (3RX9 801-0AA00) or 4-fold-M12 feeder 3RK1 901-1NR00.

AS-Interface M12 feeders and distributors, open


6/67

6

AS-Interface Slaves


■ Overview (continued) The following table shows the various connection options for the K20 modules to the AS-Interface bus cable and the 24 V DC auxiliary voltage: Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20 AS-i without Uaux

AS-i / Uaux

4DI, M8 3RK2 200-0CT30-0AA3

2DI/2DO, M8 3RK2 400-1BT30-0AA3

4DI, M12 3RK2 200-0CQ30-0AA3

2DI/2DO, M12 3RK2 400-1BQ30-0AA3

2FDI, M12 3RK1 205-0BQ30-0AA3

4DI/4DO, M8 3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3

• plus M12 feeder with molded-on lead

NSA0_00446

NSA0_00445

K20 module

NSA0_00447

K20 module • plus M12 feeder with socket • plus separate M12 lead

M12 feeder: 3RX9 801-0AA00

M12 feeder: 3RG7 838-1DG

M12 lead: 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 (0.6 m) 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 (1.0 m) 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 (1.5 m)


• plus separate M12 lead

NSA0_00450

NSA0_00449

K20 module • plus 4-fold M12 feeder

M12 feeder: 3RK1 901-1NR00

M12 feeder: 3RK1 901-1NR00



To connect the distributor and the K20 module over cable lengths > 2m, it is also possible to use freely configurable cables with an M12 cable box and an open cable end, which are fitted with an M12 plug (straight version: 3RX8 000-0CD45, angle plug 3RX8 000-0CE45) and connected to the feeder. This cable is available in two versions: • 3RX8 000-0CB42-1AF0: 5 m long, with M12 cable box • 3RX8 000-0CC42-1AF0: 5 m long, with M12 angle cable box

3RG9 001-0AD00 3RK1 901-1NR00 3RK1 901-1NR11 3RK1 901-1NR12 3RX9 801-0AA00

NSA0_00444

6

M12 feeder: 3RK1 901-1NR21 (1 m) or 3RK1 901-1NR22 (2 m) NSA0_00448

M12 feeder: 3RK1 901-1NR11 (1 m) or 3RK1 901-1NR12 (2 m)

l<5m

To connect more than one K20 module to one spur line, the spur line can be split again using a T distributor (3RK1 901-1TR00). l<5m 3RK1 901-1TR00

l < 1,5 m

l < 1,5 m 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5

Options for connecting the K20 modules to other AS-Interface modules

6/68


AS-Interface Slaves


■ Overview (continued) • For round cable connections with shared AS-i and UAUX in a single cable, the following maximum lengths apply: - Per spur line from feeder to module: maximum 5 m - Total of all round cable segments in an AS-Interface network: maximum 20 m

NSA0_00451a

Please note the following boundary conditions: • The configuration guidelines for AS-Interface apply. For all M12 connecting cables the maximum permissible current is limited to 4 A. The cross-section of these cables amounts to just 0.34 mm². For connection of the K20 modules, the aforementioned M12 connecting cables can be used for the spur lines. The voltage drop caused by the ohmic resistance (approx. 0.11 Ω/m) must be taken into account.

≤5m ≤ 1,5 m

≤5m

6

Connection using 4-fold M12 feeder

Connection using M12 feeder

Further distribution using MT-12 T feeder

(3RK1 901-1NR00)

(3RK1 901-1NR2.)

(3RK1 901-1TR00)

(AS-i/Uaux) for I/O modules

(AS-i/Uaux) for I/O modules

Connection using M12 feeder (3RK1 901-1NR1.)

(AS-i without Uaux) for modules with inputs

Connection options for K20 modules


6/69

AS-Interface Slaves



Order No.

Digital I/O module, IP67 – K20

3RK2 200-0CT30-0AA3

Type

Current carry- Slave type ing capacity of outputs

4 inputs

--


1


1

2 safe inputs

--

A/B

Standard

Pin assignment

Connection method

Standard

M8

3RK2 200-0CT30-0AA3

Y

M12

3RK2 200-0CQ30-0AA3

Standard

M8

3RK2 400-1BT30-0AA3

Y

M12

3RK2 400-1BQ30-0AA3

Standard

M8

3RK1 400-1CT30-0AA3

A/B (Spec. 3.0) Standard

3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3 Y-II

M12

3RK1 205-0BQ30-0AA3

Accessories AS-Interface sealing caps • For free M12 sockets

3RK1 901-1KA00

• For free M8 sockets

3RK1 901-1PN00

3RK1 901-1KA00

6

3RK1 901-1PN00 AS-Interface standard distributor, for AS-Interface flat cable • Current carrying capacity up to 7 A • Delivery includes special mounting plate for wall and standard rail mounting • Seals (3RK1 902-0AR00) are required only if a cable is to be terminated in the distributor and must be ordered separately

3RK1 901-1NN00

AS-Interface compact distributor, for AS-Interface flat cable current carrying capacity of up to 6 A

3RK1 901-1NN10

3RK1 901-1NN00

3RK1 901-1NN10

6/70


AS-Interface Slaves



Order No.

AS-Interface M12 feeder for flat cable

for

AS-i

M12 socket

--

3RX9 801-0AA00

M12 cable box

1m

3RK1 901-1NR11

2m

3RK1 901-1NR12

M12 socket

--

3RG7 838-1DG

M12 cable box

1m

3RK1 901-1NR21

2m

3RK1 901-1NR22

3RX9 801-0AA00

AS-i / Uaux

cable length

-4-fold M12 socket delivery includes coupling module

3RK1 901-1NR00

3RK1 901-1NR11

3RG7 838-1DG

6 3RK1 901-1NR21

3RK1 901-1NR00

3RK1 901-1TR00

M12-T distributors • IP68 • 1 x M12 connector • 2 x M12 box

3RK1 901-1TR00

M12 Y-shaped coupler plugs for connection of two sensors to an M12 socket with Y-assignment

6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0

Addressing cable, with jack plug, to M12 • For addressing K20 modules • Only required for addressing unit 3RK1 904-2AB00 • If the latest version of the 3RK1 904-2AB01 addressing unit is being used, addressing is executed over the standard 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5 M12 cable

3RK1 901-3RA00

6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0

3RK1 901-3RA00

Note: For plug connectors and cables, see • Catalog FS 10, section Proximity Switches / Accessories / Plug Connectors or • Internet (www.siemens.de/as-interface)


6/71

AS-Interface Slaves

I/O modules for operation in the field IP67 digital I/O modules – Application modules

■ Overview The AS-Interface application modules are the first module generation for AS-Interface. The K45 and K60 modules of the compact series are further developed and enhanced modules. We recommend that in the future the application modules will be replaced with the K45 compact modules. For existing systems and as replacement parts, the application modules will, however, still be available. Additional information is available in the Internet under: http://mall.ad.siemens.com

Advantages of the K45 compact modules The K45 compact modules offer further advantages over the functionality of the application modules: • An integrated addressing socket allows the module to be addressed while built-in • Time savings on installing the module: Hinging method means they are mounted with just one screw • Comprehensive diagnostics thanks to a LED on the module (display of null address, no communication with master, overload, etc.) • Insertion of the AS-Interface flat cable regardless of the position of the protruding lug • More compact dimensions • Versions with M12 and M8 connection sockets permit direct connection of all sensors • Modules in A/B technology permit up to 62 stations to be connected to an AS-Interface network

Application module decoding table --> K45 Application module

6

Comparison typ K45

Order No.

Design

Order No.

Design

3RG9 001-0AA00

4 inputs (100 mA)

3RK1 200-0CQ20-0AA3

4 inputs (200 mA)

3RG9 001-0AG00

4 inputs (200 mA)

3RK1 200-0CQ20-0AA3

4 inputs (200 mA)

3RG9 001-0AH00

2 x 2 inputs

3RK2 200-0CQ22-0AA3

2 x 2 inputs A/B slave

3RG9 001-0AC00

2 inputs / 2 outputs Relay outputs

3RK1 400-1BQ20-0AA3

2 inputs / 2 outputs Electronic outputs

3RG9 001-0CC00


3RK1 400-1BQ20-0AA3


3RG9 001-0AM00

2 inputs / 2 outputs Electronic outputs Uaux via M12 plug

3RK1 400-1BQ20-0AA3

2 inputs / 2 outputs Electronic outputs Uaux via black flat cable

3RG9 001-0AJ00

2 x (1 input / 1 output) I/O supply via AS-Interface cable

3RK1 400-0GQ20-0AA3

2 x (1 input / 1 output) I/O supply via AS-Interface cable

3RG9 001-0AB00

4 outputs Relay outputs

3RK1 100-1CQ20-0AA3

4 outputs Electronic outputs

3RG9 001-0AL00

4 outputs Uaux via M12 plug

3RK1 100-1CQ20-0AA3

4 outputs Uaux via black flat cable

3RG9 001-0CB00


3RK1 100-1CQ20-0AA3


Note: When using the K45 module instead of coupling modules 3RG9 010-0AA00 and 3RG9 030-0AA00, the K45 mounting plates 3RK1 901-2EA00 (wall mounting) or 3RK1 901-2DA00 (mounting onto standard rails) are required.

6/72


AS-Interface Slaves

I/O modules for operation in the field IP67 - K60 analog I/O modules

■ Overview The analog modules are subdivided into five groups: • Input module for sensor with current signal • Input module for sensor with voltage signal • Input module for temperature sensor • Output module for current actuators • Output module for voltage actuators The input modules according to Profile 7.3/7.4 are available as modules with two or four input channels. In addition, the twochannel module can be adjusted for use with only one input channel which allows very fast transmission times to be achieved. The module is adjusted with a jumper plug on socket 3. Twice as fast transmission times than with Profile 7.3/7.4 can be achieved with analog modules according to Profile 7.A.9. Here, among other things, it can be chosen via the ID1 code if the module is to be run in one- or two-channel mode. The output modules are supplied as two-channel modules as standard. AS-Interface analog modules of the K60 compact series acquire or supply analog signals locally. These modules are connected to the higher-level control via an AS-Interface master in accordance with Specification 2.1 or Specification 3.0.

The input and output channels are electrically isolated with respect to the AS-Interface network. If sensors which require more power are to be connected, additional power can be supplied via the auxiliary voltage in addition to the internal supply. The manual describes the modules in great detail with their technical specifications and gives detailed information on how to operate them. The manual concludes by giving several examples of function blocks.

Data transfer according to analog profile 7.3/7.4

CPU

AS-Interface Master

Seven AS-Interface cycles (max. 5 ms each)

Conversion Analog module

Analog value

G_NSA0_XX_00181

One User program cycle with system function call

Note: Values can be accesses with SFC58, SFC59 integrated standard function blocks

With analog profile 7.3/7.4, at least seven AS-Interface cycles must be passed through before transmission is completed. This requires the use of a master according to Extended Specification V2.1. With input modules the complete analog value is then available in the AS-Interface master, so that preprocessing is performed in the master.

This produces a total of the following maximum times until the analog value with profile 7.3/7.4 is available (if preset to: smoothing function deactivated; line filter 50 Hz):

Conversion and transmission time

1 channel

2 channels

4 channels

max. 95 ms

max. 235 ms

max. 435 ms

With the next system function call the user program brings the analog value as one value into the user program. This means that the analog value is updated very quickly. The analog value transmission applies in reverse order for the output modules as well.


6/73

6

AS-Interface Slaves


■ Overview (continued) Data transfer according to analog profile 7.A.9

CPU

* **

6

AS-Interface Master

Three or four * AS-Interface cycles (max. 5 ms or 10 ms each** )

depending on resolution with 12 or 14 bit with A/B technology

With analog profile 7.A.9, only 3 or 4 AS-Interface cycles are required for data transfer. This requires the use of a master that complies with Specification 3.0.

Conversion Analog module

Analog value

G_NSA0_XX_00436

One user program cycle with system function call

Please refer to the manual for details of maximum times until the analog value witih profile 7.A.9 is available, depending on the selected mode (resolution, no. of channels, A/B technology).

■ Benefits • Analog modules are just as easy to integrate in AS-Interface as digital modules • Analog values can be easily detected and issued locally • Preprocessing of the analog value transmission in the master enables rapid evaluation of the analog values • Up to four values can be detected using one analog module • Extremely fast transmission and conversion of analog values thanks to the new option for changing over to single-channel operation

6/74


In addition, Specification 3.0 now also offers: • A/B technology, now also with analog modules • On average, double fast transmission times (only 3 or 4 cycles, depending on the resolution selected), total processing times can be found in the manual • Variable adjustable mode: 12 or 14-bit resolution, 1 or 2-channel, selectable over the ID1 code • Extra simple handling of analog processing with masters of Specification 3.0, the DP/AS-i Link Advanced.

AS-Interface Slaves



Order No.

IP67 - K60 analog I/O modules, analog profile 7.3 • Slave type: Standard • Modules supplied without mounting plate Inputs

Type

Current 1 or 2 inputs (selectable using jumper plug at socket 3)

Measuring range 4 ... 20 mA or ± 20 mA (selectable)

3RK1 207-1BQ40-0AA3

Voltage

± 10 V or 1 ... 5 V (selectable)

3RK1 207-2BQ40-0AA3

Thermal resistance

Pt 100 or Ni 100 or 0 ... 600 Ω (selectable)

3RK1 207-3BQ40-0AA3

Current

4 ... 20 mA or ± 20 mA (selectable)

3RK1 207-1BQ44-0AA3

Voltage


3RK1 207-2BQ44-0AA3

Thermal resistance

Pt 100 or Ni 100 or 0 ... 600 Ω (selectable)

3RK1 207-3BQ44-0AA3

Outputs

Type

Output range

2 outputs

Current for 2-wire actuators

4 ... 20 mA or ± 20 mA or 0 ... 20 mA (selectable)

3RK1 107-1BQ40-0AA3

Voltage for 2-wire actuators

± 10 V or 0 ... 10 V or 1 ... 5 V (selectable)

3RK1 107-2BQ40-0AA3

3RK1 207-1BQ44-0AA3

4 inputs

6

IP67 - K60 analog I/O modules, analog profile 7.A.9 • Slave type: A/B (specification 3.0) • Modules supplied without mounting plate

3RK2 207-2BQ50-0AA3

Inputs

Type

Measuring range

1 or 2 inputs (variably adjustable)

Current

4 ... 20 mA or ± 20 mA (selectable)

3RK2 207-1BQ50-0AA3

Voltage


3RK2 207-2BQ50-0AA3


6/75

AS-Interface Slaves



Order No.

Accessories Manual, German only available to download on the Internet: http://www.siemens.de/automation/manuals K60 mounting plates • Wall mounting

3RK1 901-0CA00


3RK1 901-0CB01

M12 sealing caps

3RK1 901-1KA00

Sealing sets • For mounting plate K60 and distributor • Cannot be used for mounting plate K45 • One set contains one straight and one shaped seal

3RK1 902-0AR00

Jumper plug For changing over the 2-channel input modules

3RK1 901-1AA00

3RK1 901-0CA00

3RK1 901-1KA00

6

3RK1 902-0AR00

3RK1 901-1AA00

Additional information is available in the Internet under: http://mall.ad.siemens.com

6/76


AS-Interface Slaves

IP20 I/O modules for operation in the control cabinet Introduction

■ Overview

SlimLine S22.5/S45

Flat modules

For AS-Interface applications inside cabinets there are various module series for the most diverse requirements: • SlimLine S22.5 • SlimLine S45 • F90 modules • Flat modules All modules of these series can be snap-mounted directly on a standard mounting rail or be fastened using screws. AS-Interface modules in IP20 have direct terminals for the AS-Interface cables and therefore do not require a lower part.

F90 modules Series

Spectrum

Mounting on 35 mm standard mounting rail according to DIN EN 50022

Wall mounting using push-in lugs (Order No.: 3RP1 903)

Other possibilities

SlimLine S22.5

• 4I (standard and A/B modules) • 4A • 2I/2O (steady-state/relay outputs) • Counters1) • Ground fault detection module1)

•

•

--

SlimLine S45

• 4I/4O (steady-state/relay outputs) • 4I/4O with floating I/Os • 4I/3O (A/B modules) • 4I/4O (A/B modules Spec. 3.0)

•

•

--

F90 modules

• 4I/4O (screw-type terminal connection) • 4I/4O (connection using Combicon connector) • 16I

•

--

--

Flat modules

• 4I/4O (screw-type terminal connection)

--

--

Integrated lugs for screw fixing

1) More information about these modules: • See Catalog LV 1 / chapter Systems / section AS-Interface / Slaves / Modules with Special Functions • See A&D Mall / section Low-Voltage Controls / SIRIUS Industrial Controls / Systems / AS-Interface / Slaves / Modules with Special Functions


6/77

6

AS-Interface Slaves

IP20 I/O modules for operation in the control cabinet SlimLine

■ Overview SlimLine modules of the S22.5 and S45 series The AS-Interface series of modules for the "SlimLine" cabinet with IP20 protection creates space in the cabinet and in distributed local boxes. For these modules the priority was placed on a narrow type of construction. They have a width of only 22.5 mm or 45 mm. Standard sensors/actuators and the AS-Interface cable can be connected using screw-type or spring-loaded terminals. Integrated adapters enable mounting on a standard mounting rail. Disassembly from the standard mounting rail is quick and easy and requires no tools. With an additional accessory, the modules can also be screwed on. All modules are fitted at the front with LEDs which indicate the module’s status. An addressing socket integrated at the front enables the module to be addressed also when it is installed. In addition to the digital input/output modules there are modules of construction type S22.5 with special functions. These include: • Counter module • Ground fault detection module

6

6/78


More information about these modules, see: • Catalog LV 1 / chapter Systems / section AS-Interface / Slaves / Modules with Special Functions • A&D Mall: section Low-Voltage Controls / SIRIUS Industrial Controls / Systems / AS-Interface / Slaves / Modules with Special Functions The new AS-Interface Specification 3.0 adds a number of completely new features to AS-Interface bus system. The extended address mode (A/B addresses) enables the connection of up to 62 slaves on one AS-Interface network. With the extended address mode according to Specification 3.0, four outputs are now possible for the first time even with A/B slaves (instead of only three outputs possible up to now with Specification 2.1). Hence with full expansion of an AS-Interface network, there are now 248 inputs as well as 248 outputs available on one AS-Interface system. Modules with four inputs and four outputs as A/B slaves according to Specification 3.0 are also available as SlimLine modules S45. Note: Please note that the modules according to Specification 3.0 can be used only with a new master according to AS-Interface Specification 3.0 (e.g. the new DP/AS-i LINK Advanced or IE/AS-i LINK PN IO) and that the cycle times for the outputs can extend to max. 20 ms.

AS-Interface Slaves

IP20 I/O modules for operation in the control cabinet SlimLine


Order No.

SlimLine S22.5 modules Inputs: PNP transistor Type

Connection ter- Slave type minals

4 inputs

Screw

Standard

Inputs

Outputs

2-wire

--

2 and 3-wire Spring

A/B slave

2 and 3-wire

Standard

2-wire

3RK1 200-0CE00-0AA2

3RK1 200-0CE00-0AA2 3RK1 200-0CE02-0AA2 3RK2 200-0CE02-0AA2

--

2 and 3-wire

3RK1 200-0CG00-0AA2 3RK1 200-0CG02-0AA2

A/B slave

2 and 3-wire

2 inputs / 2 out- Screw puts

Standard

2-wire

PNP transistor 2A

3RK1 400-0BE00-0AA2

Relays

3RK1 402-0BE00-0AA2

Spring

Standard

2-wire

PNP transistor 2A

3RK1 400-0BG00-0AA2

Relays

3RK1 402-0BG00-0AA2

Screw

Standard

--

PNP transistor 1A

3RK1 100-1CE00-0AA2

Spring

Standard

--

PNP transistor 1A

3RK1 100-1CG00-0AA2

Inputs

Outputs

2 and 3-wire

PNP transistor 1A

3RK1 400-1CE00-0AA2

PNP transistor 2A

3RK1 400-1CE01-0AA2

PNP transistor 1A floating

3RK1 402-3CE01-0AA2

4 outputs

3RK2 200-0CG02-0AA2

SlimLine S45 modules Inputs: PNP transistor Type

Connection ter- Slave type minals


Standard

2- and 3-wire floating

3RK1 400-1CE00-0AA2

Spring

6

2 and 3-wire

Relays

3RK1 402-3CE00-0AA2

A/B (Spec. 3.0)

2 and 3-wire

PNP transistor 2A

3RK2 400-1CE01-0AA2

Standard

2 and 3-wire

PNP transistor 1A

3RK1 400-1CG00-0AA2

PNP transistor 2A

3RK1 400-1CG01-0AA2

PNP transistor 1 A floating

3RK1 402-3CG01-0AA2

2- and 3-wire floating 2 and 3-wire

Relays

3RK1 402-3CG00-0AA2

A/B (Spec. 3.0)

2 and 3-wire

PNP transistor 2A

3RK2 400-1CG01-0AA2


A/B slave

2 and 3-wire

PNP transistor 2A

3RK2 400-1FE00-0AA2

Spring

A/B slave

2 and 3-wire

PNP transistor 2A

3RK2 400-1FG00-0AA2

Accessories Sealable cap to secure against unauthorized addressing

3RP1 902

Push-in lug for screw mounting

3RP1 903

SlimLine opening tools • For all devices with spring-loaded terminal connections up to max. 1.5 mm2 conductor cross-section • Partially insulated

8WA2 807


6/79

AS-Interface Slaves

IP20 I/O modules for operation in the control cabinet Module F90


Order No.

Module F90 standard slave Type

Connection

4 inputs / 4 out- Screw terminals puts 3RG9 002-0DB00

Inputs

Outputs

2- and 3-wire PNP transistor

PNP transistor 1A

3RG9 002-0DB00

PNP transistor 2A

3RG9 002-0DA00

PNP transistor 1A

3RG9 004-0DB00

PNP transistor 2A

3RG9 004-0DA00

--

3RG9 002-0DE00

2- and 3-wire PNP transistor floating Combicon

2- and 3-wire PNP transistor 2- and 3-wire PNP transistor floating

16 inputs

Screw terminals

PNP transistor

Combicon

3RG9 002-0DC00

3RG9 004-0DC00

3RG9 004-0DE00

Accessories

6

Combicon plug set • For 4I/4O modules with Combicon connection • One set comprises: - 4 x 5-pole plug for connection - Standard sensors/actuators - 2 x 4-pole plug for AS-Interface and external auxiliary voltage 1) Summation current for all inputs and outputs max. 200 mA.

6/80


3RX9 810-0AA00

AS-Interface Slaves

IP20 I/O modules for operation in the control cabinet Flat module


Order No.

Flat module • 4 inputs / 4 outputs • 200 mA for all I/Os • Screw-type terminals

3RK1 400-0CE00-0AA3

3RK1 400-0CE00-0AA3

6


6/81

AS-Interface Slaves

Special integrated solutions

AS-Interface communication modules

■ Overview AS-Interface communication module for printed-circuit board installation 3RK1 400-0CD00-0AA3

AS-Interface communication module for printed-circuit board installation 3RG9 005-0SA00 + U

NC + IN1 OUT1 0 IN2 OUT2 0 IN3 OUT3 0 IN4 OUT4 0 + PROG ASI– ASI+

aux

NC + IN1 OUT1 0 IN2 OUT2 0 IN3 OUT3 0 IN4 OUT4 0 + ASIASI+

NSA0_00078a NSA0_00080a

With the 4I/4O module for printed-circuit board mounting it is possible for up to four mechanical contacts to be queried or indicator lights to be operated, the necessary power being provided by the AS-Interface system (yellow AS-Interface cable). Note: If the switching outputs are overloaded, the module does not respond to invoking by a master.

6

AS-Interface communication module for printed-circuit board installation 3RK1 400-0CD01-0AA3 + U aux NC + IN1 OUT1 0 IN2 OUT2 0 IN3 OUT3 0 IN4 OUT4 0 + ASI– ASI+ NSA0_00079a

With the 4I/4O module for printed-circuit board mounting it is possible for up to four mechanical contacts to be queried or indicator lights to be operated, the necessary power for the inputs and outputs being provided from the auxiliary voltage (24 V PELV). If (+) is connected to UAux + and (NC) to UAux -, the outputs are not short-circuit and overload resistant; if UAux - is connected to (0), the outputs are overload and short-circuit resistant (maximum aggregate current 200 mA). In this case the module does not respond even to invoking by a master when the switching outputs are overloaded.

6/82


With the 4I/4O module for printed-circuit board mounting it is possible for up to four mechanical contacts to be queried or indicator lights to be operated, the power for inputs and outputs being provided from an auxiliary voltage (24 V PELV). If (+) is connected to UAux + and (NC) to UAux -, the outputs are not short-circuit and overload resistant; if UAux - is connected to (0), the outputs are overload and short-circuit resistant (maximum aggregate current 200 mA). In this case the module does not respond even to invoking by a master when the switching outputs are overloaded.

AS-Interface Slaves

Special integrated solutions

AS-Interface communication modules

■ Overview (continued) AS-Interface communication module for printed-circuit board installation 3RK1 400-1CD00-0AA2

AS-Interface communication module for printed-circuit board installation 3RK1 200-0CD00-0AA2

Connection

Connection pad 1)

Connection

Connection pad 1)

ASi+

27, 29

ASi+

27, 29

ASi-

28, 30

ASi-

28, 30

Sensor+

17, 18, 23, 24

Sensor+

17, 18, 23, 24

Sensor-

13, 14, 19, 20

Sensor-

13, 14, 19, 20

IN1

21

IN1

21

IN2

22

IN2

22

IN3

15

IN3

15

IN4

16

IN4

16

U Aux + (L24+)

2, 4

Not assigned

U Aux - (M24)

1, 3

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 25, 26

OUT1

9

1) Note: Pad numbering, see section Dimensional Drawings

OUT2

10

OUT3

5

OUT4

6

With the 4I/4O module for printed-circuit board mounting it is possible for up to four mechanical contacts or 3-wire sensors to be connected, the power for inputs being provided from AS-Interface cable.

OUT-

7, 8

Not assigned

11, 12, 25, 26

1) Note: Pad numbering, see section Dimensional Drawings

With the 4I/4O module for printed-circuit board mounting it is possible for up to four mechanical contacts or 3-wire sensors according to IEC 947-5-2 to be connected or indicator lights to be operated, the power for the short-circuit resistant solid-state switching outputs being provided from an auxiliary voltage (24 V PELV).

Installation is very easy using a "Card Edge Board-to-BoardConnector". This connector can be ordered for vertical and horizontal mounting from the company AMP, for example: • 180° version for vertical mounting (AMP): Order No. 530843-2 • 90° version for horizontal mounting (AMP): Order No. 650118-1 If the inputs are loaded with more than 200 mA, the module does not respond to invoking by a master.

Installation is very easy using a "Card Edge Board-to-BoardConnector". This connector can be ordered for vertical and horizontal mounting from AMP, for example: • 180° version for vertical mounting (AMP): Order No. 530843-2 • 90° version for horizontal mounting (AMP): Order No. 650118-1 If the inputs are loaded with more than 200 mA, the module does not respond to invoking by a master.


Order No.

4 inputs / 4 outputs • Supply of I/Os using AS-Interface cable (max. 200 mA) printed-circuit board with solder pins, protected by enclosure • Supply of I/Os using external auxiliary voltage (24 V PELV) - Printed-circuit board with solder pins, protected by enclosure - Printed-circuit board with solder pins for horizontal mounting

3RK1 400-0CD00-0AA3

3RK1 400-0CD00-0AA3

3RK1 400-0CD01-0AA3 3RG9 005-0SA00

• Supply of outputs using external auxiliary voltage (24 V PELV) Printed-circuit board with gold-plated direct connector for 30-pole male connector socket for simple installation with direct connector

3RK1 400-1CD00-0AA2

4 inputs • Printed-circuit board with gold-plated direct connector for 30-pole male connector socket • For simple installation with direct connector

3RK1 200-0CD00-0AA2

3RG9 005-0SA00


6/83

6

AS-Interface Slaves

Modules with special functions Counter modules

■ Overview This module is used to send hexadecimally coded count values (LSB=D0, MSB=D3) to a higher level controller. The count value is increased by one for each valid count pulse at terminal 8. Beginning at 0, the module counts up to 15 and then begins again at 0. The controller adopts the current value and determines the number of pulses between two host invocations through subtraction from the previous value. The total number of count pulses is determined by adding these differences. For the values sent to be unambiguous, no more than 15 count values are allowed between two host invocations or AS-Interface master invocations at terminal 8. The maximum permissible transmission frequency is calculated from these times:

If the time criterion stipulated in the graph is violated, the count value is rejected. The counter is active only for the reset parameter P2 (default). The counter is deleted when P2 is set, and the incoming count pulses are not registered until after P2 is reset again. Note: A customized function block is necessary or must be programmed. ASi+ ASi-

fTRmax = 15 / Tmax

Terminal 4: Bus connection ASi+ Terminal 5: Bus connection ASiTerminal 6: unused

ASi

Tmax : maximum possible transmission time from the slave to the host

ADDR

Another condition for the maximum frequency is the pulse shaped required. For the counter to accept a pulse as valid, a Low must have been applied at the input for at least 300 µs and a High for at least 1 ms. This results in a controller-independent maximum frequency of fCmax = 1 / 1.3 ms = 769 Hz for the counter module (see following graph). +

6

IN1

-

NSA0_00085

IN1

Terminal 7: Sensor supply+ Terminal 8: Counter input Terminal 9: Sensor supply-

Connection options U

IN 1

N S A 0 0 0 8 4

³ 1 m s

³ 3 0 0 s

t

Time criteria for counter modules


Order No.

Counter module • With screw-type terminal connection

3RK1 200-0CE03-0AA2

• With spring-loaded terminal connection

3RK1 200-0CG03-0AA2

3RK1 200-0CE03-0AA2

3RK1 200-0CG03-0AA2

6/84


AS-Interface Slaves

Modules with special functions Ground fault detection modules

■ Overview "... ground faults must neither result in unintended startup, in dangerous movements of a machine, nor must they prevent its shutdown (EN 60204, Part 1 or DIN VDE 0113)" The AS-Interface ground fault detection module is used to fulfill these requirements. With this module from the SlimLine series, ground faults in AS-Interface systems can be detected and signaled safely.

The following ground faults are detected: • Ground fault from AS-i "+" • Ground fault from AS-i "-" • Ground faults of sensors and actuators which are supplied with AS-Interface power. One module is sufficient per AS-Interface network.


Order No.

Ground fault detection module • With screw-type terminal connection

3RK1 408-8KE00-0AA2

• With spring-loaded terminal connection

3RK1 408-8KG00-0AA2

3RK1 408-8KE00-0AA2

6


6/85

AS-Interface Slaves

Modules with special functions Overvoltage protection module

■ Overview The AS-Interface overvoltage protection module protects downstream AS-Interface devices or individual sections in AS-Interface networks from conducted overvoltages which can be caused by switching operations and remote lightning strikes. The location of the overvoltage protection module forms within the lightning protection zone concept the transition from zone 1 to 2/3. Direct lightning strikes must be coped with using additional protective measures at the transitions from lightning protection zone 0A to 1.

Rated discharge current Isn The rated discharge current is the peak value of a surge current with waveform 8/20 microseconds, for which the overvoltage protection module is rated in accordance with a specific test program. With waveform 8/20, 100% of the value is achieved after 8 microseconds and 50% after 20 microseconds. Protection level Up

With the AS-Interface overvoltage protection module it is now also possible to integrate AS-Interface in the overall lightning protection concept of a plant or machine.

The protection level of an overvoltage protection module is the highest momentary value of the voltage at the terminals, established in individual tests.

The module has the same type of construction, connection and degree of protection (IP67) as the AS-Interface user modules. It is a passive module without AS-i IC and as such does not need its own address on the AS-Interface network.

The protection level characterizes the capability of an overvoltage protection module to limit overvoltages to a residual level.

Connection to an AS-Interface system is effected through the FK-E or PG-E coupling module. Through use of the EEMS interface, the AS-Interface cable and the auxiliary voltage cable can be protected from overvoltage.

An FK-E or PG-E coupling module is required for connection of the AS-Interface cable and the auxiliary power supply cable.

Accessories

Overvoltages are discharged through a ground cable with a green/yellow oil-proof outer sheath. This cable is fixed in the module and must be connected with low resistance to the system’s ground.

6

Configuration guidelines

ASInterface

OVP

Application

ASInterface

Application Device with earth connection OVP = Overvoltage protection

The grounding of protection modules and the units to be protected must be effected through a shared grounding point (equipotential bonding). If insulated devices are protected, their mounts must be included in the grounding points.

6/86


NSA0_00093a

Device without earth connection → Earthing of the mounting plate Mounting plate

AS-Interface Slaves

Modules with special functions Overvoltage protection module

■ Overview (continued) Sample application Zone 1

OVP A

Zone 2 ASInterface

ASInterface

Zone 1 ASInterface

ASInterface

OVP B

protected range

Protection approx. 0.5m to the left

Equipotential bonding (system earth)

Protection approx. 5m to the right

NSA0_00092a

OVP = Overvoltage protection

Sample application for overvoltage protection modules


Order No.

Overvoltage protection module

3RK1 901-1GA00

6 3RK1 901-1GA00


6/87

AS-Interface Slaves

IP65/67 Motor Starters and Load Feeders Compact starters (400 V AC)

■ Overview EDS/ERS compact starters (solid-state) The solid-state compact starters EDS (direct-on-line starter) and ERS (reversing starter) consist of a solid-state overload relay and a solid-state circuit-breaker unit. The advantages of these solid-state compact starters are the broad limits of the setting range for overload protection (the power range up to 2.2 kW at 400/500 V AC is covered with just 2 versions), the fact that the solid-state contact elements in the power section are non-wearing, current detection (used for monitoring the energy connector), emergency operation in the event of an overload as well as remote resetting through the AS-Interface after overload tripping. The ERS compact starter is designed for direct start in reversing duty. The solid-state overload protection and the shutdown response in the event of overload can be adjusted directly at the device. Version with brake contact

6

The AS-Interface compact starter is a load feeder with IP65 degree of protection, which is fully prewired inside, for switching and protecting any three-phase loads up to 5.5 kW at 400/500 V AC (electromechanical compact starter) or up to 2.2 kW (solidstate compact starter) – mostly standard induction motors in direct start and reversing duty. It consists either of an electromechanical controlgear combination or a solid-state overload relay and circuit-breaker unit. The overload or short-circuit protection is located below a sealable, transparent cover and is therefore available for diagnostics. Two LEDs are provided to the left of the cover for diagnostic purposes for the AS-Interface and the auxiliary power. It is not possible for live parts to be touched even when the cover is open. The control elements are activated through the integrated outputs. The status of the device is scanned through the inputs, e.g. checkbacks from the auxiliary contacts of the circuitbreaker and contactor(s). A further input is used to detect the operating state of the optional hand-held device. The three power connectors are used to feed and loop through to the load supply voltage (power bus) and to connect to the load itself. Prefabricated power supply lines can be used to connect compact starters which are directly adjacent to each other. Prefabricated power supply lines can be used to connect compact starters which are directly adjacent to each other. The maximum number of starters that can be supplied via a power supply cable is limited by the maximum permissible total current (up to max. 4 mm2 corresponds to ~ 35 A). DS/RS compact starters (electromechanical) The electromechanical compact starters consist of a conventional controlgear combination with a SIRIUS circuit-breaker for protection against short-circuits and overloading and SIRIUS contactor(s) for normal switching. The advantages of the electromechanical starters are the reliable isolation during disconnection and tripping, the integrated fuseless protection against short-circuits and the favorable price. What is more, direct currents can also be switched with the electromechanical starters. Configuring note: In the case of temperature-critical applications, we recommend operation in the lower setting range of the circuit-breaker.

6/88


All compact starters are available optionally with a separately activated brake contact for electrically operated motor brakes. For externally fed motor brakes, 24 V DC is supplied jointly with the load voltage through the power connector on -X1. It is looped through via -X3 for supplying the next compact starter on -X1. The 24 V DC supply for the brakes is only bridged in those devices equipped with a brake contact. At the project planning stage, it is important to ensure that these starters are located alongside each other. All compact starters with a brake contact for 500 V DC can be equipped with an AC 400 brake contact. Hand-held device The hand-held device enables the compact starter to be operated locally and autonomously, providing that the auxiliary voltage supply is connected. Thus, assuming that the automation level is functioning correctly, local switching operations can be carried out in addition to normal manual operations in the event of a programmable controller / bus system failure (emergency mode) or during test runs before commissioning, e.g. for testing the direction of rotation of the motor. The hand-held device can be connected to the compact starter by means of a connecting cable through a socket underneath the transparent cover. Spare inputs The compact starters are also equipped with two spare inputs. The M12 socket is a "Y" connector. The signal inputs are applied to PIN 2 and 4. In this manner, it is possible, for example, to connect an optical proximity switch that supplies a signal and the "fouling" alarm. A "T" adapter can be used to split the signal inputs onto two M12 sockets. Compact starters modified in this way offer additional advantages. At no extra cost, it is possible to save AS-i addresses, reduce the space requirement and to build up logical groupings.

AS-Interface Slaves


■ Selection and Ordering data Order No.

N S A 0_00098

Version EDS compact starters Solid-state direct-on-line starter with two spare digital inputs

3RK1 322-@@S12-0AA@

ERS compact starters Solid-state reversing starter with two spare digital inputs

3RK1 322-@@S12-1AA@

Order No. Supplement for Three-phase motor 4-pole at 400 V AC standard output P


kW

A

0.18 to 0.8

0.6 to 2.18

0A

0.75 to 2.2

2.0 to 5.95

0B

DS compact starters Electromechanical direct-on-line starter, with two spare digital inputs

3RK1 322-@@S02-0AA@

RS compact starters Electromechanical reversing starter, with two spare digital inputs

3RK1 322-@@S02-1AA@

Order No. Supplement for Three-phase motor 4-pole at 400 V AC standard output P


kW

A

<0.06

0.14 to 0.20

0.06 0.09 0.10 0.12

0.18 to 0.25 0.22 to 0.32 0.28 to 0.40 0.35 to 0.50

0.18

0.45 to 0.63

0.21 0.25 0.37 0.55

0.55 to 0.80 0.70 to 1.0 0.9 to 1.25 1.1 to 1.6

0.75

1.4 to 2.0

0.90 1.1 1.5 1.9

1.8 to 2.5 2.2 to 3.2 2.8 to 4.0 3.5 to 5.0

2.2

4.5 to 6.3

3.0 4.0 5.5

5.5 to 8.0 7.0 to 10 9.0 to 12

0B 0C 0D 0E 0F

6

0G 0H 0J 0K 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 1G 1H 1J 1K

Additional price Standard version

0

With brake contact for 24 V DC/3 A external power supply

1

With brake contact for 400 V AC/0.5 A infeed for brake rectifier

3

With brake contact for DC-side switching of the brake with 500 V DC/0.2 A

4

Accessories for 24 V DC, M12 plugs

6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0

M12 coupler plug for connecting actuators or sensors 5-pole

3RX8 000-0CD55

M12 angular coupler plug for connecting actuators or sensors 5-pole

3RX8 000-0CE55

M12 Y-shaped coupler plug for connecting two sensors with a single cable 5-pole

6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0

VM12 covering caps for closing unused input or output sockets (each set contains ten sealing caps)

3RX8 000-0JA00


6/89

AS-Interface Slaves



Order No.

Accessories for AS-Interface compact starter (Han Q 8/0)

3RK1 902-0CA00

3RK1 902-0CC00

3RK1 902-0AH00

6

Connector set for power infeed, 9-pole Consisting of: 1 connector housing with Pg 16 cable gland, socket holder, 9-pole, 6 contact sockets • Suitable for cable 4 × 2.5 mm2/6 × 2.5 mm2

3RK1 902-0CA00

• Suitable for cable 4 × 4 mm2/6 × 4 mm2

3RK1 902-0CB00

Connector set for power transmission, 9-pole Consisting of: 1 connector housing with Pg 16 cable gland, 1 pin holder, 9-pole, 6 contact pins • Suitable for cable 4 × 2.5 mm2/6 × 2.5 mm22

3RK1 902-0CC00

• Suitable for cable 4 × 4 mm2/6 × 4 mm2

3RK1 902-0CD00

Connector set for motor connection, 1.5 mm2, 9-pole Consisting of: 1 connector housing with Pg 16 cable gland, 1 pin holder, 9-pole, 8 contact pins 1.5 mm2

3RK1 902-0CE00

Sealing cap, for 9-pole power socket (-X3) • 1 set contains 1 unit

3RK1 902-0CK00

• 1 set contains 10 unit

3RK1 902-0CJ00

Power connecting cable, 9-pole • 6 × 4 mm2, 0.12 m long

3RK1 902-0CH00

2

• 4 × 4 mm , 0.12 m long

3RK1 902-0CG00

Motor connection cable, 4 x 1.5 mm2 With power connector, 9-pole • Length: 3 m

3RK1 902-0CM00

• Length: 5 m

3RK1 902-0CP00

• Length: 10 m

3RK1 902-0CQ00

Motor connection cable, 6 x 1.5 mm2 With power connector, 9-pole • Length: 3 m

3RK1 902-0CN00

• Length: 5 m

3RK1 902-0CR00

• Length: 10 m

3RK1 902-0CS00

Crimping tool • For contact pins and contact sockets 1.5 to 2.5 mm2 • For contact pins and contact sockets 1.5 to 4 mm2 Disassembling tool • for disassembling male and female contacts in 9-pole inserts

3RK1 902-0AH00 3RK1 902-0CT00 3RK1 902-0AJ00


3RK1 902-0AP00

Manual for AS-Interface compact starters • German, English

3RK1 702-2GB10-2AA0

• French, Italian

3RK1 702-2HB10-2AA0

Mounting plate for compact starters for accommodating the trapezoidal-section cable for AS-Interface line and auxiliary supply

3RK1 902-0AP00

Gasket set for mounting plate For sealing enclosures at the end of a spur line (1 set = 5 straight seals, 5 trapezoidal seals)

3RK1 902-0AR00

Hand-held device for start-up with 0.5 m connection cable and plug

3RK1 902-0AM00

3RK1 902-0AM00

6/90


AS-Interface Slaves

IP65/67 Motor Starters and Load Feeders Motor starters (24 V DC)

■ Overview Quick-stop function All AS-Interface DC 24 V motor starters feature a quick-stop function which can be switched on and off as required using a switch integrated into the module. The quick-stop function allows a connected motor to be shut down immediately using an applied sensor signal (High). The switch for the quick-stop function is located alongside the input sockets and is protected by an M12 sealing cap. Brake The double direct-on-line starter and the single reversing starter versions feature an integrated permanently set brake function, i.e. as soon as the output signal is set to "0", the motor is braked. Start-up using integrated buttons Buttons integrated into the module (below the output sockets) can be used to set the motor used. The buttons are protected by an M12 sealing cap. Connection of a drive roller with integrated DC motor to an AS-Interface DC 24 V motor starter

With the K60 AS-Interface 24 V DC motor starters for the low-end performance range up to 70 W, it is now possible to connect DC 24 V motors and the associated sensors directly to the ASInterface quickly and easily. Three different versions are available: • Single direct-on-line starters (without brake and reversible quick-stop function) • Double direct-on-line starters (with brake and reversible quick-stop function) • Reversing starters (with brake and reversible quick-stop function)

Note concerning double and reversing starters: If an input with the quick-stop function receives a "High" signal, the corresponding output (e.g. quick-stop input 1 → output 1) is switched off within the device (the motor is braked). The manual key function (Key 1/2) for local operation is only permitted to be used during "CPU Stop" in the higher-level PLC. Note concerning single direct-on-line starters: If an input with the quick-stop function receives a "High" signal, the corresponding output (e.g. quick-stop input 1 → output 1) is switched off within the device (the motor runs down without being braked). The manual key function (Key 1) for local operation is only permitted to be used during "CPU Stop" in the higher-level PLC.

DC motors are connected to the module using M12 plug-in connectors. The sensors and the module electronics can be supplied from the yellow AS-Interface cable. An auxiliary voltage (24 V DC) is only required for supplying the outputs, which can be provided via the black AS-Interface cable.


6/91

6

AS-Interface Slaves

IP65/67 Motor Starters and Load Feeders Motor starters (24 V DC)

■ Overview (continued) Applications S in g le d ir e c t s ta r te r w ith o u t b r a k e ( w ith a d ju s ta b le q u ic k - s to p fu n c tio n )

D o u b le d ir e c t s ta r te r w ith b r a k e ( w ith a d ju s ta b le q u ic k - s to p fu n c tio n )

S in g le r e v e r s in g s ta r te r w ith b r a k e ( w ith a d ju s ta b le q u ic k - s to p fu n c tio n )

1 s t p o s s ib ility : C o n n e c tio n to a m a x im u m o f fo u r s e n s o r s w ith o u t p o llu tio n in d ic a tio n



S e S e S e S e 4

2

In p u t 1

o ff o n

n s n s n s n s

o r o r o r o r

s ig s ig s ig s ig

n a n a n a n a

S e n s o r 1 l l

Q u ic k - s t o p f o r o u tp u t o n /o ff

4

In p u t 2 2

B ra k e ( w ith c o a s tin g )

O u tp u t

B u tto n (m a n u a l o p e r a tio n )

S e n s o r 2 S e n s o r 3 S e n s o r 4

M o to r

4

2

In p u t 1

o ff o n

4

6

In p u t 2

s o tio s o tio

r s n r s n

ig n s ig ig n s ig

2 4

o ff o n

In p u t 2 O u tp u t 1

a l n a l a l n a l

Q u ic k - s t o p f o r o u tp u t o n /o ff B ra k e ( w ith c o a s tin g )

In p u t 1

4

2

2 P lu g b r a k e

O u tp u t 1

l

S e n s o r 1 l

S e n s o r 2

Q u ic k - s t o p f o r o u tp u t 2 o n /o ff S h o r t - c ir c u it b r a k e O u tp u t 2

o ff o n o ff o n

e n llu e n llu

s o tio s o tio

r s ig n s ig r s ig n s ig

n a n a n a n a

S e S e S e S e

l l

4

S e n s o r 3

In p u t 1

S e n s o r 4

In p u t 2

4

M o to r 1

l l l

S e n s o r 1 l

S e n s o r 2 S e n s o r 3 S e n s o r 4

Q u ic k - s to p fo r o u tp u t 1 o n /o ff

S P o S P o In p u t 1

4

2 4

Q u ic k - s t o p f o r o u tp u t 2 o n /o ff

In p u t 2

O u tp u t 2

O u tp u t

o ff o n o ff o n

2

M o to r 1

n a n a n a n a

tto n a n u c lo d re

M o to r C lo c k w is e r o ta t io n C o u n te r - c lo c k w is e r o ta t io n

2 a l o p e r a t io n c k w is e r o ta tio n ) s s

2 n d p o s s ib ility : C o n n e c tio n to a m a x im u m o f tw o s e n s o r s w ith p o llu tio n in d ic a tio n

l

M o to r 2

s ig s ig s ig s ig


B u (m fo r A d

S e n s o r 1

S e n s o r 2

o r o r o r o r

P lu g b r a k e

O u tp u t B u tto n 1 (m a n u a l o p e r a t io n fo r c lo c k w is e r o ta tio n )

l l


A d d re s s

o ff o n

2

M o to r 2

n s n s n s n s

o ff o n 2

l

B u tto n 2 ( m a n u a l o p e r a tio n )

B u tto n 1 (m a n u a l o p e r a tio n )

A d d re s s

n a n a n a n a


S P o S P o

In p u t 2

B u tto n (m a n u a l o p e r a tio n )

s ig s ig s ig s ig

A d d re s s

4

M o to r

o r o r o r o r

B u tto n 2 ( m a n u a l o p e r a tio n )

S e n s o r 1

S e n s o r 2

n s n s n s n s

2 n d p o s s ib ility : C o n n e c tio n to a m a x im u m o f tw o s e n s o r s w ith p o llu tio n in d ic a tio n

2

O u tp u t

4

B u tto n 1 (m a n u a l o p e r a tio n )

2 n d p o s s ib ility : C o n n e c tio n to a m a x im u m o f tw o s e n s o r s w ith p o llu tio n in d ic a tio n e n llu e n llu

In p u t 1

o ff o n

2

A d d re s s

S P o S P o

S e S e S e S e

l l

B u tto n 1 (m a n u a l o p e r a t io n fo r c lo c k w is e r o ta tio n )

e n llu e n llu

s o tio s o tio

r s ig n s ig r s ig n s ig

n a n a n a n a

l l l

S e n s o r 1 l


S e n s o r 2


P lu g b r a k e

M o to r C lo c k w is e r o ta t io n C o u n te r - c lo c k w is e B u tto n 2 ( m a n u a l o p e r a t io n r o ta t io n fo r c lo c k w is e r o ta tio n )

A d d re s s

N S A 0 _ 0 0 3 4 8 a


Order No. Single direct-on-line starter 4 inputs 1 output Quick stop function

3RK1 400-1MQ01-0AA4

3RK1 400-1NQ01-0AA4

Double direct-on-line starter 1) 4 inputs 2 outputs Quick stop function

3RK1 400-1MQ01-0AA4

Single reversing starter 1) 4 inputs 1 output Quick stop function

3RK1 400-1MQ03-0AA4

1) Modules supplied without mounting plate.

6/92

1)


AS-Interface Slaves

IP65/67 Motor Starters and Load Feeders 3RK1 3 ECOFAST motor starters and soft starters

■ Overview The starters can be installed close to the motor or mounted on the motor. The following are available • Single units for geographically distributed motors and • Isolated solutions (ET 200X and ET 200pro) for drives installed close together. The functionality in the ECOFAST system ranges from direct-online starters, to reversing starters and soft starters through to frequency converters. Brake contacts are available as an option for the starters. Two or four integrated digital contacts enable sensors to be scanned locally.

Distributed motor starters are used for switching and protecting loads locally. Versions with graded functional scope and with different installation possibilities ensure that both the functional requirements of the process and the constructional boundary conditions of the machine or installation are taken into account. Distributed motor starters are available for PROFIBUS DP and AS-Interface.

All starters are equipped throughout with standardized interfaces for data and energy in accordance with the ECOFAST specification: • HanBrid for PROFIBUS DP and insulation displacement method for AS-Interface • Han Q4/2 for the power supply • Han 10e for motor connection The starters can be connected using T pieces for data and T terminal connectors for power to prevent interruption. In addition the 3RK1 922-3BA00 hand-held device is available for on-site operation (see page 5/170).

6


Order No.

Field bus interface

Switching function

Motor protection

Setting range / performance range

Brake output

PROFIBUS DP

mechanical

Thermistor

0.3 ... 9 A / 4 kW 1)

No

3RK1 303-2AS54-1AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 303-2AS54-1AA3

0.3 ... 3 A / 1.1 kW

No

3RK1 303-5BS44-3AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 303-5BS44-3AA3

2.4 ... 9 A / 4 kW

No

3RK1 303-5CS44-3AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 303-5CS44-3AA3

No

3RK1 303-6BS74-3AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 303-6BS74-3AA3

No

3RK1 303-6DS74-3AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 303-6DS74-3AA3

Thermal motor model

solid-state soft

Full motor protection

0.3 ... 3 A / 1.1 kW 2.4 ... 12 A / 5.5 kW

AS-Interface

solid-state soft, several speeds, R2SS


0.6 ... 4 A / 1.5 kW

400 V AC

3RK1 303-6ES84-3AA3

mechanical

Thermistor

0.3 ... 9 A / 4 kW 1)

No

3RK1 323-2AS54-1AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 323-2AS54-1AA3

0.3 ... 3 A / 1.1 kW

No

3RK1 323-5BS44-3AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 323-5BS44-3AA3

2.4 ... 9 A / 4 kW

No

3RK1 323-5CS44-3AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 323-5CS44-3AA3

No

3RK1 323-6BS74-3AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 323-6BS74-3AA3

No

3RK1 323-6DS74-3AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 323-6DS74-3AA3

400 V AC

3RK1 323-6ES84-3AA3

Thermal motor model

solid-state soft


0.3 ... 3 A / 1.1 kW 2.4 ... 12 A / 5.5 kW



0.6 ... 4 A / 1.5 kW

1) The range from 0.3 to 9 A is fixed (wide range) and cannot be set/changed manually.


6/93

AS-Interface Slaves

IP20 Motor Starters and Load Feeders AS-Interface load feeder module

■ Overview As the outputs already have overvoltage protection integrated, no additional measures for the contactors are required. The outputs are supplied with separate auxiliary voltage – a selectively configured EMERGENCY-STOP concept is possible therefore. The inputs are supplied from the AS-Interface data line. Inputs and outputs have to be wired using integrated, spring-loaded terminals, each connected to a common potential. 3RA5 fuseless load feeder with connection to AS-Interface

6

The AS-Interface load feed module adds an input/output module to the conventional busbar and standard rail adapters. With this module the control current circuit of a load feeder is available completely factory-wired. The series has been optimized for use in conjunction with the SIRIUS load feeders size S00 and S0. Connection to the higher level automation system is made through the AS-Interface interface of the load feeder module. A non-shielded flexible lead can be used as data line and for the auxiliary current supply. Connection to the AS-Interface load feeder module is made using two connectors with the insulation displacement method. Four different AS-Interface load feeder modules are available: Differences exist in the number of inputs and outputs and in the type of outputs. The units with solid-stated outputs are designed for 24 V DC, those with relay outputs are suitable for voltages of max. 230 V AC. Direct-on-line and reversing starters as well as double direct-on-line starters and starter assemblies can be wired therefore for pole reversal. The inputs can be used to separately scan the checkbacks from circuit-breakers and contactors. The outputs can be used for direct control of the contactor coils.

6/94


The 3RA5 fuseless load feeder, comprised of the AS-Interface load module, circuit-breaker, contactor and all necessary connectors (AS-Interface, auxiliary power and 5-pole power connector), is delivered completely assembled, factory-wired and tested. The user can thus save valuable time when mounting, wiring and servicing. Direct-on-line starters as well as reversing starters are available with SIRIUS switching devices size S00 up to 10 A and size S0 – on account of the power connector – up to 16 A. The complete feeders are available with AS-Interface load feeder modules with solid-state outputs for 24 V DC auxiliary voltage. Load feeders with this type of configuration are used to control standard induction motors for example. The load feeders can be installed in central control cabinets as well as in local control boxes. They are particularly suitable for highly automated machines and plants that place high demands on availability.

AS-Interface Slaves

IP20 Motor Starters and Load Feeders AS-Interface load feeder module


Order No. AS-Interface load feeder module for standard mounting rail mounting for contactor, sizes S00 and S0 The matching carrier (see accessories) is required for mounting on 40-mm or 60-mm rail systems and SIRIUS standard mounting rail adapters The AS-Interface connectors for the data and auxiliary power supply lines (yellow and black) must be ordered separately (see accessories)

3RK1 400-1KG01-0AA1 3RK1 400-1MG01-0AA1

Type

Supply in V

• 2 inputs / 1 output

DC 24 1)

• 4 inputs / 2 outputs • 2 inputs / 1 relay output

3RK1 400-1MG01-0AA1 AC 120/230 2)

• 3 inputs / 2 relay outputs

Accessories

3RK1 400-1KG01-0AA1 3RK1 402-3KG02-0AA1 3RK1 402-3LG02-0AA1

3)

Manual for AS-Interface load feeder module • German, English

3RK 701-2GB00-0AA0

• Italian, French

3RK 701-2HB00-0AA0

Carrier for AS-Interface load feeder module • with PE and N conductor connections, for mounting on busbar adapter with 40-mm center-to-center rail distance Power connector set 3RK1 901-0EA00 required

Carrier with power plug-in connector installed

- 45 mm

3RK1 901-3AA00

- 54 mm

3RK1 901-3BA00

6

• With PE and N conductor connections, for mounting on busbar adapter with 60-mm center-to-center rail distance Power connector set 3RK1 901-0EA00 required - 45 mm

3RK1 901-3CA00

- 54 mm

3RK1 901-3DA00

• Without PE and N conductor connections, for mounting on the busbar adapter with 40 mm or 60 mm center-to-center rail distance - 45 mm

3RK1 901-3EA00

- 54 mm

3RK1 901-3FA00

• For mounting on SIRIUS standard mounting rail adapter 3RA19 22-1A - 45 mm Power connector set 5-pole, 2.5 mm2 (one set contains 1 plug and 1 coupling)

3RK1 901-3GA00 3RK1 901-0EA00

3RK1 901-0EA00

AS-Interface connector for data and auxiliary power supply lines with insulation displacement terminations for 2 × (0.5 to 0.75 mm2) standard litz wiree 3RK1 901-0NA00 3RK1 901-0PA00

• Yellow • Black

3RK1 901-0NA00 3RK1 901-0PA00

1) Without connectors for data and auxiliary power (yellow and black). 2) With one connector each for data and auxiliary power (yellow and red). 3) Busbar accessories: see Catalog LV 1, Sections Load feeders and soft starters and Distributor busbar systems and switchgear


6/95

AS-Interface Slaves

IP20 Motor Starters and Load Feeders Direct-on-line starters for busbar systems

■ Overview

■ Application The 3RA5 load feeders trigger central loads in local switching units as well as in control cabinets. They are used in highly automated plants with high demands on availability.

■ More information Types of coordination The behavior of a device during a short circuit is specified by the type of coordination acc. to DIN EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102), IEC 60947-4-1. The non-fused 3RA5 load feeders with AS-Interface achieve type of coordination 1 at Iq = 50 kA. Thus it is ensured that short circuits of 50 kA can be cleared without endangering personnel or the plant. The contactor can get damaged at such high short circuit currents.

6

The 3RA5 fuseless load feeders with AS-Interface offer the possibility of linking motor starters swiftly and at low cost to higherlevel automation systems. The integrated 3RV1 circuit-breaker for motor protection protects the motor against overloads and provides short-circuit protection for the cables. The 3RT1 contactor is used for operational switching. The switching state is triggered and signalled using the 3RK14 load feeder module on the AS-Interface. • For direct start, a load can be switched on and off with the load feeder.

6/96


AS-Interface Slaves

IP20 Motor Starters and Load Feeders Direct-on-line starters for busbar systems

■ Selection and Ordering data for 5- or 4-pole busbar system, also applicable for 3-pole busbar system. 24 V DC power supply. Power supply and communications connector included in scope of supply

Frame size

Direct starting

Setting range, Thermal overload release

Three-phase motor, 4 pole, 400 V AC 1) Normal power

Motor current (standard value)

P kW

I A

Fuseless load feeder

Order No. A

Type of assignment 1 2)

for 40 mm busbar system, 5 pole S00

3RA51 10 (with 3RK1 400-1KG01-0AA1, 2E/1A, DC 24 V)

0.06

0.2

0.14 ... 0.2

0.06

0.2

0.18 ... 0.25

0.09

0.3

0.22 ... 0.32

0.09

0.3

0.28 ... 0.4

0.12

0.4

0.35 ... 0.5

0.18

0.6

0.45 ... 0.63

0.25

0.8

0.55 ... 0.8

0.25

0.8

0.7 ... 1

0.37

1.1

0.9 ... 1.25

0.55

1.5

1.1 ... 1.6

0.75

1.9

1.4 ... 2

0.75

1.9

1.8 ... 2.5

1.1

2.7

2.2 ... 3.2

1.5

3.6

2.8 ... 4

1.5

3.6

3.5 ... 5

2.2

5.2

4.5 ... 6.3

3

6.8

5.5 ... 8

4

9

7 ... 10

5.5

11.5

9 ... 12


3RA51 10-0BC15-0BB4 3RA51 10-0CC15-0BB4 3RA51 10-0DC15-0BB4 3RA51 10-0EC15-0BB4 3RA51 10-0FC15-0BB4 3RA51 10-0GC15-0BB4 3RA51 10-0HC15-0BB4 3RA51 10-0JC15-0BB4 3RA51 10-0KC15-0BB4

6

3RA51 10-1AC15-0BB4 3RA51 10-1BC15-0BB4 3RA51 10-1CC15-0BB4 3RA51 10-1DC15-0BB4 3RA51 10-1EC15-0BB4 3RA51 10-1FC15-0BB4 3RA51 10-1GC15-0BB4 3RA51 10-1HC15-0BB4 3RA51 10-1JC16-0BB4 3RA51 10-1KC17-0BB4 for 60 mm busbar system, 5 pole

S00

3RA51 20 (with 3RK1 400-1KG01-0AA1, 2E/1A, DC 24 V)

S0

0.06

0.2

0.14 ... 0.2

0.06

0.2

0.18 ... 0.25

0.09

0.3

0.22 ... 0.32

0.09

0.3

0.28 ... 0.4

0.12

0.4

0.35 ... 0.5

0.18

0.6

0.45 ... 0.63

0.25

0.8

0.55 ... 0.8

0.25

0.8

0.7 ... 1

0.37

1.1

0.9 ... 1.25

0.55

1.5

1.1 ... 1.6

0.75

1.9

1.4 ... 2

3RA51 10-0BD15-0BB4 3RA51 10-0CD15-0BB4 3RA51 10-0DD15-0BB4 3RA51 10-0ED15-0BB4 3RA51 10-0FD15-0BB4 3RA51 10-0GD15-0BB4 3RA51 10-0HD15-0BB4 3RA51 10-0JD15-0BB4 3RA51 10-0KD15-0BB4 3RA51 10-1AD15-0BB4 3RA51 10-1BD15-0BB4 3RA51 10-1CD15-0BB4

0.75

1.9

1.8 ... 2.5

1.1

2.7

2.2 ... 3.2

1.5

3.6

2.8 ... 4

1.5

3.6

3.5 ... 5

2.2

5.2

4.5 ... 6.3

3

6.8

5.5 ... 8

4

9

7 ... 10

5.5

11.5

9 ... 12

3RA51 10-1GD15-0BB4 3RA51 10-1HD15-0BB4 3RA51 10-1JD16-0BB4 3RA51 10-1KD17-0BB4

7.5

15.5

11 ... 16

3RA51 20-4AD25-0BB4

3RA51 10-1DD15-0BB4 3RA51 10-1ED15-0BB4 3RA51 10-1FD15-0BB4

1) Specific startup and rating data of the motor to be protected are decisive for the selection. 2) With Iq = 50 kA at 400 V. Siemens IK PI · 2007

6/97

AS-Interface Slaves

IP20 Motor Starters and Load Feeders Reversing starters for busbar systems

■ Overview

■ Application The 3RA5 load feeders trigger central loads in local switching units as well as in control cabinets. They are used in highly automated plants with high demands on availability.

■ More information Types of coordination The behavior of a device during a short circuit is specified by the type of coordination acc. to DIN EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102), IEC 60947-4-1. The non-fused 3RA5 load feeders with AS-Interface achieve type of coordination 1 at Iq = 50 kA. Thus it is ensured that short circuits of 50 kA can be cleared without endangering personnel or the plant. The contactor can get damaged at such high short circuit currents.

6

The 3RA5 fuseless load feeders with AS-Interface offer the possibility of linking motor starters swiftly and at low cost to higherlevel automation systems. The integral 3RV1 circuit-breaker for motor protection protects the motor against overloads and provides short-circuit protection for the cables. The 3RT1 contactor is used for operational switching. The switching state is triggered and signalled via the 3RK14 load feeder module on the AS-Interface. • The load feeder for reversing mode is designed for two directions of rotation of three-phase motors. On these units, there is no electrical and mechanical interlock between the two contactors. Exception: size S00 features a mechanical interlock.

6/98


AS-Interface Slaves


■ Selection and Ordering data for 5- or 4-pole busbar system, also applicable for 3-pole busbar system. 24 V DC power supply. Power supply and communications connector included in scope of supply Frame size

N S S 0 _ 0 0 5 0 9

Reversible operation

Setting range, Thermal overload release

Three-phase motor, 4 pole, 400 V AC 1) Normal power

Motor current (standard value)

P

I

kW

A

Fuseless load feeder

Order No. A


for 40 mm busbar system, 5 pole S00

3RA5210 (with 3RK1 400-1MG01-0AA1, 4E/2A, DC 24 V)

0.06

0.2

0.14 ... 0.2

0.06

0.2

0.18 ... 0.25

0.09

0.3

0.22 ... 0.32

0.09

0.4

0.28 ... 0.4

0.12

0.4

0.35 ... 0.5

0.18

0.6

0.45 ... 0.63

0.25

0.8

0.55 ... 0.8

0.25

0.8

0.7 ... 1.0

0.37

1.1

0.9 ... 1.25

0.55

1.5

1.1 ... 1.6

0.75

1.9

1.4 ... 2.0

0.75

1.9

1.8 ... 2.5

1.1

2.7

2.2 ... 3.2

1.5

3.6

2.8 ... 4.0

1.5

3.6

3.5 ... 5.0

2.2

5.2

4.5 ... 6.3

3

6.8

5.5 ... 8.0

4

9

7.0 ... 10

5.5

11.5

9.0 ... 12


3RA52 10-0BC15-0BB4 3RA52 10-0CC15-0BB4 3RA52 10-0DC15-0BB4 3RA52 10-0EC15-0BB4 3RA52 10-0FC15-0BB4 3RA52 10-0GC15-0BB4 3RA52 10-0HC15-0BB4 3RA52 10-0JC15-0BB4 3RA52 10-0KC15-0BB4 3RA52 10-1AC15-0BB4 3RA52 10-1BC15-0BB4 3RA52 10-1CC15-0BB4

6

3RA52 10-1DC15-0BB4 3RA52 10-1EC15-0BB4 3RA52 10-1FC15-0BB4 3RA52 10-1GC15-0BB4 3RA52 10-1HC15-0BB4 3RA52 10-1JC16-0BB4 3RA52 10-1KC17-0BB4 for 60 mm busbar system, 5 pole

S00

3RA52 10 (with 3RK1 400-1MG01-0AA1, 4E/2A, DC 24 V)

S0

0.06

0.2

0.14 ... 0.2

0.06

0.2

0.18 ... 0.25

0.09

0.3

0.22 ... 0.32

0.09

0.4

0.28 ... 0.4

0.12

0.4

0.35 ... 0.5

0.18

0.6

0.45 ... 0.63

0.25

0.8

0.55 ... 0.8

0.25

0.8

0.7 ... 1.0

0.37

1.1

0.9 ... 1.25

0.55

1.5

1.1 ... 1.6

0.75

1.9

1.4 ... 2.0

3RA52 10-0BD15-0BB4 3RA52 10-0CD15-0BB4 3RA52 10-0DD15-0BB4 3RA52 10-0ED15-0BB4 3RA52 10-0FD15-0BB4 3RA52 10-0GD15-0BB4 3RA52 10-0HD15-0BB4 3RA52 10-0JD15-0BB4 3RA52 10-0KD15-0BB4 3RA52 10-1AD15-0BB4 3RA52 10-1BD15-0BB4 3RA52 10-1CD15-0BB4

0.75

1.9

1.8 ... 2.5

1.1

2.7

2.2 ... 3.2

1.5

3.6

2.8 ... 4.0

1.5

3.6

3.5 ... 5.0

2.2

5.2

4.5 ... 6.3

3

6.8

5.5 ... 8.0

4

9

7.0 ... 10

5.5

11.5

9.0 ... 12

3RA52 10-1GD15-0BB4 3RA52 10-1HD15-0BB4 3RA52 10-1JD16-0BB4 3RA52 10-1KD17-0BB4

7.5

15.5

11 ... 16

3RA52 20-4AD25-0BB4

3RA52 10-1DD15-0BB4 3RA52 10-1ED15-0BB4 3RA52 10-1FD15-0BB4

1) Specific startup and rating data of the motor to be protected are decisive for the selection. 2) With Iq = 50 kA at 400 V.


6/99

AS-Interface Slaves



Order No. Manuals for AS-Interface load feeder modules • German, English

3RK1 701-2GB00-0AA0

• Italian, French

3RK1 701-2HB00-0AA0

Carriers for AS-Interface load feeder modules • With PE/ground and N conductor connection, for mounting on busbar adapter with 40 mm center-line spacing 3RK1 901-0EA00 power connector set is required

Carrier with mounted 3RK1 901-3.A00 power connector coupling

- 45 mm width

3RK1 901-3AA00

- 54 mm width

3RK1 901-3BA00

• With PE/ground and N conductor connection, for mounting on busbar adapter with 60 mm center-line spacing 3RK1 901-0EA00 power connector set is required - 45 mm width

3RK1 901-3CA00

- 54 mm width

3RK1 901-3DA00

• With PE/ground and N conductor connection, for mounting on busbar adapter with 40 mm or 60 mm center-line spacing

6

- 45 mm width

3RK1 901-3EA00

- 54 mm width

3RK1 901-3FA00

• For mounting onto 3RA19 22-1A SIRIUS standard mounting rail adapter - 45 mm width

3RK1 901-3GA00

Power connector sets 5-pole, 2.5 mm2 (1 set contains 5 connectors and 5 couplings)

3RK1 901-0EA00

3RK1 901-0EA00

3RK1 901-0NA00 3RK1 901-0PA00

6/100

AS-Interface connectors for data and auxiliary supply cables With insulation displacement terminals for 2 x (0.5 ... 0.75 mm2) standard litz wires (one set contains five plug connectors) • Yellow

3RK1 901-0NA00

• Black

3RK1 901-0PA00


AS-Interface Slaves

IP20 Motor Starters and Load Feeders SIRIUS soft starters

■ Overview The SIRIUS electronic soft starters are suitable for controlled soft starting and slowing down of three-phase asynchronous motors. The reduction of the starting torque not only protects the motor, but also increases the availability of the plants. It requires very little effort and accessories to make motor feeders communication-capable with the these soft starters. Soft starters have the following advantages: • Reduction of the mechanical load in the entire operating mechanism • Reduced load on the power supply network


6

Order No.

SIRIUS Soft Starter Rated operating voltage for unit Ue at 400 V (ambient temperature 40 °C) Rated power of motors 3 kW

3RW3 014-1CB@4

4 kW

3RW3 016-1CB@4

Rated control supply voltage SIRIUS Soft Starter with AS-Interface load feeder module 1)

UC = 24 V

0

UC = 110 ... 230 V

1

AS-Interface load feeder module • 2 inputs / 1 output / 24 V DC

3RK1 400-1KG01-0AA1

• 2 inputs / 1 relay output / 120/230 V AC

3RK1 402-3KG02-0AA1

1) For mounting the AS-Interface load feeder module on the standard rail adaptor, a carrier, plug connector and power connector set are also required.

For further details about electronic soft starters, see LV Catalog, section controlgear: semiconductor contactors, soft starters, controlgear. Additional information is available in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.de/sanftstarter


6/101

AS-Interface Slaves

3SF5 Pushbutton Unit and Inidicator Lights AS-Interface F Adapters for EMERGENCY STOP/ EMERGENCY OFF Control Devices

■ Overview The AS-Interface failsafe adapter is used to connect an EMERGENCY STOP control device that complies with ISO 13850 or EN 418 from the 3SB3 series to the AS-Interface bus system. The failsafe adapter has a safe AS-Interface slave and is snapped onto the back of the EMERGENCY STOP control device (actuating element only). Depending on the version used, connection is made using screw terminals or spring-loaded terminals. In the expanded version, an output is also available for actuating an indicator light or LED. Addressing is performed using the AS-Interface connections or the integrated addressing socket. Safety category 4 (SIL 3) is achieved using the adapter.


Order No.

AS-Interface F adapter, for EMERGENCY OFF actuator SIGNUM 3SB3 Front plate mounting

6

Version

Connection

•2I

Screw terminals

3SF5 402-1AA03 3SF5 402-1AB03

Spring-loaded terminals

3SF5 402-1AA04 3SF5 402-1AB04

• 2 I/1 O, with signaling output 3SF5 402-1AA03

•2I • 2 I/1 O, with signaling output

3SF5 402-1AB03

6/102


AS-Interface Slaves

3SF5 Pushbutton Unit and Inidicator Lights AS-Interface Enclosures – General data

■ Overview AS-Interface Slaves The following slave types are available: Slave in A/B technology with 4 inputs and 3 outputs 7 Slave with 4 inputs and 4 outputs 7 Failsafe slave with 2 safe inputs 7

The following table shows the maximum number of equippable slaves:

Distributed control devices of the 3SB3 series can be quickly connected to the AS-Interface using AS-Interface enclosures. Using suitable components you can make your own enclosures with integrated AS-Interface or flexibly modify existing enclosures.

Enclosure for

Number of slaves for enclosures without EMERGENCY STOP

Number of slaves for enclosures with EMERGENCY STOP

1 control point

Not available

1x failsafe slave

2 control points

1 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O

Not available

3 control points


1 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O + 1 x failsafe slave

4 control points

2 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O1)

2 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O + 1 x failsafe slave1)

6 control points


2 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O + 1 x failsafe slave

1) For metal enclosures only 1 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O is possible.

Connection One set of links is required in each case to connect a slave to switch blocks, to lampholders and to the connection element. The connection elements are mounted in the front-end cable glands and are used for connection of the AS-Interface or for bringing unused inputs or outputs out of the enclosure. For connection to the AS-Interface bus there is a choice of the following options: 7 Terminal for shaped AS-Interface cable The cable is contacted by the insulation displacement method and routed past the enclosure on the outside (possible only with plastic enclosure). 7 Cable gland for the shaped AS-Interface cable or round cable The cable is routed into the enclosure (preferable for metal enclosure). 7 Connection using M12 plug If less than all inputs/outputs of the installed slaves in an enclosure are used for connecting the control devices, free inputs and outputs can be routed on request to the outside through an M12 socket on the top or bottom side of the enclosure. To supply inputs with power the S+ connection of the must be assigned to the socket, for outputs the OUT– connection must be assigned. Addressing is performed using the AS-Interface connections or the integrated addressing socket. An external power supply is not required. For dimension drawings see catalog LV 1T, chapter 9, technical specifications.

Enclosure Color of enclosure cover: 7 Gray, RAL 7035, or 7 Yellow, RAL 1004, for EMERGENCY STOP. Color of enclosure base: 7 Black, RAL 9005


6/103

6

AS-Interface Slaves

3SF5 Pushbutton Unit and Inidicator Lights AS-Interface Enclosures with Standard Fittings

■ Overview Enclosures with standard fittings are available with: 7 1 to 3 command points 7 Operational voltage via AS-Interface (approx. 30 V) 7 Vertical mounting type 7 Molded-plastic enclosures are equipped with actuators and indicators made of plastic, metal enclosures are equipped with actuators and indicators made of metal. The actuator/indicator is fixed with an enclosure nut. If required it can be dismantled with a 27-mm socket wrench or with a 3SX17 07 ring nut wrench.

Enclosures without an EMERGENCY STOP all have a 4I/3O user module. In the case of EMERGENCY STOP enclosures with mushroom pushbuttons in accordance with ISO 13850 (EN 418), a safe AS-Interface slave is integrated in the enclosure. EMERGENCY STOP enclosures are fitted with two NC contact blocks, which are wired to the safe slave. The contact blocks and lampholders (with spring-loaded terminals) of the control device, and the AS-Interface slaves, are mounted in the base of the enclosure and are cable-connected. The molded plastic versions of the enclosure are fitted with a connection for the AS-Interface flat cable (the cable is routed around the outside of the enclosure); for the metal versions, the AS-Interface cable is routed into the enclosure.


Order No.

AS-Interface enclosure, molded plastic with standard components

6

Components (A, B, C = code letters of the command points)

Number of command points

A = EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton via AS-Interface adapter, top of enclosure yellow

1

3SF5 811-0AA08

A = EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton via AS-Interface adapter, top of enclosure yellow, with protective collar

1

3SF5 811-0AB08

B = green pushbutton, "I" label A = red pushbutton, "O" label

2

3SF5 812-0DA00

B = white pushbutton, "I" label A = black pushbutton, "O" label

2

3SF5 812-0DB00

C = clear indicator lamp, label without inscription B = green pushbutton, "I" label A = red pushbutton, "O" label

3

3SF5 813-0DA00

C = clear indicator lamp, label without inscription B = white pushbutton, "I" label A = black pushbutton, "O" label

3

3SF5 813-0DC00

C = black indicator lamp, "II" label B = black pushbutton, "I" label A = red pushbutton, "O" label

3

3SF5 813-0DB00

AS-Interface enclosure, metal, with standard components Components (A, B, C = code letters of the command points)


A = EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton via AS-Interface adapter, top of enclosure yellow

1

3SF5 811-2AA08

A = EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton via AS-Interface adapter, top of enclosure yellow, with protective collar

1

3SF5 811-2AB08

B = green pushbutton, "I" label A = red pushbutton, "O" label

2

3SF5 812-2DA00

B = white pushbutton, "I" label A = black pushbutton, "O" label

2

3SF5 812-2DB00

C = clear indicator lamp, label without inscription B = green pushbutton, "I" label A = red pushbutton, "O" label

3

3SF5 813-2DA00

C = clear indicator lamp, label without inscription B = white pushbutton, "I" label A = black pushbutton, "O" label

3

3SF5 813-2DC00

C = black indicator lamp, "II" label B = black pushbutton, "I" label A = red pushbutton, "O" label

3

3SF5 813-2DB00

6/104


AS-Interface Slaves

3SF5 Pushbutton Unit and Inidicator Lights AS-Interface Components for Enclosures

■ Selection and Ordering data For equipment of the enclosures Version For molded plastic enclosures

Order No. Number of command points

AS-Interface slaves F-slave, 2 safe inputs for molded plastic enclosures, without protective collar

1 ... 6

3SF5 500-0BA

F-slave, 2 safe inputs for molded plastic or metal enclosures, with protective collar

1

3SF5 500-0DA

A/B slave, 4 inputs/3 outputs, for molded plastic enclosure

2 ... 6

3SF5 500-0BB

A/B slave, 4 inputs/4 outputs, for molded plastic enclosure

2 ... 6

3SF5 500-0BC

Cable set For F-slave

3SF5 900-0BA

For slave 4I/4O or A/B slave 4I(3O)

3SF5 900-0BB

Connection elements For AS-Interface ribbon cable, connection with insulation piercing method for molded plastic enclosure

1 ... 3 4 ... 6

3SF5 900-0CA 3SF5 900-0CB

For AS-Interface connection via M12 connector for molded plastic enclosure

1 ... 3 4 ... 6

3SF5 900-0CC 3SF5 900-0CD

For routing unused inputs/outputs via M12 socket, 1 ... 3 for molded plastic enclosure 4 ... 6

3SF5 900-0CE 3SF5 900-0CF

For AS-Interface ribbon cable, cable is routed inside the enclosure for molded plastic or metal enclosures

1 ... 3 4 ... 6

3SF5 900-0CG 3SF5 900-0CH

For round cable, cable is routed inside the enclosure for molded plastic or metal enclosures

1 ... 3 4 ... 6

3SF5 900-0CJ 3SF5 900-0CK

For metal enclosure


6

AS-Interface slaves F-slave, 2 safe inputs for metal enclosure, without protective collar

1 ... 6

3SF5 500-0CA

F-slave, 2 safe inputs for molded plastic or metal enclosures, with protective collar

1

3SF5 500-0DA

A/B slave, 4 inputs/3 outputs, for metal enclosure

2 ... 6

3SF5 500-0CB

A/B slave, 4 inputs/4 outputs, for metal enclosure

2 ... 6

3SF5 500-0CC

Cable set For F-slave

3SF5 900-0BA

For slave 4I/4O or A/B slave 4I(3O)

3SF5 900-0BB

Connection elements For AS-Interface connection via M12 connector for metal enclosure

1 ... 3 4 ... 6

3SF5 900-2CC 3SF5 900-2CD

For routing unused inputs/outputs via M12 socket, 1 ... 3 for metal enclosure 4 ... 6

3SF5 900-2CE 3SF5 900-2CF

For AS-Interface flat cable, cable is routed into the enclosure, for molded-plastic or metal enclosure

1 ... 3 4 ... 6

3SF5 900-0CG 3SF5 900-0CH

For round cable, cable is routed into the enclosure, for molded-plastic or metal enclosure

1 ... 3 4 ... 6

3SF5 900-0CJ 3SF5 900-0CK

Empty enclosure and elements for outfitting can be found in Catalog LV 1, Section 9.


6/105

AS-Interface Slaves

3SF5 Pushbutton Unit and Inidicator Lights AS-Interface Customized Enclosures

■ Overview The following table shows the maximum number of slaves that can be used: Enclosure for

Number of slaves for enclosures without EMERGENCY STOP

Number of slaves for enclosures with EMERGENCY STOP

2 command points 1 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O

Not possible


1 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O + 1 x F slave

4 command points 2 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O 1)

2 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O + 1 x F slave 1)


2 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O + 1 x F slave

1) Only 1 x slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O is possible for metal enclosures with 4 command points.

Connection

The configuration of enclosed control devices is freely selectable for customer-specific solutions that couple control devices to the AS-Interface. Customer-specific enclosures can be supplied with 2 to 6 command points.

6

One command point comprises: 7 1 actuator or indicator element 7 Up to 3 contact blocks or up to 2 contact blocks + 1 lampholder 7 1 labeling plate Molded-plastic enclosures are equipped with actuators and indicators made of plastic; metal enclosures are equipped with actuators and indicators made of metal. For the selection of command points, see Options. Coupling with AS-Interface slaves The following slave types are available for coupling the switching elements and lampholders of the control devices: 7 Slave in A/B technology with 4 inputs and 3 outputs 7 Slave with 4 inputs and 4 outputs 7 F-slave with 2 safe inputsS

The customized enclosures are supplied fully equipped and wired. The following can be selected for connection to the ASInterface bus: 7 Terminal for trapezoidal-section AS-Interface cable. The cable is connected using the insulation piercing method and routed alongside the enclosure. (only possible with plastic enclosures) 7 Cable glands for the trapezoidal-section AS-Interface cable or round cable. The cable is inserted into the enclosure. 7 Connection via M12 connector. If not all inputs and outputs of an installed slave in an enclosure are used for connecting the control devices, the free inputs and outputs can be routed outside on the top or bottom end of the enclosure with a M12 connector, on request. The desired pin assignment for the M12 connector must be indicated in the appendix of the order form (see Options). To supply the inputs, the S+ connector of the slave must always be connected to the socket. For outputs, the OUT connector must be connected to the socket. The module is addressed using the AS-Interface connections or the integrated addressing socket. It is not necessary to supply external power. EMERGENCY STOP For enclosures with EMERGENCY STOP, the EMERGENCY STOP actuator can either be wired conventionally or via a safe AS-Interface slave. Up to three switching contacts can be selected for the EMERGENCY STOP if it is wired conventionally. If the EMERGENCY STOP is queried via the AS-Interface, two contacts can be used for the safety circuit. For conventional wiring, an EMERGENCY STOP switching element can be queried via the AS-Interface, if desired.

■ Options To order customized AS-Interface solutions for enclosed 3SB3 control devices, the desired options must be selected by means of the 3SB/3SF configurator. Hereby, an electronic order form for the complete enclosure is generated. You can find the configurator in the electronic Catalog CA 01 on CD-ROM or DVD or in our Online Catalog (Mall) in the Internet: https://mall.automation.siemens.com

The price of the complete enclosure is calculated by the configurator after entering the desired options. When ordering, please send the electronically generated order form from the configurator to our Competence Center at the same time. [email protected] Should both media not be available, contact our Technical Support.

6/106


AS-Interface Slaves

3SF5 Pushbutton Unit and Inidicator Lights AS-Interface Front Panel Module

■ Overview

AS-Interface cable

NSD0_00053b

Terminal

3SB3 control devices mounted in front panels can be coupled to the AS-Interface bus system by means of the front panel module. Pushbuttons and illuminated pushbuttons in round or square design, in molded-plastic or metal version, can be used. Mushroom pushbuttons and audible signal devices are not suitable. The front panel module comprises: 7 One 4I/4O slave 7 Four control devices 3SB3 7 Accessories (lamps, backing plates, mounting parts) The selection of the optional components is made with the order form (see Options).

Front panel module

The module is mounted on the rear of a group of four control devices arranged horizontally or vertically and fixed with screws. The contact blocks and lampholders are integrated in the module. For mounting control devices, a grid pattern of 30 mm x 45 mm must be used. Contact is made with the AS-Interface profile cable (trapezoidal shape) by means of a terminal on the rear of the module using the insulation piercing method. The module is addressed using the AS-Interface connections or the integral addressing socket.


Order No.

AS-Interface front-panel module for control devices SIRIUS 3SB3 4E/4A

3SF5 874-4AZ

Equipment according to ordering manual (see Options).


6/107

6

AS-Interface Slaves

3SF5 Pushbutton Unit and Inidicator Lights AS-Interface Front Panel Module

■ Options To order the front panel module, the order form must be filled in and enclosed with the order. This order form cannot be generated with the 3SB/3SF configurator. You can obtain the form from our Technical Support:

The codes which must be entered in the form can be obtained from the list of options which can be ordered at extra cost.

Tel. (+49 (0) 911) 895-59 00

The price of the complete panel is calculated by adding the extra cost for the additional components to the basic price of the module (see Price List for Catalog IK PI).

The desired options are entered in the order form, e. g. the type of actuating and signaling elements, switching contacts, lampholders or accessories (labeling plates or lamp type).

The extra charges include all components, which depend on the desired equipment (actuating and signaling elements, switching contacts, lampholders or accessories).

Order form for AS-Interface front panel module

6

Order form Front Panel Module

to [email protected]

Date

Order ID of purchaser/order ID I

1. Number of command points @ 4 command points

2. Design of actuating elements @ Round, made of molded plastic @ Square, made of molded plastic @ Round, made of metal

Supplier's order reference

3. Name plates @ Without @ With name plate including legend plate 12.5 mm × 27 mm glued in @ With name plate including legend plate 27 mm × 27 mm glued in 4. Configuration

(Top view of front side of switchboard) Switchboard

Inscription of the labeling plates

A

B

C

D

Equipment (short code)

left

Version of the switching elements

right

left

right

left

right

left

right

1 NO

1 NO

1 NO

1 NO

1 NO

1 NO

1 NO

1 NC

1 NC

1 NC

1 NC

1 NC

1 NC

1 NC

1 NO 1 NC NSD0_00057d

5. Lamps @ Incandescent lamp 24 V (if no option is marked, an incandescent lamp 24 V will be used) @ Incandescent lamp 30 V @ Super bright LED (LED color is same as the color of the actuating element/signaling device)

6/108


AS-Interface Slaves

3SF5 Pushbutton Unit and Inidicator Lights AS-Interface Front Panel Module Options for AS-Interface front panel modules subject to a surcharge Version

Code for design/color of controls black red yellow

green

blue

white

clear

Actuating elements and signaling devices Pushbutton with flat button Illuminated pushbutton with flat button Pushbutton with raised button Illuminated pushbutton with raised button Pushbutton with with raised front ring Pushbutton with protruding mounting ring, castellated 1) Pressure switch with flat pushbutton Illuminated pressure switch with flat pushbutton Light inducator, smooth lens

D

BK

– DH

BK

–

D

RD

D

YE

D

GN

D

BU

D

WH

D

CL

DL

RD

DL

YE

DL

GN

DL

BU

DL

WH

DL

CL

DH

RD

DH

YE

–

DH

BU

–

–

DHL

RD

DHL

YE

DHL

GN

DHL

BU

–

DHL

DHF

BK

DHF

RD

DHF

YE

DHF

GN

DHF

BU

DHF

WH

–

DFZ

BK

DFZ

RD

DFZ

YE

DFZ

GN

DFZ

BU

DFZ

WH

–

DS

BK

CL

DS

RD

DS

YE

DS

GN

DS

BU

DS

WH

–

–

DLS

RD

DLS

YE

DLS

GN

DLS

BU

DLS

WH

DLS

CL

–

L

RD

L

YE

L

GN

L

BU

L

WH

L

CL

K1 BK1

RD RD

– BK1

K1 BK1

GN GN

– BK1

BU

K1 –

WH

YE

– BK1

CL

K2 BK2

RD RD

– BK2

K2 BK2

GN GN

– BK2

BU

K2 –

WH

YE

– BK2

CL

K4

RD

–

K4

GN

–

K4

WH

BK4

RD

BK4

BK4

GN

BK4

K5

RD

–

K5

GN

–

BK5

RD

BK5

BK5

GN

BK5

GN

–

K6

WH

–

GN

–

K7

WH

–

Selector switches with 2 switching sequences Switching sequence O–I, latching Not illuminated Illuminated

K1 –

BK

Switching sequence O–I, momentary contact Not illuminated Illuminated

K2 –

BK

Selector switches with 3 switching sequences Switching sequence I–O–II, latching Not illuminated

K4

Illuminated

–

BK

YE

BU

–

– BK4

CL

Switching sequence I–O–II, momentary contact Not illuminated

K5

Illuminated

–

BK

YE

K5 BU

WH

–

– BK5

CL

Switching sequence I–O–II, latching to the right, momentary contact to the left Not illuminated

K6

BK

K6

RD

–

K6

Switching sequence I–O–II, latching to the left, momentary contact to the right Not illuminated

K7

BK

K7

RD

–

K7

1) For Molded-plastic version only.

For more detailed information about individual actuating elements, see section Pushbuttons and Light Indicators / SIGNUM 3SB3 / Pushbuttons onward.


6/109

6

AS-Interface Slaves

3SF5 Pushbutton Unit and Inidicator Lights AS-Interface Front Panel Module Options for AS-Interface front panel modules subject to a surcharge Code for design/key removal position of locks

Version

O

I

II

O and I

O and II

I and II

I, O and II

Locks with 2 switching sequences Switching sequence O–I, latching Type RONIS, Lock no. SB30

RSB

1A

RSB

1E

–

RSB

1AE

–

–

–

Type CES, Lock no. SSG 10 Lock no. LSG 1

CES CESL

1A 1A

CES –

1E

– –

CES CESL

1AE 1AE

– –

– –

– –

–

Z-J

1AE

–

–

–

1E

– – – – –

BKS BKS A BKS E BKS C BKS B

1AE 1AE 1AE 1AE 1AE

– – – – –

– – – – –

– – – – –

OMR BK 1E

–

OMR BK1AE

–

–

–

Type CES key-operated switch, Lock no. SSG 10

CES SU 1A

Type IKON, Lock no. 360012 K1

Z-J

1A

–

Type BKS, Lock no. S1 Lock no. E1 (for VW) Lock no. E2 (for VW) Lock no. E7 (for VW) Lock no. E9 (for VW)

BKS BKS A BKS E BKS C BKS B

1A 1A 1A 1A 1A

BKS – – – –

Type O.M.R., black, Lock no. 73034

OMR BK 1A

Switching sequence O–I, momentary contact

6

Type RONIS, Lock no. SB30

RSB

2A

–

–

–

–

–

–

Type CES, Lock no. SSG 10 Lock no. LSG 1

CES CESL

2A 2A

– –

– –

– –

– –

– –

– –


Z-J

2A

–

–

–

–

–

–

Type BKS, Lock no. S1

BKS

2A

–

–

–

–

–

–


OMR BK 2A

–

–

–

–

–

–

Locks with 3 switching sequences Switching sequence I–O–II, latching Type RONIS, Lock no. SB30

RSB

4A

RSB

4E

RSB

4D

–

–

RSB

4ED

RSB

4EAD

Type CES, Lock no. SSG 10

CES

4A

CES

4E

CES

4D

–

–

CES

4ED

CES

4EAD

Type CES key-operated switch, Lock no. SSG 10

CES SU 4A


Z-J

4A

Z-J

4E

Z-J

4D

–

–

Z-J

4ED

Z-J

4EAD


BKS

4A

BKS

4E

BKS

4D

–

–

BKS

4ED

BKS

4EAD


OMR BK 4A

–

–

–

OMR BK 4ED

OMR BK 4EAD

–

Switching sequence I–O–II, momentary contact Type RONIS, Lock no. SB30

RSB5A

–

–

–

–

–

–


CES5A

–

–

–

–

–

–


Z-J5A

–

–

–

–

–

–


BKS5A

–

–

–

–

–

–


OMR BK 5A

–

–

–

–

–

–

For more detailed information on the actuators, see Catalog LV 1, Chapter 9.

6/110


AS-Interface Slaves

3SF5 Pushbutton Unit and Inidicator Lights AS-Interface Front Panel Module Options for AS-Interface front panel modules subject to a surcharge Version

Code for design Key removal position of locks O

I

II

O and I

O and II

I and II

I, O and II

Locks with 3 switching sequences Switching sequence I–O–II, latching to the right, momentary contact to the left Type RONIS, Lock no. SB30

RSB

6A

–

RSB

6D

–

RSB

6AD

–

–


CES

6A

–

CES

6D

–

CES

6AD

–

–


Z-J

6A

–

Z-J

6D

–

Z-J

6AD

–

–


BKS

6A

–

BKS

6D

–

BKS

6AD

–

–


OMR BK 6A

–

OMR BK 6D

–

OMR BK 6AD

–

–

Switching sequence I–O–II, latching to the right, momentary contact to the left Type RONIS, Lock no. SB30

RSB

7A

RSB

7E

–

RSB

7AE

–

–

–


CES

7A

CES

7E

–

CES

7AE

–

–

–


Z-J

7A

Z-J

7E

–

Z-J

7AE

–

–

–


BKS

7A

BKS

7E

–

BKS

7AE

–

–

–


OMR BK 7A

OMR BK 7E

–

–

–

–

–

6

For more detailed information on the actuators, see Catalog LV 1, Chapter 9.

5 2


N S D 0 _ 0 0 2 3 6 a

1 2 0

4 5


6/111

AS-Interface Slaves AS-Interface connection for LOGO!

■ Overview


Every LOGO! now connectable to the AS-Interface system

6

Supply voltage in V

24 V DC

Inputs/outputs

4/4 (virtual inputs/outputs)

Bus connection

AS-Interface according to specification

Ambient temperature in °C

0 ... +55


IP20

Mounting

onto standard mounting rail


36 x 90 x 58

LED displays

LEDs Green Red Flashes red/yellow

Status OK No data traffic Zero address

An intelligent slave can be integrated into the AS-Interface system with the AS-Interface for LOGO! The modular interface allows the different basic units to be integrated into the system depending on the required functionality. In addition, the functionality can be quickly and simply adapted to changed requirements by replacing the basic unit. The interface provides four inputs and four outputs for the system. These I/Os, however, are not implemented in hardware, but are only virtually available via the interface.


Order No.

AS-Interface connection for LOGO! • 4 virtual inputs • 4 virtual outputs

3RK1 400-0CE10-0AA2

3RK1 400-0CE10-0AA2

6/112


AS-Interface Power Supplies AS-Interface Power Supplies, IP20 erface Power Supplies

■ Overview

■ Benefits

AS-Interface Power Supplies are an integral part of an AS-Interface network. They supply the electronics of the system (AS-Interface Module and AS-Interface Master) and the connected sensor technology. Furthermore, the integrated data decoupling of AS-Interface Power Supplies ensures the separation of data and energy, thus enabling AS-Interface to transmit data and power on a single line.

• Compact dimensions save space in control cabinets or in the field. • Higher output rating enables connection of even more AS-Interface nodes. • Integrated ground-fault and overload detection ensures that applications are more reliable and saves the need for additional components. • Diagnostics memory, remote indication and remote reset allow fast detection of faults in the system, thus reducing downtimes. • Fast and stable installation of devices thanks to spring-loaded connections. • Removable terminal blocks allow fast component replacement, thus reducing downtimes. • The ultra-wide input range of the 8A version permits 1 and 2phase operation - so no need for connection of a neutral conductor. • UL/CSA approval means the power supply units can be used worldwide

■ Application AS-Interface Power Supplies are always used in conjunction with AS-Interface networks.

6


Order No.

AS-Interface Power Supply IP20 • Single output IP20 • With integrated ground-fault detection

3RX9 501–0BA00

Output current

Input voltage

3A

115 / 230 V AC (switch-selectable)

3RX9 501-0BA00

3A

24 V DC

3RX9 501-1BA00

5A

115 / 230 V AC (switch-selectable)

3RX9 502-0BA00

8A

115/230 ... AC 500 V (switch-selectable)

3RX9 503-0BA00

3RX9 502–0BA00

3RX9 503–0BA00

Conversion table for previous devices: see Section More Info.


6/113

AS-Interface Power Supplies AS-Interface Power Supplies, IP20

■ More information Conversion table Previous type

New type

Order No.

Version

Number Order No.

Version

3RX9 307-0AA00

Single Output IP20 2.4 A

1

3RX9 501-0BA00

Single Output IP20 with ground-fault detection 3A

3RX9 310-0AA00

Single Output IP20 with ground-fault detection 2.4 A

1

3RX9 501-0BA00


3RX9 307-1AA00

Single Output IP20 4A

1

3RX9 502-0BA00


6EP1 354-1AL01

Single Output IP20 7A

1

3RX9 503-0BA00


3RX9 305-1AA00

Dual Output IP20 4A/4A

2

3RX9 502-0BA00


3RX9 306-1AA00

Combi Output IP20 4 A (Asi) / 5 A (24 V)

1

3RX9 502-0BA00


1

6EP1 333-2AA01

SITOP 24 V IP20 5A

6

6/114


AS-Interface

Transmission media AS-Interface shaped cables erface

■ Overview The actuator/sensor interface – the networking system for the lowest field level – distinguishes itself by very simple assembly and installation. A new connection method has been specially developed for the AS-Interface. The network stations are connected by means of the AS-Interface cable. This two-wire cable has a trapezoidal profile which makes incorrect connection impossible. The connection uses the insulation piercing method. Two contact pins pierce the trapezoidal-section AS-Interface cable and ensure safe connection of the two wires. Cutting or stripping is no longer necessary. This allows AS-Interface stations (e.g. I/O modules, intelligent devices) to be connected very quickly. The devices can also be replaced extremely quickly. To permit the use in different ambient conditions (e.g. in environments that contain oil), the AS-Interface cable is available in different materials (rubber, TPE, PUR). A standard round cable can also be used for special applications. The AS-Interface uses the yellow AS-Interface cable to transmit data and power for the sensors (e.g. BERO proximity switch) and actuators (e.g. indicator lights). The black AS-Interface cable must be used for actuators with a 24 V DC power supply (e.g. solenoid valves) which require a lot of power.


6

Order No.

AS-Interface shaped cable Material

Color

Rubber

Yellow (AS-Interface) Black (24 V DC)

TPE


TPE special version according to UL Class 2 PUR 1)

Quantity 100-m roll

3RX9 010-0AA00

1-km drum

3RX9 012-0AA00

100-m roll

3RX9 020-0AA00

1-km drum

3RX9 022-0AA00

100-m roll

3RX9 013-0AA00

1-km drum

3RX9 014-0AA00

100-m roll

3RX9 023-0AA00

1-km drum

3RX9 024-0AA00

Yellow (AS-Interface)

100-m roll

3RX9 017-0AA00

Black (24 V DC)

100-m roll

3RX9 027-0AA00


100-m roll

3RX9 015-0AA00

1-km drum

3RX9 016-0AA00

100-m roll

3RX9 025-0AA00

1-km drum

3RX9 026-0AA00

Black (24 V DC)

1) Note on towability of the AS-Interface cable with PUR outer sheath: To determine its towability, the AS-Interface cable was tested in "IGUS tow chains" Type 10.2.048 and 20.2.55. For the test the tow chain was fitted with 3 × AS-Interface cables and diverse round cables. After three million bendings (travel), no damage to the cores, strands or outer sheath were discovered (tow chain equipped to 50%).


6/115

AS-Interface

System Components and Accessories Repeaters/Extenders

■ Overview

■ Benefits

Repeaters • Expansion of the range of applications and greater freedom in plant design by extending the AS-Interface segment • Reduction of standstill or service times in the event of a fault with separate display of the correct AS-Interface voltage for each end Extenders • Expansion of the range of applications and greater freedom in plant design by extending the AS-Interface segment • When the extender is used, the master can be located at a distance of up to 100 m and a power supply is not required at the master end.

6

• Repeater for extending the AS-Interface cable by 100 m in each case (max. 300 m possible) • Repeater cascadable • Extender for increasing the distance (max. 100 m) between the master and the AS-Interface segment • Simple assembly technology • IP67 module housing

6/116


■ Application The repeater is used to extend the AS-Interface segment by 100 m. The extender is used to extend the distance between the master and the AS-Interface segment with the AS-Interface slaves to a max. 100 m. A considerably greater cable length than 300 m can be achieved when the repeaters are connected in parallel. The maximum extension range is 500 m.

AS-Interface

System Components and Accessories Repeaters/Extenders

■ Design

■ Ordering data

Repeaters • Slaves can be used at both ends of the repeater. • An AS-Interface power supply unit is required at both ends. • The two AS-Interface shaped cables are electrically isolated. Separate display of the correct AS-Interface voltage for each end. • A maximum of two repeaters can be used in series (max. cable length of 300 m). • Several repeaters can be connected in parallel (star configuration is possible). • Installed in an application module enclosure with an FK-E coupling module as the base module. 100 m

100 m

Order No.

Repeater for AS-Interface For cable extension including FK-E coupling module

6GK1 210-0SA00

Extender for AS-Interface For installation of the master at a distance including the FK-E coupling module

6GK1 210-1SA00

100 m

Power section

S M

Power section

Repeater

S

Repeater

S

S

Repeater

Power section

S

6

G_IK10_XX_20011

Power section

S

Connection of repeaters

Extender • The master can be located at a distance of 100 m from the actual AS-Interface segment. • Slaves can only be used on the opposite end to the master. • An AS-Interface power supply is only required on the opposite end to the master. • The two AS-Interface shaped cables are not electrically isolated. • The correct AS-Interface voltage is displayed. • Installed in an application module enclosure with an FK-E coupling module as the base module. 100 m

100 m

100 m

Power section

Power section

No slaves

Extender

Repeater

M S

S

S G_IK10_XX_20012

Connection of extender Note: The extender cannot be used with DP/AS-Interface Link 20E.


6/117

AS-Interface

System Components and Accessories Extension Plug

■ Overview Only one power supply is required to supply the slaves on the up to 200 m long segment. An undervoltage detection unit integrated into the Extension Plug/ Extension Plug Plus monitors the AS-Interface voltage and indicates with the help of a LED whether the required voltage is available at the end of the bus cable. An undervoltage is signaled at the Extension Plug by means of a diagnostics LED. The Extension Plug Plus is equipped with an AS-Interface slave and communicates this diagnostics information directly to the AS-Interface master.

With the Extension Plug/ Extension Plug Plus, the maximum possible cable length for an AS-Interface segment can be doubled from 100 to 200 meters.

with Repeater

Master

Power Supply

Power Supply

Slave

Slave

Slave

Repeater

100 m

Slave

Slave

Slave

100 m

with Extension Plug Master

Power Supply Extension Plug Slave

Slave

Slave

Slave

200 m

Slave

Slave G_NSA0_XX_00370

6

The Extension Plug/ Extension Plug Plus is a passive component and is connected to the AS-Interface network at the maximum distance from the power supply. The extension plug has an M12 connector and can therefore be quickly connected to the M12 AS-Interface feeder with IP67 degree of protection.

To construct an AS-Interface segment with a cable length of more than 100 m and up to a maximum of 200 m, the Extension Plug / Extension Plug Plus is installed at that point of network which is furthest from the AS-Interface power supply unit. This point does not have to be localized exactly; it suffices to connect the Extension Plug / Extension Plug Plus in its vicinity (approx. ± 10 m). As with all AS-Interface networks, any network structure (line, tree, star) is possible when using the Extension Plug / Extension Plug Plus. Only one Extension Plug / Extension Plug Plus is required per 200-m segment even with a tree or star structure. As a passive network component the Extension Plug does not need an AS-Interface address The Extension Plug Plus has an integral AS-Interface A/B slave for the diagnostics message and thus requires an AS-Interface address. For addressing purposes, the Extension Plug Plus is simply plugged on the addressing unit 3RK1 904-2AB01.

Topology of an AS-Interface network with a size of 200 m

The Extension Plug / Extension Plug Plus is connected using an M12 plug-in connector and most easily realized with the help of the AS-Interface M12 branch 3RX9 801-0AA00 to degree of protection IP67. Depending on the size of an AS-Interface segment and the power consumption (the power consumption varies with the number of stations connected), it is important to make sure that the voltage drop along the AS-Interface cable does not become excessive. To guarantee that even the remotest slave is still supplied with the necessary minimum voltage, the Extension Plug has a voltage monitor. With the Extension Plug, any undershooting of the minimum voltage in accordance with the

6/118


AS-Interface specification is clearly indicated by flashing of a green LED; a correct AS-Interface voltage is signaled by steady illumination of the green LED. The undervoltage detection has a delay for the LED indication in order to recognize also short-time voltage dips of the type which occur, for example, when actuators are switched. The Extension Plug Plus is equipped with an AS-Interface slave. Instead of the diagnostics LED, the Extension Plug Plus communicates the diagnostics information directly to the AS-Interface master. Two different voltage values can be set as threshold value. Using two diagnostics bits it is possible to distinguish between brief and lengthy voltage drops.

AS-Interface

System Components and Accessories Extension Plug

■ Overview (continued) from the master to a slave is 400 m and the absolute maximum cable length is 600 m. The parallel connection of repeaters for a star-shaped configuration with segments up to 200 m long respectively is possible.

For particularly large AS-Interface networks the maximum possible cable length can be increased further by using repeaters. Please note that when a repeater and an Extension Plug / Extension Plug Plus are used together, the series connection of repeaters is not possible. Hence the maximum possible distance

Master

Slave

Slave

Power Supply Repeater

Extension Plug Slave Repeater

Slave

200 m

Power Supply

200 m

Slave

Slave

Extension Plug

200 m

600 m

G_NSA0_XX_00371

Extension Plug

Power Supply

Maximum network size with repeaters and Extension Plug (master at center of network)

■ Benefits • Doubling of the cable length per AS-Interface segment from 100 to 200 meters • Extended applications and more freedom when designing the system through doubling the AS-Interface segment. • Significant reduction of the network infrastructure costs for large networks

• This allows the AS-Interface network to be extended to up to 600 m in conjunction with repeaters (for details, see design) • Easy monitoring by means of integrated undervoltage detection


3RK1 901-1MX00

Version

Order No.

AS-Interface Extension Plug 1) • Doubling of the cable length to 200 m per AS-Interface segment • Undervoltage monitoring signal by means of diagnostics LED

3RK1 901-1MX00

AS-Interface Extension Plug Plus 1) • Doubling of the cable length to 200 m per AS-Interface segment • Undervoltage monitoring signal by means of integral AS-Interface slave to AS-Interface master

3RK1 901-1MX01

AS-Interface M12 branch • For adaptation of shaped AS-Interface cable to a standard round cable • Insulation piercing method for connection of AS-Interface cable • M12 socket for connection of standard round cable • Degree of protectionIP67

3RX9 801-0AA00

Accessories

3RX9 801-0AA00

1) For connecting to the AS-Interface you need the AS-Interface M12 branch, which must be ordered separately (see Accessories).


6/119

6

AS-Interface

System Components and Accessories Addressing units

■ Overview To be able to exchange data with the master, all stations must be addressed before the AS-Interface network is set up. This can be done • offline via an addressing unit or • online by the master of the AS-Interface system. The addresses themselves have the values 1 to 31 (or 1A to 31A and 1B to 31B for the expanded specification). A new slave which has not yet been addressed has the address 0. In this case, it is recognized as such by the master and is not yet included in normal communication. The assignment of the addresses is arbitrary, i.e. it is irrelevant whether the slave starts with the address 21 or whether the first slave is assigned the address 1.


6

Version

Order No.

AS-Interface addressing unit • For active AS-Interface modules, intelligent sensors and actuators • In accordance with AS-Interface Version 2.1 • Including expanded addressing mode • Scope of delivery: - one addressing unit - one operating manual (German, English, French, Spanish, Italian) - one addressing cable (1.5 m, with jack plug)

3RK1 904-2AB01

FK-E coupling module, with integrated addressing socket 1) for addressing user modules

3RK1 901-1MA00

Addressing cable, with M12 socket 1) • For addressing 2) slaves with M12 connection (e.g. K60R) or light curtains • 1.5 m

3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5

Addressing cable, with jack plug 3) • 1.5 m • Included in scope of supply of of the 3RK1 904-2AB01 addressing unit

Z236A

3RK1 904-2AB01 Accessories

1) Not included in scope of supply of of the 3RK1 904-2AB01 addressing unit 2) Note: A 3-pole cable must be used because the addressing unit uses PIN 2, 4 and 5 for IR addressing. 3) Can be ordered only from the following address: Gossen-Metrawatt GmbH, Thomas-Mann-Str. 16-20 90471 Nürnberg, Germany Tel.: +49 (0)911/8602-111 Fax: +49 (0)911/8602-777 E-mail: [email protected]

6/120


AS-Interface

System Components and Accessories Analyzer

■ Overview

■ Benefits • Simple and user-friendly operation allows AS-Interface network diagnostics without experts. • The intuitive display of the statistics mode facilitates fast troubleshooting. • Test logs supply proof about the status and quality of the installation for servicing and approvals. • Recorded logs make remote diagnostics by Technical Assistance easier. • Advanced trigger functions permit exact analysis. • Process data can be monitored online.

■ Application Online statistics

The AS-Interface analyzer is used to test AS-Interface networks. It enables systematic troubleshooting and permanent monitoring. Installation errors, e.g. loose contacts or EMC interference under extreme loads, can be revealed by this device. Thanks to the easy-to-use software the user can assess the quality of complete networks even if he lacks detailed specialist knowledge of AS-Interface. In addition it is an easy matter with the AS-Interface analyzer to create test logs from the records produced, thus providing documentation for start-ups and service assignments.

6

For advanced AS-Interface users there are trigger functions for detailed diagnostics. Connection

Master

Branch M12

Slave

Slave

Slave

NSA0_00359b

Slave

AS-Interface Analyser

PC

The AS-Interface analyzer follows the communication on the AS-Interface network as a passive station. The unit is supplied simultaneously from the AS-Interface cable. The AS-Interface analyzer interprets the physical signals on the AS-Interface network and records the communication. The data thus obtained are transferred through an RS232 interface to a PC such as a notebook, for evaluation with the supplied diagnostics software.

This mode provides a quick overview of the existing AS-Interface system. The error rates are presented per slave in a traffic-light function (green, yellow, red). The bus configuration and the currently transmitted data of the slaves are shown in a well arranged presentation. With the Expanded Statistics function it is possible to determine the error rates as the number of transmitted or faulty bus message frames. The Bundle Error overview shows in steps how many multiple repetitions of message frames occurred in order to enable a selective and look-ahead assessment of the transmission quality.


6/121

AS-Interface


■ Application (continued) Test log

NSA0_00362

Data mode

The recorded data of the online statistics are easy to output and document using a test log. Verification of the state of the plant can thus be provided for approvals or service assignments. The new measurement assistant records the bus signals for an adjustable period, automating the creation of the test log. A standardized quality test of AS-Interface plants is thus possible.

6

In this mode the analyzer now shows not only the digital input/output values but also the current analog values and the input status of the safety slaves. Trace mode

The presentation of message frames in the style of a classic field bus analyzer is indispensable for complex troubleshooting. Extensive trigger functions and recording and viewing filters are available for this purpose. An external trigger input and trigger output round off the scope of functions in order to find even the most difficult errors. For troubleshooting in connection with safety monitor applications, changes of status in the code tables of safety slaves are identified and assessed.

6/122


AS-Interface



3RK1 904-3AB01

Version

Order No.

AS-Interface analyzer • For testing actuator/sensor interface systems • For service assignments in installations and networks with AS-Interface systems • Scope of delivery: - AS-Interface analyzer - RS232 cable for connecting to PC - Diagnostics software (CD-ROM) for PC (Windows 95/98, ME, 2000, NT, XP)

3RK1 904-3AB01

AS-Interface M12 branch • For adaptation of shaped AS-Interface cable to a standard round cable • Insulation piercing method for connection of AS-Interface cable • M12 socket for connection of standard round cable • IP67 degree of protection

3RX9 801-0AA00

M12 cable plug • Cable: PUR • Length: 5 m • Color: Black

3RX8 000-0CD42-1AF0

Accessories

3RX9 801-0AA00

6


6/123

AS-Interface

System Components and Accessories Miscellaneous Accessories


Order No.

AS-Interface standard distribution board, for AS-Interface flat cable

3RK1 901-1NN00

• Current carrying capacity up to 7 A • Delivery includes special mounting plate for wall and standard rail mounting • Seals (3RK1 902-0AR00) are required only if a cable is to be terminated in the distribution board and must be ordered separately 3RK1 901-1NN00 AS-Interface compact distribution board, for AS-Interface flat cable Current carrying capacity up to 6 A

3RK1 901-1NN10

3RK1 901-1NN10 AS-Interface M12 feeder

3RX9 801-0AA00

for flat cable

for

AS-i

M12 socket

--

3RX9 801-0AA00

M12 cable box

1m

3RK1 901-1NR11

2m

3RK1 901-1NR12

M12 socket

--

3RG7 838-1DG

M12 cable box

1m

3RK1 901-1NR21

2m

3RK1 901-1NR22

--

3RK1 901-1NR00

AS-i / Uaux

6

4-fold M12 socket delivery includes coupling module

3RK1 901-1NR11

cable length

3RG7 838-1DG

3RK1 901-1NR21

3RK1 901-1NR00

3RK1 901-1TR00

M12-T distribution boards • IP68 • 1 x M12 connector • 2 x M12 box

3RK1 901-1TR00

M12 Y-shaped coupler plugs for connection of two sensors to one M12 socket with Y connector

6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0

Addressing cable, with jack plug, to M12 • For addressing slaves with M12 bus connection • Only required for addressing unit 3RK1 904-2AB00 • If the latest version of the 3RK1 904-2AB01 addressing unit is being used, addressing is executed over the standard 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5 M12 cable

3RK1 901-3RA00

6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0

3RK1 901-3RA00

6/124


AS-Interface

System Components and Accessories Miscellaneous Accessories


Order No.


3RK1 901-1KA00

AS-Interface covering caps M12, manipulation-proof for free M12 sockets

3RK1 901-1KA01


3RK1 901-1PN00

AS-Interface Pg 11 seal • For AS-Interface cable, shaped • For insertion in Pg-11 glands

3RK1 901-1MD00

3RK1 901-1KA00

3RK1 901-1KA01

3RK1 901-1PN00

3RK1 901-1MD00 Cable adapter for flat cable Connection of AS-Interface cable to metric gland with insulation piercing method • Continuation using standard cable

3RK1 901-3QM00

- For M16 gland

3RK1 901-3QM00

- For M20 gland

3RK1 901-3QM10

6

• Continuation using pins - For M16 gland

3RK1 901-3QM01

- For M20 gland

3RK1 901-3QM11

Cable adapter for flat cable

3RK1 901-3QA00

Cable terminating piece For sealing of open cable ends (shaped AS-Interface cable) in IP67

3RK1 901-1MN00

3RK1 901-3QA00

3RK1 901-1MN00 K45 mounting plates • For wall mounting

3RK1 901-2EA00


3RK1 901-2DA00

3RK1 901–2EA00 K60 mounting plates suitable for all K60 compact modules • Wall mounting

3RK1 901-0CA00


3RK1 901-0CB01

Sealing sets • For mounting plate K60 and standard distribution board • Cannot be used for mounting plate K45 • One set contains one straight and one shaped seal

3RK1 902-0AR00

3RK1 901-0CA00

3RK1 902-0AR00

Other accessories: • See Catalog FS 10 / chapter Proximity Switches BERO / section Accessories / Plug Connectors

• See A&D-Mall / section Low-Voltage Controls / SIRIUS Industrial Controls / Sensors, Measurement and Testing Systems / Proximity Switches BERO / Accessories / Plug Connectors Siemens IK PI · 2007

6/125

AS-Interface

6

7 6/126


SINAUT Telecontrol

7/2 7/2 7/4 7/6 7/9

Introduction General information SINAUT MICRO SINAUT ST7 Topologies

7/13 7/13 7/18 7/22 7/26 7/30 7/37

7/49 7/54 7/59 7/63

TIM communications module General information TIM 32 with dedicated-line modem TIM 33 with telephone modem TIM 34 with ISDN modem TIM 3V-IE for WAN or Ethernet TIM 3V-IE Advanced for WAN or Ethernet TIM 42 / 42D with dedicated-line modem TIM 43 / 43D with telephone modem TIM 44 / 44D with ISDN modem TIM 4V / 4VD without built-in modem TIM 4R / 4RD without built-in modem

7/67 7/67 7/69 7/78 7/84

Modems General information MD2 dedicated-line modem MD3 telephone modem MD4 ISDN modem

7/89 7/89 7/94 7/97

Mobile radio telephone components (GSM/GPRS) MC45 GSM kit MD720-3 GSM/GPRS modem ANT794-4MR GSM/GPRS antenna

7/99 7/99 7/102

Dedicated-line accessories LTOP overvoltage protection Line transformer

7/104 7/104 7/106

Radio clock components Accessories for DCF77 GPS components

7/108 7/108

7/117

Software SINAUT ST7 standard software package SINAUT ST7cc, Add-on for WinCC SINAUT ST7sc, SCADA Connect Software SINAUT MICRO SC

7/120 7/120

Accessories Connecting cables

7/124 7/124

Partner solutions TeleService

7/44

7/111 7/114


SINAUT Telecontrol

Introduction

General information

■ Overview SINAUT MICRO

SINAUT ST7 HMI

OPC Server SINAUT MICRO SC

SINAUT ST7cc

Control level

Standby service

Industrial Ethernet S7-400

redundant HMI

S7-300

Remote programming DSL router

S7-300 with TIM 3V-IE

SMS

Email

MPI TIM

TIM

Modem

TIM

MC45

Radio modem other dedicated lines (star network)

Internet

Node level

HMI

GSM

Radio (optional with time-slice procedure)

Fax

GSM network

MPI TIM

Modems

S7-300

S7-300 with TIM

with TIM 3V-IE Advanced

analog dialup network

GSM/GPRSProvider

MC45

ISDN network GSM

7

S7-300 with TIM

S7-300 with TIM

redundant transmission path


S7-300 with TIM

S7-300 with TIM


Industrial Ethernet

Telecontrol with SINAUT MICRO and SINAUT ST7

7/2

Station level

SCALANCE X-100/X-200


S7-300 with TIM


Radio modem

S7-300

PROFIBUS

S7-300 with TIM and CP 342-5

S7-300 with TIM

Field level G_IK_XX_30148

Remote Station S7-200 with modem SINAUT MD720-3

Dedicated line (linear bus network)

other dedicated lines (star network)

SINAUT Telecontrol

Introduction

General information

■ Overview (continued) SINAUT, the telecontrol system based on SIMATIC S7, consists of two independent systems: • SINAUT MICRO; Telecontrol system for monitoring and controlling distributed plants using wireless communication (GPRS) on the basis of SIMATIC S7-200 and WinCC flexible or WinCC. As a result of its bidirectional communications capability, SINAUT MICRO can handle simple telecontrol tasks. Configuration is carried out using STEP 7 Micro/WIN. • SINAUT ST7; Versatile telecontrol system based on SIMATIC S7-300, S7-400 and WinCC for fully-automatic monitoring and control of process terminals which exchange data with one or more control centers or with each other via a WAN or over Ethernet (TCP/IP). Configuration is carried out using STEP 7.

■ More information Additional information is available in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/sinaut

An OPC server is available for both systems which permits connection to a non-Siemens control center system (OPC client). Data transmission in the two systems is carried out using different protocols. If a SINAUT MICRO system is to be combined with a SINAUT ST7 system, this can be carried out in the PC or control center over OPC.

7


7/3

SINAUT Telecontrol

Introduction

SINAUT MICRO

■ Design

SINAUT MICRO is based on SIMATIC S7-200, and is the lowcost expansion for monitoring and controlling simple telecontrol tasks. With SINAUT MICRO, up to 256 SIMATIC S7-200 stations can easily and safely communicate with one another and with the control center using GPRS mobile radio. They remain permanently online.

■ Benefits

• Saving of costs for design and maintenance of own radio system through use of existing mobile radio networks • Low-cost GPRS volume tariffs reduce the monthly connection charges • A GPRS connection is permanently online, i.e. it offers the advantages of a dedicated line • Secure connection over public networks through encrypted data transmission plus additional measures of the GPRS provider • Highly flexible bidirectional connections through application of user-friendly communications manager - between station and control center - between station and station

■ Application

7

SINAUT MICRO is based on SIMATIC S7-200 and GPRS. It is particularly suitable wherever small data quantities have to be transmitted over wireless connections. SINAUT MICRO can be used as a low-cost fault signaling system, but is also appropriate for simple telecontrol tasks as a result of the bidirectional communications facility. Depending on the main memory available in the CPU of the S7-200, local automation tasks can be handled in addition to communication. Main applications are the monitoring and control of non-mobile stations in the following sectors: • Sewage treatment plants • Drinking water purification and distribution • Oil and gas supplies • District heating networks • Automatic machines • Traffic control systems • Building monitoring • Weather stations • Lighthouses and buoys • Wind power plants • Photovoltaic plants • Intelligent advertising panels In addition, SINAUT MICRO can also be used to link mobile stations if central monitoring and/or control is required for these: • Railway vehicles • Special vehicles • Local public transport • Complex building machines • Ships on rivers and in coastal areas

SINAUT MICRO consists of the following components: • SINAUT MD720-3; modem for GPRS and GSM communication • SINAUT MICRO SC software package comprising: - Block library for SIMATIC S7-200 CPU (CPU 224 and better) - OPC server software for the PC control center; for data exchange with an OPC client, e.g. WinCC or WinCC flexible - Connection manager for the PC control center; for establishing a secure GPRS connection with SINAUT MD720-3, for monitoring these connections, and for data routing with internode communication between S7-200 and S7-200 The MD720-3 modem has an RS 232 interface and is connected to the S7-200 controller using the Siemens PPI adapter (6ES7 901-3CB30-0XA0).

■ Function GPRS data communication The SINAUT MICRO SC software and the SINAUT MD720-3 GPRS modem enable communication of S7-200 PLCs over GPRS. SINAUT MICRO SC is OPC server software with special communications functions which permit it to support connections to remote S7-200 PLCs. These PLCs are equipped with the MD720-3 modem. The GPRS service (General Packet Radio Service) of a GSM network (Global System for Mobile Communication) is used for the connections. Using these GPRS connections, the remote S7-200 PLCs can communicate with the SINAUT MICRO SC software itself or with other S7-200 PLCs which are connected by the SINAUT MICRO SC software. The PC on which the MICRO SC software is installed must be permanently accessible from the GPRS network. It must therefore be directly connected to the GPRS network using a dedicated line, or permanently to the Internet, e.g. by means of DSL.


Control center

S7-200 station with modem SINAUT MD 720-3

Internet


GSM/GPRS provider

Monitoring and controlling data via GPRS

7/4



G_IK10_XX_30149

■ Overview

SINAUT Telecontrol

Introduction

SINAUT MICRO

■ Function (continued) The SINAUT MICRO SC software package includes a block library for the SIMATIC S7-200 PLC. Users can implement the following types of data exchange with the assistance of these blocks and the MICRO SC software for the PC control center:

Control center

Station 1 data

simatic hmi

Control center

Station 1 data

Station 2

simatic hmi

data

Station 1 sends data to control center

Station 1 sends data to station 2 Control center

Station 1 data

simatic hmi

Control center

Station 1 data

simatic hmi

Control center sends data to station 1 Station 2 data

Control center

Station 1

simatic hmi

G_IK10_XX_30046

data

Control center scans data at station 1

Data exchange between station and control center

G_IK10_XX_30045

Station 1 scans data at station 2

Data exchange between two stations via the control center

SMS transmission By applying additional user software, SMS, can also be transmitted from the S7-200 PLC. The GPRS connection must be temporarily interrupted for the duration of the SMS. Note: Further information on sending SMSs can be found on the Internet in the examples for the Micro Automation Set 21.

Access to the S7-200 PLC per teleservice Up to three telephone numbers can be saved on the SINAUT MD720-3 modem, from which a teleservice connection is permissible. If a call is made from one of the approved numbers, the MD720-3 interrupts the GPRS connection and switches through the teleservice connection to the PLC. The GPRS connection is reestablished at the end of the teleservice session.


7/5

7

SINAUT Telecontrol

Introduction SINAUT ST7

■ Overview

■ Design

SINAUT ST7 is a telecontrol system based on SIMATIC S7 (S7-300, S7-400 and WinCC) for fully-automatic monitoring and control of process terminals which exchange data with one or more control centers or with each other via a WAN or over Ethernet (TCP/IP). SINAUT ST7 facilitates an integrated communications concept (TIA) and complete integration into the SIMATIC environment. The modular design and the support of a huge variety of network forms and operating modes including Ethernet permit the design of flexible network structures that can also contain redundant links. By using all forms of transmission media (e.g. dedicated line, radio, dial-up networks, text messages, fax), the networks can be optimally adapted to the respective local conditions. The software packages supplied and STEP 7 permit simple and cost-effective configuration even of highly complex networks and their extensions for the first time. The system also supports data exchange with devices of the previous system SINAUT ST1 (based on SIMATIC S5).

■ Benefits

7

• All WAN and Ethernet media can be combined as required, including path redundancy • Event-driven data transmission incl. time-stamping • Local data storage • Remote programming and remote diagnostics • Integrated operator control and monitoring concept via WinCC or OPC

■ Application SINAUT ST7 is ideal for both the most basic systems with a small number of process terminals and complex networks with many hundreds of stations. Example applications: • Safe supply of drinking water, gas or district heating for private and industrial consumers via branched networks • Cost-effective transportation of gas, oil or oil products via pipelines • Reliable detection and transmission of process data from environmental monitoring systems • Remote monitoring of waste water plants • Control and supervision of beacons, engine-based cogeneration plants, conveyor or transportation systems

7/6


The SINAUT ST7 system is based on the SIMATIC S7-300 and S7-400 systems as well as on WinCC. It supplements these systems with the specific SINAUT hardware and software components listed below. Hardware Components • TIM communications modules • MD modem modules • GSM components • Dedicated-line accessories • Radio clock components • Connecting cables Software components Standard software for SINAUT ST7 • SINAUT TD7 library; contains blocks for the SIMATIC S7 CPU • SINAUT ST7 configuring and diagnostics software for the programming device Software for the central control center • SINAUT ST7cc; the SINAUT add-on for WinCC • SINAUT ST7sc; software for interfacing ST7 with control centers that can operate as OPC clients

■ Function Network configurations and operating modes SINAUT ST7 is a telecontrol system based on SIMATIC S7 (S7-300, S7-400 und WinCC) for fully-automatic monitoring and control of process terminals which exchange data with one or more control centers or with each other via a WAN or over Ethernet (TCP/IP). SINAUT ST7 facilitates an integrated communications concept (TIA) and complete integration into the SIMATIC environment. The modular design and the support of a huge variety of network forms and operating modes including Ethernet permit the design of flexible network structures that can also contain redundant links. By using all forms of transmission media (e.g. dedicated line, wireless, dial-up networks, mobile wireless), the networks can be optimally adapted to the respective local conditions. The SINAUT ST7 configuring software and STEP 7 permit simple and cost-effective configuration even of highly complex networks and their extensions. The system also supports data exchange with devices of the previous system SINAUT ST1 (based on SIMATIC S5).

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Function (continued) The control center

Constantly up-to-date date and time

A number of different versions can be selected as components of the control center: • Like the stations, the control center comprises an S7-300 or S7-400 PLC. This solution is suitable for simpler control centers in which only an up-to-date process image of the process data available in the stations is required. The station process control can be influenced by entering commands, setpoints or parameters. This S7-300 or S7-400 control center can also be used to extend a PC control center (SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc), e.g. for data output on a panel and/or as an emergency operating system. • SINAUT ST7cc; PC control center based on WinCC; this is the ideal control center system for both SINAUT ST7 and SINAUT ST1. It has been designed specifically for eventdriven and time-stamped data transmission on the SINAUT system and can be set up as a non-redundant or redundant system (to supplement the WinCC redundancy package). • SINAUT ST7sc; For interfacing control centers from other vendors via OPC; the SINAUT telecontrol technology can also be interfaced with control center systems from other vendors via the "Data Access Interface". ST7sc features extensive buffer mechanisms which prevent data from being lost even if the OPC client fails. It can be connected to non-redundant or redundant clients.

An (optional) DCF77 radio clock can be used to supply the CPUs and the control center, e.g. ST7cc, with the date and time across the network. The systems therefore always have the exact time; switching over between summer and winter times is carried out automatically. The GPS (Global Positioning System) can also be used as the time source instead of DCF77. Data telegrams with time stamping, or starting of programs depending on the time of day, therefore belong to the standard functions.

SINAUT WANs The following WANs can be used for data transmission: • Dedicated lines, private or leased; copper or fiber-optic cable (also in conjunction with transmission systems such as PCM30 or OTN) • Private radio networks (optionally with time slot procedure) • Analog telephone network • Digital ISDN network • Mobile radio network GSM SINAUT via Ethernet SINAUT communication via the Ethernet on TCP/IP-based networks is possible between station and control center and also between individual stations: • Via radio through use of special radio devices optimized for Ethernet, e.g. SCALANCE W • Via fiber-optic conductors, e.g. through use of SCALANCE X switches with optical ports; distances of up to 26 km can then be covered • Via public networks and the Internet using DSL or GPRS.

Local data storage A special property of the TIM communications module used in the SINAUT ST7 system is the capability for saving data which must not be lost in the event of a connection fault or if the partner fails. A memory capacity is provided for up to 32,000 telegrams. The memory capacity helps to save money on dial-up networks. Various priorities can be assigned to the data to be transmitted. At high priority, a dial-up connection is established immediately. At low priority, data is initially saved in the TIM. The data is transmitted the next time a connection is established with the partner for any reason (for example, if higher-priority information is to be transferred, or if a connection is established by the partner in order to exchange data). It is precisely because the TIM module can save data and transmit it at a later point in time with a time stamp that the use of a suitable control center system must be ensured. It must also be possible to continue to process this data, specifically as regards subsequent archiving, if the data is received in the control center delayed by a number of hours or even days. The SINAUT ST7cc control center system is predestined for these tasks. SINAUT remote programming and remote diagnostics In industries in which SINAUT is used, the terminals are distributed across wide areas and are often situated in locations that are difficult to access. Faults which require a visit to be made to a terminal of this type are associated with long journeys. SINAUT ST7 can provide the ideal solution for such circumstances: Remote programming and diagnostics via the telecontrol network. All diagnostics and programming functions provided by SIMATIC and SINAUT for station automation and WAN communication can be used via the telecontrol path – without interrupting process data transmission. Alarm messaging via text message In order to alert standby service personnel, event-driven text messages can be sent to mobile phones from the CPUs. An acknowledgment that a message of this type has been received can be sent back to the sender CPU from the mobile phone. An SMS message can also be output as e-mail, fax or voice mail if the SMS provider offers these options.

Change-driven data transmission In the terminals, the SINAUT software ensures that process data is transmitted between the individual CPUs and the control center, e.g. ST7cc, in the event of changes. Connection, CPU or control center failures are displayed. A data update is performed automatically following debugging or after CPU or control center startup.


7/7

7

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Integration Protocols SINAUT ST1 protocol This protocol is used in the SINAUT ST1 system, which is based on the SIMATIC S5 system. However, the SINAUT ST7 system also supports this protocol. The protocol can be used to further extend existing SINAUT ST1 systems or replace existing system parts with ST7 devices. Note: In SINAUT ST1 systems with SAMSY PC, LSC or CS7 control center systems, as well as in redundant ST1 configurations, the use of ST7 devices is only possible under certain conditions. Possible operating modes: • Polling • Polling with time-slot procedure • Spontaneous mode Please note that only transmission devices suitable for 11-bit asynchronous characters may be used in both polling modes. However, "spontaneous" mode supports transmission with both 11-bit and 10-bit asynchronous characters. SINAUT ST7 protocol This protocol is a more advanced version of the ST1 protocol. It enables SINAUT communication via WAN or Ethernet. Basically, the addressing options have been extended: • Up to 32000 stations can be addressed (as compared to a maximum of 254 with ST1) • Telegrams contain a source and a target address (ST1 telegrams only contain a source or a target address).

7

The ST7 protocol also supports "PG routing", i.e. remote programming and remote diagnostics via the WAN without interrupting data traffic. PG routing and data traffic share the available bandwidth on the transmission path. PG routing is simply allocated a higher priority. Possible operating modes: • Polling • Polling with time-slot procedure • Multi-master polling with time-slot procedure • Spontaneous mode (in dial-up networks) • Spontaneous mode in Ethernet Please note that only transmission devices suitable for 10-bit asynchronous characters may be used in "multi-master polling with time-slot procedure" mode. However, the other modes support transmission with both 11-bit and 10-bit asynchronous characters. Modes • In polling mode, data exchange is controlled from the master. It calls the connected terminals (including node terminals) in sequence. Terminals with modified data send this data as soon as it is called. Terminals with no modified data at the present time simply acknowledge the call. Data from the master to the stations can be transferred at any time between the individual calls. The ST7 protocol supports direct data transmission between stations. During this type of communication, data is always exchanged via the polling master.

7/8


• Polling with time-slot procedure mode is used on a radio network on which the use of the radio frequency assigned by the registration authorities has to be shared with other operators. Typically, each operator has 6 seconds per minute to exchange data with its stations. Once this time has elapsed, the frequency must be enabled for the next operator. During the allocated time slot, this type of polling operates in the same way as standard polling. Direct data transmission between stations is possible with the ST7 protocol. During this type of communication, data is always exchanged via the polling master. To ensure that the time slot is observed exactly, the master must be fitted with a DCF77 or GPS radio clock. • If stations on the dedicated-line or radio network have to communicate with more than one master, multi-master polling with time-slot procedure mode is used. Every minute, each of the connected masters is allocated one or even a number of time slots for polling. During polling, the masters take turns within one minute. This type of polling is similar to polling with time-slot procedure operating mode. However, in this mode, each station (including node stations) has a separate data buffer for each controller. Direct data transmission between stations is possible. During this type of communication, data is always exchanged via the polling master. As a number of masters is present, direct data transmission between stations can be set up with redundancy: If the priority master fails, the alternative master will take over direct data transmission between stations. In this mode too, in order that the time slot is observed exactly, the master must be fitted with a DCF77 or GPS radio clock. • Spontaneous mode is designed for data exchange on dialup networks. Different priorities (high, normal or alarm) can be assigned to the data of the station or node station for transmission in the dial-up network. Data to be sent by the master always has high priority. If data with a high or alarm priority is pending for transmission, a dial-up connection is established immediately. At normal priority, data is initially saved in the stations. The data is transmitted the next time a connection is established with the partner for any reason. For example, if information with a high or alarm priority is to be transferred, or if a connection is established by the partner in order to exchange data. The telegrams saved in the TIM are transmitted according to the FIFO principle, i.e. in the original chronological sequence, providing they are telegrams with high or normal priority. If alarm telegrams are present in the TIM buffer, these are always transmitted before the other telegrams. Direct data transmission between stations is possible with the ST7 protocol. • Spontaneous mode on Ethernet; When sent over Ethernet, data is transferred immediately to the relevant partner regardless of any priority. The order of transmission follows the FIFO principle. This does not apply to telegrams with maximum priority. These are transferred before the any other telegrams that may be in the buffer. Transfer is carried out with the resources of S7 Communication. One permanent S7 connection is established for transfer between two Ethernet TIMs or between one Ethernet TIM and ST7cc/ST7sc. The two TIMs or the TIM and ST7cc/ST7sc exchange the data packages specific to SINAUT ST7 with application of the TCP/IP transport protocol.

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Overview The overview below outlines the network configurations which can be set up with SINAUT ST7 in the WAN. The protocols and operating modes which can be used by SINAUT ST7 for communication via each network are indicated for each network configuration.

On redundant WAN connections, a TIM 4 with two ports must always be used, as redundant paths always start/end on a TIM module.

Explanations Network type: Point-to-point Protocol: SINAUT ST7 and ST1 Operating mode: Polling Network type: Star Protocol: SINAUT ST7 and ST1 Operating mode: Polling

Network type: Line Protocol: SINAUT ST7 and ST1 Operating mode: Polling

Combination of - point-to-point - star - line Protocol: SINAUT ST7 and ST1 Operating mode: Polling

7

Combination of - point-to-point - node - star Protocol: SINAUT ST7 and ST1 Operating mode: Polling

Combination of - point-to-point - node - star - line Protocol: SINAUT ST7 and ST1 Operating mode: Polling

Master

Station

Network type: Line with two masters *) Protocol: SINAUT ST7 Operating mode: MultiMaster polling with time slot procedure

Nodestation

*) More than two masters can be used


G_IK10_XX_30067

Dedicated line configurations

The symbols used describe the function of the WAN port on a TIM module. A TIM 3 module has one WAN port, a TIM 4 has two WAN ports. The two ports on a TIM 4 can exercise the same (e.g. 2 x master) or different (e.g. node + master) functions.

7/9

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Overview (continued) Radio network configuration

Explanations Network type: Point-to-point Protocol: SINAUT ST7 and ST1 Operating mode: Polling and polling with time slot procedure Network type: Star Protocol: SINAUT ST7 and ST1 Operating mode: Polling or polling with time slot procedure

Network type: Star with two masters *) Protocol: SINAUT ST7 Operating mode: MultiMaster polling with time slot procedure *) More than two masters can be used

7

7/10


Master

Station

Nodestation

G_IK10_XX_30068

Combination of - point-to-point - node - star Protocol: SINAUT ST7 and ST1 Operating mode: Polling or polling with time slot procedure

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Overview (continued) Explanations Network type:

Analog telephone or digital ISDN network *)

Protocol:

SINAUT ST7 and ST1

Operating mode: Spontaneous *) When using SINAUT modems, it is not possible to mix analog and ISDN connections. In such applications, special hybrid modems are required.

Network type:

Cellular phone network (GSM)

Protocol:

SINAUT ST7 and ST1

Operating mode: Spontaneous

Network type:

Combination of landline network and cellular phone network *)

Protocol:

SINAUT ST7 and ST1

Operating mode: Spontaneous *) Landline connections either analog or ISDN; ISDN is recommended in combination with cellular phone connections.

7 Network type

Switched network with 2 masters 1) shown here using the example of a mixed network comprising landline and cellular phone networks 2)

Protocol:

SINAUT ST7 and ST1

Operating mode: Spontaneous 1) More than 2 masters are possible 2) Landline connections either analog or ISDN; ISDN is recommended in combination with cellular phone connections

Network:

Protocol:

Combination of dedicated networks and landline networks over a node station *)

Master

SINAUT ST7 and ST1

Operating mode: Polling (dedicated line) Spontaneous (switched network) *) connections either analog or ISDN

Station

Node station


G_IK10_XX_30065

Switched network configurations

7/11

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Overview (continued) Redundant network configurations (examples)

Explanations Network type:

Redundant point-to-point connection using two dedicated lines

Protocol:

SINAUT ST7 and ST1

Operating mode: Polling

Network type:

Redundant star network type using two dedicated lines each; includes connections to nonredundant stations

Protocol:

SINAUT ST7 and ST1

Operating mode: Polling

Network type:

Redundant line network using two dedicated lines; includes connections to nonredundant stations

Protocol:

SINAUT ST7 and ST1

Operationg mode: Polling

7 Network type:

Redundant point-to-point connection using dedicated line and switched network

Protocol:

SINAUT ST7 and ST1

Operating mode: Polling (dedicated line) Spontaneous (switched network)

Protocol:

Redundant point-to-point connection using dedicated line and radio transmission between the master and the node station, lower-level stations are connected via a non-redundant star network

Additional information is available in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/sinaut

7/12


Station

SINAUT ST7 and ST1

Operating mode: Polling or polling with time slot procedure (radio transmission)


Master

Nodestation (node station)

G_IK10_XX_30066

Network type:

SINAUT Telecontrol

TIM communications modules General information

■ Overview The SINAUT TIM communications module

TIM 4 – with MPI connection

The TIM (Telecontrol Interface Module) is a central component of the SINAUT hardware. It is used by the S7 CPU or control center PC for data exchange via the relevant SINAUT network, optionally with the SINAUT ST7 or SINAUT ST1 protocol (ST1 protocol not via Ethernet). The TIM is housed in an S7-300 enclosure and is available in three basic versions: TIM 3V-IE

The TIM 4 is suitable for integration into the SIMATIC S7-300 as a communications module and can also be connected via MPI to one or more SIMATIC S7-300/400 units and to the ST7cc or ST7sc PC control centers as a standalone device.

The TIM 3V-IE is a SINAUT communications module for the SIMATIC S7-300. It has an RS 232 interface to which an appropriate external modem can be connected. It additionally has an RJ45 interface which permits the SINAUT transmission via Ethernet (TCP/IP-based networks). The TIM 3V-IE is available in a standard version and an advanced version. TIM 3 – without MPI connection

All TIM 4 modules have two WAN interfaces, with the exception of the TIM 4V, which only has one. On the most basic version of TIM 4, these are two RS 232/RS 485 interfaces. An appropriate external modem can be connected to each interface. On three other TIM 4 versions, the first WAN interface is implemented via the built-in modem and the second via the additional RS 232/RS 485 interface. The two WANs which can be connected to a TIM 4 may be of the same type or different types, e.g. dedicated line plus telephone network. The TIM 4 can also be fitted with a DCF77 radio clock receiver as an option.

The TIM 3 is a SINAUT communications module for the SIMATIC S7-300. It has a WAN connection and is available in three versions which differ as a result of the type of modem installed. Note: These TIM 3 types cannot be used in conjunction with a CPU 317, CPU 318 or CPU 315-2 PN/DP. A TIM 3V-IE or TIM 3V-IE Advanced must be used for the CPUs, or a TIM 4 connected via MPI.


7/13

7

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Design Configuration examples Two simple examples are shown below, one illustrating how the TIM 3 can be integrated into a S7-300 rack as a CP and the other showing a TIM 4 connected to S7-400 via MPI as a standalone device.

As a TIM 4 can communicate with not only one but a number of S7-300 or S7-400 CPUs via MPI, a SINAUT station can also be configured, as shown in the illustration below. In this configuration, the TIM 4 provides access to the WAN for both the S7-400 and the S7-300. This could for example be a larger terminal in which the automation tasks are distributed across a number of CPUs.

S7-400

S7-300

S7-300 TIM 3

WAN

MPI

WAN

G_IK10_XX_30058

G_IK10_XX_30055

TIM 4

TIM 3 as CP in S7-300 rack SIMATIC S7-400 and S7-300 with TIM 4 on MPI bus

As on an S7-400, the control center PC (e.g. SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc) is interfaced with the SINAUT telecontrol network via one or a number of TIM 4 modules (see figure below). These TIMs are connected to the MPI card on the PC via their MPI interface. There is no need to connect a telecontrol center, e.g. an S7-400. Data is exchanged directly with the terminals. Third-party control centers designed specifically for data exchange with SINAUT ST7 are also connected in the same way.

7

MPI

WAN

G_IK10_XX_30056

TIM 4

TIM 4 connected to S7-400 via MPI as a standalone device

TIM 4

The TIM 3 can also be combined with a C7 complete unit if this C7 device features a built-in IM 360 interface module. The TIM 3 is then housed in an expansion unit which is connected to the C7 device via an IM 361. With the C7-635 and C7-636 devices, this is also possible without an IM 361 if not more than four modules are connected externally, including the TIM.

WAN

G_IK10_XX_30057

IM 361 TIM 3

TIM 3 as CP in S7-300 expansion rack combined with C7 complete unit


WAN (1)

TIM 4

WAN (n)

SINAUT ST7cc/ST7sc with several TIM 4 on the MPI bus

C7-633, 634, 635, 636, 626

7/14

SINAUT ST7cc/ST7sc

MPI

G_IK10_XX_30059

S7-400

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Design (continued) When interfacing terminals via Ethernet, the connection is made directly to the PC of the control center (e.g. SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc) without an intermediate TIM 4. SINAUT ST7cc/sc master with CP 1613 A2 Switch SCALANCE X202-2IRT

S7-300 with TIM 3V-IE TIM

Fiber Fiber Optic Optic Switch SCALANCE X204-2





These TIM 3 modules are suitable for use if SINAUT communication is required over Ethernet (TCP/IP-based networks), or if the TIM has to be connected to a WAN with which the built-in modems are not compatible. These types of TIM 3 have to be used, for example, for connections to the GSM network, to radio equipment or to a fiber-optic cable.

G_IK10_XX_30133

TIM

TIM 3 modules without built-in modem • TIM 3V-IE; TIM 3 with RS 232 interface for an external modem or other transmission device as well as Ethernet interface; only one of the two interfaces can be used. The module can only be used in a station, and cannot be combined in the same rack with additional TIMs. • TIM 3V-IE Advanced; As TIM 3V-IE, but both interfaces can be used simultaneously, for SINAUT communication. The module can be used in a master, station or node station, and can be combined in the same rack with additional TIMs.

RS232 interface (9-pole, pin): WAN access via external modem

SINAUT ST7cc/ST7sc connected directly to SINAUT stations via Ethernet

RJ45 interface: Ethernet access

7

24 V G_IK10_XX_30112

TIM 3 modules with built-in modem • TIM 32; TIM 3 with built-in MD2 modem (dedicated line) • TIM 33; TIM 3 with built-in MD3 modem (analog telephone network) • TIM 34; TIM 3 with built-in MD4 modem (ISDN)

24 V

RJ12 Western connector: WAN access point via integrated modem

G_IK10_XX_30060

Interfaces of TIM 3V-IE (schematic diagram with covers removed)

Interfaces of TIM 3 with built-in modem (schematic diagram with covers removed)


7/15

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Design (continued) TIM 4 modules with built-in modem • TIM 42; TIM 4 with built-in MD2 modem (dedicated line) • TIM 42D; TIM 4 with built-in MD2 modem (dedicated line) and DCF77 radio clock receiver • TIM 43; TIM 4 with built-in MD3 modem (analog telephone network) • TIM 43D; TIM 4 with built-in MD3 modem (analog telephone network) and DCF77 radio clock receiver • TIM 44; TIM 4 with built-in MD4 modem (ISDN) • TIM 42D; TIM 4 with built-in MD4 modem (ISDN) and DCF77 radio clock receiver

24 V

Combined RS232/RS485 interface (9-pin, male): WAN access point via external modem

MPI interface (9-pin, female)

MPI interface (9-pin, female)

RJ12 Western connector: First WAN access point via integrated modem

Interfaces of TIM 4 with built-in modem (schematic diagram with covers removed)

DCF77 antenna or GPS receiver

G_IK10_XX_30063

DCF77 antenna or GPS receiver

These TIM 4 modules are suitable for use if the TIM has to be connected to a WAN with which the built-in modems are not compatible. This type of TIM has to be used, for example, for connections to the GSM network or to radio equipment.

Combined RS232/RS485 interface (9-pin, male): Second WAN access point via external modem

G_IK10_XX_30062

24 V

Interfaces of TIM 4V without built-in modem (schematic diagram with covers removed)

Combined RS232/RS485 interface (9-pin, male): First WAN access point via external modem MPI interface (9-pin, female)

DCF77 antenna or GPS receiver 24 V

Adapter plug with combined RS232/RS485 interface (9-pin, male): Second WAN access point via external modem

Interfaces of TIM 4R without built-in modem (schematic diagram with covers removed)

7/16


G_IK10_XX_30064

7

TIM 4 modules without built-in modem • TIM 4V; TIM 4 with interface for an external modem or other transmission device • TIM 4VD; TIM 4 with interface for an external modem or other transmission device, with DCF77 radio clock receiver • TIM 4R; TIM 4 with 2 interfaces for external modems or other transmission devices • TIM 4RD; TIM 4 with 2 interfaces for external modems or other transmission devices, with DCF77 radio clock receiver;

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Design (continued) Overview of all TIM modules All TIMs are supplied with a bus connector for integrating the TIM into an S7-300 as a CP. TIM modules with built-in modem also feature the WAN connecting cable required in each case. Can be used in conjunction with

TIMs with DCF77 radio clock receiver are supplied with the DCF77 adapter cable and TIM4R-V modules with the adapter cable for the second RS 232/485 interface.

MPIEthernet Number connection connection of WAN accesses

RS232/ RS485 for external modem

Ded. line MD2 modem 3)

MD3 analog dial-up modem 4)

MD4 ISDN modem 5)

DCF77 radio clock 6)

S7-300

S7-400 2)

TIM 32

■

1)

–

–

–

–

–

■

–

–

–

TIM 33

■1)

–

–

–

–

–

–

■

–

–

TIM 34

■

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

■

–

TIM 3V-IE

■

–

–

■

–

1 (RS232)

–

–

–

–

TIM 3V-IE Advanced

■

–

–

■

–

1 (RS232)

–

–

–

–

TIM 42

■

■

■

–

–

1

■

–

–

–

1)

TIM 42D

■

■

■

–

–

1

■

–

–

■

TIM 43

■

■

■

–

–

1

–

■

–

–

TIM 43D

■

■

■

–

–

1

–

■

–

■

TIM 44

■

■

■

–

–

1

–

–

■

–

TIM 44D

■

■

■

–

–

1

–

–

■

■

TIM 4V

■

■

■

–

1

1

–

–

–

–

TIM 4VD

■

■

■

–

1

1

–

–

–

■

■

■

■

–

2

2

–

–

–

–

■

■

■

–

2

2

–

–

–

■

TIM 4R

7)

TIM 4RD 7)

1) The specified TIM 3 cannot be used in conjunction with a CPU 317, CPU 318 or CPU 315-2 PN/DP! A TIM 3V-IE must be used for the CPUs, or a TIM 4 connected via MPI. 2) All TIMs suitable for S7-400 can also be connected to the ST7cc or ST7sc PC via the MPI bus. 3) Includes WAN connecting cable 6NH7700-2AR60 (RJ12 - RJ12) 4) Includes WAN connecting cable 6NH7700-3BR60 (RJ12 - RJ12 / TAE6) 5) Includes WAN connecting cable 6NH7700-4AR60 (RJ12 - RJ45) 6) Includes DCF77 adapter cable 6NH7700-0AD15 7) Includes adapter cable 6NH7700-0AS05 for the second RS232/485 serial interface

7

Approvals UL and CSA approvals have been granted for all TIM communications modules.


7/17

SINAUT Telecontrol

TIM communications modules TIM 32 with dedicated-line modem

■ Overview

■ Application The TIM 32 enables a SIMATIC S7-300 or C7 complete unit to exchange data with other SINAUT ST7 or ST1 partners via 2- or 4-wire dedicated lines. Distances of up to 33 km (at 1200 bit/s), up to 27 km (at 2400 bit/s) and up to 11 km (at 9600 and 19200 bit/s) can be covered without amplifiers/repeaters (guide values for non-coil-loaded message line type 2 x 2 x 0.8 J-Y(St)Y). The built-in MD2 modem supports the setting up of "point-topoint", "star" or "line" network topologies as well as combinations of these basic structures. In "controller" function, a small star network comprising two 2-wire cables can be connected to the modem output. The modem output can be switched with high resistance. This minimizes gap loss and only slightly reduces the maximum distance which can be bridged. The very short transmitter running times speed up data traffic with the "polling" operating mode used in the dedicated line network.

• TIM 3 module with built-in MD2 dedicated-line modem • Compact unit containing all you need to connect an S7-300 CPU or a C7 complete unit to a dedicated line (2- or 4-wire copper cable). This can be a private line or a leased telephone line. • The TIM 32 is also suitable for connection to a radio unit with modem input. • Communication is possible with SINAUT ST7 and SINAUT ST1 partners.

7

Note: The TIM 32 cannot be used in conjunction with a CPU 317, CPU 318, CPU 319 or with a CPU 315-2 PN/DP. These CPUs require a TIM 4 connected via MPI or a TIM 3V-IE, TIM 3V-IE Advanced.

The TIM 32 is also ideal for data transmission via walkie-talkies with modem input. The MD2 modem features a built-in floating opto-relay linked to the RTS signal for switching the unit on and off via its PTT input. The two opto-relay connections are available on the RJ12 socket. As walkie-talkies are usually only able to transmit voice in a sound frequency range of between 300 Hz and 3000 Hz, transmission rate with the MD2 modem is restricted here to 1200 bit/s. For 2400 bit/s, the sound frequency range has to reach beyond 3300 Hz. With a dedicated processor, the TIM relieves the load on the CPU by taking over WAN communication tasks. It manages process data communication with the configured partners completely independently in "controller", "terminal" or "node terminal" mode.

■ Benefits

• Reduced space and cabling requirements thanks to combining the TIM transmission processor and MD2 modem into a single compact unit. • Reduction in time and costs thanks to quick and user-friendly configuration of connections and data to be transferred with the SINAUT configuring software and block library. • Storage of data telegrams (approx. 10000) incl. time stamp on TIM if the communication path is faulty or a partner has failed. • Remote programming and remote diagnostics (PC routing) in parallel with data transmission via the dedicated line or radio network. • Investment protection for existing SINAUT ST1 systems through the integration of the SIMATIC S7-300 by means of ST1-compatible communication

7/18

In addition to private dedicated lines, the TIM 32 can also be connected to leased lines from telecoms suppliers. Appropriate approval has been secured. On analog-only leased lines, transmission speeds of 1200 and 2400 bit/s are possible. On switched analog/digital leased lines, the speed is usually restricted to 1200 bit/s for technical reasons.


When in "station" or "node station" mode, the TIM is able to store process data that must not be lost in the event of a communication fault or if one of the partners fails, along with its time stamp, until the partner returns to online mode. Important events, alarms, etc. are therefore not lost and the integrity of information in control center system archives is assured.

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Design The TIM 32 offers all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact construction; double standard width of SIMATIC S7-300 SM modules. • RJ12 socket for connecting the built-in modem to the dedicated line or radio unit with modem input. • The two floating opto-relay connections for switching the radio unit on and off via the PTT input are also available on the RJ12 socket. • 4-pole terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • LEDs on the front panel with SF, TXD, RXD, and MPI/K indicators (the TIM BUS and DCF77 LEDs are unassigned on the TIM 32). • Easy to mount; the TIM 32 is mounted on the S7-300 DIN rail and connected to adjacent modules by means of the bus connectors. There are no slot rules. • In combination with IM 360/361, the TIM 32 can also be used in an expansion rack (ER). This enables the TIM to be combined with a C7 complete unit. • The TIM 32 can operate without fans. A backup battery or memory module is not required.

■ Function The TIM 32 can operate in "station", "node station" and "controller" mode. The TIM 32 manages data traffic via dedicated lines or radio networks independently. For this purpose, the module has its own processor and a RAM memory to buffer up to 10,000 data telegrams in the event that the communication link is faulty or a partner fails. The TIM firmware is stored in a Flash EPROM. The functionality required in each case is defined during configuration and stored in SDB format in the non-volatile Flash EPROM. The SINAUT program in the CPU, configured with blocks from the SINAUT TD7 library, acquires the process data to be transferred, checks it for changes and then forwards it to the TIM for transmission via the WAN. The CPU may also transfer the data with a time stamp. The TIM stores the data to be transferred in its RAM buffer. The manner in which the TIM subsequently sends this data is determined by the TIM function selected: • In "station" or "node station" mode, the TIM waits to be polled by the master. The stored data telegrams are then transferred. If no telegrams are available, the poll is simply acknowledged. • In "master" mode, after each poll + reply has been completed, the TIM sends one of the messages stored in its buffer (default setting). If a larger number of telegrams is to be exchanged between two polls, this can be defined when configuring the TIM.

Telegrams received without faults by the TIM via the WAN are forwarded to the local CPU. A block integrated in the CPU responsible for evaluating the telegrams concerned outputs the information received to the outputs or data areas configured on the block. Either the SINAUT ST7 or the SINAUT ST1 protocol can be used for data traffic. Data exchange via dedicated lines and radio networks usually takes place in "polling" mode. If there are two or more masters, the "multi-master polling with time-slot procedure" mode is used (not possible with SINAUT ST1). On a radio network, the "polling with time-slot procedure" mode can be selected if necessary. In both operating modes with time-slot procedure, the TIM 32 can only be used in "station" or "node station" mode. The TIM 32 does not feature the DCF77 radio clock receiver required for "master" mode. PG/OP communication PG/OP communication allows all S7 terminals connected to the LAN to be remotely programmed. • S7 routing; with S7 routing it is possible to use programming device communication across networks. The SINAUT ST7 protocol supports PG/OP communication "tunneling". This enables the SINAUT stations connected to the WAN (CPUs and TIMs) to be programmed and diagnosed remotely. Diagnostics The SINAUT ST7 diagnostics and service tool provides extensive diagnostics functions, including: • TIM operating status • TIM module status • General diagnostics information • TIM diagnostics buffer • Status of connections with local and remote communication partners (CPUs, TIMs, ST7cc, ST7sc) • TIM telegram monitor for logging telegram traffic Configuring The "SINAUT ST7 configuration software for PG" and STEP 7, version V5.1 SP2 or higher, are used to configure the TIM 32. The blocks included in the "SINAUT TD7 block library" should be used to configure the SINAUT program required in the CPU. Both software packages are part of the SINAUT ST7 software package. The SDBs generated for the TIM 32 during configuration are uploaded to the TIM module via the MPI interface on the CPU. This upload can be performed either from the STEP 7 SIMATIC Manager or using the "Upload SDBs" function in the SINAUT ST7 diagnostics & service tool.


7/19

7

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Technical specifications Asynchronous character format

Interfaces • Connection to dedicated line

RJ12

• SINAUT ST7 protocol, polling

10 or 11 bit

• Connection to power supply

4-pin terminal block 24 V DC

• SINAUT ST7 protocol, multi-master polling

10 bit

Power supply


11 bit

Hamming distance d

4

Current consumption • from backplane bus

60 mA

• from 24 V DC

300 mA

Power loss

7.5 W

Integrated MD2 modem Transmission path

2-wire, 2 x 2-wire or 4-wire, twisted pair cables, non-coil-loaded or lightly coil-loaded

Modulation method

Phase-continuous binary frequency modulation (FSK)

Transmission rates

1200 bit/s 2400 bit/s 9600 bit/s (not for leased lines) 19200 bit/s (not for leased lines)


0 °C ... +60 °C


-40 °C ... +70 °C


max. 95 % at +25 °C


Compact module S7-300, double width


80 x 125 x 120

• Weight

approx. 300 g


IP20

Operating mode • 2-wire or 2 x 2-wire

Half-duplex

• 4-wire

Duplex or half-duplex

Transmission level can be set to

0 dB -6 dB -9 dB (for leased telephone lines) -15 dB

Receiving level

0 ... -43 dB

Configuring • Software for PG

SINAUT ST7 configuration software runs under STEP 7, V5.1 SP2 or newer.

• Software for CPU

SINAUT TD7 function block library for CPU

TIM can be operated in mode

7

• Station

Yes

• Node station

Yes

• Master

Yes

Number of TIM 32s per S7-300 CPU

More than one; number depends on the connection resources of the S7 CPU

Local communication in the rack of an S7-300 • Via backplane bus with local S7-300 CPU

Yes, over TD7onCPU 1)

• Via backplane bus with further local TIMs

Yes

• Via MPI port of local S7-300 CPU 2) with further CPUs and/or PCs

Yes, through TD7onCPU (for S7-300 and S7-400) and S7 communication (for ST7cc/ST7sc)

User memory required in S7 CPU

Minimum 20 KB, actual requirement is determined by data volume and functional scope

Transmission protocols Selectable protocols

SINAUT ST7 SINAUT ST1

Operating mode • SINAUT ST7 protocol

• SINAUT ST1 protocol

Polling Polling with time-slot procedure Multi-master polling with time-slot procedure Polling Polling with time-slot procedure

1) TD7onCPU can be used over the backplane bus with the following CPU types: All versions of CPUs 313C, 314 and 314C, CPUs 315-2 DP and 315F-2 DP, as well as all versions of the C7 units C7-633, C7-635 and C7-636. 2) The MPI port of the local CPU can be used with the following CPU types: All versions of CPUs 312, 312C, 313C, 314 and 314C as well as CPU 315-2 DP and CPU 315F-2 DP

7/20


Adjustable terminating resistor • for 1200 and 2400 bit/s

600 ohms

• for 9600 and 19200 bit/s

150 ohms

• for tapping point

> 6 kOhms

Clear to send • at 1200 bit/s

after 7 ms

• at 2400 bit/s

after 4 ms

• at 9600 and 19200 bit/s

after 0.5 ms

Minimum/maximum scanning frequency • at 1200 bit/s

1300 Hz/2100 Hz

• at 2400 bit/s

2400 Hz/3300 Hz

• at 9600 and 19200 bit/s

20800 Hz/33600 Hz

Floating opto-relay output • Max. supply voltage

60 V AC/DC

• Max. perm. continuous current

400 mA

• Max. Ron

3 ohms

Impulse strength U1.2/50 acc. to DIN VDE 0804 between power supply circuit and • FSK long-distance circuits

2.5 kV

• Opto-relay output

2.5 kV

Compatible with SINAUT modems • MD100

at 1200 bit/s

• MD124

at 1200, 2400 and 19200 bit/s

Certification

EU approval CE 0682 X

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Ordering data TIM 32 communications module With integrated MD2 modem for connection to private dedicated lines, leased telephone lines and modem-compatible radio units; incl. WAN connecting cable 6NH7 700-2AR60 (RJ12/RJ12) for connecting the built-in MD2 modem with an LTOP overvoltage protection module SINAUT ST7 standard software package 11/2005 edition on CD-ROM, comprising: • SINAUT ST7 configuring and diagnostics software for the PG • SINAUT TD7 function block library for the CPU • Electronic manual in German and English

Order No. 6NH7 800-3AA20

Order No. SINAUT ST7 Manual Paper version • German

6NH7 998-0AA13

• English

6NH7 998-0AA23

Line transformer with overvoltage protection

6NH7 997-0CA15-0AA0

• LTOP1 for 2-wire terminal

6NH9 821-0BC11

• LTOP2 for 4-wire terminal, 2 x 2-wire terminal or 2-wire tapping point

6NH9 821-0BC12

Accessories RJ12/RJ12 connecting cable (replacement)

6NH7 700-2AR60

7


7/21

SINAUT Telecontrol

TIM communications modules TIM 33 with telephone modem

■ Overview

■ Application The TIM 33 enables a SIMATIC S7-300 or C7 complete unit to exchange data with other SINAUT ST7 or ST1 partners via the analog telephone network. With a dedicated processor, the TIM relieves the load on the CPU by taking over WAN communication tasks. It manages process data communication with the configured partners completely independently in "master", "station" or "node station" mode. In order to reduce connection costs, in "station" or "node station" mode, the TIM can process the data to be transferred according to priority (high or normal): If higher-priority data is pending for transmission, a dial-up connection is established immediately. At normal priority, data is initially saved in the TIM. The data is transmitted the next time a connection is established with the partner for any reason for example, if higher-priority information is to be transferred, or if a connection is established by the partner in order to exchange data.

• TIM 3 module with built-in MD3 telephone modem • Compact unit containing all you need to connect an S7-300 CPU or a C7 complete unit to an analog telephone network • Communication is possible with SINAUT ST7 and SINAUT ST1 partners. Note: The TIM 33 cannot be used in conjunction with a CPU 317, CPU 318, CUP 319 or with the CPU 315-2 PN/DP. These CPUs require a TIM 4 connected via MP or a TIM 3V-IE, TIM 3V-IE Advanced.

■ Benefits

7 • Space savings and reduced cabling overhead thanks to combining the TIM transmission processor and MD3 modem into a single compact unit. • Reduction in time and costs thanks to quick and user-friendly configuration of connections and data to be transferred with the SINAUT configuring software and block library. • Storage of data telegrams (approx. 10,000) incl. time stamp on TIM in order to reduce connection costs for the dial-up network, if the communication path is faulty or a partner has failed. • Remote programming and remote diagnostics (PG routing) in parallel with data transmission via the installed telephone connection. • Investment protection for existing SINAUT ST1 systems through the integration of the SIMATIC S7-300 by means of ST1-compatible communication

7/22



■ Design The TIM 33 offers all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact construction; double standard width of SIMATIC S7-300 SM modules. • RJ12 socket for connecting the built-in modem to the telephone outlet. • 4-pole terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • LEDs on the front panel with SF, TXD, RXD, and MPI/K indicators (the TIM BUS and DCF77 LEDs are unassigned on the TIM 33). • Easy to mount; the TIM 33 is mounted on the S7-300 DIN rail and connected to adjacent modules by means of the bus connectors. There are no slot rules. • In combination with IM 360/361, the TIM 33 can also be used in an expansion rack (ER). This enables the TIM to be combined with a C7 complete unit. • The TIM 33 can operate without fans. A backup battery or memory module is not required.

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Function The TIM 33 can operate in "station", "node station" and "controller" mode. The TIM 33 manages data traffic via the analog telephone network independently. For this purpose, the module has its own processor and a RAM memory to buffer up to 10,000 data telegrams in order to reduce connection costs in the dial-up network in the event that the communication link is faulty or a partner fails. The TIM firmware is stored in a Flash EPROM. The functionality required in each case and the telephone numbers for the partners are defined during configuration and stored in SDB format in the non-volatile Flash EPROM. The SINAUT program in the CPU, configured with blocks from the SINAUT TD7 library, acquires the process data to be transferred, checks it for changes and then forwards it to the TIM for transmission via the WAN. Alternatively, the CPU can transfer the data with a time stamp and assign a "normal" or "high" priority ID for optimized transmission via the dial-up network. The TIM stores the data to be transferred in its RAM buffer. The manner in which the TIM subsequently sends this data is determined by the TIM function selected: • For data with "normal" priority, the TIM is not active initially in "station" and "node station" mode. However, for data with "high" priority, the TIM will immediately attempt to establish a connection with the partner addressed in order to start data transmission. If the TIM buffer contains data with "normal" priority at this point, it is also transferred. Transmission is always in accordance with the FIFO principle, i.e. regardless of priority. • In "master" mode, regardless of priority, the TIM will always immediately attempt to establish a connection with the addressed partner in order to transfer data. Telegrams received without faults by the TIM via the WAN are forwarded to the local CPU. A block integrated in the CPU responsible for evaluating the telegrams concerned outputs the information received to the outputs or data areas configured on the block.

PG/OP communication PG/OP communication allows all S7 terminals connected to the LAN to be remotely programmed. • S7 routing; with S7 routing it is possible to use programming device communication across networks. The SINAUT ST7 protocol supports PG/OP communication "tunneling". This enables the SINAUT stations connected to the WAN (CPUs and TIMs) to be programmed and diagnosed remotely. Diagnostics The SINAUT ST7 diagnostics and service tool provides extensive diagnostics functions, including: • TIM operating status • TIM module status • General diagnostics information • TIM diagnostics buffer • Status of connections with local and remote communication partners (CPUs, TIMs, ST7cc, ST7sc) • TIM telegram monitor for logging telegram traffic Configuring The "SINAUT ST7 configuring software for PG" is required for configuring the TIM 33. The blocks in the "SINAUT TD7 block library" should be used to configure the SINAUT program required in the CPU. Both software packages are part of the SINAUT ST7 software package. The SDBs generated for the TIM 33 during configuration are uploaded to the TIM module via the MPI interface on the CPU. This upload can be performed either from the SIMATIC Manager or using the "Upload SDBs" function in the SINAUT ST7 diagnostics & service tool.

Either the SINAUT ST7 or the SINAUT ST1 protocol can be used for data traffic. Transmission always takes place in "spontaneous" operating mode.


7/23

7

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Technical specifications Interfaces

Transmission protocols

• Connection to telephone network

RJ12



Power supply

24 V DC


60 mA

• from 24 V DC

400 mA

Power loss

9.9 W


0 °C ... +60 °C


-40 °C ... +70 °C


max. 95 % at +25 °C

Construction Compact module S7-300, double width


80 x 125 x 120

• Weight

approx. 300 g


IP20

Configuring • Software for PG • Software for CPU

SINAUT ST7 configuring software for PG SINAUT TD7 function block library for CPU

TIM can be operated in mode • Station

Yes

• Node station

Yes

• Master

Yes





spontaneous


spontaneous

Asynchronous character format • SINAUT ST7 protocol

10 or 11 bit


10 or 11 bit

Hamming distance d

4

MD3 built-in modem Transmission path

Analog dial-up telephone network

Yes




Minimum 20 KB, actual requirement determined by data volume and functional scope



• V.22

1200 bit/s, duplex

• V.22 up to

2400 bit/s, duplex

• V.32 up to

4800 bit/s, duplex

• V.32 up to

9600 bit/s, duplex

• V.32 up to

14400 bit/s, duplex

• V.34 up to

19200 bit/s, duplex

• V.34 up to

33600 bit/s, duplex

Telephone charge pulse filter can be set to:

12 kHz 16 kHz

Dial-up procedure

Voice frequency dialing Pulse dialing

Loop current component

Available; can be connected and disconnected

Loudspeaker


Line matching

600 ohms Zr (frequency-dependent)

Certification

Europe U.S.A. Canada



7/24


Available ITU transmission standards

• Module format

7

Available protocols

Compatible with SINAUT modems • MD125 - V.22 - V.22 up to

1200 bit/s, duplex 2400 bit/s, duplex

• MDM2425B DX - V.22

2400 bit/s, duplex

• MD3 (HW version < 4) - V.22 - V.22 up to - V.32 up to - V.32 up to - V.32 up to

1200 bit/s, duplex 2400 bit/s, duplex 4800 bit/s, duplex 9600 bit/s, duplex 14400 bit/s, duplex

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Ordering data

Order No.

TIM 33 communications module With built-in MD3 modem for connection to the analog telephone network; incl. WAN connecting cable 6NH7700-2BR60 (RJ12 -RJ12/ TAE6) with snap-on TAE6N connector for connecting the built-in MD3 modem to a telephone outlet (TAE6N or RJ12)

6NH7 800-3AA30

SINAUT ST7 standard software package 11/2005 edition on CD-ROM, comprising: • SINAUT ST7 configuring and diagnostics software for the PG • SINAUT TD7 function block library for the CPU • Electronic manual in German and English

6NH7 997-0CA15-0AA0


6NH7 998-0AA13

• English

6NH7 998-0AA23

Accessories RJ12/RJ12 connecting cable (replacement) with snap-on TAE6N connector

6NH7 700-3BR60

7


7/25

SINAUT Telecontrol

TIM communications modules TIM 34 with ISDN modem

■ Overview

■ Application The TIM 34 enables a SIMATIC S7-300 or C7 complete unit to exchange data with other SINAUT ST7 or ST1 partners via the digital ISDN network. With a dedicated processor, the TIM relieves the load on the CPU by taking over WAN communication tasks. It manages process data communication with the configured partners completely independently in "master", "station" or "node station" mode. In order to reduce connection costs, in "station" or "node station" mode, the TIM can process the data to be transferred according to priority (high or normal): If higher-priority data is pending for transmission, a dial-up connection is established immediately. At normal priority, data is initially saved in the TIM. The data is transmitted the next time a connection is established with the partner for any reason, (for example, if higher-priority information is to be transferred, or if a connection is established by the partner in order to exchange data).

• TIM 3 module with built-in MD4 ISDN modem • Compact unit containing all you need to connect an S7-300 CPU or a C7 complete unit to the digital ISDN network • Communication is possible with SINAUT ST7 and SINAUT ST1 partners. Note: The TIM 34 cannot be used in conjunction with a CPU 317, CPU 318, CUP 319 or with the CPU 315-2 PN/DP. These CPUs require a TIM 4 connected via MP or a TIM 3V-IE, TIM 3V-IE Advanced.

■ Benefits

7 • Space savings and reduced cabling overhead thanks to combining the TIM transmission processor and MD4 modem into a single compact unit. • Reduction in time and costs thanks to quick and user-friendly configuration of connections and data to be transferred with the SINAUT configuring software and block library. • Storage of data telegrams (approx. 10,000) incl. time stamp on TIM in order to reduce connection costs for the dial-up network, if the communication path is faulty or a partner has failed. • Remote programming and remote diagnostics (PC routing) in parallel with data transmission via the installed ISDN connection. • Investment protection for existing SINAUT ST1 systems through the integration of the SIMATIC S7-300 by means of ST1-compatible communication

7/26



■ Design The TIM 34 offers all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact construction; double standard width of SIMATIC S7-300 SM modules. • RJ12 socket for connecting the built-in modem to the ISDN S0 outlet. • 4-pole terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • LEDs on the front panel with SF, TXD, RXD, and MPI/K indicators (the TIM BUS and DCF77 LEDs are unassigned on the TIM 34). • Easy to mount; the TIM 34 is mounted on the S7-300 DIN rail and connected to adjacent modules by means of the bus connectors. There are no slot rules. • In combination with IM 360/361, the TIM 34 can also be used in an expansion rack (ER). This enables the TIM to be combined with a C7 complete unit. • The TIM 34 can operate without fans. A backup battery or memory module are not required.

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Function The TIM 34 can operate in "station", "node station" and "master" mode. The TIM 34 manages data traffic via the digital ISDN telephone network independently. For this purpose, the module has its own processor and a RAM memory to buffer up to 10,000 data telegrams in order to reduce connection costs in the dial-up network in the event that the communication link is faulty or a partner fails. The TIM firmware is stored in a Flash EPROM. The functionality required in each case and the telephone numbers for the partners are defined during configuration and stored in SDB format in the non-volatile Flash EPROM. The SINAUT program in the CPU, configured with blocks from the SINAUT TD7 library, acquires the process data to be transferred, checks it for changes and then forwards it to the TIM for transmission via the WAN. Alternatively, the CPU can transfer the data with a time stamp and assign a "normal" or "high" priority ID for optimized transmission via the dial-up network. The TIM stores the data to be transferred in its RAM buffer. The manner in which the TIM subsequently sends this data is determined by the TIM function selected: • For data with "normal" priority, the TIM is not active initially in "station" and "node station" mode. However, for data with "high" priority, the TIM will immediately attempt to establish a connection with the addressed partner in order to start data transmission. If the TIM buffer contains data with "normal" priority at this point, it is also transferred. Transmission is always in accordance with the FIFO principle, i.e. regardless of priority. • In "master" mode, regardless of priority, the TIM will always immediately attempt to establish a connection with the addressed partner in order to transfer data. Telegrams received without faults by the TIM via the WAN are forwarded to the local CPU. A block integrated in the CPU responsible for evaluating the telegrams concerned outputs the information received to the outputs or data areas configured on the block.

PG/OP communication PG/OP communication allows all S7 terminals connected to the LAN to be remotely programmed. • S7 routing With S7 routing it is possible to use programming device communication across networks. The SINAUT ST7 protocol supports PG/OP communication "tunneling". This enables the SINAUT stations connected to the WAN (CPUs and TIMs) to be programmed and diagnosed remotely. Diagnostics The SINAUT ST7 diagnostics and service tool provides extensive diagnostics functions, including: • TIM operating status • TIM module status • General diagnostics information • TIM diagnostics buffer • Status of connections with local and remote communication partners (CPUs, TIMs, ST7cc, ST7sc) • TIM telegram monitor for logging telegram traffic Configuring The "SINAUT ST7 configuring software for PG" is required for configuring the TIM 34. The blocks in the "SINAUT TD7 block library" should be used to configure the SINAUT program required in the CPU. Both software packages are part of the SINAUT ST7 software package. The SDBs generated for the TIM 34 during configuration are uploaded to the TIM module via the MPI interface on the CPU. This upload can be performed either from the SIMATIC Manager or using the "Upload SDBs" function in the SINAUT ST7 diagnostics & service tool.

Either the SINAUT ST7 or the SINAUT ST1 protocol can be used for data traffic. Transmission always takes place in "spontaneous" operating mode.


7/27

7

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Technical specifications Interfaces


• Connection to ISDN network

RJ12



Power supply

24 V DC


60 mA

• from 24 V DC

300 mA

Power loss

7.5 W


0 °C ... +60 °C


-40 °C ... +70 °C


max. 95 % at +25 °C

Construction Compact module S7-300, double width


80 x 125 x 120

• Weight

approx. 300 g


IP20





spontaneous


spontaneous

Asynchronous character format • SINAUT ST7 protocol

10 or 11 bit


10 or 11 bit

Hamming distance d

4


Digital ISDN network

Yes

• Node station

Yes

• Master

Yes






Yes




Minimum 20 KB, actual requirement determined by data volume and functional scope



• V.110

1200 bit/s, duplex

• V.110

2400 bit/s, duplex

• V.110

9600 bit/s, duplex

• V.110

19200 bit/s, duplex

• X.75

1200 bit/s, duplex

• X.75

2400 bit/s, duplex

• X.75

19200 bit/s, duplex

• X.75

38400 bit/s, duplex

Certification

Europe

Compatible with SINAUT modems

• Station

7/28


Available standard transmission standards

• Module format

7

Available protocols

• LGM64K - V.110

9600 bit/s, duplex

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Ordering data

Order No.

TIM 34 communications module With built-in MD4 modem for connection to the digital ISDN network; incl. WAN connecting cable 6NH7 700-4AR60 (RJ12-RJ45) for connecting the built-in MD4 modem with the ISDN S0 outlet

6NH7 800-3AA40


6NH7 997-0CA15-0AA0


6NH7 998-0AA13

• English

6NH7 998-0AA23

Accessories RJ12/RJ45 connecting cable (replacement)

6NH7 700-4AR60

7


7/29

SINAUT Telecontrol

TIM communications modules TIM 3V-IE for WAN or Ethernet

■ Overview

• Storage of data telegrams (max. 16,000) including time stamp on TIM if the communication path is faulty or a partner has failed and to reduce connection costs for the dial-up network • Remote programming and remote diagnostics (PC routing) in parallel with data transmission via the WAN or Ethernet connection. • Investment protection for existing SINAUT ST1 systems through the integration of the SIMATIC S7-300 by means of ST1-compatible communication • Industry-compatible device connection with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 and additional strain relief through latching of connector on housing

■ Application

7

• TIM 3 version without built-in modem, single width • An S7-300 CPU or a C7 control system can then carry out SINAUT communication: - using any SINAUT WAN with SINAUT ST7 and SINAUT ST1 partners - using Ethernet (TCP/IP-based networks) with SINAUT ST7 stations • Possesses two interfaces: - RS232 interface for connection of required WAN transmission equipment - RJ45 interface for the Ethernet connection • The SINAUT TD7 software for the CPU (TD7onCPU) is now integrated in the TIM 3V-IE (TD7onTIM) • SINAUT communication can take place either over the WAN or Ethernet interface. PG communication is possible at any time over the Ethernet interface. • One TIM 3V-IE can be used per S7-300 • Memory for up to 16000 data messages • Max. eight S7 connections over Ethernet Note: The TIM 3V-IE can be used with all CPU 317/318/319 types and CPU 315-2 PN/DP when the SINAUT TD7 software of the TIM (TD7onTIM) is used. The SINAUT TD7 software for the CPU (TD7onCPU) cannot be used here.

■ Benefits

• Flexible connection possible to any SINAUT WAN • SINAUT communication possible over Ethernet (TCP/IP-based networks) • Low-cost terminal configuration through use of S7 CPUs 312 and 312C because the CPU software SINAUT TD7 is integrated in the TIM 3V-IE. (This does not apply to communication with SINAUT ST1 partners and to the transmission of text messages; in this case the SINAUT TD7 software for the CPU (TD7onCPU) must be used, i.e. this software can still be used together with the TIM 3V-IE.) • Simplified maintenance through replacement of modules without PG • Single-width module saves space in rack and control cabinet • Reduction in time and costs thanks to quick and user-friendly configuration of connections and data to be transferred with the SINAUT configuring software and block library

7/30


The TIM 3V-IE enables a SIMATIC S7-300 or C7 control system to exchange data with other SINAUT ST7 or ST1 partners via any SINAUT WAN. In addition, this module expands SINAUT communication to the Ethernet, i.e. to TCP/IP-based networks with a response similar to dedicated lines and fixed IP addresses. The important SINAUT property, i.e. saving of data including time stamp on the TIM in the event of a connection fault or failure of the partner, is therefore also available for Ethernet connections. Important events, alarms, etc. are not lost and the integrity of information in control center system archives is assured. Mixed networks comprising classical SINAUT WANs (dedicated line, radio, dialing network) and Ethernet can be configured uniformly with SINAUT, thus providing time and cost advantages. The previously available SINAUT TD7 software for the CPU (TD7onCPU) is integrated in the TIM 3V-IE (TD7onTIM). This permits use of the smallest S7 CPUs 312 and 312C because, in the most favorable case, no further CPU main memory is required for SINAUT. (This does not apply to communication with SINAUT ST1 partners and to the transmission of text messages; in this case the SINAUT TD7 software for the CPU (TD7onCPU) must be used.) One TIM 3V-IE can be used per S7-300, and either of the two interfaces (RS232 or RJ45) can be used for SINAUT communication (not simultaneously). PG communication is possible at any time over the Ethernet interface. The TIM 3V-IE is therefore especially suitable for configuring low-cost terminals, but also permits implementation of a simple S7-300 controller. Use in a SINAUT submaster terminal or in a controller with further TIM 3/TIM 4 modules is not possible. Use of the TIM 3V-IE is appropriate: • When SINAUT communication should take place over Ethernet (TCP/IP-based networks) • If the TIM has to be connected to a classical SINAUT WAN which is not appropriate for the integrated modems (in TIM 32, TIM 33 and TIM 34), e.g. when connecting to the GSM network • When an MD3 modem is to be used as a dedicated line modem (the integrated MD3 modem on a TIM 33 can only be configured for dial-up operation). • When an MD4 modem is to be used for connection to a dedicated ISDN line (the integrated MD4 modem on a TIM 34 can only be configured for dial-up operation).

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Design The TIM 3V-IE offers all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact design; single standard width of the SM modules of the SIMATIC S7-300 • 9-pin Sub-D connector with an RS232 interface for connecting an external WAN transmission device • RJ45 socket for connecting to Industrial Ethernet with automatic detection of data transfer rate by means of autosensing; industry-compatible design with additional securing collar, for connection of IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 • 2-pin plug-in terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • Front LEDs for display of Ethernet and WAN communication • Easy to mount; the TIM 3V-IE is mounted on the S7-300 DIN rail and connected to adjacent modules by means of the bus connectors. There are no slot rules. • Can be operated in the expansion rack (ER) in conjunction with the IM 360/361; in this manner, the TIM can be combined with a C7 control system. In the case of the most recent C7 units, also over the supplied I/O expansion cable. • Can be operated without a fan • A backup battery or memory module are not required • Module replacement possible without PG

■ Function The TIM 3V-IE can be operated in the SINAUT WAN with the functions "station" and "master". This classification is omitted with Ethernet connections. Each partner has equal priority in this case. The TIM 3V-IE manages data traffic via the connected WAN or Ethernet independently. For this purpose, the module has its own processor and a RAM to buffer up to 16,000 data messages when the communication link is faulty or a partner fails and to reduce connection costs in the dial-up network. The TIM firmware is stored in a Flash EPROM. The functionality required in each case and, on dial-up networks, the telephone numbers for the partners, are defined during configuration and stored permanently in the TIM’s Flash EPROM or on the CPU’s memory card. Saving in the CPU permits replacement of the TIM without using a PG. Two alternatives are available for the TIM 3V-IE for reading and writing the data to be sent or received: • Use of the SINAUT TD7 software for the CPU (TD7onCPU): The SINAUT program in the CPU, configured with blocks from the SINAUT TD7 library, acquires the process data to be transferred, checks them for changes, and then forwards them to the TIM for transmission via the WAN or Ethernet. Telegrams received without faults by the TIM via the WAN/ Ethernet are forwarded to the local CPU. A block integrated in the CPU responsible for evaluating the telegrams concerned outputs the information received to the outputs or data areas configured on the block. • Use of the SINAUT TD7 software integrated in the TIM 3V-IE (TD7onTIM): The TD7onTIM program configured by the user directly reads the process data to be transferred from the CPU’s memory areas (inputs, bit memories, DBs), checks them for changes, and then forwards them to the TIM’s send buffer for transmission via the WAN or Ethernet. Data from telegrams received without fault by the TIM via the WAN/Ethernet are directly written by the TIM into the configured memory areas of the CPU.

The data acquired by "TD7onCPU" or "TD7onTIM" can be optionally assigned a time stamp, and also a "normal" or "high" priority ID for transmission via a dial-up network. "TD7onTIM" additionally permits identification of very important data as "maximum priority". This data has priority over all other data present in the send buffer, i.e. it is transferred first. The TIM stores the data to be transferred in its RAM buffer. The manner in which the TIM subsequently sends this data depends on the respective transmission network: Transfer via a SINAUT WAN The manner in which the TIM sends this data depends on the type of WAN and the TIM function selected: • Dedicated line, radio network; In "station" mode, the TIM waits to be polled by the controller. The stored data telegrams are then transferred. If no telegrams are available, the poll is simply acknowledged. In "master" mode, after each poll + response has been completed, the TIM sends one of the messages stored in its buffer (default setting). If a larger number of telegrams is to be exchanged between two polls, this can be defined when configuring the TIM. • Dial-up network; For data with "normal" priority, the TIM is not active initially in "station" mode. However, for data with "high" or "maximum" priority, the TIM will immediately attempt to establish a connection with the partner addressed in order to start data transmission. If the TIM buffer contains data with "normal" priority at this point, it is also transferred. Data with "maximum" priority is always transferred first. This is followed by transmission of data with "high" and "normal" priorities, always according to the FIFO principle, i.e. independent of the respective priority. In "master" mode, regardless of priority, the TIM will always immediately attempt to establish a connection with the partner addressed in order to transfer data. Either the SINAUT ST7 or the SINAUT ST1 protocol can be used for data traffic. The operating mode used depends on the type of WAN: • Data exchange via dedicated lines and radio networks usually takes place in "Polling" mode. If there are two or more master, the "Multi-master polling with time slot procedure" mode is used (not possible with SINAUT ST1). On a radio network, the "Polling with time slot procedure" mode can be selected if necessary. In both operating modes with time slot procedure, the TIM 3V-IE can only be used in "station" mode. The TIM 3V-IE does not feature the DCF77 radio clock receiver required for "master" mode. • On dial-up networks, data exchange always takes place in "Spontaneous" mode.


7/31

7

SINAUT Telecontrol



Connection to a SINAUT WAN

When sending data via Ethernet, this is immediately transferred to the respective partner irrespective of priority. The transmission sequence is according to the FIFO principle. This does not apply to telegrams with maximum priority. These are transmitted prior to any other telegrams still present in the buffer.

The connection to a SINAUT WAN is made via the floating RS232 interface of the TIM 3V-IE, through which various data transmission devices can be connected depending on the application: • Dedicated line modems (e.g. MD2) for point-to-point, point-to-multipoint or linear connections • Radio sets from various manufacturers, also for company radiotelephone with time slot procedure • Analog dialing modems (e.g. MD3) for the analog telephone network or point-to-point dedicated lines • ISDN modems (e.g. MD4) as connection to the ISDN network • GSM modems (e.g. GSM Kit MC45) as access to the mobile radio network

Transmission is carried out using the S7 communications functions (BSEND/BRCV). A permanent S7 connection is established in each case for transmission between two Ethernet TIMs or between an Ethernet TIM and ST7cc/ST7sc. The two TIMs or the TIM and ST7cc/ST7sc exchange the data packages specific to SINAUT ST7 with application of the TCP/IP transport protocol. PG communication PG communication allows all S7 terminals connected to the LAN, e.g. Ethernet, to be remotely programmed.

Configuration examples of SINAUT WAN

S7 routing makes it possible to use the programming device communication across networks. This also applies to SINAUT WAN networks, for the SINAUT ST7 protocol permits "tunneling" of the PG communication. This enables the SINAUT terminals connected to the WAN (CPUs and TIMs) to be programmed and diagnosed remotely.

The MC45 module is used in this case. The connection in the control center (ST7cc or ST7sc) is made using a TIM 4 module (e.g. TIM 4V), which is connected to the PC via MPI.

Diagnostics The SINAUT ST7 diagnostics and service tool provides extensive diagnostics functions, e.g.: • TIM operating status • TIM module status • General diagnostics information • TIM diagnostics buffer • Status of connections with local and remote communication partners (CPUs, TIMs, ST7cc, ST7sc) • Status and degree of filling of the send buffer, separate for each communication partner • Diagnostic information for TD7onTIM • TIM telegram monitor for logging telegram traffic

Use of TIM 3V-IE in mobile radio network (GSM)

SINAUT ST7cc/sc Control center TIM 4V

MPI

Mobile radio network (GSM)

MC45

MC45

MC45

MC45

Configuration The "SINAUT ST7 configuration software for PG V3.5" is used to configure the TIM 3V-IE. The blocks included in the "SINAUT TD7 block library" should be used to configure the SINAUT program in the CPU (TD7onCPU). Both software packages are components of the SINAUT ST7 software package Release 04/2005 and newer. STEP 7 V5.3 SP2 or higher is required if Ethernet connections have to be configured for the TIM 3V-IE. The configuration data of the TIM 3V-IE are saved either on the TIM itself or on the CPU. When saving on the CPU, module replacement is possible without a PG.

7/32


S7-300

Station

S7-300

TIM 3V-IE

Station

S7-300

TIM 3V-IE

Station

TIM 3V-IE

G_IK10_XX_30109

7

■ Integration

SINAUT communication via Ethernet

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Integration (continued) Use of TIM 3V-IE in a private radio network

Use of TIM 3V-IE as "Master"

The radio network is configured using radio devices approved for the respective country (radio devices are not included in the scope of SINAUT delivery). The connection in the control center (ST7cc or ST7sc) is made using a TIM 4 module (e.g. TIM 4V), which is connected to the PC via MPI. If a radio network with time slot procedure is configured, the TIM 4 in the control center must be equipped with a DCF77 receiver, e.g. TIM 4VD.

In this case, an S7-300 with TIM 3V-IE constitutes the control center. If a radio network with time slot procedure is configured, the TIM 3V-IE in the control center must be replaced by a TIM 4 with DCF77 receiver, e.g. TIM 4VD.

SINAUT ST7cc/sc Control center TIM 4V

Control center

S7-300

MPI

TIM 3V-IE

Station

S7-300

TIM 3V-IE

Station

S7-300

TIM 3V-IE

Station

S7-300

TIM 3V-IE

G_IK10_XX_30108

S7-300

Private radio network

Station

S7-300

TIM 3V-IE

Station

S7-300

TIM 3V-IE

Station


TIM 3V-IE

G_IK10_XX_30127

Private radio network

7/33

7

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Integration (continued) Connection to Industrial Ethernet and TCP/IP networks

Transmission over DSL

In addition to the RS232 interface, the TIM 3V-IE has an RJ45 socket. This is suitable for connecting to Ethernet, i.e. to TCP/IPbased networks with a response similar to dedicated lines and fixed IP addresses.

The continuously falling flat rates for DSL connections make this medium an interesting alternative to a leased line or also a telephone connection. In the terminal and controller, DSL routers must be used, preferably routers with a VPN and firewall to establish safe connections over VPN tunnels. For DSL connection of the controllers, a fixed IP address is recommended; the IP addresses of the terminals can be assigned dynamically.

Configuration examples of SINAUT on Ethernet Connection via switches, e.g. SCALANCE X It is then possible to configure simple network structures or also complex structures consisting of a combination of star, linear and ring structures. A TIM 4 module is not required in the control center (ST7cc or ST7sc). The connection is made directly to the Ethernet interface of the PC.

SINAUT ST7cc/sc Control center

Ethernet

SINAUT ST7cc/sc master with CP 1613 A2 Switch SCALANCE X202-2IRT


VPN tunnel VPN tunnel

Fiber Fiber Optic Optic Switch SCALANCE X204-2

DSL router with VPN and firewall



Internet

TIM


G_IK10_XX_30133

7

DSL router with VPN and firewall

TIM


S7-300

S7-300

S7-300

If hardwired Ethernet communication is not possible, a radio network can be designed using commercially available Ethernet radio modems. SINAUT ST7cc/sc Control center

Ethernet

Ethernet radio network

Station

7/34

S7-300

TIM 3V-IE

Station


S7-300

TIM 3V-IE

Station

TIM 3V-IE

G_IK10_XX_30110

S7-300

Station

TIM 3V-IE

Station

TIM 3V-IE

Station

TIM 3V-IE

G_IK10_XX_30140

Transmission using Ethernet radio modem

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Integration (continued) Use of TIM 3V-IE as "Master" In this case, an S7-300 with TIM 3V-IE constitutes the control center. As a result of the connection resources available for Ethernet, up to 8 terminals can be connected to the TIM 3V-IE controller.

Control center

S7-300

TIM 3V-IE

Ethernet radio network

Station

S7-300

TIM 3V-IE

Station

S7-300

TIM 3V-IE

Station

TIM 3V-IE

G_IK10_XX_30128

S7-300

■ Technical specifications +

General



Configuration

• WAN

50 … 38400 bit/s

• Ethernet


Interfaces • Connection for external modem

1 x 9-pin Sub-D connector, (RS232)


1 x RJ45

• Connection for supply voltage Supply voltage

IP20

• Software for PG

SINAUT ST7 configuring software for PG

• Software for CPU (optional)


TIM can be operated in mode • Terminal

Yes

• Node terminal

No

1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal block

• Service center

Yes

24 V DC (±5%)

Number of TIM 3V-IE per S7-300

1

• from the backplane bus

200 mA

• from 24 V DC

typ. 160 mA, max. 200 mA

• Via backplane bus with local CPU

Yes, over TD7onCPU 1) and TD7onTIM

Power loss

5.8 W


Not possible

0 °C … +60 °C

• Via MPI port of local CPU with further CPUs and/or PCs

Not possible

• Operating temperature • Transport/storage temperature

-40 °C … +70 °C


max. 95 % at +25 °C

• SINAUT TD7 on CPU (TD7onCPU)

At least 20 KB, actual requirement determined by data volume and functional scope

• Module format


• SINAUT TD7 on TIM (TD7onTIM)

0 byte in most favorable case


40 x 125 x 120

• Weight

approx. 200 g

Current consumption

Local communication


• Relative humidity Construction

1) TD7onCPU can be used over the backplane bus with the following CPU types: All versions of CPUs 313C, 314 and 314C, CPUs 315-2 DP and 315F-2 DP, as well as all versions of the C7 units C7-633, C7-635 and C7-636.


7/35

7

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Technical specifications (continued) Transmission protocols (WAN) Available protocols

• SINAUT ST7 • SINAUT ST1

Operating mode for dedicated line/radio network • SINAUT ST7 protocol

Polling, polling with time slot procedure, multi-master polling with time slot procedure


Polling, polling with time slot procedure

Operating mode for dial-up network • SINAUT ST7 protocol

spontaneous


spontaneous

Asynchronous character format

Order No.

TIM 3V-IE communications module For connection to a SINAUT WAN via RS232 and to Industrial Ethernet or TCP/IP networks via RJ45

6NH7 800-3BA00


6NH7 997-0CA15-0AA0

• SINAUT ST7 protocol, polling or spontaneous

10 or 11 bit


10 bit

• German

6NH7 998-0AA13


11 bit

• English

6NH7 998-0AA23

• SINAUT ST1 protocol, spontaneous

10 or 11 bit

Accessories

Hamming distance d • SINAUT ST1 protocol

4


4

Ethernet

7

■ Ordering data

Protocol

TCP/IP transport protocol

Communication services

SINAUT ST7 through S7 communication, PG communication

Number of connections • S7 communication

max. 8

• Programming device communication

max. 4

• Sum of all simultaneously operable connections

max. 12

7/36


SINAUT ST7 Manual Paper version

IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 180° cable outlet; for network components and CPs/CPUs with Industrial Ethernet interface • 1 pack = 1 item

6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0

Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 (RS232) with a SINAUT ST7 MD2, MD3 or MD4 (RS232) modem; cable length 1.5 m

6NH7 701-4AL

Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 (RS232) with the M20, TC35 or MC45 GSM kit (access to the GSM network); also suitable for third-party modems or radio equipment with standard RS232 interface; cable length 2.5 m

6NH7 701-5AN

Connecting cable With one end open for connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 with a thirdparty modem or radio unit (RS232); cable length 2.5 m

6NH7 701-4BN

Connecting cable For connecting two TIM 3VIE/TIM 4 modules using their RS232 interface without modems ("null modem"). Cable length 6 m

6NH7 701-0AR

SINAUT Telecontrol

TIM communications modules TIM 3V-IE Advanced for WAN or Ethernet

■ Overview

• Single-width module saves space in rack and control cabinet • Reduction in time and costs thanks to quick and user-friendly configuration of connections and data to be transferred with the SINAUT configuring software and block library • Storage of data telegrams (max. 32,000) including time stamp on TIM if the communication path is faulty or a partner has failed and to reduce connection costs for the dial-up network • Remote programming and remote diagnostics (PC routing) in parallel with data transmission via the WAN or Ethernet connection. • Investment protection for existing SINAUT ST1 systems through the integration of the SIMATIC S7-300 by means of ST1-compatible communication • Industry-compatible device connection with IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 and additional strain relief through latching of connector on housing

■ Application • TIM 3 version without built-in modem, single width • An S7-300 CPU or a C7 control system can then carry out SINAUT communication: - using any SINAUT WAN with SINAUT ST7 and SINAUT ST1 partners - using Ethernet (TCP/IP-based networks) with SINAUT ST7 stations • Possesses two interfaces: - RS232 interface for connection of required WAN transmission equipment - RJ45 interface for the Ethernet connection • The SINAUT TD7 software for the CPU (TD7onCPU) is now integrated in the TIM 3V-IE Advanced (TD7onTIM) • SINAUT communication can take place either over the WAN and Ethernet interface. • The TIM can be linked to other local S7 devices (e.g. S7-400) or PCs (e.g. ST7cc) over the MPI interface of the S7-300 CPU. • With each S7-300, several TIM 3V-IE Advanced as well as TIM 3/TIM 4 can be used. • Memory for up to 32000 data messages • Max. 20 S7 connections over Ethernet and MPI Note: The TIM 3V-IE Advanced can be used with all CPU 317/318/319 types and CPUs 315-2 PN/DP when the SINAUT TD7 software of the TIM (TD7onTIM) is used. The SINAUT TD7 software for the CPU (TD7onCPU) cannot be used here.

■ Benefits

The TIM 3V-IE Advanced enables one or more SIMATIC S7-300, S7-400, C7 control systems or control center PCs (SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc) to exchange data with other SINAUT ST7 or ST1 partners via any SINAUT WAN. In addition, this module expands SINAUT communication to the Ethernet, i.e. to TCP/IPbased networks with a response similar to dedicated lines. The important SINAUT property, i.e. saving of data including time stamp on the TIM in the event of a connection fault or failure of the partner, is therefore also available for Ethernet connections. Important events, alarms, etc. are not lost and the integrity of information in control center system archives is assured. Mixed networks comprising classical SINAUT WANs (dedicated line, radio, dialing network) and Ethernet can be configured uniformly with SINAUT, thus providing time and cost advantages. The previously available SINAUT TD7 software for the CPU (TD7onCPU) is integrated in the TIM 3V-IE Advanced (TD7onTIM). This permits use of the smallest S7 CPUs 312 and 312C because, in the most favorable case, no further CPU main memory is required for SINAUT. (This does not apply to communication with SINAUT ST1 partners and to the transmission of text messages; in this case the SINAUT TD7 software for the CPU (TD7onCPU) must be used.) For configuring more complex controllers or node terminals, several TIM 3V-IE Advanced can be implemented per S7-300. They can also be combined with other TIM 3 and TIM 4 types in the same rack. Use of the TIM 3V-IE Advanced is appropriate: • When SINAUT communication is required in a controller over WAN and Ethernet • When the "master" and "node station" modes are to be combined on one TIM in one node terminal. • When a redundant transmission path is to be connected to the TIM.

• Flexible connection possible to any SINAUT WAN • SINAUT communication possible over Ethernet (TCP/IPbased networks) • Can be used universally with S7-300, S7-400, C7 or control center PC. • Low-cost terminal configuration through use of S7 CPUs 312 and 312C because the CPU software SINAUT TD7 is integrated in the TIM 3V-IE Advanced. (This does not apply to communication with SINAUT ST1 partners and to the transmission of text messages; in this case the SINAUT TD7 software for the CPU (TD7onCPU) must be used, i.e. this software can still be used together with the TIM 3V-IE Advanced.) • Simplified maintenance through replacement of modules without PG


7/37

7

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Design The TIM 3V-IE Advanced offers all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact design; single standard width of the SM modules of the SIMATIC S7-300 • 9-pin Sub-D connector with an RS232 interface for connecting an external WAN transmission device • RJ45 socket for connecting to Industrial Ethernet with automatic detection of data transfer rate by means of autosensing; industry-compatible design with additional securing collar, for connection of IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 • 2-pin plug-in terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • Front LEDs for display of Ethernet and WAN communication • Easy to mount; the TIM 3V-IE Advanced is mounted on the S7-300 DIN rail and connected to adjacent modules by means of the bus connectors. There are no slot rules. • Can be operated in the expansion rack (ER) in conjunction with the IM 360/361; in this manner, the TIM can be combined with a C7 control system. In the case of the most recent C7 units, also over the supplied I/O expansion cable. • Can be operated without a fan • A backup battery or memory module are not required • Module replacement possible without PG

■ Function

7

The TIM 3V-IE Advanced can be operated in the SINAUT WAN with the functions "station", "Node station" and "master". This classification is omitted with Ethernet connections. Each partner has equal priority in this case. The TIM 3V-IE Advanced manages data traffic via the connected WAN or Ethernet independently. For this purpose, the module has its own processor and a RAM to buffer up to 32000 data messages when the communication link is faulty or a partner fails and to reduce connection costs in the dial-up network. The TIM firmware is stored in a Flash EPROM. The functionality required in each case and, on dial-up networks, the telephone numbers for the partners, are defined during configuration and stored permanently in the TIM’s Flash EPROM or on the CPU’s memory card. Saving in the CPU permits replacement of the TIM without using a PG. Two alternatives are available for the TIM 3V-IE Advanced for reading and writing the data to be sent or received: • Use of the SINAUT TD7 software for the CPU (TD7onCPU): The SINAUT program in the CPU, configured with blocks from the SINAUT TD7 library, acquires the process data to be transferred, checks them for changes, and then forwards them to the TIM for transmission via the WAN or Ethernet. Telegrams received without faults by the TIM via the WAN/Ethernet are forwarded to the local CPU. A block integrated in the CPU responsible for evaluating the telegrams concerned outputs the information received to the outputs or data areas configured on the block. • Use of the SINAUT TD7 software integrated in the TIM 3V-IE Advanced (TD7onTIM): The TD7onTIM program configured by the user directly reads the process data to be transferred from the memory areas of the CPU located in the S7-300 rack (inputs, bit memories, DBs), checks them for changes, and then forwards them to the TIM’s send buffer for transmission via the WAN or Ethernet. Data from telegrams received without fault by the TIM via the WAN/Ethernet is directly written by the TIM into the configured memory areas of the CPU.

7/38


The data acquired by "TD7onCPU" or "TD7onTIM" can be optionally assigned a time stamp, and also a "normal" or "high" priority ID for transmission via a dial-up network. "TD7onTIM" additionally permits identification of very important data as "maximum priority". These data have priority over all other data present in the send buffer, i.e. they are transferred first. The TIM stores the data to be transferred in its RAM buffer. The manner in which the TIM subsequently sends this data depends on the respective transmission network: Transfer via a SINAUT WAN The manner in which the TIM sends these data depends on the type of WAN and the TIM function selected: • Dedicated line, radio network; In "station" or "Node station" mode, the TIM waits to be polled by the controller. The stored data telegrams are then transferred. If no telegrams are available, the poll is simply acknowledged. In "master" mode, after each poll + response has been completed, the TIM sends one of the messages stored in its buffer (default setting). If a larger number of telegrams is to be exchanged between two polls, this can be defined when configuring the TIM. • Dial-up network; For data with "normal" priority, the TIM is not active initially in "station" or "Node station" mode. However, for data with "high" or "maximum" priority, the TIM will immediately attempt to establish a connection with the addressed partner in order to start data transmission. If the TIM buffer contains data with "normal" priority at this point, they are also transferred. Data with "maximum" priority are always transferred first. This is followed by transmission of data with "high" and "normal" priorities, always according to the FIFO principle, i.e. independent of the respective priority. In "master" mode, regardless of priority, the TIM will always immediately attempt to establish a connection with the addressed partner in order to transfer data. Either the SINAUT ST7 or the SINAUT ST1 protocol can be used for data traffic. The operating mode used depends on the type of WAN: • Data exchange via dedicated lines and radio networks usually takes place in "Polling" mode. If there are two or more masters, the "Multi-master polling with time slot procedure" mode is used (not possible with SINAUT ST1). On a radio network, the "Polling with time slot procedure" mode can be selected if necessary. In both operating modes with time slot procedure, the TIM 3V can only be used in "station" or "Node station" mode. The TIM 3V-IE Advanced does not feature the DCF77 radio clock receiver required for "master" mode. • On dial-up networks, data exchange always takes place in "Spontaneous" mode.

SINAUT Telecontrol



■ Integration

SINAUT communication via Ethernet

Connection to a SINAUT WAN

When sending data via Ethernet, it is immediately transferred to the respective partner irrespective of priority. The transmission sequence is according to the FIFO principle. This does not apply to telegrams with maximum priority. These are transmitted prior to any other telegrams still present in the buffer.

The connection to a SINAUT WAN is made via the floating RS232 interface of the TIM 3V-IE Advanced, through which various data transmission devices can be connected depending on the application: • Dedicated line modems (e.g. MD2) for point-to-point, point-to-multipoint or linear connections • Radio sets from various manufacturers, also for company radiotelephone with time slot procedure • Analog dialing modems (e.g. MD3) for the analog telephone network or point-to-point dedicated lines • ISDN modems (e.g. MD4) as connection to the ISDN network • GSM modems (e.g. GSM Kit MC45) as access to the mobile radio network

Transmission is carried out using the S7 communications functions (BSEND/BRCV). A permanent S7 connection is established in each case for transmission between two Ethernet TIMs or between an Ethernet TIM and ST7cc/ST7sc. The two TIMs or the TIM and ST7cc/ST7sc exchange the data packages specific to SINAUT ST7 with application of the TCP/IP transport protocol. PG communication PG communication allows all S7 terminals connected to the LAN, e.g. Ethernet, to be remotely programmed. With the aid of S7 routing it is possible to use the programming device communication across networks. This also applies to SINAUT WAN networks, for the SINAUT ST7 protocol permits "tunneling" of the PG communication. This enables the SINAUT terminals connected to the WAN (CPUs and TIMs) to be programmed and diagnosed remotely. Diagnostics The SINAUT ST7 diagnostics and service tool provides extensive diagnostics functions, e.g.: • TIM operating status • TIM module status • General diagnostics information • TIM diagnostics buffer • Status of connections with local and remote communication partners (CPUs, TIMs, ST7cc, ST7sc) • Status and degree of filling of send buffer, separate for each communication partner • Diagnostic information for TD7onTIM • TIM telegram monitor for logging telegram traffic

Connection to Industrial Ethernet and TCP/IP networks In addition to the RS232 interface, the TIM 3V-IE Advanced has an RJ45 socket. This is suitable for connecting to Ethernet, i.e. to TCP/IP-based networks with a response similar to dedicated lines and fixed IP addresses. Depending on the application, different data communication equipment can be connected, such as: • SCALANCE X switches for twisted pair cables or fiber-optic cables • SCALANCE W (IWLAN) and Ethernet radio devices from various manufacturers • DSL routers

7

Configuration The "SINAUT ST7 configuration software for PG V3.6" is used to configure the TIM 3V-IE Advanced. The blocks included in the "SINAUT TD7 block library" should be used to configure the SINAUT program in the CPU (TD7onCPU). Both software packages are part of the SINAUT ST7 software package as from Release 11/2005. The SINAUT ST7 configuring software V3.6 requires that STEP 7 V5.3 is installed with Service Pack 2 or above. The configuration data of the TIM 3V-IE Advanced are saved either on the TIM itself or on the CPU. When saving on the CPU, module replacement is possible without a PG.


7/39

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Integration (continued) Configuration examples with TIM 3V-IE Advanced Implementation in a node terminal

Redundant transmission paths

In a node terminal, TIM 3V-IE Advanced can exchange data, for example through its RS232 interface, with the lower-level terminals using radio. The connection to the control center is then implemented over the RJ45 interface, e.g. through a fiber-optic cable that is connected over SCALANCE X switches. In this configuration, data can be exchanged between any SINAUT nodes regardless of which network they are in.

With TIM 3V-IE Advanced, a terminal can be connected to the control center over redundant paths. TIM 3V-IE Advanced is implemented here in both the terminal and in the controller. The example shows a combination of fiber-optic cable and radio as redundant paths. The two TIMs coordinate data transmission: This takes place under normal conditions over the main path and if that fails, over the substitute path. When the main path is restored, transmission automatically switches back to this path.


Switch SCALANCE X-100/X-200


Fiber Fiber Optic Optic

Ethernet

S7-300

MPI TIM 3V-IE Advanced


Switch SCALANCE X-100/X-200 S7-300

TIM 3V-IE Advanded

Submaster station

7

S7-300


TIM 3V-IE


Station


Mobile network

Mobile network

S7-300

S7-300

Station

7/40

TIM 3V-IE

Station


TIM 3V-IE

G_IK10_XX_30137

Station

TIM 3V-IE Advanced

G_IK10_XX_30138

S7-300

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Integration (continued) Implementation in a controller TIM 3V-IE Advanced can also be used to configure a master that comprises a number of TIMs. The following example shows the TIM 3V-IE Advanced combined with a TIM 43D. Both TIMs are connected with the control center PC (e.g. ST7cc) over the MPI interface of the CPU located in the rack. Each TIM processes the data communication with the stations in their networks and

forwards the data directly over MPI to the PC. TIM 43D (with integral DCF77 radio clock receiver) functions in this example configuration as a master clock. From this, all SINAUT nodes are supplied with a date and time, i.e. also those terminals that are connected to TIM 3V-IE Advanced.

DCF77 GPS time signal SINAUT ST7cc/sc Control center

TIM 3V-IE TIM Advanced 43D GSM network

MPI MC45

MC45 S7-300



Station


TIM 3V-IE

S7-300

TIM 3V-IE

S7-300

Station

Mobile network

S7-300

S7-300

TIM 3V-IE

Station

Telephone network

TIM 3V-IE

Station

TIM 33


G_IK10_XX_30139

Station

7


7/41

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Technical specifications General

Transmission protocols (WAN)


Available protocols

• WAN

50 … 38400 bit/s

• Ethernet


Interfaces • Connection for external modem

1 x 9-pin Sub-D connector, RS232


1 x RJ45


1 x 2-pin plug-in terminal block

Supply voltage

24 V DC (±5%)


200 mA

• from 24 V DC

typ. 160 mA, max. 200 mA

Power loss

5.8 W


• SINAUT ST1 Operating mode for dedicated line/radio network • SINAUT ST7 protocol

Polling, polling with time slot procedure, multi-master polling with time slot procedure


Polling, polling with time slot procedure


spontaneous


spontaneous

Asynchronous character format • SINAUT ST7 protocol, polling or spontaneous

10 or 11 bit


0 °C … +60 °C -40 °C … +70 °C


10 bit

• Transport/storage temperature • Relative humidity

Max. 95 % at +25 °C


11 bit

• SINAUT ST1 protocol, s pontaneous

10 or 11 bit



Hamming distance d


40 x 125 x 120


4

approx. 200 g


4

IP20

Ethernet

• Weight Degree of protection

7

• SINAUT ST7

Configuration

Protocol

TCP/IP transport protocol

• Software for PG


Communication services

SINAUT ST7 through S7 communication, PG communication

• Software for CPU (optional)


TIM can be operated in mode • Terminal

Yes

• Node terminal

Yes

• Service center

Yes

Number of TIM 3V-IE Advanced per S7-300

More than one; number depends on the connection resources of the S7-300 CPU

Local communication • Via backplane bus with local S7-300 CPU

Yes, over TD7onCPU 1) and TD7onTIM


Yes

• Via MPI port of local CPU 2) with further CPUs and/or PCs


User memory required in S7 CPU • SINAUT TD7 on CPU (TD7onCPU)

At least 20 KB, actual requirement determined by data volume and functional scope

• SINAUT TD7 on TIM (TD7onTIM)

0 byte in most favorable case


7/42


Number of connections • S7 communication

max. 20

• Programming device communication

max. 4

• Sum of all simultaneously operable connections

max. 24

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Ordering data

Order No.

Order No.

TIM 3V-IE Advanced communications module For connection to a SINAUT WAN via RS 232 and to Industrial Ethernet or TCP/IP networks via RJ45

6NH7 800-3CA00

Accessories


6NH7 997-0CA15-0AA0


SINAUT ST7 Manual Paper version • German

6NH7 998-0AA13

• English

6NH7 998-0AA23

• 1 pack = 1 item

6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0

Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 (RS 232) with a SINAUT ST7 MD2, MD3 or MD4 (RS 232) modem; cable length 1.5 m

6NH7 701-4AL

Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 (RS 232) with the M20, TC35 or MC45 GSM kit (access to the GSM network); also suitable for third-party modems or radio equipment with standard RS 232 interface; cable length 2.5 m

6NH7 701-5AN

Connecting cable With one end open for connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 with a thirdparty modem or radio unit (RS 232); cable length 2.5 m

6NH7 701-4BN

Connecting cable For connecting two TIM 3VIE/TIM 4 modules via their RS 232 interface without modems ("null modem"). Cable length 6 m

6NH7 701-0AR


7

7/43

SINAUT Telecontrol

TIM communications modules TIM 42/42D with dedicated-line modem

■ Overview

7

■ Benefits

• TIM 4 module with two WAN interfaces: - the first WAN interface via the built-in MD2 dedicated-line modem - the second WAN interface via the combined RS 232/RS 485 interface • Compact unit which can be used both as an S7-300 CP and as a standalone device: - like a TIM 3, as a communications processor (CP) in an S7-300 - as a standalone device, combined with one or several S7-400, S7-300, C7 complete units or control center PCs (SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc) via the MPI interface • The devices listed can be connected to a dedicated-line network (2- or 4-wire copper cable) via the first WAN interface on the TIM 42/42D and integrated into any SINAUT WAN via the second. The modem or any other data transmission device for the second WAN is connected to the combined RS 232/ RS 485 interface on the TIM 42/42D. • The dedicated line connected via the built-in modem can be a private dedicated line or a leased telecommunications line. The modem is also suitable for connection to a radio unit with modem input. • The TIM 42D also features a built-in DCF77 radio clock receiver to supply the date/time to all SINAUT stations connected locally or, as a master, to synchronize all SINAUT devices on the WAN. • Communication is possible with SINAUT ST7 and SINAUT ST1 partners.

• Space savings and reduced cabling overhead thanks to combining the TIM transmission processor, MD2 modem and another serial WAN interface into a single compact unit. • Can be used universally with S7-300, S7-400, C7 or control center PC. • The TIM 42D module provides the correct date/time at all times and supports daylight-saving time switchover. • Reduction in time and costs thanks to quick and user-friendly configuration of connections and data to be transferred with the SINAUT configuring software and block library. • Storage of data telegrams (approx. 10,000) incl. time stamp on TIM in order to reduce connection costs for the dial-up network, if the communication path is faulty or a partner has failed. • Remote programming and remote diagnostics (PG routing) in parallel with data transmission via the WAN connection. • Investment protection for existing SINAUT ST1 systems through the integration of the SIMATIC S7-300 by means of ST1-compatible communication

■ Application The TIM 42/42D enables one or more S7-400, S7-300, C7 complete units or control center PCs (SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc) to exchange data with other SINAUT ST7 or ST1 partners via a dedicated-line network and via any other WAN. This TIM 4 module is suitable for use • if two WANs are to be connected in one master and one of them is a dedicated-line network. • if the "master" and "node station" functions are to be combined on one TIM in a node station and one of the two WANs is to be connected is a dedicated-line network. • if a redundant transmission path is to be connected to the TIM and one of the two paths is a dedicated line. Via the integrated MD2 modem, distances of up to 33 km (at 1200 bit/s), up to 27 km (at 2,400 bit/s) and up to 11 km (at 9,600 and 19,200 bit/s) can be covered without amplifiers/ repeaters (guide values for non-coil-loaded message line type 2 x 2 x 2 x 0.8 J-Y(St)Y). The built-in MD2 modem supports the setting up of "point-topoint", "star" or "line" network topologies as well as combinations of these basic structures. In "master" function, a small star network comprising two 2-wire cables can be connected to the modem output. The modem output can be switched with high resistance in order to tap a terminal along a line. This minimizes gap loss and only slightly reduces the maximum distance which can be bridged. The very short transmitter running times speed up data traffic with the "polling" operating mode used in the dedicated line network. In addition to private dedicated lines, the TIM 32 can also be connected to leased telephone lines. Appropriate approval has been secured. On analog-only leased lines, transmission speeds of 1,200 and 2,400 bit/s are possible. On switched analog/digital leased lines, the speed is usually restricted to 1,200 bit/s for technical reasons.

7/44


SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Application (continued) The TIM 42 is also ideal for data transmission via walkie-talkies with modem input. The MD2 modem features a built-in floating opto-relay linked to the RTS signal for switching the unit on and off via its PTT input. The two opto-relay connections are available on the RJ12 socket. As walkie-talkies are usually only able to transmit voice in a sound frequency range of between 300 Hz and 3,000 Hz, transmission speed with the MD2 modem is restricted here to 1,200 bit/s. For 2,400 bit/s, the sound frequency range has to reach beyond 3,300 Hz. With a dedicated processor, the TIM relieves the load on the S7 CPU or control center PC by taking over WAN communication tasks. It manages process data communication completely independently, via both WAN ports simultaneously, with the configured partners functioning as a "master", "station" and/or "node station". In order to reduce connection costs if the second WAN connected is a dial-up network, in "station" or "node station" mode, the TIM can process the data to be transferred according to priority (high or normal): If higher-priority data is pending for transmission, a dial-up connection is established immediately. At normal priority, data is initially saved in the TIM. The data is transmitted the next time a connection is established with the partner for any reason; for example, if higher-priority information is to be transferred, or if a connection is established by the partner in order to exchange data. When in "station" or "node station" mode, the TIM is able to store process data that must not be lost in the event of a communication fault or if one of the partners fails, along with its time stamp, until the partner returns to online mode. Important events, alarms, etc. are therefore not lost and the integrity of information in control center system archives is assured.

■ Design The TIM 42/42D offers all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact construction; double standard width of SIMATIC S7-300 SM modules. • 1st WAN port via an RJ12 socket for connecting the built-in modem to the dedicated line or radio unit with modem input. • The two floating opto-relay connections for switching the radio unit on and off via the PTT input are also available on the RJ12 socket. • 2nd WAN port via 9-pin Sub-D connector with a combined RS232/RS485 interface for the connection of an external modem or other data transmission device. • MPI interface (9-pin Sub-D socket) for connecting the TIM as a standalone device to one or more S7 CPUs or control center PCs. • 4-pole terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • LEDs on the front panel with SF, TXD, RXD, and MPI/K indicators and, on the TIM 42D, DCF77 indicator (the TIM-BUS LED is unassigned on the TIM 42/42D). • The DCF77 adapter cable supplied with the TIM 42D features a BNC connector for connecting the antenna cable. • Easy to mount; the TIM 42/42D is mounted on an S7-300 DIN rail. If it is integrated into an S7-300 as a CP, it is connected to adjacent modules by means of the bus connectors. As a standalone device it is connected to the S7 CPU(s) or control center PC(s) via its MPI interface. • The TIM 42/42D can operate without fans. A backup battery or memory module are not required.

■ Function The TIM 42/42D can operate in "station", "node station" and "master" mode. One of the modes can be assigned to each of the two WAN interfaces. The two modes can be the same or different. Because of the built-in dedicated-line modem, the driver for the first WAN interface is set to "dedicated line". The driver can be set to "dedicated line" or "dial-up network" for the second interface. The TIM manages data traffic via the two connected WANs independently. For this purpose, the module has its own processor and a RAM memory to buffer up to 10,000 data telegrams in order to reduce connection costs in the dial-up network in the event that the communication link is faulty or a partner fails. The TIM firmware is stored in a Flash EPROM. The functionality required in each case and, on dial-up networks, the telephone numbers for the partners, are defined during configuration and stored in SDB format in the non-volatile Flash EPROM. If the SINAUT device connected locally is an S7 CPU, the SINAUT program in the CPU, configured with blocks from the SINAUT TD7 library, acquires the process data to be transmitted. The CPU checks the data for changes and transmits it along with the parameterized target address to the TIM, from where it is forwarded for transmission via the WAN. Alternatively, the CPU can transfer the data with a time stamp and assign a "normal" or "high" priority ID for transmission via a dial-up network. If the local SINAUT device is a control center PC (SINAUT ST7cc/ST7sc), operator inputs from the PC program are acquired, converted into SINAUT data telegrams in accordance with the ST7cc/ST7sc configuration and forwarded to the TIM with the configured target address. The TIM buffers the data to be sent in its RAM buffer and assigns it to either the first or second WAN port depending on the respective target address. If both ports have been configured with redundancy, the data is assigned to the current path. Switching to the alternative path takes place if the current path fails.


7/45

7

SINAUT Telecontrol



7

The manner in which the TIM subsequently sends this data is determined by the type of WAN and the TIM function selected: • Dedicated line, radio network In "station" or "node station" mode, the TIM waits to be polled by the master. The stored data telegrams are then transferred. If no telegrams are available, the poll is simply acknowledged. In "master" mode, after each poll + reply has been completed, the TIM sends one of the messages stored in its buffer (default setting). If a larger number of telegrams is to be exchanged between two polls, this can be defined when configuring the TIM. • Dial-up network For data with "normal" priority, the TIM is not active initially in "station" and "node station" mode. However, for data with "high" priority, the TIM will immediately attempt to establish a connection with the partner addressed in order to start data transmission. If the TIM buffer contains data with "normal" priority at this point, it is also transferred. Transmission is always in accordance with the FIFO principle, i.e. regardless of priority. In "master" mode, regardless of priority, the TIM will always immediately attempt to establish a connection with the addressed partner in order to transfer data.

PG/OP communication

Telegrams received without faults by the TIM via the WAN are forwarded to the local CPU or to the PC. A block integrated in the CPU responsible for evaluating the telegrams concerned outputs the information received to the outputs or data areas configured on the block. On the PC, the ST7cc/ST7sc software performs this task in accordance with the ST7cc/ST7sc configuration.

Configuring

Either the SINAUT ST7 or the SINAUT ST1 protocol can be used for data traffic. The operating mode used depends on the type of WAN: • Data exchange via dedicated lines and radio networks usually takes place in "polling" mode. If there are two or more masters, the "multi-master polling with time-slot procedure" mode is used (not possible with SINAUT ST1). On a radio network, the "polling with time-slot procedure" mode can be selected if necessary. In both operating modes with time-slot procedure, the TIM 42 can only be used in "station" or "node station" mode. "Master" mode is possible on the TIM 42D, as this module features the DCF77 radio clock receiver required. • On dial-up networks, data exchange always takes place in "spontaneous" mode.

7/46


PG/OP communication allows all S7 terminals connected to the LAN to be remotely programmed. • S7 routing With the aid of S7 routing it is possible to use programming device communication across networks. The SINAUT ST7 protocol supports PG/OP communication "tunneling". This enables the SINAUT stations connected to the WAN (CPUs and TIMs) to be programmed and diagnosed remotely. Diagnostics The SINAUT ST7 diagnostics and service tool provides extensive diagnostics functions, including: • TIM operating status • TIM module status • General diagnostics information • TIM diagnostics buffer • Status of connections with local and remote communication partners (CPUs, TIMs, ST7cc, ST7sc) • TIM telegram monitor for logging telegram traffic The "SINAUT ST7 configuring software for PG" is required for configuring the TIM. The blocks in the "SINAUT TD7 block library" should be used to configure the SINAUT program required in the CPU. Both software packages are part of the SINAUT ST7 software package. The SDBs generated for the TIM during configuration are uploaded to the TIM module either from the SIMATIC Manager or using the "Upload SDBs" function in the SINAUT ST7 diagnostics & service tool. The SDBs are uploaded: • via the MPI interface on the TIM 4 if it has been set up as a standalone device • on a TIM 4 connected to an S7-300 as a CP via the MPI interface on the CPU.

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Technical specifications Transmission rate via RS232/RS485 interface Ports • Connection to dedicated line • Connection to external data transmission device • MPI bus • DCF77 antenna (TIM 42D)

50 ... 38400 bit/s

Available protocols


1 x RJ12 1 x 9-pin Sub-D connector, RS232 can be switched to RS485 1 x 9-pin Sub-D socket 1 x BNC socket (via DCF77 adapter cable supplied) 1 x 4-pin terminal block

Supply voltage

24 V DC

Current consumption • From backplane bus • from DC 24 V

60 mA (only if the TIM is used as a CP in an S7-300 rack) 500 mA

Power loss

12.3 W


Transmission protocols SINAUT ST7 SINAUT ST1

Operating mode for dedicated line/radio network SINAUT ST7 protocol

Polling Polling with time-slot procedure Multi-master polling with time-slot procedure

SINAUT ST1 protocol

Polling Polling with time-slot procedure


spontaneous


spontaneous


10 or 11 bit


10 bit


11 bit 10 or 11 bit

• Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm • Weight


• SINAUT ST1 protocol, spontaneous Hamming distance d

4


IP20

Transmission path


2-wire, 2 x 2-wire or 4-wire, twisted pair cables, non-coil-loaded or lightly coil-loaded

Modulation method


Transmission rates

1200 bit/s 2400 bit/s 9600 bit/s (not for leased telephone lines) 19200 bit/s (not for leased telephone lines)



0 °C ... +60 °C -40 °C ... +70 °C Max. 95 % at +25 °C


Yes

• Node station

Yes

• Master

Yes

Number of TIM 42s per S7 CPU





Yes



Special communication in stand-alone mode • Via MPI port of the TIM with CPUs and/or PCs User memory required in S7 CPU

Yes, through TD7onCPU (for S7-300 and S7-400) and S7 communication (for ST7cc/ST7sc) Minimum 20 KB, actual requirement determined by data volume and functional scope

Integrated MD2 modem

Mode • 2-wire or 2 x 2-wire

Half-duplex

• 4-wire




Receiving level

0 to -43 dB


600 ohms

• for 9600 and 19200 bit/s

150 ohms


> 6 kOhms


after 7 ms

• at 2400 bit/s

after 4 ms

• at 9600 and 19200 bit/s

after 0.5 ms



7/47

7

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Technical specifications (continued) Minimum/maximum scanning frequency • at 1200 bit/s

1300 Hz/2100 Hz

• at 2400 bit/s

2400 Hz/3300 Hz

• at 9600 and 19200 bit/s

20800 Hz/33600 Hz

• Max. perm. continuous current • max. Ron

7

60 V AC/DC 400 mA 3 ohms

■ Ordering data

6NH7 800-4AA20

TIM 42D communications module Same as TIM 42, but with the addition of the DCF77 radio clock receiver incl. DCF77 adapter cable 6NH7 700-0AD15 for converting the internal connector to the external BNC connector required

6NH7 800-4AD20


6NH7 997-0CA15-0AA0

• Opto-relay output

2.5 kV

• MD100

at 1200 bit/s

• MD124

at 1200, 2400 and 19200 bit/s

Approvals


Order No. Accessories (continued) Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 (RS232) with the GSM kit M20, TC35 or MC45 (access to GSM network). Also suitable for thirdparty modems or radio equipment with RS232 standard; cable length 2.5 m.

6NH7 701-5AN

Connecting cable With one end open for connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 with a thirdparty modem or radio unit (RS232 or RS485); cable length 2.5 m

6NH7 701-4BN

Connecting cable For connecting two TIM 3V-IE/ TIM 4 modules via their RS232 interface without modems ("nul modem"); cable length 6 m

6NH7 701-0AR

Line transformer with overvoltage protection


6NH7 998-0AA13

• English

6NH7 998-0AA23

Accessories Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 (RS232) with a SINAUT ST7 MD2, MD3 or MD4 (RS232) modem; cable length 1.5 m

6NH7 701-4AL

Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 (RS485) with a SINAUT ST7 MD2, MD3 or MD4 (RS485) modem. Cable length 1.5 m

6NH7 701-4DL


2.5 kV

Order No.

TIM 42 communications module Incl. MD2 modem for connection to private dedicated lines, leased telephone lines and modemcompatible radio equipment; incl. WAN connecting cable 6NH7700-2AR60 (RJ12/RJ12) for connecting the built-in MD2 modem with an LTOP overvoltage protection module; with second interface for the connection of an external data transmission device via RS232/RS485, with MPI interface

7/48

• FSK long-distance circuits Compatible with SINAUT modems

Floating opto-relay output • Max. supply voltage

Impulse strength U1.2/50 acc. to DIN VDE 0804 between power supply circuit and


6NH9 821-0BC11

• LTOP2 for 4-wire terminal, 2 x 2-wire terminal or 2-wire terminal

6NH9 821-0BC12

RJ12/RJ12 connecting cable (spare part)

6NH7 700-2AR60

DCF77 adapter cable (spare part)

6NH7 700-0AD15

DCF77 indoor antenna Incl. 10 m antenna cable with BNC connectors

6NH9 831-0AA

DCF77 outdoor antenna For mounting on a flat roof or wall; incl. 20 m antenna cable with BNC connectors

6NH9 831-0BA

DCF77 outdoor antenna For mounting on a mast; incl. 20 m antenna cable with BNC connectors

6NH9 831-0DA

Indirect lightning protection For DCF77 outdoor antenna

6NH9 831-2AA

GPS complete package For simulating the DCF77 time signal, comprising a GPS receiver, GPS outdoor antenna incl. 25 m cable, BNC adapter plug, configuration software, PC adapter cable, and documentation

6NH9 831-8AA

Indirect lightning protection For GPS outdoor antenna

6NH9 831-8LA

SINAUT Telecontrol

TIM communications modules TIM 43/43D with telephone modem

■ Overview

• TIM 4 module with two WAN interfaces: - the first WAN interface via the built-in MD3 telephone modem - the second WAN interface via the combined RS 232/RS 485 interface • Compact unit which can be used both as an S7-300 CP and as a standalone device: - like a TIM 3, as a communications processor (CP) in an S7-300 - as a standalone device, combined with one or several S7-400, S7-300, C7 complete units or control center PCs (SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc) via the MPI interface • The devices listed can be connected to an analog telephone network via the first WAN interface on the TIM 43/43D and integrated into any SINAUT WAN via the second. The modem or any other data transmission device for the second WAN is connected to the combined RS 232/RS 485 interface on the TIM 43/43D. • The TIM 43D also features a built-in DCF77 radio clock receiver to supply the date/time to all SINAUT stations connected locally or, as a master, to synchronize all SINAUT devices on the WAN. • Communication is possible with SINAUT ST7 and SINAUT ST1 partners.

■ Benefits

• Space savings and reduced cabling overhead thanks to combining the TIM transmission processor, MD3 modem and another serial WAN interface into a single compact unit. • Can be used universally with S7-300, S7-400, C7 or control center PC. • The TIM 43D module provides the correct date/time at all times and supports daylight-saving time switchover. • Reduction in time and costs thanks to quick and user-friendly configuration of connections and data to be transferred with the SINAUT configuring software and block library. • Storage of data telegrams (approx. 10,000) incl. time stamp on TIM in order to reduce connection costs for the dial-up network, if the communication path is faulty or a partner has failed. • Remote programming and remote diagnostics (PG routing) in parallel with data transmission via the WAN connection. • Investment protection for existing SINAUT ST1 systems through the integration of the SIMATIC S7-300 by means of ST1-compatible communication.

■ Application The TIM 43/43D enables one or more S7-400, S7-300, C7 complete units or control center PCs (SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc) to exchange data with other SINAUT ST7 or ST1 partners via an analog telephone network and via any other WAN. This TIM 4 module is suitable for use • if two WANs are to be connected in one master and one of them is an analog telephone network. • if the "master" and "node station" functions are to be combined on one TIM in a node station and one of the two WANs to be connected is an analog telephone network. • if a redundant transmission path is to be connected to the TIM and one of the two paths is an analog telephone network. With a dedicated processor, the TIM relieves the load on the S7 CPU or control center PC by taking over WAN communication tasks. It manages process data communication completely independently, via both WAN ports simultaneously, with the configured partners functioning as a "master", "station" and/or "node station". In order to reduce connection costs for the dial-up network, in "station" or "node station" mode, the TIM can process the data to be transferred according to priority (high or normal): If higher-priority data is pending for transmission, a dial-up connection is established immediately. At normal priority, data is initially saved in the TIM. The data is transmitted the next time a connection is established with the partner for any reason. (for example, if higher-priority information is to be transferred, or if a connection is established by the partner in order to exchange data). When in "station" or "node station" mode, the TIM is able to store process data that must not be lost in the event of a communication fault or if one of the partners fails, along with its time stamp, until the partner returns to online mode. Important events, alarms, etc. are therefore not lost and the integrity of information in control center system archives is assured.


7/49

7

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Design

■ Function

The TIM 43/43D offers all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact construction; double standard width of SIMATIC S7-300 SM modules. • 1st WAN port via RJ12 socket for connecting the built-in modem to the telephone outlet. • 2nd WAN port via 9-pin Sub-D connector with a combined RS232/RS485 interface for the connection of an external modem or other data transmission device. • MPI interface (9-pin Sub-D socket) for connecting the TIM as a standalone device to one or more S7 CPUs or control center PCs. • 4-pole terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • LEDs on the front panel with SF, TXD, RXD, and MPI/K indicators and, on the TIM 43D, DCF77 indicator (the TIM-BUS LED is unassigned on the TIM 43/43D). • The DCF77 adapter cable supplied with the TIM 43D features a BNC connector for connecting the antenna cable. • Easy to mount; the TIM 43/43D is mounted on an S7-300 DIN rail. If it is integrated into an S7-300 as a CP, it is connected to adjacent modules by means of the bus connectors. As a standalone device it is connected to the S7 CPU(s) or control center PC(s) via its MPI interface. • The TIM 43/43D can operate without fans. A backup battery or memory module is not required.

The TIM 43/43D can operate in "station", "node station" and "master" mode. One of the modes can be assigned to each of the two WAN interfaces. The two modes can be the same or different. Because of the built-in telephone modem, the driver for the first WAN interface is set to "dial-up network". The driver can be set to "dedicated line" or "dial-up network" for the second interface. The TIM manages data traffic via the two connected WANs independently. For this purpose, the module has its own processor and a RAM memory to buffer up to 10,000 data telegrams in order to reduce connection costs in the dial-up network in the event that the communication link is faulty or a partner fails. The TIM firmware is stored in a Flash EPROM. The functionality required in each case and, on dial-up networks, the telephone numbers for the partners, are defined during configuration and stored in SDB format in the non-volatile Flash EPROM. If the SINAUT device connected locally is an S7 CPU, the SINAUT program in the CPU, configured with blocks from the SINAUT TD7 library, acquires the process data to be transmitted. The CPU checks the data for changes and transmits it along with the parameterized target address to the TIM, from where it is forwarded for transmission via the WAN. Alternatively, the CPU can transfer the data with a time stamp and assign a "normal" or "high" priority ID for transmission via a dial-up network. If the local SINAUT device is a control center PC (SINAUT ST7cc/ST7sc), operator inputs from the PC program are acquired, converted into SINAUT data telegrams in accordance with the ST7cc/ST7sc configuration and forwarded to the TIM with the configured target address. The TIM buffers the data to be sent in its RAM buffer and assigns it to either the first or second WAN port depending on the respective target address. If both ports have been configured with redundancy, the data is assigned to the current path. Switching to the alternative path takes place if the current path fails.

7

7/50


SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Function (continued) The manner in which the TIM subsequently sends this data is determined by the type of WAN and the TIM function selected: • Dedicated line, radio network In "station" or "node station" mode, the TIM waits to be polled by the master. The stored data telegrams are then transferred. If no telegrams are available, the poll is simply acknowledged. In "master" mode, after each poll + reply has been completed, the TIM sends one of the messages stored in its buffer (default setting). If a larger number of telegrams is to be exchanged between two polls, this can be defined when configuring the TIM. • Dial-up network For data with "normal" priority, the TIM is not active initially in "station" and "node station" mode. However, for data with "high" priority, the TIM will immediately attempt to establish a connection with the addressed partner in order to start data transmission. If the TIM buffer contains data with "normal" priority at this point, it is also transferred. Transmission is always in accordance with the FIFO principle, i.e. regardless of priority. In "master" mode, regardless of priority, the TIM will always immediately attempt to establish a connection with the addressed partner in order to transfer data.

PG/OP communication

Telegrams received without faults by the TIM via the WAN are forwarded to the local CPU or PC. A block integrated in the CPU responsible for evaluating the telegrams concerned outputs the information received to the outputs or data areas configured on the block. On the PC, the ST7cc/ST7sc software performs this task in accordance with the ST7cc/ST7sc configuration.

Configuring


PG/OP communication allows all S7 terminals connected to the LAN to be remotely programmed. • S7 routing With S7 routing it is possible to use programming device communication across networks. The SINAUT ST7 protocol supports PG/OP communication "tunneling". This enables the SINAUT stations connected to the WAN (CPUs and TIMs) to be programmed and diagnosed remotely. Diagnostics The SINAUT ST7 diagnostics and service tool provides extensive diagnostics functions, including: • TIM operating status • TIM module status • General diagnostics information • TIM diagnostics buffer • Status of connections with local and remote communication partners (CPUs, TIMs, ST7cc, ST7sc) • TIM telegram monitor for logging telegram traffic The "SINAUT ST7 configuring software for PG" is required for configuring the TIM. The blocks in the "SINAUT TD7 block library" should be used to configure the SINAUT program required in the CPU. Both software packages are part of the SINAUT ST7 software package. The SDBs generated for the TIM during configuration are uploaded to the TIM module either from the SIMATIC Manager or using the "Upload SDBs" function in the SINAUT ST7 diagnostics & service tool. The SDBs are uploaded: • via the MPI interface on the TIM 4 if it has been set up as a standalone device • on a TIM 4 connected to an S7-300 as a CP via the MPI interface on the CPU.


7/51

7

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Technical specifications Transmission rate via RS232/RS485 interface Interfaces • Connection to telephone network • Connection to external data transmission device • MPI bus • DCF77 antenna (TIM 43D) • Connection to supply voltage Power supply

24 V DC

• from 24 V DC


Power loss

12.3 W


0 °C ... +60 °C -40 °C ... +70 °C max. 95 % at +25 °C


Transmission protocols Available protocols

1 x RJ12 1 x 9-pin Sub-D connector, RS232 can be switched to RS485 1 x 9-pin Sub-D socket 1 x BNC socket (via DCF77 adapter cable supplied) 1 x 4-pin terminal block



• SINAUT ST1 protocol Operating mode for dial-up network • SINAUT ST7 protocol • SINAUT ST1 protocol Asynchronous character format • SINAUT ST7 protocol, polling or spontaneous • SINAUT ST7 protocol, multi-master polling • SINAUT ST1 protocol, polling • SINAUT ST1 protocol, spontaneous Hamming distance d

• Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm • Weight



IP20

SINAUT ST7; SINAUT ST1

Polling Polling with time-slot procedure Multi-master polling with time-slot procedure Polling Polling with time-slot procedure spontaneous spontaneous 10 or 11 bit 10 bit 11 bit 10 or 11 bit 4

MD3 built-in modem Transmission path

Analog dial-up telephone network

Available ITU transmission standards • V.22 • V.22 up to • V.32 up to • V.32 up to • V.32 up to • V.34 up to • V.34 up to

1200 bit/s, duplex 2400 bit/s, duplex 4800 bit/s, duplex 9600 bit/s, duplex 14400 bit/s, duplex 19200 bit/s, duplex 33600 bit/s, duplex


12 kHz 16 kHz

Dial-up procedure




Loudspeaker



Line matching



Yes

Certification

Europe; U.S.A.; Canada



Compatible with SINAUT modems • MD125 - V.22 - V.22 up to


• MDM2425B DX - V.22 up to

2040 bit/s, duplex


1200 bit/s, duplex 2040 bit/s, duplex 4800 bit/s, duplex 9600 bit/s, duplex 14400 bit/s, duplex


7

50 ... 38400 bit/s




Yes

• Node station

Yes

• Master

Yes







7/52


SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Ordering data

Order No.

TIM 43 communications module With built-in MD3 modem for connection to the analog telephone network; incl. WAN connecting cable 6NH7700-2BR60 (RJ12 -RJ12/ TAE6) with snap-on TAE6N connector for connecting the built-in MD3 modem to a telephone outlet (TAE6N or RJ12); with second interface for the connection of an external data transmission device via RS232/RS485, with MPI interface

6NH7 800-4AA30


6NH7 800-4AD30


6NH7 997-0CA15-0AA0


6NH7 998-0AA13

• English

6NH7 998-0AA23

Order No. Accessories Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 (RS232) with a SINAUT ST7 MD2, MD3 or MD4 (RS232) modem; cable length 1.5 m

6NH7 701-4AL

Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 4 (RS485) with a SINAUT ST7 MD2, MD3 or MD4 (RS485) modem. The connecting cable is also suitable for connecting the TIM to an RSM optical fiber module. Cable length 1.5 m

6NH7 701-4DL

Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 (RS232) with the GSM kit M20, TC35 or MC45 (access to GSM network). Also suitable for thirdparty modems or radio equipment with RS232 standard; cable length 2.5 m.

6NH7 701-5AN

Connecting cable With one end open for connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 with a thirdparty modem or radio unit (RS232 or RS485); cable length 2.5 m

6NH7 701-4BN

Connecting cable For connecting two TIM 3V-IE/ TIM 4 modules via their RS232 interface without modems ("null modem"); cable length 6 m

6NH7 701-0AR

RJ12/RJ12 connecting cable with snap-on TAE6N connector (spare part)

6NH7 700-3BR60


6NH7 700-0AD15


6NH9 831-0AA


6NH9 831-0BA


6NH9 831-0DA


6NH9 831-2AA


6NH9 831-8AA


6NH9 831-8LA


7

7/53

SINAUT Telecontrol

TIM communications modules TIM 44/44D with ISDN modem

■ Overview

7

■ Benefits

• TIM 4 module with two WAN interfaces: - the first WAN interface via the built-in MD4 ISDN modem - the second WAN interface via the combined RS 232/RS 485 interface • Compact unit which can be used both as an S7-300 CP and as a standalone device: - like a TIM 3, as a communications processor (CP) in an S7-300 - as a standalone device, combined with one or several S7-400, S7-300, C7 complete units or control center PCs (SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc) via the MPI interface • The devices listed can be connected to an ISDN network via the first WAN interface on the TIM 44/44D and integrated into any SINAUT WAN via the second. The modem or any other data transmission device for the second WAN is connected to the combined RS 232/RS 485 interface on the TIM 44/44D. • The TIM 44D also features a built-in DCF77 radio clock receiver to supply the date/time to all SINAUT stations connected locally or, as a controller, to synchronize all SINAUT devices on the WAN. • Communication is possible with SINAUT ST7 and SINAUT ST1 partners.

• Space savings and reduced cabling overhead thanks to combining the TIM transmission processor, MD4 modem and another serial WAN interface into a single compact unit. • Can be used universally with S7-300, S7-400, C7 or control center PC. • The TIM 44D module provides the correct date/time at all times and supports daylight-saving time switchover. • Reduction in time and costs thanks to quick and user-friendly configuration of connections and data to be transferred with the SINAUT configuring software and block library. • Storage of data telegrams (approx. 10,000) incl. time stamp on TIM in order to reduce connection costs for the dial-up network, if the communication path is faulty or a partner has failed. • Remote programming and remote diagnostics (PC routing) in parallel with data transmission via the WAN connection. • Investment protection for existing SINAUT ST1 systems through the integration of the SIMATIC S7-300 by means of ST1-compatible communication.

■ Application The TIM 44/44D enables one or more S7-400, S7-300, C7 complete units or control center PCs (SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc) to exchange data with other SINAUT ST7 or ST1 partners via an ISDN network and via any other WAN. This TIM 4 module is suitable for use • if two WANs are to be connected in one master and one of them is an ISDN network. • if the "master" and "node station" functions are to be combined on one TIM in a node station and one of the two WANs to be connected is an ISDN network. • if a redundant transmission path is to be connected to the TIM and one of the two paths is an ISDN network. With a dedicated processor, the TIM relieves the load on the S7 CPU or control center PC by taking over WAN communication tasks. It manages process data communication completely independently, via both WAN ports simultaneously, with the configured partners functioning as a "master", "station" and/or "node station". In order to reduce connection costs for the dial-up network, in "station" or "node station" mode, the TIM can process the data to be transferred according to priority (high or normal): If higherpriority data is pending for transmission, a dial-up connection is established immediately. At normal priority, data is initially saved in the TIM. The data is transmitted the next time a connection is established with the partner for any reason. For example, if higher-priority information is to be transferred, or if a connection is established by the partner in order to exchange data. When in "station" or "node station" mode, the TIM is able to store process data that must not be lost in the event of a communication fault or if one of the partners fails, along with its time stamp, until the partner returns to online mode. Important events, alarms, etc. are therefore not lost and the integrity of information in control center system archives is assured.

7/54


SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Design The TIM 44/44D offers all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact construction; double standard width of SIMATIC S7-300 SM modules. • 1st WAN port via RJ12 socket for connecting the built-in modem to the ISDN S0 outlet • 2nd WAN port via 9-pin Sub-D connector with a combined RS232/RS485 interface for the connection of an external modem or other data transmission device. • MPI interface (9-pin Sub-D socket) for connecting the TIM as a standalone device to one or more S7 CPUs or control center PCs • 4-pole terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • LEDs on the front panel with SF, TXD, RXD, and MPI/K indicators and, on the TIM 44D, DCF77 indicator (the TIM-BUS LED is unassigned on the TIM 44/44D). • The DCF77 adapter cable supplied with the TIM 44D features a BNC connector for connecting the antenna cable. • Easy to mount; the TIM 44/44D is mounted on an S7-300 DIN rail. If it is integrated into an S7-300 as a CP, it is connected to adjacent modules by means of the bus connectors. As a standalone device it is connected to one or more S7 CPUs or to one or more control center PCs via its MPI interface. • The TIM 44/44D can be operated without fans. A backup battery or memory module is not required.

■ Function The TIM 44/44D can operate in "station", "node station" and "master" mode. One of the modes can be assigned to each of the two WAN interfaces. The two modes can be the same or different. Because of the built-in ISDN modem, the driver for the first WAN interface is set to "dial-up network". The driver can be set to "dedicated line" or "dial-up network" for the second interface. The TIM manages data traffic via the two connected WANs independently. For this purpose, the module has its own processor and a RAM memory to buffer up to 10,000 data telegrams in order to reduce connection costs in the dial-up network in the event that the communication link is faulty or a partner fails. The TIM firmware is stored in a Flash EPROM. The functionality required in each case and, on dial-up networks, the telephone numbers for the partners, are defined during configuration and stored in SDB format in the non-volatile Flash EPROM. If the SINAUT device connected locally is an S7 CPU, the SINAUT program in the CPU, configured with blocks from the SINAUT TD7 library, acquires the process data to be transmitted. The CPU checks the data for changes and transmits it along with the parameterized target address to the TIM, from where it is forwarded for transmission via the WAN. Alternatively, the CPU can transfer the data with a time stamp and assign a "normal" or "high" priority ID for transmission via a dial-up network. If the local SINAUT device is a control center PC (SINAUT ST7cc/ST7sc), operator inputs from the PC program are acquired, converted into SINAUT data telegrams in accordance with the ST7cc/ST7sc configuration and forwarded to the TIM with the configured target address. The TIM buffers the data to be sent in its RAM buffer and assigns it to either the first or second WAN port depending on the respective target address. If both ports have been configured with redundancy, the data is assigned to the current path. Switching to the alternative path takes place if the current path fails.


7/55

7

SINAUT Telecontrol



7

The manner in which the TIM subsequently sends this data is determined by the type of WAN and the TIM function selected: • Dedicated line, radio network In "station" or "node station" mode, the TIM waits to be polled by the master. The stored data telegrams are then transferred. If no telegrams are available, the poll is simply acknowledged. In "master" mode, after each poll + reply has been completed, the TIM sends one of the messages stored in its buffer (default setting). If a larger number of telegrams is to be exchanged between two polls, this can be defined when configuring the TIM. • Dial-up network For data with "normal" priority, the TIM is not active initially in "station" and "node station" mode. However, for data with "high" priority, the TIM will immediately attempt to establish a connection with the addressed partner in order to start data transmission. If the TIM buffer contains data with "normal" priority at this point, it is also transferred. Transmission is always in accordance with the FIFO principle, i.e. regardless of priority. In "master" mode, regardless of priority, the TIM will always immediately attempt to establish a connection with the addressed partner in order to transfer data.

PG/OP communication

Telegrams received without faults by the TIM via the WAN are forwarded to the local CPU or PC. A block integrated in the CPU responsible for evaluating the telegrams concerned outputs the information received to the outputs or data areas configured on the block. On the PC, the ST7cc/ST7sc software performs this task in accordance with the ST7cc/ST7sc configuration.

Configuring


7/56


PG/OP communication allows all S7 terminals connected to the LAN to be remotely programmed. • S7 routing With S7 routing it is possible to use programming device communication across networks. The SINAUT ST7 protocol supports PG/OP communication "tunneling". This enables the SINAUT stations connected to the WAN (CPUs and TIMs) to be programmed and diagnosed remotely. Diagnostics The SINAUT ST7 diagnostics and service tool provides extensive diagnostics functions, including: • TIM operating status • TIM module status • General diagnostics information • TIM diagnostics buffer • Status of connections with local and remote communication partners (CPUs, TIMs, ST7cc, ST7sc) • TIM telegram monitor for logging telegram traffic The "SINAUT ST7 configuring software for PG" is required for configuring the TIM. The blocks in the "SINAUT TD7 block library" should be used to configure the SINAUT program required in the CPU. Both software packages are part of the SINAUT ST7 software package. The SDBs generated for the TIM during configuration are uploaded to the TIM module either from the SIMATIC Manager or using the "Upload SDBs" function in the SINAUT ST7 diagnostics & service tool. The SDBs are uploaded: • via the MPI interface on the TIM 4 if it has been set up as a standalone device • on a TIM 4 connected to an S7-300 as a CP via the MPI interface on the CPU.

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Technical specifications Transmission rate via RS232/RS485 interface Interfaces • Connection to ISDN network • Connection to external data transmission device • MPI bus • DCF77 antenna (TIM 44D)

50 to 38400 bit/s

Available protocols


RJ12 9-pin Sub-D connector, RS232 can be switched to RS485 9-pin Sub-D socket BNC socket (via DCF77 adapter cable supplied) 4-pin terminal block

Power supply

24 V DC

Current consumption • From backplane bus • from 24 V DC Power loss

12.3 W


0 °C ... +60 °C -40 °C ... +70 °C max. 95 % at +25 °C

• Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm • Weight Degree of protection Configuring • Software for PG • Software for CPU

Compact module S7-300, double width 80 x 125 x 120 approx. 300 g IP20 SINAUT ST7 configuring software for PG SINAUT TD7 function block library for CPU

• Station

Yes

• Node station

Yes

• Master

Yes



Yes, over TD7onCPU 1) Yes





Polling Polling with time-slot procedure Multi-master polling with time-slot procedure


Polling Polling with time-slot procedure


spontaneous


spontaneous


10 or 11 bit


10 bit


11 bit

• SINAUT ST1 protocol, spontaneous

10 or 11 bit

Hamming distance d

4


Digital ISDN network

• V.110

1200 bit/s, duplex

• V.110

2400 bit/s, duplex

• V.110

9600 bit/s, duplex

• V.110

19200 bit/s, duplex

• X.75

1200 bit/s, duplex

• X.75

2400 bit/s, duplex

• X.75

19200 bit/s, duplex

• X.75

38400 bit/s, duplex

Certification

Europe

7

Compatible with SINAUT modems


Special communication in stand-alone mode • Via MPI port of the TIM with CPUs and/or PCs

Operating mode for dedicated line/radio network

Available standard transmission standards




Operating mode for dial-up network 60 mA (only if the TIM is used as a CP in an S7-300 rack) 500 mA



• LGM64K - V.110

9600 bit/s, duplex




7/57

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Ordering data

Order No.

TIM 44 communications module With built-in MD4 modem for connection to the analog telephone network; incl. WAN 6NH7 700-4AR60 (RJ12/RJ45) connecting cable for connecting the built-in MD4 modem with the ISDN S0 outlet; with second interface for connecting an external data transmission device via RS232/RS485; with MPI interface

6NH7 800-4AA40


6NH7 800-4AD40


6NH7 997-0CA15-0AA0


7

• German

6NH7 998-0AA13

• English

6NH7 998-0AA23

7/58


Order No. Accessories Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 (RS232) with a SINAUT ST7 MD3, MD3 or MD4 (RS232) modem; cable length 1.5 m

6NH7 701-4AL


6NH7 701-4DL

Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 (RS232) with the GSM kit M20, TC35 or MC45 (access to GSM network). Also suitable for thirdparty modems or radio equipment with RS232 standard; cable length 2.5 m.

6NH7 701-5AN

Connecting cable With one end open for connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 with a third-party modem or radio unit (RS232); cable length 2.5 m

6NH7 701-4BN


6NH7 701-0AR


6NH7 700-4AR60


6NH7 700-0AD15


6NH9 831-0AA


6NH9 831-0BA


6NH9 831-0DA


6NH9 831-2AA


6NH9 831-8AA


6NH9 831-8LA

SINAUT Telecontrol

TIM communications modules TIM 4V/4VD without built-in modem

■ Overview

■ Application The TIM 4V/4VD enables one or more S7-400, S7-300, C7 complete units or control center PCs (SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc) to exchange data with other SINAUT ST7 or ST1 partners via any SINAUT WAN. This TIM 4 module is suitable for use • if the TIM has to be connected to a WAN with which the builtin modems are not compatible. This type of TIM has to be used for example for connections to the GSM network, to radio modems or to a fiber-optic cable. • if an MD3 modem is to be used as a dedicated-line modem (the integrated MD3 modem on a TIM 43 can only be configured for dial-up operation). • if a number of MD2 or MD3 dedicated-line modems is to be connected in parallel via the RS485 interface to the TIM in the controller in order to create a more extensive star network. • if an MD4 modem is to be used for connection to a ISDN dedicated line (the integrated MD4 modem on a TIM 44 can only be configured for dial-up operation).

• TIM 4 modules without built-in modem • With one serial WAN interface • Compact unit which can be used both as an S7-300 CP and as a standalone device: - like a TIM 3, as a communications processor (CP) in an S7-300 - as a standalone device, combined with one or several S7-400, S7-300, C7 complete units or control center PCs (SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc) via the MPI interface • The devices listed can be integrated into any SINAUT WAN via the TIM 4V/4VD. The modem or data transmission device required in each case is connected to the combined RS 232/RS 485 interface on the TIM 4V/4VD. • The TIM 4VD also features a built-in DCF77 radio clock receiver to supply the date/time to all SINAUT stations connected locally or, as a master, to synchronize all SINAUT devices on the WAN. • Communication is possible with SINAUT ST7 and SINAUT ST1 partners.

With a dedicated processor, the TIM relieves the load on the S7 CPU or control center PC by taking over WAN communication tasks. It manages process data communication with the configured partners completely independently in "master", "station" or "node station" mode. In order to reduce connection costs for the dial-up network, in "station" or "node station" mode, the TIM can process the data to be transferred according to priority (high or normal): If higherpriority data is pending for transmission, a dial-up connection is established immediately. At normal priority, data is initially saved in the TIM. The data is transmitted the next time a connection is established with the partner for any reason (for example, if higher-priority information is to be transferred, or if a connection is established by the partner in order to exchange data). When in "station" or "node station" mode, the TIM is able to store process data that must not be lost in the event of a communication fault or if one of the partners fails, along with its time stamp, until the partner returns to online mode. Important events, alarms, etc. are therefore not lost and the integrity of information in control center system archives is assured.

■ Benefits

• TIM 4 module which supports flexible connection to any SINAUT WAN. • Can be used universally with S7-300, S7-400, C7 or control center PC. • The TIM 4VD module provides the correct date/time at all times and supports daylight-savings time switchover. • Reduction in time and costs thanks to quick and user-friendly configuration of connections and data to be transferred with the SINAUT configuring software and block library. • Storage of data telegrams (approx. 10,000) incl. time stamp on TIM in order to reduce connection costs for the dial-up network, if the communication path is faulty or a partner has failed. • Remote programming and remote diagnostics (PC routing) in parallel with data transmission via the WAN connection. • Investment protection for existing SINAUT ST1 systems through the integration of the SIMATIC S7-300 by means of ST1-compatible communication.


7/59

7

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Design The TIM 4V/4VD offers all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact construction; double standard width of SIMATIC S7-300 SM modules. • 9-pin Sub-D connector with a combined RS232/RS485 interface for the connection of an external modem or other data transmission device. • MPI interface (9-pin Sub-D socket) for connecting the TIM as a standalone device to one or more S7 CPUs or control center PCs. • 4-pole terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • LEDs on the front panel with SF and MPI/K indicators and, on the TIM 4VD, DCF77 indicator (the TXD, RXD and TIM-BUS LEDs are unassigned on the TIM 4V/4VD). • The DCF77 adapter cable supplied with the TIM 4VD features a BNC connector for connecting the antenna cable. • Easy to mount; the TIM 4V/4VD is mounted on an S7-300 DIN rail. If it is integrated into an S7-300 as a CP, it is connected to adjacent modules by means of the bus connectors. As a standalone device it is connected to the S7 CPU(s) or control center PC(s) via its MPI interface. • The TIM 4V/4VD can be operated without fans. A backup battery or memory module is not required.

■ Function The TIM 4V/4VD can operate in "station", "node station" and "master" mode.

7

The TIM manages data traffic via the connected WAN independently. For this purpose, the module has its own processor and a RAM memory to buffer up to 10,000 data telegrams in order to reduce connection costs in the dial-up network in the event that the communication link is faulty or a partner fails. The TIM firmware is stored in a Flash EPROM. The functionality required in each case and, on dial-up networks, the telephone numbers for the partners, are defined during configuration and stored in SDB format in the non-volatile Flash EPROM. If the SINAUT device connected locally is an S7 CPU, the SINAUT program in the CPU, configured with blocks from the SINAUT TD7 library, acquires the process data to be transmitted. The CPU checks the data for changes and transmits it along with the parameterized target address to the TIM, from where it is forwarded for transmission via the WAN. Alternatively, the CPU can transfer the data with a time stamp and assign a "normal" or "high" priority ID for transmission via a dial-up network. If the local SINAUT device is a control center PC (SINAUT ST7cc/ST7sc), operator inputs from the PC program are acquired, converted into SINAUT data telegrams in accordance with the ST7cc/ST7sc configuration and forwarded to the TIM with the configured target address.

7/60


The TIM stores the data to be transferred in its RAM buffer. The manner in which the TIM subsequently sends this data is determined by the type of WAN and the TIM function selected: • Dedicated line, radio network In "station" or "node station" mode, the TIM waits to be polled by the master. The stored data telegrams are then transferred. If no telegrams are available, the poll is simply acknowledged. In "master" mode, after each poll + reply has been completed, the TIM sends one of the messages stored in its buffer (default setting). If a larger number of telegrams is to be exchanged between two polls, this can be defined when configuring the TIM. • Dial-up network For data with "normal" priority, the TIM is not active initially in "station" and "node station" mode. However, for data with "high" priority, the TIM will immediately attempt to establish a connection with the addressed partner in order to start data transmission. If the TIM buffer contains data with "normal" priority at this point, it is also transferred. Transmission is always in accordance with the FIFO principle, i.e. regardless of priority. In "master" mode, regardless of priority, the TIM will always immediately attempt to establish a connection with the partner addressed in order to transfer data. Telegrams received without faults by the TIM via the WAN are forwarded to the local CPU or PC. A block integrated in the CPU responsible for evaluating the telegrams concerned outputs the information received to the outputs or data areas configured on the block. On the PC, the ST7cc/ST7sc software performs this task in accordance with the ST7cc/ST7sc configuration. Either the SINAUT ST7 or the SINAUT ST1 protocol can be used for data traffic. The operating mode used depends on the type of WAN: • Data exchange via dedicated lines and radio networks usually takes place in "polling" mode. If there are two or more masters, the "multi-master polling with time-slot procedure" mode is used (not possible with SINAUT ST1). On a radio network, the "polling with time-slot procedure" mode can be selected if necessary. In both operating modes with time-slot procedure, the TIM 4V can only be used in "station" or "node station" mode. "Master" mode is possible on the TIM 4VD, as this module features the DCF77 radio clock receiver required. • On dial-up networks, data exchange always takes place in "spontaneous" mode.

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Function (continued) PG/OP communication

Configuring

PG/OP communication allows all S7 terminals connected to the LAN to be remotely programmed. • S7 routing With S7 routing it is possible to use programming device communication across networks. The SINAUT ST7 protocol supports PG/OP communication "tunneling". This enables the SINAUT stations connected to the WAN (CPUs and TIMs) to be programmed and diagnosed remotely.

The "SINAUT ST7 configuring software for PG" is required for configuring the TIM. The blocks in the "SINAUT TD7 block library" should be used to configure the SINAUT program required in the CPU. Both software packages are part of the SINAUT ST7 software package.

Diagnostics The SINAUT ST7 diagnostics and service tool provides extensive diagnostics functions, including: • TIM operating status • TIM module status • General diagnostics information • TIM diagnostics buffer • Status of connections with local and remote communication partners (CPUs, TIMs, ST7cc, ST7sc) • TIM telegram monitor for logging telegram traffic

The SDBs generated for the TIM during configuration are uploaded to the TIM module either from the SIMATIC Manager or using the "Upload SDBs" function in the SINAUT ST7 diagnostics & service tool. The SDBs are uploaded: • via the MPI interface on the TIM 4 if it has been set up as a standalone device • on a TIM 4 connected to an S7-300 as a CP via the MPI interface on the CPU.

■ Technical specifications Transmission rate

50 to 38400 bit/s


Yes

• Connection to external data transmission device

9-pin Sub-D connector, RS232 can be switched to RS485

• Node station

Yes

• Master

Yes

• MPI bus

9-pin Sub-D socket

• DCF77 antenna (TIM 4VD)

BNC socket (via DCF77 adapter cable supplied)

Number of TIM 4Vs per S7 CPU




Supply voltage

24 V DC


• from backplane bus

60 mA (only if the TIM is used as a CP in an S7-300 rack)


Yes

• from DC 24 V

400 mA


Power loss

9,9 W


Ports

Current consumption


0 °C ... +60 °C


-40 °C ... +70 °C


max. 95 % at +25 °C





80 x 125 x 120

• Weight

approx. 300 g


IP20





7





7/61

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Technical specifications (continued) Transmission protocols Available protocols




Polling Polling with time-slot procedure Multi-master polling with time-slot procedure Polling Polling with time-slot procedure

Operating mode for dial-up network • SINAUT ST7 protocol • SINAUT ST1 protocol Asynchronous character format • SINAUT ST7 protocol, polling or spontaneous • SINAUT ST7 protocol, multi-master polling • SINAUT ST1 protocol, polling • SINAUT ST1 protocol, spontaneous Hamming distance d

■ Ordering data

7

Order No.

TIM 4V communications module With RS232/485 interface for the connection of an external data transmission device, with MPI interface

6NH7 800-4AA00

TIM 4VD communications module Same as TIM 4V, but with the addition of the DCF77 radio clock receiver incl. DCF77 adapter cable 6NH7 700-0AD15 for converting the internal connector to the external BNC connector required

6NH7 800-4AD00


6NH7 997-0CA15-0AA0


6NH7 998-0AA13

• English

6NH7 998-0AA23

Accessories Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 (RS232) with a SINAUT ST7 MD2, MD3 or MD4 (RS232) modem; cable length 1.5 m

6NH7 701-4AL


6NH7 701-4DL

7/62


spontaneous spontaneous 10 or 11 bit 10 bit 11 bit 10 or 11 bit 4

Order No. Accessories (continued) Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 (RS232) with the GSM kit M20, TC35 or MC45 (access to GSM network). Also suitable for thirdparty modems or radio equipment with RS232 standard; cable length 2.5 m.

6NH7 701-5AN

Connecting cable With one end open for connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 with a third-party modem or radio unit (RS232); cable length 2.5 m

6NH7 701-4BN

Connecting cable For connecting two TIM3V/TIM4 modules via their RS232 interface without modems ("null modem"); cable length 6 m

6NH7 701-0AR


6NH7 700-0AD15


6NH9 831-0AA


6NH9 831-0BA


6NH9 831-0DA


6NH9 831-2AA


6NH9 831-8AA


6NH9 831-8LA

SINAUT Telecontrol

TIM communications modules TIM 4R/4RD without built-in modem

■ Overview

■ Application The TIM 4R/4RD enables one or more S7-400, S7-300, C7 complete units or control center PCs (SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc) to exchange data with other SINAUT ST7 or ST1 partners via any two SINAUT WANs. This TIM 4 module is suitable for use • if two WANs are to be connected in one master. • if the "master" and "node station" modes are to be combined on one TIM in one node station. • if a redundant transmission path is to be connected to the TIM.

• TIM 4 modules without built-in modem • With two serial WAN interfaces • Compact unit which can be used both as an S7-300 CP and as a standalone device: - like a TIM 3, as a communications processor (CP) in an S7-300 - as a standalone device, combined with one or several S7-400, S7-300, C7 complete units or control center PCs (SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc) via the MPI interface • The devices listed can be integrated into any SINAUT WAN via the TIM 4R/4RD. The modem or data transmission device required in each case is connected to the two RS 232/RS 485 interfaces on the TIM 4R/4RD. • The TIM 4RD also features a built-in DCF77 radio clock receiver to supply the date/time to all SINAUT stations connected locally or, as a controller, to synchronize all SINAUT devices on the WAN. • Communication is possible with SINAUT ST7 and SINAUT ST1 partners.

■ Benefits

• Space savings and reduced cabling overhead thanks to combining the TIM transmission processor and two WAN interfaces into a single compact unit. • TIM 4 module which supports flexible connection to any SINAUT WAN. • Can be used universally with S7-300, S7-400, C7 or control center PC. • The TIM 4RD module provides the correct date/time at all times and supports daylight-savings time switchover. • Reduction in time and costs thanks to quick and user-friendly configuration of connections and data to be transferred with the SINAUT configuring software and block library. • Storage of data telegrams (approx. 10,000) incl. time stamp on TIM in order to reduce connection costs for the dial-up network, if the communication path is faulty or a partner has failed. • Remote programming and remote diagnostics (PC routing) in parallel with data transmission via the WAN connection. • Investment protection for existing SINAUT ST1 systems through the integration of the SIMATIC S7-300 by means of ST1-compatible communication.

In all configurations listed, the TIM 4R/4RD is ideal if none of the integrated modem types is suitable for either of the two WAN ports. This is the case: • In the event of connection to the GSM network, to radio modems or a fiber-optic cable. • if an MD3 modem is to be used as a dedicated-line modem (the integrated MD3 modem on a TIM 43 can only be configured for dial-up operation). • if a number of MD2 or MD3 dedicated-line modems is to be connected in parallel via the RS485 interface to the TIM in the controller in order to create a more extensive star network. • if an MD4 modem is to be used for connection to a ISDN dedicated line (the integrated MD4 modem on a TIM 44 can only be configured for dial-up operation). With a dedicated processor, the TIM relieves the load on the S7 CPU or control center PC by taking over WAN communication tasks. It manages process data communication completely independently, via both WAN ports simultaneously, with the configured partners functioning as a "master", "station" and/or "node station". In order to reduce connection costs for the dial-up network, in "station" or "node station" mode, the TIM can process the data to be transferred according to priority (high or normal): If higherpriority data is pending for transmission, a dial-up connection is established immediately. At normal priority, data is initially saved in the TIM. The data is transmitted the next time a connection is established with the partner for any reason (for example, if higher-priority information is to be transferred, or if a connection is established by the partner in order to exchange data). When in "station" or "node station" mode, the TIM is able to store process data that must not be lost in the event of a communication fault or if one of the partners fails, along with its time stamp, until the partner returns to online mode. Important events, alarms, etc. are therefore not lost and the integrity of information in control center system archives is assured.


7/63

7

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Design The TIM 4R/4RD offers all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact construction; double standard width of SIMATIC S7-300 SM modules. • 9-pin Sub-D connector with a combined RS 232/RS 485 interface for the connection of an external modem or other data transmission device. • RJ45 socket as additional combined RS 232/RS 485 interface. The RJ45/Sub-D interface adapter cable supplied provides another 9-pin Sub-D connector for connecting an external modem or other data transmission device. • MPI interface (9-pin Sub-D socket) for connecting the TIM as a standalone device to one or more S7 CPUs or control center PCs. • 4-pole terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • LEDs on the front panel with SF, TXD, RXD, and MPI/K indicators and, on the TIM 4RD, DCF77 indicator (the TIM-BUS LED is unassigned on the TIM 4R/4RD). • The DCF77 adapter cable supplied with the TIM 4RD features a BNC connector for connecting the antenna cable. • Easy to mount; the TIM 4R/4RD is mounted on an S7-300 DIN rail; if integrated into an S7-300 as a CP, it is connected to adjacent modules by means of the bus connectors. As a standalone device it is connected to one or more S7 CPUs or to one or more control center PCs via its MPI interface. • Can be operated without fans; a backup battery or memory module is not required.

■ Function

7

The TIM 4R/4RD can operate in "station", "node station" and "master" mode. One of the modes can be assigned to each of the two WAN interfaces. The two modes can be the same or different. The driver can be set to "dedicated line" or "dial-up network" for each of the two WAN interfaces. The same driver can be selected for both interfaces or different drivers can be assigned. The TIM manages data traffic via the two connected WANs independently. For this purpose, the module has its own processor and a RAM memory to buffer up to 10,000 data telegrams in order to reduce connection costs in the dial-up network in the event that the communication link is faulty or a partner fails. The TIM firmware is stored in a Flash EPROM. The functionality required in each case and, on dial-up networks, the telephone numbers for the partners, are defined during configuration and stored in SDB format in the non-volatile Flash EPROM. If the SINAUT device connected locally is an S7 CPU, the SINAUT program in the CPU, configured with blocks from the SINAUT TD7 library, acquires the process data to be transmitted. The CPU checks the data for changes and transmits it along with the parameterized target address to the TIM, from where it is forwarded for transmission via the WAN. Alternatively, the CPU can transfer the data with a time stamp and assign a "normal" or "high" priority ID for transmission via a dial-up network. If the local SINAUT device is a control center PC (SINAUT ST7cc/ST7sc), operator inputs from the PC program are acquired, converted into SINAUT data telegrams in accordance with the ST7cc/ST7sc configuration and forwarded to the TIM with the configured target address.

7/64


The TIM stores the data to be transferred in its RAM buffer. The manner in which the TIM subsequently sends this data is determined by the type of WAN and the TIM function selected: • Dedicated line, radio network In "station" or "node station" mode, the TIM waits to be polled by the master. The stored data telegrams are then transferred. If no telegrams are available, the poll is simply acknowledged. In "master" mode, after each poll + reply has been completed, the TIM sends one of the messages stored in its buffer (default setting). If a larger number of telegrams is to be exchanged between two polls, this can be defined when configuring the TIM. • Dial-up network For data with "normal" priority, the TIM is not active initially in "station" and "node station" mode. However, for data with "high" priority, the TIM will immediately attempt to establish a connection with the partner addressed in order to start data transmission. If the TIM buffer contains data with "normal" priority at this point, it is also transferred. Transmission is always in accordance with the FIFO principle, i.e. regardless of priority. In "controller" mode, regardless of priority, the TIM will always immediately attempt to establish a connection with the addressed partner in order to transfer data. Telegrams received without faults by the TIM via the WAN are forwarded to the local CPU or PC. A block integrated in the CPU responsible for evaluating the telegrams concerned outputs the information received to the outputs or data areas configured on the block. On the PC, the ST7cc/ST7sc software performs this task in accordance with the ST7cc/ST7sc configuration. Either the SINAUT ST7 or the SINAUT ST1 protocol can be used for data traffic. The operating mode used depends on the type of WAN: • Data exchange via dedicated lines and radio networks usually takes place in "polling" mode. If there are two or more masters, the "multi-master polling with time-slot procedure" mode is used (not possible with SINAUT ST1). On a radio network, the "polling with time-slot procedure" mode can be selected if necessary. In both operating modes with time-slot procedure, the TIM 4R can only be used in "station" or "node station" mode. "Master" mode is possible on the TIM 4RD, as this module features the DCF77 radio clock receiver required. • On dial-up networks, data exchange always takes place in "spontaneous" mode. PG/OP communication PG/OP communication allows all S7 terminals connected to the LAN to be remotely programmed. • S7 routing With S7 routing it is possible to use programming device communication across networks. The SINAUT ST7 protocol supports PG/OP communication "tunneling". This enables the SINAUT stations connected to the WAN (CPUs and TIMs) to be programmed and diagnosed remotely.

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Function (continued) Diagnostics

Configuring

The SINAUT ST7 diagnostics and service tool provides extensive diagnostics functions, including: • TIM operating status • TIM module status • General diagnostics information • TIM diagnostics buffer • Status of connections with local and remote communication partners (CPUs, TIMs, ST7cc, ST7sc) • TIM telegram monitor for logging telegram traffic

The "SINAUT ST7 configuring software for PG" is required for configuring the TIM. The blocks in the "SINAUT TD7 block library" should be used to configure the SINAUT program required in the CPU. Both software packages are part of the SINAUT ST7 software package. The SDBs generated for the TIM during configuration are uploaded to the TIM module either from the SIMATIC Manager or using the "Upload SDBs" function in the SINAUT ST7 diagnostics & service tool. The SDBs are uploaded: • via the MPI interface on the TIM 4 if it has been set up as a standalone device • on a TIM 4 connected to an S7-300 as a CP via the MPI interface on the CPU.

■ Technical specifications Data transmission rate Interfaces • 1st connection to external data transmission device • 2nd connection to external data transmission device

50 to 38400 bit/s


9-pin Sub-D connector, RS 232 can be switched to RS 485 RJ45, RS 232 can be switched to RS 484 (the interface adapter cable supplied provides an additional 9-pin Sub-D connector) 9-pin Sub-D socket BNC socket (via DCF77 adapter cable supplied) 4-pin terminal block

Power supply

24 V DC

• MPI bus • DCF77 antenna (TIM 4RD)

Current consumption • from backplane bus

Local communication in the rack of an S7-300 • Via backplane bus with local S7-300 CPU • Via backplane bus with further local TIMs

Yes




• from 24 V DC



Power loss

12.3 W

Available protocols


0 °C … +60 °C -40 °C … +70 °C max. 95 % at +25 °C





IP20


• SINAUT ST1 protocol Operating mode for dial-up network • SINAUT ST7 protocol • SINAUT ST1 protocol

• Station

Yes

• Node station

Yes

Asynchronous character format • SINAUT ST7 protocol, polling or spontaneous • SINAUT ST7 protocol, multi-master polling • SINAUT ST1 protocol, polling • SINAUT ST1 protocol, spontaneous

• Master

Yes

Hamming distance d

Number of TIM 4Rs per S7 CPU






Yes, through TD7onCPU (for S7-300 and S7-400) and S7 communication (for ST7cc/ST7sc) Minimum 20 KB, actual requirement determined by data volume and functional scope SINAUT ST7 SINAUT ST1

Polling Polling with time-slot procedure Multi-master polling with time-slot procedure Polling Polling with time-slot procedure spontaneous spontaneous 10 or 11 bit 10 bit 11 bit 10 or 11 bit 4

1) TD7onCPU can be used over the backplane bus with the following CPU types: All versions of CPUs 313C, 314 and 314C, CPUs 315-2 DP and 315F-2 DP, as well as all versions of the C7 units C7-633, C7-635 and C7-636. 2) The MPI port of the local CPU can be used with the following CPU types: All versions of CPUs 312, 312C, 313C, 314 and 314C as well as CPU 315-2 DP and CPU 315F-2 DP Siemens IK PI · 2007

7/65

7

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Ordering data

Order No.

TIM 4R communications module for connecting 2 external data transmission devices via RS 232/485; incl. interface adapter cable 6NH7 700-0AS05 for the second serial RS 232/485 interface for converting the internal connector (RJ45) to the 9-pin Sub-D connector required externally; with MPI interface

6NH7 800-4AA90

TIM 4RD communications module Same as TIM 4R, but with the addition of the DCF77 radio clock receiver incl. DCF77 adapter cable 6NH7 700-0AD15 for converting the internal connector to the external BNC connector required

6NH7 800-4AD90

SINAUT ST7 software package On CD-ROM, comprising: • SINAUT ST7 configuring and diagnostics software V3.4 for the PG • SINAUT TD7 block library V2.1.4 for the CPU • SINAUT ST7 software V4.3 for TIM • Electronic manual in German and English

6NH7 997-0CA15-0AA0


7

• German

6NH7 998-0AA13

• English

6NH7 998-0AA23

7/66


Order No. Accessories Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 (RS 232) with a SINAUT ST7 MD2, MD3 or MD4 (RS 232) modem; cable length 1.5 m

6NH7 701-4AL

Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 4 (RS 485) with a SINAUT ST7 MD2, MD3 or MD4 (RS 485) modem. The connecting cable is also suitable for connecting the TIM to an RSM optical fiber module. Cable length 1.5 m

6NH7 701-4DL

Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 (RS 232) with the GSM kit M20, TC35 or MC45 (access to GSM network). Also suitable for thirdparty modems or radio equipment with RS 232 standard; cable length 2.5 m.

6NH7 701-5AN

Connecting cable With one end open for connecting a TIM3V/TIM4 with a third-party modem or radio unit (RS 232); cable length 2.5 m

6NH7 701-4BN


6NH7 701-0AR

Interface adapter cable (spare part)

6NH7 700-0AS05


6NH7 700-0AD15


6NH9 831-0AA


6NH9 831-0BA


6NH9 831-0DA


6NH9 831-2AA


6NH9 831-8AA


6NH9 831-8LA

SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems

General information

■ Overview

■ Application Although the modems were developed as components of the SINAUT ST7 system, they can be used independently of this system as standard dedicated-line or dial-up modems. Due to their design and electrical characteristics, the modems are particularly suitable for use in industrial applications.

■ Design

SINAUT MD3 modem

The SINAUT ST7 system provides three modems, which, like the TIM module, are housed in an S7-300 enclosure. • MD2; dedicated-line modem for multi-point connection, can be tapped, can also be used as a repeater, max. 19,200 bit/s • MD3; modem for the analog telephone network, max. 33,600 bit/s; can also be used as a dedicated-line modem for a point-to-point connection, max. 33,600 bit/s in voice band • MD4; modem for the digital ISDN network, max. 64,000 bit/s; also suitable for an ISDN dedicated line;

All three modem types are identical in design and offer all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact construction; double standard width of SIMATIC S7-300 SM modules • RJ12 socket for connecting the modem to the WAN (dedicated line or dial-up network) • 9-pin Sub-D connector with RS 232 interface for connection to the serial interface on the TIM • 9-pin Sub-D socket with RS 485 interface for connection to the serial interface on the TIM • 4-pole terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • LEDs on the front panel with TXD, RXD, DTR, RTS/ONL, CTS/RI, and DCD indicators • Easy to mount on an S7-300 DIN rail or a 35 mm standard mounting rail • SINAUT ST7 modems can be operated without fans

RS232 interface (9-pin, male)

These modems can be connected to the serial modem interface of a TIM module with appropriate components (TIM 3V-IE and all TIM 4 modules).

7

RS485 interface (9-pin, female)

■ Benefits

• SIMATIC S7-300 design • Can be mounted on an S7-300 DIN rail or on a 35 mm standard mounting rail (via the 6NH7760-0AA adapter, to be ordered separately) • 24 V DC power supply connection • RS232 and RS485 interface • Electrical isolation between power supply and RS232/RS485 interface

24 V

RJ12 Western connector: WAN access point

G_IK10_XX_30050

The modems are supplied together with the WAN connecting cable required in each case. Connecting cables for connecting the modems to a TIM must be ordered separately.

Available connections on a SINAUT ST7 modem (schematic diagram with covers removed)


7/67

SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems

General information

■ Design (continued) Configuration examples An external MD modem is connected to a TIM via a type 7701 standard connecting cable. The modem is mounted on a separate S7-300 DIN rail or a 35 mm standard mounting rail (a suitable adapter is available).

If two WAN accesses are required on an S7-400 with TIM 4, another external MDx modem can be connected. The TIM and modem are mounted together on a separate S7-300 DIN rail. The TIM is connected to the CPU via its MPI interface. The TIM is connected to the external MDx modem via a type 7701 standard connecting cable.

Connecting cable 7701


S7-400

S7-300

WAN (1)

WAN (2)

In the following configuration, the modem is housed on the outside on the right in the rack. The TIM is connected with the adjacent module on the left by means of a bus connector. There is no bus connector between the TIM and modem. Therefore S7 modules cannot be used to the right of the modem.

MPI

WAN WAN (2) (1)

The next configuration shows how a star-type dedicated-line network is linked to a TIM operating as a master, e.g. a TIM 4 on a control center PC (SINAUT ST7cc or ST7sc). Every cable of the star network is connected to a modem in the master. All these modems are connected to the RS 232/RS 485 interface on the TIM 4 via their RS 485 interface.



7

TIM 4

G_IK10_XX_30053

MDx

MDx

G_IK10_XX_30051

TIM 4

SINAUT ST7cc/ST7sc

S7-300


MDx

WAN (2) Star network

MDx

TIM 4

WAN (1)

MPI

G_IK10_XX_30054

WAN WAN (1) (2)

7/68

MDx

MDx

G_IK10_XX_30052

TIM 4

SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems

MD2 dedicated-line modem

■ Overview

■ Application Although the MD2 modem was developed as a component of the SINAUT ST7 system, it can be used independently of this system as a standard dedicated-line modem. Due to its design and electrical characteristics, the MD2 is particularly suitable for use in industrial applications. Distances of up to 33 km (at 1200 bit/s), up to 27 km (at 2400 bit/s) and up to 11 km (at 9600 and 19,200 bit/s) can be covered by the MD2 without amplifiers/repeaters (guide values for non-coil-loaded message line type 2 x 2 x 0.8 J-Y(St)Y). The distances indicated can be multiplied by connecting two MD2 modems to one repeater. The MD2 modem supports the setting up of "point-to-point", "star" or "line" network topologies as well as combinations of these basic structures. If the modem is used in the master, a small star network comprising two 2-wire cables can be connected to the modem output. The star network can be extended by a multiple of 2 x 2-wire by connecting a number of MD2 modems (max. 32) via the RS485 interface.

• Frequency-modulated (FSK) dedicated-line modem • Half-duplex data transmission on 2-wire dedicated lines, duplex data transmission on 4-wire dedicated lines • As the modem supports tapping, lines with a number of stations connected to them can also be set up. The MD2 can also be used as a repeater on 2-wire and 4-wire dedicated lines. • Private or telecommunications leased lines can be used as dedicated lines. The MD2 is also suitable for connection to a radio unit with modem input.

■ Benefits

• SIMATIC S7-300 design • Can be mounted on an S7-300 DIN rail or on a 35 mm standard mounting rail (via the 6NH7760-0AA adapter, to be ordered separately) • 24 V DC power supply connection • RS232 and RS485 interface • Electrical isolation between power supply and RS232/RS485 interface • 4 different transmission rates can be selected • Supports tapping • Integrated transformer for the connection of two 2-wire lines • Built-in repeater function for range multiplication • Suitable for connection to a radio unit with modem input

The modem output can be switched with high resistance in order to tap a terminal along a line. This minimizes gap loss and only slightly reduces the maximum distance which can be bridged. The very short transmitter running times speed up data traffic with the "polling" operating mode used in the dedicated line network. In addition to private dedicated lines, the MD2 can also be connected to leased telephone lines. Appropriate approval has been secured. On analog-only leased lines, transmission rates of 1200 and 2400 bit/s are possible. On switched analog/digital leased lines, the speed is usually restricted to 1200 bit/s for technical reasons. The MD2 is also ideal for data transmission via walkie-talkies with modem input. The MD2 modem features a built-in floating opto-relay linked to the RTS signal of the RS232 interface for switching the radio unit on and off via its PTT input. The two opto-relay connections are available on the RJ12 socket. As walkie-talkies are usually only able to transmit voice in a sound frequency range of between 300 Hz and 3000 Hz, transmission rate with the MD2 modem is restricted here to 1200 bit/s. For 2400 bit/s, the sound frequency range has to reach beyond 3300 Hz.


7/69

7

SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems


■ Design The MD2 modem offers all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact construction; double standard width of SIMATIC S7-300 SM modules. • RJ12 socket for connecting the modem to the dedicated line. • 9-pin Sub-D connector with RS232 interface for connecting the modem to the RS232/RS485 interface on the TIM. • 9-pin Sub-D socket with RS485 interface for connecting the modem to the RS232/RS485 interface on the TIM.

• 4-pole terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • LEDs on the front panel with TXD, RXD, DTR, RTS/ONL, CTS/RI, und DCD indicators. • Easy to mount; the modem is mounted on an S7-300 DIN rail. Alternatively, it can be mounted on a 35 mm standard mounting rail. • The modem can be operated without fans.

■ Integration The various ways in which the MD2 modem can be connected to a TIM or other MD2 modems, as well as to the dedicated line (via an LTOP overvoltage protection module), are illustrated below. Connection of an MD2 to a TIM via the RS 232 interface One MD2 modem can be connected to a TIM via the RS 232 interface. This technique can be used to set up "point-to-point" and "line" network configurations as well as a small star network with only two 2-wire lines (see schematic configurations below). Point-to-point

Line

Star, line, point-to-point Master

Station

2- or 4-wire terminal station

7

2 x 2-wire terminal station 2-wire terminal station 2-wire tandem station

Possible network configurations for connection of an MD2 to a TIM via RS 232

7/70


G_IK10_XX_30083

2- or 4-wire tandem station

SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems


■ Integration (continued) The interconnections between the components at the various terminals and tapping points (the 6NH7700-2AR60 connecting cable is part of the scope of supply of the MD2) are illustrated below. 2-wire terminal station

4-wire terminal station

TIM

Connecting cable 6NH7701-4AL

RS232

MD2

RS232

Connecting cable 6NH7700-2AR60

Overvoltage protection LTOP1 6NH9821-0BC11

2-wire dedicated line

TIM

RS232

MD2

RS232


7



G_IK10_XX_30084


Connection of an MD2 to a TIM via RS 232, 2-wire and 4-wire terminal


7/71

SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems


■ Integration (continued) 2 x 2-wire terminal station

2-wire tandem station


RS232

MD2

RS232

TIM 3V TIM 4


7


RS232


2-wire dedicated line (second route)

Connection of an MD2 to a TIM via RS 232, 2 x 2-wire terminal and 2-wire tapping point

7/72

MD2



2-wire dedicated line (first route)

RS232


G_IK10_XX_30085

TIM 3V TIM 4


SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems


■ Integration (continued) Connection of a number of MD2 modems to a TIM via the RS 485 interface


A number of MD2 modems can be connected to a TIM via the RS 485 interface. This type of interconnection is used if a number of dedicated lines have to be combined on a single WAN port on the TIM, i.e. if a star topology is connected, as illustrated schematically below.


Star, line, point-to-point

Master

Station

RS232

MD4

RS232

Neutral point Bundling of several 2 or 4-wire terminal stations 2 or 4-wire terminal station 2 or 4-wire tandem station

G_IK10_XX_30087

TIM

A possible neutral point connection using standard components is illustrated on page 7/74 (the 6NH7700-2AR60 connecting cable is part of the scope of supply of the MD2). Each MD2 in the neutral point connection can be configured individually as a 2-wire, 4-wire or 2 x 2-wire terminal. (For configuring the terminals and tapping points in the stations, please see above.)


7


G_IK10_XX_30086


Connection of an MD2 to a TIM via RS 232, 4-wire tapping point


7/73

SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems



TIM

RS485

MD2

MD2

RS485

MD2

RS485

RS485

Connecting cable 6NH7701-4DL





2-wire dedicated line (first route)

7


Connection of a number of MD2 modems with one TIM via RS 485, star-type connection of a number of dedicated lines

6NH7701-4DL standard connecting cable is used to connect the TIM to the first MD2. A prefabricated connecting cable is not available for the connection of the other modems. However, standard components from the SIMATIC S7 range can be used for this purpose. The same parts used to create an MPI connection can be used. The 6XV1830-0AH10 cable and 6ES7972-0BA12-0XA0 connector are recommended.

7/74


2-wire dedicated line (second route)

G_IK10_XX_30088

Overvoltage protection LTOP1 6NH9821-0BC11 or LTOP2 6NH9821-0BC12

SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems


■ Integration (continued) In most cases, an additional ST7 station with a TIM and built-in or external MD2 modem is used at the point where a repeater is used. A TIM32 or TIM42 or TIM 3V-IE with MD2 can be connected to the 2-wire or 4-wire line at this repeater point. (The 6NH7700-2AR60 connecting cable is part of the scope of supply of the MD2.)

Interconnection of two MD2 modems to one repeater If the distance to be covered is too large, two MD2 modems can be connected to one repeater (2-wire or 4-wire repeater). The repeater performs signal amplification and regenerates the individual characters.

Repeater set up using 2 x MD2

Connecting cable 6NH7701-1CB

TIM 32 TIM 42


MD2


MD2

RS232

7





2-wire dedicated line 2-wire terminal station

G_IK10_XX_30089



RS232

Two MD2 modems as 2-wire repeater with simultaneous 2-wire tapping on a TIM (e.g. TIM32)

In order to set up a 4-wire repeater configuration, simply replace the two LTOP1 modules with LTOP2 modules in the configuration with the 2-wire repeater.


7/75

SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems


■ Integration (continued) Calculating the maximum range (in km) based on transmission rate and wire diameter The table below can be used to calculate approximate values for the maximum distance in km which can be covered by the MD2 modem, depending on transmission rate and wire diameter.

A level reserve of 4 dB was applied when calculating the maximum ranges. This should ensure that even in the event of deviations in cable characteristics, which experience has shown to be possible during operation, the level will always be sufficient to ensure fault-free data transmission.

The values in the table are guide values for non-coil-loaded message lines type 2 x 2 x A J-Y(St)Y (A = core diameter in mm). Transmission rate (bit/s)

Maximum range (km) Transmission level –6 dB 1)

Transmission level 0 dB 1)

with LTOP

without LTOP

with LTOP

without LTOP

Outside diameter 0.6 mm 1 200

21.4 – AST x 0.8

22 – AST x 0.3

25.4 – AST x 0.8

26 – AST x 0.3

2 400

17.4 – AST x 0.6

17.8 – AST x 0.2

20.6 – AST x 0.6

21 – AST x 0.2

9 600 / 19 200

6.7 – AST x 1.0

7.6 – AST x 0.1

8.1 – AST x 1.0

9 – AST x 0.1

1 200

28 – AST x 1.1

28.7 – AST x 0.4

33.2 – AST x 1.1

33.9 – AST x 0.4

2 400

23 – AST x 0.8

23.5 – AST x 0.2

27.2 – AST x 0.8

27.8 – AST x 0.2

9 600 / 19 200

9.0 – AST x 1.4

10.3 – AST x 0.1

10.9 – AST x 1.4

12.1 – AST x 0.1

1 200

35.7 – AST x 1.4

36.6 – AST x 0.5

42.4 – AST x 1.4

43.3 – AST x 0.5

2 400

29.2 – AST x 1.0

30 – AST x 0.2

34.7 – AST x 1.0

35.4 – AST x 0.2

9 600 / 19 200

11.1 – AST x 1.7

12.6 – AST x 0.1

13.4 – AST x 1.7

15 – AST x 0.1

1 200

49.5 – AST x 1.9

50.7 – AST x 0.7

58.7 – AST x 1.9

60 – AST x 0.7

2 400

42.9 – AST x 1.4

44 – AST x 0.3

50.9 – AST x 1.4

52 – AST x 0.3

9 600 / 19 200

16.1 – AST x 2.4

18.3 – AST x 0.2

19.4 – AST x 2.4

21.6 – AST x 0.2

1 200

58.5– AST x 2.2

60 – AST x 0.8

69.4 – AST x 2.2

70.9 – AST x 0.8

2 400

53.6 – AST x 1.7

55 – AST x 0.4

63.6 – AST x 1.7

65 – AST x 0.4

9 600 / 19 200

19.3 – AST x 2.9

22 – AST x 0.2

23.3 – AST x 2.9

26 – AST x 0.2

Outside diameter 0.8 mm



7


AST = number of tapping points 1) Not possible on leased telephone lines. Set transmission level to -9 dB.

7/76


SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems


■ Technical specifications Interfaces • Connection to dedicated line

RJ12

• RS232 connection to data terminal equipment



9-pin Sub-D socket

• Connection to supply voltage Power supply

4-pin terminal block 24 V DC


100 mA

Power loss

2.4 W


0 °C ... +60 °C



Receiving level

0 to -43 dB


600 ohms

• for 9600 and 19200 bit/s

150 ohms


> 6 kOhms


after 7 ms

• at 2400 bit/s

after 4 ms

• at 9600 and 19200 bit/s

after 0.5 ms


-40 °C ... +70 °C

Minimum/maximum scanning frequency


max. 95 % at +25 °C

• at 1200 bit/s

1300 Hz/2100 Hz

• at 2400 bit/s

2400 Hz/3300 Hz

• at 9600 and 19200 bit/s

20800 Hz/33600 Hz


10 or 11 bit




80 x 125 x 120

• Weight

approx. 300 g


IP20

Transmission path

2-wire, 2 x 2-wire or 4-wire, twisted pair cable, non-coilloaded or lightly coil-loaded

Modulation method


Transmission rates

1200 bit/s 2400 bit/s 9600 bit/s (not for leased telephone lines) 19200 bit/s (not for leased telephone lines)

Operating mode

Floating opto-relay output • max. supply voltage

60 V AC/DC

• max. perm. continuous current

400 mA

• max. Ron

3 ohms

Impulse strength U1.2/50 acc. to DIN VDE 0804 between power supply circuit and • Power supply circuit and FSK trunk line circuits

2.5 kV

• Power supply circuit and opto-relay output

2.5 kV

7

Compatible with SINAUT modems • MD100

at 1200 bit/s

• 2-wire or 2 x 2-wire

Half-duplex

• MD124

at 1200, 2400 and 19200 bit/s

• 4-wire


Certification


■ Ordering data MD2 dedicated-line modem For multi-point connection, supports tapping, can also be used as a repeater, max. 19,200 bit/s; incl. WAN connecting cable 6NH7700-2AR60 (RJ12/RJ12) for connecting the modem with an LTOP overvoltage protection module


MD2 Modem Instruction Manual Paper version • German

6NH7 811-0AA21

• English

6NH7 811-0AA22

Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 with a SINAUT ST7 MD2, MD3 or MD4 modem Cable length 1.5 m • RS 232

6NH7 701-4AL

• RS 485

6NH7 701-4DL

Order No. Accessories Connecting cable For connecting two MD2 modems (RS 232) in order to create a repeater; cable length 0.3 m

6NH7 701-1CB


6NH7 700-2AR60

Line transformer with overvoltage protection • LTOP1 for 2-wire terminal • LTOP2 for 4-wire terminal, 2 x 2-wire terminal or 2-wire tapping point Adapter For mounting the MD2 modem on a 35 mm standard mounting rail

6NH9 821-0BC11 6NH9 821-0BC12

6NH7 760-0AA


7/77

SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems

MD3 telephone modem

■ Overview

■ Application Although the MD3 modem was developed as a component of the SINAUT ST7 system, it can be used independently of this system as a standard telephone or dedicated-line modem. Due to its design and electrical characteristics, the MD3 is particularly suitable for use in industrial applications. Telephone modem When used as a telephone modem, it can be used to establish connections with other MD3 modems or compatible devices, e.g. with MD125 or MDM2425B DX modems, which were used on the SINAUT ST1 system. Dedicated-line modem In addition to private dedicated lines, the MD3 can also be connected to leased telephone lines. Appropriate approval has been secured. Both on purely analog leased lines and on analog/digital switched leased lines, there are no restrictions in terms of possible transmission rates.

• Dial-up modem for data transmission via the analog telephone network • It can also be used as a dedicated-line modem. On 2-wire dedicated lines duplex data transmission is therefore possible in the voice band. • Private or telecommunications leased lines can be used as dedicated lines.

■ Benefits

7

• SIMATIC S7-300 design • Can be mounted on an S7-300 DIN rail or on a 35 mm standard mounting rail (via the 6NH7760-0AA adapter, to be ordered separately) • 24 V DC power supply connection • RS232 and RS485 interface • Electrical isolation between power supply and RS232/RS485 interface • Transmission rate on telephone network and dedicated line max. 33,600 bit/s

7/78


When used as a dedicated-line modem on private lines, the MD3 can cover distances of up to 34 km (at 300 bit/s), up to 28 km (at 1200 to 19200 bit/s) and up to 19 km (at 33600 bit/s) without amplifiers/repeaters (guide values for non-coil-loaded message line type 2 x 2 x 0.8 J-Y(St)Y). There are no restrictions in terms of distance when the MD3 is connected to leased telephone lines. Depending on the quality of the leased line used, the dedicated-line provider will guarantee sufficient receiving levels on both terminal points. Line qualities M1020 and M1025 are recommended. When used as a dedicated-line modem, the MD3 supports the setting up of "point-to-point" or "star" network topologies. If the modem is used in the controller, up to 32 point-to-point connections can be added to the star network by integrating a number of MD3s via the RS485 interface.

■ Design The MD3 modem offers all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact construction; double standard width of SIMATIC S7-300 SM modules. • RJ12 socket for connecting the modem to the telephone outlet or dedicated line via the 6NH7700-3BR60 connecting cable supplied. • 9-pin Sub-D connector with RS232 interface for connecting the modem to the RS232/RS485 interface on the TIM. • 9-pin Sub-D socket with RS485 interface for connecting the modem to the RS232/RS485 interface on the TIM. • 4-pole terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • LEDs on the front panel with TXD, RXD, DTR, RTS/ONL, CTS/RI, und DCD indicators. • Easy to mount; the modem is mounted on an S7-300 DIN rail. Alternatively, it can be mounted on a 35 mm standard mounting rail. • The modem can be operated without fans.

SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems

MD3 telephone modem

■ Integration The diagrams below illustrate how the MD3 modem and the TIM module can be connected to the telephone outlet and which configurations are possible when the modem is used as a dedicated-line modem.

Telephone modem: Connection of the MD3 with a TIM and TAE6 telephone outlet The diagram below illustrates how the MD3 modem, when operating in dial-up mode and using the standard connecting cable specified (the 6NH7700-3BR60 connecting cable is part of the scope of supply of the MD3), is connected to a TIM (via RS 232) as well as to the telephone outlet (TAE6N socket). A telephone can be connected to the same telephone outlet in parallel with the modem (via the TAE6F socket).


TAE6F TIM

RS232

RS232

MD3

TAE6N

Connecting cable 6NH7700-3BR60

RJ12

RJ12

Telephone socket

G_IK10_XX_30080

7

Connection of an MD3 with a TIM and TAE6 telephone socket


7/79

SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems

MD3 telephone modem

■ Integration (continued) Dedicated-line modem: Connection of an MD3 to a TIM via the RS 232 interface

Dedicated-line modem: Connection of a number of MD3 modems to a TIM via the RS 485 interface

One MD3 modem can be connected to a TIM via the RS 232 interface. This technique can be used to set up a "point-to-point" network configuration.

A number of MD3 modems can be connected to a TIM via the RS 485 interface. This type of interconnection is used if a number of dedicated lines have to be combined on a single WAN port on the TIM, i.e. if a star topology is connected, as illustrated schematically below.

Point-to-point Master

Star

Terminal station

Neutral point Bundling of several 2-wire terminal stations

The diagram below shows how the components are interconnected at the two 2-wire terminals (the 6NH7700-3BR60 connecting cable is part of the scope of supply of the MD3).



7

RS232 TIM

RS232 MD3


Connection of an MD3 to a TIM via RS 232, 2-wire terminal

7/80


G_IK10_XX_30081



Station

G_IK10_XX_30078

Station

G_IK10_XX_30076

Master

SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems

MD3 telephone modem

■ Integration (continued) A possible neutral point connection using standard components is illustrated below (the 6NH7700-3BR60 connecting cable is part of the scope of supply of the MD3). Each MD3 in the neutral point connection is configured as a 2-wire terminal. (For configuring the 2-wire terminals in the stations, please see above).

TIM

RS485

MD3

MD3

RS485

MD3

RS485

RS485







7


G_IK10_XX_30082


Connection of a number of MD3 modems with one TIM via RS 485, star-type connection of a number of dedicated lines

Standard connecting cable 6NH7701-4DL is used to connect the TIM to the first MD3. A prefabricated connecting cable is not available for the connection of the other modems. However, standard components from the SIMATIC S7 range can be used for this purpose. The same parts used to create an MPI connection can be used. The 6XV1830-0AH10 cable and 6ES7972-0BA12-0XA0 connector are recommended.


7/81

SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems

MD3 telephone modem

■ Integration (continued) Dedicated-line modem: Maximum range (in km) of the MD3 modem The table below can be used to calculate approximate values for the maximum distance in km which can be covered by the MD3 modem, depending on transmission rate. The values in the table are guide values for non-coil-loaded message lines type 2 x 2 x 0.8 J-Y(St)Y. Transmission rate (bit/s)

A level reserve of 4 dB was applied when calculating the maximum ranges. This should ensure that even in the event of deviations in cable characteristics, which experience has shown to be possible during operation, the level will always be sufficient to ensure fault-free data transmission..

Maximum range (km) Transmission level –15 dB

Transmission level –10 dB

with LTOP

without LTOP

with LTOP

without LTOP

300

29

30

34

35

1200 to 19200

23

24

28

29

33600

14

15

19

20

With terminating resistor Z = Zr

■ Technical specifications Interfaces • Connection to telephone network or dedicated line

RJ12




9-pin Sub-D socket



Power supply

24 V DC

Current consumption

7

• from 24 V DC

200 mA

Power loss

4.8 W


0 °C ... +60 °C


-40 °C ... +70 °C


max. 95 % at +25 °C

Modem control

AT commands V.25bis commands


12 kHz 16 kHz

Dial-up procedure




Loudspeaker


Line matching



-10 dB -15 dB


10 or 11 bit

Standard dedicated-line profiles

300 bit/s (direct) 1200 bit/s (direct) 2400 bit/s (direct) 9600 bit/s (direct) 19200 bit/s (direct) 19200 bit/s (buffered) 33600 bit/s (buffered)




80 x 125 x 120

• Weight

approx. 300 g


IP20

Transmission path

Analog dial-up telephone network Dedicated line, 2-wire twisted pair cable, non-coil-loaded

Available ITU transmission standards in analog telephone network

Compatible with SINAUT modems (as telephone modem) • MD125 - V.22 - V.22 up to


• MDM2425B DX - V.22 up to

2400 bit/s, duplex 1200 bit/s, duplex 2400 bit/s, duplex 4800 bit/s, duplex 9600 bit/s, duplex 14400 bit/s, duplex

• V.22

1200 bit/s, duplex

• V.22 up to

2400 bit/s, duplex

• V.32 up to

4800 bit/s, duplex

• V.32 up to

9600 bit/s, duplex


• V.32 up to

14400 bit/s, duplex

Certification

• V.34 up to

19200 bit/s, duplex

Europe U.S.A. Canada

• V.34 up to

33600 bit/s, duplex

Error correction

V.42 and MNP4

Recommended line quality on leased telephone lines

M1020 M1025

Data compression

V.42bis and MNP5

7/82


SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems

MD3 telephone modem

■ Ordering data MD3 modem For the analog telephone network, max. 33600 bit/s; can also be used as a dedicated-line modem for a point-to-point connection, max. 33600 bit/s in voice band; incl. WAN 6NH7700-3BR60 connecting cable (RJ12 -RJ12/ TAE6) with snap-on TAE6N connector for connecting the modem to a telephone outlet (TAE6N or RJ12) or an LTOP overvoltage protection module (for dedicated-line operation)


Order No. Accessories Connecting cable For connecting a TIM3V/TIM4 with a SINAUT ST7 MD2, MD3 or MD4 modem Cable length 1.5 m • RS 232

6NH7 701-4AL

• RS 485 (not for TIM 3V-IE)

6NH7 701-4DL

RJ12/RJ12 connecting cable with snap-on TAE6N connector (spare part)

6NH7 700-3BR60

Line transformer with overvoltage protection (for dedicated line only)


6NH7 811-0AA31

• English

6NH7 811-0AA32


6NH9 821-0BC11

Adapter For mounting the MD3 modem on a 35 mm standard mounting rail

6NH7 760-0AA

7


7/83

SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems

MD4 ISDN modem

■ Overview

Deutsche Telekom ISDN dedicated-line products Designation

Available channels

Remark

LeasedLink SFV Digital 64S

1 x 64 Kbit/s B channel

Suitable for one MD4 dedicated-line connection

LeasedLink SFV Digital 64S2

2 x 64 Kbit/s B channels Suitable for two parallel MD4 dedicated-line connections

LeasedLink SFV Digital TS02

2 x 64 Kbit/s B channels Suitable for two parallel MD4 dedicated-line connections 1 x 16 Kbit/s D channel

• Dial-up modem for data transmission via the digital ISDN network • Can also be used as a modem for duplex point-to-point data transmission via an ISDN dedicated line

■ Benefits

7

• SIMATIC S7-300 design • Can be mounted on an S7-300 DIN rail or on a 35 mm standard mounting rail (via the 6NH7760-0AA adapter, to be ordered separately) • 24 V DC power supply connection • RS232 and RS485 interface • Electrical isolation between power supply and RS232/RS485 interface • Transmission speed on ISDN telephone network and ISDN dedicated line max. 64,000 bit/s

■ Application Although the MD4 modem was developed as a component of the SINAUT ST7 system, it can be used independently of this system as a standard ISDN modem. Due to its design and electrical characteristics, the MD4 is particularly suitable for use in industrial applications. ISDN modem When used as an ISDN dial-up modem, the MD4 can be used to establish connections with other MD4 modems or compatible devices, e.g. with LGM64K modems, which were used on the SINAUT ST1 system. Dedicated-line modem There are no restrictions in terms of distance when the MD4 is connected to an ISDN dedicated line. The dedicated-line provider must ensure that the receiving level is sufficient at both terminals. For example, Deutsche Telekom offers the following ISDN dedicated-line products, which are suitable for the MD4:

7/84


The D channel cannot be used for an MD4 dedicated-line connection.

When used as a dedicated-line modem, the MD4 modem supports the setting up of "point-to-point" or "star" network topologies. If the modem is used in the controller, up to 32 point-to-point connections can be added to the star network by integrating a number of MD4s via the RS485 interface.

■ Design The MD4 modem offers all the advantages of the SIMATIC S7-300 system design: • Compact construction; double standard width of SIMATIC S7-300 SM modules. • RJ12 socket for connecting the modem to the ISDN S0 outlet via the 6NH7700-4AR60 connecting cable supplied. • 9-pin Sub-D connector with RS232 interface for connecting the modem to the RS232/RS485 interface on the TIM. • 9-pin Sub-D socket with RS485 interface for connecting the modem to the RS232/RS485 interface on the TIM. • 4-pole terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • LEDs on the front panel with TXD, RXD, DTR, RTS/ONL, CTS/RI, und DCD indicators. • Easy to mount; the modem is mounted on an S7-300 DIN rail. Alternatively, it can be mounted on a 35 mm standard mounting rail. • The modem can be operated without fans.

SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems

MD4 ISDN modem

■ Integration The various ways in which the MD4 modem and TIM can be connected to the ISDN S0 socket and which configurations are possible when the modem is used on an ISDN dedicated line are illustrated below

ISDN dial-up modem: Connection of the MD4 with a TIM and ISDN S0 outlet The diagram below illustrates in summary format how the MD4 modem, when operating in dial-up mode and using the standard connecting cable specified (the 6NH7700-4AR60 connecting cable is part of the scope of supply of the MD4) is connected to a TIM (via RS 232) as well as to the ISDN S0 outlet. Additional modems, telephones, etc. can be connected via parallel switched S0 outlets or a telecommunications system.


TIM

RS232

RS232

MD4


RJ12

RJ45

ISDN socket (S0)

ISDN socket (S0)

G_IK10_XX_30075

7

Connection of the MD4 with a TIM and ISDN S0 outlet

ISDN dedicated line: Connection of an MD4 to a TIM via the RS 232 interface One MD4 modem can be connected to a TIM via the RS 232 interface. This technique can be used to set up a "point-to-point" dedicated-line configuration. Point-to-point

Station

Terminal station

G_IK10_XX_30076

Master

The diagram below shows how the components are interconnected to the two end terminals of the ISDN dedicated line (the 6NH7700-4AR60 connecting cable is part of the scope of supply of the MD4).


7/85

SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems

MD4 ISDN modem

■ Integration (continued) Connecting cable 6NH7701-4AL

RS232


RS232

MD4

RJ12

RJ45 G_IK10_XX_30077

TIM

ISDN socket(S0)

Connection of an MD4 to a TIM via RS 232 on ISDN dedicated line Note The S0 interface on the ISDN dedicated line cannot be used in parallel for dial-up operation. Only if the second B channel is enabled for dedicated line operation, an additional MD4 can be connected for dedicated-line operation.

ISDN dedicated line: Connection of a number of MD4 modems to a TIM via the RS 485 interface A number of MD4 modems can be connected to a TIM via the RS 485 interface. This type of interconnection is used if a number of dedicated ISDN lines have to be combined on a single WAN port on the TIM, i.e. if a star topology is connected, as illustrated schematically below. Star Master

Station

Neutral point Bundling of several terminal stations Terminal station

G_IK10_XX_30106a

7

A possible neutral point connection using standard components is illustrated below (the 6NH7700-4AR60 connecting cable is part of the scope of supply of the MD4). For configuring the dedicated-line terminals in the stations, please see above.

7/86


SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems

MD4 ISDN modem


TIM

RS485

MD4

MD4

RS485

MD4

RS485

RS485





ISDN socket (S0)

ISDN socket (S0)

G_IK10_XX_30079

7

ISDN socket (S0)

Connection of a number of MD4 modems via RS 485, star-type convergence of a number of ISDN dedicated lines in one WAN port of the TIM

Standard connecting cable 6NH7701-4DL is used to connect the TIM to the first MD4. A prefabricated connecting cable is not available for the connection of the other modems. However, standard components from the SIMATIC S7 range can be used for this purpose. The same parts used to create an MPI connection can be used. The 6XV1830-0AH10 cable and 6ES7972-0BA12-0XA0 connector are recommended.


7/87

SINAUT Telecontrol

Modems

MD4 ISDN modem


■ Ordering data

Interfaces • Connection to ISDN dial-up network or ISDN dedicated line

1 x RJ12


1 x 9-pin Sub-D connector


1 x 9-pin Sub-D socket



Power supply

24 V DC


100 mA

Power loss

2.4 W




6NH7811-0AA41

• English

6NH7 811-0AA42

Accessories


0 °C ... +60 °C


-40 °C ... +70 °C


max. 95 % at +25 °C

Connecting cable For connecting a TIM3 V-IE/TIM 4 with a SINAUT ST7 MD2, MD3 or MD4 modem Cable length 1.5 m


• RS 232

6NH7 701-4AL

• RS 485

6NH7 701-4DL


6NH7 700-4AR60

Adapter For mounting the MD4 modem on a 35 mm standard mounting rail

6NH7 760-0AA


7

MD4 modem For the digital ISDN network, max. 64000 bit/s; can also be used in conjunction with an ISDN dedicated line for a point-to-point connection, max. 64,000 bit/s; incl. WAN connecting cable 6NH7700-4AR60 (RJ12/RJ45) for connecting the modem to an ISDN S0 outlet


80 x 125 x 120

• Weight

approx. 300 g


IP20

Transmission path

Digital ISDN network ISDN dedicated line, e.g. Deutsche Telekom’s dedicated-line products LeasedLink SFV Digital 64S ISDN LeasedLink SFV Digital 64S2 LeasedLink SFV Digital TS02

Available standard transmission standards • V.110

1200 bit/s, duplex

• V.110

2400 bit/s, duplex

• V.110

9600 bit/s, duplex

• V.110

19200 bit/s, duplex

• X.75

1200 bit/s, duplex

• X.75

2400 bit/s, duplex

• X.75

19200 bit/s, duplex

• X.75

38400 bit/s, duplex

Modem control

AT commands V.25bis commands


10 or 11 bit

Certification

Europe

Compatible with SINAUT modems • LGM64K - V.110

7/88

9600 bit/s, duplex


SINAUT Telecontrol

Mobile radio components (GSM/GPRS) MC45 GSM kit

■ Overview

■ Application Data transmission via the GSM network is the alternative in the absence of other transmission media such as dedicated lines or telephone networks and wherever it would be too expensive to set up your own radio network. Of course, the GSM signal available on site must be of sufficient strength (either in the 900 MHz or 1800 MHz range). Data transmission between two partners can take place from mobile radio to mobile radio (GSM module to GSM module) or from mobile radio to a fixed network (telephone or ISDN connection; ISDN is recommended). As well as data, the MC45 module can also send text messages directly to standby service personnel. Receipt of SMS messages can be acknowledged using a mobile telephone. If an acknowledgement is not received, the text message can be sent to another mobile phone.

■ Design • The MC45 GSM kit is available for data transmission via the mobile telephone network (GSM). • Like an MD modem, this GSM kit can be connected to the serial modem interface of a TIM module with appropriate components (TIM 3V-IE and all TIM 4 modules).

■ Benefits

• All required GSM components in one kit • Data transmission via the GSM network, both 900 MHz and 1800 MHz • Sending of text messages to standby service personnel incl. acknowledgment • Text messages can also be transmittted as fax, Email or voice mail if these are supported by the provider • 24 V DC power supply

• Compact design (74 x 65 x 33 mm) • 9-pin Sub-D connector with RS232 interface for connecting the MC45 T to the RS232/RS485 interface on the TIM. • RJ12 socket for connecting the MC45 T to 24 V DC via the power supply cable supplied • FME antenna connection (male) • Mini SIM card holder The scope of supply also includes: • Magnetic foot antenna with 2.5 m antenna cable • Antenna extension cable (5 m) • FME connector for connecting the extension cable to the antenna • Power supply cable (1.5 m) • DIN rail bracket with 2 screws


7

7/89

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Integration Data transmission between two partners can take place from mobile radio to mobile radio (GSM module to GSM module) or from mobile radio to a fixed network (telephone or ISDN connection; ISDN is recommended). Mobile radio to mobile radio Master

Station

Master

TIM 3V TIM 4

Station

RS232

Connecting cable (2.5 m) 6NH7701-5AN

TIM 3V TIM 4

RS232 Connecting cable (2.5 m) 6NH7701-5AN

7

GSM-Kit MC45 6HN9840-3DB45 Antenna cable (5 m) GSM kit Û antenna, antenna and SV cable are included

MC45

24 V


Schematic diagram plus required hardware configuration for transmission from mobile radio to mobile radio

7/90


MC45

G_IK10_XX_30097

GSM network

24 V

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Integration (continued) Mobile radio to fixed network Master

Station

Master

Station TIM with integrated or external MD3 or MD4 modem

TIM

TIM 3V TIM 4

Connecting cable (2.5 m) 6NH7701-5AN

ISDNsocket (S0) *)

RJ45

ISDN-network

for TIM with MD4:

GSMProvider


Telephone network TAE6 RJ12

RS232

Telephone socket *)

7 GSM network

24 V


G_IK10_XX_30098

for TIM with MD3: Connecting cable 6NH7700-3BR60

MC45

*) overvoltage protection recommended e.g. by Phoenix or Dehn

Schematic diagram plus required hardware configuration for transmission from mobile radio to fixed network

Note: For fixed network connections, analog and ISDN connections should not be mixed (either analog or ISDN); ISDN is recommended for use with mobile radio.


7/91

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Integration (continued) Sending text messages

TIM

RS232

Connecting cable (2,5 m) 6NH7701-5AN

SMSexchange

Short Message Service (SMS) GSMmobile telephone

GSM-network

24 V

MC45

Antenna cable (5 m) GSM-kit Û antenna, antenna and SV are included

7

Schematic diagram plus required hardware configuration for sending text messages

In addition to data, text messages can be sent via the GSM network, e.g. to alert standby service personnel directly. SMS messages can also be transmitted as fax, e-mail or voice mail if supported by the SMS provieder. Text messages can also be sent from a fixed network connection, e.g. via an analog telephone connection with an MD3 modem or an ISDN connection with an MD4 modem. However, these messages cannot be acknowledged from a mobile phone. This is only possible for text messages sent via an MC45 (or the previous module TC35).

7/92


G_IK10_XX_30099

GSM-Kit MC45 6HN9840-3DB45

SINAUT Telecontrol



■ Ordering data

Transmission paths

GSM mobile telephone network, 900 MHz and 1800 MHz

Transmission rate

9600 bit/s

RS232 interface

9-pin Sub-D socket

Power supply

24 V DC (8 ... 30 V)

Power loss

2W

Current consumption • Voice mode

300 mA (average), 2.0 A (peak)

• Idle mode

10 mA


74 x 65 x 33

• Weight

approx. 130 g


10 bit

Transmit power • EGSM900

Class 4 (2 W)

• GSM1800

Class 1 (1 W)

PLC

Via AT commands

Antenna gain of GSM antenna

3 dB

Certification

Acc. to GSM phase 2/2+

MC45 GSM kit For connection to GSM mobile radio networks (900 and 1800 MHz), comprising an MC45 T GSM modem, power supply cable (1.5 m), magnetic foot antenna with 2.5 m antenna cable, antenna extension cable (5 m), FME connector and DIN rail adapter

Order No. 6NH9 840-3DB45

Accessories Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 3V/TIM 4 (RS232) with the M20, TC35 or MC45 GSM kit (access to the GSM network); also suitable for third-party modems or radio equipment with RS 232 standard; cable length 2.5 m

6NH7 701-5AN

7


7/93

SINAUT Telecontrol

Mobile radio components (GSM/GPRS) MD720-3 GSM/GPRS modem

■ Overview

■ Application

• GPRS modem for linking SIMATIC S7-200 PLCs over GPRS to a PC control center with SINAUT MICRO SC • Used for low-cost monitoring and control of simple telecontrol tasks • Permanent wireless online connection of SIMATIC S7-200 with secure linking over public networks • Use as GSM modem for teleservice • Simple startup possible without special knowledge of radio systems

• Construction of systems for monitoring and controlling of simple telecontrol tasks • Energy-saving concepts for plants, e.g. through statusdependent speed control of pumps in remote stations • Control and monitoring e.g. of: - sewage treatment plants, water treatment - oil and gas supplies - district heating networks - power distribution - pumping stations - automatic machines - traffic control systems - buildings - intelligent advertising panels - weather stations - lighthouses and buoys - wind generators and photovoltaic plants • Linking of mobile stations, with central monitoring/control of track vehicles, special vehicles, local public transport, complex building machines, ships on rivers and in coastal areas • Remote programming and maintenance of SIMATIC S7-200 over GSM/CSD connection (Circuit Switched Data) • For international use


■ Benefits

• Low-cost volume tariffs allow permanent and wireless online linking of machines or plants to a control center • Low operating costs thanks to optimized communication with effective frame design on SINAUT MICRO SC OPC server • Central control station is location-independent as result of Internet link between mobile radio provider and OPC server • Reliable transmission from PLC up to control station as result of high availability of GPRS network • Secure connection over public networks through encrypted data transmission plus additional measures of the GPRS provider • Simple planning of wireless plants without special knowledge of radio systems • Modem replacement possible by non-specialists since parameterization is carried out through the S7-200 • Cost savings through remote maintenance • Fast generation of applications by means of coordinated combination of automation components with the Micro Automation Set 21 (http://www.siemens.com/microset)

7/94



Internet


GSM/GPRS provider


Communication between SIMATIC S7-200 systems via MICRO SC control center with assistance of routing functionality

G_IK10_XX_30149

7

Control center

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Design • Rugged plastic enclosure for DIN rail mounting • 9-pin Sub-D socket with RS232 interface (PPI adapter for SIMATIC S7-200 necessary) • Diagnostics LEDs for modem status, field strength and connection check • SET service key • 4-pin screw terminal for connection to the 24 V DC supply voltage • SMA connection for GSM/GPRS antennas

■ Function • Quad band GSM with the frequency bands 850/900/1800/1900 MHz • GPRS Multislot Class 10 (gross: 13.4 … 27 kbit/s upload, 40 … 54 kbit/s download). • Automatic establishment and holding of IP-based online connection over GPRS to the Internet • Data exchange with PC-based application SINAUT MICRO SC (router and OPC server); data exchange with further MD720-3 modems possible over routing of SINAUT MICRO SC • Hot switchover between GPRS and CSD (modem operation) • CSD and GPRS connection controllable using AT commands • Sending of SMS and fax (via SMS) using GSM services • Secure access to SIMATIC S7-200 data, also over mobile radio provider networks which do not provide public and fixed IP addresses for the modem Configuration • Parameterization using PLC blocks with the Micro/Win programming tool for SIMATIC S7-200 • PLC blocks are part of SINAUT MICRO SC • AT command interface Security • Approval of up to 3 call numbers for incoming GSM connections (CLIP function) for teleservice • User name and password for GSM connection • Unlimited client and server operation even in protected GPRS networks with private IP addresses of the mobile radio providers • Secure data transfer between modem, Internet and SINAUT MICRO SC using encryption algorithms

■ Technical specifications Data transmission rate • RS232 • GSM data calls • GPRS up to 2 uplinks up to 4 downlinks

Interfaces • RS232 • GSM/GPRS

300 bit/s … 57600 bit/s CSD 9600 bit/s 13.4 kbit … 27 kbit upload gross (modem->Internet) Net approx. 30% less 40 kbit … 54 kbit download gross (Internet -> modem) Net approx. 30% less 1 x 9-pin Sub-D socket 1 x SMA antenna socket (50 Ohm)

Frequency ranges

850, 900, 1800, 1900 MHz

Transmitted output power

2 W at 850, 900 MHz 1 W at 1800, 1900 MHz

Current consumption Send mode • at 12 V • at 24 V

430 mA 140 mA

Receive mode • at 12 V • at 24 V

90 mA 50 mA

Supply voltage

12 … 30 V DC

Power loss

typ. 5 W max. 6.2 W


- 20 °C … +60 °C - 25 °C … +85 °C max. 95 % at +25 °C

Design • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm • Weight • Assembly

22.5 x 99 x 114 approx. 150 g Standard rail


IP40

Configuration

AT commands through S7-200 program blocks

National approvals

Current approvals can be found on the Internet at http:/www.siemens.com/ simatic-net/ik-info

7

Diagnostics / maintenance • Status of establishment of connection, and of an existing connection on front LED display • Reading of configuration data over the RS232 interface • Connection status to modem and to PLC can be monitored in SINAUT MICRO SC • Direct, additional access over GSM (modem operation) for teleservice (remote programming, remote diagnostics)


7/95

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Ordering data SINAUT MD720-3 GPRS modem for IP-based data transmission over GSM networks, quad band, AT command interface, automatic establishment of GPRS connection, switchable to CSD mode, RS 232, including gender changer for RS 232/PPI adapter; manual on CD-ROM in German, English (Chinese available soon)


Order No. Accessories ANT 794-4MR antenna Quad band antenna, omnidirectional with 5 m cable SINAUT MICRO SC Single license for one installation; OPC server for GPRS communication with S7-200; connection management with 8, 64 or 256 remote stations; routing for connections between S7-200 stations; connection monitoring; German and English GUI; for Windows XP Professional SP 2 and higher, Windows 2003 Server SP 1, Windows 2000 Professional/Server SP 4; manual on CD-ROM in German and English (Chinese available soon) • SINAUT MICRO SC8 connection management for 8 remote stations; • SINAUT MICRO SC64 connection management for 64 remote stations; • SINAUT MICRO SC256 connection management for 256 remote stations; SIMATIC S7-200 PC/PPI cable Multimaster, for connecting S7200 to serial PC interface, supports Freeport and GSM modems

7

7/96


6NH9 860-1AA0

6NH9 910-0AA10-0AA3

6NH9 910-0AA10-0AA6

6NH9 910-0AA10-0AA8

6ES7 901-3CB30-0XA0

SINAUT Telecontrol

Mobile radio components (GSM/GPRS) ANT794-4MR GSM/GPRS antenna

■ Overview

■ Application • • • •

For use in GSM/GPRS networks For indoors/outdoors (degree of protection IP65) Operating temperature -40 °C to +70 °C Ideally suitable for SINAUT GPRS modems, e.g. MD720-3

■ Design • Radiator accommodated in a plastic tube for protection • RF cable with fixed connection to antenna • Fixed and rugged vertical installation outside control cabinet


• • • •

Omnidirectional antenna for use in GSM/GPRS networks Remote antenna for indoors/outdoors Suitable for quad band Complete with cable and mounting bracket for direct connection to SINAUT GPRS modems

■ Benefits

• Weatherproof design allows installation outside buildings to improve the field strength • Quad band technology permits international use

Mobile telephone networks

GSM / GPRS

Frequencies

850 MHz, 900 MHz, 1800 MHz, 1900 MHz, 2200 MHz

Characteristic

Omnidirectional

Antenna amplification

0 dB

SWR

< 2.0

Max. power

20 W

Polarity

Linear vertical

Connectors

SMA


5m


- 40 °C … +70 °C - 40 °C … +70 °C 100 %

Design • Dimensions (D x H) in mm • Weight • Assembly

25 x 193 380 g (incl. packaging) Using supplied bracket


IP65

Outer material

Hard PVC UV-resistance


7

7/97

SINAUT Telecontrol

Mobile radio components (GSM/GPRS) ANT794-4MR GSM/GPRS antenna

■ Ordering data ANT794-4MR GSM/GPRS quad band antenna; weather-resistant for indoor/ outdoor use; 5 m cable with fixed connection to antenna; SMA connector; including mounting bracket, screws, wall plugs

Order No.


6NH9 860-1AA00 Dimensions in mm

Accessories

7/98


193 Ø 24

81

M10 x 0.75

25

Ø 10.5

6NH9 910-0AA10-0AA3

6NH9 910-0AA10-0AA6

6NH9 910-0AA10-0AA8

148

6

G_IK10_XX_30152

7

SINAUT MICRO SC Single license for one installation; OPC server for GPRS communication with S7-200; connection management with 8, 64 or 256 remote stations; routing for connections between S7-200 stations; connection monitoring; German and English GUI; for Windows XP Professional SP 2 and higher, Windows 2003 Server SP 1, Windows 2000 Professional/Server SP 4; manual on CD-ROM in German and English (Chinese available soon) • SINAUT MICRO SC8 connection management for 8 remote stations; • SINAUT MICRO SC64 connection management for 64 remote stations; • SINAUT MICRO SC256 connection management for 256 remote stations;

6NH9 720-3AA0

35

SINAUT MD720-3 GPRS modem for IP-based data transmission over GSM networks, quad band, AT command interface, automatic establishment of GPRS connection, switchable to CSD mode, RS 232, including gender changer for RS 232/PPI adapter; manual on CD-ROM in German, English (Chinese available soon)

SINAUT Telecontrol

Dedicated-line accessories LTOP overvoltage protection

■ Overview

■ Design The protection concept is a combination of components with complementary functions: • Surge arresters filled with inert gas for general protection (G1, G2) • Inductances to limit the rate of current rise (L1, L2) • Metal-oxide varistors for low-voltage protection (voltage-dependent resistor; R1) • Transformer for electrical isolation (T1) • Suppressor diode to limit the secondary voltage of the transformer (V1)

G1

• Line transformer with overvoltage protection • For the electrical isolation of a dedicated-line modem from the trunk line • For protection against overvoltage which may be induced via the trunk line

G2

■ Application Copper dedicated lines are much more susceptible to access and interference from parasitic voltages. Interference from parasitic voltages can be inductive or capacitive, e.g. due to lightning. Direct galvanic interference due to insulation faults is also possible. LTOP can limit parasitic voltages and overvoltage to a harmless level. Furthermore, the floating transformer is electrically isolated, thereby preventing the accidental energization of other line sections. LTOP protects personnel and investments and is therefore an essential safety element in private trunk line networks. Note: LTOP modules are not suitable for protecting dial-up network connections (telephone or ISDN network). For these types of networks, TAE6, S0, RJ12 and RJ45 outlets with overvoltage protection from vendors such as Phoenix and Dehn should be used.

T1

Modem

R1 V1 OPM

OPM

L2

■ Benefits

• Reduces overvoltage to tolerable levels before they reach sensitive electronics circuits • Electrically isolates line sections; prevents interference due to external voltages • Limits damage to segments affected by overvoltage • The protective components are housed in a plug-in OPM overvoltage module. The OPM can be replaced without interrupting the trunk line.

L1

G_IK10_XX_30070

Long-distance trunk

Two different LTOP overvoltage protection modules are available: • LTOP 1; overvoltage protection module for use at the beginning or end of a 2-wire line • LTOP 2; overvoltage protection module for use at the beginning or end of a 4-wire line or a 2-wire tapping point. 2 LTOP2 modules are required on a 4-wire tapping point. In addition to screw connections, both LTOP modules also have an RJ12 Western socket. The WAN connecting cable (RJ12 - RJ12) supplied with MD2 and MD3 modems (used as dedicated-line modems) can be connected directly to this RJ12 socket.

■ Function The combination of arresters and limiters supplemented by the line transformer is more effective than galvanically-coupled protection concepts. Leakage voltages place considerable strain on protective components in the OPM, slowly destroying them. We therefore recommend that OPMs are replaced approximately once a year. In areas affected by frequent thunderstorms, this should be reduced to approximately every 6 months as a precautionary measure.


7/99

7

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Integration If necessary, a number of LTOP enclosures can be interconnected. Possible and recommended configurations are described in the examples below.

Modem

Legend: Line transformer (LT - Line Transformer)

R/T

Overvoltage protection (OP - Overvoltage Protection)

LTOP1 Long-distance trunk

T

Transmitter (Transmitter)

R

Receiver (Receiver)


Modem R

R/T

T

LTOP2

LTOP2

Long distance Long-distance trunk 1 cable 2

Long-distance trunk 4-wire terminal station Long distance trunk 1 (to/from station)

7

R/T

Only modem with integrated Yconnection e.g. MD2 or MD124

2 x 2-wire terminal station

Modem

Long-distance cable 1 (to/from station) Modem LTOP2 R

LTOP2

T

R/T

Long-distance cable 2 (to/from station) 2-wire tandem station

7/100


Long-distance cable 2 (to/from station) 4-wire tandem station

G_IK10_XX_30071

LTOP2

SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Technical specifications Transmission paths

Private non-coil-loaded or coil-loaded trunk lines

Transmission ratio

1 : 1; ± 5 % (e.g. 600/600 ohms in voice band)

Transmission range

300 Hz to 35 kHz

Frequency-dependent attenuation

Attenuation [dB]

Frequency [Hz]

0.2

1300 ... 3300

0.8

5200 ... 8400

4800

0.9

10400 ... 16800

9600

1

20800 ... 30600

19200

Transmission rate [bps] MD100

MD124

MD2

MD3

1200

1200 2400

1200 2400

All


> 2000 MOhms

Test voltage

4 kV, 50 Hz, 10 sec.

Impulse withstand voltage

6 kV/2 J acc. to EN 60 099-1

Nominal discharge current isn (8/20 µs)

5 kA

Output voltage limit at isn

approx. 15 V

Trunk line connection

Screw terminals Cross-section 0.2 … 4 mm2 rigid wires Cross-section 0.2 … 2.5 mm2 flexible wires

Modem connection

Screw terminals (wire cross-section see trunk line connection) or RJ12 socket for Western connector

Installation location

As near as possible to where the cable enters the building

9600 19200


0 °C … +60 °C


-40 °C … +70 °C


max. 95 % at +25 °C

7


90 x 75 x 110 mm

• Weight - LTOP1 - LTOP2 - OPM

300 g 320 g 10 g


IP20

Assembly

DIN rail TS35 (35 mm; EN 50 022)

■ Ordering data

Order No.

LTOP 1 1x line transformer, with 1 OPM overvoltage protection module for use at the beginning or end of a 2-wire line

6NH9 821-0BC11

LTOP 2 2x line transformer, with 2 OPM overvoltage protection modules for use at the beginning or end of a 4-wire line or a 2-wire tapping point

6NH9 821-0BC12

Accessories OPM Overvoltage protection module for LTOP 1 and LTOP 2, plug-in (unit packs of 4)

6NH9 821-0BB00


7/101

SINAUT Telecontrol

Dedicated-line accessories Line transformer

■ Overview

A possible star-point connection for max. 4 x 2-wire terminals using the quadruple transformer and additional standard components is illustrated below. The 6NH7700-2AR60 connecting cable is part of the scope of supply of the MD2 modem, which is either built in or connected to the TIM as an external modem.

TIM

• Quadruple transformer for the regeneration of the trunk line connection on a dedicated-line modem from 1 x 2-wire to 4 x 2-wire


■ Application In a controller, the quadruple transformer enables up to four point-to-point or line connections (each 2-wire) to be made in a start-type configuration, or a combination of both network topologies. The transformer is only designed for a frequency range between 300 and 3400 Hz. In conjunction with the MD2 modem, transmission rates are limited to 1200 and 2400 bit/s.

Connection to 4-fold transmitter requires adaptation

4-fold transmitter 6NH9821-4GA

600 W 4 x 600 W

Attenuation 6.5 dB

■ Design The quadruple transformer is housed in a sheet-steel enclosure. It is mounted on a 35 mm standard mounting rail.

■ Integration If a number of dedicated lines have to be combined on one WAN port of the TIM, i.e. if a star-type network is being connected, this can be achieved by connecting a number of MD2 modems in parallel. 2 x 2-wire terminals can be connected to each MD2. The quadruple transformer can be used to increase the number of 2-wire terminals per MD2 from 2 to 4. However, this means that at a transmission rate of 1200 bit/s, the attenuation is increased by 6.5 dB, reducing the max. range by approx. 6 km. Star, line, point-to-point

Station

Neutral point Bundling of several 2-wire terminal stations


7/102


1. 2. Route

3. 4. Route

Note: See MD2 dedicated-line modem for the configuration for the terminals and tapping points in the stations.

Master


4 x 2-wire dedicated line

G_IK10_XX_30096


The trunk line is connected by means of soldering tabs.

G_IK10_XX_30105

7

TIM with integrated or external MD2 modem

SINAUT Telecontrol

Dedicated-line accessories Line transformer


■ Ordering data

Frequency range

0.3 - 3.4 kHz

Quadruple transformer

Translation

600 : 4 x 600 ohms

Attenuation at 1200 bit/s

6.5 dB

600 ohms to 4 x 600 ohms

Dielectric strength

2 kV


60 x 107 x 110

Weight

0.2 kg

Installation

Standard mounting rail 35 mm

Order No. 6NH9821-4GA

7


7/103

SINAUT Telecontrol

Radio clock components Accessories for DCF77

■ Overview An adapter cable with a BNC connector at one end is supplied with every TIM module, which has a built-in DCF77 radio clock receiver. Various accessories, both for the DCF77 and for GPS, can be connected. • DCF77 indoor antenna An indoor antenna can be used in buildings in which there are no sources of interference for the DCF77 signal. It should not be installed in the direct vicinity of television sets, monitors, thyristor controllers, network cables or fluorescent lamps. • DCF77 outdoor antenna for mounting on flat roofs, walls or masts If possible, a professional radio clock should be operated with an outdoor antenna. Unlike an indoor antenna, whose environment can change constantly due to technical activities indoors, the conditions for an outdoor antenna are almost constant. The use of indirect lightning protection is highly recommended for an outdoor antenna.

■ Integration The interconnection between the various DCF77 components (the 6NH7700-0AD15 adapter cable is part of the scope of supply of every TIM with built-in DCF77 radio clock receiver) is illustrated below.

If the lightning protector 6NH9831-2AA is used, this should be installed as close to the entrance of the building as possible. A separate antenna cable must be used to connect the lightning protector with the adapter cable of the TIM (with BNC socket at both ends, similar to the antenna cable supplied with the indoor or outdoor antenna). Users must either make this themselves or obtain it commercially in the appropriate length.

TIM with integrated DCF77 radio receiver TIM

7

Indoor antenna incl. 10 m adapter cable 6NH9831-0AA

or Adapter cable (1.5 m) is supplied with TIM (Spare parts Order No. 6NH7700-0AD15)

Outdoor antenna incl. 20 m antenna cable: - For flat roof or wall mounting 6NH9831-0BA Indirect lightning protection 6NH9831-2AA

7/104


- For mast mounting 6NH9831-0DA G_IK10_XX_30095

BNC

SINAUT Telecontrol

Radio clock components Accessories for DCF77


■ Ordering data

Antennas Power supply (via antenna cable)

+1.7 V to +5 V

Differential output resistance

50 ohms

Gain

16 dB

Temperature range

-30 °C ... +80 °C

Indirect lightning protection Input and output for antenna cable

one BNC socket for each

Grounding point

M 6 screwed joint

Construction • Casing material • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm • Weight

Aluminum 250 x 155 x 95 approx. 3500 g

Response rate

1 nsec

Current-carrying capacity 8/20 msec wave

5 kA

Protective level at 6 kV 1.5/50 msec wave at input

< 12 V

Input impedance

50 ohms

Insertion loss

max. 3 dB

DCF77 indoor antenna Incl. 10 m cable and BNC connectors DCF77 outdoor antenna Incl. 20 m cable and BNC connectors • For mounting on a flat roof or wall • For mounting on a mast Indirect lightning protection for DCF77 outdoor antenna

Order No. 6NH9 831-0AA

6NH9 831-0BA 6NH9 831-0DA 6NH9 831-2AA

7


7/105

SINAUT Telecontrol

Radio clock components GPS components

■ Overview using the satellite-based GPS (Global Positioning System) is recommended. For this application, the SINAUT system offers a GPS receiver, which simulates the DCF77 signal as an output signal. This receiver can therefore be connected directly with the DCF77 receiver in the TIM, to which it can supply the current time.

The DCF77 radio clock signal can only be received in Western Europe (radius of approx. 800 km around Frankfurt am Main, Germany). In areas where this signal cannot be received, the use of a GPS receiver, which is able to determine the local time

This GPS receiver is supplied as a complete package and includes: • GPS receiver module for snapping onto a 35 mm standard mounting rail • GPS outdoor antenna for mounting on a wall or mast, incl. 25 m antenna cable • BNC adapter plug for connecting the DCF77 adapter cable on the TIM to the BNC socket on the GPS receiver • Software for configuring the GPS receiver (for Windows 3.x, 95, NT) • PC adapter cable, length 1.5 m • Documentation Since the GPS antenna is an outdoor antenna, the offered lightning protection device accessory must be used.

■ Integration The interconnection between the various GPS components (the 6NH7700-0AD15 adapter cable is part of the scope of supply of every TIM with built-in DCF77 radio clock receiver) is illustrated below. If the lightning protector 6NH9831-2AA is used, this should be installed as close to the entrance of the building as possible.

7

TIM with integrated DCF7 radio clock receiver

A separate antenna cable must be used to connect the lightning protector with the adapter cable of the TIM (with BNC socket at both ends, similar to the antenna cable supplied with the indoor or outdoor antenna). Users must either make this themselves or obtain it commercially in the appropriate length.

GPS receiver module

TIM

DCF77 output for simulation signal

Input GPS signal BNC adapter plug

Adapter cable 6NH7700-0AD15

Indirect lightning protection for GPS 6NH9831-8LA GPS-Kit 6NH9831-8AA Complete GPS package for simulating the DCF77 time signal comprising: GPS receiver module GPS outdoor antenna incl. 25 m cable BNC adapter plug Configuration software PC adapter cable Documentation

7/106


GPS outdoor antenna for wall or mast mounting incl. 25 m antenna cable

G_IK10_XX_30094

BNC

SINAUT Telecontrol

Radio clock components GPS components


■ Ordering data

GPS receiver module Interfaces • RS232/RS422 connection • Pulse outputs • GPS input • DCF77 simulation output

9-pin Sub-D connector Screw terminals BNC socket BNC socket

Power loss

3.5 W

Power supply

18 V to 60 V DC

Power consumption

3.5 VA



Installation

on 35 mm standard DIN rail

Order No.

GPS complete package For simulating the DCF77 time signal, comprising a GPS receiver, GPS outdoor antenna incl. 25 m cable, BNC adapter plug, configuration software, PC adapter cable, and documentation.

6NH9 831-8AA

Indirect lightning protection for GPS outdoor antenna

6NH9 831-8LA

Indirect lightning protection Input and output for antenna cable

one BNC socket for each

Grounding point

M 6 screwed joint



Response rate

1 nsec

Current-carrying capacity 8/20 msec wave

5 kA

Protective level at 6 kV 1.5/50 msec wave at input

< 12 V

Input impedance

50 ohms

Insertion loss

max. 3 dB

7


7/107

SINAUT Telecontrol

Software

SINAUT ST7 standard software package

■ Application The SINAUT ST7 standard software package with the following components is required for the configuration, diagnostics and operation of the SINAUT system: • SINAUT ST7 configuring software • SINAUT TD7 library The CD-ROM also contains the SINAUT ST7 Manual in electronic format (German/English). The software package is a work package which can be used for any number of SINAUT projects without a licensing process.

■ Function SINAUT ST7 configuring software for the programming device • Runs under Windows 2000 or XP; STEP 7 software V5.1 SP2 or higher must also be installed. • Includes: - module manager to supplement the HW Config STEP 7 tool; displays and sets the parameters of the TIM modules in HW-Config - WAN Manager to supplement the NetPro STEP 7 tool; displays and sets the parameters of the SINAUT WAN networks and network nodes in NetPro - the SINAUT ST7 configuring tool is used for project-wide functions such as SINAUT connection configuration and SINAUT station management - SINAUT ST7 diagnostics and service tool; in addition to the diagnostics functions familiar to users of STEP 7, it also provides access to SINAUT-specific diagnostic information. The service tool can be used, for example, to upload new software to the TIM.

7

WAN Manager for SINAUT ST7 In the catalog for the STEP 7 network configuration tool NetPro, the SINAUT networks have been added to the sub-networks directory. The SINAUT networks required in each case can be selected from this directory and installed in the NetPro window. With the SINAUT ST7 configuring tool V3.5 and higher, Ethernet can also be configured for the SINAUT data transmission. The TIM modules can be assigned to these networks using the mouse or dialog boxes. Any erroneous connections are rejected immediately. A corresponding Properties dialog box is called up to define the generally valid parameters for a network, e.g. ST1 or ST7 protocol, transmission rate, etc. The individual properties for each of the network nodes can be defined in a further dialog box, e.g. the dedicated telephone number for the connection to a telephone network.

Module manager for SINAUT ST7 A SINAUT ST7 folder has been added to the SIMATIC 300 directory. This folder contains a list of all available TIM modules. The TIM module required in each case can be selected from this directory and installed in the S7 rack. A corresponding Properties dialog box can be called up to set the module parameters. If necessary, the Properties dialog box for a TIM module can be opened in NetPro with the same property options as in HW Config.

7/108


SINAUT Telecontrol

Software


■ Function (continued) SINAUT ST7 configuring tool

SINAUT ST7 diagnostics and service tool

The SINAUT ST7 configuring tool is a separate configuration tool for SINAUT ST7 and includes: • Connection configuration • Station management • SINAUT ST1 – Configuration overview

In addition to the diagnostics functions familiar to users of STEP 7, the SINAUT ST7 diagnostics and service tool also provides access to SINAUT-specific diagnostic information. The service tool can be used, for example, to upload new software to the TIM.

First, the "Connection configuration" tool is used to define the SINAUT devices (ST7 CPU, ST7cc, ST7sc or ST1 device) between which a connection is required. For this purpose, the tool displays a list of all connections possible in the right-hand side of a two-section window. The tool has generated the list automatically using the network configured with NetPro (see WAN Manager). The user moves the connections actually required from the right-hand to the left-hand window using the pop-up menu.

SINAUT TD7 library, blocks for the CPU The SINAUT TD7 library is a software package with blocks for the CPU. The package has been designed so that it can run both on an S7-400 and on an S7-300 CPU. Only a small number of blocks have been designed specifically for the S7-300 or S7-400 CPU respectively. In the terminals, the SINAUT TD7 software ensures that process data is transmitted between the individual CPUs and with the control center, e.g. ST7cc, in the event of changes. Connection, CPU or control center failures are displayed. A data update is performed automatically following debugging or CPU or control center startup. A time stamp can be assigned to data telegrams if required. The package essentially comprises: • Basic and auxiliary blocks Most of these blocks are always required in the CPU, a small number are optional. The basic blocks perform central tasks such as startup, connection and connection partner monitoring, general prompting, time management, communication processing, etc. The auxiliary blocks, for example, insert telegrams into the sending mailbox and retrieve them from the receive mailbox, perform connection-specific send and receive operations or provide access to information the user is searching for. • Data-point typicals These blocks are integrated into the CPU program on the basis of the data types and data volumes to be transmitted. In the event of changes to data, they create telegrams or output received process data.

One of the features provided by the "Station management" tool is a list of all SINAUT devices. If necessary, station-specific modifications can be made, e.g. the SINAUT station numbers can be changed for the individual devices, or message texts can be configured to be sent as text message. The station management tool also handles configuring of the data telegrams to be sent and received if telegram generation and evaluation are to be carried out by the TIM (only possible for TIMs with TD7onTIM functionality). The tool generates the system data blocks (SDB) for the CPUs and TIMs from the configuration data. If the SINAUT TD7 software is used for the CPU, the tool also preprocesses the accounting and communication data blocks for the CPUs, which it stores in the CPU block library together with the blocks (FBs, FCs) which are essential to the CPUs for SINAUT communication.

In order to operate correctly, the TD7 package needs a number of data blocks which are generated by the SINAUT ST7 configuring tool. These are: • Central accounting DB This block contains all data required centrally, e.g. accounting data for all communication partners as well as for all connections to be managed. • Communication DBs A separate communication DB is created for every connection with a sending and receive mailbox and all data required for controlling and monitoring this connection.

The third tool, "SINAUT ST1 – Configuration overview" is only required for configuring systems which also feature SINAUT ST1 devices. This tool makes adjusting the addresses for SINAUT ST1 much easier.


7/109

7

SINAUT Telecontrol

Software



■ Ordering data SINAUT ST7 standard software package

Operating systems

Windows XP Professional SP1 Windows 2000 Professional SP1, 2, 3, 4

STEP 7 versions

STEP 7 V5.1 SP2 or higher; for SINAUT connections via Ethernet: STEP 7 V5.3 SP2 or higher

Order No.

Standard software for SINAUT ST7 On CD-ROM, comprising: • SINAUT ST7 configuring and diagnostics software V3.6 for the PG • SINAUT TD7 block library V2.1.4 for the CPU • Electronic manual in German and English

6NH7 997-0CA15-0AA0

ST7 software upgrade package for owners of versions older than V3.0

6NH7 997-0CA15-0GA0


7

7/110


• German

6NH7 998-0AA13

• English

6NH7 998-0AA23

SINAUT Telecontrol

Software

SINAUT ST7cc, Add-on for WinCC

■ Overview

■ Benefits SINAUT ST7cc


Ethernet TCP/IP

TIM 4

TIM 4

■ Application

DCF77/GPS

WAN

WAN

MPI

e.g. S7-300 with e.g. S7-400 with TIM 4 TIM 3V SINAUT ST7 stations

• Interfacing of SINAUT terminals to SIMATIC WinCC via WAN and Ethernet • Entry of messages, analog and count values in WinCC archives using the event times supplied by the SINAUT terminals • Protection of investments in existing SINAUT ST1 systems, as ST1 terminals can be connected • Saving of time and reduction of costs through simple configuration without requiring detailed knowledge of SINAUT

e.g. S5-115 with TIM 11 SINAUT ST1 stations G_IK10_XX_30069

SINAUT ST7cc control center system (non-redundant or redundant) with connected ST7 and ST1 terminals

Based on SIMATIC WinCC, SINAUT ST7cc is the ideal control center system for both SINAUT ST7 and SINAUT ST1. It has been developed specifically for event-driven and time-stamped data transmission on the SINAUT system. A high-availability ST7cc control center can be set up in conjunction with the WinCC redundancy package. SINAUT ST7cc additionally assumes the function of a telecontrol center. There is therefore no need for a separate SIMATIC S7-CPU for this function.

Based on SIMATIC WinCC, SINAUT ST7cc is the ideal control center system for both SINAUT ST7 and SINAUT ST1. It has been developed specifically for event-driven and timestamped data transmission on the SINAUT system. It avoids the possible loss of data inherent in cyclic polling in WinCC. It also ensures the use of the correct event times supplied by the SINAUT terminals for all WinCC messages and archive entries. The process image integrated into ST7cc contains all process data along with the status of all SINAUT stations in the network, and makes this data available directly to WinCC for high-speed process image visualization. ST7ccConfig provides the user with an integrated configuring tool based on the data telegrams configured in the SINAUT ST7 or ST1 terminals. WinCC and all its variables are configured automatically and updated consistently to reflect any changes. The additional use of the WinCC ACRON add-ons is recommended for archives, protocols and reports in accordance with ATV Notice H260 or Hirthammer. ST7cc features a configurable data interface for these add-ons. A high-availability ST7cc control center can be set up in conjunction with the WinCC redundancy package.

■ Design SINAUT ST7cc is installed on a Windows PC (Windows 2000, XP or Server 2003). WinCC can run on the same PC. However, WinCC client/server configurations are also possible in which the ST7cc is located on the WinCC server. A license for the WinCC complete package is required. A runtime package may be sufficient if no configurations are required on the end computer. The WinCC redundancy package incl. license is also required for the redundant ST7cc. The table on page 7/112 lists the software packages required for the ST7cc non-redundant/redundant system in detail.


7/111

7

SINAUT Telecontrol

Software


■ Design (continued) ST7cc non-redundant system

ST7cc redundant system

Number

Software package

Number

Software package

1

Windows 2000, XP or Server 2003

2

Windows 2000, XP or Server 2003

1

WinCC complete package1)

1

WinCC complete package1)

1

WinCC runtime package

1

WinCC redundancy package (with 2 licenses)

2

SIMATIC NET with license for CP software

1

ST7cc redundancy package (with 2 licenses)

2

SW ST7cc S (with license for 6 stations) or SW ST7cc M (with license for 12 stations) or SW ST7cc L (with license for > 12 stations)

1

SIMATIC NET with license for CP software

1

SW ST7cc S (with license for 6 stations) or SW ST7cc M (with license for 12 stations) or SW ST7cc L (with license for > 12 stations)

1) A runtime package may be sufficient if no configurations are required on the end computer.

One or more SINAUT ST7 TIM communications processors is connected to the ST7cc PC via the MPI bus or via Ethernet. Both ST7 and ST1 terminals can be connected to the TIMs, only ST7 terminals to the TIMs on the Ethernet. Provision of current time of day: • Time synchronization for TIMs connected via MPI to the ST7cc PC (TIM 4x) is only possible using a TIM equipped with a DCF77 receiver. This is then responsible for central synchronization of the ST7cc PC and all stations.

• Time synchronization for TIMs connected via Ethernet to the ST7cc PC (TIM 3V-IE) is via ST7cc. Outside the reception area of the DCF77 real-time transmitter the use of a GPS receiver is recommended. This determines the local time from the satellite-based global positioning system (GPS).

■ Function

7

Operation as telecontrol center with user-friendly diagnostic capability • Direct connection of SINAUT ST7 TIMs to ST7cc via MPI and Ethernet. A separate CPU connected in series as a telecontrol center is not required. • Provision of the most important status information for each SINAUT ST7 or ST1 station with visualization in WinCC via the provided station typicals (image typicals and faceplates). • Control options for SINAUT stations via these faceplates. • Process value flags from stations with faulty connection to ST7cc. • General query for affected terminals following end of transmission fault in order to update the process image in ST7cc. • For diagnostic purposes: Selective recording of telegram traffic for individual or all SINAUT stations. Telegram visualization and evaluation is carried out as with the TIM telegram monitor. • Time synchronization by ST7cc for the TIMs connected via Ethernet to the ST7cc PC.

• Analog values (instantaneous and mean values) - floating-point numbers, integers - linear raw value adaptation (raw value → physical value) - entry of analog values (with or without linear raw value adaptation) into the assigned WinCC variables - entry of analog values (with or without linear raw value adaptation) into the WinCC archive taking into account the time stamp supplied by SINAUT ST7 or ST1 • Count values - processing of overflows on absolute-value counters. - adaptation of count values via factors. - generation of intervals at correct times. - entry of up-to-date accumulated intervals into assigned WinCC variables. - entry of completed intervals into the WinCC archive taking into account the time stamp supplied by SINAUT ST7 or ST1. • Setpoints - floating-point numbers, integers - linear raw value adaptation (physical value → raw value) if required.

Preprocessing of process data

Simple, system-wide configuration

Binary values, analog values and count values can be configured. Configurations take into account event times and assign correct time stamps to derived messages and archive entries. • Binary values - entry of up-to-date binary values into assigned WinCC variables. - binary values can be interpreted as single-pole or multi-pole messages. - entry of derived messages into the WinCC messaging system taking into account the time stamp supplied by SINAUT ST7 or ST1.

Configuring the entire system with ST7ccConfig is extremely user-friendly. Separate WinCC configuring for variables functions, archives and message system is limited to a few preparatory measures, e.g. the creation of message classes and types and of archives in WinCC.

7/112


SINAUT Telecontrol

Software


■ Technical specifications SINAUT ST7cc Operating systems

WinCC versions

STEP 7 / NCM versions

■ Ordering data SINAUT ST7cc Software for connecting SINAUT stations to WinCC (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003); Single license for 1 installation of the runtime software; runtime software, configuration software and electronic manual on CD-ROM; license key on floppy disk; German/English • SINAUT ST7cc S Small license for max. 6 SINAUT stations • SINAUT ST7cc M Medium license for max. 12 SINAUT stations • SINAUT ST7cc L Large license for more than 12 SINAUT stations • SINAUT ST7cc R Redundancy license for ST7cc (contains 2 licenses); two ST7cc S, M or L single licenses are also required • SINAUT ST7cc SM License upgrade from ST7cc S to ST7cc M (from 6 to 12 stations) • SINAUT ST7cc SL License upgrade from ST7cc S to ST7cc L (from 6 to more than 12 stations) • SINAUT ST7cc ML License upgrade from ST7cc M to ST7cc L (from 12 to more than 12 stations)

Windows XP Professional SP1, SP2 Windows 2000 Professional SP1, 2, 3, 4, Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition + SP1 WinCC V5.0 SP2 or higher, WinCC V5.1 SP1 or higher, WinCC V6.0 SP1 or higher, WinCC V6.0 SP2 HF5 or higher, WinCC V6.0 SP3 HF2 or higher, WinCC V6.0 SP4 or higher SIMATIC NCM PC/S7 V5.3 SP2 or SIMATIC STEP 7 V5.3 SP1

SINAUT ST7cc SIMATIC NET PC software versions Configuration • ST7cc

ST7cc configuring tool V2.5

• SINAUT system

SINAUT ST7 configuration software V3.5; SINAUT ST7 configuration software V3.6

Quantity framework • 6 SINAUT terminals

Small license

• 12 SINAUT terminals

Medium license

• for more than 12 SINAUT terminals

Large license

SOFTNET-S7 Edition 2005 for Industrial Ethernet Software for S7 and S5-compatible communication, incl. OPC server, PG/OP communication and NCM PC; up to 64 connections, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, 2000 Professional/Server; German/English

6GK1 704-1CW63-3AA0

CP 5613 A2 communications processor PCI card (32-bit; 5 V) for connecting a PG or PC to PROFIBUS/MPI; suitable for the connection of up to 30 TIM modules via MPI

6GK1 561-3AA01

S7-5613 Edition 2005 for CP 5613 A2 Software for S7 communication incl. PG and FDL protocol, single license for 1 installation, license key on floppy disk

6GK1 713-5CB63-3AA0

SOFTNET-S7 Lean Edition 2005 for Industrial Ethernet Software for S7 and S5-compatible communication, incl. OPC server, PG/OP communication and NCM PC; up to 8 connections, single license for 1 installation, runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on diskette, Class A, for 32-bit Windows XP Professional, 2003 Server, 2000 Professional/Server; German/English

6GK1 704-1LW63-3AA0

CP 1613 A2 communications processor PCI card (32 bit; 33 MHz/66 MHz; 3.3 V/5 V universal key) for connecting a PG or PC to Industrial Ethernet (10/100 Mbit/s); suitable for the connection of up to 120 TIM modules via Industrial Ethernet

6GK1 161-3AA01

S7-1613 V6.2 Edition 2005 for CP 1613 A2 Software for S7 communication including PG communication, suitable for max. 120 connections, single license for 1 installation, license key on diskette

6GK1 716-1CB63-3AA0

Order No.

6NH7 997-7CA15-0AA1

6NH7 997-7CA15-0AA2

6NH7 997-7CA15-0AA3

6NH7 997-8CA15-0AA0

6NH7 997-7AA00-0AD2

6NH7 997-7AA00-0AD3

6NH7 997-7AA00-0AE3

SINAUT ST7cc Manual Paper version • German

6NH7 998-7AA11

• English

6NH7 998-7AA21

CP 5611 A2 communications processor PCI card (32-bit) for connecting a PG or PC to PROFIBUS/MPI; suitable for the connection of up to 8 TIM modules via MPI

6GK1 561-1AA01

CP 5611 A2 MPI communications processor Comprising a 5611 PCI card (32-bit) and 5 m MPI cable

6GK1 561-1AM01

SIMATIC NET PC software V6.2; SIMATIC NET PC software V6.3

Order No.

7


7/113

SINAUT Telecontrol

Software

SINAUT ST7sc SCADA Connect Software

■ Overview

■ Benefits SINAUT ST7sc

• Connection of SINAUT terminals to HMI, SCADA and Office applications via OPC • The item-buffering procedure ensures a complete and seamless archive • Saving of time and reduction of costs through the simple configuration without requiring detailed knowledge of SINAUT


Ethernet TCP/IP

TIM 4

■ Application

TIM 4

DCF 77 GPS

WAN

WAN

e.g. S7-300 with e.g. S7-400 with TIM 4 TIM 3V-IE SINAUT ST7 stations

7

e.g. S5-115 with TIM 11 SINAUT ST1 stations

G_IK10_XX_30132

MPI

• The SCADA Connect Software SINAUT ST7sc permits the connection of SINAUT ST7 and ST1 stations to control center systems that can operate as OPC clients (e.g. iFIX from Intellution, InTouch from Wonderware, Open Enterprise from Bristol-Babcock, Micro SCADA from ABB or RESY-PMC from repas AEG). • SINAUT ST7sc is also suitable for data exchange with other applications via OPC, e.g. Matrikon using Excel. • The OPC data can be exchanged either synchronously or asynchronously (change-controlled). • The "Item Buffering" function prevents the loss of data on failure of the OPC client or if SINAUT stations supply data at a faster rate than can be transferred via the OPC interface. • System availability can be increased by connecting two ST7sc systems working in parallel to a redundant client system. • SINAUT ST7sc can also operate as a telecontrol center, meaning that a separate SIMATIC S7 CPU would no longer be required for this function.

The SINAUT system permits the networking of SIMATIC stations with a control center via a wide area network (WAN) or via Ethernet. This control center can also be a SIMATIC terminal or a PCbased control center, e.g. WinCC with the SINAUT ST7cc addon. SINAUT ST7sc offers suppliers of other control center systems the option of connecting to SINAUT without having to integrate a SINAUT interface. Communication takes place via OPC: As an OPC server, SINAUT ST7sc forms the interface between the SINAUT and the control center system, which is linked as an OPC client. The OPC interface is also suitable for data exchange with other applications such as Excel.

■ Design SINAUT ST7sc is installed on a Windows PC (Windows 2000 or XP). The OPC server function permits the connection of one or more client applications. These clients are either connected to the server via a suitable communications medium, e.g. Ethernet, or they are installed on the same PC as SINAUT ST7sc. One or more SINAUT ST7 TIM communications processors are connected to the ST7sc PC via the MPI bus or via Ethernet. Both ST7 and ST1 stations can be connected to the TIMs on the MPI, only ST7 stations to the TIMs on the Ethernet. Provision of current time of day: • Time synchronization for TIMs connected via MPI to the ST7sc PC (TIM 4x) is only possible using a TIM equipped with a DCF77 receiver. This is then responsible for central synchronization of the ST7cc PC and all terminals. • Time synchronization for TIMs connected via Ethernet to the ST7sc PC (TIM 3V-IE) takes place using ST7cc. Outside the reception area of the DCF77 real-time transmitter the use of a GPS receiver is recommended. This determines the local time from the satellite-based global positioning system (GPS).

7/114


SINAUT Telecontrol

Software


■ Function

One special property of the SINAUT system is that the process data is secured against loss. If, for example, the connection from the station to the control center fails, the station stores all changes to the data locally which occur during the failure and gives it a time stamp. In this way it is possible to overcome connection failures lasting several hours or even days without any loss of data. To ensure that this data stored in the station also reaches the OPC client securely at a later stage, ST7sc includes the "item-buffering" procedure which helps to avoid the loss of data on the path to the OPC client: • If the OPC "data access" interface which represents a process image is updated by the SINAUT station faster than the client can read the data; • If the OPC client is unavailable for a shorter or longer period, or if the OPC communication link fails. The ST7sc normally sets up only one "memory cell" per item, in which it holds the last status or value of the item. When the itembuffering procedure is selected, however, one buffer is set up for each item, in which all changes to the relevant item are time-stamped and stored in sequence. The data is stored until the individual changes can be forwarded to the OPC client. The item-buffering procedure requires an HMI application that can process the time-stamped data, even if the time stamp is already several days old, e.g. after an extended connection failure.

"Data access" OPC server interface

SINAUT ST7sc

1

1 1a 1b 1c

2

3 3a

7 7a 7b 7c 7d 7e

45

78 78a 78b

3

79 79a 79b 79c

Item Buffer

In the opposite direction the OPC client can write data that is to be transmitted to a terminal (e.g. commands, setpoints, parameters) onto the ST7sc variables store via the OPC server interface. This data is converted into SINAUT data frames and sent via the WAN or Ethernet to the SINAUT station specified in the configuration.

OPC communication

n

ST7sc variable range SINAUT message decoding

SINAUT message coding SINAUT data message

SINAUT WAN communication

SINAUT data message

G_IK10_XX_30014

The SINAUT terminal records the process data when making the change and forwards it via the WAN or Ethernet to SINAUT ST7sc. SINAUT ST7sc decodes the received SINAUT frames and stores them in the ST7sc variables store according to the configuration. An OPC client can read this received data from the ST7sc variables store via the OPC "data access" server interface. This is done either synchronously or asynchronously (recommended), i.e. the OPC server interface only forwards data if changes have taken place in the ST7sc variables store.

System configuration with SINAUT ST7sc

Redundant application SINAUT ST7sc also permits a connection to a redundant client system. In this case, two ST7sc systems would be used. These systems transmit the data received from the station in parallel and independently of one another to both clients and receive data from these for transmission to the station. The redundancy intelligence is located on the side of the client: • This ensures the correct evaluation and comparison of the parallel data transmissions; • It transfers data that is to be sent to the terminals only once to one of the two ST7sc’s so that there is no duplication of the transmission. Configuring The ST7sc is configured using the ST7sc Config-Tool, which is supplied on the ST7sc software CD. The documentation for ST7sc and the Config-Tool can also be found on this CD.


7/115

7

SINAUT Telecontrol

Software


■ Technical specifications SINAUT ST7sc Programming

Open and standardized; OPC data access interface V2.05; Synchronous (IOPCSyncIO) and asynchronous (IOPCAsyncIO2) reading and writing of variables via the standard interface; the variables of the item buffers are accessed by means of asynchronous reading

Logging

DCOM protocol

Operating systems

Windows XP Prof. SP1, SP2; Windows 2000 Prof. SP1, 2, 3, 4

■ Ordering data

• SINAUT ST7sc S Small license for max. 6 SINAUT stations

6NH7 997-5CA05-0AA1

• SINAUT ST7sc M Medium license for max. 12 SINAUT stations

6NH7 997-5CA05-0AA2

• SINAUT ST7sc L Large license for more than 12 SINAUT stations

6NH7 997-5CA05-0AA3

• SINAUT ST7sc SM License upgrade from ST7sc S to ST7sc M (from 6 to 12 stations)

6NH7 997-5AA00-0AD2

• SINAUT ST7sc SL License upgrade from ST7sc S to ST7sc L (from 6 to more than 12 stations)

6NH7 997-5AA00-0AD3

• SINAUT ST7sc ML License upgrade from ST7sc M to ST7sc L (from 12 to more than 12 stations)

6NH7 997-5AA00-0AE3

SINAUT ST7sc Manual Paper version for V1.0 • German

6NH7 998-5AA11

• English

6NH7 998-5AA21

CP 5611 A2 communications processor PCI card (32-bit) for connecting a PG or PC to PROFIBUS/MPI; suitable for the connection of up to 8 TIM modules via MPI

6GK1 561-1AA01

CP 5611 A2 MPI communications processor Comprising a 5611 PCI card (32-bit) and 5 m MPI cable

6GK1 561-1AM01

7/116


SIMATIC NCM PC/S7 V5.3 SP2 or SIMATIC STEP 7 V5.3 SP1

SIMATIC NET PC software versions

SIMATIC NET PC software V6.2; SIMATIC NET PC software V6.3

Configuring

ST7sc Config tool

Quantity framework • 6 SINAUT terminals • 12 SINAUT terminals • More than 12 SINAUT terminals

Small license Medium license Large license

Order No.

SINAUT ST7sc Software for connecting SINAUT terminals to HMI, SCADA and Office applications via OPC; single license for 1 installation of the runtime software; runtime software, configuration software and electronic manual on CD-ROM; license key on floppy disk; German/English

7

SINAUT ST7sc STEP 7 / NCM versions

Order No. SOFTNET-S7 Edition 2005 for CP 5611 Software for S7 communication incl. FDL protocol, single license for 1 installation, license key on floppy disk

6GK1 704-5CW63-3AA0

CP 5613 A2 communications processor PCI card (32-bit; 5 V) for connecting a PG or PC to PROFIBUS/MPI; suitable for the connection of up to 30 TIM modules via MPI

6GK1 561-3AA01

S7-5613 Edition 2005 for CP 5613 A2 Software for S7 communication incl. PG and FDL protocol, single license for 1 installation, license key on floppy disk

6GK1 713-5CB63-3AA0

SOFTNET-S7 Edition 2005 Software for S7 communication including PG communication, suitable for max. 64 connections, single license for 1 installation, license key on diskette

6GK1 704-1CW63-3AA0

SOFTNET-S7 Lean Edition 2005 for CP 1612 Software for S7 communication including PG communication, suitable for max. 8 connections, single license for 1 installation, license key on diskette

6GK1 704-1LW63-3AA0

CP 1613 A2 communications processor PCI card (32 bit; 33 MHz/66 MHz; 3.3 V/5 V universal key) for connecting a PG or PC to Industrial Ethernet (10/100 Mbit/s); suitable for the connection of up to 120 TIM modules via Industrial Ethernet

6GK1 161-3AA01

S7-1613 Edition 2005 for CP 1613 Software for S7 communication including PG communication, suitable for max. 120 connections, single license for 1 installation, license key on diskette

6GK1 716-1CB63-3AA0

SINAUT Telecontrol

Software

SINAUT MICRO SC

• Software package for PC and SIMATIC S7-200, comprising: - PC: OPC server, connection manager - S7-200: PLC block library • OPC server for GPRS linking as many as 256 SIMATIC S7-200 stations to a control center • Permanent, bidirectional and wireless online connection to the S7-200 via GPRS • GPRS communication between S7-200 stations by means of routing function • Clear monitoring of GPRS station connections • Low GPRS mobile radio costs due to optimized communication with effective frame design Encrypted transmission for protection against data manipulation and tapping

■ Benefits

• Design of low-cost fault signaling and monitoring systems with SIMATIC S7-200 and WinCC flexible using GPRS system solution • Low-cost GPRS volume tariffs allow permanent and wireless online linking of machines or plants to a master center • Design of GPRS-based automation networks without special contracts with mobile radio providers over closed virtual private networks (VPN) • Low operating costs due to selectable cyclic or event-based transmission • Free selection of central control station location through use of Internet • Protection against tapping and manipulation of transmitted data between S7-200 station and OPC server of the SINAUT MICRO SC by means of encryption and scrambling algorithms • Fast detection of communication faults thanks to clear monitoring of all S7-200 station connections • No complex radio planning, therefore fast commissioning with low project costs • Fast generation of applications through matched combination of automation components with the Micro Automation Set 21 (http://www.siemens.com/microset)

■ Application

• Configuration of systems for monitoring and controlling simple telecontrol tasks • Energy-saving concepts for plants, e.g. through statusdependent speed control of pumps in remote stations • Control and monitoring e.g. of: - sewage treatment plants, water treatment - oil and gas supplies - district heating networks - power distribution - pumping stations - automatic machines - traffic control systems - buildings - intelligent advertising panels - weather stations - lighthouses and buoys - wind generators and photovoltaic plants • Linking of mobile stations, with central monitoring/control of track vehicles, special vehicles, local public transport, complex building machines, ships on rivers and in coastal areas


7 Control center


Internet


GSM/GPRS provider


G_IK10_XX_30149

■ Overview

Communication between SIMATIC S7-200 systems via MICRO SC control center


7/117

SINAUT Telecontrol

Software

SINAUT MICRO SC

■ Design

Combination of SINAUT MICRO and SINAUT ST7 SINAUT MICRO and SINAUT ST7 use different protocols for data transmission. However, it is possible to combine a SINAUT MICRO system with a SINAUT ST7 system. This is carried out in the PC of the control center over the OPC server of the SINAUT MICRO SC.

WinCC

MICRO SC OPC server

ST7cc

S7-200 stations

SINAUT ST7 stations

■ Function • Access to SIMATIC S7-200 variables over the OPC interface • Wireless communication between S7-200 stations through the integral routing function • WinCC and WinCC flexible can be used as clients • Configuration of monitoring time and time synchronization of S7-200 stations • Adjustable cyclic transmission of all variables; transmission of variables can be combined with monitoring • Event-based communication with the S7-200 stations • Input screens for creation of S7-200 stations • The PC on which the MICRO SC software is installed must be permanently accessible from the GPRS network. The PC must therefore be directly connected to the GPRS network using a dedicated line, or permanently to the Internet, e.g. by means of DSL.

7

Security • Password authentication for establishment of connection by an S7-200 station • Secure data transfer between modem, Internet and SINAUT MICRO SC using encryption algorithms Diagnostics • Integrated diagnostic functions for: - tabular overall view of connection status of all stations - connection status as list - adjustable refresh response - manual scanning of connection status - integral diagnostics functions for monitoring of connections

7/118


G_IK10_XX_30150

OPC communication

When using WinCC in the control center

Non-Siemens system OPC communication MICRO SC OPC server

S7-200 stations

ST7cc

SINAUT ST7 stations

When using a non-Siemens system in the control center

G_IK10_XX_30151

The SINAUT MICRO SC software package consisting of: • Block library for the S7-200 CPU (CPU 224 or higher) • OPC server software for the PC control center - for data exchange with an OPC client, e.g. WinCC or WinCC Flexible • Connection manager software for the PC control center - for configuration of a secure GPRS connection with an MD720-3 modem - for monitoring these connections and - for data routing in the case of cross-communication between SIMATIC S7-200 and S7-200

SINAUT Telecontrol

Software

SINAUT MICRO SC


■ Ordering data

Controls that are supported

S7-200 CPU 224 or higher (block library included in scope of supply)

Number of stations that can be used

8, 64 or 256 controllers

Interfaces to the OPC Client

• DCOM protocol • OPC "data access interface V2.05" • Synchronous and asynchronous reading of variables

Interfaces and functions for the SIMATIC S7-200

• Writing of variables in the SIMATIC S7 in the case of value changes to OPC variables • Transfer of SIMATIC S7 data to OPC variables (for event-driven communication from the SIMATIC S7) • Activatable cyclic reading of variables; adjustable time interval • Monitoring of connected SIMATIC S7 with time-of-day synchronization • Routing of data packets between connected SIMATIC S7-200 stations • Protocol optimized for GRPS; tunnel configuration from GPRS modem • Via Internet access as server with public IP address (recommendation: Fixed public Internet address)

Diagnostics data

Integral OPC client for connection monitoring

Configuration

Using integral configuration tool

SINAUT MICRO SC Single license for one installation; OPC server for GPRS communication with S7-200; connection management with 8, 64 or 256 remote stations; routing for connections between S7-200 stations; connection monitoring; German and English GUI; for Windows XP Professional SP 2 and higher, Windows 2003 Server SP 1, Windows 2000 Professional/Server SP 4; manual on CD-ROM in German and English (Chinese available soon) • SINAUT MICRO SC8 connection management for 8 remote stations; • SINAUT MICRO SC64 connection management for 64 remote stations; • SINAUT MICRO SC256 connection management for 256 remote stations;

Order No.

6NH9 910-0AA10-0AA3

6NH9 910-0AA10-0AA6

6NH9 910-0AA10-0AA8

Accessories SINAUT MD720-3 GPRS modem for IP-based data transmission over GSM networks, quad band, AT command interface, automatic establishment of GPRS connection, switchable to CSD mode, RS232, including gender changer for RS232/PPI adapter; manual on CD-ROM in German, English, Chinese

6NH9 720-3AA0

ANT 794-4MR antenna Quad band antenna, omnidirectional with 5 m cable

6NH9 860-1AA0


7

7/119

SINAUT Telecontrol

Accessories

Connecting cables

■ Overview A range of standard connecting cables is available for interconnecting SINAUT components or connecting them to the relevant WAN. Some of these connecting cables are part of the scope of supply of the hardware components and others can be ordered as required.

7

7/120


SINAUT Telecontrol

Accessories

Connecting cables

■ Overview (continued) Connecting cables for connecting TIM and modem modules Order No.

Description

6NH7701-4AL

Connecting cable for connecting TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 (RS232) with one of the SINAUT ST7 modems MD2, MD3 or MD4 (RS232). Also suitable for coupling the so-called modems to a SIMATIC point-to-point CP such as CP 340, CP 342 or CP 441 with RS232 interface. Cable length 1.5 m

TIM3V/4

Connecting cable for connecting TIM 4 (RS485) with one of the SINAUT ST7 modems MD2, MD3 or MD4 (RS485). Cable length 1.5 m TIM3V/4

6NH7701-1CB

6NH7701-4BN

6NH7701-0AR

6NH1701-7AN

Connecting cable for connecting TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 (RS232) with the GSM kit M20, TC35 or MC45 (access to GSM network). Also suitable for non-Siemens modems or transmitters with RS232 standard. Cable length 2.5 m.

Connecting cable with one free end for connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 with a non-Siemens modem or transmitter (RS232). Cable length 2.5 m

Test cable. Connecting cable for connecting two TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 using their RS232 interfaces without using modems (null modem). Cable length 6 m

MD2

M20, TC35, MC45

TIM3V/4

7

TIM3V/4

nonSiemens modem, transmitter

TIM3V/4

TIM3V/4

Connecting cable for connecting TIM 11 (RS232) with one of the SINAUT ST7 modems MD2, MD3 or MD4 (RS232). Cable length 2.5 m TIM11 (SINAUT ST1)

6NH1701-7BK

MD2/3/4 RSM

Connecting cable for connecting two MD2 (RS232) modems to create a repeater. Cable length 0.3 m MD2

6NH7701-5AN

MD

MD

Connecting cable for connecting TIM 011B (RS232) with one of the SINAUT ST7 modems MD2, MD3 or MD4 (RS232). Cable length 1.0 m. TIM 011B (SINAUT ST1)

MD


G_IK10_XX_30072

6NH7701-4DL

Figure

7/121

SINAUT Telecontrol

Accessories

Connecting cables

■ Overview (continued) Connecting cables for WAN connection The connecting cables can also be ordered as spare parts by quoting the numbers indicated.

Order No.

Description

6NH7700-2AR60

Connecting cable with 2 x RJ12 connectors for connecting an MD2 (RJ12 modem) with an LTOP overvoltage protection module (RJ12). The connecting cable is also suitable for an MD2 modem which is integrated into a TIM module. Cable length 6 m

6NH7700-3BR60

6NH7700-4AR60

7

Figure

Connecting cable with 2 x RJ12 Western connectors and snap-on TAE6N connectors for connecting an MD3 modem (RJ12) with a telephone socket (TAE6N) or LTOP overvoltage protection module (RJ12) if the MD3 modem is used as modem for the dedicated line. The connecting cable is also suitable for an MD3 modem which is integrated into a TIM module. Cable length 6 m

Connecting cable with RJ12 and RJ45 Western connector for connecting an MD4 modem (RJ12) with an ISDN-S0 socket (RJ45). The connecting cable can also be used for an MD4 modem which is integrated into a TIM module. Cable length 6 m

RJ12

RJ12

TAE6N

RJ12

RJ12

RJ12

RJ45

G_IK10_XX_30073

A 6NH7700-xxx connecting cable is supplied with every TIM module with a built-in MD modem as well as with every MD modem. It can be used to connect the MD modem built into the TIM or the separate modem to the relevant WAN.

Interface adapter cable for TIM 4R/4RD

An adapter cable is required to connect the second serial interface with an external modem or other transmission devices. An RJ45 connector is located at one end of this cable and

a 9-pin Sub-D miniature connector at the other, to which the standard cable for the modem/transmission device can be connected (for selection see Table Connecting cables for connecting TIM and modem modules). The adapter cable is supplied with every TIM 4R/4RD module. However, it can also be ordered as a spare part by quoting the number in the table below.

Order No.

Description

6NH7700-0AS05

Adapter cable for the second serial RS232/485 interface of the TIM4R/4RD for connecting the internal connector (RJ45) to the 9-pole Sub-D miniature connector required externally. Cable length 0.5 m

Figure RJ45

TIM4R TIM4RD

7/122


9pol. Sub-D MD

G_IK10_XX_30074

Instead of a built-in modem, the TIM 4R/TIM 4RD features a second serial interface (combined RS 232/485). The interface connector, which can be accessed in the same place as the RJ12 connector on the built-in modem, is an 8-pin RJ45 connector.

SINAUT Telecontrol

Accessories

Connecting cables

■ Ordering data Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 with a SINAUT ST7 MD2, MD3 or MD4 modem; Cable length 1.5 m • RS 232 Also suitable for interfacing the modems listed with a SIMATIC point-to-point CP such as the CP 340, CP 341 or CP 441 with RS 232 interface • RS 485 (not for TIM 3V-IE)

Order No.

6NH7 701-4AL

6NH7 701-4DL

Connecting cable For connecting two MD2 modems (RS 232) in order to create a repeater; Cable length 0.3 m

6NH7 701-1CB

Connecting cable For connecting a TIM 3V-IE/TIM 4 (RS 232) with the M20, TC35 or MC45 GSM kit (access to the GSM network); also suitable for third-party modems or radio equipment with RS 232 standard interface; Cable length 2.5 m

6NH7 701-5AN

Connecting cable open at one end For connecting a TIM3V/TIM4 with a third-party modem or radio unit (RS 232 or RS 485); Cable length 2.5 m

6NH7 701-4BN

Test cable Connecting cable for connecting two TIM3V/TIM4 modules via their RS232 interface without modems (null modem); Cable length 6 m

6NH7 701-0AR

Order No. Connecting cable with 2 x RJ12 connectors For connecting an MD2 modem (RJ12) with an LTOP overvoltage protection module (RJ12); also suitable for an MD2 built into a TIM; Cable length 6 m

6NH7 700-2AR60

Connecting cable with 2 x RJ12 Western connectors and snap-on TAE6N connector For connecting an MD3 modem (RJ12) with a telephone socket (TAE6N) or with an LTOP overvoltage protection module (RJ12) if the MD3 modem is operated as a dedicated-line modem; also suitable for an MD3 built into a TIM. Cable length 6 m

6NH7 700-3BR60

Connecting cable with RJ12 and RJ45 Western connectors For connecting an MD4 modem (RJ12) with an ISDN S0 socket (RJ45); also suitable for an MD4 built into a TIM. Cable length 6 m

6NH7 700-4AR60

Adapter cable For the second RS 232/485 serial interface on a TIM 4R/4RD, for converting the internal connector (RJ45) to the 9-pin Sub-D miniature connector required externally; Cable length 0.5 m

6NH7 700-0AS05

7


7/123

SINAUT Telecontrol


D

■ Overview

■ Application

Fixed or radio network

PG/PC

Modem (PG/PC)

TeleService increases the effective availability of plants and machines. The use of TeleService means that technical services (e.g., maintenance, updating, fault analysis) can be carried out cost-effectively from a central service center.

TS Adapter II

MPI

S7-400

S7-300

C7

PROFIBUS DP DP Slave

7

TeleService can be used for remote maintenance of SIMATIC S7/C7 automation systems via a wired or radio network using a PG/PC. The known functionality of STEP 7 and the engineering tools are available to the user, comparable with a local MPI connection.

S7-CPU

• For remote maintenance of SIMATIC S7/C7 automation systems using a wired or radio network • Functions: - access to remote plants (remote maintenance): Distributed systems can be centrally managed, controlled and monitored using remote connections (can be used in SIMATIC S7-300 and S7-400). - establishment of connection from/to remote plants (PG-AS remote coupling). - data exchange between plants (AS-AS remote coupling): Exchange of process data between two SIMATIC automation systems over the telephone network. - sending a text message: A SIMATIC automation system can send a text message via a GSM radio modem. • For use on the SIMATIC S7-300, S7-400, C7

In addition to remote maintenance, remote coupling can be established to a PG/PC using an FB call and program control. This coupling permits the exchange of process data between an S7 CPU and the PG/PC with support of PRODAVE MPI.

■ Design Different components are required in accordance with the TeleService function. For remote maintenance: • Engineering Software TeleService. • One Hayes-compatible modem on the PG/PC side and one on the plant side (not necessary with TS Adapter II). • TS Adapter, plant side. • Modem cable for connecting the PG/PC and modem (service-side). • Modem cable for connecting the TS Adapter and modem (included in TS Adapter II package). Required in addition to the components for remote maintenance in the case of PG/PLC remote coupling: • PRODAVE MPI V5.0 and higher for PG/PC: Toolbox for process data traffic between SIMATIC S7/C7 for autonomous processing of data traffic. • "PG_DIAL" function block (included in TeleService software package) for the PLC. Required in addition to the components for remote maintenance in the case of PLC/PLC remote coupling: • TS Adapter for the second PLC. • "AS_DIAL" function block (included in TeleService software package) for the PLCs. For sending SMSes: • Engineering Software TeleService Version 5.2 and higher. • 1 GSM wireless modem on plant side, Hayes-compatible. • TS Adapter, plant side. • Modem cable for connecting the TS Adapter and modem (included in TS Adapter II package).

7/124


SINAUT Telecontrol


■ Design (continued) TS Adapter II The following features are new to TS Adapter II as compared to the predecessor TS Adapter 5.2: • Single-width standard S7-300 housing. • Mounted onto DIN or S7-profile rail, therefore no time-consuming cabinet installation required using a mounting plate. • Integral modem, either analog or ISDN as required. • USB interface for parameterization (V5.2: Serial interface). This means that notebooks without a serial interface can also be used. This interface can also be used locally as a programming interface for the connected devices. • Serial RS232 interface for connecting external modems (e.g. wireless modem). • Firmware with update-capability, e.g. for error rectification (not possible with V5.2). • Power supply over MPI or over external 24 V power supply (5.2 V only over MPI). This ensures that there will be no problems with the power supply locally. • Connection of an external modem, e.g. a GSM wireless modem, over serial interface. • Can be connected to: - MPI - PROFIBUS DP up to 12 Mbit/s (previously 1.5 Mbit/s) - PPI Scope of delivery: The following components are supplied with the TS Adapter II: • CD with driver • TeleService Software V6.0 (can be used for 14 days; a license must be obtained thereafter) • MPI cable, 0.8 m, for connecting the adapter to the MPI/DP interface. • USB cable, 5 m, for parameterizing the adapter; it can also be used for programming the connected devices. • Standard telephone cable, 3 m, with RJ12 connectors (only for analog TS Adapter II). • Standard telephone cable, 3 m, with RJ45 connectors (only for ISDN TS Adapter II). • TAE6N connector.

■ Function The following functionalities are provided for remote maintenance with TeleService: • Parameterization of modems: Parameterization is supported on the PG/PC side by Windows functions. On the plant side, the TS adapter (with default settings) takes over parameterization. • Electronic phone book: For supporting plant administration (e.g., phone number, location). • Multilevel access enable program: Uses password and/or callback number to prevent unauthorized connections being made to a plant. • Callback functionality: The plant automatically calls back the service center following a TeleService call. • Routing of the PG functionality: Routing using TeleService is supported exactly as with a local connection. Prerequisites are S7/M7 CPUs and CP modules with routing capability. • Import/export of the TS adapter parameters: The parameters can be saved in a file (*.tap) on the programming device/PC, and downloaded again. The remote link in the configuration with the TS adapter also supports the following functionality: • Program-controlled FB call: For coupling between S7 CPU and PG/PC. Acceptance of calls on the PG/PC side is ensured by PRODAVE MPI and TeleService. • Triggering for exchange of process data also on the PG/PC side by PRODAVE MPI. New in TeleService V6.0: • TeleService V6.0 is independent of STEP 7. • Support for the new TS Adapter II. • Authorization over the new Automation License Manager. • Exclusively for use with Windows 2000, Windows XP Home and Windows XP Professional.

When using the TS Adapter II modem outside Germany, a standard national telephone plug can be snapped onto the RJ12 connector. A TAE6N connector is supplied for Germany. In some countries, telephone sockets with RJ12 sockets are available, in which case telephone cables can be used without the need for a telephone plug. For operation, TeleService Software Version 6.0 is required.


7/125

7

SINAUT Telecontrol



■ Ordering data

Technical specifications from TeleService see "Engineering Tools".

Order No.

TeleService, Version 6.0


125 x 110 x 40

Weight, approx.

250 g

Ports • to S7/C7 • to PC • to external modem • to analog telephone system • to ISDN telephone system

RS 485 (max. 12 Mbit/s) USB 1.1 (12 Mbit/s) RS 232 (max. 115 Kbaud) RJ12 RJ45

Task: Remote maintenance of SIMATIC S7/C7 by means of fixed or radio network Target system: SIMATIC S7-200, SIMATIC S7-300, SIMATIC S7-400, SIMATIC C7 Requirement: TS Adapter (STEP 7 not required) Delivery package: on CD, German, English, French, Spanish, Italian; with electronic documentation

24 V DC


6ES7 842-0CC10-0YA5

Current consumption

60 mA (typ.) / 120 mA (max.)

• Floating License Upgrade (from each previous version)

6ES7 842-0CC10-0YE5

Max. inrush current

0.7 A; 8 µs


6ES7 842-0CA01-0YX2


IP20

6ES7 972-0CB35-0XA0

Temperature • Operation • Storage/transport

± 0 °C to +60 °C -40 °C to +70 °C

TS Adapter II Analog With MPI connection and RS 232; 9-pole, male (modem side) TS Adapter II ISDN With MPI connection and RS 232; 9-pole, male (modem side)

6ES7 972-0CC35-0XA0

SIMATIC Manual Collection Electronic manuals on CD-ROM, five languages: S7-200/300/400, C7, LOGO!, SIMATIC DP, PC, PG, STEP 7, engineering software, runtime software, PCS 7, SIMATIC HMI, SIMATIC NET

6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0


6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE2

TS Adapter II

Voltage is supplied externally or through MPI interface

7

7 7/126


Network transitions

8/2 8/2 8/3 8/3 8/4 8/4 8/5 8/5 8/8 8/8 8/12 8/12 8/17 8/21 8/21 8/26 8/26 8/30 8/32 8/32

Introduction Industrial Ethernet – PROFIBUS network transition IWLAN – PROFIBUS network transition Industrial Ethernet – AS-Interface network transition Industrial Ethernet – MODBUS network transition PROFIBUS – AS-Interface network transition PROFIBUS – EIB network transition PROFIBUS – MODBUS network transition IWLAN – PROFIBUS network transition IWLAN/PB Link PN IO Industrial Ethernet – PROFIBUS network transition IE/PB Link PN IO IE/PB link Industrial Ethernet – AS-Interface network transition IE/AS-i LINK PN IO PROFIBUS DP – AS-Interface network transition DP/AS-i LINK Advanced DP/AS-Interface Link 20E PROFIBUS DP – EIB network transition DP/EIB Link

PROFIBUS DP – PROFIBUS PA network transition Sec. 4 DP/PA coupler Sec. 4 DP/PA Link PROFIBUS DP – RS 232C network transition Sec. 4 PROFIBUS DP/RS 232C Link


Network transitions Introduction

■ Overview Network transition

IE/PB Link PN IO or IE/PB Link

Industrial Ethernet

PROFIBUS

S7-200 CP 243-1

S7-300

CP 343-1 CP 343-1 Advanced

CP 342-5 CP 342-5 FO CP 343-5

S7-400 CP 443-1 CP 443-1 Advanced


PC

CP 1604

8 Industrial Ethernet – PROFIBUS network transitions

8/2


Microbox

G_IK10_XX_40001

CP 5613 A2/ CP 5613 FO CP 5614 A2/ CP 5614 FO CP 5611 A2 CP 5512

CP 1613 A2 CP 1616


■ Overview (continued) SCALANCE W788-1PRO W788-2PRO

Industrial Ethernet

PROFIBUS

PROFIBUS

Industrial Ethernet IWLAN/PB Link PN IO SCALANCE W788-1PRO W788-2PRO

Industrial Ethernet

IWLAN RCoax Cable

G_IK10_XX_30037

PROFIBUS IWLAN/PB Link PN IO

IWLAN – PROFIBUS network transitions

Network transition IE/AS-I LINK PN IO

CP 243-1 CP 243-1 IT


S7-200

S7-300

AS-Interface

8

CP 243-2

CP 343-2 CP 343-2 P

G_IK10_XX_40002

Industrial Ethernet

Industrial Ethernet – AS-Interface network transitions


8/3


■ Overview (continued) Network transition Industrial Ethernet


MODBUS

S7-300 CP 341 with loadable drivers 1)


CP 441-2 with loadable drivers 1) 1) see Catalog ST 70

G_IK10_XX_40003

S7-400

Industrial Ethernet – MODBUS network transitions

Network transition DP/AS-i LINK Advanced or DP/AS-Interface Link 20E

PROFIBUS

AS-Interface

S7-200 CP 243-2

BM 141 BM 142 BM 147

8

ET 200X CP 142-2

ET 200M IM 153

CPU 31x-2 CP 342-5 CP 342-5 FO CP 343-5

CP 343-2 CP 343-2 P

S7-300 CP 343-2 CP 343-2 P

IM 308-C CP 5431 FMS/DP

PROFIBUS – AS-Interface network transitions

8/4


CP 2430

G_IK10_XX_40010

S5-115U to -115U


■ Overview (continued) Network transition PROFIBUS

G_IK10_XX_40004

EIB

DP/EIB Link

PROFIBUS – EIB network transitions

Network transition

MODBUS

PROFIBUS


S7-300

S7-400

CP 341 with loadable drivers

1)

CP 441-2 with loadable drivers

1)

1) see Catalog ST 70

G_IK10_XX_40005

CP 342-5 CP 342-5 FO CP 343-5

PROFIBUS – MODBUS network transitions

8


8/5


■ Application The advantages of Industrial Ethernet, PROFIBUS, EIB and AS-Interface can be utilized in a common bus system by means of special links. S7-400 e.g. with CP 443-1 Advanced

PC with SOFTNET PN IO

S7-300 e.g. with CP 343-1

PROFINET

ET 200pro ET 200S

PROFIBUS

ET 200pro ET 200S When IE/AS-i LINK PN IO is used as dual master AS-Interface

AS-Interface

Power Safety supply monitor unit

8


Laser scanner

Power supply unit

The following links are available: • IE/PB Link and IE/PB Link PN IO for the transition from Industrial Ethernet to PROFIBUS (also for fail-safe communication) • IE/AS-i LINK PN IO for the transition from Industrial Ethernet to AS-Interface • IWLAN/PB Link PN IO for the transition from IWLAN to PROFIBUS • DP/AS-i LINK Advanced and DP/AS-Interface Link 20E for the transition from PROFIBUS to AS-Interface • DP/EIB Link for the transition from PROFIBUS to KNX/EIB In the case of PLCs such as e.g. SIMATIC S7-200, S7-300, S7-400, SINUMERIK or SIMOTION C, data is exchanged between the individual networks by means of communications processors or integrated interfaces. The data is linked by means of a PLC, and therefore passed on to the other network already preprocessed.


LOGO!


Network transitions from one bus system to another are implemented using links, PLCs or PCs. In the case of PLCs or PCs, this can take place via integrated interfaces and communications processors (CPs). Links pass on the data autonomously from one network to the other.

8/6

Field device

Safety monitor

DP/AS-i LINK Advanced AS-Interface

Power supply unit

LOGO!


Safety monitor

G_IK10_XX_40016

IE/AS-i LINK PN IO

Field device

IE/PB LINK PN IO

S7-300 e.g. with CP 342-5

PROFINET network transition with proxy functionality PROFIBUS segments can be connected to Industrial Ethernet via PROFINET proxys. This connection can be implemented using a solution with the SIMATIC WinAC PN optional package, SIMATIC S7-300/400-CPUs with DP and PN interface, IE/PB Link or via the IE/PB Link PN IO. For a wireless network transition, a SCALANCE W-700 Access Point with the IWLAN/PB Link PN IO can be used. This allows all PROFIBUS standard slaves to be used unchanged for PROFINET.


■ Application (continued)


PROFINET Based on Industrial Ethernet, PROFINET enables direct communication of field devices (IO devices) with controllers (IO controllers) as well as the solution of isochronous drive controls for motion control applications. PROFINET also supports distributed automation with the help of component engineering (Component Based Automation).

Important note: It is important to note the restrictions for use of the specified SIMATIC Net products (Order Nos. 6GK..., 6XV1...) which you can view in the Internet:. Additional information is available in the Internet: http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info

PROFIBUS DP device types PROFIBUS DP distinguishes between two different master classes and different DP functions: DP Master Class 1 The DP Master Class 1 is the central component on PROFIBUS DP. The central controller or PC exchanges information with distributed stations (DP slaves) in a fixed, repeated message cycle. DP Master Class 2 Devices of this type are used (programming, configuration or control devices) during start-up, for configuring the DP system or for controlling the plant during normal operation (diagnostics). A DP Master Class 2 can be used, for example, to read the input, output, diagnostics and configuration data of the slaves. DP slave A DP slave is an I/O station that reads in input data and transfers output data to the I/O. The volume of input and output data depends on the device and can be up to 244 byte. The functional scope can differ between DP Master Class 1 and 2 or DP slaves. This determines the performance and availability of a communications processor. AS-Interface master AS-Interface is a single-master system and consists of a master, an AS-Interface power supply and the stations, referred to as slaves. The masters, e.g. communications processors or links, handle data exchange with the slaves.

8 PN

IO-C

IO-D

DP-M

DP-S

ASi-M

CBA


8/7

Network transitions

IWLAN — PROFIBUS network transition IWLAN/PB Link PN IO

■ Overview

■ Benefits

PN

DP-M

DP-S

ASi-M

• High mobility; increased plant availability through wireless data transmission to mobile communication partners, e.g. to control an automated guided vehicle system (AGVS) • Wear-free; contact-free technology with RCoax as a substitute for contact wires, e.g. in monorail overhead conveyors • Integration of PROFIBUS field devices into an IWLAN radio network (investment protection) • Designed for compatibility with Power Rail Booster; optimized for installation in overhead conveyors with ET 200S • Flexible implementation by connecting an IWLAN antenna or an alternative antenna for RCoax cable • Module replacement without the need for a programming device, using the C-PLUG swap media for backing up the configuration data

■ Application IO-C

8

IO-D

CBA

• Compact router between Industrial Wireless LAN and PROFIBUS • Flexible integration of field level systems into an IWLAN radio infrastructure according to IEEE 802.11b/g and IEEE 802.11a with up to 54 Mbit/s at 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz with SCALANCE W Access Points • PROFINET IO proxy; connection of PROFIBUS DP slaves to PROFINET IO controller according to PROFINET standard: - from the viewpoint of the IO-controller, all DP slaves are handled like I/O devices with Ethernet interface, i.e. the IWLAN/PB Link PN IO is their proxy. - from the viewpoint of the DP slaves, the IWLAN/PB Link PN IO is the DP master • Connection of a WLAN antenna or alternatively an antenna for operation with an RCoax cable (radiating cable) • Communication with programmable controllers in mobile applications such as automated guided vehicles, storage and retrieval systems or monorail overhead conveyors • Direct substitution of solutions with Power Rail Booster for PROFIBUS with non-contact data transmission technology; Advantages: No wear of sliding contacts • For installation in the casing of the Power Rail Booster (common with overhead conveyor and automated guided vehicles) to degree of protection IP20 • High, reliable data throughput together with rapid roaming • High degree of protection against unauthorized access thanks to 128-bit encoding (AES) • Module replacement without the need for a programming device, using the C-PLUG swap media for backing up the configuration data • Integration in STEP 7

8/8


The IWLAN Link PN IO supports the use of an IWLAN with RCoax and WLAN antennas for wireless or contact-free data transmission e.g. in monorail overhead conveyors or storage and retrieval systems. With the support of PROFINET the numerous different PROFIBUS system functions, such as diagnosis over the bus, remain available. • Monorail overhead conveyors; vehicle controllers for monorail overhead conveyors can be implemented at low cost on the basis of SIMATIC components. High availability, short response times and easy expansion can be achieved by using distributed controllers, such as SIMATIC ET 200S IM 151/CPU. The IWLAN/PB Link PN IO allows the vehicle control systems to be used unchanged. The user can also program them remotely with STEP 7 over IWLAN. • Storage and retrieval systems; with these systems, data light barriers requiring intensive maintenance can be replaced by an IWLAN solution. This enhances plant availability.

■ Design The IWLAN/PB Link PN IO is snapped onto a standard rail, and the outer dimensions correspond to the housing of the Power Rail Booster. Using a connector, either an antenna for RCoax or an antenna for an IWLAN radio field can be connected. The degree of protection IP20 ensures that the IWLAN/PB Link PN IO is suitable for installation in the control cabinet. • Compact design; the rugged plastic casing features on the front: - an R-SMA interface for connecting antennae - one 9-pin Sub-D socket for connection to PROFIBUS - one 4-pin terminal strip for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC. - Diagnostic LEDs • Can be operated without a fan • Fast device replacement in the event of a fault by using the optional C-PLUG swap medium (not included in scope of supply)

Network transitions


■ Function PROFINET • PROFINET IO proxy; wireless connection of PROFIBUS DP slaves to PROFINET IO controller according to PROFINET standard Diagnostics Extensive diagnostic options are available via STEP 7 or SNMP, including: • Diagnosis of the assigned PROFINET field devices; using the IWLAN/PB Link PN IO as a proxy, the connected DP slaves can be diagnosed in the same manner as PROFINET IO devices (also in the user program of the PROFINET IO controller)

• • • • •

General diagnostics and statistics functions Connection diagnostics LAN controller statistics Diagnostics Buffer Integration into network management systems through the support of SNMP V1 MIB-II

Configuring With STEP 7 V 5.3 SP2 or higher (HSP IWLAN/PB Link PN IO necessary), the parameters required for the IWLAN/PB Link PN IO, e.g. the addresses, are assigned and all the necessary routing information is automatically generated.

■ Integration SIMATIC S7-400 with CP 443-1 Advanced




PROFIBUS






PROFIBUS

Antenna ANT792-4DN


IWLAN/PB IWL Link PN IO

8

PROFIBUS

G_IK10_XX_300333


Monorail overhead conveyor

System solution with IWLAN/PB Link PN IO using example of monorail overhead conveyor


8/9

Network transitions



■ Ordering data

Data transmission rates • Radio - standards supported

1 … 54 Mbit/s 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g

• PROFIBUS

9.6 kbit/s … 12 Mbit/s incl. 45.45 kbit/s (PROFIBUS PA)

Interfaces • Connection to Industrial Wireless LAN

RSMA antenna socket

• Connection to PROFIBUS - maximum segment length for PROFIBUS 1) - maximum current consumption at the PROFIBUS interface with connection of network components (for example, optical network components)

9-pin Sub-D socket 20 m



Power supply 2)

2 supplies for 20.4 … 28.8 V DC

100 mA at 5 V

Current consumption (at rated voltage) • External from 24 V DC, max.

300 mA

Power loss

approx. 6.5 W

Order No.

6GK1 417-5AB00 6GK1 417-5AB01


6GK1 900-0AB00


Delivered with STEP 7 V5.3

Documentation S7-CPs/NCM Paper version for Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS; manual package for configuring S7-CPs, IE/PB Link and PC-Station (STEP 7 V5.3) • German

6GK7 080-0AA01-8AA0

• English

6GK7 080-0AA01-8BA0

S7-300 power supply PS 307 24 V DC

6ES7 307-1BA00-0AA0 6XV1 875-2A

Performance data

IWLAN RCoax cables Radiating cables for complex radio environments as special antenna for SCALANCE W Access Points; for enhanced temperature range (-40 °C … + 85 °C); sold by the meter • 2.4 GHz

PROFINET communication

• 5 GHz

6XV1 875-2D

IWLAN RCoax N-Connect Female Antenna ANT792-4DN RCoax helical antenna with circular polarization for RCoax systems; 2.4 GHz; N-Connect female connection; antenna gain 1 dB at 2.4 GHz; degree of protection IP67; ambient temperature -20 °C … +60 °C

6GK5 792-4DN00-0AA6

IWLAN RCoax N-Connect Female Antenna ANT793-4MN RCoax 5/8 antenna, vertical polarization for RCoax systems; 5 GHz; N-Connect female connection; degree of protection IP67; ambient temperature -20 °C … +60 °C

6GK5 793-4MN00-0AA6


0 °C … + 60 °C


- 40 °C … + 70 °C


95 % at +25 °C


Power Rail Booster enclosure


90 x 132 x 75

• Weight

approx. 300 g


IP20

Configuration Configuration software

8

IWLAN/PB Link PN IO Network transition between Industrial Wireless LAN and PROFIBUS with PROFINET IO functionality, TCP/IP, S7-Routing, IEEE 802.11 b/g/a at 2.4/5 GHz to 54 Mbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s PROFIBUS; including electronic manual on CD-ROM German, English, French, Spanish, Italian • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation inside the U.S.A. and Canada

STEP 7/NCM S7 with V5.3 SP2 or later plus Hardware Support Package for IWLAN/PB Link PN IO

• Number of DP slaves on the IWLAN/PB Link PN IO (PROFINET IO-Devices for PROFINET IO)

max. 8

• Number of DP inputs.

max. 256 byte

• Number of DP outputs.

max. 256 byte

Additional functionality • Number of S7 connections

max. 8

• Number of DSGW connections

max. 8

1) A repeater is required if the specified length is exceeded 2) The power supply is electrically isolated; a high-impedance connection (>700 kΩ) exists to the contact spring for mounting of the enclosure on the DIN rail).

8/10


6XV1 875-2A

Network transitions


■ Ordering data SCALANCE W788-1PRO IWLAN Access Point with built-in radio interface; radio networks IEEE 802.11b/g/a at 2.4/5 GHz to 54 Mbit/s; national approvals; WPA/AES; Power over Ethernet (PoE), degree of protection IP65 (-20 °C … +60 °C); scope of supply: 2 antennas ANT795-4MR, IP67 hybrid plug-in connector, assembly material, manual on CD-ROM; German/English • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation inside the U.S.A. and Canada SCALANCE W788-2PRO IWLAN Dual Access Point with two built-in radio interfaces; radio networks IEEE 802.11b/g/a at 2.4/5 GHz to 54 Mbit/s; national approvals; WPA/AES; Power over Ethernet (PoE), degree of protection IP65 (-20 °C … +60 °C); scope of supply: 2 antennas ANT795-4MR, IP67 hybrid plug-in connector, assembly material, manual on CD-ROM; German/English • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation inside the U.S.A. and Canada SCALANCE W788-1RR IWLAN Access Point with built-in radio interface; Industrial Wireless LAN Rapid Roaming (IWLAN RR) or Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN); radio networks IEEE 802.11b/g/a at 2.4/5 GHz to 54 Mbit/s; national approvals; WPA/AES; Power over Ethernet (PoE), degree of protection IP65 (-20 °C … +60 °C); scope of supply: 2 antennas ANT795-4MR, IP67 hybrid plug-in connector, assembly material, manual on CD-ROM; German/English • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation inside the U.S.A. and Canada SCALANCE W788-2RR IWLAN Dual Access Point with two built-in radio interfaces; Industrial Wireless LAN Rapid Roaming (IWLAN RR) or Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN); radio networks IEEE 802.11b/g/a at 2.4/5 GHz to 54 Mbit/s; national approvals; WPA/AES; Power over Ethernet (PoE), degree of protection IP65 (-20 °C … +60 °C); scope of supply: 2 antennas ANT795-4MR, P67 hybrid plug-in connector, assembly material, manual on CD-ROM; German/English • National approvals for operation outside the U.S.A. and Canada • National approvals for operation inside the U.S.A. and Canada

Order No.

Order No. RCoax N-Connect Male Termination Impedance Terminating resistor, 50 Ohm

6GK5 795-1TN00-1AA0

RCoax N-Connect Female N-Connector Plug-in connector for assembly in the field

6GK5 798-0CN00-0AA0

RCoax N-Connect male/male Flexible connecting cable e.g. between two RCoax segments 6GK5 788-1ST00-2AA6 6GK5 788-1ST00-2AB6

6GK5 788-2ST00-2AA6 6GK5 788-2ST00-2AB6

•1m

6XV1 875-5AH10

•5m

6XV1 875-5AH50

RCoax N-Connect/R-SMA male/male Flexible connecting cable for components with R-SMA connection and RCoax N-Connect •1m

6XV1 875-5CH10

•5m

6XV1 875-5CH50

RCoax R-SMA/SMA Male/Male Flexible Connection Cable Flexible cable for connecting an IWLAN/PB Link PN IO to components with R-SMA and SMA connections, e.g. cabinet feedthrough; assembled with two R-SMA to N-male connectors • 0.3 m

6XV1 875-5DE30

RCoax N-Connect/R-SMA female/female panel feedthrough Panel feedthrough for wall thicknesses up to 5.5 mm, R-SMA female and N-female connections

6GK5 798-0PT00-2AA0

Preset-PLUG Swap medium for simple initial startup of IWLAN clients, e.g. SCALANCE W-740 client modules or IWLAN/PB Link PN IO

6GK5 798-8AB00

8

6GK5 788-1SR00-2AA6 6GK5 788-1SR00-2AB6

6GK5 788-2SR00-2AA6 6GK5 788-2SR00-2AB6


8/11

Network transitions

Industrial Ethernet — PROFIBUS network transition IE/PB Link PN IO

■ Overview

PN

IO-C

IO-D

DP-M

CBA

8

8/12


DP-S

ASi-M

• Compact network transition between Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS • Connection to Industrial Ethernet with 10/100 Mbit/s full/half duplex connection with autosensing for automatic switchover • Connection to PROFIBUS with 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s incl. 45.45 kbit/s for PROFIBUS PA • PROFINET IO proxy; connection of PROFIBUS DP slaves to PROFINET IO controller via real-time communication (RT) according to PROFINET standard: - from the viewpoint of the IO-controller, all DP slaves are handled like I/O devices of the Ethernet interface, i.e. the IE/PB Link PN IO is its proxy. • Cross-network programming device/operator panel communication by S7 routing, i.e. all S7 stations can be remotely programmed by the programming device on the Industrial Ethernet or PROFIBUS. • Cross-network access to data of S7 stations for visualization by means of S7 OPC server and S7 routing; - via the IE/PB Link PN IO access can be made from the PC on the Industrial Ethernet (e.g. for HMI applications with OPC Client interface) by means of S7 OPC server, to all data of the S7 stations on the PROFIBUS. • Module replacement without the need for a PG, using the C-PLUG swap media for backing up the configuration data

Network transitions


■ Benefits

PROFINET applications • Protection of investment due to simple connection of PROFIBUS DP slaves to PROFINET IO controller • Access to process data from all plant management levels

• Worldwide access to data of the PROFIBUS nodes via Industrial Ethernet and Internet for vertical integration • Optimization of a plant from a central location • Loading of STEP 7 programs from a central location • Independence from manufacturers thanks to support of the PROFINET standard for distributed field devices • Module replacement without the need for a PG, using the C-PLUG swap media for backing up the configuration data SIMATIC S7-400 with CP 443-1 Advanced

SIMATIC HMI


IE/PB Link PN IO ET 200S

ET 200S

ET 200S

PROFIBUS SINAMICS ET 200M

G_IK10_XX_30036

ET 200S

MICROMASTER

Migration for PROFIBUS devices Sample configuration of PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS. Via the IE/PB Link PN IO as proxy, PROFIBUS devices can be seamlessly incorporated in the PROFINET.


8/13

8

Network transitions


■ Benefits (continued) • Optimization of a plant from a central location • Access to process data from all plant management levels • Loading of STEP 7 programs from a central location

Applications in the case of vertical integration • Worldwide access to data of the PROFIBUS nodes via Industrial Ethernet and Internet for vertical integration

Intranet/Internet

S7-400 with CP 443-1 Advanced SIMATIC Panel PC 670

PC with CP 1616

PROFINET Industrial Ethernet Cell level

PC

IE/PB Link or IE/PB Link PN IO

S7-300

DP/PA Link

8

Drive Data access

ET 200S

ET 200X

SITRANS

G_IK10_XX_40006

PROFIBUS DP Field level

Sample configuration of IE/PB Link PN IO as router from Industrial Ethernet to PROFIBUS for vertical integration

■ Application As an independent component, the IE/PB Link PN IO forms the seamless transition between Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS. By means of the IE/PB Link PN IO as proxy, the existing PROFIBUS devices can continue to be used and integrated into a PROFINET application. The IE/PB Link PN IO also offers the following functions: • S7 routing - cross-network programming device/operator panel communication, i.e. all S7 stations can be remotely programmed by the programming device on the Industrial Ethernet or PROFIBUS. - from the HMI stations on the Industrial Ethernet, access can be made to visualization data of the S7 stations on the PROFIBUS. • Data record routing (PROFIBUS DP) - this makes it possible, for example to parametrize and diagnose a PROFIBUS field device using SIMATIC PDM (on the PC) on the Industrial Ethernet via the IE/PB Link PN IO.

8/14


■ Design The IE/PB Link PN IO exhibits all the advantages of the SIMATIC design: • Compact design; the rugged plastic casing features on the front: - one RJ45 port for connection to Industrial Ethernet. - one 9-pin Sub-D socket for connection to PROFIBUS - one 2-pin terminal strip for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC. - diagnostic LEDs • Connection is by means of the IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 with 180° cable exit or by means of a standard patch cable • Simple mounting; the IE/PB Link PN IO is mounted on an S7-300 DIN rail. • Can be operated without a fan • Fast device replacement in the event of a fault by using the optional C-PLUG swap medium (not included in scope of supply)

Network transitions


■ Function PROFINET • PROFINET IO proxy; connection of PROFIBUS DP slaves to PROFINET IO controller via real-time communication (RT) according to PROFINET standard Additional functions for vertical integration • S7 routing - cross-network programming device communication, i.e. all S7 stations on Industrial Ethernet or PROFIBUS can be remotely programmed by the programming device. - from the HMI stations on the Industrial Ethernet, access can be made to visualization data from the S7 stations on the PROFIBUS. • Data record routing (PROFIBUS DP) - with this option, the IE/PB Link PN IO can be used as a router for data sets that have to be sent to field devices (DP slaves). SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) is a tool that creates data sets of this type for parameterizing and diagnosing field devices. Application: This makes it possible, for example to parameterize and diagnose a PROFIBUS PA field device using SIMATIC PDM (on the PC) on Industrial Ethernet via the IE/PB Link PN IO and DP/PA coupler. The additional functions for vertical integration can also be used in an existing PROFIBUS application without PROFINET for interfacing to a higher-level Industrial Ethernet. The IE/PB Link PN IO can be used as an additional DP master Class 2 on a PROFIBUS segment for coupling to Industrial Ethernet and offers the above-mentioned functions. Diagnostics Extensive diagnostic options are available via STEP S7 or SNMP, including: • Diagnosis of the assigned PROFINET field devices; using the IE/PB Link PN IO as a proxy, the connected DP slaves can be diagnosed in the same manner as PROFINET IO devices (also in the user program of the PROFINET IO controller) • General diagnostics and statistics functions • Connection diagnostics • LAN controller statistics • Diagnostics buffer • Integration into network management systems through the support of SNMP V1 MIB-II

■ Technical specifications Data transmission rates • Industrial Ethernet


• PROFIBUS

9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s incl. 45.45 kbit/s (PROFIBUS PA)

Interfaces • Connection to Industrial Ethernet - 10BaseT/100BaseT

RJ45


9-pin Sub D socket



Power supply

24 V DC (+/-5%)

Current consumption (at rated voltage) • external from 24 V DC, max.

600 mA

Power loss

approx. 10 W


0 °C ... + 60 °C


- 40 °C ... + 70 °C


95 % at +25 °C


S7-300 construction


80 x 125 x 120

• Weight

approx. 600 g


IP20

Configuring Configuration software for PROFINET and additional functions

STEP 7/NCM S7, V5.3 SP1 or higher

Performance data PROFINET communication PROFINET IO performance data • Number of DP slaves on the IE/PB Link PN IO (PROFINET IODevices for PROFINET IO)

64

• Number of DP inputs, max.

2.048 byte

• Number of DP outputs, max.

2.048 byte

8


Max. 32


Max. 32

Configuring The IE/PB Link PN IO is configured with STEP 7, V 5.3 SP1 and higher. The parameters required for IE/PB Link PN IO, e.g. the addresses, are assigned using STEP 7 and all the necessary routing information is automatically generated. The configuration data for PROFINET IO created using STEP 7 are saved on the IO Controller. The maximum volume of data that can be stored must be taken into account. The initialization data for the Ethernet interface are backed up on the C-PLUG (Configuration Plug) swap medium. The IE/PB Link PN IO can be replaced without the need for a programming device in the event of failure because the relevant configuration data are backed up on the IO-Controller or on the C- PLUG.


8/15

Network transitions


■ Ordering data IE/PB Link PN IO Network transition between Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS; with PROFINET IO functionality, TCP/IP, S7 routing and dataset routing, 10/100 Mbit/s Fast Ethernet, 9.6 to 12 Mbit/s PROFIBUS; including electronic manual on CD-ROM German, English, French, Spanish, Italian

Order No. 6GK1 411-5AB00

• 1 pack = 1 item

6GK1 901-1BB10-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB10-2AE0

C-PLUG Swap medium for simple replacement of devices in the event of a fault; for storing configuration or engineering and application data, can be used for SIMATIC NET products with C-PLUG slot

6GK1 900-0AB00

S7-300 DIN rail

6ES7 390-1AB60-0AA0


6ES7 307-1BA00-0AA0


Included in STEP 7 V5 scope of supply

Documentation S7-CPs/NCM Paper version for Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS; manual package for configuring S7-CPs, IE/PB Link and PC-Station (STEP 7 V5.3) • German

6GK7 080-0AA01-8AA0

• English

6GK7 080-0AA01-8BA0

Manual for twisted pair and fiber optic networks Paper version network architecture, components, configurations, mounting guidelines • German

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1

Manual for PROFIBUS networks Paper version Network architecture, project management, network components, mounting • German

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA1

8/16


Additional information is available in the Internet: http://www.siemens.com/profinet


8


Network transitions

Industrial Ethernet — PROFIBUS network transition IE/PB link

■ Overview • Compact network transition between Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS • Connection to Industrial Ethernet with 10/100 Mbit/s full/half duplex connection with autosensing for automatic switchover • Connection to PROFIBUS with data transmission rates of 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s incl. 45.45 kbit/s for PROFIBUS PA • PROFINET Standard Version V1.0. • IE/PB Link supports the PROFINET communication services for data communication between the PROFINET devices and is a proxy for PROFIBUS field devices. • PROFINET defines an engineering model for distributed automation solutions and a model for integrated communication over PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet with IT standards. • Cross-network programming device/operator panel communication by S7 routing, i.e. all S7 stations can be remotely programmed using the programming device on the Industrial Ethernet or PROFIBUS. PN

IO-C

IO-D

DP-M

DP-S

ASi-M

CBA

■ Benefits Applications in Component Based Automation • Support for the PROFINET standard V1.0 • Consistent modularization of plants and machines through easy handling of distributed intelligence

• Access to process data from all plant management levels • Worldwide access to data of the PROFIBUS nodes via Industrial Ethernet and Internet for vertical integration • Optimization of a plant from a central location • Loading of STEP 7 programs from a central location

SIMATIC Panel PC 670 with PN CBA OPC-Server


MOBIC with CP 1515

Mobile startup, diagnostics on-site via LAN access to station


8

PC with PN CBA OPC-Server

PG

Access Point SCALANCE W PROFINET Industrial Ethernet Data access

Load programs

IE/PB Link PN IO

Drive

Communication between autonomous PROFINET devices

Drive



ET 200X

ET 200S

G_IK10_XX_40007

PROFIBUS DP

Sample configuration of PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS. Over the IE/PB Link as proxy, PROFIBUS devices can be seamlessly incorporated in the PROFINET. Siemens IK PI · 2007

8/17

Network transitions


■ Benefits (continued) Applications in the case of vertical integration • Worldwide access to data of the PROFIBUS nodes via Industrial Ethernet and Internet for vertical integration • Optimization of a plant from a central location • Loading of STEP 7 programs from a central locations Intranet/Internet

S7-400 with CP 443-1 Advanced SIMATIC Panel PC 670

PC with CP 1616

PROFINET Industrial Ethernet Cell level IE/PB Link or IE/PB Link PN IO

PC S7-300

DP/PA Link

8

Drive Data access

ET 200S

ET 200X

Sample configuration of IE/PB Link as network transition from Industrial Ethernet to PROFIBUS for vertical integration

8/18


SITRANS

G_IK10_XX_40006

PROFIBUS DP Field level

Network transitions


■ Application As an independent component, the IE/PB Link enables the seamless transition between Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS. PROFINET defines an engineering model for distributed automation solutions and a model for integrated communication over PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet with IT standards. PROFINET facilitates communication relationships between PROFIBUS devices as well as between PROFIBUS devices and Ethernet devices. IE/PB Link supports the connection of DP slaves as well as the connection of PROFIBUS devices with loadable functionality in the form of a program, e.g. an ET 200 S with CPU. This allows vertical integration from the management level down to the field level. • Support for Component Based Automation based on the new PROFINET standard of PROFIBUS International. This standard supports: - component technology in automation engineering - graphical configuration of communication between intelligent devices instead of complex programming - manufacturer-independent, plant-wide engineering - component Based Automation provides access to the variables of the PROFINET components from all standard PC applications with an OPC client interface, e.g. visualization systems. The objects can be directly selected from a list of variables from the selected PROFINET component through OPC servers. The IE/PB Link also offers the following functions: • S7 routing - enables cross-network PG/OP communication, i.e. all S7 stations can be remotely programmed using the programming device on the Industrial Ethernet or PROFIBUS. - HMI stations on the Industrial Ethernet can access visualization data from the S7 stations on the PROFIBUS. • Data record routing (PROFIBUS DP) - this makes it possible, for example, to parameterize and diagnose a PROFIBUS field device using SIMATIC PDM (on the PC) on the Industrial Ethernet via the IE/PB Link.

■ Design The IE/PB link has all the advantages of the SIMATIC design • Compact design; the rugged plastic casing features on the front - 15-pin Sub-D connector for interfacing to Industrial Ethernet (automatic switching between AUI and industrial twisted pair). - RJ45 interface for connection to twisted pair - 9-pin Sub-D connector for connection to PROFIBUS - 4-pin terminal block for connecting the external supply voltage of 24 V DC • Automatic transmission rate detection through autosensing. • The IE/PB link is operated without fans. • Simple mounting; the IE/PB link is mounted on an S7-300 sectional rail.

■ Function The IE/PB Link module supports the following communication services: • PROFINET communication services in accordance with the PROFINET standard Version V1.0 • Network transition as DP Master Class 2/vertical integration - S7 Routing - data record routing (PROFIBUS DP) PROFINET IE/PB Link supports the communication services specified in PROFINET for data communication between the PROFINET devices and is a proxy for PROFIBUS field devices. It facilitates communication relationships between PROFIBUS devices as well as between PROFIBUS devices and Ethernet devices. IE/PB Link supports the connection of simple DP slaves as well as the connection of PROFIBUS devices with loadable functionality in the form of a program, e.g. for an ET200 S with its own CPU. Network transition as DP Master Class 2/vertical integration • The IE/PB Link can be used as an additional DP Master Class 2 on a PROFIBUS segment for coupling to Industrial Ethernet and offers the following functions. • S7 Routing - enables cross-network PG communication, i.e. all S7 stations can be remotely programmed using the programming device on the Industrial Ethernet or PROFIBUS. • Data record routing (PROFIBUS DP) - with this option, the IE/PB Link can be used as a router for data sets that have to be sent to field devices (DP slaves). SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) is a tool that creates data sets of this type for parameterizing and diagnosing field devices. Application: This makes it possible, for example, to parameterize and diagnose a PROFIBUS PA field device using SIMATIC PDM (on the PC) on Industrial Ethernet via the IE/PB Link and DP/PA coupler/link. Diagnostics data Extensive diagnostic options are available via NCM S7, including: • Operating status • General diagnostics and statistics functions • Connection diagnostics • LAN controller statistics • Message buffer

8

Configuration For configuring the additional functions of IE/PB Link, STEP 7 Version V5.1 SP2 and higher is necessary. The parameters required for IE/PB Link, such as the addresses, are assigned using STEP 7 and all the necessary routing information is automatically generated. For configuring the PROFINET communication, the separate engineering tool SIMATIC iMap to the PROFINET standard is required. The tool is offered as an option package with STEP 7. The SIMATIC iMap engineering software, which operates system-wide and manufacturer-independently, replaces the otherwise complex programming of the communication relationships between intelligent devices with easy graphical configuration.


8/19

Network transitions



■ Ordering data

Data transmission rates • Industrial Ethernet


• PROFIBUS

9.6 kbit/s ... 12 Mbit/s incl. 45.45 kbit/s (PROFIBUS PA)

Interfaces • Connection to Industrial Ethernet - AUI (10 Mbit/s) - 10BaseT/100BaseT

15-pin Sub-D socket RJ45


9-pin Sub-D socket



Supply voltage

24 V DC (+/-5%)

Current consumption (at rated voltage) • External from 24 V DC, max.

600 mA

Power loss

approx. 10 W


6GK1 411-5AA00

S7-300 DIN rail

6ES7 390-1AB60-0AA0


6ES7 307-1BA00-0AA0


Shipped with STEP 7 V5

Manual for TP and fiber-optic networks Paper version Network architecture, components, configurations, installation guidelines • German

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0


0 °C … + 60 °C

• English

6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1


- 40 °C … + 70 °C


95 % at +25 °C

• Module format

S7-300 construction

Manual for PROFIBUS networks Paper version Network architecture, project management, network components, installation


80 x 125 x 120

• German

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA0

• Weight

approx. 600 g

• English

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA1


IP20

SIMATIC iMap V3.0 for configuring PROFINET CBA Prerequisite: Windows 2000 Prof. with Service Pack 4 or higher or Windows XP Prof. with Service Pack 1 or Windows 2003 Server with Service Pack 1 or higher; on PG or PC with Pentium processor, min. 1 GHz; STEP 7 V5.3 or higher with Service Pack 3, PN OPC Server V6.3 or higher; Delivery form: German, English, with electronic documentation

Construction

Configuration Configuration software for PROFINET

Option package SIMATIC iMAP V1.2 and higher

Configuring software for additional functions

NCM S7 in STEP 7, V5.1 SP2 or higher

Performance data PROFINET communication

8

Order No.

IE/PB link Network transition between Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS, including electronic manual on CD-ROM, German, English, French, Spanish, Italian

• Number of DP slaves on the IWLAN/PB Link PN IO (PROFINET IO-Devices for PROFINET IO)

max. 64 1)

• Number of DP inputs

max. 2048 byte

• Number of DP outputs

max. 2048 byte


max. 32


max. 32

1) All PROFINET IO Devices (DP slaves) to be connected to the IE/PB Link PN IO must be generated as PROFIBUS-DPV0 (standard slaves) using STEP 7.

• Single license

6ES7 820-0CC04-0YA5


6ES7 820-0CC01-0YX2


6ES7 820-0CC04-0YE5

■ More information Additional information is available in the Internet: http://www.siemens.com/automation/cba

8/20


Network transitions

Industrial Ethernet — AS-Interface network transition IE/AS-i LINK PN IO

■ Overview

■ Benefits

• Short startup time due to simple configuration by pressing a button and testing of the AS-Interface segment on display or through Web interface • Reduction in downtimes and servicing times on failure of slave due to convenient diagnostics on display or through Web interface • Reduction of installation costs because the power can be supplied entirely from the AS-Interface cable, so an additional power supply is not required • Reduced engineering overhead thanks to convenient configuration of Siemens slaves by means of Drag&Drop in HW-Config (STEP 7)

■ Application PN

IO-C

IO-D

DP-M

DP-S

ASi-M

CBA

• Compact network transition between Industrial Ethernet (PROFINET IO device) and AS-Interface • Single and dual AS-Interface master (according to AS-Interface specification V3.0) for connecting 62 AS-Interface slaves • High-performance, integrated analog value transmission • Integral earth-fault monitoring for the AS-Interface cable • Simple diagnostics and startup on site using a pixel-graphics display and operator keys or Web interface with standard browser • Optimum TIA integration through STEP 7, integration in engineering tools from other vendors through PROFINET type file (GSDML) • Vertical integration (standard Web interface) through Industrial Ethernet • Power supply from the AS-Interface cable or alternatively with 24 V DC (optional) • Module replacement without PG by using C-PLUG (optional)

The IE/AS-i LINK PN IO is a PROFINET IO-Device (according to IEC 61158) and AS-Interface master (according to AS-Interface specification V3.0 to EN 50 295), and enables transparent data access to the AS-Interface from Industrial Ethernet. PROFINET IO-Controllers can exchange I/O data cyclically with the AS-Interface; with acyclic services AS-i master calls can also be carried out. The IE/AS-i LINK PN IO is thus ideally suitable for distributed configuration and for linking an underlying AS-Interface network. The IE/AS-i LINK PN IO in the version as AS-i single master is sufficient for applications with typical quantity frameworks. The IE/AS-i LINK PN IO in the version as AS-i dual master is used for applications with high quantity frameworks. In this case, twice the quantity frameworks can be used on two AS-i segments running independently of each other.

8


8/21

Network transitions


■ Application (continued) PC with SOFTNET PN IO


SCALANCE X208

PROFINET

S7-300 e.g. with CP 343-1

HMI

IE/AS-i LINK PN IO

ET 200S

AS-Interface Power supply unit Power supply unit

Slave

Laser scanner

Safety monitor


8

Linking of AS-Interface to PROFINET via IE/AS-i LINK PN IO as single/dual master

8/22


LOGO!


AS-Interface

Safety monitor

G_IK10_XX_40017 G_IK10_XX_40017

When IE/AS-i LINK PN IO is used as dual master

ET 200pro

Network transitions


■ Application (continued) With an upstream IWLAN client module, e.g. SCALANCE W7461PRO, an AS-Interface segment can be integrated wirelessly into the PROFINET world. Typical applications here are those solved with fault-prone festoon cables or contact conductor technology; maintenance costs are thus reduced.

Radio cell 1

Radio cell 2 S7-400

PROFINET Industrial Ethernet SCALANCE W788-1PRO

SCALANCE W788-1PRO

Field PG/ Notebook with CP 7515


SIMATIC HMI

IE/AS-i LINK PN IO

G_IK10_XX_30143

ASInterface Automatic Guided Vehicle System (AGVS)

8

Wireless communication between Industrial Ethernet and AS-Interface components


8/23

Network transitions


■ Design

■ Function

• Sturdy plastic enclosure with degree of protection IP20 for DIN rail mounting • Compact design; - display in front panel for exactly detailed indication of operating state and functional readiness of all connected and activated AS-Interface slaves - keys for startup and testing of the AS-Interface segment directly on the IE/AS-i LINK PN IO - LED display of operating state of PROFINET IO and AS-Interface - integral 2-port switch (RJ45 socket) for connection to Industrial Ethernet supports the linear topology without external switch - convenient startup, diagnostics and testing of the IE/AS-i LINK PN IO over a Web interface with standard browser - power supply from the AS-Interface shaped cable or alternatively with 24 V DC - low mounting depth through recessed connector assembly • Simple assembly on standard DIN rail • Operation without fans or batteries • Fast device replacement in the event of a fault by using the optional C-PLUG swap medium (not included in scope of supply)

The IE/AS-i LINK PN IO allows a PROFINET IO master to cyclically access the I/O data of all slaves of a subordinate AS-Interface segment. In line with the enhanced AS-Interface specification (V3.0), a maximum of 62 slaves – each with 4 inputs and 4 outputs – as well as analog slaves can be connected per AS-Interface segment. The IE/AS-i LINK PN IO occupies 62 input byte and 62 output byte in the IO controller as standard, in which the I/O data of the connected AS-Interface slaves are saved. The input/output buffer can be compressed so that only the actual I/O memory space required is occupied in the system of the IO controller. Integral evaluation of analog signals is just as simple as the accessing of digital values. PROFINET IO controllers are also able to trigger AS-Interface master calls (e.g. write parameters, modify addresses, read diagnostics values) by means of the acyclic PROFINET services. The subordinate AS-i segment can be completely started up using an input display in the AS-Interface link. The IE/AS-i LINK PN IO is equipped with two switched Ethernet ports which additionally permit use of the integral Web server, making the input display already described even easier to use. Firmware updates are also available. The optional C-PLUG supports module replacement without a programming device, ensuring that downtimes in the event of a fault are reduced to a minimum. Diagnostics data Extensive diagnostics options are available via the display and input keys, Web interface or STEP 7, including • Operating status of the link • Status of the link as PROFINET IO device • Diagnostics of the AS-Interface network • Frame statistics • Standard diagnostics sites for rapid diagnostics access using standard browser Configuration The IE/AS-i LINK PN IO can be configured using STEP 7 from Version V5.4 SP2 or simply by importing the actual configuration on the display.

8

Alternatively, the IE/AS-i LINK IO can be integrated in the engineering tool by means of the PROFINET type file (GSD): • STEP 7 versions lower than V5.5 SP2 • Engineering tools from other manufacturers With STEP 7 configuring, uploading of the AS-Interface configuration is possible in STEP 7 from V5.4 SP2 onwards. In addition, AS-Interface Slaves from Siemens can be conveniently configured in HW-Config (slave catalog).

8/24


Network transitions



■ Ordering data

Data transmission rates per AS-i segment • AS-Interface bus cycle time

5 ms for 31 slaves; 10 ms for 62 slaves

• Ethernet data transmission rate

10/100 Mbit/s, autosensing

Interfaces

Order No.

IE/AS-i LINK PN IO Network transition between Industrial Ethernet and AS-Interface; master profiles M3 and M4, enhanced AS-Interface specification V3.0; degree of protection IP20; manual on CD-ROM German, English, French, Spanish, Italian

• AS-Interface connection - with single master - with dual master (2 AS-i segments)

1 x 4-pin terminal block (plug-in) 1 x 4-pin terminal block (plug-in) 2 x 4-pin terminal block (plug-in)

• Single master with display

6GK1 411-2AB10

• Connection to Ethernet

2 x RJ45 sockets (switch ports)

• Dual master with display

6GK1 411-2AB20

3-pole terminal contacts (plug-in) incl. functional ground for integral ground fault monitoring

Accessories

• Optional: 24 V DC supply voltage


C-PLUG

Display

128 x 64 pixels with backlighting

Keys

Membrane keyboard (6 keys)

Supply voltage • From the AS-Interface shaped cable (segment 1)

According to AS-Interface specification EN 50 295

• Optional

24 V DC

Current consumption • From the AS-Interface shaped cable

max. 250 mA

Loading capacity

C-PLUG

6GK1 900-0AB00

Swap medium for simple replacement of devices in the event of a fault; for storing configuration or engineering and application data; can be used for SIMATIC NET products with C-PLUG slot IE FC RJ45 Plug 90 RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 90° cable outlet; e.g. for ET 200S

• Power loss

7.5 W

• 1 pack = 1 item

6GK1 901-1BB20-2AA0


IP20


6GK1 901-1BB20-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB20-2AE0

Perm. ambient conditions • Operating temperature - horizontal mounting - vertical mounting

0 °C … +60 °C 0 °C … +45 °C


-30 °C … +70 °C


max. 95% at +25 °C

• Operating altitude

3000 m above mean sea level

8

Construction • Assembly

On standard DIN rail


90 x 132 x 88.5

• Weight

approx. 380 g

Supported AS-Interface master profiles

M1, M2, M3, M4 (corresponding to AS-Interface specification V3.0)

Configuration of AS-Interface

by means of keys on front panel, with STEP 7 Version V5.4 SP2, through Web interface


8/25

Network transitions

PROFIBUS DP — AS-Interface network transition DP/AS-i LINK Advanced

■ Overview

PN

8

■ Benefits

DP-M

DP-S

ASi-M

• Compact network transition between PROFIBUS (DP slave) and AS-Interface • Single and dual AS-Interface master (according to AS-Interface specification V3.0) for connecting 62 AS-Interface slaves • High-performance, integrated analog value transmission • High-performance, integral earth-fault monitoring for the AS-Interface cable • Simple diagnostics and startup on site using a pixel-graphics display and operator keys or Web interface with standard browser • Optimum TIA integration through STEP 7, integration into engineering tools of other vendors through PROFIBUS type file (GSD) • Vertical integration (standard Web interface) through Industrial Ethernet • Power supply from the AS-Interface cable or alternatively with 24 V DC (optional) • Module replacement without PG by using C-PLUG (optional)

8/26


• Short startup time through simple configuration by pressing a button and testing the AS-Interface segment via display or Web interface • Reduction in downtimes and servicing times on failure of slave through convenient diagnostics on display or Web interface and by simple replacement of module with the C-PLUG swap medium • Reduction of installation costs because the power can be supplied entirely from the AS-Interface cable, so an additional power supply is not required • Reduced engineering overhead through convenient configuration of Siemens slaves per slave catalog in HW-Config (STEP 7) • Lower costs for high quantity frameworks as result of the dual AS-Interface master

■ Application The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is PROFIBUS DPV1 slave (according to EN 50 170) and AS-Interface master (according to AS-Interface specification V3.0 to EN 50 295) and enables transparent data access to the AS-Interface from PROFIBUS DP. PROFIBUS DP masters can exchange I/O data cyclically with the AS-Interface; DP masters with acyclic services can additionally carry out AS-Interface master calls. The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is thus particularly suitable for distributed configuration and for linking a subordinate AS-Interface network. The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced in the version as AS-Interface single master is sufficient for applications with typical quantity frameworks. The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced in the AS-Interface dual master version is used for applications with high quantity frameworks. In this case, twice the quantity frameworks can be used on two AS-Interface segments running independently of each other.

Network transitions


■ Application (continued) PC with SOFTNET-DP S7-300 e.g. with CP 342-5

S7-400 with CP 443-5 Extended

HMI

PROFIBUS

ET 200S ET 200pro

When IE/AS-i LINK Advanced is used as dual master

PG e.g. with CP 5611 A2

AS-Interface

AS-Interface

Power supply unit

Slave

Laser scanner

Safety monitor

Power supply unit

LOGO!

Safety monitor

Safe slave with EMERGENCY-STOP

Safe slave with EMERGENCY-STOP Linking of AS-Interface to PROFIBUS via DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as single/dual master

8


8/27

Network transitions


■ Design

■ Function

• Stable plastic enclosure with degree of protection IP20 for DIN rail mounting • Compact design; - display in front panel for exactly detailed indication of operating state and functional readiness of all connected and activated AS-Interface slaves - 6 keys for startup and testing of the AS-Interface segment directly on the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - LED display of operating state of PROFIBUS DP and AS-Interface - integral Ethernet port (RJ45 socket) for convenient startup, diagnostics and testing of DP/AS-i LINK Advanced through a Web interface with standard browser - power supply from the AS-Interface shaped cable or alternatively with 24 V DC - low mounting depth due to recessed connector assembly • Simple assembly on standard DIN rail • Operation without fans or batteries • Fast device replacement in the event of a fault by using the optional C-PLUG swap medium (not included in scope of supply)

The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced allows a PROFIBUS DP master to cyclically access the I/O data of all slaves of a subordinate AS-Interface segment. In line with the enhanced AS-Interface specification (V3.0), a maximum of 62 slaves – each with 4 inputs and 4 outputs – as well as analog slaves can be connected per AS-Interface segment. The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced occupies 62 input byte and 62 output byte in the DP master as standard, in which the I/O data of the connected digital AS-Interface slaves are saved. The input/output buffer can be compressed so that only the I/O memory space actually required is occupied in the system of the DP master. Integral evaluation of analog signals is just as simple as the access to digital values; it is unnecessary to call communications blocks. PROFIBUS DP V1 masters are also able to trigger AS-Interface master calls (e.g. write parameters, modify addresses, read diagnostics values) by means of the acyclic PROFIBUS services. The subordinate AS-Interface segment can be completely started up using an input display in the AS-i link. The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is equipped with an additional Ethernet port which permits use of the integral Web server and therefore additionally increases the convenience of the input display already described. Firmware updates are also available free of charge. The optional C-PLUG supports module replacement without a programming device, ensuring that downtimes in the event of a fault are reduced to a minimum. Diagnostics data Extensive diagnostics options are available via LEDs, the display and input keys, Web interface or STEP 7, including • Operating status of the link • Status of the link as PROFIBUS DP slave • Diagnostics of the AS-Interface network • Frame statistics • Standard diagnostics sites for rapid diagnostics access using standard browser Configuration

8

The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced can be configured using STEP 7 from Version V5.4 or simply by importing the actual configuration on the display. Alternatively, the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced can be integrated in the engineering tool by means of the PROFIBUS type file (GSD): • COM PROFIBUS • Older STEP 7 versions lower than V5.4 • Engineering tools from other vendors With STEP 7 configuring, uploading of the AS-Interface configuration is possible in STEP 7 from V5.4 onwards. In addition, AS-Interface Slaves from Siemens can be conveniently configured in HW-Config (slave catalog).

8/28


Network transitions



■ Ordering data

Data transmission rates per AS-Interface segment • AS-Interface bus cycle time

5 ms for 31 slaves; 10 ms for 62 slaves

• PROFIBUS data transmission rate

Up to 12 Mbit/s

• Ethernet data transmission rate

10/100 Mbit/s, autosensing

Interfaces • AS-Interface connection - with single master - with dual master (2 AS-i segments)

1 x 4-pin terminal block (plug-in) 1 x 4-pin terminal block (plug-in) 2 x 4-pin terminal block (plug-in)


1 x 9-pin Sub-D socket

• Connection to Ethernet

1 x RJ45 socket

• Optional: 24 V DC supply voltage

3-pole terminal contacts (plug-in) incl. functional ground for integral ground fault monitoring


C-PLUG

Display

128 x 64 pixels with backlighting

Keys

Membrane keyboard (6 keys)

Supply voltage • From the AS-Interface shaped cable (segment 1)


• Optional: 24 V DC

24 V DC, PE conductor

Current consumption • From the AS-Interface shaped cable

max. 250 mA

Loading capacity • 5 V DC on PROFIBUS connection

max. 70 mA

• Power loss

7.5 W


IP20


0 °C … +60 °C 0 °C … +45 °C


-30 °C … +70 °C


max. 95% at +25 °C

• Operating altitude

3000 m above mean sea level

Order No.

DP/AS-i LINK Advanced Network transition between PROFIBUS DP and AS-Interface; master profiles M3 and M4, enhanced AS-Interface specification V3.0; degree of protection IP20; manual on CD-ROM, German, English, French, Spanish, Italian • Single master with display

6GK1 415-2BA10

• Dual master with display

6GK1 415-2BA20

Accessories C-PLUG Swap medium for simple replacement of devices in the event of a fault; for storing configuration or engineering and application data; can be used for SIMATIC NET products with C-PLUG slot

6GK1 900-0AB00

IE FC RJ45 Plug 90 RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet with a rugged metal housing and integrated insulation displacement contacts for connecting Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 90° cable outlet; e.g. for ET 200S • 1 pack = 1 item

6GK1 901-1BB20-2AA0


6GK1 901-1BB20-2AB0


6GK1 901-1BB20-2AE0

Bus connector RS 485 with angled cable outlet (35°) With screw-type terminals, max. data transmission rate 12 Mbit/s • Without PG interface

6ES7 972-0BA60-0XA0

8

Construction • Assembly

On standard DIN rail


90 x 132 x 88.5

• Weight

approx. 380 g

Supported AS-Interface master profiles

M1, M2, M3, M4 (corresponding to complete AS-Interface specification V3.0)

Configuration of AS-Interface

by means of keys on front panel, with STEP 7 Version V5.4 and later, through Web interface


8/29

Network transitions

PROFIBUS DP — AS-Interface network transition DP/AS-Interface Link 20E

■ Overview The DP/AS-Interface link 20E connects PROFIBUS DP with AS-Interface. It provides the following functions: • PROFIBUS DP slave and AS-Interface master • Up to 62 AS-Interface slaves can be connected and integrated analog value transfer (according to the extended AS-Interface specification V2.1). • Supports all AS-Interface master functions in accordance with the extended AS-Interface specification V2.1, i.e. Master Class M3. • Supplied from the AS-Interface cable, so no additional power supply is necessary. • Supports uploading of the AS-Interface configuration in STEP 7 from V5.2.

PN

DP-M

DP-S

ASi-M

■ Benefits

• Reduction of installation costs because the power is supplied entirely from the AS-Interface cable, so an additional power supply is not required.

• Shorter start-up time thanks to easy configuration at the press of a button • Reduction of downtimes or service times due to failure of a slave thanks to the LEDs • Quick and easy start-up thanks to readout of the AS-Interface configuration (ES03 and higher) e.g. S7-400 with CPU 413-2 DP

PROFIBUS DP

8

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E AS-Interface power supply unit Passive module (without slave AISC)

Aktive module (with slave AISC)

Repeater

1)

AS-Interface power supply unit

Actuator/sensor (wit Slave-ASIC)

Actuator/sensor (without slave-ASIC)

Branch

Transition from PROFIBUS DP to AS-Interface over DP/AS-Interface Link 20E

8/30


1) Use of extenders not currently possible.

G_IK10_XX_40008

AS-Interface cable

Network transitions

PROFIBUS DP — AS-Interface network transition DP/AS-Interface Link 20E

■ Application The DP/AS-Interface Link 20E is a PROFIBUS DP slave (according to EN 50 170) and AS-Interface master (according to EN 50 295 ) and enables the AS-Interface to be operated on PROFIBUS DP. Simple PROFIBUS masters can exchange I/O data cyclically with AS-Interface; masters with acyclic services can exchange I/O data and perform master calls. DP/AS-Interface Link 20E cannot be used in conjunction with the extender.

■ Design • Compact housing with degree of protection IP20 for DIN rail mounting • LEDs in the frontplate for displaying the operating status and operational readiness of all connected and activated slaves • The PROFIBUS DP address can be set by the simple push of a button • LED display of PROFIBUS DP slave address, DP bus fault and diagnostics • Two pushbuttons for switching the operating mode and for setting the existing ACTUAL configuration as SETPOINT configuration • Power is supplied from the AS-Interface shaped cable

■ Function The DP/AS-Interface Link 20E allows a DP master to access all slaves of an AS-Interface segment. According to the expanded specifications (V2.1) a maximum of 62 slaves each with 4 inputs and 3 outputs can now be connected. By default, the DP/AS-Interface Link 20E occupies 32 byte input and 32 byte output data in the DP master in which the I/O data of the AS-Interface slaves connected are stored. The size of the input/output buffer can be compressed, so that only the memory space of the DP master actually required is occupied. PROFIBUS DP masters are also able to invoke the AS-Interface master calls through the acyclic PROFIBUS utilities menu (e.g. parametric control, change addresses, read diagnostic values). Configuration The DP/AS-Interface Link 20E can be configured at the PROFIBUS with STEP 7 or COM PROFIBUS. Enclosed with the manual are also the type and GSD files, so that it is also possible to carry out configuration with versions that do not yet contain the DP/AS-Interface Link 20E as standard. Configuration of the AS-Interface segment can be preset either by means of STEP 7 or simply by adopting the ACTUAL configuration. Startup is also possible without PROFIBUS. For STEP 7 configuration, uploading of the AS-Interface configuration is possible in STEP 7 V5.2 and newer.

■ Technical specifications AS-Interface bus cycle time


PROFIBUS transmission rate

max. 12 Mbit

Supported AS-Interface master profile

M3 (corresponding to Complete AS-Interface Specification V2.1)

Configuring AS-Interface

by means of pushbutton on the frontplate or with STEP 7 V5.1 SP2

Interfaces • AS-Interface connection

Clip contacts


9-pin Sub-D socket

Supply voltage • From the AS-Interface cable


Current consumption • From the AS-Interface cable

max. 200 mA

Loading capacity 5 V DC on PROFIBUS connection

max. 90 mA

Power loss

3.7 W

Mounting

DIN rail or direct mounting


IP20


0 °C ... +60 °C 0 °C ... +45 °C


-40 °C ... +70 °C


max. 95% at +25 °C


S7-200 construction


90 x 80 x 60

• Weight

approx. 200 g

■ Ordering data DP/AS-Interface Link 20E Network transition between PROFIBUS DP and AS-Interface in degree of protection IP20

Order No.

8

6GK1 415-2AA01

DP/AS-Interface Link 20E manual Paper version including type and GSD files • German

6GK1 971-2DS01-0AA0

• English

6GK1 971-2DS01-0AA1

• French

6GK1 971-2DS01-0AA2

• Spanish

6GK1 971-2DS01-0AA3

• Italian

6GK1 971-2DS01-0AA4


8/31

Network transitions

PROFIBUS DP — EIB network transition DP/EIB Link

■ Overview

■ Benefits

• New applications by linking production and process automation (PROFIBUS) to building automation (EIB) for optimized, all-encompassing energy management • High-performance open-loop control, closed-loop control and visualization systems from automation engineering, e.g. SIMATIC, are now available for EIB • Flexible installation thanks to mounting in control cabinets and subdistribution boards • Low start-up and maintenance costs thanks to: - easy mounting on standard rails - LED to display PROFIBUS status - the DP address can be set directly using a DIP switch - EIB programming button and status display on the device PN

DP-M

DP-S

ASi-M

The DP/EIB Link connects manufacturing and process automation with building automation Data is exchanged between PROFIBUS DP and EIB (European Installation Bus) Compact enclosure with degree of protection IP20 in control cabinets as well as in subdistribution boards Configurable with STEP 7 standard tools or COM PROFIBUS as a DP slave and with the EIB configuration software ETS 2

8

8/32


■ Application The DP/EIB Link is used to connect the two open standard communication systems for manufacturing and process automation PROFIBUS DP and for building automation EIB. EIB for building automation can now be connected to PROFIBUS DP. The DP/EIB Link is predestined for energy management tasks, since monitoring, open-loop control, closed-loop control and visualization of all energy consumers in the electrical installation and in the industrial application can be performed by one integrated system. It is designed for installation in control cabinets as well as in subdistribution boards.

Network transitions


■ Application (continued) PC with WinCC

SIMATIC S7

PROFIBUS Powerline 230 V

DP/EIB Link 00

Powerline Bus coupler

s

00

00 7 00

s

6GK1415-0AA00 instabus EIB

6GK14150AA00 instabus EIB

Power

00

PROFIBUS Addr.

DP/EIB-Link

DP/BF EIB/BF

s


Powerline Coupler

24V

EIB

Phys. Adr.

EIB

s


EIB binary input module

s


EIB binary output module

EIB pushbutton

G_IK10_XX_40011

24V

Drive Wind sensor

Network transition from PROFIBUS DP to EIB/KNX with DP/EIB Link

■ Design The DP/EIB Link has a standard enclosure to N dimensions with 4 width modules (WM) in the subdistribution board • The PROFIBUS DP cable is connected on the side with a 9-pole Sub-D female connector through a bus connector (6ES7 972-0BA50-0XA0) and PROFIBUS bus cable • The EIB bus is connected using bus terminals • Connector for external power supply Displays and command elements: • LED for EIB functions (programming, test, diagnostics, etc.) • LED for PROFIBUS status • Coding switch for the PROFIBUS address • Programming button for EIB

■ Function The DP/EIB Link is a DP slave and maps data objects of the event-driven EIB in the process image of the DP master. The EIB data objects that are connected to PROFIBUS are specified using the EIB configuration software ETS 2. The DP/EIB Link provides various profiles for this purpose, each of which comprise different numbers of the various data objects.

Status changes in these data objects are transferred to the DP/EIB Link, or it can change these so that the PROFIBUS master is able to read and write to data objects. The DP slave address is set using a coding switch on the Link; STEP 7 or COM PROFIBUS can be used for configuration and to specify the size of the PROFIBUS I/O area. With the DP/EIB Link, the number and type of EIB data points to be transferred to PROFIBUS can be set as required. This means that the Link can be matched to each application and optimal utilization of the memory resources is possible. A range of different profiles are available for configuration that each cover all EIB data types. Configuring • PROFIBUS DP: A GSD file is enclosed with the manual. The DP slave address is set using a coding switch on the DP/EIB Link. The data objects are accessed over DP-V1 (read/write data set). • EIB: the database entry of the DP/EIB Link for the EIB configuration software ETS 2 is included with the manual. Note: for further details on building engineering with instabus EIB technology, see Catalog "I 2.1 2000 N-System" Order No. E86060-K8210-A101-A3. Contact your nearest Siemens branch office for further information.


8/33

8

Network transitions


■ Integration SECONDARY CONTROLLER

PRIMARY CONTROLLER

Heater Boiler

EIB window contact

Cooling system

Ventilation system

EIB control valves

EIB pushbutton

PROFIBUS

Room temperature controller

DP/EIB Link 00

EIB window contact

00

00 7 00

s

Power

00

DP/EIB-Link

DP/BF EIB/BF

24V

EIB

Phys. Adr.

EIB DP/EIB Link as a link for HVAC systems (heating, lighting, air conditioning) between the primary and secondary control systems

8

8/34


G_IK10_XX_40012

Controllers, e.g. S7-400


PROFIBUS Addr.

Network transitions



S7-400 with CP 443-5

PC with CP 5613

S7-300 with CPU 315-2 DP

PROFIBUS DP 00

00

00

00 7 00

s

6GK1415-0AA00 instabus EIB Power

00

s


DP/EIB-Link

Power

DP/BF

00

00

24V

DP/EIB-Link

Production line

DP/BF

EIB/BF

EIB/BF

24V

Door control

Production monitoring

EIB

24V

EIB

Phys. Adr.

EIB

Access control

Limit value monitor

Air conditioning

Phys. Adr.

EIB

Lab area


Plant

CAR

Access control

D

30

DP/EIB-Link

Power

DP/BF

00

PROFIBUS Addr.


DP/EIB-Link

Phys. Adr.

EIB

00

00

s

PROFIBUS Addr.

Power

EIB

Phys. Adr.

Light control

00

00 7

00

s


EIB/BF

EIB

00

00 7

00

PROFIBUS Addr.

DP/BF

EIB/BF

24V

00

00 7

00

PROFIBUS Addr.

20

CAR

D

Energy monitor 00

10

00

00 7 00

00

G_IK10_XX_40013

Ventilation

Production and lab

Use of DP/EIB Link in production and the laboratory

8


8/35

Network transitions


■ Integration (continued) PC with CP 5613 S7-400 with CP 443-5

PROFIBUS DP 00

00

00


00

s


DP/EIB-Link

Power

DP/BF


24V

24V

EIB


DP/EIB-Link

Power

00

PROFIBUS Addr.

DP/EIB-Link

DP/BF EIB/BF

EIB

24V

EIB

Phys. Adr.

EIB

Phys. Adr.

EIB

Assembly line 2

Assembly line 3

EIB Assembly line 4

Light control

Light control

Air conditioning

Blinds control

Blinds control

Heating

Heating

Ventilation

Ventilation

Warehouse

00

00

s

EIB/BF

EIB

Phys. Adr.

Assembly line 1

00

00 7

00

PROFIBUS Addr.

DP/BF

EIB/BF

EIB

00

00

s

DP/EIB-Link

Phys. Adr.

8

00

00 7

00

PROFIBUS Addr.

DP/BF

EIB/BF

24V

00

00 7

00

PROFIBUS Addr.

Factory hall 1

Factory hall 2

Air conditioning

Factory hall 3 with control center

G_IK10_XX_40014

00

00 7 s

Connection of EIB applications to a PROFIBUS network that spans buildings


■ Ordering data

Data transmission rate • PROFIBUS DP

max. 12 Mbit/s

• EIB

9.6 kbit/s


9-pin Sub-D socket

• Connection to EIB

Terminals

Power supply

24 V DC (20.4 ... 30 V)

Current input at 24 V DC

120 ... 150 mA

Power consumption • PROFIBUS section

approx. 3.3 W

• EIB section

approx. 300 mW


-5 °C ... +60 °C


-25 °C ... +70 °C


5% ... 93%

DP/EIB Link Network transition for transferring data between PROFIBUS DP and EIB


Manual Paper version incl. GSD file and ETS data base entry • German

6GK1 971-3DA00-0AA0

• English

6GK1 971-3DA00-0AA1

SIMATIC NET Manual Collection Electronic manuals for communication systems, communication protocols and communication products on CD-ROM, German/English

6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0


72 x 90 x 55

• Weight

approx. 300 g

7 8/36


ECOFAST System

9/2

Introduction

9/8

ECOFAST motor starters and soft starters

9/9 9/9 9/10

ECOFAST Frequency Converters COMBIMASTER 411 MICROMASTER 411

9/11

ECOFAST peripherals

9/12

ECOFAST Selection Module

9/13

ECOFAST Hybrid Field Bus Connections

9/14

ECOFAST motors

9/15

4FB21 PCM power and control modules

9/16 9/16 9/17 9/19 9/21 9/23

Connection methods Power cables Motor connection cables ECOFAST bus cables ECOFAST fiber-optic hybrid cable AS-Interface shaped cables

9/24 9/24 9/25 9/25 9/25

Accessories Energy Communication Installation Miscellaneous accessories

9/26 9/26 9/27

Software ECOFAST ES ES motor starters

9/28

Documentation


ECOFAST System Introduction

■ Overview

ECOFAST system – Distributed installation technology in IP65

ECOFAST (Energy and Communication Field Installation System) is a system solution for distributed systems outside the control cabinet. It sets new standards in equipping machines and plants for automation, low-voltage controlgear and drives. ECOFAST is centered on the extensive distribution and modularization of installations, combined with comprehensive diagnostics down to the component level. Modern field and power bus technologies open up new possibilities for machinery and plant construction. Systems of distributed design are flexible and can be adapted to the various requirements of industrial automation.

9

This gives rise to advantages in terms of overall process costs. The standardized distributed installation technology with a high degree of protection (IP65) produces savings during • Configuration, • Wiring, • Mounting, • Start-up and • during normal operation

Features • ECOFAST is a system solution with a wide range of automation, drive and installation components with a high degree of protection. • With ECOFAST, power and information are distributed and transmitted in a line. • Parameters and control and diagnostics functionality are transmitted through PROFIBUS or AS-Interface for fast operation start-ups and troubleshooting. • A configuring tool for the supply system shortens the configuration time and improves safety appreciably. • A parameterizing tool provides user-friendly support with entering all the motor starter data. • ECOFAST connects all the components of an automation system using a uniform, standardized connection method for data and power. ECOFAST is thus an integral component of Totally Integrated Automation and open for manufacturers and users alike. • All interfaces on ECOFAST also comply with the ISO 23570 standard. Shorter time frames With ECOFAST it is possible to shorten the time frames for the tendering, planning and configuring of machines and plants: • Modular planning of machines and plants • Compiling tenders from ready-made modules • Faster construction and mounting • Cabinet-free construction with a high degree of protection • Use of prefabricated and tested function units • Faster mounting on site • Smaller plant footprints

9/2



■ Overview (continued) Fast and smooth start-up ECOFAST enables the fast and smooth start-up of automation and drive systems: • Minimization of error sources through standardized interfaces and connectors • Extensive diagnostics on the device and though the bus • Improved EMC through direct coupling of switching unit and drive

Configuring tool ECOFAST ES and parameterizing tool MOTORSTARTER ES 2006 ECOFAST ES configuring tool

High plant availability ECOFAST maintains a high level of plant availability: • Reduction of downtimes thanks to the speedy and safe exchange of devices • No interruption of the power and field bus while devices are being exchanged • Automatic parameterizing when devices are exchanged • Extensive status and diagnostics information • Transmission of operating parameters (e.g. current values or status messages) The ECOFAST components Interplay of the ECOFAST components

MOTORSTARTER ES 2006 parameterizing tool

The two software tools, ECOFAST ES and MOTORSTARTER ES 2006, support configuration and parameterization in the ECOFAST system. ECOFAST ES is a user-friendly and powerful configuring tool for configuring the supply system and for testing the plant. The following components exist in the ECOFAST system: • Infeed module (Power & Control Module) • Switchgear and control devices (direct-on-line starters, reversing starters, soft starters, speed regulating rheostats with 2 speeds, frequency converters) - for near-motor or motor-mounted installation - as a stand-alone device or as an island solution • I/Os • Motors and geared motors • Installation components (cables, connectors etc. for communication and power) • Configuration and parameterization software

MOTORSTARTER ES 2006 is a tool forparameterizing and diagnosing the motor starters (stand-alone devices) in the ECOFAST system.


9/3

9


■ Design • Han-Brid data cable with integrated auxiliary voltage of 2 x 24 V and PROFIBUS DP protocol in copper and FO cable technology • AS-Interface cable with insulation displacement technology and integrated auxiliary voltage

The ECOFAST network topology The following network hardware is integrated: • Power cable 2.5 mm2 / 4 mm2 / 6 mm2 with/without Han Q4/2 power T / double-T clamping connector PROFIBUS DP

P&CM or cubicle 1 3 4

2

1) Auxiliary power supply 2) Main power supply (circuit-breaker, supply contactor ...) 3) Signal processing (PLC / PROFIBUS master) 4) Safety technology

power bus emergency stop Hybrid Field Bus Line PROFIBUS DP

Micromaster

Micromaster

ET 200X ET 200pro

Motors

PROFIBUS DP network topology

9

9/4



■ Design (continued) AS-Interface

P&CM or cubicle 1 3

2

4

1) Auxiliary power supply 2) Main power supply (circuit-breaker, supply contactor ...) 3) Signal processing (PLC / AS-I master) 4) Safety technology (e.g. AS-I safety at work)

AS-Interface auxiliary voltage power bus

Micromaster

emergency stop

Micromaster

AS-Interface Communication

Motors

AS-Interface network topology

9


9/5


■ Design (continued) Interface overview

power-T-connector Han Q4/2 (socket) Han Q4/2 (pin)

Hybrid Field Bus Line HanBrid connector

spur line

data-T-adapter RS485 / FO

Han Q4/2 (socket) Han Q4/2 (pin)

motor starter

Han 10e (socket) Han 10e (pin)

Insulation Displacement Method motor cable

AS-Interface 24 V auxiliary voltage Han 10e (socket)

motor motor interface

HanDrive with Han 10e pin insert

Schematic interface overview (power bus on left, communication bus on right)

9

All interfaces for communication and power are standardized and according to DESINA specification. Communication through PROFIBUS DP • Hybrid cable for PROFIBUS DP (switched and non-switched auxiliary voltage) • Connection through HanBrid plug-in connectors • Transmission media: RS 485 or FO • Data T piece for interruption-free operation (with RS 485) Communication through AS-Interface Connection by insulation piercing method

Power bus • Shock-hazard-protected connection method • Connection through HanQ4/2 connector • Power T / double-T clamping connector for interruption-free operation Motor connection • Connection through Han10e plug-in connector on the switching device (for ET 200X / ET 200pro in Han Q8 version) • Connection through HanDrive/10e connector on the motor • Motor connection cable in shielded or non-shielded version: Use of a frequency converter requires EMC shielding Actuators/sensors Connection through M12 circular connectors

9/6



■ Design (continued) The data T pieces PROFIBUS-DP connection

PROFIBUS-DP connection

Data T piece PROFIBUS-DP RS485 4 x Han Brid D male/female 1,5 mm2 for 10 A (2 x 24 V auxiliary voltage) 2 x Han Brid D male/female

Data T piece PROFIBUS-DP FO 4 x Han Brid D male/female 1,5 mm2 for 10 A (2 x 24 V auxiliary voltage) 2 x Han Brid LWL male/female

Field device connection

NSA0_00189c

25-pin Sub-D socket

Data T piece

• Data T piece for PROFIBUS DP with cable cable (PROFIBUS DP RS 485) and 2 x 24 V auxiliary voltage (switched and non-switched) • Data T piece for PROFIBUS DP with FO cable (PROFIBUS DP FO) and 2 x 24 V auxiliary voltage (switched and nonswitched)

Data T pieces connect individual field devices to PROFIBUS DP. The data T pieces define the transmission medium (FO or RS 485) for the field device. The field device itself is neutral with regard to the transmission method. There are two T pieces in the ECOFAST system: Power T / double-T clamping connector design variants 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8)

P&CM

6 1

Power bus line (sold by the meter) Power-T-connector Power-T-T-connector Spur line Subsegment cable Power cable duct (cubicle) Prefabricated power cable Motor connecting cable

2

2

1

3

1

3

7

9

3

ET200X 4

5

4

axial

FU

4

MS MS angled

MS

8

MS 8

MS 8

Power T / double-T clamping connector design variants

Power T / double-T clamping connectors connect the components of an automation system to the power bus. The energy bus is not interrupted when the components are detached. Siemens IK PI · 2007

9/7

ECOFAST System ECOFAST motor starters and soft starters

■ Overview The starters can be installed close to the motor or mounted on the motor. The following are available • Single units for geographically distributed motors and • Isolated solutions (ET 200X and ET 200pro) for drives installed close together. The functionality in the ECOFAST system ranges from direct on-line starters, to reversing starters and soft starters through to frequency converters. Brake contacts are available as an option for the starters. Two or four integrated digital contacts enable sensors to be scanned locally.

Distributed motor starters are used for switching and protecting loads locally. Version with graded functional scope and with different installation possibilities ensure that both the functional requirements of the process and the constructional boundary conditions of the machine or installation are taken into account. Distributed motor starters are available for PROFIBUS DP and AS-Interface.

All starters are equipped throughout with standardized interfaces for data and energy in accordance with the ECOFAST specification: • HanBrid for PROFIBUS DP and insulation displacement method for AS-Interface • Han Q4/2 for the power supply • Han 10e for motor connection The starters can be connected using T pieces for data and T terminal connectors for power to prevent interruption. Detailed technical specifications of the Ecofast motor starters can be found in the manual "Ecofast Motor Starters".


Order No.

Field bus interface

Switching function

Motor protection

Setting range / performance range

Brake output

PROFIBUS DP

mechanical

Thermistor

0.3 ... 9 A / 4 kW 1)

No

3RK1 303-2AS54-1AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 303-2AS54-1AA3

Thermal motor model

0.3 ... 3 A / 1.1 kW

No

3RK1 303-5BS44-3AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 303-5BS44-3AA3

No

3RK1 303-5CS44-3AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 303-5CS44-3AA3

0.3 ... 3 A / 1.1 kW

No

3RK1 303-6BS74-3AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 303-6BS74-3AA3

2.4 ... 12 A / 5.5 kW

No

3RK1 303-6DS74-3AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 303-6DS74-3AA3

2.4 ... 9 A / 4 kW solid-state soft

9

AS-Interface




0.6 ... 4 A / 1.5 kW

400 V AC

3RK1 303-6ES84-3AA3

mechanical

Thermistor

0.3 ... 9 A / 4 kW 1)

No

3RK1 323-2AS54-1AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 323-2AS54-1AA3

Thermal motor model

0.3 ... 3 A / 1.1 kW 2.4 ... 9 A / 4 kW

solid-state soft


0.3 ... 3 A / 1.1 kW 2.4 ... 12 A / 5.5 kW



0.6 ... 4 A / 1.5 kW

1) The range from 0.3 to 9 A is fixed (wide range) and cannot be set/changed manually.

9/8


No

3RK1 323-5BS44-3AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 323-5BS44-3AA3

No

3RK1 323-5CS44-3AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 323-5CS44-3AA3

No

3RK1 323-6BS74-3AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 323-6BS74-3AA3

No

3RK1 323-6DS74-3AA0

400 V AC

3RK1 323-6DS74-3AA3

400 V AC

3RK1 323-6ES84-3AA3

ECOFAST System

ECOFAST Frequency Converters COMBIMASTER 411

■ Overview The COMBIMASTER 411 is the distributed drive solution with frequency converter. Thanks to its high functionality, the frequency converter can be used for a number of different drive applications e.g. in conveying and handling. The self-cooled frequency converter is available as a fixed mount on the motor.

In the ECOFAST system, AS-Interface or PROFIBUS DP is used for communication. We recommend that certified ECOFAST cables are used. In order to guarantee perfect operation in the plant or system – e.g. due to EMC distrubances – we recommend that shielded ECOFAST motor connection and PROFIBUS cables are used.


Order No.

COMBIMASTER 411 frequency converter with EMC filter class B including energy-saving motor 1LA7, "Improved Efficiency" eff2 Type of construction IM B3

1UA2 @@@-@ AA2 @-Z

Special versions

@@@

AS-Interface bus

M53

Solid-state brake control

M55

Dynamic brake unit (R&EM brake)

M79

PROFIBUS-DP

M80

Output (W) 370

Number of poles 2-pole

070-2

4-pole

073-4

2-pole

073-2

4-pole

080-4

750

2-pole

080-2

4-pole

083-4

1100

2-pole

083-2

4-pole

090-4

2-pole

090-2

4-pole

096-4

2-pole

096-2

550

1500 2200

4-pole Type of motor construction

106-4 Ident. no. for type of motor construction, see Catalog M11 (motor catalog) and Catalog DA51.3 (COMBIMASTER 411/ MICROMASTER 411)

9


9/9

ECOFAST System

ECOFAST Frequency Converters MICROMASTER 411

■ Overview MICROMASTER 411 is the distributed drive solution with a frequency converter. Thanks to its diverse functional scope, the frequency converter can be used for a wide range of different drive appplications, e.g. in conveyor systems. The self-cooled frequency converter is available in a wall mounted version for mounting close to the motor.

The communication interface is implemented in the ECOFAST system via PROFIBUS DP or the AS-Interface. We recommend that certified ECOFAST cables are used. In order to guarantee perfect operation in the plant or system – e.g. due to EMC distrubances – we recommend that shielded ECOFAST motor connection and PROFIBUS cables are used.


Order No.

MICROMASTER 411 frequency converter EMC filter class A

6SE6 411-6AD @@-@ @@@

Output 370 W

1 3-7

550 W

1 5-5

750 W

1 7-5

1.1 kW

2 1-1

1.5 kW

2 1-5

2.2 kW

2 2-2

3.0 kW

2 3-0

Frame size ECOFAST CSB

V

ECOFAST CSC

W

Options / combinations Mount AS-i on left side

P3

Mount PROFIBUS on left side

P7

Mount AS-i on left side, EM brake on right side

S3

Mount AS-i on left side, R&EM brake on right side

S4

Mount PROFIBUS-i on left side, EM brake on right side

S7

Mount PROFIBUS-i on left side, R&EM brake on right side

S8

For more information see Catalogs M 11 and D81.1 (Motor Catalog) and Catalog DA 51.3 (COMBIMASTER 411/MICROMASTER 411

9

9/10


ECOFAST System Peripherals

■ Overview The ET 200X and the ET 200pro are both modular I/O devices with a high degree of protection for PROFIBUS DP. The functionoriented construction of stations is possible using the technology-oriented modules. Combinations with several motor starters in an ET 200X or ET 200pro station form isolated solutions for near-motor installation in the ECOFAST system.

For further information see section: • ET 200X distributed I/O • ET 200Xpro distributed I/O • ET 200eco distributed I/O

The ET 200eco is an I/O device with a high degree of protection for PROFIBUS DP. It is constructed in block design. Each I/O device has a fixed number of inputs and outputs.

9


9/11

ECOFAST System ECOFAST Selection Module

■ Overview With the selection module, feeders on the power bus can be shut down selectively, e.g. for services purposes. The module is equipped with a lockable switch for this purpose (repair switch). It also has line protection for cross-section transitions on the power bus and can be used to extend the power bus segments. Product range: • Modules with 8, 16, and 25 A rated current • With checkback contact M12 • Generally with 6 mm² wiring


Order No.

Selective module For selective deactivation of feeders, with repair switch function for line protection at cross-section transitions and to extend the segments with checkback contact M12 Connected load in A •8

3RK1 911-4AB08

• 16

3RK1 911-4AB16

• 25

3RK1 911-4AB25

9

9/12


ECOFAST System ECOFAST Hybrid Field Bus Connections

■ Overview Infeed: The auxiliary power is fed into the field from the IP20 side. Looping: The auxiliary power comes from the field (IP65). Characteristics of the active glands (with repeater function): • Control cabinet gland from IP20 to IP65 • After switching on, the baud rate is detected automatically and is retained up to a voltage reset / LED yellow. • Signal regeneration between segment 1 (IP20 side) and segment 2 (IP65 side):

Copper hybrid field bus connection (socket/socket) for the infeed

Hybrid field bus connections are designed as control cabinet glands. They are the interface between the control cabinet (IP20) and the field (IP65). They are also used to jointly route PROFIBUS DP and the auxiliary voltages into the hybrid field bus cable. Hybrid field bus connections are available in different versions (active/passive): • Glands for RS485 transmission systems • Glands for FO transmission systems • Glands with RS485/FO converters The field side is connected using HanBrid plug connectors. The two-channel version (2 HanBrid) enables the simple integration of IP20 devices in the control box or site box into the ECOFAST system. The version with fast-connect connections for PROFIBUS in Cu/Cu technology shortens the installation time appreciably.


Order No.

Hybrid field bus connections • passive Connection type / Function

Connection IP65

Connection IP20 (PROFIBUS)

Cu/Cu For supply (switchgear cabinet, P&C module)

Socket/socket

Direct connection

3RK1 911-1AA22

Cu/Cu For supply (switchgear cabinet, P&C module)

Socket/socket

PROFIBUS bus termination connector FastConnect

3RK1 911-1AF22

Cu/Cu For routing (local control boxes)

Pin/socket

Direct connection

3RK1 911-1AA32


Pin/socket

PROFIBUS bus termination connector FastConnect

3RK1 911-1AF32

9

• active (repeater) Connection type / Function

Connection IP65

Connection IP20 (PROFIBUS)

Cu/Cu For feeder (switchgear cabinet, P&C module)

Socket/socket

9-pin Sub-D socket

3RK1 911-1AH22


Pin/socket

9-pin Sub-D socket

3RK1 911-1AH32

Cu/LWL For feeder (switchgear cabinet, P&C module)

Socket/socket

9-pin Sub-D socket

3RK1 911-1AG22

LWL/Cu For routing (local control boxes)

Pin/socket

9-pin Sub-D socket

3RK1 911-1AG32


9/13

ECOFAST System ECOFAST motors

■ Overview The standard motors and gear motors of the ECOFAST system are equipped with standardized plug connections. The switching device is connected with a motor connection cable (if it is installed close to the motor) or mounted directly onto the motor (integrated installation). The motor is supplied with a HanDrive motor connector if the ordering option G56 is selected: shielded connection.


9

9/14

Version

Order No.

Low-voltage motors with HanDrive Han 10E motor connector Performance range: 0.06 to 7.5 kW Frame sizes 56M-132M For series compatible with ECOFAST (options): 1LA7, frame sizes 56-132 (G55, G56) 1LA9, frame sizes 56-132 (G55, G56) 1LP7, frame sizes 63-132 (G55, G56) 1PP7, frame sizes 56-132 (G55, G56)

see Catalog M 11 or D 81.1

Geared motors with HanDrive Han 10e motor connector Frame sizes 63-132 For series compatible with ECOFAST (option G55/G56)

see Catalog M 15/M 15 News

Helical gear motor 2KG1 31/41 Performance range: 0.09 to 5.5 kW Output torque: 90 to 20000 Nm


Flat-type geared motor 2KG1 32/42 Performance range: 0.09 to 5.5 kW Output torque: 150 to 20000 Nm


Bevel gear motors 2KG1 33/43 Performance range: 0.09 to 5.5 kW Output torque: 130 to 20000 Nm


Helical gear motor 2KG1 34 Performance range: 0.12 to 5.5 kW Output torque: 120 to 1680 Nm


Worm gear motor 2KG1 35 Performance range: 0.09 to 5.5 kW Output torque: 40 to 230 Nm



ECOFAST System 4FB21 PCM power and control modules

■ Overview The Power & Control Module (PCM) forms the nodal point of the ECOFAST system. It sees to the power infeed, distribution and fusing as well as to auxiliary current generation, signal processing and EMERGENCY STOP functions. With the PCM the user has an optimized and tested system component that enables him to to do without an own control cabinet. This means that the customer is no longer responsible for the related engineering. The necessary variability of the PCM (80 versions) with regard to signal processing, safety engineering and the supply of the main and auxiliary current is achieved through the use of function units, which are also available as replacement parts with plug connectors for easy and fast connection. This adds further to the increase in availability that already goes hand in hand with the ECOFAST system.

IP65 version

Full functionality is also provided by the built-in control cabinet versions for those customer who are unable or unwilling to do without their own control cabinets but would still like to use tested and ECOFAST-certified modules. The optimum version is ideally selected using the configuring tool ECOFAST ES.

Built-in control cabinet version

Features: • Main current supply 3 AC 400 V • Graded ratings 16 / 20 / 25 / 32 / 40 A • Generation of the auxiliary voltage 24 V DC: SIDAC or SITOP • PROFIBUS DP master or slave functionality • Optional with integrated PLC S7-300 CPU 313C-2 DP • PROFIBUS DP, optional AS-Interface in addition • EMERGENCY STOP functionality/safety technology SIGUARD contactor safety combination AS-Interface Safety at Work • Standardized interfaces for communication and energy • IP65 or built-in control cabinet By constructing Power & Control Modules using the above mentioned function units it is possible to implement more versions with little effort. If the requirements of a particular application cannot be met with these PCMs, special solutions are also possible of course. In this case please contact your local Siemens representative and cite the order number stem 4FB2 1… Note: More information and Ordering data can be found in our interactive Catalog CA 01 in the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/automation/ca01 or on CD-ROM (Order No.: E86060-D4001-A110-C4-7600) and in the A&D Mall: http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall


9/15

9

ECOFAST System

Connection methods Power cables

■ Overview The power lines are used to supply the switching devices and loads of the ECOFAST system with 400 V AC. The power is supplied in a line as a power bus. Prefabricated power cables are available • in different variants, • with different cross-sections and numbers of conductors as well as • in different lengths.

With the spur lines; the switching device is connected with a connection lead. Han Q4/2 + Han Q4/2 The ET 200X and ET 200pro is connected with a separate subsegment cable. Han Q4/2 + Han Q8/0


Order No.

Non-assembled power bus cables Cross-section mm²

Fixed length m

Any length 1) m

5x4

20

--

3RK1911-0AG60

50

--

3RK1911-0AG70

100

--

3RK1911-0AG80

20

--

3RK1911-0AH60

50

--

3RK1911-0AH70

100

--

3RK1911-0AH80

5x6

Prefabricated power cables (new) Cross-section mm²

Fixed length m

Any length 1) m

Spur line/connection of switching devices/motor starters on both sides with axial Han Q4/2 (pin/socket) cable gland 5x4

5x6

--

<3

3RK1 911-0CP21

--

> 3.1 to < 5

3RK1 911-0CP31

--

> 5.1 to < 10

3RK1 911-0CP41

--

> 10.1 to < 15

3RK1 911-0CP51

--

<3

3RK1 911-0CP22

--

> 3.1 to < 5

3RK1 911-0CP32

--

> 5.1 to < 10

3RK1 911-0CP42

--

> 10.1 to < 15

3RK1 911-0CP52

Subsegment/connection of ET 200X Han Q4/2 (pin) axial cable gland / Han Q8/0 (socket) angular cable gland 5x4

9

--

<3

3RK1 911-0CR21

--

> 3.1 to < 5

3RK1 911-0CR31

--

> 5.1 to < 10

3RK1 911-0CR41

--

> 10.1 to < 15

3RK1 911-0CR51

1) The length must be entered manually when ordering (example: length = 7.50 m). The order must be placed in increments of 10 cm.

9/16


ECOFAST System

Connection methods Motor connection cables

■ Overview Motor connection cables are used to connect the motor with the switching device (ECOFAST starter / frequency converter / stand-alone devices). Prefabricated cables are available

• • • •

in different variants, with a different number of conductors, in different lengths and in shielded and unshielded versions.


Order No.

Motor connection cables Cross-section mm²

Fixed length m

Any length 1) m

factory fitted with Han 10e (pin/socket) on both sides, unshielded 11 x 1.5

7 x 1.5

1.5

--

3RK1 911-0BK10

--

< 2.9

3RK1 911-0CK20

3

--

3RK1 911-0BK20

--

> 3.1 to < 4.9

3RK1 911-0CK30

5

--

3RK1 911-0BK30

1.5

--

3RK1 911-0BH10

--

< 2.9

3RK1 911-0CH20

3

--

3RK1 911-0BH20

--

> 3.1 to < 4.9

3RK1 911-0CH30

5

--

3RK1 911-0BH30

factory fitted with Han 10e (pin/socket) on both sides, shielded 4 x 2.5 4 x 0.75

1.5

--

3RK1 911-0BU10

--

< 2.9

3RK1 911-0CU20

3

--

3RK1 911-0BU20

--

> 3.1 to < 4.9

3RK1 911-0CU30

5

--

3RK1 911-0BU30

factory fitted with Han 10e (pin) on one side, unshielded 11 x 1.5

7 x 1.5

1.5

--

3RK1 911-0BJ10

--

< 2.9

3RK1 911-0CJ20

3

--

3RK1 911-0BJ20

--

> 3.1 to < 4.9

3RK1 911-0CJ30

5

--

3RK1 911-0BJ30

1.5

--

3RK1 911-0BG10

--

< 2.9

3RK1 911-0CG20

3

--

3RK1 911-0BG20

--

> 3.1 to < 4.9

3RK1 911-0CG30

5

--

3RK1 911-0BG30

9

factory-fitted with Han 10e (pin) on one side, shielded 4 x 2.5 4 x 0.75

1.5

--

3RK1 911-0BV10

--

< 2.9

3RK1 911-0CV20

3

--

3RK1 911-0BV20

--

> 3.1 to < 4.9

3RK1 911-0CV30

5

--

3RK1 911-0BV30

20

--

3RK1 911-0BW60

50

--

3RK1 911-0BW70

100

--

3RK1 911-0BW80

non-assembled 4 x 2.5 4 x 0.75

1) The length must be entered manually when ordering (example: length = 7.50 m). The order must be placed in increments of 10 cm.


9/17

ECOFAST System

Connection methods Motor connection cables


Order No.

Motor connection for frequency converter EM 148-FC factory-fitted, shielded, HAN Q8 open end • 1.5 m

6ES7 194-1LA01-0AA0

•3m

6ES7 194-1LB01-0AA0

•5m

6ES7 194-1LC01-0AA0

• 10 m

6ES7 194-1LD01-0AA0

Unshielded motor connection for ET 200X, one side with Han Q8 Cross-section mm²

Fixed length m

4 x 1.5

• 1.5 m

3RK1 902-0CL00

•3m

3RK1 902-0CM00

•5m

3RK1 902-0CP00

• 10 m

3RK1 902-0CQ00

•3m

3RK1 902-0CN00

•5m

3RK1 902-0CR00

• 10 m

3RK1 902-0CS00

6 x 1.5

9

9/18


ECOFAST System

Connection methods ECOFAST bus cables

■ Overview

In the ECOFAST system, all operational devices are connected to PROFIBUS DP using the bus cables. The bus cable is implemented as a hybrid cable and contains: • PROFIBUS DP in copper RS 485; • Four additional copper cores for carrying 24 V DC: - 24 V DC, not switched (for electronics and inputs) - 24 V DC, switched (for outputs, disconnectable e.g. for EMERGENCY OFF) The ECOFAST hybrid cables are sold by the meter or in fixed lengths preassembled with ECOFAST connector (Han Brid) and socket.

■ Benefits • Savings in wiring, installation, commissioning and operation as result of standardized connection system (copper or fiberoptic) with high degree of protection (IP65) • With ECOFAST, the turnaround times for offers, planning and engineering of machines and plants can be reduced • ECOFAST permits fast and problem-free startup of automation and drive systems • Minimization of sources of error by means of standardized interfaces and plug connectors. • With ECOFAST plants remain highly available: No interruption of power and fieldbus when replacing equipment.


PROFIBUS ECOFAST hybrid cable 1) 2)

Applications

Connection for ECOFAST stations

Damping • at 16 MHz • at 4 MHz • at 9.6 kHz

< 49 dB/km < 25 dB/km < 3 dB/km

Characteristic impedance • at 9.6 kHz • at 38.4 kHz • at 3 to 20 MHz

270 ± 27 Ω 185 ± 18.5 Ω 150 ± 15 Ω

Rated value

≤ 150 Ω

Loop resistance

≤ 138 Ω/km

Shield resistance

≤ 15 Ω/km


30 pF/m


100 V

Power cores (stranded wires) diameter • Current carrying capability of the power cores • Sheath color

1.5 mm2

Cable type (standard designation) • ECOFAST hybrid cable • ECOFAST hybrid cable GP

Black 02Y (ST)C 1 x 2 x 0.65/2.56-150 LI LIH-Z 11Y 4 x 1 x 1.5 VI FRNC 02Y (ST)C 1 x 2 x 0.65/2.56-150 LI LIY-Z Y 4 x 1 x 1.5 VI

Sheath • Material - ECOFAST hybrid cable - ECOFAST hybrid cable GP

PUR PVC

• Diameter

approx. 11 mm

• Color

Violet


–40 ºC … +60 ºC –40 ºC … +60 ºC –40 ºC … +60 ºC

Bending radius • Single bend • Multiple bends

38 mm 55 mm


≤ 300 N

Weight

approx. 154 kg/km

Halogen-free • ECOFAST hybrid cable • ECOFAST hybrid cable GP

Yes No

Behavior in fire

1) Electrical characteristics at 20 °C, tests according to DIN 47 250 Part 4 or DIN VDE 0472 2) Trailing cable for the following requirements: ECOFAST hybrid cable: Min. 9 million bending cycles for the specified bending radius and an acceleration of max. 5 m/s2; ECOFAST hybrid cable GP: Min. 2 million bending cycles for the specified bending radius and an acceleration of max. 2.5 m/s2

12 A


UL listing / 300 V rating • ECOFAST hybrid cable • ECOFAST hybrid cable GP

No CM/PLTC/SunRes/Oil Res

UL style / 600 V rating • ECOFAST hybrid cable • ECOFAST hybrid cable GP

No Yes


9

Limited

UV-resistant • ECOFAST hybrid cable • ECOFAST hybrid cable GP

No Yes

Silicone-free

Yes


No Siemens IK PI · 2007

9/19

ECOFAST System

Connection methods ECOFAST bus cables

■ Ordering data PROFIBUS ECOFAST Hybrid Cable - Cu Trailing cable (PUR sheath), with two shielded Cu wires for PROFIBUS DP plus four Cu wires of 1.5 mm2 Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

Order No.

6XV1 830-7AH10


6XV1 830-7AN20

• 50 m

6XV1 830-7AN50

• 100 m

6XV1 830-7AT10

Pre-assembled with ECOFAST male and female connectors, fixed length • 0.5 m

6XV1 830-7BH05

PROFIBUS Cu bus connector with 2 x Cu shielded and 4 x Cu 1.5 mm2; 5 units; with installation instructions • with pin insert

6GK1 905-0CA00

• with socket insert

6GK1 905-0CB00

PROFIBUS ECOFAST Hybrid Plug angled; with 2 x Cu shielded and 4 x Cu 1.5 mm2; 5 units; with installation instructions • Male pins

6GK1 905-0CC00

• Female pins;

6GK1 905-0CD00

•1m

6XV1 830-7BH10

• 1.5 m

6XV1 830-7BH15

•3m

6XV1 830-7BH30

•5m

6XV1 830-7BH50

ECOFAST Terminating Plug Bus termination plug-in connector for PROFIBUS DP; with 2 x Cu and 4 x Cu 1.5 mm2; male pins, integrated termination resistors

• 10 m

6XV1 830-7BN10

• Pack of 1

6GK1 905-0DA10

• 15 m

6XV1 830-7BN15

• Pack of 5

6GK1 905-0DA00

• 20 m

6XV1 830-7BN20

• 25 m

6XV1 830-7BN25

• 30 m

6XV1 830-7BN30

• 35 m

6XV1 830-7BN35

• 40 m

6XV1 830-7BN40

• 45 m

6XV1 830-7BN45

• 50 m Pre-assembled with two ECOFAST connectors, variable length 1) PROFIBUS ECOFAST Hybrid Cable GP Trailing cable with 4 x Cu and 2 x Cu, shielded, with UL approval Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m; minimum order 20 m;

6XV1 830-7BN50

6XV1 860-2P

• 20 m

6XV1 860-4PN20

• 50 m

6XV1 860-4PN50

• 100 m

6XV1 860-4PT10

Pre-assembled with ECOFAST male and female connectors • 0.5 m

6XV1 860-3PH05

•1m

6XV1 860-3PH10

• 1,5 m

6XV1 860-3PH15

•3m

6XV1 860-3PH30

•5m

6XV1 860-3PH50

• 10 m

6XV1 860-3PN10

• 15 m

6XV1 860-3PN15

• 20 m

6XV1 860-3PN20

• 25 m

6XV1 860-3PN25

• 30 m

6XV1 860-3PN30

• 35 m

6XV1 860-3PN35

• 40 m

6XV1 860-3PN40

• 45 m

6XV1 860-3PN45

• 50 m

6XV1 860-3PN50

9/20


Data T piece For 2 x 24 V auxiliary voltage (switched and non-switched) and PROFIBUS DP • for Cu RS 485

3RK1 911-2AG00


3RK1 911-2AH00

Addressing plug For setting the PROFIBUS DP addresses

6ES7 194-1KB00-0XA0


Not pre-assembled

9

Order No. Additional components

You can order components supplementary to the SIMATIC NET cabling range from your local Siemens representative. For technical support, please contact: J. Hertlein Tel.: +49(0) 911/750 44 65 Fax: +49(0) 911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]

ECOFAST System

Connection methods

ECOFAST fiber-optic hybrid cable

■ Overview


ECOFAST fiber optic hybrid cable (DESINA-compatible)

Core cross-section Applications

DESINA-compatible devices, e.g. for ET 200X

Delivery format

Sold by the meter; can be assembled on site with DESINA plugs or preassembled with 2 DESINA plugs


J-V11Y 4Y2P980/1000 230A10 FFLIY 4 × 1.5

Fiber type

Step-index fiber


≤ 260 dB/km

Number of fibers

2 × FOC, 4 × copper

Materials

• Electrical isolation of DP devices • Protection of the transmission path against electromagnetic interference • Up to 50 m cable length with plastic fiber-optic cable • Rugged fiber-optic cables, designed for industrial applications • Hybrid cable for the shared transmission of data and power supply

■ Benefits

• Fiber core


• Cladding

Fluorinated special polymer


PA, black, orange


PUR, violet

• Strain relief

–

• Copper cores - rated voltage - current load - nominal area - sheath material/color

300 V 10 A 1.5 mm2 PVC, black


• Savings in wiring, installation, commissioning and operation as result of standardized connection system (copper or fiberoptic) with high degree of protection (IP65) • With ECOFAST, the turnaround times for offers, planning and engineering of machines and plants can be reduced: • ECOFAST permits fast and problem-free startup of automation and drive systems • Minimization of sources of error by means of standardized interfaces and plug connectors. • With ECOFAST plants remain highly available: No interruption of power and field bus when replacing equipment.

■ Application The ECOFAST Fiber Optic Hybrid Cable of SIMATIC NET is used to construct optical PROFIBUS DP networks indoors. It is particularly suitable for connecting DESINA components installed at machine level, and is easy to assemble on site. The maximum cable length between two DP devices is 50 m.

■ Design The rugged, hybrid trailing cable contains two plastic fiber-optic cables for data transmission and four copper wires (1.5 mm2) for supplying power to DESINA 1) stations.


980 µm


1000 µm


2.2 ± 0.01 mm Ø


10.6 mm Ø

• Cable weight

135 kg/km

• Maximum permissible tensile force - temporary - constant

≤ 100 N ≤ 30 N

• Bending radius - once without tensile force - more than once with tensile force

– ≥ 106 mm

• Resistance to lateral force per 10 cm cable length (temporary) • Resistance against - mineral oil ASTM No. 2 - mineral grease/water - UV radiation

≤ 100 N/10 cm

9

Limited Limited No


+5 ºC … +70 ºC


–30 ºC … +70 ºC

• Routing

+5 ºC … +70 ºC


+160 °C (max. 5 sec)

Behavior in fire


UL/CSA approvals

No

UV-resistant

No

Halogen-free

No

Silicone-free

Yes

1) DESINA is the trademark for DEcentralized and Standardized INstallAtion technology for machine tools.


9/21

ECOFAST System

Connection methods

ECOFAST fiber-optic hybrid cable

■ Ordering data ECOFAST fiber optic hybrid cable (DESINA-compatible) Trailing cable with 2 plastic fiberoptic conductors and 4 copper cores, 1.5 mm2 for use in DESINA-compatible devices only Sold by the meter; max. quantity 1000 m, minimum order 20 m

Order No.

6XV1 830-6CH10


6XV1 830-6CN20

• 50 m

6XV1 830-6CN50

• 100 m

6XV1 830-6CT10

Preassembled with 2 DESINA connectors • 1.5 m

6XV1 830-6DH15

•3m

6XV1 830-6DH30

•5m

6XV1 830-6DH50

• 10 m

6XV1 830-6DN10

• 15 m

6XV1 830-6DN15

ECOFAST Fiber Optic Hybrid Plug 180, DESINA-compatible (ECOFAST FOC) 2 x FO; 4 x 1.5 mm2 Cu • With male pins (Hanbrid connector) • With female pins (Hanbrid connector)

6GK1 905-0BA00 6GK1 905-0BB00

Manual for PROFIBUS networks Paper version: Network architecture, project management, network components, mounting • German

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA0

• English

6GK1 970-5CA20-0AA1


6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0

9

9/22


■ More information You can order components supplementary to the SIMATIC NET cabling range from your local contact. Technical advice on this subject is available from: J. Hertlein Tel.: +49(0)911/750 44 65 Fax: +49(0)911/750 99 91 E-mail: [email protected]

ECOFAST System

Connection methods

AS-Interface shaped cables

■ Overview The actuator/sensor interface – the networking system for the lowest field level – distinguishes itself by very simple assembly and installation. A new connection method has been specially developed for the AS-Interface. The network stations are connected by means of the AS-Interface cable. This two-wire cable has a trapezoidal profile which makes incorrect connection impossible. The connection uses the insulation piercing method. Two contact pins pierce the trapezoidal-section AS-Interface cable and ensure safe connection of the two wires. Cutting or stripping is no longer necessary. This allows AS-Interface stations (e.g. I/O modules, intelligent devices) to be connected very quickly. The devices can also be replaced extremely quickly. To permit the use in different ambient conditions (e.g. in environments that contain oil), the AS-Interface cable is available in different materials (rubber, TPE, PUR). A standard round cable can also be used for special applications. The AS-Interface uses the yellow AS-Interface cable to transmit data and power for the sensors (e.g. BERO proximity switch) and actuators (e.g. indicator lights). The black AS-Interface cable must be used for actuators with a 24 V DC power supply (e.g. solenoid valves) which require a lot of power.


Order No.


AS-i blue

4

NSA0_00125a

10

Material

Color

Quantity

Rubber


100-m roll

3RX9 010-0AA00

1-km drum

3RX9 012-0AA00

100-m roll

3RX9 020-0AA00

1-km drum

3RX9 022-0AA00

100-m roll

3RX9 013-0AA00

1-km drum

3RX9 014-0AA00

100-m roll

3RX9 023-0AA00

1-km drum

3RX9 024-0AA00

100-m roll

3RX9 017-0AA00

100-m roll

3RX9 027-0AA00

100-m roll

3RX9 015-0AA00

1-km drum

3RX9 016-0AA00

100-m roll

3RX9 025-0AA00

1-km drum

3RX9 026-0AA00

6.5 AS-i brown

Black (24 V DC) TPE


TPE special version Yellow (AS-Interface) according to UL Black (24 V DC) Class 2 PUR

1)


9

1) Note on towability of the AS-Interface cable with PUR outer sheath: To determine its towability, the AS-Interface cable was tested in "IGUS tow chains" Type 10.2.048 and 20.2.55. For the test the tow chain was fitted with 3 ¥ AS-Interface cables and diverse round cables. After three million bendings (travel), no damage to the cores, strands or outer sheath were discovered (tow chain equipped to 50%).


9/23

ECOFAST System

Accessories Energy


Order No.

Enclosures

Usage

Contacts

Connector set for incoming power supply HAN Q4/2 2.5 mm² / 4 mm² / 6 mm², comprising: Angular e.g. for power supply on motor starter One cable-end connector hood with PG 16

One female insert

5 female contacts 2.5 mm2

3RK1 911-2BE50

One cable-end connector hood with PG 16

One female insert

5 female contacts 4 mm2

3RK1 911-2BE10


One female insert


3RK1 911-2BE30

Straight e.g. for power supply on motor starter One cable-end connector hood with PG 16

One female insert


3RK1 911-2BR50


One female insert


3RK1 911-2BR10


One female insert


3RK1 911-2BR30

Connector set for power loop-through connection HanQ4/2 2.5 mm² / 4 mm² / 6 mm²,comprising: Angled e.g. for connection P&CM One coupling enclosure with PG 16

One male insert

5 male contacts 2.5 mm2

3RK1 911-2BF60

One coupling enclosure with PG 16

One male insert

5 male contacts 4 mm2

3RK1 911-2BF20


One male insert


3RK1 911-2BF40

Straight e.g. for connection on power T terminal connector One coupling enclosure with PG 16

One male insert


3RK1 911-2BS60


One male insert


3RK1 911-2BS20


One male insert


3RK1 911-2BS40

Control cabinet gland HanQ4/2 e.g. for installation in control cabinets or local switchboxes

3RK1 911-1BF00

Power T terminal connector For 400 V AC for connection of feeders (e.g. motor starters) by means of standard round cable at any point of the power bus, by insulation piercing method Use of preassembled bus segments • 2.5 mm² / 4 mm²

3RK1 911-2BF01

• 4 mm² / 6 mm²

3RK1 911-2BF02

Power double T terminal connector For 400 V AC for connection of feeders (e.g. motor starters) by means of standard round cable at any point of the power bus, by insulation piercing method Use of preassembled bus segments Connection of two motor starters possible • 4 mm² / 6 mm²

3RK1 911-2BG02

Gasket set (comprising 2 seals) For power T / power double T terminal connector

9

• For power cables with Ø 10 to 13 mm

3RK1 911-5BA00


3RK1 911-5BA10


3RK1 911-5BA20


3RK1 911-5BA30

• Blanking plugs

3RK1 911-5BA50

Connector set for motor connection Han10e • Unshielded • One coupling enclosure with PG 13, low

One male insert


3RK1 911-2BK00

• One coupling enclosure with PG 21, high

One male insert


3RK1 911-2BL00

One female insert


3RK1 911-2BM00

• One cable-end conn. hood with PG 21, high One female insert


3RK1 911-2BN00

One male insert

7 male contacts 3 × 2.5 mm2 + 4 × 0.75 mm2

3RK1 911-2BL10

One female insert

7 female contacts 3 × 2.5 mm2 + 4 × 0.75 mm2

3RK1 911-2BN10

Connection on motor • One cable-end conn. hood with PG 16, low • Shielded Outgoing feeder on motor starter • One coupling enclosure with M25 Connection on motor including star bridge • One cable-end connector hood with M25

9/24


ECOFAST System

Accessories

Communication


Order No.

Data T piece for 2 x 24 V auxiliary voltages (switched and non-switched) and PROFIBUS DP • for Cu RS485

3RK1 911-2AG00


3RK1 911-2AH00

Addressing plug for setting the PROFIBUS DP address

6ES7 194-1KB00-0XA0

ECOFAST bus termination plug connector for PROFIBUS DP • pack of one

6GK1 905-0DA10

• pack of 5

6GK1 905-0DA00

Installation


Order No.

Mounting bracket for ECOFAST for motor starters on motors with mounted insert

3RK1 911-3AA00



Order No.

Crimping tool for contact pins and sockets

3RK1 902-0AH00

• 1.5 and 2.5 mm2

3RK1 902-0CT00

2

3RK1 902-0AJ00

• 1.5, 2.5 to 4 mm

Disassembly tool for contact pins and sockets for 9-pole inserts (e.g. HAN Q8) Sealing cap for power sockets

3RK1 902-0CK00

• one unit per package

3RK1 902-0CJ00

• ten units per package

3RK1 911-0BN20

Interface cable for transmitting configuration data to an ECOFAST starter for AS-Interface for connection of a programming device/PC with motor starter ES 2006 to an ECOFAST starter

3RK1 911-2AM00

Test plug set for testing the motor starter without a communication link (manual operation)

3RK1 902-0AH00


9

9/25

ECOFAST System

Software

ECOFAST ES

■ Overview ECOFAST ES provides the following advantages: • Graphic user interface for selecting and interconnecting stations on the power bus • The components are identified down to the unique order number and entered in parts/quantity lists • Automatic interface and function testing by means of logic rules (e.g. motor braking units, selectivity, etc.) • Cable characteristics and laying specifications are taken into account in the calculation • Plug-in connections are adapted automatically • Division of projects into levels of hierarchy is possible • The software finally calculates and checks the configuration according to currently valid rules and state of the art • If necessary, an error list with hints for possible solutions (online help) can be output • The configuration can be optimized automatically • Choice of German, English and French as operating language ECOFAST ES for configuring, calculating and documenting of applications.

ECOFAST ES configuration tool The ECOFAST system is an open and innovative system solution for distributed applications and sets new standards in equipping machines and plants for automation, low-voltage controlgear and drives. The system therefore offers a high degree of safety and availability during operation in addition to high time and cost savings during planning and commissioning/installation. The convenient ECOFAST ES configuring software reduces configuring times even further and enables reliable configuring right from the start. ECOFAST ES reduces errors and effort during configuring, calculating and documenting of applications.

System requirements ECOFAST ES V1.4 supports all standard PCs with the Windows operating system. Minimum hardware and software requirements need to be met to work with ECOFAST ES V1.4; efficient operation is possible with the recommended values. System requirements

Minimum

Operating system (with service pack)

Windows 2000 or Windows XP Professional

Recommended

Processor

Pentium 800 MHz

Pentium 1000 MHz1)

• Resolution

1024 x 768

1280 x 1024

• Colors, number

256

True Color

Main memory

512 MB RAM

> 512 MB RAM

Free space on hard disk

At least 50 MB 2)

CD-ROM drive 3)

Yes, for the installation of ECOFAST ES V1.4

Graphics cards

1) More powerful platforms may be necessary when working with options. 2) Additional free space recommended, e.g. for swap-out file. 3) CD-ROM drive not required for using ECOFAST ES V1.4.

9

■ Ordering data ECOFAST ES, Basic Package V1.4 Graphical configuration tool for SIRIUS drive solutions • Operator guidance for selection of distributed products • Power design in accordance with relevant standards • Documentation, parts lists, quantity lists • Operating languages: German, English, French Delivered as CD, single license

9/26


Order No. 3ZS1 200-0CC14-0YA0

ECOFAST System

Software

ES motor starters

■ Overview Switch ES motor starter is used for start-up, parameterization, diagnostics, documentation and for preventative maintenance of the High Feature motor starters of the SIMATIC ET 200S and ECOFAST product families. Interfacing is performed • either via the serial device interface (applies to ET 200S / ECOFAST) or • with PROFIBUS DP V1 capable motor starters from any point in PROFIBUS (for ECOFAST). Using Switch ES motor starter, the communication-capable motor starters are easily parameterized during start-up, monitored during normal operation and successfully diagnosed for service purposes. Preventative maintenance is supported by a function for reading out diverse statistical data (e.g. operating hours, operating cycles, cut-off currents, etc.). The user is supported during these procedures with comprehensive Help functions and plain text displays. ES motor starter for parametrization, monitoring, diagnostics and testing of ECOFAST motor starters

Switch ES motor starter can either be used as a stand-alone program or it can be integrated into STEP 7 V5.1 SP3 upwards via an object manager. The following components are required for a serial connection: ET200S High Feature motor starters: • 2 DI 24 V DC COM control module 3RK1 903-0CH10 • LOGO! PC cable 6ED1 057-1AA00-0BA0 ET 200pro motor starter: • RS 232 interface cable 3RK1 922-2BP00 ECOFAST High Feature motor starters (interface cable): • PC cable 3RK1 911-0BN20

9


9/27

ECOFAST System

Software

ES motor starters

■ Ordering data Soft Starter ES 2006 Smart Single license, comprising • ES Motor Starter for parameterizing, monitoring, diagnosing and testing the ECOFAST Motor Starters, SIMATIC ET 200S High Feature Starters and SIMATIC ET 200pro Motor Starters over a serial connection - with Online Help German/English selectable - Operating system: Windows 2000/XP • System requirements: - Cable for serial communication through a serial interface - CD-ROM drive

Order No. 3ZS1 310-1CC10-0YA0

Control module 2DI DC 24 V 3RK1 903-0CH10 COM Digital input module with 2 inputs for local motor starter functions for mounting onto the front of motor starters Operatinal voltage 24 V DC (supplied from U1), short-circuit proof, floating contact with serial interface for connecting to ES Motor Starter Connected using LOGO! PC cable, max. cable length (out and back) 50 m

Motor Starter ES 2006 3ZS1 310-2CC10-0YA0 Professional Single license, comprising • ES Motor Starter for parameterizing, monitoring, diagnosing and testing the ECOFAST Motor Starters, SIMATIC ET 200S High Feature Starters and SIMATIC ET 200pro Motor Starters over PROFIBUS DP or a serial connection - with Online Help German/English selectable - Operating system: Windows 2000/XP • STEP7 Object Manager (OM) For integrating the ECOFAST starter as S7 slave in SIMATIC S7 For calling ES Motor Starter from STEP 7 Motor Starter ES 2006 Professional Upgrade Single license, comprising • Upgrade from Switch ES Motor Starter 2004 or ES Motor Starter Smart 2005 to ES Motor Starter 2006 Professional

9

Order No. Accessories for ET 200S High Feature Motor Starters

LOGO! PC cable For connecting the high feature motor starter with ES Motor Starter interface to a PC

6ED1 057-1AA00-0BA0

Accessories for ET 200pro motor starters RS 232 interface cable For serial data connection between an ET 200pro motor starter and a laptop/PC/PG

3RK1 922-2BP00

Accessories for ECOFAST High Feature Motor Starters (interface cable) PC cable

3RK1 911-0BN20

3ZS1 310-2CC10-0YE0

Documentation

■ Selection and Ordering data Documentation can be downloaded from the Internet. http://support.automation.siemens.com

7 9/28


Appendix

10/2

Abbreviations, Explanations

10/17

Training

10/19

Software “Quick Start”

10/20

Standards and approbations

10/21

Quality management

10/22

Siemens contacts worldwide

10/23

Siemens Solution Partner Automation and Power Distribution

10/24

Information and Ordering in the Internet and on CD-ROM

10/25

Customer Support

10/27

Safety of electronic devices

10/28

Software Licenses

10/29

Index

10/33

Ordering data summary

10/37

Fax order form

10/38

Conditions of sale and delivery Export regulations


Appendix Abbreviations, Explanations

10

Term

Meaning

Definition

1 100BaseFX

—

Fast Ethernet Standard for data transmission on glass fiber-optic cables

100BaseT

—

Fast Ethernet Standard

100BaseVG

—

A specification for 100 Mbit/s networks. This is based on the demand priority access procedure which is totally incompatible to CSMA/CD. 100BaseVG is also specified for telephone cable (voice grade). 100BaseVG has never been able to penetrate the market.

10Base2

—

Standard for the transmission of 10 Mbit/s Ethernet on thin coaxial cables; segment length 185 m

10Base5

—

Standard for the transmission of 10 Mbit/s Ethernet on coaxial cables (yellow cable); segment length 500 m

10BaseFL

—

Standard for the transmission of 10 Mbit/s Ethernet on glass fiber cables (fiber link)

10BaseT

—

Standard for the transmission of 10 Mbit/s Ethernet on twisted pair cables

A Access Point

—

Wireless LANs can be connected to wire-bound Ethernet networks through Access Point. The device can also be used to extend the range of individual wireless LAN components.

ACL

Access Control List

List of MAC addresses that are authorized to access the radio network

Ad-hoc network

—

Radio link between individual devices (point-to-point)

AES

Advanced Encryption Standard

Powerful encoding mechanism in radio networks to protect against eavesdropping and unauthorized access

Actuator

—

Controlling element

Aerial diversity

—

Method according to which a radio receiver is equipped with two antennae and can select the better signal from the two signals received

ALI

Application Layer Interface

Interface for the application layer; it maps the interface of an application process into the standardized interface of the application layer and vice versa.

Antenna gain

—

Improvement (passive!) of the antenna range thanks to a suitable design as compared to an isotropic radiator

AP

Automation Protocol

Automation protocol. Layers 5 to 7 of the ISO reference model

ASIC

Application Specific Integrated Circuit

Application-specific IC

AS-Interface

Actuator-Sensor Interface

Network for the direct connection of simple binary sensors and actuators (transmission of low information volumes)

ASPC 2

Advanced Siemens PROFIBUS ASIC used in master modules of the PROFIBUS interfaces for Controller der 2. Generation transmission rates of up to 12 Mbit/s

Atex

—

Approval for explosion-proof areas

ATM

Asynchronus Transfer Mode

Technique in which data traffic is transmitted in smaller packages of fixed length by means of asynchronous time-division multiplexing

AUI

Attachment Unit Interface

Interface in accordance with IEEE 802.3

Autocrossover

—

Function enables automatic crossing of send and receive lines at twisted-pair interfaces.

Autonegotiation

—

Configuration protocol in Fast Ethernet. Devices on the network agree a transmission mode before data transmission starts which each unit is able to handle (100 Mbit/s or 10 Mbit/s, full duplex or half duplex).

Autosensing

—

Ability of a device to automatically detect the data transmission rate (10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s) and to send and receive at this rate.

AWG

American Wire Gauge

US standard also known as Brown & Sharp (B&S) Wire Gauge. It specifies the diameter of copper conductors.

10/2


Appendix Abbreviations, Explanations Term

Meaning

Definition

B BERO

—

Proximity switch

BFOC

Bayonett Fiber Optic Connector

Standardized connector for glass fiber optic cables with bayonet lock; also referred to as "ST" (see ST connector)

BRECV

—

Block-oriented receipt of data

Bridge

—

A network component which interconnects network segments. It ensures that local data traffic remains local, i.e. data packages are only passed on if they are addressed to a node in another segment. Faults within a network segment remain restricted to the respective segment. In contrast to switches, bridges are only able to handle one data flow at any point in time. Bridges are no longer relevant in the market place.

Broadcast

Series of messages in a computer network

Message in which data packets are transmitted from one point to all nodes in a network

BSEND

—

Block-oriented sending of data

Burst

—

Temporary increased network loading due to a data surge or alarm avalanche

C Category-x Components

—

Cabling components are divided into different categories depending on their transmission properties. Different physical limit values (e.g. maximum signal attenuation at a defined transmission frequency) are determined for the individual categories. Category 3: data transfer up to 16 MHz Category 4: data transfer up to 20 MHz Category 5: data transfer up to 100 MHz Category 6: data transfer up to 200 MHz (standard design)

CBA

Component Based Automation Supports modularization in mechanical and plant engineering through the plant-wide, graphical grouping of distributed applications. Component Based automation based on the PROFInet standard of PNO.

CC

Central controller

—

CD

Compact Disc

—

CHAP

Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol

Authentication protocol

CLI

Command Line Interface

Alphanumeric command interface for parameterization and diagnostics via a serial interface or TELNET

CLID

Calling Line Identification

Service features

Client/Server Communication

Principle of connection setup

The network node that sets up a connection is called the client. A server, on the other hand, is the node to which a connection is established.

CM

—

Cable for use in buildings in accordance with Section 800-53(d) of NEC. Flames do not spread upward from the cable through the cable tray in the vertical tray flame test specified in UL 1685, "Vertical-Tray Fire-Propagation and Smoke Release Test for Electrical and OpticalFiber Cables".

CMIP

Common Management Information Protocol

—

CMIS

Common Management Information Service

—

CMX

—

Cable for use in buildings where the lines or cables are enclosed in a wiring duct or in a non-combustible hose. Unprotected length of lines or cables must not exceed 3 meters. CMX cable is allowed to bear the "Outdoor" marking. This cable meets the VW-1 Flame Test Requirements as laid down in UL 1581.

CoL

Certificate of License

License certificate that is included in the scope of supply of a software product and documents the legal ownership of a software license

10


10/3


Meaning

Definition

C Collision domain

—

To guarantee the function of the collision access method CSMA/CD, the runtime of a data packet from one station to another must be restricted. During this runtime, there is a spatially limited expansion of the network dependent on the transfer rate, the so-called collision domain. In the 10 Mbit/s Ethernet this is 4520 m and in the Fast Ethernet 412 m. Several collision domains can be interconnected through bridges/ switches. Full duplex enables expansions beyond a collision domain.

COM/DCOM

Component Object Model / Distributed Component Object Model

COM is an elemental object model. It permits an object to make its functionality available to other components. DCOM is an extension of COM for communication via a network.

CP

Communications Processor

Interface module for communications tasks

CPU

Central Processing Unit

For example, for SIMATIC S5/S7

CSD

Circuit Switched Data

Modem operation

CSMA/CD

Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection

Collision access procedure for Industrial Ethernet bus systems to IEEE 802.3

D DA

Destination Address

—

Data objects

—

Programming representation of the EIB bus nodes for the EIB configuring software ETS 2. Data objects can be interconnected and represent the status of EIB bus nodes. A bus node can comprise several data objects.

dBi

—

Unit for achieving an antenna gain as compared to an isotropic omni-directional antenna

DCP

Discovery and Basic Configuration

Defines the assignment of the IP parameters with vendor-specific configuration/programming tools or in plant-wide engineering, e.g. in the PROFINET configuration editor

DDE

Dynamic Data Exchange

Windows interface

DDL

Direct Data Link

—

DDLM

Direct Data Link Mapper

— Forseeable data traffic and defined response times over a radio link

Determinism

10

DHCP

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

De facto standard for assigning dynamic IP addresses

Diversity

—

Radio receiver with two antennas for selecting the strongest signal

DLL

Dynamic Link Library

A collection of functions available to two or more programs, but which are only loaded once into memory (Windows/Windows NT feature).

DLPI

Data Link Protocol Interface

—

Domain services

—

An application service group which contains services for downloading/uploading of logically related memory areas.

DP

Distributed I/Os

Input/output modules used in the distributed arrangement by the CPU. The link between programmable controller and distributed I/Os can be through the PROFIBUS DP bus system.

DPRAM

Dual Port Random Access Memory

—

DSSS

Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum

Spread spectrum transmission process (IEEE 802.11b)

10/4



Meaning

Definition

E (E)DP

Data processing

Previously also referred to as Electronic Data Processing (EDP)

EIB

European Installation Bus

Registered trademark of the European Installation Bus Association, Brussels

EIRP

Equivalent isotropic radiated power

The transmission power that would be required for an isotropic radiator to transmit with the same amount of power as a different antenna in a specific direction. An isotropic radiator is a theoretical antenna that radiates in all directions equally (isotropic) and is received as infinitively small.

ELS

Electrical Lean Switch

Electrical network components for Industrial Ethernet with switching function

E-Mail

Electronic Mail

Electronic mail for data transmission between computers, mobile telephones and pagers. E-mails can be sent by the user or automatically generated.

EMC

Electromagnetic Compatibility —

ER

Expansion Rack

Expansion component for SIMATIC

ERP

Enterprise Resource Planning

Term for systems and software solutions which coordinate the business process and help with planning, e.g. SAP R3, Peoplesoft, BAAN.

ERTEC

Enhanced Real-Time Ethernet Controller

The Industrial Ethernet ASIC is a high-performance Ethernet controller optimized for PROFINET with integrated switch functionality and processor

ESD

Electro static discharge

Voltage resistance

ESM

Electrical Switch Module

Electrical network components for Industrial Ethernet with switching functions from SIMATIC NET.

EU

Expansion unit

—

Ex

Intrinsically safe protective measure to DIN EN 50 020

Appropriately marked modules may also be used within hazardous areas. (Regulations must be observed!)

F FastConnect

—

Fast connection system

FB

Function Block

—

FC

Function Call

FDDI

Fiber Distributed Data Interface

High-speed network standardized by ANSI for data transmission over a range of up to 100 km with a bit rate of 100 Mbit/s. Double glass fiber cables are used as the transmission medium.

FDL

Fieldbus Data Link

Layer 2 with PROFIBUS; it comprises the field bus link control (FLC) and medium access control (MAC).

FDX

Full Duplex

Capability of a device for sending and receiving data at the same time. In the case of full duplex, collision detection is deactivated. A full duplex capable device is able to buffer data packets.

Fetch

—

Fetching data from remote stations

FHSS

Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum

Frequency hopping spread spectrum process used by 802.11b and Bluetooth

Filtering

—

A switch filters data traffic depending on the source and destination addresses in a data packet. An incoming data packet is routed by the switch to the port to which the data terminal with the appropriate destination address is connected.


10/5

10


Meaning

Definition

F FIFO principle

—

The transmission from telecontrol systems is implemented independently of the respective priority

FIM

Field Interface Module

—

Firewall

—

One or more computers which permit or block access to data on interconnected networks in accordance with prescribed security restrictions.

FM

—

US certificate for installing devices in hazardous areas (Factory Mutual Research)

FMS

Fieldbus Message Specification

Upper sublayer of Layer 7 with PROFIBUS; it encompasses the functions: protocol machine, generation of PDUs, coding/ decoding and interpretation of the protocol data unit.

FO

Fiber Optic

FOC

Fiber optic cable

Automatic roaming upon interruption of the radio link

Forced Roaming

10

Flexible optical media/fibers of glass or plastic which allow controlled conducting of light

FRNC

Flame Retardent Non-Corrosive

Flame-retardant, halogen-free cladding material for a cable

FTS

Driverless transport system

Moving, driverless machine components

Full Duplex

—

Capability of a device for sending and receiving data at the same time. In the case of full duplex, collision detection is deactivated.

Functional ground

—

Function for internal ground-fault detection; also provides protection against dangerous touch voltages

G Gateway

—

Intelligent connection between a local network and an external network with a completely different structure

GHz

Gigaherz

Unit of measurement for indicating frequencies, e.g. 2.4 GHz

GP

General Purpose

A UL listing (safety standard) for power cables is required specifically for the U.S. and Canadian market. The requirements for an approval are based on the location of the relevant cable in the building. This applies to all cables which must be laid from a machine to a remote control cabinet and run over cable racks affixed to the building.

GPRS

General Packet Radio Service A packet of networking mobile communications services based on GSM channels. GPRS enables fast communication at high transmission speeds and is interesting above all for mobile Internet access.

GPS

Global Positioning System

Satellite-supported system for determining the position of a GPS receiver. A GPS receiver can be localized without doubt using three of the total of 24 satellites. GPS receivers are typically integrated in navigation systems.

GRP

Glass-fiber reinforced plastic

—

GSD

General Station Description

A GSD contains an XML-based description of the properties of I/O devices, such as communication parameters as well as the number and type of and configuration data, parameters and diagnostic information for modules

GSM

Global System for Mobile Communication

Global standard for mobile communication

10/6



Meaning

Definition

High availability communication

High availability redundant communication with SIMATIC S7-H systems

HCS

—

Trademark of Spectran Specialty Optics

HDX

Half Duplex

A device can either receive or send data at a given time.

HMI

Human Machine Interface

Operator control and process monitoring products/systems from Siemens

HTB

Communication function block HTB are standard function blocks that allow data transfer between boards outfitted with page frame addresses.

HTML

Hypertext Markup Language

Descriptive language for World Wide Web pages

HTTP

Hypertext Transfer Protocol

Transmission protocol for Web pages in the Internet

Hub

—

Active network components with repeater functional scope, synonym for star coupler

Internet Control Message Protocol

In addition to the Internet Protocol (IP), there are further protocols available on the Internet level. One of them is ICMP; it serves to exchange error and information messages with IP, TCP, and UDP protocols. ICMP packets are always sent as IP datagram. This is for the purpose of informing the hosts about more favorable routes, to inform about routing problems, or to interrupt connections due to problems in the data network. The commands ping and traceroute are based on ICMP. The ICMP messages are divided into two classes: error messages and information messages.

IE

Industrial Ethernet

Cell network to the IEEE 802.3 international standard (Ethernet), designed for industrial applications

IEC

International Electrotechnical Commission

—

IEEE

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

—

IEEE 802


LAN/WAN standards committee

IEEE 802.11


Standard for radio networks in the 2.4 GHz range with Baud rates up to 2 Mbit/s.

IEEE 802.11a


Standard for radio networks in the 5 GHz range with data transmission rates up to 54 Mbit/s.

IEEE 802.11b


Standard for radio networks in the 2.4 GHz range with Baud rates up to 11 Mbit/s.

IEEE 802.11g


Standard for 2.4 GHz radio networks with transmission rates of up to 54 Mbit/s. Downward-compatible to IEEE 802.11b.

IEEE 802.11i


Expanded safety architecture for the 802.11 standard, valid for IEEE 802.11a/b/g; includes TKIP and AES

IEEE 802.3


Ethernet working group

IEEE 802.3af


Standard that defines the transmission of energy and data via a line (see Power-over-Ethernet)

IEEE 802.3u


Fast Ethernet working group

IGMP

Internet Group Management Protocol

Protocol for load limitation when using multicast-based protocols, e.g. in the case of video monitoring

ILM

Infrared Link Module

Infrared network components

IM

Interface Module

—

INA

Intel Network Architecture

—

H H Communication

I ICMP


10/7

10


Meaning

Definition

I instabus

—

instabus® is a registered trademark of Siemens AG which members of the "Insta Association" are also authorized to use

Intrinsically safe

—

Ex protection measure according to DIN

I/O

Input/output

—

IO controller

PROFINET I/O controller in which the automation program executes

IO device

Distributed field device allocated to an I/O controller

IO supervisor

Programming device/PC with commissioning and diagnostic functions for PROFINET I/O

IP

Internet Work Protocol

On its own, the IP protocol is without connections and invalid. The most important data is the unique IP address. The data blocks are sent independently to the target computer whereby no agreement is made between IP and the target computer. An end-to-end error check is not performed. Telegrams can arrive in a different sequence from the sequence in which they were sent. TCP is responsible for rearranging them in the correct sequence. Monitoring function for IP connections

IP Alive IPX

—

Protocols of ISO-layers 1 to 4

IP20

—

Device protection class; protected against finger touch and intrusion of solid foreign bodies with a diameter larger than 12 mm; no particular protection against water

IP30

—

Device protection class; protected against contact with tools, wires, etc. with a diameter larger than 2.5 mm and against intrusion of solid foreign bodies with a diameter larger than 2.5 mm; no particular protection against water

IP65

—

Device protection class; complete shock-hazard protection and protection against intrusion of dust; water jet-proof from any directions

IRT

Isochronous Real-Time

Deterministic and isochronous real-time PROFINET communication for the highly sophisticated demands of, for example, motion control applications. Cycle times under 1 ms can be achieved through the use of appropriate hardware.

ISA

Industry Standard Architecture —

ISDN

Integrated Services Digital Network

—

ISM-Band

Industrial, Scientific and Medical-Band

Frequency band that can be used without a license

ISO

International Organization for Standardization

—

ISP

Internet Service Provider

—

10

10/8



Meaning

Definition

Information Technology with e-mail and web technology at Siemens

Acquisition, conditioning, transmission, distribution, utilization and processing of information

ITP (Category 5)

Industrial Twisted Pair

Highly efficient, shielded, twisted pair cable for universal applications (international cabling standard ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173)

IVM

Java Virtual Machine

Java is a platform-independent, object-oriented programming language similar to C++. The Java compiler does not create a native machine code, however, but a byte code which has to be interpreted. This is done with the help of the Java Virtual Machine.

IWLAN

Industrial Wireless LAN

Radio network with deterministic features and redundancy added to the IEEE 802.11 standard for process-critical (e.g. alarm messages) and non-critical data (e.g. service and diagnostics)

Konnex (EN 50 090, ANSI EIA 776)

Universal bus system for all building management systems; KNX was developed by the Konnex Association based on the EIB (European Installation Bus)

L LAN

Local Area Network

—

Load decoupling

—

Due to filtering, a switch ensures that local data traffic remains local. Local net loading of a segment is decoupled from the remainder of the network.

Layer-3 routing

—

Communication between different IP subnets

Layer 3 switching

—

Function for Layer 3-based communication between different IP subnets. The term IP routing is also sometimes used.

LED

Light Emitting Diode

—

Link check

—

Cyclic monitoring of a radio link

Link class

—

In the link class, the quality of a complete connection (link) is described from the active components to the data terminal (patch cable, patch field, installation cable, connection sockets, connecting cable). This link must comply with the values specified in the standard for structured cabling ISO/IEC 1180. Contrary to this is the specification according to "categories" where only product requirements are defined, e.g. category 5 cable.

LLC

Logical Link Control

Standardized network protocol

LLI

Lower Layer Interface

Part of layer 7 with PROFIBUS, in which layer 7 services are mapped onto layer 2 services

L2TP

Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol

—

I IT

K KNX

10


10/9

Appendix Abbreviations, Explanations

10

Term

Meaning

Definition

M MAC

Media Access Control

Bus access control

MAN

Metropolitan Area Network

Data network with the geographical range of a town

MAP

Manufacturing Automation Protocol

International standard for automation protocols

Media redundancy

—

Redundancy in the network infrastructure (cable and active components such as OLM or OSM/ORM)

MIB

Management Information Base

File for the creation of device profiles; SNMP-capable devices, for instance, can be integrated in the OPC configuration by loading MIBs to the SMI V1 and SMI V2 standard beginning STEP 7 V5.4

MMS

Manufacturing Message Specification

User interface of MAP

Mono-protocol

—

Data can only be transferred through one protocol

MPI

Multi Point Interface

Multipoint-capable interface for SIMATIC S7

Multipath propagation

—

Reflections of a radio wave from different objects in the room. Thus the radio wave arrives at the receiver with varying intensity and propagation time

Multicast

—

In the world of telephone communication, multicast or a group call designates the transmission of a message from one point to a group (also referred to as a multi-point connection). The advantage of multicasting is that information can be transferred simultaneously to multiple nodes or to a closed node group without the sender's bandwidth being multiplied by the number of recipients.

Multiplex function

—

The multiplex function (with OP communication) increases the number of connectable OPs on a SIMATIC S7-300

Multi-protocol

—

Data can be transferred through up to two protocols.

N NC

Numerical Control

Numerical control for machine tools

NCM

Network and Communication Management

Generic term for SIMATIC management products

N dimension

—

Equipment installation dimension for distribution systems in the electrical installation

NDIS

Network Driver Interface Specification

Microsoft and 3Com interface

NEC

National Electrical Code

UL guideline for laying cables in buildings

NFS

Network File System

Sun program package

NIC

Network Interface Card

—

NTP

Network Time Protocol

Standardized protocol for the synchronization of clocks in computer systems via communication networks

O ODI

—

NOVELL interface

OFDM

Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex

Modulation procedure with 802.11a

OLE

Object Linking and Embedding

Central architectural principle of Windows for generating and editing documents containing objects generated by different applications

OLM

Optical Link Module

Network component, versions for PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet

10/10



Meaning

O omnidirectional

Definition Antennas with radiation patterns both in the direction of 360 degrees and in the elevation level

OP

Operator Panel

—

OPC

OLE for Process Control

Standard interface for access to process data

OPC DA

OPC Data Access

Standard for Ethernet-based access to data from measuring and control devices, finding OPC servers, and simple browsing in the names spaces of OPC servers using client/server communication

OPC DX

OPC Data Exchange

Standard for Ethernet-based exchange of non-time-critical user data between automation systems from different manufacturers using server-to-server communication

OSM

Optical Switch Module

Network components for Industrial Ethernet with switch functional scope

P PA

Process Automation

Protocol profile, based on PROFIBUS DP with intrinsically safe transmission system to IEC 61158-2

PAP

Password Authentication Protocol

—

PAN

Personal Area Network

Comparable to an ad hoc network; for networking individual small devices within a small area.

PCF

Polymere Cladded Fiber

—

PCI

Peripheral Component Interconnect

Backplane bus in personal computers

PCMCIA

Personal Computer, Memory Card, International Association

Standard for PC plug-in cards (credit card size). PCMCIA cards (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) are used above all for input/output operations (e.g. modem) or memory expansions.

PCS 7

—

Process control system from Siemens

PDU

Protocol Data Unit

—

PG

Programming device

—

PI

Program Invocation

Communication object

PLC

Programmable Logic Controller

—

PN

PROFINET

Standard defined by the PROFIBUS User Organization for the implementation of component based automation

PNO

PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation Organization for PROFIBUS users and vendors e.V.

PoE, Power-over-Ethernet

—

Transmission of energy and data over one line

POF

Polymere Optic Fiber

—

Polling

—

Addressed polling in centrally oriented data networks with polling mode. A poll is the command issued to a specific station to send messages. Thus the poll sequences control the data flow.

POP

Point of Presence

Dial-in node for an Internet service provider

PP

Push Button Panel

—

PPM

Parts Per Million

—


10/11

10


Meaning

Definition

Point-to-Point Tunnelling Protocol

—

PROFIBUS

Process Field Bus

International field bus standard according to EN 50 170/IEC 61158

PROFIBUS DP

—

Protocol profile according to IEC 61158/EN 50170 for process or field communication for fast, cyclic data exchange with field devices

PROFIBUS PA

—

Protocol profile, based on PROFIBUS DP with intrinsically safe transmission system to IEC 61158-2

PROFIdrive

—

PROFIBUS protocol profile, based on PROFIBUS DP, driven engineering profile (version 3, clock synchronization)

Profil

—

Definition of options and parameters supplementing the norm, e.g. PROFIBUS profile

PROFINET

—

Standard of the organization of PROFIBUS users (PNO), which defines a cross-vendor communications and engineering model

PROFINET device

—

One device on Ethernet is a PROFInet device. A PROFInet device can also have a PROFIBUS interface as a master and proxy PROFInet device.

PROFINET device with proxy functionality

—

A PROFInet device that takes on the role of the master with regard to PROFInet devices. This makes it possible to link PROFIBUS slaves into the PROFInet communication. If the device has a local (internal) PROFIBUS, it has the role of DP master with regard to the local DP slaves.

Protocol

—

Procedure for data transmission. This procedure specifies the message formats as well as the data flow during transmission.

Proxy

—

Representative object in the object model which displays the PROFINET view on a field device or group of field devices. On the Ethernet, the proxy is a representative for one or more PROFIBUS devices


—

The process or field communication serves to connect actuators/sensors to a CPU

PUR

Polyurethan

—

Q Quick Start

—

This comprises a CD-ROM that contains application examples that can be loaded and then modified.

Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service

Access control via the server

RAM

Random Access Memory

—

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

IM IEEE-802.1w standardspecified configuration protocol

The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol represents further development of the Spanning Tree Protocols (STP). It serves to avoid redundant network paths (loops) in the LAN, particularly when using switches; the reconfiguration time lies within a range of from 2 to 3 seconds.

RBC

Remote Base Controller

—

RegTP

—

Regulatory authority for telecommunication in Germany

RJ45

Symmetrical connector for data This is also known as a western connector or a western plug. cables This is a widely used plug connector in telephone and ISDN technology which is used in LAN installations in the office environment.

P PPTP

R RADIUS

10

10/12



Meaning

Definition

R RM

Redundancy manager

Function for monitoring the network; the RM detects the failure of a transmission link in the ring or of a switch and activates the substitute link within no more than 0.3 seconds

RMON

Remote Monitoring

Function for network administration, e.g. collecting of statistical information

Roaming

—

Free movement of Wireless LAN stations even beyond the boundaries of the radio cell of an access point. The station can change from one radio cell to the next without any noticeable interruption.

R-SMA

—

Reverse SMA, connector for antenna with IWLAN

RSTP

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol is the further development of the Spanning Tree Protocols (STP). The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) serves the avoidance of redundant network paths (loops) in the LAN, particularly in switched environments; the reconfiguration time lies within a range of 2 to 3 seconds.

RT

Real-Time

Real-time communication with PROFINET

S SA

Source Address

—

SAP

Service Access Point

Service access point: An interface allowing the user to access services of the lower layer

SAPI

Simple Application Programmers Interface

—

SC connection system

—

Standardized plug-in connection for glass fiber optic cable

SC RJ connection system —

Standardized plug-in connection for fiber optic cable, e.g.for POF and PCF-FOC

SDA service

Send Data with Acknowledge (free Layer 2 access)

Sending of acknowledged Layer 2 services

SDN

Send Data with No Acknowledge (free Layer 2 access)

Sending of unacknowledged layer 2 services (broadcast multicast)

SFB

System Function Block

A System Function Block (SFB) is a function block that is integrated in the S7 CPU. System function blocks are part of the operating system, so they are not loaded as part of the program. SFBs are blocks with “memory”. Instance data blocks must also be generated for SFBs and loaded into the CPU as part of the program

SFC

System function calls

System functions calls which are integrated in the CPU operating system, e.g. timer functions or block transfer

SFM

System error message concept — of SIMATIC

Shared LAN

—

All components in a shared LAN share the nominal data transmission rate. Shared LANs are built up with repeaters/hubs.

Signal run time

—

The time that a data packet requires on its way through the network

Slot time

—

Time elapsing between transmission of a call and reception of an answer or acknowledgment

SM

Signal Module

Digital input module for SIMATIC


10/13

10


Meaning

Definition

S SMTP

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

Transmission protocol for e-mail

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol

Communication protocol for the integration of stations through the network in a network management station

SNTP

Simple Network Time Protocol Standardized protocol for the synchronization of clocks in computer systems via communication networks

Socket interface

Standard communication for Industrial Ethernet

This facilitates data communication with computers through TCP/IP. Users are able to freely program their own protocols on this interface which is widely used in the PC and UNIX world. The SEND/RECEIVE blocks are used as access to TCP/IP in SIMATIC S7.

SOFTNET

—

Software based on simple communications modules

SP

Service Packs

Internet data which can be downloaded free of cost.

Spanning Tree Protocol

In the IEEE-802.1d standard specified configuration protocoll by Bridges

The Spanning Tree Protocol is used to eliminate loops in meshed networks. The reconfiguration time lies in a range of around 30 seconds.

SPC

Siemens PROFIBUS Controller —

S/STP

Screened Shielded Twisted Pair

With this cable type, the individually twisted pairs of a twisted pair cable are wrapped with a film shield. The two individually shielded wire pairs are then surrounded by a common woven copper shield.

Stand-by function

—

Function for the redundant interfacing of network segments, for example for interfacing redundant ring structures

STP

Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1d Standard)

The Spanning Tree Protocol is used to eliminate loops in meshed networks. The reconfiguration time lies in a range of around 30 seconds.

ST connector

Straight tip connector

Standardized connector for glass fiber optic cables with bayonet lock (ST = registered trademark of AT&T); see BFOC

Switching

—

Establishing several links between the ports simultaneously. These links are established dynamically and temporarily in accordance with the data traffic.

SWR

Standing Wave Ratio

Standing Wave Ratio, ration of the radiated energy from the antenna to the energy that is reflected from the antenna to the radio module

S0 interface

—

Basic ISDN interface for connecting data terminal equipment

S7 routing

—

PG/OP communication through different networks

Transport Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol

De-facto standard; protocol for worldwide communication with the Ethernet.

TD

Text Display

—

TF

Technological Functions

Application layer 7 for Industrial Ethernet (contains the user services)

TFTP

Terminal File Transfer Protocol Data transmission standard

T TCP/IP

10

10/14



Meaning

Definition

T Thin Client

—

The principle of thin client/server computing is based on the fundamental physical separation of data.

TIA

Totally Integrated Automation

Fully integrated and company-wide system for automation from Siemens for company-wide configuration/programming, data management and communication.

TKIP

Temporal Key Integrity Protocol

Cyclic key change procedure with WLAN

Token

—

The bit pattern with control function in token ring and token bus LANs; it is often the same as a send authorization

Token Passing

—

A collision-free access method, the send authorization (token) circulates between nodes which form a logical ring

Topology

Form of cable arrangement between the nodes

The most important basic types are: • Line • Tree • Ring • Star Any combination of these basic types is possible.

Touchscreen

—

Touch-sensitive screen of the MOBIC, which can detect the position on its surface where it is touched (normally using a stylus) and converts this touch into a required action (similar to the movement of a cursor).

TP

Touch Panel

—

TPC

Transmission power control

Automatic control of the transmission power in the 5GHz band

Trap

—

When certain events occur, such as Link-up or Link-down, the OSM/ESM or MIKE management interface card can issue alarm signals with the corresponding error messages. These alarms are called “traps” in SNMP.

Triaxial cable

—

The SIMATIC NET 727-0 bus cable is based on the coaxial cable specified in the 10base5 standard (IEEE 802.3), but it features a thick aluminum outer cladding to make it suitable for industrial applications.

Twisted Pair

Data cable with twisted wire pairs

The twist in the wire pairs provides good transmission properties and prevents electromagnetic interference. Twisted pair cables are available in different qualities for different transfer rates

U UDP

User Datagram Protocol

Connectionless data transmission, i.e. datagram service that does not guarantee secure transmission. Users must take their own measures to ensure secure transmission. Data is transmitted as a data block. Transmission of data without RFC 1006 is thus possible.

UL

Underwriters Laboratories

Certificate for the US market

UMTS

Universal Mobile Telecommunications System

Standard for mobile voice, audio, image, video and data communication with a transmission rate of up to 2 Mbit/s

URECV

—

Uncoordinated receipt of data

USB

Universal Serial Bus

Standard for connecting peripheral devices. USB (Universal Serial Bus) supports relatively high data transmission rates and can be used to connect several devices to a single computer.

USEND

—

Uncoordinated transmission of data


10/15

10


Meaning

Definition

V Variable Services

—

Application service group; it provides services for processing variables

VLAN

Virtual Local Area Network

Virtual local network within a physical network. A widely used technical implementation of VLANs ist partially defined in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

VNS

Virtual Network Services

Central security mechanism per user group (Virtual Network Services, VNS) which secures data against unauthorized access and manipulation.

VPN

Virtual Private Network

Technology/network type for the secure transport of confidential data over public IP networks, for example the Internet

W WAN

Wide Area Network

Data network with a diameter of more than 50 km

WDS

Wireless Distribution System

Radio links for connecting the access points for an Extended Service Set (ESS)

WECA

Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance

Association of Wireless LAN products manufacturers that ensure the compatibility of their products through tests

WEP

Wired Equivalent Privacy

WLAN encryption mode

WinCC

—

Open process visualization system for the control and monitoring of SIMATIC HMI

Wi-Fi seal

Wireless Fidelity

WECA seal to mark compatible and tested products.

Wireless LAN

—

Wireless local area network

WLAN

The Wireless LAN Association Wireless LAN supplier syndicate for distributing Wireless LAN technology in the network market.

Workflow

—

Workflow systems are used for the structuring and control of work sequences.

WPA

Wi-Fi Protecterd Access

Decoding mechanism in radio networks to protect against eavesdropping and unauthorized access

Write

—

Writing data to remote stations

WS

Workstation

—

WWW

World Wide Web

Multimedia service on the Internet. Distributed hypertext information system on client/server architecture through HTTP protocol

X XML

Extensible Markup Language

Definition of a structured data description

XMP

X/Open Management Protocol —

XTI

UNIX Transport Layer Interface Layer 4 transport layer, standardized under UNIX

X.25

—

Interface between terminal and data transmission equipment for terminals which operate in packet mode in public data networks and are transported through dedicated lines

Z ZI

Cyclic Interface

—

10

10/16


Appendix Training

■ Training is decisive for your success SITRAIN® – the Siemens Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions – provides you with comprehensive support when solving your tasks. Training by the market leader in automation, plant installation and support permits you to make your decisions with certainty and full command. Especially where the optimum and efficient use of products and plants are concerned. You can eliminate deficiencies in existing plants, and exclude expensive faulty planning right from the beginning. All in all, this represents an enormous gain for your company: Shortened startup times, optimized plant components, faster troubleshooting, reduced down times. In other words, increased profits and lower costs.

■ The right mixture: Blended learning Blended learning is understood to be the combination of various training media and sequences. For example, a local attendance course in a Training Center can be optimally supplemented by a teach-yourself program as preparation or follow-up. Furthermore, SITRAIN utilizes supported online training for live instruction on the Internet at agreed times. The right mixture is the solution. Therefore blended learning can convey complex topics well, and train networked thinking. Additional effect: Reduced travelling costs and periods of absence through training sequences independent of location and time.

■ The international training portal www.siemens.com/sitrain All training facilities at a glance: Search in the worldwide range of courses at leisure, call up all course dates online, utilize the daily updated display of vacant course spaces – and register directly.

■ Customer comments on Sitrain " ... the good course documents, competence and flexibility convinced me." [Manfred Riek from Festo Systemtechnik, responsible for planning the basic and further training of project engineers] " ... represents effective training, constructive dialogs, and solutions which provide great help." [Günter Niedermaier, electrical design manager at AMT, Aalen, Germany]

■ Contact Visit us in the Internet at: www.siemens.com/sitrain

Top trainers Our trainers know their topics in practice, and possess comprehensive didactic experience. Course developers have a direct wire to product development, and directly pass on their knowledge to the trainers. Practical experience The practical experience of our trainers makes it possible for them to pass on theoretical matter in a plausible manner. But since it is known that all theory is drab, we attach great importance to practical exercises which can comprise up to half of the course time. You can therefore immediately implement your new knowledge in practice. We train you on state-of-the-art methodically/didactically designed training equipment. You feel absolutely certain when trained in this manner.

or let us advise you personally. You can request our latest training catalog from: Course office, Infoline Germany: Tel.: +49 (0)1805 / 23 56 11 (0.12 €/Min) Fax: +49 (0)1805 / 23 56 12

■ Training program for SIMATIC NET The training program for SIMATIC NET gives your employees a necessary overview as well as detailed knowledge of industrial communication. In addition to planning and configuring with SIMATIC NET, training includes the use and programming of SIMATIC NET products as well as commissioning and service. Further information regarding course content, dates and prices as well as current courses for EIB/KNX is available in the Internet at: www.siemens.com/sitrain

10

Wide variety With a total of approx. 300 local attendance courses, we train the complete range of A&D products and a large portion of the system solutions from I&S. Telecourses, teach-yourself software and seminars presented on the Web supplement our classical range of courses. Close to our customers The distance is short. You can find us approx. 60 times in Germany, and worldwide in 62 countries. You wish to have individual training instead of one of our 300 courses? No problem: we will provide a program tailored exactly to your personal requirements. Training can be carried out in our Training Centers or at your company.


10/17

Appendix Training

■ SIMATIC NET Communications systems Commissioning engineer, configuring engineer Programmer

Service personnel

Project management

Operators, users

Decision-maker, sales personnel

Service engineers

Title

Target group

Duration/ Medium

Short title

CD-ROM

SM-ETHER

WBT

WT-IESI

3 days

IK-ITEP

✔

3 days

IK-IESYS

✔

1 day

IK-IEWS

Industrial Ethernet ✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

WBT

WT-ETHER

✔

✔

✔

✔

1 day

IK-IESECWS

✔

✔

✔

✔

5 days

KO-KS5H1

Industrial Ethernet ✔

Industrial Ethernet at SIEMENS A&D IT solutions for industrial automation, engineering and programming Industrial Ethernet system courses Industrial Ethernet Workshop

✔

Communication over Industrial Ethernet

✔

Security in Industrial Ethernet Networks

✔

✔

✔

SIMATIC S5, Industrial Ethernet

✔

✔

✔

✔

PROFINET Automating with PROFINET

✔

✔

✔

Technical book FB-AUTPN

Automating with PROFINET

✔

✔

✔

Technical book FB-AUTPN

Certified PROFINET Network Engineer/Installer

✔

PROFINET – The open Industrial Ethernet standard

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

PROFINET system course

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

Industrial Wireless LAN system course

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

Industrial Wireless LAN workshop

✔

PROFINET

✔

✔

✔ ✔

✔

3 days

IK-PNOCPNEI

1 day

IK-PNWS

3 days

IK-PNSYS

WBT

WT-PROFIN

2 days

IK-IWLANSYS

1 day

IK-IWLANWS

2 days

IK-OPCPRO

3 days

IK-OPCSYS

Industrial Mobile Communication ✔

✔

OPC OPC client programmierung ✔

Understanding the OPC interface – system course

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

PROFIBUS

10

Decentralization with PROFIBUS-DP/DPV1

✔

✔

✔

Technical book FB-PROFI

Decentralization with PROFIBUS-DP/DPV1

✔

✔

✔

Technical book FB-PROFI

PROFIBUS-DP system course

✔

✔

✔

SIMATIC S5, PROFIBUS

✔

✔

✔

PROFIBUS

✔

✔

✔

✔ ✔

✔

3 days

IK-PBSYS

✔

5 days

KO-KS5L2

✔

CD-ROM

SM-PROFI

✔

WBT

WT-PROFI

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

Actuator/Sensor Interface system course

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

3 days

IK-ASISYS

AS-Interface

✔

✔

✔

✔

✔

WBT

WT-ASI

✔

✔

✔

✔

5 days

IK-SINAUT

✔

✔

✔

✔

2 days

IK-SINAUTMIC

PROFIBUS AS-Interface

SINAUT ST7 Engineering SINAUT ST7 SINAUT MICRO SC Telecontrol System

10/18


N

Appendix Software Quick Start

■ Fast entry into industrial communication Content • Sample programs for programming devices/PC, SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC S5 • All terminals are connected to all other terminals through Industrial Ethernet or PROFIBUS • Complete, simple examples for a multitude of interfacing options • Communication solutions: choose your communication solution from the complete, executable projects and programs, incl. S7 communication, PROFIBUS-FMS, PROFIBUS DP, SEND/RECEIVE... Structure • A single interface guides you through the applications • The documentation is simple and clear • The simple layout presents an instant overview of the program components required for communication • Small programs with simple data exchange form the basis for your own applications • The examples required can be loaded from the CD and run immediately.

• With "Quick Start" you get a free CD-ROM and/or online sample programs for a fast introduction to industrial communication.

To get your free copy of the Quick Start CD, please answer the questions about your system/installation on the online order form. Your replies will help us with the ongoing development of our products. The order form can be accessed in the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net/ik-info

10


10/19

Appendix Standards and approbations

■ CE marking In as far as the electronic products described in this Catalog are subject to requirements and protection goals stipulated in EG guidelines, the relevant EG conformity declarations for the competent authorities are held available at: SIMATIC: Siemens AG, Automation and Drives A&D AS Postfach 1963 D-92209 Amberg Federal Republic of Germany SIMATIC NET: Siemens AG, Automation and Drives A&D PT 2 BD Postfach 4848 D-90327 Nuremberg Federal Republic of Germany SIMATIC HMI: Siemens AG Automation and Drives A&D AS HMI BD Postfach 4848 D-90327 Nuremberg Federal Republic of Germany SIMATIC NET products are designed for operation in industrial environments and comply with the following requirements: Noise emissions: EN 50 081-2: 1993 and EN 61 000-6-4: 2001 Noise immunity: EN 61 000-6-3: 2001 Selected modules comply with stringent requirements with regard to emitted interference and is therefore allowed to be used in the domestic environment: Noise emissions: EN 50 081-1: 1992 and EN 61 000-6-4: 2001 Noise immunity: EN 50 082-1: 1997 and EN 61 000-6-1: 2001 Please take details regarding the fulfillment of specific European standards (EN) from the technical documents (manuals) associated with the product. Prerequisite for the fulfillment of the aforementioned protection goals is strict observance of the installation guidelines described in the manuals during the installation and operation of the products.

10

The installation guidelines described in the manuals and the important notes concerning installation in cabinets and the use of shielded cables must be complied with when installing and operating the products described in this catalog.

10/20


■ Notes for machine manufacturers The SIMATIC automation system is not a machine within the context of the EU machine guidelines. A conformity declaration with respect to the EU machine guideline 89/392/ EMC is not available for SIMATIC. The EU guideline for machines 89/392/EMC specifies the requirements for a machine. For purposes of this guideline, a machine is understood to be a combination of interconnected parts or mechanisms (see also EN 292-1, Paragraph 3.1). SIMATIC is part of the electrical equipment of a machine and must therefore be included in the conformity declaration procedure by the machine manufacturer. The EN 60204-1 standard (safety of machines, general requirements for the electrical equipment of machines) is applicable to the electrical equipment of machines. The following table should be of assistance with the conformity declaration and shows which criteria of EN 60 204-1 (as of June 1993) apply for SIMATIC. EN 60204-1

Topic/criterion

Notes

Paragraph 4

General requirements

The requirements are met when the equipment is assembled/ installed in accordance with the installation guidelines. Please note the relevant information in the manuals

Paragraph 11.2

Digital input/output interfaces

The requirements are met

Paragraph 12.3

Programmable equipment

The requirements are met when the equipment is installed in lockable cabinets to protect against alteration of the memory contents by unauthorized persons.

Paragraph 20.4

Voltage tests

The requirements are met

Appendix Quality management

■ Quality management The quality management system of our A&D division complies with the international standard ISO 9001. The products and systems described in this catalog are sold under application of a quality management system certified by DQS and TÜV (German Technical Inspectorate) in accordance with ISO 9001. The certificates are recognized in all EQ Net countries.

■ Certificates (continued) You can find certificates, approbations, verification certificates or characteristic curves under: Support\Infomaterial\Certificates

DQS Registered Certificate Nos.: Siemens AG Automation and Drives Technology • Division Industrial Automation Systems Reg. No.: 001323 QM • Division SIMATIC NET Industrial Communication Reg. No.: 002613 QM TÜV (German Technical Inspectorate) Registered Certificate No.: Siemens AG Automation and Drives Technology • Low-Voltage Switching Reg. No.: 12 100 16950 TMS

or by going directly to the Link Box:

■ Certificates An overview of the certificates available for SIMATIC NET products (CE, UL, CSA, FM, shipping authorizations) and classification figures (MTBF) can be found in the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net Other certificates for SIMATIC products can be found in the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/simatic/certificates The lists are continuously updated. The data for products which have not yet been included in the overview is continuously collected and prepared for the subsequent edition.

10


10/21

Appendix Siemens contacts worldwide

■ Overview

At www.siemens.com/automation/partner you can find details of Siemens contact partners worldwide responsible for particular technologies. You can obtain in most cases a contact partner for • Technical Support, • Spare parts/repairs, • Service, • Training, • Sales or • Consultation/engineering. You start by selecting a • Country, • Product or • Sector. By further specifying the remaining criteria you will find exactly the right contact partner with his/her respective expertise.

10

10/22


Appendix

Partner

Siemens Solution Partner Automation and Power Distribution

■ Overview Solution Partner Finder

Solution Partner Automation

s

The Solution Partner Finder, available to you on the Internet, is a comprehensive database in which all Solution Partners, together with their performance profiles, present themselves. In addition to the search criteria Technology, Sector and Country, you can also search by Company and ZIP Code. From there it is only a small step to making the first contact. www.siemens.com/automation/partnerfinder

Solution Partner Power Distribution

s

Additional information about the Siemens Solution Partner Program is available in the Internet at: www.siemens.com/automation/solutionpartner E-Mail: [email protected]

Products and systems from Siemens Automation and Drives provide the ideal platform for all automation tasks. Our partners appear as qualified solution providers for Siemens automation and power distribution products and systems, which are available worldwide, under the name Siemens Solution Partner Automation and Siemens Solution Partner Power Distribution. We pull together with our partners within the framework of the Siemens Solution Partner Program. The interaction of our product and system know-how with the application and sector know-how of our partners forms the common basis for fast, problem-free and highly efficient implementation of your products, the common basis for your customized solutions with which you will leave your competitors behind. .

10


10/23

Appendix

Service & Support Information and Ordering in the Internet and on CD-ROM

■ A&D in the WWW

A detailed knowledge of the range of products and services available is essential when planning and configuring automation systems. It goes without saying that this information must always be fully up-to-date. The Siemens Automation and Drives Group (A&D) has therefore built up a comprehensive range of information in the World Wide Web, which offers quick and easy access to all data required. Under the address http://www.siemens.com/automation you will find everything you need to know about products, systems and services.

■ Product Selection Using the Interactive Catalog

Detailed information together with convenient interactive functions: The interactive catalog CA 01 covers more than 80,000 products and thus provides a full summary of the Siemens Automation and Drives product base. Here you will find everything that you need to solve tasks in the fields of automation, switchgear, installation and drives. All information is linked into a user interface which is easy to work with and intuitive. After selecting the product of your choice you can order at the press of a button, by fax or by online link. Information on the interactive catalog CA 01can be found in the Internet under http://www.siemens.com/automation/ca01 or on CD-ROM or DVD.

■ Easy Shopping with the A&D Mall

The A&D Mall is the virtual department store of Siemens AG in the Internet. Here you have access to a huge range of products presented in electronic catalogs in an informative and attractive way. Data transfer via EDIFACT allows the whole procedure from selection through ordering to tracking of the order to be carried out online via the Internet. Numerous functions are available to support you.

10

For example, powerful search functions make it easy to find the required products, which can be immediately checked for availability. Customer-specific discounts and preparation of quotes can be carried out online as well as order tracking and tracing. Please visit the A&D Mall on the Internet under: http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall

10/24


Appendix

Customer Support Our Services for Every Phase of Your Project

■ Configuration and Software Engineering

Support in configuring and developing with customer-oriented services from actual configuration to implementation of the automation project. 1)

■ Service On Site

.I

In the face of harsh competition you need optimum conditions to keep ahead all the time: A strong starting position. A sophisticated strategy and team for the necessary support - in every phase. Service & Support from Siemens provides this support with a complete range of different services for automation and drives.

With Service On Site we offer services for startup and maintenance, essential for ensuring system availability. In Germany 0180 50 50 444 1)

In every phase: from planning and startup to maintenance and upgrading. Our specialists know when and where to act to keep the productivity and cost-effectiveness of your system running in top form.

■ Online Support

■ Repairs and Spare Parts

The comprehensive information system available round the clock via Internet ranging from Product Support and Service & Support services to Support Tools in the Shop.

In Germany 0180 50 50 448 1)

http://www.siemens.com/ automation/service&support

■ Technical Support

■ Optimization and Upgrading Competent consulting in technical questions covering a wide range of customer-oriented services for all our products and systems.

In the operating phase of a machine or automation system we provide a comprehensive repair and spare parts service ensuring the highest degree of operating safety and reliability.

To enhance productivity and save costs in your project we offer high-quality services in optimization and upgrading. 1)

Tel.: +49 (0)180 50 50 222 Fax: +49 (0)180 50 50 223 E-Mail: [email protected]

■ Technical Consulting

Support in the planning and designing of your project from detailed actual-state analysis, target definition and consulting on product and system questions right to the creation of the automation solution. 1)

10

1) For country-specific telephone numbers go to our Internet site at: http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support


10/25

Appendix

Customer Support Knowledge Base on CD-ROM Automation Value Card

■ Knowledge Base on CD-ROM For locations without online connections to the Internet there are excerpts of the free part of the information sources available on CD-ROM (Service & Support Knowledge Base). This CDROM contains all the latest product information at the time of production (FAQs, Downloads, Tips and Tricks, Updates) as well as general information on Service and Technical Support.

The CD-ROM also includes a full-text search and our Knowledge Manager for targeted searches for solutions. The CD-ROM will be updated every 4 months. Just the same as our online offer in the Internet, the Service & Support Knowledge Base on CD comes complete in 5 languages (German, English, French, Italian, Spanish). You can order the Service & Support Knowledge Base CD from your Siemens contact. Order No. 6ZB5310-0EP30-0BA2 Orders via the Internet (with Automation Value Card or credit card) at: http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support in the Shop domain.

■ Automation Value Card By entering the card number and PIN you have full access to the Service & Support services being offered. The charge for the services procured is debited from the credits on your Automation Value Card. All the services offered are marked in currency-neutral credits, so you can use the Automation Value Card worldwide. Automation Value Card Order Nos. Credits

Small card – great support The Automation Value Card is an integral component of the comprehensive service concept with which Siemens Automation and Drives will accompany you in each phase of your automation project. It doesn't matter whether you want just specific services from our Technical Support or want to purchase high-quality Support Tools in our Online Shop, you can always pay with your Automation Value Card. No invoicing, transparent and safe. With your personal card number and associated PIN you can view the state of your account and all transactions at any time. Services on card. This is how it's done. Card number and PIN are on the back of the Automation Value Card. When delivered, the PIN is covered by a scratch field, guaranteeing that the full credit is on the card.

10

10/26


Order No.

200

6ES7 997-0BA00-0XA0

500

6ES7 997-0BB00-0XA0

1000

6ES7 997-0BC00-0XA0

10000

6ES7 997-0BG00-0XA0

Detailed information on the services offered is available on our Internet site at: http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support Service & Support à la Card: Examples Technical Support ”Priority“

Priority processing for urgent cases

”24 h“

Availability round the clock

”Extended“

Technical consulting for complex questions

Support Tools in the Support Shop ”System Utilities“

Tools that can be used directly for configuration, analysis and testing

”Applications“

Complete topic solutions including ready-tested software

”Functions & Samples“

Adaptable blocks for accelerating your developments

Appendix Safety of electronic devices

■ Safety of electronic devices The information listed here is mainly of a fundamental nature and applies regardless of the type and vendor of the electronic control system. Reliability The reliability of devices and components is being driven as high as possible by employing extensive and cost-effective measures in development and production. This includes • Selection of high-quality components; • Worst-case design calculation of all circuits; • Systematic and computer-controlled testing of all subcontracted components; • Burn-in of all large-scale integrated circuits (e.g. processors, memories etc.); • Measures to prevent static charging when working at or with MOS circuits; • Visual checks at various stages of production; • In-circuit testing of all modules, i.e. computer-aided testing of all components and their interaction in the circuit; • Hot endurance run at high ambient temperature over several days; • Meticulous computer-controlled final testing; • Statistical evaluation of all returns for immediate introduction of remedial actions.

■ Division into a safe and a non-safe zone In practically all plants there are parts which perform safetyrelated functions (e.g. emergency stop pushbuttons, mesh guards, two-hand controls). In order not to have to consider the complete control system in terms of safety engineering it is customary to divide the control system into a safe and a non-safe zone. No special requirements are imposed on the safety of the control system in the non-safe zone because there would be no impact on the safety of the plant if the electronics failed in this case. In the safe zone, on the other hand, you are only allowed to use control systems and/or circuits which satisfy the directives in question. The following zonal divisions are customary in practice: • Control systems with little safety engineering, e.g. machine control systems. • Control systems with balanced zones, e.g. chemical plants, aerial ropeways. • Control systems with mainly safety engineering, e.g. incineration plants. Important Even if a maximum of design-based safety is achieved in the configuration of an electronic control systems – e.g. through multi-edge configuration – it is still essential to closely follow the instructions in the operating manuals as otherwise wrong actions may suspend precautions for preventing potential faults or may create additional sources of danger.

These measures are regarded a basic measures in safety engineering. They prevent or keep control of the majority of potential faults. Risks Wherever faults are liable to cause injury to persons or damage to property it is necessary to introduce measures aimed in particular at the safety of the plant and, therefore, of the control system. Special, plan-specific directives exist for these applications and need to be taken into account when configuring the control system. In the case of safety-relevant electronic control systems the measures needing to be taken to prevent or keep control of faults are aimed at the risk presented by the plant. In such a case the basic measures listed above are no longer sufficient above a certain level of hazard potential. Additional measures have to be implemented and certified (e.g.dual-channel arrangements, tests, checksums etc.) for the control system.

10


10/27

Appendix Software Licenses

■ Overview Software types Software requiring a license is categorized into types. The following software types have been defined: • Engineering software • Runtime software Engineering software This includes all software products for creating (engineering) user software, e.g. for configuring, programming, parameterizing, testing, commissioning or servicing. Data generated with engineering software and executable programs can be duplicated for your own use or for use by thirdparties free-of-charge. Runtime software This includes all software products required for plant/machine operation, e.g. operating system, basic system, system expansions, drivers, etc. The duplication of the runtime software and executable programs created with the runtime software for your own use or for use by third-parties is subject to a charge. You can find information about license fees according to use in the ordering data (e.g. in the catalog). Examples of categories of use include per CPU, per installation, per channel, per instance, per axis, per control loop, per variable, etc. Information about extended rights of use for parameterization/configuration tools supplied as integral components of the scope of delivery can be found in the readme file supplied with the relevant product(s). License types Siemens Automation and Drives offers various types of software license: • Floating license • Single license • Rental license • Trial license Floating license The software may be installed for internal use on any number of devices by the licensee. Only the concurrent user is licensed. The concurrent user is the person using the program. Use begins when the software is started. A license is required for each concurrent user. Single license Unlike the floating license, a single license permits only one installation of the software. The type of use licensed is specified in the ordering data and in the Certificate of License (CoL). Types of use include for example per device, per axis, per channel, etc. One single license is required for each type of use defined.

10

Rental license A rental license supports the "sporadic use" of engineering software. Once the license key has been installed, the software can be used for a specific number of hours (the operating hours do not have to be consecutive). One license is required for each installation of the software. Trial license A trial license supports "short-term use" of the software in a nonproductive context, e.g. for testing and evaluation purposes. It can be transferred to another license. Certificate of license The Certificate of License (CoL) is the licensee's proof that the use of the software has been licensed by Siemens. A CoL is required for every type of use and must be kept in a safe place.

10/28


Downgrading The licensee is permitted to use the software or an earlier version/release of the software, provided that the licensee owns such a version/release and its use is technically feasible. Delivery versions Software is constantly being updated. The following delivery versions • PowerPack • Upgrade can be used to access updates. Existing bug fixes are supplied with the ServicePack version. PowerPack PowerPacks can be used to upgrade to more powerful software. The licensee receives a new license agreement and CoL (Certificate of License) with the PowerPack. This CoL, together with the CoL for the original product, proves that the new software is licensed. A separate PowerPack must be purchased for each original license of the software to be replaced. Upgrade An upgrade permits the use of a new version of the software on the condition that a license for a previous version of the product is already held. The licensee receives a new license agreement and CoL with the upgrade. This CoL, together with the CoL for the previous product, proves that the new version is licensed. A separate upgrade must be purchased for each original license of the software to be upgraded. Software Update Service The SIMATIC NET Software Update Service includes automatic delivery of the relevant updates of the SIMATIC NET PC software CD, which is available following the signing of the contract. The CD contains SIMATIC NET software for Industrial Ethernet, PROFINET, OPC server and PROFIBUS, so that your software is always up to date. The following boundary conditions apply: • The customer must already have a current software version, so an update/upgrade may be required beforehand. • The update service is valid for one year following the date specified in the order. • It shall be extended automatically for a further year, provided that it is not cancelled 3 months in advance by the customer or by the responsible Siemens partner. • When the contract is extended, the customer will be invoiced for the cost of a further year. ServicePack ServicePacks are used to debug existing products. ServicePacks may be duplicated for use as prescribed according to the number of existing original licenses. License key Siemens Automation and Drives supplies software products with and without license keys. The license key serves as an electronic license stamp and is also the "switch" for activating the software (floating license, rental license, etc.). The complete installation of software products requiring license keys includes the program to be licensed (the software) and the license key (which represents the license). Detailed explanations concerning license conditions can be found in the “Terms and Conditions of Siemens AG” or under http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall (A&D Mall Online-Help System)

Appendix Index Page

Page

Page

1 1 COUNT 24 V/100 kHz counter module ...............................5/66 1 COUNT 5 V/500 kHz counter module ...............................5/69 1 POS U positioning module .............5/64 1SI interface module..........................5/72 1 STEP stepper module.....................5/62 2 A, 5 A, 10 A load current supplies ....................5/293 2 PULSE pulse generator ..................5/60 3UF18 current transformers for overload protection .................4/173 3SF2 AS-Interface cable-operated switches.................6/18 3SF5 pushbuttons and indicator lights ..6/102 4 IQ-Sense and 8 IQ-Sense sensor modules...............................5/55 A Abbreviations, definitions ..................10/2 Accessories for DCF77....................7/104 Access points ....................................3/18 Active network components ..............2/80 Active RS 485 terminating element ...4/52 Addressing units..............................6/120 Analog input module with HART .....5/271 Analog modules ..............................5/255 Analog modules with HART .............5/271 Analog I/O modules IP67 - K60 ........6/73 Analog electronic modules ...............5/36 Analyzer...........................................6/121 ANT794-4MR GSM/GPRS antenna....7/97 Antennae for IWLAN ..........................3/44 AS-Interface components for enclosures ...............................6/105 AS-Interface EMERGENCY STOP Pushbuttons for AS-Interface ..........6/50 AS-Interface interface for LOGO! ....6/112 Application modules .........................6/72 Application examples for IMC .............3/5 AS-Interface.........................................6/1 AS-Interface communications modules ..............6/82 AS-Interface customized enclosures ................6/106 AS-Interface front panel module .....6/107 AS-Interface F adapters for EMERGENCY STOP control devices .............................6/102 AS-Interface enclosures .................6/103 AS-Interface enclosures with standard fittings ....................6/104 AS-Interface Load Feeder Module ....6/94 AS-Interface LS4 laser scanner ........6/46 AS-Interface master...........................6/51 AS-Interface power supplies, IP20 ..6/113 AS-Interface power supply ..............6/113 AS-Interface safety modules ...............6/9 AS-Interface safety monitors ...............6/8 AS-Interface shaped cables...6/115, 9/23 AS-Interface slaves............................6/59 AS-Interface specification ...................6/5

A ASIsafe ................................................ 6/7 ASM 450/45 ..................................... 4/182 ASM 454/424 ................................... 4/189 ASM 456 .......................................... 4/184 ASM 470/475 ................................... 4/186 ASM 473 .......................................... 4/188 ASM 754/724 ................................... 4/189 ASM 854/824 ................................... 4/189 B BM 141, BM 142 basic modules .... 5/181 BM 147/CPU intelligent basic modules ............. 5/175 BT 200 hardware test unit.................. 4/60 Bus cables ...................... 4/29, 4/36, 4/64 Bus terminals..................................... 4/49 C C-PLUG ........................................... 2/245 Cable 2 x 2 ........................................ 2/33 Cable 4 x 2 ........................................ 2/38 Client Modules................................... 3/36 COMBIMASTER 411............................ 9/9 Communication ................................. 9/25 Communication Board CBE20......... 2/286 Communication Board CBE30......... 2/258 Communication Board MCI-PN ....... 2/259 Communications overview for Industrial Ethernet........................ 2/5 for PROFIBUS ................................. 4/11 Compact starters (AC 400 V) ............ 6/88 Components for safety motor starters and and frequency converters............. 5/117 Condition of sale and delivery......... 10/38 Configuration examples for AS-Interface ................................. 6/3 for Industrial Ethernet........................ 2/7 for PROFIBUS ................................. 4/13 Connecting cable 830-1T.................. 4/46 Connecting cable 830-2.................... 4/47 Connecting cables (SINAUT) .......... 7/120 Connection examples (PROFIBUS)... 4/24 Connection technology (ECOFAST) .. 9/16 Contact persons worldwide............. 10/22 Counter modules ............................... 6/84 CP 142-2................................. 5/197, 6/51 CP 1604........................................... 2/211 CP 1613 A2 ..................................... 2/214 CP 1616........................................... 2/208 CP 243-1.......................................... 2/180 CP 243-1 IT...................................... 2/183 CP 243-2............................................ 6/53 CP 342-5............................................ 4/99 CP 342-5 FO.................................... 4/102 CP 343-1.......................................... 2/189 CP 343-1 Advanced ........................ 2/193 CP 343-1 Lean................................. 2/186 CP 343-2............................................ 6/55 CP 343-2 P ........................................ 6/57 CP 343-5.......................................... 4/106

C CP 443-1 ......................................... 2/197 CP 443-1 Advanced ........................ 2/200 CP 443-5 Basic ............................... 4/109 CP 443-5 Extended ......................... 4/112 CP 5512........................................... 4/139 CP 5611 A2 ..................................... 4/141 CP 5613 A2 ..................................... 4/121 CP 5613 FO..................................... 4/125 CP 5614 A2 ..................................... 4/129 CP 5614 FO..................................... 4/134 CP 7515............................................. 3/50 CPU 315-2 PN/DP ........................... 2/151 CPU 315F-2 PN/DP ......................... 2/165 CPU 317-2 PN/DP ........................... 2/155 CPU 317F-2 PN/DP ......................... 2/170 CPU 319-3 PN/DP ........................... 2/170 CPUs for SIMATIC S7-300............... 2/151 Customer support ........................... 10/25 D Data communication for Industrial Ethernet........................ 2/4 for PROFIBUS ................................... 4/9 Delphi-S7, Delphi-DPLib and Delphi-DPSoftnetSlave .......... 4/208 Dedicated-line accessories .............. 7/99 Development Kits for ERTEC........... 2/266 DK-ERTEC 200 PN IO ................... 2/266 DK-ERTEC 400 PN IO ................... 2/266 Development packages .................. 4/206 Development packages .................. 2/271 Distributed ET 200S I/Os ................. 2/251 Distributed SIMATIC ET 200 I/Os ........ 5/1 Diagnostic repeater for PROFIBUS DP ........................... 4/54 Digital modules .............................. 5/234 Digital I/O Modules IP67 application modules ...................... 6/72 Digital I/O Modules IP67 - K20 .......... 6/66 Digital I/O Modules IP67 – K45 ......... 6/65 Digital I/O Modules IP67 – K60 ......... 6/60 Digital I/O Modules IP68 / IP69K – K60R ............................................... 6/62 Digital electronic modules ................ 5/26 Direct-on-Line Starters for busbar systems ............................. 6/96 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced ................... 8/26 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E.................. 8/30 DP/DP coupler .................................. 4/56 DP/EIB link......................................... 8/32 DP/PA coupler and link...................... 4/66 DP/RS 232C-Link............................... 4/57 DM 370 dummy module ................. 5/292


10/29

10

Appendix Index

10

Page

Page

Page

E ECOFAST 3RK1 3 motor starters and soft starters 6/93, 9/8 ECOFAST basic modules ...............5/183 ECOFAST bus cables ..............4/36, 9/19 ECOFAST Documentation .................9/28 ECOFAST ES .....................................9/26 ECOFAST Fiber Optic Hybrid Cable ..........................4/91, 9/21 ECOFAST frequency converters..........9/9 ECOFAST hybrid field bus connections...........9/13 ECOFAST miscellaneous accessories .............9/25 ECOFAST motors...............................9/14 ECOFAST motor starters and soft starters .........9/8 ECOFAST peripherals........................9/11 ECOFAST selection module ..............9/12 Electrical networks (PROFIBUS PA) ..4/62 Electrical networks (RS 485)..............4/27 ELS ..................................................2/119 EM 141 and EM 142 digital expansion modules ...........5/153, 5/187 EM 143/DESINA digital expansion module .............5/191 EM 144 and EM 145 analog expansion modules ...........5/157, 5/193 EM 148-P pneumatic interface ........5/199 Engineering tools.........2/281, 3/55, 4/191 Enhanced Real-Time Ethernet Controller ERTEC ..........................................2/260 ERTEC 200 ....................................2/260 ERTEC 400 ....................................2/260 Energy (ECOFAST) ............................9/24 ESM .................................................2/124 ET 200eco........................................5/297 ET 200iSP ........................................5/123 ET 200iSP analog electronic modules and terminal modules ...................5/133 ET 200iSP digital electronic modules and terminal modules ....5/128 ET 200iSP power supply unit...........5/141 ET 200iSP reserve module and terminal modules....................5/139 ET 200L............................................5/210 ET 200L block I/O ............................5/210 ET 200M...........................................5/215 ET 200pro ........................................5/145 ET 200pro isolator modules .............5/170 ET 200pro Motor Starters.................5/168 ET 200R ...........................................5/304 ET 200S ...............................................5/2 ET 200S Fail-Safe Motor Starters.......5/99 ET 200S FC Fail-Safe frequency converters ....................5/101 ET 200S FC frequency converters.....5/87 ET 200S Motor Starters......................5/81 ET 200X ...........................................5/173 ET 200X Motor Starters....................5/203

E Ex analog modules.......................... 5/283 Ex analog input modules................. 5/283 Ex digital output modules................ 5/281 Ex digital modules ........................... 5/279 Ex digital input modules .................. 5/279 Export regulations ........................... 10/38 Extension Plug................................. 6/118 F F90 Module........................................ 6/80 Fail-safe digital expansion modules 5/163 Fail-safe modules .............................. 5/49 FastConnect ............................. 2/27, 4/27 Fax-form .......................................... 10/37 F digital/analog modules ................. 5/222 F electronic modules ......................... 5/51 Fiber-optic cables..................... 2/65, 4/69 Fiber-optic cables Glass fiber-optic cables ......... 2/66, 4/69 Plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables ........... 4/77, 4/86 POF and PCF fiber-optic cables ..... 2/74 Flat module........................................ 6/81 F terminal modules ............................ 5/54 G Glass fiber-optic cables for Industrial Ethernet...................... 2/66 for PROFIBUS ................................. 4/69 GPS components ............................ 7/106 GSM components (GSM/GPRS) ................................... 7/89 H Hybrid cable...................................... 2/41 I IE/AS-i LINK PN IO ............................ 8/21 IE connecting cable M12-180/M12-180 / M12 plug PRO................................. 2/32 IE FC Outlet RJ45 .............................. 2/51 IE FC RJ45 Modular Outlet................ 2/56 IE FC RJ45 plug ................................ 2/29 IE FC TP cable 2 x 2.......................... 2/33 IE FC TP cable 4 x 2.......................... 2/38 IE Hybrid cable.................................. 2/41 IE TP Cord ......................................... 2/46 IE/PB Link .......................................... 8/17 IE/PB Link PN IO................................ 8/12 ILM..................................................... 4/96 IM 151-1 interface modules................. 5/4 IM 151-3 PN interface modules .................. 2/251, 5/9 IM 151-7 CPU interface modules ...... 5/11 IM 151-7 F-CPU interface modules ........................... 5/17 IM 152-1 interface module .............. 5/125 IM 153-1/153-2 ................................ 5/216 IM 153-2 FO..................................... 5/220 IM 154-1 interface modules............. 5/147 IM 154-2 interface modules............. 5/147 IM 154-4 PN interface modules ............... 2/254,4/147 IM 467.............................................. 4/115 IM 467 FO........................................ 4/115

I Image processing systems ............. 2/272 iMap ................................................ 2/281 Index ............................................... 10/29 Industrial Ethernet (IE)......................... 2/2 Industrial Ethernet ELS.................... 2/119 Industrial Ethernet FastConnect........ 2/27 Industrial Ethernet mediaconverter............................. 2/131 Industrial Ethernet OMC TP11 und TP11-LD ................................. 2/141 Industrial Ethernet OSM/ESM.......... 2/124 Industrial Ethernet Switches.............. 2/81 Industrial Mobile Communication (IMC) ................................................. 3/1 Industrial Security............................ 2/144 Industrial Twisted Pair – Cables/connectors.......................... 2/62 Information and Ordering in the Internet and on CD-ROM .... 10/24 Infrared Link Module ILM .................. 4/96 Integrated solutions........................... 6/82 Interface modules / interfaces ........ 4/203 Interfacing options for SIMATIC HMI ................ 2/237, 4/149 I/O Modules for Operation in the Field ............... 6/59 I/O Modules for Operation in the Control Cabinet IP20 ...................... 6/77 IP20 motor starters and load feeders ..... 6/94 IP65/67 motor starters and load feeders ..... 6/88 IQ-Sense modules and sensors ........ 5/55 IQ-Sense modules and sensors .................. 5/287 IQ-Sense sensor module................. 5/287 ISDN-Modem MD4 ............................ 7/84 Isolating module .............................. 5/233 IWLAN/PB Link PN IO ......................... 8/8 IWLAN RCoax Cable ......................... 3/10 L Lightning protection element (IWLAN) .......................................... 3/44 Line transformer .............................. 7/102 LTOP overvoltage protection ............. 7/99

10/30


Appendix Index Page

Page

Page

M Master interface submodule for IM 151-7 CPU interface module .....5/16 MC45 GSM kit....................................7/89 MD2 dedicated-line modem ..............7/69 MD3 telephone modem .....................7/78 MD720-3 GSM/GPRS modem ...........7/94 Media converter...............................2/131 Methods of connecting to SIMATIC PCs .....................2/207, 4/120 MICROMASTER 411..........................9/10 Modems.............................................7/67 MD2.................................................7/69 MD3.................................................7/78 MD4.................................................7/84 Modular Outlet ...................................2/56 Modules with special functions (AS-Interface) ..................................6/84 Motor connection cables ...................9/17 Motor starters (24 V DC)....................6/91 Motor Starter ES......................5/120, 9/27 N Network components for Industrial Ethernet .............2/25, 2/80 for IWLAN ........................................3/10 for PROFIBUS..................................4/20 Network selection criteria for Industrial Ethernet ......................2/18 for PROFIBUS..................................4/21 Network transitions ..............................8/1 Industrial Ethernet – AS-Interface ...........................8/3, 8/21 Industrial Ethernet – MODBUS..........8/4 Industrial Ethernet – PROFIBUS.......................8/2, 8/12, 8/17 IWLAN – PROFIBUS...................8/3, 8/8 PROFIBUS – AS-Interface 8/4, 8/26, 8/30 PROFIBUS – EIB ......................8/5, 8/32 PROFIBUS – MODBUS .....................8/5 O OBT....................................................4/94 OLM ...................................................4/83 OMC TP11 and TP11-LD .................2/141 OPC server for Industrial Ethernet...2/224 OPC server for PROFIBUS ..............4/146 Optical Bus Terminal OBT .................4/94 Optical Link Module OLM..................4/83 Optical networks with OBT and integrated interface..................4/86 Optical networks with OBT ................4/69 Opto proximity switches SIMATIC PXO with IQ-Sense .........5/288 Order No. index ...............................10/33 OSM.................................................2/124 Outlet RJ45 ........................................2/51 Overvoltage protection module .........6/86

P Passive network components............ 2/25 PCM 4FB21 Power and control modules ............ 9/15 PDM................................................. 4/196 Performance data for Industrial Ethernet.................... 2/206 for PROFIBUS ............................... 4/118 Plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables ................... 4/77, 4/86 PM 148 power module .................... 5/190 PM-E F PROFIsafe F power module ............................. 5/50 PM-E power module ........................ 5/164 PN CBA OPC server........................ 2/228 POF and PCF fiber-optic cables........ 2/74 POF/PCF FOC termination kit................ 2/78, 4/82, 4/93 Position switch................................... 6/11 molded-plastic enclosure 31 mm and 50 mm ........................ 6/12 metal enclosure 40 mm and 56 mm ........................ 6/13 with separate actuator – molded-plastic enclosure 31 mm and 52 mm ........................ 6/14 with separate actuator – metal enclosure 40 mm ........................................... 6/15 with tumbler – molded-plastic enclosure, 1200 N locking force ..................... 6/16 with tumbler – metal enclosure, 2000 N locking force ..................... 6/17 Potential isolation module.................. 5/25 Power Rail Booster ............................ 4/59 PS791-1PRO power supply............... 3/48 Power lines ..................... 2/43, 4/39, 9/16 Power modules for PM-E electronics modules .............. 5/21 Power modules for ET 200S motor starters and frequency converters.. 5/97 Process or field communication .......... 4/4 PROFIBUS (PB) ................................... 4/1 PROFIBUS bus cables ...................... 4/29 PROFIBUS DP ASICs ...................... 4/200 PROFIBUS DP laser scanner LS4 ... 4/176 PROFIBUS DP/RS 232C link.............. 4/57 PROFIBUS DP switching and control devices and sensors ........ 4/162 PROFIBUS FastConnect.................... 4/27 PROFIBUS M12 and 7/8" plug-in cable/connector.................. 4/48 PROFIBUS SCOPE diagnostic software ...................... 4/207 PROFINET (PN) ................................... 2/2 PROFINET technology components ............... 2/260 PROFINET products on Industrial Ethernet ..................... 2/23 PROFIsafe Safety Module .............. 5/114 ProTool/Pro............................ 2/237, 4/152

Q Quality management ....................... 10/21 Quick Start....................................... 10/19 R Radio clock components ................ 7/104 RCoax cable...................................... 3/10 Repeater/Extender .......................... 6/116 Reserve modules .............................. 5/24 Reversing starters for busbar systems ......................... 6/98 RF170C ........................................... 5/166 RFID systems .................................. 5/163 RFID systems communications modules ............. 4/182 RJ45 Modular Outlet ......................... 2/56 RJ45 plug ......................................... 2/29 RS 485 bus connectors .................... 4/41 RS485-IS coupler ............................ 5/143 RS485 repeater for PROFIBUS ......... 4/53 S S7-REDCONNECT .......................... 2/218 Safety local Module ......................... 5/171 Safety Module local ......................... 5/109 Safety motor starter solutions local/ PROFIsafe....................................... 5/98 Safety of electronic devices ............ 10/27 SCALANCE ......................................... 1/9 SCALANCE S .................................. 2/145 SCALANCE W ..................................... 3/1 SCALANCE W-740 client modules.... 3/36 SCALANCE W-780 Access Points .... 3/18 SCALANCE W-780 Access Points and WLAN Controller ...................... 3/31 SCALANCE X .................................... 2/81 SCALANCE X005 entry level............. 2/83 SCALANCE X-100 unmanaged......... 2/86 SCALANCE X-200 managed............. 2/92 SCALANCE X-200IRT managed ..... 2/100 SCALANCE X-400 modular ............. 2/109 SENTRON communication-capable circuit-breakers ............................ 4/175

10


10/31

Appendix Index

10

Page

Page

Page

S SICLOCK time synchronization .......2/247 Siemens contacts worldwide...........10/22 Siemens Solution Partner Automation and Power Distribution ..................10/23 SIMATIC ET 200...................................5/1 SIMATIC FS400 light curtains (AS-Interface) ..................................6/19 with external evaluation ASIsafe, Category 4 ........................6/28 with integrated evaluation unit ASIsafe, Category 4 ........................6/24 Accessories.....................................6/34 SIMATIC iMap ..................................2/281 SIMATIC FS600 laser scanner for AS-Interface ...............................6/43 for PROFIBUS................................4/176 SIMATIC PDM ..................................4/196 SIMATIC PDM Process Device Manager ..............4/193 SIMATIC RF170C .............................5/166 SIMATIC VS120................................2/272 SIMATIC VS130-2 ............................2/276 SIMATIC WinAC ...............................2/175 SIMATIC WinAC Software PLC ........2/175 SIMOCODE pro ...............................4/162 SIMOCODE pro motor management and control devices ......................4/162 SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5 ......................4/169 SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5 motor management and control devices ......................4/169 SIMOTION .......................................2/256 SIMOTION Motion Control System ..................2/256 Simulator SM 374.............................5/289 SINAMICS S120...............................2/284 SINAMICS S120 drive system .........2/284 SINAUT MICRO ...................................7/4 SINAUT MICRO SC .........................7/117 SINAUT ST7.........................................7/6 SINAUT ST7 standard software package ..........7/108 SINAUT ST7cc, Add-on for WinCC .7/111 SINAUT ST7sc, SCADA Connect software .............7/114 SINAUT telecontrol ..............................7/1 SINEMA E Lean .................................3/55 SIPLUS IM 153-1 .............................5/219 SIPLUS isolating module .................5/233 SIPLUS SM 321 digital input module ......................5/250 SIPLUS SM 322 digital output module ...................5/252 SIPLUS SM 323 digital input/output module .....................5/254 SIPLUS SM 331 analog input module .....................5/266 SIPLUS SM 332 analog output module ...................5/269

S SIPLUS SM 334 analog input/output module ..................... 5/270 SIPLUS SM 326 F digital output module – Safety Integrated........... 5/230 SIPLUS SM 326 F digital input module – Safety Integrated........... 5/229 SIRIUS soft starter ........................... 6/101 SITOP power 24 V/10 A power supply................ 5/208 SIWAREX CF...................................... 5/78 SIWAREX CS ..................................... 5/74 SlimLine ............................................. 6/78 SM 331 analog input module ......... 5/255 SM 321 digital input module ........... 5/234 SM 332 analog output module ....... 5/262 SM 322 digital output module ........ 5/240 SM 323/SM 327 digital input/output module ..................... 5/246 SM 334 analog input/output module ..................... 5/266 SM 336 F analog input module – Safety Integrated........................... 5/228 SM 326 F digital input module – Safety Integrated .......................... 5/222 SM 326 F digital output module – Safety Integrated........................... 5/225 SNMP OPC server ........................... 2/231 SOFTBUS for LINUX/UNIX............... 2/235 SOFTNET for Industrial Ethernet...... 2/220 SOFTNET for LINUX/UNIX ............... 2/233 SOFTNET for PROFIBUS ................. 4/143 SOFTNET PN IO............................... 2/220 SOFTNET Security Client ................. 2/149 Software „Quick Start“ ..................... 10/19 Software licenses............................. 10/28 Solution Partner Automation and Power Distribution.................. 10/23 Sonar proximity switch SIMATIC PXS with IQ-Sense ......... 5/290 Special modules.............................. 5/291 Special integrated solutions .............. 6/82 SpliTConnect ..................................... 4/62 SSI module ........................................ 5/58 Standards and approvals ................ 10/20 STARTER drive/commissioning software ........................................ 5/122 STEP 7 ............................................. 4/191 Switches ............................................ 2/81 System ECOFAST................................ 9/1 System interfacing for PG/PC ................. 2/205, 3/50, 4/117 System connections for SIMATIC ..... 4/98 System connections for SIMATIC and SINUMERIK............................ 2/179 System components and accessories (AS-Interface) ........... 6/116

T Technical specifications (PROFIBUS) .................................... 4/19 Technology components ................. 4/200 Technology module ........................... 5/57 TeleService ...................................... 7/124 Terminal modules for ET 200S motor starters and frequency converters............. 5/117 Terminal modules for power and electronic modules .. 5/79 Terminating resistor (IWLAN) ............ 3/44 Termination kit ................................... 2/78 TIM 32 with dedicated-line modem... 7/18 TIM 33 with telephone modem .......... 7/22 TIM 34 with ISDN modem ................. 7/26 TIM 3V-IE Advanced for WAN or Ethernet ...................................... 7/37 TIM 3V-IE for WAN or Ethernet .......... 7/30 TIM 42 / 42D with dedicated-line modem ............ 7/44 TIM 43 / 43D with telephone modem 7/49 TIM 44 / 44D with ISDN modem ........ 7/54 TIM 4R / 4RD without built-in modem.................... 7/63 TIM 4V / 4VD without built-in modem.................... 7/59 TIM communications modules .......... 7/13 Topologies for Industrial Ethernet........................ 2/9 for PROFIBUS ................................. 4/15 for SINAUT Telecontrol...................... 7/9 TP Cord ............................................. 4/46 Training............................................ 10/17 Transmission media (AS-Interface)................................ 6/115 Transmission technology (AS-Interface).................................... 6/2 Twisted Pair – overview ..................... 2/26 V VS120 .............................................. 2/272 VS130-2........................................... 2/276 W WinAC ............................................. 2/175 WinCC ................................. 2/241, 4/156 WinCC flexible RT................. 2/239, 4/154 Wireless coupling ............................. 4/96

10/32


Appendix Ordering data summary Type

Page

2XV 2XV9 450-... .............2/154, 2/159, 2/164, ....................2/169, 2/174, 2/234, 2/236, ....................5/239, 5/250, 5/251, 5/252, ....................5/264, 5/267, 5/280, 5/282, .....................5/284, 5/286, 5/291, 5/292 3RA 3RA5 110-... ......................................6/97 3RA5 120-... ......................................6/97 3RA5 210-... ......................................6/99 3RA5 220-... ......................................6/99 3RB 3RB1 900-... .........................4/166, 4/172 3RG 3RG7 838-... .......................4/178, 4/181, ............................6/36, 6/46, 6/48, 6/49, ...........................6/64, 6/68, 6/71, 6/124 3RG7 841-... ............................6/35, 6/37 3RG7 842-... ..................6/26, 6/30, 6/31, ......................................6/32, 6/35, 6/36 3RG7 844-... ............................6/27, 6/35 3RG7 848-... .........6/26, 6/27, 6/28, 6/34, ....................6/35, 6/36, 6/37, 6/38, 6/41 3RG9 001-... ............................6/68, 6/72 3RG9 002-... .....................................6/80 3RG9 004-... .....................................6/80 3RG9 005-... .....................................6/83 3RG9 010-... .....................................6/72 3RG9 030-... .....................................6/72 3RK 3RK1 100-... ...........6/61, 6/65, 6/72, 6/79 3RK1 105-... ........................................6/8 3RK1 107-... ......................................6/75 3RK1 194-... ....................................5/207 3RK1 200-... ..........6/61, 6/65, 6/68, 6/70, ............................6/72, 6/79, 6/83, 6/84, 3RK1 205-... ....................6/10, 6/68, 6/70 3RK1 207-... ......................................6/75 3RK1 300-... ....................................5/204 3RK1 301-... ..................5/84, 5/86, 5/100 3RK1 303-... ...............................6/93, 9/8 3RK1 304-... ..............5/169, 5/170, 5/171 3RK1 322-... ......................................6/89 3RK1 323-... ...............................6/93, 9/8 3RK1 400-... ..........6/61, 6/63, 6/65, 6/67, ............................6/68, 6/70, 6/72, 6/79, .....................................6/81, 6/82, 6/83, ............................6/92, 6/95, 6/97, 6/99, ...........................................6/101, 6/112 3RK1 402-... ..................6/79, 6/95, 6/101 3RK1 405-... ......................................6/10 3RK1 408-... .............................6/61, 6/85 3RK1 701-... ...........................6/95, 6/100 3RK1 702-... ......................................6/90 3RK1 802-... ........................................6/8

Type

Page

3RK 3RK1 901-... .......... 5/205, 6/8, 6/10, 6/61, ............................ 6/62, 6/63, 6/64, 6/65, ............................ 6/66, 6/67, 6/68, 6/69, ............................ 6/70, 6/71, 6/72, 6/76, ........................ 6/87, 6/95, 6/100, 6/119, ................................ 6/120, 6/124, 6/125 3RK1 902-... ............. 5/172, 5/186, 5/202, ........................ 5/206, 5/207, 6/61, 6/70, ........................ 6/76, 6/90, 6/124, 6/125, ............................................... 9/18, 9/25 3RK1 903-... .......... 5/21, 5/85, 5/86, 5/95, ...................... 5/97, 5/100, 5/112, 5/113, .................... 5/116, 5/118, 5/119, 5/120, .................................... 5/121, 9/27, 9/28 3RK1 904-... ................... 6/46, 6/62, 6/64, ........................ 6/66, 6/71, 6/118, 6/120, ........................................... 6/123, 6/124 3RK1 911-... .... 4/38, 5/120, 5/121, 5/172, ............................ 9/12, 9/13, 9/16, 9/17, .................... 9/20, 9/24, 9/25, 9/27, 9/28 3RK1 922-... .... 5/85, 5/120, 5/121, 5/172, ...................................... 6/93, 9/27, 9/28 3RP 3RP1 902-... ............................... 6/8, 6/79 3RP1 903-... .................. 4/166, 6/77, 6/79 3RT 3RT1 900-... ......................... 5/156, 5/302 3RT1 936-... .................................... 4/166 3RT1 946-... .................................... 4/166 3RT1 955-... .................................... 4/166 3RT1 956-... .................................... 4/166 3RT1 966-... .................................... 4/166 3RW 3RW2 920-... ................................... 4/172 3RW3 014-... ................................... 6/101 3RW3 016-... ................................... 6/101 3RX 3RX1 305-... .................................... 6/114 3RX1 306-... .................................... 6/114 3RX1 307-... .................................... 6/114 3RX1 310-... .................................... 6/114 3RX1 501-... ......................... 6/113, 6/114 3RX1 502-... ......................... 6/113, 6/114 3RX1 503-... .................................... 6/113 3RX1 633-... .................................... 5/163 3RX1 634-... .................................... 5/163 3RX1 635-... .................................... 5/163 3RX1 640-... .................................... 5/163 3RX1 641-... .................................... 5/163 3RX1 642-... .................................... 5/163 3RX1 667-... ............. 5/163, 5/182, 5/186, ..................... 5/189, 5/190, 5/192, 5/303 3RX1 668-... ............. 5/182, 5/186, 5/189, ................................ 5/190, 5/192, 5/303 3RX7 321-... ...................................... 6/47 3RX7 322-... ...................................... 6/34 3RX7 326-... ...................................... 6/34 3RX7 915-... ...................................... 6/34 3RX7 916-... ........................... 5/289, 6/34 3RX8 000-... ............. 4/178, 5/172, 5/205, ............................ 6/46, 6/62, 6/63, 6/64, ............................ 6/66, 6/68, 6/71, 6/89, ................................ 6/120, 6/123, 6/124

Type

Page

3RX 3RX9 010-... ........................... 6/115, 9/23 3RX9 012-... ........................... 6/115, 9/23 3RX9 013-... ........................... 6/115, 9/23 3RX9 014-... ........................... 6/115, 9/23 3RX9 015-... ........................... 6/115, 9/23 3RX9 016-... ........................... 6/115, 9/23 3RX9 017-... ........................... 6/115, 9/23 3RX9 020-... ........................... 6/115, 9/23 3RX9 022-... ........................... 6/115, 9/23 3RX9 023-... ........................... 6/115, 9/23 3RX9 024-... ........................... 6/115, 9/23 3RX9 025-... ........................... 6/115, 9/23 3RX9 026-... ........................... 6/115, 9/23 3RX9 027-... ........................... 6/115, 9/23 3RX9 801-... . 6/36, 6/64, 6/67, 6/68, 6/71, ..................... 6/118, 6/119, 6/123, 6/124 3RX9 802-... ............. 2/251, 5/149, 5/151, .................... 5/156, 5/162, 5/163, 5/182, ..................... 5/186, 5/189, 5/192, 5/302 3RX9 810-... ...................................... 6/80 3SE 3SE2 120-... ............................. 6/13, 6/14 3SE2 200-... ...................................... 6/12 3SE2 210-... ...................................... 6/12 3SE2 243-... ...................................... 6/14 3SE2 257-... ...................................... 6/14 3SE2 830-... ...................................... 6/17 3SE2 840-... ...................................... 6/17 3SE3 750-... ...................................... 6/16 3SE3 760-... ...................................... 6/16 3SE3 850-... ...................................... 6/17 3SE3 860-... ...................................... 6/17 3SE7 120-... ...................................... 6/18 3SE7 140-... ...................................... 6/18 3SE7 150-... ...................................... 6/18 3SF 3SF2 120-... ...................................... 6/18 3SF2 140-... ...................................... 6/18 3SF2 150-... ...................................... 6/18 3SF3 100-... ...................................... 6/13 3SF3 120-... ............................. 6/13, 6/15 3SF3 200-... ............................. 6/12, 6/14 3SF3 210-... ...................................... 6/12 3SF3 243-... ...................................... 6/14 3SF3 257-... ...................................... 6/14 3SF3 750-... ...................................... 6/16 3SF3 760-... ...................................... 6/16 3SF3 830-... ...................................... 6/17 3SF3 840-... ...................................... 6/17 3SF3 850-... ...................................... 6/17 3SF3 860-... ...................................... 6/17 3SF5 402-... ........................... 6/50, 6/102 3SF5 500-... .................................... 6/105 3SF5 811-... ........................... 6/50, 6/104 3SF5 812-... .................................... 6/104 3SF5 813-... .................................... 6/104 3SF5 874-... .................................... 6/107 3SF5 900-... .................................... 6/105


10/33

10


10

Page

3SF 3SF6 232-... ................5/56, 5/287, 5/290 3SF6 233-... ................5/56, 5/287, 5/290 3SF7 210-... ................5/56, 5/287, 5/290 3SF7 211-... ................5/56, 5/287, 5/290 3SF7 214-... ................5/56, 5/287, 5/290 3SF7 240-... ................5/56, 5/287, 5/290 3SF7 241-... ................5/56, 5/287, 5/290 3SF7 834-... ..4/178, 4/179, 4/180, 4/181, .............................6/46, 6/47, 6/48, 6/49 3SF7 842-... ..6/29, 6/30, 6/31, 6/32, 6/33 3SF7 844-... ....................6/25, 6/26, 6/36 3SX 3SX1 707-... ....................................6/104 3SX3 195-... ......................................6/14 3SX3 196-... ......................................6/14 3SX3 197-... .............................6/15, 6/17 3SX3 203-... .............................6/15, 6/17 3SX3 206-... .............................6/15, 6/17 3SX3 207-... .............................6/15, 6/17 3SX3 217-... ......................................6/14 3SX3 218-... ......................................6/14 3SX3 228-... ......................................6/14 3SX3 233-... ......................................6/14 3SX3 234-... ......................................6/14 3SX3 252-... .............................6/16, 6/17 3SX3 253-... .............................6/16, 6/17 3SX3 254-... .............................6/16, 6/17 3SX3 256-... ......................................6/14 3SX3 306-... .............................6/15, 6/17 3TX 3TX7 446-... ....................................4/173 3TX7 466-... ....................................4/173 3TX7 506-... .........................4/172, 4/173 3TX7 536-... .........................4/172, 4/173 3TX7 686-... .........................4/172, 4/173 3TX7 696-... .........................4/172, 4/173 3UF 3UF1 843-... ....................................4/173 3UF1 845-... ....................................4/173 3UF1 847-... ....................................4/173 3UF1 848-... ....................................4/173 3UF1 850-... ....................................4/173 3UF1 852-... ....................................4/173 3UF1 854-... ....................................4/173 3UF1 856-... ....................................4/173 3UF1 857-... ....................................4/173 3UF1 868-... ....................................4/173 3UF1 900-... ....................................4/172 3UF5 001-... ....................................4/170 3UF5 011-... ....................................4/170 3UF5 021-... ....................................4/170 3UF5 031-... ....................................4/170 3UF5 041-... ....................................4/170 3UF5 051-... ....................................4/170

10/34


Type

Page

3UF 3UF5 100-... .................................... 4/170 3UF5 202-... .................................... 4/170 3UF5 700-... .................................... 4/171 3UF5 710-... .................................... 4/171 3UF5 711-... .................................... 4/171 3UF5 712-... .................................... 4/171 3UF5 720-... .................................... 4/171 3UF5 900-... .................................... 4/172 3UF7 000-... .................................... 4/164 3UF7 010-... .................................... 4/164 3UF7 100-... .................................... 4/164 3UF7 101-... .................................... 4/165 3UF7 102-... .................................... 4/164 3UF7 103-... .................................... 4/164 3UF7 104-... .................................... 4/164 3UF7 110-... .................................... 4/164 3UF7 111-... .................................... 4/164 3UF7 112-... .................................... 4/164 3UF7 113-... .................................... 4/164 3UF7 114-... .................................... 4/164 3UF7 200-... .................................... 4/164 3UF7 300-... .................................... 4/164 3UF7 400-... .................................... 4/165 3UF7 500-... .................................... 4/165 3UF7 700-... .................................... 4/165 3UF7 900-... .................................... 4/166 3UF7 910-... .................................... 4/166 3UF7 920-... .................................... 4/166 3UF7 930-... .................................... 4/165 3UF7 931-... .................................... 4/165 3UF7 932-... .................................... 4/165 3UF7 933-... .................................... 4/165 3UF7 935-... .................................... 4/165 3UF7 937-... .................................... 4/165 3UF7 940-... .................................... 4/165 3UF7 950-... .................................... 4/166 3UF7 970-... .................................... 4/167 3UF7 982-... .................................... 4/167 3ZS 3ZS1 200-... ...................................... 9/26 3ZS1 310-... ........................... 5/121, 9/28 3ZS1 312-... .................................... 4/167 4FB 4FB5 1..-... ........................................ 9/15 6AG 6AG1 153-... .................................. 5/219, 6AG1 196-... ................................... 5/233 6AG1 305-... .. 5/293, 5/294, 5/295, 5/296 6AG1 307-... .. 5/293, 5/294, 5/295, 5/296 6AG1 321-... ........................ 5/250, 5/251 6AG1 322-... ........................ 5/252, 5/253 6AG1 323-... ................................... 5/254 6AG1 326-... ............. 5/229, 5/230, 5/231 6AG1 331-... ................................... 5/268 6AG1 332-... ................................... 5/269 6AG1 334-... ................................... 5/270

Type

Page

6DL 6DL2 804-... ............. 5/126, 5/127, 5/132, ................................ 5/137, 5/138, 5/140 6ED 6ED1 057-... .............. 5/85, 5/120, 5/121, ............................................... 9/27, 9/28 6EP 6EP1 333-... .................................... 6/114 6EP1 334-... .................................... 5/209 6EP1 354-... .................................... 6/114 6EP1 971-... .................................... 5/209 6EP8 106-... ........................... 4/81, 5/209 6ES 6ES5 710-... .. 2/252, 5/8, 5/10, 5/15, 5/20 6ES5 750-... ...................................... 4/58 6ES7 131-... .......... 5/27, 5/28, 5/29, 5/35, ..................... 5/128, 5/131, 5/211, 5/214 6ES7 132-... .......... 5/30, 5/31, 5/32, 5/33, ........................ 5/35, 5/50, 5/129, 5/130, ..................... 5/131, 5/212, 5/213, 5/214 6ES7 133-... ......................... 5/213, 5/214 6ES7 134-... . 5/37, 5/38, 5/39, 5/40, 5/41, ................... 5/42, 5/43, 5/44, 5/45, 5/48, ..................... 5/133, 5/134, 5/135, 5/137 6ES7 135-... ................... 5/46, 5/47, 5/48, ........................................... 5/136, 5/137 6ES7 138-... . 5/13, 5/16, 5/19, 5/23, 5/24, ................... 5/25, 5/50, 5/51, 5/53, 5/55, ................... 5/56, 5/58, 5/59, 5/60, 5/61, ................... 5/62, 5/63, 5/64, 5/65, 5/66, ................... 5/67, 5/68, 5/69, 5/70, 5/71, .............. 5/72, 5/73, 5/139, 5/141, 5/142 6ES7 141-... ........................ 5/156, 5/182, ................................ 5/186, 5/189, 5/302 6ES7 142-... ... 5/156, 5/182, 5/189, 5/302 6ES7 143-... ... 5/186, 5/192, 5/302, 5/305 6ES7 144-... ......................... 5/162, 5/196 6ES7 145-... ......................... 5/162, 5/196 6ES7 147-... .................................... 5/180 6ES7 148-... .. 5/163, 5/165, 5/190, 5/199, ................................ 5/200, 5/202, 5/302 6ES7 151-... .......... 2/252, 5/7, 5/10, 5/15, ...................................... 5/20, 5/50, 5/53 6ES7 152-... ... 5/126, 5/131, 5/137, 5/139 6ES7 153-... ..... 5/218, 5/219, 5/221, 4/68 6ES7 154-... ... 2/255, 5/148, 5/151, 5/163 6ES7 157-... ...................................... 4/68 6ES7 158-... ............................. 4/56, 4/68 6ES7 180-... .................................... 4/205 6ES7 181-... .................. 4/55, 4/61, 4/205 6ES7 182-... .................................... 4/205 6ES7 183-... .................................... 4/205 6ES7 184-... .................................... 4/205 6ES7 193-... ... 2/252, 4/61, 5/7, 5/8, 5/10, ................... 5/15, 5/16, 5/20, 5/23, 5/25, ................... 5/35, 5/48, 5/50, 5/54, 5/59, ................... 5/61, 5/63, 5/68, 5/71, 5/73, ................... 5/75, 5/78, 5/79, 5/80, 5/97, .................... 5/126, 5/131, 5/137, 5/139, .......... 5/142, 5/214, 5/224, 5/226, 5/228


Page

6ES 6ES7 194-... ........2/255, 3/30, 3/43, 4/34, ......................4/38, 4/183, 4/185, 5/148, ....................5/149, 5/152, 5/156, 5/162, ....................5/163, 5/165, 5/172, 5/176, ....................5/182, 5/186, 5/189, 5/190, ....................5/199, 5/202, 5/205, 5/207, ........................5/302, 5/303, 6/71, 6/89, ...........................6/124, 9/18, 9/20, 9/25 6ES7 195-... ......2/269, 2/273, 4/68, 4/89, ....................4/105, 4/116, 4/141, 4/202, ........................4/205, 4/206, 5/8, 5/215, ....................5/217, 5/221, 5/224, 5/226, ....................5/228, 5/232, 5/233, 5/272, ................................5/274, 5/276, 5/278 6ES7 198-... .............5/180, 5/182, 5/186, ...............................5/189, 5/190, 5/192, .....................5/196, 5/202, 5/205, 5/302 6ES7 305-... ..........................4/68, 5/296, 6ES7 307-... ..........................2/271, 4/68, ....................5/224, 5/226, 5/228, 5/296, ......................................8/10, 8/16, 8/20 6ES7 315-... .........................2/154, 2/169 6ES7 317-... ...2/159, 2/174, 2/269, 2/271 6ES7 318-... ....................................2/164 6ES7 321-... ..............5/239, 5/280, 5/284 6ES7 322-... .........................5/245, 5/282 6ES7 323-... ....................................5/249 6ES7 326-... .........................5/224, 5/226 6ES7 327-... ....................................5/249 6ES7 328-... .............5/239, 5/245, 5/261, ...............................5/264, 5/267, 5/280, ................................5/282, 5/284, 5/286 6ES7 331-... ..............5/261, 5/272, 5/276 6ES7 332-... ...5/264, 5/274, 5/278, 5/286 6ES7 334-... ....................................5/267 6ES7 336-... ....................................5/228 6ES7 338-... ....................................5/287 6ES7 370-... ................4/68, 4/108, 5/292 6ES7 374-... ....................................5/291 6ES7 390-... ....4/68, 5/126, 5/131, 5/137, ....................5/139, 5/144, 5/218, 5/221, ....................5/239, 5/249, 5/261, 5/264, ....................5/267, 5/272, 5/274, 5/276, ....................5/278, 5/287, 5/291, 5/292, .............................................5/296, 8/16 6ES7 391-... .............2/154, 2/159, 2/164, ...........................................2/169, 2/174 6ES7 392-... ..2/154, 2/159, 2/164, 2/169, ...............................2/174, 2/186, 4/168, ....................5/224, 5/226, 5/239, 5/249, ....................5/261, 5/264, 5/267, 5/272, ....................5/274, 5/276, 5/278, 5/280, .....................5/282, 5/284, 5/286, 5/291 .............................................5/292, 6/56 6ES7 393-... .............5/224, 5/272, 5/274, ...............................5/276, 5/278, 5/280, ................................5/282, 5/284, 5/286 6ES7 398-... ..2/154, 2/159, 2/164, 2/169, ....................2/174, 2/178, 4/101, 4/108, ...............................4/111, 4/114, 4/116, ....................5/228, 5/239, 5/261, 5/264, ....................5/267, 5/274, 5/276, 5/278, .....................5/280, 5/282, 5/284, 5/286

Type

Page

6ES 6ES7 467-... .................................... 4/116 6ES7 498-... .................................... 4/116 6ES7 651-... .................................... 4/199 6ES7 658-... ......................... 4/198, 4/199 6ES7 671-... .................................... 2/178 6ES7 792-... .................. 4/192, 5/15, 5/20 6ES7 810-... ... 2/182, 2/185, 2/271, 4/192 6ES7 820-... ............. 2/192, 2/196, 2/204, .................................. 2/230, 2/283, 8/20 6ES7 833-... ........................ 2/169, 2/174, .......................... 5/20, 5/50, 5/53, 5/224, ................................ 5/226, 5/228, 5/302 6ES7 842-... .................................... 7/126 6ES7 901-... ............. 2/164, 2/169, 2/174, ................................. 2/183, 4/44, 4/192, ........................ 5/226, 5/86, 5/95, 5/122, ............................... 5/151, 5/162, 5/180, .................................. 5/224, 5/228, 7/96 6ES7 910-... ............. 2/163, 2/168, 2/173, ........................................... 5/151, 5/162 6ES7 912-... ............ 2/164, 2/169, 2/174, ..................... 2/178, 2/183, 5/151, 5/162 6ES7 953-... ............. 2/159, 2/164, 2/169, ............................... 2/174, 2/178, 2/183, ............................... 2/254, 2/257, 2/273, .......................... 5/10, 5/15, 5/20, 5/151 6ES7 972-... ............. 2/164, 2/169, 2/174, .......................................... 2/178, 2/183, ................. 4/34, 4/44, 4/53, 4/55, 4/192, .................... 5/126, 5/131, 5/137, 5/139, .................... 5/144, 5/151, 5/162, 5/214, .................... 5/215, 5/218, 5/224, 5/226, ........................................... 5/228, 7/126 6ES7 973-... .................................... 5/245 6ES7 974-... .................................... 5/261 6ES7 991-... .................................... 5/148 6ES7 998-... ............. 2/154, 2/159, 2/164, ............................... 2/169, 2/174, 2/252, ................................. 2/255, 4/55, 4/192, ....................... 5/7, 5/8, 5/10, 5/50, 5/53, ............................... 5/149, 5/151, 5/162, .................... 5/182, 5/186, 5/189, 5/190, .................... 5/192, 5/196, 5/202, 5/214, .................... 5/218, 5/221, 5/224, 5/226, .................... 5/228, 5/239, 5/245, 5/249, .................... 5/261, 5/264, 5/267, 5/274, .................... 5/278, 5/280, 5/282, 5/284, ............................... 5/286, 5/303, 5/305, ............................................. 7/126, 8/29 6FC 6FC5 312-... .................................... 2/258 6FX 6FX2 001-... ............................. 5/68, 5/71 6FX5 002-... ............................. 5/59, 5/68 6GF 6GF1 120-... .................................... 2/275 6GF1 130-... .................................... 2/280

Type

Page

6GK 6GK1 100-... ................................... 2/143 6GK1 102-... ................................... 2/123 6GK1 105-... ................................... 2/130 6GK1 160-... ................................... 2/213 6GK1 161-... ............ 2/210, 2/217, 2/269, ........................................... 7/113, 7/116 6GK1 182-... ........................ 2/265, 2/270 6GK1 184-... ........................ 2/265, 2/270 6GK1 210-... ................................... 6/117 6GK1 411-... ................... 8/16, 8/20, 8/25 6GK1 415-... ................... 8/29, 8/31, 8/36 6GK1 417-... ............................ 3/17, 8/10 6GK1 500-... . 2/154, 2/159, 2/164, 2/169, ................ 2/174, 4/34, 4/44, 4/47, 4/51, ........................ 4/55, 4/95, 4/101, 4/108, .................... 4/111, 4/114, 4/127, 4/136, ................................ 4/141, 4/143, 4/145 6GK1 502-... ..................................... 4/85 6GK1 503-... ..................................... 4/97 6GK1 551-... ........................ 4/143, 4/192 6GK1 561-... ............ 2/178, 4/127, 4/131, ............................... 4/136, 4/141, 4/145, ................................ 4/192, 7/113, 7/116 6GK1 588-... ................................... 4/201 6GK1 704-... ............ 2/148, 2/150, 2/182, .................... 2/185, 2/188, 2/192, 2/196, .................... 2/199, 2/204, 2/217, 2/221, ........................ 2/223, 2/269, 3/53, 3/54, .................... 4/127, 4/131, 4/136, 4/141, .................... 4/143, 4/145, 4/148, 4/192, ........................................... 7/113, 7/116 6GK1 706-... ............. 2/227, 2/230, 2/232 6GK1 713-... ............ 4/127, 4/131, 4/136, ................................ 4/141, 7/113, 7/116 6GK1 716-... ............ 2/182, 2/185, 2/188, ............................... 2/192, 2/196, 2/199, ............................... 2/204, 2/217, 2/219, ........................................... 7/113, 7/116 6GK1 751-... ................... 3/30, 3/43, 3/53 6GK1 781-... ..................................... 3/57 6GK1 900-... ....... 2/77, 2/79, 2/99, 2/108, ............................... 2/118, 2/148, 2/192, ............................... 2/196, 2/204, 2/246, ..................................... 3/30, 3/43, 3/49, ..................................... 4/82, 4/89, 4/93, ............................. 8/10, 8/16, 8/25, 8/29 6GK1 901-... 2/31, 2/32, 2/37, 2/40, 2/42, ................... 2/50, 2/55, 2/61, 2/64, 2/73, .......................... 2/85, 2/91, 2/99, 2/108, .................... 2/118, 2/130, 2/140, 2/148, .................... 2/150, 2/188, 2/192, 2/199, .................... 2/204, 2/210, 2/213, 2/148, .................... 2/150, 2/188, 2/192, 2/199, .................... 2/204, 2/210, 2/213, 2/252, ............................... 2/258, 2/259, 2/270, ..................................... 3/16, 3/29, 3/42, ........................ 4/76, 4/89, 4/105, 4/141, ..................................... 5/8, 5/10, 5/151, .................... 7/36, 7/43, 8/16, 8/25, 8/29


10/35

10


10

Page

6GK 6GK1 905-... .........................2/45, 2/255, ...................4/34, 4/38, 4/40, 4/48, 4/55, ...................4/63, 4/65, 4/80, 4/89, 4/92, ....................4/105, 4/141, 4/180, 4/185, ....................5/148, 5/149, 5/151, 5/165, .............................. 5/180, 5/221, 5/302, ...........................5/303, 9/20, 9/22, 9/25 6GK1 907-... ...........................2/45, 2/99, .............................3/29, 3/43, 4/38, 4/40 6GK1 908-... ...................2/45, 2/99, 4/40 6GK1 953-... ........................2/265, 2/269 6GK1 970-... ..2/3, 2/40, 2/42, 2/50, 2/55, ...................2/64, 2/73, 2/77, 2/85, 2/91, ......................2/99, 2/108, 2/123, 2/130, ...................2/140, 4/3, 4/19, 4/35, 4/44, ...................4/51, 4/55, 4/65, 4/76, 4/81, ...................4/85, 4/90, 4/92, 4/95, 4/97, ...........................4/105, 8/16, 8/20, 9/22 6GK1 971-... ............................8/31, 8/36 6GK1 975-... ...........2/3, 2/37, 2/40, 2/42, ...................2/45, 2/50, 2/55, 2/64, 2/73, .....................2/77, 4/3, 4/19, 4/35, 4/40, ...................4/44, 4/51, 4/65, 4/76, 4/81, ...................4/85, 4/90, 4/92, 4/95, 4/97, ........................5/198, 5/221, 6/52, 6/56, ...............................................8/36, 9/22 6GK5 005-... .....................................2/85 6GK5 101-... ........................2/108, 2/140 6GK5 104-... .....................................2/91 6GK5 106-... .....................................2/91 6GK5 108-... ..........................2/91, 2/271 6GK5 200-... ...................................2/108 6GK5 201-... ...................................2/108 6GK5 202-... ........................2/108, 2/270 6GK5 204-... ...............2/99, 2/108, 2/270 6GK5 206-... .....................................2/99 6GK5 208-... .....................................2/99 6GK5 414-... ...................................2/118 6GK5 490-... ...................................2/118 6GK5 491-... ...................................2/118 6GK5 492-... ...................................2/118 6GK5 495-... ...................................2/118 6GK5 496-... ...................................2/118 6GK5 498-... ...................................2/118 6GK5 602-... ...................................2/148 6GK5 612-... ........................2/148, 2/150 6GK5 613-... ........................2/148, 2/150 6GK5 744-... ...................3/17, 3/29, 3/42 6GK5 746-... ...................3/17, 3/29, 3/42 6GK5 747-... ...................3/17, 3/29, 3/42 6GK5 788-... .3/17, 3/29, 3/35, 3/54, 8/11 6GK5 791-... .2/99, 3/30, 3/43, 3/47, 3/49 6GK5 792-... .3/16, 3/30, 3/43, 3/47, 8/10 6GK5 793-... .3/16, 3/30, 3/43, 3/47, 8/10 6GK5 795-... .3/16, 3/30, 3/43, 3/47, 8/11 6GK5 798-... .3/16, 3/30, 3/43, 3/47, 8/11 6GK7 080-... .2/188, 2/192, 2/196, 2/199, ....................2/204, 4/101, 4/105, 4/108, ..................................4/111, 4/114, 8/10

10/36


Type

Page

6GT 6GT2 002-... ............. 4/183, 4/185, 4/187, ................................ 4/188, 4/190, 5/167 6GT2 080-... .............. 4/183, 4/187, 4/190 6GT2 090-... ......................... 4/183, 4/188 6GT2 091-... ............. 4/183, 4/185, 4/187, ........................................... 4/188, 5/167 6GT2 302-... .................................... 4/190 6GT2 402-... .................................... 4/190 6GT2 491-... .............. 4/183, 4/187, 4/188 6GT2 691-... ......................... 4/185, 5/167 6GT2 891-... ............. 4/183, 4/185, 4/187, ........................................... 4/188, 5/167 6NH 6NH7 700-... ......... 7/21, 7/25, 7/29, 7/48, ............................ 7/53, 7/58, 7/62, 7/66, ............................................. 7/83, 7/123 6NH7 701-... ......... 7/36, 7/43, 7/48, 7/53, ................... 7/58, 7/62, 7/66, 7/77, 7/83, .................................... 7/88, 7/93, 7/123 6NH7 720-... ................. 7/96, 7/98, 7/119 6NH7 760-... ................... 7/77, 7/83, 7/88 6NH7 800-... ......... 7/21, 7/25, 7/29, 7/36, ............................ 7/43, 7/48, 7/53, 7/58, ............................................... 7/62, 7/66 6NH7 810-... ................... 7/77, 7/83, 7/88 6NH7 811-... ................... 7/77, 7/83, 7/88 6NH7 820-... ..................................... 7/96 6NH7 821-... .................. 7/21, 7/48, 7/77, .................................. 7/83, 7/101, 7/103 6NH7 831-... ......... 7/48, 7/53, 7/58, 7/62, .................................. 7/66, 7/105, 7/107 6NH7 840-... ..................................... 7/93 6NH7 860-... ................. 7/96, 7/98, 7/119 6NH7 910-... ................. 7/96, 7/98, 7/119 6NH7 997-... ......... 7/21, 7/25, 7/29, 7/36, ...................... 7/43, 7/48, 7/53, 7/58, 7/62, ....................... 7/66, 7/110, 7/113, 7/116 6NH7 998-... ......... 7/21, 7/25, 7/29, 7/36, ................... 7/43, 7/48, 7/53, 7/58, 7/62, ....................... 7/66, 7/110, 7/113, 7/116 6SE 6SE6 411-... ...................................... 9/10 6SL 6SL3 055-... .................................... 2/286 6SL3 072-... .................................... 5/105 6SL3 203-... ...................................... 5/86 6SL3 225-... ........................... 5/91, 5/105 6SL3 244-... ........................... 5/91, 5/105 6SL3 254-... ............................. 5/86, 5/95 6SL3 298-... ...................................... 5/95

Type

Page

6XV 6XV1 812-... ........... 2/45, 2/61, 3/49, 4/40 6XV1 820-... .................... 2/73, 4/75, 4/76 6XV1 821-... ............................. 4/80, 4/89 6XV1 822-... ............... 2/255, 4/48, 4/185, ..................... 5/149, 5/151, 5/165, 5/302 6XV1 830-... ...... 2/45, 2/73, 2/163, 2/168, .................... 2/173, 2/178, 2/183, 2/141, .................... 2/145, 2/154, 2/159, 2/164, ............................... 2/169, 2/174, 2/255, ................... 4/34, 4/38, 4/40, 4/46, 4/47, ................... 4/48, 4/55, 4/65, 4/75, 4/92, ...................... 4/95, 4/180, 4/185, 5/144, .................... 5/148, 5/149, 5/151, 5/165, ......................... 5/180, 5/303, 9/20, 9/22 6XV1 831-... ...................................... 4/34 6XV1 840-... ...... 2/31, 2/37, 2/210, 2/213, .................... 2/252, 2/258, 2/259, 2/270, ......................... 2/286, 3/42, 5/10, 5/151 6XV1 850-... ........ 2/50, 2/55, 2/63, 2/130, ........................................... 2/143, 2/271 6XV1 851-... ...................................... 2/64 6XV1 860-... ............................ 4/34, 4/38, .................................. 5/148, 5/149, 9/20 6XV1 861-... ........... 2/77, 4/80, 4/81, 4/89 6XV1 870-... .......... 2/31, 2/32, 2/37, 2/40, ............................ 2/42, 2/50, 2/61, 2/99, .................... 2/210, 2/213, 2/252, 2/255, ............................... 2/258, 2/259, 2/286, ........................... 3/29, 3/42, 5/10, 5/151 6XV1 873-... ............................. 2/72, 4/75 6XV1 874-... ...................................... 2/77 6XV1 875-... .......... 3/16, 3/29, 3/30, 3/43, ...................................... 3/47, 8/10, 8/11 8WA 8WA2 807-... ..................................... 6/79 8WA2 842-... . 5/48, 5/54, 5/75, 5/78, 5/80 8WA2 848-... ...... 5/54, 5/80, 5/126, 5/131 8WA2 861-... ................ 5/54, 5/80, 5/126, ................................ 5/131, 5/137, 5/139 8WA2 868-... . 5/48, 5/54, 5/75, 5/78, 5/80 Z23 Z236A ............................................. 6/120

Appendix

Just copy and fill out the form and fax it to us. We will deliver immediately! Fax order form To:

Fax No. (Address "Contact person")

Item Order No.

Contact partners

Designation

Quantity Unit price

Total price

The Conditions of Sale and Delivery apply in accordance with the catalog / price list of your contact partner. Company address (company stamp):

Delivery address (if different):

Company number (if known)

Company/Dept.

Company/Dept.

Street, No.

Street, No.

ZIP code/City

10

Postal code/City Contact partners Tel. No./Fax Customer Order No.:

Date

Comments

........................................................................

Desired delivery date: ..............................................................

Signature


10/37

Appendix

Additional information Conditions of sale and delivery Export regulations

■ Terms and Conditions of Sale and Delivery By using this catalog you can acquire hardware and software products described therein from Siemens AG subject to the following terms. Please note! The scope, the quality and the conditions for supplies and services, including software products, by any Siemens entity having a registered office outside of Germany, shall be subject exclusively to the General Terms and Conditions of the respective Siemens entity. The following terms apply exclusively for orders placed with Siemens AG. For customers with a seat or registered office in Germany The “General Terms of Payment” as well as the “General Conditions for the Supply of Products and Services of the Electrical and Electronics Industry” shall apply. For software products, the “General License Conditions for Software Products for Automation and Drives for Customers with a Seat or registered Office in Germany” shall apply. For customers with a seat or registered office outside of Germany The “General Terms of Payment” as well as the “General Conditions for Supplies of Siemens, Automation and Drives for Customers with a Seat or registered Office outside of Germany” shall apply. For software products, the “General License Conditions for Software Products for Automation and Drives for Customers with a Seat or registered Office outside of Germany” shall apply. General The dimensions are in mm. In Germany, according to the German law on units in measuring technology, data in inches only apply to devices for export. Illustrations are not binding. Insofar as there are no remarks on the corresponding pages, – especially with regard to data, dimensions and weights given – these are subject to change without prior notice. The prices are in € (Euro) ex works, exclusive packaging. The sales tax (value added tax) is not included in the prices. It shall be debited separately at the respective rate according to the applicable legal regulations. Prices are subject to change without prior notice. We will debit the prices valid at the time of delivery. Surcharges will be added to the prices of products that contain silver, copper, aluminum, lead and/or gold if the respective basic official prices for these metals are exceeded. These surcharges will be determined based on the official price and the metal factor of the respective product. The surcharge will be calculated on the basis of the official price on the day prior to receipt of the order or prior to the release order. The metal factor determines the official price as of which the metal surcharges are charged and the calculation method used. The metal factor, provided it is relevant, is included with the price information of the respective products.

An exact explanation of the metal factor and the text of the Comprehensive Terms and Conditions of Sale and Delivery are available free of charge from your local Siemens business office under the following Order Nos.: • 6ZB5310-0KR30-0BA1 (for customers based in Germany) • 6ZB5310-0KS53-0BA1 (for customers based outside Germany) or download them from the Internet http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall (Germany: A&D Mall Online-Help System)

■ Export regulations The products listed in this catalog / price list may be subject to European / German and/or US export regulations. Therefore, any export requiring a license is subject to approval by the competent authorities. According to current provisions, the following export regulations must be observed with respect to the products featured in this catalog / price list: AL

Number of the German Export List Products marked other than “N” require an export license. In the case of software products, the export designations of the relevant data medium must also be generally adhered to. Goods labeled with an “AL“ not equal to “N” are subject to a European or German export authorization when being exported out of the EU.

ECCN

Export Control Classification Number Products marked other than “N” are subject to a reexport license to specific countries. In the case of software products, the export designations of the relevant data medium must also be generally adhered to. Goods labeled with an “ECCN“ not equal to “N” are subject to a US re-export authorization.

Even without a label or with an “AL: N” or “ECCN: N”, authorization may be required due to the final destination and purpose for which the goods are to be used. The deciding factors are the AL or ECCN export authorization indicated on order confirmations, delivery notes and invoices. Errors excepted and subject to change without prior notice. A&D/VuL_ohne MZ/En 05.09.06

10

7 10/38


Catalogs of the

Automation and Drives Group (A&D) Further information can be obtained from our branch offices listed in the appendix or at www.siemens.com/automation/partner Automation and Drives Interactive catalog on CD-ROM and on DVD

Catalog

The Offline Mall of Automation and Drives

CA 01

Automation Systems for Machine Tools SINUMERIK & SIMODRIVE

NC 60

SINUMERIK & SINAMICS

NC 61

Drive Systems Variable-Speed Drives

Industrial Communication for Automation and Drives

Catalog IK PI

Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution – SIRIUS, SENTRON, SIVACON

LV 1

Controls and Distribution – Technical Information SIRIUS, SENTRON, SIVACON

LV 1 T

SIDAC Reactors and Filters

LV 60

SIVENT Fans

LV 65

SIVACON 8PS Busbar Trunking Systems

LV 70

Motion Control System SIMOTION

PM 10

SINAMICS G130 Drive Converter Chassis Units, SINAMICS G150 Drive Converter Cabinet Units

D 11

SINAMICS G110 Inverter Chassis Units

D 11.1

SINAMICS GM150/SINAMICS SM150 Medium-Voltage Converter 0.6 MVA to 28 MVA

D 12

SINAMICS S120 Vector Control Drive System

D 21.1

SINAMICS S120 Servo Control Drive System

D 21.2

SINAMICS S150 Drive Converter Cabinet Units

D 21.3

Process Instrumentation and Analytics Field Instruments for Process Automation Measuring Instruments for Pressure, Differential Pressure, Flow, Level and Temperature, Positioners and Liquid Meters

Asynchronous Motors Standardline

D 86.1

PDF: Indicators for panel mounting

MP 12

DC Motors

DA 12

SIREC Recorders and Accessories

MP 20

SIMOREG DC MASTER 6RA70 Digital Chassis Converters

DA 21.1

SIPART, Controllers and Software

MP 31

SIMOREG K 6RA22 Analog Chassis Converters

DA 21.2

SIWAREX Weighing Systems

WT 01

SIMOREG DC MASTER 6RM70 Digital Converter Cabinet Units

DA 22

Continuous Weighing and Process Protection

WT 02

Process Analytical Instruments

PA 01

PDF: Process Analytics, Components for the System Integration

PA 11

SIMOVERT PM Modular Converter Systems

DA 45

SIEMOSYN Motors

DA 48

MICROMASTER 410/420/430/440 Inverters

DA 51.2

MICROMASTER 411/COMBIMASTER 411

DA 51.3

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Vector Control

DA 65.10

SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Motion Control

FI 01

SIMATIC Industrial Automation Systems SIMATIC PCS Process Control System

ST 45 ST 70

DA 65.11

Products for Totally Integrated Automation and Micro Automation

Synchronous and asynchronous servomotors for SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES

DA 65.3

SIMATIC PCS 7 Process Control System

ST PCS 7 ST PCS 7.1

SIMODRIVE 611 universal and POSMO

DA 65.4

Add-ons for the SIMATIC PCS 7 Process Control System

M 11

Migration solutions with the SIMATIC PCS 7 Process Control System

ST PCS 7.2

Squirrel-Cage Motors, Totally Enclosed, Fan-Cooled Automation Systems for Machine Tools SIMODRIVE

NC 60

pc-based Automation

ST PC

SIMATIC Control Systems

ST DA

SIMATIC Sensors

FS 10

SIPOS Electric Actuators Electric Rotary, Linear and Part-turn Actuators

MP 35

Electric Rotary Actuators for Nuclear Plants

MP 35.1/.2

Systems Engineering Power supplies SITOP power

KT 10.1

System cabling SIMATIC TOP connect

KT 10.2

Low-Voltage Three-Phase-Motors

• Main Spindle/Feed Motors • Converter Systems SIMODRIVE 611/POSMO Automation Systems for Machine Tools SINAMICS

NC 61

• Main Spindle/Feed Motors • Drive System SINAMICS S120 Drive and Control Components for Hoisting Equipment

HE 1

Electrical Installation Technology ALPHA Small Distribution Boards and Distribution Boards

ET A1

PDF: ALPHA 8HP Molded-Plastic Distribution System

ET A3

ALPHA FIX Terminal Blocks

ET A5

BETA Modular Installation Devices

ET B1

DELTA Switches and Socket Outlets

ET D1

GAMMA Building Management Systems

ET G1

Human Machine Interface Systems SIMATIC HMI

ST 80

System Solutions Applications and Products for Industry are part of the interactive catalog CA 01 TELEPERM M Process Control System PDF: AS 488/TM automation systems

PLT 112

PDF: These catalogs are only available as pdf files. A&D/3U/En 01.08.06

Automation and Drives Industrial Communication Postfach 48 48 90327 NÜRNBERG GERMANY www.siemens.com/automation

The information provided in this catalog contains descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of further development of the products. An obligation to provide the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of contract. Availability and technical specifications are subject to change without notice. All product designations may be trademarks or product names of Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.

Order No.: E86060-K6710-A101-B5-7600

Catalog IK PI · 2007

Catalog IK PI · 2007 Industrial Communication for Automation and Drives

Subject to change without prior notice | Dispo 26000 | KG 1006 33.0 S 1240 EN / 701140 | IWI TST S | Printed in Germany | © Siemens AG 2006

Siemens AG

industrial COMMUNICATION Industrial Communication for Automation and Drives

Industrial Communication

Recommend Documents